ETERNITY V10 System Manual
Uploaded by
Rahamath Ali Mohammed AttarETERNITY V10 System Manual
Uploaded by
Rahamath Ali Mohammed AttarETERNITY
System Manual
ETERNITY
The IP-PBX with Seamless Mobility
and Universal Connectivity
System Manual
Documentation Disclaimer
Matrix Comsec reserves the right to make changes in the design or components of the product as engineering and
manufacturing may warrant. Specifications are subject to change without notice.
This is a general documentation for all models of the product. The product may not support all the features and
facilities described in the documentation.
Information in this documentation may change from time to time. Matrix Comsec reserves the right to revise
information in this publication for any reason without prior notice. Matrix Comsec makes no warranties with respect
to this documentation and disclaims any implied warranties. While every precaution has been taken in the
preparation of this system manual, Matrix Comsec assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any
liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained herein.
Neither Matrix Comsec nor its affiliates shall be liable to the purchaser of this product or third parties for damages,
losses, costs or expenses incurred by the purchaser or third parties as a result of: accident, misuse or abuse of this
product or unauthorized modifications, repairs or alterations to this product or failure to strictly comply with Matrix
Comsec's operating and maintenance instructions.
Copyright
All rights reserved. No part of this system manual may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means
without the prior written consent of Matrix Comsec.
Version 10
Release date: June 18, 2011
Contents
Introduction..................................................................................................................................................... 1
Welcome ............................................................................................................................................................. 1
About this System Manual .................................................................................................................................. 1
Know Your ETERNITY .................................................................................................................................... 7
Applications of ETERNITY ................................................................................................................................ 10
Models of ETERNITY ........................................................................................................................................ 16
Hardware Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 18
The Interfaces ................................................................................................................................................... 24
Installing ETERNITY ..................................................................................................................................... 33
Before You Start ................................................................................................................................................ 33
Protecting ETERNITY and Yourself .................................................................................................................. 40
Installing ETERNITY ME ............................................................................................................................... 45
The Power Supply Card .................................................................................................................................... 50
The Master Card ............................................................................................................................................... 54
The Switch Card ................................................................................................................................................ 62
The Single Line Telephone Card ...................................................................................................................... 67
The Intercom Line Card .................................................................................................................................... 74
The Digital Key Phone Card .............................................................................................................................. 79
The Two-Wire Trunk Card ................................................................................................................................. 92
The BRI Card .................................................................................................................................................... 98
The T1E1PRI Card .......................................................................................................................................... 108
The Mobile Card .............................................................................................................................................. 114
The E&M Card ................................................................................................................................................ 118
The Magneto Card .......................................................................................................................................... 128
The SLT/TWT-Magneto Card .......................................................................................................................... 132
The SLT+MAG+TWT+LD+ENM Card ............................................................................................................. 137
The VoIP Card ................................................................................................................................................ 141
SIP Extensions ................................................................................................................................................ 148
The Voice Mail System Card ........................................................................................................................... 161
Starting Up ETERNITY ME ............................................................................................................................. 164
Installing ETERNITY GE ............................................................................................................................. 165
The Power Supply Card .................................................................................................................................. 169
The CPU Card ................................................................................................................................................. 172
The Single Line Telephone Card .................................................................................................................... 180
The Intercom Line Card .................................................................................................................................. 185
Table of Contents i
The Digital Key Phone Card ............................................................................................................................ 188
The Two-Wire Trunk Card ............................................................................................................................... 200
The BRI Card .................................................................................................................................................. 205
The T1E1PRI Card .......................................................................................................................................... 215
The Mobile Card .............................................................................................................................................. 221
The E&M Card ................................................................................................................................................ 224
The VoIP Card ................................................................................................................................................ 230
SIP Extensions ................................................................................................................................................ 236
The Voice Mail System Card ........................................................................................................................... 249
Starting Up ETERNITY GE ............................................................................................................................. 251
Installing ETERNITY PE ............................................................................................................................. 253
The Single Line Telephone Card .................................................................................................................... 264
The Digital Key Phone Card ............................................................................................................................ 268
The Two-wire Trunk Card ............................................................................................................................... 279
The BRI Card .................................................................................................................................................. 283
The T1E1PRI Card .......................................................................................................................................... 293
The Mobile Card .............................................................................................................................................. 297
The VoIP Card ................................................................................................................................................ 300
SIP Extensions ................................................................................................................................................ 305
The Voice Mail System Card ........................................................................................................................... 319
The Door Phone Card ..................................................................................................................................... 321
Starting Up ETERNITY PE .............................................................................................................................. 325
Configuring ETERNITY............................................................................................................................... 327
Configuring using Web-based GUI: Jeeves .................................................................................................... 327
Configuring using a Telephone ....................................................................................................................... 330
Using Jeeves ................................................................................................................................................... 334
Configuring using FTP .................................................................................................................................... 340
Configuring using Serial COM Port ................................................................................................................. 346
Using Quick Installation Wizard - Standard PBX ............................................................................................ 357
Using Full Programming Access ..................................................................................................................... 406
Configuring System Pre-requisites .................................................................................................................. 408
Configuring ‘Region’ ........................................................................................................................................ 411
Configuring Master Ethernet Port Parameters ................................................................................................ 418
Configuring Extensions ................................................................................................................................... 427
Configuring SLT Extensions ............................................................................................................................ 457
Configuring DKP Extensions ........................................................................................................................... 465
DSS Keys Programming ................................................................................................................................. 482
Configuring ISDN Terminals ........................................................................................................................... 517
Configuring 'Operator' ..................................................................................................................................... 524
Configuring Trunks .......................................................................................................................................... 530
Configuring TWT Trunks ................................................................................................................................. 583
Configuring BRI Trunks ................................................................................................................................... 593
Configuring T1E1PRI Trunks .......................................................................................................................... 594
Configuring Mobile Trunks .............................................................................................................................. 595
Configuring VoIP Network ............................................................................................................................... 614
Configuring SIP Trunks ................................................................................................................................... 635
Configuring SIP Extensions ............................................................................................................................ 655
Configuring E&M Lines ................................................................................................................................... 686
Configuring Magneto Interface ........................................................................................................................ 694
Configuring Loop Dial Trunk Ports .................................................................................................................. 706
Configuring the Voice Mail System (VMS) ...................................................................................................... 715
Configuring LCR .............................................................................................................................................. 716
Configuring Emergency Number Dialing ......................................................................................................... 731
ii Table of Contents
Features and Facilities ............................................................................................................................... 735
Abbreviated Dialing ......................................................................................................................................... 735
Access Codes ................................................................................................................................................. 750
Account Codes ................................................................................................................................................ 757
Alarms ............................................................................................................................................................. 765
Alternate Number Dialing ................................................................................................................................ 787
Auto Answer .................................................................................................................................................... 794
Auto Call Back (ACB) ...................................................................................................................................... 799
Auto Redial ...................................................................................................................................................... 805
Automated Control Applications ...................................................................................................................... 811
Automatic Number Translation ........................................................................................................................ 825
Background Music (BGM) ............................................................................................................................... 832
Backup-SMDR ................................................................................................................................................ 835
Backup-System Configuration ......................................................................................................................... 840
Backup-System Software ................................................................................................................................ 843
Barge-In .......................................................................................................................................................... 846
BCCH Selection .............................................................................................................................................. 850
Behind the PBX Application ............................................................................................................................ 854
BITE (Built-In Test Equipment) ....................................................................................................................... 858
Building Intercom ............................................................................................................................................ 862
Call Back on Trunk Ports ................................................................................................................................ 864
Call Budget ...................................................................................................................................................... 870
Call Budget on Trunk ...................................................................................................................................... 874
Call Chaining ................................................................................................................................................... 885
Call Cost Calculation (CCC) ............................................................................................................................ 887
Call Cost Display ............................................................................................................................................. 917
Call Duration Control (CDC) ............................................................................................................................ 919
Call Duration Display ....................................................................................................................................... 928
Call Forward .................................................................................................................................................... 929
Call Forward-Remote ...................................................................................................................................... 936
Call Forward-Scheduled .................................................................................................................................. 939
Call Park .......................................................................................................................................................... 945
Call Hold .......................................................................................................................................................... 948
Call Logs ......................................................................................................................................................... 954
Call Pick Up ..................................................................................................................................................... 958
Call Progress Tones ........................................................................................................................................ 966
Call Restriction based on IP Address .............................................................................................................. 977
Call Taping ...................................................................................................................................................... 980
Call Toggle ...................................................................................................................................................... 989
Call Transfer .................................................................................................................................................... 993
Calling Line Identification and Presentation (CLIP) ....................................................................................... 1001
Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR) ......................................................................................................... 1008
Cancel All Station Features ........................................................................................................................... 1010
Class of Service (COS) ................................................................................................................................. 1011
CLI Based Routing ........................................................................................................................................ 1021
Clock Synchronization ................................................................................................................................... 1025
Closed User Group (CUG) ............................................................................................................................ 1028
Closed User Group-With Exchange ID ......................................................................................................... 1033
CO Call Waiting ............................................................................................................................................. 1037
Communication Ports .................................................................................................................................... 1038
Conference Dial-In ........................................................................................................................................ 1044
Conference-3 Party ....................................................................................................................................... 1051
Conference-Multiparty ................................................................................................................................... 1055
Conflict Dialing .............................................................................................................................................. 1061
Conversation Recording ................................................................................................................................ 1064
Table of Contents iii
Customer Name ............................................................................................................................................ 1068
Day Night Mode ............................................................................................................................................ 1070
Daylight Saving Time (DST) .......................................................................................................................... 1073
DDI Routing Table ......................................................................................................................................... 1081
Debug System ............................................................................................................................................... 1084
Debug VoIP Ethernet Port ............................................................................................................................. 1089
Default Settings ............................................................................................................................................. 1092
Department Call ............................................................................................................................................ 1101
Dial By Name ................................................................................................................................................ 1112
Dialed Number Directory ............................................................................................................................... 1115
Digest Authentication .................................................................................................................................... 1117
Digital Input Port (DIP) .................................................................................................................................. 1120
Digital Key Phone-Operation ......................................................................................................................... 1123
Digital Output Port (DOP) .............................................................................................................................. 1142
Direct Dialing-In (DDI) ................................................................................................................................... 1148
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) ........................................................................................................................... 1150
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ............................................................................................................ 1156
Direct Station Selection Console ................................................................................................................... 1165
Distinctive Rings ............................................................................................................................................ 1167
Do Not Disturb (DND) ................................................................................................................................... 1172
Door Phone ................................................................................................................................................... 1180
Dynamic Lock ................................................................................................................................................ 1195
E&M Connectivity .......................................................................................................................................... 1203
E1 Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................ 1207
Emergency Conference ................................................................................................................................ 1212
Emergency Detection and Reporting ............................................................................................................ 1215
Emergency Dialing ........................................................................................................................................ 1216
External Music ............................................................................................................................................... 1218
Flash Timer ................................................................................................................................................... 1219
Flashing on Trunks ........................................................................................................................................ 1221
Flexible Numbers .......................................................................................................................................... 1222
Floor Service ................................................................................................................................................. 1224
Follow Me ...................................................................................................................................................... 1230
Forced Answer .............................................................................................................................................. 1232
Forced Call Disconnection ............................................................................................................................ 1234
Gateway Application-Answer Signaling ........................................................................................................ 1236
GPAX Application .......................................................................................................................................... 1239
GPAX Billing .................................................................................................................................................. 1242
GPAX Flexible Numbers ............................................................................................................................... 1243
Help Desk ...................................................................................................................................................... 1245
Hot Desking ................................................................................................................................................... 1246
Hotline ........................................................................................................................................................... 1248
IC Reference Table ....................................................................................................................................... 1252
Incoming CLI Modification ............................................................................................................................. 1255
Internal Call Restriction ................................................................................................................................. 1259
Interrupt Request (IR) ................................................................................................................................... 1261
ISDN-BRI ...................................................................................................................................................... 1263
ISDN-PRI ...................................................................................................................................................... 1285
Macros .......................................................................................................................................................... 1290
Last Caller Recall .......................................................................................................................................... 1294
Last Number Redial ...................................................................................................................................... 1295
Least Cost Routing-Carrier Pre-Selection ..................................................................................................... 1296
License Management .................................................................................................................................... 1298
Live Call Screening ....................................................................................................................................... 1310
Live Call Supervision ..................................................................................................................................... 1312
Logical Partition ............................................................................................................................................. 1313
iv Table of Contents
Meet Me Paging ............................................................................................................................................ 1317
Message Wait ............................................................................................................................................... 1319
Mobility Extension ......................................................................................................................................... 1324
Multi-Stage Dialing ........................................................................................................................................ 1331
Music on Hold (MOH) .................................................................................................................................... 1335
Number Lists ................................................................................................................................................. 1337
Mute .............................................................................................................................................................. 1342
OFF-Hook Alert ............................................................................................................................................. 1344
OG Reference Table ..................................................................................................................................... 1346
Outgoing Trunk Bundle ................................................................................................................................. 1348
OG Trunk Bundle Group ............................................................................................................................... 1352
PCAP Trace .................................................................................................................................................. 1359
Paging ........................................................................................................................................................... 1366
Peer-to-Peer Calling ...................................................................................................................................... 1371
PLCC-An Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 1378
Presence ....................................................................................................................................................... 1386
Priority Calls in E&M MFCR2 Signaling ........................................................................................................ 1393
Priority ........................................................................................................................................................... 1397
Privacy .......................................................................................................................................................... 1400
QSIG ............................................................................................................................................................. 1402
Quick Dial ...................................................................................................................................................... 1415
Raid ............................................................................................................................................................... 1417
RCOC (Return Call to Original Caller) .......................................................................................................... 1419
Real Time Clock (RTC) ................................................................................................................................. 1424
Reminder ....................................................................................................................................................... 1430
Remote Programming ................................................................................................................................... 1439
Room Monitor ................................................................................................................................................ 1441
Routing Group ............................................................................................................................................... 1443
Security Alarm and Reporting ....................................................................................................................... 1447
Selective Port Access ................................................................................................................................... 1456
Self Ring Test ................................................................................................................................................ 1458
SIM Card Balance and Recharging ............................................................................................................... 1459
Software Port and Hardware ID .................................................................................................................... 1462
Static Routing Table ...................................................................................................................................... 1467
Station Message Detail Recording ................................................................................................................ 1472
Station Message Detail Recording-Online .................................................................................................... 1473
Station Message Detail Recording-Posting ................................................................................................... 1489
Station Message Detail Recording-Report .................................................................................................... 1531
Station Message Detail Recording-Storage .................................................................................................. 1545
System Activity Log ....................................................................................................................................... 1551
System Activity Log Display .......................................................................................................................... 1557
System Fault Log Display ............................................................................................................................. 1558
System Fault Log .......................................................................................................................................... 1559
System Parameters ....................................................................................................................................... 1565
System Timers and Counts ........................................................................................................................... 1584
System Security ............................................................................................................................................ 1595
T1 Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................ 1600
T1E1 Trunks .................................................................................................................................................. 1608
T1 RBS Parameters ...................................................................................................................................... 1660
Time Tables .................................................................................................................................................. 1671
Time Zone Display ........................................................................................................................................ 1675
Toll Control .................................................................................................................................................... 1676
Trunk Access Group (TAG) ........................................................................................................................... 1692
Trunk Auto Answer ........................................................................................................................................ 1693
Trunk Landing Group (TLG) .......................................................................................................................... 1700
Trunk Reservation ......................................................................................................................................... 1703
Table of Contents v
User Absent/Present ..................................................................................................................................... 1705
User Password .............................................................................................................................................. 1707
Video Call ...................................................................................................................................................... 1709
Virtual Station ................................................................................................................................................ 1710
Voice Help ..................................................................................................................................................... 1711
Voice Mail Integration .................................................................................................................................... 1712
Voice Message Applications ........................................................................................................................ 1716
Walk-In Class of Service ............................................................................................................................... 1726
Appendix ................................................................................................................................................... 1729
Technical Specifications ................................................................................................................................ 1729
Packing List ................................................................................................................................................... 1740
How to Make the Telecom Earth ................................................................................................................... 1752
Features at a Glance ..................................................................................................................................... 1754
SA Commands .............................................................................................................................................. 1763
System Commands ....................................................................................................................................... 1771
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................................ 1819
Acronyms ...................................................................................................................................................... 1822
Warranty Statement ...................................................................................................................................... 1828
Regulatory Information .................................................................................................................................. 1830
Open Source Licensing Terms and Conditions ............................................................................................. 1840
Index .......................................................................................................................................................... 1847
vi Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1 Introduction
Welcome
Thank you for choosing the Matrix ETERNITY! We hope you will make optimum use of this intelligent, integrated
Voice Switch. Please read this document carefully to get acquainted with the product before installing and operating
it.
About this System Manual
This document provides detailed information and instructions for installing and operating the PBX, ETERNITY.
Those who require instructions for quick installation and operation of this system, may refer to the ETERNITY
Quick Start and the ETERNITY User Card shipped with the system.
You may also refer the User Cards for the proprietary digital key phone EON shipped with the system, for
instructions on using the features of the ETERNITY.
This is a common documentation for all models of ETERNITY, namely ETERNITY ME, GE and PE and their
variants.
This document is primarily for the Enterprise Application of the ETERNITY.
Intended Audience
This System Manual is aimed at:
• System Engineers, who will install, maintain and support the ETERNITY. System Engineers are persons
who customize the system configuration to meet the requirements of the organization/users. It is assumed
that they are experienced in installing PBX, are familiar with telecom wiring technology, how it works, and
the various technical terms and functions associated with it. The SE must have undergone training in the
configuring ETERNITY.
No one, other than the System Engineer is permitted to make any alterations to the configuration of the
ETERNITY.
• System Administrators, who are persons who will administer the ETERNITY. Generally an operator/
receptionist in an organization, or the staff manning the reception or front desk area of the establishment
are selected as System Administrators.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1
It is assumed that the System Administrators have some previous experience in administering a PBX and
its Terminals and Consoles. The System Administrators are not expected to install and program the PBX,
but only the routine jobs and features that are specific to them like generating SMDR reports, Setting
report filters, configuring the features, Setting Alarms, reminders, etc.
• Users, persons/organizations who will use the resources of the ETERNITY. They may be executives,
include personnel of small and medium businesses, large enterprises, front desk and service staff of
Hotels/Motels, hospitals, and other commercial and public organizations/institutions.
Organization of this Document
This system manual contains 8 chapters:
• Chapter 1: Introduction - gives an overview of this document, its purpose, intended audience,
organization, terms and conventions used to present information and instructions.
• Chapter 2: Know Your ETERNITY - describes the system and its design, application scenarios, the
available models, the interfaces, and the hardware.
• Chapter 3: Installing ETERNITY - gives step-by-step instructions for preparing for and installing the
ETERNITY in general, like setting up the main distribution frames for the wiring, the safety measures for
protecting the system and persons handling the installation and maintenance.
• Chapter 4: Installing ETERNITY ME - provides step-by-step instructions for installing the ETERNITY ME
and its variants, inserting the cards, connecting the cables and powering the system.
• Chapter 5: Installing ETERNITY GE - contains instructions for installing the ETERNITY GE and its
variants, inserting the cards, connecting the cables lines and powering the system.
• Chapter 6: Installing ETERNITY PE - describes the installation of the ETERNITY PE and its variants,
inserting the cards, connecting the cables lines and powering the system.
• Chapter 7: Configuring ETERNITY - contains description of the different tools and options available to
configure ETERNITY. It provides detailed description of how to configure the various extension and trunk
port types - SLT, DKP, ISDN Terminal, SIP Extensions, TWT, Mobile, VoIP-SIP, T1E1PRI, BRI, E&M and
Magneto - supported by ETERNITY.
• Chapter 8: Features and Facilities - describes in detail, each feature and facility offered by the
ETERNITY. This includes a description of the feature/facility, how it works, and how to program the feature/
facility.
The feature description is arranged alphabetically by Feature Name to make it easy for you to locate the
description you want to look up.
How to Read this System Manual
This document is organized in a manner to help you get familiar with the PBX, learn how to install it, connect it to
the various networks and interfaces, and external devices, and start the system and use the features.
This System Manual is presented in a manner that will help you find the information you need easily and quickly.
2 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
You may use the table of contents and the Index to navigate through this document to the relevant topic or
information you want to look up.
Instructions
The instructions in this document are written in a numbered, step-by-step format, as follows. Each step, its outcome
and indication/notification, wherever they occur, have been described.
Access Codes
Access codes are strings of digits dialed by an extension to
• Call another extension, Department Group,
• Grab a trunk line
• Turn on and turn off a Digital/Analog Port
• Use a Feature, like Call Block, Call Forward.
The Access Codes provided in the instructions throughout this document, are default access codes. It is possible to
change the Access Codes according to user requirement and preferences. Verify with the Installer/System
Engineer, if the default Access Codes have been changed, and use the codes programmed by the System
Engineer. For more information, read the topic “Access Codes” in this document.
Notices
The following symbols have been used for notices to draw your attention to important items.
Important: to indicate something that requires your special attention or to remind you of
something you might need to do when you are using the system.
Caution: to indicate an action or condition that is likely to result in malfunction or damage to the
system or your property.
Warning: to indicate a hazard or an action that will cause damage to the system and or cause
bodily harm to the user.
Tip: to indicate a helpful hint giving you an alternative way to operate the system or carry out a
procedure, or use a feature more efficiently.
Terminology used in this System Manual
The technical terms and Acronyms used in this Manual are standard terms, commonly used in the
telecommunications and data communications industry. Considering the broad group of intended users of this
manual, wherever possible, use of jargon has been avoided.
Acronyms have been defined in the text and a list of the same is appended.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 3
Some of the terms specific to this Manual that you will encounter are defined below:
The words 'ETERNITY', 'System', 'PBX' are used interchangeably and synonymously to mean all models of
ETERNITY. Wherever necessary, the model and variant names are used.
• Called party/Callee: the person to whom the call is made.
• Calling party/Caller: the person who makes a call.
• CO Network: The public telephone exchange.
• CO Lines: The lines subscribed from the CO Network. These may be Two-wire Trunk Lines, ISDN BRI,
ISDN PRI, etc.
• Digital Key Phone (DKP): refers to EON, the proprietary digital key phone of Matrix supplied with the
ETERNITY. The term 'Digital Key Phone' refers to all models of EON.
• Enterprise Application/Features: pertaining to the general and special telephone and call management
features required by business establishments, public and private organizations.
• Extension: it is the port of the PBX to which a telephone instrument (DKP/SLT/ISDN) is connected.
• External Calls: calls made by users of ETERNITY to subscribers of PSTN, PLMN, ITSPs, etc.
• External Numbers: numbers of parties/individuals outside the PBX or PBX network. The unique number
string given to subscribers of PSTN, PLMN, ITSP, etc.
• Hospitality Application/ Features: pertaining to the special telephone and guest/patient management
features required by accommodation establishments like hotels and hospitals.
• Internal Calls: calls made from and received by one extension to another extension of the ETERNITY.
• Internal numbers: same as extension/station numbers.
• Mobile Extension: A mobile/landline phone used as a remote extension of ETERNITY. You can access all
the features of an extension of ETERNITY from the mobile/landline phone.
• Port: the physical interfaces on the cards for trunk lines and stations lines.
• Service Provider: the providers of telecom network lines/Internet - POTS, PSTN, GSM, ISDN PRI, ISDN
BRI, and Internet Telephony Service Providers (ITSP).
• Single Line Telephone (SLT): any standard two-wire telephone attached as extensions of the ETERNITY.
• Station: same as extension.
• System Administrator Commands/SA Commands: number strings dialed from the System
Administrator access/mode to operate features or set/cancel features for other extensions.
• System Commands/SE Commands: number strings dialed from the System Engineer access/mode to
program the system features/functions.
• TWT trunks: Two-wire trunks, that is, analog trunk lines from the POTS network.
4 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Using this Manual, we hope, you will be able to set up, operate and make optimum use of this feature packed PBX.
If you encounter any technical problems, please contact your Dealer/reseller or the Matrix Support team.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 5
6 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
CHAPTER 2 Know Your ETERNITY
Introduction
The Matrix ETERNITY is an Integrated Enterprise Voice Switch expandable up to 516 user ports. It is a unique
convergence of innovative switching technology and intelligent software features.
The system is built on PCM/TDM, 100 percent non-blocking, digital technology, providing high density switching. It
is powered by a 32-bit RISC processor for distributed processing. Thus the system offers reliable, efficient, and
unrestricted simultaneous communication (incoming and outgoing) by all users.
Universal Connectivity
ETERNITY offers Universal Connectivity, working with all major telecom interfaces: POTS, ISDN BRI/PRI, T1/E1,
GSM/3G, VoIP, E&M, and Magneto. So, you have access to multiple telecom networks on a single platform. The
system's intelligent Least Cost Routing logic diverts your calls through the appropriate network, ensuring least
possible call cost.
Besides Operator consoles (Digital Key phones, Direct Station Selection consoles) and standard telephones, you
can interface ETERNITY with different types of external devices such as a Fax machine, an external music source,
a public address system.
You can operate security devices with the ETERNITY. Any sensor device such as a smoke detector, an object
sensor, a glass break detector, can be connected to the ETERNITY to instigate a hooter, siren connected to the
ETERNITY.
You can also operate several automated control applications such as a door lock, lights glow signboards, bells,
water pump, and the like.
A door phone can also be connected to screen visitors.
ETERNITY supports video conferencing and data connectivity. You can interface any standard video phone
conference unit with suitable ISDN Interface with ETERNITY ISDN T1E1PRI and BRI cards.
ETERNITY supports Q-Sig. allowing you to network ETERNITY with another PBX/ETERNITY. So, you have feature
transparency and a network of PBXs working as a single unit.
Flexibility and Scalability
ETERNITY is designed to support both homogenous and Hybrid Mix Port cards in its Universal Slots. The Hybrid
cards offer all possible communication interface options to match exactly your communication requirement.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 7
The system is also designed to provide very high level of flexibility and scalability to meet your future
communication needs. The Universal Slot platform and the modular design of the cards allow you to start with the
minimum required configuration and expand the system capacity later, by adding more cards to the universal slots.
So, you can invest progressively in scaling up the system as the communication needs of your organization grow.
Cost Saving and Productivity Enhancing Features
Key features like Multi-party Conference, Auto Attendant, Digital Input Port, Digital Output Port, Analog Input Port,
Analog Output Port, Remote programming, SMDR Buffer with a large capacity, that normally warrant additional
investment in most other brands, are built into the system.
Intelligent features like Auto Attendant, CLI based Routing and Dial by Name ensure efficient call management and
prompt response to callers.
Least Cost Routing and Call Budgeting help reduce communication cost and enhance productivity.
ETERNITY can route a VoIP call to GSM or T1E1PRI port. In the same way, a call on a T1E1PRI port can be
routed to VoIP, GSM or TWT ports. Further, you can select Fixed or Least Cost Routing to route outgoing calls.
ETERNITY can handle calls on all ports simultaneously, allowing full traffic on all ports.
ETERNITY can work as an adjunct to your existing telephony infrastructure, as a Gateway, saving you the cost of
equipment replacement, wiring and installation, while giving you Universal Connectivity and a host of intelligent
features.
Redundancy
To reduce down time and provide uninterrupted communication, the ETERNITY ME supports redundancy option in
the ETERNITY ME10SR variant for the three cards that are critical to its functioning: The Power Supply Card1, the
Master Card and the Switch Card. There two cards of each on the ETERNITY ME10SR. When the active card fails,
the standby card takes over.
Hot Swap
With the Hot Swap feature2 you can remove a card and insert it back without switching off the system. So, you can
replace a faulty card with a functional one without affecting the functioning of the system.
Q-Sig
With Q-Sig. you can network ETERNITY with another ETERNITY or any other ISDN-PBX to expand the PBX
resources. You can enjoy feature transparency between the PBXs.
Key Features
• Account Codes
• Auto Attendant
• Automatic Call Distribution
• CAS Interface
• Class of Service
• CLI Based Routing
• Closed User Group
1. Redundancy is supported only for the PS48V Power Supply card! It is not supported for the PS UNI Power Supply Card. Refer the
topic “The Power Supply Card” to know more. ETERNITY GE and PE do not support Redundancy.
2. The Hot Swap feature is supported for all cards except Power Supply card in both ETERNITY ME10S and ME16S. The ETERNITY
GE and PE variants do not support Hot Swap.
8 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Conference - 15-Party in (ETERNITY GE and ETERNITY PE6SP)
• Conference - 6-Party (ETERNITY PE3SS, PE3SP)
• Conference -21-Party (ETERNITY ME),
• Door Phone (ETERNITY PE)
• Emergency Call Detection and Reporting
• External Music Port
• FTP (easy maintenance)
• Hospitality features (for Hotels and Hospitals)
• Hot Desking
• Hot-Swap (optional)
• Least Cost Routing
• PAS Port
• PMS Interface
• Priority
• Q-Sig
• Redundancy (optional)
• Relay Port
• Remote Programming
• RS232C Port
• Security Alarm
• SMDR Reports
• Syslog (for easy maintenance)
• System Activity Log
• System Fault Log
• Toll Control
• Universal Slots
• Video Conferencing
• Voice Applications
• Voice Mail
• Web-based Programming
Also refer “Appendix” for a complete list of Hardware and Software features and technical specifications.
Easy Installation and Operation
ETERNITY is easy to install and operate. The universal slot architecture allows easy installation and removal of
cards.
The built-in web server Jeeves allows you to configure the system parameters and features on-site and also from a
remote location using a Web browser.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 9
Applications of ETERNITY
The Matrix ETERNITY can be deployed in small to large enterprises and institutions: manufacturing units,
corporate offices, banking and financial institutions, software firms, shopping malls, hospitals, hotels-motels, in
power line carrier communication of electric utilities, call centers, in institutions and, power line carrier
communication PLCC networks, as group PBX (GPAX).
The ETERNITY can work as a Gateway with the existing telephony infrastructure - TDM PBX, IP PBX - as
Universal Gateway for Calling Card Operators, Internet Telephony Service Providers (ITSP).
Illustrated in the following are various scenarios where the ETERNITY finds application.
Enterprise Application
10 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Hotel Application
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 11
Closed User Group Application
Power Line Carrier Communication Application
12 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Universal Gateway Application
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 13
14 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 15
Models of ETERNITY
The Matrix ETERNITY in available in three models: ETERNITY ME, ETERNITY GE and ETERNITY PE. Each
model has variants with different configurations.
ETERNITY ME
The ETERNITY ME is designed for medium and large organizations and it available in the following variants:
ETERNITY ME16S ETERNITY ME10S
• 16 universal slots • 10 universal slots
• 516 user ports • 324 user ports
• Redundancy option for Power Supply,
Available with AC and DC power supply.
Master Card and Switch Card
ETERNITY GE
ETERNITY GE is designed for small and medium organizations. It is available in the following variants:
ETERNITY GE12S ETERNITY GE6S ETERNITY GE 3S
• 12 universal slots • 6 universal slots • 3 universal slots
• 240 user ports • 120 user ports • 60 user ports
16 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
ETERNITY PE
The ETERNITY PE is designed for small and growing organizations/small organizations with growth potential. It
available in the following variants:
ETERNITY PE3SS
ETERNITY PE3SP ETERNITY PE6SP
• 3 universal slots
• 3 universal slots • 6 universal slots
• 24 user ports
• 24 user ports • 48 user ports
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 17
Hardware Overview
ETERNITY ME
The Enclosure
The enclosure of ETERNITY ME consists of 'fixed' and universal slots. The fixed slots are occupied by specific
cards - Power Supply Card, Master Card, Switch Card - and cannot be changed, whereas in the universal slots,
you can install any of the various card.
The slot connectors are located on the motherboard on the backplane of the enclosure. Each slot has guide rails for
inserting the cards.
Illustrated below are design of the enclosure and the position of the slots on each model of ETERNITY ME.
ETERNITY ME16S
In the ETERNITY ME16S, the extreme left slot is reserved for the Power Supply card, the extreme right is reserved
for the Master card, and the second last slot is reserved for the Switch Card. The slots between these fixed slots
are the 16 universal slots to fit the other cards.
ETERNITY ME10S
18 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
In the ETERNITY ME10S, the first three slots from extreme left slot are reserved for the Power Supply card, the
Master Card and the Switch Card respectively. The remaining slots are the 10 universal slots.
ETERNITY ME10S with Redundancy Option
The ETERNITY ME10SR, which offers the redundancy option, has the same organization of the fixed and universal
slots as the ME10S variant, starting with the Power Supply Card on the extreme left. Only the number of slots
exceeds because of the presence of the second Power Supply Card, Master Card and Switch Card, provided in this
variant to support the Redundancy feature.
The Cards
ETERNITY ME houses the following Cards:
1. Master Card
2. Switch Card
3. Power Supply Cards: PSUNI or PS48V
4. SLT Card
5. TWT+SLT Card
6. DKP
7. Intercom Line Card
8. E&M Card
9. VMS Card
10. BRI Card
11. T1E1PRI Card
12. GSM/3G Card
13. VoIP Card
14. Magneto Card
15. SLT8+MAG2+TWT2+LD2+ENM2 Card
16. SLT8-Magneto8 Card
17. TWT8-Magneto8 Card
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 19
ETERNITY GE
The Enclosure
The enclosure of ETERNITY GE has 'fixed' and universal slots. The fixed slots are occupied by specific cards -
Power Card and the CPU Card - and cannot be changed, whereas in the universal slots you can install any of the
various cards.
Inside the enclosure of ETERNITY GE are slot connectors located on the motherboard on the backplane of the
enclosure. Each slot has guide rails for inserting the cards.
Illustrated below are the design of the enclosures and the position of the slots in each model of ETERNITY GE.
ETERNITY GE12S
The first two slots from the extreme left are reserved for the Power Supply Card and the CPU card respectively.
ETERNITY GE6S
The first two slots from the extreme left are reserved for the Power Supply Card and the CPU card respectively.
ETERNITY GE3S
The first two slots from the extreme left are reserved for the Power Supply Card and the CPU card respectively.
20 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The Cards
The ETERNITY GE houses the following types of cards:
1. Power Supply Card - PSUNI Card (90-265V, 47-63Hz Mains as Input AC voltage power supply).
2. CPU Card
3. SLT Card
4. TWT+SLT Card
5. DKP Card
6. DKP+SLT Card
7. Intercom Line Card
8. E&M Card
9. VMS Card
10. BRI Card
11. T1E1PRI Card
12. GSM/3G Card
13. VoIP Card
ETERNITY PE
The Enclosure
The ETERNITY PE has a different design. The enclosure of ETERNITY PE consists of a top plate, which functions
as the cover and can be removed.
The Power Supply unit and the CPU are in-built, and fixed on the bottom plane of the ETERNITY PE.
The CPU card is fixed on the bottom plate of the enclosure, with the 2-row connectors for the card slots facing up.
Illustrated in the following are the design of the enclosures and the position of the slots in each model of ETERNITY
PE.
ETERNITY PE6SP
The Power Supply unit and the CPU are in-built, and fixed on the bottom plane of the ETERNITY PE.
Universal slots are located on the CPU. The connectors of the slots are located on the CPU.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 21
Cards are mounted on the CPU, and secured on the three studs labeled as H1, H2, H3 on the CPU, with the
screws are provided for this purpose.
ETERNITY PE3SP
ETERNITY PE3SP is similar to PE6S, except has it has only 3 universal slots.
ETERNITY PE3SS
ETERNITY PE3SS has 3 universal slots and an Ethernet Port.
There is no Communication (COM) Port, no USB port, no Analog Input Port and no Analog Output port.
The Cards
The ETERNITY PE houses the following Cards:
1. SLT Card
2. DKP Card
3. TWT Card
4. DKP+ SLT Card
5. TWT + SLT Card
6. DKP + TWT Card
7. DKP + TWT + SLT Card
8. BRI Card (only ETERNITY PE6SP and PE3SP)
9. T1E1PRI Card (only ETERNITY PE6SP and PE3SP)
10. GSM/3G Card
11. VoIP Card
22 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
12. VMS Card
13. Door Phone Card
Cards of ETERNITY at a Glance
Card Name ME16S ME10S GE12S GE6S GE3S PE6SP PE3SP PE3SS
PSUNI Power Supply Card # # #
48 VDC Power Supply Card # # #
Master Card -- -- -- -- -- --
Switch Card -- -- -- -- -- --
CPU Card -- -- ## ## ##
SLT Card
TWT Card -- -- --
TWT+SLT Card
DKP Card
DKP+SLT Card -- --
DKP+TWT Card -- -- -- -- --
DKP+TWT+SLT Card -- -- -- -- --
Intercom Line Card -- -- --
E&M Card -- -- --
VMS Card
BRI Card --
TIE1PRI Card --
GSM/3G Card
VoIP Card
Magneto Card -- -- -- -- -- --
SLT-Magneto Card -- -- -- -- -- --
TWT-Magneto Card -- -- -- -- -- --
SLT+MAG+TWT2+LD2+ENM2 Card -- -- -- -- -- --
Door Phone Card -- -- -- -- --
# Built-in SMPS; # # Built-in CPU; *Check availability.
The TWT, SLT, DKP, E&M, VMS, T1E1PRI, BRI, GSM/3G, VoIP, Magneto cards are available in different
configurations for the different models of ETERNITY. For an at-a-glance view of the configurations in which these
cards are available for ETERNITY ME, GE and PE, refer “Technical Specifications”.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 23
The Interfaces
The ETERNITY supports the following interfaces for connecting to different telecom networks, digital key phones,
standard telephones and other external devices.
The TWT Interface
The TWT Interface enables the ETERNITY to be connected to the POTS Network. The POTS Networks across the
world support various standards and differ in features. For example, some networks support Caller ID Presentation
using DTMF signaling, while some support Caller ID Presentation using FSK signaling; some networks offer 600
Ohms Impedance, while others offer complex impedance.
ETERNITY's versatile architecture allows it to be connected to such networks differing in their characteristics. The
TWT Interface supports following features:
• Programmable AC Impedance - 600, 900 and various complex impedances.
• Answer Supervision/Polarity Reversal
• Selectable Disconnect Supervision - Polarity Reversal, Open Loop Disconnect
• Selectable Caller ID Presentation - DTMF, FSK
• Programmable Dialing method - Pulse/Tone (with programmable Pulse Ratio/DTMF On-Off period)
• Programmable Speech Tx Gain
• Programmable Speech Rx Gain
• Programmable Disconnect Tone Sensing
• Programmable Flash Timer
• Programmable Loop Current
The ISDN PRI Interface
The ISDN PRI Interface enables ETERNITY to be connected to digital networks over T13 and E14 carrier lines.
On T1 carrier lines, the Interface supports the following signaling types:
• PRI
• Robbed Bit Signaling (RBS)
• Q-Signaling (QSIG)
• E&M
On E1 carrier lines, ETERNITY supports the following signaling types:
• PRI
• Channel Associated Signaling (CAS)
• Q-Signaling (QSIG)
• E&M
The ISDN T1E1PRI Interface supports the following features:
• Terminal (TE) mode and Network (NT) Mode
3. T1 PRI (T-Carrier) offers 23 Bearer Channels and one Signaling Channel (23B+D). It is used in North America, Japan and Korea.
4. E1 PRI (E-Carrier) offers 30 Bearer Channels and two Signaling Channels (30B+D). It is used in all countries, except North
America, Japan and Korea.
24 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Video conferencing and data connectivity
ISDN BRI
The ISDN BRI Interface enables ETERNITY to be connected to ISDN BRI Lines and connect ISDN BRI compatible
devices with the ETERNITY.
The ISDN BRI Interface has the following features:
• Signaling types - 2B+D Signaling
• Terminal (TE) mode
• Terminal (TE) mode
• Video conferencing and data connectivity
Depending on the requirement, each BRI Port can be configured in the TE/NT mode.
It is possible to feed power from the ETERNITY to the terminal equipment connected to the ETERNITY (on its BRI
port configured as NT).
The Mobile Interface
The Mobile Interface enables the ETERNITY to be connected to GSM/3G network operators worldwide. For
example, the Frequency Band supported by the GSM networks varies across countries. In some countries, the
network operators may use 850MHz while network operators in some countries may use 1900MHz, in some
countries network operators may use both frequency bands.
ETERNITY's Mobile Interface supports full Quad-Band Operation (GSM850, 900, 1800, 1900MHz) for world-wide
use, for Global, Inter and Intra country roaming.
The Mobile Interface supports the following features:
• GSM 2G, GSM 3G network support.
• Selectable GSM Frequency Bands - 900, 1800, 1900, 850 + 1900, 900+1800 MHz.
• Programmable Network Selection - Manual and Automatic.
• Programmable Network Operator Codes in order of priority (from 1 to 9) in case of Manual Network
Selection.
• Programmable Speech Tx Gain
• Programmable Speech Rx Gain
• Selectable Incoming Call Modes - Allow, Ignore, Reject.
• SIM Card protection with a Personal Identification Number (PIN) and Personal Unlock Keyword (PUK).
• Single Rooftop (RT) antenna for 'High Gain'
The ETERNITY Mobile Interface does not support GPRS features, Fax and Data services, and network
supported services, except CLIR and USSD.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 25
The VoIP Interface
The Voice-over-IP (VoIP) Interface routes over the Internet, all the outgoing and incoming calls made or received
by the extensions of the ETERNITY and extensions of other PBXs that are networked with the ETERNITY.
The VoIP Interface supports Session Initiation Protocol (SIP), the industry standard VoIP.
The VoIP Interface supports SIP Trunks and SIP Extensions.
With SIP Trunks users can make IP calls using the SIP Server of the Internet Telephony Service Providers (ITSPs).
The VoIP Card has an in-built Registrar Server that allows any SIP enabled device like a Wi-Fi mobile handset, a
PDA or an IP-Phone to be registered with it and function as the 'SIP Extension' of the ETERNITY. The SIP
Extension users can make and receive calls to any extension user of the ETERNITY as well as any external
numbers over PSTN, GSM, VoIP and E&M. With SIP Extensions, organizations can communicate and stay
connected at the lowest cost without any geographical restrictions.
The VoIP Interface supports adaptive jitter buffer for reducing delay and improving speech quality.
The key features of the VoIP Interface are:
• Up to 32 SIP Trunks5 - for Proxy as well as Peer-to-Peer (non-Proxy) calls.
• Up to 999 SIP Extensions6.
• 32 Simultaneous Voice Calls maximum7.
• Selectable Network Assignment (Connection Type) - Static IP, DHCP, PPPoE.
• Selectable DNS - Automatic and Static.
• Dynamic DNS for mobile SIP devices.
• STUN.
• TCP and UDP NAT Keep Alive.
• VLAN.
• Symmetric RTP Selection.
• MAC Address Cloning option.
• Fax over IP - T.38 (UDPTL), T.38 (RTP) and Pass Through.
• Send CLI Option for outgoing calls
• Selectable DTMF - RTP (RFC 2833), SIP Info, InBand
5. ETERNITY GE supports 16 SIP Trunks and ETERNITY PE supports 4 SIP Trunks.
6. ETERNITY ME supports 999 SIP Extensions, ETERNITY GE supports 500 SIP Extensions, and ETERNITY PE supports a maxi-
mum of 50 SIP Extensions.
7. ETERNITY PE supports a maximum of 16 Simultaneous Calls.
26 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Flash Detection using SIP INFO and RFC2833.
• Broad Voice Codec Selection: G.723, G.729ab, GSM FR, iLBC - 30 ms, iLBC - 20 ms, G. 711 µ-Law, and
G. 711 A-Law.
• Quality of Service - SIP DiffServe/ToS, RTP DiffServe/ToS
• VoIP Silence Detection and Disconnection.
• Voice Mail Subscription on SIP Extensions.
• Busy Lamp Field Subscription on SIP Extensions.
• Upto 10 Call Appearances on SIP Extensions.
• Registration of SIP Extensions from 3 different locations.
The E&M Interface
The E&M Interface of the ETERNITY supports analog trunking to connect various communication equipment
telephone switches, Routers, Leased Lines, etc.
Often, E&M connectivity is used to expand the PBX capacity (by connecting a second PBX with the main PBX) or to
connect two or more remotely located PBXs, forming a network of PBXs.
The E&M Interface can be used for the following applications:
• Power Line Carrier Communication (PLCC) Networks, where several EPAXs are connected with each
other through E&M tie lines. Refer “PLCC-An Introduction” to know more.
• Closed User Groups, where several PBXs are connected with each other through E&M tie lines8.
• PBX expansion, where two PBXs are connected with each other with E&M tie lines.
• Connecting remote PBXs/Satellite equipment over E&M tie lines
Also, refer the topics “E&M Connectivity” and “E&M Feature Template” to know more.
The E&M Interface can be programmed to provide Trunk Interface, a Subscriber (Station) Interface or both, as a
Tie Line with the dual personality of a Trunk and a Subscriber.
The E&M Interface of the ETERNITY has the following features:
• Programmable Orientation Type - trunk, station, tie-line.
• Selectable E&M Interface Types - IV and V.
• Selectable Speech Interface (Audio Interface)9 - Two-wire and four-wire.
8. The PBXs in a Closed User Group can be connected over ISDN T1/E1 Lines as well. Refer the topic “Closed User Group (CUG)”
to know more.
9. The number of wires used to transmit audio signals.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 27
• Selectable E&M Trunk Seizure Type10 - Immediate, Immediate + Wink, Seizure Pulse, Seizure Pulse +
Wink, Express, and Compander Control Signal.
• Selectable Address Signaling - Pulse dial (Pulse 10PPS, Pulse 20PPS) and Tone Dial (DTMF).
The Magneto Interface
Magneto Telephones11 can be connected to the Magneto Interface of ETERNITY. Magneto telephones are widely
used by the defense establishments as field phones in front lines, and by other establishments such as railroad
companies (signaling emergencies, crossings, etc.), electric utilities, pipeline companies, who need to have their
networks at places that are too remote to be serviced by public telephone networks.
ETERNITY can land calls from magneto field telephones on the extensions (SLT, DKP, ISDN Terminal) of the
ETERNITY and place calls from the extensions of the ETERNITY on magneto telephones.
To know more about how the Magneto Card works, refer the topic “Configuring Magneto Interface”.
The Digital Key Phone Interface
The Digital Key Phone Interface of the ETERNITY is for the purpose of connecting the proprietary Digital Key
Phones of Matrix Comsec, namely EON, the PC-based phone EONSOFT and the proprietary Direct Station
Selection (DSS) Consoles with the ETERNITY.
The Digital Key Phone Interface has the following features:
• Programmable Call Capacity - up to 10 Call Appearances/Call Loops on a single DKP.
• Selectable Headset and Speaker (Hands-free) modes.
• Selectable Auto Answer mode.
• Programmable Headset Speech Tx and Rx Gains.
• Programmable Hands-free (Speaker) Speech Tx and Rx Gains.
• Programmable Key Click Volume levels.
• Programmable Key Maps for Operator, Executive, Hotel Attendant and Guests.
• 4-Level Adjustable Backlight and Contrast Controls
• Selectable Ring Types.
• Ringer Volume Control.
• Programmable Ringer Modes - Ring Immediately, Ring if Idle, Ring after Delay, Ring Off.
• Ring On Speakerphone and Ring on Headset options.
• Language Support - English, French, German, Portuguese, Spanish.
The Single Line Telephone Interface
The Single Line Telephone (SLT) Interface allows any standard, two-wire, analog single line telephone instrument -
rotary, pulse-tone, cordless, feature phones with or without Calling Line Identification - to be connected to the
ETERNITY as extension phone.
10. This is the line protocol that defines how the equipment seizes the E&M trunk. Also, referred to as Start Dial Supervision Signaling
Protocol.
11. A magneto telephone is a local battery telephone set, in which signaling current is provided by a magneto hand generator. The
hand generator, commonly referred to as 'crank', is located on the right hand side of the telephone set and is turned to produce
energy to ring other phones or to signal the CO. The magneto, also called the generator, is used to convert the mechanical motion
via the crank to produce sufficient energy to ring other phones or to signal the CO.
28 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The SLT Interface has the following features:
• Selectable Caller ID Presentation - DTMF, FSK
• Programmable CLIP Digit Pad Count (0-9).
• Programmable Ring Type - Trapezoidal, Sinusoidal, Low Trapezoidal, Low Sinusoidal.
• Programmable AC Impedance - 600, 900, 350 + (100 || 0.21uF), 220+ (820 || 120nF), 270 +
(750 || 150 nF)
• Selectable Answer Signaling.
• Selectable Disconnect Signaling - Polarity Reversal, Open Loop Disconnect.
• Programmable Speech Rx Gain.
• Programmable Speech Tx Gain.
• Programmable Flash Timer.
• Programmable Loop Current.
• Fax machine connectivity.
Voicemail System (VMS)
ETERNITY provides a full-fledged, 'in-skin' Voicemail System with a capacity of up to 512 mailboxes. Thus, every
extension of the ETERNITY can be assigned a mailbox.
The key auto attendant and voicemail features supported by ETERNITY's Voicemail System are:
• Programmable Mailbox Size.
• Programmable Message Length.
• Welcome greetings according to the time of the day.
• Different voice greetings for different time zones.
• Special greetings for holidays.
• Five call transfer types: none, blind, wait for ring, wait for answer, and screened.
• Dial by extension.
• Dial by name.
• Personalized greetings for each mailbox.
• Individual mailbox size.
• Call forward to voicemail.
• Message forwarding.
• Distribution lists.
• Broadcast message.
• Message Wait Notification.
• Redirecting messages.
• Email based Message Wait Notification.
ETERNITY's Voicemail System also forms the basis of other features like:
• Conversation Recording
• Call Taping
• Voice-guided Wake-up Calls and Reminders
• Message Wait Notification
• Call Transfer to Mailbox
• Call Forward to Voice Mail
• Department Calls - Mailbox for Department Groups
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 29
Computer
You can connect a standalone computer with the ETERNITY over the RS232 serial Communication Port of the
system.
You can also connect ETERNITY to a standalone computer or to a LAN Switch over the Ethernet Port of the
ETERNITY.
PC connectivity is required to:
• access the web-based configuration tool Jeeves.
• set up and run software applications such as Property Management Software (PMS), Call Accounting
Software (CAS) in the Hotel Application.
• to run the Front Desk User Wizard of the Hotel Application.
• capture and download Station Message Detail Records (SMDR): SMDR reports, SMDR Online and SMDR
Posting,
• capture and download System Activity Log and System Fault Log, and Hotel Motel Activity Log in the Hotel
Application.
External Music Source
You can connect any external music source like a CD Player, a Cassette Player, FM radio, etc. to the Analog Input
Port of the ETERNITY.
The Analog Input Port can handle unamplified, isolated, analog speech signal from an external music source.
Music from this external source can be played as Music-On-Hold to callers and as Background Music to extension
users.
Public Address System
You can connect a public address system to the Analog Output Port of the ETERNITY. Any extension of the
ETERNITY can make announcements using the external speakers of the public address system.
Security Devices
Any type of sensor device like glass break sensor, smoke detector, object sensor, etc. can be connected to the
Digital Input Port of the ETERNITY.
You can connect a Siren or a Hooter to the Digital Output Port of the ETERNITY which can be activated to indicate
emergencies.
The sensor device connected to the Digital Input Port can be used to instigate the hooter or siren connected to the
Digital Output Port.
Automated Control Applications
In addition to the security devices, you also run different automated control applications such as a door lock, a
school bell, a water pump, sprinklers, automated illuminations (office lights, porch and terrace lights, glow
signboards, street lights, etc.) by connecting such devices to the Digital Output Port of the ETERNITY.
30 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The devices can be operated by dialing a command or can be programmed to automatically switch on and switch
off at particular times.
What's more, these devices can also work on instigation from a sensor connected to the Digital Input Port of the
ETERNITY and can be operated from a remote location using the Direct Inward System Access (DISA) provided by
ETERNITY.
Door Phone
You can connect any standard 4-wire door phones to the Door Phone ports of the ETERNITY. The door phones
can be operated in conjunction with a Door Lock connected to the Digital Output Port of the ETERNITY.
The Door Phone interface is supported only on ETERNITY PE.
For an at-a-glance view of the maximum trunks and ports available for each of the aforementioned Interface
options on the various models of ETERNITY, refer System Capacity and Resources in Appendix “Technical
Specifications”.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 31
32 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
CHAPTER 3 Installing ETERNITY
Before You Start
Before you begin the installation of the ETERNITY ME/GE/PE, make sure that the required telecom wiring has
been done.
The number of extensions (stations) you require and their location will determine the type of cabling you require on
your premises.
We recommend that you plan the wiring and the installation of the ETERNITY according to your current and
expected future requirements.
Before you begin to install and set up the hardware of ETERNITY, make sure you have the following items:
• A Main Distribution Frame (MDF)
• A suitable location to install the Main Distribution Frame and the ETERNITY hardware.
• Cables for trunk lines and stations.
• The Cards of ETERNITY.
• One or more Single Line Telephone or Digital Key Phones for testing.
• Power supply.
• One or more active Two-wire trunk lines for test calls.
• A modem for the ISDN T1E1PRI line.
• An NT1 termination device for the ISDN BRI line.
• Appropriate cables and connectors to set up and test the Ethernet interface of the ETERNITY and the LAN
connection.
• A standalone PC or a PC connected in a LAN that can PING the ETERNITY.
• A SIM card to test mobile network connectivity.
• A SIP Account to test VoIP connectivity.
Well begun is half done; plan your hardware installation well.
The Main Distribution Frame (MDF)
The MDF connects outside telephone lines coming from the local exchange, on one side and the internal (PBX)
lines on the other.
In simple form, the MDF is a special metallic frame designed and constructed with columns of receptacles to firmly
hold the termination modules for the trunk and extension cables.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 33
The cables or trunk lines to/from the Public Telephone Exchange terminate on the line side and cross connections
(jumpers) run to the opposite (PBX) side of the MDF. From those terminals, a multi-core cable runs from a second
set of terminals into the PBX.
A multi-core cable runs from the PBX into the MDF. From the distribution frame, the smaller cables run into each
individual extension telephone outlet or socket (RJ11 or RJ45).
In a multi-storied building or on a widely spread out premises, it is common to have more than one distribution
frame, called the intermediate distribution frame (IDF) on each floor, to provide the connection between the MDF
and the individual telephone wiring. IDFs function as wiring points to gather and distribute wiring. IDFs are useful
used when a large number of stations are to be connected and the wire runs extend over hundreds of feet; hence
the distance is too great to economically terminate every station run individually to the MDF.
• Select a suitable MDF (and IDF, if required) with the standard lead-in cable termination KRONE modules.
• Ensure that the MDF complies with the local building telecom wiring Guidelines, Rules and Regulations.
• Select an appropriate site to install the MDF.
Location of the MDF
• The MDF is normally installed inside the building in a location and position which is free from the ingress of
dust and moisture, and which is not subject to damp or humid conditions.
• This also applies to MDF installed outside the building. It must be protected from exposure to weather
conditions, dust, dampness and humidity
• Do not install the MDF in any of the following locations:
• In washing or toilet facilities, boiler/plant/machine rooms or any area subject to corrosive fumes and
fluids;
• In fire escape stairways;
• Within a cupboard containing a fire hose reel;
• Within any refrigeration room or sauna heater room;
• Near any water feature or water body like fountains, sprinklers, a bath, shower or other fixed water
container, a swimming pool, paddling pool, spa pool or tub; or any area where hosing down operations
are carried out.
• In a high voltage electrical switch room or near a heavy voltage transformer.
• The MDF should be robust and securely attached to a permanent building element such as a wall, floor or
column. Do not mount the MDF on movable elements such as hinged panels or wheeled trolleys.
• Provide adequate lighting in the place where the MDF is located.
• Provide adequate space around the MDF where any person is required to pass to enable safe and
convenient access to the MDF and ready escape from the vicinity under emergency conditions.
• Any room containing the MDF must not require the use of a tool, key, card, number pad or the like to exit
the room. Ensure a quick hurdle-free exit from such a room.
• The MDF or the enclosure in which it is located should have the provision for securing with a key, lock or
tool. External MDF should be adequately secured against vandalism and access by children or
unauthorized persons.
34 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• The MDF enclosure should be designed so as to prevent access to live parts by unqualified persons and
should be free of exposed sharp edges.
• The MDF enclosure should be protected from insects and rodents.
Read Protecting ETERNITY and Yourself.
Selecting the Installation Site for ETERNITY
The ETERNITY maybe be mounted on a table or wall. Refer to the mechanical dimensions of the model you have,
when selecting the site for installation, and deciding whether to mount the system on a table top, or on the wall, or
on a rack.
Select an appropriate site to install the ETERNITY taking into consideration the following recommendations and
precautions:
• The site of installation should be well-ventilated, moisture and dust free, and not exposed to direct sunlight,
heat, excessive cold or humidity.
• The site should be equidistant from all the extensions to simplify cabling network and reduce cabling costs.
• The system should be installed at a height of at least 3.5 feet from the ground. Installation at this height
makes preventive or corrective maintenance tasks easy.
• The system should be installed away from any source of electromagnetic noise such as any radio
equipment, heavy transformers, faulty electric chokes of tube-lights, any device having faulty coil, etc.
Read “Protecting ETERNITY and Yourself”.
Selecting Cables
• Select standard good quality telephone cables with 0.5 mm conductor diameter for the internal as well as
over-head cabling.
• Use twisted pair wires to reduce interference.
• Use separate cable conduits for electrical and telephone cables.
• The length of the cables must not be too long. They must have minimum number of joints. This will help
you detect cable faults easily.
• Maintain cable records so that cables and cross-connections on the MDF can be correctly identified and
connected. The records should be in a clear, legible and updateable format.
Selecting Extension Telephones
Select appropriate telephone instruments to be connected as extension phones. You may connect:
• any of the models of the proprietary Digital Key Phone (DKP) of the EON series (EON42, EON48)
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 35
• Any standard telephone instrument like rotary phone, Pulse/tone switchable push-button phone, Feature
phone or Cordless phone. So, you can also use your existing telephone instruments.
You are recommended to connect DKPs with DSS of the EON series for Operator/Receptionist/ Front
Desk/Senior management extensions (stations).
Providing Power Supply Source
• The ETERNITY ME, GE and PE work with input voltages ranging between 100-240VAC.
• Arrange for a separate power point and switch, close to the system.
• Power supply for the system must be separate from other heavy electrical loads like Air-conditioners,
heaters, welding machines, electrical motors, etc.
Terminating Trunk and Station Cables on the MDF
• Terminate the TWT Trunk Line cables from the CO (public telephone exchange) and E&M cables into the
'Trunk Lines' side of the MDF using the punch tool for Krone modules.
• Terminate all the station cables (connected to the wall sockets/outlets) into the 'Station Lines' side of the
MDF using the punch tool for Krone modules.
• Label the trunk and station line cables for easy identification and keep a record of the trunk and station
lines in an updatable format.
Where multiple wiring cabinets/distribution frames are used, label each frame and reference its number on
the corresponding outlet.
• Install Primary Protection modules with Gas Discharge Tubes (GDT) and fuses on entry points for all trunk
lines. This is to protect the system from heavy voltages from trunk lines and overhead stations.
The product warranty does not cover damages resulting from lack of primary protection on trunk lines.
• It is recommended that you also install Primary Protection modules with GDT and fuses on all Station lines,
particularly off-premise extensions, and E&M ports.
For this, you are recommended to use the Primary Protection Module (PPM4) supplied by Matrix.
36 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• A typical connection between a PBX and the MDF is illustrated in the figure below.
• If you are using a smaller configuration of the ETERNITY, like ETERNITY PE3SS, 3SP or 6SP, you may
refer the following diagram to connect the PBX and the Distribution Frame.
You are recommended to use the “Primary Protection Module - PPM4” supplied by Matrix.
Connecting Primary Protection Modules to Trunk and Overhead/Off-
Premises Lines
It is necessary to protect the ETERNITY from heavy voltages entering the system from the Trunk Lines and
overhead stations.
The protection can be in the form of surge suppressor devices like Gas Discharge Tubes (GDT), MOVs, Fuses, etc.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 37
Input Protection Modules (IPM)
Install IPM on the Krone Modules of the MDF. Input protection modules are for analog input channels to protect
against over-voltages that may be applied between any tow input connectors or between an input connector and
the ground.
Primary Protection Module - PPM4
Matrix provides Primary Protection Modules (PPM) consisting of four PPM circuits. The PPM4 contains Gas
Discharge Tubes and Fuses.
The Gas Discharge Tube is an over voltage protection device. It has three terminals. It is connected parallel to the
CO Line or the overhead station cable. The third terminal is connected to a telecom earth. When the voltage
between any of the two terminals exceeds the permissible limit (general 150V), the gas in the device begins to
conduct and the terminals with the earth terminal. Heavy voltage passes to the earth instead of entering the
system, thereby protecting the system.
The Fuses in the PPM4 are an over current protection device. Whenever the current builds up beyond the
permissible limit, (generally 100mA), the fuse opens to protect the circuit ahead.
PPM4 must be properly earthed to work well. It is recommended that PPM4 be connected to a separate telecom
earth (ground).
Telecom earth is a dedicated earth (ground) only for the PBX. A dedicated earth greatly reduces the risk of back
voltage.
Installing PPM4
Refer the block diagram above for the location of the PPM4.
1. Unpack the PPM and check the package contents.
2. Select an appropriate location for the PPM4. Refer the block diagram above when deciding where to place
the PPM4. Also, take into consideration the length of the cables of the PPM4.
3. Use the Mounting Template supplied with the PPM4 to drill holes on the wall to fix the PPM in the selected
location. Fix the screws supplied with the PPM4 into the drilled holes, with their heads protruding from the
wall.
38 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
4. You may mount the PPM4 first and connect the cables OR you may connect the cables first and then
mount the PPM4.
5. To connect cables, press the snap fits on both sides of the PPM4 to release the cover. Remove the cover.
6. Connect the Earth wire (green wire) to the Telecom Earth.
7. Now connect the TWT Trunk wires from the CO side into the PPM4 port connectors marked as P1, P2, P3
and P4.
8. To do so, strip off about half a centimeter of the insulation of the wire ends of the first pair of TWT Trunk
you want to connect to the PPM4.
9. Push back the (orange-color) levers of the connector of port P1, using a blunt pin or a small flat screw
driver or your thumbnail.
10. Insert the stripped ends of the two wires into the two (green-color) openings of the connector, with one wire
in each opening.
11. Release pressure on the levers. Both wires will be held in place by spring clamp action.
To remove the wires,
• push back the levers.
• pull out the wires gently.
• release pressure on the levers.
12. Now, repeat the above steps to connect the other TWT Trunk wires from the CO side into the connectors of
the ports P2, P3, and P4.
13. Now, terminate the wire pairs emerging from the PPM4 multi-pair cable into the 'Trunk Lines' side of the
MDF using the punch tool for Krone Modules.
Refer the following table for connection details of the wires:
PPM4 Port Color
P1 Blue and White
P2 Orange and White
P3 Green and White
P4 Brown and White
14. Replace the cover of the PPM4 by pressing back the snap fits on both sides.
15. Mount the PPM, if not done already.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 39
Protecting ETERNITY and Yourself
The ETERNITY is an electronic device. When you handle any electrical or electronic equipment, you are in a
situation that could cause you bodily harm, besides damage to the product. When handling any electronic
equipment, you must be aware of the safety hazards involved in electrical circuitry and the standard practices for
accident prevention.
When using any telephone equipment, take every safety precaution to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and
injury to persons. Read and understand the precautions, dos and don'ts of handling this product listed below.
These instructions are by no means exhaustive. So, take all the necessary precautions for handling electronic and
electrical appliances. Your safety and that of the others lies in your hands.
Location
• Do not place this product in any of the following locations:
• near a water source like a wash bowl, kitchen sink, laundry tub, near a swimming pool, or in a wet
basement.
• In places where dust, oil, corrosive fumes may come in contact with the system.
• Any area where it is exposed to direct sunlight, heat, excessive cold or humidity.
• On moveable or unstable surfaces, which may cause the product to fall and get damaged.
• Any area where shocks or vibration are frequent or strong.
• Near High-Frequency generating devices such as Electric Welder, Sewing Machine or and Microwave
Oven.
• Do not leave cables exposed on the ground where they may be trampled upon, or get damaged by
entangling with feet or pressure from other heavy objects.
Power Supply
• This product should be operated with proper supply voltage. If you are not sure about supply voltage,
contact authorized dealer.
• The ETERNITY does not work in isolation from the environment. Power is fed to the system for functioning
of the system. Being a PBX system, it has several interfaces like trunk lines and extensions, external
music, Public Address System, Printer interface, PC interface, etc. So there are chances of heavy voltages
entering the system through these interfaces. Also, static charges could find their way through the system
components.
Protect the system from heavy voltages from the mains
• The ETERNITY ME, GE and PE are designed to work with input voltages ranging between 100-240VAC.
The ETERNITY ME, GE and PE Power Cards have a 'switch mode' design to support such a wide range of
operating voltage.
40 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Protect the system from heavy voltages on the trunk lines and the
overhead stations
• The ETERNITY may be damaged by heavy voltages entering the system from trunk lines or from overhead
stations. These heavy voltages may enter the trunk lines and from overhead stations due to:
• Heavy voltage line falling on the CO line or on the overhead stations cable. A dangerous surge can
occur if a telephone line comes in contact with a power line.
• Lightning/Thunderbolts.
• To protect ETERNITY from these voltages, use Primary Protection/Surge Protectors on the trunk and long
distance extension lines to protect the system from lightning and electrical surges.
• Install any standard Input Protection (punch down protection) on the Krone Modules of the MDF or the
“Primary Protection Module - PPM4” supplied by Matrix at entry points for all CO trunks lines and all
overhead stations. The product Warranty does not cover damages resulting from heavy voltage on CO
lines and overhead stations!
• It is recommended that you install the PPM on the MDF, as MDF cables from the CO are terminated on the
System MDF.
Protect the system from Lightning
• To protect ETERNITY from extremely high voltage currents associated with lightning strikes, install a
lightning protector on an outside (CO) line.
Protect the system from static charges
• Every person carries some static charge in his/her body depending upon body composition and the
environment around them. Most of the times, this charge finds its way to the earth when the person
touches any object which is grounded, or when the person is barefoot.
• Generally, persons installing or handling electronic and electrical equipment take precaution to wear
appropriate footwear to get protection from electric shocks. Doing so, the static charge accumulates in his/
her body and does not find its way to the ground. But when such a person touches any of the electronic
cards, the static charge finds its way through the electronic components thereby causing damage to the
cards.
• So, the person installing or servicing the system must provide a path to the static charges, by wearing an
antistatic belt, which is properly earthed.
Protect the system from heavy voltage on the communication cable
• The Communication Port (COM Port) is provided on the ETERNITY for connecting a PC.
• If an electrical wire carrying heavy voltage accidentally shorts with this cable, heavy voltages can damage
the communication port.
• It is recommended that the communication cable (connecting ETERNITY and the PC) be run through the
conduit carrying telephone cables or through a separate conduit.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 41
Protecting the system from heavy voltage on the Analog Input Port
The Analog Input Port of the ETERNITY should be protected from:
• Heavy voltages on the cable connecting the system and the external music source due to shorting with any
electrical wire.
• An audio signal, not complying with the specifications of this port, is fed to this port.
• Refer the technical specifications of the AIP before connecting any external music device to it.
Protecting the system from heavy voltage on the Analog Output Port
The Analog Output Port of the ETERNITY should be protected from:
• Heavy voltages on the cable connecting the system and the amplifier/speaker due to shorting with any
electrical wire.
Protecting the system from heavy voltage on the Digital Output Port
The Digital Output Port (DOP) of the system should be protected from:
• Heavy voltages on the cable connecting the system and the device connected to the DOP.
Protecting the system from heavy voltage on the Digital Input Port
The Digital Input Port (DIP) of the system should be protected from:
• Heavy voltages on the cable connecting the system and the sensor device or panic switch connected to
the DIP.
Protecting the system from heavy voltage on the printer cable
The ETERNITY ME provides a printer port to which a printer can be connected. The printer port should be
protected from heavy voltages on the cable connecting the printer with the system due to shorting with any
electrical wire. To prevent this,
• Check the supply to the printer.
• Ensure that the printer is properly earthed.
• Also, check the printer cable for any short or open.
Telecom Earth (Ground)
• The Earth (Ground) is the most important safety procedure to prevent electrical shocks and fires. It
protects from lightning strikes, electrical transients, static discharges, electromagnetic interference and
electrical hazards.
42 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Ensure that a proper electrical earth and a telecom earth are in place for the safety of people and the
system. Telecom earth is a dedicated earth for the PBX/any other telecom equipment.
• Provide a separate Telecom Earth (Ground) to the system installation. Providing a separate earth to the
telecom equipment eliminates the possibility of any back-voltage on the earth.
• Refer “How to Make the Telecom Earth” for instructions on making the perfect earth (ground).
Shock and Fire Hazard
• Always wear a properly earthed, electrostatic discharge preventive wrist strap/belt while handling the
system and its cards to prevent damage to the system and harm to yourself.
• Do not open the system in power On condition.
• Slots and openings in the cabinet and the back or bottom are provided for ventilation, to protect the system
from overheating. These openings must not be blocked or covered.
• Never insert or push objects of any kind into this product through the cabinet slots as they may touch
dangerous voltage points or short out parts which may result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this product where the cord will be trampled
upon or get entangled.
• This product is equipped with a plug having a third (ground) pin, which fits only into a grounding-type
outlet. This is a safety feature. So, if the existing outlet is not a three-pin and or if you are unable to insert
the plug into the outlet, have the outlet replaced by the electrician.
• Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in the risk of fire or electric shock.
• Do not disassemble this product. Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or
other risks. Incorrect reassembly may cause electric shock when the appliance is used. Take the product
to a qualified technician when service or repair work is required.
• Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during a storm, to prevent electric shock from
lightning.
• Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak so as to prevent the risk of fire.
External Devices
• When you connect external devices like headset, external music source (PC, Cassette Player, CD Player),
relay devices (door lock, door lock release), sensors, public address or paging devices, telephone
instruments, cables, connectors, etc., ensure that they are of standard make and good quality, so that the
functioning of the system is not affected.
• Matrix does not guarantee the performance of external devices that are not supplied by it.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 43
Cleaning and maintenance
• Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning.
• Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product.
• Use a dry cloth for cleaning.
Service and Repair
• Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to a qualified service person under the following
conditions:
• When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed.
• If liquid has been spilled into the product.
• If the product has been exposed to rain or water.
• If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.
• If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance.
Disposal
• This product must be disposed according to the national laws and regulations prevailing in the country
where it is installed.
Warning for RF Safety:
The product complies with RF exposure guidelines as per standard FCC 47 CFR part 2. However, please observe
the following precautions.
• Make sure that the RF Antenna is installed at least 20 cm away from other electronic and radio
transmission devices.
• Make sure that the RF Antenna is installed at a place at 20 cm away from people's vicinity.
• Do not place magnetic storage media near the product.
• People carrying medical implants like cardiac pacemakers are advised to maintain appropriate distance
from the system. They are also advised to avoid being in the vicinity of the product for a long time.
44 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
CHAPTER 4 Installing ETERNITY ME
• The Matrix ETERNITY is to be installed by persons trained and experienced in telecom wiring.
• The person installing the ETERNITY must be familiar with trunks, physical wiring of the MDF on both
the exchange (PBX) side and the line side (CO).
• When installing any equipment, make sure that you take all the necessary precautions for handling
electronic and electrical appliances. Follow proper procedures for static electricity, while handling the
system and its cards to prevent damage to the system and harm to yourself.
• Use a grounding mat and wear an anti-static strap/belt. Read the dos and don'ts listed in '“Protecting
ETERNITY and Yourself”.
• If you have complied with the requirements and instructions described in “Before You Start”, you may
now begin the installation of your ETERNITY ME.
The Matrix ETERNITY ME is shipped factory fitted with the Power supply card, the Master and Switch Card in their
respective fixed slots (refer the section “Know Your ETERNITY”).
The cards - BRI, T1E1PRI, GSM, VoIP, DKP, TWT, SLT, VMS, E&M, Magneto - are shipped separately as per the
order placed by individual customers. These cards can be installed in any of the Universal slots.
Illustrated below is the position of the fixed and universal slots in each variant of ETERNITY ME.
ETERNITY ME16S
In the ETERNITY ME16S, the extreme left slot is reserved for the Power Supply card, the extreme right is reserved
for the Master card, and the second last slot is reserved for the Switch Card. The slots between these fixed slots
are the 16 universal slots to fit the other cards.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 45
ETERNITY ME10S
In the ETERNITY ME10S, the first three slots from extreme left slot are reserved for the Power Supply card, the
Master Card and the Switch Card respectively. The remaining slots are the 10 universal slots.
ETERNITY ME10SR (with Redundancy Option)
The ETERNITY ME10SR, which offers the redundancy option, has the same organization of the fixed and universal
slots as the ME10S variant, starting with the Power Supply Card on the extreme left. Only, the number of slots
exceeds on account of the second Power Supply Card, Master Card, and Switch Card, provided in this variant to
support the Redundancy feature.
Follow the installation instructions for cards described here, also when you expand the system (add more cards) or
remove or swap cards for maintenance and repair.
1. Unpack the box. Check the package contents (see “Packing List”). Contact your Dealer/Distributor if any of
the items is missing, faulty or damaged. Do not discard the packaging material.
46 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Mounting the System
2. Decide where to mount the ETERNITY - on a table or wall - taking into consideration the mechanical
dimensions and weight of the model you have. If mounting the system on a wall, you may refer the
mechanical dimensions and the Mounting Template for drilling holes at appropriate places on the wall.
3. When installing the system in a rack, allow adequate space between the system and other units for air
circulation.
4. Mount the system at the selected site. Make sure that the system is place such that you have full access to
the front and back panels. The holes in the panels are provided for ventilation; Make sure that these are
not blocked, to prevent overheating.
Connecting Input Power Supply
5. Ensure that a proper electrical earth and telecom earth are in place.
6. Check the voltage at the power point from where the supply is to be given to the system. It should be as
per the specifications. Earth the system properly. (Refer “How to Make the Telecom Earth”)
Inserting Cards
7. Make sure that the ETERNITY power is off and the power cord is unplugged.
8. Open the enclosure slot covers by pressing down the snap lugs.
9. Select a free slot from the universal slots.
10. Unscrew and remove the filler bracket that covers the card-slot opening of the slot you intend to use.
11. Hold the card with the connectors facing you. Do not grab the card from both ends.
12. Slide the card into the slot, along the guide rails provided for each slot at the top and bottom planes.
13. Ensure that the cards are inserted deep enough for all the connector pins on the cards make complete
contact with those of the motherboard on the backplane.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 47
Do not force the card into the slot. Doing so can damage the card or the slot connector.
14. When the card is firmly seated in the connector, push down the levers on the card mounting bracket and
secure the card with the screw provided.
15. Tighten the screws on either side of the bracket.
16. Following the above steps, install each card into the universal slots.
Detailed installing instructions are provided for each card - Power Supply Card, Switch Card, DKP, SLT,
TWT, ISDN BRI, ISDN T1E1PRI, GSM, VoIP, E&M, etc. - later in this section. Refer to them when installing
each card type.
17. To remove a card:
• Switch off power supply, unplug the power cord.
• Disconnect any cables connected to the card.
• Remove the screws from the card-mounting bracket.
• Lift the levers on the mounting bracket to release the card.
• The card will emerge out of the slot.
• Grasp the card by its mounting bracket, and ease it out of its slot.
• If you are removing the card permanently or for a certain period of time, install a filler bracket over the
empty card opening in the chassis.
• Installing filler brackets over empty card-slot openings is necessary to protect the system from dust,
dirt, insects and damage.
18. Connect the cables supplied with the cards and lead the cables through the cable guides provided below
the slots in the enclosure. This will ensure neat and tangle-free cabling.
48 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The cables are bunched together (four cables in a single bunch), but each cable is identified by a distinct
color marked at the Boot edge and the Insulation edge of the cable.
The color markings make it easy to identify the connector and the ports to which the cable is connected.
19. After you have completed inserting and connecting the cards, power ON the system and observe the
Reset cycle and the LED pattern of each card, where applicable.
20. Close the enclosure cover, pressing down the snap lug as you push each part of the cover in its place.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 49
The Power Supply Card
Two types of Power Supply Cards are supported by the Matrix ETERNITY ME models: PS UNI Card and PS48V
Card.
• PS UNI Card with 100-240VAC, 47-63Hz Mains as Input AC Voltage Power Supply.
This card is designed on the SMPS scheme. As this card does not have any provision for battery backup,
it is recommended that a UPS be connected to keep the system powered during outages.
This card has four LEDs, a Mains Switch, and a Socket assembly for connecting the mains cord.
• PS48V Card with 48VDC as Input DC Power Supply Voltage. A Float cum Boost Charger (FCBC) is
required to feed 48VDC power to the card. The FCBC works on input AC mains.
The card has four LEDs, an MCB Switch, a power ON/OFF Switch, and a 3-way termination block for
connecting the power cord.
Both, the PS UNI card and the PS48V Card provide DC output voltages as: +3.5V, +5.0V, -27V and -85V.
These are indicated by LEDs.
• The ETERNITY provides Redundancy option for the Power Supply card only in the ETERNITY ME10S
variant and for the PS48V card only.
• The ETERNITY ME10S model supports two PS48V power supply cards. Whenever there is a fault in
one, the other takes over the control, providing uninterrupted communication.
• You cannot 'Hot Swap' the Power Supply Card.
• The maximum number of ports supported by the GSM, SLT and DKP Cards may vary according to the
type of Power Supply used. Refer the following table for maximum ports supported with Universal
Power (PSUNI) and DC Power Supply.
ETERNITY ME - Universal Power Supply (PSUNI)
Type of Port Maximum Number of Ports Supported
GSM 32 ports in Talk mode
SLT 128 ports in Talk mode for short loop
10 extensions in Talk mode for long loop
320 extensions permanently connected
DKP 96 ports maximum
Analog SLT ports supported for Short Loop with Loop Current programmed
Loop Current Programmed 20mA 25mA 30mA 35mA 40mA
Number of ports supported in talk mode (OFF-Hook short loop) 250 200 172 150 128
according to loop current programmed
50 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
ETERNITY ME DC to DC 400W Power Supply
Type of Port Maximum Number of Ports Supported
GSM 112 ports in Talk mode
SLT 256 ports in Talk mode for short loop
20 extensions talk mode for long loop
512 extensions permanently connected
DKP 128 ports
Installing the Power Supply Card
The Power Supply Card is located in a fixed slot. No other card can be inserted in this slot.
The Power Supply Card is delivered factory fitted, when you buy the system. However, if you want to remove the
card for the purpose of maintenance or replace it with a new one, please follow the instructions below:
1. Unpack the Power Supply Card and verify the package contents.
If already installed, switch OFF power supply, unplug the power cord. Remove the screws securing the
card. Lift the levers on the mounting bracket to release the card. As the card emerges from the slot, ease it
out of the slot.
2. Insert the Power Supply card into the guide rails of the first slot on the extreme left, designated for the
Power Supply Card. Make sure that the card is inserted deep enough to make perfect contact with the
connectors on the motherboard at the backplane.
3. Now, press down the levers on the card mounting bracket to secure the card in its slot.
4. Secure the card in the slot by screwing the bracket on both ends.
To install a second PS48V card on the ETERNITY ME10S for redundancy, insert the second card on the
next slot. Also refer the topic “Hardware Overview” in Know Your ETERNITY.
5. If installing the PSUNI card, connect the three-pin power cord into the socket of the PS UNI card and plug
in the cord into the mains supply.
You may connect the PSUNI Card to a UPS to keep the system live during power outages.
Select a UPS considering the typical power consumption of ETERNITY presented in the table below:
Power Consumption
Model
(Typical)
ETERNITY ME10S 70 watts
ETERNITY ME16S 100 watts
6. If installing the PS48V card, connect the Float cum Boost Charger (FCBC). Terminate the power cord from
the FCBC output into the 3-way termination block on the PS48V card.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 51
Polarity is critical. Ensure that the wires are connected with the correct polarity. Follow the standard color
codes used by FCBC manufacturers:
Color Signal
Red +48VDC
Black GND
Green Earth
It is recommended that you measure the voltage before connecting the power cable to the power supply
card. Ensure that the earth is connected.
Connecting an FCBC to the ETERNITY ME
-85VDC (LED L1)
230VAC +/- FCBC ETERNITY ME -27VDC (LED L2)
41 to 56V
10%@50Hz 10A Card PS48VDC +5VDC (LED L3)
+3.5VDC (LED L4)
48V Battery
If two PS48V cards are installed for redundancy (possible in ETERNITY ME10S only), each must be
connected to a separate FCBC and each FCBC must be connected to a separate source of power supply.
7. Connect Battery back up to the FCBC12.
12. When the batteries are drained, the FCBC goes into the boost mode and begins to charge the batteries at higher current. When
the batteries reach a preset voltage level (typically set to 56.0 volts), the FCBC goes to float mode. In the float mode the FCBC
keeps charging the battery but at lower current. The FCBC monitors the voltage level of the batteries. As soon as the battery volt-
age goes below preset voltage (typically set to 50.4 volts), FCBC goes from float mode to boost mode. The change over from
mains to battery and vice-versa is automatic. The advantage of using an FCBC is that batteries get charged faster, since the bat-
teries are charged with higher current initially.
52 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Battery backup time depends upon the total load. The total load is the sum of system's load and load of
active stations. The power consumed by the variants of ETERNITY ME is given in the table below:
Model Power Consumption (Typical)
ETERNITY ME10S 70 watts
ETERNITY ME16S 100 watts
The Battery back up time depends on the 'Ah' rating of the battery connected to the FCBC. If 48V/26Ah
batteries are connected to the FCBC for the ETERNITY ME 10S system then backup time of 2.5 to 3 hrs
can be ensured. The FCBC uses the constant voltage charging method. So, the batteries get charged
faster if less power is consumed by the system when in mains mode.
8. Switch on power supply, after completing all other installation.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 53
The Master Card
As the main card in the ETERNITY ME, the Master card manages the entire system. Equipped with a primary and
a secondary controller (also called the Communication Manager), the Master card controls all the slave cards of the
ETERNITY ME: the Switch card, DKP card, SLT card, TWT+SLT card, E&M card, ISDN T1E1PRI card, ISDN BRI
card, VMS card, etc. All the configuration information is stored on this card.
The Master Card occupies a fixed slot in the ETERNITY ME. As the slot designated for the Master Card has a
unique arrangement of connectors, no other card can be inserted into this slot.
The Master card is equipped two Communication Ports, a Digital Input Port, a Digital Output Port, Ethernet Port, a
Printer Port, and three dual color LEDs, on the front panel. Each of these is described briefly below.
Communication Ports
There are two asynchronous, serial, full-duplex RS-232C Communication (COM) Ports, labeled as COM1 and
COM2. The COM Ports have two identical DB-9 connectors.
The COM port allows you to connect a PC to the ETERNITY, so that you can install and operate the following
features:
• Property Management Software (PMS)
• Call Accounting Software (CAS)
• Downloading Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Reports
• Downloading System Activity, System Fault Log, etc.
• Hotel Reports
Use crossed cable to connect the ETERNITY ME with a computer.
13
Master Ethernet Port
The Ethernet Port on the fascia of the Master Card is provided to connect ETERNITY to a PC or a LAN to operate
the web-based configuration software Jeeves and the Property Management Software (PMS) for Hotel Application.
A cable with a standard RJ45 connector is provided for the Master Ethernet Port.
Printer Port
The Printer port, labeled PRN, on the Master Card is an industry standard Centronics port with a DB-25 female
connector. You can connect any standard printer. The system sends data in the pure ASCII format. No special
characters or control sequences are sent.
Digital Input Port
The Master Card of the ETERNITY ME has a Digital Input Port, to which an emergency/ a panic switch or a sensor
- smoke detector, glass break sensor - can be connected. The device that you connect to this port must comply with
the technical specifications of the DIP port.
Refer the topic “Digital Input Port (DIP)” to know more.
13. The Ethernet port is supported on Master Cards with PCB version V3R0 onwards.
54 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Digital Output Port
The Digital Output Port (DOP) on the Master Card of the ETERNITY ME allows you to connect and operate
automated control applications such as: a hooter, a siren, a door lock, a fire alarm, a bell, a water pump, and
several types of illuminations (office, terrace, porch lights and signboards).
Ensure that the devices connected to the DOP comply with the technical specifications. Refer the topic “Digital
Output Port (DOP)” to know more.
Ports and Connectors of the Master Card at a Glance
Port Name Connector Location Function
Printer DB-25 female Fascia To connect a printer to the ETERNITY
Communication DB-9 female Fascia To connect a PC (to run various software, download
(COM Port) system activity reports).
Communication DB-9 female Fascia To connect a PC (to run various software, download
(COM Port) system activity reports).
Ethernet Port RJ45 Fascia To connect ETERNITY to a PC/LAN (to run the
configuration tool, Jeeves, and Property
Management Software).
Digital Input Loop Sensing-Open/ Fascia To connect Emergency/Panic Switch or Sensor.
Port Close, 5mA, Push-type
Connector.
Digital Output VDC Max.=60VDC, IDC Fascia To connect automated application devices: hooter,
Port Max.=0.15A, Push-type siren, door lock, fire alarm, bell, water pump, lights.
Connector.
LEDs
The three LEDs located on the Master Card indicate the health of the card during the reset cycle and the health of
the system during its normal functioning. The LED pattern of the Master card is summarized in the table below.
Stage L1 L2 L3
During initialization process ORANGE ON ORANGE ON ORANGE ON
After initialization process OFF OFF OFF
In normal condition GREEN Toggle OFF OFF
In stand-by RED Toggle OFF OFF
Jumpers
Jumper J9 on the Master Card is used to Reset the SE Password. Refer the table below:
Jumper Number Position Function
J8 AB (default) External Boot
BC Internal Boot
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 55
Jumper Number Position Function
J9 AB Reset SE Password.
BC (default) Normal.
AB (default) Embedded ICE
J10
BC JTAG Mode
AB (default) Enable: Tx debug from COM Port2 (debug/1st boot)
J12
BC Disable: Tx debug
AB (default) Enable: Rx debug from COM Port2 (debug/1st boot)
J13
Disable: Rx debug
Do not change the position of Jumpers number J8, J10, J12 and J13.
Redundancy for the Master Card is supported only in the ETERNITY ME 10S model. Two Master Cards
can be installed in ETERNITY ME10S. When the active card fails, the standby card takes over control. As
the system restarts during the take over, all existing calls get disconnected. When the standby card
becomes the active card, the system re-boots automatically, restoring communication, all within a few
minutes (2-3 minutes).
Installing the Master Card
The Master Card is delivered factory fitted with the system. However, if you want to remove the card for the purpose
of maintenance or replace it with a new one, please follow the instructions below:
1. Unpack the Master Card and verify the “Packing List”.
If the card is already installed, switch off power supply, unplug the power cord. Remove the screws
securing the card. Lift the levers on the mounting bracket to release the card. As the card emerges from
the slot, ease it out of the slot.
2. Insert the Master Card into the guide rails of the slot designated for the card.
On the ETERNITY ME10S model, the third and fourth slots from the left are fixed for the Master Card.
(Refer the slot illustrations at the beginning of this topic)
On the ETERNITY ME16S model, the last slot on the right side is designated to the Master Card. (Refer
the slot illustrations at the beginning of this topic)
Ensure that the card makes perfect contact with the connectors on the backplane of the motherboard.
Press down the levers on the mounting bracket to secure the card in its slot.
3. If installing a second Master Card on the ETERNITY ME10S for redundancy, insert the second card on the
fourth slot from the left, next to the first Master Card.
4. You can connect the following external devices to the appropriate ports on the ETERNITY Master Card:
• A Printer to the “Printer Port”.
• A Door Lock, a hooter, a siren, and other such gadgets to the “Digital Output Port (DOP)”.
56 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• A sensor device, like a smoke detector, a glass break detector, a break-in detector, etc. to the “Digital
Input Port (DIP)”.
• A PC to the Communication Port.
• A PC/LAN Switch to the Ethernet Port
Connecting a Printer
5. You can connect any standard printer to the Printer Port (25-pin connector).
Connecting a Sensor device to the Digital Input Port (DIP)
6. Refer the technical specifications of the DIP and select a compatible device. The DIP has a two-wire,
push-in (spring clamp action) connector to attach the sensor device.
Technical Specifications of the DIP
Type Loop Open/Loop Close Sensing
Minimum Required Loop (open/close) Sensing Current 1 mA
Maximum Permissible Loop (open/close) Sensing Current 7 mA
Use 0.5mm, non-stranded cables to connect the sensor device to the DIP.
To connect the sensor device to the DIP,
• strip off about half a centimeter of the insulation off the wire ends of the sensor device.
• using a blunt pin or a small flat screw driver, push back the (orange-color) levers of the connector.
• insert the stripped ends of the two wires into the two (green-color) openings of the connector, with one
wire in each opening.
• ensure that both wires fit neatly into the opening.
• release pressure on the levers. Both wires will be held in place by spring clamp action.
To remove the wires,
• push back the levers.
• pull out the wires gently.
• release pressure on the levers.
If you are using ETERNITY ME10S with Redundancy Option, connect the DIP on the Active and the
Standby Master Cards as illustrated below.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 57
Connecting a Gadget to the Digital Output Port (DOP)
7. Refer the technical specifications of the DOP and select a compatible device.
A DC contactor (60VDC max.) can be connected to the DOP. Any external relay based device can be
interfaced with the DOP via this DC contactor.
The DOP has a two-wire, push-in (spring clamp action) connector to attach the relay device.
Use 0.5mm, non-stranded cables to connect the gadget to the DOP.
Technical Specifications of the DOP
Relay Type Solid State (CMOS) Relay
Contact Arrangement 1 Normally Open, 1-Form-A
Contact Rating (Resistive Load) 60VDC Max. @ 0.15 Amp
Operation Time 5 ms
To connect the device to the DOP,
• strip off about half a centimeter of the insulation off the wire ends of the gadget.
• using a blunt pin or a small flat screw driver, push back the (orange-color) levers of the connector.
• insert the stripped ends of the two wires into the two (green-color) openings of the connector, with one
wire in each opening.
• ensure that both wires fit snugly into the openings.
• release pressure on the levers. Both wires will be held in place by spring clamp action.
To remove the wires,
• push back the levers.
• pull out the wires gently.
• release pressure on the levers.
If you are using ETERNITY ME10S with Redundancy Option, connect the DOP on the Active and the
Standby Master Cards as illustrated below.
58 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Connecting to the Local Area Network
8. Connect the Ethernet port of the ETERNITY ME with the LAN switch using the RJ45 Ethernet cable
supplied with the system.
The Ethernet Port is located on the Master Card on ETERNITY ME. With the ETERNITY connected to a
LAN, you can:
• access the web-based configuration tool Jeeves from any PC on the LAN.
• set up and run software applications such as PMS and CAS on any PC on the LAN.
• generate Station Message Detail Record (SMDR) Reports on any PC on the LAN.
Connect the ETERNITY to a Standalone PC
There are two ways to do it, depending on the type application you are going to use:
There are two ways to do it, depending on the type of application you are going to use:
9. Connect the Ethernet Port of ETERNITY with the Ethernet Port of the stand-alone PC using the Ethernet
cable supplied with ETERNITY.
You need to connect to the PC via the Ethernet port for the following functions:
• To use the web-based programming Tool Jeeves
• To configure ETERNITY using FTP
• To take debug/report on Syslog
• To capture “Station Message Detail Recording-Report”, “Station Message Detail Recording-Online”
and “Station Message Detail Recording-Posting”.
• To capture “System Activity Log” and “System Fault Log”, Hotel Motel Activity Log
• To run PMS Interface or CAS Interface in the Hotel Application14.
10. Connect the Communication Port of ETERNITY with the Communication Port of the stand-alone PC using
any standard Communication Cable.
14. Refer the ETERNITY Hospitality System Manual to know more.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 59
You need to connect to the PC via the COM Port for the following functions:
• To run a PMS/CAS Interface.
• To capture “Station Message Detail Recording-Report”, “Station Message Detail Recording-Online”
and “Station Message Detail Recording-Posting”.
• To capture “System Activity Log” and “System Fault Log”, Hotel Motel Activity Log
• To run PMS Interface or CAS Interface in the Hotel Application15,
• To program the system using Hyper Terminal.
When you connect the ETERNITY ME to a standalone/LAN PC, you need to make sure that
• The IP Address of the Master Ethernet Port of the ETERNITY ME and the Ethernet Port of the PC do
not conflict, are not the same.
• The Master Ethernet Port of ETERNITY ME and the Ethernet Port of the PC are in the same Subnet.
Changing IP Address and Subnet Mask of the Master Ethernet Port
The default IP Address of the Master Ethernet Port of the ETERNITY ME is 192.168.1.101 and the Subnet Mask is
255.255.255.0
11. Ascertain the IP Address and Subnet of the standalone PC.
If the system is connected to a LAN PC, ask the LAN Administrator to assign an IP Address and a Subnet
Mask to the ETERNITY ME16.
12. Switch ON the system.
13. Change the IP Address and the Subnet Mask of the Master Ethernet Port by dialing the following
commands from a station of the ETERNITY ME.
• Dial 1#91-1234 (to enter programming mode. 1234 is the default SE Password)
• You get programming tone.
Dial 1#91-1234 (to enter programming mode. 1234 is the default SE Password)
You get programming tone.
To change IP Address
• Dial 2110-IP Address
• For example: to change the IP Address to 192.168.50.10 dial 2110-192168050010.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Dial 2111-Subnet Mask
• For example: to change the Subnet Mask to 255.255.255.0 dial 2111-255255255000
• You get confirmation tone.
• Dial 00 to exit from the programming mode.
15. Refer the ETERNITY Hospitality System Manual to know more.
16. This will not be necessary, if there is a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server on the LAN.
60 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Switch off power supply and continue with other installation tasks. If you have completed all installation
tasks, start the system and observe the Reset Cycle.
If you have Redundancy option in the Master Card on your ETERNITY ME10S, all configuration settings
must be updated on both the Master Cards by the System Engineer via Jeeves, so that when the standby
card takes over, the system will function with the same configuration settings as the first card. Thus
ensuring smooth take over by the redundant (second) card.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 61
The Switch Card
The Switch Card supports the Master Card in performing the functions of speech and data connections, Call
Progress Tone Generation (dial tone, ring back tone, busy tone, etc.), and music generation.
The Switch Card too occupies a fixed slot with a unique arrangement of connectors, so that no other card can be
inserted in this slot.
In the ETERNITY ME16S model, the Switch Card slot is the second last slot on the right. In the ETERNITY ME10S
model, the fifth slot is reserved for the Switch Card. (Refer the slot illustration at the beginning of this topic)
The card has an Analog Input Port, an Analog Output Port, four Digital Key Phone (DKP) ports. All these ports are
connected via a single Amphenol connector (24-Way, 10-Pair) and an MDF cable is supplied with the card.
The two LEDs on the Switch Card to indicate the health of the card during the reset cycle and the status of the DKP
ports during normal functioning of the system.
Analog Input Port (AIP)
The Analog Input Port (AIP) is meant for connecting an external music source. The AIP can handle un-amplified,
isolated, analog speech signals from an external music source, which may be any audio output from a PC, a CD
player, a Cassette Player, etc.
Music from the external source can be played as Music-on-Hold to internal as well as external callers. Refer the
topics “Background Music (BGM)” and “Music on Hold (MOH)”.
Ensure that the external music source you connect to the AIP complies with its technical specifications.
Analog Output Port (AOP)
The Analog Output Port (AOP) on the Switch card provides un-amplified, isolated, analog speech signal, which can
be amplified by an external amplifier connected to it. A Public Address System (PAS) can be connected to the AOP
for “Paging”.
When you connect an external paging device to the AOP, ensure that it complies with the technical specifications/
requirements of the port.
Ports and Connectors of the Switch Card at a Glance
Port Name Connector Location Description
Analog Input Port Amphenol (24 pin) 0.7Vmrs, Fascia To connect an External Music
Isolated Source
Analog Output Amphenol (24 pin) 0.7Vmrs, Fascia To connect a Public Address
Port Isolated System.
DKP Ports (1-4) Amphenol (24 pin) Fascia To connect digital key phones
• Switch Card Redundancy option is supported only in the ETERNITY ME 10S model. An additional
Switch Card can be installed for redundancy.
62 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• If the main Switch Card fails, the other card takes over. During this period, all existing calls get
disconnected and the standby card becomes active. The system reboots automatically, restoring
communication within 2-3 minutes.
• You can 'Hot Swap' the Switch Card in ETERNITY ME 10S and 16S.
• If your ME10S has Switch Card Redundancy and you have connected Digital Key Phones to the DKP
ports on the main card Switch Card, you must have the requisite wiring in place to ensure that the
digital key phones continue to work when the redundant Switch card takes control.
• Refer the following wiring diagram to install the digital key phones with the main Switch Card and the
Redundant card.
Switch Card - Master Card Firmware Version Compatibility
Notes for selecting Master card and Switch card type:
• If you are using a new Switch Card (1000 ports) of firmware version V5Rx, use a Master Card with
software version less than or equal to 'V6R10' only.
• If you are using old Switch card (512 ports) of firmware V4Rx, you can use a Master Card with any
software version. (However, in 7th slot, use the cards with configuration of less than 16 ports).
• If you are using a DSP based Switch card it is better to use the firmware version of 'V5R1' to avoid
compatibility issues with software version of Master Card in use. (If you are using firmware version of
Switch card less than 'V4Rx', the cards in the 7th and 8th slot will not work. However, in 7th slot, you
can use the cards with configuration, less than 16 ports).
For example, if you are using Switch card with software version 'V4R2', change it to 'V5R1'.
Installing the Switch Card
Like the Power Supply Cards and the Master Card, the Switch Card too is delivered factory-fitted in the system. If
you want to remove the card for the purpose of maintenance or replace it with a new one, please follow the
instructions below:
1. Unpack the Switch Card and verify the Package Contents.
If the card is already installed, switch off power supply, unplug the power cord. Remove the screws
securing the card. Lift the levers on the mounting bracket to release the card. As the card emerges from
the slot, ease it out of the slot.
2. Insert the Switch Card into the guide rails of the slot designated for the card. On the ETERNITY ME10S
model, the fifth and the sixth slots from the left are reserved for the Switch Card. On the ETERNITY
ME16S model, the second last slot on the right side is designated to the Switch Card.
Ensure that the card makes perfect contact with the connectors on the backplane of the motherboard.
Press down the levers on the mounting bracket to secure the card in its slot.
3. If installing a second Switch Card on the ETERNITY ME10S for redundancy, insert the second card on the
sixth slot from the left.
4. Use the 24 Way-10 Pair (Amphenol connector) MDF cable supplied with the Switch Card to connect the
following devices to the Switch Card:
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 63
• Digital key phones (DKP) to the DKP Port.
• An External Music Source to the “Analog Input Port (AIP)”.
• Public Address System to the “Analog Output Port (AOP)”.
Refer the illustration below for the pinout details to help you identify the ports.
Connecting Digital Key Phones
5. You can connect up to 4 Digital Key Phones (DKP) on the DKP ports provided on the Switch Card.
The cable pinout details for the DKP Ports on the Switch Card are shown in the above figure.
Terminate the free end of the wires of the DKP Ports into the Main Distribution Frame. Crimping each wire
into the punch down block of the Krone module. Also, refer “The Main Distribution Frame (MDF)”,
“Installing Digital Key Phone Card”.
Connecting a Public Address System
6. Refer the technical specifications of the Analog Output Port and select a compatible Public Address
System (PAS) device.
Connect a good quality external amplifier and matching speakers to the port
Technical Specifications of the AOP
Specification Value
Interface Type Audio Signal
Frequency 300Hz to 3400Hz
64 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Specification Value
Maximum Voltage 0.707Vrms across 600
To connect the amplifier and speakers,
• strip off about half a centimeter the wire-pair of the amplifier.
• join the stripped end of the amplifier wires with the free end of the wires of the Analog Output Port - the
Blue-Red wire pair - in the Switch Card cable.
• Connect speakers with the output of the Amplifier.
Use shielded cable for connecting the amplifier with the speakers.
Also refer the topic External Paging under “Paging”.
Connecting an External Music Source
7. Refer the technical specifications of the Analog Input Port and select a compatible external music source -
Tape Recorder, FM Radio, CD Player, etc.
Analog Input Port Technical Specifications
Specification Value
Interface Type Audio Signal
Frequency 300Hz to 3400Hz
Maximum Voltage 0.707Vrms across 600
DC Bias Not more than 10V DC
Isolation Internal Transformer
Source Impedance required 600
Termination provided 600
To connect the music source,
• strip off about half a centimeter of insulation of the wire-pair of the external music device.
• join the stripped ends of the device wires with the free end of the wires of the Analog Input Port - the Grey-
White wire pair - emerging from the Switch Card cable.
Also refer the topics “Background Music (BGM)”, “Music on Hold (MOH)”, “External Music”.
The volume of the external music source must be set to a level such that the music on the trunks is neither
very low nor very high. The volume of the signal coming from this device must never increase beyond the
specified limits - 0.707Vrms across 600.
Do not apply electrical signal of higher volume than the specified limit to this port, as it may cause
permanent damage to the system. Matrix Warranty does not cover damages resulting from improper use.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 65
8. If you have finished all installation tasks, switch on power supply and observe the Reset Cycle and the
LED pattern of the Switch Card.
LED Pattern of the Switch Card
The Switch Card has two LEDs - L1 and L2.
• L1 is used for monitoring the status of the four DKP ports.
• L2 is used for monitoring the status of the Switch Card.
LED1 (L1) Pattern: DKP Port Status
PORT Status Color Cadence
DKP FSM is not Active. RED 1 sec ON - 1 sec OFF
Command from Application to DKP Port. GREEN Togglea
Event to Application from DKP Port RED
a. The current LED state will remain the same until the next command is received
from the application on the DKP Port. For example, if the current LED state is
Green/Red ON, on the next command received, the LED will be turned OFF. It
will remain OFF until the next command is received. When the next command is
received it will be turned Green/Red ON again. This process continues.
LED2 (L2) Pattern: Switch Card Status
PORT Status Color Cadence
Switch Card is stand-by RED 1 sec ON - 1 sec OFF
Switch Card is active (up but idle) GREEN Continuous ON
Command from Application to Switch Card GREEN Togglea
Event to Application from Switch Card RED
a. The current LED state will remain the same until the next command is received from
the application on the DKP Port. For example, if the current LED state is Green/Red
ON, on the next command received, the LED will be turned OFF. It will remain OFF
until the next command is received. When the next command is received it will be
turned Green/Red ON again. This process continues.
66 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The Single Line Telephone Card
The Single Line Telephone (SLT) Card provides the interface to connect as extension phones, any standard, two-
wire, analog single line telephone instrument - rotary, pulse-tone, cordless, feature phones with or without Calling
Line Identification.
The SLT Card is available in the following configurations for the variants of ETERNITY ME. SLT interface also is
available in combination with TWT Trunks on a single card.
SLT Cards for ETERNITY ME
Card Name Configuration and Application
ETERNITY ME Card SLT32 32-port card to connect 32 Single Line Telephones
ETERNITY ME Card SLT16 16-port card to connect 16 Single Line Telephones
ETERNITY ME Card SLT8 8-port card to connect 8 Single Line Telephones
ETERNITY ME Card Combination card, with 8-ports to connect to 8 Two-wire Analog trunk lines and
TWT8+SLT24 24 Single Line Telephones
ETERNITY ME Card SLT8- Combination card, with 8-ports to connect to 8 Single Line Telephones and 8
MAGNETO8 Magneto Telephones (with Port Swapping)
Choose an SLT Card with the configuration that meets your requirement for SLT ports. Also consider the maximum
SLT Port capacity of the system you are installing. The maximum number of SLT ports supported by the variants of
ETERNITY ME are:
• 320 SLT Ports in ETERNITY ME10S
• 512 SLT Ports in ETERNITY ME16S
Connectors
The SLT Cards have RJ45 connectors, with each connector having 4 SLT ports. A multi-pair, MDF cable is supplied
for each connector.
LEDs
The SLT cards for ETERNITY ME models have a single, tri-color LED to indicate:
• the health of the card during the Reset Cycle.
• the status of any one of the station ports during normal functioning of the system.
You may monitor any of the SLT Station ports by assigning the LED to that port17.
17. To do this, enter SE mode, and dial the SE Command 7902-Slot-LED Number-Port, where Slot is the number of the universal slot
in which the card is installed and Port is the port on the card to which the LED is to be assigned to monitor its functioning. LED
Number is the number of the LED on the card, which will monitor the port.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 67
Installing Single Line Telephones
To be able to connect Single Line Telephones as Stations (Extensions) to your ETERNITY ME, you must install at
least one of the aforementioned SLT cards in the System.
1. Decide the number of SLT extensions required and arrange for as many telephone instruments.
You may use any standard telephone instrument like a rotary phone, a pulse-tone switchable push-button
phone, a feature phone or a cordless phone.
Use SLTs equipped with a 'Flash' key, as several of the features and facilities of the ETERNITY require
you to press Flash. If any of the SLTs you have selected does not have a Flash key, tap the Hook switch of
the phone to dial Flash.
2. Unpack the SLT card and check the package contents. Ensure that the power supply is switched off,
before you begin the installation of the card. Always wear an electrostatic discharge prevention wrist strap/
belt and use a grounding mat.
The SLT Card supports Hot Swap. So, you can insert the SLT Card while the system is switched on.
3. Unscrew and remove the filler card mount bracket of any of the free (empty) Universal Slots. Do not
discard the filler bracket! You may require it at a later stage.
4. Insert the SLT Card into the guide rails of the free slot you selected for the card.
Make sure that the connectors on the card make perfect contact with those on the motherboard on the
backplane.
5. Press down the levers on the mounting bracket to secure the card in its slot. Now, secure the mounting
bracket with the two screws provided.
If you are installing more than one SLT card, you can install the second card in any other free slot. It is not
necessary to install the second/third card in the subsequent slots.
6. Use the cables supplied with the SLT card to connect the SLT wires with the Main Distribution Frame.
For each connector on the SLT Card, there is a separate 4-pair cable with an RJ45 jack on one end and
free at the other end.
68 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
ETERNITY ME Card SLT32
L1
Connector Color Connection H/w Port Offset
RJ45-1 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 01
(Blue) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 02
1 Green - (Green & White) SLT
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 04
RJ45-2 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 05
(Orange) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 06
2 Green - (Green & White) SLT
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 08
RJ45-3 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 09
(Green) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 10
3 Green - (Green & White) SLT
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 12
RJ45-4 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 13
(Brown) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 14
4 Green - (Green & White) SLT
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 16
RJ45-5 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 17
(Blue) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 18
5 Green - (Green & White) SLT
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 20
RJ45-6 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 21
(Orange) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 22
6 Green - (Green & White) SLT
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 24
RJ45-7 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 25
(Green) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 26
7 Green - (Green & White) SLT
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 28
RJ45-8 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 29
(Brown) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 30
8 Green - (Green & White) SLT
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 32
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 69
ETERNITY ME Card SLT16
L1
Connector Color Connection H/w Port Offset
RJ45-1 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 01
(Blue) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 02
1 Green - (Green & White) SLT
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 04
RJ45-2 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 05
(Orange) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 06
2 Green - (Green & White) SLT
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 08
RJ45-3 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 09
(Green) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 10
3 Green - (Green & White) SLT
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 12
RJ45-4 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 13
(Brown) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 14
4 Green - (Green & White) SLT
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 16
70 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
ETERNITY ME Card SLT8
L1
Connector Color Connection H/w Port Offset
RJ45-1 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 01
1 (Blue) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 02
Green - (Green & White) SLT
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 04
RJ45-2 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 05
(Orange) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 06
2
Green - (Green & White) SLT
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 08
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 71
ETERNITY ME Card TWT8+SLT24
L1
Connector Color Connection H/w Port Offset
RJ45-1 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 01
(Blue) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 02
1 Green - (Green & White) SLT
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 04
RJ45-2 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 05
(Orange) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 06
2 Green - (Green & White) SLT
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 08
RJ45-3 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 09
(Green) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 10
3 Green - (Green & White) SLT
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 12
RJ45-4 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 13
(Brown) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 14
4 Green - (Green & White) SLT
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 16
RJ45-5 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 17
(Blue) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 18
5 Green - (Green & White) SLT
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 20
RJ45-6 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 21
(Orange) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 22
6 Green - (Green & White) SLT
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 24
RJ45-7 Blue - (Blue & White) TWT 01
(Green) Orange - (Orange & White) TWT 02
7 Green - (Green & White) TWT
Brown - (Brown & White) TWT 04
RJ45-8 Blue - (Blue & White) TWT 05
(Brown) Orange - (Orange & White) TWT 06
8 Green - (Green & White) TWT
Brown - (Brown & White) TWT 08
ETERNITY ME Card SLT8-MAGNETO8
For pinout details, refer the topic “The SLT/TWT-Magneto Card”.
7. Plug in the RJ45 end of the MDF cables supplied with the card into the respective connectors with the help
of the color markings on the cables as illustrated above for each SLT Card type.
8. Terminate the open end of the cables into the punch down blocks of the Krone modules designated for
'Station Lines' in the “The Main Distribution Frame (MDF)”.
9. Repeat the same steps to install another SLT card. Connect the SLT instruments, as described in the next
step. If you have completed all installation tasks, power ON the system, observe the Reset Cycle and the
LED Pattern of the SLT Card.
72 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
LED Pattern of the SLT Card
Stage LED Color Cadence
Auto Upgradationa
Card waiting for application RED ON-200ms-OFF 200ms
Card is up, loaded with new application GREEN ON-200ms-OFF 200ms
Initialization
RED ON 500ms-OFF 500ms
GREEN ON 500ms - OFF 500ms
ORANGE ON 500ms - OFF 500ms
Stand-by task ORANGE ON 1 sec - OFF-1 sec
Errors
Flash Failure None None
RAM Failure None None
a. Done by the Boot Loader Application.
Status of Selected Port
PORT Status LED Colour LED Cadence
Selected port data transmitted to Master Card RED Togglea
Selected port data received from Master Card RED
a. The current LED state will remain the same until the next command is re-
ceived from the application on the SLT Port. For example, if the current LED
state is Green/Red ON, on the next command received, the LED will be
turned OFF. It will remain OFF until the next command is received. When the
next command is received it will be turned Green/Red ON again. This pro-
cess continues.
Connecting SLT instruments
10. Connect the SLT instruments you have arranged for. Plug in the SLTs into the wall socket/outlets.
• For the purpose of testing, you may connect one or two Single Line Telephone instruments by plugging
in the phone cables into the RJ45 connectors on the card.
• When you plug the RJ11 connector of SLT into an RJ45 connector on the SLT card, the first port on the
connector will be assigned to the SLT.
• If you have installed SLT8-Magneto8 combination card, it is possible to swap ports and test the
functioning of ports. Refer the topic “Configuring Magneto Interface” for instructions.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 73
The Intercom Line Card
For the Building Intercom application, ETERNITY supports the Intercom Line Card (ILC).18
You can connect any standard, two-wire, analog single line telephone instrument - rotary, pulse-tone, cordless,
feature phones with or without Calling Line Identification to the Intercom Line card.
The Intercom Line Card is available in the following configurations for the variants of ETERNITY ME.
ILC Cards for ETERNITY ME
Card Name Configuration and Application
ETERNITY ME Card ILC32 32-port card to connect 32 Single Line Telephones
ETERNITY ME Card ILC16 16-port card to connect 16 Single Line Telephones
Choose an ILC Card with the configuration that meets your requirement for intercom ports. Also, consider the
maximum Port capacity of the system you are installing. The maximum number of intercom ports supported by the
variants of ETERNITY ME are:
• 320 Intercom Ports in ETERNITY ME10S
• 512 Intercom Ports in ETERNITY ME16S
Connectors
The ILC Cards have RJ45 connectors with four ports on each connector. A multi-pair, MDF cable is supplied for
each connector.
LEDs
The ILC cards for ETERNITY ME have a single, tri-color LED to indicate the health of the card during the Reset
Cycle.
Installing Intercom Phones
To be able to connect intercom telephones to your ETERNITY ME, you must install at least one of the
aforementioned intercom line cards in the system.
1. Decide the number of intercom extensions required and arrange for as many telephone instruments.
2. Ensure that the extension wiring is completed according to your requirements. The extension cables from
the wall jack are terminated in the Main Distribution Frame and the telephones are connected to the wall
jacks.
3. Always wear an electrostatic discharge prevention wrist strap/belt and use a grounding mat to prevent
damage to the components of the card.
18. Check Availability. This card is supported by Firmware Version 10.06 and later only.
74 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
4. Unpack the ILC card and check the package contents. You may switch off power supply before you install
the card. Since, ETERNITY ME supports Hot Swap, you can install the card in power on condition.
5. Unscrew and remove the filler card mount bracket of any of the free (empty) Universal Slots. Keep the filler
bracket for future use.
6. Insert the ILC card into the guide rails of the free slot you selected for the card.
Make sure that the connectors on the card make perfect contact with those on the motherboard on the
backplane.
7. Press down the levers on the mounting bracket to secure the card in its slot. Now, secure the mounting
bracket with the two screws provided.
8. Repeat these steps to install another card.
9. Now, use the cables supplied with the ILC card to connect the card to the Main Distribution Frame to which
the intercom phones are connected.
For each connector on the card, there is a separate 4-pair cable with an RJ45 jack on one end and free at
the other end. Refer the illustrations of the pinout of the intercom cards to connect the wires.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 75
ETERNITY ME Card ILC32
L1
Connector Color Connection H/w Port Offset
RJ45-1 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 01
(Blue) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 02
1 Green - (Green & White) SLT
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 04
RJ45-2 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 05
(Orange) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 06
2 Green - (Green & White) SLT
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 08
RJ45-3 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 09
(Green) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 10
3 Green - (Green & White) SLT
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 12
RJ45-4 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 13
(Brown) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 14
4 Green - (Green & White) SLT
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 16
RJ45-5 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 17
(Blue) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 18
5 Green - (Green & White) SLT
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 20
RJ45-6 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 21
(Orange) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 22
6 Green - (Green & White) SLT
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 24
RJ45-7 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 25
(Green) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 26
7 Green - (Green & White) SLT
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 28
RJ45-8 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 29
(Brown) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 30
8 Green - (Green & White) SLT
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 32
76 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
ETERNITY ME Card ILC16
L1
Connector Color Connection H/w Port Offset
RJ45-1 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 01
(Blue) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 02
1 Green - (Green & White) SLT
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 04
RJ45-2 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 05
(Orange) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 06
2 Green - (Green & White) SLT
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 08
RJ45-3 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 09
(Green) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 10
3 Green - (Green & White) SLT
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 12
RJ45-4 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 13
(Brown) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 14
4 Green - (Green & White) SLT
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 16
10. If you have completed all other installation tasks, power ON the system, observe the Reset Cycle and the
LED indication of the card.
LED Indication of the ILC Card
Stage LED Colour Cadence
Auto Upgradationa
Card waiting for application RED ON-200ms-OFF 200ms
Card is up, loaded with new application GREEN ON-200ms-OFF 200ms
Initialization
RED ON 500ms-OFF 500ms
GREEN ON 500ms - OFF 500ms
ORANGE ON 500ms - OFF 500ms
Stand-by task ORANGE ON 1 sec - OFF-1 sec
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 77
Stage LED Colour Cadence
Errors
Flash Failure None None
RAM Failure None None
a. Done by the Boot Loader Application.
78 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The Digital Key Phone Card
The Digital Key Phone (DKP) Card provides the interface to connect the proprietary digital key phones, EON, the
PC-based phone EONSOFT and the Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles with the ETERNITY.
The DKP Card is available in the following configurations for the models of ETERNITY ME.
DKP Cards for ETERNITY ME
Card Name Configuration and Application
ETERNITY ME DKP32 32-port card to connect 32 DKP/DSS Consoles
ETERNITY ME DKP16 16-port card to connect 16 DKP/DSS Consoles
ETERNITY ME DKP8 8-port card to connect 8 DKP/DSS Consoles
Select a DKP Card with the configuration that meets your requirement for DKP Ports. Also consider the maximum
DKP Port capacity of the system you are installing.
Both ETERNITY ME 10S and ME16S support a maximum of 128 DKP Ports.
• Four DKP Ports are built into “The Switch Card”.
• If you have used up the four in-built DKP ports on the Switch Card, you can connect a maximum of 124
DKPs.
Connectors
The DKP Cards have RJ45 connectors, with each connector having 4 DKP ports. A multi-pair MDF cable is
supplied for each connector on the card.
LEDs
The DKP card has two dual color LEDs:
• LED1 indicates the health of the card during the Reset Cycle.
• LED2 monitors the status of any one of the station ports during normal functioning of the system.
LED 2 can be assigned to any DKP port to monitor the status of that port19.
Installing Digital Key Phone Card
To install the proprietary digital key phone EON and the DSS Consoles and the PC-based EON SOFT, you must
have at least one of the above mentioned DKP Cards installed in the system.
1. Decide the number of DKP extensions and DSS Consoles required and arrange for as many EON,
EONSOFT and DSS Consoles.
19. You can do this from the SE mode, by dialing the SE Command 7902-Slot-LED Number-Port, where Slot is the number of the uni-
versal slot in which the card is installed and Port is the port on the card to which the LED is to be assigned to monitor its function-
ing. LED Number is the number of the LED on the card, which will monitor the port.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 79
2. Unpack the DKP card and check the package contents. Make sure that power supply is switched off and
you are wearing an antistatic-wrist strap/belt and have a grounding mat, before handling the card.
3. Unscrew and remove the filler card mount bracket of any of the free (empty) Universal Slots. Do not
discard the filler bracket, keep for future use to cover empty slots.
4. Insert the DKP card into the guide rails of the free slot you have selected for the card. All the pins on the
connector of the card should make perfect contact with those on the connector of the slot on the backplane
motherboard.
5. Press down the levers on the mounting bracket to secure the card in its slot. Now, fix the card in its slot
with the two screws provided.
If you are installing more than one DKP card, it is not necessary to install the next card in the subsequent
slots.
6. Using the MDF Cables supplied with the DKP card connect the DKP wire pairs to the Main Distribution
Frame.
ETERNITY ME Card DKP32
L1
Connector Color Connection H/w Port Offset
RJ45-1 Blue - (Blue & White) DKP 01
(Blue) Orange - (Orange & White) DKP 02
1 Green - (Green & White) DKP
Brown - (Brown & White) DKP 04
RJ45-2 Blue - (Blue & White) DKP 05
(Orange) Orange - (Orange & White) DKP 06
2 Green - (Green & White) DKP
Brown - (Brown & White) DKP 08
RJ45-3 Blue - (Blue & White) DKP 09
(Green) Orange - (Orange & White) DKP 10
3 Green - (Green & White) DKP
Brown - (Brown & White) DKP 12
RJ45-4 Blue - (Blue & White) DKP 13
(Brown) Orange - (Orange & White) DKP 14
4 Green - (Green & White) DKP
Brown - (Brown & White) DKP 16
RJ45-5 Blue - (Blue & White) DKP 17
(Blue) Orange - (Orange & White) DKP 18
5 Green - (Green & White) DKP
Brown - (Brown & White) DKP 20
RJ45-6 Blue - (Blue & White) DKP 21
(Orange) Orange - (Orange & White) DKP 22
6 Green - (Green & White) DKP
Brown - (Brown & White) DKP 24
RJ45-7 Blue - (Blue & White) DKP 25
(Green) Orange - (Orange & White) DKP 26
7 Green - (Green & White) DKP
Brown - (Brown & White) DKP 28
RJ45-8 Blue - (Blue & White) DKP 29
(Brown) Orange - (Orange & White) DKP 30
8 Green - (Green & White) DKP
Brown - (Brown & White) DKP 32
80 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
ETERNITY ME Card DKP16
L1
Connector Color Connection H/w Port Offset
RJ45-1 Blue - (Blue & White) DKP 01
(Blue) Orange - (Orange & White) DKP 02
1 Green - (Green & White) DKP
Brown - (Brown & White) DKP 04
RJ45-2 Blue - (Blue & White) DKP 05
(Orange) Orange - (Orange & White) DKP 06
2 Green - (Green & White) DKP
Brown - (Brown & White) DKP 08
RJ45-3 Blue - (Blue & White) DKP 09
(Green) Orange - (Orange & White) DKP 10
3 Green - (Green & White) DKP
Brown - (Brown & White) DKP 12
RJ45-4 Blue - (Blue & White) DKP 13
(Brown) Orange - (Orange & White) DKP 14
4 Green - (Green & White) DKP
Brown - (Brown & White) DKP 16
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 81
ETERNITY ME Card DKP8
L1
Connector Color Connection H/w Port Offset
RJ45-1 Blue - (Blue & White) DKP 01
1 (Blue) Orange - (Orange & White) DKP 02
Green - (Green & White) DKP
Brown - (Brown & White) DKP 04
RJ45-2 Blue - (Blue & White) DKP 05
(Orange) Orange - (Orange & White) 06
2 DKP
Green - (Green & White) DKP
Brown - (Brown & White) DKP 08
7. Plug in the RJ45 end of the DKP cables into the respective connectors guided by the color markings on the
cables as illustrated above for each DKP Card Type.
8. Terminate the free end of the cables into the punch down blocks of the Krone modules designated for
'Station Lines' in the Main Distribution Frame (MDF).
Each wire-pair from the ETERNITY ME DKP Port must be terminated to the bottom of the Krone
Connector, while the wire-pair of the extension line to be connected to this port must be terminated on the
top of the Krone connector. Refer the topic “The Main Distribution Frame (MDF)” for illustration.
9. Connect the Digital Key Phone to the DKP Ports as described in the next step. If you have completed all
installation tasks, power on the system and observe the Reset Cycle and the LED Pattern of the DKP
Card.
82 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
LED Pattern of the DKP Card
Stage LED Color Cadence
Auto Upgradation
Card waiting for application RED ON-200ms-OFF 200ms
Card is up, loaded with new application GREEN ON-200ms-OFF 200ms
Initialization
RED ON 500ms-OFF 500ms
GREEN ON 500ms-OFF 500ms
ORANGE ON 500ms-OFF 500ms
Stand-by task ORANGE ON 1 sec-OFF 1 sec
Errors
Flash Failure None None
RAM Failure None None
Status of Selected DKP Port
PORT Status LED Color LED Cadence
Selected DKP's data are transmitted to Master Card RED Togglea on each event
Selected DKP's data are received from Master Card RED Toggleb on each request from Master
a. The current LED state will remain the same until the next event is received from the application on the DKP Port.
For example, if the current LED state is Green/Red ON, on the next event, the LED will be turned OFF. It will
remain OFF until the next event occurs. When the next event is received it will be turned Green/Red ON again.
This process continues.
b. Same as above note.
Installing EON
Matrix offers EON, the proprietary digital key phone. EON is available in the following models:
• EON42
• EON48
1. Unpack the box and verify the package contents.
2. Mount the phone on a desk or wall at a convenient location.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 83
EON42
• To mount EON42 on a wall, detach the Foot Stand on the bottom of the phone, by pressing the snap fits of
the foot stand backwards, and lifting it from its anchorage in the mounting holes.
• Now, insert the snap fits of the foot stand into the Wall Mount bracket slots on the bottom of the phone in
the " wall up" direction.
• Fix two screws of appropriate diameter on the wall, ensuring that they are aligned with the Keyhole Slots 1
and 2 of EON42. The screws should protrude from the wall to fit into the Keyhole Slots.
• Now, mount the phone with the screws fitting into the keyhole slots.
• Connect the handset of the EON42 to the phone body using the spring cord.
• To use a Headset (not supplied with the phone), plug any standard stereo headset with 2.5mm single
connector into the headset jack on the left side panel of the phone.
EON48
• To mount EON48 on a wall, detach the Foot Stand on the bottom of the phone, as illustrated below.
84 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Fix two screws of appropriate diameter on the wall, ensuring that they are aligned with the Keyhole Slots 1
and 2 of EON48. The screws should protrude from the wall to fit into the Keyhole Slots.
• Now, mount the phone with the screws fitting into the keyhole slots.
• When you mount EON48 on a desk, you can attach the Foot Stand in two ways as illustrated below.
• Connect the handset of the EON48 to the phone body using the spring cord.
• To use a Headset (not supplied with the phone), plug any standard stereo headset with 2.5mm single
connector into the headset jack on the left side panel of the phone.
You can also plug in a headset with RJ11 connector into the Headset port at the bottom of the phone.
3. Plug one end of the RJ45 cable supplied with the phone into the RJ45 connector and the other end into the
wall jack. The cable in the wall jack originates from the DKP card through the MDF.
4. When the ETERNITY is powered ON, the EON will get reset. The EON communicates with the ETERNITY.
The handshaking lasts for 5-6 seconds. The EON model, version and revision number, along with the
message 'Please wait'… appear on the LCD display.
M AT R I X E O N 4 8 - S V 2 R 2
PL EASE WAI T .. .
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 85
5. 1.After successful handshaking and reset cycle, if the DKP Parameters have been programmed, the LCD
display of the EON will show the station number and the station name in a line. The day, date and time,
time zone in the other line.
202 Reception
M on 2 4 A U G 1 2 : 0 0
6. You may adjust the LCD for brightness, contrast and backlight. Refer the topic, “Digital Key Phone-
Operation”.
For the purpose of testing, you may connect one or two DKPs directly to the connectors of the ETERNITY
DKP card.
Installing DSS Consoles
Once you have installed EON with ETERNITY, installing DSS Consoles can be done in a few simple steps, very
much similar to those involved in the installation of EON.
1. Unpack the box and verify the package contents.
2. Place the DSS Console next to the DKP, EON, to which it is to be attached.
You can install two DSS consoles to a DKP. Refer “Direct Station Selection Console” for possible
combinations for installing the various models of DSS Consoles.
3. Decide which DKP Ports on the DKP Card are to be assigned to the DSS Consoles. You may select any
free (unused) port on the card for DSS Consoles. It is not necessary for the DSS Console ports to be in a
sequence with the DKP ports to which they are attached.
For example: you have connected DKP1 to Port 1 on the first RJ45 connector of the DKP8 card. You want
to attach two DSS Consoles to DKP1. The two DSS Consoles may be connected to any port on the
second connector of the card, not necessarily to Port 2 and Port 3 on the first connector.
4. The wire-pairs from the DKP Ports designated for DSS Consoles should be terminated into the bottom of
the Krone Connector (of 'Station Lines' on the MDF).
5. The wire-pairs of the DSS Consoles should be terminated into the top of the Krone Connector (of 'Station
Lines' on the MDF).
6. Refer the topic “The Main Distribution Frame (MDF)” for illustration.
7. ETERNITY automatically assigns the first DSS Console discovered on the system to the first DKP, the
second DSS to the second DKP.
8. Only when two DSS Consoles are to be assigned to a single DKP, manual assignment of DSS to the DKP
is required. Refer “Configuring DKP Extensions”.
86 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Installing EONSOFT
To install EONSOFT, you must have a computer with Windows as the operating system. The EONSOFT is
compatible with the following Operating Systems of Windows:
• Windows 98
• Windows XP
• Windows NT
• Windows 2003
• Windows Vista
1. Unpack the box and verify the package contents.
2. Connect the Handset to the dongle in the handset jack. If using a headset, connect the microphone and
the speaker connectors into the dongle.
3. Connect one end of the Communication cable to the COM port of the dongle. Connect the other end of the
communication cable into the COM port of the computer.
4. Connect a wire-pair of a DKP port of the ETERNITY to the RJ11 port marked 'DKP' on the dongle.
5. Switch ON the computer. The computer must have Windows Operating System installed on it. If you do not
have of the operating systems mentioned above, install any compatible Windows Operating System.
6. Now insert the EONSOFT CD-ROM supplied with this PC-based DKP into the CD drive of your Computer.
The EONSOFT has a self-executing program and will automatically install itself on your PC.
7. If the software does not perform auto install on your PC, browse to CD-ROM.
8. The software program will appear, with the Matrix Icon and labeled as 'Matrix-EONSOFT'.
9. Click the Matrix EONSOFT Icon to run the program.
10. After the program has been installed and run, a shortcut will be automatically created and appear on your
desktop.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 87
11. Click the shortcut to open the program. The EONSOFT window will open:
12. Click 'Options' at the top left of the window. A drop down menu will appear.
88 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
13. Click the option 'COM Port'.
14. Select the COM Port to which the communication cable is connected.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 89
15. This dialog box will be displayed:
This screen will appear only if the DKP port to which the EONSOFT is connected has been programmed for
parameters like Name, Station number, Date and Time.
• If this dialog box does not appear on the screen in response to the click to select the COM Port Option,
test the COM Port for data transfer.
• If the wrong COM port has been selected, a dialog box will pop up on your screen with the message:
"COMx is invalid or busy, please select another COM Port". Select the correct COM Port.
Testing the COM Port
• From the drop down menu of 'Options', select the 'COM Port' to which you have connected the
communication cable.
• The COM Port Settings dialog box will open.
• Connect the communication cable to the COM Port of the PC.
• Short pin2 and pin3 of the DB-9 connector at the free end of the cable.
• Click the button labeled 'Start Test' in the COM Port Settings dialog box.
• After clicking this button, observe the Test Result section on the dialog box.
90 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• The 'Error Count' would show zero as value, if both the communication cable and the COM port were
working.
The above figure shows that the COM Port/communication cable is working.
• If the 'Error Count' shows a value other than zero, it means that either the communication cable or the
COM port of the PC is faulty.
Above figure shows the faulty COM Port/Communication Cable.
• Remove the communication cable from the COM Port of the PC.
• Short pin2 and pin3 of the communication port of the computer and click 'Start Test' in the COM Port
Settings dialog box.
• Now, if the error count is zero, please check the Communication Cable.
• If the error count is not a zero, the COM Port of the PC is faulty. Try another communication port.
Test the functioning of the COM Port of the PC and the communication cable, before you install the
EONSOFT.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 91
The Two-Wire Trunk Card
The Two-Wire Trunk (TWT) Card provides the interface to connect the ETERNITY with the POTS Network. The
TWT Card supports the different standards and features of POTS Networks across the world.
The TWT Card is available in the following configurations for the variants of ETERNITY ME. TWT interface is also
available in combination with SLT ports on a single card.
TWT Cards for ETERNITY ME
Card Name Configuration and Application
ETERNITY ME Card TWT16 16-port card to connect 16 Two-wire Trunk lines from the CO network
ETERNITY ME Card TWT8 8-port card to connect 8 Two-wire Trunk lines from the CO network
ETERNITY ME Card TWT8+SLT24 Combination card, with 8 TWT ports to connect 8 TWT analog trunk lines
and 24 SLT ports to connect 24 Single Line Telephones
ETERNITY ME Card Combination card, with 8 TWT ports to connect 8 TWT analog trunk lines
TWT8+MAGNETO8 and 8 Magneto ports to connect 8 Magento Telephones (with port
swapping)
Choose a TWT Card with the configuration that meets your requirement for TWT trunk ports, keeping in mind the
maximum TWT Trunk Port capacity of the system you are installing.
ETERNITY ME 10S and ME16S both support a maximum of 128 TWT Ports.
Connectors
The TWT Card has RJ45 connectors, with 4 TWT ports on each connector. A multi-pair, MDF cable is supplied for
each connector on the card.
LED
The TWT Cards have a single tri-color LED to indicate:
• the health of the card during the Reset Cycle
• the status of a selected Trunk port during normal functioning of the system.
You can assign the LED to any TWT port on the card which you want to monitor20.
Installing the TWT Card
For TWT connectivity, you must install at least one of the above mentioned TWT Cards in the system.
20. To assign the LED to a selected port for monitoring its functioning, you must enter SE mode and dial the SE Command 7902-Slot-
LED Number-Port, where Slot is the number of the universal slot in which the card is installed and Port is the port on the card to
which the LED is to be assigned to monitor its functioning. LED Number is the number of the LED on the card, which will monitor
the port.
92 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
1. Take all the necessary precautions prescribed for handling the cards and electronic equipment. Make sure
that power supply is turned off before you begin the installation of the card. Put on an electrostatic-
discharge preventive wrist strap/belt and use a grounding mat.
2. Unpack the TWT card and check the package contents.
3. Select any free (empty) slot from the Universal Slots. Unscrew and remove the filler bracket of the empty
slot. Preserve the filler bracket for future use!
4. Insert the TWT Card into the guide rails of the free slot you selected for the card. The connectors on the
card should make perfect contact with those of the slot on the backplane motherboard.
5. Press down the lever on the card mounting brackets to secure the card in its slot. Fix the mounting bracket
in place with the two screws provided.
If installing more than one TWT Card, it is not necessary to insert the other cards in subsequent slots. Any
card can be inserted in any of the Universal Slots.
6. Use the cables supplied for each connector on the TWT card to connect the Trunk Lines with the Main
Distribution Frame.
The cable for each connector is identified by a distinct color marked at the Boot edge and the Insulation
edge of the cable. This is to help you identify the connector and the ports to which the cable is connected.
You may refer the illustrations below to identify which cable to plug into each connector with the help of the
color markings on the cable.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 93
ETERNITY ME Card TWT16
L1
Connector Color Connection H/w Port Offset
RJ45-1 Blue - (Blue & White) TWT 01
(Blue) Orange - (Orange & White) TWT 02
1 Green - (Green & White) TWT
Brown - (Brown & White) TWT 04
RJ45-2 Blue - (Blue & White) TWT 05
(Orange) Orange - (Orange & White) TWT 06
2 Green - (Green & White) TWT
Brown - (Brown & White) TWT 08
RJ45-3 Blue - (Blue & White) TWT 09
(Green) Orange - (Orange & White) TWT 10
3 Green - (Green & White) TWT
Brown - (Brown & White) TWT 12
RJ45-4 Blue - (Blue & White) TWT 13
(Brown) Orange - (Orange & White) TWT 14
4 Green - (Green & White) TWT
Brown - (Brown & White) TWT 16
94 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
ETERNITY ME Card TWT8
L1
Connector Color Connection H/w Port Offset
RJ45-1 Blue - (Blue & White) TWT 01
1 (Blue) Orange - (Orange & White) TWT 02
Green - (Green & White) TWT
Brown - (Brown & White) TWT 04
RJ45-2 Blue - (Blue & White) TWT 05
(Orange) Orange - (Orange & White) TWT 06
2
Green - (Green & White) TWT
Brown - (Brown & White) TWT 08
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 95
ETERNITY ME Card TWT8+SLT24
L1
Connector Color Connection H/w Port Offset
RJ45-1 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 01
(Blue) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 02
1 Green - (Green & White) SLT
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 04
RJ45-2 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 05
(Orange) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 06
2 Green - (Green & White) SLT
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 08
RJ45-3 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 09
(Green) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 10
3 Green - (Green & White) SLT
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 12
RJ45-4 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 13
(Brown) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 14
4 Green - (Green & White) SLT
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 16
RJ45-5 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 17
(Blue) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 18
5 Green - (Green & White) SLT
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 20
RJ45-6 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 21
(Orange) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 22
6 Green - (Green & White) SLT
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 24
RJ45-7 Blue - (Blue & White) TWT 01
(Green) Orange - (Orange & White) TWT 02
7 Green - (Green & White) TWT
Brown - (Brown & White) TWT 04
RJ45-8 Blue - (Blue & White) TWT 05
(Brown) Orange - (Orange & White) TWT 06
8 Green - (Green & White) TWT
Brown - (Brown & White) TWT 08
7. Plug in the RJ45 end of the Trunk Card cables into the respective connectors referring to the color
markings on the cables as illustrated above for each TWT Card type.
8. Terminate the free end of the TWT Card cable into the punch down blocks of the Krone modules
designated for 'Trunk Lines' on “The Main Distribution Frame (MDF)”.
Trunk cables from the ETERNITY are to be connected with the Trunk Lines from the PSTN/CO terminated
on the MDF.
Refer the topics “The Main Distribution Frame (MDF)” and “Terminating Trunk and Station Cables on the
MDF”.
9. Repeat these steps to install other TWT cards, if applicable.
10. If you have completed all other installation tasks, power ON the system,
96 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
LED Pattern of the TWT Card
Stage LED Color Cadence
Auto Upgradationa
Card waiting for application RED ON-200ms-OFF 200ms
Card is up, loaded with new application GREEN ON-200ms-OFF 200ms
Initialization
RED ON 500ms-OFF 500ms
GREEN ON 500ms - OFF 500ms
ORANGE ON 500ms - OFF 500ms
Stand-by task ORANGE ON 1 sec - OFF-1 sec
Errors
Flash Failure None None
RAM Failure None None
a. Done by the boot loader application.
Status of Selected TWT Port
PORT Status LED Color LED Cadence
Selected TWT's data are transmitted RED Togglea on each event
to Master Card
Selected TWT's data are received RED Toggleb on each request from Master
from Master Card
a. The current LED state will remain the same until the next event is received from the application on
the TWT Port. For example, if the current LED state is Green/Red ON, on the next event, the LED
will be turned OFF. It will remain OFF until the next event occurs. When the next event is received
it will be turned Green/Red ON again. This process continues.
b. Same as above note.
If you have installed TWT8-Magneto8 combination card, it is possible to swap ports and test the
functioning of ports. Refer the topic “Configuring Magneto Interface” for instructions.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 97
The BRI Card
The BRI card provides the interface to connect ETERNITY with ISDN BRI Lines. The BRI lines may be from a
public ISDN exchange or a private ISDN exchange.
The BRI Card is available in the following configurations for the variants of ETERNITY ME.
BRI Cards of ETERNITY ME
Card Name Configuration and Application
ETERNITY ME Card BRI8 8-Port card to connect 8 ISDN BRI Lines or ISDN Compatible Devices
ETERNITY ME Card BRI4 4-Port card to connect 4 ISDN BRI Lines or ISDN Compatible Devices
Both ETERNITY ME10S and ME16S support upto 32 BRI lines.
Connectors
The BRI cards have RJ45 Connectors. The ETERNITY ME BRI8 card has 8 RJ45 connectors for 8 BRI ports.
The ETERNITY ME BRI4 card has 4 RJ45 connectors for 4 BRI ports. A separate cable is supplied for each
connector.
LEDs
The ETERNITY ME BRI8 has 8 LEDs and BRI4 has 4 LEDs.
Connecting ISDN BRI Lines
Most ISDN Service Providers also provide the NT1 device along with the BRI line. The BRI Line from the ISDN
central office is terminated on the NT1 on the Customer's Premises, as illustrated below.
ISDN
Network NT 1 BRI Port
ETERNITY
Power
U-Interface S/T
(2-wire) Interface
Customer Premises
Where,
• U Interface = between the NT1 equipment and the ISDN central office.
• S/T Interface = between the ISDN user equipment, that is, ETERNITY and the Network Interface
Equipment (NT1).
The BRI line is terminated on the NT1. The S/T interface of the NT1 is connected to BRI port of the
ETERNITY.
98 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
TE and NT Modes
In this illustration, the BRI line from ISDN Service Provider is directly connected to BRI port of the ETERNITY via
the NT1 device. Here, the ETERNITY is the Terminal Equipment, so the BRI Port must be programmed to work in
the TE mode.
When an ISDN Phone is to be connected to the BRI port of ETERNITY, the BRI port must be programmed to work
in NT mode.
When a BRI port of another ISDN PBX is to be connected to the BRI port of the ETERNITY, in such a configuration,
you may configure
• the BRI port of the other ISDN PBX in the TE mode and the BRI Port of the ETERNITY in the NT mode.
OR
• the BRI port of the other ISDN PBX in the NT mode and the BRI Port of the ETERNITY in the TE mode
Also refer the topic “ISDN-BRI” to know more.
Types of BRI Configuration
There are two types of configurations in BRI: Point-to-Point Configuration and Point-to-Multipoint Configuration.
Each of these is discussed below.
Point-to-Point Configuration
BRI Line
NT BRI Port
ISDN (TE Mode)
Network
(UP to 1 Km.)
ETERNITY
The maximum distance between the NT (Network Termination, NT1 or NT2) and a single Terminal Equipment, in
this case ETERNITY, can be upto 1 kilometer.
Point-to-Multipoint Configuration
A maximum of 8 ISDN equipment can be connected on a single BRI Bus line in a Point-to-Multipoint configuration.
Further, two configurations are possible in a Point-to-Multipoint configuration:
1. Short Passive Bus Configuration
2. Extended Passive Bus Configuration
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 99
Short Passive Bus Configuration
d < 200 meters
ISDN NT
Network BRI Bus Bar
Terminal
BRI Port Resistance 100
(TE Mode)
Terminal
Resistance 100
ETERNITY ISDN Phone ISDN Phone ISDN Phone
Terminal 1 Terminal 2 Terminal 3 Terminal 8
Where,
TE = Terminal Equipment or ISDN device (End user device)
NT = Network Termination provided by the ISDN Service Provider
d = distance from NT to the last TE equipment.
In a Short Passive Bus Configuration,
• A maximum of 8 TEs or ISDN devices can be connected to a single NT on a bus up to 200 meters from the
NT.
• 100 Terminal Resistance is required to be inserted at the NT side as well as the last TE Equipment as
shown in the figure.
• Using this configuration, any subscriber from ETERNITY can access a BRI line and can make outgoing
calls. At the same time, another subscriber from ETERNITY or any ISDN phone shown in the figure can
make outgoing call from the same BRI. In the same way, incoming calls are possible on the same BRI.
• Only two simultaneous speech paths can be established, as BRI supports 2 voice channels only.
• This configuration is useful on the smaller premises, where a single BRI line and multiple ISDN devices are
used.
Extended Passive Bus Configuration
d < 1 Km
d1 < 30 meters
ISDN NT
Network BRI Bus Bar
Terminal
Terminal BRI Port Resistance 100
(TE Mode)
Resistance 100
ETERNITY ISDN Phone ISDN Phone
Terminal 1 Terminal 2 Terminal 3
100 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Where,
TE = Terminal equipment of any ISDN Equipment
NT = Network Termination provided by Service Provider
TR Terminal Resistance 100
d = distance from NT to the last TE Equipment
d1 = the total distance from first TE equipment and the last TE equipment.
In an Extended Passive Bus Configuration,
• You can connect only 3 Terminal Equipment or ISDN devices. These devices are grouped together at one
end of the bus, with may extend to a distance of up to 1 kilometer from the NT.
• However, all the 3 Terminal Equipment/ISDN devices must be located within a range of 30 meters, as
shown in the figure.
• Using this configuration, any subscriber from ETERNITY can access the BRI line and make outgoing calls.
At the same time, another subscriber from the ETERNITY or any ISDN phone shown in the figure can
make outgoing calls from the same BRI. In the same way, incoming calls are possible on the same BRI.
• Only two simultaneous speech paths can be established, as BRI supports 2 voice channels only.
• This configuration is useful on large premises where a limited number of ISDN devices (maximum 3) are to
be used within a range of 30 meters.
Installing the BRI Card
1. Take all the necessary precautions prescribed for handling the cards and electronic equipment: turn off
power supply, always wear an electrostatic-discharge preventive wrist strap/belt and use a grounding mat.
2. Unpack the BRI card and check the package contents.
3. Select any free (empty) slot from the Universal Slots. Unscrew and remove the filler bracket of the empty
slot. Do not discard the filler bracket! Preserve it for future use!
Setting Orientation Type of BRI Port
4. Set the Orientation Type of the BRI Ports as TE or NT mode as per your installation requirement. To set
the Orientation Type, change the position of the jumpers located on the Main Board of the card. Refer the
following tables for Jumper Positions for each BRI port.
Jumper Position
Mode BRI Port 1 BRI Port 2
J20 J21 J22 J23 J24 J25 J26 J27
NT BC BC BC BC BC BC BC BC
TE AB AB AB AB AB AB AB AB
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 101
Jumper Position
Mode BRI Port 3 BRI Port 4
J28 J29 J30 J31 J32 J33 J34 J35
NT BC BC BC BC BC BC BC BC
TE AB AB AB AB AB AB AB AB
Jumper Position
Mode BRI Port 5 BRI Port 6
J36 J37 J38 J39 J40 J41 J42 J43
NT BC BC BC BC BC BC BC BC
TE AB AB AB AB AB AB AB AB
Jumper Position
Mode BRI Port 7 BRI Port 8
J44 J45 J46 J47 J48 J49 J50 J51
NT BC BC BC BC BC BC BC BC
TE AB AB AB AB AB AB AB AB
By default, Orientation Type is TE. So, you may skip to the next step.
Inserting Termination Resistance
5. Termination of 100 should be inserted in the following cases:
• When the BRI port is configured in the TE mode and connected in a Point-to-Point configuration as
shown below.
102 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• When the BRI port is configured in the TE mode in a Point-to-Multipoint configuration as shown below.
100 Termination is required on the last Terminal connected on the S0 bus to terminate calls properly.
ISDN
BRI Line NT
Network
BRI TE BRI TE BRI TE
Other ISDN Other ISDN ETERNITY
Equipment Equipment
In a Point-to-Multipoint configuration, 100 termination can be provided on either of the following:
• Last TE equipment.
• Last point of the bus bar where the last TE equipment is connected.
• When BRI port is configured in the NT mode.
• If the S0 bus itself supports Terminating resistors, Termination Resistance need not be inserted when
• BRI Port is configured as TE and connected in a Point-to-Point Configuration as illustrated above.
• BRI Port is configured as NT.
• Termination need not be inserted if the BRI port of ETERNITY (configured in TE mode) is connected as
any terminal other than the last terminal on the S0 bus (in a Multi-point configuration).
Termination in TE Equipment (BRI Port)
6. To set the 100 termination on the BRI port set the Jumpers on the BRI Module (daughterboard) to the
position described below:
Jumper Position
Function
J3 J4
To insert 100 termination AB AB
To remove 100 termination BC BC
By default, Termination Resistance of 100 is set on the BRI port (Jumpers J3 and J4 are in AB position).
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 103
Termination in the Bus Bar
7. 100 termination resister can be connected between TX and RX, that is, between pin number 3-4 and 5-6
in the RJ45 connector as illustrated below.
1 RJ45 Connector on
Bus Bar at the Last
TE ISDN Equipment
Tx 3
100
Rx 4
Rx 5
100
Tx 6
As shown in the application diagrams for Point-to-Multipoint connectivity, each ISDN TE device is
connected in a Bus Bar, which may be Short Passive Bus Bar configuration or an Extended Passive Bus
Bar configuration.
Illustrated below is the connection diagram of two ports connected with each other on the same BRI bus
bar.
1 1 RJ45 Connector
ports on BRI Bus
Bar to which the
3 3
ISDN TE
4 4 Equipment is
connected
5 5
6 6
8 8
• The above figure shows the connection details of two ports on the BRI Bus Bar. Similarly, you can
connect 8 ports on the Bus Bar, keeping in mind the Termination Resister for the NT and the Last TE
on the Bus bar.
• Pin number 3, 4, 5 and 6 of the RJ45 connector are used for connectivity.
• Pin number 3 and 6 are used for Transmit (Tx) and pin number 4 and 5 are used for Receive (Rx) from
the ISDN TE side.
• Pin number 3 and 6 are used for Receive (Rx) and pin number 4 and 5 are used for Transmit (Tx) from
the NT side.
104 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Feeding Power to the Terminal
8. When the BRI Port of the ETERNITY is used as BRI-NT, you can feed power to the terminal equipment
connected to the BRI-NT Port from the ETERNITY.
To do this, you must change the position of the Jumpers J1 and J2 on the BRI modules (daughterboard),
on the BRI Card.
Jumper Position
Function
J1 J2
To feed power on Tx and Rx wires (Phantom Power) AB AB
To feed power on separate pair of wires BC BC
No power to be fed to the terminal equipment Open Open
• To feed the power on Tx and Rx wires, set the jumpers J1 and J2 of BRI module in AB position.
• To feed the power on separate pairs of wires, set the jumpers J1 and J2 of BRI module in BC position.
• To power the ISDN terminal from external power source, keep the jumpers J1 and J2 open.
• By default, the jumpers J1 and J2 are Open.
• The maximum power that can be fed to a single BRI port is 50mA.
• From signaling point of view, a maximum of 8 terminal equipment can be connected on the BRI port
configured in the NT mode.
• The number of ISDN Terminals that can be connected on the BRI port configured in the NT mode
depends on the power consumed by the ISDN terminals.
9. Insert the BRI Card into the guide rails of the free slot you selected for the card. The connectors on the
card should make perfect contact with those of the slot on the backplane motherboard.
Press down the levers on the card mounting brackets to secure the card in its slot. Fix the mounting
bracket in place with the two screws provided.
If installing more than one BRI Card, it is not necessary to insert the other cards in subsequent slots. Any
card can be inserted in any of the Universal Slots. Remember to set the Orientation Type, Termination
Resistance and Power Feed, as required.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 105
10. Use the straight cables supplied for each connector on the BRI card to connect the BRI Ports to the NT1
device supplied by your ISDN service provider. Refer the configuration and pinout details given below for
guidance.
Configuration details of the U interface (RJ-45) at NT1
Pin Number Pin Details
4 Tx
5 Rx
Configuration details of the S/T interface (RJ-45) on NT1
Pin Number Pin Details
3 Rx1
4 Tx1
5 Tx2
6 Rx2
Pin details of BRI Port in TE Mode
RJ45 Pin Number Signal Color
1 -- Orange-White
2 -- Orange
3 TX_A Green-White
4 RX_A Blue
5 RX_B Blue-White
6 TX_B Green
7 VOUT- Brown-White
8 VOUT+ Brown
Pin details of BRI Port in NT Mode
RJ45 Pin Number Signal Color
1 -- Orange-White
2 -- Orange
3 RX_A Green-White
4 TX_A Blue
5 TX_B Blue-White
6 RX_B Green
7 VOUT- Brown-White
8 VOUT+ Brown
106 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The following diagram shows how to connect a BRI Line to the ETERNITY ME BRI port in the TE mode.
11. If you have completed all other installation tasks, you may turn ON the system and observe the Reset
Cycle, and the LED pattern of the BRI Card.
LED Pattern of the BRI Card
The BRI Card has an LED for each port.
• The BRI8 Card has 8 LEDs: L1, L2, L3, L4, L5, L6, L7, L8.
• The BRI4 Card has 4 LEDs: L1, L2, L3, L4.
The LEDs show the Status of the Ports as summarized in the table below:
Port Status LED Color LED Cadence
Port is not active RED Continuously ON
Port is active GREEN Continuously ON
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 107
The T1E1PRI Card
The ETERNITY T1E1PRI Card provides the interface to connect ETERNITY to ISDN Network.
When connected to T1 carrier lines, the Card supports the following signaling types:
• PRI
• Robbed Bit Signaling
• Q-Signaling (QSIG)
• E&M
When connected to E1 carrier lines, the card supports the following signaling types:
• PRI
• Channel Associated Signaling (CAS)
• Q-Signaling (QSIG)
• E&M
The T1E1PRI Card is available in the following configurations for ETERNITY ME:
T1E1PRI Cards for ETERNITY ME
Card Name Configuration and Application
ETERNITY ME Card T1E1PRI 2-Port card with QSIG support to connect 2 ISDN T1/E1 PRI Lines or ISDN
Dual Compatible Devices
ETERNITY ME Card T1E1PRI 1-Port card with QSIG support to connect 1 ISDN T1/E1 PRI Line or ISDN
Single Compatible Device
Both ETERNITY ME10S and ME16S support a maximum of 8 PRI lines.
Connectors
The T1E1PRI card has an RJ45 Connector for each port. The ETERNITY ME T1E1PRI Dual card has 2 RJ45
Connectors for the two ports, while the ETERNITY ME T1E1PRI Single card has a single RJ45 Connector.
A cable with RJ45 plugs on both ends is supplied for each connector.
LEDs
The ETERNITY ME T1E1PRI Dual Card has four LEDs: L1, L2, L3 and L4.
The ETERNITY ME T1E1PRI Single Card has two LEDs L1 and L2.
Installing the T1E1PRI Card
To be able to connect ETERNITY to PRI Lines, any one of the above cards must be installed in the system.
1. Before installing the card, take the necessary precautions prescribed for handling the cards. Always wear
an electrostatic-discharge preventive wrist strap and use a grounding mat. Make sure the power supply is
turned off.
108 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
2. Unpack the T1E1PRI card and check the package contents.
3. Select any free (empty) slot from the Universal Slots. Unscrew and remove the filler bracket of the empty
slot. Preserve the filler bracket for future use!
Setting Line Termination Resistance
4. The default positions of SW3, SW4, SW6, SW7 should be as follows:
Pin1 Pin2 Pin3 Pin4 Termination Resistance ()
OFF OFF OFF ON 0 (Default)
Do Not Change the positions of any of these switches!
5. By default, termination resistance of PRI port is set as 120, which is for E1 connectivity.
• To use the PRI Port for T1 connectivity, termination resistance must be changed to 100.
• Use DIP Switch SW5 to change the Termination Resistance of PRI Port 1. Set the Pins of SW5 as
shown below:
Pin-1 Pin-2 Pin-3 Pin-4 Resistance
OFF OFF ON OFF 120 (for E1)
OFF ON OFF OFF 100 (for T1)
• If using the ETERNITY ME T1E1PRI Dual Card, use DIP Switch SW2 to change the Termination
Resistance of PRI Port 2. Set the Pins of SW2 as shown below:
Pin-1 Pin-2 Pin-3 Pin-4 Resistance
OFF OFF ON OFF 120 (for E1)
OFF ON OFF OFF 100 (for T1)
6. Insert the T1E1PRI Card into the guide rails of the free slot you selected for the card. Make sure that the
connectors on the card make perfect contact with those of the slot on the backplane motherboard.
7. Press down the levers on the card mounting brackets to secure the card in its slot. Fix the mounting
bracket in place with the two screws provided.
If you are installing more than one T1E1PRI Card, it is not necessary to insert the other cards in
subsequent slots. Any card can be inserted in any of the Universal Slots.
Connecting ISDN T1/E1 PRI Lines
8. Use the cable supplied with the T1E1PRI Card to connect the ETERNITY to the T1E1PRI network
interface equipment (modem), which is generally supplied by your ISDN Service Provider along with the
PRI line.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 109
The diagram below illustrates this.
Customer Premises
ETERNITY
ISDN G.703
Modem
Network 4-wire HDSL DTE
4-wire
PRI Port
(RJ-45 Connector) (RJ-45 Connector)
G.703
Modem
Power
• Most Service Providers insist on connecting an ISDN modem at both the ends of the PRI line, that is,
one at the Local Exchange and other at the Customer's Premises.
• At the Customer's Premises, the PRI line is terminated on the HDSL interface of the modem.
• The DTE interface of the modem is be connected to the PRI port (RJ-45 connector on the Matrix
ETERNITY ME T1E1PRI Dual/Single Card).
9. Refer the following pin details for connecting the Network Termination Unit with the ETERNITY.
Pin details of HDSL Interface of the G.703 Modem. (HDSL Network Termination Unit)
Pin Number Pin Details
1 Line A
2 Line A
3 Not used
4 Line B
5 Line B
6 Not used
7 Not used
8 Not used
Pin details of DTE Interface of G.703 Modem. (HDSL Network Interface Unit)
Pin Number Pin Details
1 TX1 (Tip)
2 TX2 (Ring)
3 Not used
4 RX1 (Ring)
5 RX2 (Tip)
6 Not used
7 Not used
8 Not used
110 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Most of the HDSL Network Termination Unit manufacturers use these connectors. But you are advised to
read the instrument guide of the HDSL Network Termination Unit being used by you.
Pin details of ETERNITY T1E1PR1 Port
The T1E1PRI Port of the ETERNITY terminates in an 8-pin RJ45, female connector and is wired according to the
figure below.
Tx1 (Ring) Tx2 (Tip)
4 5
NC NC
3 6
Rx2 (Tip) NC
2 7
Rx1 (Ring) NC
1 8
The cable wires may have to be crossed depending on the pinout of the DTE Interface of the modem.
10. If you have completed all other installation tasks. Power the system. After the Reset Cycle is completed,
observe the LED patterns of the T1E1PRI Card.
LED Pattern of the T1E1PRI Card
The ETERNITY ME T1E1PRI Dual Card has four LEDs: L1, L2, L3 and L4.
• L1 and L2 are assigned to PRI Port 1 (PRI#1)
• L3 and L4 are assigned to PRI Port 2 (PR1#2)
• L1 shows Card Heart Bit as well as status of Port 1.
The ETERNITY ME T1E1PRI Single Card has two LEDs: L1 and L2.
Given below are the LED Patterns defined for indicating port states in the signaling types supported by the
ETERNITY ME.
1. Port Active Mode
Signaling Type: E1-PRI
LED1/LED3 Pattern:
Port Status Color Cadence
Layer 1 established successfully GREEN Continuous ON
CRC4 Alarm GREEN 100ms ON-100 ms OFF
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 111
Port Status Color Cadence
BFA Alarm RED 500ms ON-500 ms OFF
LOS Alarm RED Continuous ON
LED2/LED4 Pattern:
Port Status Color Cadence
Layer 1 established successfully GREEN Continuous ON
RAI Alarm RED 500ms ON-500 ms OFF
AIS or LOS Alarm RED Continuous ON
Signaling Type: E1-CAS
LED1/LED3 Pattern:
Port Status Color Cadence
Layer 1 established successfully GREEN Continuous ON
CRC4 Alarm GREEN 100ms ON-100 ms OFF
MFA Alarm RED 100ms ON-100 ms OFF
BFA Alarm RED 500ms ON-500ms OFF
LOS Alarm RED Continuous ON
LED2/LED4 Pattern:
Port Status Color Cadence
Layer 1 established successfully GREEN Continuous ON
Y-Bit Alarm GREEN 100ms ON-100 ms OFF
AIS16 Alarm RED 100ms ON-100 ms OFF
RAI Alarm RED 500ms ON-500 ms OFF
AIS or LOS Alarm RED Continuous ON
Signaling Type: T1-RBS or T1-PRI
LED1/LED3 Pattern:
Port Status Color Cadence
No Alarm GREEN Continuous ON
TFA Alarm or MFA Alarm RED 500ms ON-500 ms OFF
AIS Alarm RED 100ms ON-100 ms OFF
LOS Alarm RED Continuous ON
112 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
LED2/LED4 Pattern:
Port Status Color Cadence
Layer 1 established successfully GREEN Continuous ON
RAI or LOS Alarm RED Continuous ON
2. Port Maintenance Mode
LED1/LED3 Pattern:
Port Status Color Cadence
Maintenance Mode RED -GREEN 500 ms RED-500 ms GREEN
LED2/LED4 Pattern:
Port Status Color Cadence
Near end loop back wait before activate RED 100ms ON-100 ms OFF
Near end loop active RED Continuous ON
Near end loop back wait before deactivate RED 500ms ON-500 ms OFF
Far end loop back wait after activate GREEN 100ms ON-100 ms OFF
Far end loop active GREEN Continuous ON
Far end loop back wait after deactivate GREEN 500ms ON-500 ms OFF
3. Port Disable Mode
LED1/LED3 Pattern:
Port Status Color Cadence
Port Disable RED Continuous ON
LED2/LED4 Pattern:
Port Status Color Cadence
Port Disabled OFF OFF
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 113
The Mobile Card
The Mobile Card interfaces the ETERNITY with GSM/3G networks. It routes calls made and received over mobile
networks, like a mobile handset.
The GSM Cards are available in 2G and 3G variants.
The card does not support GPRS features, Fax and Data services, network supported services, except
CLIR and USSD.
The Mobile card is available in the following configurations for ETERNITY ME.
The Mobile Card for ETERNITY ME
Card Name Configuration and Application
ETERNITY ME Card GSM8 8-port card to connect to 8 GSM networks (8 SIM Cards can be installed)
ETERNITY ME Card GSM4 4-port card to connect to 4 GSM networks (4 SIM Cards can be installed)
ETERNITY ME Card GSM8 8-port card to connect to 8 GSM networks with 3G support (8 SIM Cards can be
3G installed)
ETERNITY ME Card GSM4 4-port card to connect to 4 GSM networks with 3G support (4 SIM Cards can be
3G installed)
Just like mobile handsets, each Mobile Port has a unique IMEI (International Mobile Equipment Identity) number,
pasted on the mobile engine.
Both ETERNITY ME10S and ME16S support up to 32 Mobile ports.
SIM cards from different service providers can be used.
Antenna
There is a single rooftop (RT) antenna for four GSM ports. A splitter connects all the four ports on the card into a
single antenna. An antenna cable is also provided, giving you the flexibility to move the antenna to another position
(in case of weak signal).
LEDs
There is a tri-color LED for each mobile port on the card to indicate the functioning of the card and the status of the
ports.
Personal Identification Number (PIN)
The SIM cards can be protected from unauthorized use by programming a Personal Identification Number (PIN) on
the SIM. If the wrong SIM PIN is entered thrice in a row, by a user, the SIM Card suspects the user and asks for the
Personal Unlock Keyword (PUK).
114 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Installing the Mobile Card
To be able to connect ETERNITY to GSM/3G networks, you must have either one of the above mobile card types
installed in the system.
1. To install the Mobile Card,
• If using a GSM/3G card, get the get the SIM Card from the GSM/3G service provider of your choice
ready. Use SIM PIN protection, if required.
Disable Call Waiting in the SIM, if using 3G services.
2. Make sure that the ETERNITY is installed at a location where sufficient network coverage is available. The
power supply should be turned off, and you must be wearing an electrostatic discharge preventive wrist
strap and a have a grounding mat, before you begin handling the card.
3. Unpack the Mobile Card and verify the package contents.
Enabling PIN Protection on SIM
4. For the GSM/3G Card, enable SIM PIN before installing the SIM card in the system.
• insert the SIM into a mobile handset first.
• enable PIN Protection from the mobile handset.
• change the SIM PIN to 1234 (this is the default PIN for all SIM cards used in the system). Changing the
SIM PIN to '1234' enables you to change the SIM PIN from the ETERNITY later (Refer SIM PIN for
instructions).
• remove the SIM from the mobile handset.
If you do not want to use PIN protection, insert the SIM in the mobile handset and disable PIN protection.
Remove the SIM Card from the mobile handset.
5. Insert the SIM card (PIN changed to 1234), with its connector side down into the SIM holder on the Mobile
card. You can insert multiple SIM cards of the same GSM service provider or of different service providers.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 115
ETERNITY ME Card GSM4/GSM4 3G
ETERNITY ME Card GSM8/GSM8 3G
6. Insert the Mobile card into the guide rails of the Universal Slot you have selected for this card. Make sure
that the card is inserted deep enough to make perfect contact with the connectors in the backplane. Now,
press down the levers on the card mount bracket to secure the card in its slot.
7. Connect the antenna provided with the card on the splitter connector on the front panel of the card. You
may also use the antenna cable to place the antenna at another position.
116 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
8. Repeat Steps 1-7 to insert another Mobile card.
9. If you have completed all installations tasks, power the system.
10. Wait for the system to register with the Mobile network. By default, the Mobile ports are set to select and
register with the Mobile networks automatically. Now, observe the LED Patterns of the Mobile Ports.
• At every power up of the system, it takes about 3 minutes for the Mobile ports to get registered with the
network. Once registration with the GSM network is completed, the mobile port can be used.
• Each time the Mobile Port sends a request, such as a Registration Request, the system waits for the
duration of the Network Response Timer. This Timer signifies the time for which the Mobile Port waits
for a response from the Mobile network. It is fixed for 150 seconds for all Mobile ports.
LED Pattern of Mobile Ports
The number of tri-color LEDs on the GSM card corresponds with the number of mobile ports on the card.
At Power On: All LEDs will blink 1 second ON and 1 second OFF in the color sequence: Red-Green-Orange until
the Reset cycle is complete.
In the Stand-by state: All LEDs will glow Orange for a second and turn Green for a second, repeatedly.
During normal functioning: The LEDs will various events on the Mobile port in the color and cadence described
in the table below:
Event Color Cadence in msec (1 cadence is of 3000 msec)
Port disabled - LED OFF
Port idle - LED OFF
Port Active (All States other Red Continuous ON
than Ring and Speech)
Ring Event Green 400ms ON-200ms OFF400ms ON-200ms OFF
Speech Green Continuous ON
GSM initialization Orange 200ms ON-200ms OFF-200ms ON-200ms OFF-200ms ON-200ms
OFF-200ms ON-200ms OFF-200ms ON-1200ms OFF (5 blinks)
PUK required Orange 200ms ON-200ms OFF-200ms ON-200ms OFF-200ms ON-200ms
OFF-200ms ON-1600ms OFF-
SIM PIN faulty Orange 200ms ON-200ms OFF-200ms ON-200ms OFF-200ms ON-2000ms
OFF (3 blinks)
SIM Absent Orange 200ms ON-200ms OFF-200ms ON-2400ms OFF (2 blinks)
Network Link Down Orange 200ms ON-2800ms OFF
(Absence of GSM Network)
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 117
The E&M Card
The E&M Card of the ETERNITY ME provides the interface for analog trunking to connect various communication
equipment telephone switches, Routers, Leased Lines, etc. using Tie-Lines.
The E&M Card is required for the following applications:
• Power Line Carrier Communication (PLCC) Networks, where several EPAXs are connected with each
other through E&M tie lines. Refer “PLCC-An Introduction” to know more.
• “Closed User Group (CUG)”, where several PBXs are connected with each other through E&M tie lines21.
• PBX expansion, where two PBXs are connected with each other with E&M tie lines.
• Connecting remote PBXs over E&M tie lines
Refer the topics “E&M Connectivity” to know more.
An E&M Port can be programmed to behave as a Trunk Interface, a Subscriber (Station) Interface or both, as a Tie
Line with the dual personality of a Trunk and a Subscriber.
The E&M Card supports
• E&M Interface - Types IV and V
• Speech Interface - Two-wire and four-wire.
• E&M Trunk Seizure Type22: Immediate, Immediate + Wink, Seizure Pulse, Seizure Pulse + Wink, Express,
and Compander Control Signal.
• Address Signaling: Pulse dial (Pulse 10PPS, Pulse 20PPS) and Tone Dial (DTMF).
The ETERNITY E&M Card is available in the following configuration for the ETERNITY ME:
E&M Cards for ETERNITY ME
Card Name Configuration and Application
ETERNITY ME Card E&M8 8-port card to connect 8 E&M Tie Lines
ETERNITY ME Card E&M4 4-port card to connect 4 E&M Tie Lines
Connectors
The E&M8 card is supplied with RJ45 or Amphenol connectors. On the ETERNITY ME E&M8 card with Amphenol
connectors, the first 4 E&M ports (E&M1 to E&M4) are located on the lower connector, and the remaining four E&M
ports (E&M5 to E&M8) are located on the upper connector.
The ETERNITY ME E&M4 card has a single Amphenol connector with 4 ports.
A separate MDF cable is supplied for each connector.
21. The PBXs in a “Closed User Group (CUG)” can be connected over ISDN T1E1PRI Lines as well. Refer the topic Closed User
Groups to know more.
22. This is the line protocol that defines how the equipment seizes the E&M trunk. Also referred to as Start Dial Supervision Signaling
Protocol.
118 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
LEDs
The ETERNITY ME Card E&M8 has eight tri-color LEDs. The ETERNITY ME Card E&M4 has 4 LEDs, to indicate
the functioning of the ports.
Installing the E&M Card
The number of E&M lines that you can interface with the ETERNITY using the E&M Card varies according to
number of E&M ports supported by the each variant of ETERNITY ME.
The maximum number of E&M ports supported by each model of ETERNITY ME are:
• ETERNITY ME10S: 80
• ETERNITY ME16S: 128
An E&M port of ETERNITY can be programmed to take on the function of:
• a Station - works like a station interface, receiving incoming calls.
OR
• a Trunk - works like a trunk interface when any of the stations of the PBX makes an outgoing call through
it.
OR
• a Tie Line - takes on a dual personality: functioning as both a station and a trunk. The E&M port works like
a station interface for incoming calls. It works like a trunk interface when any station makes an outgoing
call through it.
This dual function is used in PBXs that are used as Transit Exchanges as in a PLCC Network. Read
“PLCC-An Introduction” to know more.
You cannot connect a trunk line or an SLT or a DKP to an E&M port.
1. Have the necessary wiring for the E&M Analog trunk in place. Take the necessary safety precautions
before you begin handling the card; switch off power supply and always wear an antistatic wrist strap and
use a grounding mat.
2. Unpack the E&M card and check the package contents.
3. The E&M Card supports E&M Interface Type IV and Type V connection. To select the appropriate
Interface Type out of the two, you need to change the Jumper Settings.
Refer the table below to select the desired Interface Type and Speech Interface.
Jumper Number Position Function
J1 and J2 AB Type IV E&M Interface
BC Type V E&M Interface
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 119
• By default all the E&M Ports are set to support Type-IV.
• To select the Type-V connection for the E&M Port, set Jumpers J1 and J2 (given on E&M module) in
BC Position.
4. Select the speech interface - 2-wire speech or 4-wire speech - as required, by changing the jumper
settings. Refer the table below.
Jumper Number Position Function
J3 and J4 AB 4-wire speech interface
BC 2-wire speech interface
• By default all the E&M Ports are set to support 2-wire Speech Interface.
• To select 2-wire speech interface for the E&M Port, set Jumpers J3 and J4 (given on E&M module) to
BC Position.
• To select 4-wire speech interface for the E&M Port, set Jumpers J3 and J4 on E&M module to AB
Position.
5. Now, select a free slot for the E&M card. Unscrew and remove the filler bracket by pushing up the levers
on the bracket. Preserve the filler bracket for future use.
6. Insert the E&M Card into guide rails of the empty slot. Make sure the connectors on the card make perfect
contact with those on the backplane motherboard. Secure the card by pressing down the levers and fix the
bracket with the screws provided with the card.
7. Connect the cables supplied with the E&M card into the RJ45/Amphenol connectors on the E&M Card.
8. Connect the other end of the cable into the E&M Ports of the other PBX/Router/Tie Line equipment by
appropriate crossing of the wires.
Refer the following pin-out details for each E&M Card Type and for each E&M Type and Speech Interface
Type.
120 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Pinout details of ETERNITY ME Card E&M8 - RJ45 Connectors
L1 L5
L2 L6
L3 L7
L4 L8
Pin No. Connection Colour H/w Port Offset
01 Open Gray 01
02 SB Green-White
03 M OUT Green
04 RX SPCH A Orange-White
1 RJ45-1 05 SPCH A Blue
Pin No. Connection Colour H/w Port Offset 06 SPCH B Blue-White
07 RX SPCH B Orange
01 Open Gray 02
08 E IN Brown-White
02 SB Green-White
09 BGND Brown
03 M OUT Green
10 CCC Gray-White
04 RX SPCH A Orange-White
05 SPCH A Blue
06 SPCH B Blue-White RJ45-2 2
07 RX SPCH B Orange Pin No. Connection Colour H/w Port Offset
08 E IN Brown-White
09 BGND Brown 01 Open Gray 03
10 CCC Gray-White 02 SB Green-White
03 M OUT Green
04 RX SPCH A Orange-White
3 RJ45-3 05 SPCH A Blue
Pin No. Connection Colour H/w Port Offset 06 SPCH B Blue-White
07 RX SPCH B Orange
01 Open Gray 04
08 E IN Brown-White
02 SB Green-White
09 BGND Brown
03 M OUT Green
10 CCC Gray-White
04 RX SPCH A Orange-White
05 SPCH A Blue
06 SPCH B Blue-White
RJ45-4 4
07 RX SPCH B Orange
08 E IN Brown-White
09 BGND Brown Pin No. Connection Colour H/w Port Offset
10 CCC Gray-White
01 Open Gray 05
02 SB Green-White
03 M OUT Green
04 RX SPCH A Orange-White
Pin No. Connection Colour H/w Port Offset 5 RJ45-5 05 SPCH A Blue
06 SPCH B Blue-White
07 RX SPCH B Orange
01 Open Gray 06
08 E IN Brown-White
02 SB Green-White
09 BGND Brown
03 M OUT Green
10 CCC Gray-White
04 RX SPCH A Orange-White
05 SPCH A Blue
06 SPCH B Blue-White RJ45-6 6
07 RX SPCH B Orange Pin No. Connection Colour H/w Port Offset
08 E IN Brown-White
09 BGND Brown 01 Open Gray 07
10 CCC Gray-White 02 SB Green-White
03 M OUT Green
04 RX SPCH A Orange-White
Pin No. Connection Colour H/w Port Offset
7 RJ45-7 05 SPCH A Blue
06 SPCH B Blue-White
07 RX SPCH B Orange
01 Open Gray 08
08 E IN Brown-White
02 SB Green-White
09 BGND Brown
03 M OUT Green
10 CCC Gray-White
04 RX SPCH A Orange-White
05 SPCH A Blue
06 SPCH B Blue-White RJ45-8 8
07 RX SPCH B Orange
08 E IN Brown-White
09 BGND Brown
10 CCC Gray-White
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 121
Pinout details of ETERNITY ME Card E&M8 - Amphenol Connectors
122 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Pinout details of ETERNITY ME Card E&M4 - RJ45 Connectors
L1 L3
L2 L4
Pin No. Connection Colour H/w Port Offset
01 Open Gray 01
02 SB Green-White
03 M OUT Green
04 RX SPCH A Orange-White
1 RJ45-1 05 SPCH A Blue
Pin No. Connection Colour H/w Port Offset 06 SPCH B Blue-White
07 RX SPCH B Orange
01 Open Gray 02
08 E IN Brown-White
02 SB Green-White
09 BGND Brown
03 M OUT Green
10 CCC Gray-White
04 RX SPCH A Orange-White
05 SPCH A Blue
06 SPCH B Blue-White RJ45-2 2
07 RX SPCH B Orange Pin No. Connection Colour H/w Port Offset
08 E IN Brown-White
09 BGND Brown 01 Open Gray 03
10 CCC Gray-White 02 SB Green-White
03 M OUT Green
04 RX SPCH A Orange-White
3 RJ45-3 05 SPCH A Blue
Pin No. Connection Colour H/w Port Offset 06 SPCH B Blue-White
07 RX SPCH B Orange
01 Open Gray 04
08 E IN Brown-White
02 SB Green-White
09 BGND Brown
03 M OUT Green
10 CCC Gray-White
04 RX SPCH A Orange-White
05 SPCH A Blue
06 SPCH B Blue-White
RJ45-4 4
07 RX SPCH B Orange
08 E IN Brown-White
09 BGND Brown
10 CCC Gray-White
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 123
Pinout details of ETERNITY ME Card E&M4 - Amphenol Connector
2 Wire, Type IV E&M Connection
124 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
2 Wire, Type V E&M Connection
4 Wire, Type IV E&M Connection
4 Wire, Type V E&M Connection
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 125
• If you are connecting two PLCC EPAX in a Power Line Carrier Communication Network Compander
Control Signal (CCS) Connection should be made as illustrated in the block diagram below for any of the
four combinations of E&M and Speech Interfaces illustrated in the previous step.
Compander Control Signal (CCS) is a special type of signal used by Power Line Carrier Communication
Networks to improve quality of speech transmission. The PLCC network expects this signal from the PBX
when speech is established. The E&M Card supports this facility. The ETERNITY sends CCS signal to the
PLCC panel.
• When the E&M port is used as an Endpoint; the system sends a CCS to the PLCC panel while making
an outgoing call through the E&M port or when a call is received at the E&M port.
• When the E&M port is used for Transit Exchange; the system sends a CCS to the PLCC panel while
there is a Transit call through the E&M port.
9. If you have finished all installation tasks, power ON the system, observe the Reset Cycle and the LED
Pattern of the E&M Card.
LED Pattern of the E&M Card
Stage LED Color LED Cadence
Initialization
At Power ON RED L1 to L8 glow one after the other in a sequence,
ON 100ms -OFF.
L1 ON 100ms-OFF,
L2 100ms ON-OFF,
L3 100ms ON-OFF,
L4 100ms ON-OFF……L8 100ms ON-OFF
GREEN L1 to L8 glow one after the other in a sequence,
ON 100ms -OFF.
L1 ON 100ms-OFF,
L2 100ms ON-OFF,
L3 100ms ON-OFF,
L4 100ms ON-OFF……L8 100ms ON-OFF
Stand-Bya GREEN, ORANGE L1 toggles GREEN ON 1 sec,
ORANGE ON 1 sec
Normal (Port Event)
126 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Stage LED Color LED Cadence
M-Wire High GREEN LED of the Port continuously ON
M-Wire Low LED of the Port continuously OFF
E-Wire High RED LED of the Port continuously ON
M-Wire Low LED of the Port continuously OFF
E-Wire and M-Wire High ORANGE LED of the Port continuously ON
Errors
Controller RAM failure ORANGE All LEDs Toggle at 1 sec
External RAM failure ORANGE All LEDs Toggle at 2 sec
Eprom failure ORANGE All LEDs Toggle at 3 sec
Invalid Slot detected ORANGE All LEDs Toggle at 6 sec
a. Waiting to be detected by Master Card.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 127
The Magneto Card
The Magneto Card is used for connecting the ETERNITY to Magneto Telephones23, which are widely used by the
defense establishments as field phones in front lines, and by other establishments such as railroad companies
(signaling emergencies, crossings, etc.), electric utilities, pipeline companies, who need to have their networks at
places that are too remote to be serviced by public telephone networks.
The Magneto Card of ETERNITY lands calls from magneto field telephones on the Stations of the ETERNITY and
places calls from the Stations of the ETERNITY on magneto telephones.
The Magneto card is available in the following configuration for the ETERNITY ME.
Magneto Card for ETERNITY ME
Card Name Configuration and Application
ETERNITY ME Card Magneto8 8-port card to connect 8 Magneto Phones
The maximum number of Magneto Ports supported by each variant of ETERNITY ME are:
• ETERNITY ME10S: 80 Magneto Ports
• ETERNITY ME16S: 128 Magneto Ports.
Connectors
The Magneto Card has RJ45 connectors, with 4 ports on each connector. A multi-pair cable is provided for each
connector.
LED
The ETERNITY Magneto8 has 8 LEDs for each magneto port supported by the card.
The LEDs indicate the health of the cards during the Reset Cycle and the status of the ports during the normal
functioning of the system.
Installing the Magneto Card
1. Have the necessary wiring for the Magneto Ports in place.
You may install an MDF to connect the Magneto Ports with the Field Telephone wires.
OR
You may connect the wires from the Magneto Field Telephones directly to the Magneto Port.
You are advised to use a separate set of Krone Modules for connecting the Magneto phones to the
Magneto ports of ETERNITY.
23. A magneto telephone is a local battery telephone set, in which signaling current is provided by a magneto hand generator, usually
a magneto. The hand generator, commonly referred to as 'crank', is located on the right hand side of the telephone set and is
turned to produce energy to ring other phones or to signal the CO. The magneto, also called the generator, is used to convert the
mechanical motion via the crank to produce sufficient energy to ring other phones or to signal the CO.
128 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
2. Prepare for the card installation by switching off power supply and wearing an electrostatic discharge
preventive wrist strap and use a grounding mat.
3. Unpack the Magneto Card and check the package contents.
4. Select any universal slot to insert the card. Unscrew the filler bracket and remove it by pushing up the
levers on the bracket.
5. Insert the Magneto card into the guide rails of the free slot. The card's connectors must make perfect
contact with the connectors on the backplane motherboard. Press down the levers of the mounting bracket
to secure the card in its slot and fix the two screws provided with the card on the mounting bracket.
6. Now, plug in the cables supplied with the Magneto Card into the connectors on the card. Terminate the
free ends of the cables into the MDF, if applicable.
Refer to the following block diagram for terminating the cables from the Magneto Card and the wires from
the Magneto Field Telephones.
Connecting Magneto Telephones to the Magneto Card
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 129
7. Connect the pairs of wires from the Magneto Field Phones to the appropriate pairs emerging from the
Magneto Card of the ETERNITY on the MDF. Refer the cable diagram for the Magneto card.
8. Repeat the same steps to install the other Magneto Cards.
9. If you do not have any other Card to insert and have completed the installation procedures, plug in the
power cord, switch ON power supply from the mains, switch on the Power supply of the ETERNITY and
observe the Reset Cycle and the LED Pattern of the Magneto Card.
LED Pattern of the Magneto Card
Stage LED Color LED Cadence
Initialization
At Power ON RED L1 to L8 turned ON for 500ms, turned OFF
simultaneously.
GREEN L1 to L8 turned ON for 500ms, turned OFF
simultaneously.
Stand-Bya GREEN, RED L1 toggles 1 sec GREEN and RED
Normal (Port Event)
Ring (incoming/outgoing call) RED LED of the Port continuously ON
Port Disabled LED of the Port continuously OFF
130 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Stage LED Color LED Cadence
OFF-Hook (in Speech) GREEN LED of the Port continuously ON
For Outgoing call from Magneto:
When called station answers the call
For Incoming call to Magneto:
When stopping Ring on Magneto using
MRE key or #
Port Idle LED of the Port continuously OFF
Errors
Invalid Card Configuration Jumper ORANGE All LEDs Flash (250ms ON-250ms OFF) twice,
OFF 3 sec.
Controller Xram Failure ORANGE LEDs Flash (250ms ON-250ms OFF) four times,
OFF 3 sec.
Controller Eprom Failure ORANGE LEDs Flash (250ms ON-250ms OFF) 5 times,
OFF 3 sec.
Invalid Slot detectionb ORANGE LEDs Flash (250ms ON-250ms OFF) 6 times,
OFF 3 sec.
a. Waiting to be detected by Master Card.
b. Waiting to be detected by Master Card.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 131
The SLT/TWT-Magneto Card
The SLT/TWT-Magneto Card is used for connecting Single Line Telephones (SLT), Two-wire Trunks (TWT) and
Magneto Telephones.
You can connect SLT and Magneto Telephones or TWT trunk lines and Magneto Telephones on the same card.
The SLT/TWT-Magneto Card supports Port Swapping, using which you can interchange the SLT/TWT and
Magneto ports. The card also supports BITE (Built-in Test) which allows testing of the functioning of any desired
port on the card.
SLT/TWT-Magneto card is available in the following configurations for ETERNITY ME:
SLT/TWT-Magneto Card for ETERNITY ME
Card Name Configuration and Application
ETERNITY ME Card SLT8-Magneto8 8-port card to connect 8 SLT and 8 Magneto Phones
ETERNITY ME Card TWT8-Magneto8 8-port card to connect 8 TWT lines and 8 Magneto Phones
A combination of up to 16 SLT/TWT and Magneto telephones can be connected on this card.
Connectors
The SLT/TWT-Magneto Card has RJ45 connectors, with an SLT/TWT and a Magneto port on each connector. A
separate cable is provided for each connector.
LED
The ETERNITY SLT/TWT-Magneto Card has 8 dual color LEDs.
The LEDs indicate the health of the cards during the Reset Cycle and the status of the ports after the Reset Cycle.
The LEDs are programmable. You can assign an LED to any port to monitor its functioning24. By default, all 8 LEDs
show the status of the Magneto Ports.
Installing the SLT/TWT-Magneto Card
You are advised to use a separate set of Krone Modules for connecting the Magneto phones, the SLTs and the
TWT, on the MDF.
1. Have the necessary wiring for the Magneto Phones, the SLTs and TWT Trunks in place. Prepare for the
card installation by switching off power supply and wearing an electrostatic discharge preventive wrist
strap and use a grounding mat.
2. Unpack the SLT/TWT-Magneto Card and check the package contents.
24. To do this, enter SE mode, and dial the SE Command 7902-Slot-LED Number-Port, where Slot is the number of the universal slot
in which the card is installed and Port is number of the port on the card to which the LED is to be assigned to monitor its function-
ing. LED Number is the number of the LED on the card, which will monitor the port.
132 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
3. Select any universal slot to insert the card. Unscrew the filler bracket and remove it by pushing up the
levers on the bracket.
4. Insert the card into the guide rails of the free slot. Make sure the card's connectors make perfect contact
with the connectors on the backplane motherboard. Press down the levers of the mounting bracket to
secure the card in its slot and fix the two screws provided with the card on the mounting bracket.
5. Now, plug in the cables supplied with the SLT/TWT-Magneto Card into the connectors on the card.
Terminate the free ends of the cables into the MDF.
When connecting Magneto telephones, you may either terminate the Magneto wire pairs into the MDF or
you may directly connect the wires from the Magneto Telephones into the Magneto Ports.
Refer to the following pinout details of the card connectors for terminating the cables from the card into the
MDF and the wires from the Magneto Telephones, SLT and TWT trunks.
For detailed instructions, refer the topics “The Main Distribution Frame (MDF)” and “Terminating Trunk and
Station Cables on the MDF”.
Also refer the topics “The Single Line Telephone Card” and “The Two-Wire Trunk Card”.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 133
ETERNITY ME Card SLT8-Magneto8
134 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
ETERNITY ME Card TWT8-Magneto8
The SLT/TWT-Magneto card supports Port Swapping. The pin details presented here represent the
'Normal' mode. For pin details in the 'Swapped' mode, refer the topic “Port Swapping of Magneto, SLT and
TWT Ports”.
6. Repeat the same steps to install another card.
7. If you have finished installing the desired number of cards, plug in the power cord, switch ON power supply
from the mains, switch on the Power supply of the ETERNITY and observe the Reset Cycle and the LED
Pattern of the SLT/TWT-Magneto Card.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 135
LED Pattern of the SLT/TWT-Magneto Card
Reset Cycle
Stage LED Color LED Cadence
Initialization
At Power ON RED L1 to L8 turned ON for 500ms, turned OFF simultaneously.
GREEN L1 to L8 turned ON for 500ms, turned OFF simultaneously.
ORANGE L1 to L8 turned ON for 500ms, turned OFF simultaneously.
Stand-Bya GREEN, RED L1 toggles 1 sec GREEN and RED
Errors
Invalid Slot detectionb ORANGE LEDs Flash (250ms ON-250ms OFF) 6 times, OFF 3 sec.
a. Waiting to be detected by Master Card
b. Waiting to be detected by Master Card
Port Events:
Event Color Cadence
For Magneto Port:
Ring (incoming/outgoing call) RED LED of the Port continuously ON
Port Disabled LED of the Port continuously OFF
Port Idle LED of the Port continuously OFF
OFF-Hook (in Speech) GREEN LED of the Port continuously ON
For Outgoing call from Magneto:
When called station answers the call
For Incoming call to Magneto:
When stopping Ring on Magneto using MRE
key or #
For SLT/TWT Port:
Port Idle Off
Port Disable Off
Ring Green 400ms ON-200ms OFF-400ms ON-2000msOFF
Any other states Green Continuous ON
136 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The SLT+MAG+TWT+LD+ENM Card
A Loop Dial (LD) port is a unique port with a dual personality. It is used as a tie-line to connect two PBXs over Two-
wire Trunk lines. The LD Port has a dual personality of a Trunk and a Station.
For outgoing calls, the port assumes the personality of a Two-wire Trunk port. For incoming calls, it behaves like an
SLT port.
The LD Trunk port can be used for expanding the PBX capacity, connecting a second PBX with the main PBX or to
connect two or more remote PBXs with each other, forming a network of PBXs.
The Loop Dial port is available as a combination-card in the following configuration for ETERNITY ME.
The SLT+MAG+TWT+LD+ENM Card for ETERNITY ME
Card Name Configuration and Application
ETERNITY ME Card Combination card with
SLT8+MAG2+TWT2+LD2+ENM2 Card • 8 SLT ports to connect 8 Single Line Telephones.
• 2 Magneto ports to connect 2 Magneto Telephones.
• 2 TWT ports to connect 2 Two-wire Analog trunk lines.
• 2 LD ports to connect 2 EPBAXs on each port.
• 2 E&M ports to connect 2 E&M Tie lines.
The number of LD ports supported by ETERNITY ME depends on the model and the number of Loop Dial
combination cards installed in the system.
The maximum number of LD ports supported by each model of ETERNITY ME are:
• ETERNITY ME10S: 20 LD ports.
• ETERNITY ME16S: 32 LD ports.
Connectors
The SLT8+MAG2+TWT2+LD2+ENM2 Card has 7 RJ45 connectors. A separate cable is provided for each
connector.
LED
There are 8 dual color LEDs on the SLT8+MAG2+TWT2+LD2+ENM2 Card
The LEDs indicate the health of the cards during the Reset Cycle and the status of the ports after the Reset Cycle.
The LEDs are programmable. You can assign an LED to any port to monitor its functioning25.
25. To do this, enter SE mode, and dial the SE Command 7902-Slot-LED Number-Port, where Slot is the number of the universal slot
in which the card is installed and Port is number of the port on the card to which the LED is to be assigned to monitor its function-
ing. LED Number is the number of the LED on the card, which will monitor the port.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 137
Installing the Loop Dial Combination Card
The installation instructions given below are with reference to the LD Trunks only.
For instructions on connecting SLTs, TWT Trunks, Magneto phones and E&M tie lines, refer the respective topics.
Installation Scenario
The LD Trunk port is used for connecting two PBX systems with each other, as illustrated below.
EPBX A EPBX B
LD Port LD Port
CO CO
• The LD Port of PBX A is connected to the LD Port of PBX B.
• The LD port works as a trunk port for extension users, when they make outgoing calls. When the extension
user of PBX A grabs its LD port by dialing a feature access code, it will receive the dial tone of PBX B. The
extension user of PBX A can dial the desired extension number or external number just like any other
extension of PBX B.
• The LD port works as an extension for incoming calls. When the extension user of PBX B grabs the LD
port of PBX B, PBX A feeds dial tone to PBX B over its LD port.
1. Have the necessary wiring in place for LD Ports ready between the desired number of PBXs you want to
interconnect. Prepare for the card installation. Switch off power supply; always wear an electrostatic
discharge preventive wrist strap and use a grounding mat.
2. Unpack the SLT8+MAG2+TWT2+LD2+ENM2 Card and check the package contents.
3. Select any universal slot to insert the card. Unscrew the filler bracket and remove it by pushing up the
levers on the bracket.
4. Insert the card into the guide rails of the free slot. Make sure the card's connectors make perfect contact
with the connectors on the backplane motherboard. Press down the levers of the mounting bracket to
secure the card in its slot and fix the two screws provided with the card on the mounting bracket.
5. Now, plug in the cables supplied with the Card into the connectors on the card. Terminate the free ends of
the cables into the MDF.
Refer to the following pinout details of the card connectors for terminating the cables from the LD Port of
the card into the MDF.
138 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
ETERNITY ME SLT8+MAG2+TWT2+LD2+ENM2 Card
For detailed instructions, refer the topics “The Main Distribution Frame (MDF)” and “Terminating Trunk and
Station Cables on the MDF”.
Also refer the topics “The Single Line Telephone Card”, “The Two-Wire Trunk Card”, “The E&M Card”,
“The Magneto Card”.
6. Repeat the same steps to install another card.
7. If you have finished installing the desired number of cards, plug in the power cord, switch ON power supply
from the mains, switch on the Power supply of the ETERNITY and observe the Reset Cycle and the LED
Pattern of the card.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 139
LED Pattern
Reset Cycle
Stage LED Color LED Cadence
Initialization
At Power ON RED L1 to L8 turned ON for 500ms, turned OFF simultaneously.
GREEN L1 to L8 turned ON for 500ms, turned OFF simultaneously.
ORANGE L1 to L8 turned ON for 500ms, turned OFF simultaneously.
Stand-Bya GREEN, RED L1 toggles 1 sec GREEN and RED
Errors
Invalid Slot detection ORANGE All LEDs Flash (250ms ON-250ms OFF) 6 times, OFF 3 sec.
a. Waiting to be detected by Master Card
Port Events:
Event Color Cadence
For Magneto Port:
Ring (incoming/outgoing call) RED LED of the Port continuously ON
Port Disabled LED of the Port continuously OFF
Port Idle LED of the Port continuously OFF
OFF-Hook (in Speech) GREEN LED of the Port continuously ON
For Outgoing call from Magneto:
When called station answers the call
For Incoming call to Magneto:
When stopping Ring on Magneto using MRE key or #
For SLT/TWT/LD Port:
Port Idle Off
Port Disable Off
Port Event From Master GREEN LED of the Port gets Toggled
Port Event From Module RED LED of the Port gets Toggled
Any other states GREEN LED of the Port continuously ON
For ENM port:
M-wire high GREEN LED of the Port continuously ON
M-wire low LED of the Port continuously OFF
E-wire high RED LED of the Port continuously ON
E-wire low LED of the Port continuously OFF
M-wire and E-wire high ORANGE LED of the Port continuously ON
140 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The VoIP Card
The SIP-based VoIP Card enables the stations of ETERNITY to connect to the IP network and make Proxy as well
as Non-Proxy (Peer-to-Peer) VoIP calls. The card has a Registrar Server, allowing any SIP device to be registered
with it and function as an extension of the ETERNITY. With the VoIP Card, ETERNITY offers the functionality of an
IP-PBX.
In countries, where the provision and use of Internet telephony services and products is prohibited and or
subject to laws, regulations or licenses, the User is advised to comply with such laws and regulations when
installing and using this product.
The VoIP card for ETERNITY ME is available in the following configuration.
VoIP Card for ETERNITY ME
Card Name Configuration and Application
ETERNITY ME VoIP32 Card with 32 Voice channels.
ETERNITY ME VoIP16 Card with 16 Voice channels.
LAN and WAN Ports
There is a LAN Port and a WAN Port on the VoIP Card.
The LAN Port is used for connecting the VoIP Card to the Local Area Network to register SIP extensions through
the LAN Port.
The WAN Port is for connecting the VoIP Card to the public network over a Router/Modem. Any user on the public
network can be registered as SIP Extension through the WAN Port.
You can also connect the WAN Port to a LAN Switch/Hub.
The LAN Port supports Static IP Addressing only. The WAN Port supports Static, DHCP and PPPoE IP
Addressing.
Voice Channels
There are 32 Voice Channels on the VoIP32 Card and 16 Voice Channels on the VoIP16 Card, allowing as many
simultaneous calls to be made (using SIP Trunks and/or Extensions) as the number of Voice Channels supported
by these cards.
A call made from a SIP Extension or SIP Trunk to another SIP Extension or SIP Trunk will consume two
voice channels, whereas a call made from an SLT or DKP extension to a SIP Extension or SIP Trunk will
consume one voice channel. Thus, the number of speech paths available to make simultaneous calls will
depend not only on the number of voice channels, but also be the number of channels consumed by such
SIP-to-SIP and Analog/Digital extension to SIP Trunk/SIP Extension calls.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 141
SIP Trunks
The ETERNITY ME VoIP Card supports up to 32 SIP Trunks. You can subscribe to as many as 32 different Internet
Telephony Service Providers (ITSP).
It is possible to program all 32 SIP trunks on a single VoIP Card or in a distributed manner, where more than one
VoIP card is installed in the system.
SIP Extensions
ETERNITY ME supports 999 SIP Extensions. Upto 500 SIP Extensions can be registered with a single VoIP Card.
To register more than 500 SIP Extensions, you need at least two VoIP Cards.
You can register any SIP-enabled device like an IP-phone, a Softphone, analog phone adapter, with the VoIP Card
as the 'SIP Extension' of the ETERNITY ME.
The SIP Extensions function in the same ways as other extensions of the ETERNITY. SIP Extension users can
make and receive calls from and to other extensions of ETERNITY and external numbers over PSTN, GSM, VoIP
and E&M lines26. You can also connect the Standard and Extended IP Phones offered by Matrix as SIP
Extensions.
SIP Extensions require a license. To know more about Licensing requirements and how to acquire and
activate a license key, see the topic “License Management”.
A SIP Extension can be registered with the VoIP Card of ETERNITY from three different locations. This helps
organizations overcome geographical distances and reduce call costs.
To know more about connecting SIP Extensions, see “SIP Extensions”.
26. Only if there are no restrictions on calls from VoIP to other Public Networks in your country. If the telecom regulations of your coun-
try prohibit call traffic between the public telelphony networks and IP networks, you must configure Logical Partition in your system.
To know more, see “Logical Partition”.
142 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Installing VoIP Card
The VoIP Card can be installed in typically two scenarios: in a Public Network or in a Private network (behind a NAT
Router). It can also be connected to both networks.
VoIP Card connected to a Public Network
ETERNITY ME16S
Master Ethernet Port
LAN Switch/Hub
LAN
IP
IP
Router
VoIP Server Card
WAN
Switch Card
Master Card
Public IP is assigned to the WAN Port of the VoIP Card.
When connecting the card to the Public Network, you would require the following items/information:
• A Broadband Internet Connection to make/receive calls through the Public Internet. If you wish to make
calls within your network (LAN), you do not need an Internet connection.
• A SIP Account with an Internet Telephony Service Provider (ITSP).
If you want to make only Peer-to-Peer calls27 (calls made without the intervention of a SIP Server or Proxy
Server) you do not need the service of an ITSP.
If you have subscribed one or more SIP Accounts to make SIP calls, ask your Internet Telephony Service
Provider (ITSP) for the following information:
• SIP ID/User ID
• Authentication User ID
• Authentication Password
• SIP Registrar Server Address
• SIP Registrar Server Port
You may ask your Internet Service Provider / LAN administrator for the above information.
• Network Information:
• IP Addressing scheme (DHCP/PPPoE/Static) of the network
• IP Address of the WAN Port of the VoIP Card (Default: 192.168.001.116)
• Subnet Mask of the WAN Port. (Default: 255.255.255.000)
• Gateway Address
• DNS Address
• DNS Domain Name (if applicable)
27. Peer-to-Peer calls are calls made without the intervention of a SIP Server or Proxy Server.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 143
• IP Address of your LAN
• IP Address of the LAN Port of the VoIP Card (Default: 192.168.002.031)
VoIP Card connected to a Private Network
ETERNITY ME16S
Master Ethernet Port
LAN
VoIP Server Card
WAN
Switch Card
Master Card
LAN Switch/Hub
IP
IP
Router
The card is located behind the NAT Router and Private IP is assigned to the WAN port.
When connecting the card in a Private Network, you would require the following information:
• IP Addressing Scheme of your network; whether the Connection Type is DHCP, Static, PPPoE
• IP Address of the WAN Port of the VoIP Card (Default: 192.168.001.116)
• Subnet Mask of the Network to which the WAN Port is connected. (Default: 255.255.255.000)
• Gateway Address
• DNS Address
• DNS Domain Name (if applicable)
144 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
VoIP Card connected to the Public Network for Matrix Extended IP Phones
Public IP is assigned to the WAN Port of the VoIP card and the Ethernet Port of the Master Card.
Here, the LAN port of the VoIP Card is connected to the LAN Switch/Hub. The WAN Port of the Card is connected
to the Public Network and the Master Ethernet Port of ETERNITY is also connected to the Public Network.
This installation is required when you want to register the Matrix Extended IP Phone with ETERNITY from the
Public Network. The Master Ethernet Port is used for Auto Configuration of the Matrix Extended IP Phones.
To install the VoIP Card, do the following:
1. Get the items/information listed ready before you install the VoIP card and connect it to the IP network.
2. Observe all prescribed safety precautions when inserting or removing cards. Make sure the Power Supply
is switched off, and you are wearing an antistatic wrist strap/belt and have a grounding mat.
3. Unpack the VoIP card and verify the package contents.
4. Select any of the free Universal Slots of ETERNITY to insert the VoIP Card. Unscrew and remove the filler
bracket of the slot. Preserve the filler bracket for future use.
5. Insert the card into the guide rails of the slot. The card should be inserted deep enough to make perfect
contact with the connectors on the backplane.
6. Now, secure the card in its slot by pressing down the levers of the mounting bracket and fixing it in place
with the two screws provided.
7. Using the Ethernet cable supplied with the VoIP card, connect the LAN and the WAN Port to the IP
network, which may be Public Internet or a LAN, or both.
If connecting to the Public Internet Network,
• Plug one end of the Ethernet cable supplied with the VoIP card into the WAN Port of the VoIP Card and
the other end into the Router/Modem.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 145
If connecting to a Private Network,
• Plug one end of the Ethernet cable supplied with the card into the WAN Port of the card and the other
end into the LAN Switch/Hub.
If connecting to the Public Network for registering Extended IP Phones,
• Plug one end of the Ethernet cable supplied with the VoIP card into the WAN Port of the VoIP Card and
the other end of the cable into the Router/Modem.
• Connect the LAN Port of the VoIP Card to the LAN Switch/Hub.
• Connect the Master Ethernet Port of the ETERNITY to the Router/Modem.
8. To insert and connect another VoIP card, repeat the same steps as described above.
9. If you have completed all other installation tasks, you may switch on power supply and observe the Reset
Cycle and the LED indication of the VoIP Card.
LED Indication
There are two LEDs on the VoIP Card: LED 1 and LED 2.
• LED 1 indicates the status of the VoIP card.
• LED 2 indicates the status of any of the SIP Trunks to which this LED is assigned.
LED 1 - VoIP Card Status Indication
VoIP Card Status LED Color Cadence
Booting Up (Power On) Green Continuous ON
Once Stack Construct COMMAND is received from Master, LED will Red Continuous ON
remain ON Red and wait for the WAN and DSP download response.
WAN Stack Construction Failed -(PPPoE connection is not established Red ON 1 sec-OFF 1 sec
or IP Address Invalid or DHCP Client does not retrieve network ON 1 sec-OFF 1 sec
parameters or any other reason)
LAN Stack constructed or not
DSP Image is downloaded successfully or not
WAN Stack constructed successfully Red ON 500msec-OFF 3500 msec
LAN Stack constructed or not
DSP Image is not downloaded successfully (in all DSPs)
WAN Stack constructed successfully Green ON 500msec-OFF 3500 msec
LAN Stack constructed successfully
DSP Image not downloaded successfully (in any DSP but not all)
146 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
VoIP Card Status LED Color Cadence
WAN Stack constructed successfully Green ON 500msec-OFF 500msec
ON 500msec-OFF 2500msec
LAN Stack construct Failed
DSP Image not downloaded successfully (in any DSP but not all)
WAN Stack constructed successfully Green ON 500msec-OFF 500msec
ON 500msec-OFF 500msec
LAN Stack construct Failed ON 500msec-OFF 1500 msec
DSP Image is downloaded successfully (in all DSPs)
WAN Stack constructed successfully Green ON 1 sec - OFF 1 sec, ON
1sec - OFF 1 sec
LAN Stack constructed successfully
DSP Image is downloaded successfully (in all DSPs)
Card goes live
LED 2 - SIP Trunk Status Indication
SIP Trunk Status LED Color Cadence
SIP Trunk - Disabled Red Continuous ON
Registration Failed - Authentication Red ON 500msec-OFF 3500msec
Password Invalid
Registration Failed - Configuration Red ON 500msec-OFF 500msec
Parameter Invalid ON 500msec-OFF 2500 msec
Registration in Progress Green ON 500msec-OFF 3500 msec
Registration Successful Green Continuous ON
SIP Trunk Status will be indicated by LED2 only after you have programmed LED Indication in VoIP Port
Parameters.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 147
SIP Extensions
ETERNITY ME supports up to 999 SIP Extensions. The SIP Extensions function like DKP/SLT extensions of the
ETERNITY ME. SIP Extension users can make and receive calls to any extension user of the ETERNITY and to
external numbers over various telecom networks like CO, Mobile, ISDN PRI, BRI, and VoIP28.
You may register any SIP-enabled device, like an IP-phone, a Soft phone, Analog Phone Adapter, as the SIP
Extension of the ETERNITY ME.
To register SIP Extensions, a VoIP Card must be installed in the ETERNITY ME, and you must have the IP8
License. For more information on Licensing, see “License Management”.
You can register upto 500 SIP Extensions with a single VoIP Card of ETERNITY ME. However, at a time, only as
many extensions as the number of “Voice Channels” supported by the “The VoIP Card” can make calls.
You can register the same SIP Extension from three different locations.
You may also connect the Standard and Extended IP Phones of Matrix.
The Matrix Extended IP Phone, SETU VP248, takes on all the functions of EON48, the proprietary digital key
phone of Matrix, except the following features:
• Background Music
• CO Call Waiting
• Hot Desking
• Live Call Screening
If you register the Extended IP Phone outside the Region/Country selected for ETERNITY, the time and
Time Zone dependant features, such as Alarms, Reminders, Time Zone Display, of the phone at each
location will operate according to the Real Time Clock of ETERNITY. Also, Access Codes and Emergency
Numbers will work according to the Region/Country selected for ETERNITY.
The SIP Extensions may be registered over WAN or over LAN according to your preference and your IP network
installation scenario.
If the ETERNITY ME Master Card and VoIP Card are connected to a Public Network,
• Connect SETU VP248, the Extended IP Phone, or any Open SIP device to the LAN Switch.
• Register any SIP device (Extended IP phone or Open SIP phone) on the public network as SIP extension.
28. Calls between VoIP, Public and Private Networks may be subject to Regulation in your country. You may have to configure your
system to allow or restrict call traffic between networks to comply with the telecom regulations of your country. To know more, read
“Logical Partition”.
148 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
ETERNITY ME16S
Master Ethernet Port
LAN Switch/Hub
LAN
IP
IP
Router
VoIP Server Card
WAN
Switch Card
Master Card
When you register the Matrix Extended IP Phone with ETERNITY, make sure the Master Ethernet Port and
the WAN port of the VoIP Card are connected to the public network. The Master Ethernet Port is used for
Auto Configuration of the Matrix Extended IP Phones.
When you register a SIP device other than the Matrix Extended IP Phone on the public network as SIP
Extension of ETERNITY, in this SIP device, you must configure the following:
• the Registrar Server Address of ETERNITY ME
• the Registrar Server Port
• the SIP ID
• Authentication ID and Password.
If the ETERNITY ME Master Card and VoIP Card are connected to a Private Network (Behind the NAT),
ETERNITY ME16S
Master Ethernet Port
LAN
VoIP Server Card
WAN
Switch Card
Master Card
LAN Switch/Hub
IP
IP
Router
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 149
• Connect SETU VP248, the Extended IP Phone, or any standard IP Phone to the LAN Switch.
• You may also register any SIP device (Extended IP Phone or open SIP phone) on the public network as
SIP Extension.
When you register the Matrix Extended IP Phone with ETERNITY, configure Port Forwarding for Master
Ethernet Port and the WAN port of the VoIP Card on the Router. The Master Ethernet Port is used for
Auto Configuration of the Extended IP Phones.
Connecting SETU VP248 as Extended SIP Extension
You are recommended to complete the following steps before connecting the Matrix Extended IP Phone to ETERNITY
ME:
• Decide the location of the Extended IP Phone, whether within the same network or outside, according to
your installation scenario.
If you want to use the DHCP Server on your LAN for assigning IP Address to the Extended IP Phone, do
the following:
• use DHCP option 224 and Data Type as ‘String’ to provide Server Address to the Extended IP
Phones.
• Program the IP Address or the Dynamic DNS Domain Name of the Master Ethernet Port of
ETERNITY ME in the DHCP option.
• Log in to Jeeves. For instructions, read the topic “Using Jeeves” under Configuring ETERNITY.
• Assign an extension number (SIP ID or Access Code) to the Extended IP Phone. For instructions on
assigning SIP ID, see “Configuring SIP Extensions”.
• For the SIP extension number you assigned to the Extended IP Phone, go to the Location settings of the
extension, and do the following:
• Enable Matrix Extended IP Phone Mode.
• Enter the MAC Address of the Extended IP Phone.
• Assign the Registrar Server IP Address, as per you installation scenario.
For instructions, see the topic “Matrix Extended IP Phone Settings” under Configuring SIP Extensions.
Now, follow the steps described below to install the Extended IP Phone. The instructions are common for all models
of the SETU VP248. For the purpose of illustration, the premium model, SETU VP248P, has been used.
1. Unpack the SETU VP248 box and verify package contents.
2. Mount the phone on a desk or wall at a location convenient to you.
• When mounting the phone on the wall, detach the Foot Stand from the bottom of the phone.
150 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Pull out the Foot Stand.
Keyhole Slot 1 Keyhole Slot 2
Press down Press down
to attach/detach to attach/detach
Foot Stand. Foot Stand.
• Fix two screws of appropriate diameter on the wall, ensuring that they are aligned with the Keyhole
Slots 1 and 2.
• Use wall plugs, if required, to fix the screws. Leave the screw heads protruding from the wall to fit
into the Keyholes.
• Now, mount the phone on the wall, with the screws fitting into the Keyhole slots.
• When you mount the phone on a desk, you can attach the Foot Stand in two ways as illustrated in the
following.
Foot Stand attached at 20° Angle
Foot Stand attached at 45° Angle
If you attach the Foot Stand at 45°, the phone will be placed in an almost upright position on your
desk.
• Decide which of these positions would work for you best and accordingly attach the Foot Stand.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 151
3. Connect the Handset to the Phone body.
• Plug the long straightened end of the phone cord into the handset jack at the bottom of the phone
marked with the handset symbol.
• Plug the other (short straight) end of the phone cord into the jack at the bottom of the handset.
4. If you want to use a Headset (not supplied) with your phone, you may plug a headset with a 2.5 mm single
connector into the headset jack on the left side panel of the phone.
OR
You may plug a headset with an RJ11 connector in to the headset port at the bottom of the phone.
5. Connect the LAN Port of SETU VP248 to the LAN Switch/Hub or a Router/Modem, according to your
installation scenario.
6. To connect your phone to a computer on your desk, use an Ethernet cable (not supplied with this phone) to
connect the PC Port of the phone to the LAN Port of the computer.
7. Plug the connector of the Power Adapter in to the power jack at the back of the phone29. Use only the
adapter provided with the phone to prevent any damages that may arise from the use of other adapters.
If you want to use Power over Ethernet (PoE), ensure that your LAN supports PoE. Supply power through
an 802.3af connection on the LAN Port of the phone. Do not connect the Adapter!
8. Plug the Power Adapter into a power outlet.
9. Switch ON power supply.
When you power the phone, the boot process will be initiated in the following sequence.
29. The SETU VP248 does not have a power switch.
152 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• All keys with LED, including the Speaker key, and the Ringer LED, will glow.
• The LCD display will light up and the following message will appear on it, as the phone boots:
Welcom e to M atrix
B ooting ...
• As soon as the ‘Loading...’ message appears on the phone display, press # key.
W e l c o m e t o M a t ri x
L oad ing ...
• Select the firmware Extended - IP Phone. Move the cursor by pressing the DOWN navigation key V.
Sel ect the fir mwar e
Standar d S IP
Extended S IP
• When the cursor is placed under the Extended IP Phone, press Enter key.
Sel ect the fir mwar e
Standar d S IP
Extended S IP
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 153
• The phone will start loading the Extended IP Phone Firmware. It will display current firmware being loaded.
We l c o me to M a t ri x
L oa d in g V 0 5R 0 1 Ex t S I P
• After loading the firmware, the phone will prompt you to change Network settings.
Change Network Settings?
Yes
No
• Wait for a few seconds.
If you want to change the Network Settings, press the Enter key. Detailed instructions for changing the
Network Settings of the phone are provided at the end of this topic. See “Network Settings”at the end of
this topic.
• The phone makes DHCP Discovery and fetches its IP Address and Server Address from the DHCP
Server.
D H C P d i s c o v e r y. . . !
On getting the IP Address and Server Address, the phone initiates Auto Configuration to download the
configuration files from ETERNITY ME.
154 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• As the phone downloads the configuration files, the file names will appear one by one.
T r y i n g f o r C o n f i g. f i le
L a n g u a ge S t r . x m l
• On successful download of all configuration files, the phone attempts to register with ETERNITY ME.
Attemptin g Regist ration
• On successful registration, the phone will display the current day, date and time, the extension number and
name assigned to the Extended IP Phone.
M on 10 M AY 1 5: 4 0
2 00 1 Re ce pt i on
Network Settings
You can change the network settings of the Extended IP Phone by accessing the Local Menu of the phone. To
move the cursor and scroll through the menu and submenu options, use the following touch sense navigation keys
on your phone.
• The Enter key to make a selection or to complete an action.
• The Up key to move up the Menu.
• The Down key move down the Menu.
• The Forward key move the cursor one character.
• The Back key to move the cursor one character and to return from the submenu to the main menu.
The cursor is a non-blinking underscore that appears under the first letter of the first option in the menu. To make a
selection in the menu, you must move the cursor in the desired direction using the Up, Down, Forward and Back
key. When the cursor is at the desired position, press Enter key to make a selection.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 155
Accessing Network Settings
You can access the Network Settings of the Extended IP Phone in any of the following stages:
1. During start-up, when the phone prompts you to change the network settings after loading the firmware.
Change Network Settings?
Yes
No
You must press the Enter Key to select Yes and access network settings.
2. When the phone is making Network discovery, downloading configuration files, attempting registration.
You must press the Enter Key to access network settings,
3. When the phone is in idle state. You must press the DSS key assigned to ‘Local Menu’.
M on 10 M AY 1 5: 40
2 00 1 Re ce pt io n
Voice Mail Call Back Canc el Mute Conference Transfer
Forw ard DN D Names Redial Release Hold
Local Menu
1 2 abc 3 def
4 ghi 5 jkl 6 mno
7 pqrs 8 tuv 9 wxyz
CA04
CA03 * 0 #
CA02
CA01
When you press the Local Menu DSS Key (in idle state) or when you press the Enter key during any process, the
Local Menu appears on your phone display.
LO C AL ME N U
N e t wo r k P a r a m e t e r s
N e t wo r k S t a t u s
156 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
You can configure Network Parameters and view Network status from the Local Menu.
Configuring Network Parameters
• In the Local Menu of the phone, select Network Parameters by pressing the Enter Key.
• The Network Parameters submenu appears.
N E T W O R K PA R A M E T E R S
M A C : 0 0 : 1 b : 09 : 00 : 9a : a 7
C o n n e c t i o n Ty p e
I P A d d r e ss
S u b n e t Ma s k
G a t e w ay A d d r es s
• Use the Down/Up key to reach the desired network parameter and press Enter key to select and change
the settings.
• You can configure all network parameters described below, except the MAC Address.
Connection Type
• Select the Connection Type as DHCP, PPPoE or Static according to the IP Addressing scheme of your
network.
If you select DHCP or PPPoE, the phone will be assigned IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway
Address, DNS Address Server Address, automatically by the DHCP/PPPoE server.
For PPPoE Connection Type, you must configure the PPPoE User ID and Password provided by the
Internet Service Provider.
If you select Static, you must assign the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway Address to the phone.
IP Address
• If you select Static as Connection Type, enter the static IP Address to be assigned to the phone.
Enter the desired Static IP Address by pressing the digit keys.
To enter the dot/period in the IP Address, press the digit key ‘1’ twice.
Subnet Mask
• If you select Static as Connection Type, enter the Subnet Mask to be applied on the phone by pressing the
digit keys.
To enter the dot/period in the IP Address, press the digit key ‘1’ twice.
Gateway Address
• If you select Static as Connection Type, enter the Gateway Address here. This is the IP Address of the
LAN Port of the Router.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 157
DNS Server
• If you select Static as Connection Type, select the DNS Server option Static and configure the DNS
Address.
• If you select DHCP or PPPoE as Connection Type and your Internet Service Provider provides DNS
Address, select the DNS Server option Automatic. However, if your Internet Service Provider does not
provide DNS Address, select Static and configure the DNS Address.
DNS Address
• If you select DNS Server as Static, enter the DNS Address here.
To enter dot/period in the IP Address, press the digit key ‘1’ twice.
DNS Domain Name
• If you select DNS Server as Static, enter the DNS Domain Name here. DNS Domain Name is optional.
PPPoE User ID
• If you have selected PPPoE as Connection Type, you must enter the User ID provided to you by your
Internet Service Provider.
PPPoE Password
• This is the password provided by your Internet Service Provider for the PPPoE User ID. If you have
selected PPPoE as Connection Type, you must enter the password provided by your Internet Service
provider here.
PPPoE Service Name
• If your Internet Service Provider has provided a Service Name, enter the Service Name here. If your
Internet Service Provider has not provided a Service Name, do not configure this parameter.
Server Address
• ETERNITY ME Master Card works as the Auto Configuration Server for the phone. Enter the IP Address
or the Dynamic DNS Domain Name of the Master Ethernet Port of ETERNITY here. Default: blank.
The phone sends the request for configuration files to this Server Address.
If you have selected DHCP as Connection Type, the phone will get the Server Address automatically from
the DHCP Server. For this, use DHCP option 224 and Data Type as ‘String’ to provide Server Address
from the DHCP Server.
For PPPoE and Static Connection Types, you need to enter the Server Address.
Server Port
• Enter the Web Server Port of the Master Ethernet Port of ETERNITY here.
The phone sends the request for configuration files to this port.
Valid range of the port is: 80 or 1024–65535. Default: 80.
158 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
VLAN Setting
If your phone is connected to a virtual LAN, you need to configure VLAN Settings.
To enable the VLAN switch to correctly route packets generated by the phone and the computers (on the LAN) to
each other, the packets must be tagged with a VLAN header.
The VLAN header consists of the VLAN ID (12-bit) and Class of Service (CoS, 3-bit) for prioritization of traffic30.
The meaning of CoS bits with respect to traffic type is as follows:
CoS Traffic Type
0 Best Effort
1 Background
2 Spare
3 Excellent Effort
4 Controlled Load
5 Video
6 Voice
7 Network Control
• Select Phone VLAN/COS to add VLAN header to the packets generated by the phone, and add VLAN
header to the packets relayed from the PC to its LAN port (packets generated by the PC connected to its
PC port).
• To configure Phone VLAN/COS, select Enable?. The VLAN ID will be tagged on all packets generated
by the phone (SIP, RTP, DNS, ARP, etc.). Default: Disabled.
• Select VLAN ID and enter the VLAN ID that you have assigned to the VLAN in which the IP Phones are
connected. Valid range: 0-4094. Default: 1.
• Select SIP CoS and define the CoS (priority) bits in all SIP packets. Valid range: 0-7. Default: 3
• Select RTP CoS and define the CoS (priority) bits in all RTP packets. Valid range: 0-7. Default: 6.
• Select PC/VLAN CoS to add VLAN header to all packets entering the PC Port and leaving the LAN port of
the phone. Default: Disabled.
• To configure PC VLAN/COS, select Enable?.
• Select VLAN ID and enter the same ID as you have assigned to the VLAN in which the computers are
connected. Valid range: 0-4094. Default: 1.
• Select CoS and define the Layer 2 CoS (priority) bits. Valid range: 0-7. Default: 0.
30. The IEEE 802.1P standard allows Layer2 switches to prioritize the traffic, thus providing Quality of Service (QoS), i.e. better handling
of data that pass over a network, thereby resulting in greater reliability and quality. Quality of Service (QoS) on Layer2 is referred to as
Class of Service (CoS) which is defined by IEEE 802.1P.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 159
PCAP
To capture packets sent and received from and by the phone for monitoring and troubleshooting, you can enable
PCAP on the phone. The phone captures up to 2 MB of packets. For more information and for instructions on how
to use PCAP Trace on the phone, see “Using PCAP Trace for Matrix Extended IP Phone”, under PCAP Trace.
When you change the Network Settings, the phone will restart.
Viewing Network Status
• In the Local Menu of the phone, place the cursor on Network Status and press the Enter key.
• The Network Status submenu appears.
N E T W O R K S TAT U S
MAC: 0 0:1 b:0 9:0 0:9 a:a 7
IP : 1 92. 16 8. 2 0 1 .2 0 5
MASK: 2 5 5 . 25 5 . 2 5 5 .0
G W: 1 9 2 . 16 8 . 2 0 1 .3
DNS:
Use the Down/Up key to view the status of the various network parameters. The status of the following
parameters appear on your display as you scroll.
• MAC: This is the MAC Address of the phone.
• IP: The current IP Address assigned to the phone.
• MASK: The current Subnet mask assigned to the phone.
• GW: The current Gateway IP Address assigned to the phone.
• DNS: The Domain Name Server address assigned to the phone.
• S. ADD: The IP Address or Dynamic DNS Domain Name of the Master Ethernet Port of ETERNITY
ME.
• S. PORT: The Web Server Port of the Master Ethernet Port of ETERNITY ME.
• DOMAIN: The Domain Name assigned to the phone.
• FIRM: The version of the current Firmware of the phone.
160 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The Voice Mail System Card
The VMS Card provides a full fledged, 'in-skin' Voice Mail System with auto attendant and voice mail features. It is
designed to provide a variety of voice applications that are commonly supported by any external Voice Mail
System.
VMS Card for ETERNITY ME
Card Name Configuration and Application
Voice Mail System to providing voice mail facility to all Extensions of
ETERNITY ME Card VMS16
ETERNITY.
Each Mailbox has the capacity of storing 254 messages. The size of each Mailbox is set by default to 5 minutes.
The maximum message length for each mailbox is set by default to 15 seconds31.
The VMS card utilizes a USB memory stick as its storage medium. Matrix provides a 1GB Pen Drive with the VMS
card. The Pen Drive supports 18 hours of recording.
The VMS Card has an Ethernet Port, a communication port (COM1), a USB port, and four LEDs.
Ethernet Port
The Ethernet Port is used to connect the VMS card to a computer (standalone or in a LAN) to access and use the
embedded FTP server for Software Upgrades, Backup of configuration files and Mailbox messages. The Ethernet
Port can also be used for Debug.
Communication (COM) Port
COM1, the RS232 communication port of the VMS card is used for connecting the card to a computer for Debug.
USB Port
The USB port is an internal port, located on the main board of the card. The Pen Drive provided by Matrix with the
VMS Card is connected to this port. All the voice messages, mailbox messages, greetings and other messages and
prompts are stored in Pen Drive.
The Pen Drive is factory fitted and shipped with the card.
LEDs
The ETERNITY ME VMS16 has four LEDs: L1, L2, L3 and L4.
The L1 shows the 'Status'.
31. When the ETERNITY is installed in the Hospitality Application (Hotel Mode), the default Mailbox size would be 300 minutes and
the default length of messages is 999 seconds.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 161
Installing the VMS Card
1. Equip yourself with an electrostatic discharge preventive wrist belt and a grounding mat.
2. Unpack the card and check the package contents with the packing list.
3. Switch OFF Power supply and unplug the power cable of the ETERNITY.
4. Remove the filler bracket of the empty slot you have selected for installing the VMS card, by removing the
screws and pressing up the levers of the filler bracket.
5. Insert the VMS card into the guide rails of the slot. Make sure its connectors fit perfectly into those on the
backplane.
6. Secure the card in its slot by pushing down the levers of the mounting bracket and fixing the card with the
two screws provided.
7. If you have completed all installation tasks, switch ON the ETERNITY and observe the Reset Cycle and
the LED pattern of the VMS Card.
LED Pattern of the VMS Card
At power on
• All LEDS are OFF.
• L1 LED glows green as soon as initialization process starts. Initialization process starts after approximately
100 seconds.
• After approximately 80 seconds of glowing of L1, LEDs will follow the sequence as under:
• Glow Green-500ms-Glow Red-500ms-Glow Orange 500 ms-LEDs turned OFF.
In normal condition
LED L1 will behave in the following manner:
Condition Color Cadence
Normal Green 1 sec ON- 1 sec OFF
File System Error RED 1 sec ON- 1 sec OFF
Pen Drive Error - Pen Drive Full RED Five times 100ms ON-100ms OFF (for 1 sec) - 1 sec OFF
8. Open Jeeves, and configure the VMS Card. Refer the topic “Configuring the Voice Mail System (VMS)” for
further configuration instructions.
9. If you need to generate configuration and debug reports, connect the COM Port of the VMS Card with that
of a PC using the communication cable supplied with the card.
10. If you want to use FTP to upgrade Software of the VMS Card, upload recorded voice messages, store
Back-up of Configuration files and Mailbox messages, connect the Ethernet port of the VMS card to a
standalone PC or a PC on LAN.
162 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Plug in one end of the Ethernet cable supplied with the card into the Ethernet Port of the VMS Card.
• Plug the other end of the cable into the Ethernet port of a standalone PC or into a LAN Switch.
When you connect the VMS Card to a to a LAN PC, you need to make sure that
• The IP Address of the Ethernet Port of the VMS Card and the Ethernet Port of the LAN PC are not the
same.
• The Ethernet Port of the VMS Card and the Ethernet Port of the PC are in the same Subnet.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 163
Starting Up ETERNITY ME
Power ON
1. If you have completed all the installation tasks, switch on power supply.
• For PSUNI card installed in the system, connect the three-prong plug of the power cord from the
ETERNITY into the AC outlet, and switch on power supply.
• For PS48V card installed in the system, keep the MCB Switch ON and power the FCBC.
2. Observe the Reset Cycle.
Reset Cycle
• Reset Cycle (Power-ON Self Test) takes about 2 minutes to finish.
• All the LEDs of the system, the cards and the keys of the DKP attached to the System are turned on.
Interpreting LEDs
The functioning of the LEDs of the system and the various cards and their meaning are summarized in the
tables below. This will help you to verify if the system is operating properly and locate faults, where they
occur.
Reset Cycle on ETERNITY ME
When the reset cycle is successful, the default Station “Access Codes” loaded by the system and the date
and time of the “Real Time Clock (RTC)” of the system will appear on the LCD display of the DKPs you
have connected with the system.
3. After you have completed inserting and connecting the cards, power ON the system and observe the
Reset cycle and the LED pattern of each card, where applicable.
4. Now, close the enclosure cover, pressing down the snap lug as you push each part of the cover in its
place.
164 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
CHAPTER 5 Installing ETERNITY GE
• The Matrix ETERNITY is to be installed by persons trained and experienced in telecom wiring.
• The person installing the ETERNITY must be familiar with trunks, physical wiring of the MDF on both
the exchange (PBX) side and the line side (CO).
• When installing any equipment, make sure that you take all the necessary precautions for handling
electronic and electrical appliances. Follow proper procedures for static electricity, while handling the
system and its cards to prevent damage to the system and harm to yourself.
• Use a grounding mat and wear an anti-static strap/belt. Read the dos and don'ts listed in “Protecting
ETERNITY and Yourself”.
• If you have complied with the requirements and instructions described in '“Before You Start”, you may
now begin the installation of your ETERNITY GE.
The Matrix ETERNITY GE is shipped factory fitted with the Power supply card, the Master and Switch Card in their
respective fixed slots (refer the section “Know Your ETERNITY”).
The cards - BRI, T1E1PRI, GSM, VoIP, DKP, TWT, SLT, VMS, E&M - are shipped separately as per the order
placed by individual customers. These cards are installed in any of the Universal slots.
Illustrated below is the position of the fixed and universal slots in each variant of ETERNITY GE.
ETERNITY GE12S
The first two slots from the extreme left are reserved for the Power Supply Card and the CPU card respectively.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 165
ETERNITY GE6S
The first two slots from the extreme left are reserved for the Power Supply Card and the CPU card respectively.
ETERNITY GE3S
The first two slots from the extreme left are reserved for the Power Supply Card and the CPU card respectively.
Follow the installation instructions for cards described here also when you expand the system (add more cards) or
remove or swap cards for maintenance and repair.
1. Unpack the box. Check the package contents (see “Packing List”). Contact your Dealer/Distributor if any of
the items is missing, faulty or damaged. Do not discard the packaging material.
Mounting the System
2. Decide where to mount the ETERNITY - on a table or wall - taking into consideration the mechanical
dimensions and weight of the model you have. If mounting the system on a wall, you may refer the
mechanical dimensions and the Mounting Template for drilling holes at appropriate places on the wall.
3. When installing the system in a rack, allow adequate space between the system and other units for air
circulation.
166 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
4. Mount the system at the selected site. Make sure that the system is place such that you have full access to
the front and back panels. The holes in the panels are provided for ventilation; Make sure that these are
not blocked, to prevent overheating.
Connecting Input Power Supply
5. Ensure that a proper electrical earth and telecom earth are in place.
6. Check the voltage at the power point from where the supply is to be given to the system. It should be as
per the specifications. Earth the system properly. (Refer “How to Make the Telecom Earth”)
Inserting Cards
7. Make sure that the ETERNITY power is off and the power cord is unplugged.
8. Select a free slot from the universal slots.
9. Unscrew and remove the filler bracket that covers the card-slot opening of the slot you intend to use.
10. Hold the card with the connectors facing you. Do not grab the card from both ends.
11. Slide the card into the slot, along the guide rails provided for each slot at the top and bottom planes.
12. Ensure that the cards are inserted deep enough for all the connector pins on the cards make complete
contact with those of the motherboard on the backplane.
Do not force the card into the slot. Doing so can damage the card or the slot connector.
13. When the card is firmly seated in the connector, push down the levers on the card mounting bracket and
secure the card with the screw provided.
14. Tighten the screws on either side of the bracket.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 167
15. Following the above steps, install each card into the universal slots.
Detailed installing instructions are provided for each card - DKP, SLT, TWT, ISDN BRI, ISDN T1E1PRI,
GSM, VoIP, E&M - later in this section. Refer to them when installing each card type.
16. To remove a card:
• Switch off power supply, unplug the power cord.
• Disconnect any cables connected to the card.
• Remove the screws from the card-mounting bracket.
• Lift the levers on the mounting bracket to release the card.
• The card will emerge out of the slot.
• Grasp the card by its mounting bracket, and ease it out of its slot.
• If you are removing the card permanently or for a certain period of time, install a filler bracket over the
empty card opening in the chassis.
• Installing filler brackets over empty card-slot openings is necessary to protect the system from dust,
dirt, insects and damage.
17. Using the cables supplied with each card, and terminate the cables in the Main Distribution Frame (SLT,
DKP, TWT, and E&M lines), the NT1 device (ISDN BRI lines), ISDN Modem (ISDN PRI Lines), as
applicable.
For cards with multiple RJ45 connectors, the cables are bunched together, but each cable is identified by a
distinct color marked at the Boot edge and the Insulation edge of the cable.
The color markings make it easy for you to identify the connector on the card into which the cable is
plugged in, and the hardware ports on that connector. For example, the cable marked with blue on the
Boot and Insulation edge is connected to the first port of the card, containing the hardware ports 01-04.
Lead the cables neatly and tangle-free into the MDF.
18. After you have completed inserting and connecting the cards, power ON the system and observe the
Reset cycle and the LED pattern of each card, where applicable.
168 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The Power Supply Card
Two types of Power Supply Cards are supported by the Matrix ETERNITY GE models: PS UNI and PS48V.
• PS UNI Card with 100-240VAC, 47-63Hz Mains as Input AC Voltage Power Supply.
This card is designed on the SMPS scheme. As this card does not have any provision for battery backup,
it is recommended that a UPS be connected to keep the system powered during outages.
This card has four LEDs, a Mains Switch, and a Socket assembly for connecting the mains cord.
• PS48V Card with 48VDC as Input DC Power Supply Voltage. A Float cum Boost Charger (FCBC) is
required to feed 48VDC power to the card. The FCBC works on input AC mains.
The card has four LEDs, an MCB Switch, a power ON/OFF Switch, and a 3-way termination block for
connecting the power cord.
Both, the PS UNI card and the PS48V Card provide DC output voltages as: +3.5V, +5.0V, -27V and -85V.
These are indicated by LEDs.
Installing the Power Supply Card
The Power Supply Card is located in a fixed slot. No other card can be inserted in this slot.
The Power Supply Card is delivered factory fitted, when you buy the system. However, if you want to remove the
card for the purpose of maintenance or replace it with a new one, please follow the instructions below:
1. Unpack the Power Supply Card and verify the package contents.
If already installed, switch OFF power supply, unplug the power cord. Remove the screws securing the
card. Lift the levers on the mounting bracket to release the card. As the card emerges from the slot, ease it
out of the slot.
2. Insert the Power Supply card into the guide rails of the first slot on the extreme left, designated for the
Power Supply Card. Make sure that the card is inserted deep enough to make perfect contact with the
connectors on the motherboard at the backplane.
3. Now, press down the levers on the card mounting bracket to secure the card in its slot.
4. Secure the card in the slot by screwing the bracket on both ends.
5. If installing the PSUNI card, connect the three-pin power cord into the socket of the PS UNI card and plug
in the cord into the mains supply.
You may connect the PSUNI Card to a UPS to keep the system live during power outages.
Select a UPS considering the typical power consumption of ETERNITY presented in the table below.
Model Power Consumption (Typical)
ETERNITY GE3S 25 watts
ETERNITY GE6S 30 watts
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 169
Model Power Consumption (Typical)
ETERNITY GE12S 50 watts
6. If installing the PS48V card, connect the Float cum Boost Charger (FCBC). Terminate the power cord from
the FCBC output into the 3-way termination block on the PS48V card.
Polarity is critical. Ensure that the wires are connected with the correct polarity. Follow the standard color
codes used by FCBC manufacturers:
Color Signal
Red +48VDC
Black GND
Green Earth
It is recommended that you measure the voltage before connecting the power cable to the power supply
card. Ensure that the earth is connected.
Connecting an FCBC to the ETERNITY GE
-85VDC (LED L1)
AC Mains Supply -27VDC (LED L2)
FCBC ETERNITY GE
230VAC +/- 41 to 56V
10A Card PS48VDC +5VDC (LED L3)
10%@50Hz
+3.5VDC (LED L4)
48V Battery
7. Connect the Battery Backup32.
32. When the batteries are drained, the FCBC goes into the charge mode and begins to charge the batteries at higher current. When
the batteries reach a preset voltage level (typically set to 56.0 volts), the FCBC goes to float mode. In the float mode the FCBC
keeps charging the battery but at lower current. The FCBC monitors the voltage level of the batteries. As soon as the battery volt-
age goes below preset voltage (typically set to 50.4 volts), FCBC goes from float mode to charge mode. The change over from
mains to battery and vice-versa is automatic. The advantage of using an FCBC is that batteries get charged faster, since the bat-
teries are charged with higher current initially.
170 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Battery backup time depends upon the total load. The total load is the sum of system's load and load of
active stations. The power consumed by the variants of ETERNITY GE is given in the table below:
Model Power Consumption (Typical)
ETERNITY GE3S 25 watts
ETERNITY GE6S 30 watts
ETERNITY GE12S 50 watts
The Battery back up time depends on the 'Ah' rating of the battery connected to the FCBC. If 48V/26Ah
batteries are connected to the FCBC for the ETERNITY GE system you can ensure a backup time of 2.5 to
3 hours. The FCBC uses the constant voltage charging method. So, the batteries get charged faster if less
power is consumed by the system when in mains mode.
8. Switch on power supply, after completing all other installation tasks.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 171
The CPU Card
The CPU card is designed for the ETERNITY GE models as a combination of the Master Card and Switch Card of
ETERNITY ME. The CPU card has the functions of both cards; it manages the entire system, controls all other
slave cards (SLT, DKP, TWT+SLT, DKP+SLT, E&M, BRI, VMS, T1E1, GSM, VoIP, etc.). All configuration and
programming information is stored on this card.
The CPU card occupies a fixed slot, second from the left, with a unique arrangement of connectors. So no other
card can be inserted in the slot of the CPU card.
The CPU card has an Ethernet Port, Communication Port, a Digital Input Port (DIP), a Digital Output Port (DOP),
an Analog Input Port (AIP), an Analog Output Port (AOP), and a USB Port on the front panel.
Master Ethernet Port
The Master Ethernet Port is provided to connect ETERNITY to a PC or a LAN. This port is used for operating the
web-based programming software Jeeves, and the Property Management Software (PMS) and the Call Accounting
Software (CAS) for the Hotel Application. A cable with a standard RJ45 connector is provided for the Master
Ethernet Port.
Communication Port
This is a single asynchronous, serial, full duplex RS232C communication port, labeled as COM1. The COM Port
has a DB-9 connector. The COM port is meant for connecting a PC to the ETERNITY GE. With a PC connected to
the ETERNITY GE you can install and operate from the COM Port the following features:
• Property Management Software (PMS)
• Call Accounting Software (CAS)
• Station Message Recording (SMDR) reports
• System reports (activity and fault logs)
• Hotel reports
Use crossed cable to connect the ETERNITY GE with a computer.
Digital Input Port
The Digital Input Port (DIP) on the CPU card allows you to connect a panic switch or a sensor to the ETERNITY
GE.
Ensure that the device connected to the DIP complies with the technical specifications of this port.
Refer the topic “Digital Input Port (DIP)” to know more.
Digital Output Port
The Digital Output Port (DOP) on the CPU card allows you to connect and operate automated control applications
like a hooter, buzzer, a siren, door lock, etc. The device connected to the DOP must comply with the technical
specifications of the port.
Refer the topic “Digital Output Port (DOP)” for more information.
172 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Analog Input Port
The Analog Input Port (AIP) handles un-amplified, isolated, analog speech signals. It is used for connecting an
external music device, which may be any audio output like a PC, a CD player, or a Cassette Player. The music
device must comply with the technical specifications of this port.
The music from the external source can be played as 'Music-on-Hold' to internal as well as external callers. Refer
the sections “Connecting an External Music Source” and “Music on Hold (MOH)”.
Analog Output Port
The Analog Output Port (AOP) outputs un-amplified, isolated, analog speech signals, which can be amplified by an
external amplifier connected to the port. The port is meant for connecting a Public Address System for “Paging”.
When you connect an external paging device to the AOP, ensure that it complies with the technical specifications of
the port.
Ports and Connectors on the CPU Card at a Glance
Port Name Connector Location Function
Master Ethernet Port RJ45 Facia To connect ETERNITY to a PC/LAN (to run various
software; download system activity reports)
USB port (Device Port) USB Fascia To download data on to the ETERNITY through a PC.
Communication (COM DB-9 female Fascia To connect a PC (to run various software; download
Port) system activity reports).
Digital Input Port Push-type Fascia To connect a sensor device/panic switch
Digital Output Port Push-type Fascia To connect an automated application devices: hooter,
siren, door lock, fire alarm, bell, water pump, lights, etc.
Analog Input Port Push-type Fascia To connect an external music source
Analog Output Port Push-type Fascia To connect a public address system
LED
The CPU card has two dual color (Green and Red) LEDs.
• LED 1 - L1 works as a Heart Bit of CPU Card. In Normal Condition, L1 will be turned ON Green for 1 sec
and OFF for 1 sec.
• LED 2 - L2 indicates the Layer Application status. In Normal condition, L2 will be turned on Orange and will
blink very fast.
• Both L1 and L2 also indicate Application status.
Case 1: L1 is steady GREEN/OFF and LED2 is OFF. This means the Application has got hanged and
there is some problem at Application side code.
Case 2: LED1 is steady GREEN/OFF and LED2 is GREEN/RED/ORANGE. This means the Layer has got
hanged and there is some problem with the Layer side code.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 173
Jumpers
The position and function of the Jumpers on the CPU Card are:
Jumper Number Position Function
J12 AB Default SE Password.
BC (default) Normal.
J5 AB External Music.
BC (default) Internal Music.
J7 AB (default) External Boot.
BC Internal Boot.
J13 AB (default) Embedded ICE.
BC JTAG Mode.
Do not change the position of Jumpers number J7 and J13.
ETERNITY GE does not support Redundancy or Hot Swap.
Installing the CPU Card
Like the Power Supply Cards and the CPU too is delivered factory-fitted in the system. If you want to remove the
card for the purpose of maintenance or replace it with a new one, please follow the instructions below:
1. Unpack the CPU Card and verify the Package Contents.
If the card is already installed, switch off power supply, unplug the power cord. Remove the screws
securing the card. Lift the levers on the mounting bracket to release the card. As the card emerges from
the slot, ease it out of the slot.
2. Insert the CPU Card into the guide rails of the slot designated for the card. On all variants of ETERNITY
GE, the second slot from the left (next to the Power Supply Card) is designated for the CPU Card.
Ensure that the card makes perfect contact with the connectors on the backplane of the motherboard.
Press down the levers on the mounting bracket to secure the card in its slot.
Connect the ETERNITY GE to a Standalone PC
There are two ways to do it, depending on the type application you are going to use:
3. Connect the Ethernet Port of ETERNITY with the Ethernet Port of the stand-alone PC using the Ethernet
cable supplied with ETERNITY.
You need to connect to the PC via the Ethernet port for the following functions:
• To use the web-based programming Tool Jeeves
174 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• To configure ETERNITY using FTP
• To take debug/report on Syslog
• To capture “Station Message Detail Recording-Report”, “Station Message Detail Recording-Online”
and “Station Message Detail Recording-Posting”.
• To capture “System Activity Log” and “System Fault Log”, Hotel Motel Activity Log
• To run PMS Interface or CAS Interface in the Hotel Application33
4. Connect the Communication Port of ETERNITY with the Communication Port of the stand-alone PC using
any standard Communication Cable.
You need to connect to the PC via the COM Port for the following functions:
• To run a PMS/CAS Interface.
• To capture “Station Message Detail Recording-Report”, “Station Message Detail Recording-Online”
and “Station Message Detail Recording-Posting”.
• To capture “System Activity Log” and “System Fault Log”, Hotel Motel Activity Log
• To run PMS Interface or CAS Interface in the Hotel Application34
• To program the system using Hyper Terminal.
Connecting to the Local Area Network
5. Connect the Ethernet port of the ETERNITY GE with the LAN switch using the RJ45 Ethernet cable
supplied with the system.
With the ETERNITY connected to a LAN, you can:
• access the web-based programming tool Jeeves from any PC on the LAN.
• set up and run software applications such as PMS and CAS on any PC on the LAN.
• generate Station Message Detail Record (SMDR) Reports on any PC on the LAN.
When you connect the ETERNITY GE to a to a standalone/LAN PC, you need to make sure that
• The IP Address of the Master Ethernet Port of the ETERNITY GE and the Ethernet Port of the PC do
not conflict.
• The Master Ethernet Port of ETERNITY GE and the Ethernet Port of the PC are in the same Subnet.
Changing IP Address and Subnet Mask of the Master Ethernet Port
The default IP Address of the Master Ethernet Port of the ETERNITY GE is 192.168.1.101 and the Subnet Mask is
255.255.255.0
6. Ascertain the IP Address and Subnet of the standalone PC.
If the system is connected to a LAN PC, ask the LAN Administrator to assign an IP Address and a Subnet
Mask to the ETERNITY GE35.
7. Switch ON the system.
33. Refer the ETERNITY Hospitality System Manual to know more.
34. Refer the ETERNITY Hospitality System Manual to know more.
35. This will not be necessary, if there is a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server on the LAN.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 175
8. Change the IP Address and the Subnet Mask of the Ethernet Port36 by dialing the following commands
from a station of the ETERNITY GE.
• Dial 1#91-1234 (to enter programming mode. 1234 is the default SE Password)
You get programming tone.
To change IP Address
• Dial 2110-IP Address
For example: to change the IP Address to 192.168.50.10 dial 2110-192168050010
You get confirmation tone.
• Dial 2111-Subnet Mask
For example: to change the Subnet Mask to 255.255.255.0 dial 2111-255255255000
You get confirmation tone.
• Dial 00 to exit from the programming mode.
9. Switch off power supply and continue with other installation tasks.
Connecting a Sensor device to the Digital Input Port (DIP)
10. Refer the “Technical Specifications” of the DIP and select a compatible device. The DIP has a two-wire,
push-in (spring clamp action) connector to attach the sensor device.
Technical Specifications of the DIP
Type Loop Open/Loop Close Sensing
Minimum Required Loop (open/close) Sensing Current 1 mA
Maximum Permissible Loop (open/close) Sensing Current 7 mA
Use 0.5mm, non-stranded cables to connect the sensor device to the DIP.
To connect the sensor device to the DIP,
• strip off about half a centimeter of the insulation off the wire ends of the sensor device.
• using a blunt pin or a small flat screw driver, push back the (orange-color) levers of the connector.
• insert the stripped ends of the two wires into the two (green-color) openings of the connector, with one
wire in each opening.
36. If the ETERNITY is connected to a LAN (without a DHCP server), use the IP Address and Subnet Mask given by your LAN Admin-
istrator as the new IP Address, Subnet Mask.
176 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• ensure that both wires fit neatly into the opening.
• release pressure on the levers. Both wires will be held in place by spring clamp action.
To remove the wires,
• push back the levers.
• pull out the wires gently.
• release pressure on the levers.
Connecting a Gadget to the Digital Output Port (DOP)
11. Refer the technical specifications of the DOP and select a compatible device.
• A DC contactor (60VDC max.) can be connected to the DOP. Any external relay based device can be
interfaced with the DOP via this DC contactor.
• The DOP has a two-wire, push-in (spring clamp action) connector to attach the relay device.
• Use 0.5mm, non-stranded cables to connect the gadget to the DOP.
Technical Specifications of the DOP
Relay Type Solid State (CMOS) Relay
Contact Arrangement 1 Normally Open, 1-Form-A
Contact Rating (Resistive Load) 60VDC Max. @ 0.15 Amp
Operation Time 5 ms
To connect the device to the DOP,
• strip off about half a centimeter of the insulation off the wire ends of the gadget.
• using a blunt pin or a small flat screw driver, push back the (orange-color) levers of the connector.
• insert the stripped ends of the two wires into the two (green-color) openings of the connector, with
one wire in each opening.
• ensure that both wires fit snugly into the openings.
• release pressure on the levers. Both wires will be held in place by spring clamp action.
To remove the wires,
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 177
• push back the levers.
• pull out the wires gently.
• release pressure on the levers.
Connecting a Public Address System
12. Refer the technical specifications of the Analog Output Port and select a compatible Public Address
System (PAS) device.
Connect a good quality external amplifier and matching speakers to the port.
Technical Specifications of the AOP
Specification Value
Interface Type Audio Signal
Frequency 300Hz to 3400Hz
Maximum Voltage 0.707Vrms across 600
Use shielded cable for connecting the amplifier with the speakers.
Also refer the topic “Paging”.
To connect the amplifier and speakers,
• strip off about half a centimeter the wire-pair of the amplifier.
• using a blunt pin or a small flat screw driver, push back the (orange-color) levers of the AOP connector.
• insert the stripped ends of the two wires into the two (green-color) openings of the connector, with one
wire in each opening.
• ensure that both wires fit snugly into the openings.
• release pressure on the levers. Both wires will be held in place by spring clamp action.
To remove the wires,
• push back the levers.
• pull out the wires gently.
• release pressure on the levers.
Connecting an External Music Source
13. Refer the technical specifications of the Analog Input Port and select a compatible external music source -
Cassette Player, FM Radio, CD Player, etc.
Analog Input Port Technical Specifications
Specification Value
Interface Type Audio Signal
Frequency 300Hz to 3400Hz
178 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Specification Value
Maximum Voltage 0.707Vrms across 600
DC Bias Not more than 10V DC
Isolation Internal Transformer
Source Impedance required 600
Termination provided 600
To connect the music source,
• strip off about half a centimeter of insulation of the wire-pair of the external music device.
• using a blunt pin or a small flat screw driver, push back the (orange-color) levers of the AIP connector.
• insert the stripped ends of the two wires into the two (green-color) openings of the connector, with one
wire in each opening.
• ensure that both wires fit snugly into the openings.
• release pressure on the levers. Both wires will be held in place by spring clamp action.
To remove the wires,
• push back the levers.
• pull out the wires gently.
• release pressure on the levers.
Also refer the topics “Music on Hold (MOH)”, “Background Music (BGM)”, “External Music”.
The volume of the external music source must be set to a level such that the music on the trunks is neither
very low nor very high. The volume of the signal coming from this device must never increase beyond the
specified limits - 0.707Vrms across 600.
Do not apply electrical signal of higher volume than the specified limit to this port, as it may cause
permanent damage to the system. Matrix Warranty does not cover damages resulting from improper use.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 179
The Single Line Telephone Card
The Single Line Telephone (SLT) Card provides the interface to connect as extension phones, any standard, two-
wire, analog single line telephone instrument - rotary, pulse-tone, cordless, feature phones with or without Calling
Line Identification.
The SLT Card is available in the following configurations for the models of ETERNITY GE. SLT interface also is
available in combination with Two-wire trunk and digital key phone interfaces on a single card.
SLT Cards for ETERNITY GE
Card Name Configuration and Application
ETERNITY GE Card SLT20 20-port card to connect 20 Single Line Telephones
ETERNITY GE Card SLT8 8-port card to connect 8 Single Line Telephones
ETERNITY GE Card DKP4+SLT16 Combination card, with 4-ports to connect to 4 Digital Key Phones and
16 ports to connect 16 Single Line Telephones
ETERNITY GE Card Combination card, with 2 ports to connect 2 Two-wire Trunk lines, 2
TWT2+DKP2+SLT16 ports to connect 2 Digital Key Phones, and 16 ports to connect 16
Single Line Telephones
ETERNITY GE Card TWT8+SLT8 Combination card with 8 ports to connect 8 Two-wire Trunk lines, and
8 ports to connect 8 Single Line Telephones
ETERNITY GE Card TWT4+SLT16 Combination card with 4 ports to connect 4 Two-wire Trunk lines, and
16 ports to connect 16 Single Line Telephones
The maximum number of SLT ports supported by the variants of ETERNITY GE are:
• ETERNITY GE3S: 60 SLT ports
• ETERNITY GE6S:120 SLT ports
• ETERNITY GE12S: 240 SLT ports
Connectors
The SLT Cards have RJ45 connectors, with each connector having 4 SLT ports. A multi-pair, MDF cable is supplied
for each connector.
LEDs
The Card SLT8 has 2 LEDs, while SLT20 has no LED:
• The LEDs indicate the health of the card during the Reset Cycle.
• the status of any one of the station ports during normal functioning of the system.
You can monitor any of the SLT Station ports by assigning the LED to that port37.
37. To do this, enter SE mode, enter the programming mode from any station connected to the ETERNITY, by dialing 1#91-1234. Dial
the command 7902-Slot-LED Number-Port, where Slot is the number of the universal slot in which the card is installed and Port is
the port on the card to which the LED is to be assigned to monitor its functioning. LED Number is the number of the LED on the
card, which will monitor the port. Exit programming mode by dialing '00'.
180 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
LED Pattern of SLT Card
LED 2 (L2)
PORT Status LED Color LED Cadence
Commands from Application to SLT Port. GREEN Togglea at each command
Events to Application from SLT Port. RED Toggleb at each event
a. The current LED state will remain the same until the next command is received from the ap-
plication on the SLT Port. For example, if the current LED state is Green/Red ON, on the
next command received, the LED will be turned OFF. It will remain OFF until the next com-
mand is received. When the next command is received it will be turned Green/Red ON
again. This process continues.
b. Same as above note.
Installing Single Line Telephones
To be able to connect Single Line Telephones as Stations (Extensions) to your ETERNITY GE, you must install at
least one of the aforementioned SLT cards in the System.
1. Decide the number of SLT extensions required and arrange for as many telephone instruments.
You may use any standard telephone instrument like a rotary phone, a pulse-tone switchable push-button
phone, a feature phone or a cordless phone.
Use SLTs equipped with a 'Flash' key, as several of the features and facilities of the ETERNITY require
you to press Flash. If any of the SLTs you have selected does not have a Flash key, tap the Hook switch of
the phone to dial Flash.
2. Unpack the SLT card and check the package contents. Ensure that the power supply is switched off,
before you begin the installation of the card. Always wear an electrostatic discharge prevention wrist strap/
belt and use a grounding mat.
3. Unscrew and remove the filler card mount bracket of any of the free (empty) Universal Slots. Do not
discard the filler bracket! You may require it at a later stage.
4. Insert the SLT Card into the guide rails of the free slot you selected for the card.
Make sure that the connectors on the card make perfect contact with those on the motherboard on the
backplane.
5. Press down the levers on the mounting bracket to secure the card in its slot. Now, secure the mounting
bracket with the two screws provided.
If you are installing more than one SLT card, you can install the second card in any other free slot. It is not
necessary to install the second/third card in the subsequent slots.
6.Use the cables supplied with the SLT card to connect the SLT wires with the Main Distribution Frame.
For each connector on the SLT Card, there is a separate 4-pair cable with an RJ45 jack on one end and
free at the other end.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 181
The cables are bunched together, but each cable is identified by a distinct color marked at the Boot edge
and the Insulation edge of the cable.
The color markings make it easy to identify the connector in which the cable is plugged in and the ports on
the connector.
Refer the illustrations below to help you identify which cable to plug into each connector and the ports on
each connector.
ETERNITY GE Card SLT20
Connector Color Connection H/w Port Offset
RJ45-1 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 01
1 (Blue) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 02
Green - (Green & White) SLT 03
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 04
RJ45-1 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 05
2 (Orange) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 06
Green - (Green & White) SLT 07
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 08
RJ45-1 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 09
(Green) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 10
3 Green - (Green & White) SLT 11
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 12
RJ45-1 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 13
(Brown) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 14
4 Green - (Green & White) SLT 15
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 16
RJ45-1 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 17
(Blue) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 18
5 Green - (Green & White) SLT 19
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 20
182 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
ETERNITY GE Card SLT8
ETERNITY GE Card DKP4+SLT16
Refer “Installing Digital Key Phone Card”.
ETERNITY GE Card TWT2+DKP2+SLT16
Refer “Installing the TWT Card”.
ETERNITY GE Card TWT8+SLT8
Refer “Installing the TWT Card”.
ETERNITY GE Card TWT4+SLT16
Refer “Installing the TWT Card”.
7. Plug in the RJ45 end of the MDF cables supplied with the card into the respective connectors with the help
of the color markings on the cables as illustrated above for each SLT Card type.
8. Terminate the open end of the cables into the punch down blocks of the Krone modules designated for
'Station Lines' in the “The Main Distribution Frame (MDF)”.
Each wire-pair from the ETERNITY SLT Port must be terminated to the bottom of the Krone Connector,
while the wire-pair of the extension line to be connected to this port must be terminated on the top of the
Krone connector. Refer the topic “The Main Distribution Frame (MDF)” for illustration.
9. Repeat the same steps to install another SLT card.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 183
Connecting SLT instruments
10. Connect the SLT instruments you have arranged for. Plug in the SLTs into the wall socket/outlets.
• For the purpose of testing, you may connect one or two Single Line Telephone instruments by plugging
in the phone cables into the RJ45 connectors on the card.
• When you plug the RJ11 connector of SLT into an RJ45 connector on the SLT card, the SLT will be
connected on the first port on the connector.
184 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The Intercom Line Card
For the Building Intercom application, ETERNITY GE supports the Intercom Line Card (ILC).38
You can connect any standard, two-wire, analog single line telephone instrument - rotary, pulse-tone, cordless,
feature phones with or without Calling Line Identification to the Intercom Line card.
The Intercom Line Card is available in the following configurations for the variants of ETERNITY GE.
ILC Cards for ETERNITY GE
Card Name Configuration and Application
ETERNITY GE Card ILC20 20-port card to connect 20 Single Line Telephones
ETERNITY GE Card ILC8 8-port card to connect 8 Single Line Telephones
Choose an ILC Card with the configuration that meets your requirement for intercom ports. Also, consider the
maximum Port capacity of the system you are installing. The maximum number of intercom ports supported by the
variants of ETERNITY GE are:
• ETERNITY GE3S: 60 Intercom Ports
• ETERNITY GE6S:120 Intercom Ports
• ETERNITY GE12S: 240 Intercom Ports
Connectors
The ILC Cards have RJ45 connectors, with each connector having 4 ports. A multi-pair, MDF cable is supplied for
each connector.
LEDs
The Card ILC8 has 2 LEDs, while ILC 20 has no LED:
• The LEDs indicate the health of the card during the Reset Cycle.
• the status of any one of the station ports during normal functioning of the system.
Installing Single Line Telephones
To be able to connect intercom telephones to your ETERNITY GE, you must install at least one of the
aforementioned intercom line cards in the system.
1. Decide the number of intercom extensions required and arrange for as many telephone instruments.
2. Ensure that the extension wiring is completed according to your requirements. The extension cables from
the wall jack are terminated in the Main Distribution Frame and the telephones are connected to the wall
jacks.
3. Always wear an electrostatic discharge prevention wrist strap/belt and use a grounding mat to prevent
damage to the components of the card.
38. Check Availability. This card is supported by Firmware Version 10.06 and later only.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 185
4. Unpack the ILC card and check the package contents. Switch off power supply before you install the card.
5. Unscrew and remove the filler card mount bracket of any of the free (empty) Universal Slots. Keep the filler
bracket for future use.
6. Insert the ILC card into the guide rails of the free slot you selected for the card.
Make sure that the connectors on the card make perfect contact with those on the motherboard on the
backplane.
7. Press down the levers on the mounting bracket to secure the card in its slot. Now, secure the mounting
bracket with the two screws provided.
8. Repeat these steps to install another card.
9. Now, use the cables supplied with the ILC card to connect the card to the Main Distribution Frame to which
the intercom phones are connected.
For each connector on the card, there is a separate 4-pair cable with an RJ45 jack on one end and free at
the other end. Refer the illustrations of the pinout of the intercom cards to connect the wires.
ETERNITY GE Card ILC20
Connector Color Connection H/w Port Offset
RJ45-1 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 01
1 (Blue) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 02
Green - (Green & White) SLT 03
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 04
RJ45-1 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 05
2 (Orange) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 06
Green - (Green & White) SLT 07
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 08
RJ45-1 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 09
(Green) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 10
3 Green - (Green & White) SLT 11
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 12
RJ45-1 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 13
(Brown) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 14
4 Green - (Green & White) SLT 15
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 16
RJ45-1 Blue - (Blue & White) SLT 17
(Blue) Orange - (Orange & White) SLT 18
5 Green - (Green & White) SLT 19
Brown - (Brown & White) SLT 20
186 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
ETERNITY GE Card ILC8
10. If you have completed all other installation tasks, power ON the system, observe the Reset Cycle.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 187
The Digital Key Phone Card
The Digital Key Phone (DKP) Card provides the interface to connect the proprietary digital key phones, EON, the
PC-based phone EONSOFT and the Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles with the ETERNITY.
The DKP Card is available in the following configurations for the models of ETERNITY GE.
DKP Cards for ETERNITY GE
Card Name Configuration and Application
ETERNITY GE DKP16 16-port card to connect 16 DKP/DSS Consoles
ETERNITY GE DKP8 8-port card to connect 8 DKP/DSS Consoles
ETERNITY GE Card Combination card, with 4-ports to connect to 4 Digital Key Phones and 16 ports to
DKP4+SLT16 connect 16 Single Line Telephones
ETERNITY GE Card Combination card, with 2 ports to connect 2 Two-wire Trunk lines, 2 ports to connect 2
TWT2+DKP2+SLT16 Digital Key Phones, and 16 ports to connect 16 Single Line Telephones
The maximum number of DKP Ports supported by each variant of ETERNITY GE is:
• ETERNITY GE3S: 48 DKP ports
• ETERNITY GE6S: 96 DKP ports
• ETERNITY GE12S: 128 DKP ports
Connectors
The DKP Cards have RJ45 connectors, with each connector having 4 DKP ports. A multi-pair MDF cable is
supplied for each connector on the card.
LEDs
The DKP16 and DKP8 cards have two dual color LEDs:
• LED1 indicates the health of the card during the Reset Cycle.
• LED2 monitors the status of any one of the station ports during normal functioning of the system.
LED 2 can be assigned to any DKP port to monitor the status of that port39.
39. You can do this from the SE mode, by dialing the SE Command 7902-Slot-LED Number-Port, where Slot is the number of the uni-
versal slot in which the card is installed and Port is the port on the card to which the LED is to be assigned to monitor its function-
ing. LED Number is the number of the LED on the card, which will monitor the port.
188 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
LED Pattern DKP Card
LED 2 (L2)
PORT Status LED Color LED Cadence
Commands from Application to DKP Port. GREEN Togglea
Events to Application from DKP Port. RED
a. The current LED state will remain the same until the next command is received
from the application on the DKP Port. For example, if the current LED state is
Green/Red ON, on the next command received, the LED will be turned OFF. It
will remain OFF until the next command is received. When the next command
is received it will be turned Green/Red ON again. This process continues.
Installing Digital Key Phone Card
To install the proprietary digital key phone EON and the DSS Consoles and the PC-based EON SOFT, you must
have at least one of the above mentioned DKP Cards installed in the system.
1. Decide the number of DKP extensions and DSS Consoles required and arrange for as many EON,
EONSOFT and DSS Consoles.
2. Unpack the DKP card and check the package contents. Make sure that power supply is switched off and
you are wearing an antistatic-wrist strap/belt and have a grounding mat, before handling the card.
3. Unscrew and remove the filler card mount bracket of any of the free (empty) Universal Slots. Do not
discard the filler bracket, keep for future use to cover empty slots.
4. Insert the DKP card into the guide rails of the free slot you have selected for the card. All the pins on the
connector of the card should make perfect contact with those on the connector of the slot on the backplane
motherboard.
5. Press down the levers on the mounting bracket to secure the card in its slot. Now, fix the card in its slot
with the two screws provided.
If you are installing more than one DKP card, it is not necessary to install the next card in the subsequent
slot.
6. Using the MDF Cables supplied with the DKP card connect the DKP wire pairs to the Main Distribution
Frame.
For each connector on the DKP card, there is a separate cable with an RJ45 jack on one end and free wire
on the other end. The cables are bunched together. Each cable is identified by a distinct color marked at
the Boot Edge and the Insulation edge of the cable
The color markings make it easy to identify the connector and the ports to which the cable is connected.
Refer the illustrations below to help you identify which cable to plug into each connector and the ports on
each connector.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 189
ETERNITY GE Card DKP16
ETERNITY GE Card DKP8
190 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
ETERNITY GE Card DKP4+SLT16
ETERNITY GE Card TWT2+DKP2+SLT16
Refer the topic “Installing the TWT Card”.
7. Plug in the RJ45 end of the DKP cables into the respective connectors guided by the color markings on the
cables as illustrated above for each DKP Card Type.
8. Terminate the free end of the cables into the punch down blocks of the Krone modules designated for
'Station Lines' in the Main Distribution Frame (MDF).
Each wire-pair from the ETERNITY GE DKP Port must be terminated to the bottom of the Krone
Connector, while the wire-pair of the extension line to be connected to this port must be terminated on the
top of the Krone connector. Refer the topic “The Main Distribution Frame (MDF)” for illustration.
Installing EON
Matrix offers EON, the proprietary digital key phone. EON is available in the following models:
• EON42
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 191
• EON48
1. Unpack the box and verify the package contents.
2. Mount the phone on a desk or wall at a convenient location.
EON42
• To mount EON42 on a wall, detach the Foot Stand on the bottom of the phone, by pressing the snap fits of
the foot stand backwards, and lifting it from its anchorage in the mounting holes.
• Now, insert the snap fits of the foot stand into the Wall Mount bracket slots on the bottom of the phone in
the " wall up" direction.
• Fix two screws of appropriate diameter on the wall, ensuring that they are aligned with the Keyhole Slots 1
and 2 of EON42. The screws should protrude from the wall to fit into the Keyhole Slots.
• Now, mount the phone with the screws fitting into the keyhole slots.
• Connect the handset of the EON42 to the phone body using the spring cord.
• To use a Headset (not supplied with the phone), plug any standard stereo headset with 2.5mm single
connector into the headset jack on the left side panel of the phone.
192 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
EON48
• To mount EON48 on a wall, detach the Foot Stand on the bottom of the phone, as illustrated below.
• Fix two screws of appropriate diameter on the wall, ensuring that they are aligned with the Keyhole Slots 1
and 2 of EON48. The screws should protrude from the wall to fit into the Keyhole Slots.
• Now, mount the phone with the screws fitting into the keyhole slots.
• When you mount EON48 on a desk, you can attach the Foot Stand in two ways as illustrated below.
• Connect the handset of the EON48 to the phone body using the spring cord.
• To use a Headset (not supplied with the phone), plug any standard stereo headset with 2.5mm single
connector into the headset jack on the left side panel of the phone.
You can also plug in a headset with RJ11 connector into the Headset port at the bottom of the phone.
3. Plug one end of the RJ45 cable supplied with the phone into the RJ45 connector and the other end into the
wall jack. The cable in the wall jack originates from the DKP card through the MDF.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 193
4. When the ETERNITY is powered ON, the EON will get reset. The EON communicates with the ETERNITY.
The handshaking lasts for 5-6 seconds. The EON model, version and revision number, along with the
message 'Please wait'… appear on the LCD display.
M AT R I X E O N 4 8 - S V 2 R 2
PLEASE WAI T .. .
5. After successful handshaking and reset cycle, if the DKP Parameters have been programmed, the LCD
display of the EON will show the station number and the station name in a line. The day, date and time,
time zone in the other line.
202 Reception
M on 2 4 A U G 1 2 : 0 0
6. You may adjust the LCD for brightness, contrast and backlight. Refer the topic, “Digital Key Phone-
Operation”.
For the purpose of testing, you may connect one or two DKPs directly to the connectors of the ETERNITY
DKP card.
Installing DSS Consoles
Once you have installed EON with ETERNITY, installing DSS Consoles can be done in a few simple steps, very
much similar to those involved in the installation of EON.
1. Unpack the box and verify the package contents.
2. Place the DSS Console next to the DKP, EON, to which it is to be attached.
You can install two DSS consoles to a DKP. Refer “Direct Station Selection Console” for possible
combinations for installing the various models of DSS Consoles.
3. Decide which DKP Ports on the DKP Card are to be assigned to the DSS Consoles. You may select any
free (unused) port on the card for DSS Consoles. It is not necessary for the DSS Console ports to be in a
sequence with the DKP ports to which they are attached.
For example: you have connected DKP1 to Port 1 on the first RJ45 connector of the DKP8 card. You want
to attach two DSS Consoles to DKP1. The two DSS Consoles may be connected to any port on the
second connector of the card, not necessarily to Port 2 and Port 3 on the first connector.
4. The wire-pairs from the DKP Ports designated for DSS Consoles should be terminated into the bottom of
the Krone Connector (of 'Station Lines' on the MDF).
194 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
5. The wire-pairs of the DSS Consoles should be terminated into the top of the Krone Connector (of 'Station
Lines' on the MDF).
Refer the topic “The Main Distribution Frame (MDF)” for illustration.
6. ETERNITY automatically assigns the first DSS Console discovered on the system to the first DKP, the
second DSS to the second DKP.
7. Only when two DSS Consoles are to be assigned to a single DKP, manual assignment of DSS to the DKP
is required. Refer “Configuring DKP Extensions”.
Installing EONSOFT
To install EONSOFT, you must have a computer with Windows as the operating system. The EONSOFT is
compatible with the following Operating Systems of Windows:
• Windows 98
• Windows XP
• Windows NT
• Windows 2003
• Windows Vista
1. Unpack the box and verify the package contents.
2. Connect the Handset to the dongle in the handset jack. If using a headset, connect the microphone and
the speaker connectors into the dongle.
3. Connect one end of the Communication cable to the COM port of the dongle. Connect the other end of the
communication cable into the COM port of the computer.
4. Connect a wire-pair of a DKP port of the ETERNITY to the RJ11 port marked 'DKP' on the dongle.
5. Switch ON the computer. The computer must have Windows Operating System installed on it.
6. Now insert the EONSOFT CD-ROM supplied with this PC-based DKP into the CD drive of your Computer.
The EONSOFT has a self-executing program and will automatically install itself on your PC.
7. If the software does not perform auto install on your PC, browse to CD-ROM.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 195
8. The software program will appear, with the Matrix Icon and labeled as 'Matrix-EONSOFT'.
9. Click the Matrix EONSOFT Icon to execute installation of the program.
10. After the program has been installed and run, a shortcut will be automatically created and appear on your
desktop.
11. Click the shortcut to open the program. The EONSOFT window will open:
12. Click 'Options' at the top left of the window. A drop down menu will appear.
196 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
13. Click the option 'COM Port'.
14. Select the COM Port to which the communication cable is connected.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 197
15. This dialog box will be displayed:
This screen will appear only if the DKP port to which the EONSOFT is connected has been programmed
for parameters like Name, Station number, Date and Time.
• If this dialog box does not appear on the screen in response to the click the COM Port Option, test the
COM Port for data transfer.
• If the wrong COM port has been selected, a dialog box will pop up on your screen with the message:
"COMx is invalid or busy, please select another COM Port". Select the correct COM Port.
Testing the COM Port
• From the drop down menu of 'Options', select the 'COM Port' to which you have connected the
communication cable.
• The COM Port Settings dialog box will open.
• Connect the communication cable to the COM Port of the PC.
• Short pin2 and pin3 of the DB-9 connector at the free end of the cable.
• Click the button labeled 'Start Test' in the COM Port Settings dialog box.
• After clicking this button, observe the Test Result section on the dialog box.
198 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• The 'Error Count' value shows zero, if both the communication cable and the COM port are working.
The above screen shows that the COM Port/communication cable is working.
• If the 'Error Count' shows a value other than zero, it means that either the communication cable or the
COM port of the PC is faulty.
Above screen shows the faulty COM Port/Communication Cable.
• Remove the communication cable from the COM Port of the PC.
• Short pin2 and pin3 of the communication port of the computer and click 'Start Test' in the COM Port
Settings dialog box.
• Now, if the error count is zero, please check the Communication Cable.
• If the error count is not a zero, the COM Port of the PC is faulty. Try another communication port.
Test the functioning of the COM Port of the PC and the communication cable, before you install the
EONSOFT.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 199
The Two-Wire Trunk Card
The Two-Wire Trunk (TWT) Card provides the interface to connect the ETERNITY with the POTS Network. The
TWT Card supports the different standards and features of POTS Networks across the world.
The TWT Card is available in the following configurations for the variants of ETERNITY GE. TWT interface is also
available in combination with SLT and DKP ports on a single card.
TWT Cards for ETERNITY GE
Card Name Configuration and Application
ETERNITY GE Card TWT16 16-port card to connect 16 Two-wire Trunk lines from the CO network
ETERNITY GE Card TWT8 8-port card to connect 8 Two-wire Trunk lines from the CO network
ETERNITY GE Card Combination card, with 8 TWT ports to connect 8 TWT analog trunk lines and 8
TWT8+SLT8 SLT ports to connect 8 Single Line Telephones
ETERNITY GE Card Combination card, with 4 TWT ports to connect 4 TWT analog trunk lines and 16
TWT4+SLT16 SLT ports to connect 16 Single Line Telephones
ETERNITY GE Card Combination card, with 2 TWT ports to connect 2 Two-wire Trunk lines, 2 DKP
TWT2+DKP2+SLT16 ports to connect 2 Digital Key Phones, and 16 SLT ports to connect 16 Single
Line Telephones
The maximum TWT Trunk Ports supported by the variants of ETERNITY GE is:
• ETERNITY GE 3S: 48
• ETERNITY GE6S: 96
• ETERNITY GE12S: 128
Connectors
The TWT Card has RJ45 connectors, with 4 TWT ports on each connector. A multi-pair, MDF cable is supplied for
each connector on the card.
LED
The TWT16 and TWT8 Cards have two LEDs to indicate:
• the health of the card during the Reset Cycle
• the status of a selected Trunk port during normal functioning of the system
You can assign the LED to any TWT port on the card which you want to monitor40.
Among the combination cards TWT2+DKP2+SLT16, TWT2+DKP2+SLT8, TWT4+TWT16 have no LEDs.
The combination card TWT8+SLT8 has two LEDs.
LED Pattern of TWT Card
40. To assign the LED to a selected port for monitoring its functioning, you must enter SE mode and dial the SE Command 7902-Slot-
-LED Number-Port, where Slot is the number of the universal slot in which the card is installed and Port is the port on the card to
which the LED is to be assigned to monitor its functioning. LED Number is the number of the LED on the card, which will monitor
the port.
200 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
LED 2 (L2)
PORT Status LED Color LED Cadence
Commands from Application to TWT Port. GREEN Togglea
Events to Application from TWT Port. RED
a. The current LED state will remain the same until the next command is received
from the application on the TWT Port. For example, if the current LED state is
Green/Red ON, on the next command received, the LED will be turned OFF. It
will remain OFF until the next command is received. When the next command
is received it will be turned Green/Red ON again. This process continues.
Installing the TWT Card
For TWT connectivity, you must install at least one of the above mentioned TWT Cards in the system.
1. Take all the necessary precautions prescribed for handling the cards and electronic equipment. Make sure
that power supply is turned off before you begin the installation of the card. Put on an electrostatic-
discharge preventive wrist strap/belt and use a grounding mat.
2. Unpack the TWT card and check the package contents.
3. Select any free (empty) slot from the Universal Slots. Unscrew and remove the filler bracket of the empty
slot. Preserve the filler bracket for future use!
4. Insert the TWT Card into the guide rails of the free slot you selected for the card. The connectors on the
card should make perfect contact with those of the slot on the backplane motherboard.
5. Press down the lever on the card mounting brackets to secure the card in its slot. Fix the mounting bracket
in place with the two screws provided.
If installing more than one TWT Card, it is not necessary to insert the other cards in subsequent slots. Any
card can be inserted in any of the Universal Slots.
6. Use the cables supplied for each connector on the TWT card to connect the Trunk Lines with the Main
Distribution Frame.
The cable for each connector is identified by a distinct color marked at the Boot edge and the Insulation
edge of the cable. This is to help you identify the connector and the ports to which the cable is connected.
You may refer the illustrations below to identify which cable to plug into each connector with the help of the
color markings on the cable.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 201
ETERNITY GE Card TWT16
ETERNITY GE Card TWT8
202 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
ETERNITY GE Card TWT8+SLT8
ETERNITY GE Card TWT4+SLT16
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 203
ETERNITY GE Card TWT2+DKP2+SLT16
7. Plug in the RJ45 end of the Trunk Card cables into the respective connectors referring to the color
markings on the cables as illustrated above for each TWT Card type.
8. Terminate the free end of the TWT Card cable into the punch down blocks of the Krone modules
designated for 'Trunk Lines' on “The Main Distribution Frame (MDF)”.
Trunk cables from the ETERNITY are to be connected with the Trunk Lines from the PSTN/CO terminated
on the MDF. Each wire-pair form the ETERNITY GE TWT Port must be terminated on the bottom of the
Krone Connector, while the wire-pair of the trunk line from the CO Network to be connected to this port
must be terminated on the top of the Krone Connector.
Refer the topics “The Main Distribution Frame (MDF)” and “Terminating Trunk and Station Cables on the
MDF”.
9. Repeat these steps to install other TWT cards, if applicable.
204 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The BRI Card
The BRI card provides the interface to connect ETERNITY with ISDN BRI Lines. The BRI lines may be from a
public ISDN exchange, a private ISDN exchange.
The BRI Card is available in the following configuration for the variants of ETERNITY GE.
BRI Cards of ETERNITY GE
Card Name Configuration and Application
ETERNITY GE Card BRI4 4-Port card to connect 4 ISDN BRI Lines or ISDN Compatible Devices
The maximum number of BRI lines supported by each variant of ETERNITY GE are:
• ETERNITY GE3S: 12 BRI lines.
• ETERNITY GE6S: 24 BRI lines
• ETERNITY GE12S: 32 BRI lines
Connectors
The BRI card has 4 RJ45 Connectors. A separate cable is supplied for each connector.
ISDN BRI - Installation Scenarios
Most ISDN Service Providers also provide the NT1 device along with the BRI line. The BRI Line from the ISDN
central office is terminated on the NT1 on the Customer's Premises, as illustrated below.
ISDN
Network NT 1 BRI Port
ETERNITY
Power
U-Interface S/T
(2-wire) Interface
Customer Premises
Where,
• U Interface = between the NT1 equipment and the ISDN central office.
• S/T Interface = between the ISDN user equipment, in this case, ETERNITY and the Network Interface
Equipment (NT1).
The BRI line is terminated on the NT1. The S/T interface of the NT1 is connected to BRI port of the ETERNITY.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 205
TE and NT Modes
In this illustration, the BRI line from ISDN Service Provider is directly connected to BRI port of the ETERNITY via
the NT1 device. Here, the ETERNITY is the Terminal Equipment, so the BRI Port must be programmed to work in
the TE mode.
When an ISDN Phone is to be connected to the BRI port of ETERNITY, the BRI port must be programmed to work
in NT mode.
When a BRI port of another ISDN PBX is to be connected to the BRI port of the ETERNITY, in such a configuration,
you may configure
• the BRI port of the other ISDN PBX in the TE mode and the BRI Port of the ETERNITY in the NT mode.
OR
• the BRI port of the other ISDN PBX in the NT mode and the BRI Port of the ETERNITY in the TE mode
Also refer the topic “ISDN-BRI” to know more.
Types of BRI Configuration
There are two types of configurations in BRI: Point-to-Point Configuration and Point-to-Multipoint Configuration.
Each of these is discussed below.
Point-to-Point Configuration
BRI Line
NT BRI Port
ISDN (TE Mode)
Network
(UP to 1 Km.)
ETERNITY
The maximum distance between the NT (Network Termination, NT1 or NT2) and a single Terminal Equipment, in
this case ETERNITY, can be up to 1 kilometer.
Point-to-Multipoint Configuration
A maximum of 8 ISDN equipment can be connected on a single BRI Bus line in a Point-to-Multipoint configuration.
Further, two configurations are possible in a Point-to-Multipoint configuration:
a. Short Passive Bus Configuration
b. Extended Passive Bus Configuration
206 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Short Passive Bus Configuration
d < 200 meters
ISDN NT
Network BRI Bus Bar
Terminal
BRI Port Resistance 100
(TE Mode)
Terminal
Resistance 100
ETERNITY ISDN Phone ISDN Phone ISDN Phone
Terminal 1 Terminal 2 Terminal 3 Terminal 8
Where,
TE = Terminal Equipment or ISDN device (End user device)
NT = Network Termination provided by the ISDN Service Provider
d = distance from NT to the last TE equipment.
In a Short Passive Bus Configuration,
• A maximum of 8 TEs or ISDN devices can be connected to a single NT on a bus up to 200 meters from the
NT.
• 100 Terminal Resistance is required to be inserted at the NT side as well as the last TE Equipment as
shown in the figure.
• Using this configuration, any subscriber from ETERNITY can access a BRI line and can make outgoing
calls. At the same time, another subscriber from ETERNITY or any ISDN phone shown in the figure can
make outgoing call from the same BRI. In the same way, incoming calls are possible on the same BRI.
• Only two simultaneous speech paths can be established, as BRI supports 2 voice channels only.
• This configuration is useful on the smaller premises, where a single BRI line and multiple ISDN devices are
used.
Extended Passive Bus Configuration
d < 1 Km
d1 < 30 meters
ISDN NT
Network BRI Bus Bar
Terminal
Terminal BRI Port Resistance 100
(TE Mode)
Resistance 100
ETERNITY ISDN Phone ISDN Phone
Terminal 1 Terminal 2 Terminal 3
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 207
Where,
TE = Terminal equipment of any ISDN Equipment
NT = Network Termination provided by Service Provider
TR Terminal Resistance 100
d = distance from NT to the last TE Equipment
d1 = the total distance from first TE equipment and the last TE equipment.
In an Extended Passive Bus Configuration,
• You can connect only 3 Terminal Equipment or ISDN devices. These devices are grouped together at one
end of the bus, with may extend to a distance of up to 1 kilometer from the NT.
• However, all the 3 Terminal Equipment/ISDN devices must be located within a range of 30 meters, as
shown in the figure.
• Using this configuration, any subscriber from ETERNITY can access the BRI line and make outgoing calls.
At the same time, another subscriber from the ETERNITY or any ISDN phone shown in the figure can
make outgoing calls from the same BRI. In the same way, incoming calls are possible on the same BRI.
• Only two simultaneous speech paths can be established, as BRI supports 2 voice channels only.
• This configuration is useful on large premises where a limited number of ISDN devices (maximum 3) are to
be used within a range of 30 meters.
Installing the BRI Card
1. Take all the necessary precautions prescribed for handling the cards and electronic equipment: turn off
power supply, always wear an electrostatic-discharge preventive wrist strap/belt and use a grounding mat.
2. Unpack the BRI card and check the package contents.
3. Select any free (empty) slot from the Universal Slots. Unscrew and remove the filler bracket of the empty
slot. Do not discard the filler bracket! Preserve it for future use!
Setting Orientation Type of BRI Port
4. The BRI Port can be configured in the TE mode and the NT mode, by changing the position of related
jumpers of each port. Refer the table below.
Jumper Position for Port1 Jumper Position for Port2
Mode
J1 J2 J3 J4 J6 J7 J8 J9
NT BC BC BC BC BC BC BC BC
TE AB AB AB AB AB AB AB AB
Jumper Position for Port3 Jumper Position for Port4
Mode
J10 J16 J17 J18 J14 J15 J19 J20
NT BC BC BC BC BC BC BC BC
TE AB AB AB AB AB AB AB AB
208 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• By default all the BRI ports are configured in the TE mode so, all Jumpers are set in AB position.
• If the BRI Port is to be configured in the NT mode, all the related Jumpers of each port should be set in BC
position.
Inserting Termination Resistance
5. Termination of 100 should be inserted in the following cases:
• When the BRI port is configured in the TE mode and connected in a Point-to-Point configuration as
shown below.
• When the BRI port is configured in the TE mode in a Point-to-Multipoint configuration as shown below.
100 Termination is required on the last Terminal connected on the S0 bus to terminate calls properly.
ISDN
BRI Line NT
Network
BRI TE BRI TE BRI TE
Other ISDN Other ISDN ETERNITY
Equipment Equipment
In a Point-to-Multipoint configuration, 100 termination can be provided on either of the following:
• Last TE equipment
• Last point of the bus bar where the last TE equipment is connected.
• When BRI port is configured in the NT mode.
• If the S0 bus itself supports Terminating resistors, Termination Resistance need not be inserted when
• BRI Port is configured as TE and connected in a Point-to-Point Configuration as illustrated above.
• BRI Port is configured as NT.
• Termination need not be inserted if the BRI port of ETERNITY (configured in TE mode) is connected as
any terminal other than the last terminal on the S0 bus (in a Multi-point configuration).
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 209
Termination in TE Equipment (BRI Port)
6. To set the 100 termination on the BRI port set the Jumpers J3 and J4 provided on the BRI module of
each port in AB position. Refer the table below.
Jumper Position for BRI Port1 Jumper Position for BRI Port2
Function
J3 J4 J3 J4
To insert 100 termination resistance AB AB AB AB
To remove 100 termination resistance BC BC BC BC
Jumper Position for BRI Port3 Jumper Position for BRI Port4
Function
J3 J4 J3 J4
To insert 100 termination resistance AB AB AB AB
To remove 100 termination resistance BC BC BC BC
By default, Termination Resistance of 100 is set on the BRI port (Jumpers J3 and J4 are in AB position)
7. To remove the 100 termination from the BRI port set the Jumpers J3 and J4 (provided on the BRI
module) in BC position.
Termination in the Bus Bar
8. 100 termination resister can be connected between TX and RX, between pin number 3-4 and 5-6 in the
RJ45 connector as illustrated below.
1 RJ45 Connector on
Bus Bar at the Last
TE ISDN Equipment
Tx 3
100
Rx 4
Rx 5
100
Tx 6
210 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
As shown in the application diagrams for Point-to-Multipoint connectivity, each ISDN TE device is
connected in a Bus Bar, which may be Short Passive Bus Bar configuration or an Extended Passive Bus
Bar configuration.
Illustrated below is the connection diagram of two ports connected with each other on the same BRI bus
bar.
1 1 RJ45 Connector
ports on BRI Bus
Bar to which the
3 3
ISDN TE
4 4 Equipment is
connected
5 5
6 6
8 8
• The above figure shows the connection details of two ports on the BRI Bus Bar. Similarly, you can
connect 8 ports on the Bus Bar, keeping in mind the Termination Resister for the NT and the Last TE
on the Bus bar.
• Pin number 3, 4, 5 and 6 of the RJ45 connector are used for connectivity.
• Pin number 3 and 6 are used for Transmit (Tx) and pin number 4 and 5 are used for Receive (Rx) from
the ISDN TE side.
• Pin number 3 and 6 are used for Receive (Rx) and pin number 4 and 5 are used for Transmit (Tx) from
the NT side.
Feeding Power to the Terminal
9. When the BRI Port of the ETERNITY is used as BRI-NT, you can feed power to the terminal equipment
connected to the BRI-NT Port from the ETERNITY.
To do this, you must change the position of the Jumpers J1 and J2 on the BRI modules (daughterboard),
on the BRI Card.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 211
Jumper Position
Function BRI Port1 BRI Port2 BRI Port3 BRI Port4
J1 J2 J1 J2 J1 J2 J1 J2
To feed power on Tx and Rx AB AB AB AB AB AB AB AB
wires (Phantom Power)
To feed power on separate pair of wires BC BC BC BC BC BC BC BC
No power to be fed to the terminal Open Open Open Open Open Open Open Open
equipment
By default, the jumpers J1 and J2 are open.
• The maximum power that can be fed to a single BRI port is 50mA.
• From signaling point of view, a maximum of 8 terminal equipment can be connected on the BRI port
configured in the NT mode.
• The number of ISDN Terminals that can be connected on the BRI port configured in the NT mode
depends on the power consumed by the ISDN terminals.
10. Insert the BRI Card into the guide rails of the free slot you selected for the card. The connectors on the
card should make perfect contact with those of the slot on the backplane motherboard.
11. Press down the lever on the card mounting brackets to secure the card in its slot. Fix the mounting bracket
in place with the two screws provided.
If installing more than one BRI Card, it is not necessary to insert the other cards in subsequent slots. Any
card can be inserted in any of the Universal Slots.
Connecting to ISDN BRI Lines
12. Use the cable supplied for each connector on the BRI card to connect the BRI Ports to the NT1 device
supplied by your ISDN service provider.
The following diagram shows how to connect a BRI Line to the ETERNITY GE BRI port (in the TE mode).
NT-1 ETERNITY
3
Rx1 TxA
4 4
Tx Tx1 RxA
ISDN
5
Network Rx Tx2 5 RxB
6
Rx2 TxB
NC V-
Power NC V+
U-Interface S/T Interface A BRI port of
(2-wire) (4-wire) ETERNITY
212 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• The Tx and Rx of the BRI port should be connected with the Rx and Tx of the NT1 respectively.
Ascertain the pin details of the NT1 from your Service Provider. If required, cross connect the cables.
• V- and V+ are used when a TE is connected to BRI port (in this case the port functions as network or
NT).
13. To connect the BRI Lines to the BRI ports, refer the configuration and pinout details given below for
guidance.
Configuration details of the U interface (RJ-45) at NT1
Pin Number Pin Details
4 Tx
5 Rx
Configuration details of the S/T interface (RJ-45) on NT1
Pin Number Pin Details
3 Rx1
4 Tx1
5 Tx2
6 Rx2
Pinout and Cable Details of BRI4 Port in TE Mode
Pin Color Connection
1 Orange-White Not connected
2 Orange Not connected
3 Green-White TxA
4 Blue RxA
5 Blue-White RxB
6 Green TxB
7 Brown-White V-
8 Brown V+
Pinout and Cable Details of BRI4 Port in NT Mode
Pin Color Connection
1 Orange-White Not connected
2 Orange Not connected
3 Green-White RxA
4 Blue TxA
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 213
Pin Color Connection
5 Blue-White TxB
6 Green RxB
7 Brown-White V-
8 Brown V+
14. If you have completed all other installation tasks, you may turn ON the system and observe the Reset
Cycle and the LED pattern of the BRI Card.
LED Pattern of the BRI Card
The BRI4 Card has an LED for each port: L1, L2, L3, L4.
The LEDs show the Status of the Ports as summarized in the table below:
Port Status LED Color LED Cadence
Port is not active RED Continuously ON
Port is active GREEN Continuously ON
214 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The T1E1PRI Card
The ETERNITY T1E1PRI Card provides the interface to connect ETERNITY GE to ISDN PRI Network.
When connected to T1 carrier lines, the Card supports the following signaling types:
• PRI
• Robbed Bit Signaling
• Q-Signaling (QSIG)
• E&M
When connected to E1 carrier lines, the card supports the following signaling types:
• PRI
• Channel Associated Signaling (CAS)
• Q-Signaling (QSIG)
• E&M
The T1E1PRI Card is available in the following configuration for ETERNITY GE:
T1E1PRI Card for ETERNITY GE
Card Name Configuration and Application
ETERNITY GE Card T1E1PRI 1-Port card with QSIG support to connect 1 ISDN T1/E1 PRI Line or ISDN
Single Compatible Device
The maximum number of PRI Lines supported by each variant of ETERNITY GE is:
• ETERNITY GE3S: 3 PRI lines
• ETERNITY GE6S: 6 PRI lines
• ETERNITY GE12S: 8 PRI lines
Connectors
The T1E1PRI card has an RJ45 Connector. A cable with RJ45 plugs on both ends is supplied for the connector.
LEDs
The ETERNITY GE T1E1PRI Card has 2 LEDs - L1 and L2 - for indicating the port states.
Installing the T1E1PRI Card
1. Before installing the card, take the necessary precautions prescribed for handling the cards. Always wear
an electrostatic-discharge preventive wrist strap and use a grounding mat. Make sure the power supply is
turned off.
2. Unpack the T1E1PRI card and check the package contents.
3. Select any free (empty) slot from the Universal Slots. Unscrew and remove the filler bracket of the empty
slot. Do not discard the filler bracket.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 215
Setting Line Termination Resistor
4. To set the Line Termination Resistor for the PRI Port for T1 or E1 Connectivity, you must change the
position of the jumper J5. Refer the table below.
Jumper Position Meaning
J5 AB To set termination resistance of 120 for E1 connectivity
J5 BC To set termination resistance of 100 for T1 connectivity
• By default J5 is set to BC position to provide 120 termination resistance for E1 connectivity.
• To set 100 termination resistance for T1 connectivity, set jumper J5 to AB position.
5. Insert the T1E1PRI Card into the guide rails of the free slot you selected for the card. Make sure that the
connectors on the card make perfect contact with those of the slot on the backplane motherboard.
6. Now, press down the levers on the card mounting brackets to secure the card in its slot. Fix the card in
place with the two screws provided.
Connecting ISDN T1/E1 PRI Lines
7. Use the cable supplied with the T1E1PRI Card to connect the ETERNITY to the T1/E1 PRI network
interface equipment (modem), which is usually supplied by your ISDN Service Provider along with the PRI
line.
The diagram below illustrates this.
Customer Premises
ETERNITY
ISDN G.703
Modem
Network 4-wire HDSL DTE
4-wire
PRI Port
(RJ-45 Connector) (RJ-45 Connector)
G.703
Modem
Power
• Most Service Providers insist on connecting an ISDN modem at both the ends of the PRI line—one at
the Local Exchange and other at the Customer's Premises.
• At the Customer's Premises, the PRI line is terminated on the HDSL interface of the modem.
• The DTE interface of the modem is to be connected to the PRI port (RJ-45 connector on the Matrix
ETERNITY GE T1E1PRI Card).
8. Plug in one end of the RJ45 cable supplied with the card into the card's connector. Plug the other end of
the RJ45 cable into the Network Termination Unit.
9. Refer the following pin details for connecting the Network Termination Unit with the ETERNITY.
216 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Pin details of HDSL Interface of the G.703 Modem. (HDSL Network Termination Unit)
Pin Number Pin Details
1 Line A
2 Line A
3 Not used
4 Line B
5 Line B
6 Not used
7 Not used
8 Not used
Pin details of DTE Interface of G.703 Modem. (HDSL Network Interface Unit)
Pin Number Pin Details
1 TX1 (Tip)
2 TX2 (Ring)
3 Not used
4 RX1 (Ring)
5 RX2 (Tip)
6 Not used
7 Not used
8 Not used
Most of the HDSL Network Termination Unit manufacturers use these connectors. But you are advised to
read the installation guide of the HDSL Network Termination Unit being used by you.
Pin details of ETERNITY T1E1PR1 Port
The T1E1PRI Port of the ETERNITY terminates in an 8-pin RJ45, female connector and is wired according to the
table below.
Tx1 (Ring) Tx2 (Tip)
4 5
NC NC
3 6
Rx2 (Tip) NC
2 7
Rx1 (Ring) NC
1 8
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 217
The cable wires may have to be crossed depending on the pinout of the DTE Interface of the modem.
10. Repeat the same steps to install another card. It is not necessary to install the other T1E1PRI cards in a
sequence. Any card can be installed in any of the slots.
11. If you have completed all other installation tasks. Power the system. After the Reset Cycle, observe the
LED patterns of the T1E1PRI Card.
LED Patterns
The ETERNITY GE T1E1PRI Card has 2 LEDs: L1 and L2. Given below are the LED Patterns defined for each port
state in the different signaling types supported by the ETERNITY GE.
1. Port Active Mode
Signaling Type: E1-PRI
LED1 Pattern:
Port Status Color Cadence
Layer 1 established successfully GREEN Continuous ON
CRC4 Alarm GREEN 100ms ON-100 ms OFF
BFA Alarm RED 500ms ON-500 ms OFF
LOS Alarm RED Continuous ON
LED2 Pattern:
Port Status Color Cadence
Layer 1 established successfully GREEN Continuous ON
RAI Alarm RED 500ms ON-500 ms OFF
AIS or LOS Alarm RED Continuous ON
Signaling Type: E1-CAS
LED1 Pattern:
Port Status Color Cadence
Layer 1 established successfully GREEN Continuous ON
CRC4 Alarm GREEN 100ms ON-100 ms OFF
MFA Alarm RED 100ms ON-100 ms OFF
BFA Alarm RED 500ms ON-500 ms OFF
LOS Alarm RED Continuous ON
218 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
LED2 Pattern:
Port Status Color Cadence
Layer 1 established successfully GREEN Continuous ON
Y-Bit Alarm GREEN 100ms ON-100 ms OFF
AIS16 Alarm RED 100ms ON-100 ms OFF
RAI Alarm RED 500ms ON-500 ms OFF
AIS or LOS Alarm RED Continuous ON
Signaling Type: T1-RBS or T1-PRI
LED1 Pattern:
Port Status Color Cadence
No Alarm GREEN Continuous ON
TFA Alarm or MFA Alarm RED 500ms ON-500 ms OFF
AIS Alarm RED 100ms ON-100 ms OFF
LOS Alarm RED Continuous ON
LED2 Pattern:
Port Status Color Cadence
Layer 1 established successfully GREEN Continuous ON
RAI or LOS Alarm RED Continuous ON
2. Port Maintenance Mode
LED1 Pattern:
Port Status Color Cadence
Maintenance Mode RED -GREEN 500 ms RED-500 ms GREEN
LED2 Pattern:
Port Status Color Cadence
Near end loop back wait Before activate RED 100ms ON-100 ms OFF
Near end loop active RED Continuous ON
Near end loop back wait Before deactivate RED 500ms ON-500 ms OFF
Far end loop back wait after activate GREEN 100ms ON-100 ms OFF
Far end loop active GREEN Continuous ON
Far end loop back wait after deactivate GREEN 500ms ON-500 ms OFF
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 219
3. Port Disable Mode
LED1 Pattern:
Port Status Color Cadence
Port Disable RED Continuous ON
LED2 Pattern:
Port Status Color Cadence
Port Disabled OFF OFF
220 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The Mobile Card
The Mobile Card interfaces the ETERNITY with GSM/3G networks. It routes calls made and received over mobile
networks, like a mobile handset.
The mobile Cards are available in 2G and 3G variants.
The mobile card does not support GPRS features, Fax and Data services, network supported services,
except CLIR and USSD.
The Mobile card is available in the following configurations for ETERNITY GE.
The Mobile Card for ETERNITY GE
Card Name Configuration and Application
ETERNITY GE Card GSM4 4-port card to connect to 4 GSM networks (4 SIM Cards can be installed)
ETERNITY GE Card GSM4 3G 4-port card to connect to 4 GSM networks with 3G support (4 SIM Cards can
be installed)
Just like mobile handsets, each Mobile Port has a unique IMEI (International Mobile Equipment Identity) number,
pasted on the mobile engine.
The maximum Mobile ports supported by the variants of ETERNITY GE are:
• ETERNITY GE3S: 12
• ETERNITY GE6S: 24
• ETERNITY GE12S: 32
SIM cards from different service providers can be used.
Antenna
ETERNITY GE Card GSM4 has a single antenna for the four ports. A splitter connects all the four ports on the card
into a single antenna. An antenna cable is also provided, giving you the flexibility to move the antenna to another
position (in case of weak signal).
Personal Identification Number (PIN)
The SIM cards can be protected from unauthorized use by programming a Personal Identification Number (PIN) on
the SIM. If the wrong SIM PIN is entered thrice in a row, by a user, the SIM Card suspects the user and asks for the
Personal Unlock Keyword (PUK).
Installing the Mobile Card
To be able to connect ETERNITY to GSM/3G networks, you must have either one of the above mobile card types
installed in the system.
1. To install the Mobile Card,
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 221
• If using a GSM/3G card, get the SIM Card from the GSM/3G service provider of your choice ready. Use
SIM PIN protection, if required.
Disable Call Waiting in the SIM, if using 3G services.
2. Make sure that the ETERNITY is installed at a location where sufficient network coverage is available. The
power supply should be turned off, and you must be wearing an electrostatic discharge preventive wrist
strap and a have a grounding mat, before you begin handling the card.
3. Unpack the Mobile card and verify the package contents.
ETERNITY GE Card GSM4
Enabling PIN Protection on SIM
4. For the GSM/3G Card, enable SIM PIN before installing the SIM card in the system.
• insert the SIM into a mobile handset first.
• enable PIN Protection from the mobile handset.
• change the SIM PIN to 1234 (this is the default PIN for all SIM cards used in the system). Changing the
SIM PIN to '1234' enables you to change the SIM PIN from the ETERNITY later (Refer SIM PIN for
instructions).
• remove the SIM from the mobile handset.
222 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
If you do not want to use PIN protection, insert the SIM in the mobile handset and disable PIN protection.
Remove the SIM Card from the mobile handset.
5. Insert the SIM card (PIN changed to 1234), with its connector side down into the SIM holder on the Mobile
card. You can insert multiple SIM cards of the same GSM service provider or of different service providers.
6. Insert the Mobile card into the guide rails of the Universal Slot you have selected for this card. Make sure
that the card is inserted deep enough to make perfect contact with the connectors in the backplane. Now,
press down the levers on the card mount bracket to secure the card in its slot.
7. Connect the antenna provided with the card on the splitter connector on the front panel of the card. You
may also use the antenna cable to place the antenna at another position.
8. Repeat Steps 1-7 to insert another Mobile card.
9. If you have completed all installations tasks, power the system.
10. Wait for the system to register with the Mobile network. By default, the Mobile ports are set to select and
register with the Mobile networks automatically. Now, observe the LED Patterns of the Mobile Ports.
• At every power up of the system, it takes about 3 minutes for the Mobile ports to get registered with the
network. Once registration with the GSM network is completed, the mobile port can be used.
• Each time the Mobile Port sends a request, such as Registration Request, the system waits for the
duration of the Network Response Timer. This Timer signifies the time for which the Mobile Port waits
for a response from the Mobile network. It is fixed for 150 seconds for all Mobile ports.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 223
The E&M Card
The E&M Card of the ETERNITY provides the interface for analog trunking to connect various communication
equipment telephone switches, Routers, Leased Lines, etc. using Tie-Lines.
The E&M Card is required for the following applications:
• Power Line Carrier Communication (PLCC) Networks, where several EPAXs are connected with each
other through E&M tie lines. Refer “PLCC-An Introduction” to know more.
• “Closed User Group (CUG)”, where several PBXs are connected with each other through E&M tie lines41.
• PBX expansion, where two PBXs are connected with each other with E&M tie lines.
• Connecting remote PBXs over E&M tie lines.
Refer the topic “E&M Connectivity” to know more.
An E&M Port can be programmed to behave as a Trunk Interface, a Subscriber (Station) Interface or both, as a Tie
Line with the dual personality of a Trunk and a Subscriber.
The E&M Card supports
• E&M Interface - Types IV and V
• Speech Interface - Two-wire and four-wire.
• E&M Trunk Seizure Type42: Immediate, Immediate + Wink, Immediate with Ack, Immediate with
Ack+Wink, Seizure Pulse, Seizure Pulse + Wink, Express, and Compander Control Signal.
• Address Signaling: Pulse dial (Pulse 10PPS, Pulse 20PPS) and Tone Dial (DTMF).
The ETERNITY E&M Card is available in the following configuration for the ETERNITY GE
E&M Card for ETERNITY GE
Card Name Configuration and Application
ETERNITY GE Card E&M4 4-port card to connect 4 E&M Tie Lines
The number of E&M lines that you can interface with the ETERNITY using the E&M Card varies according to
number of E&M ports supported by the each variant of ETERNITY GE.
The maximum number of E&M ports supported by each variant of ETERNITY are:
• ETERNITY GE3S: 12
• ETERNITY GE6S: 24
• ETERNITY GE12S: 48
41. The PBXs in a “Closed User Group (CUG)” can be connected over ISDN T1E1PRI Lines as well. Refer the topic Closed User
Groups to know more.
42. This is the line protocol that defines how the equipment seizes the E&M trunk. Also referred to as Start Dial Supervision Signaling
Protocol.
224 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Connectors
The E&M card has RJ45 Connectors. A separate MDF cable is supplied for each connector.
LEDs
The ETERNITY GE E&M4 Card has 4 LEDs to indicate the functioning of the ports.
Installing the E&M Card
An E&M port of ETERNITY can be programmed to take on the function of:
• a Station - works like a station interface, receiving incoming calls.
OR
• a Trunk - works like a trunk interface when any of the stations of the PBX makes an outgoing call through
it.
OR
• a Tie Line - takes on a dual personality: functioning as both a station and a trunk. The E&M port works like
a station interface for incoming calls. It works like a trunk interface when any station makes an outgoing
call through it.
This dual function is used in PBXs that are used as Transit Exchanges as in a PLCC Network. Read
“PLCC-An Introduction” to know more.
You cannot connect a trunk line or an SLT or a DKP to an E&M port.
1. Have the necessary wiring for the E&M Analog trunk in place. Take the necessary safety precautions
before you begin handling the card; switch off power supply and always wear an antistatic wrist strap and
use a grounding mat.
2. Unpack the E&M card and check the package contents.
3. The E&M Card supports E&M Interface Type IV and Type V connection. To select the appropriate
Interface Type out of the two, you need to change the Jumper Settings.
Refer the table below to select the desired Interface Type and Speech Interface.
Jumper Number Position Function
J1 and J2 AB Type IV E&M Interface
BC Type V E&M Interface
• By default all the E&M Ports are set to support Type-IV.
• To select the Type-V connection for the E&M Port, set Jumpers J1 and J2 (located on the E&M
module) in BC Position.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 225
4. Select the speech interface - 2-wire speech or 4-wire speech - as required, by changing the jumper
settings. Refer the table below.
Jumper Number Position Function
J3 and J4 AB 4-wire speech interface
BC 2-wire speech interface
• By default all the E&M Ports are set to support 2-wire Speech Interface.
• To select 2-wire speech interface for the E&M Port, set Jumpers J3 and J4 (given on E&M module) to
BC Position.
• To select 4-wire speech interface for the E&M Port, set Jumpers J3 and J4 on E&M module to AB
Position.
5. Now, select a free slot for the E&M card. Unscrew and remove the filler bracket by pushing up the levers
on the bracket. Preserve the filler bracket for future use.
6. Insert the E&M Card into guide rails of the empty slot. Make sure the connectors on the card make perfect
contact with those on the backplane motherboard. Secure the card by pressing down the levers and fix the
bracket with the screws provided with the card.
7. Connect the cables supplied with the E&M card into the RJ45 connectors on the E&M Card.
8. Connect the free ends of the cables into the E&M Ports of the other PBX/Router/Tie Line equipment by
appropriate crossing of the wires.
Refer the following pin-out details for the E&M Card and for each Interface and Speech Interface Type.
226 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Pinout details of ETERNITY GE Card E&M4
2 Wire, Type IV E&M Connection
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 227
2 Wire, Type V E&M Connection
4 Wire, Type IV E&M Connection
4 Wire, Type V E&M Connection
228 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
9. If you are connecting two PLCC EPAX in a Power Line Carrier Communication Network Compander
Control Signal (CCS) Connection should be made as illustrated in the block diagram below for any of the
four combinations of E&M and Speech Interfaces illustrated in the previous step.
Compander Control Signal (CCS) is a special type of signal used by Power Line Carrier Communication
Networks to improve quality of speech transmission. The PLCC network expects this signal from the PBX
when speech is established. The E&M Card supports this facility. The ETERNITY sends CCS signal to the
PLCC panel.
• When the E&M port is used as an Endpoint; the system sends a CCS to the PLCC panel while making
an outgoing call through the E&M port or when a call is received at the E&M port.
• When the E&M port is used for Transit Exchange; the system sends a CCS to the PLCC panel while
there is a Transit call through the E&M port.
10. If you have completed all installation tasks, power ON the system, observe the Reset Cycle and the LED
pattern of the E&M Card.
LED Pattern of E&M Card
Stage LED Color LED Cadence
At Power ON LED OFF
After 30-60 seconds LED OFF
After 60-90 seconds RED L1, L2, L3, L4 ON 500ms - L1, L2, L3, L4 OFF
GREEN L1, L2, L3, L4 ON 500ms - L1, L2, L3, L4 OFF
After 65-95 seconds RED L1, L2 L3, L4 ON 500ms - L1, L2, L3, L4 OFF
GREEN L1, L2 L3, L4 ON 500ms - L1, L2, L3, L4 OFF
Normal (Port Event)
M-Wire High Green LED of the Port continuously ON
M-Wire Low LED of the Port continuously OFF
E-Wire High Red LED of the Port continuously ON
E-Wire Low LED of the Port continuously OFF
E-Wire and M-Wire High Orange LED of the Port continuously ON
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 229
The VoIP Card
The SIP-based VoIP Card enables the stations of ETERNITY to connect to the IP network and make Proxy as well
as Non-Proxy (Peer-to-Peer) VoIP calls. The card has a Registrar Server, allowing any SIP device to be registered
with it and function as an extension of the ETERNITY. With the VoIP Card, ETERNITY offers the functionality of an
IP-PBX.
In countries, where the provision and use of Internet telephony services and products is prohibited and or
subject to laws, regulations or licenses, the User is advised to comply with such laws and regulations when
installing and using this product.
The VoIP card is available in the following configuration for the ETERNITY GE.
VoIP Card for ETERNITY GE
Card Name Configuration and Application
ETERNITY GE VoIP32 Card with 32 Voice Channels channels.
ETERNITY GE VoIP16 Card with 16 Voice Channels channels.
LAN and WAN Ports
There is a LAN Port and a WAN Port on the VoIP Card.
The LAN Port is used for connecting the VoIP Card to the Local Area Network to register SIP extensions through
the LAN Port.
The WAN Port is for connecting the VoIP Card to the public network over a Router/Modem. Any user on the public
network can be registered as SIP Extension through the WAN Port.
You can also connect the WAN Port to a LAN Switch/Hub.
The LAN Port supports Static IP Addressing only. The WAN Port supports Static, DHCP and PPPoE IP
Addressing.
Voice Channels
There are 32 Voice Channels on the VoIP32 Card and 16 Voice Channels on the VoIP16 Card, allowing as many
simultaneous calls to be made (using SIP Trunks and/or Extensions) as the number of Voice Channels supported
by these cards.
A call made from a SIP Extension or SIP Trunk to another SIP Extension or SIP Trunk will consume two
voice channels, whereas a call made from an SLT or DKP extension to a SIP Extension or SIP Trunk will
consume one voice channel. Thus, the number of speech paths available to make simultaneous calls will
depend not only on the number of voice channels, but also be the number of channels consumed by such
SIP-to-SIP and Analog/Digital extension to SIP Trunk/SIP Extension calls.
230 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
SIP Trunks
The ETERNITY GE supports a maximum of 16 SIP Trunks, allowing you to subscribe to as many as 16 different
Internet Telephony Service Providers (ITSP).
It is possible to program all 16 SIP trunks on a single VoIP Card or program them in a distributed manner, where
more than one VoIP card is installed in the system.
SIP Extensions
ETERNITY GE supports 500 SIP Extensions. Any SIP-enabled device like an IP-phone, a Softphone, analog
phone adapter, can be registered with the VoIP Card and function as the 'SIP Extension' of the ETERNITY GE.
The SIP Extensions function in the same ways as other extensions of the ETERNITY. SIP Extension users can
make and receive calls from and to other extensions of ETERNITY and external numbers over PSTN, GSM, VoIP
and E&M lines43. You can also connect the Standard and Extended IP Phones offered by Matrix as SIP
Extensions.
A SIP Extension can be registered with the ETERNITY GE from three different locations. This helps organizations
overcome geographical distances and reduce call costs.
SIP Extensions require a license. To know more about Licensing requirements and how to acquire and
activate a license key, see the topic “License Management”.
Installing VoIP Card
The VoIP Card can be installed in typically two application scenarios: in a Public Network or in a Private network
(behind a NAT Router).
VoIP Card installed in a Public Network
ETERNITY GE12S
Master Ethernet Port
LAN Switch/Hub
LAN
IP
IP
VoIP Server Card
WAN Router
CPU Card
Public IP is assigned to the WAN Port of the VoIP Card.
43. Only if there are no restrictions on calls from VoIP to other Public Networks in your country. If the telecom regulations of your coun-
try prohibit call traffic between the public telelphony networks and IP networks, you must configure Logical Partition in your system.
To know more, see “Logical Partition”.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 231
When connecting the card to the Public Network, you would require the following items/information:
• A Broadband Internet Connection to make/receive calls through the Public Internet. If you wish to make
calls within your network (LAN), you do not need an Internet connection.
• A SIP Account with an Internet Telephony Service Provider (ITSP).
If you want to make only Peer-to-Peer calls44 (calls made without the intervention of a SIP Server or Proxy
Server) you do not need the service of an ITSP.
If you have subscribed one or more SIP Accounts to make SIP calls, ask your Internet Telephony Service
Provider (ITSP) for the following information:
• SIP ID/User ID
• Authentication User ID
• Authentication Password
• SIP Registrar Server Address
• SIP Registrar Server Port
You may ask your Internet Service Provider / LAN administrator for the above information.
• Network Information:
• IP Addressing scheme (DHCP/PPPoE/Static) of the network
• IP Address of the WAN Port of the VoIP Card (Default: 192.168.001.116)
• Subnet Mask of the WAN Port. (Default: 255.255.255.000)
• Gateway Address
• DNS Address
• DNS Domain Name (if applicable)
• IP Address of your LAN
• IP Address of the LAN Port of the VoIP Card (Default: 192.168.002.031)
VoIP Card installed in a Private Network
ETERNITY GE12S
Master Ethernet Port
LAN
LAN Switch/Hub
IP
IP
VoIP Server Card
WAN
Router
CPU Card
44. Peer-to-Peer calls are calls made without the intervention of a SIP Server or Proxy Server.
232 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The card is located behind the NAT Router and Private IP is assigned to the WAN port.
When connecting the card in a Private Network, you would require the following information:
• IP Addressing Scheme of your network; whether the Connection Type is DHCP, Static, PPPoE
• IP Address of the WAN Port of the VoIP Card (Default: 192.168.001.116)
• Subnet Mask of the Network to which the WAN Port is connected. (Default: 255.255.255.000)
• Gateway Address
• DNS Address
• DNS Domain Name (if applicable)
VoIP Card connected to the Public Network for Matrix Extended IP Phones
Public IP is assigned to the WAN Port of the VoIP card and the Ethernet Port of the Master Card.
Here, the LAN port of the VoIP Card is connected to the LAN Switch/Hub. The WAN Port of the Card is connected
to the Public Network and the Master Ethernet Port of ETERNITY is also connected to the Public Network.
This installation is required when you want to register the Matrix Extended IP Phone with ETERNITY from the
Public Network. The Master Ethernet Port is used for Auto Configuration of the Matrix Extended IP Phones.
To install the VoIP Card, do the following:
1. Get the items/information listed ready before you install the VoIP card and connect it to the IP network.
2. Observe all prescribed safety precautions when inserting or removing cards. Make sure the Power Supply
is switched off, and you are wearing an antistatic wrist strap/belt and have a grounding mat.
3. Unpack the VoIP card and verify the package contents.
4. Select any of the free Universal Slots of ETERNITY to insert the VoIP Card. Unscrew and remove the filler
bracket of the slot. Preserve the filler bracket for future use.
5. Insert the card into the guide rails of the slot. The card should be inserted deep enough to make perfect
contact with the connectors on the backplane.
6. Now, secure the card in its slot by pressing down the levers of the mounting bracket and fixing it in place
with the two screws provided.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 233
7. Using the Ethernet cable supplied with the VoIP card, connect the LAN and the WAN Port to the IP
network, which may be Public Internet or a LAN or both.
If connecting to the Public Internet Network,
• Plug one end of the Ethernet cable supplied with the VoIP card into the WAN Port of the VoIP Card and
the other end into the Router/Modem.
If connecting to a Private Network,
• Plug one end of the Ethernet cable supplied with the card into the WAN Port of the card and the other
end into the LAN Switch/Hub.
If connecting to the Public Network for registering Extended IP Phones,
• Plug one end of the Ethernet cable supplied with the VoIP card into the WAN Port of the VoIP Card and
the other end of the cable into the Router/Modem.
• Connect the LAN Port of the VoIP Card to the LAN Switch/Hub.
• Connect the Master Ethernet Port of the ETERNITY to the Router/Modem.
8. To insert and connect another VoIP card, repeat the same steps as described above.
9. If you have completed all other installation tasks, you may switch on power supply and observe the Reset
Cycle and the LED indication of the VoIP Card.
LED Pattern
There are two LEDs on the VoIP Card: LED 1 and LED 2.
• LED 1 indicates the status of the VoIP card.
• LED 2 indicates the status of any of the SIP Trunks to which this LED is assigned.
Described below are the LED Patterns of LED 1 and LED 2.
LED 1 - VoIP Card Status Indication
VoIP Card Status LED Color Cadence
Booting Up (Power On) Green Continuous ON
Once Stack Construct COMMAND is received from Master, LED will Red Continuous ON
remain ON Red and wait for the WAN and DSP download response.
WAN Stack Construction Failed -(PPPoE connection is not established Red ON 1 sec-OFF 1 sec
or IP Address Invalid or DHCP Client does not retrieve network ON 1 sec-OFF 1 sec
parameters or any other reason)
LAN Stack constructed or not
DSP Image is downloaded successfully or not
234 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
VoIP Card Status LED Color Cadence
WAN Stack constructed successfully Red ON 500msec-OFF 3500 msec
LAN Stack constructed or not
DSP Image is not downloaded successfully (in all DSPs)
WAN Stack constructed successfully Green ON 500msec-OFF 3500 msec
LAN Stack constructed successfully
DSP Image not downloaded successfully (in any DSP but not all)
WAN Stack constructed successfully Green ON 500msec-OFF 500msec
ON 500msec-OFF 2500msec
LAN Stack construct Failed
DSP Image not downloaded successfully (in any DSP but not all)
WAN Stack constructed successfully Green ON 500msec-OFF 500msec
ON 500msec-OFF 500msec
LAN Stack construct Failed ON 500msec-OFF 1500 msec
DSP Image is downloaded successfully (in all DSPs)
WAN Stack constructed successfully Green ON 1 sec - OFF 1 sec, ON
1sec - OFF 1 sec
LAN Stack constructed successfully
DSP Image is downloaded successfully (in all DSPs)
Card goes live
LED 2 - SIP Trunk Status Indication
SIP Trunk Status LED Color Cadence
SIP Trunk - Disabled Red Continuous ON
Registration Failed - Authentication Red ON 500msec-OFF 3500msec
Password Invalid
Registration Failed - Configuration Red ON 500msec-OFF 500msec
Parameter Invalid ON 500msec-OFF 2500 msec
Registration in Progress Green ON 500msec-OFF 3500 msec
Registration Successful Green Continuous ON
SIP Trunk Status will be indicated by LED2 only after you have programmed the LED Indication in the VoIP
Port Parameters.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 235
SIP Extensions
ETERNITY GE supports up to 500 SIP Extensions. The SIP Extensions function in the same way as DKP/SLT
extensions of the ETERNITY GE. SIP Extension users can make and receive calls to any extension user of the
ETERNITY and to external numbers over various telecom networks like CO, Mobile, ISDN PRI, BRI, and VoIP45.
You may register any SIP-enabled device, like an IP-phone, a Soft phone, Analog Phone Adapter, as the SIP
Extension of the ETERNITY GE.
To register SIP Extensions, a VoIP Card must be installed in the ETERNITY GE, and and must have the IP8
License. For more information on Licensing, see “License Management”.
You can register upto 500 SIP Extensions with a single VoIP Card of ETERNITY GE. However, at a time, only as
many extensions as the number of Voice Channels supported by the VoIP Card can make calls.
You can register the same SIP Extension from three different locations.
You may connect the Standard and Extended IP Phones of Matrix as SIP Extensions.
The Matrix Extended IP Phone, SETU VP248, takes on all the functions of EON48, the proprietary digital key
phone of Matrix, except the following features:
• Background Music
• CO Call Waiting
• Hot Desking
• Live Call Screening
If you register the Extended IP Phone outside the Region/Country selected for ETERNITY, the time and
Time Zone dependant features, such as Alarms, Reminders, Time Zone Display, of the phone at each
location will operate according to the Real Time Clock of ETERNITY. Also, Access Codes and Emergency
Numbers will work according to the Region/Country selected for ETERNITY.
The SIP Extensions may be registered over WAN or over LAN according to your preference and your IP network
installation scenario.
If the ETERNITY GE Master Ethernet Port and the VoIP Card are connected to a Public Network,
• Connect SETU VP248, the Extended IP Phone, or any Open SIP device to the LAN Switch.
• Register any SIP device (Extended IP phone or Open SIP phone) on the public network as SIP extension.
45. Calls between VoIP, Public and Private Networks may be subject to Regulation in your country. You may have to configure your
system to allow or restrict call traffic between networks to comply with the telecom regulations of your country. To know more, read
“Logical Partition”.
236 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
ETERNITY GE12S
Master Ethernet Port
LAN Switch/Hub
LAN
IP
IP
VoIP Server Card
WAN Router
CPU Card
When you register the Matrix Extended IP Phone with ETERNITY, make sure the Master Ethernet Port and
the WAN port of the VoIP Card are connected to the public network. The Master Ethernet Port is used for
Auto Configuration of the Matrix Extended IP Phones.
When you register a SIP device other than the Matrix Extended IP Phone on the public network as SIP
Extension of ETERNITY, in this SIP device, you must configure the following:
• the Registrar Server Address of ETERNITY GE
• the Registrar Server Port
• the SIP ID
• Authentication ID and Password.
If the ETERNITY GE Master Ethernet Port and VoIP Card are connected to a Private Network (Behind the NAT),
ETERNITY GE12S
Master Ethernet Port
LAN
LAN Switch/Hub
IP
IP
VoIP Server Card
WAN
Router
CPU Card
• Connect SETU VP248, the Extended IP Phone, or any standard IP Phone to the LAN Switch.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 237
• You may also register any SIP device (Extended IP Phone or open SIP phone) on the public network as
SIP Extension.
When you register the Matrix Extended IP Phone with ETERNITY, configure Port Forwarding for Master
Ethernet Port and the WAN port of the VoIP Card on the Router. The Master Ethernet Port is used for
Auto Configuration of the Extended IP Phones.
Connecting SETU VP248 as Extended SIP Extension
You are recommended to complete the following steps before connecting the Matrix Extended IP Phone to ETERNITY
GE:
• Decide the location of the Extended IP Phone, whether within the same network or outside, according to
your installation scenario.
If you want to use the DHCP Server on your LAN for assigning IP Address to the Extended IP Phone, do
the following:
• use DHCP option 224 and Data Type as ‘String’ to provide Server Address to the Extended IP
Phones.
• Program the IP Address or the Dynamic DNS Domain Name of the Master Ethernet Port of
ETERNITY GE in the DHCP option.
• Log in to Jeeves. For instructions, read the topic “Using Jeeves” under Configuring ETERNITY.
• Assign an extension number (SIP ID or Access Code) to the Extended IP Phone. For instructions on
assigning SIP ID, see “Configuring SIP Extensions”.
• For the SIP extension number you assigned to the Extended IP Phone, go to the Location settings of the
extension, and do the following:
• Enable Matrix Extended IP Phone Mode.
• Enter the MAC Address of the Extended IP Phone.
• Assign the Registrar Server IP Address, as per you installation scenario.
For instructions, see the topic “Matrix Extended IP Phone Settings” under Configuring SIP Extensions.
Now, follow the steps described below to install the Extended IP Phone. The instructions are common for all models
of the SETU VP248. For the purpose of illustration, the premium model, SETU VP248P, has been used.
1. Unpack the SETU VP248 box and verify package contents.
2. Mount the phone on a desk or wall at a location convenient to you.
• When mounting the phone on the wall, detach the Foot Stand from the bottom of the phone.
238 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Pull out the Foot Stand.
Keyhole Slot 1 Keyhole Slot 2
Press down Press down
to attach/detach to attach/detach
Foot Stand. Foot Stand.
• Fix two screws of appropriate diameter on the wall, ensuring that they are aligned with the Keyhole
Slots 1 and 2.
• Use wall plugs, if required, to fix the screws. Leave the screw heads protruding from the wall to fit
into the Keyholes.
• Now, mount the phone on the wall, with the screws fitting into the Keyhole slots.
• When you mount the phone on a desk, you can attach the Foot Stand in two ways as illustrated in the
following.
Foot Stand attached at 20° Angle
Foot Stand attached at 45° Angle
If you attach the Foot Stand at 45°, the phone will be placed in an almost upright position on your
desk.
• Decide which of these positions would work for you best and accordingly attach the Foot Stand.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 239
3. Connect the Handset to the Phone body.
• Plug the long straightened end of the phone cord into the handset jack at the bottom of the phone
marked with the handset symbol.
• Plug the other (short straight) end of the phone cord into the jack at the bottom of the handset.
4. If you want to use a Headset (not supplied) with your phone, you may plug a headset with a 2.5 mm single
connector into the headset jack on the left side panel of the phone.
OR
You may plug a headset with an RJ11 connector in to the headset port at the bottom of the phone.
5. Connect the LAN Port of SETU VP248 to the LAN Switch/Hub or a Router/Modem, according to your
installation scenario.
6. To connect your phone to a computer on your desk, use an Ethernet cable (not supplied with this phone) to
connect the PC Port of the phone to the LAN Port of the computer.
7. Plug the connector of the Power Adapter in to the power jack at the back of the phone46. Use only the
adapter provided with the phone to prevent any damages that may arise from the use of other adapters.
If you want to use Power over Ethernet (PoE), ensure that your LAN supports PoE. Supply power through
an 802.3af connection on the LAN Port of the phone. Do not connect the Adapter!
8. Plug the Power Adapter into a power outlet.
9. Switch ON power supply.
46. The SETU VP248 does not have a power switch.
240 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
When you power the phone, the boot process will be initiated in the following sequence.
• All keys with LED, including the Speaker key, and the Ringer LED, will glow.
• The LCD display will light up and the following message will appear on it, as the phone boots:
Welcom e to M atrix
B ooting ...
• As soon as the ‘Loading...’ message appears on the phone display, press # key.
W e l c o m e t o M a t ri x
L oad ing ...
• Select the firmware Extended - IP Phone. Move the cursor by pressing the DOWN navigation key V.
Sel ect the fir mwar e
Standar d S IP
Extended S IP
• When the cursor is placed under the Extended IP Phone, press Enter key.
Sel ect the fir mwar e
Standar d S IP
Extended S IP
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 241
• The phone will start loading the Extended IP Phone Firmware. It will display current firmware being loaded.
We l c o me to M a t ri x
L oading V 05R01 Ext SI P
• After loading the firmware, the phone will prompt you to change Network settings.
Change Network Settings?
Yes
No
• Wait for a few seconds.
If you want to change the Network Settings, press the Enter key. Detailed instructions for changing the
Network Settings of the phone are provided at the end of this topic. See “Network Settings”at the end of
this topic.
• The phone makes DHCP Discovery and fetches its IP Address and Server Address from the DHCP
Server.
D H C P d i s c o v e r y. . . !
On getting the IP Address and Server Address, the phone initiates Auto Configuration to download the
configuration files from ETERNITY GE.
242 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• As the phone downloads the configuration files, the file names will appear one by one.
T r y i n g f o r C o n f i g. f i le
L a n g u a ge S t r . x m l
• On successful download of all configuration files, the phone attempts to register with ETERNITY GEGE.
Attemptin g Regist ration
• On successful registration, the phone will display the current day, date and time, the extension number and
name assigned to the Extended IP Phone.
M on 10 M AY 1 5: 4 0
2 00 1 Re ce pt i on
Network Settings
You can change the network settings of the Extended IP Phone by accessing the Local Menu of the phone. To
move the cursor and scroll through the menu and submenu options, use the following touch sense navigation keys
on your phone.
• The Enter key to make a selection or to complete an action.
• The Up key to move up the Menu.
• The Down key move down the Menu.
• The Forward key move the cursor one character.
• The Back key to move the cursor one character and to return from the submenu to the main menu.
The cursor is a non-blinking underscore that appears under the first letter of the first option in the menu. To make a
selection in the menu, you must move the cursor in the desired direction using the Up, Down, Forward and Back
key. When the cursor is at the desired position, press Enter key to make a selection.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 243
Accessing Network Settings
You can access the Network Settings of the Extended IP Phone in any of the following stages:
1. During start-up, when the phone prompts you to change the network settings after loading the firmware.
Change Network Settings?
Yes
No
You must press the Enter Key to select Yes and access network settings.
2. When the phone is making Network discovery, downloading configuration files, attempting registration.
You must press the Enter Key to access network settings,
3. When the phone is in idle state. You must press the DSS key assigned to ‘Local Menu’.
M on 10 M AY 1 5: 40
2 00 1 Re ce pt io n
Voice Mail Call Back Canc el Mute Conference Transfer
Forw ard DN D Names Redial Release Hold
Local Menu
1 2 abc 3 def
4 ghi 5 jkl 6 mno
7 pqrs 8 tuv 9 wxyz
CA04
CA03 * 0 #
CA02
CA01
When you press the Local Menu DSS Key (in idle state) or when you press the Enter key during any process, the
Local Menu appears on your phone display.
LO C AL ME N U
N e t wo r k P a r a m e t e r s
N e t wo r k S t a t u s
244 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
You can configure Network Parameters and view Network status from the Local Menu.
Configuring Network Parameters
• In the Local Menu of the phone, select Network Parameters by pressing the Enter Key.
• The Network Parameters submenu appears.
N E T W O R K PA R A M E T E R S
M A C : 0 0 : 1 b : 09 : 00 : 9a : a 7
C o n n e c t i o n Ty p e
I P A d d r e ss
S u b n e t Ma s k
G a t e w ay A d d r es s
• Use the Down/Up key to reach the desired network parameter and press Enter key to select and change
the settings.
• You can configure all network parameters described below, except the MAC Address.
Connection Type
• Select the Connection Type as DHCP, PPPoE or Static according to the IP Addressing scheme of your
network.
If you select DHCP or PPPoE, the phone will be assigned IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway
Address, DNS Address Server Address, automatically by the DHCP/PPPoE server.
For PPPoE Connection Type, you must configure the PPPoE User ID and Password provided by the
Internet Service Provider.
If you select Static, you must assign the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway Address to the phone.
IP Address
• If you select Static as Connection Type, enter the static IP Address to be assigned to the phone.
Enter the desired Static IP Address by pressing the digit keys.
To enter the dot/period in the IP Address, press the digit key ‘1’ twice.
Subnet Mask
• If you select Static as Connection Type, enter the Subnet Mask to be applied on the phone by pressing the
digit keys.
To enter the dot/period in the IP Address, press the digit key ‘1’ twice.
Gateway Address
• If you select Static as Connection Type, enter the Gateway Address here. This is the IP Address of the
LAN Port of the Router.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 245
DNS Server
• If you select Static as Connection Type, select the DNS Server option Static and configure the DNS
Address.
• If you select DHCP or PPPoE as Connection Type and your Internet Service Provider provides DNS
Address, select the DNS Server option Automatic. However, if your Internet Service Provider does not
provide DNS Address, select Static and configure the DNS Address.
DNS Address
• If you select DNS Server as Static, enter the DNS Address here.
To enter dot/period in the IP Address, press the digit key ‘1’ twice.
DNS Domain Name
• If you select DNS Server as Static, enter the DNS Domain Name here. DNS Domain Name is optional.
PPPoE User ID
• If you have selected PPPoE as Connection Type, you must enter the User ID provided to you by your
Internet Service Provider.
PPPoE Password
• This is the password provided by your Internet Service Provider for the PPPoE User ID. If you have
selected PPPoE as Connection Type, you must enter the password provided by your Internet Service
provider here.
PPPoE Service Name
• If your Internet Service Provider has provided a Service Name, enter the Service Name here. If your
Internet Service Provider has not provided a Service Name, do not configure this parameter.
Server Address
• ETERNITY GE CPU Card works as the Auto Configuration Server for the phone. Enter the IP Address or
the Dynamic DNS Domain Name of the Master Ethernet Port of ETERNITY here. Default: blank.
The phone sends the request for configuration files to this Server Address.
If you have selected DHCP as Connection Type, the phone will get the Server Address automatically from
the DHCP Server. For this, use DHCP option 224 and Data Type as ‘String’ to provide Server Address
from the DHCP Server.
For PPPoE and Static Connection Types, you need to enter the Server Address.
Server Port
• Enter the Web Server Port of the Master Ethernet Port of ETERNITY here.
The phone sends the request for configuration files to this port.
Valid range of the port is: 80 or 1024–65535. Default: 80.
246 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
VLAN Setting
If your phone is connected to a virtual LAN, you need to configure VLAN Settings.
To enable the VLAN switch to correctly route packets generated by the phone and the computers (on the LAN) to
each other, the packets must be tagged with a VLAN header.
The VLAN header consists of the VLAN ID (12-bit) and Class of Service (CoS, 3-bit) for prioritization of traffic47.
The meaning of CoS bits with respect to traffic type is as follows:
CoS Traffic Type
0 Best Effort
1 Background
2 Spare
3 Excellent Effort
4 Controlled Load
5 Video
6 Voice
7 Network Control
• Select Phone VLAN/COS to add VLAN header to the packets generated by the phone, and add VLAN
header to the packets relayed from the PC to its LAN port (packets generated by the PC connected to its
PC port).
• To configure Phone VLAN/COS, select Enable?. The VLAN ID will be tagged on all packets generated
by the phone (SIP, RTP, DNS, ARP, etc.). Default: Disabled.
• Select VLAN ID and enter the VLAN ID that you have assigned to the VLAN in which the IP Phones are
connected. Valid range: 0-4094. Default: 1.
• Select SIP CoS and define the CoS (priority) bits in all SIP packets. Valid range: 0-7. Default: 3
• Select RTP CoS and define the CoS (priority) bits in all RTP packets. Valid range: 0-7. Default: 6.
• Select PC/VLAN CoS to add VLAN header to all packets entering the PC Port and leaving the LAN port of
the phone. Default: Disabled.
• To configure PC VLAN/COS, select Enable?.
• Select VLAN ID and enter the same ID as you have assigned to the VLAN in which the computers are
connected. Valid range: 0-4094. Default: 1.
• Select CoS and define the Layer 2 CoS (priority) bits. Valid range: 0-7. Default: 0.
47. The IEEE 802.1P standard allows Layer2 switches to prioritize the traffic, thus providing Quality of Service (QoS), i.e. better handling
of data that pass over a network, thereby resulting in greater reliability and quality. Quality of Service (QoS) on Layer2 is referred to as
Class of Service (CoS) which is defined by IEEE 802.1P.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 247
PCAP
To capture packets sent and received from and by the phone for monitoring and troubleshooting, you can enable
PCAP on the phone. The phone captures up to 2 MB of packets. For more information and for instructions on how
to use PCAP Trace on the phone, see “Using PCAP Trace for Matrix Extended IP Phone”, under PCAP Trace.
When you change the Network Settings, the phone will restart.
Viewing Network Status
• In the Local Menu of the phone, place the cursor on Network Status and press the Enter key.
• The Network Status submenu appears.
N E T W O R K S TAT U S
MAC: 0 0:1 b:0 9:0 0:9 a:a 7
IP: 1 9 2 . 1 6 8 . 2 0 1 .2 0 5
MASK: 2 5 5 . 25 5 . 2 5 5 .0
G W: 1 9 2 . 16 8 . 2 0 1 .3
DNS:
Use the Down/Up key to view the status of the various network parameters. The status of the following
parameters appear on your display as you scroll.
• MAC: This is the MAC Address of the phone.
• IP: The current IP Address assigned to the phone.
• MASK: The current Subnet mask assigned to the phone.
• GW: The current Gateway IP Address assigned to the phone.
• DNS: The Domain Name Server address assigned to the phone.
• S. ADD: The IP Address or Dynamic DNS Domain Name of the Master Ethernet Port of ETERNITY
GE.
• S. PORT: The Web Server Port of the Master Ethernet Port of ETERNITY GE.
• DOMAIN: The Domain Name assigned to the phone.
• FIRM: The version of the current Firmware of the phone.
248 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The Voice Mail System Card
The VMS Card provides a full fledged, 'in-skin' Voice Mail System with auto attendant and voice mail features. It is
designed to provide a variety of voice applications that are commonly supported by any external Voice Mail
System.
VMS Card for ETERNITY GE
Card Name Configuration and Application
ETERNITY GE Card VMS16 Voice Mail System providing voice mail facility to all extensions of ETERNITY.
Each Mailbox has the capacity of storing 254 Messages. The size of each Mailbox is set by default to 5 minutes.
The maximum message length for each mailbox is set by default to 15 seconds48.
The VMS card utilizes a USB memory stick as its storage medium. Matrix provides a 1GB Pen Drive with the VMS
card. The Pen Drive supports 18 hours of recording.
The VMS Card has an Ethernet Port, a communication port, a USB port, and four LEDs.
Ethernet Port
The Ethernet Port is used to connect the VMS card to a computer (standalone or in a LAN) to access and use the
embedded FTP server for Software Upgrades, Backup of configuration files and Mailbox messages. The Ethernet
Port can also be used for Debug.
Communication (COM) Port
COM1, the RS232 communication port of the VMS card is used for connecting the card to a computer for Debug.
USB Port
The USB port is an internal port, located on the main board of the card. The Pen Drive provided by Matrix with the
VMS Card is connected to this port. All the voice messages, mailbox messages, greetings and other messages and
prompts are stored in Pen Drive.
The Pen Drive is factory fitted and shipped with the card.
LEDs
The ETERNITY GE VMS16 has two LEDs: L1 and L2.
The L1 shows the 'Status'.
Installing the VMS Card
1. Equip yourself with an electrostatic discharge preventive wrist belt and a grounding mat.
2. Unpack the card and check the package contents with the packing list.
48. When the ETERNITY is installed in the Hospitality Application (Hotel Mode), the default Mailbox size would be 300 minutes and
the default length of Messages is 999 seconds.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 249
3. Switch OFF Power supply and unplug the power cable of the ETERNITY.
4. Remove the filler bracket of the empty slot you have selected for installing the VMS card, by removing the
screws and pressing up the levers of the filler bracket.
5. Insert the VMS card into the guide rails of the slot. Make sure its connectors fit perfectly into those on the
backplane.
6. Secure the card in its slot by pushing down the levers of the mounting bracket and fixing the card with the
two screws provided.
Connecting to a Computer
7. Now, connect the card to a standalone PC/LAN.
• Plug in one end of the Ethernet cable supplied with the card into the Ethernet Port of the VMS Card.
• Plug the other end of the cable into the Ethernet port of a standalone PC or into a LAN Switch.
When you connect the VMS Card to a to a standalone/LAN PC, you need to make sure that
• The IP Address of the Ethernet Port of the VMS Card and the Ethernet Port of the PC do not conflict.
• The Ethernet Port of the VMS Card and the Ethernet Port of the PC are in the same Subnet.
8. If you have completed other installation tasks, switch ON the system.
LED Pattern of the VMS Card
At power on
• All LEDS are OFF.
• L1 LED glows green as soon as initialization process starts. Initialization process starts after approximately
100 seconds.
• After approximately 80 seconds of glowing of L1, LEDs will follow the sequence as under:
• Glow Green-500ms - Glow Red -500ms - Glow Orange 500 ms - LEDs turned OFF.
In normal condition
LED L1 will behave in the following manner:
Condition Color Cadence
Normal Green 1 sec ON- 1 sec OFF
File System Error RED 1 sec ON- 1 sec OFF
Pen Drive Error-Pen Drive Full RED Five times 100ms ON-100ms OFF (for 1 sec) - 1 sec OFF
250 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Starting Up ETERNITY GE
Power ON
1. If you have completed all the installation tasks, switch on power supply.
• For PSUNI card installed in the system, connect the three-prong plug of the power cord from the
ETERNITY into the AC outlet, and switch on power supply.
• For PS48V card installed in the system, keep the MCB Switch ON and power the FCBC.
2. Observe the Reset Cycle.
Reset Cycle
• Reset Cycle (Power-ON Self Test) takes about 2 minutes to finish.
• All the LEDs of the system, the cards and the keys of the DKP attached to the System are turned on.
Interpreting LEDs
The functioning of the LEDs of the system and the various cards and their meaning are summarized at the
end of the installation instructions for each Card Type.
Refer to the LED Patterns described for each Card Type to verify if the system is operating properly and locate
faults, where they occur.
When the reset cycle is successful, the default Station “Access Codes” loaded by the system and the date and
time of the “Real Time Clock (RTC)” of the system will appear on the LCD display of the DKPs you have
connected with the system.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 251
252 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
CHAPTER 6 Installing ETERNITY PE
• The Matrix ETERNITY is to be installed by persons who are trained and experienced in telecom wiring;
familiar with trunks, physical wiring of the MDF on both the PBX side and the line side (CO).
• Take all the necessary precautions for handling electronic and electrical appliances. Follow prescribed
procedures for preventing electrostatic discharges, to prevent damage to the cards and harm to
yourself.
• Wear an anti-static wrist strap/belt and use a grounding mat. Read the dos and don'ts listed in
“Protecting ETERNITY and Yourself”.
• If you have complied with the requirements and instructions described in “Before You Start”, you may
now begin the installation of your ETERNITY PE.
The Matrix ETERNITY PE is shipped factory fitted with the Power supply unit and the CPU Card (refer the section
“Know Your ETERNITY”).
The cards - SLT, DKP, TWT, BRI, T1E1PRI, GSM, VoIP, VMS, and the Door Phone Card - are shipped separately
as per the order placed by individual customers.
Illustrated below are the positions of the slots in each variant of ETERNITY PE.
ETERNITY PE6SP
The Power Supply unit and the CPU are in-built, and fixed on the bottom plane of the ETERNITY PE.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 253
The Power Supply unit and the CPU are in-built, and fixed on the bottom plane of the ETERNITY PE.
Universal slots are located on the CPU. The connectors of the slots are located on the CPU.
Cards are mounted on the CPU and secured on the three studs on the CPU, with the screws provided.
The ETERNITY PE 6S has an Ethernet port, a Communication Port, an Analog Input Port and an analog Output
Port.
ETERNITY PE3SP
ETERNITY PE3SP is similar to PE6S, except it has only 3 universal slots.
ETERNITY PE3SS
ETERNITY PE3SS has 3 universal slots and an Ethernet Port.
254 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
There is no Communication (COM) Port, no USB port, no Analog Input Port and no Analog Output port.
Instructions are provided in the following for installation of the cards. These instructions are to be followed also
when you expand the system (add more cards) or remove cards for maintenance and repair.
1. Have all the necessary wiring ready. Read the topic Main Distribution Frame for guidance on how to set up
the MDF and connect the system with the MDF, and install Primary Protection against heavy voltages.
2. Unpack the box. Check the package contents (see Packaging List). Contact your Dealer/Distributor if any
of the items is missing, faulty or damaged. Do not discard the packaging material.
Mounting the System
3. You can mount the system on a table, a wall. ETERNITY PE6SP can be installed in a rack.
If you have decided to mount the ETERNITY PE on a wall, use the Mounting Template for drilling the holes
at appropriate distances on the wall.
4. Mount the system at the selected site. Make sure that the system is placed such that you have full access
to the front and back panels. The holes in the side panels are provided for ventilation; Make sure that these
are not blocked, to prevent overheating.
When installing the system in a rack49 allow adequate space between the system and other units for air
circulation.
Connecting Input Power Supply
5. Ensure that a proper electrical earth and telecom earth are in place.
6. Check the voltage at the power point from where the supply is to be given to the system. It should be as
per the specifications. Earth the system properly.
Inserting Cards
7. Make sure the power supply is turned off and the power cord is unplugged, before you begin inserting the
cards.
8. Unpack the card and check the package contents.
49. The rack mount option is available in ETERNITY 6SP only.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 255
9. Unscrew the top cover of the ETERNITY PE and remove it by sliding it out. Keep the cover and the screws
aside.
10. Select a free slot from the universal slots.
11. Grasp the card by its sides or corners. Fit the card into connectors of the selected slot. Ensure that the
card is seated perfectly for all the connector pins on the cards make complete contact with those on the
CPU (motherboard) on the bottom plane.
256 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
12. When the card is firmly seated in the connector, use the three screws provided with the card to secure it on
the studs labeled as H1, H2 and H3.
13. Following the above steps, install each card into the universal slots.
Detailed installing instructions are provided for each card - DKP, SLT, TWT, ISDN BRI, ISDN T1/E1/PRI,
GSM, VoIP, VMS - later in this section. Refer to them when installing each card type.
14. Using the cables supplied with the cards, connect the card interfaces with the MDF (for SLT, DKP and
TWT, Magneto), the NT1 termination device (for BRI lines), the ISDN modem (for T1/E1 PRI lines), the IP
network, a Computer as applicable for each card.
For cards with multiple RJ45 connectors, the cables are bunched together, but each cable is identified by a
distinct color marked at the Boot edge and the Insulation edge of the cable.
The color markings make it easy for you to identify the connector on the card into which the cable is
plugged into, and the hardware ports on that connector. For example, the cable marked with blue on the
Boot and Insulation edge is connected to the first port of the card, containing the hardware ports 01-04.
15. Lead the cables out of the enclosure through any of the two cable outlets on either side of the enclosure.
Lead the cables neatly and tangle-free into the MDF.
16. When you have completed inserting the cards and connecting the cables, replace the top cover by sliding
it in place. Secure the cover with the two screws you removed.
Since the connectors of the cards will not be visible after the cover has been replaced, you are advised to
label the cables appropriately to facilitate identification.
17. To remove a card:
• Switch off power supply, unplug the power cord.
• Disconnect any cables connected to the card.
• Remove the screws from the studs H1, H2 and H3.
• Grasp the card by corners; gently rock the card to ease it out of its slot connectors.
The Power Supply Unit
The Power Supply in the ETERNITY PE is an in-built universal SMPS, with 90-265VAC, 47-63Hz Mains as Input
AC Voltage Power Supply.
There is no provision for battery backup. So, you are recommended to provide Battery Backup of 24 VDC, 7-10A.H.
by connecting a UPS to keep the system powered during outages.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 257
Typical power consumption of the variants of ETERNITY PE is given below:
Variant Power Consumption (Typical)
ETERNITY PE3SS 75W
ETERNITY PE3SP 75W
ETERNITY PE6SP 75W
The Power Supply Unit is factory-fitted. It must be removed and refitted by trained technicians only, and
only for the purpose of fault repair or replacement.
The CPU
The CPU of ETERNITY PE manages the entire system, controls all other cards (SLT, DKP, TWT, DKP+SLT,
TWT+SLT, DKP+TWT, BRI, T1E1PRI Single, GSM, VoIP, etc.). All configuration and programming information is
stored on this card.
The CPU is factory-fitted on the bottom plane of the ETERNITY PE.
The CPU may be removed and reinstalled solely for the purpose of fault repair or replacement, and by
trained technicians only.
Connectors
The connectors of the universal slots of ETERNITY PE are located on the CPU. So, the cards of ETERNITY PE
must be mounted on the connectors on the CPU.
The CPU card has an Ethernet Port, a USB Port, a Communication Port, an Analog Input Port (AIP) and an Analog
Output Port (AOP), and a USB Port.
Master Ethernet Port
The Master Ethernet port is meant for connecting ETERNITY PE to a PC or to a LAN to operate the web-based
programming software Jeeves, Property Management Software (PMS), and Call Accounting Software (CAS). The
Master Ethernet Port is supplied with a cable with a standard RJ45 plug on both ends.
USB Port
The USB port functions as the Device port for downloading data on to the ETERNITY PE using a PC.
The USB port is not available on the ETERNITY PE3SS.
Communication Port
This is a single asynchronous, serial, full duplex RS232C communication port, labeled as COM 10101. The COM
Port has a DB-9 connector. The COM port is meant for connecting a PC to the ETERNITY PE to install and operate
Property Management Software (PMS), Call Accounting Software (CAS), and download Station Message
Recording (SMDR) reports and System reports, and Hotel Reports.
258 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• COM Port is not available in ETERNITY PE3SS.
• As the ETERNITY PE assumes the role of a Data Terminal Equipment, a crossed cable is required for
connecting a computer with the ETERNITY PE3SP and PE6SP.
Analog Input Port
The Analog Input Port (AIP) handles un-amplified, isolated, analog speech signals. It is used for connecting an
external music source, which may be any audio output like a PC, a CD player, or a Cassette Player. The external
device must comply with the technical specifications of this port.
AIP is not available in ETERNITY PE3SS.
Analog Output Port
The Analog Output Port (AOP) outputs un-amplified, isolated, analog speech signals, which can be amplified by an
external amplifier connected to the port. The port is meant for connecting a Public Address System/Paging System
device.
AOP is not available in ETERNITY PE3SS.
Ports and Connectors on the CPU Card - ETERNITY PE at a Glance
Port Name Connector Function
Ethernet Port (TCP/IP) RJ45 To connect to a PC or LAN (to run various software).
Communication (COM Port) DB-9 female To connect a PC (to run various software; download
system activity reports).
USB port (Device Port)a USB To download data on to the ETERNITY through a PC.
Analog Input Portb Standard audio jack To connect audio input device like an external music
source.
Analog Output Portc Standard audio jack To audio output device - Public Address/Paging System.
a. Available on ETERNITY PE6SP and PE3SP only.
b. Available on ETERNITY PE6SP and PE3SP only.
c. Available on ETERNITY PE6SP and PE3SP only.
LED
The CPU has two dual color - Green and Red - LEDs labeled L1 and L2.
• L1 - indicates the health of the card during the normal functioning of the system.
• L2 - indicates the health of the card during the reset cycle. After power ON, when the system becomes
stable LED blinks Green for 1 second ON and OFF.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 259
Jumpers
Jumper J10 and J13 on the CPU card of ETERNITY PE3SS/3SP and PE6SP are used to Reset the SE Password.
Refer the table below:
Jumper Number
Position Function
ETERNITY PE3SS ETERNITY PE3SP ETERNITY PE6SP
J5 J5 J11 AB (default) External Boot.
BC Internal Boot.
J10 J10 J13 AB Reset SE Password.
BC (default) Normal.
J6 J6 J7 AB (default) Embedded ICE
BC JTAG Mode
Do not change the position of Jumpers number J5 and J6 on ETERNITY PE3SS and PE3SP.
Do not change the position of the Jumpers J7 and J11 on ETERNITY PE6SP.
ETERNITY PE does not support Redundancy and Hot Swap.
Providing Battery Backup
Provide Battery Backup of 24 VDC, 7-10A.H. by connecting the system with a UPS.
Connecting ETERNITY PE to the Local Area Network
Plug one end of the Ethernet cable supplied with the system into the Ethernet port of the ETERNITY PE and plug
the other end into the LAN switch.
With the ETERNITY PE connected to a LAN, you can:
• access the web-based programming tool Jeeves from any PC on the LAN.
• set up and run software applications such as PMS and CAS on any PC on the LAN.
• generate Station Message Detail Record (SMDR) Reports on any PC on the LAN.
Connect the ETERNITY to a Standalone PC
You can connect ETERNITY PE to a standalone PC either through the Ethernet Port or through the COM Port,
depending on the type of application you want to use.
1. Connect the Ethernet Port of ETERNITY with the Ethernet Port of the stand-alone PC using the Ethernet
cable supplied with ETERNITY.
You need to connect to the PC via the Ethernet port for the following functions:
• To use the web-based programming Tool Jeeves
• To configure ETERNITY using FTP
• To take debug/report on Syslog
• To capture SMDR reports, SMDR Online and SMDR Posting
• To capture System Activity Log and System Fault Log, Hotel Motel Activity Log
260 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• To run PMS Interface or CAS Interface in the Hotel Application50
2. Connect the Communication Port of ETERNITY with the Communication Port of the stand-alone PC using
any standard Communication Cable.
You need to connect to the PC via the COM Port for the following functions:
• To run a PMS/CAS Interface.
• To capture SMDR reports, SMDR Online and SMDR Posting
• To capture System Activity Log and System Fault Log, Hotel Motel Activity Log
• To run PMS Interface or CAS Interface in the Hotel Application51
• To program the system using Hyper Terminal.
When you connect the ETERNITY PE to a standalone/LAN PC, you need to make sure that
• The IP Address of the Master Ethernet Port of the ETERNITY PE and the Ethernet Port of the PC are
not the same.
• The Ethernet Port of ETERNITY PE and the Ethernet Port of the PC are in the same Subnet.
Changing IP Address and Subnet Mask of the Master Ethernet Port
The default IP Address of the Master Ethernet Port of the ETERNITY PE is 192.168.1.101 and the Subnet Mask is
255.255.255.0.
• Ascertain the IP Address and Subnet of the standalone PC.
If the system is connected to a LAN PC, ask the LAN Administrator to assign an IP Address and a Subnet
Mask to the ETERNITY PE52.
• Replace the cover of the ETERNITY PE and switch ON the system.
• Change the IP Address and the Subnet Mask of the Ethernet Port by dialing the following commands from
a station of the ETERNITY PE.
• Dial 1#91-1234 (to enter programming mode. 1234 is the default SE Password)
You get programming tone.
To change IP Address:
• Dial 2110-IP Address
For example: to change the IP Address to 192.168.50.10 dial 2110-192168050010.
You get confirmation tone.
• Dial 2111-Subnet Mask
For example: to change the Subnet Mask to 255.255.255.0 dial 2111-255255255000.
You get confirmation tone.
50. Refer the ETERNITY Hospitality System Manual to know more.
51. Refer the ETERNITY Hospitality System Manual to know more.
52. This will not be necessary, if there is a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server on the LAN.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 261
• Dial 00 to exit from the programming mode.
• If there is a DHCP server on the LAN to which the Ethernet Port of the ETERNITY PE is connected,
there is no need to change the IP Address or Subnet Mask, as these will be provided automatically by
the DHCP server.
• You must only enable the DHCP flag of the Ethernet Port of ETERNITY PE.
• To enable DHCP flag
• Dial 1#91-1234 (to enter programming mode. 1234 is the default SE Password)
• You get programming tone.
• Dial 2117-1
• You get confirmation tone.
• Dial 00 to exit from the programming mode.
Connecting a Public Address System
• Refer the “Technical Specifications” of the Analog Output Port (AOP) and select a compatible Public
Address System device.
Connect a good quality external amplifier and matching speakers to the port. You may use a combination
of 10W amplifier and a 4W speaker.
Technical Specifications of the AOP
Specification Value
Interface Type Audio Signal
Frequency 300Hz to 3400Hz
Maximum Voltage 0.707Vrms across 600
Physical Connector 3.5mm audio jack
• Plug in the audio jack into the AOP connector.
Also refer the topic “Paging”.
Connecting an External Music Device
• Refer the “Technical Specifications” of the Analog Input Port and select a compatible external music
source - Cassette Player, FM Radio, CD Player, etc.
Analog Input Port Technical Specifications
Specification Value
Interface Type Audio Signal
Frequency 300Hz to 3400Hz
Maximum Voltage 0.707Vrms across 600
262 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Specification Value
DC Bias Not more than 10V DC
Isolation Internal Transformer
Source Impedance required 600
Termination provided 600
Physical Connector 3.5mm audio jack
• Plug in the audio jack of the device into the AIP connector.
Also refer the topics “Music on Hold (MOH)”, “Background Music (BGM)”, “External Music”.
The volume of the external music source must be set to a level such that the music on the trunks is neither
very low nor very high. The volume of the signal coming from this device must never increase beyond the
specified limits - 0.707Vrms across 600.
Do not apply electrical signal of higher volume than the specified limit to this port, as it may cause
permanent damage to the system. Matrix Warranty does not cover damages as a result of improper use.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 263
The Single Line Telephone Card
The Single Line Telephone (SLT) Card provides the interface to connect as extension phones, any standard, two-
wire, analog single line telephone instrument-rotary, pulse-tone, cordless, feature phones with or without Calling
Line Identification.
The SLT Card is available in the following configurations for the models of ETERNITY PE. The SLT interface is
available in combination with Digital Key Phone ports and Two-wire Trunk ports on a single card.
SLT Cards for ETERNITY PE
Card Name Configuration and Application
ETERNITY PE Card SLT8 8-port card to connect 8 Single Line Telephones
ETERNITY PE Card Combination card, with 4 ports to connect to 4 Digital Key Phones and 4 Single
DKP4+SLT4 Line Telephones
ETERNITY PE Card Combination card, with 2 ports to connect to 2 Digital Key Phones and 6 Single
DKP2+SLT6 Line Telephones
ETERNITY PE Card Combination card, with 4 ports to connect to 4 Two-wire Analog trunk lines and 4
TWT4+SLT4 Single Line Telephones
ETERNITY PE Card Combination card, with 2 ports to connect to 2 Two-wire Analog trunk lines, 2 Digital
TWT2+DKP2+SLT4 Key Phones, and 4 Single Line Telephones
ETERNITY PE Card Combination card with 2 ports to connect 2 Two-wire Analog trunk lines, and 6
TWT2+SLT6 ports to connect 6 Single Line Telephones
Choose an SLT Card with the configuration that meets your requirement for SLT ports. Also consider the maximum
SLT Port capacity of the system you are installing.
The maximum number of SLT ports supported by the variants of ETERNITY PE are:
• ETERNITY PE3SS: 24 SLT Ports
• ETERNITY PE3SP: 24 SLT Ports
• ETERNITY PE6SP: 48 SLT Ports
Connectors
The SLT Cards have RJ45 connectors. A multi-pair, cable is supplied for each connector on the card.
Installing Single Line Telephones
To be able to connect Single Line Telephones as Stations (Extensions) to your ETERNITY PE, you must install at
least one of the aforementioned SLT cards in the System.
1. Decide the number of SLT extensions required and arrange for as many telephone instruments.
You may use any standard telephone instrument like a rotary phone, a pulse-tone switchable push-button
phone, a feature phone or a cordless phone.
264 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Use SLTs equipped with a 'Flash' key, as several of the features and facilities of the ETERNITY require you
to press Flash. If any of the SLTs you have selected does not have a Flash key, tap the Hook switch of the
phone to dial Flash.
2. Unpack the SLT card and check the package contents.
3. Make sure that the power supply is switched off, before you begin the installation of the card. Always wear
an electrostatic discharge prevention wrist strap/belt and use a grounding mat.
4. Unscrew the top cover of the ETERNITY PE and slide it out. Keep the cover and the screws aside.
5. Select any of the free slots from the universal slots.
6. Grasping the card by its sides or corners fit it onto the connectors of the selected slot. The card should be
seated such that its connector pins make perfect contact with those on the CPU (motherboard) on the
bottom plane.
7. Secure the card on the studs labeled H1, H2 and H3 with the three screws provided.
8. Repeat the same steps to install another SLT card. It is not necessary to install the other SLT cards in
subsequent slots. You may install the other SLT cards in any of the universal slots.
9. Now, use the cables supplied with the SLT card to connect the SLT wires with the Main Distribution Frame.
For each connector on the SLT Card, there is a separate cable with an RJ45 jack on one end and free at
the other end.
The color markings serve the purpose of identifying which cable is to be plugged into each connector, and
the wire-pairs for each port on the connector.
ETERNITY PE Card SLT8
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 265
ETERNITY PE Card DKP4+SLT4
ETERNITY PE Card TWT4+SLT4
ETERNITY PE Card TWT2+DKP2+SLT4
10. Plug in the RJ45 end of the SLT cables into the respective connectors with the help of the color markings
on the cables as illustrated for each SLT Card type.
11. Lead the cables out of the enclosure through any of the two cable outlets on either side of the enclosure.
266 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
12. Terminate the free end of the cables into the punch down blocks of the Krone modules designated for
'Station Lines' in the Main Distribution Frame (MDF).
Each wire-pair from the ETERNITY PE SLT Port must be terminated to the bottom of the Krone Connector,
while the wire-pair of the extension line to be connected to this port must be terminated on the top of the
Krone connector. Refer the topic “The Main Distribution Frame (MDF)” for illustration.
13. If you have completed installing all cards, replace the top cover by sliding it in place. Secure the cover with
the two screws you removed.
Connecting SLT instruments
14. Connect the SLT instruments you have arranged for. Plug in the SLTs into the wall socket/outlets.
• For the purpose of testing, you may connect one or two Single Line Telephone instruments by plugging
in the phone cables into the RJ45 connectors on the card.
• When you plug the RJ11 connector of SLT into an RJ45 connector on the SLT card, the SLT will be
connected to the first port on the connector.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 267
The Digital Key Phone Card
The Digital Key Phone (DKP) Card provides the interface to connect the proprietary digital key phones, EON, the
PC-based phone EONSOFT and the Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles with the ETERNITY PE.
The DKP Card is available in the following configurations for the models of ETERNITY PE.
DKP Cards for ETERNITY PE
Card Name Configuration and Application
ETERNITY PE Card DKP8 8-port card to connect 8 DKP/DSS Consoles
ETERNITY PE Card Combination card, with 4 ports to connect to 4 Digital Key Phones and 4 Single
DKP4+SLT4 Line Telephones
ETERNITY PE Card Combination card, with 2 ports to connect to 2 Digital Key Phones and 6 Single
DKP2+SLT6 Line Telephones
ETERNITY PE Card Combination card, with 4 ports to connect to 4 Two-wire Analog trunk lines and 4
TWT4+DKP4 ports to connect 4 DKP/DSS Consoles
ETERNITY PE Card Combination card, with 2 ports to connect to 2 Two-wire Analog trunk lines, 2
TWT2+DKP2+SLT4 ports to connect 2 DKP/DSS Consoles, and 4 ports to connect 4 Single Line
Telephones
Select a DKP Card with the configuration that meets your requirement for DKP Ports. Also consider the maximum
DKP Port capacity of the system you are installing.
The maximum number of DKP ports supported by each variant of ETERNITY PE is:
• ETERNITY PE3SS: 24 DKP ports
• ETERNITY PE3SP: 24 DKP ports
• ETERNITY PE6SP: 48 DKP ports
Installing Digital Key Phone Card
To be able to connect the Matrix proprietary DKP - EON and its DSS Consoles, and the PC-based EONSOFT as
Stations (Extensions) to your ETERNITY PE, you must install at least one of the aforementioned DKP cards in the
System.
1. Decide the number of DKP extensions and DSS consoles required and arrange for as many instruments.
2. Take all the necessary precautions for installing cards - wear an electrostatic discharge preventive wrist
strap and use a grounding mat. Make sure power supply is turned off and the power cord is unplugged.
3. Unpack the DKP card and check the package contents.
4. Unscrew and remove the top cover of the ETERNITY PE, and keep it aside with the screws.
5. Select any of the free slots from the universal slots.
268 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
6. Grasping the DKP card by its sides or corners fit it onto the connectors of the selected slot. The card
should be seated such that its connector pins make perfect contact with those on the CPU (motherboard)
on the bottom plane.
7. Secure the card on the studs labeled H1, H2 and H3 with the three screws provided.
8. Repeat the same steps to install another DKP card. You may install the other DPK cards in any of the
slots, not necessarily in a sequence.
9. Now, use the cables supplied with the DKP card to connect the DKP wire-pairs with the Main Distribution
Frame.
For each connector on the DKP Card, there is a separate cable with an RJ45 jack on one end and free at
the other end.
The color markings serve the purpose of identifying which cable is to be plugged into each connector, and
the wire-pairs for each port on the connector.
ETERNITY PE Card DKP8
ETERNITY PE Card DKP4+SLT4
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 269
ETERNITY PE Card DKP2+SLT6
ETERNITY PE Card TWT4+DKP4
ETERNITY PE Card TWT2+DKP2+SLT4
10. Plug in the RJ45 end of the DKP cables into the respective connectors with the help of the color markings
on the cables as illustrated for each DKP Card type.
270 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
11. Lead the cables out of the enclosure through any of the two cable outlets on either side of the enclosure.
12. Terminate the free end of the cables into the punch down blocks of the Krone modules designated for
'Station Lines' in the Main Distribution Frame (MDF).
Each wire-pair from the ETERNITY PE DKP Port must be terminated to the bottom of the Krone
Connector, while the wire-pair of the extension line to be connected to this port must be terminated on the
top of the Krone connector. Refer the topic “The Main Distribution Frame (MDF)” for illustration.
13. If you have completed installing all cards, replace the top cover by sliding it in place. Secure the cover with
the two screws you removed.
Installing EON
Matrix offers EON, the proprietary digital key phone. EON is available in the following models:
• EON42
• EON48
1. Unpack the box and verify the package contents.
2. Mount the phone on a desk or wall at a convenient location.
EON42
• To mount EON42 on a wall, detach the Foot Stand on the bottom of the phone, by pressing the snap fits of
the foot stand backwards, and lifting it from its anchorage in the mounting holes.
• Now, insert the snap fits of the foot stand into the Wall Mount bracket slots on the bottom of the phone in
the “ wall up" direction.
• Fix two screws of appropriate diameter on the wall, ensuring that they are aligned with the Keyhole Slots 1
and 2 of EON42. The screws should protrude from the wall to fit into the Keyhole Slots.
• Now, mount the phone with the screws fitting into the keyhole slots.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 271
• Connect the handset of the EON42 to the phone body using the spring cord.
• To use a Headset (not supplied with the phone), plug any standard stereo headset with 2.5mm single
connector into the headset jack on the left side panel of the phone.
EON48
• To mount EON48 on a wall, detach the Foot Stand on the bottom of the phone, as illustrated below.
• Fix two screws of appropriate diameter on the wall, ensuring that they are aligned with the Keyhole Slots 1
and 2 of EON48. The screws should protrude from the wall to fit into the Keyhole Slots.
• Now, mount the phone with the screws fitting into the keyhole slots.
• When you mount EON48 on a desk, you can attach the Foot Stand in two ways as illustrated below.
• Connect the handset of the EON48 to the phone body using the spring cord.
• To use a Headset (not supplied with the phone), plug any standard stereo headset with 2.5mm single
connector into the headset jack on the left side panel of the phone.
272 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
You can also plug in a headset with RJ11 connector into the Headset port at the bottom of the phone.
3. Plug one end of the RJ45 cable supplied with the phone into the RJ45 connector and the other end into the
wall jack. The cable in the wall jack originates from the DKP card through the MDF.
4. When the ETERNITY is powered ON, the EON will get reset. The EON communicates with the ETERNITY.
The handshaking lasts for 5-6 seconds. The EON model, version and revision number, along with the
message 'Please wait'… appear on the LCD display.
M AT R I X E O N 4 8 - S V 2 R 2
PLEASE WAI T .. .
5. After successful handshaking and reset cycle, if the DKP Parameters have been programmed, the LCD
display of the EON will show the station number and the station name in a line. The day, date and time,
time zone in the other line.
202 Reception
M on 2 4 A U G 1 2 : 0 0
6. You may adjust the LCD for brightness, contrast and backlight. Refer the topic, “Digital Key Phone-
Operation”.
For the purpose of testing, you may connect one or two DKPs directly to the connectors of the ETERNITY
DKP card.
Installing DSS Consoles
Once you have installed EON with ETERNITY, installing DSS Consoles can be done in a few simple steps, very
much similar to those involved in the installation of EON.
1. Unpack the box and verify the package contents.
2. Place the DSS Console next to the DKP, EON, to which it is to be attached.
You can install two DSS consoles to a DKP. Refer “Direct Station Selection Console” for possible
combinations for installing the various models of DSS Consoles.
3. Decide which DKP Ports on the DKP Card are to be assigned to the DSS Consoles. You may select any
free (unused) port on the card for DSS Consoles. It is not necessary for the DSS Console ports to be in a
sequence with the DKP ports to which they are attached.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 273
For example: you have connected DKP1 to Port 1 on the first RJ45 connector of the DKP8 card. You want
to attach two DSS Consoles to DKP1. The two DSS Consoles may be connected to any port on the
second connector of the card, not necessarily to Port 2 and Port 3 on the first connector.
4. The wire-pairs from the DKP Ports designated for DSS Consoles should be terminated into the bottom of
the Krone Connector (of 'Station Lines' on the MDF).
5. The wire-pairs of the DSS Consoles should be terminated into the top of the Krone Connector (of 'Station
Lines' on the MDF).
Refer the topic “The Main Distribution Frame (MDF)” for illustration.
6. ETERNITY automatically assigns the first DSS Console discovered on the system to the first DKP, the
second DSS to the second DKP.
7. Only when two DSS Consoles are to be assigned to a single DKP, manual assignment of DSS to the DKP
is required. Refer “Configuring DKP Extensions”.
Installing EONSOFT
To install EONSOFT, you must have a computer with Windows as the operating system. The EONSOFT is
compatible with the following Operating Systems of Windows:
• Windows 98
• Windows XP
• Windows NT
• Windows 2003
• Windows Vista
1. Unpack the box and verify the package contents.
2. Connect the Handset to the dongle in the handset jack. If using a headset, connect the microphone and
the speaker connectors into the dongle.
3. Connect one end of the Communication cable to the COM port of the dongle. Connect the other end of the
communication cable into the COM port of the computer.
274 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
4. Connect a wire-pair of a DKP port of the ETERNITY to the RJ11 port marked 'DKP' on the dongle.
5. Switch ON the computer. The computer must have Windows Operating System installed on it.
6. Now insert the EONSOFT CD-ROM supplied with this PC-based DKP into the CD drive of your Computer.
The EONSOFT has a self-executing program and will automatically install itself on your PC.
7. If the software does not perform auto install on your PC, browse to CD-ROM.
8. The software program will appear, with the Matrix Icon and labeled as 'Matrix-EONSOFT'.
9. Click the Matrix EONSOFT Icon to execute installation of the program.
10. After the program has been installed and run, a shortcut will be automatically created and appear on your
desktop.
11. Click the shortcut to open the program. The EONSOFT window will open:
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 275
12. Click 'Options' at the top left of the window. A drop down menu will appear.
13. Click the option 'COM Port'.
14. Select the COM Port to which the communication cable is connected.
276 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
15. This dialog box will be displayed:
This screen will appear only if the DKP port to which the EONSOFT is connected has been programmed
for parameters like Name, Station number, Date and Time.
• If this dialog box does not appear on the screen in response to the click the COM Port Option, test the
COM Port for data transfer.
• If the wrong COM port has been selected, a dialog box will pop up on your screen with the message:
"COMx is invalid or busy, please select another COM Port". Select the correct COM Port.
Testing the COM Port
• From the drop down menu of 'Options', select the 'COM Port' to which you have connected the
communication cable.
• The COM Port Settings dialog box will open.
• Connect the communication cable to the COM Port of the PC.
• Short pin2 and pin3 of the DB-9 connector at the free end of the cable.
• Click the button labeled 'Start Test' in the COM Port Settings dialog box.
• After clicking this button, observe the Test Result section in the dialog box.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 277
• The 'Error Count' value shows zero as value, if both the communication cable and the COM port are
working.
The above screen shows that the COM Port/communication cable is working.
• If the 'Error Count' shows a value other than zero, it means that either the communication cable or the
COM port of the PC is faulty.
The above screen shows the faulty COM Port/Communication Cable.
• Remove the communication cable from the COM Port of the PC.
• Short pin2 and pin3 of the communication port of the computer and click 'Start Test' in the COM Port
Settings dialog box.
• Now, if the error count is zero, please check the Communication Cable.
• If the error count is not a zero, the COM Port of the PC is faulty. Try another communication port.
Test the functioning of the COM Port of the PC and the communication cable, before you install the
EONSOFT.
278 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The Two-wire Trunk Card
The Two-Wire Trunk (TWT) Card provides the interface to connect the ETERNITY with the POTS Network. The
TWT Card supports the different standards and features of POTS Networks across the world.
The TWT Card is available in the following configurations for the variants of ETERNITY PE. TWT interface is also
available in combination with SLT ports on a single card.
TWT Cards for ETERNITY PE
Card Name Configuration and Application
ETERNITY PE Card TWT8 8-port card to connect 8 Two-wire analog Trunk lines from the CO network
ETERNITY PE Card Combination card, with 4 TWT ports to connect 4 Two-wire analog Trunk lines from
TWT4+SLT4 the CO network, and 4 SLT ports to connect 4 Single Line Telephones
ETERNITY PE Card Combination card, with 4 TWT ports to connect 4 Two-wire analog trunk lines and
TWT4+DKP4 4 DKP ports to connect 4 DKP/DSS Consoles
ETERNITY PE Card Combination card, with 2 ports to connect to 2 Two-wire Analog trunk lines, 2 ports
TWT2+DKP2+SLT4 to connect 2 DKP/DSS Consoles, and 4 ports to connect 4 Single Line Telephones
ETERNITY PE Card Combination card with 2 ports to connect 2 Two-wire Analog trunk lines, and 6
TWT2+SLT6 ports to connect 6 Single Line Telephones
Choose a TWT Card with the configuration that meets your requirement for TWT trunk ports, keeping in mind the
maximum TWT Trunk Port capacity of the system you are installing.
• ETERNITY PE3SS: 8 TWT ports
• ETERNITY PE3SP: 8 TWT ports
• ETERNITY PE6SP: 16 TWT ports
Connectors
The TWT Card has RJ45 connectors, with 4 TWT ports on each connector. A multi-pair, MDF cable is supplied for
each connector on the card.
Installing the TWT Card
For TWT connectivity, you must install at least one of the above mentioned TWT Cards in the system.
1. Take all the necessary precautions prescribed for handling the cards and electronic equipment. Make sure
that power supply is turned off, and the power cord is unplugged before you begin the installation of the
card. Put on an electrostatic-discharge preventive wrist strap/belt and use a grounding mat.
2. Unpack the TWT card and check the package contents.
3. Unscrew and remove the top cover of the ETERNITY PE, and keep it aside with the screws.
4. Select any of the free slots from the universal slots.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 279
5. Seat the card onto the connectors of the selected slot. The connector pins of the card should make perfect
contact with those on the CPU (motherboard) on the bottom plane.
6. Secure the card on the studs labeled H1, H2 and H3 with the three screws provided.
7. Repeat the same steps to install another TWT card. You may install the other TWT cards in any of the
universal slots, but not necessarily in a sequence.
8. Now, use the cables supplied with the TWT card to connect the TWT ports with the Main Distribution
Frame.
For each connector on the TWT Card, there is a separate cable with an RJ45 jack on one end and free at
the other end.
The color markings serve the purpose of identifying which cable is to be plugged into each connector, and
the wire-pairs for each port on the connector.
9. Plug in the RJ45 end of the TWT cables into the respective connectors with the help of the color markings
on the cables as illustrated below for each TWT Card type.
ETERNITY PE Card TWT8
ETERNITY PE Card TWT4+SLT4
280 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
ETERNITY PE Card TWT2+SLT6
ETERNITY PE Card TWT4+DKP4
ETERNITY PE Card TWT2+DKP2+SLT4
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 281
10. Lead the cables out of the enclosure through any of the two cable outlets on either side of the enclosure.
11. Terminate the free end of the cables into the punch down blocks of the Krone modules designated for
'Trunk Lines' in the Main Distribution Frame (MDF).
Each wire-pair from the ETERNITY PE TWT Port must be terminated to the bottom of the Krone
Connector, while the wire-pair of the trunk line from the CO Network to be connected to this port must be
terminated on the top of the Krone connector.
Refer the topics “The Main Distribution Frame (MDF)” and “Terminating Trunk and Station Cables on the
MDF”.
12. If you have completed installing all cards, replace the top cover by sliding it in place. Secure the cover with
the two screws you removed.
282 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The BRI Card
The BRI card provides the interface to connect ETERNITY PE with ISDN BRI Network. The ISDN Network may be
a public or a private ISDN exchange.
The BRI Card is available in the following configuration for the variants of ETERNITY PE.
BRI Card of ETERNITY PE
Card Name Configuration and Application
ETERNITY PE Card BRI2 2-Port card to connect 2 ISDN BRI Lines or ISDN Compatible Devices
The maximum number of BRI lines supported by each variant of ETERNITY PE are:
• ETERNITY PE6SP: 12 BRI lines
• ETERNITY PE3SP: 6 BRI lines
ETERNITY PE3SS does not support ISDN BRI connectivity.
Connectors
The BRI card has 2 RJ45 Connectors. A separate cable is supplied for each connector.
Installing the BRI Card
To be able to connect ETERNITY to BRI Lines, any one of the above cards must be installed in the system.
1. Take all the necessary precautions prescribed for handling the cards and electronic equipment: turn off
power supply, always wear an electrostatic-discharge preventive wrist strap/belt and use a grounding mat.
2. Unpack the BRI card and check the package contents.
3. Unscrew and remove the top cover of the ETERNITY PE, and keep it aside with the screws.
4. Select any of the free slots from the universal slots.
5. Seat the card onto the connectors of the selected slot. The connector pins of the card should make perfect
contact with those on the CPU (motherboard) on the bottom plane.
6. Secure the card on the studs labeled H1, H2 and H3 with the three screws provided.
7. Repeat the same steps to install another BRI card. You may install the other BRI cards in any of the
universal slots, but not necessarily in a sequence.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 283
Connecting ISDN BRI Lines
Most ISDN Service Providers also provide the NT1 device along with the BRI line. The BRI Line from the ISDN
central office is terminated on the NT1 on the Customer's Premises, as illustrated below.
ISDN
Network NT 1 BRI Port
ETERNITY
Power
U-Interface S/T
(2-wire) Interface
Customer Premises
Where,
• U Interface = between the NT1 equipment and the ISDN central office.
• S/T Interface = between the ISDN user equipment, in this case, ETERNITY and the Network Interface
Equipment (NT1).
The BRI line is terminated on the NT1. The S/T interface of the NT1 is connected to BRI port of the ETERNITY.
TE and NT Modes
In this illustration, the BRI line from ISDN Service Provider is directly connected to BRI port of the ETERNITY via
the NT1 device. Here, the ETERNITY is the Terminal Equipment, so the BRI Port must be programmed to work in
the TE mode.
When an ISDN Phone is to be connected to the BRI port of ETERNITY, the BRI port must be programmed to work
in NT mode.
When a BRI port of another ISDN PBX is to be connected to the BRI port of the ETERNITY, in such a configuration,
you may configure
• the BRI port of the other ISDN PBX in the TE mode and the BRI Port of the ETERNITY in the NT mode.
OR
• the BRI port of the other ISDN PBX in the NT mode and the BRI Port of the ETERNITY in the TE mode
Also refer the topic “ISDN-BRI” to know more.
Types of BRI Configuration
There are two types of configurations in BRI: Point-to-Point Configuration and Point-to-Multipoint Configuration.
Each of these is discussed below.
284 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Point-to-Point Configuration
BRI Line
NT BRI Port
ISDN (TE Mode)
Network
(UP to 1 Km.)
ETERNITY
The maximum distance between the NT (Network Termination, NT1 or NT2) and a single Terminal Equipment, in
this case ETERNITY, can be up to 1 kilometer.
Point-to-Multipoint Configuration
A maximum of 8 ISDN equipment can be connected on a single BRI Bus line in a Point-to-Multipoint configuration.
Further, two configurations are possible in a Point-to-Multipoint configuration:
a. Short Passive Bus Configuration
b. Extended Passive Bus Configuration
Short Passive Bus Configuration
d < 200 meters
ISDN NT
Network BRI Bus Bar
Terminal
BRI Port Resistance 100
(TE Mode)
Terminal
Resistance 100
ETERNITY ISDN Phone ISDN Phone ISDN Phone
Terminal 1 Terminal 2 Terminal 3 Terminal 8
Where,
TE = Terminal Equipment or ISDN device (End user device)
NT = Network Termination provided by the ISDN Service Provider
d = distance from NT to the last TE equipment.
In a Short Passive Bus Configuration,
• A maximum of 8 Terminal equipment or ISDN devices can be connected to a single NT on a bus up to 200
meters from the NT.
• 100 Terminal Resistance is required to be inserted at the NT side as well as the last TE Equipment as
shown in the figure.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 285
• Using this configuration, any subscriber from ETERNITY can access a BRI line and can make outgoing
calls. At the same time, another subscriber from ETERNITY or any ISDN phone shown in the figure can
make outgoing call from the same BRI. In the same way, incoming calls are possible on the same BRI.
• Only two simultaneous speech paths can be established, as BRI supports 2 voice channels only.
• This configuration is useful on the smaller premises, where a single BRI line and multiple ISDN devices are
used.
Extended Passive Bus Configuration
d < 1 Km
d1 < 30 meters
ISDN NT
Network BRI Bus Bar
Terminal
Terminal BRI Port Resistance 100
(TE Mode)
Resistance 100
ETERNITY ISDN Phone ISDN Phone
Terminal 1 Terminal 2 Terminal 3
Where,
TE = Terminal equipment of any ISDN Equipment
NT = Network Termination provided by Service Provider
TR = Terminal Resistance 100
d = distance from NT to the last TE Equipment
d1 = the total distance from first TE equipment and the last TE equipment.
In an Extended Passive Bus Configuration,
• You can connect only 3 Terminal Equipment or ISDN devices. These devices are grouped together at one
end of the bus, with may extend to a distance of up to 1 kilometer from the NT.
• However, all the 3 Terminal Equipment/ISDN devices must be located within a range of 30 meters, as
shown in the figure.
• Using this configuration, any subscriber from ETERNITY can access the BRI line and make outgoing calls.
At the same time, another subscriber from the ETERNITY or any ISDN phone shown in the figure can
make outgoing calls from the same BRI. In the same way, incoming calls are possible on the same BRI.
• Only two simultaneous speech paths can be established, as BRI supports 2 voice channels only.
• This configuration is useful on large premises where a limited number of ISDN devices (maximum 3) are to
be used within a range of 30 meters.
3. Use the cable supplied for each connector on the BRI card to connect the BRI Ports to the NT1 device
supplied by your ISDN service provider.
4. To connect the BRI Lines to the BRI ports, refer the configuration and pinout details given below for
guidance
286 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Configuration details of the U interface (RJ-45) at NT1
Pin Number Pin Details
4 Tx
5 Rx
Configuration details of the S/T interface (RJ-45) on NT1
Pin Number Pin Details
3 Rx1
4 Tx1
5 Tx2
6 Rx2
Pinout and cable details of the BRI Port in TE Mode
Port 1:
Pin Connection Color
1 NC Orange-White
2 NC Orange
3 Tx0A Green-White
4 Rx0A Blue
5 Rx0B Blue-White
6 Tx0B Green
7 VOut 0- Brown-White
8 VOut 0+ Brown
Port 2:
Pin Connection Color
1 NC Orange-White
2 NC Orange
3 Tx1A Green-White
4 Rx1A Blue
5 Rx1B Blue-White
6 Tx1B Green
7 VOut 1- Brown-White
8 VOut 1+ Brown
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 287
Pinout details of the BRI Port in NT Mode
Port 1:
Pin Connection Color
1 NC Orange-White
2 NC Orange
3 Rx0A Green-White
4 Tx0A Blue
5 Tx0B Blue-White
6 Rx0B Green
7 VOut 0- Brown-White
8 VOut 0+ Brown
Port 2:
Pin Connection Color
1 NC Orange-White
2 NC Orange
3 Rx1A Green-White
4 Tx1A Blue
5 Tx1B Blue-White
6 Rx1B Green
7 VOut 1- Brown-White
8 VOut 1+ Brown
The following diagram shows how to connect a BRI Line to the ETERNITY PE BRI port in the TE mode.
NT-1 ETERNITY
3
Rx1 TxA
4 4
Tx Tx1 RxA
ISDN
5
Network Rx Tx2 5 RxB
6
Rx2 TxB
NC V-
Power NC V+
U-Interface A BRI port of
S/T Interface
(2-wire) (4-wire) ETERNITY
• V- and V+ are used when a TE is connected to BRI port (in this case the port functions as network or
NT).
• For using the BRI port in the TE mode, the cable connections need not be crossed.
• When the BRI Port is to be used in the NT mode, the Tx and Rx cable of BRI port shall be crossed with
the Rx and Tx cables of the terminal respectively.
288 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Setting Orientation Type of BRI Port
5. In all the BRI configuration types illustrated here, the BRI port must be configured as TE.
By default the Orientation Type of the BRI ports of ETERNITY are set as 'Terminals' (TE mode). So, you
may skip to the next step.
If the BRI Port is to be configured in the NT mode, all the related Jumpers should be set in BC position.
Refer the table below.
Jumper Position for BRI Port1 Jumper Position for BRI Port2
Mode
J1 J2 J4 J5 J7 J8 J10 J11
NT BC BC BC BC BC BC BC BC
TE AB AB AB AB AB AB AB AB
Inserting Termination Resistance
6. Termination of 100 should be inserted in the following cases:
• When the BRI port is configured in the TE mode and connected in a Point-to-Point configuration as
shown below.
• When the BRI port is configured in the TE mode in a Point-to-Multipoint configuration as shown below.
100 Termination is required on the last Terminal connected on the S0 bus to terminate calls properly.
ISDN
BRI Line NT
Network
BRI TE BRI TE BRI TE
Other ISDN Other ISDN ETERNITY
Equipment Equipment
In a Point-to-Multipoint configuration, 100 termination can be provided on either of the following:
• Last TE equipment
• Last point of the bus bar where the last TE equipment is connected.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 289
• When BRI port is configured in the NT mode.
• If the S0 bus itself supports Terminating resistors, Termination Resistance need not be inserted when:
• BRI Port is configured as TE and connected in a Point-to-Point Configuration as illustrated above.
• BRI Port is configured as NT.
• Termination need not be inserted if the BRI port of ETERNITY (configured in TE mode) is connected as
any terminal other than the last terminal on the S0 bus (in a Multi-point configuration).
Termination in TE Equipment (BRI Port)
7. To set the 100 termination on the BRI port set the Jumpers J3 and J4 provided on the BRI module of
each port in AB position. Refer the table below.
Jumper Position for BRI Port1 Jumper Position for BRI Port 2
Function
J3 J4 J3 J4
To insert 100 termination resistance AB AB AB AB
To remove 100 termination BC BC BC BC
resistance
By default, Termination Resistance of 100 is set on the BRI port (Jumpers J3 and J4 are in AB position)
Termination in the Bus Bar
8. 100 termination resister can be connected between TX and RX, between pin number 3-4 and 5-6 in the
RJ45 connector as illustrated below.
1 RJ45 Connector on
Bus Bar at the Last
TE ISDN Equipment
Tx 3
100
Rx 4
Rx 5
100
Tx 6
290 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
As shown in the application diagrams for Point-to-Multipoint connectivity, each ISDN TE device is
connected in a Bus Bar, which may be Short Passive Bus Bar configuration or an Extended Passive Bus
Bar configuration.
Illustrated below is the connection diagram of two ports connected with each other on the same BRI bus
bar.
1 1 RJ45 Connector
ports on BRI Bus
Bar to which the
3 3
ISDN TE
4 4 Equipment is
connected
5 5
6 6
8 8
• The above figure shows the connection details of two ports on the BRI Bus Bar. Similarly, you can
connect 8 ports on the Bus Bar, keeping in mind the Termination Resister for the NT and the Last TE
on the Bus bar.
• Pin number 3, 4, 5 and 6 of the RJ45 connector are used for connectivity.
• Pin number 3 and 6 are used for Transmit (Tx) and pin number 4 and 5 are used for Receive (Rx) from
the ISDN TE side.
• Pin number 3 and 6 are used for Receive (Rx) and pin number 4 and 5 are used for Transmit (Tx) from
the NT side.
Feeding Power to the Terminal
9. When the BRI Port of the ETERNITY is used as BRI-NT, you can feed power to the terminal equipment
connected to the BRI-NT Port from the ETERNITY.
To do this, you must change the position of the Jumpers J1 and J2 on the BRI modules (daughter board),
of the BRI Card.
Jumper Position
Function
J1 J2
To feed power on Tx and Rx wires (Phantom Power) AB AB
To feed power on separate pair of wires BC BC
No power to be fed to the terminal equipment Open Open
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 291
By default, the jumpers J1 and J2 are open.
• The maximum power that can be fed to a single BRI port is 50mA.
• From signaling point of view, a maximum of 8 terminal equipment can be connected on the BRI port
configured in the NT mode.
• The number of ISDN Terminals that can be connected on the BRI port configured in the NT mode
depends on the power consumed by the ISDN terminals.
10. If you have completed all other installation tasks, you may turn ON the system and observe the Reset
Cycle.
292 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The T1E1PRI Card
The ETERNITY PE T1E1PRI Card provides the interface to connect ETERNITY PE to ISDN Network.
When connected to T1 carrier lines, the Card supports the following signaling types:
• PRI
• Robbed Bit Signaling
• Q-Signaling (QSIG)
• E&M
When connected to E1 carrier lines, the card supports the following signaling types:
• PRI
• Channel Associated Signaling (CAS)
• Q-Signaling (QSIG)
• E&M
The T1E1PRI Card is available in the following configuration for ETERNITY PE:
T1E1PRI Card for ETERNITY PE
Card Name Configuration and Application
ETERNITY PE Card T1E1PRI 1-port card with QSIG support to connect 1 ISDN T1/E1 PRI Line or ISDN
Single Compatible Device
The maximum number of ISDN PRI lines supported by the variants of ETERNITY PE are:
• ETERNITY PE3SP: 3 T1/E1 PRI Lines
• ETERNITY PE6SP: 6 T1/E1 PRI Lines.
ETERNITY PE3SS does not support ISDN PRI connectivity.
Connectors
The T1E1PRI card has an RJ45 Connector. A cable with RJ45 plugs on both ends is supplied with the card.
Installing the T1E1PRI Card
1. Before installing the card, take the necessary precautions prescribed for handling the cards. Always wear
an electrostatic-discharge preventive wrist strap and use a grounding mat. Make sure the power supply is
turned off.
2. Unpack the T1E1PRI card and check the package contents.
3. Unscrew and remove the top cover of the ETERNITY PE (if not opened already). Keep the cover and the
screws aside.
4. Select any free slot from the Universal Slots.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 293
5. Grasp the card by its sides or corners. Fit the card's connectors into the connectors of the selected slot.
Ensure that the card's connector pins make perfect contact with those on the CPU on the bottom plane.
6. Secure the card on the studs labeled H1, H2 and H3 with the three screws provided.
7. Repeat the same steps to install another T1E1PRI card. You may install the other T1E1PRI cards in any of
the universal slots, but not necessarily in a sequence. Any card can be inserted in any of the universal
slots.
Connecting ISDN T1/E1 PRI Lines
8. Use the cable supplied with the T1E1PRI Card to connect the ETERNITY to the T1/E1 PRI network
interface equipment (modem), which is usually supplied by your ISDN Service Provider along with the PRI
line.
The block diagram illustrates this.
Customer Premises
ISDN G.703
Modem
Network 4-wire HDSL DTE
4-wire PRI
(RJ-45 Connector) (RJ-45 Connector) Port
G.703
Modem
Power
• Most Service Providers insist on connecting an ISDN modem at both the ends of the PRI line, one at
the Local Exchange and other at the Customer's Premises.
• At the Customer's Premises, the PRI line is terminated on the HDSL interface of the modem.
• The DTE interface of the modem is to be connected to the PRI port (RJ45 connector on the Matrix
ETERNITY PE T1E1PRI Single Card).
9. Plug in one end of the RJ45 cable supplied with the card into the card's connector. Lead the cable out of
the enclosure through any of the two cable outlets on either side of the enclosure.
10. Plug the other end of the RJ45 cable into the Network Termination Unit.
11. Refer the following pin details for connecting the Network Termination Unit with the ETERNITY.
Pin details of HDSL Interface of the G.703 Modem. (HDSL Network Termination Unit)
Pin Number Pin Details
1 Line A
2 Line A
3 Not used
4 Line B
294 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Pin Number Pin Details
5 Line B
6 Not used
7 Not used
8 Not used
Pin details of DTE Interface of G.703 Modem. (HDSL Network Interface Unit)
Pin Number Pin Details
1 TX1 (Tip)
2 TX2 (Ring)
3 Not used
4 RX1 (Ring)
5 RX2 (Tip)
6 Not used
7 Not used
8 Not used
Most of the HDSL Network Termination Unit manufacturers use these connectors. But you are advised to
read the installation guide of the HDSL Network Termination Unit being used by you.
Pin details of ETERNITY T1E1PR1 Port
The T1E1PRI Port of the ETERNITY PE terminates in an 8-pin RJ45, female connector and is wired
according to the figure below.
Tx1 (Ring) Tx2 (Tip)
4 5
NC NC
3 6
Rx2 (Tip) NC
2 7
Rx1 (Ring) NC
1 8
The cable wires may have to be crossed depending on the pinout of the DTE Interface of the modem.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 295
Setting Line Termination Resistor
12. Termination Resistance of the PRI Port for T1 or E1 Connectivity is set by changing the position of the
Jumper J2 as given in the table below:
Jumper Position Meaning
J2 BC To set termination resistance of 120 for E1 connectivity
J2 AB To set termination resistance of 100 for T1 connectivity
• By default the jumper J2 is in BC position to provide 120 for E1 connectivity.
• To use the PRI Port for T1 connectivity, termination resistance must be changed to 100, by changing
the position of jumper J2 to AB position.
13. Repeat the same steps to connect another PRI card, if installed.
14. If you have no other card to install, replace the top cover, by sliding it in place. Secure the cover with the
two screws you removed.
15. If you have completed all other installation tasks. Power the system and observe the Reset Cycle.
296 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The Mobile Card
The Mobile Card interfaces the ETERNITY with GSM/3G networks. It routes calls made and received over mobile
networks, like a mobile handset.
The card does not support GPRS features, Fax and Data services, network supported services, except
CLIR and USSD.
The Mobile card is available in the following configuration for ETERNITY PE:
Mobile Card for ETERNITY PE
Card Name Configuration and Application
ETERNITY PE Card GSM2 2-port card to connect to the GSM network (2 SIM Cards can be
installed)
ETERNITY PE Card GSM2 2-port card to connect to 3G network (2 SIM Cards can be installed)
3G
ETERNITY PE Card GSM4 4-port card to connect to the GSM network (4 SIM Cards can be
installed)
ETERNITY PE Card GSM4 4-port card to connect to 3G network (4 SIM Cards can be installed)
3G
Just like mobile handsets, each Mobile Port has a unique IMEI (International Mobile Equipment Identity) number,
pasted on the mobile engine.
The maximum number of Mobile ports trunks supported by each variant of ETERNITY PE are:
• ETERNITY PE3SS: 12 GSM Ports
• ETERNITY PE3SP: 12 GSM Ports
• ETERNITY PE6SP: 24 GSM Ports
SIM of different service providers can be used.
Antenna
For all four mobile ports, there is a single antenna with a male connector on the card. A splitter connects all the four
ports on the card into a single antenna. An antenna cable is provided.
Personal Identification Number (PIN)
The SIM cards can be protected from unauthorized use by programming a Personal Identification Number (PIN) on
the SIM. If the wrong SIM PIN is entered thrice in a row, by a user, the SIM Card suspects the user and asks for the
Personal Unlock Keyword (PUK).
Installing the Mobile Card
1. Before you install the Mobile Card, make sure that
• the ETERNITY is installed at a location where sufficient network coverage is available.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 297
• the power supply is turned off
• you are wearing an electrostatic discharge preventive wrist strap and have a grounding mat, before you
begin handling the card.
2. Get the SIM Card from the GSM service provider of your choice ready. Use SIM PIN protection, if required.
3. Unpack the Mobile card and verify the package contents.
SIM PIN Protection
4. Enable SIM PIN to protect your SIM card. Before installing the SIM card in the system, insert the SIM into
a mobile handset first. From the mobile handset,
• enable PIN Protection.
• change the SIM PIN to 1234 (this is the default PIN for all SIM cards used in the system). Changing the
SIM PIN to '1234' enables you to change the SIM PIN from the ETERNITY later.
• remove the SIM from the mobile handset.
If you do not want to use PIN protection, insert the SIM in the mobile handset and disable PIN protection.
Remove the SIM Card from the mobile handset.
5. Now, insert the SIM card (PIN changed to 1234), with its connector side down into the SIM holder on the
Mobile card. You can insert multiple SIM cards of the same GSM service provider or of different service
providers.
ETERNITY PE Card GSM2
298 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
ETERNITY PE Card GSM4
6. Remove the top cover of the ETERNITY PE, if not opened already. Keep the cover and the screws aside.
7. Select any of the free universal slots. Grasping the card by its sides or corners fit it onto the connectors of
the selected slot.
The card should be seated such that its connector pins make perfect contact with those on the CPU
(motherboard) on the bottom plane.
8. Secure the card on the studs labeled H1, H2 and H3 with the three screws provided.
9. Repeat the same steps to install another Mobile card, in another free slot. It is not necessary to install the
Mobile cards in subsequent slots.
10. Connect the antenna cable provided with the card on the splitter connector on the card.
11. Lead the antenna cable out of the enclosure through any of the two cable outlets on either side of the
enclosure. Now, place the antenna at an appropriate location.
12. If you have completed installing all cards, replace the top cover by sliding it in place. Secure the cover with
the two screws you removed.
• At every power up of the system, it takes about 3 minutes for the Mobile ports to get registered with the
network. Once registration with the GSM network is completed, the mobile port can be used.
• Each time the Mobile Port sends a request, such as a Registration Request, the system waits for the
duration of the Network Response Timer. This Timer signifies the time for which the Mobile Port waits
for a response from the GSM network. It is fixed for 150 seconds for all Mobile ports.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 299
The VoIP Card
The SIP-based VoIP Card enables the stations of ETERNITY PE to connect to the IP network and make Proxy as
well as Non-Proxy (Peer-to-Peer) VoIP calls. The card has a Registrar Server, allowing any SIP-based device to be
registered with it and function as an extension of the ETERNITY PE. With the VoIP Card, ETERNITY PE offers the
functionality of an IP-PBX.
In countries, where the provision and use of Internet telephony services and products is prohibited and or
subject to laws, regulations or licenses, the User is advised to comply with such laws and regulations when
installing and using this product.
The VoIP card is available in the following configuration for the ETERNITY PE.
VoIP Card for ETERNITY PE
Card Name Configuration and Application
ETERNITY PE VoIP16 Card with 16 Voice channels.
ETERNITY PE VoIP8 Card with 8 Voice channels.
LAN and WAN Ports
There is a LAN Port and a WAN Port on the VoIP Card.
The LAN Port is used for connecting the VoIP Card to the Local Area Network to register SIP extensions through
the LAN Port.
The WAN Port is for connecting the VoIP Card to the public network over a Router/Modem. Any user on the public
network can be registered as SIP Extension through the WAN Port.
You can also connect the WAN Port to a LAN Switch/Hub.
The LAN Port supports Static IP Addressing only. The WAN Port supports Static, DHCP and PPPoE IP
Addressing.
Voice Channels
There are 16 Voice Channels on the VoIP16 Card and 8 Voice Channels on the VoIP8 Card, allowing as many
simultaneous calls to be made (using SIP Trunks and/or Extensions) as the number of Voice Channels supported
by these cards.
A call made from a SIP Extension or SIP Trunk to another SIP Extension or SIP Trunk will consume two
voice channels, whereas a call made from an SLT or DKP extension to a SIP Extension or SIP Trunk will
consume one voice channel. Thus, the number of speech paths available to make simultaneous calls will
depend not only on the number of voice channels, but also be the number of channels consumed by such
SIP-to-SIP and Analog/Digital extension to SIP Trunk/SIP Extension calls.
300 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
SIP Trunks
The ETERNITY PE supports a maximum of 4 SIP Trunks. It is possible to program all 4 SIP trunks on a single VoIP
Card or program them in a distributed manner, where more than one VoIP card is installed in the system.
SIP Extensions
ETERNITY PE supports 50 SIP Extensions. Any SIP-enabled device like an IP-phone, a Softphone, analog phone
adapter, can be registered with the VoIP Card and function as the 'SIP Extension' of the ETERNITY PE.
The SIP Extensions function like extensions of the ETERNITY PE. SIP Extension users can make and receive calls
from and to other extensions of ETERNITYPE and external numbers over PSTN, GSM, VoIP and E&M lines53. You
can also connect the Standard and Extended IP Phones offered by Matrix as SIP Extensions.
SIP Extensions require a license. To know more about Licensing requirements and how to acquire and
activate a license key, see the topic “License Management”.
A SIP Extension can be registered with the ETERNITY from three different locations. This helps organizations
overcome geographical distances and reduce call costs.
Installing VoIP Card
The VoIP Card can be installed in typically two application scenarios: in a Public IP Network or in a Private network
(behind a NAT Router).
VoIP Card installed in a Public Network
Public IP is assigned to the WAN Port of the VoIP Card.
53. Only if there are no restrictions on calls from VoIP to other Public Networks in your country. If the telecom regulations of your coun-
try prohibit call traffic between the public telelphony networks and IP networks, you must configure Logical Partition in your system.
To know more, see “Logical Partition”.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 301
When connecting the card to the Public Network, you would require the following items/information:
• A Broadband Internet Connection to make/receive calls through the Public Internet. If you wish to make
calls within your network (LAN), you do not need an Internet connection.
• A SIP Account with an Internet Telephony Service Provider (ITSP).
If you want to make only Peer-to-Peer calls54 (calls made without the intervention of a SIP Server or Proxy
Server) you do not need the service of an ITSP.
If you have subscribed one or more SIP Accounts to make SIP calls, ask your Internet Telephony Service
Provider (ITSP) for the following information:
• SIP ID/User ID
• Authentication User ID
• Authentication Password
• SIP Registrar Server Address
• SIP Registrar Server Port
You may ask your Internet Service Provider / LAN administrator for the above information.
• Network Information:
• IP Addressing scheme (DHCP/PPPoE/Static) of the network
• IP Address of the WAN Port of the VoIP Card (Default: 192.168.001.116)
• Subnet Mask of the WAN Port. (Default: 255.255.255.000)
• Gateway Address
• DNS Address
• DNS Domain Name (if applicable)
• IP Address of your LAN
• IP Address of the LAN Port of the VoIP Card (Default: 192.168.002.031)
VoIP Card installed in a Private Network
The card is located behind the NAT Router and Private IP is assigned to the WAN port.
54. Peer-to-Peer calls are calls made without the intervention of a SIP Server or Proxy Server.
302 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
When connecting the card in a Private Network, you would require the following information:
• IP Addressing Scheme of your network; whether the Connection Type is DHCP, Static, PPPoE
• IP Address of the WAN Port of the VoIP Card (Default: 192.168.001.116)
• Subnet Mask of the Network to which the WAN Port is connected. (Default: 255.255.255.000)
• Gateway Address
• DNS Address
• DNS Domain Name (if applicable)
VoIP Card connected to the Public Network for Matrix Extended IP Phones
Public IP is assigned to the WAN Port of the VoIP card and the Ethernet Port of the Master Card.
Here, the LAN port of the VoIP Card is connected to the LAN Switch/Hub. The WAN Port of the Card is connected
to the Public Network and the Master Ethernet Port of ETERNITY is also connected to the Public Network.
This installation is required when you want to register the Matrix Extended IP Phone with ETERNITY from the
Public Network. The Master Ethernet Port is used for Auto Configuration of the Matrix Extended IP Phones.
Get these items/information ready before you install the VoIP card and connect it to the IP network.
1. Observe all prescribed safety precautions when inserting or removing cards. Make sure the Power Supply
is switched off, and you are wearing an antistatic wrist strap/belt and have a grounding mat.
2. Unpack the VoIP card and verify the package contents.
3. Unscrew the top cover of the ETERNITY PE and slide it out. Keep the cover and the screws aside.
4. Select any of the free slots from the universal slots.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 303
5. Grasping the card by its sides or corners fit it onto the connectors of the selected slot. The card should be
seated such that its connector pins make perfect contact with those on the CPU (motherboard) on the
bottom plane.
6. Secure the card on the studs labeled H1, H2 and H3 with the three screws provided.
7. Using the Ethernet cable supplied with the VoIP card, connect the LAN and the WAN Port to the IP
network, which may be Public Internet or a LAN, or both.
If connecting to the Public Internet Network,
• Plug one end of the Ethernet cable supplied with the VoIP card into the WAN Port of the VoIP Card and
the other end into the Router/Modem.
If connecting to a Private Network,
• Plug one end of the Ethernet cable supplied with the card into the WAN Port of the card and the other
end into the LAN Switch/Hub.
If connecting to the Public Network for registering Extended IP Phones,
• Plug one end of the Ethernet cable supplied with the VoIP card into the WAN Port of the VoIP Card and
the other end of the cable into the Router/Modem.
• Connect the LAN Port of the VoIP Card to the LAN Switch/Hub.
• Connect the Master Ethernet Port of the ETERNITY to the Router/Modem.
8. To insert and connect another VoIP card, repeat the same steps as described above.
9. If you have completed all installation tasks, replace the top cover by sliding it in place. Secure the cover
with the two screws you removed.
10. Switch on power supply. The ETERNITY PE VoIP Card does not have LED.
304 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
SIP Extensions
ETERNITY PE supports up to 50 SIP Extensions. The SIP Extensions function like DKP/SLT extensions of the
ETERNITY PE. SIP Extension users can make and receive calls to any extension user of the ETERNITY and to
external numbers over various telecom networks like CO, Mobile, ISDN PRI, BRI, and VoIP55.
You may register any SIP-enabled device, like an IP-phone, a Soft phone, Analog Phone Adapter, as the SIP
Extension of the ETERNITY PE.
To register SIP Extensions, a VoIP Card must be installed in the ETERNITY PE and you must have the IP8
License. For more information on Licensing, see “License Management”.
You can register upto 50 SIP Extensions with a single VoIP Card of ETERNITY PE. However, at a time, only as
many extensions as the number of Voice Channels supported by the VoIP Card can make calls. For more
information, see “Voice Channels” under the description for the“The VoIP Card” for ETERNITY PE.
You can register the same SIP Extension from three different locations.
You may also connect the Standard and Extended IP Phones of Matrix.
The Matrix Extended IP Phone, SETU VP248, takes on all the functions of EON48, the proprietary digital key
phone of Matrix, except the following features:
• Background Music
• CO Call Waiting
• Hot Desking
• Live Call Screening
If you register the Extended IP Phone outside the Region/Country selected for ETERNITY, the time and
Time Zone dependant features, such as Alarms, Reminders, Time Zone Display, of the phone at each
location will operate according to the Real Time Clock of ETERNITY. Also, Access Codes and Emergency
Numbers will work according to the Region/Country selected for ETERNITY.
The SIP Extensions may be registered over WAN or over LAN according to your preference and your IP network
installation scenario.
55. Calls between VoIP, Public and Private Networks may be subject to Regulation in your country. You may have to configure your
system to allow or restrict call traffic between networks to comply with the telecom regulations of your country. To know more, read
“Logical Partition”.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 305
If the ETERNITY PE Master Ethernet Port and the VoIP Card are connected to a Public Network,
• Connect SETU VP248, the Extended IP Phone, or any Open SIP device to the LAN Switch.
• Register any SIP device (Extended IP phone or Open SIP phone) on the public network as SIP extension.
When you register the Matrix Extended IP Phone with ETERNITY, make sure the Master Ethernet Port and
the WAN port of the VoIP Card are connected to the public network. The Master Ethernet Port is used for
Auto Configuration of the Matrix Extended IP Phones.
When you register a SIP device other than the Matrix Extended IP Phone on the public network as SIP
Extension of ETERNITY, in this SIP device, you must configure the following:
• the Registrar Server Address of ETERNITY PE
• the Registrar Server Port
• the SIP ID
• Authentication ID and Password.
306 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
If the ETERNITY PE Master Ethernet Port and VoIP Card are connected to a Private Network (Behind the NAT),
• Connect SETU VP248, the Extended IP Phone, or any standard IP Phone to the LAN Switch.
• You may also register any SIP device (Extended IP Phone or open SIP phone) on the public network as
SIP Extension.
When you register the Matrix Extended IP Phone with ETERNITY, configure Port Forwarding for Master
Ethernet Port and the WAN port of the VoIP Card on the Router. The Master Ethernet Port is used for
Auto Configuration of the Extended IP Phones.
Connecting SETU VP248 as Extended SIP Extension
You are recommended to complete the following steps before connecting the Matrix Extended IP Phone to ETERNITY
PE:
• Decide the location of the Extended IP Phone, whether within the same network or outside, according to
your installation scenario.
If you want to use the DHCP Server on your LAN for assigning IP Address to the Extended IP Phone, do
the following:
• use DHCP option 224 and Data Type as ‘String’ to provide Server Address to the Extended IP
Phones.
• Program the IP Address or the Dynamic DNS Domain Name of the Master Ethernet Port of
ETERNITY PE in the DHCP option.
• Log in to Jeeves. For instructions, read the topic “Using Jeeves” under Configuring ETERNITY.
• Assign an extension number (SIP ID or Access Code) to the Extended IP Phone. For instructions on
assigning SIP ID, see “Configuring SIP Extensions”.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 307
• For the SIP extension number you assigned to the Extended IP Phone, go to the Location settings of the
extension, and do the following:
• Enable Matrix Extended IP Phone Mode.
• Enter the MAC Address of the Extended IP Phone.
• Assign the Registrar Server IP Address, as per you installation scenario.
For instructions, see the topic “Matrix Extended IP Phone Settings” under Configuring SIP Extensions.
Now, follow the steps described below to install the Extended IP Phone. The instructions are common for all models
of the SETU VP248. For the purpose of illustration, the premium model, SETU VP248P, has been used.
1. Unpack the SETU VP248 box and verify package contents.
2. Mount the phone on a desk or wall at a location convenient to you.
• When mounting the phone on the wall, detach the Foot Stand from the bottom of the phone.
Pull out the Foot Stand.
Keyhole Slot 1 Keyhole Slot 2
Press down Press down
to attach/detach to attach/detach
Foot Stand. Foot Stand.
• Fix two screws of appropriate diameter on the wall, ensuring that they are aligned with the Keyhole
Slots 1 and 2.
• Use wall plugs, if required, to fix the screws. Leave the screw heads protruding from the wall to fit
into the Keyholes.
• Now, mount the phone on the wall, with the screws fitting into the Keyhole slots.
• When you mount the phone on a desk, you can attach the Foot Stand in two ways as illustrated in the
following.
308 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Foot Stand attached at 20° Angle
Foot Stand attached at 45° Angle
If you attach the Foot Stand at 45°, the phone will be placed in an almost upright position on your
desk.
• Decide which of these positions would work for you best and accordingly attach the Foot Stand.
3. Connect the Handset to the Phone body.
• Plug the long straightened end of the phone cord into the handset jack at the bottom of the phone
marked with the handset symbol.
• Plug the other (short straight) end of the phone cord into the jack at the bottom of the handset.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 309
4. If you want to use a Headset (not supplied) with your phone, you may plug a headset with a 2.5 mm single
connector into the headset jack on the left side panel of the phone.
OR
You may plug a headset with an RJ11 connector in to the headset port at the bottom of the phone.
5. Connect the LAN Port of SETU VP248 to the LAN Switch/Hub or a Router/Modem, according to your
installation scenario.
6. To connect your phone to a computer on your desk, use an Ethernet cable (not supplied with this phone) to
connect the PC Port of the phone to the LAN Port of the computer.
7. Plug the connector of the Power Adapter in to the power jack at the back of the phone56. Use only the
adapter provided with the phone to prevent any damages that may arise from the use of other adapters.
If you want to use Power over Ethernet (PoE), ensure that your LAN supports PoE. Supply power through
an 802.3af connection on the LAN Port of the phone. Do not connect the Adapter!
8. Plug the Power Adapter into a power outlet.
9. Switch ON power supply.
When you power the phone, the boot process will be initiated in the following sequence.
• All keys with LED, including the Speaker key, and the Ringer LED, will glow.
56. The SETU VP248 does not have a power switch.
310 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• The LCD display will light up and the following message will appear on it, as the phone boots:
Welcom e to M atrix
B ooting ...
• As soon as the ‘Loading...’ message appears on the phone display, press # key.
W e l c o m e t o M a t ri x
L oad ing ...
• Select the firmware Extended - IP Phone. Move the cursor by pressing the DOWN navigation key V.
Sel ect the fir mwar e
Standar d S IP
Extended S IP
• When the cursor is placed under the Extended IP Phone, press Enter key.
Sel ect the fir mwar e
Standar d S IP
Extended S IP
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 311
• The phone will start loading the Extended IP Phone Firmware. It will display current firmware being loaded.
We l c o me to Ma t ri x
L oa din g V 0 5 R0 1 Ex t SI P
• After loading the firmware, the phone will prompt you to change Network settings.
Change Network Settings?
Yes
No
• Wait for a few seconds.
If you want to change the Network Settings, press the Enter key. Detailed instructions for changing the
Network Settings of the phone are provided at the end of this topic. See “Network Settings”at the end of
this topic.
• The phone makes DHCP Discovery and fetches its IP Address and Server Address from the DHCP
Server.
D H C P d i s c o v e r y. . . !
On getting the IP Address and Server Address, the phone initiates Auto Configuration to download the
configuration files from ETERNITY PE.
312 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• As the phone downloads the configuration files, the file names will appear one by one.
T r y i n g f o r C o n f i g. f i le
L a n g u a ge S t r . x m l
• On successful download of all configuration files, the phone attempts to register with ETERNITY PE.
Attemptin g Regist ration
• On successful registration, the phone will display the current day, date and time, the extension number and
name assigned to the Extended IP Phone.
M on 10 M AY 1 5: 4 0
2 00 1 Re ce pt i on
Network Settings
You can change the network settings of the Extended IP Phone by accessing the Local Menu of the phone. To
move the cursor and scroll through the menu and submenu options, use the following touch sense navigation keys
on your phone.
• The Enter key to make a selection or to complete an action.
• The Up key to move up the Menu.
• The Down key move down the Menu.
• The Forward key move the cursor one character.
• The Back key to move the cursor one character and to return from the submenu to the main menu.
The cursor is a non-blinking underscore that appears under the first letter of the first option in the menu. To make a
selection in the menu, you must move the cursor in the desired direction using the Up, Down, Forward and Back
key. When the cursor is at the desired position, press Enter key to make a selection.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 313
Accessing Network Settings
You can access the Network Settings of the Extended IP Phone in any of the following stages:
1. During start-up, when the phone prompts you to change the network settings after loading the firmware.
Change Network Settings?
Yes
No
You must press the Enter Key to select Yes and access network settings.
2. When the phone is making Network discovery, downloading configuration files, attempting registration.
You must press the Enter Key to access network settings,
3. When the phone is in idle state. You must press the DSS key assigned to ‘Local Menu’.
M on 10 M AY 1 5: 40
2 00 1 Re ce pt io n
Voice Mail Call Back Canc el Mute Conference Transfer
Forw ard DN D Names Redial Release Hold
Local Menu
1 2 abc 3 def
4 ghi 5 jkl 6 mno
7 pqrs 8 tuv 9 wxyz
CA04
CA03 * 0 #
CA02
CA01
When you press the Local Menu DSS Key (in idle state) or when you press the Enter key during any process, the
Local Menu appears on your phone display.
LO C AL ME N U
N e t wo r k P a r a m e t e r s
N e t wo r k S t a t u s
314 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
You can configure Network Parameters and view Network status from the Local Menu.
Configuring Network Parameters
• In the Local Menu of the phone, select Network Parameters by pressing the Enter Key.
• The Network Parameters submenu appears.
N E T W O R K PA R A M E T E R S
M A C : 0 0 : 1 b : 09 : 00 : 9a : a 7
C o n n e c t i o n Ty p e
I P A d d r e ss
S u b n e t Ma s k
G a t e w ay A d d r es s
• Use the Down/Up key to reach the desired network parameter and press Enter key to select and change
the settings.
• You can configure all network parameters described below, except the MAC Address.
Connection Type
• Select the Connection Type as DHCP, PPPoE or Static according to the IP Addressing scheme of your
network.
If you select DHCP or PPPoE, the phone will be assigned IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway
Address, DNS Address Server Address, automatically by the DHCP/PPPoE server.
For PPPoE Connection Type, you must configure the PPPoE User ID and Password provided by the
Internet Service Provider.
If you select Static, you must assign the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway Address to the phone.
IP Address
• If you select Static as Connection Type, enter the static IP Address to be assigned to the phone.
Enter the desired Static IP Address by pressing the digit keys.
To enter the dot/period in the IP Address, press the digit key ‘1’ twice.
Subnet Mask
• If you select Static as Connection Type, enter the Subnet Mask to be applied on the phone by pressing the
digit keys.
To enter the dot/period in the IP Address, press the digit key ‘1’ twice.
Gateway Address
• If you select Static as Connection Type, enter the Gateway Address here. This is the IP Address of the
LAN Port of the Router.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 315
DNS Server
• If you select Static as Connection Type, select the DNS Server option Static and configure the DNS
Address.
• If you select DHCP or PPPoE as Connection Type and your Internet Service Provider provides DNS
Address, select the DNS Server option Automatic. However, if your Internet Service Provider does not
provide DNS Address, select Static and configure the DNS Address.
DNS Address
• If you select DNS Server as Static, enter the DNS Address here.
To enter dot/period in the IP Address, press the digit key ‘1’ twice.
DNS Domain Name
• If you select DNS Server as Static, enter the DNS Domain Name here. DNS Domain Name is optional.
PPPoE User ID
• If you have selected PPPoE as Connection Type, you must enter the User ID provided to you by your
Internet Service Provider.
PPPoE Password
• This is the password provided by your Internet Service Provider for the PPPoE User ID. If you have
selected PPPoE as Connection Type, you must enter the password provided by your Internet Service
provider here.
PPPoE Service Name
• If your Internet Service Provider has provided a Service Name, enter the Service Name here. If your
Internet Service Provider has not provided a Service Name, do not configure this parameter.
Server Address
• ETERNITY PE CPU Card works as the Auto Configuration Server for the phone. Enter the IP Address or
the Dynamic DNS Domain Name of the Master Ethernet Port of ETERNITY here. Default: blank.
The phone sends the request for configuration files to this Server Address.
If you have selected DHCP as Connection Type, the phone will get the Server Address automatically from
the DHCP Server. For this, use DHCP option 224 and Data Type as ‘String’ to provide Server Address
from the DHCP Server.
For PPPoE and Static Connection Types, you need to enter the Server Address.
Server Port
• Enter the Web Server Port of the Master Ethernet Port of ETERNITY here.
The phone sends the request for configuration files to this port.
Valid range of the port is: 80 or 1024–65535. Default: 80.
316 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
VLAN Setting
If your phone is connected to a virtual LAN, you need to configure VLAN Settings.
To enable the VLAN switch to correctly route packets generated by the phone and the computers (on the LAN) to
each other, the packets must be tagged with a VLAN header.
The VLAN header consists of the VLAN ID (12-bit) and Class of Service (CoS, 3-bit) for prioritization of traffic57.
The meaning of CoS bits with respect to traffic type is as follows:
CoS Traffic Type
0 Best Effort
1 Background
2 Spare
3 Excellent Effort
4 Controlled Load
5 Video
6 Voice
7 Network Control
• Select Phone VLAN/COS to add VLAN header to the packets generated by the phone, and add VLAN
header to the packets relayed from the PC to its LAN port (packets generated by the PC connected to its
PC port).
• To configure Phone VLAN/COS, select Enable?. The VLAN ID will be tagged on all packets generated
by the phone (SIP, RTP, DNS, ARP, etc.). Default: Disabled.
• Select VLAN ID and enter the VLAN ID that you have assigned to the VLAN in which the IP Phones are
connected. Valid range: 0-4094. Default: 1.
• Select SIP CoS and define the CoS (priority) bits in all SIP packets. Valid range: 0-7. Default: 3
• Select RTP CoS and define the CoS (priority) bits in all RTP packets. Valid range: 0-7. Default: 6.
• Select PC/VLAN CoS to add VLAN header to all packets entering the PC Port and leaving the LAN port of
the phone. Default: Disabled.
• To configure PC VLAN/COS, select Enable?.
• Select VLAN ID and enter the same ID as you have assigned to the VLAN in which the computers are
connected. Valid range: 0-4094. Default: 1.
• Select CoS and define the Layer 2 CoS (priority) bits. Valid range: 0-7. Default: 0.
57. The IEEE 802.1P standard allows Layer2 switches to prioritize the traffic, thus providing Quality of Service (QoS), i.e. better handling
of data that pass over a network, thereby resulting in greater reliability and quality. Quality of Service (QoS) on Layer2 is referred to as
Class of Service (CoS) which is defined by IEEE 802.1P.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 317
PCAP
To capture packets sent and received from and by the phone for monitoring and troubleshooting, you can enable
PCAP on the phone. The phone captures up to 2 MB of packets. For more information and for instructions on how
to use PCAP Trace on the phone, see “Using PCAP Trace for Matrix Extended IP Phone”, under PCAP Trace.
When you change the Network Settings, the phone will restart.
Viewing Network Status
• In the Local Menu of the phone, place the cursor on Network Status and press the Enter key.
• The Network Status submenu appears.
N E T W O R K S TAT U S
MAC: 0 0:1 b:0 9:0 0:9 a:a 7
IP: 1 9 2 . 1 6 8 . 2 0 1 .2 0 5
MASK: 2 5 5 . 25 5 . 2 5 5 .0
G W: 1 9 2 . 16 8 . 2 0 1 .3
DNS:
Use the Down/Up key to view the status of the various network parameters. The status of the following
parameters appear on your display as you scroll.
• MAC: This is the MAC Address of the phone.
• IP: The current IP Address assigned to the phone.
• MASK: The current Subnet mask assigned to the phone.
• GW: The current Gateway IP Address assigned to the phone.
• DNS: The Domain Name Server address assigned to the phone.
• S. ADD: The IP Address or Dynamic DNS Domain Name of the Master Ethernet Port of ETERNITY
PE.
• S. PORT: The Web Server Port of the Master Ethernet Port of ETERNITY PE.
• DOMAIN: The Domain Name assigned to the phone.
• FIRM: The version of the current Firmware of the phone.
318 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The Voice Mail System Card
The VMS Card provides a full fledged, 'in-skin' Voice Mail System with auto attendant and voice mail features. It is
designed to provide a variety of voice applications that are commonly supported by any external Voice Mail
System.
VMS Card for ETERNITY PE
Card Name Configuration and Application
ETERNITY PE Card VMS16 Voice Mail System providing mailbox to all extensions of ETERNITY.
The card provides mailbox facility to all extensions of ETERNITY PE. Each Mailbox has the capacity of storing 254
messages. The size of each Mailbox is set by default to 5 minutes. The maximum message length for each mailbox
is set by default to 15 seconds58.
The VMS card utilizes a USB memory stick as its storage medium. Matrix provides a 1GB Pen Drive with the VMS
card. The Pen Drive supports 18 hours of recording.
The VMS Card has an Ethernet Port and a USB port.
Ethernet Port
The Ethernet Port is used to connect the VMS card to a computer (standalone or in a LAN) to access and use the
embedded FTP server for Software Upgrades, Backup of configuration files and Mailbox messages. The Ethernet
Port can also be used for Debug.
USB Port
The USB port is an internal port, located on the main board of the card. The USB port is used for connecting the
USB Pen Drive to the VMS Card. The pen drive is supplied by Matrix and contains all the voice messages, mailbox
messages, greetings and other messages and prompts.
The Pen Drive is factory fitted and shipped with the card.
Installing the VMS Card
1. Equip yourself with an electrostatic discharge preventive wrist belt and a grounding mat. Ensure that
power supply to the ETERNITY is turned off, and the power cord is unplugged.
2. Unpack the VMS card and check the package contents with the packing list.
3. Remove the top cover of the ETERNITY, if not opened already. Keep the cover and the screws aside.
4. Select from any of the free universal slots to install the VMS Card.
5. Hold the card by its sides and seat the card on the connectors of the slot on the CPU. Make sure that the
card's connector pins fit perfectly into those on the CPU.
58. When the ETERNITY is installed in the Hospitality Application (Hotel Mode), the default Mailbox size would be 300 minutes and
the default length of messages is 999 seconds.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 319
6. Secure the card on the studs labeled H1, H2 and H3 with the three screws provided.
Connecting to a Computer
7. Now, connect the card to a standalone PC/LAN.
• Plug in one end of the Ethernet cable supplied with the card into the Ethernet Port of the VMS Card.
• Lead the Ethernet cable out of the enclosure through any of the two cable outlets on either side of the
enclosure.
• Plug the other end of the cable into the Ethernet port of a standalone PC or into a LAN Switch.
When you connect the VMS Card to a to a standalone/LAN PC, you need to make sure that
• The IP Address of the Ethernet Port of the VMS Card and the Ethernet Port of the PC do not conflict,
are not the same.
• The Ethernet Port of the VMS Card and the Ethernet Port of the PC are in the same Subnet.
320 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The Door Phone Card
The Door Phone Card is a special card for the ETERNITY PE models only. The card provides the interface to run
electronic gadgets (refer “Automated Control Applications”) and operate Door Phones with the ETERNITY PE.
The Door Phone Card supports 3 Door phone Ports, 3 Digital Output Ports, and a single Digital Input Port.
Door Phone Ports
The Door Phone Port is used for connecting any standard Door Phone Box at the entrance of the building.
Calls on the door phone can be made to land on any of the extensions of the ETERNITY or on an external
number.
You can connect any standard 4-wire Door Phone with ETERNITY PE. Matrix does not supply Door Phones.
Technical Specification of the Door Phone Ports
Specification Value
Speaker Output 1.41Vrms(max); Single Ended
Mic Input 1.34Vrms(max); Single Ended
Digital Output Port (DOP)
The DOP can be used to run Automated Control Applications by connecting relay based devices to it.
The DOP can act as a Relay for Door Locks. So, you can connect a Door Lock release device to the DOP to
work in conjunction with the Door Phone connected to the Door Phone Port.
Technical Specification of the DOP
Specification Value
Relay Type Power Relay
Contact Arrangement Normally Open; 1-Form-A
Contact Rating (Resistive Load) 1.5Amp; 120VAC/150VDC
Operation Time: 8ms (max.)
Also refer the topic “Digital Output Port (DOP)”.
Digital Input Port (DIP)
Any external sensor device (object sensor, smoke detector, glass break detector, water level sensor, etc.) can
be connected to the DIP of the card. The sensor device can be used to instigate Automated Control
Application devices connected to the DOP.
The DIP can be used for certain “Automated Control Applications” and “Security Alarm and Reporting”. Read
these topics to know more.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 321
Also refer the topic “Digital Input Port (DIP)”.
Technical Specifications of the DIP
Specification Value
Loop Current Supplied 13mA
Type Open/Close Sensing
Maximum Cable Length 1000
Installing the Door Phone Card
1. Unpack the Door Phone card and check the package contents.
2. Make sure that the power supply is switched off, before you begin the installation of the card. Always wear
an electrostatic discharge prevention wrist strap/belt and use a grounding mat.
3. Unscrew the top cover of the ETERNITY PE and slide it out. Keep the cover and the screws aside.
4. Select any of the free slots from the universal slots.
5. Grasping the card by its sides or corners fit it onto the connectors of the selected slot. The card should be
seated such that its connector pins make perfect contact with those on the CPU (motherboard) on the
bottom plane.
6. Secure the card on the studs labeled H1, H2 and H3 with the three screws provided.
7. Now, plug in the cables supplied with the card into the connectors. Lead the cables out of the cable outlet
and terminate the free end of the cables into the Distribution Frame.
For each connector on the card, there is a separate cable with an RJ45 jack on one end and free at the
other end. Each cable is identified by a distinct color marked at the Boot edge and the Insulation edge of
the cable.
You can refer to the color markings to identify which cable is to be plugged into each connector, and the
wire-pairs for each port on the connector.
Refer to the pinout details of the ports on the Door Phone card to connect the wires appropriately.
322 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Pinout and Cable Details of Door Phone Port
Connector Pin Port Connection Color
1 Relay A Orange-White
DOP-1
2 Relay B Orange
3 Status Green-White
RJ45-1 4 MIC Input Blue
Door Phone-1
(Blue) 5 Speaker Output Blue-White
6 Analog Ground Green
7 DIP_B Brown-White
DIP-1
8 DIP_A Brown
1 Relay A Orange-White
DOP-2
2 Relay B Orange
3 Status Green-White
RJ45-2 4 MIC Input Blue
Door Phone-2
(Orange) 5 Speaker Output Blue-White
6 Analog Ground Green
7 Not Connected Not Connected Brown-White
8 Not Connected Not Connected Brown
1 Relay A Orange-White
DOP-3
2 Relay B Orange
3 Status Green-White
RJ45-3 4 MIC Input Blue
Door Phone-3
(Green) 5 Speaker Output Blue-White
6 Analog Ground Green
7 Not Connected Not Connected Brown-White
8 Not Connected Not Connected Brown
8. The wires of the devices - Door Phone, Door Lock, Sensor - you want to connect to the ETERNITY PE
should be terminated in to the Distribution Frame. Refer the pinout details of the ports of the Door Phone to
connect the cables.
Connecting Door Phones
• There is a door phone port on each connector of the Door Phone Card. You can connect any standard
4-wire door phone. Refer to the pin out details given above to make the connections.
• Make sure that the door phone you connect conforms with the Technical Specifications of the door
phone port.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 323
• If a Door Lock is to be used in conjunction with the Door Phone, connect the Door Lock to the Digital
Output Port (DOP) of the ETERNITY PE.
Connecting a Gadgets to the Digital Output Port
• There is a Digital Output Port on each of the three connectors of the Door Phone Card. You can
connect a Door Lock or any other gadget you want to operate as an automated control application to
this port. Refer to the pin out details given above to make the connections.
• Make sure that the gadget you connect conforms with the Technical Specifications of the DOP.
Connecting Sensor Device the Digital Input Port
• The Digital Input Port is located on the first connector of the Door Phone Card. Make sure that the
sensor of panic switch that you connect to the DIP conforms with the technical specifications of the DIP.
9. If you have completed all installation tasks, replace the top cover by sliding it in place. Secure the cover
with the two screws you removed.
A typical Installation of the Door Phone Card is illustrated below.
324 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Starting Up ETERNITY PE
Power ON
1. If you have completed all the installation tasks, connect the three-prong plug of the power cord from the
ETERNITY into the AC outlet, and switch on power supply.
2. Observe the Reset Cycle.
Reset Cycle
• Reset Cycle (Power-ON Self Test) takes about 2 minutes to finish.
• The LEDs L1 and L2 are turned on, and glow Orange for a minute.
• The LEDs of the keys of the Digital Key Phones attached to the system are turned on sequentially.
• When the system becomes stable after Power-ON,
• L1 glows Orange and remains steady ON.
• L2 blinks Green - 1 sec. ON and 1 sec OFF.
When the Reset Cycle is successful, the default Station Access Codes loaded by the system and the date
and time of the Real Time Clock of the system will appear on the LCD display of the Digital Key Phones
have connected with the system.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 325
326 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
CHAPTER 7 Configuring ETERNITY
The ETERNITY can be configured using the following tools:
• A web-based graphic user interface (GUI), called Jeeves.
• A telephone
• File Transfer Protocol (FTP)
• Serial Communication Port
Each of these is explained in detail in this chapter.
Configuring using Web-based GUI: Jeeves
ETERNITY provides a Graphic User Interface (GUI), Jeeves, the proprietary web-based configuration software of
Matrix. It is an HTTP server built into the ETERNITY.
Jeeves allows system configuration at three levels: System Engineer, System Administrator, and the Front Desk
User.
A distinct set of features and facilities can configured at each of these levels.
It is possible to configure the ETERNITY from any location using Jeeves. You can use Jeeves to configure
the system On-site (where it is installed) and Off-site, from a remote location.
1. System Engineer Mode
At the System Engineer level, the entire system configuration, all configurable features and facilities of the
ETERNITY can be changed to match user requirements and preferences.
To be able to do this, the System Engineer must enter the System Engineer (SE) configuration mode, by
logging into Jeeves as System Engineer.
Only the System Engineer, who installs, configures and maintains the PBX is allowed access to this mode.
Hence access to the SE mode is protected by means of a password, referred throughout this document as the
SE Password.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 327
SE Password
The SE password is a 4-digit code used to prevent unauthorized access and alterations or misuse of the features
and facilities. As this password is meant for restricting access to the SE mode, it must be kept strictly confidential
with the System Engineer. The default, SE Password is 1234.
The SE password can be changed. Refer the topic “System Security” for instructions on how to change the SE
password.
If you forget the SE password, you can restore the default SE password. Read the topic “System Security” for
instructions on restoring the default SE password.
You are advised to record the SE password at a safe place, where it can be accessed by you (the System
Engineer) to avoid the inconvenience of restoring the default SE password.
Quick Installation Wizards
For the ease of installation, as well as to simplify and speed up the process of setting up the ETERNITY, the Jeeves
offers two Wizards, namely:
• Quick Installation Wizard - Standard PBX: This wizard helps the Installer/System Engineer to quickly
set-up the ETERNITY for the standard PBX (Enterprise) Application.
Using this Wizard, the Installer/System Engineer can configure as much as 80 percent of the system
configuration, covering all the parameters necessary for the functioning of the system. For advanced
configuration of features and facilities, the Installer/System Engineer must use the “Using Full
Programming Access” mode.
Detailed information on this Wizard and instructions for using it for system configuration are given later in
this chapter. Refer the topic “Using Quick Installation Wizard - Standard PBX”.
• Hotel Installation Wizard - Hospitality PBX: This is a special wizard for the Hospitality Application of the
ETERNITY. The Hotel Installation Wizard simplifies the configuration process and helps the Installer/
System Engineer to configure the system for the special telephone and guest/patient management
facilities and features for hotels and hospitals.
You may use this Wizard if you have deployed the ETERNITY as a Hospitality Application. The Hotel
Installation Wizard is recommended to be used when configuring the ETERNITY for the first time.
Refer the separate ETERNITY Hospitality System Manual to know more.
Full Programming Access
While the Quick Installation Wizard provides a fast-track way for system configuration, detailed and advanced
configuration of the system can be done only from the Full Programming Access mode of Jeeves.
The Full Programming Access mode of Jeeves, as the title itself suggests, enables the Installer to change the
values of all configurable parameters of the system, including those not covered by the Wizard.
Refer the topic “Using Full Programming Access” for more information and instructions.
328 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
As many as four System Engineers can simultaneously login into SE Mode and configure the system via
the Full Programming Access and the Quick Installation Wizard-Standard PBX. However, it is
recommended that multiple login be avoided when using the Quick Installation Wizard and the use of the
Wizard be restricted to a single person only.
2. System Administrator Mode
At the System Administrator level, the settings of the features for the Extension users can be changed, and
various system activity logs and reports such as fault log reports, Station Message Detail Recording reports,
and Hotel reports, can be captured and printed.
For this, the System Administrator, who is usually the operator or receptionist, must login as System
Administrator into Jeeves.
SA Password
The access to SA mode may be protected by means of a password, referred to as the SA password in this
document.
The SA password is 4-digit code for preventing unauthorized access to the SA mode. The default, SA Password is
1111.
The SA password can be changed by the SA and the SE. However, if the SA forgets the password, the default
password or an entirely new password can be issued only by the SE.
Refer the topic “System Security” for instructions on how to change the SA password.
Four persons can simultaneously login and change system settings from the SA mode.
3. Front Desk User Mode
The Front Desk Mode is relevant for only the Hospitality Application of the ETERNITY.
This mode is meant for the personnel at the Front Desk of the Hotels/Motels, allowing them access to and
operation of the hospitality features of ETERNITY, for example: Check-In/Out of guests, Changing Room
Occupancy and Clean Status, setting Call Budgets for guests, setting Wake-up calls, Reminders, Do Not
Disturb for guests, printing Call Reports and Hotel reports, and several others.
The Front Desk User mode too is password protected.
Refer the ETERNITY Hospitality System Manual to know more.
The system can be configured both, 'on site' and from a remote location (refer “Remote Programming”), and
from multiple extensions simultaneously, without its functioning being affected.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 329
Configuring using a Telephone
The ETERNITY can be configured by dialing the relevant command strings from a telephone. The telephone may
be any Single Line Telephone (SLT) or the Matrix proprietary Digital Key Phone (DKP), EON, connected as an
extension of the ETERNITY.
For the ease of operation, you may use EON instead of an SLT. Using EON has the advantage that
• you can view the command strings that you have keyed in on the LCD display of EON;
• you will get prompts and confirmatory messages on the phone's LCD display, in addition to confirmation
tone played to you.
• you dial alphanumeric command strings.
All these facilities will not be available to you on an SLT.
System Configuration using a Telephone can be done at two levels: System Engineer Level and System
Administrator Level.
A distinct set of features and facilities can programmed at each of these levels.
It is possible to configure the ETERNITY from any location using a Telephone. You can use a Telephone
connected as an extension of the ETERNITY to configure the system On-site (where it is installed). You
can also configure the system using a Telephone Off-site, from a Remote location, using the “Direct Inward
System Access (DISA)” feature of the ETERNITY. You can access both the System Engineer mode as well
as the System Administrator mode from the remote location. Refer the topic 'Remote Configuration using a
Telephone' later in this chapter for instructions.
1. System Engineer Mode
At the System Engineer level, the entire system configuration, all programmable features and facilities of the
ETERNITY can be configured by dialing command strings referred to in this document as SE Commands.
The System Engineer has Full Programming Access when configuring the system using a Telephone. In other
words, the System Engineer can configure the entire system, nearly all the programmable parameters, using
a telephone.
Refer the topic “Using Full Programming Access” for more information and instructions.
SE Commands
These are number strings to be dialed by the System Engineer on entering the SE mode via a telephone. SE
Commands are unique to the feature/facility being programmed. Hence SE Commands for configuring a particular
feature/facility are presented in description of that feature/facility in this manual.
For a complete List of all SE Commands, refer “System Commands”.
330 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
SE Password
The SE password is 4-digit code used to restrict unauthorized access to the SE Mode. The default SE Password is
1234. It may be changed and kept confidential.
Refer the topic “System Security” for instructions on how to change the SE password. In case the System Engineer
forgets the password, it can be restored to the default password and changed again. Read the section “Default
Settings” for instructions on restoring the default SE password.
There is no restriction on the number of persons who can simultaneously enter SE mode from a Telephone
and configure the system.
Entering the SE mode using a Telephone
The telephone that you use to enter the SE programming mode may be a DKP or an SLT connected as extension
phone of the ETERNITY.
To enter the SE mode via a DKP/SLT:
• Dial 1#91-SE Password59
• You get programming tone to indicate entry into the SE mode.
• Now, dial the desired SE Command to configure.
• You get confirmation tone and message on the LCD if using EON.
To exit the SE mode:
• Dial 00.
• You will hear the dial tone of the ETERNITY.
• If the SE Password you entered is incorrect, you will be played an Error Tone and an Error Message on
EON.
• The system accepts and executes the command immediately, but it takes approximately 2 minutes to
save a command. So, it is advisable that you do not turn OFF the system for 2 to 3 minutes after
entering the last command.
2. System Administrator Mode
At the System Administrator level, you can set/cancel features settings for extensions, capture and print
various system activity logs and reports.
The Operator or Receptionist, who usually administer the system, must enter the System Administrator (SA)
mode by dialing 1#92-SA Password.
After entering SA mode, you may dial command strings referred to as SA Commands from a telephone.
SA Commands
SA commands consist of a prefix string 1072, followed by the Command string. For example: the SA command for
setting Do Not Disturb for an extension is 1072-001-extension number-1, where 1072 is the prefix string and 001
is the command string.
59. You may use the default SE password, 1234, if the password has not been changed already. If the password has been changed,
use the new password.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 331
The Prefix string in the SA Command (1072) can be changed by the installer/System Engineer. However, the
command strings of the SA Command (001 in the above example) cannot be changed.
The command for entering SA mode (1#92) is also non-programmable. Refer “Access Codes” in the chapter
Features and Facilities.
To know how to use change feature settings with SA Commands, please refer the description of individual features
under “Features and Facilities”.
For a complete list of SA Commands, refer “SA Commands”.
SA Password
The access to SA mode may be protected by means of an SA password.
The SA password is 4-digit code for preventing unauthorized access to the SA mode. The default, SA Password is
1111. It can be changed and reset by the System Engineer.
Refer the topic “System Security” for instructions on how to change and reset the SA Password using SE
commands.
• When the ETERNITY is used in the Standard PBX Application, you can enter SA mode only from
extensions which have the features 'SA mode' and or 'Allow SA Commands' enabled in their Class of
Service.
• When the feature 'Allow SA Commands' is enabled in the Class of Service of an extension, the
extension will always be in SA mode. You do not need to enter SA mode by dialing the SA password.
You can enter the SA mode by dialing the SA command prefix string.
• When the feature 'SA Mode' is enabled in the Class of Service of an extension, dialing of the SA
Password is required to enter the SA mode. SA Commands can be dialed only after successfully
entering the SA Mode.
• There is no restriction on the number of persons who can simultaneously enter and operate from the
SA mode using a telephone.
Entering SA Mode using a Telephone
You may use a DKP or an SLT extension of the ETERNITY to enter the SA Mode.
To enter SA mode via an extension phone,
• Dial 1#92-SA Password60
• You get a confirmation Tone of the ETERNITY to indicate successful entry into the SA mode.
• Dial SA Command strings: 1072-Feature Access Code.
• You get a confirmatory tone and text message on the phone display (if using Eon).
• Replace handset to exit SA mode.
OR
60. You may use the default SA password, 1111, if the password has not been changed already. If the password has been changed,
use the new password.
When you dial this command, the system will check if the facility 'SA Mode' is enabled in the Class of Service allowed to the exten-
sion from which you have dialed this command. If the SA mode is not allowed, an Error Tone will be played. The Error Tone will be
played also when the SA password is entered incorrectly.
If the facility 'Allow SA Commands' is enabled in the Class of Service of the extension you are using, you can skip this step and
directly dial the SA Command (1072-<Command String>).
332 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Dial 1#92
You can exit from the SA mode automatically or manually. To exit the SA mode automatically, you must
program the SA Mode Timer. This Timer can be set to a desired duration between 000 and 255 minutes.
On the expiry of the set time, the system disconnects the extension phone from the SA mode. By default,
the SA Mode Timer is set to 003 minutes. The Timer is loaded every time a new SA command is issued.
To program the SA Mode Timer:
• Dial 1072-016-SA Mode Timer
Where,
SA Mode Timer = 000 to 255 minutes.
• You can also exit the SA mode before the SA Mode Timer expires by dialing this command. If the SA Mode
Timer is set to 000 minutes, you can exit the SA mode only by dialing the command 1#92.
Changing Login Session Time Out of Jeeves
As mentioned earlier in, each login session of Jeeves has been set to 60 minutes by default. The Login session will
expire at the end of 60 minutes. The duration of the Login session can be changed as per your preference by
changing the settings of the 'Web Configuration Time Out Timer'.
To do this:
• Dial 1#91-SE Password to enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
• Dial 2118-Time
Where,
Time is from 001 to 255 minutes.
For example, to set log out time to 45 minutes, dial 2118-045.
• Press 'Enter' key to save setting, if using EON42/48.
Logging Out Users from Jeeves
It is possible for four users to simultaneously log in as System Engineers and use Jeeves. It is also possible to log
out all these users at once or log out any of these users selectively. To do this,
• Dial 1#91-SE Password to enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
• Dial 2119 to log out all users.
OR
• Dial 2120-User Number to log out users selectively.
Where,
User Number is from 1 to 4.
For example: dial 2120-3 to log out user number 3.
• Press 'Enter' key to save setting, if using EON42/48.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 333
Using Jeeves
To be able to access Jeeves,
• the Master Ethernet Port of ETERNITY must be connected with a stand-alone PC or in a LAN.
• a web-browser, either Internet Explorer 6 with SP2 (Service Pack) or Mozilla Firefox, must be installed on
the PC.
Refer the installation instructions for connecting a standalone/LAN as applicable to your model of ETERNITY
(“Installing ETERNITY ME”, “Installing ETERNITY GE”, and “Installing ETERNITY PE”).
When the system is connected to a standalone/LAN, change the IP Address and Subnet Mask so that the IP
Address of the PC and the Master Ethernet Port of ETERNITY do not clash and the PC and the Master
Ethernet Port of ETERNITY are in the same Subnet.
Refer the instructions provided under the sub-topic 'Changing IP Address and Subnet Mask of the Master
Ethernet Port' under the topics “Installing ETERNITY ME”, “Installing ETERNITY GE”, and “Installing
ETERNITY PE” as applicable to your model.
1. Open the browser (Internet Explorer/Mozilla Firefox) on the PC (Standalone or LAN PC) to which the
ETERNITY is connected.
2. Enter the current IP address of Master Ethernet Port of ETERNITY on the address bar or the browser.
The 'Welcome' page will open:
334 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
3. Click the link of the Login mode you wish to enter:
• Front Desk User Login
• System Administrator Login
• System Engineer Login
Each of these Login modes is described in detail later in this section.
4. You may select a language of your choice from the options provided on the top of this page. Jeeves
supports the following languages:
• English
• Italian
• Spanish
• French
• German
• Portuguese
Important: Language support is available in ETERNITY Software Version 10 onwards.
English is the default language. When you select a language, all the pages of Jeeves will appear in the
selected language for the current session, until you log out of Jeeves.
You can also select a language on the Front Desk User Login page, the System Engineer Login page and
the System Administrator Login page. The language you select from these pages will also be valid only for
the current login session.
• The language that you select on the 'Welcome' page or on any of the Login pages is valid for the
session only. The default language will be applied on next login.
• When you select the “Region” for the country in which ETERNITY is being installed, the system will
load the country-specific default settings and automatically select the local language of the country, if
the local language is among the above listed languages. The default local language set on selecting
the Region will be applied for every login session, unless you select another language as the default
local language.
• The default local language set on selecting the Region can also be changed from the "System
Parameters" page of Jeeves.
Set the Appearance Settings of your PC's screen to the resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels for full view of the
pages of Jeeves, the horizontal and vertical scroll bars on the pages.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 335
System Engineer Login
• To enter SE mode, click 'Login as System Engineer (SE)' link.
• The Login page of the SE mode on Jeeves will open.
336 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Now, enter the SE password.
You may use the default SE password, 1234, if the password has not been changed already. If the
password has been changed, use the new password.
• On successful login, the following programming options appear on your screen.
• Enter the desired programming option, by clicking the link. For instance, if you want to use the Quick
Installation Wizard-Standard PBX, click the link. The Wizard will open, you may navigate further.
• To exit the SE programming mode in Jeeves, click the 'Logout' button on bottom right of the browser
window.
• Each login session into the SE Mode is set to 60 minutes by default. So, the login session will expire at
the end of 60 minutes. The duration of the login session can be extended or shortened according to
your preference by changing the settings for the 'Web Configuration Timer'. Refer the topic “Changing
Login Session Time Out of Jeeves”.
• It is possible for four users to simultaneously log into the System Engineer Mode of Jeeves. It is also
possible to log out all of these users at once or log out any of these users selectively. Refer the topic
“Logging Out Users from Jeeves”.
• If you are using the model ETERNITY ME10S, with the Redundancy Option for the Master Card, you
will have two Master Cards; each card is loaded with the GUI Jeeves. Now, the Jeeves of the second
card can be accessed and used in the same way as described above. Make sure that the configuration/
settings of the active card are updated in the second card.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 337
System Administrator Login
• Repeat the Steps 1 to 3 to open Jeeves.
• To enter SA mode, click the 'Login as System Administrator (SA)' link.
• The Login page of the SA mode on Jeeves will open.
338 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Now, enter the SA user name (if assigned, not mandatory) and the SA password.
You may use the default SA password, 1111, if the password has not been changed already. If the
password has been changed, use the new password.
• On successful login, the Feature Menu for the SA mode is displayed as links on the left side panel as
navigation links on the page and on every SA programming page.
• Click the link of the desired Feature to open the page. Program the feature and click 'Submit' at the bottom
of the page to save changes. Click 'Default' to reset the default values.
• To exit the SA programming mode in Jeeves, click the 'Logout' button on the bottom right of the browser
window.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 339
Configuring using FTP
File Transfer Protocol (FTP), is a standard network protocol, used to exchange and manipulate files over a TCP
computer network such as the Internet.
FTP is the simplest way to exchange files between computers on the Internet. Like the Hypertext Transfer Protocol
(HTTP), which transfers displayable Web pages and related files, and the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP),
which transfers e-mail, FTP uses the Internet's TCP/IP protocols, and is commonly used to transfer Web server for
everyone on the Internet, download program and other files to your computer from other servers.
Using FTP, you can also update (delete, rename, move and copy) files at a server. For this, you need to log on to
an FTP server.
ETERNITY supports an embedded FTP server which can be used for three purposes:
• Upgrading System Software.
• Uploading/Back-up System Configuration files.
• Uploading/Back-up Call Record files (SMDR).
Configuration of ETERNITY using FTP is meant for Installers who want to complete system configuration at their
end or are unable to configure the system on-site at the customer's end.
The advantage of using FTP for configuring the system is that Installers can complete the entire system
configuration as per their customer's requirement at their end, copy these configuration files, and then upload these
configuration files on to the customer's system.
Further, once the configuration file has been created, Installers only need to make the desired changes in the
relevant files and upload the updated files again.
Before you configure the system using the FTP server, make sure you have completed the following tasks at your
end:
• Open the web browser (Internet Explorer/Mozilla Firefox).
• Enter the IP Address of the Master Ethernet Port of ETERNITY in the Address Bar to open Jeeves. Refer
“Using Jeeves” for instructions.
• Now, log in as 'Log in as System Engineer' by entering the SE password.
• Configure the system as per the customer/user requirements “Using Quick Installation Wizard - Standard
PBX” or “Using Full Programming Access”.
340 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To configure the system using the FTP server,
• Login as System Engineer
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 341
• Click the link 'Configuration Upload' on the left side panel containing the SE mode menu options.
• The FTP server window 'Log on As' will open.
• Enter the SE password (default:1234)
• Click the 'Log on' button.
342 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• On successful login, the FTP window will open. The folder named 'config', containing the configuration files
will open.
• The configuration files have the extension '.cfg'. Select all files in the folder. Copy the files.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 343
• Click the link 'Copy the selected items' and select the path and location to save the configuration files
created for the customer.
• You may select an existing folder you created.
OR
• Create a new folder in the selected location and rename the folder.
• Click Copy to get the configuration files onto this folder.
• The progress of file transfer will appear on your screen.
344 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Close the window after the files are transferred.
• Log out of Jeeves.
• Copy the configuration folder you created on a CD or a Pen Drive for the purpose of uploading the
configuration files on to the customer's system.
If you are an Installer who has multiple customers and you want configure your customers' systems using
FTP, you are recommended to tag the names of the configuration folders you create for your customers
with some identification, like name and date.
At the customers end,
• Open the web browser (Internet Explorer/Mozilla Firefox).
• Enter the IP Address of the Master Ethernet Port of ETERNITY in the Address Bar to open Jeeves. Refer
“Using Jeeves” for instructions.
• Now, log in as 'Log in as System Engineer' by entering the SE password.
• Enter Full Programming Access Mode.
• On the left side panel containing the SE mode menu options, scroll down to reach 'Configuration Upload'.
• Click the link 'Configuration Upload'.
• The FTP server window 'Log on As' will open.
• Enter the SE password (default:1234)
• Click the 'Log on' button.
• On successful login the FTP window will open. The all the system configuration files are stored in the
folder named 'config'. The configuration files have the extension '.cfg'.
• Select all files/files in the folder on the FTP and delete the files.
• Now, copy the files you created for the customer from the location it is stored (from the CD-ROM drive/
folder, if the files are on a CD; Disk/folder, if saved on a disk drive of the PC).
• Go back to the 'config' folder, and paste all the files you copied on to this folder.
• The file transfer progress will be shown on your screen.
• When transfer is completed, close the FTP window to exit.
The FTP can be used to store back-up of configuration files, SMDR, and System Software files. Refer the
topics “Backup-System Configuration”, “Backup-SMDR” and “Backup-System Software” to know more.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 345
Configuring using Serial COM Port
The ETERNITY can be programmed via the Serial COM port of a computer, using communication software like
HyperTerminal, ProComm, and BitComm.
For this, the ETERNITY must be connected to the Communication (COM) Port of a PC.
You must create a Text file and enter the programming command strings in the file. The Text file must be uploaded
on to the ETERNITY using the communication software, such as HyperTerminal/ ProComm/ BitComm.
The advantage of programming the ETERNITY using a computer is that once the Text file has been created, you
only need to make any subsequent changes that are required at the relevant places in the file and upload it again
on the PBX.
To program the ETERNITY from the Serial Port, follow these steps:
1. Connect the communication port of the ETERNITY with the communication port of the computer (any
standard computer with Window and NT operating system) using a crossed communication cable with 9-
pin D-type female connector on both ends.
2. Enable 'Programming through COM Port' in the ETERNITY for serial communication, select the COM Port
for programming, and program the COM Port Attributes of ETERNITY and that of the PC. You can do this
in two ways:
a. Using Jeeves
• Login as System Engineer in Jeeves (refer “Using Jeeves”)
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click 'System Parameters' link.
346 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Go to the option 'Enable Programming through Comm. Port', and select the checkbox.
• In the 'Communication Port for Programming' box, select the port you want to use for programming:
COM Port 1, COM Port 2. By default no COM Port is selected.
• Click 'Submit' to save changes.
• Click 'Communication Ports' to open the page.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 347
• Change the parameters of the selected COM Port - Speed, Data Bits, Parity, Stop Bits, Flow
Control, DSR Sensing - to match the values of the same attributes of the COM Port of the PC. Refer
the topic “Communication Ports” to know more.
• Click 'Submit' to save changes.
• Log out of Jeeves.
b. Using SE Commands
• Enter SE mode (dial 1#91-SE Password) from a DKP/SLT.
To enable Programming through COM Port,
• Dial 2102-Code
Where,
Code is 0 for Disable, 1 for Enable. Default: Disabled.
To select COM Port for programming
• Dial 2101-Code
Where,
Code is
0 for None
1 for COM Port 1
2 for COM Port 2
To change COM Port parameters, refer “Communication Ports” for SE Commands.
• Dial 00 to exit SE mode.
Configuring the ETERNITY using HyperTerminal
1. Create configuration files following these steps:
• Open Notepad (point cursor on Start Programs Accessories; click NotePad, a new, untitled file will
open).61
• Type 'P-' and the SE password.
• Type the desired SE Commands.
• Each command string should be prefixed with the character '^' (press shift+6)
61. If you are using WORDSTAR, use the non-document mode.
348 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Terminate each command string with the character '~'.
• After you have entered the SE commands, save the text file containing the commands with an
appropriate file name with .txt extension. Name the file such that you will know what commands it
contains. For example: If you have entered SE commands to configure SLT ports, save the file as SLT-
port-parameters.txt.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 349
You may save the command file for future reference and use. You may also print the command files for
verification and future reference.
2. Open HyperTerminal (point cursor on Start Programs Accessories Communication; click
HyperTerminal icon.
350 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
3. You may enter your location information, or choose 'cancel' to ignore and proceed further.
4. A 'New Connection-HyperTerminal' window will open.
5. Enter the name you desire to give to the new connection and select an icon. Click OK.
If you have ignored the location information in Step 3, you may be prompted again. You may ignore the
prompt.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 351
6. The 'Connect To' window will pop up. Select the COM Port you have assigned for configuring ETERNITY
in the field 'Connect using: ' and click 'OK'.
7. Configure the 'Port Settings' - Bits per second, Parity, Data Bits, Stop Bits, Flow Control. Remember, these
values must match with the values you entered for the COM Port of the ETERNITY to which this COM Port
is connected. Click 'Apply' and click 'OK'.
8. Click File Properties Settings.
352 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
9. In the ETERNITY Properties window, change the option 'Emulation' to VT100 (default: Autodetect).
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 353
10. In the same window, click 'ASCII Setup'. Under 'ASCII Sending' options, click to enable 'Echo typed
characters locally'. Click 'OK'.
11. Click 'Transfer' on the task bar of HyperTerminal window. Select the option 'Send Text File' from the drop
down menu. The 'Send Text File' window will open.
354 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
12. Browse (from Look in: ) to the location where you saved the text file and select the desired text file by
clicking on it. Click OK.
13. The computer is now sends the command file character by character. The ETERNITY receives these
characters and executes commands after assembling them in a command format.
14. Wait for the file transfer to finish.
If the PBX accepts the programming, it responds by sending the character 'Y'. If the PBX does not accept
it, it responds by sending character 'N'.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 355
15. Click File Exit to exit the program.
16. You may verify the programming of ETERNITY by logging into Jeeves and checking the parameters of the
feature/facility you programmed using HyperTerminal. For example, click SLT Parameters page and check
if the command strings you uploaded in the text file SLT-port-parameters.txt are reflected here.
356 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Using Quick Installation Wizard - Standard PBX
The Quick Installation Wizard-Standard PBX helps you with the basic configuration of the system in easy steps. It is
designed to break down the complexities of programming and can cover as much as 80% of your basic installation
requirements.
The advantage of using the Wizard is that it speeds up system configuration, as you configure parameters that are
specific to your model of ETERNITY and only those parameters you would like to use. For example, if you are
installing ETERNITY PE3SS, the Wizard will not display ISDN BRI and T1E1 PRI parameters, as these are not
supported in this model. Similarly, the Wizard will show only the Trunks and Extensions that are connected to the
system for configuration, for instance, if you are installing only 12 out of the 128 TWT trunks supported by
ETERNITY ME16S, and 12 DKP and 120 SLT extensions, the Wizard will show only as many trunk and extension
ports for configuration. Thus, the Wizard makes the entire system configuration very focused.
Further, the Wizard can be used for system configuration for first time installation as well as any time post-
installation to make modifications in the system configuration.
Structure of the Wizard
The Wizard stores its own set of configuration files and once the installation is completed, it updates the system
configuration files with the data you entered. However, the reverse does not work. The changes you make in the
system configuration “Using Full Programming Access” will not be reflected in the Quick Installation Wizard.
The Quick Installation Wizard - Standard PBX offers the configuration of the following parameters:
1. Region
2. System Pre-requisites
3. Extension Numbering Plan
4. Naming Trunks
5. Day-Night time
6. Number Patterns
7. Operator
8. Extensions
9. Door Phones
10. Least Cost Routing (LCR)
11. CPU Groups
12. TWT Trunks
13. BRI Trunks
14. T1E1PRI Trunks
15. Mobile Trunks
16. VoIP Network
17. SIP Trunks
18. Emergency Numbers
Help Text
There is a help text to explain the parameters on each screen. You may use this help text to guide you in entering
the information.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 357
The Buttons
The Wizard has the following buttons:
• Next: Clicking this button will cause the existing values of the parameters in a page to be submitted and
takes you to the next page of the Wizard.
• Submit: Clicking this button will cause the parameters configured in the page to be submitted, but will not
take you to the next page. The 'Submit' button is to be used when there are multiple pages for configuring
a facility, for example, configuring extensions, TWT trunks. Instead of navigating all the pages, you can
access the desired page, make changes and submit them. Similarly, if you want to make any changes
post-installation, instead of navigating through all pages of the Wizard and clicking 'Done' to effect the
changes, you can reach the desired page, make the necessary changes and submit the changes.
To navigate further, you must click the 'Next' button.
• Skip: Clicking this button will take you to the next page, without making any changes to the current page.
The Skip button is to be used when the Wizard is used post-installation to reach a page which is to be
modified, without changing the existing configuration settings on other pages.
• Undo: Clicking this button refreshes the page with the parameters configured in the system. You may use
this button if you are not sure about the values you entered or have entered incorrect values and wish to
start all over again. This button is available only on select pages of the Wizard.
• Help: Clicking this button on a page opens a dialog box, containing Help Text for that page. The dialog box
can be maximized.
• Default: Clicking this button will populate all the fields of the page with the default values. Use this button
when you want to assign default values to parameters.
• Clear: Clicking this button will cause the values of all the fields on the page to be cleared. Use this button
to make corrections or start entering the values all over again.
• Cancel: This button appears on the dialog box that pops up on a page. Clicking this button on the dialog
box will close the box, while keeping you on the same page.
• Exit: Clicking this button will cause you to exit the Wizard.
The changes you make in the system configuration “Using Full Programming Access” will not be reflected
in the Quick Installation Wizard.
You are advised to either use the Wizard only during installation and to make modifications post
installation OR use the Wizard only for basic configuration (first time installation) and the Full Programming
Access mode for making subsequent changes.
Entering the Wizard
• Open Jeeves (see “Using Jeeves” earlier in this chapter for instructions). The 'Home' page will open.
358 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Click the link 'Login’ as System Engineer (SE).
• Enter the SE password in the System Engineer Login page.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 359
• On successful login, you get the three programming options: Quick Installation Wizard-Standard PBX,
Quick Installation Wizard-Hotel, and Full Programming Access.
• Click the Quick Installation Wizard-Standard PBX to open the Wizard. The Welcome page of the Wizard
will open.
360 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Jeeves allows 4 persons to simultaneously log in as System Engineer. When you are logged into the
Wizard, it is recommended that no other person log into Jeeves as System Engineer.
Configuring Parameters
The Wizard gives you two options for configuring the system:
• Selective Configuration - This option allows you to choose what you want to configure and click the
related links on the navigation bar of the Wizard page. You are recommended use this option for making
the desired changes post-installation.
• Navigation by Wizard - In this option, the Wizard will lead you logically, step-by-step through the
configuration of the desired parameters. You are recommended to use this option when installing the
system for the first time, using the Wizard.
When you are installing the system for the first time, follow the steps given below to configure the system.
• Click the 'Navigate Wizard' button.
For information about the Wizard, click 'About Wizard'.
Region
• In the 'Region' list, select the country where the system is installed, and then click 'Next'.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 361
Selecting the 'Region' will instruct the system to load the default values of features/facilities according to
the country specific requirements.
The default 'Region' is India.
• Click the button 'Default the System'.
362 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
This will load the default settings in the system. You will get an alert, asking you, if you want to continue.
Click 'OK' to continue.
The system will restart and load the default values according to the 'Region' you selected on the previous
screen.
If you are using the Wizard post-installation, do not default the system. This will roll back the entire system
configuration to the default values. Use the 'Skip' button, to move to the next page, without effecting
changes on the parameters of the current page.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 363
System Pre-requisites
• Enter the “Customer Name”. You may enter the name (and address, if desired) of the organization/
enterprise in this field. For example: Prudent Investment, 701 Sunshine Boulevard, Bannerghatta,
Bangalore. The Customer Name can be a maximum of 80 characters.
• In 'Model Type', select the model of ETERNITY you are configuring. For example, ETERNITY ME16S.
When you select the 'Model Type', the Wizard will display the different port types according to the system
capacity (the maximum number of ports) supported by the model and variant of ETERNITY you have
selected as the Model Type. For example, if you selected ETERNITY GE6S as Model Type, the maximum
number of TWT Ports will be 96 and the maximum number of DKP extensions would be 96 ports. If you
selected ETERNITY PE6SP, the maximum number of TWT Ports will be 16, and the maximum number of
DKP ports will be 48.
• Select the number of ports to be used for each Port Type (TWT, DKP, SLT, Mobile, T1E1 PRI, BRI, VoIP,
SIP Trunks, SIP Extensions) from the respective boxes. For example, if you want 8 TWT Trunks, 24 DKP
extensions, and 128 SLT extensions to be used, select the same numbers from the box.
If you want to use voice mail, or connect any device to the Digital Input Port or the Digital Output port,
select 'Yes'.
• If you have selected the System Pre-requisites, navigate to the next page of the Wizard by clicking the
'Next' button.
364 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• You can set the Wizard to display only those trunk and extension port types which are present in the
system. This can be done by enabling the 'On Site Configuration' flag.
• When the 'On-Site Configuration?' flag is enabled, the Wizard will display the only those ports that are
present in the system (detected by the system at Power-ON) on this page.
For example, the system detects ETERNITY ME SLT32 card at power-on, so the maximum number of
SLT ports in the box will be 32. If you want only 20 SLTs to be used, select 20 in the box.
The Wizard will now consider that there are only 20 SLTs in the system and will modify the relevant
pages accordingly.
To cite another example, if your system is ETERNITY PE3SS, which does not support ISDN BRI or
PRI, the fields of these port types and ISDN Terminals on this page are displayed as non-editable.
Similarly, the field of the Door Phone ports will be editable only if the system has detected a Door
Phone card.
The fields for port types which are not available on-board (detected at Power-On) are displayed as non-
editable.
• To enable the 'On site Configuration' flag you must enter Full Programming Access mode.
• The Wizard does not provide for the port types 'Magneto' and 'E&M' as these are less commonly used.
If your system has Magneto card and or E&M card installed, you must configure the related trunk
parameters from the Full Programming Access mode only.
It is recommended that you enable the 'On-Site Configuration?' flag when you are configuring the system
at the installation site.
Extension Numbering Plan
• Assign extension numbers and names for the Door Phone, SLT, DKP, ISDN Terminal ports and SIP
Extensions as desired on this page. You can also program Access Codes from this page.
The desired Extension Number can be 6 digits long. The digits 0 to 9, # and * are allowed.
The desired Extension Name may be the name of the person who will use the extension. The name can be
a maximum of 18 characters.
When you change the extension numbers, make sure that they do not clash with any other Feature Access
Code in the dialing phase. To know more, refer the topic “Access Codes”.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 365
The Wizard pops up an alert about clashing extension numbers and prompts you to resolve the conflicting
numbers.
The Wizard will display only those ports available in the system and the number of ports you have defined
earlier in the System Pre-requisites page. The Wizard automatically detects the Hardware Slot and Port
Offset of the ports and assigns them to Software Ports. The Wizard also assigns the default extension
numbers to the ports, but leaves the extension names blank.
The default extension numbers for the above port types are:
2601 to 2603 for Door Phone 1 to 3.
2001 to 2512 for SLTs 001 to 512.
3001 to 3128 for DKPs 001 to 128.
3201 to 3264 for ISDN terminals 01 to 64.
3301 to 4300 for SIP Extensions 001 to 999.
SIP Extensions are a licensed feature.
In the case of SIP Extensions, the number you program as Extension # will be considered as the SIP ID,
the Authentication ID and the Authentication Password.
If more than one VoIP Card is present in the system, by default, all SIP Extensions will be assigned to the
first VoIP Card that is detected by the system. The System Engineer may change this assignment, if
required.
• If you have finished assigning numbers and names, click 'Submit'.
• To assign the extension numbers and names all over again, click the 'Clear' Button on this page.
366 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• To default all extension numbers, click the 'Default' button on this page.
Access Codes
• Change the Feature Access Codes, if required. Feature Access Codes may consist of single digits or a
sequence of a maximum of 6 digits. Digits 0 to 9,# and * are allowed. The default Access Codes that
appear on the screen are country-dependant. Also, refer “Access Codes” to know more.
• Click 'Submit' and click 'Next' to move to the next page.
If you assign the same Access Code to more than one feature, the Wizard will pop up a “Total Conflict’
message and ask you to resolve the conflicting codes. It will not allow you to submit until you have
resolved the conflict. If you assign an Access Code which has the same first digit as another Access Code,
the Wizard will pop up an alert about the clashing numbers. You may choose to resolve the clashing
number by clicking ‘Cancel’ or you may ignore the alert and continue programming by clicking ‘OK’.
Naming the Trunks
• Program names for Trunk ports for easy identification of the trunks. The name may consist of a maximum
of 18 alphanumeric characters.
The Wizard automatically detects the Hardware Slot and Port Offset of the trunk ports and assigns them to
Software Ports. The Wizard also assigns the default trunk port names along with their respective software
port numbers. For example, if it is a Two-wire Trunk assigned software port number 001; the name will be
displayed as TWT -001. Thus TWT trunks are named as TWT-001 to TWT-128, Mobile Ports as MOB-001
to 0064, BRI Ports as BRI-001 to BRI-032, and so on.
The Wizard will display only those Trunk port types available in the system and the number of Trunk ports
you have defined for each trunk port type earlier on the System Pre-requisites page.
• Click 'Submit' and click 'Next' to navigate the page further.
Day-Night Time
• Ask your customer about their working days and working hours (24 hours format) and program the
parameters accordingly. The Wizard considers the working hours you have selected as Daytime and the
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 367
remaining hours as Night Time (non-working hours). The default working hours are from 09:00 to 18:00.
The default Working Days are Monday to Saturday.
• Day-Night Time is assigned to Trunks and Extensions, so that they behave differently according to the
Time of the day. For example, the customer may want the system to route trunk calls to the security
personnel when the office is closed, or deny certain extensions access to outgoing long distance calls
during non-working hours and days, or to play a different greeting message to callers on holidays.
• This parameter is based on Time Table 162, which is assigned to Trunks and Extensions by default.
• The Wizard simplifies the assignment of Time Tables to trunks and extensions, requiring you to
program only the working hours and working days, instead of prompting you to define the non-working
hours and break hours. The Wizard automatically applies the working hours and days you have
programmed to time table-dependent facilities and features such as Class of Service, Toll Control,
Outgoing Trunk Access, etc.
• Skip this page if you feel that the requirements of your customer are not served by this parameter63.
Configure the Time Tables and related features like Class of Service, Toll Control, Outgoing Trunk
Access, etc. from the Full Programming Access mode.
• If you want to change the working hours and days at a later stage while navigating the Wizard, you may
use the 'Back' button of your browser to return to this page and make the changes.
62. A Time Table is a schedule of the three time zones (working hours, break hours, non-working hours) for a week. There are 8 differ-
ent Time Table templates to select from. Different Time Tables can be assigned to different trunks and extensions. Refer the sec-
tion “Time Tables” to know more.
63. For instance, the working hours are not the same throughout the week.
368 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Click the 'Next' button to navigate the Wizard further.
Number Patterns
This parameter is related to the “Toll Control” Feature, which allows you to define a particular calling permission for
each extension, referred to as 'Call Privilege'. A Call Privilege allows the extension to call certain areas and restricts
it from calling others. The extension can also be restricted from the dialing of specific telephone numbers. The
ETERNITY supports six types of Call Privileges, these are: No Calls, Local Calls, Regional Calls, National Calls,
International Calls and Limited Calls.
• On this page, you are required to define the number strings which the system should consider as Local
Numbers, Regional Numbers, National Numbers and International Numbers.
In the field 'Numbers starting with', you may enter only the first digit of the number string, or a part of the
string, or the complete number string.
In the field 'except', enter the number strings which you want to restrict from being dialed out.
Each number string you enter must not exceed 16 characters. Separate number strings with comma.
Do not provide <space> between commas and numbers.
• Click the 'Next' button to navigate the Wizard further.
• The Call Privilege Type 'No Calls' does not require any number pattern programming.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 369
• The Call Privilege Type 'Limited Calls' allows the dialing of only specific telephone numbers (regional,
national or international). It can be programmed only from the Full Programming Access mode only. To
know more, refer the feature description for 'Toll Control'.
'Operator'
• Select the extensions which are to be used as Operator.
When you double click this field, a list box will open. The box on the left displays the extension names and
numbers you programmed or the default access codes. Place your cursor on the desired extension and
click the 'Select>>' button. The selected extensions will appear on the box on the right.
A maximum of 32 extensions can be selected as Operator extension.
You will be shown an alert if you program more than 32 extensions. You may select and delete the excess
extensions or choose to ignore the alert by clicking 'OK' or closing the alert dialog box. Regardless of this,
the system will consider only 32 extensions.
When you click 'OK', all the extensions you selected will appear sequentially, separated by comma in the
order you selected the extensions. You can change the sequence of the extensions on the right hand side
using 'drag and drop'.
• Define the Class of Service for the Operator extension. Select the features to be allowed to the Operator
extension during the day and at night by selecting the checkboxes of the features listed in the table.
• Configure the Toll Control for the Operator extension for day time and night time. Select the type of calls to
be allowed during the day, and the type of calls to be allowed during the night. By default, all types of calls
are allowed during the day and at night.
• Select the Outgoing Trunks for the Day Time (the trunks through which calls are to be routed during the
day). If you want to the system to use Least Cost Routing, click the check box.
370 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
When you double click this field, the list box will open. Select the outgoing trunks from the left side box.
As you can see, the same trunk types are arranged sequentially, regardless of their hardware port location.
If you select trunks of the same type in sequential order, for example: TWT001, TWT002, TWT003, BRI01,
BRI02 and MOB02, the same trunk type will be grouped in one OG Trunk Bundle: TWT001, TWT002,
TWT003 will be OGTB #1, BRI01 and BRI02 will be grouped as OGTB#2, and MOB02 as OGTB#3.
These are default trunk names. If you have changed the trunk names (see Naming of Trunks), the name
will appear here, instead of the default trunk names.
If you select the trunks of the same type in a non-sequential order, for example, TWT001,
MOB01, BRI01 and TWT002, four OGTBs will be formed with TWT001 as member of OGTB#1, MOB01 as
member of OGTB#2, BRI01 in OGTB#3 and TWT002 in OGTB#4. So, despite two same trunk types being
selected (TWT001 and TWT002) they are grouped in separate OGTBs.
A maximum of 8 OGTB are allowed. If you exceed the number, the Wizard will show an alert indicating that
the system is short of resources.
It is possible to change the sequence of trunks on the right side box using the drag and drop action. You
can also delete a particular trunk from the right box.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 371
• Select the Outgoing Trunks for the Night Time (the trunks through which calls are to be routed during the
night). If you want to the system to use Least Cost Routing, click the check box.
Follow the same instructions for selecting the trunks from the list box as described in the previous step.
• Set the “Priority”64 for the Operator extension, by selecting the desired Priority Level from 1-9 from the box.
By default the priority level for the Operator extension is set to level 5.
64. Each extension of the ETERNITY is assigned a Priority Level starting from 1, 2, 3, 4...to 9. With 1 being the lowest priority and 9
being the highest priority. The calls from an extension with higher priority has preference in call landing. When an extension with
higher priority calls another with lower priority, a triple ring is placed on the called extension, and the call will land first on the exten-
sion when there are multiple incoming calls on the extension with lower priority.
372 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Click 'Next' to navigate to the next page.
For the parameters of the Operator extension, the Wizard uses the following resources:
• Class of Service Groups 18 to 19.
• Outgoing Trunk Bundle Groups 18 and 19
• Outgoing Trunk Bundles 69 to 76.
When programming the system from the Full Programming Access mode, do not modify the settings of
these parameters. It will affect the settings made by the Wizard.
Extensions
• Create a User Profile for extensions. A User Profile consists of Class of Service (COS), Toll Control and
Trunk Access to be assigned to an extension during day time and night time.
The Wizard makes configuration of the extensions easy with 'User Profiles'. Instead of configuring each
extension individually, you can group together extensions that are to be allowed the same COS group, Toll
Control and Trunk Access (Outgoing Trunk Bundle and Outgoing Trunk Bundle Group) in a single User
Profile.
User Profiles meet the requirements of organizations that desire to assign a different set of features to their
personnel according to their position in the organization, like senior managers, field executives,
administrative assistants etc. In such cases, each of these groups of users can be assigned a different
User Profile.
As many as 8 different User Profiles can be programmed using the Wizard.
You can name each User Profile such that it reflects the extension user group to which it is assigned. For
example, you may rename User Profile-1 created for managers as 'Manager', User Profile-2 created for
field executives as 'Executive', User Profile-3 created for administrative assistants as 'Admin'.
• To change the label of the User Profile, click the 'Pencil' icon.
• A prompt will pop up, asking you if you want to rename the User Profile Name. Enter the desired name in
the field. You can enter a maximum of 18 characters as name. Click 'OK'.
• The name you entered will appear in place of 'User Profile' number.
• To assign the User Profile to the desired extensions, double click the box.
The Wizard will display the configured extension numbers on the left box. Place your cursor on the desired
extension numbers and click 'Select'. The selected extension numbers will appear on the right box.
You can select the extensions for the User Profile after configuring the other parameters of the User
Profile.
• Define the Class of Service for the User Profile for day time and night time by selecting the check boxes of
the features you want to allow in the Class of Service.
• Define the Toll Control for the User Profile for the day time and night time by selecting the desired Toll
Control level in the box.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 373
The Toll Control levels on this page are based on the number lists you have programmed earlier on the
'Configuring Number Patterns' page of the Wizard.
• Select the Outgoing Trunks for the Day Time (the trunks through which calls are to be routed during the
day). If you want to the system to use Least Cost Routing, click the check box.
When you double click the field, the list box will open. Select the outgoing trunks from the left box.
As you can see, the same trunk types are arranged sequentially, regardless of their hardware port location.
If you select trunks of the same type in sequential order, for example, TWT001, TWT002, TWT003, BRI01,
BRI02 and MOB02, the same trunk type will be grouped in one OG Trunk Bundle: TWT001, TWT002,
TWT003 will be OGTB #1, BRI01 and BRI02 will be grouped as OGTB#2, and MOB02 as OGTB#3.
If you select the trunks of the same type in a non-sequential order, such as: TWT001, MOB01, BRI01 and
TWT002, four OGTBs will be formed with TWT001 as member of OGTB#1, MOB01 as member of
OGTB#2, BRI01 in OGTB#3 and TWT002 in OGTB#4. So, despite two same trunk types being selected
(TWT001 and TWT002) they are grouped in separate OGTBs.
A maximum of 8 OGTB are allowed. If you exceed the number, the Wizard will show an alert indicating that
the system is short of resources.
It is possible to change the sequence of trunks on the right side box using the drag and drop action. You
can also delete a particular trunk from the right box.
• Select the Outgoing Trunks for the Night Time (the trunks through which calls are to be routed during the
night). If you want to the system to use Least Cost Routing, select the check box.
Follow the same instructions for selecting the trunks from the box as described in the previous step.
• Set the “Priority”65 for the extension, by selecting the desired Priority Level from 1-9 in the box. By default
the priority level for the extension is set to level 5.
You may set a different Priority Level in each User Profile, depending on the requirement of the extension
users, whose extension the User Profile is to be assigned. For example, you may set a higher Priority level
to the User Profile to be assigned to Managers.
• Click 'Submit' to save the changes in the User Profile.
• To program another User Profile, click the label.
• Rename the label, if required, by clicking the 'Pencil' icon. Repeat all the steps described above to define
Class of Service, Toll Control, Trunk Access and Priority.
• Click 'Submit' to save changes. Repeat the same steps to program another User Profile.
• When you have finished programming the desired number of User Profiles, click 'Next' button to navigate
the Wizard further.
65. Each extension of the ETERNITY is assigned a Priority Level starting from 1, 2, 3, 4...to 9. With 1 being the lowest priority and 9
being the highest priority. The calls from an extension with higher priority has preference in call landing. When an extension with
higher priority calls another with lower priority, a triple ring is placed on the called extension, and the call will land first on the exten-
sion when there are multiple incoming calls on the extension with lower priority. Refer the feature description for “Priority” to know
more.
374 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Extensions which are present in the system but which have not been configured using Wizard will be
assigned User Profile-1.
• The User Profiles 1-8 use the following resources in the system:
• Station Basic Feature Template number 2 to 9
• Class of Service Groups 2 to 17.
• Outgoing Trunk Bundle Groups 2 to 17
• Outgoing Trunk Bundles 5 to 68.
• Do not use them when configuring the system from the Full Programming Access mode.
Door Phones
• This feature is applicable only if your System is an ETERNITY PE model.
• You will reach this page only if the system has detected the presence of the Door Phone Card in the
system (as the 'On-site Configuration?' flag is enabled).
• In case the On-site Configuration?' flag is disabled, you must include 'Door Phone' in the 'System Pre-
requisites page of the Wizard to be able to reach this page.
• Configure the following door phone parameters for each Door Phone you have connected to the Door
Phone Port of the ETERNITY PE.
• Route Door Phone Calls: Select the mode of routing for calls landing on the Door Phone.
Select 'At Wish' if you want the flexibility to have calls routed to a group of extensions or to an external
number as you desire.
Select 'As per Schedule' if you want the system to route the Door Phone Calls automatically to landing
destination phone (extension or external number) according to the time of the day.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 375
• If you have selected 'As per Schedule', program the following parameters:
• Route Door Phone Calls during Day to: Select the radio button of the desired destination - External
Number or Extensions - on which calls should be landed during the day time.
• Route Door Phone Calls during Night to: Select the radio button of the desired landing destination -
External Number or Extensions - for calls during the night time.
• Extensions for Day Time: Select the Extension numbers where calls should land during the day.
When you double click this field, the multiple selection box will open. The Wizard will display the
extensions you have configured on the left box. Place your cursor on the desired extension and click
select. The selected extensions will appear on the right box. You can select a maximum of 32
extensions as the landing destination for the door phone calls.
• Extensions for Night Time: Select the Extension numbers where calls should land during the night.
To select the extensions, double click the field, the multiple selection box will open. Place your cursor
on the desired extensions appearing on the left side box and click ‘select’. You can select a maximum
of 32 extensions. The selected extensions will appear on the right side box.
• External Number: Enter the External Number. This number is common for Day time and Night Time,
which means, you cannot have calls routed to different external numbers for the Day Time and Night
Time.
376 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• If you have selected 'At Wish', enter the External Number and select the Extensions from the box.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 377
• For the External number you have programmed (at wish or scheduled), define the Outgoing Trunk Bundle
Group.
When you click the field 'To Dial External Number, Use Trunk:', the box will open, displaying the trunk
types present in the system in the left side box. Click the desired trunk type and click ‘Select’.
If you select trunks of the same type in sequential order, for example: TWT001, TWT002, TWT003, BRI01,
BRI02 and MOB02, the same trunk type will be grouped in one OG Trunk Bundle, for example: TWT001,
TWT002, TWT003 will be OGTB #1, BRI01 and BRI02 will be grouped as OGTB#2, and MOB02 as
OGTB#3.
If you select the trunks of the same type in a non-sequential order, for example: TWT001,
MOB01, BRI01 and TWT002, four OGTBs will be formed with TWT001 as member of OGTB#1, MOB01 as
member of OGTB#2, BRI01 in OGTB#3 and TWT002 in OGTB#4. So, despite two same trunk types being
selected (TWT001 and TWT002) they are grouped in separate OGTBs.
It is possible to change the sequence of trunks on the right side box using the drag and drop action. You
can also delete a particular trunk from the right box.
A maximum of 8 OGTB are allowed. If you exceed the number, the Wizard will show an alert indicating that
the system is short of resources.
• Select the check box of 'Use LCR?' to enable Least Cost Routing.
• Change the 'Door Phone Ring Timer', if required. This is the time for which the Door Phone will ring on the
extensions programmed as the landing destination. This Timer has a range of 001 to 255 seconds. By
default the Timer is set to 30 seconds.
378 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
If you are using a Door Lock in conjunction with the Door Phone connected to this Door Phone, select the
checkbox to enable 'Use Door Lock'
• Click 'Submit' to save your settings.
• Repeat the same steps to program another door phone. If you have no other door phone to program, click
'Next' to navigate further.
The Wizard uses the following resources for this feature:
• Outgoing Trunk Bundle Groups (OGTBG) 20 to 22.
• Outgoing Trunk Bundles (OGTB) 77 to 88.
• Routing Group 58-66.
Do not change their settings when configuring the system from the Full Programming Access mode.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 379
Least Cost Routing (LCR)
• Assign Cost Factor to the trunks.
• On this page, the Wizard displays the number of trunk ports you selected in the 'System Pre-Requisites'
page.
• Cost Factor is used to grade the cost of routing calls from that trunk, from 1 to 99; 1 signifies least cost and
99 signifies the highest cost. By default all trunks are assigned Cost Factor 01.
• Now configure the number of or part of the number and the preferred trunk to route that number. The
number can be a maximum of 16 digits.
• Select the cost factor trunk applicable for each number in the order of preference. Select the foremost
preferred Cost Factor trunk in Preference 1, the second most preferred Cost Factor trunk in Preference 2,
the third preferred Cost Factor trunk in Preference 3 and the least preferred Cost Factor trunk in
Preference 4.
• Click 'Next' to navigate the Wizard further.
ETERNITY supports four different types of LCR, but the Wizard supports only Number based LCR. To
know more, refer “Configuring LCR”.
380 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
CPU Groups
• Assign extensions to Call Pick-Up (CPU) groups.
Call Pick-Up allows extension users to answer (internal and trunk) calls ringing on other extensions from
their own extension; without physically going to the ringing extensions. For this extensions must be
assigned to CPU Groups.
• While you can create as many as 01 to 99 CPU Groups, and assign extensions to these groups, the
Wizard allows you to create and assign extensions to 01 to 16 CPU Groups. By default, all extensions are
assigned to CPU Group number 99.
• To create a CPU group, click the CPU group number, for example CPU 01, and select the extensions to be
assigned to this group from the box.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 381
• Click 'Submit' to save the settings of the CPU group you created. Now, repeat the same steps to create
another group.
• If you have finished programming CPU groups, click 'Next' to navigate to the next page of the Wizard.
To know more about this feature, refer the topic “Call Pick Up”.
TWT Trunks
382 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Configure features of the Two-wire Trunks (TWT) connected to the ETERNITY on this page.
The Wizard makes configuration of the TWT Trunks easy with 'TWT Profiles'. Instead of configuring each
TWT Trunk individually, you can group together trunks that are to be assigned the same features - Calling
Line Identification, Trunk Landing Group - in a single TWT Profile.
You can program as many as 8 different TWT Profiles using the Wizard.
It is also possible to name each TWT Profile by the service provider. For example, you may rename TWT
Profile-1 created as 'BSNL', TWT Profile-2 as 'Reliance' and so on.
• To change the label of the TWT Profile, click the 'Pencil' icon.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 383
• A prompt will pop up, asking you if you want to rename the TWT Profile Name. Enter the desired name in
the field. You can enter a maximum of 18 characters as name. Click 'OK'.
• The name you entered will appear in place of 'TWT Profile' number.
• To assign the TWT Profile to the desired trunks, double click the field Select Trunks/Apply to Trunks.
384 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The Wizard will display the number of TWT trunks (along their names) you configured in the 'System Pre-
requisites' page on the left side box. Place your cursor on the desired trunks and click 'Select'. The
selected TWT trunks will appear on the right side box.
You can select the trunks for the TWT Profile after configuring the other parameters of the TWT Profile.
• Define the Calling Line Identification Format for the TWT Profile by selecting the desired option in the box.
You are advised to consult the service provider in this regard.
• In the field 'Route Calls during Day to', select the landing destination for calls on trunks in the TWT Profile
during day time. You may select any option: Operator extension, other extensions, built-in Auto Attendant
or the Voice Mail Auto Attendant (if available) from the box.
• If you selected the option ‘Built-In Auto Attendant’, the default Voice Modules 02 to 13 containing the
default Voice Messages (Morning, Afternoon and Evening Greetings, DID Greeting and Guidance
Messages) will be applied. Refer “Voice Message Applications” to know more.
• If you click the option 'Extensions' as the landing destination, select the extensions in the corresponding
field. Double click the field, the list box will open. Select the extensions from the left box.
A maximum of 32 extensions can be selected. If you exceed the number, the Wizard will prompt you to
make the selection again. You can delete the excess extensions from those you selected. You can also
change the order of the selected landing extensions in the right side box using drag and drop option.
The selected extension numbers will appear in the field, separated by comma.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 385
• In the field 'Route Calls during Night to', select the landing destination for calls on trunks in the TWT Profile
during night time. Follow the same instruction as in the previous step.
• Click 'Submit' to save your settings in the TWT Profile. Repeat these steps to create another TWT Profile.
• If you have finished creating TWT profiles and assigning them to trunks, click 'Next' to navigate further.
• If there is any trunk you have not assigned a TWT Profile, the Wizard will pop-up an alert informing you
about the trunk you have not programmed and ask if you want the default TWT Profile number should be
assigned.
• If you wish to assign the default TWT Profile to such trunks, click 'OK'.
• Click 'Cancel' if you want to ignore the alert and not assign the profile to the TWT.
The Wizard uses the following resources for this page:
• Trunk Feature Templates 34 to 41.
• Routing Groups 34 to 49.
• TWT Hardware Templates 02 to 09.
Do not make any modifications to them when configuring the system from the Full Programming Access
mode.
386 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
BRI Trunks
• You will reach this page only if your system has detected the presence of BRI Trunks or if you have
specified the number of BRI Trunks to be used in the 'System Pre-requisites' page.
• The ETERNITY supports a maximum of 32 BRI Trunks, depending on the system capacity of your
model.
• Using the Wizard, you can configure only the first four BRI Trunks in your system. To program the
remaining BRI Trunks, you must enter Full Programming Access.
• The Wizard will display the name of first BRI Trunk.
The name will be displayed only if you have programmed names in the 'Naming of Trunks' page of the
Wizard. If you have not named the trunk on that page, you may change the label; right click the tab 'BRI
Trunk 1' and enter the desired name.
If required, you may change the Hardware slot and port number of the BRI trunk is displayed here.
• Select the mode for routing incoming calls. Incoming calls may be routed according to MSN Numbers, DDI
Numbers or Port-wise.
• Route Incoming Calls MSN Number wise: Select this option if you want to route incoming calls
according to MSN numbers66. You can program maximum 6 MSN numbers.
• Route Incoming Calls DDI Number wise: Select this option if you want to route incoming calls
according to DDI Numbers67. Select this option only if your extensions are arranged sequentially. If the
extensions are not arranged sequentially (for example, DDI numbers 2630551 to 2630559 are to be
routed to extensions 3001 to 3009) you are recommended to program this parameter from the Full
Programming Access mode. You can program maximum 12 DDI numbers.
• Route Incoming Calls Port wise: Select this option if you want to route all incoming calls on the BRI
trunk port to extensions, irrespective of dialed MSN/DDI number.
• If you selected MSN Number-wise routing, configure the following parameters:
• MSN Number: Enter the MSN Number provided by your Service Provider. This number is used to
route the incoming calls and sent to the ISDN Exchange when making an outgoing call. You can enter
up to 6 MSN numbers using the Wizard.
• Route calls during day to: Select where you want to the route the calls during day time. You can route
the calls to the Operator or to a group of extensions or to Built-In Auto-Attendant or to the Voice Mail
Card's Auto-Attendant68.
If you click the option ‘Built-In Auto Attendant’, the default Voice Modules 02 to 13 containing the
default Voice Messages (Morning, Afternoon and Evening Greetings, DID Greeting and Guidance
Messages) will be applied by the Wizard. Refer “Voice Message Applications” to know more.
66. MSN numbers is a set of numbers with no logical connection between the numbers themselves. For example, MSN numbers for a
BRI connection could be 2630555, 2634872, 2635098, etc. Up to 8 MSN numbers are provided on a single BRI connection.
67. DDI numbers are a set of numbers arranged sequentially, for example DDI numbers for a BRI connection could be 2630551 to
2630559.
68. The Built-In Attendant offers 5 simultaneous calls, whereas Voice Mail's Auto-Attendant offers 16 simultaneous calls.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 387
If you selected 'Extensions', double click the empty field, the multiple selection box will open. Select the
extensions from the left side box.
A maximum of 32 extensions can be selected. If you exceed the number, the Wizard will prompt you to
make the selection again. You can delete the excess extensions from those you selected. You can also
change the order of the selected landing extensions in the right side box using drag and drop option.
The selected extension numbers will appear in the field, separated by comma.
• When NR?: Select an option for what action the system should take when there is no response (NR),
that is, the incoming call is not answered within the DDI Ring Timer (default: 45 sec.) by the destination.
By default, it is set to 'Disconnect'.
• When Busy?: Select an option for what action the system should take when the landing destination is
busy. By default, it is set to 'Disconnect'.
• Route calls during night to: Select where you want to the route the calls during night time. If you
selected group of extensions as the destination, select the extensions from the list box, as described
above. This may be a different group of extensions than the one selected for calls during day time.
If you selected 'Extensions', you must now select the extensions by clicking the field provided for it. A
maximum of 32 extensions can be selected. Follow the same procedure described above for selection
of extensions for calls during day time.
• When NR?: Select an option for what action the system should take when there is no response (NR),
that is, the incoming call is not answered within the DDI Ring Timer (default: 45 sec.) by the destination.
By default, it is set to 'Disconnect'.
• When Busy?: Select an option for what action the system should take when the landing destination is
busy. By default, it is set to 'Disconnect'.
• The Wizard allows you to select the desired landing extension (Operator/ extensions/ Built-In Auto
Attendant/Voice Mail's Auto Attendant) only for the first 3 MSN numbers. The remaining 3 MSN
numbers can be routed to a single extension only.
• So, if you want to route incoming calls to a particular extension during the day time and night time,
enter the MSN numbers in MSN#4 to MSN#6.
• Configure the same parameters for MSN#2 to #6, as applicable.
• If you selected DDI Number-wise routing, configure the following parameters for each DDI#:
• Root DDI #: Enter the Root DDI number. This number is used to send the DDI number to the ISDN
Exchange. This number is also sent to the Exchange when an outgoing call is made by an extension
which is not assigned DDI number. This is the same as the Pilot Number.
• Start DDI #: Enter the first DDI number provided by your Service Provider. More often than not, the
Start DDI# is the same as the Root DDI#.
• Total DDIs: Enter the total DDI numbers provided by your Service Provider.
388 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Start Extension#: Enter the number of the first extension from which the DDI number assignment is to
be done.
For example, your Service Provider has given you DDI numbers 2630550 to 2630560. These are to be
assigned to extension numbers 2001 to 2010. In this case 2630550 will be the Root DDI# as well as
Start DDI#. As 10 DDI numbers are provided to you, the Total DDI# would be 10, and the Start
Extension# would be 2001.
• When NR?: Select an option for what action the system should take when there is no response (NR),
that is, the incoming call is not answered within the DDI Ring Timer (default: 45 sec.) by the destination.
By default, it is set to 'Disconnect'.
• When Busy?: Select an option for what action the system should take when the landing destination is
busy, during DDI Ring Timer (default: 45 sec.). By default, it is set to 'Disconnect'.
• Now, configure the same parameters for DDI#2 to #12.
• If you selected BRI port-wise routing, configure the following parameters:
• Route Calls during Day to: Select the landing destination for calls on BRI trunk during day time. You
may select any option: Operator extension, other extensions, built-in Auto Attendant or the Auto
Attendant of the Voice Mail System (if available).
If you click the option ‘Built-In Auto Attendant’, the default Voice Modules 02 to 13 containing the
default Voice Messages (Morning, Afternoon and Evening Greetings, DID Greeting and Guidance
Messages) will be applied by the Wizard. Refer “Voice Message Applications” to know more.
If you selected 'Extensions' as landing destination, you must select the extensions. Double click the
field and select the extensions from the left box.
A maximum of 32 extensions can be selected. If you exceed the number, the Wizard will prompt you to
make the selection again. You can delete the excess extensions from those you selected. You can also
change the order of the selected landing extensions in the right side box using drag and drop option.
The selected extension numbers will appear in the field, separated by comma.
• Route Calls during Night to: Select the landing destination for calls on BRI trunk during night time.
Follow the same procedure for selecting extensions as described above.
• Click 'Submit' to save changes. Repeat the same steps to program the other BRI Trunks.
• If you have finished configuring the BRI Trunks, click 'Next' to navigate further.
• If there is a BRI trunk you have not configured, the Wizard will pop-up an alert informing you about the
trunk you have not programmed. It will ask you if you want the default BRI Profile number to be assigned to
the trunk.
If you wish to assign the default profile to such trunks, click 'OK'.
Click 'Cancel' if you want to ignore the alert and not assign the profile to the BRI trunk.
You may either configure this trunk by clicking 'Yes', or ignore this alert by clicking 'No', and navigate
further.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 389
For the BRI parameters, the Wizard uses the following resources:
• Entries 01 to 48 of the Incoming Call (IC) Reference Table.
• Entries 01 to 48 of the Outgoing Reference Table.
• Routing Groups 01 to 25
• Trunk Feature Template 01 to 25.
When programming the system from the Full Programming Access mode, do not modify the settings of
these resources. It will affect the settings made by the Wizard.
T1E1PRI Trunks
• The ETERNITY supports a maximum of 8 T1E1PRI Trunks, depending on the system capacity of your
model.
• However, using the Wizard you can configure only the first 2 PRI Trunks in the system. You may
configure the remaining Trunks, if applicable, from the Full Programming Access mode only.
• Change the label of the T1E1PRI Trunk, if required. Click the 'Pencil' icon. A prompt will pop-up. Enter the
desired name in the field of the prompt and click 'OK'. The name you programmed will appear.
You may enter the name of the Service Provider to make the identification of the Trunk easy.
• The Wizard will display the Hardware Slot-Port Number of the first T1E1 PRI Trunk the system has
detected in this field.
• Select the Signaling Type as applicable: from PRI, RBS, QSIG, and E&M. These are the signaling types
supported by the ETERNITY.
390 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Select the Framing Mode, as applicable. By default, 'CEPT1 MF (Auto CRC)' is selected as Framing Mode.
• Select the Line Coding as applicable. By default 'HDB3' is selected.
• Select the ISDN Switch variant. By default 'ETSI NET5' is selected as the variant.
• Select the mode for routing incoming calls. Incoming calls may be routed according to DDI Numbers or
Port-wise.
• Route Incoming Calls Port wise: Select this option if you want to route all incoming calls on the
T1E1PRI trunk port to groups of extensions, without identifying the DDI number.
• Route Incoming Calls DDI Number wise: Select this option if you want to route incoming calls
according to DDI numbers. Select this option only if your extension numbers are arranged sequentially.
If the extensions are not arranged sequentially you are recommended to program this parameter from
the Full Programming Access mode.
If your installation uses multiple DDI blocks on the same T1E1PRI connection, you can configure only 2
such DDI blocks using the Wizard. To configure more DDI blocks on a single T1E1PRI connection, you
must use the Full Programming Access mode.
• If you selected DDI Number-wise routing, configure the following parameters:
• Root DDI #1: enter the Root DDI # provided by your Service Provider. The Root DDI # is the main
number assigned to the T1E1PRI trunk. It is also known as MSN Number, Pilot Number or Main
Number69.
If your exchange requires area code to be sent with the DDI number, program the root number with
area code. For example: Root DDI # is 2630555 and area code where the PBX is installed is 265, enter
2652630555 in this field.
• Route calls during day to: Select where you want to the route the calls during day time. You can route
the calls to the Operator or to a group of extensions or to Built-In Auto-Attendant or to the Voice Mail
Card's Auto-Attendant70.
If you click the option ‘Built-In Auto Attendant’, the default Voice Modules 02 to 13 containing the
default Voice Messages (Morning, Afternoon and Evening Greetings, DID Greeting and Guidance
Messages) will be applied by the Wizard. Refer “Voice Message Applications” to know more.
If you selected 'Extensions', then select the extensions by clicking the empty field. A multiple selection
box will open. Select the extensions from the left box.
A maximum of 32 extensions can be selected. If you exceed the number, the Wizard will prompt you to
make the selection again. You can delete the excess extensions from those you selected. You can also
change the order of the selected landing extensions in the right box using drag and drop option.
The selected extension numbers will appear in the field, separated by comma.
69. This number will be used to prepare the DDI number to the Exchange (Reverse DDI) when an Outgoing call is made from the
ETERNITY by the Extension assigned DDI Number. Also, this number will be sent to the Exchange without any modification when
an Outgoing call will be made by an extension which is not assigned DDI number.
70. The Built-In Attendant offers 5 simultaneous calls, whereas Voice Mail's Auto-Attendant offers 16 simultaneous calls.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 391
• When NR?: Select an option for what action the system should take when there is no response (the
incoming call is not answered within the DDI Ring Timer, set by default to 45 seconds) by the
destination. By default, it is set to 'Disconnect'.
• When Busy?: Select an option for what action the system should take when the landing destination
is busy (for the duration of the DDI Ring Timer; default: 45 seconds). By default, it is set to
'Disconnect'.
• Route calls during night to: Select where you want to the route the calls during night time from the
options. If you selected group of extensions as the destination, select the extensions from the box, as
described above. This may be a different group of extensions than the one selected for calls during day
time.
If you selected 'Extensions', you must now select the extensions by clicking the field provided for it. A
maximum of 32 extensions can be selected. Follow the same procedure described above for selection
of extensions for calls during day time.
• When NR?: same as described above for calls during day time.
• When Busy?: same as described above for calls during day time.
• Start DDI#: Enter the first DDI number given by the Service Provider. The Start DDI Number may be
the Root DDI number, as seen in most of the cases.
• Total DDIs: Enter the Total DDI numbers. Ask your Service Provider.
• Start Extension#: Enter the number of the first extension from which the DDI assignment is to be
done.
For example, your Service Provider has given you DDI numbers 2630551 to 2630560. These numbers
are to be routed to extensions 2001 to 2010. In this case, the Root DDI number as well as the Start
DDI# will be 2630550. As 10 DDI numbers are used, enter Total DDI numbers =10 and Start Extension
# = 2001.
• When NR?: same as described above for calls during day time.
• When Busy?: same as described above for calls during day time.
Now, configure the same parameters for Root DDI#2
• If you selected Port-wise routing, configure the following parameters:
• Route Calls during Day to: Select the landing destination for calls on T1E1PRI trunks during day
time. You may select any option: Operator extension, other extensions, built-in Auto Attendant or the
Auto Attendant of the Voice Mail System (if available).
If you click the option ‘Built-In Auto Attendant’, the default Voice Modules 02 to 13 containing the
default Voice Messages (Morning, Afternoon and Evening Greetings, DID Greeting and Guidance
Messages) will be applied by the Wizard. Refer “Voice Message Applications” to know more.
If you selected 'Extensions' as landing destination, you must select the extensions. Double click the
field and select the extensions from the left box.
392 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
A maximum of 32 extensions can be selected. If you exceed the number, the Wizard will prompt you to
make the selection again. You can delete the excess extensions from those you selected. You can also
change the order of the selected landing extensions in the right side box using drag and drop option.
The selected extension numbers will appear in the field, separated by comma.
• Route Calls during Night to: Select the landing destination for calls on T1E1PRI trunks during night
time. Follow the same procedure for selecting extensions as described above.
• Click 'Submit' to save changes. Repeat the same steps to program the second T1E1PRI Trunk.
• If you have finished configuring the T1E1 PRI Trunks, click 'Next' to navigate further.
Mobile Trunks
• You will reach this page only if your system has detected the presence of the Mobile Card in the system
(as the 'On-Site Configuration?' flag is enabled) or if you have specified the number of Mobile Ports
Used earlier in the 'System Pre-requisites page of the Wizard.
• ETERNITY supports up to 64 Mobile Ports, depending upon the system capacity of your model.
• The Wizard makes configuration of the Mobile Trunks easy with 'Mobile Profiles'. Instead of configuring
each Mobile Trunk individually, you can group together trunks that are to be assigned the same
features in a single Mobile Profile.
You can program as many as 4 different Mobile Profiles using the Wizard.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 393
• Change the label of the Mobile Profile, if required. Right click the tab and enter the desired name, for
example rename Mobile Profile 1 as 'Vodafone'. Naming the profile with the Service Provider's name
makes identification of the Trunk on which this profile is applied easy.
• Select the mobile trunks on which this Mobile Profile is to be applied. It is also possible to configure all the
other parameters and then select the mobile trunks.
To select the desired mobile trunks, double click the box. The Wizard will display the number of Mobile
Trunks you specified in the 'System Pre-requisites' page on the left side box. All the Mobile Trunks appear
in this box and are arranged sequentially in the increasing order of their software port number.
Place your cursor on the desired trunks and click 'Select' button. The selected Mobile Trunks will appear
on the right side box. It is also possible to select a range of trunks at a time pressing the 'SHIFT and 'Down'
arrow keys.
• Change the SIM PIN for the mobile profile.
Recall that you have changed the SIM PIN of the SIM Card using a Handset before installing it in the
system to the default '1234'. Now, you may change it to a desired SIM PIN.
Since you are changing the SIM PIN for a Mobile Profile, this SIM PIN will be applied for all the Mobile
Trunks you selected for this Mobile Profile.
• Select the extensions to which the incoming calls on the Mobile Trunks should be routed.
394 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• In the field 'Route Calls during Day to', select the landing destination for calls on Mobile trunks during day
time. You may select any option: Operator extension, other extensions, built-in Auto Attendant or the Auto
Attendant of the Voice Mail System (if available).
If you select the option ‘Built-In Auto Attendant’, the default Voice Modules 02 to 13 containing the default
Voice Messages (Morning, Afternoon and Evening Greetings, DID Greeting and Guidance Messages) will
be applied by the Wizard. Refer “Voice Message Applications” to know more.
If you click the option 'Extensions' as the landing destination, select the extensions in the corresponding
field. Double click this field, the multiple selection box will open. Select the extensions from the left side
box.
A maximum of 32 extensions can be selected. If you exceed the number, the Wizard will prompt you to
make the selection again. You can delete the excess extensions from those you selected. You can also
change the order of the selected landing extensions in the right side box using drag and drop option.
The selected extension numbers will appear in the field, separated by a comma.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 395
• In the field 'Route Calls during Night to', select the landing destination for calls on Mobile trunks during
night time. Follow the same instruction as in the previous step to select extensions as the landing
destination.
• Click 'Submit' to save your settings in the Mobile Profile. Repeat these steps to configure another Mobile
Profile.
• If you have finished configuring the Mobile Profiles, click 'Next' to navigate further.
• If there is any mobile trunk you have not assigned a Mobile Profile, the Wizard will pop-up an alert
informing you about the trunk you have not programmed. It will ask you whether the default Mobile Profile
number should be assigned to that trunk.
You may either assign a profile to this trunk by clicking 'OK', or ignore this alert by clicking 'Cancel, and
navigate further.
VoIP Network
• You will reach this page only if your system has detected the presence of the VoIP Card in the system
(as the 'On-Site Configuration?' flag is enabled).
• In case the On-site Configuration?' flag is disabled, you must specify 'Number of VoIP Ports Used' in
the 'System Pre-requisites page of the Wizard to be able to reach this page.
396 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Each VoIP card has a WAN Port and a LAN Port. The Wizard covers only the WAN Port parameters. To
program LAN Port parameters, you must use the Full Programming Access mode.
• Regardless of the number of VoIP Ports supported by your model of ETERNITY and the number of
VoIP ports you have defined in the 'System Pre-requisites' page, the Wizard allows you to configure
only the first four VoIP ports in your system.
• Configure the Network Parameters of each VoIP (WAN) Port. The system will automatically detect the
Hardware Slot and Port Offset and display the same for each VoIP Port.
• Change the label of the VoIP (WAN) Port, if required. This will make identification of the port easy.
• Click the 'Pencil' icon and enter the name of your choice in the blank field of the prompt that will pop up on
your screen. Click OK.
• In the Network Connection Type box, select the IP addressing scheme of the network to which the VoIP
(WAN) Port is connected: Static, DHCP, PPPoE. Ask your LAN administrator for this information. Select
the appropriate radio button.
• If your network connection is DHCP, skip the next two steps and select the DNS connection type.
The DHCP server on your network will automatically assign the IP Address and Subnet Mask, Gateway
Address and other parameters to the VoIP Port.
• If your network connection is Static, enter the following information from your LAN Administrator
• IP Address (default: 192.168.001.116)
• Network Mask (default: 255.255.255.0)
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 397
• Gateway Address (default: 000.000.000.000)
• If your network connection is PPPoE, enter the following information from your Service Provider:
• PPPoE User Name
• PPPoE Password
• PPPoE Service Name (if applicable)
• Select the type of DNS Connection Type: 'Static' or 'Automatic'.
Select 'Static' to assign DNS IP Address and DNS Domain Name manually. If the Network Connection
Type is selected as Static, the DNS connection type can be selected as Static only.
Select 'Auto' to get DNS IP address and DNS Domain Name from PPPoE Server/DHCP Server. You can
select DNS Connection Type as Auto only if you select Network connection type as PPPoE or DHCP.
• Enter the Router's Public IP Address. This address will be used in SIP messages if the parameter 'Source
Port IP Address' in the page 'Configuring SIP trunks' is configured as Router's Public IP Address.
• Enter the STUN Server Address and the Port Number.
STUN server facilitates traversing through most NATs, except symmetric NATs. If your router has
symmetric NAT, do not program this field.
• Click to enable the check box 'Use SIP Port fetched using STUN?' if you want to use the port number
fetched using STUN in the SIP message.
This parameter should be disabled if you are using Port-Forwarding in the Router for SIP messages.
• Enter SIP UDP Port. This is port on which the ETERNITY (VoIP Port) listens for SIP messages. The VoIP
Port also uses this port to send SIP messages to the remote peer. The default value of SIP UDP Port is
5060.
• Enter RTP Listen Port. This port defines the port on which ETERNITY (VoIP Port) listens for RTP packets.
The system also uses the port as source port for sending RTP packets to the remote peer.
• Click 'Submit' to save the configuration of the VoIP (WAN) Port. Now, repeat the same steps to configure
another VoIP (WAN) Port.
• If you have finished configuring all VoIP ports, click 'Next' to navigate to further.
SIP Trunks
• You will reach this page only if you have specified 'Number of SIP Trunks Used' on the 'System Pre-
requisites' page.
• SIP Trunks are to be configured only if you are using Internet Telephony Service Providers for VoIP
calls.
• The number of SIP Trunks supported by ETERNITY varies according to its model. ETERNITY ME
supports 32 SIP Trunks. ETERNITY GE supports 16 SIP Trunks and ETERNITY PE supports 4 SIP
Trunks.
398 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• You can configure all SIP Trunks on a single VoIP port, or if you have installed more than one VoIP
Card, you may program the IP Trunks on the VoIP ports in a distributed manner. For example, if you
have installed four VoIP Cards in ETERNITY ME, you can program either 8 SIP Trunks each on the 4
VoIP ports OR program 12 SIP Trunks on the VoIP Port of the first card, 8 on the VoIP Port of the
second card, 6 SIP Trunks each on the VoIP Ports of the third and fourth card.
• The Wizard however, allows you to configure only 4 SIP Trunks (even if you have specified more than 4
SIP Trunks being used on the 'System Pre-Requisites' page). To program the remaining IP Trunks, you
must use the Full Programming Access mode.
• ETERNITY supports Fax over IP (FoIP). The Wizard allows you to configure the Fax Type only. To
configure Fax Homing, you must enter the Full Programming Access mode.
• Assign a VoIP Software Port to this SIP trunk in the field 'VoIP S/w Port'.
• The Wizard will display the Hardware Slot and the Port number of the first VoIP Card detected in the field
'H/w Slot - Port Number'.
If multiple VoIP cards are installed in the system, you may change the Hardware Slot and Port number as
desired.
• You may change the label of the SIP Trunk (rename 'SIP Trunk 1'), if required. You may use the name of
the ITSP to make identification of the SIP Trunk easy.
Click the 'Pencil' icon. A prompt will pop up, asking you if you want to change the name of this SIP Trunk.
Enter the desired name in the blank field. Click 'OK'. The new name will appear instead of the SIP Trunk
number.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 399
• Enable SIP Trunk by selecting the check box.
• Enter the SIP ID provided by the ITSP. This is the ID which callers will use to call this SIP Trunk. The SIP
ID may be a number or text.
• Enter the Proxy/Registrar Server Address and the Registrar Server Port provided by the ITSP. The
Registrar Server Address can be an IP Address or domain. The Registrar Server Listening Port ranges
from 1024 to 65535. The default Registrar Server Port is 5060.
• Enter the Authentication ID (User ID) and Password provided by the ITSP.
• Enable 'Outbound Proxy' by selecting the checkbox, if the ITSP who provided this SIP Trunk has a SIP
outbound server to handle voice calls. By default 'Outbound Proxy' is disabled.
• If you have enabled 'Outbound Proxy', enter the Outbound Proxy Server Address and the Server Port
provided by the ITSP. This can be an IP Address or Domain name.
• Set the desired Vocoder Preference for this SIP Trunk. Vocoders are the various Voice Codecs used to
compress the data in RTP packets for optimum use of bandwidth and for ensuring voice quality. You can
set 7 Vocoders options in the order of preference for this SIP account.
• Select the DTMF Option. The DTMF option you select will determine how the DTMF digits will be sent over
the IP Network, when a DTMF digit is pressed. ETERNITY VoIP Card supports three DTMF options: RTP
(RFC 2833), SIP Info, and InBand. Select the appropriate option. By default RTP (RFC 2833) is selected.
• Select the appropriate Fax Type. The ETERNITY VoIP card supports T.38 (UDPTL), T.39 (RTP) and Pass-
Through.
• Select the Source Port IP Address.
• Select 'Use Ethernet Port IP Address' if the VoIP port (of the ETERNITY VoIP Card) is connected directly
to the public internet.
• Select 'Use IP Address Fetched Using STUN' if the VoIP port (of the ETERNITY VoIP Card) is located
behind a NAT router other than Symmetric.
If you select this option, keep the 'Outbound Proxy' disabled.
• Select 'Use Router's Public IP Address', if the VoIP port (of the ETERNITY VoIP Card) is located behind a
NAT Router (any type).
If you select this option, keep the 'Outbound Proxy' disabled.
• In 'No. of Simultaneous Calls', select the number of simultaneous calls you want to allow on this SIP Trunk.
The number of simultaneous SIP calls depends on the number of simultaneous calls allowed by the ITSP
with whom you have subscribed this SIP Trunk and the number of simultaneous calls supported by your
model of ETERNITY.
400 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The ETERNITY ME and GE support 32 simultaneous calls on a single VoIP card, while ETERNITY PE
supports 16 simultaneous calls on a single VoIP card. Ask the ITSP about the number of simultaneous SIP
calls supported on a SIP Trunk. Program this parameter only if the ITSP supports less than the number of
simultaneous calls supported by your model of ETERNITY.
• In 'Route Calls during Day to', select the landing destination for calls on SIP trunks during day time. You
may select any option: Operator extension, other extensions, built-in Auto Attendant or the Auto Attendant
of the Voice Mail System (if available).
• If you click the option ‘Built-In Auto Attendant’, the default Voice Modules 02 to 13 containing the default
Voice Messages (Morning, Afternoon and Evening Greetings, DID Greeting and Guidance Messages) will
be applied by the Wizard. Refer “Voice Message Applications” to know more.
• If you click the option 'Extensions' as the landing destination, select the extensions in the corresponding
field. Double click the field, the list box will open. Select the extensions from the left box.
A maximum of 32 extensions can be selected. If you exceed the number, the Wizard will prompt you to
make the selection again. You can delete the excess extensions from those you selected. You can also
change the order of the selected landing extensions in the right side box using drag and drop option.
The selected extension numbers will appear in the field, separated by comma.
• In the field 'Route Calls during Night to', select the landing destination for calls on SIP trunks during night
time. Follow the same instruction as in the previous step to select extensions as the landing destination.
• Click 'Submit' to save your settings in the SIP Trunk. Repeat these steps to configure another SIP Trunk.
• If you have finished configuring the SIP Trunks, click 'Next' to navigate further.
• If there is any SIP Trunk you have not configured, the Wizard will pop-up an alert informing you about the
trunk you have not programmed.
You may either program this trunk by clicking 'Yes', or ignore this alert by clicking 'No', and navigate
further.
For the SIP Trunks, the Wizard uses the following resources:
• Routing Groups 67-74.
• Trunk Feature Template 46-49.
• SIP Hardware Template 2-5.
Do not change the these resources when using Full Programming Access mode.
Emergency Numbers
• This page displays the default Emergency Numbers according to the 'Region' selected for the system.
In other words, it displays the Emergency Numbers specific to your country where the ETERNITY is
installed.
• The Emergency Numbers on this page are non-editable. All you need to do is to select the Outgoing
Trunk Bundle Group (OGTB) for each Emergency Number. For example, '112' is the default
Emergency Number for the mobile network. So, you may select the Mobile Trunk for dialing this
number.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 401
• Make sure that the trunks configured by default for each Emergency number route the Emergency call
to the correct network.
• For each default Emergency number, select the trunks to be used to route this call. Double click the
'Through' field. The box will open, displaying the trunk types present in the system in the left box.
All the Trunk types present in the system are arranged by their type, in the sequence of their software port,
irrespective of their hardware location.
• Double click the desired trunk type and click 'Select'. The selected trunk type will appear on the box on the
right.
If you select trunks of the same type in sequential order, like: TWT001, TWT002, TWT003, BRI01, BRI02
and MOB02, the same trunk type will be grouped in one OG Trunk Bundle; TWT001, TWT002, TWT003
will be OGTB #1, BRI01 and BRI02 will be grouped as OGTB#2, and MOB02 as OGTB#3.
If you select the trunks of the same type in a non-sequential order, for example: TWT001, MOB01, BRI01
and TWT002, four OGTBs will be formed with TWT001 as member of OGTB#1, MOB01 as member of
OGTB#2, BRI01 in OGTB#3 and TWT002 in OGTB#4. So, despite two same trunk types being selected
(TWT001 and TWT002) they are grouped in separate OGTBs.
It is possible to change the sequence of trunks on the right side box using the drag and drop action. You
can also delete a particular trunk from the right box.
A maximum of 8 OGTB are allowed. If you exceed the number, the Wizard will show an alert indicating that
the system is short of resources.
402 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Click 'OK'. All the trunks you selected for a particular Emergency Number (in the right-hand side box) will
appear on the 'Through' field, sequentially separated by comma in the order of selection made.
• Click 'Submit' to save the values entered on this page.
• Click 'Next' to navigate further.
• If you selected a Region other than the United States or Australia, you may get the message “No
Emergency numbers programmed”.
• You may program the Emergency Numbers of your country using “Full Programming Access” mode.
Disclaimer:
• Matrix Comsec will not be responsible for incorrect programming of Emergency Numbers.
Done
You have now reached the last screen of the Wizard. Click 'Done' to submit the configuration you have done using
the Wizard.
When you click 'Done', the Wizard will throw up alerts for incomplete or missing configuration information, for
example, if you have not assigned a User Profile to an extension, or if you have not assigned a TWT Trunk Profile
to a TWT Trunk, if you have configured a BRI or T1E1PRI Trunk.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 403
For each alert, you have the option to assign the default values offered by the Wizard or not to assign any value.
For example, if you have missed assigning a User Profile to an extension, the Wizard will ask you if you want to
assign the default User Profile#1 to that extension. You may click 'Yes' to assign the default profile, or you may click
'No' if you do not want to assign any User Profile to that extension. In which case, you may go to the 'Configuring
Extension' page of the Wizard by clicking the link on the left navigation bar and assign a user profile to the
extension.
After completing the validation of the configuration, the Wizard will inform you about successful configuration of the
system with the message: “Congratulations! System is configured as per your wish".
404 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Exiting the Wizard
Each page of the Wizard also has an 'Exit' button, which you may click to exit the Wizard.
However, the changes you made till the page you exited from will not be applied to the system configuration files.
• The Standard PBX Wizard has been designed keeping a very broad user base in mind and is limited to
the configuration of the parameters most commonly required by a broad user group. So, it does not
cover the configuration of all the features and facilities of the system.
• The Wizard does not cover the configuration of the following features and facilities. These are to be
configured from the Full Programming Access mode only.
• Global Directory
• Personal Directory
• Account Name List
• Automatic Number Translation
• Automated Control Applications
• Call Cost Calculation
• Call Duration Control
• CLI-based Routing
• Closed User Groups
• Communication Port
• Department Groups
• Digital Input Port
• Digital Output Port
• DISA CLI Authentication
• Digital Key Phone Key Template
• DND Text messages
• DST Parameters
• E&M Parameters
• E&M Feature Templates
• ISDN Terminal Parameters
• Keyboard Macros
• Logical Partition
• Master Ethernet Parameters
• Page Zones
• Peer-to-Peer table
• Ring parameters
• RTC parameters
• Security Alarm Parameters
• Station Message Detail Records
• System Activity Log
• System Fault Log
• System General Parameters
• System Timers and Counts
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 405
Using Full Programming Access
Full Programming Access allows configuration or all programmable parameters of the system.
You can enter Full Programming Access using Jeeves or an extension Telephone (DKP or SLT) of the ETERNITY.
You are recommended to use Jeeves. If you choose to use a telephone, you are recommended to use a DKP for
ease of operation.
To enter Full Programming Access mode using Jeeves by logging in as “System Engineer Login”, and clicking the
'Use Full Programming Access' link.
406 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Also, refer the topic “System Engineer Login” under “Using Jeeves”.
To enter Full Programming Access using a Telephone, enter into SE mode from a DKP/SLT by dialing 1#91
followed by the SE password (default: 1234).
For detailed instructions, refer the topic “Entering the SE mode using a Telephone”.
Avoid modifications or use of the following system resources, when configuring the system from the Full
Programming Access mode.
• Station Basic Feature Template number 2 to 10.
• Class of Service Groups 2 to 19.
• Outgoing Trunk Bundle Groups 2 to 27
• Outgoing Trunk Bundles 5 to 108.
The system uses these resources for the Quick Installation Wizard-Standard PBX. Changes made in them will not
be updated in the Wizard.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 407
Configuring System Pre-requisites
System resources (number of trunk and extension ports supported) vary by models and variants of ETERNITY. It is
quite common for users to utilize the system resources below its capacity, especially when they begin using a new
system.
To make the task of configuring for such users easier, ETERNITY allows you select the 'Model Type' you are using,
and specify the number of trunk and extension ports you want to configure. Accordingly all the relevant pages of
Jeeves will show only as many trunk and extension ports that you have specified, instead of showing all the ports
supported by ETERNITY.
To be able to do this, you must configure the 'System Pre-requisites' using Jeeves or a Telephone.
On-site Configuration
ETERNITY makes configuration even more focused by making it possible to configure only those trunk and
extension ports which are actually present in the system.
This can be done by enabling the 'On Site Configuration' flag.
When 'On Site Configuration' flag is enabled, ETERNITY will detect all the different trunk and extension port types
present in the system (at Power-ON). Accordingly, all the relevant pages of Jeeves will show only those ports
detected by the system for configuration.
The system will detect the presence of ports at each Power ON/Reset. Whenever a new card is found, the range of
ports is updated and displayed on Jeeves. You can then define the number of ports to be used.
By default, the On-site Configuration flag is disabled.
When the On Site Configuration' flag is enabled, the Quick Installation Wizard - Standard PBX will also
display only the ports and port types that are on-board. Enable this flag if you want the Wizard to display
only the port types present in the system.
It is recommended that you enable the 'On-Site Configuration?' flag when you are configuring the system
at the installation site.
Defining System Pre-requisites using Jeeves
• Log into Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
408 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Click the link 'System Pre-requisites' to open the page.
• Configure the following parameters:
• Model Type: Select the model of ETERNITY you are configuring from this list.
When you select the 'Model Type', Jeeves will display the different port types according to the system
capacity (the maximum number of ports) supported by the model and variant of ETERNITY you have
selected as the Model Type.
For example, if you selected ETERNITY GE6S as Model Type, the maximum number of TWT Ports will
be 96 and the maximum number of DKP extensions would be 96 ports. If you selected ETERNITY
PE6SP, the maximum number of TWT Ports will be 16, and the maximum number of DKP ports will be
48.
• Number of Ports Used: Define the number of ports to be used for each Port Type (TWT, DKP, SLT,
Mobile, T1E1 PRI, BRI, VoIP, SIP) in the respective boxes.
For example, if you want 8 TWT Trunks, 24 DKP extensions, and 128 SLT extensions to be used,
select the same numbers in the respective boxes.
If you want to use voice mail, or connect any device to the Digital Input Port or the Digital Output port,
select 'Yes'.
• On Site Configuration: If you want to enable 'On-site Configuration' flag, click the check box.
Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page. OR click away on any other part of your screen.
When you enable this flag, the fields for 'Number of Ports Used', will be populated with exactly the
number the system has detected.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 409
The fields for port types which are not available on-board the system are displayed as non-editable
fields.
For example, the system has detected ETERNITY ME SLT32 card at power-on, so the maximum
number of SLT ports in the will be 32. If you want only 20 SLTs to be used, select 20.
To cite another example, if your system is ETERNITY PE3SS, which does not support ISDN BRI or
PRI, the fields of these port types and ISDN Terminals on this page are displayed as non-editable.
Similarly, the field of the Door Phone ports will be editable only if the system has detected a Door
Phone card.
• If the system has detected BRI ports, the fields 'BRI Trunks used' and 'BRI ISDN Terminals used' will
be editable.
• By default, the number of BRI Trunks Used will be equal to the Number of BRI ports used.
• The number of ISDN terminals used will be zero. Only when the System Engineer changes the value of
the Number of BRI Trunks used will the number of ISDN Terminal get changed to the number of
available BRI ports x 8. In other words, the number of ISDN terminals will be: Number of BRI Ports
used minus the Number of BRI Trunks used multiplied by 8.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
410 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Configuring ‘Region’
The ETERNITY is a versatile system that can operate anywhere in the world, meeting the diverse customer
requirements worldwide.
To speed up the process of system configuration, ETERNITY is supplied with factory-set values for system and
feature settings, referred to as “Default Settings”. These factory-set values are loaded when the system is installed
and are sufficient for getting the system into operation. However, users may alter or customize the Default Settings
to match their exact requirement.
ETERNITY provides Default Settings to match country/region-specific requirements of users around the world. The
system is designed to work efficiently in any country with these default settings.
To load the country-specific Default Settings, users must select the Region for the country in which the system is
installed.
India is selected as the default Region. So, if you are installing ETERNITY in a country other than India, change the
Region.
Changing Region using Jeeves
• Log into Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access.
• Click the link 'Regional Settings'.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 411
• Click the link 'Region Selection' to open the page.
• In the Region list, select the country where the system is installed.
412 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
• To load the country-specific default settings, click the link 'Default the System'.
• You will get an alert that default values will be assigned and ask you if you want to continue.
• Click 'OK'.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 413
• You will get the prompt: "Enter reverse SE password". Enter the password and click 'OK'.
• The system will load the country-specific default settings.
• Wait for the system to restart.
• Enter Jeeves again, and continue your configuration tasks.
To know more, read the topic “Default Settings”.
Changing Region using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To select Region, dial:
• 5301-Region Code
Where,
Region Code is the code for the country in which ETERNITY is installed.
Refer the following table and select the appropriate Region Code.
Region Code Country Name
001 Afghanistan
002 Algeria
003 Antigua and Barbuda
004 Argentina
005 Australia (Perth)
006 Australia (Adelaide)
414 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Region Code Country Name
007 Australia (Brisbane, Canberra, Melbourne, Sydney)
008 Austria
009 Bahamas
010 Bahrain
011 Bangladesh
012 Belarus
013 Belgium
014 Bhutan
015 Bolivia
016 Bosnia and Herzegovina
017 Botswana
018 Brunei
019 Brazil (Fernando De Noronha)
020 Brazil (Brasilia, Rio de Janeiro, Sao Paulo)
021 Brazil (Manaus)
022 Brazil (Acre)
023 Bulgaria
024 Cambodia
025 Cameroon
026 Canada (St. John's)
027 Canada (Halifax)
028 Canada (Montreal, Ottawa, Toronto)
029 Canada (Winnipeg)
030 Canada (Calgary)
031 Canada (Vancouver)
032 Chile
033 China
034 Colombia
035 Costa Rica
036 Croatia
037 Cuba
038 Cyprus
039 Czech Republic
040 Denmark
041 Egypt
042 Fiji
043 Finland
044 France
045 Germany
046 Greece
047 Guyana
048 Hong Kong
049 Hungary
050 India
051 Indonesia
052 Iran
053 Iraq
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 415
Region Code Country Name
054 Ireland
055 Israel
056 Italy
057 Japan
058 Jordan
059 Kazakhstan
060 Kenya
061 Korea - North
062 Korea - South
063 Kuwait
064 Kyrgyzstan
065 Lebanon
066 Libya
067 Malaysia
068 Maldives
069 Mauritius
070 Mexico (Mexico City)
071 Mexico (Chihuahua)
072 Mexico (Tijuana)
073 Mongolia
074 Mozambique
075 Myanmar
076 Namibia
077 Nepal
078 Netherlands
079 New Zealand
080 Nigeria
081 Norway
082 Oman
083 Pakistan
084 Paraguay
085 Peru
086 Philippines
087 Poland
088 Portugal
089 Qatar
090 Romania
091 Russia (Moscow, St. Petersburg)
092 Russia (Novosibirsk)
093 Russia (Vladivostok)
094 Singapore
095 Slovakia
096 South Africa
097 Spain
098 Sri Lanka
099 Sudan
100 Sweden
416 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Region Code Country Name
101 Switzerland
102 Syria
103 Taiwan
104 Tajikistan
105 Thailand
106 Turkey
107 Uganda
108 Ukraine
109 United Arab Emirates
110 United Kingdom
111 United States (Atlanta, Augusta, Boston, Charlotte, Columbus, Detroit, Indiapolis,
Miami, NY, Philadelphia, Washington)
112 United States (Chicago, Dallas, Des Moines, Memphis, Minneapolis, New Orleans,
Oklahoma, Omaha, St. Louis)
113 United States (Albuquerque, Boise, Cheyenne, Denver, Salt Lake City)
114 United States (Las Vegas, Los Angeles, Phoenix, San Francisco, Seattle)
115 United States (Juneau)
116 United States (Hawaii)
117 Uzbekistan
118 Venezuela
119 Vietnam
120 Yemen
121 Yugoslavia
122 Zambia
123 Zimbabwe
By default, the region code is 050 (India).
For example, if ETERNITY is installed in the Philippines, dial 5301-075
To default the system:
• 5302-Reverse SE Password.
• Exit SE mode.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 417
Configuring Master Ethernet Port Parameters
The Master Ethernet Port of ETERNITY allows you to connect ETERNITY to a standalone PC or a LAN PC to
operate Jeeves, capturing Station Message Detail Records, generating System Activity Logs and Reports, and
running the Property Management Software (PMS) in hotels, and Call Accounting Software.
When you connect ETERNITY to a LAN switch, the IP Address of the Master Ethernet Port of ETERNITY must not
conflict with the IP Address assigned to any device on the LAN, and the Master Ethernet Port of ETERNITY must
be in the same Subnet as the LAN PC from which it is to be accessed.
The Master Ethernet Port can be connected to a LAN Switch/Hub/Broadband Router/Modem. Since Network
scenario may vary from site to site of the installation, you must accordingly configure the Network parameters of the
Master Ethernet Port. This can be done using Jeeves and by dialing SE commands from a telephone.
Configuring Master Ethernet Port using Jeeves
• Open the browser, Internet Explorer/Mozilla Firefox, on the standalone PC/LAN PC to which the Master
Ethernet Port of ETERNITY is connected.
• Enter the IP address of Master Ethernet Port of ETERNITY on the address bar or the browser.
You may enter the default IP Address of the Master Ethernet Port: 192.168.1.101
OR
If the IP has been changed, enter the current IP Address of the Master Ethernet Port.
• The 'Welcome' page will open, with links to the different Login modes.
• Click the link 'Login as System Engineer (SE)', enter the System Engineer password.
The default password is 1234. If the password has been changed, use the current password.
• Click the link ‘Use Full Programming Access’ to open the page.
• Click the link 'Master Ethernet Port Parameters’.
• Click ‘Parameter’ to open the page.
• Now, program the following parameters according to your requirement.
418 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Basic Configuration
Connection Type
Select the IP Addressing scheme of your network: Static, DHCP, PPPoE. By default, Static is selected as
Connection Type.
• Connection Type: Static
If your network uses Static IP addresses, configure the following parameters.
• IP Address: Enter the IP Address you obtained from your network Administrator for the Master
Ethernet Port of ETERNITY in this field. Make sure that the IP Address does not conflict with that of
any other device on the LAN.
• Subnet Mask: Enter the Subnet Mask you obtained from your network Administrator for the Master
Ethernet Port in this field. When connected on a LAN, ETERNITY should be in the same Subnet as
the LAN PC from which it is to be accessed.
• Default Gateway: Enter the Router’s LAN Interface IP Address as the Default Gateway IP
Address.Now assign these to the Master Ethernet Port.
• Connection Type: DHCP
If your network uses DHCP addressing, the DHCP server will dynamically assign an IP Address, the
Subnet Mask to the Gateway Address to the Master Ethernet Port whenever ETERNITY is restarted. You
have to configure the “Domain Name Server (DNS)” Address only, if not provided by your Internet Service
Provider.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 419
• Connection Type: PPPoE
If your network uses PPPoE addressing, the PPPoE server will automatically assign an IP Address,
Subnet Mask and Gateway Address to the Master Ethernet Port of ETERNITY. You need to program the
following parameters provided by your Internet Service Provider:
• PPPoE User ID: Enter the User Name provided by the Internet Service Provider. The User ID may be
a maximum of 16 characters.
• PPPoE Password: Enter the User Password provided by the Internet Service Provider. The password
may be a maximum of 16 characters.
• PPPoE Service Name: Enter the Service Name, if provided by your Internet Service Provider. The
Service Name may consist of a maximum of 16 characters. If Service Name is not provided, leave this
field blank.
• Domain Name Server: See below for instructions.
Domain Name Server (DNS)
Configure the DNS related parameters as provided by your Internet Service Provider. You may consult your LAN
administrator in this regard.
• DNS Address Assignment: If you selected DHCP or PPPoE as Connection Type and the DHCP/
PPPoE Server provides DNS Address, select ‘Auto’ as the DNS Address Assignment.
If you selected DHCP or PPPoE as Connection Type, but the DHCP/PPPoE server does not assign
DNS Address, then you must select ‘Static’ as DNS Address Assignment, and manually program the
Primary and Secondary DNS Server Address, as applicable.
If you selected Static as Connection Type, you can select only ‘Static’ as the DNS Address Assignment
and program the Primary and Secondary DNS Server Address, as applicable.
• Primary DNS Server: If you selected ‘Static’ as the DNS Address Assignment, enter the DNS Server
Address in this field. If your Internet Service Provider has provided you with a Primary and a Secondary
DNS Server Address, enter the Primary DNS Server in this field.
• Secondary DNS Server: If you selected ‘Static’ as the DNS Address Assignment, and your Internet
Service Provider has given you a Primary and a Secondary DNS Server, enter the Secondary DNS
Server address in this field. If your Service Provider has not given you any secondary DNS Server,
keep this field blank.
• If you have configured the above basic Ethernet Port parameters, click ‘Submit’ to save your settings.
Advanced Configuration
• To configure other advanced configuration parameters, click the ‘Advance’ button, and scroll with the
vertical bar to reach the desired parameter.
420 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• On this page you may configure the following advanced Master Ethernet Port parameters:
Web Server Port
• Define the Listening Port for the Web Server of Jeeves in this field. The valid port range is 80, 1024 to
65535. By default, 80 is assigned as Web Server Port for Jeeves.
Dynamic DNS (DynDNS.org)
• Dynamic DNS makes it easy for users to access and use the GUI Jeeves from the public IP network by
using a Host Name instead of the IP Address of the Master Ethernet Port.
ETERNITY supports Dynamic DNS client of the Service Provider DynDNS.org. If you wish to use
DynDNS.org, program the following parameters:
• Enable Dynamic DNS: Enable this flag if you are using the services of DynDNS.org. By default, this
flag is disabled.
• User ID: Enter the User ID you created on DynDNS.org here. The User ID may be 24-characters long.
• Password: Enter the password you created on the DynDNS.org here. A maximum of 40 characters,
including all ASCII characters are allowed.
• Host Name: Enter the Host Name you created on DynDNS.org here. The Host Name may consist of a
maximum of 40 characters, including all ASCII characters.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 421
• Retry Trials: This count defines the number of attempts that the Master Ethernet Port of ETERNITY
should make to send the Public IP Address Update Request to the Dynamic DNS Server. The Retry
Count may be set from 1 to 9. By default the count is set to 1.
• Update IP Address now?: When the Master Ethernet Port is registered with the Dynamic DNS server,
the server stores the mapping between the host name and the public IP address and updates this
whenever the Public IP address changes. However, it is possible to update the IP address at will, by
clicking this button.
• Router’s Public IP Address: This parameter is to be configured when Dynamic DNS is to be used in
the following scenario:
• the Master Ethernet Port of ETERNITY is connected behind a NAT Router.
• Static IP Addressing is used by the Internet Service Provider to assign Public IP to the Router.
If this is your installation scenario, enter the Router’s IP Address in this field. By default this field is
blank.
• Simple Traversal of UDP through NAT (STUN): This parameter is to be configured when Dynamic
DNS is to be used in the following scenario:
• the Master Ethernet Port of ETERNITY is connected behind a NAT Router.
• Dynamic IP Addressing (DHCP/PPPoE server) is used by the Service Provider to assign Public IP
Address to the Router.
The Master Ethernet Port will use STUN Query to know the current Public IP Address of the NAT
Router.
If this is your installation scenario, program the following STUN parameters:
• STUN Server Address: Enter the STUN Server Address; a maximum of 40 characters are allowed.
• STUN Server Port: Enter the Listening Port of the STUN Server. The valid range for this field is
from 1024-65535. The default STUN Port is 03478.
• STUN Query Interval (min): This parameter defines the interval between each STUN query for the
Public IP Address of the NAT Router. The range of this interval is from 0001 to 9999 minutes. By
default, it is set to 120 minutes.
• Click ‘Submit’ at the bottom of the page to save your settings.
• If you have finished programming the Ethernet Port Parameters, log out of Jeeves or continue
programming.
422 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Viewing Master Ethernet Port Status
• You can also view the Status of the Ethernet Port, by clicking ‘Status’ under ‘Network Parameters’.
Configuring Master Ethernet Port using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To select Connection Type, dial:
• 2116-Connection Type
Where,
Connection Type is
1 for Static
2 for DHCP
3 PPPoE
Default: Static
To program PPPoE User ID, dial:
• 2117 - PPPoE User ID
Where,
PPPoE User ID may consist of a maximum of 16 ASCII characters.
Default: Blank.
To program PPPoE Password, dial:
• 2123- PPPoE Password
Where,
PPPoE Password may consist of a maximum of 16 ASCII characters.
Default: Blank.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 423
To program PPPoE Service Name, dial:
• 2124-PPPoE Service Name
Where,
PPPoE Service Name may consist of a maximum of 16 ASCII characters.
Default: Blank.
To assign IP Address to Master Ethernet Port, dial:
• 2110-IP Address
Where,
IP Address is 15 digits maximum. 000 to 255 for the first 3 Octets and 001 to 254 for the 4th Octet. Use
zeros as fillers and dial the digits in a continuous sequence. Do not dial ‘.’ in the IP Address.
For example: to change the IP Address to 192.168.50.10 dial 2110-192168050010.
To assign Subnet Mask to the Master Ethernet Port, dial:
• 2111-Subnet Mask
For example: to change the Subnet Mask to 255.255.255.0 dial 2111-255255255000.
To program the Gateway IP Address, dial:
• 2112-Gateway IP Address
Where,
Gateway IP Address is the Router’s LAN Interface IP Address. Gateway IP Address may be a
maximum of 15 digits max. Follow the same instructions as assigning IP Address to the Master
Ethernet Port.
To select DNS Assignment Type, dial:
• 2115-DNS Address Assignment Type
Where,
DNS Address Assignment Type is
1 for Static
2 for Automatic
Default: Static
To program Primary DNS Server Address, dial:
• 2113-Primary DNS Server Address
Where,
Primary DNS Server Address is a maximum of 15 digits. Follow the same instructions as described for
dialing IP Address for the Master Ethernet Port.
To program Secondary DNS Server Address, dial:
• 2114-Secondary DNS Server Address
Where,
Secondary DNS Server Address is a maximum of 15 digits. Follow the same instructions as described
for dialing IP Address for the Master Ethernet Port.
To program Web server Port, dial:
• 2121-Port
Where,
Port range is: 80, 1024 to 65535.
Default: 80
To enable/disable Dynamic DNS, dial:
• 2125-Code
Where,
424 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Code is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Disable.
To program Dynamic DNS User ID, dial:
• 2126-DDNS User ID
Where,
DDNS User ID may be a maximum of 40 ASCII characters.
To program Dynamic DNS User Password, dial:
• 2127-DDNS User Password
Where,
DynDNS User Password may consist of a maximum of 24 characters.
To program Dynamic DNS Host Name, dial:
• 2128 - DDNS Host Name
Where,
Host Name may consist of a maximum of 40 ASCII characters.
To program Dynamic DNS - Retry Trial Count, dial:
• 2129 - DDNS Retry Count
Where,
Retry Trial Count is from 1 to 9.
Default: 1.
To Update Dynamic DNS IP Address binding (‘Update IP Address Now?’ flag), dial
• 2130
To program Router's Public IP Address, dial:
• 2132-IP Address
Default: Blank.
To program STUN Server Address, dial:
• 2133-STUN Server Address.
Where,
STUN Server Address may be a maximum of 40 ASCII Characters.
Default: Blank.
To program STUN Server Port, dial:
• 2134- Port
Where,
STUN Server Port range is from 1024 to 65535.
Default: 3478.
To set STUN Query Interval, dial:
• 2135 - Interval
Where,
Interval is from 0001 to 9999 minutes.
Default: 120 min.
• Exit SE mode.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 425
Viewing Master Ethernet Port Status from a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP (only).
To view IP Address of the Master Ethernet Port, dial:
• 2150
To view Subnet Mask of the Master Ethernet Port, dial:
• 2151
To view Gateway Address of the Master Ethernet Port, dial:
• 2152
To view current STUN query status, dial:
• 2159
To view Router’s Public IP Address fetched by STUN, dial:
• 2160
To view Dynamic DNS Status, dial:
• 2161
To view Ethernet link Status, dial:
• 2162
• Exit SE mode.
426 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Configuring Extensions
The ETERNITY supports the following types of extension ports:
• SLT Extension Ports: Single Line Telephones (SLT) is connected to these ports. ETERNITY supports up
to 51271 SLT extensions. The number of SLT ports available to you depends on the model and variant of
ETERNITY, and number and configuration of the SLT Cards installed in the system.
• DKP Extension Ports: The proprietary Digital Key Phone of Matrix is connected to these ports.
ETERNITY supports up to 12872 DKP extensions. The number of DKP ports available to you depends on
the model and variant of ETERNITY, and number and configuration of the DKP Cards installed in the
system.
• ISDN Terminals: These are ISDN phones connected to the BRI Ports of the ETERNITY. ISDN Terminals
can be connected only in a Point-to-Multipoint BRI configuration (Short or Extended Passive Bus
Configuration). Refer the topic Installing BRI Card under Installation instructions for your model of
ETERNITY to know more.
A maximum of 8 ISDN Terminals (phones) can be connected on a single BRI Bus line in a Point-to-
Multipoint configuration. In a Short Passive Bus Configuration, you can connect up to 8 ISDN Terminals
while in the Extended Passive Bus Configuration you can connect up to 3 ISDN Terminals.
Depending on the number of BRI ports available to you and the type of Point-to-Multipoint Configuration
(Short or Extended Passive Bus), a maximum of 64 ISDN Terminals can be connected to the ETERNITY.
• SIP Extensions: Any SIP-enabled device like an IP-phone, a Softphone, a Wi-Fi mobile handset, or a
PDA can be registered with the VoIP Card of ETERNITY and function as the 'SIP Extension' of the
ETERNITY.
SIP Extensions function like any normal DKP/SLT extension of the ETERNITY, allowing you to make and
receive calls to any extension user of the ETERNITY as well as any external numbers over PSTN, GSM,
VoIP and E&M lines, depending on the “Logical Partition” configured in the System.
ETERNITY ME supports 999 SIP Extensions. ETERNITY GE supports 500 SIP extensions and
ETERNITY PE supports 50 SIP Extensions. SIP Extensions are a licensed feature. To know more, refer
the topic “License Management”.
• Magneto Ports: Magneto telephones are connected to these ports and function as extensions of the
ETERNITY ME. A maximum of 128 Magneto Ports are supported.
• E&M Ports functioning as Stations: An E&M port of ETERNITY can be programmed to take on the
function of a Subscriber (Station), to work like a station interface, receiving incoming calls.
Presuming that you have connected the extensions successfully, you may now configure the extensions
using Jeeves or a Telephone.
71. The maximum number of SLT ports supported in ETERNITY ME may vary according to the type of Power Supply (whether PSUNI
or DC) being used. See Technical Specifications provided in the Appendix.
72. The maximum number of DKP ports supported in ETERNITY ME may vary according to the type of Power Supply (whether PSUNI
or DC) being used. See Technical Specifications provided in the Appendix.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 427
Templates for Configuring Extensions
To make the task of configuring of extensions easy, the ETERNITY offers Templates, namely:
• SLT Hardware Template - for SLT extensions.
• Station Basic Feature Template - for DKP, SLT, and SIP Extensions, ISDN Terminals, and E&M Ports
functioning as stations, and Magneto ports.
• Station Advanced Feature Template - for DKP, SLT, and SIP Extensions, ISDN Terminals, and E&M Ports
functioning as stations, and Magneto ports.
• SIP Hardware Template - for SIP Extensions (and SIP Trunks) only.
You can use these templates to program extensions which are to be assigned the same set of features at one go,
saving you the effort for painstaking configuration of each extension.
The features in these templates are loaded with default values that fulfill the requirements of a very broad user
base. The Templates may be customized as per user requirements and applied to the extensions.
Before you start the configuration of the extensions, please read the description of the templates and how to
customize the templates according to user requirements.
SLT Hardware Template
An SLT Hardware Template is a set of features that define the behavior of the SLT hardware port, and needless to
say, it is assigned to SLT Ports only.
The SLT Hardware Template allows you to configure according to user requirements, a common set parameters
(features) like Caller ID Presentation (DTMF, FSK), Digit Pad Count, Ring Type, AC Impedance, Answer Signaling
type, etc. to be assigned to all SLT Hardware Ports.
Each of these hardware parameters, along with its default value, is briefly described below.
SLT Hardware Template Parameters
1. CLIP Type: The ETERNITY provides a facility to detect the calling number and present it to the SLT. This
is known as Calling Line Identification and Presentation (CLIP). For this feature to work, the telephone
instrument connected to the SLT port must support CLIP.
The Eternity supports 3 signaling protocols for CLI on the SLT port: DTMF, FSK-V.23, and FSK-BellCore.
Select the appropriate signaling protocol.
If you want to disable CLI on the SLT port, select 'None'.
By default, DTMF protocol is set as CLIP Type.
2. Digit Pad Count: Certain SLT instruments that support CLI require a minimum number of digits in the
calling party's number to be able identify and display it. The Digit Pad Count signifies the number of zeroes
to be added with the Calling party's number before displaying it on the called party's instrument. This count
entirely depends on the instrument connected to it.
3. Ring Type: The SLIC used with SLT port allows you to change the Ring type: Sinusoidal, Trapezoidal, Low
Sinusoidal, Low Trapezoidal. This is helpful in cases when telephone instruments, which expect sinusoidal
428 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
type of ringing current, are connected to the SLT port. By default the Ring Type for all SLT ports is
Trapezoidal.
4. Tx Gain: The SLIC used with each SLT port provides a facility to adjust the Transmit (Tx) Gain. This
enables the SLT user to increase the volume of the outgoing speech on the SLT, if required.
5. Rx Gain: The SLIC used with each SLT port provides a facility to adjust the Receive (Rx) Gain. This
enables the SLT user to increase the volume of the incoming speech on the SLT, if required.
6. AC Impedance: The SLIC used with each SLT port provides a facility to adjust the AC impedance of the
SLT port with the communication equipment connected to it.
Generally, most telephone instruments that are connected have nominal characteristics with AC
impedance of 600. However, the ETERNITY allows you to connect instruments with AC impedance other
than 600.
7. Flash Timer (msec): In Pulse Dialing, codes are dialed in pulses. A Flash key is generally used to dial this
code. Flash is breaking the loop current for 83ms to 900ms. Flash Timer defines the time period which
should be considered as Flash, if the loop current breaks.
The range of the Flash Timer is from 83 to 999 seconds. By default, the Flash Timer is set to 600 msec.
Program the Flash Timer as per user requirement.
8. Answer Signaling: An 'Answer Signal' is a signal generated on the SLT port to indicate that the called
party (remote party) has answered the call and the call is now mature.
Answer Signaling on the SLT port is particularly useful when there is a PCO machine or any Billing
equipment connected to the SLT port. With Answer Signaling enabled on an SLT port, during an outgoing
call is made from that SLT port to any other port - TWT/Mobile/SIP/T1E1/BRI - when the called party
(remote party) answers, the Public Network provides an Answer Signal to the trunk port to indicate call
maturity.
This information can be passed on to the PCO machine billing equipment in the form of Answer Signaling.
On detecting Answer Signaling the PCO machine billing equipment can start billing.
Answer Signaling is generated in the form of Polarity Reversal or Battery Reversal, whereby the Battery
polarity of the SLT port gets reversed. For example, if the battery polarity of the SLT port is +ve for TIP and
-ve for RING in speech condition, then on call maturity, TIP becomes -ve and Ring becomes +ve.
To generate Answer Signaling on the SLT Port, select 'Polarity Reversal'. Select 'None' if Answer Signaling
is not be generated on the SLT port.
By default 'None' is selected.
9. Disconnect Signaling: A 'Disconnect Signal' is the signal generated on the SLT port to indicate that the
called party (remote party has disconnected the call.
Disconnect Signaling on the SLT port is useful when there is a PCO machine or any Billing equipment
connected to the SLT port. With Disconnect Signaling enabled on an SLT port, during an outgoing call is
made from that SLT port to any other port - TWT/Mobile/SIP/T1E1/BRI - when the called party (remote
party) disconnects (goes ON Hook), the Public Network provides a Disconnect Signal to trunk port indicate
call disconnection. This signal can be generated on the on the SLT port to indicate to the PCO machine/
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 429
Billing equipment connected to this port to consider the call as disconnected and stop billing. Thus,
Disconnect Signaling on the SLT port helps prevent excessive billing.
ETERNITY supports two types of Disconnect Signals on the SLT Port:
• Polarity Reversal: Call Disconnection is signaled in the form of Polarity Reversal. The Battery polarity
of the SLT port will be reversed. For example, if the battery polarity of the SLT port is '+ve' for TIP and '-
ve' for RING in speech condition then on disconnection on other port, TIP will become '-ve' and Ring
'+ve'. When call is disconnected, user will get Error tone.
• Open Loop: Call Disconnection is signaled in the form of Open Loop Disconnect Pulse, whereby the
Battery voltage on the SLT port is removed for the duration of the Open Loop Disconnect Timer
programmed for that SLT port and will be restored on the expiry of this Timer. However, the Polarity of
Battery Voltage on the SLT port is not changed. When call is disconnected, the SLT extension user gets
an Error tone.
To generate Disconnect Signaling on the SLT Port, select 'Polarity Reversal' or 'Open Loop' as
appropriate. Select 'None' if Disconnect Signaling is not be generated on the SLT port.
By default 'None' is selected.
10. Open Loop Disconnect Timer (msec): This parameter is applicable only if the option Open Loop
Disconnect is selected as Disconnect Signaling type on the SLT port.
Open Loop Disconnect Timer is the time period for which the system will remove Battery Voltage on the
SLT port and restore Battery Voltage on the expiry of the Timer to signal Call Disconnection.
The range of this timer is from 001 to 999 milliseconds. By default, the Timer is set to 500 msec.
11. Loop Current (mA): The SLT Port provides Loop Current to the telephone instrument connected to the
SLT port to drive the telephone instrument.
The Loop Current is to be increased/decreased according to the length of the telephony wiring cable
between the wall jack (into which the SLT telephone instrument is plugged) and the MDF (into which the
cables from the SLT port are terminated).
The longer the Loop Length of the SLT port, the greater the likelihood of current dissipation, affecting
speech quality of the telephone instrument connected to the SLT port.
The system supports Loop Current of 25, 30, 35 and 40 mA. By default the Loop Current for SLT ports is
set to 25mA and the SLT port, which is sufficient to support Loop Length of 1 kilometer.
You may change the Loop Current according to the Loop Length of the SLT.
12. Minimum Current for OFF-Hook Detection: ETERNITY detects OFF-Hook state of an SLT instrument
and gives dial tone on the basis of the current drawn by it from the SLT port. However, all types and brands
of SLT instruments may not uniformly draw the same minimum current; some may draw lesser and some
may draw more, making OFF-Hook detection difficult for ETERNITY. To resolve this, ETERNITY provides
for programmable values for threshold current for OFF-Hook detection: 10mA, 12mA, 14mA, 16mA and
18mA.
By default, the value of the Minimum Current for OFF-Hook detection is set to 12 mA. Change this value
according to the current drawn by your SLT instrument.
430 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
When an SLT instrument draws current equal to or greater than the programmed threshold value of current
for off-hook detection, ETERNITY will consider the SLT instrument as OFF-Hook and will offer dial tone to
the SLT.
13. ON-Hook Detection Current (mA): ETERNITY detects ON-Hook state of an SLT instrument to route calls
on the basis of the current drawn by it from the SLT port. However, as all types and brands of SLT
instruments may not uniformly draw the same current, ON-Hook detection becomes difficult for the system.
To resolve this, ETERNITY provides for programmable values for threshold current for ON-Hook
Detection: 10mA, 12mA, 14mA, 16mA and 18mA.
By default, the value of the ON-Hook Detection Current is set to 10 mA.
When an SLT instrument draws current equal to or lower than the programmed threshold value of current
for ON-Hook detection, ETERNITY will consider the SLT instrument as ON-Hook.
SLT instruments also vary in the level of current drawn during the normal 'idle' state and when Flash is
dialed73 (the simulated idle state). So, when the Flash key of an SLT instrument is pressed, and if the
instrument draws a higher current than the threshold defined for the 'idle' state, the system will not be able
to detect Flash (ON-Hook state).
Consider this when changing the value of ON-Hook Detection Current. Define the value considering the
current drawn by your SLT instrument in idle state, as well as when Flash key is pressed.
14. Rx Gain at SIP Trunk/SIP Extensions (dB): This parameter allows you to increase the incoming speech
volume level of calls from SIP trunks/SIP Extensions to SLT stations. By default, Rx Gain is set to 0dB.
15. Tx Gain at SIP Trunk/SIP Extensions (dB): This parameter allows you to increase the outgoing speech
volume level of calls from SIP trunks/SIP Extensions to SLT stations. By default, Tx Gain is set to 6dB.
• You can also set the Rx and Tx Gains for SIP to Digital Trunks and Stations and SIP to TWT Trunks.
• To increase Rx and Tx Gain for SIP to TWT trunks, go to 'TWT Hardware Template’.
• To increase Rx and Tx Gain for Digital Trunks/Stations, go to 'SIP Trunk Parameters’.
Customizing SLT Hardware Templates
There are 50 SLT Hardware Templates that can be customized and assigned to the SLT ports. These templates
contain the default values of the above-listed parameters.
The default parameter values of the SLT Hardware Templates are country specific and are loaded in each template
according to the Country selected as the “Region”.
For example, when India is selected as the Region, the default value of the CLIP Type in the SLT Hardware
Templates is DTMF, whereas it is FSK-Bellcore when the Region is selected as US or Canada and FSK-V.23 when
UK is selected as Region. Similarly, the default values of AC Impedance on the SLT Hardware Templates will vary
according to the Region selected; 600 ohms for Region India, 900 for Region the Philippines, and 350 +(1000
|| 0.21µF) for Region UK.
By default SLT Hardware Template Number 01 is assigned to all the SLT ports. This template has default values
fulfilling the common requirements of a very broad user base.
73. Dialing 'Flash' either with the 'Flash Key' or by pressing the Hook-switch causes the phone to go in ON-Hook state briefly for 600-
800 milliseconds. Thus ON-Hook state is simulated briefly. The SLT may draw a higher current when 'Flash' is dialed.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 431
If the default SLT Hardware Template 01 fulfills the user and country requirements, retain Template 01.
If you want to change the values of certain SLT Hardware Parameters, but apply the same parameter values to all
SLT ports, simply customize the desired parameters in Template 01.
However, if different hardware parameters are to be applied to different SLTs, then you can customize different the
SLT Hardware Templates using Jeeves or a Telephone.
Customizing SLT Hardware Template using Jeeves
• Log into Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access.
• Click the link 'SLT Configuration'.
• Click the 'SLT Hardware Template' under SLT Configuration to open the page.
• Select a Template number you wish to customize, for example Template 02.
432 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Change the values of the SLT Hardware Template parameters as desired.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your changes.
• Now, apply this SLT Hardware Template 02 on the SLT ports. To do this,
• Click the link 'SLT Parameters' to open the page.
• Go to the SLT software ports to which this Template is to be assigned, for example SLT-001, 002, and 003.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 433
• Enter the number of the Template you customized, 02, in the field 'SLT Hardware Template' of each of
these SLT ports.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your setting.
• Repeat the same steps to customize another template.
Customizing SLT Hardware Template using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To change the default values of a SLT Hardware Parameter in a Template, dial:
• 5702-1-Template Number-Parameter Number-Code to program the value of a parameter in a single
template.
• 5702-2-Template Number-Template Number-Parameter Number-Code to program the same value
for the parameter in a range of templates.
• 5702-*-Parameter Number-Code to program the same value for the parameter in all templates.
Where,
Template Number is the number of the SLT Hardware Template from 01 to 50.
Parameter Number is the number of the SLT Hardware Template Parameter from 01 to 15.
Code is the value for each parameter from 0 to 63.
Refer the table below for parameter numbers and meaning of codes.
For example, to change the CLIP Type in Template 02 from default the DTMF to FSK-Bell, dial 5702-1-
02-01-3
Where,
02 is the template number
01 is the parameter number for CLIP Type
3 is the code for FSK-Bell
434 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Default values of SLT Hardware Templates
• 'Cmplx' is 'Complex Impedance' which consists of resistive and reactive impedance for the 'AC
Impedance' parameter.
• The default values of the SLT Hardware Templates are for the default Region India. The default values
will differ according to the Region you have selected for the system.
To default SLT Hardware Template, dial:
• 5701-1-Template Number to default a single template.
• 5701-2-Template Number-Template Number to default a range of templates.
• 5701-* to default all templates.
When the SE command to set the AC impedance for the SLT is issued, the settings will be effective when
the SLT extension (for which AC Impedance is programmed) goes ON-Hook. ETERNITY will restart, if the
SLT is OFF-Hook.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 435
To apply the Customized SLT Hardware Template to SLT port, dial:
• 5703-1-SLT-Template Number to assign a hardware template to a single SLT port.
• 5703-2-SLT-SLT-Template Number to assign a hardware template to a range of SLT ports.
• 5703-*-Template Number to assign a hardware template to all SLT ports.
Where,
SLT is the Software Port number of the SLT port from 001 to 512.
Template Number is the number of the customized SLT Hardware Template, from 01 to 50. Default: 01.
For example, to assign Template 02 to SLT ports 003 to 010, dial 5703-2-003-010-02
• Exit SE mode.
Station Basic Feature Template
The Station Basic Feature Template is a set of general features that completely define the basic behavior of a
station. Instead of programming each extension individually, the Station Basic Feature makes it possible to group
together extensions that are to be assigned the same set of features, prepare a Station Basic Feature Template
with the common set of features and apply it on these extensions.
The ETERNITY offers 50 such Station Basic Feature Templates. A Station Basic Feature Template is assigned to
all the types of stations, namely SLT, DKP, ISDN Terminals, E&M (Orientation = Station), T1E1PRI (NT mode) and
BRI (NT mode).
These templates have commonly used values, but can be customized per the requirement and applied on the
extensions.
Station Basic Feature Template Parameters
The Station Basic Feature Template contains the following features:
• Time Table: A Time Table is a schedule of the three Time Zones, namely: Working Hours, Break Hours,
Non-Working hours for a week.
Certain features of the ETERNITY like Operator, Class of Service, Toll Control, Outgoing Trunk Access,
among others, require the station to behave differently in each Time Zone74.
So, a Time Table is assigned to stations defining the Time Zones for the entire week, so that the system
can execute the Time Zone-dependent features and facilities according to the Time Table.
There are 8 different Time Table templates to select from. By default, the Time Table 1 is assigned to all
Station Basic Feature Templates. All seven days of the week are 'working hours 9:00 to 18:00' with break
hours from '13:00 to14:00'.
You may also customize the default Time Table 1 OR customize and assign a different Time Table to the
Station Basic Feature Template. Please refer the topic “Time Tables” for more details.
• Operator: Define the Operator for the stations on which the template is applied.
The system supports multiple Operators. In each Time Zone one of the four Operators can be
programmed.
74. For example, incoming calls are to be routed to the security personnel extension, instead of the Operator when the office is closed
(non-working hours), or certain features in the Class of Service are to be allowed only during working hours, or access to outgoing
long distance calls are to be denied during non-working hours, or the station must play a different greeting message to the callers
during break hours and holidays (non-working hours).
436 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Operator can be a single station or a group of stations, so that call management is more efficient. For
instance certain stations may be assigned Operator 1, certain others Operator 2 and the rest may be
assigned Operator 3.
Operator 1 is the default in the Station Basic Feature Template. If you want to assign different stations to
different Operators, you must program a separate Station Basic Feature Template with a different Operator
for each station group.
Refer the topic “Configuring 'Operator'” to know more.
• Class of Service: Class of Service (COS) defines the set features of the PBX that the extension is to be
allowed access to.
Not all extensions may require the same set of features. Some extensions may require voicemail, while
another group of extensions may need the ability to forward calls to a cell phone, and still others may have
no need to make calls outside the office.
Similarly, certain features may be required during working hours, but not during break or non-working
hours.
It is possible to assign a different Class of Service to different extensions according to their feature
requirements as well as according to the Time Zones.
By default COS group 01 is assigned to the Station Basic Feature Templates for all Time Zones. If you
want to assign a different COS for each Time Zone, you must customize the COS group first and then
assign the number of the COS group in the Template.
Refer the topic “Class of Service (COS)” to know more and for instructions on how to enable or disable a
feature in a COS group.
• Call Budget: This flag is for enabling the Call Budget feature. The Call Budget feature will allot a 'budget'
limit for outgoing calls made by stations on which the template is applied. Refer “Call Budget” for more
details.
• Toll Control Level 0: This Toll Control Level allows you to define the Call Privilege (calling permission) to
be allowed to stations according to the time of the day, during working hours (WH), break hours (BH) and
non-working hours (NH).
For each Time Zone, you may define the calling permission to be allowed to stations by selecting the Type
of Call Privilege.
• Call Privilege: Define the type of calling permission to be allowed to the station during the Working
Hours. The call privilege options are: No Calls, Regional Calls, National Calls International Calls,
Limited Calls.
• Allowed List: If you select 'Limited Calls' as the Call Privilege type, you must define the list of numbers
to be allowed during Working Hours.
• Denied List: If you select 'Limited Calls' as the Call Privilege type, you define the list of numbers to be
denied during the Working Hours.
• Toll Control Level 0 (BH): This Toll Control Level allows you to define the Call Privilege (calling
permission) allowed to a station during Break Hours.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 437
• Call Privilege: Define the type of calling permission to be allowed to the station during the Break
Hours. The call privilege options are: No Calls, Regional Calls, National Calls International Calls,
Limited Calls.
• Allowed List: If you select 'Limited Calls' as the Call Privilege type, you must define the list of numbers
to be allowed during Break Hours.
• Denied List: If you select 'Limited Calls' as the Call Privilege type, you must define the list of numbers
to be denied during the Break Hours.
• Toll Control Level 0 (NH): This Toll Control Level allows you to define the Call Privilege (calling
permission) allowed to a station during Non-Working Hours.
• Call Privilege: Define the type of calling permission to be allowed to the station during the Non-
Working Hours. The call privilege options are: No Calls, Regional Calls, National Calls International
Calls, Limited Calls.
• Allowed List: If you select 'Limited Calls' as the Call Privilege type, you must define the list of numbers
to be allowed during Non-Working Hours.
• Denied List: If you select 'Limited Calls' as the Call Privilege type, you must define the list of numbers
to be denied during the Non-Working Hours.
• Toll Control Level 1: This Toll Control Level allows you to define the Call Privilege (calling permission) to
be allowed a station, regardless of Time Zone. By default Toll Control Level 1 is set to Local Calls.
• Toll Control Level 2: This Toll Control Level allows you to define the Call Privilege (calling permission) to
be allowed a station, regardless of Time Zone. By default Toll Control Level 2 is set to National Calls.
• Toll Control Level 3: This Toll Control Level allows you to define the Call Privilege (calling permission) to
be allowed a station, regardless of Time Zone. By default Toll Control Level 3 is set to No Calls.
• Toll Control - Call Budget Consumed: This Toll Control Level allows you to define the Call Privilege
(calling permission) to be allowed a station, when the Call Budget allotted to the station is consumed. By
default the Toll Control is set to No Calls.
• OG-Trunk Bundle Group (WH): This is the Outgoing Trunk Bundle Group to be allotted to the station for
Working Hours. The station will be allowed to make outgoing calls through the trunks in this group.
• OG-Trunk Bundle Group (BH): This is the Outgoing Trunk Bundle Group to be allotted to the station for
Break Hours.
• OG-Trunk Bundle Group (NH): This is the Outgoing Trunk Bundle Group to be allotted to the station for
Non-Working Hours.
Refer the topic “OG Trunk Bundle Group” for more details.
• Store Outgoing Calls: This flag is used to enable or disable the storage of call details - Station Message
Detail Records - of Outgoing Calls landing on the stations on which the template is applied. Refer the topic
“Station Message Detail Recording-Storage” for more details.
438 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Store Incoming Calls: This flag is used to enable or disable the storage of call details - Station Message
Detail Records - of Incoming Calls landing on the stations on which the template is applied. Refer the topic
“Station Message Detail Recording-Storage” for more details.
Customizing Station Basic Feature Template using Jeeves
• Log into Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access.
• Click the link 'Station Basic Feature Template' to open the page.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 439
• Select a Template number you wish to customize, for example Template 10.
• Change the values of the Station Basic Feature Template parameters as desired.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your changes.
• Now, apply this Template 10 on the SLT/DKP/ISDN Terminals/SIP Extensions.
To apply the customized template on SLT ports,
• Click 'SLT Configuration'.
• Click the link 'SLT Parameters' under SLT Configuration to open the page.
• Go to the SLT software ports to which this Template is to be assigned, for example SLT-003 and 004.
440 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Enter the number of the Template you customized, 10, in the field 'Station Basic Feature Template' of each
of these SLT ports.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your setting.
To apply the customized template on DKP ports,
• Click 'DKP Configuration'.
• Click the link 'DKP Parameters' under DKP Configuration to open the page.
• Go to the DKP software ports to which this Template is to be assigned, for example DKP-005 to 008.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 441
• Enter the number of the Template you customized, 10, in the field 'Station Basic Feature Template' of each
of these DKP software ports.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your setting.
To apply the customized template on ISDN Terminal ports,
• Click the link 'ISDN Terminal Parameters' to open the page.
• Go to the ISDN Terminal software ports to which this Template is to be assigned, for example ISDN-01.
442 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Enter the number of the Template you customized, 10, in the field 'Station Basic Feature Template' of each
of the ISDN Terminal software port.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your setting.
To apply the customized template on SIP Extensions,
• Click the link 'SIP Extension Settings' under VoIP Configuration.
• Go to the SIP Extensions to which this Template is to be assigned, and enter the Template number.
• Click ‘Submit’ to save your setting.
• Repeat the same steps to customize another template and apply it on the extension ports.
Customizing Station Basic Feature Template using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To program a feature in a Station Basic Feature Template, dial:
• 5502-1-Template Number-Feature Number-Code to program the value of a feature in a single
template.
• 5502-2-Template Number-Template Number-Feature Number-Code to program the same value for
a feature in a range of templates.
• 5502-*-Feature Number-Code to program the same value for a feature in all templates.
Where,
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 443
Template Number is the number of the Station Basic Feature Template, from 01 to 50.
Feature Number is the number of the Feature in the Template, from 01 to 39.
Code is the parameter value of the Feature.
For example, you want to customize Template number 10, by enabling Call Budget feature and select
'Local Calls' as the Toll Control when Call Budget Consumed.
Dial 5502-1-10-06-1 to enable Call Budget feature (number 06) on Template 10.
Dial 5502-1-10-19-1 to select Local Calls (1) as Toll Control when Call Budget Consumed (19) in
Template 10.
Refer the following Table for the Feature Number and Codes for the Station Basic Feature Templates.
To default a Station Basic Feature Template, dial:
• 5501-1-Template Number to default the values of a single template.
• 5501-2-Template Number-Template Number to default the values of a range of templates.
• 5501-* to default the values of all templates
To assign a Station Basic Feature Template to SLT, dial:
• 5503-1-SLT-Template Number to assign the template to a single SLT port.
• 5503-2-SLT-SLT-Template Number to assign the same template number to a range of SLT ports.
• 5503-*-Template Number to assign the same template number to all SLT ports.
Where,
444 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
SLT is the number of the Software port of the SLT, from 001 to 512.
Template Number is the number of the Station Basic Feature Template, from 01 to 50.
Default: Template 01 is assigned to all SLT ports.
For example, to assign Station Basic Feature Template number 10 to the SLT software ports 004 to
010, dial 5503-2-004-010-10.
To assign a Station Basic Feature Template to a DKP, dial:
• 5504-1-DKP-Template Number to assign a template to a single DKP.
• 5504-2-DKP-DKP-Template Number to assign the same template to a range of DKPs.
• 5504-*-Template Number to assign the same template to all DKPs.
Where,
DKP is the number of the Software port of the DKP, from 001 to 128.
Template Number is the number of the Station Basic Feature Template, from 01 to 50.
Default: Template 01 is assigned to all DKP ports.
For example, to assign Station Basic Feature Template 10 to DKP software ports DKP-005 to 010, dial
5504-2-005-010-10
To assign a Station Basic Feature Template to an ISDN Terminal port, dial:
• 5507-1-ISDN-Template Number to assign a template to a single ISDN Terminal port.
• 5507-2-ISDN-ISDN-Template Number to assign the same template to a range of ISDN terminal ports.
• 5507-*-Template Number to assign the same template to all ISDN terminal ports.
Where,
ISDN Terminal is the number of the ISDN Terminal Software port, from 01 to 64.
Template Number is the number of the Station Basic Feature Template, from 01 to 50.
Default: Template 01 is assigned to all ISDN Terminals.
For example, to assign Station Basic Feature Template number 10 to the ISDN Terminal Software
ports 01 to 04, dial 5507-2-01-04-10
To assign a Template to an E&M (Station) port, dial:
• 5505-1-E&M-Template Number to assign a template to a single E&M port.
• 5505-2-E&M-E&M-Template Number to assign the same template to a range of E&M ports.
• 5505-*-Template Number to assign the same template to all E&M ports.
Where,
E&M is the number of the E&M Software port, from 001 to 128.
Template Number is the number of the Station Basic Feature Template, from 01 to 50.
Default: Template 01 is assigned to all E&M (Station) ports
To assign a Station Basic Feature Template to a T1E1PRI port, dial:
• 5506-1-T1E1PRI-Template Number to assign a template to a single T1E1 port.
• 5506-2-T1E1PRI-T1E1PRI-Template Number to assign the same template to a range of T1E1 ports.
• 5506-*-Template Number to assign the same template to all T1E1 ports.
Where,
T1E1PRI is the number of the T1E1PRI Software port, from 1 to 8.
Template Number is the number of the Station Basic Feature Template, from 01 to 50.
Default: Template 01 is assigned to all T1E1 ports.
To assign a Station Basic Feature Template to a BRI port, dial:
• 5509-1-BRI-Template Number to assign a template to a single BRI port.
• 5509-2-BRI-BRI-Template Number to assign the same template to a range of BRI ports.
• 5509-*-Template Number to assign the same template to all BRI ports
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 445
Where,
BRI is the number of the BRI Software port, from 01 to 32.
Template is the number of the Station Basic Feature Template, from 01 to 50.
Default: Template 01 is assigned to all BRI ports.
To assign a Station Basic Feature Template to a SIP trunk, dial:
• 5508-1-SIP trunk- Template Number to assign the template to a single SIP trunk.
• 5508-2-SIP trunk-SIP trunk-Template Number to assign the same template to a range of SIP trunks.
• 5508-*- Template Number to assign the same template to all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP trunk is the number of the Software Port of the SIP trunk, from 01 to 32.
Template number is the number of the Station Basic Feature Template, from 01 to 50.
Default: Template 01 is assigned to all SIP trunks.
To assign a Station Basic Feature Template to a SIP Extension, dial:
• 5510-1-SIP Extension-Template Number to assign
• 5510-2-SIP Extension-SIP Extension-Template Number
• 5510-*-Template Number to assign the same
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Station Basic Feature Template is from 01 to 50.
By default, Template 01 is assigned.
• Exit SE mode.
Station Advanced Feature Template
The Station Advanced Feature Template is a set of advanced extension features, to be applied on extensions to
support features like CLIP, Call Duration Control, Storage of Internal SMDR, Call Taping, Alarm Notification, Floor
Service, Walk-In Class of Service, etc.
Instead of programming each extension individually, the Station Advanced Feature makes it possible to group
together extensions that are to be assigned the same set of features, prepare a Station Advanced Feature
Template with the common set of features and apply it on these extensions.
The ETERNITY offers 50 such Station Advanced Feature Templates. A Station Advanced Feature Template is
assigned to all the types of stations viz. SLT, DKP, ISDN Terminals, E&M75, T1E1PRI and BRI76.
These templates have commonly used values, but can be customized per the requirement and applied on the
extensions.
Station Advanced Feature Template Parameters
The Advanced Feature Template comprises the following features on extensions:
• Caller ID Presentation while Transfer: This parameter is related to the CLIP feature. It allows you to
select whether you want the CLI of the ‘Held Party’ or the CLI of the ‘Transferring Party’ to be displayed to
the transfer destination extension while the call is being transferred. Refer the feature description for
“Calling Line Identification and Presentation (CLIP)” to know more.
75. Applicable only when Orientation type is 'Station'.
76. Applicable only when the T1E1PRI and BRI ports are in NT mode.
446 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Call Forward No-Reply Timer: This parameter is related to the Call-Forward-No Reply feature. The Timer
is the duration for which the system will wait for an extension to answer an incoming call, before forwarding
the call it to the programmed destination phone number as Call Forward-No Reply. By default the Timer is
set to 30 seconds. Refer the feature description for “Call Forward” to know more.
• DDI IC Routing: This flag is relevant only if you are using DDI IC Routing. As this flag is enabled by
default, hence all the stations configured in the IC Reference Table will behave as DDI stations. If you do
not want any of these stations to function as a DDI station, disable this flag in the feature template applied
on that station. By default, the flag is enabled.
Refer the topics “Direct Dialing-In (DDI)”, “DDI Routing Table” and “IC Reference Table” to know more.
• Send DDI Number as CLI?: This flag is relevant only if the station is programmed as a DDI Station (the
DDI IC Routing is enabled). You can choose whether to the Calling Line Identification (CLI) of the DDI
station should be sent for outgoing calls made from that station. By default the flag is enabled.
• Internal Calls Storage: This parameter is related to the storage of Station Message Detail Records of
internal calls, made between stations of the ETERNITY. You can select the type of internal calls to be
stored by the system: i) Calls made from the station, ii) Calls made to the station, iii) Calls made from as
well as calls made to the station, and iv) all types of calls, and v) no internal calls. By default, all types of
internal calls on the station are stored. Select desired type of internal call storage.
Refer “Station Message Detail Recording-Storage” to know more.
• Walk-Out Mode: This parameter is related to the feature Walk-In Class of Service. ETERNITY offers two
types of Walk-In: i) One-Call per Walk-In, whereby the user is automatically logged out after a call. ii) Walk-
In until Logout, whereby the user remains logged on until s/he manually walks out or a second user walks
into the same station.
You must select the Walk-Out mode for the station. If One-Call per Walk-In is to be supported on the
station, select 'One Call' as Walk-Out mode.
If Walk-In until Logout is to be supported on the station, select 'Multiple Calls' as the Walk-Out mode.
To know more about this feature, refer “Walk-In Class of Service”.
• CDC Table: This parameter is to be programmed if you have enabled the “Call Duration Control (CDC)”
feature on the station. The system will check the Call Duration Control (CDC) Table applied to station to
implement this feature on the station. So, you must first program the CDC Table and enter the number of
the CDC Table you have programmed in this field.
You can program 8 different CDC tables. By default, CDC Table No. 1 is assigned to all stations. If CDC is
to be applied on stations of the ETERNITY, simply program the default CDC Table No. 1.
To do this, click the link CDC Table to open the page. Program the CDC Table parameters and 'Submit' to
save your settings. Now return to the Station Advanced Feature Template and enter the number of the
CDC Table you programmed in the CDC Table field of the template.
Refer the feature description “Call Duration Control (CDC)” to know more and for instructions on creating
CDC Tables.
• Forced Account Code: This flag used to enable or disable the feature Forced Account Code on the SLT/
DKP/ISDN Terminal extensions. When this flag is enabled, the system will allow the extension user to dial
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 447
an external number only after entering the Account Code. Refer the feature description for “Account
Codes” to know more.
• Department Billing Group: This parameter enables you to know the total cost of the calls made by a
particular group of stations. This parameter is used as a one of the filters for printing SMDR Reports
namely, “Print outgoing calls department group wise”. To be able to use this filter, you must assign the
station to a Department Bill Group. You can create as many as 99 different Department Bill Groups. Enter
the number of the Bill Group you want to assign the stations to in this field.
• Floor Service Group: This parameter is related to the Floor Service feature. Floor Service can be floor-
wise or centralized. Floor Service requires you to program Routing Groups as landing destinations for
extension calls.
Program the Floor Service (Routing) Group first and enter this Floor Service (Routing) Group number in
this field. There are 96 different Routing Groups to be programmed as Floor Service Groups. By default,
no Routing Group is assigned to Floor Service in the Template ('00').
To know more about this feature, refer the feature description for “Floor Service”.
Calls from the station will land on the Floor Service (Routing) Group you have assigned in this field.
• Alarm Notification Type: This parameter is related to the Alarm feature of the ETERNITY. You can select
any from the following options for Alarm Notification to station users for Alarm calls:
• Voice Message: Extension users will be played a message recorded in the Voice Module, when they
answer the alarm call. By default, this option is selected.
• Music-on-Hold: Extension users will be played music-on-hold when they answer the alarm call.
• External Music Source: Extension users will be connected to live music when they answer the alarm
call. If you select this option, make sure you have connected a live music source to the Analog Input
Port of the ETERNITY.
• Routing Group: Extension users will be connected to the stations programmed in the 'Alarm
Notification Group'. For this you must have programmed a Routing Group.
If you select this option, you can also connect external Messaging Devices to play real-time updated
information like date, time, greetings, weather information, specific event announcements, etc, when
then extension users answer the alarm calls. The messaging devices must be connected to any of the
SLT ports and included in the Routing Group for alarm notification.
• Alarm Notification Routing Group: Program this parameter if you have selected 'Routing Group' as the
Alarm Notification Type. Enter the number of the Routing Group you have programmed for Alarm Calls.
By default Routing Group 32 is assigned as the Alarm Notification Routing Group. If the same Routing
Group is to be assigned to all stations, click the link 'Alarm Notification Routing Group' to open the Routing
Groups page. Select members (stations) in this routing group. Save your changes by clicking 'Submit'
button.
You can program a different Routing Group repeating these steps. Make sure to enter the number of the
Routing Group you programmed in this field.
Refer the feature description for “Alarms” to know more.
448 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Landing Destination for Virtual Station: This parameter is related to the “Virtual Station” feature of
ETERNITY. A Virtual Station allows sharing of a single physical telephone instrument by multiple users, as
though each user were using an individual extension, known as Virtual Station. The physical station
(telephone) is called the master station.
If the station is to be configured as the master station, configure the following parameters:
• Master Port Type: Select the port type of the station, whether SLT or DKP. If you are not using any
Virtual Station, select 'Null'.
• Port Number: Enter the software port number of the station designated as the master station in this
field.
• Help Desk: Enable this flag if you want to define the station as a “Help Desk”. When this flag is enabled,
Auto Call Back will be automatically set whenever this station is found busy.
• GPAX - Charge Internal Calls: This parameter is related to the GPAX application. If the station is
programmed as a GPAX user, enable this flag for billing internal calls made by the station. When this flag is
enabled, the system will record all calls made from the station in the Station Message Detail Record-
Outgoing buffer for “GPAX Billing”. If the flag is disabled the calls will not be billed and will be recorded in
the Station Message Detail Record - Internal buffer as an internal call.
• Call Taping: If you want to use the “Call Taping” feature on the station, you must program the related
parameters described below.
• Tape Calls without CLI?: Enable this flag if you want incoming calls without CLI to be taped. By
default, the flag is disabled. The system will not tape incoming calls without CLI.
• Number List-Incoming Calls: Assign a Number List containing numbers of Incoming Calls that must
be taped. You must first program the Number List. By default, Number List 09 is assigned.
• Number List-Outgoing Calls: Assign a Number List containing numbers of Outgoing Calls that must
be taped. You must first program the Number List. By default, Number List 10 is assigned also for
outgoing calls.
If Number list 10 is already used for another application, prepare a different number list and assign it to
the template.
• Call Taping for Internal Calls: Enable this flag if you want to allow Call Taping of internal calls made
and received by the station.
• Station Category: Program this parameter only
a. if the stations are connected to T1 Trunks using RBS protocol.
b. If you want to define stations of the PBXs networked over E&M lines using MFCR2 Signaling as either
'Priority Subscriber' or 'Ordinary Subscriber'.
Select the appropriate station category from the following options:
• Ordinary Subscriber (default)
• Priority Subscriber
• Maintenance Equipment
• Operator
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 449
• Pay Phone
• Data Transmission
• Interception Operator
• Allow External Call Forward for: This parameter defines the types of calls for which the External Call
Forwarding is to be applied. This parameter is relevant for the features “Call Forward” and “Mobility
Extension”. You may select from the following options:
• Internal Calls Only
• Trunk Calls Only
• Internal + Trunk Calls.
Customizing Station Advanced Feature Template using Jeeves
• Log into Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access.
• Click the link 'Station Advanced Feature Template' to open the page.
• Select a Template number you wish to customize, for example Template 02.
• Change the values of the Station Advanced Feature Template parameters as desired.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your changes.
• Now, apply this Template 02 on the SLT/DKP/ISDN Terminal ports.
To apply the customized template on SLT ports,
450 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Click the link 'SLT Configuration'.
• Click the link 'SLT Parameters' under SLT Configuration to open the page.
• Go to the SLT software ports to which this Template is to be assigned, for example SLT-003 and 004.
• Enter the number of the Template you customized, 02, in the field 'Station Advanced Feature Template' of
each of these SLT ports.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your setting.
To apply the customized template on DKP ports,
• Click the link 'DKP Configuration'.
• Click the link 'DKP Parameters' under DKP Configuration to open the page.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 451
• Go to the DKP software ports to which this Template is to be assigned, for example DKP-005 to 008.Enter
the number of the Template you customized, 02, in the field 'Station Advanced Feature Template' of each
of these DKP software ports.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your setting.
To apply the customized template on ISDN Terminal ports,
• Click the link 'ISDN Terminal Parameters' to open the page.
• Go to the ISDN Terminal software ports to which this Template is to be assigned, for example ISDN-01.
452 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Enter the number of the Template you customized, 02, in the field 'Station Basic Feature Template' of each
of this ISDN Terminal software port.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your setting.
• Repeat the same steps to customize another template and apply it on other extension ports.
Customizing Station Advanced Feature Template using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To program a feature in a Station Advanced Feature Template, dial:
• 5602-1-Template Number-Feature Number-Code to program the value of a feature in a single
template.
• 5602-2-Template Number-Template Number-Feature Number-Code to program the same value for
a feature in a range of templates.
• 5602-*-Feature Number-Code to program the same value for a feature in all templates.
Where,
Template Number is the number of the Station Advanced Feature Template, from 01 to 50.
Feature Number is the number of the Feature in the Template, from 01 to 20.
For example, you want to customize Template number 02, by changing the default settings of the
following features:
• Call Forward No Reply Timer to set to 45 seconds, dial 5602-1-02-02-045 (Template 02, Feature
Number 02 for No Reply Timer, Code 045 for 45 seconds).
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 453
• Forced Account Code Flag to be enabled, 5602-1-02-08-1 (Template 02, Feature Number 08 for
Forced Account Code, Code 1 for enable flag).
Refer the following Table for the Feature Number and Codes for the Station Advanced Feature Templates.
To default a Station Advanced Feature Template, dial:
• 5601-1-Template Number to default the values of a single template.
• 5601-2-Template Number-Template Number to default the values of a range of templates.
• 5601-* to default the values of all templates
To assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to SLT, dial:
• 5603-1-SLT-Template Number to assign the template to a single SLT port.
• 5603-2-SLT-SLT-Template Number to assign the same template number to a range of SLT ports.
• 5603-*-Template Number to assign the same template number to all SLT ports.
Where,
SLT is the number of the Software port of the SLT, from 001 to 512.
Template Number is the number of the Station Advanced Feature Template, from 01 to 50.
Default: Template 01 is assigned to all SLT ports.
454 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
For example, to assign Station Advanced Feature Template number 02 to the SLT software ports 004 to
010, dial 5603-2-004-010-02
To assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to a DKP, dial:
• 5604-1-DKP-Template Number to assign a template to a single DKP.
• 5604-2-DKP-DKP-Template Number to assign the same template to a range of DKPs.
• 5604-*-Template Number to assign the same template to all DKPs.
Where,
DKP is the number of the Software port of the DKP, from 001 to 128.
Template Number is the number of the Station Advanced Feature Template, from 01 to 50.
Default: Template 01 is assigned to all DKP ports.
For example, to assign Station Advanced Feature Template 02 to DKP software ports DKP-005 to 010,
dial 5604-2-005-010-02
To assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to an ISDN Terminal port, dial:
• 5607-1-ISDN-Template Number to assign a template to a single ISDN Terminal port.
• 5607-2-ISDN-ISDN-Template Number to assign the same template to a range of ISDN terminal ports.
• 5607-*-Template Number to assign the same template to all ISDN terminal ports.
Where,
ISDN is the number of the ISDN Terminal Software port, from 01 to 64.
Template Number is the number of the Station Advanced Feature Template, from 01 to 50.
Default: Template 01 is assigned to all ISDN Terminals.
For example, to assign Station Advanced Feature Template number 02 to the ISDN Terminal Software
ports 01 to 04, dial 5607-2-01-04-02
To assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to an E&M (Station) port, dial:
• 5605-1-E&M-Template Number to assign a template to a single E&M port.
• 5605-2-E&M-E&M-Template Number to assign the same template to a range of E&M ports.
• 5605-*-Template Number to assign the same template to all E&M ports.
Where,
E&M is the number of the E&M Software port, from 001 to 128.
Template Number is the number of the Station Advanced Feature Template, from 01 to 50.
Default: Template 01 is assigned to all E&M (Station) ports
To assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to a T1E1PRI port, dial:
• 5606-1-T1E1PRI-Template Number to assign a template to a single T1E1 port.
• 5606-2-T1E1PRI-T1E1PRI-Template Number to assign the same template to a range of T1E1 ports.
• 5606-*-Template Number to assign the same template to all T1E1 ports.
Where,
T1E1PRI is the number of the T1E1PRI Software port, from 1 to 8.
Template Number is the number of the Station Advanced Feature Template, from 01 to 50.
Default: Template 01 is assigned to all T1E1 ports.
To assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to a BRI port, dial:
• 5609-1-BRI-Template Number to assign a template to a single BRI port.
• 5609-2-BRI-BRI-Template Number to assign the same template to a range of BRI ports.
• 5609-*-Template Number to assign the same template to all BRI ports
Where,
BRI is the number of the BRI Software port, from 01 to 32.
Template is the number of the Station Advanced Feature Template, from 01 to 50.
Default: Template 01 is assigned to all BRI ports.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 455
To assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to a SIP trunk, dial:
• 5608-1-SIP trunk-Template Number to assign the template to a single trunk.
• 5608-2-SIP trunk-SIP trunk-Template Number to assign the same template to a range of trunks.
• 5608-*- Template Number to assign the same template to all trunks.
Where,
SIP trunk is the number of the Software Port of the SIP trunk, from 01 to 32.
Template number is the number of the Station Advanced Feature Template, from 01 to 50.
Default: Template 01 is assigned to all SIP trunks.
To assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to a SIP Extension, dial:
• 5612-1-SIP Extension-Template Number to assign the template to a single extension.
• 5612-2-SIP Extension-SIP Extension-Template Number to assign the same template to a range of
extensions.
• 5612-*- Template Number to assign the same template to all extensions.
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 001 to 999.
Template number is the number of the Station Advanced Feature Template, from 01 to 50.
Default: Template 01 is assigned to all SIP extensions.
• Exit SE mode.
456 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Configuring SLT Extensions
The number of SLT extensions available to you for configuration depends on the number of SLT ports supported by
your model of ETERNITY and the number of SLT ports you have specified on the “System Pre-requisites” page.
If you have enabled 'On-Site Configuration', the system will provide you only those ports that are actually present in
the system for configuration.
Configure SLT port parameters using Jeeves or by dialing commands from a Telephone.
Configuring SLT Parameters using Jeeves
• Log into Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the link SLT Configuration.
• Click the link SLT Parameters to open the page.
• Configure the following parameters for each SLT port on this page:
• SLT Port No.: This non-editable field is the number of the software port of the SLT port.
• Hardware - Slot - Port: 'Slot' is the number of the Universal Slot in which the SLT Card is inserted.
'Port' is the number of the SLT hardware port on which the telephone instrument is connected.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 457
The ETERNITY can automatically detect and assign the hardware slot and port numbers automatically
to the SLT software ports.
For example: if you have inserted the SLT8 Card in Slot number 02 and SLT16 Card in Slot number 03
of ETERNITY ME16S, the system will assign the hardware slot 02 and port numbers 01-08 to the SLT
Software Ports from 001 to 008 respectively. The system will assign Slot 03 and port numbers 09-24 to
the SLT Software Ports 009 to 024. Refer the topic “Software Port and Hardware ID” to know more.
However, if required, you may change the Hardware Slot and Port assigned to the SLT software port. In
which case, enter the desired Hardware Slot and Port number in this field.
If you want to de-assign the Hardware Slot and Port, Enter '00' in both fields.
• Access Code: Assign Station Access Codes to the SLT Port. Station Access Codes are commonly
referred to as Extension Numbers. These may be a combination of 1, 2, 3 or 4 digits, which are dialed
to call the SLT port to which they are assigned.
All SLT ports are assigned the following Station Access Codes as default.
SLT Software Port Access Codes
001 2001
002 2002
003 2003
: :
: :
512 2512
You may either apply the default Station Access Codes to the SLT ports or assign them according to
your requirement and preferences.
If you decide to customize the Station Access Codes, make sure that the numbers do not clash with any
other Access Code in the 'Dial' phase. Refer the topics “Access Codes” and “Conflict Dialing” to know
more.
• Name: Assign a 'Name' to the SLT port. The name may be of the person who will use the SLT or the
name of a department. This name will be displayed on the LCD of the remote user's phone, if it is
equipped with Caller ID.
You can program a name of a maximum of 18 alphanumeric characters.
• SLT Hardware Template: Assign an SLT Hardware Template to the SLT port. An SLT Hardware
Template is a set of features that define the behavior of the SLT hardware port. The SLT Hardware
Template allows you to configure according to user requirements a common set of features for all SLT
Hardware Ports, like Caller ID Presentation (DTMF, FSK), Digit Pad Count, Ring Type, AC Impedance,
Answer Signaling type, Speech Transmit and Receive Gains, Open Loop Disconnect, Loop Current,
and external Voice Mail and Fax connectivity.
458 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
There are 50 SLT Hardware Templates that can be customized and assigned to the SLT ports. By
default SLT Hardware Template Number 01 is assigned to all the SLTs. This template has default
values fulfilling the common requirements of a very broad user base.
Check if the values in this template fulfill your requirements.
If the default SLT Hardware Template 01 fulfills the feature requirements and if the same features are to
be allowed to all SLTs, retain Template 01.
If different sets of hardware features are to be allowed to different SLTs, then prepare separate SLT
Hardware Templates and apply them on the ports. To do this,
• Click the link SLT Hardware Template to open the page.
• Select a Template number, for example 02.
• Customize Template number 02 and click Submit at the bottom of the page.
• Now go back to the SLT Parameters page.
• Enter the number of the Template you customized, template 02, in the SLT Hardware Template
field of the SLT Ports on which you want to apply this template.
• Click Submit to save changes.
• Repeat the same steps to customize and assign a different SLT Hardware Template to another SLT
port.
Also, refer the topic “SLT Hardware Template” to know more about customizing the templates and
applying on the SLT ports.
• Station Basic Feature Template: Assign a “Station Basic Feature Template” to the SLT. A Station
Basic Feature Template includes a set of features that completely define the behaviour of the extension
port, such as Time Table, Operator access, Trunk Access, Class of Service, Toll Control, Call Budget,
and Station Message Detail Records (storage of Incoming and Outgoing Call details).
By default, Station Basic Feature Template 01 is assigned to all stations of the system that includes
DKP ports, ISDN Terminals, SIP extensions, and E&M Lines with Station as Orientation Type.
Check if the default template fulfills the feature requirements (like “Class of Service (COS)”, “Toll
Control”, “OG Trunk Bundle Group”, etc.) of the SLT.
If the default Template 01 fulfills the feature requirements and if the same features are to be allowed to
all SLTs, retain Template 01.
If different sets of features are to be allowed to different SLTs, then prepare separate Station Basic
Feature Templates and apply them on the ports. To do this,
• Click the link Station Basic Feature Template to open the page.
• Select a Template number, for example 10.
• Customize Template number 10 and click Submit at the bottom of the page.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 459
• Now go back to the SLT Parameters page.
• Enter the number of the Template you customized, Template 10 in the Station Basic Feature
Template field of the SLT Port, for instance SLT-003, on which you want to apply this template.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
• Repeat the same steps to customize and assign a different Template to another SLT port.
Also, refer the topic “Station Basic Feature Template” to know more about customizing the templates
and applying on the ports.
• Station Advanced Feature Template: Assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to the SLT. The
Advanced Feature Template consists of a set of less commonly used features like Message Wait
Notification Type, Alarm Notification Type, Caller ID Presentation for Transferred Calls, DDI Incoming
Call Routing, Storage of Internal Calls, Call Duration Control, Floor Service, Call Taping, etc.
By default Station Advanced Feature Template 01 is assigned to all stations of the ETERNITY, which
includes DKP Ports, ISDN Terminals, SIP Extensions, and E&M Lines configured as Stations.
Check if this default template fulfills the feature requirements of the SLT Ports by clicking the link
Station Advanced Feature Template.
If the default Template 01 fulfills the feature requirements, and if the same features are to be allowed to
all SLT ports, retain Template 01.
If different sets of features are to be allowed to different SLT Ports, then prepare separate Station
Advanced Feature Templates and apply them on the ports.
To do this,
• Click the Station Advanced Feature Template link to open the page.
• Select a Template number, for example 02.
• Customize Template number 02.
• Click Submit to save changes.
• Return to SLT Parameters page.
• Enter the number of the Template you customized, template 02, in the Station Advanced Feature
Template field of the SLT Ports on which you want to apply this template.
• Click Submit to save changes.
• Repeat the same steps to customize and assign a different Template to another SLT port.
Also refer the topic “Station Advanced Feature Template” for instructions on customizing these
templates and applying them on the ports.
• Call Pick-Up Group: Configure this parameter if you want to assign the SLT to a particular “Call Pick
Up” group.
460 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Call Pick Up allows the SLT extension user to 'pick up' (answer) calls ringing on any other extension, by
dialing a feature code, without physically going to the ringing extension.
For this to work, both extensions, the ringing extension and the station picking up the call, must be in
the same Call Pick Up Group. Refer “Call Pick Up” for instructions on how to create groups. You can
create as many as 99 groups numbered from 01 to 99.
Enter the number of the Call Pick-Up Group you created for this SLT in this field.
• Station Type: This parameter is relevant only for the Hotel Application of the ETERNITY. Extensions
are identified as 'Administrator' or 'Guest' extensions according to the intended user of the SLT. When
the Station Type is selected, the system will automatically assign the Guest and Administrator (Hotel
Staff) features to the SLT. To know more, refer the ETERNITY Hospitality System Manual.
Advanced Configuration
For extension users who need to be provided features like Personal Directory or assigned a Priority, you may click
the Advance button at the bottom of the page and program the following parameters:
• Personal Directory: Enter the number of the Personal Directory that you want to assign to this SLT. A
Personal Directory is a list of 25 frequently dialed numbers, each of which are stored by Index number
(location code), Name and Trunk Access Codes (“OG Trunk Bundle Group”). The Personal Directory is
necessary for using the features “Abbreviated Dialing” and “Dial By Name”.
When a Personal Directory is assigned to an SLT, it must also be configured.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 461
The Personal Directory can be configured by the SLT users and by the System Engineer. Refer the topic
“Abbreviated Dialing” for instructions on configuring the Personal Directory.
• Priority: Select a Priority Level for the SLT.
Each extension of the ETERNITY is assigned a Priority Level starting from 1, 2, 3... to 9, with '1' being
lowest Priority and '9' being highest Priority. Whenever an extension phone with higher priority calls an
extension with lower priority, a triple ring is placed on the called station. To know more, read the feature
description “Priority”.
By default, the Priority of all SLT ports is set to '5'. So, decide what Priority Level you will assign to each of
the SLTs and set the desired level for each port.
• If you have completed configuring SLT parameters, click Submit at the bottom of the page to save your
settings.
It is possible to default all the parameters by clicking the Default button. You can also restore default
values of the parameters of a single SLT by clicking the Default One button and specifying the SLT you
want to set to default.
Configuring SLT Parameters using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To assign Hardware Slot-Port to an SLT Port, dial:
• 1101-SLT-Slot-Port offset on the card
Where,
SLT is the Software Port number of the SLT port from 001 to 512.
Slot is Slot number in which the SLT Card is inserted from 01 to 16
Port Offset is the number of the SLT Port on the card from 01 to 99.
To de-assign the hardware slot and the hardware port of an SLT port, dial:
• 1101-SLT-00-00
To assign Access Code to an SLT Port, dial:
• 3101-1-SLT-Access Code-#*
Where,
SLT is the Software Port number of the SLT port from 001 to 512.
Access Code is a number string of any combination of 1, 2, 3 or 4 digits. Terminate the command with
#* if the number string has fewer than 4 digits.
To clear the Access codes assigned to the SLT, dial:
• 3101-1-SLT-#* to clear the Access Codes of a single SLT port.
• 3101-2-SLT-SLT-#* to clear the Access Codes of a range of SLT ports.
• 3101-*-#* to clear the Access Codes of all SLT ports.
To assign default Access Codes assigned to SLT, dial:
• 3151-1-SLT to default Access Codes of values to a single SLT port.
• 3151-2-SLT-SLT to default Access Codes of a range of SLT ports.
• 3151-* to default Access Codes of all SLT ports.
To assign a Name to an SLT, dial:
• 5402-1-SLT-Name-#* to assign a Name to a single SLT port.
462 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• 5402-2-SLT-SLT-Name-#* to assign the same Name to a range of SLT ports.
• 5402-*-Name-#* to assign the same Name to all SLT ports.
Where,
SLT is the Software Port number of the SLT port from 001 to 512.
Name is a string of a maximum 18 alphanumeric characters. Terminate the commands with #* if the
number string has fewer than 18 characters.
To clear the name of the SLT, dial:
• 5402-1-SLT-#* to clear the Name of a single SLT port.
• 5402-2-SLT-SLT-#* to clear the Names of a range of SLT ports.
• 5402-*-#* to clear the Names of all SLT ports.
To assign an SLT Hardware Template to an SLT port, dial:
• 5703-1-SLT-Template Number to assign a hardware template to a single SLT port.
• 5703-2-SLT-SLT-Template Number to assign a hardware template to a range of SLT ports.
• 5703-*-Template Number to assign a hardware template to all SLT ports.
Where,
SLT is the Software Port number of the SLT port from 001 to 512.
Template Number is the number of the SLT Hardware Template, from 01 to 50. Default: 01.
To assign a Station Basic Feature Template to an SLT Port, dial:
• 5503-1-SLT-Template Number to assign a Template to a single SLT port.
• 5503-2-SLT-SLT-Template Number to assign the same Template to a range of SLT ports.
• 5503-*-Template Number to assign the same Template to all SLT ports.
Where,
SLT is the Software Port number of the SLT port from 001 to 512.
Template is the Station Basic Feature Template from 01 to 50. Default: 01.
To assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to an SLT Port, dial:
• 5603-1-SLT-Template Number to assign a Template to a single SLT port
• 5603-2-SLT-SLT-Template Number to assign the same Template to a range of SLT ports.
• 5603-*-Template Number to assign the same Template to all SLT ports.
Where,
SLT is the Software Port number of the SLT port from 001 to 512.
Template is the Station Advanced Feature Template from 01 to 50. Default: 01.
To assign a Call Pick-Up Group to an SLT Port, dial:
• 3901-1-SLT-Call Pickup Group to assign a single SLT port to a Call Pick-Up Group.
• 3901-2-SLT-SLT-Call Pickup Group to assign a range of SLT ports to the same Call Pick-Up Group.
• 3901-*-Call Pickup Group to assign all SLT ports to the same Call Pick-Up Group.
Where,
SLT is the Software Port number of the SLT port from 001 to 512.
Call Pickup Group is from 00 to 99. Default: 99.
To remove an SLT from a Call Pick Up group, dial:
• 3901-1-SLT-00 to remove a single SLT port from a group.
• 3901-2-SLT-SLT-00 to remove a range of SLT ports from a group.
• 3901-* to remove all SLT ports from a group.
To define the Station Type for an SLT Port, Refer ETERNITY Hospitality System Manual.
To assign a Personal Directory to an SLT Port, dial:
• 1905-1-SLT-Personal Directory to assign a Personal Directory to a single SLT port.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 463
• 1905-2-SLT-SLT-Personal Directory to assign the same Personal Directory to a range of SLT ports.
• 1905-*-Personal Directory to assign the same Personal Director to all SLT ports.
Where,
SLT is the Software Port number of the SLT port from 001 to 512.
Personal Directory Number is from 01 to 50.
To clear the Personal Directory assigned to the SLT, dial:
• 1905-1-SLT-00 to clear the Personal Directory of a single SLT port.
• 1905-2-SLT-SLT-00 to clear the Personal Directory of a range of SLT ports.
• 1905-* to clear the Personal Directory of all SLT ports.
To define the Priority for an SLT Port, dial:
• 3911-1-SLT-Priority to define Priority for a single SLT port.
• 3911-2-SLT-SLT-Priority to define the same Priority for a range of SLT ports.
• 3911-*-Priority to define the same Priority for all SLT ports.
Where,
SLT is the Software Port number of the SLT port from 001 to 512.
Priority is from 1 to 9. Default: 5
• Exit SE mode.
464 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Configuring DKP Extensions
The number of DKP extensions available to you for configuration depends on the number of DKP ports supported
by your model of ETERNITY and the number of DKP ports you have specified on the “System Pre-requisites” page.
If you have enabled 'On-Site Configuration', the system will provide you only those ports that are actually present in
the system for configuration.
Configure DKP port parameters using Jeeves or by dialing commands from a Telephone.
Configuring DKP Parameters using Jeeves
• Log into Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the 'DKP Parameters' link.
The DKP Ports appear in tabs, with eight DKP Ports in each tab, 001-008, 009-016, 017-024, and so forth.
• For each DKP Port number, configure the following parameters:
• DKP - Slot - Port: 'Slot' is the number of the Universal Slot in which the DKP Card is inserted. 'Port' is
the number of the DKP hardware port on which the proprietary DKP EON is connected.
The ETERNITY can automatically detect and assign the hardware slot and port numbers automatically
to the DKP software ports.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 465
For example: if you have inserted the DKP8 Card in Slot number 03 and DKP16 Card in Slot number
04 of ETERNITY ME16S, the system will assign the hardware slot 03 and port numbers 01-08 to the
DKP Software Ports from 001 to 008 respectively. The system will assign Slot 04 and port numbers 09-
16 to the DKP Software Ports 009 to 024. Refer the topic “Software Port and Hardware ID” to know
more.
However, if required, you may change the Hardware Slot and Port assigned to the DKP software port.
In which case, enter the desired Hardware Slot and Port number in this field.
If you want to de-assign the Hardware Slot and Port, Enter '00' in both fields.
If your ETERNITY is ME10S or ME16S, the system will detect and assign the first four Software Ports to
the four DKP Ports located on the Switch Card.
• Access Code: Assign Station Access Codes to the DKP Port. Station Access Codes are commonly
referred to as Extension Numbers. These may be a maximum of 6 digits, which are dialed to call the
DKP port to which they are assigned.
All DKP ports are assigned the following Station Access Codes as default.
DKP (Software) Port No. Access Codes
001 3001
002 3002
003 3003
: :
: :
128 3128
You may either apply the default Station Access Codes to the DKP ports or assign them according to
your requirement and preferences.
If you decide to customize the Station Access Codes, make sure that the numbers do not clash with any
other Access Code in the 'Dial' phase. Refer the topics “Access Codes” and “Conflict Dialing” to know
more.
• Name: Assign a 'Name' to the DKP port. The name may be of the person who will use the DKP or the
name of a department. This name will be displayed on the LCD of the DKP of the user and on other
extension user's phones, provided these are also a model or EON or are equipped with Caller ID.
You can program a name of maximum 18 alphanumeric characters.
• Station Basic Feature Template: Assign a “Station Basic Feature Template” to the DKP.
A Station Basic Feature Template includes a set of features that completely define the behaviour of the
Station, such as Time Table, Operator access, Trunk Access, Class of Service, Toll Control, Call
Budget, and Station Message Detail Records (storage of Incoming and Outgoing Call details).
By default, Station Basic Feature Template 01 is assigned to all stations of the system that includes
DKP ports as well as DKP ports, ISDN Terminals, E&M Lines with Station as Orientation Type, and SIP
Extensions.
466 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Check if the default template fulfills the feature requirements (like “Class of Service (COS)”, “Toll
Control”, “OG Trunk Bundle Group”, etc.) of the DKP.
If the default Template 01 fulfills the feature requirements and if the same features are to be allowed to
all DKPs, retain Template 01.
If different sets of features are to be allowed to different DKPs, then prepare separate Station Basic
Feature Templates and apply them on the ports. To do this,
• Click the link “Station Basic Feature Template” to open the page.
• Select a Template number, for example 11.
• Customize Template number 11 and click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page.
• Now go back to the 'DKP Parameters' page.
• Enter the number of the Template you customized, Template 11, in the 'Station Basic Feature
Template' field of the DKP Port, for instance DKP-005, on which you want to apply this template. If
you want to apply this template to other ports too, like DKP-006, 007, and 008, assign the Template
11 to all these ports.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
• Repeat the same steps to customize and assign a different Template to another DKP port.
Also, refer the topic Station Basic Feature Templates to know more about customizing the templates
and applying on the ports.
• Station Advanced Feature Template: Assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to the DKP. The
Advanced Feature Template consists of a set of less commonly used features like Message Wait
Notification Type, Alarm Notification Type, Caller ID Presentation for Transferred Calls, DDI Incoming
Call Routing, Storage of Internal Calls, Call Duration Control, Floor Service, Call Taping, etc.
By default Station Advanced Feature Template 01 is assigned to all stations of the ETERNITY, which
includes DKP Ports, ISDN Terminals, E&M Lines configured as Stations, and SIP Extensions.
Check if this default template fulfills the feature requirements of the DKP Ports by clicking the link
'Station Advanced Feature Template'.
If the default Template 01 fulfills the feature requirements, and if the same features are to be allowed to
all DKP ports, retain Template 01.
If different sets of features are to be allowed to different DKP Ports, then prepare separate Station
Advanced Feature Templates and apply them on the ports.
To do this,
• Click the 'Station Advanced Feature Template' link to open the page.
• Select a Template number, for example 02.
• Customize Template number 02.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 467
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page.
• Now go back to the 'DKP Parameters' page.
• Enter the number of the Template you customized, Template 02 in the 'Station Advanced Feature
Template' field of the DKP Port, for instance DKP-001, on which you want to apply this template. If
you want to apply this template to other ports too, like DKP-002, 003, and 004, assign the Template
04 to all these ports.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
• Repeat the same steps to customize and assign a different Template to another DKP port.
Also refer the topic “Station Advanced Feature Template” for instructions on customizing these
templates and applying them on the ports.
• Call Capacity: Call Capacity is the number of Call Appearances (also referred to as 'call loops')
assigned to a (DKP) station. It is the ability of a Station to handle multiple calls simultaneously. A Call
Appearance allows a station user to attend to more than one calling party at a time.
A minimum of two Call Appearances must be assigned to a DKP Station - Operator station or Executive
station - so that the Station user can put one party on hold while talking to another. A third Call
Appearance allows the station user to put two calls on hold, make/attend a third call and toggle
between three calls.
The higher the call capacity (the more the number of Call Appearances assigned to a station), the more
the number of calls the Station user can handle.
The ETERNITY supports a maximum of 10 Call Appearances as Call Capacity of the DKP extensions.
DKP stations for Executives are usually assigned 2 Call Appearances, while the Operator Station is
assigned 6 Call Appearances to handle 6 calls simultaneously. The default call capacity of the DKP
ports is 02.
Now, select the number of Call Appearances you wish to assign to the DKP port in the column, 'Call
Capacity'.
• Key Map: EON is designed to function as Operator, Executive, Hotel Attendant, and Hotel Guest
extensions, providing default key settings (key maps) for all these functions. All you need to do is
assign a Key Map Template according to the intended user of the DKP.
For example, if the DKP is to be used by the Operator, select ‘Operator's Template’. The DKP will be
assigned the key template with the special features required by Operators, such as more DSS keys for
Trunk Access and Call Appearances, a Call Release Key, etc.
Similarly, if the user of the DKP is a Hotel Attendant, select 'Hotel Attendant's Template'. The key map
with the specific Front Desk User features such as Check-In, Check-Out, Guest In/Out, Change Room
Clean Status, Room Shift, will be automatically assigned to the DKP.
You can also customize the key map of the DKP, by selecting the option ‘Personalized’ and assign
functions to keys as per your requirement.
468 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To know more about key maps, key templates and how to customize them, see “DSS Keys
Programming”.
• Call Pick-Up Group: Program this parameter if you want to assign the DKP to a particular “Call Pick
Up” group.
Call Pick Up allows the DKP station user to 'pick up' (answer) calls ringing on any other station, by
dialing a feature code, without physically going to the ringing station. For this to work, both the ringing
station and the station picking up the call must be in the same 'Call Pick Up Group'. Refer “Call Pick
Up” for instructions on how to create groups. You can create as many as 99 groups numbered from 01
to 99.
Enter the number of the Call Pick-Up Group you created for this DKP in this field.
• Station Type: This parameter is relevant only for the Hotel Application of the ETERNITY. Extensions
are identified as 'Administrator' or 'Guest' extensions according to the intended user of the DKP. When
the Station Type is selected, the system will automatically assign the Guest and Administrator (Hotel
Staff) features to the DKP. To know more, refer the ETERNITY Hospitality System Manual.
For instructions on configuring EON Keys, DSS1 Keys and DSS2 Keys, see the topic “DSS Keys Programming”
Advanced Configuration
The above listed parameters fulfill the basic DKP station port configuration requirements of most users. However, it
is anticipated that some users may need to configure the more advanced features like Personal Directory,
Language Selection, DKP Settings - Backlight Brightness and Contrast, Headset/Handset/Speaker Volume levels,
Select a Ringer Tune, attach Direct Station Selection Consoles, etc. For such users, you may click the 'Advanced'
button.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 469
• Scroll with the horizontal bar, and configure the following advanced DKP Parameters:
• Personal Directory: Enter the number of the “Personal Directory” that you want to assign to the DKP. A
Personal Directory is a list of 25 frequently dialed numbers, each of which are stored by Index number
(location code), Name and Trunk Access Codes (“OG Trunk Bundle Group”). The Personal Directory is
necessary for using the features “Abbreviated Dialing” and “Dial By Name”.
To be able to assign a Personal Directory to a DKP you must first program it. Refer the topic “Abbreviated
Dialing” for instructions on programming the Personal Directory.
• Priority: Select a Priority Level for the DKP from 1, 2, 3... to 9, with '1' being lowest Priority and '9' being
highest Priority. Whenever a station (DKP) with higher priority calls a station with lower priority, a triple ring
is placed on the called station. To know more, read the feature description “Priority”.
By default, the Priority of all DKP ports is set to '5'.
• CO CLIP Pattern: This parameter allows you to select the type of Calling Line Presentation on the DKP for
incoming calls from trunks. You can select any of the below options:
• Name Only: only the name of the caller will be displayed.
• Number Only: only the number of the caller will be displayed.
• Number + Name: both the name and the number of the caller will be displayed.
By default, Number + Name is selected as the CO CLIP Pattern for all DKPs.
• Language: ETERNITY provides language support for English, French, German, Spanish, Portuguese,
and Italian. When you select any of these languages, all the command strings and prompts will appear in
the selected language. By default English is selected.
• Ringer Mode: You can select a Ringer mode for each DKP from the four options:
• Ring immediate (it rings immediately as a fresh calls lands on the DKP).
• Ring if idle (rings only if the DKP is idle).
• Ring after a delay (if the call is still not answered).
• Ring Off (silent mode).
By default the Ringer Mode is set to 'Ring Immediate'. Change the Ringer Mode on the DKP as per the
requirement and preferences of the DKP users.
• Ring Delay Timer: The Ring Delay Timer is the time in seconds the ETERNITY will wait to ring on
receiving a call. This Timer needs to be set only if you have selected 'Ring after a delay' as the Ringer
Mode for the DKP in the previous parameter.
By default, the Ringer Delay Timer is set to 10 seconds. You may change the Ring Delay Timer according
to the preferences and requirements of the DKP user.
• Acknowledgement Timer: This Timer is to be programmed to enable the Ringer Auto Acknowledge
mode. This mode determines when to stop the ring on the DKP. There are two options for ringer auto
acknowledge:
• Stop only when the call is answered.
• Stop after a delay.
470 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To stop the ring on the DKP after a delay, the Acknowledge Timer must be programmed. The range of the
timer is 01 to 99 seconds.
To stop the ring only when the Call is answered or manually acknowledged, the Acknowledge Timer must
be set to '00'. By default, Ring Auto Acknowledge is turned OFF.
• Play Ring ON: With this parameter, you can assign the Ring Destination for the DKP; you can choose
whether the Ring should be played on the Speakerphone or Headset of the DKP. Default: Speakerphone is
selected.
When you select the Headset as the destination, ensure that you have enabled “Headset Connectivity” flag
and have connected a Headset to the DKP.
The speech path of both, the Headset and the Handset is common. If the Headset is not connected and
you have selected the Headset as the ring destination, the ring will be played on the speaker of the
Handset.
• Ring Tune: You can select from different ringer tunes for each DKP according to your preferences and
requirement. By default, Ringer Tune is set to 1.
• Ring Volume: You can select from different ringer volumes for each DKP according to your preferences
and requirement. By default, Ringer Volume is set to 5.
• Handset MIC Transmit (Tx) Volume Level: This parameter is used for increasing or decreasing the
volume of outgoing speech (Transmit Gain) on the Handset of the DKP. Select the desired Handset Tx
Volume Level from 0 to 9. By default, Handset Tx Volume Level is 5.
• Handset Rx Volume Level: This parameter is used for increasing or decreasing the volume of incoming
speech (Receive Gain) on the Handset of the DKP. Select the desired Handset Rx Volume Level from 0 to
9. By default, Handset Rx Volume Level is 4.
• Headset Transmit Volume Level: This parameter is used for increasing or decreasing the volume of
outgoing speech (Transmit Gain) on the Headset port of the DKP. Select the desired Headset Tx Volume
Level from 0 to 9. By default, Headset Tx Volume Level is 4.
• Headset Rx Volume Level: This parameter is used for increasing or decreasing the volume of incoming
speech (Receive Gain) on the Headset port of the DKP. Select the desired Headset Rx Volume Level from
0 to 9. By default, Headset Rx Volume Level is 4.
• Hands-free Tx Volume Level: With this parameter you may change the Volume level of Transmit Gain of
the Speaker phone MIC volume from 0 to 9, as per your preference. This parameter is to be used for
increasing or decreasing the volume levels of outgoing speech on the Speaker of the DKP. By default,
Hands-free Tx volume level is 4.
• Hands-free Rx Volume Level: With this parameter you may change the Volume level of Receive Gain of
the Speaker phone MIC volume from 0 to 9, as per your preference. This parameter is to be used for
increasing or decreasing the volume levels of incoming speech on the Speaker of the DKP. By default,
Hands-free Rx volume level is 4.
• Key Click Volume Level: You may change the Key Click Volume (Key DTMF Side tone) of the DKP. Key
Click Volume is the tone you hear as you press the dial pad keys of EON. Select the desired volume level
from 0 to 9. By default, the volume level is set to 5.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 471
• DTMF Generation Flag: This flag is used to enable or disable DTMF dialing on the DKP. By default, the
flag is enabled. To disable the flag, click the checkbox.
• DTMF Transmit Level: You can select the desired Transmit Level from 0 to 9 for DTMF generation from
the DKP. By default, the DTMF Transmit Level is set to 5.
• Headset Connected?: Enable this parameter by selecting the checkbox if you want to use a Headset with
the DKP.
Make sure that you have also connected a Headset to the DKP.
• Auto Answer: Enable this parameter by selecting the checkbox if you want to set the “Auto Answer”
feature on the DKP.
When this feature is set, the DKP goes OFF-Hook automatically after a preset period of time, without the
user having to pick up the handset or press the speaker or headset key.
• Auto Answer Timer (sec): This parameter is to be programmed if you have enabled the “Auto Answer”
feature on the DKP.
When the Auto Answer feature is enabled, the Auto Answer Timer must be programmed. This timer
defines the time in seconds that the DKP should wait before going OFF-Hook. The range of this timer is 1
to 9 seconds. By default, the Auto Answer Timer is set to 1 second.
If you set the Auto Answer Timer to 0, Auto Answer will be disabled.
• LCD Backlight Level: You can change the LCD Backlight Brightness of EON. The intensity of the
backlight brightness increases from 0 to 4, where '0' will cause the backlight to be turned OFF. '1' signifies
minimum intensity, '4' signifies maximum intensity. Select any of the levels from 1to 4 from the list.
• LCD Backlight OFF Timer: The backlight of the LCD display of EON can be kept switched ON
continuously, or can be set to switch OFF automatically after a predefined period of time, known as the
Backlight OFF Timer. The range of the Backlight OFF Timer is 000-999 seconds. By default it is set to
switch OFF after 060 seconds.
• LCD Contrast Level: The EON offers 4-level contrast control for its LCD display. Level 1 signifies
minimum and level 4 is the maximum. The contrast increases in steps of 1 to 4. By default the contrast is
set to level 3. You may adjust it to the level comfortable to you. Select a level from 1-4.
• DSS1 - Slot/Port: This parameter is to be configured only if you have attached a Direct Station Selection
Console with the DKP.
You can attach two “Direct Station Selection Console” to each DKP to increase the number of DSS keys
for Direct Station Calling. You may attach any two DSS Consoles of the same model or of two different
models to the DKP.
DSS Consoles are connected to the DKP Cards just like digital key phones (refer the topic “Installing DSS
Consoles” in the installation instructions for your model of ETERNITY.
If you have attached a single DSS Console to a DKP, you must enter the following information in the 'DSS1
H/w-Slot to Port' column:
472 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• the number of the Universal Slot in which the DKP card, to which the DSS Console is connected, is
located.
• the number of the Port on the card, on which the DSS Console is connected.
• DSS2- Slot/Port: To configure a second DSS Console attached to the DKP, enter the same information as
above here, that is, the number of the Universal Slot in which the DKP card to which the DSS Console is
located, and the number of the Port on the card, on which the DSS Console is connected.
The DSS Console you want to attach to a particular DKP must not necessarily be located on the same card
as the DKP to which it is attached.
For example, you want to attach two DSS Consoles to DKP Port Number 001 in Slot number 18. The first
DSS Console is connected to DKP Port Number 01 on the card which is occupying Slot number 02. The
second DSS Console is connected to the DKP Port Number 02 on the same card. Now, to attach the DSS
Consoles to the DKP connected on Port Number 001, enter the hardware ID and port number as follows:
Enter 02 and 01 as the hardware ID and port number in the column DSS1. Similarly, enter 02 and 02 as
the hardware ID and port number in the column DSS2 of the DKP port.
DKP DSS1 DSS2
DKP No.
H/w-Slot to Port H/w-Slot to Port H/w-Slot to Port
001 17 01 02 01 02 02
002 17 02
003 17 03
004 17 04
005 17 05
006 17 06
007 17 07
008 17 08
009 02 01
010 02 02
• Repeat the same steps to configure other DKP ports.
• If you have completed configuration of all the above listed DKP Parameters, click 'Submit' to save your
changes.
Two additional DKP Parameters you can configure only by dialing the related SE Commands from a telephone are:
• Rx Gain at SIP Trunk/Extension (dB): This parameter allows you to increase the incoming speech
volume level of calls from SIP trunks/Extensions to Mobile Ports. By default, Rx Gain is set to 0dB.
• Tx Gain at SIP Trunk/Extension (dB): This parameter allows you to increase the outgoing speech
volume level of calls from SIP trunks/Extensions to Mobile Ports. By default, Tx Gain is set to 6dB.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 473
For instructions, see “Configuring DKP Extensions using a Telephone”.
Configuring DKP Extensions using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To assign Hardware Slot and Port, dial:
• 1102-DKP-Slot-Port offset on the card
Where,
DKP is the Software Port number of the DKP port from 001 to 128.
Slot is Slot number in which the DKP Card is inserted from 01 to 16
Port Offset is the number of the DKP Port on the card from 01 to 99.
To clear the hardware Slot and Port assigned to the DKP software port, dial:
• 1102-DKP-00-00
To assign an Access Code to a DKP Port, dial:
• 3102-1-DKP-Access Code-#*
Where,
DKP is the Software Port number of the DKP port from 001 to 128.
Access Code is a number string of any combination of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 digits. Terminate the command
with #* if the number string has fewer than 6 digits.
To clear the Access codes assigned to the DKP, dial:
• 3102-1-DKP-#* to clear the Access Code of a single DKP port.
• 3102-2-DKP-DKP-#* to clear the Access Codes of a range of DKP ports.
• 3102-*-#* to clear the Access Codes of all DKP Ports.
To assign default Station Access Codes to DKP, dial:
• 3152-1-DKP to default Access Code of a single DKP Port.
• 3152-2-DKP-DKP to default Access Codes of a range of DKP ports.
• 3152-* to default Access Codes of all DKP ports.
To assign a Name to a DKP Port, dial:
• 5403-1-DKP-Name-#* to assign a Name to a single DKP port.
• 5403-2-DKP-DKP-Name-#* to assign the same Name to a range of DKP ports.
• 5403-*-Name-#* to assign the same Name to all DKP ports.
Where,
DKP is the Software Port number of the DKP port from 001 to 128.
Name is a string of a maximum of 18 alphanumeric characters. Terminate the commands with #* if the
number string has fewer than 18 characters.
To clear the Name of the DKP Port, dial:
• 5403-1-DKP-#* to clear the Name of a single DKP port.
• 5403-2-DKP-DKP-#* to clear the Names of a range DKP ports.
• 5403-*-#* to clear the Names of all DKP ports.
To assign a Station Basic Feature Template to a DKP Port, dial:
• 5504-1-DKP-Template Number to assign a template to a single DKP port.
• 5504-2-DKP-DKP-Template Number to assign the same template to a range of DKP ports.
• 5504-*-Template Number to assign the same template to all DKP ports.
Where,
DKP is the Software Port number of the DKP port from 001 to 128.
Template Number is the number of the Station Basic Feature Template, from 01 to 50. Default: 01
474 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to a DKP Port, dial:
• 5604-1-DKP-Template Number to assign a template to a single DKP port.
• 5604-2-DKP-DKP-Template Number to assign the same template to a range of DKP ports.
• 5604-*-Template Number to assign the same template to all DKP ports.
Where,
DKP is the Software Port number of the DKP port from 001 to 128.
Template Number is the number of the Station Advanced Feature Template, from 01 to 50. Default: 01
To define the Call Capacity of a DKP Port, dial:
• 1201-1-DKP-Call Capacity to define the call capacity for a single DKP port.
• 1201-2-DKP-DKP- Call Capacity to define the same call capacity for a range of DKP ports.
• 1201-*- Call Capacity to define the same call capacity for all DKP ports.
Where,
DKP is the Software Port number of the DKP port from 001 to 128.
Call Capacity is from 02 to 10. Default: 02.
To assign a Key Map for a DKP Port, dial:
• 1221-1-DKP-DKP Key Template Number to assign a Key Map to a single DKP port.
• 1221-2-DKP-DKP-DKP Key Template Number to assign the same Key Map to a range of DKP ports.
• 1221-*-DKP Key Template Number to assign the same Key Map to all DKP ports.
Where,
DKP is the Software Port number of the DKP port from 001 to 128.
DKP Key Template Number is
1 for Operator's Template
2 Executive's Template
3 Hotel Attendant's Template
4 Guest's template.
Default: 1
To assign the DKP Port to a Call Pick-Up Group, dial:
• 3902-1-DKP-Call Pick-Up Group to assign a single DKP port to a Call Pick-Up group.
• 3902-2-DKP-DKP-Call Pickup Group to assign a range of DKP ports to the same Call Pick-Up group.
• 3902-*-Call Pickup Group to assign all DKP ports to the same Call Pick-Up group.
Where,
DKP is the Software Port number of the DKP port from 001 to 128.
Call Pickup Group is from 00 to 99. Default: 99.
To remove a DKP from a Call Pick Up group, dial:
• 3902-1-DKP-00 to remove a single DKP port from a Call Pick-Up group.
• 3902-2-DKP-DKP-00 to remove a range of DKP ports from a Call Pick-Up group.
• 3902-*-00 to remove all DKP ports from a Call Pick-Up group.
To select a Station Type for a DKP Port, refer the ETERNITY Hospitality System Manual.
• For Advanced Configuration of the DKP Ports, use the following commands:
To assign a Personal Directory to a DKP Port, dial:
• 1906-1-DKP-Personal Directory to assign directory to a single DKP port.
• 1906-2-DKP-DKP- Personal Directory to assign the same directory to a range of DKP ports.
• 1906-*-Personal Directory to assign the same directory to all DKP ports.
Where,
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 475
DKP is the Software Port number of the DKP port from 001 to 128.
Personal Directory number is from 01 to 50.
To clear the Personal Directory assigned to a DKP Port, dial:
• 1906-1-DKP-00 to clear the directory of a single DKP port.
• 1906-2-DKP-DKP-00 to clear the directory of a range of DKP ports.
• 1906-*-00 to clear the directory from all DKP ports.
To define the Priority for a DKP Port, dial:
• 3912-1-DKP-Priority to define Priority for a single DKP port.
• 3912-2-DKP-DKP-Priority to define the same Priority for a range of DKP ports.
• 3912-*-Priority to define the same Priority for all DKP ports.
Where,
DKP is the Software Port number of the DKP port from 001 to 128.
Priority is from 1 to 9. Default: 5
To select CO CLIP Pattern for a DKP Port, dial:
• 1243-1-DKP-CO CLIP Pattern to select the CLIP Pattern for a single DKP port.
• 1243-2-DKP-DKP-CO CLIP Pattern to select the same CLIP Pattern for a range of DKP ports.
• 1243-*-CO CLIP Pattern to select the same CLIP Pattern for all DKP ports.
Where,
DKP is the Software Port number of the DKP port from 001 to 128.
CO CLIP Pattern is
1 for Name only
2 for Number only
3 for Number+Name
Default: Number+Name
To select Language for a DKP port, dial:
• 1224-1-DKP-Language to select language for a single DKP port.
• 1224-2-DKP-DKP-Language to select the same language for a range of DKP ports.
• 1224-*-Language to select the same language for all DKP ports.
Where,
DKP is the Software Port number of the DKP port from 001 to 128.
Language is
1 for English
2 for Français
3 for Deutsch
4 for Español
5 for Português
6 for Italian
Default: English
To select Ringer Mode for a DKP Port, dial:
• 1204-1-DKP-Ringer Mode to select Ringer mode for a single DKP port.
• 1204-2-DKP-DKP-Ringer Mode to select Ringer mode for a range of DKP ports.
• 1204-*-Ringer Mode to select Ringer mode for all DKP ports.
Where,
DKP is the Software Port number of the DKP port from 001 to 128.
Ringer Mode is
1 for Ring Immediate
2 for Ring if Idle
3 for Ring after Delay
4 for Ring OFF
476 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Default: Ring Immediate
To select Ring Delay Timer for a DKP Port, dial:
• 1205-1-DKP-Ring Delay Timer to select Delay Timer for a single DKP port.
• 1205-2-DKP-DKP- Ringer Delay Timer to select Delay Timer for a range of DKP ports.
• 1205-*- Ringer Delay Timer to select Delay Timer for all DKP ports.
Where,
DKP is the Software Port number of the DKP port from 001 to 128.
Ring Delay Timer is 01 to 99 seconds. Default: 10 seconds.
To set the Acknowledgement Mode, dial:
• 1206-1-DKP-Ringer Auto Acknowledge Mode to select mode for a single DKP port.
• 1206-2-DKP-DKP-Ringer Auto Acknowledge Mode to select the same mode for a range of DKP
ports.
• 1206-*-Ringer Auto Acknowledge Mode to select the same mode for all DKP ports.
Where,
DKP is the Software Port number of the DKP port from 001 to 128.
Ringer Auto Acknowledge Mode is
0 for OFF
1 for ON
To set the Ringer Auto Acknowledge Timer, dial:
• 1207-1-DKP-Ringer Auto Acknowledge Timer to set Timer for a single DKP port.
• 1207-2-DKP-DKP-Ringer Auto Acknowledge Timer to set the same Time for a range of DKP ports.
• 1207-*-Ringer Auto Acknowledge Timer to set the same Time for all DKP ports.
Where,
DKP is the Software Port number of the DKP port from 001 to 128.
Ringer Auto Acknowledge Timer is from 01 to 99 seconds. Default: 00.
To select Destination for 'Play Ring ON' for a DKP Port, dial:
• 1220-1-DKP-Ring Destination to select Play Ring ON destination for a single DKP port.
• 1220-2-DKP-DKP-Ring Destination to select the same Play Ring ON destination for a range of DKP
ports.
• 1220-*-Ring Destination to select the same Play Ring ON destination for all DKP ports.
Where,
DKP is the Software Port number of the DKP port from 001 to 128.
Ring Destination is
1 for Play Ring on Speaker Phone
2 for Play Ring on Headset
To select Ring Tune for a DKP Port, dial:
• 1202-1-DKP-Ring Tune to select a Tune for a single DKP port.
• 1202-2-DKP-DKP-Ring Tune to select the same Tune for a range of DKP ports.
• 1202-*-Ring Tune to select the same Tune for all DKP ports.
Where,
DKP is the Software Port number of the DKP port from 001 to 128.
Ringer Tune is from 0 to 9. Default: 1.
To set Ringer Volume for a DKP Port, dial:
• 1203-1-DKP-Ringer Volume to set Ringer Volume for a single DKP port.
• 1203-2-DKP-DKP-Ringer Volume to set the same volume level for a range of DKP ports.
• 1203-*-Ringer Volume to set the same volume level for all DKP ports.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 477
Where,
DKP is the Software Port number of the DKP port from 001 to 128.
Ringer Volume is from 0 to 9. Default: 5.
Setting Ringer Volume to '0' will cause the DKP volume to be turned OFF.
To set Handset Transmit (Tx) Volume Level for a DKP, dial:
• 1208-1-DKP-Handset MIC Volume Level to set transmit volume for a single DKP port.
• 1208-2-DKP-DKP-Handset MIC Volume Level to set the same transmit volume level for a range of
DKP ports.
• 1208-*-Handset MIC Volume Level to set the same transmit volume level for all DKP ports.
Where,
DKP is the Software Port number of the DKP port from 001 to 128.
Handset MIC Volume Level is from 0 to 9. Default: 5.
Setting volume level to '0' will cause the Handset MIC volume to be turned OFF.
To set Handset Receive (Rx) Volume Level for a DKP, dial:
• 1209-1-DKP-Handset Speaker Volume Level to set receive volume for a single DKP port.
• 1209-2-DKP-DKP-Handset Speaker Volume Level to set the same receive volume level for a range
of DKP ports.
• 1209-*-Handset Speaker Volume Level to set the same receive volume level for all DKP ports.
Where,
DKP is the Software Port number of the DKP port from 001 to 128.
Handset Speaker Volume Level from 0 to 9. Default: 5.
Setting volume level to '0' will cause the Handset Speaker volume to be turned OFF.
To set Headset Transmit (Tx) Transmit Volume Level for a DKP, dial:
• 1222-1-DKP-Headset MIC Volume Level to set receive volume for a single DKP port.
• 1222-2-DKP-DKP- Headset MIC Volume Level to set the same receive volume level for a range of
DKP ports.
• 1222-*- Headset MIC Volume Level to set the same receive volume level for all DKP ports.
Where,
DKP is the Software Port number of the DKP port from 001 to 128.
Headset MIC Volume Level is from 0 to 9. Default: 5.
To set Headset Receive (Rx) Volume Level for a DKP, dial:
• 1223-1-DKP-Headset Speaker Volume Level to set receive volume for a single DKP port.
• 1223-2-DKP-DKP- Headset Speaker Volume Level to set the same receive volume level for a range
of DKP ports.
• 1223-*- Headset Speaker Volume Level to set the same receive volume level for all DKP ports.
Where,
DKP is the Software Port number of the DKP port from 001 to 128.
Headset Speaker Volume Level is from 0 to 9. Default: 5.
To set Hands-free Transmit (Tx) Volume Level for a DKP, dial:
• 1210-1-DKP-Speaker Phone MIC Volume Level to set volume level for a single DKP port.
• 1210-2-DKP-DKP-Speaker Phone MIC Volume Level to set the same volume level for a range of
DKP ports.
• 1210-*-Speaker Phone MIC Volume Level to set the same volume level for all DKP ports.
478 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Where,
DKP is the Software Port number of the DKP port from 001 to 128.
Speaker Phone MIC Volume Level from 0 to 9. Default: 5.
Setting volume level to '0' will cause the Speaker Phone MIC volume to be turned OFF.
To set Hands-free Receive (Rx) Volume Level for a DKP, dial:
• 1211-1-DKP-Speaker Phone Speaker Volume Level to set volume level for a single DKP port.
• 1211-2-DKP-DKP-Speaker Phone Speaker Volume Level to set the same volume level for a range of
DKP ports.
• 1211-*-Speaker Phone Speaker Volume Level to set the same volume level for all DKP ports.
Where,
DKP is the Software Port number of the DKP port from 001 to 128.
Speaker Phone Speaker Volume is from 0 to 9. Default: 5.
To set Key Click Volume Level for a DKP, dial:
• 1212-1-DKP-Key Click Volume to set volume level for a single DKP port.
• 1212-2-DKP-DKP-Key Click Volume to set the same volume level for a range of DKP ports.
• 1212-*-Key Click Volume to set the same volume level for all DKP ports.
Where,
DKP is the Software Port number of the DKP port from 001 to 128.
Key Click Volume Level is from 0 to 9. Default: 5.
To enable/disable DTMF Generation Flag for a DKP, dial:
• 1241-1-DKP-DTMF Generation to enable/disable the flag for a single DKP port.
• 1241-2-DKP-DKP-DTMF Generation to enable/disable the flag for a range of DKP ports.
• 1241-*-DTMF Generation to enable/disable the flag for all DKP ports.
Where,
DKP is the Software Port number of the DKP port from 001 to 128.
DTMF Generation is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Enable.
To set DTMF Transmit Level for a DKP, dial:
• 1218-1-DKP-DTMF Transmit Level to set Transmit level for a single DKP port.
• 1218-2-DKP-DKP-DTMF Transmit Level to set Transmit level for a range of DKP ports.
• 1218-*-DTMF Transmit Level to set Transmit level for all DKP ports.
Where,
DKP is the Software Port number of the DKP port from 001 to 128.
DTMF Transmit Level is 0 to 9. Default: 5.
To enable/disable Headset Connectivity for a DKP, dial:
• 1213-1-DKP-Headset Connectivity Flag to enable/disable the flag for a single DKP port.
• 1213-2-DKP-DKP-Headset Connectivity Flag to enable/disable the flag for a range of DKP ports.
• 1213-*-Headset Connectivity Flag to enable/disable the flag for all DKP ports.
Where,
DKP is the Software Port number of the DKP port from 001 to 128.
Headset Connectivity Flag is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Disabled
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 479
To enable/disable Auto Answer for a DKP, dial:
• 1214-1-DKP-Auto Call Answer Mode to enable/disable Auto Answer for a single DKP port.
• 1214-2-DKP-DKP-Auto Call Answer Mode to enable/disable Auto Answer for a range of DKP ports.
• 1214-*-Auto Call Answer Mode to enable/disable Auto Answer for all DKP ports.
Where,
DKP is the Software Port number of the DKP port from 001 to 128.
Auto Call Answer Mode is
1 for OFF (manual)
0 for ON (auto)
Default: OFF
To set Auto Answer Timer (sec) for a DKP, dial:
• 1215-1-DKP-Auto Call Answer Timer to set Timer for a single DKP port.
• 1215-2-DKP-DKP-Auto Call Answer Timer to set the same Timer duration for a range of DKP ports.
• 1215-*-Auto Call Answer Timer to set the same Timer duration for all DKP ports.
Where,
DKP is the Software Port number of the DKP port from 001 to 128.
Auto Call Answer Timer is from 1 to 9 seconds. Default: 3 seconds.
To set LCD Back Light Level of a DKP, dial:
• 1216-1-DKP-LCD Backlight Level to set brightness of a single DKP.
• 1216-2-DKP-DKP-LCD Backlight Level to set the same brightness level for a range of DKPs.
• 1216-*-LCD Backlight Level to set the same brightness level for all DKPs.
Where,
DKP is the Software Port number of the DKP port from 001 to 128.
Backlight Level is Brightness level from 1 to 4. Default: 3
To change LCD Backlight OFF Timer of a DKP, dial:
• 1219-1-DKP-LCD Backlight OFF Timer to change the timer for a single DKP.
• 1219-2-DKP-DKP-LCD Backlight OFF Timer to set the same timer duration for a range of DKPs.
• 1219-*-LCD Backlight OFF Timer to set the same timer duration for all DKPs.
Where,
DKP is the Software Port number of the DKP port from 001 to 128.
Backlight OFF Timer is from 000-999 seconds. Default: 010 seconds.
To change LCD Contrast Level of a DKP, dial:
• 1217-1-DKP-LCD Contrast Level to set the Contrast level for a single DKP
• 1217-2-DKP-DKP-LCD Contrast Level to set the same Contrast level for a range of DKPs.
• 1217-*-LCD Contrast Level to set the same Contrast level for all DKPs.
Where,
DKP is the Software Port number of the DKP port from 001 to 128.
LCD Contrast Level is from 1 to 4. Default: 3.
To assign Hardware Slot-Port to DSS connected to a DKP, dial:
• 1103-DKP-DSS-Slot-Port offset on the card
Where,
DKP is the Software Port number of the DKP port from 001 to 128.
DSS is 1 for the first DSS Console and 2 for the second DSS Console attached to the DKP
Slot is the number of the Universal Slot in which the DKP card is located, to which the DSS Console is
connected, from 01 to 16.
Port is the number of the hardware port on the card on which the DSS Console is connected.
480 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To clear the hardware Slot-Port assigned to the DSS software port, dial:
• 1103-DKP-DSS-00-00
To change Rx Gain and Tx Gains at SIP Trunks/SIP Extensions, dial:
• 1231-1-DKP-Rx Gain Code
• 8042-1-DKP-Tx Gain Code
Where,
DKP is the number of the DKP Software Port, from 001 to 128.
Rx and Tx Gain is 01 to 63 dB: Default: 36
For Rx and Tx Gain at SIP codes, see the tables below.
• Exit SE mode.
The DKP parameters described above are set by the System Engineer.
• In addition to these parameters, the users of the DKP can change several phone settings according
their preferences and requirement. These are referred to as DKP Personal Settings and include:
• Ringer Volume
• Ringer Tune
• Ringer Mode
• Ringer Acknowledge Mode
• Speech Volume (Transmit/Receive)
• Time Zone (Working Hour/Break Hour/Non-working Hour)
• User Status (Present/Absent)
• Keypad Security (Lock/Open)
• Call Answer Type - Manual/Auto
• Headset/Handset Connectivity option
To be able change the DKP personal settings, the DKP users must access and navigate the phone menu.
Refer “Digital Key Phone-Operation”.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 481
DSS Keys Programming
Key Templates
EON, the proprietary digital key phone (DKP) of Matrix and SETU VP248, the Extended IP Phone of Matrix, can be
the extension of the Operators and Executives in an enterprise, and in hotels, it can be the extension of the Front
Desk Attendants and Guests.
Each of these groups of users may require a different set of features on their phones. For example, when EON/
SETU is an Operator's extension, for efficient call management, more DSS keys may be required for Trunk Access,
Call Appearances, Call Release, Direct Station (DKP/SLT) Calling, than for accessing features.
When EON/SETU is an Executive's extension, more DSS keys may be required for single-touch access to
features, and fewer keys for Trunk Access and Direct Station Calling.
Similarly, when EON/SETU is a Hotel Attendant's extension, keys are required for specific hotel functions such as
Check-In/Check-Out, Changing Room Clean Status, Room Shift, etc. But, a different set of keys with special
functions are required when EON/SETU is provided as a guest extension, because guests are allowed only a
limited number of features of the ETERNITY, such as calling the Front Desk/Floor Service, setting Do Not Disturb,
Wake-up Calls, Call Forward, and checking Voice Mail.
Given the varying requirements of these groups of extension users, ETERNITY provides programmable Templates
of Key Maps for the Operator, Executive, Hotel Attendant, and Hotel Guest.
The default Key Maps in these Templates can be customized to match the requirement of the intended user group.
The customized Template is assigned to the DKPs/Extended IP Phones. For example, you may customize the Key
Template for the Operator and assign it to the Operator DKPs. Likewise, you may customize the Key Template for
Executive and assign it to the Executive extensions.
The default Key Maps vary according to the model of the DKP/Extended IP Phone in use, as illustrated below.
The keys in the Key Templates are numbered only for the purpose of locating the keys when programming.
Key numbers do not appear on the key labels on the phone body.
482 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
EON42 Key Templates (default)
Operator/Executive Hotel Attendant Guest
Key Label Label Key Key Label Label Key Key Label Label Key
01 DKP4 SLT3 13 01 RV-Alarm Print RS 13 01 Operator Alarm VG 13
02 DKP3 SLT2 14 02 Floor Ser Print AS 14 02 Floor Ser Retrv Msg 14
03 DKP2 SLT1 15 03 MsgWait Clean 15 03 MACRO-4 Missed Call 15
04 DKP1 ACB-Set 16 04 R-Forward ACB-Set 16 04 Voice Mail DND 16
05 TWT4 3PConf 17 05 R-DND 3PConf 17 05 Voice Help ACB-Set 17
06 TWT3 CallFwd 18 06 R-Budget CallFwd 18 06 SLT1 3PConf 18
07 TWT2 Name 19 07 Call Block Name 19 07 DKP2 CallFwd 19
08 TWT1 AR-Set 20 08 Voice Mail Redial 20 08 DKP1 Name 20
09 CA 1 Redial 21 09 Retrv Msg Release 21 09 TWT2 Redial 21
10 CA 2 Release 22 10 TWT1 BT VMS 22 10 TWT1 Release 22
11 CA 3 Transfer 23 11 CA 2 Transfer 23 11 CA 2 Transfer 23
12 CA 4 Hold 24 12 CA 1 Hold 24 12 CA 1 Hold 24
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
4 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 6
7 8 9 7 8 9 7 8 9
* 0 # * 0 # * 0 #
25 25 25
All keys, including Speaker Key are equipped with LED.
EON48 Key Templates (default)
Operator/Executive Hotel Attendant Guest
Voice Mail ACB Set Cancel Mute 3PConf Transfer Voice Mail ACB Set Cancel Mute 3PConf Transfer Voice Mail ACB Set Cancel Mute 3PConf Transfer
17 18 19 23 24 25 17 18 19 23 24 25 17 18 19 23 24 25
20 21 22 26 27 28 20 21 22 26 27 28 20 21 22 26 27 28
CallFwd DND Names Redial Release Hold CallFwd DND Names Redial Release Hold CallFwd DND Names Redial Release Hold
01 09 2 01 09 2 01 09 2
1 abc 3 def 1 abc 3 def 1 abc 3 def
02 10 02 10 02 10
4 ghi 5 jkl 6 mno 4 ghi 5 jkl 6 mno 4 ghi 5 jkl 6 mno
03 11 03 11 03 11
04 12 7 pqrs 8 tuv 9 wxyz 04 12 7 pqrs 8 tuv 9 wxyz 04 12 7 pqrs 8 tuv 9 wxyz
Retrv
05 CA 4 13 05 13 05 DKP2 13
Msg.
06 CA 3 14 * 0 #
06 CA 3 14 * 0 #
06 DKP1 14 * 0 #
07 CA 2 15 07 CA 2 15 07 CA 2 15
08 CA 1 16 29 08 CA 1 16 29 08 CA 1 16 29
There is no LED on the following key numbers:
• 19 (Cancel)
• 22 (Names)
• 24 (Conference)
• 25 (Transfer)
• 26 (Redial)
• 27 (Release)
• 28 (Hold)
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 483
EONSOFT Key Template (default)
Matrix Extended IP Phone, SETU VP248 Key Template (default)
Operator/Executive Hotel Attendant Guest
Voice Mail ACB Set Cancel Mute 3PConf Transfer Voice Mail ACB Set Cancel Mute 3PConf Transfer Voice Mail ACB Set Cancel Mute 3PConf Transfer
17 18 19 23 24 25 17 18 19 23 24 25 17 18 19 23 24 25
20 21 22 26 27 28 20 21 22 26 27 28 20 21 22 26 27 28
CallFwd DND Names Redial Release Hold CallFwd DND Names Redial Release Hold CallFwd DND Names Redial Release Hold
Local Local
01 09 01 09 01 09
Menu 1 2 abc 3 def Menu 1 2 abc 3 def 1 2 abc 3 def
02 10 02 10 02 10
4 ghi 5 jkl 6 mno 4 ghi 5 jkl 6 mno 4 ghi 5 jkl 6 mno
03 11 03 11 03 11
04 12 7 pqrs 8 tuv 9 wxyz 04 12 7 pqrs 8 tuv 9 wxyz 04 12 7 pqrs 8 tuv 9 wxyz
Retrv
05 CA 4 13 05 13 05 DKP2 13
Msg.
06 CA 3 14 * 0 #
06 CA 3 14 * 0 #
06 DKP1 14 * 0 #
07 CA 2 15 07 CA 2 15 07 CA 2 15
08 CA 1 16 29 08 CA 1 16 29 08 CA 1 16 29
By using Key Templates you can prepare and assign common key maps to all or as many DKPs and Extended IP
Phones as you want, at one go.
ETERNITY also offers the flexibility to personalize the Key Maps of each DKP/Extended IP Phone, instead of using
the Key Templates. For example, if you have assigned a common Executive Key Template to 12 DKPs, but you
want to reassign some of the keys on two of these DKPs, ETERNITY allows you to selectively personalize the key
maps of these two DKPs.
484 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The Key Templates can be customized using Jeeves as well as a Telephone.
• Before you begin programming the keys,
• List the features/facilities that you want to change in each of the existing (default) Key Templates of
Operator, Executive, Hotel Attendant, and Guest.
• Create customized Key Templates on sheets of paper.
• For each template, decide the keys that will be reassigned the features you listed.
• You may use the key templates printed above to decide the position of keys.
• For each template that you customize, list down the DKPs which will be assigned the template,
along with their Software port numbers and their corresponding Hardware Slot and Port Offset.
Similarly list Extended IP Phones along with their Software port numbers (SIP Extension numbers)
and VoIP Port numbers.
• Similarly, list the DKPs and the Extended IP Phones which are to be assigned personalized Key
Maps, along with their Software port numbers and their corresponding Hardware Slot and Port
Offset.
Illustrated below is an example of a customized Operator's Template for the EON48 model:
This customized Template is to be applied on 2 Operator DKPs:
• DKP-001, connected on H/w Slot-Port - 17-01
• DKP-002, connected on H/w Slot-Port - 17-02
You can customize the key template and assign it to DKPs using Jeeves or a Telephone.
EON48 and SETU VP248 have 12 Touch-sense feature keys. While you can reassign the features on
these keys, you cannot re-label the keys. Avoid reassigning features on touch-sense keys.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 485
Customizing Key Templates using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the 'Key Template' link to open the page.
• The links to the default key templates for Operator, Executive, Hotel Attendant and Guests for EONSOFT,
each model of EON and the Matrix Extended IP Phone appear on your screen.
• Select the Key Template you want to customize according to the model of EON/Extended IP Phone in use,
by clicking the respective link. In case you have more than one model of EON, you may customize the
desired Key Template for each model.
Let us attempt to program the sample Operator template we customized earlier for EON48.
• Click the 'Operator' template link of EON48.The Operator Key template for EON48 will appear on your
screen.
486 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Refer the key template we customized on paper. As per the customized template the keys to be
reassigned features are as follows:
Existing function on the key To be replaced by
DKP4 Trunk to Trunk Transfer (T-T Xfer)
DKP3 SA Command for “Remote DND”
DKP2 DND-Override
SLT4 Mobile Trunk 1 (MOBILE1)
SLT3 SIP Trunk 1 (SIP1)
SLT2 BRI Trunk 1 (BRI 1)
SLT1 T1E1 Channel Number 2 of T1E1 Trunk 1
• To assign Trunk to Trunk Transfer, click the DKP4 key. A new window opens.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 487
• As Trunk to Trunk Transfer is a feature, in the ‘Select Function Type’ list, click ‘Feature''.
All features that can be assigned to keys will appear in the 'Select Offset' list.
488 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• In the ‘Select Offset’ list, click 'Trunk to Trunk Call Transfer'.
• Click on 'OK' in the dialog box. The box will close.
• The 'Trunk to Trunk Call Transfer' feature will appear in abbreviated form as ‘T-T Xfer’ on the key label.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 489
• To assign Remote DND, click DKP3 key.
• As Remote DND is an SA Command, select the option 'SA Command' in the Select Function Type list.
490 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• In the ‘Select Offset’ list, click 'Set DND for remote station'.
• Click OK. The window closes. The Remote DND feature appears in abbreviated form as ‘R-DND’ on the
key label.
• Repeat these steps to reassign other keys, selecting the appropriate Function Type and the Offset for each
feature/function.
For example, DND-Override is a feature, so select 'Feature' as the function type.
To assign direct access to Mobile Trunk 1, select “Mobile” as function type and '01' as Offset.
To assign direct access to SIP Trunk 1, select “SIP” as function type and '01' as Offset.
To assign direct access to BRI Trunk 1, select “BRI” as function type and ‘01’ as Offset. When you select
BRI as function type, you will be asked to ‘Select Channel’. Since you do not want to assign direct access
to any particular BRI channel of this trunk, retain the option ‘All Channels” for ‘Select Channel’.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 491
To assign direct access to Channel Number 2 or T1E1 Trunk 1, select 'T1E1' as function type, '01' as
Offset.
When you select T1E1, as function type, you will be given the ‘Select Channel’ option. Since you want to
assign direct access to Channel 2 of T1E1 Trunk 1, select the option ‘Channel 2’ in the ‘Select Channel’
list.
Always click 'OK' when you select a Function Type and Offset.
• When you have completed assigning functions to keys, click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save
your settings.
• Follow the same steps to program the other Key Templates.
• Assign the key templates you created to the respective DKPs.
To take the above example further, the Operator key template customized for EON48 is to be assigned to
the DKPs 001 and 002. To do this,
• Click the 'DKP Parameters' link to open the page.
• Scroll with the horizontal bar to reach the parameter 'Key Map' of this DKP 001.
• Select 'Operator’s Template' as the key map.
• Similarly, for DKP-002, select 'Operator' as the key map.
• Click 'Submit'.
• Also refer the topic “Configuring DKP Parameters using Jeeves” for instructions on assigning the
Key Map in the DKP Parameters.
Customizing Key Templates using a Telephone
When customizing key templates using a Telephone, two attributes of a key must be programmed, namely:
a. Location - the physical location of the key on the phone body.
b. Function - the function that the key should perform, that is, as direct access to a feature or an SLT or DKP
station, a trunk type, an SA command, etc.
Follow the numbering of keys on the default Key Maps illustrated earlier in this topic.
492 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To assign a feature to a key in a Template, dial:
• 1261-1-Key Template-Terminal Type-Key Number-Function Type-Function Number-Channel
To assign the same feature to the same key number in a range of templates, dial:
• 1261-2-Key Template-Key Template-Terminal Type-Key Number-Function Type-Function
Number-Channel
To assign the same feature to the same key number in all the templates, dial:
• 1261-*-Terminal Type-Key Number-Function Type-Function Number-Channel
Where,
Key Template is
1 for Operator
2 for Executive
3 for Hotel Attendant
4 for Guest
Terminal Type is
1 for EON45/EONSOFT
2 for EON42
3 for EON48
4 for EON48E
5 for EON48E Turret
6 for SETU VP248
Key Number is the number of the key which is to be reassigned the feature.
Key Numbers on EONSOFT are from 01 to 25
Key Numbers on EON42 are from 01 to 25
Key Numbers on EON48 are from 01 to 29.
Key Numbers on SETU VP248 are from 01 to 29.
For numbering of the keys, refer the default Key Maps illustrated at the beginning of this topic.
Function Type is the function to be performed by the key, from 00 to 34.
Function Number defines the exact function under each Function Type selected for the key.
Channel is the number of the channel in the BRI or PRI Line to be accessed.
Channel number for BRI Line is
01 for Channel 1
02 for Channel 2
00 for both Channels
Channel number for PRI Line is
01 to 30 for Channels 1 to 30 respectively.
00 for all Channels
Channel number for all function types other than BRI and PRI is 00
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 493
Refer the tables below for the complete list of function types and function numbers, and channel
numbers.
Table: Function Types and Function Numbers
Function Function
Meaning Meaning
Type Number
00 None - -
01 SLT (Direct Station 001 to 512 Number of the SLT (software) port which is to be
Call) called when the key is pressed.
02 DKP (Direct Station 001 to 128 Number of the DKP (software) which is to be called
Call) when the key is pressed.
03 TWT (Direct Trunk 001 to 128 Number of the TWT (software) port which is to be
Access) called when the key is pressed.
04 BRI (Direct Trunk 001 to 032 Number of the BRI (software) port which is to be called
Access and Direct when the key is pressed.
BRI Channel
Access) Number of the Channel in the BRI Line, which is to be
accessed when the key is pressed.
Channel numbers are:
01 for BRI Channel 1
02 for BRI Channel 2
00 for both Channels
05 T1E1 (Direct Trunk 001 to 008 Number of the T1E1 (software) port which is to be
Access and Direct called when the key is pressed.
PRI Channel
Access) Number of the Channel in the PRI Line which is to be
accessed when the key is pressed.
Channel numbers are:
01 for T1E1 Channel 1
02 for T1E1 Channel 2
03 for T1E1 Channel 3
:
:
30 for T1E1 Channel 30
00 for all Channels
06 E&M (Direct Trunk/ 001 to 128 Number of the E&M (software) port which is to be
Station Access) called when the key is pressed.
11 DEPTGRP (Direct 01 to 16 Number of the Department Group which is to be
Station Call) called when the key is pressed.
12 QCKDIAL 001 to 999 The Global Directory Index number on which the
(Abbreviated External Number is stored. Call will be made to that
Dialing) External Number when this key is pressed
13 LOOP (Loop Count 01 to 10 The number of Call Appearance/Call Loop which will
or Call Capacity) be accessed when the key is pressed.
494 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Function Function
Meaning Meaning
Type Number
14 MACRO 01 to 25 The number string of the Key Board Macro which will
be dialed when the key is pressed. Refer “Key Board
Macro”
15 TAC (Direct Trunk 1 to 6 The Trunk Access Code that will be dialed when the
Access) key is pressed.
18 FEATURE (Direct 01 to 81 The feature that will be invoked when the key is
Feature Access) pressed. For a complete list of features, refer the
“Table: “Function Type 18: Features””.
21 VMSGRP (Direct 1 The Voicemail System Port to be dialed when the
VMS Group key is pressed.
Access)
22 SA Command 001 to 173 The SA Command to be invoked when the key is
(Direct Dialing of pressed. For a complete list of SA Commands, refer
SA Command) the “Table: “Function Type 22: SA Commands””.
24 DKPSPLKY 01 to 15 The Special Digits to be dialed when the key is
(Special Functions pressed. For a complete list of Special Keys, refer
of DKP) the “Table: “Function Type 24: Special Keys””.
25 MOBILE (Direct 01 to 32 The number of the Mobile Port to be accessed when
Trunk Access) the key is pressed.
26 SIP (Direct Trunk 01 to 32 The number of the SIP Trunk to be accessed when
Access) the key is pressed
28 ISDN Terminal 01 to 64 The number of the ISDN Terminal (software) port
(Direct Station Call) which is to be dialed when the key is pressed.
29 Magneto (Direct 001 to 128 The number of the Magneto (software) port to be
Station Call) dialed when the key is pressed.
31 ROOM (Direct 001 to 512 The number of the Hotel Room to be dialed when the
Station Call) key is pressed.
33 Door Phone (Direct 1 to 3 The Door Phone port to be called when the key is
Station Call) pressed.
34 SIP Extension 001 to 500 The number of the SIP Extension to be dialed when
(Direct Access) the key is pressed.
Table: “Function Type 18: Features”
Feature Name Function Number DSS LED Activity?
Enter SE Mode 01
Enter SA Mode 02
Call Pick Up-General 03
Call Pick Up-Selective 04
Auto Call Back 05 Yes
Cancel Auto Call Back 06
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 495
Feature Name Function Number DSS LED Activity?
Redial 07
Auto Redial 08 Yes
Cancel Auto Redial 09
Personal Directory Programming 10
Directory Dialing (Global + Personal) 11
Operator Dialing 12
Call Forward/Call Follow Me 13 Yes
Dynamic Lock 14
Hot Line 15
Alarm 16
Do Not Disturb 17 Yes
Interrupt Request 18
Barge-In 19
Raid 20
Trunk Reservation 21
Call Toggle 22
Conference- 3 Party 23 Yes
Trunk - to - Trunk Transfer 24
Conference-Multi Party 25
Call Park 26
Retrieve Parked Call 27
Room Monitor 28
Last Caller Recall 29
Voice Help 30
Walk-In Class Of Service 31
Change User Password 32
Page Zone 33
DISA Log In Code 34
Trunk Release (Trunk-to-Trunk Speech) 35
Cancel All Features 36
Selective Port Access Code 37
Flashing on Trunk 38
Change User Status 39
Account Code by Number 40
496 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Feature Name Function Number DSS LED Activity?
Account Code by Name 41
Background Music 42
Meet Me Paging 43
Hot Desk 44
DND Override 45
Presence Status 46 Yes
VMS Live Call Screening 47
VMS Conversation Recording 48
Forced Release 49
Hold 50
Live Call Supervision 51
Forced Answer 52
Maid Status 53
Guest Number 54
Minibar Details 55
Mute 56 Yes
Emergency Conference 57
Self Ring Test 58
Set Chain Party 59
SA Command 60
Second Trunk Access Code 61
Floor Service 62
Keypad Lock DKP 63 Yes
CLIR 64 Yes
Call Cost Display (CCD) 65
Reminder 66
Voice Guided Alarm 67
Voice Guided Reminder 68
Blind Transfer to Mailbox (VMS) 69
Message Wait Set 70
Message Wait Retrieval 71
User Definable Field 72
Door Phone - Mode Selection (Scheduled / Manual) 73
Door Phone - Manual Mode (Local (RG) / Remote
74
(External Number)
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 497
Feature Name Function Number DSS LED Activity?
Opening a Door 75
DOP (ON / OFF) 76
MRE (Magneto Ring Enable) 77
RCOC Invoke 78
Scheduled Call Forward 79 Yes
Manual Priority Intrusion (MFC R2) 80
Forced Release Order (MFC R2) 81
Call Forward for Department Group 82
Table: “Function Type 22: SA Commands”
SA Command Name Function Number DSS LED Activity?
Check-In 001
Check-Out 002
Guest Name 003
Guest Group 004
Guest-In/Out 005
Guest Title 006
Change Check-In Profile of Room 007
Change Occupancy Status of Room / Extension 008
Change Clean status of Room/Extension 009
Room Shift 010
Reprint Check Out Report 011
Print Room Status Report 012
Print Alarm Status Report 013
Delete Checked Out calls 014
Set DND-Remote 015
Set Dynamic Lock settings - Remote 016
Set Alarm -Remote 017
Assign Call Budget to a station 018
Assign / un-assign Mailbox to a Station - Remote 019
Set Call Forward - Remote 020
Set Call Forward for all Stations - Remote 021
Assign Station User Greeting Message 022
Display & Acknowledge System Activity 023 Yes
Display & Acknowledge System Fault 024 Yes
498 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
SA Command Name Function Number DSS LED Activity?
Station Budget Display - Remote 025
Change User Password of a Station - Remote 026
Lock/unlock DKP's Keypad - Remote 027
User Absent / Present - Remote 028
Change SA password 029
Change SA mode timer 030
Display Registered GSM Network ID 031
Set Day/Night mode 032 Yes
Switch OFF DOP manually 033
Switch ON DOP manually 034
Terminate Security dialing 035
Clear System Activity Log 036
Start/Abort SAL in Offline mode 037
Start/Abort SAL in Online mode 038
- 039
Cancel Dial in Conference 040
Start/Abort SFL in Offline mode 041
Start/Abort SFL in Online mode 042
Display Port Parameters 043
Start/Abort Online OG Report 044
OG Print Filter: Print calls originated from station(s) 045
OG Print Filter: To Print calls terminated from TWT 046
OG Print Filter: To Print calls terminated from BRI 047
OG Print Filter: To Print calls terminated from DS1 048
OG Print Filter: To Print calls terminated from E&M 049
OG Print Filter: To Print calls terminated from Mobile 050
OG Print Filter: To Print calls terminated from SIP 051
OG Print Filter: To Print calls Department Bill Group wise 052
OG Print Filter: To print calls made on date(s) 053
OG Print Filter: Print calls made between time 054
OG Print Filter: To Print calls made to numbers matching with 055
the numbers programmed in the Number List
OG Print Filter: To Print calls of Duration more than this time 056
OG Print Filter: To Print calls of Units more than the units 057
programmed
OG Print Filter: To Print calls made to account code 058
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 499
SA Command Name Function Number DSS LED Activity?
Assign default OG Print filters 059
Start/Abort offline report 060
Enable/ Disable OG Schedule Reports 061
Program Time for Daily OG Scheduled Reports 062
Program Day and Time for OG Weekly Scheduled Reports 063
Program Date and Time for OG Monthly Scheduled Reports 064
Delete calls made by station(s) 065
Delete calls made on/from date 066
Clear SMDR OG buffer 067
Start/Abort Internal calls Report 068
Set filter to print Internal calls Report Station wise 069
Set filter to print internal calls with duration greater than that 070
given here
Start/Abort Offline Internal Call Report 071
Enable/ Disable Internal Scheduled Reports 072
Program Time for Internal Daily Scheduled Reports 073
Program Day and Time for Internal Weekly Scheduled Reports 074
Program Date and Time for Internal Monthly Scheduled Reports 075
Clear SMDR Internal Buffer 076
Start/Abort Online - IC Report 077
Set filter to print all Normal calls 078
Set filter to print all DID calls 079
Set filter to print all Unanswered calls 080
Set filter to print all DID Unanswered calls 081
Set filter to print all DISA calls 082
Set filter to print all calls with speech duration More than timer 083
Set filter to print all calls unanswered for duration More than 084
timer
Set filter to print all calls kept on hold for duration more than 085
timer
Set filter to print all IC calls received by the station 086
Set filter to print all IC calls recd. On the TWT 087
Set filter to print all IC calls recd. On the BRI 088
Set filter to print all IC calls recd. On the T1E1 089
Set filter to print all IC calls recd. On the E&M 090
Set filter to print all IC calls from Mobile 091
500 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
SA Command Name Function Number DSS LED Activity?
Set filter to print calls received from SIP 092
Set filter to print all IC calls recd. on/from date 093
Set filter to print all IC calls recd. at/from-to Time 094
Set filter to print all IC calls recd. From nos. matching the 095
Number List
Default IC Print filters 096
Abort/Start IC Offline Report 097
Enable/ Disable IC Scheduled Report 098
Program Time for IC Daily Scheduled Reports 099
Program Day and Time for IC Weekly Scheduled Reports 100
Program Date and Time for IC Monthly Scheduled Reports 101
Clear SMDR-IC buffer 102
Start/Abort Printing of Online DS1 Performance Report 103
Start/Abort Offline DS1 Performance Report 104
Signal Strength of Mobile Port 105
Enable/Disable Call Cost Display for a Station 106
Start/Abort Hotel/Motel Activity log in Offline mode 107
Start/Abort Hotel/Motel Activity log in Online mode 108
Display and Acknowledge Hotel/Motel Activity 109 Yes
Change Guest VIP Status of Station 110
Change Phone Ringing Pattern of Room 111
Print Reminder Status Report 112
Reminder - Remote 113
Voice Guided Alarm - Remote 114
Voice Guided Reminder - Remote 115
- 116
- 117
Enable/Disable Scheduled Alarm Report 118
Program Time for Scheduled Alarm Report 119
Enable/Disable Scheduled Reminder Report 120
Program Time for Scheduled Reminder Report 121
Request Database Synchronization to PMS 122
Enable/Disable Scheduled Room Status Report 123
Program Time for Schedule Room Status Report 124
Enable/Disable Scheduled Change of Room Clean Status 125
Program Time for Schedule Change of Room Clean Status 126
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 501
SA Command Name Function Number DSS LED Activity?
- 127
Enable/Disable Internal Call Block For Guest Phones 128 Yes
Software Version Revision Display of Master Card 129
User Definable Fields 130
OG Print Filter: To print calls originated from TWT 131
OG Print Filter: To print calls originated from BRI 132
OG Print Filter: To print calls originated from T1E1 133
OG Print Filter: To print calls originated from E&M 134
OG Print Filter: To print calls originated from Mobile 135
OG Print Filter: To print calls originated from SIP 136
OG Print Filter: To print calls originated from Magneto 137
Set Budget Type for TWT Port 138
Program Budget Amount for TWT 139
Program Free Minutes on TWT 140
Set Budget Type for DS1 Port 141
Program Budget Amount for DS1 142
Program Free Minutes on DS1 143
Set Budget Type for BRI Port 144
Program Budget Amount for BRI 145
Program Free Minutes on BRI 146
Set Budget Type for SIP 147
Program Budget Amount for SIP 148
Program Free Minutes on SIP 149
Set Budget Type for MOBILE 150
Program Budget Amount for MOBILE 151
Program Free Minutes on MOBILE 152
Call Budget Reset Mode for TWT 153
Scheduled Date to Rest Call Budget Statistics on TWT 154
Reset consumed Budget Amount /minutes on TWT manually 155
Call Budget Reset Mode for DS1 156
Scheduled Date to Reset Call Budget Statistics on DS1 157
Reset consumed Budget Amount /minutes on DS1 manually 158
Call Budget Reset Mode for BRI 159
Scheduled Date to Rest Call Budget Statistics on BRI 160
Reset consumed Budget Amount /minutes on BRI manually 161
502 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
SA Command Name Function Number DSS LED Activity?
Call Budget Reset Mode for SIP 162
Scheduled Date to Rest Call Budget Statistics on SIP 163
Reset consumed Budget Amount /minutes on SIP manually 164
Call Budget Reset Mode for MOBILE 165
Scheduled Date to Rest Call Budget Statistics on MOBILE 166
Reset consumed Budget Amount /minutes on MOBILE manually 167
Swap Ports for TWT8/SLT8 - MAG8 Card 168
Reset mobile ‘avg call dur’ & ‘ans/seizure’ 169
Set/Cancel Scheduled Call Forward 170
Start BITE Test for desired port 171
OG Print Filter: To print calls terminated from LD trunk 172
IC Print Filter: To print calls received on LD trunk 173
OG Print Filter: To print calls originated from LD 174
To Broadcast Message 175
To record a prompt for a node 176
To playback a prompt for a node 177
To record a system greetings 178
To playback a system greetings 179
To record Welcome message 180
To playback Welcome message 181
To record Time Zone greeting for a mailbox 182
To playback Time Zone greeting for a mailbox 183
To record Name of a station 184
To playback Name of a station 185
To record Voice Guidance message 186
To playback Voice Guidance message 187
Table: “Function Type 24: Special Keys”
Special Key Name Function Number DSS LED Activity?
Flash 001 No
Pause 002 No
Digit 'A’ 003 No
Digit 'B’ 004 No
Digit 'C’ 005 No
Digit 'D’ 006 No
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 503
Special Key Name Function Number DSS LED Activity?
Release 007 No
Ring Acknowledge 008 No
Enter 009 No
Dial By Name 010 No
Call Transfer 011 No
Speaker 012 Yes
Headset 013 Yes
Cancel 014 No
Answer 015 No
Examples:
Let us attempt to program the same sample Operator Template we customized earlier for EON48 using
a telephone. For this, we need to know the location of the key, i.e. the key number.
Existing function on the key To be replaced by Location of the key on the Key Map
DKP4 Trunk to Trunk Transfer (T-T Xfer) Key No. 01
DKP3 SA Command for “Remote DND” Key No. 02
DKP2 DND-Override Key No. 03
SLT4 Mobile Trunk 1 (MOBILE1) Key No. 09
SLT3 SIP Trunk 1 (SIP1) Key No. 10
SLT2 BRI Trunk 1 (BRI 1) Key No. 11
SLT1 T1E1 Channel Number 2 of T1E1 Key No. 12
Trunk 1
To assign Trunk to Trunk Transfer to the key currently assigned to DKP4 key (key 01) in the Operator
Template, dial:
• 1261-1-1-3-01-18-24-00
Where,
1 is Operator Template
3 is for EON48 Terminal
01 is the Key Number
18 is Function Type for Features
24 is Function Number for Trunk to Trunk Transfer feature.
00 is Channel.
To assign Mobile Trunk 1 in place of SLT4 on DSS key 09 on the Operator Template, dial:
• 1261-1-1-3-09-25-01-00
Where,
1 is Operator Template
3 is for EON48 Terminal
09 is the Key Number
25 is Function Type for Mobile Trunks
01 is Function Number, i.e. the port offset of the Mobile Port.
504 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
00 is Channel
To assign BRI Trunk 1 in place of SLT2 on DSS Key 11 on the Operator Template, dial:
• 1261-1-1-3-11-04-01-00
Where,
1 is Operator Template
3 is for EON48 Terminal
11 is the Key Number
04 is Function Type for BRI Trunks
01 is Function Number, i.e. number of the BRI port.
00 is Channel number.
To assign Channel 2 of T1E1 Trunk 1 in place of SLT1 on DSS Key 12 on Operator Template, dial:
• 1261-1-1-3-12-05-01-02
Where,
1 is Operator Template
3 is for EON48 Terminal
12 is the Key Number
05 is Function Type for T1E1 Trunks.
01 is Function Number, i.e. number of the T1E1 port.
02 is Channel number.
To assign a DKP Key template to a DKP, dial:
• 1221-1-DKP-DKP Key Template to assign the template to a single DKP.
• 1221-2-DKP-DKP-DKP Key Template to assign the same template to a range of DKPs
• 1221-*-DKP Key Template to assign the same template to all DKPs
Where,
DKP is number of the Software Port of the DKP to which the Template is to be assigned, from 001 to
128.
DKP Key Template is
0 for Personalized key map
1 for Operator Template
2 for Executive's Template
3 for Hotel Attendant's Template
4 for Guest Template.
For example, to assign the customized Operator Template to DKP 001 and DKP002, you may dial:
• 1221-1-001-1 to assign the template to DKP001
• 1221-1-002-1 to assign the template to DKP002
OR
• 1221-2-001-002-1 to assign the same template to both DKPs at one go.
• Exit SE Mode.
Personalizing Key Maps
You can personalize the Key Maps of individual DKPs and Extended IP Phones, instead of using the Key
Templates.
When you personalize the Key Map of a DKP, you must first select the option 'Personalized' as the Key Map in the
DKP Parameters of the DKP.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 505
Similarly, when you personalize the Key Map of an Extended IP phone, you must select ‘Personalized’ as the Key
Template in the SIP Extension Settings of the phone.
You can personalize key maps of DKPs/Extended IP Phones using Jeeves or by dialing SE commands from a
telephone connected to the ETERNITY.
Personalizing Key Map using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the 'DKP Parameters' link.
• Go to the DKP you want to assign a personalized key map, for example, DKP001.
• Select the option 'Personalized' as the 'Key Map' for the DKP.
• Click ‘Submit’ to save Key Map selection.
506 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Click the 'EON Keys’ link of the DKP.
• The current Key Map of the DKP opens.
• To assign features to keys, follow the same steps as you did for customizing the key templates.
• Click the key you want to assign the function. For example, you want 'Barge-In' on the key assigned to
DKP4, click this key.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 507
• The options for the Functions to be Performed by the key will open in a new window.
• Click the option 'Feature' in the 'Function Type' list.
• Click the option 'Barge-In' in the 'Select Offset' list.
• Click 'OK'. The window will close. The new label will appear on the key.
508 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Repeat the same steps to program another key on this key map.
• When you have completed personalizing the key map, close the window.
• Click 'Submit' to save.
• Follow the same steps to personalize the key map of another DKP.
For instructions on personalizing the Key Map of the Matrix Extended IP Phone, under Configuring SIP Extensions,
see “Matrix Extended IP Phone Settings”, “Phone Key Settings”.
Personalizing Key Maps using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode.
To assign a Personalized Key map to a DKP, dial:
• 1221-1-DKP-0 to assign personalized key map to a single DKP.
• 1221-2-DKP-DKP-0 to assign the personalized key map to a range of DKPs.
• 1221-*-0 to assign personalized key map to all DKPs.
Where,
DKP is number of the Software Port of the DKP to which the Template is to be assigned, from 001 to
128.
0 is for Personalized key map.
For example, to assign the personalized Key map to DKP 003, dial: 1221-1-003-0
To assign a function to a DKP key in a personalized key map, dial:
• 1252-1-DKP-Key Number-Function Type-Function Number-Channel to assign a function to a DKP
Key on a single DKP.
• 1252-2-DKP-DKP-Key Number-Function Type-Function Number-Channel to assign the same
function on the same key number on a range of DKPs.
• 1252-*-Key Number-Function Type-Function Number-Channel to assign the same function on the
same key number on all DKPs
Where,
DKP is the number of the Software Port of the DKP from 001 to 128.
Key Number is the number of the key which is to be assigned the function/feature. The Key numbers
vary according to the EON Terminal Type being used.
Key Numbers on EONSOFT are from 01 to 25.
Key Numbers on EON42 are from 01 to 25.
Key Numbers on EON48 are from 01 to 29.
For numbering of the keys, refer the default Key Maps illustrated at the beginning of this topic.
Function Type is the function to be performed by the key, from 00 to 34.
Function Number defines the exact function under each Function Type selected for the key. Refer the
tables above for the complete list of function types and function numbers.
Channel is the number of the channel in the BRI or T1E1 PRI Line to be accessed.
Channel number for BRI Line is
01 for Channel 1
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 509
02 for Channel 2
00 for both Channels
Channel number for T1E1 PRI Line is
01 to 30 for Channels 1 to 30 respectively.
00 for all Channels
Channel number for all function types other than BRI and PRI is 00
For example, you want Barge-In on key number 04 of DKP-003, dial:
• 1252-1-003-04-18-19-00
Where,
003 is DKP-003
04 is the Key Number on DKP-003
18 is the Function Type for Features
19 is the Function Number for Barge-In
00 is Channel number
To personalize the Key Map of an Extended IP Phone, dial:
• 7887-1-SIP Extension-Location-Key Number-Function Type-Function Number-Channel
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
Key Number is 01 to 29 (as located on the phone)
Function Type is 00 to 34 (00 is none).
Function Number (as per function type selected)
Channel Is the number of the channel in the BRI or PRI Line to be accessed.
Channel number for BRI Line is
01 for Channel 1
02 for Channel 2
00 for both Channels
Channel number for PRI Line is
01 to 30 for Channels 1 to 30 respectively.
00 for all Channels
Channel number for all function types other than BRI and PRI is 00
For the complete list of Function Types and Function Numbers see “Customizing Key Templates using
a Telephone”.
The Key Numbers of the MATRIX Extended IP Phone is the same as EON48 described under this
topic.
Also see “Matrix Extended IP Phone Settings” under Configuring SIP Extensions using a Telephone.
• Exit SE Mode.
After you have finished assigning key templates and key maps, test the functioning of the keys.
510 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Programming DSS Console Keys
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles are devices that function as extensional buttons for EON, providing more
buttons for single-touch Direct Station Calling and feature access.
If you want to use the proprietary DSS Consoles - DSS64 or DSS72 - with the EON, you must first install the DSS
Consoles and assign them to the respective DKP.
You can attach two DSS Consoles to a single DKP for further increase the number of keys. The two DSS Consoles
may be two DSS64 or DSS72 or a combination of DSS64 and DSS72. Refer “Direct Station Selection Console” to
know more.
For installation instructions, refer the topics Installing EON, Installing DSS Consoles, under “Installing ETERNITY
ME”, “Installing ETERNITY GE” and “Installing ETERNITY PE”.
For configuring DSS Consoles with DKPs, refer the topic “Configuring DKP Extensions”.
If you have attached the DSS Consoles - DSS64 or DSS72 - to the DKPs and assigned the DSS Consoles to the
DKP in the DKP Parameters, you may now program the DSS Console Keys.
Default DSS Key maps
The keys on DSS64 for EON48 and DSS72 for EON42 are mapped as follows in the factory default settings.
DSS64: 16x4 (64 Keys) DSS72: 24x3 (72 Keys)
01 17 33 49
01 25 49
02 18 34 50 02 26 50
03 19 35 51 03 27 51
04 20 36 52 04 28 52
05 21 37 53 05 29 53
06 22 38 54 06 30 54
07 23 39 55 07 31 55
08 24 40 56 08 32 56
09 25 41 57
09 33 57
10 26 42 58
10 34 58
11 27 43 59
11 35 59
12 28 44 60
12 36 60
13 29 45 61
13 37 61
14 30 46 62
14 38 62
15 31 47 63
15 39 63
16 32 48 64
16 40 64
17 41 65
18 42 66
19 43 67
20 44 68
21 45 69
22 46 70
23 47 71
24 48 72
In the default DSS Key assignment, all DSS Keys are assigned SLT ports for Direct Station Calling.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 511
Accordingly,
• If a single DSS64 is attached to a DKP, the SLT ports 005 to 068 are assigned to the keys. Recall that by
default SLT001 to SLT004 are assigned to the DSS keys on the DKP.
• If a single DSS72 is attached to a DKP, the SLT ports 005 to 076 are assigned to the keys. Recall that by
default SLT001 to SLT004 are assigned to the DSS keys on the DKP.
• If two DSS72 are attached to a single DKP, the SLT Ports 005 to 076 are assigned to DSS1 (the first DSS
Console) and the SLT ports 077 to 148 are assigned to DSS2 (the second DSS Console).
• If the first DSS is a DSS72 and the second DSS64, the SLT Ports 005 to 076 are assigned to DSS1 and
the SLT ports 077 to 140 are assigned to DSS2.
However,
• If two DSS64 are attached to a single DKP, the SLT ports 005 to 068 are assigned to DSS1 (the first DSS
Console) and SLT ports from 077 to 140 are assigned to DSS2 (the second DSS Console). The SLT ports
069 to 076 and from 141 to 148 cannot be accessed from the DSS. So, the keys of both DSS1 and DSS2
must be programmed.
• Similarly, if the first DSS is a DSS64 and the second DSS72, the SLT Ports 005 to 068 are assigned to
DSS1 and the SLT ports 077 to 148 are assigned to DSS2. The SLT ports 069 to 076 and from 141 to 148
cannot be accessed from the DSS. So, the keys of only DSS2 must be programmed.
The steps for programming the Keys of the proprietary DSS Consoles of Matrix, DSS64 and DSS72, are
quite similar the programming of the DKP keys. It can be done using Jeeves as well as a Telephone.
Programming DSS Console Keys using Jeeves
• Log into Jeeves as System Engineer
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the 'DKP Parameters' link.
• Go to the DKP number to which you attached the DSS Console.
512 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Using the horizontal scroll bar on the page, scroll to ‘DSS1’, the first Console attached to the DKP.
• Click ‘DSS1’ link.
• The default key map of the DSS Console appears on your screen. By default all keys are assigned to
SLTs.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 513
• Click the key on which you want to assign a feature/function.
• The options for the Functions to be Performed by the key will open in a new window.
• Now, configure the key just like you configured the DKP/Extended IP Phone keys.
• Select the desired 'Function Type’ to be assigned to the key and the desired ‘Offset’ for the Function Type.
• Click ‘OK’.
• The function you selected will appear as the key label.
• Similarly, configure other keys of DSS1.
• After you have finished assigning functions to the DSS1 keys, close the window.
514 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Click 'Submit’ on the DKP Parameters page.
• To configure the second DSS console, if attached, click DSS2.
• Follow the same steps as described above to program the keys of DSS2.
Programming DSS Console Keys using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode.
To assign a function to a DSS key, dial:
• 1254-1-DKP-DSS-Key Number-Function Type-Function Number-Channel to assign a function to a
DSS Key on the DSS of a single DKP.
• 1254-2-DKP-DKP-DSS-Key Number-Function Type-Function Number-Channel to assign the same
function on the same key number on the DSS of a range of DKPs.
• 1254-*-DSS-Key Number-Function Type-Function Number-Channel to assign the same function on
the same key number on the DSS of all DKPs
Where,
DKP is the number of the Software Port of the DKP from 001 to 128.
DSS is the number of the DSS Console attached to the DKP.
1 for DSS1
2 for DSS2
Key Number is the number of the key which is to be assigned the function/feature. The Key numbers
vary according to the type of DSS Console being used.
Key Numbers on DSS64 are from 01 to 64.
Key Numbers on DSS72 are from 01 to 72.
For numbering of the keys, refer the default DSS Key Maps illustrated at the beginning of this topic.
Function Type is the function to be performed by the key, from 00 to 34.
Function Number defines the exact function under each Function Type selected for the key.
Channel is the number of the channel in the BRI or PRI Line to be accessed.
Channel number for BRI Line is
01 for Channel 1
02 for Channel 2
00 for both Channels
Channel number for PRI Line is
01 to 30 for Channels 1 to 30 respectively.
00 for all Channels
Channel number for all function types other than BRI and PRI is 00
Refer the tables provided under “Customizing Key Templates using a Telephone” for the complete list
of function types and function numbers.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 515
To clear a function of a key on a DSS of a DKP, dial:
• 1254-1-DKP-DSS-Key Number-00-000 to clear a key function on the DSS of a single DKP.
• 1254-2-DKP-DKP-DSS-Key Number-00-000 to clear the same key function from the DSS of a range
of DKPs
• 1254-*-DSS-Key Number-00-000 to clear the same function from the DSS of all DKPs.
• Exit SE mode.
516 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Configuring ISDN Terminals
Depending on the number of BRI ports available to you and the type of Point-to-Multipoint Configuration (Short or
Extended Passive Bus), a maximum of 64 ISDN Terminals can be connected to the ETERNITY.
The number of ISDN Terminal extensions available to you for configuration also depends on the number of ISDN
Terminals you have specified on the“System Pre-requisites” page.
If you have enabled 'On-Site Configuration', the system will provide you only those ISDN terminal ports that are
actually present in the system for configuration.
Configure ISDN Terminal Parameters using Jeeves or by dialing commands from a Telephone.
Configuring ISDN Terminals using Jeeves
• Log into Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click 'ISDN Terminal Parameters' to open the page.
• Configure the following parameters for each ISDN Terminal on this page:
• ISDN Terminal: This non-editable field is the number of the software port of the ISDN Terminal.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 517
• BRI Port: This is the number of the BRI Software port to which the ISDN Terminal is connected on a
Short/Extended Passive Bus line.
• Access Code: Assign Station Access codes to the ISDN Terminal. Station Access codes re commonly
referred to as Extension Numbers. These may be a combination of a maximum of 6 digits, which are
dialed to call the ISDN Terminal to which they are assigned.
All ISDN Terminal ports are assigned the following Station Access Codes as default.
ISDN Terminal (Software Port) No. Access Codes
01 3201
02 3202
03 3203
: :
: :
64 3264
• Name: Assign a 'Name' to the ISDN Terminal. The name may be of the person who will use the ISDN
Terminal or the name of a department. This name will be displayed to the called station.
You can program a name of maximum 18 alphanumeric characters.
• Station Basic Feature Template: Assign a “Station Basic Feature Template” to the ISDN Terminal.
A Station Basic Feature Template includes a set of features that completely define the behaviour of the
Station, such as Time Table, Operator access, Trunk Access, Class of Service, Toll Control, Call
Budget, and Station Message Detail Records (storage of Incoming and Outgoing Call details).
By default, Station Basic Feature Template 01 is assigned to all stations of the system that also
includes SLT ports, ISDN ports and E&M Lines with Station as Orientation Type.
Check if the default template fulfills the feature requirements (like “Class of Service (COS)”, “Toll
Control”, “OG Trunk Bundle Group”, etc.) of the ISDN Terminal.
If the default Template 01 fulfills the feature requirements and if the same features are to be allowed to
all ISDN Terminals, retain Template 01.
If different sets of features are to be allowed to different ISDN Terminals, then prepare separate Station
Basic Feature Templates and apply them on the ports. To do this,
• Click the link 'Station Basic Feature Template' to open the page.
• Select a Template number, for example Template number 12.
• Customize Template number 12 and click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page.
• Now go back to the 'ISDN Parameters' page.
• Enter the number of the Template you customized, Template 12, in the 'Station Basic Feature
Template' field of the ISDN Terminal, for instance, ISDN-01, on which you want to apply this
518 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
template. If you want to apply this template to other terminals too, like ISDN-02, 03, and 04, assign
the Template 12 to all them.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
• Repeat the same steps to customize and assign a different Template to another ISDN Terminal.
Also, refer the topic “Station Basic Feature Template” to know more about customizing the templates
and applying on station ports.
• Station Advanced Feature Template: Assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to the ISDN
Terminal. The Advanced Feature Template consists of a set of less commonly used features like Message
Wait Notification Type, Alarm Notification Type, Caller ID Presentation for Transferred Calls, DDI Incoming
Call Routing, Storage of Internal Calls, Call Duration Control, Floor Service, Call Taping, etc.
By default Station Advanced Feature Template 01 is assigned to all stations of the ETERNITY, which
includes ISDN ports, SLT ports, and E&M Lines configured as Stations.
Check if this default template fulfills the feature requirements of the ISDN Terminal by clicking the 'Station
Advanced Feature Template' link.
If the default Template 01 fulfills the feature requirements, and if the same features are to be allowed to all
ISDN Terminals, retain Template 01.
If different sets of features are to be allowed to different ISDN Terminals, then prepare separate Station
Advanced Feature Templates and apply them on the ports.
To do this,
• Click the 'Station Advanced Feature Template' link to open the page.
• Select a Template number, for example 04.
• Customize Template number 04.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page.
• Now go back to the 'ISDN Parameters' page.
• Enter the number of the Template you customized, Template 04 in the 'Station Advanced Feature
Template' field of the ISDN Terminal, for instance, ISDN-01, on which you want to apply this template.
If you want to apply this template to other terminals too, like ISDN-01, 02, and 03, assign the Template
04 to all these ports.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
• Repeat the same steps to customize and assign a different Template to another ISDN Terminal.
Also refer the topic “Station Advanced Feature Template” for instructions on customizing these templates
and applying them on the station ports.
• Station Type: This parameter is relevant only for the Hotel Application of the ETERNITY. Extensions are
identified as 'Administrator' or 'Guest' extensions according to the intended user of the ISDN Terminal.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 519
When the Station Type is selected, the system will automatically assign the Guest and Administrator (Hotel
Staff) features to the ISDN Terminal. To know more, refer the ETERNITY Hospitality System Manual.
Advanced features
The above listed parameters fulfill the ISDN Terminal configuration requirements of most users. If you need to use
other features like Personal Directory, Call Pick-Up Groups, for some users, you may click the 'Advance' button.
Configure the following parameters:
• Personal Directory: Enter the number of the “Personal Directory” that you want to assign to the ISDN
Terminal. A Personal Directory is a list of 25 frequently dialed numbers, each of which are stored by Index
number (location code), Name and Trunk Access Codes (“OG Trunk Bundle Group”). The Personal
Directory is necessary for using the features “Abbreviated Dialing” and “Dial By Name”.
The Personal Directory number that you assign to an ISDN Terminal must also be programmed either by
you, the System Engineer, or by the ISDN Terminal user. Refer the topic “Abbreviated Dialing” for
instructions on programming the Personal Directory.
• Priority: Select a Priority Level for the ISDN Terminal from 1, 2, 3... to 9, with '1' being lowest Priority and
'9' being highest Priority. Whenever a station (ISDN Terminal) with higher priority calls a station with lower
priority, a triple ring is placed on the called station. To know more, read the feature description “Priority”.
By default, the Priority of all ISDN Terminals is set to '5'.
520 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Call Pick-Up Group: Configure this parameter if you want to assign the ISDN Terminal to a particular “Call
Pick Up” group.
Call Pick Up allows the ISDN Terminal user to 'pick up' (answer) calls ringing on any other station, by
dialing a feature code, without physically going to the ringing station. For this to work, both the ringing
station and the station picking up the call must be in the same 'Call Pick Up Group'. Refer “Call Pick Up” for
instructions on how to create groups. You can create as many as 99 groups numbered from 01 to 99.
Enter the number of the Call Pick-Up Group you created for this ISDN Terminal in this field.
• Repeat the same steps to configure other ISDN Terminals.
• If you have completed configuration of all the above listed ISDN Terminal Parameters, click 'Submit' at the
bottom of the page to save your changes.
Configuring ISDN Terminals using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode using a DKP/SLT.
To assign BRI Software Port to an ISDN Terminal, dial:
• 7301-1-ISDN Terminal-BRI to assign BRI Software Port to a single ISDN Terminal.
• 7301-2-ISDN Terminal-ISDN Terminal-BRI to assign the same BRI Software Port to a range of ISDN
Terminals.
• 7301-*-BRI to assign the same BRI Software Port to all ISDN Terminals.
Where,
ISDN Terminal is the Software Port number of the Terminal from 01 to 64.
BRI is the number of the BRI Software Port to which the ISDN Terminal is connected, from 01 to 32.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 521
5. Default: No port is assigned, 00.
To de-assign ISDN Terminal from a BRI Software Port, dial:
• 7301-1-ISDN Terminal-00 to de-assign a single Terminal from a BRI port.
• 7301-2-ISDN Terminal-ISDN Terminal-00 to de-assign a range of Terminals from a BRI port.
• 7301-*-00 to de-assign all Terminals from a BRI port.
To assign Access Code to an ISDN Terminal, dial:
• 3103-1- ISDN Terminal -Access Code-#*
Where,
ISDN Terminal is the Software Port number of the Terminal from 01 to 64.
Access Code is a number string of any combination of a maximum of 6 digits. Terminate the command
with #* if the number string has fewer than 6 digits. (0 to 9, #, * are allowed)
To clear the Access codes assigned to the ISDN Terminal, dial:
• 3103-1-ISDN Terminal-#* to clear the Access Code of a single terminal.
• 3103-2-ISDN Terminal-ISDN Terminal-#* to clear the Access Code of a range of terminals.
• 3103-*-#* to clear the Access Codes of all terminals.
To assign default Station Access Codes to ISDN Terminal, dial:
• 3153-1-ISDN Terminal to default Access Code of a single terminal.
• 3153-2-ISDN Terminal-ISDN Terminal to default Access Codes of a range of terminals.
• 3153-* to default Access Codes of all terminals.
To assign a Name to an ISDN Terminal, dial:
• 5409-1-ISDN Terminal-Name-#* to assign a Name to a single terminal.
• 5409-2-ISDN Terminal-ISDN Terminal-Name-#* to assign the same Name to a range of terminals.
• 5409-*-Name-#* to assign the same Name to all terminals.
Where,
ISDN Terminal is the Software Port number of the Terminal from 01 to 64.
Name is a string of a maximum of 18 alphanumeric characters. Terminate the commands with #* if the
number string has fewer than 18 characters.
To clear the Name of the ISDN Terminal, dial:
• 5409-1-ISDN Terminal-#* to clear the Name of a single terminal.
• 5409-2-ISDN Terminal-ISDN Terminal-#* to clear the Names of a range terminals.
• 5409-*-#* to clear the Names of all terminals.
To assign a Station Basic Feature Template to an ISDN Terminal, dial:
• 5507-1-ISDN Terminal-Template Number to assign a template to a single terminal.
• 5507-2-ISDN Terminal-ISDN Terminal-Template Number to assign the same template to a range of
terminals.
• 5507-*-Template Number to assign the same template to all terminals.
Where,
ISDN Terminal is the Software Port number of the Terminal from 01 to 64.
Template Number is the number of the Station Basic Feature Template, from 01 to 50. Default: 01
To assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to an ISDN Terminal, dial:
• 5607-1-ISDN Terminal-Template Number to assign a template to a single terminal.
• 5607-2-ISDN Terminal-ISDN Terminal-Template Number to assign the same template to a range of
terminals.
• 5607-*-Template Number to assign the same template to all terminals.
522 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Where,
ISDN Terminal is the Software Port number of the Terminal from 01 to 64.
Template Number is the number of the Station Advanced Feature Template, from 01 to 50. Default: 01
To select a Station Type for an ISDN Terminal, refer the ETERNITY Hospitality System Manual.
For Configuration of Advanced Features, use the following commands:
To assign a Personal Directory to an ISDN Terminal, dial:
• 1907-1-ISDN Terminal-Personal Directory to assign directory to a single terminal.
• 1907-2-ISDN Terminal-ISDN Terminal-Personal Directory to assign the same directory to a range of
terminals.
• 1907-*-Personal Directory to assign the same directory to all terminals.
Where,
ISDN Terminal is the Software Port number of the Terminal from 01 to 64.
Personal Directory number is from 01 to 50.
To clear the Personal Directory assigned to an ISDN Terminal, dial:
• 1907-1-ISDN Terminal-00 to clear the directory of a single terminal.
• 1907-2-ISDN Terminal-ISDN Terminal-00 to clear the directory of a range of terminals.
• 1907-* to clear the directory from all terminals.
To define the Priority for an ISDN Terminal, dial:
• 3913-1-ISDN Terminal-Priority to define Priority for a single terminal.
• 3913-2-ISDN Terminal-ISDN Terminal-Priority to define the same Priority for a range of terminals.
• 3913-*-Priority to define the same Priority for all terminals.
Where,
ISDN Terminal is the Software Port number of the Terminal from 01 to 64.
Priority is from 1 to 9. Default: 5
To assign an ISDN Terminal to a Call Pick-Up Group, dial:
• 3903-1-ISDN Terminal-Call Pick-Up Group to assign a single terminal to a Call Pick-Up group.
• 3903-2-ISDN Terminal-ISDN Terminal-Call Pickup Group to assign a range of terminals to the same
Call Pick-Up group.
• 3903-*-Call Pickup Group to assign all terminals to the same Call Pick-Up group.
Where,
ISDN Terminal is the Software Port number of the Terminal from 01 to 64.
Call Pickup Group is from 00 to 99. Default: 99.
To remove an ISDN Terminal from a Call Pick-Up Group, dial:
• 3903-1-ISDN Terminal-00 to remove a single terminal from a Call Pick-Up group.
• 3903-2-ISDN Terminal-ISDN Terminal-00 to remove a range of terminals from a Call Pick-Up group.
• 3903-*-00 to remove all terminals from a Call Pick-Up group.
• Exit SE mode.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 523
Configuring 'Operator'
In the context of a PBX, users understand the term 'Operator' as a person who handles multiple simultaneous calls
and functions as the link between callers and called parties.
For the PBX however, an 'Operator' is a Routing Group; a group of extensions to which calls made by extensions
by dialing '9' are to be landed. This also includes Direct Inward Dialing calls on trunks during which the caller dials
'9'.
Depending on the size of the Enterprise and the amount of call traffic to be managed, more than one Operator may
be employed. Also, it is not uncommon to have different Operator extensions according to the time of the day. For
instance, during working hours calls may be handled by the Receptionists or Front Desk Personnel, whereas during
non-working hours, calls may be handled by the Security Personnel.
To meet this requirement, ETERNITY offers configuration of up to four different Operators (Routing Group):
Operator 1, Operator 2, Operator 3 and Operator 4. However, at a time, only one Operator can be assigned to
extensions
Each 'Operator' is assigned a Routing Group for the Time Zones - Working Hours, Break Hours and Non-Working
Hours.
Each 'Operator' is assigned a Time Table, which defines the Working Hours, Break Hours and Non-working Hours
for a week. The system follows this Time Table to assign a Routing Group as 'Operator' according to the current
Time Zone.
Configuration of 'Operator' involves the following steps:
1. Configuring Routing Groups as 'Operator': A routing group may be made up of one or more than one
extensions, depending on user requirement. If the user requires only one extension as 'Operator', include
only one extension as member in the Routing Group for Operator. If the user requires five extensions as
'Operator', create a Routing Group of the five desired extensions to be used as 'Operator'.
If the user requires Time-Zone based 'Operator', then prepare a different routing group for each Time
Zone. If the user requires the same Operator for all Time Zones, use the same Routing Group number in
all Time Zones.
2. Configuring a Time Table for Operator: This is applicable only when Operator extensions are different
for different Time Zones.
Define the Time Table to be followed for the Operator selection. The Time Table may be the same as the
Time Tables assigned to trunks and extensions of the ETERNITY or may be configured to match with the
timings of the persons who work as Operators. For example if Operators in the Enterprise are working in
shifts, the Time Table can be configured to match their timings.
3. Assignment of 'Operator' to Extensions: SLT, DKP, ISDN Terminals, and SIP phones connected as
extensions of the ETERNITY can be assigned to an 'Operator' in their Station Basic Feature Template.
All extensions may be assigned to the same Operator, or different groups of extensions may be assigned
to different Operators, so that call management is more efficient. For instance, certain extensions may be
assigned to Operator 1, certain others to Operator 2 and the rest to Operator 3.
524 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Operator 1 is the default in the Station Basic Feature Templates. If you want to assign different stations to
different Operators, you must program separate Station Basic Feature Templates with a different Operator
for each extension group.
4. Assignment of 'Operator' to Trunks: Trunks are also assigned an 'Operator', so that when a caller dials
'9' using Direct Inward Dialing (DID), the call is routed to the Routing Group defined as Operator for the
trunk for a particular Time Zone. For example, the during working hours, a caller on trunk 001 dials '9', the
call lands on 3001; when a caller on trunk 001 dials '9' during non-working hours the call lands on 3003
and when the caller dials '9' during break hours the call lands on 3002.
Similarly, it is also possible to assign different Operators to different trunks.
Decide the number of Operators to be configured on the basis of the user's requirement.
Configuring Operator using Jeeves
• Login as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the link 'Routing Groups' to open the page.
• Select a Routing Group you want to program for Operator. By default, Routing Group 32 is assigned to
Operator. You may configure this group, or select another one.
• Select the type of extension to be included in the group as 'Member Type'. The extension may be a DKP,
an SLT or an ISDN terminal.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 525
• Enter the 'Port Number' (software port number) to which the SLT/DKP/ISDN Terminal/SIP extension is
connected. You can program as many as 32 members in the Routing Group. If the user requires only one
extension as Operator, configure the first Member and disable all other 'members' of the routing group by
setting 'Member Type' to 'None'.
• Click 'Submit' to save your changes.
• Repeat the same steps to configure another Routing Group.
If you have finished configuring Routing Groups for Operator, configure the Time Table for Operator.
526 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Click the link 'Time Table' to open the page.
• By default Time Table 1 is assigned to all Operators. If this time table meets your requirement, retain it. If
not, select another Time Table. Customize it by defining the Working Hours, Break Hours and Non-
Working Hours for the week.
• Click 'Submit' to save your changes.
• If you want to assign different Time Tables to different Operators, repeat the above steps to prepare the
other Time Tables.
If you have completed configuring the Time Table,
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 527
• Click the link 'Operator' to open the page.
• Select the Operator number you want to configure. By default Operator 1 is assigned to all extensions and
trunks.
• Select the number of the Time Table you prepared for the selected Operator.
• Enter the number of the Routing Group you prepared for the selected Operator for Working Hours, for
Break Hours and for Non-Working hours. If the same Routing Group is to be kept for all Time Zones, enter
the same number in fields of all three time zones.
• Click Submit to save your changes.
• Repeat the above steps to configure another Operator.
Now, you may assign the 'Operator' groups you have configured to the SLT, DKP, ISDN Terminal, and SIP
extensions by configuring the number of the Operator (1-4) in the “Station Basic Feature Template” applied
on these extensions.
Similarly, you may assign the 'Operator' groups you have configured to the trunks in the “Trunk Feature
Template” applied on these Trunks.
528 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Configuring Operator using a Telephone
Prepare the required Routing Groups and Time Table first. Refer the topics “Routing Group” and “Time Tables” for
SE commands.
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To assign a Time Table to an Operator, dial:
• 1602-1-Operator-Time Table to assign a time table to a single Operator.
• 1602-2-Operator-Operator-Time Table to assign the same time table to a range of Operators.
• 1602-*-Time Table to assign the same time table to all Operators.
Where,
Operator is from 1 to 4.
Time Table is from 1 to 8. Enter the number of the Time Table you customized for Operator.
To define an Operator for Working Hours, dial:
• 1611-1-Operator-Routing Group
Where,
Operator is from 1 to 4.
Routing Group is from 01 to 96. Enter the number of the Routing Group you prepared for Operator for
working hours. Default: Routing Group is 32.
To define an Operator for Break Hours:
• 1612-1-Operator-Routing Group
Operator is from 1 to 4.
Routing Group is from 01 to 96. Enter the number of the Routing Group you prepared for Operator for
Break Hours. Default: Routing Group is 32.
To define an Operator for Non-working Hours, dial:
• 1613-1-Operator-Routing Group
Operator is from 1 to 4.
Routing Group is from 01 to 96. Enter the number of the Routing Group you prepared for Operator for
Break Hours. Default: Routing Group is 32.
For SE commands to assign an operator to extensions and trunks, refer the topics “Customizing
Station Basic Feature Template using a Telephone” and “Customizing Trunk Feature Template using a
Telephone”.
To default an Operator, dial:
• 1601-1-Operator to restore default values of a single Operator.
• 1601-2-Operator-Operator to restore default values of a range of Operators.
• 1601-* to restore default values of all Operators.
Where,
Operator is from 1 to 4.
On issuing this command, Timetable 1 is assigned to Operator and Routing Group 32 is assigned to
Operator for all Time Zones.
• Exit SE mode.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 529
Configuring Trunks
The ETERNITY supports the following types of trunk ports:
• Two-Wire Trunks
• E&M Lines
• ISDN T1E1 PRI Lines
• ISDN BRI Lines
• Mobile Trunks
• SIP Trunks
Templates for Configuring Trunk Lines
ETERNITY offers the following Hardware and Software Feature Templates to make the configuration of Trunks
easy.
• TWT Hardware Template (for TWT Trunk Lines).
• Trunk Feature Template (for All Trunk Types)
• E&M Feature Template (for E&M Lines and T1E1PRI Lines that use E&M signaling)
Using these templates, you can configure all Trunks that are to be assigned the same set of hardware and software
features at one go, instead of configuring each trunk individually.
TWT Hardware Template
The TWT Hardware Template contains a set of features, such as AC Termination Impedance, Pulse-Tone Dialing,
Answer Supervision, Disconnect Supervision, DTMF detection, etc. that define the behavior of the hardware of the
TWT ports of the ETERNITY.
A TWT Hardware template must be assigned to all the TWT trunk ports. Using the TWT templates, you can
configure TWT ports which are to be assigned the same set of features at one go, instead of configuring port-by-
port.
The ETERNITY offers 50 TWT Hardware Templates. These templates have commonly used values, but can be
customized per the requirement and applied on the extensions.
ETERNITY supports only 'Loop Start' on TWT Interface.
TWT Hardware Template Parameters
The following is an overview of the parameters of these templates and a brief description of each.
TWT Type: Three types of TWTs can be interfaced to a TWT port of the ETERNITY:
• Normal Dial type: This is the conventional TWT available from the PSTN.
• Hotline type: The TWT connecting two destinations immediately on grabbing the trunk.
530 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Hotline Dial type: A special TWT available from the PSTN, which works as a normal dial type for some
time and works as a hotline thereafter.
By default all the TWT ports are set as Normal Dial type. You may select the TWT Dial Type you want to
assign to the TWT port.
• AC Termination Impedance: The AC Termination Impedance of the TWT port must match with the AC
Termination Impedance supported by the PSTN network. The system supports the following AC
Termination Impedance:
• 600
• 900
• 270 + (750 || 150 nF) and 275 + (780 || 150 nF)
• 220 + (820 || 120 nF) and 220 + (820 || 115 nF)
• 370 + (620 || 310 nF)
• 320 + (1050 || 230 nF)
By default, the AC Termination Impedance is set as per the “Region” you have selected.
• Dial Type: You can select the Dialing method as Pulse or Tone (with configurable Pulse Ratio and DTMF
ON-OFF period) according to the Dialing method supported by the CO network to which the TWT port is
connected.
By default, Tone is selected as the Dial Type.
• Pulse Dial Ratio: This parameter is to be configured if you have selected Pulse as the 'Dial Type' in the
previous parameter. The system supports the six different Pulse Dialing Ratios on TWT ports. Select the
appropriate Pulse Dial Ratio from the following according to the type of Pulse Dialing Ratio supported by
your CO Network:
• 10PPS, 1:2
• 10PPS, 2:3
• 10PPS, 1:1
• 20PPS, 1:2
• 20PPS,2:3
• 20PPS, 1:1
By default, 10PPS, 1:2 is selected as the Pulse Dial Ratio.
• Rx CLI Type: ETERNITY detects the CLI sent by the CO network and sends this information to the
landing station/operator with the ringing signal. You must select the CLI Type supported by your CO
network from the following options:
• None
• Any ETSI DTMF format
• Any FSK V.23 format
• Any FSK Bellcore format
• 1st Ring, ETSI DTMF, 2nd Ring
• Polarity Reversal, ETSI DTMF, 1st Ring
• 1st Ring, FSK, 2nd Ring
By default, Any ETSI DTMF format is selected as the Rx CLI Type.
• Rx Gain (dB): You can increase or decrease the level of Incoming Speech (Receive Gain) on the Trunk by
changing the Rx Gain to the desired level from: 10, 9.5, 9, 8.5, 8, 7.5. By default Rx Gain is set to '0'.
• Tx Gain (dB): You can increase or decrease the level of Outgoing Speech (Transmit Gain) on the Trunk
by changing the Tx Gain to the desired level from: 10, 9.5, 9, 8.5, 8, 7.5 dB. By default Tx Gain is set to '0'.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 531
• Answer Supervision: It is a signal from the CO network to indicate to call maturity. Whenever you make
an outgoing call from TWT, the CO network will give answer signaling when the called party answers the
call.
This feature is particularly useful if you want to use “Call Cost Calculation (CCC)” to enable accurate
billing. When the signal is received, the billing will start and in the absence of this signal, the call will not be
billed, ensuring that unanswered and unsuccessful call attempts are not billed.
Answer Supervision Signal has three options:
• Pseudo Answer: It is used when no signaling is available from the PSTN. If this option is selected, the
call will be considered as matured on the expiry of the 'Pseudo Answer Supervision Timer'
(configurable; default 20 seconds), irrespective of whether or not the call actually gets matured. After
this, the Call Duration Timer starts. Finally, the system starts detecting the “Disconnect Supervision”
signal configured for the TWT port.
Select this option only if there is no Answer Supervision Signal supported.
• Polarity Reversal: It is used as maturity signal when the answer signaling is given in the form of
Battery Reversal. If the battery polarity of the line is -ve for TIP and +ve for RING, when the called party
has answered the call, the CO network will reverse the battery polarity, TIP becomes +ve and Ring -ve.
After this, the Call Duration Timer is started. Finally system starts detecting the Disconnect Supervision
signal configured for the TWT port.
• 12 KHz/16 KHz Pulse: When called party answers the call, the CO network generates a 12/16 KHz
metering pulse to indicate call maturity. Finally, the system will start detecting Disconnect Supervision
signal configured for the TWT port.
By default, Answer Supervision is set to 'Pseudo Answer' for each TWT port.
Select the same Answer Supervision signal as provided by your CO Network. If the type of Answer
Supervision signal selected in the system does not match with that of the CO network, the call will not be
stored in the Station Message Detail Record (SMDR) buffer. For example, if the CO network does not
support Answer Supervision, but you have set Polarity Reversal or 12/16KHz as Answer Supervision
Type, the call will be considered as matured and will not be stored in the Station Message Detail Record
(SMDR) buffer. The same would be the case if you selected 12/16KHz when the CO supports Polarity
Reversal.
• Pseudo Answer Supervision Timer: Configure this timer if you have selected 'Pseudo Answer' as
Answer Supervision Signal option.
This is the time period for which the system will wait before treating a call as matured (regardless of
whether or not it was answered). The range of this Timer is from 001 to 255 seconds. By default the
Pseudo Maturity Timer is set to 20 seconds.
When Pseudo Answer is selected as Answer Supervision signal, the call duration measured by the system
will not accurately reflect the actual call duration because the Pseudo Answer Supervision Timer is not
related to the actual call maturity. For example, if the Pseudo Answer Supervision Timer is set to 015
seconds, the call will be considered as matured after 015 seconds, even if it is answered after 20 seconds.
Similarly, if this Timer is set to 080 seconds, but the call was answered after 020 seconds and
disconnected after 040 seconds, this call will never be considered as matured as it ends before 080
seconds.
532 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Disconnect Supervision: It is a signal from the CO network to indicate call disconnection. Whenever
a call (incoming or outgoing) made from the TWT is disconnected by the remote party, the CO network
will send Disconnect signal to the TWT port. ETERNITY will detect this signal and release the TWT
port.
Disconnect Supervision signal is important when a PCO machine is connected to the (SLT Port)
ETERNITY and or when ETERNITY is deployed in a Gateway application.
In such application scenarios, it is desirable that calls that are disconnected by either end - calling party
or called party - is terminated by the system and the port is released. If the called (remote) party has
disconnected the call but the calling party (station that made the outgoing call from ETERNITY) has not
disconnected the call, the call remains live within the system.
So, Disconnect Supervision signal is important, particularly when calls are routed from TWT-to-TWT
ports, to indicate to the system that it needs to disconnect the call and release the port.
Disconnect Supervision signal has three options:
• None: When there this no signaling supported. Select this option only if there is no Disconnect
Supervision signal supported.
• Polarity Reversal: Call disconnection is signaled as Polarity Reversal when the call is
disconnected by the remote user. For example, if the battery polarity of the TWT port is '+ve' for TIP
and '-ve' for RING in speech condition then on disconnection by the remote user, TIP will become '-
ve' and Ring '+ve'. The user gets an Error tone and the TWT port is released.
• Open Loop Disconnect: Call Disconnection is signaled in the form of Open Loop, whereby the
Battery voltage on the TWT port is removed for a short duration. Voltage is restored after this short
duration. However, the Polarity of Battery Voltage on the TWT port is not changed.
This option is to be selected when call disconnection is signaled in the form of Open Loop
Disconnect pulse by the CO network. System will check Open Loop Disconnect signal for the time
configured for Open Loop Disconnect Timer for each TWT port. If the time of the Open Loop signal
detected is less than the Open Loop Disconnect Timer configured, it will not be considered as valid
Open Loop signal for releasing the TWT port. But if the Open loop is detected continuously for at
least for the time set as the Open Loop Disconnect timer, it is considered as a valid Disconnect
Supervision signal. The call will be released and caller will get error tone.
By default, Disconnect Supervision is set to 'None' for each TWT port.
Select the same Disconnect Supervision signal as provided by your CO Network.
• Select the same Answer Supervision and Disconnect Supervision signal type supported by your CO
network for the TWT ports. Consider the following case:
• The CO network supports Polarity Reversal signal as Answer and Disconnect Supervision.
• But you have configured 'Pseudo Answer' as Answer Supervision signal and 'Polarity Reversal' as
Disconnect Supervision signal for the TWT ports in the system.
• In this case, when a call is made through the TWT port, the call will be considered as matured after
the Pseudo Answer Supervision Timer.
• Now, when the called party answers the call, the CO generates 'Polarity Reversal' as answer
supervision signal on the TWT port.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 533
• But as 'Polarity Reversal' is also configured as the Disconnect Supervision for the port, the system
will interpret this (Answer Signaling) signal as Disconnect Supervision signal and disconnect the
call.
• Open Loop Disconnect Timer (ms): This parameter is applicable only if the option Open Loop
Disconnect is selected as Disconnect Supervision on the TWT port.
The range of this timer is from 001 to 999 milliseconds. By default, the Timer is set to 200 ms.
• DID Disconnection Tone Detection Timer: This parameter is relevant only for TWT Cards with CMX
Chipset. You need not configure this parameter if your TWT card hardware is DSP-based.
This parameter is to be configured when “Direct Inward Dialing (DID)” is enabled on the TWT, but the CO
network does not support Disconnect Supervision (Polarity Reversal or Open Loop Disconnect).
During a DID call, when DID is on, the system detects DTMF dialed by a caller. However, if the caller fails
to dial any digits, the system will wait for the duration of the First Digit Wait Timer. On the expiry of this
timer, the system will wait to detect the Disconnection Tone from the CO network. But since the CO
network does not support Disconnect Supervision or signaling (Polarity Reversal, Open Loop Disconnect,
Disconnect Tone), the system will not disconnect the DID call, even if the caller has disconnected it.
The DID Disconnection Tone Detection Timer prevents this by initiating Disconnection Tone detection for
the DID call. If the system detects the Disconnection Tone before the timer expires, the DID call will be
disconnected and the TWT port will be released.
If no tone is detected when the Timer expires, the DID call will be routed as per the Routing Logic
configured for the TWT port (Operator or Trunk Landing Group).
The range of this timer is from 1 to 9 seconds. By default the timer is set to 3 seconds.
• Disconnect Tone Detection: This parameter is to be configured if Call Disconnection is signaled by the
CO network in the form of Disconnect Tone.
When there is an incoming/outgoing call on/from the TWT port is answered, the system will check whether
the flag “Disconnect Tone detection - OG Call + All IC Call states other than DID No Digit Dial State” is
enabled.
Only if the flag is enabled, the system will detect the Disconnect Tone.
If Disconnect Tone is detected, the system will consider the call as ended and will release the TWT port.
• Disconnect Tone Cadence: To enable the system to detect the Disconnect Tone accurately, you must
set the Cadence (ON-OFF time) and Frequency of the Disconnect Tone, as supported by the CO network.
Configure the following Disconnect Tone Cadence parameters:
• Frequency 1 (Hz): Frequency 1 is from 300 to 1400 Hz. Default: 400Hz
• Operator: This parameter has 3 options: No operator, Modulation (*), Addition (+). Default: No.
If ‘No’ operator is selected frequency 2 will not be applicable.
If Modulation is selected, frequency 1and frequency 2 will be used as modulation, F1* F2
534 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
If Addition is selected, frequency 1 and frequency 2 will be used as addition, F1 + F2.
• Frequency 2 (Hz): Frequency 2 is from 20 to 1400 Hz. Select Frequency 2 if the Disconnect Tone
supported by the CO network is Dual Frequency. Default: 25Hz.
• ON Time 1 (ms), OFF Time 1 (ms): Select Cadence for the first cycle ON Time1 and OFF Time 1. It may
be 0, or 40 to 4000 milliseconds. Default: 750 ms ON Time 1, 750 ms OFF Time 1
• ON Time 2(ms), OFF Time 2 (ms): Select Cadence for the second cycle ON Time 2 and OFF Time 2. It
may be 0, or 40 to 4000 (ms). Default: 750 ms ON Time 2, 750 ms OFF Time 2.
• ON Time 3(ms), OFF Time 3 (ms): Select Cadence for the third cycle ON Time 3 and OFF Time 3. It may
be 0, or 40 to 4000 milliseconds. Default: 0 ms ON Time 3, 0 ms OFF Time 3.
• ON Time 4(ms), OFF Time 4 (ms): Select Cadence for the fourth cycle ON Time 4 and OFF Time 4. It
may be 0, or 40 to 4000 milliseconds. Default: 0 ms ON Time 4, 0 ms OFF Time 4.
When disconnect tone detected on the port matches the Frequency and Cadences you have set, the call
will be disconnected and the TWT port will be released.
When Disconnect cadence is zero, ETERNITY will skip that cadence and match the next cadence.
ETERNITY will match the cadence for 3 cycles and then release the trunk.
For CMX-based TWT Cards only:
• You need not configure Frequency 1 and Frequency 2 in the Disconnect Tone Cadence.
• Call Disconnect Tone (CDT) detection will be insignificant if DISA is enabled on the TWT Port.
• If DID and DISA both are enabled on any TWT port, and call gets routed using DISA feature, CDT
Detection will not be started even if enabled.
• If DID and DISA both are enabled on any TWT port, and call gets routed using DID feature, CDT
Detection will be applicable as configured.
For DSP-based TWT Cards only:
• You must configure Frequency and Cadence as appropriate.
• Speech Delay Timer: It is the time after which the system gives dial tone to the extension, when the
extension user grabs the TWT.
To understand the significance of this timer, let us consider a situation. Extension 2001 does not have
calling permission for long distance numbers. The user of extension 2001 grabs a TWT, and dials a
number 1022-6305555. The system dials out this number, as it starts with '1', but since the actual dial tone
from the CO comes after some time, the CO interprets this number as 022-6305555 and establishes
speech. This way an extension user who does not have permission for long distance calling, can dial out a
long distance number. This situation can be prevented by setting the Speech Delay Timer to an
appropriate value.
The range of this timer is from 000 to 255 seconds. By default it is set to '1' second.
• Pause Timer: This Timer is used for the “Multi-Stage Dialing” feature.This Timer is required for inserting
delay while digits of a number string are out dialed from the TWT trunk. The range of this timer is from
0500 to 3000 milliseconds. By default the timer is set to 1000milliseconds.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 535
• Ring Cadence OFF Timer: Configure this timer to set OFF time for Ring cadence. During the incoming
call on TWT port, if the CO gives ring in which the Ring OFF period is quite long, the system will consider
that the ring has been stopped, and will stop ringing the SLT port, even though the incoming call is still
present.
To get accurate indication, the system supports Ring Cadence OFF timer on TWT port so that ring can
continue even for incoming calls with long Ring OFF period.
The range of the Ring Cadence OFF timer is from 1 to 6 seconds. By default the timer is set to 6 seconds.
• DTMF Out Dial: While dialing out the DTMF digits from the TWT port, the following attributes of DTMF
signal are critical.
• DTMF Signal ON Time (ms): It is the width of DTMF digit to be dialed out by the TWT port and is
configurable. By default the ON Time is set to 102 milliseconds.
• DTMF Inter-Digit pause Timer (ms): When the TWT port dials out the DTMF digits on the TWT, it
waits for the Inter Digit Pause Timer, while dialing the DTMF digits on TWT. This timer is configurable.
By default the timer is set to 102 milliseconds.
The 'level' of each DTMF digit is fixed, at -6.0 dB, but you may configure these parameters to match the
CO network requirement.
These DTMF Out Dial attributes are applied when the features Redial, Auto Redial and Abbreviated
Dialing are used to dial out the numbers from the TWT port. These attributes are also applicable when you
make a call from a DKP that has DTMF generation disabled.
• DTMF Detection: The default settings of DTMF Detection serve the requirements of most of the
applications. However, you may fine tune the following parameters if you face any problems in DTMF
detection.
• Minimum Level (dB): This parameter signifies the minimum level (dB) of the DTMF digit to be
considered as valid. By default, Minimum levels set to -4.5dB.
• Minimum ON Time (ms): This parameter signifies the minimum time period for which the DTMF signal
should be present in order to be detected. The valid range of this time is 17 to 204 milliseconds. By
default, Minimum ON Time is set to 34 milliseconds.
• Minimum OFF Time (ms): This parameter signifies the minimum time period between successive
DTMF digits. The valid range of this time is 17 to 204 milliseconds. By default, Minimum OFF Time is
set to 68.
• Flash Timer (ms): This parameter is relevant for dialing out Flash on the TWT to access some of the
features of the PSTN. Configure the desired time of Flash to be generated on the TWT.
By default the Flash Timer is set to 600 milliseconds.
• ON Hook Speed (ms): This parameter allows you to set the amount of time for the line-side device to go
on-hook.
The ON-Hook speed specified is measured from the time the ON-Hook bit is cleared until loop current
equals zero. Select the desired ON-Hook Speed from the following options:
536 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• <0.5ms
• 3 ms
• 26 ms
By default, <0.5ms is selected as ON-Hook Speed.
• OFF Hook Speed (ms): This parameter defines the time to settle the line transients after which
transmission or reception can occur. Select the desired OFF-Hook Speed from the following options:
• 512 ms
• 128 ms
• 64 ms
• 8 ms
By default, OFF-Hook Speed is set to 8 milliseconds.
• Current Limiting: With this flag you can enable Loop Current Limiting mode. When this flag is enabled,
the Loop Current will be limited to a maximum of 60mA.
By default, the flag is disabled.
• Minimum Loop Current (mA): This parameter sets the minimum loop current at which DAA module of the
TWT port can operate. Select the minimum operational loop current from the following options as per your
requirement:
• 10
• 12
• 14
• 16
The minimum Operational Loop Current set by default is set to '10 mA'.
• Tip Ring Voltage (Volts): This parameter allows you TIP/Ring Voltage Adjustment on the line side.
Countries where Low voltage is required should use lower TIP/RING voltage. Adjust the values of the Tip
Ring Voltage to match your country requirements from the following options:
• 3.1
• 3.2
• 3.35
• 3.5
The default Tip/Ring voltage is 3.5.
• Ringer Impedance: Set the Ringer Impedance - High or Synthesized - for the TWT port according your
country-specific requirement.
'High' signifies 20Mohm Ringer Impedance. This is the default Ringer Impedance provided on the line side
by the DAA module of the TWT port. The DAA Module can provide higher impedance when 'Synthesized'
impedance is selected.
Some countries like Poland, South Africa and Slovenia require higher ring impedance which is achieved by
the DAA module, when Ringer Impedance is set to 'Synthesized' impedance.
By default 'High' (20Mohm) is selected.
• Ringer Threshold (Vrms): This parameter defines the level below which the TWT port would not validate
the Ring signal and the level above which it validate the Ring signal. Set Ringer Threshold to the desired
value from the following options:
• 13.5 - 16.5
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 537
• 19.35 - 23.65
• 40.5 - 49.5
By default 13.5 - 16.5 Vrms is set as Ringer Threshold.
• PPDC: 'Pre-PSTN Digit Count' or PPDC is parameter is to be configured, only if the TWT Trunk ports on
which the template is applied are in a “Behind the PBX Application”.
PPDC is the number of digits (dialed by an extension) to be ignored by the system before toll control check
is begun. It is the same as the number.
In Behind the PBX Applications, another PBX may be connected to the ETERNITY, with some of its TWT
Trunks terminating into the Stations of the other PBX and other trunks directly connected to the PSTN.
PPDC for TWT Trunk ports directly connected to the PSTN must be set to '0'.
For Trunk ports connected to stations of another PBX, PPDC must be configured as per the number of
digits in the Trunk Access Code defined for that PBX.
If the TAC is a single digit, select '1'. If TAC is double or triple digit number, accordingly select '2' or '3' as
the PPDC.
To know more about this feature, refer “Behind the PBX Application”.
• Gateway Application - Answer Signaling: This parameter is to be configured if the TWT Port is being
used in a gateway application as a source port (from where calls originate).
The calls originating on the source port (TWT port) are routed using another Trunk port, the terminating
port, which may be any trunk port, for example: T1E1. When call made from the terminating port gets
matured, this is signaled to the source port in the form of DTMF digits.
• Enable: Enable this flag if you want the TWT port to be used in a Gateway Application.
• DTMF String (max. 4 digits): Configure the DTMF digits to be sent to signal call maturity to the source
port.
• Category (Logical Partitioning): This parameter assigns the TWT Port to a trunk category for the
purpose of Logical Partitioning. By default all TWT Ports are assigned to Category 177.
If you have re-defined Category 1 or have assigned TWT ports to a different category, say Category 3,
enter the same number here.
You may configure the call permission between the Category assigned to TWT Ports and other Categories
(assigned to other Trunk ports). Refer the feature description “Logical Partition” to know more.
• Rx Gain at SIP Trunk (dB): This parameter allows you to increase the incoming speech volume level of
calls from SIP trunks to TWT trunks. By default, Rx Gain is set to 0dB.
• Tx Gain at SIP Trunk (dB): This parameter allows you to increase the outgoing speech volume level of
calls from SIP trunks to TWT trunks. By default, Tx Gain is set to 6dB.
77. Trunk ports interfaced with PSTN /PLMN (Public Land Mobile Network) are assigned this category.
538 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Rx Gain at SIP Trunk (Pass Through Fax): This parameter allows you to improve the quality of Fax over
IP78. Configure this parameter if you have selected Pass Through Fax as the Type of Fax over IP on SIP
Trunks, and if Pass Through Fax is to be received on a TWT Trunk.
“Data Gain (dB): select the dB Level for Data Gain. By default, Data Gain is set to -11 dB.
• Bypass Gain (dB): select the dB Level for Bypass Gain. By default, Bypass gain is set to -9 dB.
• You can also set the Rx and Tx Gains for SIP to Digital Trunks and Stations and SIP to SLT.
• To increase Rx and Tx Gain for SIP to SLT stations, go to “SLT Hardware Template”. To increase Rx
and Tx Gain for Digital Trunks/Stations, go to SIP Trunk Parameters.
Customizing the TWT Hardware Templates
The TWT ports provide the interface to connect ETERNITY to the POTS network. The standards and features
supported by POTS networks across the world vary. For example, some networks support Caller ID Presentation
using DTMF signaling, while some support Caller ID Presentation using FSK signaling; some networks offer 600
Ohms Impedance, while others offer complex impedance.
ETERNITY's versatile architecture allows it to be connected to such networks differing in their characteristics. You
can configure the TWT hardware features to match the standards supported by the POTS network of the country
where the system is installed.
The 50 TWT Hardware Templates offered by ETERNITY contain the default values of the above-listed parameters.
The default parameter values of these are country specific and are loaded in each template according to the
Country selected as the“Region”.
For example, when India is selected as the Region, the default value of the AC Impedance is 600, whereas it is
900 ohms when Philippines is selected as Region, and 320 + (1050 || 230 nF) for Region UK. Similarly, the
default Rx CLI Type for Region India is 'Any ETSI DTMF format' while the same is 'Any FSK V.23 format' for Region
UK.
By default, TWT Hardware Template number 01 is assigned to all TWT Trunk ports.
While the default TWT Hardware Template number 01 has all with commonly used values to match your country-
specific requirements, you can still customize each of the 50 Templates to match your preference or requirement.
If the TWT Hardware Template number 01 fulfills your requirements, and if the same features at to be applied on all
TWT trunk ports, retain Template 01. Similarly, if you want only a few changes to be made to Template 01 and
apply it on all TWT Ports, make the changes and retain the template.
However, if different sets of features are to be allowed to different TWT hardware ports, then prepare separate TWT
Hardware Templates and apply them on the ports as required.
You can use Jeeves or a Telephone to customize the TWT Hardware Template.
78. Normally, fax calls require less gain compared to voice calls. However, to improve fax reception, ETERNITY allows the configuring
of gain settings for fax. Fax gain settings consist of Data Gain and Bypass Gain. ETERNITY supports Fax Receive Gain for SIP to
TWT Trunks, SIP to Digital Trunk calls as well as SIP to SLT Calls.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 539
Customizing TWT Hardware Templates using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access.
• Click the link 'TWT Configuration'
• Click the link 'TWT Hardware Template' under TWT Configuration to open the page.
• Select a TWT Hardware Template Number you wish to customize. For example, Template 07.
540 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Customize the TWT Hardware Template number 07 by setting the parameters to the desired values.
• Click 'Submit' to save changes.
• Now, apply this TWT Hardware Template 07 on the TWT ports.
• To do this, click the link 'TWT Parameters' to open the page.
• Go to the TWT software ports to which this Template you customized (07) is to be assigned, for example
TWT-007 and 008.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 541
• Enter the number of the Template you customized, 07, in the field “TWT Hardware Template' of each of
these TWT ports.
• Click 'Submit' to save your changes.
• Repeat the same steps to customize another template and apply it to the TWT Port.
Customizing TWT Hardware Templates using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To change the default value of a TWT Hardware Parameter in a Template, dial:
• 5902-1-TWT Hardware Template Number-Feature Number-Code to change values of a parameter
in a single template
• 5902-2- TWT Hardware Template Number-TWT Hardware Template Number-Feature Number-
Code to set the same value for the parameter in a range of templates.
• 5902-*-Feature Number-Code to set the same value for the parameter in all templates.
Template Number is the number of the TWT Hardware Template from 01 to 50.
Feature Number is the number of the TWT Hardware Template Parameter from 01 to 45.
Code is the value for each parameter from 0 to 82. Refer the following table.
542 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Default Values of TWT Hardware Templates (Region Code: India)
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 543
544 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Table 1:
Table 2:
For example, to change the Rx CLI Type in Template 07 from 'Any ETSI DTMF format' to 'Any FSK V.23
format', dial 5902-1-07-01-3
Where,
07 is the template number
05 is the parameter number for Rx CLI Type
2 is the code for Any FSK V.23 format.
To default TWT Hardware Template, dial:
• 5901-1- TWT Hardware Template Number to default a single template.
• 5901-2- TWT Hardware Template Number - TWT Hardware Template Number to default a range of
templates.
• 5901-* to default all templates.
To assign a TWT Hardware Template to a TWT port, dial:
• 5903-1-TWT-TWT Hardware Template Number to assign a hardware template to a single TWT port.
• 5903-2-TWT-TWT-TWT Hardware Template Number to assign a hardware template to a range of
TWT ports.
• 5903-*-TWT Hardware Template Number to assign a hardware template to all TWT ports.
Where,
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 545
TWT is the Software Port number of the TWT port from 001 to 128.
Template Number is the number of the customized TWT Hardware Template, from 01 to 50. Default:
Template 01.
• Exit SE mode.
Trunk Feature Template
The Trunk Feature Template is a set of general features that define the behavior of a Trunk port. ETERNITY offers
50 such Templates.
A Trunk Feature Template is assigned to all the Trunk types: TWT, Mobile, SIP, BRI, T1E1PRI, and E&M.
Trunk Feature Template Parameters
The Trunk Feature Template contains the following features:
• Time Table: Select a Time Table for the Trunk ports.
A Time Table is a schedule of the three Time Zones, namely: Working Hours, Break Hours, Non-Working
hours for a week.
Certain features of the ETERNITY like Operator, DID, DISA, Trunk Landing Group, require the trunk to
behave differently in each Time Zone. For example, it can be made to land on the Operator Station during
working hours, and on the station of the dining area during Break (lunch) hours, and on the station of the
Security Personnel during non-working hours.
So, a Time Table is assigned to stations defining the Time Zones for the entire week, so that the system
can execute the Time Zone-dependent features and facilities according to the Time Table.
There are 8 different Time Table templates to select from. By default, the Time Table 1 is assigned to all
Trunk Feature Templates. All seven days of the week are 'working hours 9:00-18:00' with break hours
'13:00 -14:00 hrs'.
You may also customize the default Time Table 1 OR customize and assign a different Time Table to the
Trunk Feature Template. Please refer the topic “Time Tables” for more details.
• Operator: Define the Operator for the Trunks on which the template is applied. Operator is used to route
the call when the caller dials '9' during a DID call. This parameter is of significance only if DID/DISA is
enabled on the trunk.
The system supports multiple Operators. In each Time Zone any one of the four Operators can be
selected.
Trunks may be assigned to a single Operator, or different groups of Trunks may be assigned to different
Operators, so that call management is more efficient. For instance certain Trunks may be assigned to
Operator 1, while some may be assigned to Operator 2 and the rest to Operator 3.
Operator 1 is the default in the Trunk Feature Template. If you want to assign different trunks to different
Operators, you must create a separate Trunk Feature Template with a different Operator for each trunk
group.
Refer the topic “'Operator'” to know more.
546 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Trunk Landing Group: This parameter allows you to configure the group of stations on which incoming
calls on the trunks (to which this template is assigned) are to be landed. This group of stations is referred
to as 'Trunk Landing Group' (TLG).
To configure the TLG, you must first configure Routing Groups. Refer “Trunk Landing Group (TLG)” for
instructions on configuring trunk landing groups. Also refer the topic “Routing Group”.
There are as many as 96 Routing Groups which can be assigned as TLG. By default, Routing Group 01 is
assigned as TLG for all Time Zones. If you have prepared a different TLG for each Time Zone, for
example, Routing Group 02 for Working Hours and Break Hours, Routing Group 3 for Non-Working Hours,
then enter the number of these Routing Groups in the TLG field.
• DID: This parameter is to be configured if you want to enable “Direct Inward Dialing (DID)” on the trunk
ports on which you will apply the template.
DID can be enabled or disabled for each Time Zone, namely Working Hours (WH), Break Hours (BH) and
Non-Working Hours (NH).
For each Time Zone, you may select the desired DID option from the following:
• OFF: Select this option if you want to disable DID for the Time Zone. By default, DID is disabled (OFF)
for all the Time Zones.
• ON: Select this option if you want the calls to be answered by the built-in Auto Attendant of the
ETERNITY. ETERNITY answers the call using Voice Modules, if assigned, or it answers the call and
plays the appropriate call progress tone - Dial tone, Ring Back tone, Busy tone - for each call state.
If you select this option, make sure you also configure the DID related Timers and Flags, record and
assign the DID related Voice Message. Refer the topics “Direct Inward Dialing (DID)” and “Voice
Message Applications” for instructions.
• Delayed DID: Select this option if you want to the calls to be answered by the built-in Auto Attendant of
ETERNITY, if none of the extensions of the Trunk Landing Group answers the incoming call.
DID Delayed Timer: Set this Timer, if you want to enable “Delayed DID” on the trunk. The range of this
timer is from 01 to 99 seconds. By default, the timer is set to 10 seconds.
When you enable Delayed DID, ETERNITY routes the incoming call on the trunk to the Trunk Landing
Group assigned to this trunk. It waits for the duration of the Delayed DID Timer for any of the extensions
the Trunk Landing Group to answer the call.
If none of the extensions in the Trunk Landing Group answers the call before the expiry of the DID Delayed
Timer, the call is answered by the built-in Auto Attendant of ETERNITY.
• Multilevel DID Profile: Select the desired Multilevel DID Profile from 1 to 16, if you have enabled
Multistage DID for a time zone. By default, 1 is selected.
• DISA: This parameter is to be configured if you want to enable “Direct Inward System Access (DISA)” on
the trunk ports on which you will apply the template.
DISA can be enabled or disabled for each Time Zone, namely Working Hours (WH), Break Hours (BH) and
Non-Working Hours (NH).
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 547
For each Time Zone, you may select the desired DISA option from the following:
• Disable: Select this option if you want to disable DISA.
• PIN Auth.-Multiple calls: Select this option if you want to enable DISA with PIN Authentication and
allow multiple calls during the DISA login session.
• CLI Auth.-Multiple calls: Select this option if you want to enable DISA login with CLI Authentication
and allow multiple calls to be made during the DISA login session.
Caller numbers that do not match with the CLI Table will be routed as per the logic of the Trunk Feature
Template.
• CLI Auth.-One call-Answer Signaling: Select this option if you want to enable DISA session with CLI
Authentication, and allow only a single call to be made during the DISA login session. This form of
DISA is used when ETERNITY is installed in a Gateway application. This form of DISA is applicable on
TWT Trunks only.
By default, DISA is disabled for all Time Zones.
• Trunk Auto Answer: This parameter is relevant only if you want to enable the “Trunk Auto Answer”
feature on the Trunk ports on which this template is applied.
Trunk Auto Answer enables calls landing on a trunk to be answered automatically by greeting the caller
with a voice message before the call is actually handled.
You can set the following types of Trunk Auto Answer:
• Disable: Select this option if you do not want Trunk Auto Answer on the trunk.
• For all Calls: Select this option if you want all incoming calls landing on the trunk line to be answered.
• When Busy: Select this option if you want the system to answer incoming calls on the trunk to be
answered if the landing destination is busy.
Trunk Auto Answer can be enabled or disabled for each Time Zone, namely Working Hours (WH),
Break Hours (BH) and Non-Working Hours (NH).
By default, Trunk Auto Answer is disabled.
If you have enabled Trunk Auto Answer for All Calls or When Busy, you must also set the Trunk Auto
Answer Greeting Message.
• Trunk Auto Answer Greeting Message: This parameter is to be configured only if you have enabled
Trunk Auto Answer 'For All Calls' or 'When Busy' for a Time Zone in the previous parameter.
Assign the number of the Trunk Auto Answer Greeting with which callers will be greeted. For this you must
first record a Voice Module with the desired Greeting Message and assign it to this parameter.
You can assign up to 4 Greetings Messages for Trunk Auto Answer and assign a different Greeting
message for each Time Zone. Refer the topic “Voice Message Applications” for instructions on configuring
the greetings.
548 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Enter the number of the Greeting Message you want to be played for each Time Zone. By default, Trunk
Auto Answer Greeting number 1 is assigned to all Time Zones.
• Trunk Auto Answer RBT Message Type: This parameter is to be configured only if you have enabled
Trunk Auto Answer 'For All Calls' or 'When Busy' for a Time Zone in the previous parameter.
When Trunk Auto Answer is enabled on a trunk, the system will answer the caller with a Greeting message
once, and play the Ring Back Ton (RBT) Message Type you have selected. You can select an RBT
Message Type from the following options:
• None: The system will play Ring Back Tone to the caller after the Trunk Auto Answer Greeting
Message.
• Internal MOH: The system will play internal music-on-hold to the caller after playing the Trunk Auto
Answer Greeting Message.
• External Music: The system will play music to the caller from an external source connected to the
Analog Input Port.
If you select this option, you must also connect an External Music source to the Analog Input Port. You
may refer to the Installation Instructions for your model of ETERNITY.
• RBT Message: The system will play a voice message continuously to the caller.
If you select this option, you must first record a Voice Module with the desired RBT Greeting Message.
You can set up to 4 RBT Messages. You can also assign a different RBT message for each Time Zone.
Refer the topic “Voice Message Applications” for instructions on configuring the RBT Message.
Assign the number of the RBT Message you want to be played to callers in each Time Zone.
By default, 'None' is selected as RBT Message Type for all Time Zones.
• Trunk Auto Answer Busy Bye Message: This parameter is to be configured only if you have enabled
Trunk Auto Answer ('For All Calls' or 'When Busy') for a Time Zone.
When Trunk Auto Answer is enabled on a trunk, the system will answer the caller with a Greeting message
once, and play the Ring Back Tone (RBT) Message Type you have selected (see previous parameter)
continuously for the duration of the DID Inactivity Timer. If the landing destination (called extension) is busy
on the expiry of this Timer, the system will inform the caller about the busy state in two ways, which you
can select from the following options:
• None: The system will play a Busy Tone to the caller.
• Bye Message: The system will play a voice message to the caller.
If you select this option, you must first record a Voice Module with the desired Bye Message.
You can set up to 4 Busy Bye Message. You can also assign a different Busy Bye message for each
Time Zone. Refer the topic “Voice Message Applications” for instructions on configuring the Busy Bye
Message.
Assign the number of the Bye Message you want to be played to callers in each Time Zone.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 549
By default 'None' is selected as Busy Bye Message for all Time Zones.
• Priority: Select a Priority Level for the trunks on which the template will be applied.
Each trunk of the ETERNITY can be assigned a Priority Level starting from 1, 2, 3... to 9, with '1' being
lowest Priority and '9' being highest Priority.
Whenever there are incoming calls on multiple trunks, the call on the trunk with higher priority will be
answered by the Operator station first. To know more, read the feature description “Priority”.
By default, the Priority of all trunks is set to '9'. Decide what Priority Level you will assign to the trunks and
set the desired level for the trunk.
• SMDR-OG Storage: This flag is used to enable or disable the storage of details of outgoing calls from the
trunk. Please refer the topic “Station Message Detail Recording-Storage” for more details. By default,
storage of outgoing calls is enabled.
• SMDR-IC Storage: This flag is used to enable or disable storage of details of incoming calls on the trunk.
Please refer the topic “Station Message Detail Recording-Storage” to know more. By default, storage of
incoming calls is enabled.
• Hold on DSS Key Press: This flag defines the 'Hold' state of the external called party, when an extension
user presses a DSS key to dial another port.
For example, the DKP extension user (on DKP-001 port) is in the middle of speech with an external party
on a Trunk port TWT-002.
If extension user of DKP-001 presses a DSS key to call another extension port DKP-003, two situations
are possible, depending on whether the Hold on DSS Key Press flag is enabled or disabled:
• When the Hold Flag is enabled: TWT-002 will be played music-on-hold. DKP-001 will hear Ring Back
Tone and the call will be placed on DKP-003.
• When Hold Flag is disabled: TWT-002 will be disconnected. DKP-001 will hear Ring Back Tone, and
call will be placed on DKP-003.
By default the Hold On DSS Key Press flag is enabled.
• Forced Account Code Flag: This parameter is related to the “Account Codes” feature of the ETERNITY.
This flag must be enabled, if the feature Forced Account Code is to be applied on the trunks.
When this flag is enabled, the system will prompt extension users to dial the Account Code whenever they
grab a trunk to dial out a number. The system will allow extension users to dial out numbers only when
after they have dialed the Account Code or Name.
By default, the flag is disabled. Refer the feature description for “Account Codes” to know more.
Account Codes feature must also be enabled in the Class of Service of extension users who are to be
allowed this feature.
550 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• FAX TLG (Routing Group): The (SLT) stations to which Fax machines are connected can be configured
in a 'Fax Trunk Landing Group (TLG).Incoming calls detected as fax calls by the system will be routed to
the Fax TLG. Currently the system supports 'Fax Call' detection on SIP trunks only.
To use this feature, you must first configure a Routing Group as FAX TLG. Refer the topic “Routing Group”
for instructions.
You may configure any Routing Group number as Fax TLG. By default, Routing Group 01 is assigned as
Fax TLG. As the same Routing Group is used for other feature applications such as Trunk Landing Group,
Floor Service, Alarms, you are recommended to configure a different Routing Group number as Fax TLG.
Now, assign the number of the Routing Group you have prepared as Fax TLG.
• Call Cost Calculation Pulse Rate Option: This parameter is to be configured only if you want to apply
the “Call Cost Calculation (CCC)” feature on the trunks on which the template is applied.
You have four options for Pulse Rate Types. Select from Pulse Rate Type for Pulse Rate Option 1 to 4
which you want to apply on the trunks.
• Call Cost Calculation Time Schedule: This parameter is to be configured only if you want to apply the
“Call Cost Calculation (CCC)” feature on the trunks on which the template is applied.
The Pulse Rates offered by service providers may vary according to the time of the day. In such cases, you
must first define the Time Zone (time of the day) for which a particular Pulse Rate should be applied and
the Time Schedule for each Time Zone.
You can configure up to four different Time Zones - T1, T2, T3 and T4 with different Pulse rates in the
CCC-“Holiday Pulse Rate Table”.
Now, configure the Call Cost Calculation Time Schedule, by specifying the Start Time and the End time (in
24hours: minutes format) for each Time Zone.
The default Time Schedule (starts and end time) for each Time Zone Index are as follows:
Time Zone Index Start Time End Time
T1 00:00 23:59
T2 00:00 23:59
T3 00:00 23:59
T4 00:00 23:59
If your service provider offers the same Pulse Rate for the entire day,
• configure only one Time Zone Index with the Pulse Rate, for instance, T1, in the CC-Holiday Pulse
Rate Table.
• Now, set the Time Schedule for Time Zone, T1, with the start and end time in Hours: Minutes format;
• set the start and end time of the other Time Zone Index, T2 to T4, to 00:00 (hours: minutes).
Similarly, if your service provider supports two different Pulse Rates in a day, set the Start and the End time
for two Time Zones and set the other two to 00:00.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 551
Customizing Trunk Feature Templates
By default, Trunk Feature Template 01 is assigned to all Trunk Types: TWT, Mobile, SIP, BRI, T1E1PRI, except
E&M. The default values of the parameters of this template are sufficient to meet the common requirements of most
users.
If the default values of the Template fulfill the requirements of all Trunk types, retain this template. If you want to
change some of the feature settings and apply the template to all trunk types, you may simply customize this
template.
However, if you want to assign different feature settings for different trunk types, you are recommended to prepare
and apply separate Trunk Feature Templates for each Trunk type.
This can be done using Jeeves and from a telephone.
Customizing Trunk Feature Template using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access.
• Click 'Trunk Feature Template' link.
• Select a Trunk Feature Template Number, for instance 02.
552 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Customize the Template by changing the values of the desired parameters.
• Click 'Submit' to save changes.
• Apply the Trunk Feature Template you customized to the Trunk Port type.
• To apply the template on TWT Trunks,
• Open 'TWT Parameters' page'.
• Go to the TWT software ports to which this Template you customized is to be assigned, for instance
TWT-001 to 003.
• Enter the number of the Trunk Feature Template you customized, 02, in the 'Trunk Feature Template'
field of this port.
• Click ‘Submit' to save changes.
• To apply the template on Mobile Ports,
• Click 'Mobile Configuration' link.
• Click 'Mobile Port Parameters' to open the page.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 553
• Enter the number of the template you customized in the field 'Trunk Feature Template' of the Mobile
Software ports to which you want to assign this template.
• Click 'Submit' to save changes.
• Repeat the same steps to create another template and apply it on the desired Trunk Port type.
To apply the template on E&M ports, open 'E&M Parameters' page under E&M Configuration.
To apply the template on SIP Trunks, open 'SIP Parameters' page under VoIP Configuration.
To apply the template to BRI Trunks, open 'BRI Parameters' page under BRI Configuration.
To apply the template on T1 lines, open 'T1 Port Parameters' page under T1E1 Configuration.
To apply the template on E1 lines, open 'E1 Port Parameters' page under T1E1 Configuration.
• Remember to click 'Submit' to save your settings on each page.
Customizing Trunk Feature Template using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To change the default value of a Trunk Feature Parameter in a Template, dial:
• 5802-1-Trunk Feature Template Number-Feature Number-Code to change the value of a parameter
in a single template
554 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• 5802-2-Trunk Feature Template Number-Trunk Feature Template Number-Feature Number-Code
to set the same value for the parameter in a range of templates.
• 5802-*-Feature Number-Code to set the same value for the parameter in all templates.
Template Number is the number of the Trunk Feature Template from 01 to 50.
Parameter Number is the number of the Trunk Feature Template Parameter from 01 to 35.
Code is the value for each parameter from 0 to 9.
Refer the following table for the parameter numbers and the values for the codes.
Trunk Feature Templates - Parameter Numbers and Default Values
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 555
For example: Assign Trunk Landing Group 03 to Working Hours and Break Hours and Trunk Landing
Group 04 to Non-Working Hours in Template 02.
To assign TLG 03 to Working Hours, dial:
• 5802-1-02-03-03
Where,
02 is the template number
03 is the parameter number for TLG-Working Hours
03 is the code for the TLG to be assigned to Working Hours.
556 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To assign TLG 03 to Break Hours, dial:
• 5802-1-02-04-03
Where,
02 is the template number
04 is the parameter number for TLG-Break Hours
03 is the code for the TLG to be assigned to Break Hours.
To assign TLG 04 to Non-Working Hours, dial:
• 5802-1-02-05-03
Where,
02 is the template number
05 is the parameter number for TLG-Non-Working Hours
03 is the code for the TLG to be assigned to Non-Working Hours.
To default Trunk Feature Templates, dial:
• 5801-1-Trunk Feature Template Number to default a single template.
• 5801-2-Trunk Feature Template Number-Trunk Feature Template Number to default a range of
templates.
• 5801-* to default all templates.
• To assign a Trunk Feature Template to a Trunk Port type:
For TWT trunks, dial:
• 5803-1-TWT- Trunk Feature Template Number to assign a feature template to a single TWT port.
• 5803-2-TWT-TWT- Trunk Feature Template Number to assign a feature template to a range of TWT
ports.
• 5803-*- Trunk Feature Template Number to assign a feature template to all TWT ports.
Where,
TWT is the Software Port number of the TWT port from 001 to 128.
Template Number is the number of the customized Trunk Feature Template, from 01 to 50. Default:
Template 01.
For BRI trunks, dial:
• 5804-1-BRI- Trunk Feature Template Number to assign a feature template to a single BRI port.
• 5804-2-BRI-BRI- Trunk Feature Template Number to assign a feature template to a range of BRI
ports.
• 5804-*- Trunk Feature Template Number to assign a feature template to all BRI ports.
Where,
BRI is the Software Port number of the TWT port from 01 to 32.
Template Number is the number of the customized Trunk Feature Template, from 01 to 50. Default:
Template 01.
For E&M Trunks, dial:
• 5805-1-E&M- Trunk Feature Template Number to assign a template to a single E&M port.
• 5805-2-E&M-E&M- Trunk Feature Template Number to assign the same template to a range of E&M
ports.
• 5805-*- Trunk Feature Template Number to assign the same template to all E&M ports.
Where,
E&M is the Software Port number of the port from 001 to 128.
Template Number is the number of the customized Trunk Feature Template, from 01 to 50. Default:
Trunk Feature Template 01.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 557
For T1E1 Trunks, dial:
• 5806-1-T1E1- Trunk Feature Template Number to assign a template to a single T1E1 port.
• 5806-2-T1E1- Trunk Feature Template Number to assign the same template to a range of T1E1
ports.
• 5806-*- Trunk Feature Template Number to assign the same template to all T1E1 ports.
Where,
T1E1is the Software Port number of the port from 1 to 8.
Template Number is the number of the customized Trunk Feature Template, from 01 to 50. Default:
Trunk Feature Template 01.
For Mobile ports, dial:
• 5807-1-Mobile- Trunk Feature Template Number to assign a template to a single Mobile port.
• 5807-2-Mobile-Mobile- Trunk Feature Template Number to assign the same template to a range of
Mobile Ports.
• 5807-*- Trunk Feature Template Number to assign the same template to all Mobile ports.
Where,
Mobile Port Number is the number of the software port from 01 to 64.
Template Number is the number of the Trunk Feature Template, from 01 to 50.
Default: Trunk Feature Template 01.
For SIP Trunks, dial:
• 5808-1-SIP-Trunk Feature Template Number to assign a template to a single SIP trunk.
• 5808-2-SIP-SIP- Trunk Feature Template Number to assign the same template to a range of SIP
trunks.
• 5808-*- Trunk Feature Template Number to assign the same template to all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP Trunk from 01 to 32.
Template Number is the number of the Trunk Feature Template from 01 to 50.
• Exit SE mode.
SIP Hardware Template
The SIP Hardware Template contains a set voice quality related features such as Voice Codec selection, Tx and
Rx Gains, Echo Cancellation, Jitter Buffer and, Fax-over-IP options and related parameters
A SIP Hardware Template must be assigned to all SIP Trunks as well as SIP Extensions. Using the SIP Hardware
Template, you can configure SIP Trunks and Extensions the same set of features at one go.
ETERNITY offers 32 SIP Hardware Templates, which can be customized as per the requirement and applied on
SIP Trunks and Extensions.
SIP Hardware Template Parameters
Each of the SLT Hardware Template parameters is described below in brief.
• Vocoder Preference: Vocoders are the various voice codecs used to compress the data in RTP packets
for optimum use of bandwidth and for ensuring voice quality. You can set 7 Vocoder options in the order of
preference for a SIP trunk.
The Vocoders supported by the VoIP card of the ETERNITY in the order of preference, from 1st to 7th, by
default are: G.723, G.729ab, GSM FR, iLBC - 30 ms, iLBC - 20 ms, G. 711-Law, and G. 711 A-Law.
558 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
If you do not want to select any Vocoder, you can select the option 'None' in the Template. However, if all
Vocoder Preferences from 1 to 7 are set to 'None', incoming and outgoing calls will be blocked.
• G.723 Bit Rate (kbps): You can select the Bit Rate for G.723 codec as 5.3 kbps or 6.3 kbps. When G.723
is negotiated, the selected Bit Rate will be applied only when sending the RTP packets. When receiving
RTP packets from the remote end, both Bit Rates of G.723 will be accepted. The default G.723 Bit Rate is
6.3kpbs.
• Silence Suppression for Vocoders: This parameter suppresses the 'Silence' packets, allowing only the
Voice packets through. ETERNITY supports Silence Suppression for all Vocoders except GSM FR.
Silence Suppression must be disabled if you have selected 'Pass Through' as the “Fax Type”.
• Rx Gain for SIP to Digital Trunk/DKP Voice call (dB): This parameter allows you to increase the
incoming speech volume level of calls from SIP trunks to Digital trunks (BRI, T1E1, and Mobile).
• Tx Gain for SIP to Digital Trunk/DKP Voice call (dB): This parameter allows you to increase the
outgoing speech volume level of calls from SIP trunks to Digital trunks (BRI, T1E1, and Mobile)
• You can also set the Rx and Tx Gains for SIP to Analog Trunks and Stations (TWT and SLT).
• To increase Rx and Tx Gain for SIP to TWT trunks, go to “TWT Hardware Template”.
• To increase Rx and Tx Gain for SIP to SLT stations, go to “SLT hardware Template”.
• DTMF Type: This parameter will determine how the DTMF digits will be sent over the IP Network, when a
DTMF digit is pressed. The ETERNITY supports three DTMF options: i) RTP (RFC 2833), ii) SIP Info, and
iii) In-Band. You may select the appropriate option. By default RTP (RFC 2833) is selected.
• Echo Cancellation: ETERNITY supports Echo Cancellation for SIP to TWT trunk calls and SIP to Digital
Trunks (BRI, T1E1, Mobile, SIP) and Stations (DKP, ISDN Terminals). If you want to apply Echo
Cancellation, you must enable configure the following parameters.
• Enable: This flag is to be enabled to apply Echo Cancellation on SIP to TWT and SIP to Digital Trunks/
Stations. By default Echo Cancellation is enabled.
• Tail Length (msec) for TWT: Echo Cancellation Tail Length for SIP to TWT trunks can be 32/64/128
milliseconds. By default, Echo Cancellation Tail Length for TWT is set to 64 milliseconds.
• Tail Length (msec) for Stations and Digital Trunks: Echo Cancellation Tail Length for SIP to Digital
Trunks/Stations can be 32/64/128 milliseconds. By default, Echo Cancellation Tail Length for Digital
Trunks/Stations is set to 32 milliseconds.
• Jitter Buffer: The speed at which voice packets travel through a network depends on the condition of the
network. All voice packets may not come at the same speed. This variation in the delay in receiving
packets, known as Jitter, affects voice quality. Jitter Buffer helps overcome the delay in receiving voice
packets and improves voice quality. Jitter Buffer receives voice packets, stores them and sends it to the
DSP to process it at evenly spaced intervals, thus improving voice quality.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 559
ETERNITY supports two types of Jitter Buffer: Static and Dynamic. Static Jitter Buffer's internal delay is
static, whereas, the Dynamic Jitter Buffer's internal delay adapts itself to the jitter in the network.
• Type: Select the type of Jitter Buffer - Static or Dynamic - you want to use. If you selected Static Jitter
Buffer, you may set the 'Minimum Delay'. The value configured in the Minimum Delay determines the
size of the Static Jitter buffer.
If you selected Dynamic Jitter Buffer, configure the 'Optimization Factor' and 'Minimum Delay'. The
minimum size of the Dynamic Jitter buffer depends on the 'Minimum Delay' you configured. The
Optimization Factor determines the rate of adaptation of the Dynamic Jitter Buffer to the jitter in the
network.
• Optimization Factor: This parameter must be configured if you have selected Dynamic Jitter Buffer.
The Optimization Factor can be set from 01 to 13. By default, it is set to '10'.
In networks with higher jitter, a higher value should be set as Optimization Factor.
The actual size of the Dynamic Jitter Buffer will be determined by the DSP on the basis of the value of
the Optimization Factor and actual network condition. Dynamic Jitter buffer can go up to maximum 300
milliseconds.
• Minimum Delay (msec): This parameter is to be configured for both Static and Dynamic Jitter Buffer.
The Minimum Delay determines the size of the Static Jitter Buffer and When Jitter Buffer type is
selected as Static, the Minimum Delay defines the size of the Static Jitter Buffer. The Static Jitter Buffer
will store each received voice packets for the time you set and then it will send it to DSP for voice
processing.
When Jitter Buffer type is Dynamic, the Minimum Delay specifies the minimum time for which the
Dynamic Jitter Buffer will store the received voice packet before sending it to the DSP for voice
processing. 'Minimum Delay' can be from 10 to 280 milliseconds. By default Minimum Delay is set to
150 milliseconds.
• Fax Type: This parameter allows you to select the protocol of Fax over IP (FoIP). You can send/receive
Fax from a Fax machine connected to the SLT port of the ETERNITY.
The ETERNITY VoIP Card supports the fax options: T.38 (UDPTL), T.38 (RTP), and Pass Through.
• 'Pass Through' and 'T.38' will work only if the peer devices also support the same option.
• If you select 'Pass through' as Fax type, you must disable 'Silence Suppression'.
• If the fax sent using T.38 is rejected, ETERNITY will use Pass Through for sending the Fax.
• T.38 Fax Parameters: This parameter is relevant only if you have selected T.38 as the Fax Type of Fax
over IP. Receiving a good quality fax over SIP trunk depends on high 'Eye Quality Monitor' (EQM). The
higher the Eye Quality Monitor, the better the Fax quality. To improve the quality of T.38 fax reception, you
may configure the below parameters.
• Max Rate (Kbps): This parameter controls the Fax image transfer speed. As EQM is inversely
proportional to Fax Max Rate, if you receive poor quality fax, the Fax Max Rate should be reduced. The
default Max rate is 14.4 kbps.
560 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Packet Period (msec): This parameter sets the sampling rate of TDM signal. If you cannot improve fax
quality by lowering Fax Max Rate, you may reduce the Fax Packet Period.
When you reduce the Fax Packet Period, the fax image will be sent at lower speed. EQM is inversely
proportional to Fax Packet Period.
The default packet period is 40msec. Do not change the default settings unless it is required.
• Image Redundancy Level: The Fax Image Level is redundancy level for output Image, which can be
from 0 to 3.
Fax Image transfer speed is inversely proportional to this parameter. If this parameter is low then fax is
transferred faster. EQM is directly proportional to this parameter. If this parameter is high, good quality
fax can be achieved.
You may increase the Fax Image Level from 1 to 3 if the quality of fax does not improve with Fax Max
Rate and Fax Packet Period.
Level 0 means no redundancy. By default Image Redundancy level is set to 1.
• Data Redundancy Level: This is a redundancy level for T.30 control data. Fax Data Level can be set from
0 to 7. Level 0 means no redundancy. Redundancy level increases from 1 towards 7. The higher the level
set, the slower would be the fax transmission.
EQM is directly proportional to this parameter. The higher the Fax Data Redundancy Level, the better the
EQM. By default, Data Redundancy Level is set to 3.
• Pass Through Fax: This parameter is of relevance if you have selected 'Pass Through' as the Fax type.
Pass Through Fax packets are transported using RTP protocol. Normally, fax calls require less gain
compared to voice calls. However, to improve fax reception, ETERNITY allows the configuring of gain
settings for fax. Fax gain settings consist of Data Gain and Bypass Gain.
ETERNITY supports Fax Receive Gain for SIP to Digital Trunk calls as well as SIP to SLT Calls.
• Pass Through FAX Rx Gain (SIP-Digital Trunk Call): Configure this parameter if Pass Through Fax is to
be received on a Digital Trunk (Mobile, BRI, T1E1PRI).
• Data Gain (dB): select the dB Level for Data Gain. By default, Data Gain is set to -11 dB.
• Bypass Gain (dB): select the dB Level for Bypass Gain. By default, Bypass gain is set to -9 dB.
• Pass Through FAX Rx Gain (SIP-SLT Call): configure this parameter if Pass Through Fax is to be
received on a fax machine connected to an SLT port.
• Data Gain (dB): select the dB Level for Data Gain. By default, Data Gain is set to -11 dB.
• Bypass Gain (dB): select the dB Level for Bypass Gain. By default, Bypass gain is set to -9 dB.
Customizing SIP Hardware Template
You can customize 32 SIP Hardware Templates using Jeeves or by dialing SE commands from a Telephone. By
default, SIP Hardware Template 01 is assigned to all SIP Trunks as well as SIP Extensions.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 561
If the default SIP Hardware Template 01 fulfills the user requirements, retain Template 01.
If you want to change the values of certain SIP Hardware Parameters, but apply the same parameter values to all
SIP Trunks and Extensions, simply customize the desired parameters in Template 01.
If different hardware parameters are to be applied to different SIP Trunks and SIP Extensions, customize different
the SIP Hardware Templates using Jeeves or a Telephone and apply them to the SIP Trunks and SIP Extensions
as appropriate.
Customizing SIP Hardware Template using Jeeves
• Log into Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access.
• Click 'VoIP Configuration'.
• Open the link 'SIP Hardware Templates'.
• Select a Template number you wish to customize, for example Template 02.
• Change the values of the SIP Hardware Template parameters as desired.
• Click 'Submit' to save your changes.
• Now, apply this Template 02 on the SIP Trunks and SIP Extensions.
To apply the customized template on SIP Trunks,
• Click 'SIP Trunk Parameters' under VoIP Configuration.
• Go to the SIP Trunks to which this Template is to be assigned, for example SIP Trunk 02, 03 and 04.
• Enter the number of the Template you customized, 02, in the field 'SIP Hardware Template' of each of
these SIP Trunks.
• Click 'Submit' to save your template.
To apply the customized template on SIP Extensions,
• Click 'SIP Extension Settings' under VoIP Configuration.
• Go to the SIP Extension software ports to which the Template is to be assigned, for example SIP
Extensions-005 to 008.
• Enter the number of the Template you customized, 02, in the field 'SIP Hardware Template' of each of
these SIP Extensions.
• Click 'Submit' to save your settings.
• Repeat the same steps to customize another template and apply it on the SIP Trunks and Extensions.
562 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Customizing SIP Hardware Template using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To change the default values of a SIP Hardware Parameter in a Template, dial:
• 7806-1-SIP Hardware Template Number-Parameter Number-Code to assign the value of a
parameter in a single template.
• 7806-2-SIP Hardware Template Number-SIP Hardware Template Number-Parameter Number-
Code to set the same value for the parameter in a range of templates.
• 7806-*-Parameter Number-Code to set the same value for the parameter in all templates.
Where,
SIP Hardware Template is from 01 to 32.
Parameter Number is the number of the SIP Hardware Template Parameter from 01 to 27.
Code is the value for each parameter from 01 to 63.
Refer the table below for parameter numbers and meaning of codes.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 563
SIP Hardware Templates - Parameter Numbers and Default Values
For example, to select T.38 (RTP) as Fax Type in Template 02l, dial 7806-1-02-19-2
Where,
02 is the template number
19 is the parameter number for Fax Type
564 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
2 is the code for T.38 (RTP)
To restore default values of a SIP Hardware Template, dial:
• 7805-1-SIP Hardware Template Number to default a single template.
• 7805-2-SIP Hardware Template Number-SIP Hardware Template Number to default a range of
templates.
• 7805-* to default all templates
To apply SIP Hardware Template to a SIP Trunk, dial:
• 7808-1-SIP-SIP Hardware Template Number to apply template to a single trunk.
• 7808-2-SIP-SIP- SIP Hardware Template Number to apply the same template to a range of trunks.
• 7808-*-SIP Hardware Template Number to apply the same template to all trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the SIP Trunk from 01 to 32.
SIP Hardware Template Number is from 01 to 32.
For example, to apply SIP Hardware Template 02 on SIP trunks 02, 03, and 04, dial 7808-2-02-04-02
To apply SIP Hardware Template to a SIP Extension, dial:
• 7807-1-SIP Extension-SIP Hardware Template Number to apply the template to a single extension.
• 7807-2-SIP Extension-SIP Extension-SIP Hardware Template Number to apply the template to a
range of extensions.
• 7807-*-SIP Hardware Template Number to apply the same template to all extensions.
Where,
SIP Extension is the number of the SIP Extension from 001 to 999.
SIP Hardware Template Number is from 01 to 32.
For example, to apply SIP Hardware Template 02 on SIP Extensions 005 to 008, dial 7807-2-005-008-
02
• Exit SE mode.
E&M Feature Template
The E&M Feature Template is a set of features specific to E&M signaling, which define the behaviour of the E&M
ports, according to their 'Orientation Type', whether they are functioning as Stations, Trunks or Tie-Lines.
The E&M Feature Template is applied also on T1E1PRI trunks which use E&M signaling.
The ETERNITY offers 50 such Templates. The E&M templates are loaded with default values that serve the
requirements of a broad user base, but can be customized as per user requirements.
E&M Feature Template Parameters
The E&M Feature Template has the following parameters:
• Seizure Type: E&M Trunk Seizure Type is the line protocol that defines how the equipment seizes the
E&M Trunk. It is also referred to as Start Dial Supervision Signaling Protocol. ETERNITY supports the
following Seizure Types:
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 565
• Immediate: The method of seizing the E&M Line using Immediate Start for Outgoing and Incoming
calls is illustrated below.
Outgoing Call:
While making an outgoing call, when the station user of PBX A seizes the E&M Port of PBX A, the
status of the "M" wire of its E&M port will go high, indicating that it has seized the E&M line.
There will not be any signaling over the "E" wire of PBX A's E&M Port during seizure.
Incoming Call:
While receiving an incoming call over its E&M port, PBX-B will be ready to receive digits as soon as it
detects high state on its "E" wire.
There will not be any signaling over the "M" wire of E&M Port of PBX B while receiving an incoming
call.
• Immediate with Ack: The method of seizing the E&M Line using Immediate with Acknowledgement for
Outgoing and Incoming calls is as follows:
Outgoing Call:
If this seizure type is selected, while an outgoing call is made by seizing the E&M Port, the 'M" wire will
go high immediately.
The remote end will acknowledge this by making its 'M' wire high, which in turn will activates (high) 'E'
wire of the E&M port of PBX-A.
On sensing high signal on 'E' wire, PBX-A will start dialing out the DTMF/Pulse digits.
Incoming Call:
On detecting high signal on "E" wire of the E&M port, the system will consider it to be an incoming call
seizure and hence it will immediately make its 'M" wire high, which will allow the remote end to dial out
the DTMF/Pulse digits.
Call Disconnection:
If the parameter 'Release Type' is configured as 'Status Change' and for this type of seizure, the "M"
wire at the remote end goes Low for some call condition, the call will be disconnected. For example,
"M" wire at the remote end will go 'Low' in the following conditions:
• Remote end user dials invalid number and does not hang up on getting Error Tone.
• Remote end user dials valid station number and after conversation remote end hangs up first.
• Remote end user dials valid number and station does not reply, but the remote party does not
disconnect the call.
566 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Remote end has made 'Orientation Type' of E&M port as 'Trunk' and for Incoming calls, all the
stations in the trunk landing group are busy and also second call is not allowed to the station user,
the system will disconnect the call after the expiry of the Ring Back Tone Timer, by making the 'M'
wire Low.
• Immediate + Wink: The method of seizing the E&M Line using Immediate + Wink Start for Outgoing
and Incoming calls is described below.
0V 0V
Wink
-48V -48V Pulse
2001 3001
M M
E E
Rx Rx
PBX-A PBX-B
Tx Tx
SA SA
2002 3002
SB SB
Outgoing Call:
While making an outgoing call when the PBX A attempts a seizure (grab), the state of the "M" wire of
the E&M port of PBX A will go high.
To acknowledge this, the E&M port of PBX B will send Wink signal over its "M" wire, when PBX B is
ready to receive digits.
PBX A will wait for the duration of the 'Wait Wink Timer'. On receiving the acknowledgment in the form
of Wink signal on the "E" wire of its E&M port, before the expiry of the Wait Wink Timer, PBX A will
consider the trunk seizure as successful. Digits will be dialed out from E&M port.
If Wink is not received from PBX B within the ‘Wait Wink Timer’, PBX-A will drop the call.
Incoming Call:
While receiving an incoming call over the 'M' wire of its E&M port, PBX B will send the Wink signal to
the PBX A, which has initiated the seizure (grab).
The ‘Wink’ signal will be sent by the PBX B when it is ready to receive the digits from the PBX A.
You can change the 'wink' pulse width by configuring the 'Wink Pulse Timer'.
The width of the Wink Pulse ranges from 0000 to 9999 milliseconds.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 567
• Immediate with Ack + Wink (MFC R2): The method of seizing the E&M Line using Immediate with
Ack + Wink (MFC R2) for outgoing and incoming calls is described below.
Outgoing Call:
When PBX-A attempts a seizure of (attempts to grab) the E&M Port, the 'M' Wire of the E&M Port of
PBX-A will go high and wait for the E&M Port of PBX B to turn its 'M' wire high.
PBX-B detects this on its 'E' wire. To acknowledge this, the E&M port of PBX-B will turn its 'M' wire high
and send a Wink signal over its 'M' Wire. Sending of the wink signal indicates the readiness of PBX-B
to receive the digits of the called party number.
PBX-A will wait for the duration of the 'Wait Wink Timer' to receive the acknowledgment in form of the
Wink Signal on the 'E' wire of its E&M port.
When PBX-A receives the acknowledgment from PBX-B, before the Wait Wink Timer expires, PBX-A
considers the trunk seizure as successful and starts dialing out DTMF digits as per the MFCR2
Signaling protocol.
However, if PBX-A does not receive the Wink Signal within the ‘Wait Wink Timer', or if invalid Wink
Pulse is received (not according to Wink Pulse Timer), PBX-A will drop the call by turning its 'M' wire
low.
Incoming Call:
On detecting high signal on 'E' wire of the E&M port, PBX-B will consider it to be an incoming call
seizure and hence it will immediately make its 'M' wire high and send the Wink signal on the 'M' wire of
PBX-A to indicate its readiness to receive the called party number digits. The width of the Wink Pulse
(referred to as 'Proceed To Send' in MFCR2 Signaling) can be changed by setting the 'Wink Pulse
Timer'.
PBX-A dials out the digits as per the MFCR2 Signaling protocol.
When the called station of PBX-B answers the call, PBX-B sends the Wink signal on the 'M' wire of its
E&M Port to indicate the call maturity.
Call Disconnection:
The call can be disconnected by the calling party, PBX-A, or the called party, PBX-B by changing the
status of the 'M' wire to Low.
Call Disconnection takes place when 'M' wire is low. So, it is recommended that the Call 'Release Type'
of the E&M Port for this Seizure Type (Immediate with Ack+Wink) be set to 'Status Change'.
568 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
If you select Immediate with Ack+Wink as the Seizure Type, you must configure the MFCR2 Signaling
parameters.
• Seizure Pulse: The method of seizing the E&M Line using Seizure Pulse for Outgoing and Incoming
Calls is described below.
Outgoing Call:
While making an out going call from the E&M port of PBX-A, it will send Seizure Pulse over the "M" wire
of its E&M port to seize the line.
Incoming Call:
While receiving an incoming call over the E&M Port PBX B will detect valid Seizure Pulse over the "E"
wire of its E&M port.
Seizure Pulse can be set for various time periods T1, T2 and T3 as required.
The Seizure Pulse for T1, T2 and T3 ranges from 000 to 999 milliseconds.
• Seizure Pulse + Wink: The method of seizing the E&M Line using Seizure Pulse + Wink for Outgoing
and Incoming Calls is as follows:
Outgoing Call:
While making an OG call, "Seizure Pulse" (as configured) will be sent on the "M" wire of E&M Port and
will start ‘Wait Wink Timer’ and expect ‘Wink’ from the remote device.
On receiving a valid Wink Pulse from the remote end within the Wait Wink Timer, digits will be dialed
out on the E&M Port.
If a valid Wink Pulse is not received from the remote end, digits will be dialed out on the expiry of ‘Wait
Wink Timer’.
Incoming Call:
On detecting valid Seizure pulse (matching with configured value of seizure pulse) on "E" wire of the
E&M Port, the E&M Port will send Wink pulse (of configured value) on "M" wire, and the call will be
considered to be present.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 569
• Express: Express Signaling works as illustrated below.
To make a call from PBX A to PBX B, the caller from PBX A presses the DSS Key of the desired E&M
port.
For as long as the DSS key is pressed by caller from PBXA, the signal on the "M" wire of E&M port of
PBX A will be high.
When the destination station on PBX B answers, the caller from PBX A releases the DSS key, as the
line seizure is successful.
When the caller from PBX A releases the DSS key, the signal on the 'M' wire of the E&M port of PBX A,
and the "E" wire of the E&M port of PBX B will go low.
• Radio A: This seizure type to be used for supporting Combat Net Radio (CNR) signaling on the E&M
port.
The E&M port of the ETERNITY will detect this pulse on the 'E' wire of its E&M port and recognize it as
a seizure signal (incoming call indication).
The length of this input signal (pulse) can be defined by setting the 'Minimum Pulse Width for Radio
Seizure' Timer. The ETERNITY will recognize the input signal on the 'E' wire of its E&M port as a
seizure signal only if the signal is present for the duration of this timer.
Once the incoming call is detected by the E&M port, the call is routed to the Routing Group number as
per the call routing logic configured for the E&M port.
When Routing Group member (Station) answers the call, speech is established with the CNR user.
Outgoing Call:
When any station user of the PBX wants to contact the CNR user (Soldier), station user must grab the
E&M port by dialing TAC/Selective Trunk Access / DSS key of E&M Port.
When E&M Port is grabbed by the station user, the 'M' wire of the E&M port is made high, to indicate
the seizure signal to the radio equipment. The radio equipment then passes on the call to the CNR
user's wireless phone.
Incoming Call:
When status of "E" wire of the E&M port goes high for greater than or equal to the 'Minimum Pulse
Width for Radio Call' it is considered to be an incoming call, and the call is routed as per the current call
routing logic.
570 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The Minimum Pulse Width for Radio Call' timer will be applicable only if the seizure type is configured
as 'Radio A' or 'Radio B'. The range of this timer is from 0000 to 9999 milliseconds. The default value of
this pulse is 150 milliseconds.
When a station user of the PBX answers an incoming call, the 'M' wire of the E&M Port will be made
high.
The call between the station user and the CNR user can be disconnected only if the station user
disconnects the call. So, it is recommended that the call 'Release Type' of the E&M port be set to
'None'.
• Radio B: Characteristics of M and E wire for seizure type 'Radio B' are as follows:
Outgoing Call:
When any station user of the PBX wants to contact the CNR user (Soldier), station user must grab the
E&M port by dialing TAC/Selective Trunk Access / DSS key of E&M Port.
When E&M Port is grabbed by the station user, the 'M' wire of the E&M port is made high, to indicate
the seizure signal to the radio equipment. The radio equipment then passes on the call to the CNR
user's wireless phone.
Incoming Call:
When the status of "E" wire of the E&M port goes high for greater than or equal to 'Minimum Pulse
Width for Radio Call' ETERNITY considers it to be an incoming call, and routes the call as per the
current call routing logic.
When a station user answers the call, there is no signaling on the 'M' wire of the E&M port by
ETERNITY.
The call between the station user and the CNR user can be disconnected only if the station user
disconnects the call. So, it is recommended that the call 'Release Type' of the E&M port be set to
'None'.
The following table shows the status of the "M" wire of an E&M Port while making Outgoing calls and
while receiving Incoming calls.
Status of 'M' Wire after Status of 'M' Status of 'M' Wire on
E&M Seizure Type seizure and in conversation Wire when an IC answering and when in
in an OG Call call is initiated conversation in an IC Call
Immediate High Low High
Immediate with Ack High Low High
Immediate + Wink High Wink High
Immediate with Ack High Wink High
+Wink
Seizure Pulse Low Low Low
Seizure Pulse + Wink Low Wink Low
Express Low Low Low
Radio A High Low High
Radio B High Low Low
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 571
• Orientation Type: Configure the Orientation Type of the E&M Port according to your installation
scenario.
Select 'Station' if the E&M port is to function as Station. All Station-related parameters, the “Station
Basic Feature Template” and the “Station Advanced Feature Template”, will be applicable to this port.
Select 'Trunk' as orientation type if the port is to be assigned the feature of a trunk line. All trunk-related
parameters, “Trunk Feature Template”, will be applicable to this port.
Select 'Tie Line'79 if the E&M port is to function as both a Station and a Trunk. The system will regard
the port as a Station for incoming calls and as a Trunk for outgoing calls. The Station Basic and
Advanced Feature Templates as well as the Trunk Feature Template will be applied on this port.
By default, the Orientation Type of all E&M ports is 'Station'.
• Dial Type: Digits can be dialed over E&M Tie Line by two methods:
• Tone: In this Dial Type, the DTMF signals will be sent on the "Tx" of the E&M port of the originating
side and it will be received over the "Rx" of the E&M port of the terminating side.
• Pulse: In this Dial Type, the dialed digits will be sent on the "M" wire of the E&M port of the
originating side and will be received over the "E" wire of the E&M port of the terminating side.
The way digits are sent varies according to the Trunk Seizure Type, as described for each Seizure Type
below.
• Express: the caller can make call by pressing the DSS key.
• Immediate: the PBX seizes the Tie Line and the system will start the Pause Timer. On the expiry of the
Pause Timer the PBX sends the digits to the remote PBX.
• Seizure Pulse + Wink: on receiving Wink signal from the terminating end, the originating side (which
initiates seizure) will start the Pause Timer and on expiry of Pause Timer it will start sending digits.
• Seizure Pulse: the originating PBX system will start the Pause Timer after sending the Seizure Pulse.
On expiry of the Seizure Pulse Timer it will send digits to the terminating end.
• Pulse Dial Ratio: This parameter is to be configured if 'Pulse' is selected as Dial Type in the previous
parameter. Select the Pulse Dial Ratio from any of the following values:
• 10PPS, 1:2
• 10PPS, 2:3
• 10PPS, 1:1
• 20PPS, 1:2
• 20PPS, 2:3
• 20PPS, 1:1
The default Pulse Dial Ratio is 10PPS, 1:2
• Wait Wink Timer (sec): This parameter is to be configured, if 'Immediate + Wink' or 'Seizure Pulse +
Wink' have been selected as Seizure Type for the E&M port.
The Wait Wink Timer is the Time period for which the system waits for the acknowledgement in the
form of Wink Signal on "E" wire of the E&M port of the ETERNITY to consider it as a successful
seizure.
The range of this timer is from 000 to 255 seconds. By default the timer is set to '000' seconds.
79. Such as in PBXs used as Transit Exchanges as in a PLCC Network.
572 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Wink Pulse Timer (msec): This parameter is to be configured, if 'Immediate + Wink' or 'Seizure Pulse
+ Wink' have been selected as Seizure Type for the E&M port.
The Wink Pulse Timer defines the width of the Wink Pulse. The range of this timer is from 0000-9999
milliseconds. By default the timer is set to '0000' milliseconds.
• Seizure Pulse Timers (msec): This parameter is to be configured, if 'Seizure Pulse' is selected as
Seizure Type for the E&M port.
• T1: This is the time period of the first ON period of the 'Seizure Pulse'.
• T2: this is the time period of the second ON period of the 'Seizure Pulse'
• T3: this is the time period of the third ON period of the 'Seizure Pulse'.
The range of T1, T2 and T3 is from 000-999 milliseconds. By default the timer is set to '000'
milliseconds.
• Minimum Pulse Width for Radio Seizure (msec): This Timer is to be configured if 'Radio A' or 'Radio
B' have been selected as the Seizure Type for the E&M ports.
The Minimum Pulse Width for Radio Seizure defines the time for which the ETERNITY will wait to
detect the width of the pulse sent by the Radio Interface Device80 on the 'E' wire of the E&M port and
recognize it as a seizure signal (incoming call indication).
The range of this timer is from 000 to 999 milliseconds. By default the timer is set to '150' milliseconds.
• Release Type: ETERNITY supports four methods to 'release' E&M calls based on, which end will
release the call and 'release pulse width'. These are:
• None: Select this option if you have selected "Express" as Trunk Seizure Type for the E&M port. It
is advisable to keep the Release Type as "None" in case the protocol does not support any
signaling for disconnecting the E&M port, for the reason that 'Trunk-to-Trunk Inactivity Timer' will be
started if the E&M port with Release type "None" is involved in a Trunk-to-Trunk call.
• Release Pulse: Select this option if the specific Pulse width of the Release Pulse is to be used to
disconnect the call. This Pulse width is configurable, as shown below:
The call can be disconnected by either party by sending Release Pulse. Consider the following
example:
80. Connected on the 'M' wire of the E&M port. The Radio Interface Device sends pulse of approximately 100msec or higher.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 573
SLT 2001 is connected to PBX-A and SLT 3001 is connected to PBX-B.
SLT 2001 user goes ON-Hook.
• PBX-A will send Release Pulse over the "M" wire of its E&M port.
• PBX-A will release its E&M port.
• The Release Pulse sent by PBX-A will be received and detected on the "E" wire of the E&M port of
the PBX-B.
• PBX-B will release its E&M port.
SLT 3001 user goes ON-Hook.
• PBX-B will send Release Pulse over the "M" wire of its E&M port.
• PBX-B will release its E&M port.
• The Release pulse sent by PBX-B will be received and detected on the "E" wire of the E&M port of
the PBX-A.
• PBX-A will release its E&M port.
• Status Change: Select this option, if Status change of 'M' wire (‘M’ wire is low) is to be considered for
release of the E&M call.
By default, 'Status Change' is selected as the Release Type for all E&M ports.
If you selected ‘Immediate with Ack + WInk’ as Seizure Type for the E&M Port, select ‘Status Change’
as Release Type for the port.
• Release Pulse Timer (msec): This timer is to be configured if you selected the option 'Release Pulse'
as the Release Type for E&M calls in the previous parameter.
This timer defines the specific Pulse width of the Release Pulse is to be used to disconnect the call.
The range of this timer is from 0000-9999 milliseconds. By default the timer is set to '0000'
milliseconds.
• CCS - When End Point: CCS (Compander Control Signal) is a type of signal used by PLCC Networks
to improve the quality of speech transmission. The PLCC network awaits this signal from the PBX
when speech is established. ETERNITY supports CSS. The system sends CSS signal to the PLCC
panel.
This parameter is relevant if the E&M line is being used in a Power Line Communication Network
(PLCC).
This flag should be enabled if the E&M port is used as an Endpoint in a PLCC network. When the E&M
Port is used as an Endpoint, the system sends CSS to the PLCSS panel while making an outgoing call
through the E&M port and when receiving an incoming call on the E&M port.
By default, the flag is enabled.
• CCS - When Transit Exchange: This flag is to be enabled if the E&M port is used as a Transit
exchange in a PLCC network.
When the E&M Port is used as a Transit Exchange: The system sends CSS to the PLCC panel when
there is an Incoming/Outgoing Transit call through the E&M port.
By default, the flag is enabled.
574 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• DTMF Detection: This flag is relevant when the "Dial Type' for the E&M Port is selected as 'Tone'. This
flag is of significance while receiving incoming calls.
• Max. OG Pulse Digit Count: This count defines the maximum number of digits that can be dialed out
to make a call. When dialing out the number, if the number of digits exceeds this count, the port which
is used for dialing these numbers is released automatically.
• Idle Wait Timer (sec): This timer signifies the time after which the codes could be simply (Station
Numbers or Station Numbers with Exchange ID) dialed over the E&M trunk.
The Idle Wait Timer is useful in two conditions:
• When Forced Disconnection is used. For example, two exchanges A and B are connected
through E&M trunk. Station 2002 of PBX A is talking to station 3001 of PBX B over the E&M line.
Station 2001 of PBX A calls station 3001 of PBX B and finds it to be busy.
Station 2001 is allowed to use forced disconnection feature. Station 2001 issues the forced
disconnection command. The PBX A disconnects the Station 2002. It then waits for the Idle Wait
Timer to expire and then dials 3001 over the E&M trunk.
• To stop any station from grabbing the E&M trunk until call is released. For example, when
Station 2001 of PBX A goes On-Hook, PBX A sends a release signal over the E&M trunk to PBX B.
In turn, PBX B sends a release signal to PBX A as an acknowledgment.
The E&M Idle Wait Timer set in PBX A does not allow any other station of PBX A to grab the E&M
trunk. Similarly, E&M Idle Wait Timer set in PBX B does not allow any station of PBX to grab the
E&M trunk.
• Flash Timer (msec): This Timer is significant when the PBX acts as a Transit exchange for a call. The
flash received on one E&M Port is generated on another E&M Port involved in a Transit call.
• Pause Timer (msec): This Timer defines the time for which the system waits before dialing the outside
number after grabbing the E&M trunk.
Sometimes a station user may not get a dial tone immediately on grabbing a trunk, in which case the
station user may wait for the dial tone before dialing out the number. However, when the system dials
out the number, if there is no pause time, it is possible that the system may dial out the number before
getting the dial tone. This may result in a wrong number being dialed out. The Pause Timer helps avoid
this.
• Pseudo Answer Supervision Timer (sec): This is the time period after which, the system will
consider the call as matured, irrespective of whether the call was answered or not. At the end of the
Timer, the system will start detecting Disconnect Supervision.
The range of this timer is from 000 to 255 seconds. By default the Timer is set to 030 seconds.
• Ring Timer (sec): This is the time for which the stations connected to ETERNITY ring for incoming
calls.
The Ring Timer is useful in situations where the users may not be able to immediately answer on the
first few rings. The range of this timer is from 000 to 255 seconds. By default the Timer is set to 255
seconds.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 575
• Inter-Digit Pause Timer (msec): This Timer defines the time gap to be inserted between digits of a
number string being dialed by the system.
The range of this timer is from 000 to 999 milliseconds. By default the Timer is set to 750 milliseconds.
• DTMF Out Dial: This parameter is of significance when the system dials out DTMF digits to enable the
device at the remote end (in this case a PBX) to detect and decode the Tones. You must configure
both the DTMF ON Time and the Level (dB) according to the DTMF digit detection capacity of the
remote PBX.
For example, PBX A and PBX B are connected over E&M Line. PBX B detects DTMF digits only if the
tone remains present (ON) for 100 milliseconds frequency and at a transmit level of 4 dB. The DTMF
Out Dial parameter for PBX A should be configured accordingly. The DTMF Out Dial ON Time should
be set to 100ms and Level to 4dB.
• ON Time (msec): This is the Time for which the DTMF digit tone will remain ON, while being dialed
out by the ETERNITY. The range of this timer is 50 to 500 milliseconds. By default the ON Time is
set to 100 milliseconds.
This Timer must be configured according to the DTMF digit detection capacity of the remote device.
• Level (dB): This is the Transmit Level of the DTMF digit dialed out by the system. The range of
DTMF Out Dial 'Level' is from 0 to 7. By default DTMF Out Dial Level is set to 3.
• MFC R2 Signaling: This parameter is relevant only if you selected 'Immediate with Ack + Wink' as the
Seizure Type. Configure the following timers related to MFCR2 Signaling.
• Forward Tone Maximum ON Time (T1) (sec): the range of this timer is from 1 to 99 seconds. By
default it is set to 15 seconds.
• Forward Tone Maximum OFF Timer (T2) (sec): The range of this timer is from 1 to 99. By default
it is set to 24 seconds.
• Maximum Compelled Cycle Timer (T3) (sec): the range of this timer is from 1 to 99. By default it
is set to 15 seconds.
• Pulse Duration for Pulse Signal (msec): The range of this timer is from 001 to 999. By default, it
is set to 150 seconds.
• Pulse Signal Maximum Wait Timer (sec): The range of this timer is from 1 to 99. By default, it is
set to 15 seconds.
• First Forward Tone Wait Timer (sec): The range of this timer is from 8 to 24. By default, it is set to
15 seconds.
• Minimum MF Signal Persist Timer (msec): The range of this timer is from 1 to 255 seconds. By
default, it is set to 20 seconds.
• Inter Digit Wait Timer (sec): By default it is set to 10 seconds.
• Ask CLI: By default, it is enabled.
576 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Category (Logical Partitioning): This parameter assigns the E&M Port to a trunk category for the
purpose of Logical Partitioning. By default all E&M Ports are assigned to Category 381.
If you have re-defined Category 3 or have assigned E&M ports to a different category, say Category 2,
enter the same number here.
You may configure the call permission between the Category assigned to E&M Ports and other
Categories. Refer the feature description “Logical Partition” to know more.
Customizing E&M Feature Template
By default E&M Feature Template 01 is applied on all E&M Ports. This template has 'Station' as the default
Orientation Type.
If all the E&M Ports are to be configured as 'Stations', then retain this template.
If all the E&M Ports are to be configured as 'Trunks', use the default E&M Feature Templates 09 and 10 which have
'Trunks' as Orientation Type.
If some of the E&M Ports are to be configured as Stations, some as Trunks and yet others as Tie Lines, prepare
different E&M Feature Template for each Orientation Type and apply them to the related ports.
The E&M Feature Template can be customized using Jeeves and a Telephone.
Customizing E&M Feature Template using Jeeves
• Log in to Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access.
• Click the link 'E&M Configuration'.
81. Trunk ports used to interconnect two PBXs are assigned this category.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 577
• Click the link 'E&M Feature Template'.
• Select an E&M Feature Template Number.
• Customize the E&M Feature Template.
• Click 'Submit' to save changes.
• Now, apply the E&M Feature Template you customized to the E&M Ports and T1E1PRI ports.
To apply E&M Feature Template on E&M ports:
• Click the 'E&M Parameters' link to open the page.
578 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Apply the E&M Feature Template you customized to the E&M Port by entering the template number in the
'E&M Feature Template' field of this port.
• Click 'Submit' to save changes.
To apply E&M Feature Template on T1E1PRI ports:
• Click the link 'T1E1 Configuration'.
• Click the link 'E&M Signaling'.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 579
• Click the tab of the desired T1E1 trunk port number (1 to 8), you wish to apply the E&M feature Template.
• Enter the number of the Template you customized in the field 'E&M Feature Template' of the selected
T1E1 trunk port.
• Click ‘Submit' to save changes.
Customizing E&M Feature Template using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To change the default values of a Parameter in an E&M Feature Template:
• 6002-1-Template Number-Parameter Number-Code to change the value of a parameter in a single
template.
• 6002-2-Template Number-Template Number-Parameter Number-Code to set the same value for
the parameter in a range of templates.
• 6002-*-Parameter Number-Code to set the same value for the parameter in all templates.
Where,
Template Number is the number of the E&M Feature Template from 01 to 50.
Parameter Number is the number of the E&M Feature Template Parameter from 01 to 35.
Code is the parameter value.
Refer the following table for the Parameter Number and default parameter values of all E&M Feature
Templates.
580 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Default E&M Feature Templates
For example, you want to Immediate with Ack +Wink in the E&M Template number 2.
• Dial 6002-1-2-01-9
Where
2 is for E&M Template number 2
01 is parameter number for Seizure Type
9 is the value of Immediate with Ack+Wink
To restore default values to the Parameters of an E&M Feature Template:
• Dial 6001-1-Template Number to restore default values of the parameters of a single template.
• Dial 6001-2-Template Number-Template Number to restore the default values of a range of
templates.
• Dial 6001-* to restore the default values of all templates.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 581
To assign an E&M Feature Template to an E&M port
• Dial 6003-1-E&M-Template Number to assign a template to a single E&M port.
• Dial 6003-2-E&M-E&M-Template Number to assign the same template to a range of ports.
• Dial 6003-*-Template Number to assign the same template to all ports.
Where,
E&M is the number of the E&M Software port from 001 to 128.
Template Number is the number of the E&M Feature Template from 01 to 50.
Default: Template 01 is assigned to all E&M ports.
To assign E&M Feature Template to a T1E1 Port:
• Dial 6004-1-T1E1-Template Number to assign a template to a single T1E1 port.
• Dial 6004-2-T1E1-T1E1-Template Number to assign the same template to a range of T1E1 ports.
• Dial 6004-*-Template Number to assign the same template to all T1E1 ports.
Where,
T1E1 is the number of the T1E1PRI Software port, 1 to 8.
Template Number is the number of the E&M Feature Template from 01 to 50.
Default: Template 01 is assigned to all T1E1 ports.
• Exit SE mode.
582 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Configuring TWT Trunks
The ETERNITY supports a maximum of 128 Analog Two-Wire Trunk Lines82. Before you begin configuring the
TWT trunk ports, ensure that the TWT card has been installed correctly.
You may configure the TWT ports from Jeeves and using a Telephone.
Configuring TWT Trunks using Jeeves
• Log into Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the 'TWT Configuration' link on the left navigation bar.
• Click the 'TWT Parameters' link to open the page.
Configure the following port parameters:
• TWT Port No.: This non-editable field is the number of the software port of the TWT Trunk.
• Hardware Slot and Port: 'Slot' is the number of the Universal Slot in which the TWT Card has been
inserted. 'Port' is the number of the TWT trunk port on that card.
82. Depends on the model you have. Please refer the Appendix for an overview of the system resources and maximum expansion
capacity.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 583
By default the ETERNITY can detect and assign the hardware slot and port numbers automatically to the
TWT (software) ports. However, if required, you may change the Hardware Slot and Port assigned to the
TWT software port. In which case, enter the desired Hardware Slot and Port number in this field.
If you want to de-assign the Hardware Slot and Port, Enter '00' in both fields.
• Enable Port: This flag is for enabling or disabling a TWT Trunk port. When a TWT Trunk port is disabled,
neither incoming nor outgoing calls can be made from that port.
By default, the port is enabled. You may disable ports that are not functioning by clearing this check box.
You may disable TWT port in case of trouble with the TWT line.
• Name: You may assign a 'Name' to each TWT Trunk to facilitate identification. Whenever there is an
incoming call without CLI on this port, the Name you have programmed will be displayed on the landing
extension.
The Name of the port may be the name of the Service Provider of this Trunk Line (recommended).
The Name may comprise a maximum of 18 characters.
• TWT Hardware Template: A TWT Hardware Template is a set of features that completely define the
behavior of the hardware port of the TWT, such as Type of TWT Trunk, AC Termination Impedance, Pulse-
Tone Dialing, Answer Supervision, Disconnect Supervision, DTMF detection, etc.
Apply a TWT Hardware template to the TWT trunk port. The ETERNITY offers 50 TWT Hardware
Templates. By default, TWT Hardware Template number 01 is assigned to all TWT Trunks. Refer the topic
“TWT Hardware Template” to know more.
Check if this default template fulfills the feature requirements of the TWT Hardware Ports by clicking the
'TWT Hardware Template' link.
If TWT Hardware Template 01 fulfills your requirements, and if the same features at to be applied on all
TWT trunk ports, retain Template 01. Similarly, if you want only a few changes to be made to Template 01
and apply it on all TWT Ports, make the changes and retain the template.
However, if different sets of features are to be allowed to different TWT hardware ports, then prepare
separate TWT Hardware Templates and apply them on the ports as required. To do this,
• Click the 'TWT Hardware Template' link to open the page.
• Select a TWT Hardware Template Number.
• Customize the TWT Hardware Template.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page.
• Go back to the 'TWT Parameters' page.
• Apply the TWT Hardware Template you customized to the TWT Port by entering the template number
in the 'TWT Hardware Template' field of this port.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page.
584 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Repeat the same steps to customize another template and apply it to the TWT Port.
To know more about the hardware port features and customizing templates, refer the topic “TWT
Hardware Template”.
• Trunk Feature Template: A Trunk Feature Template is a set of features like Time Table, Operator, DID,
DISA, Trunk Auto Answer, Trunk Landing Group, SMDR Storage, etc., that defines the behavior of a
Trunk. Apply a Trunk Feature Template to the TWT Trunk port. By default, Trunk Feature Template 01 is
applied on all TWT Trunks as well as all other trunk types like ISDN BRI, ISDN T1/E1/PRI, GSM, and VoIP.
Refer the topic “Trunk Feature Template” to know more.
Click the 'Trunk Feature Template’ link to open the page. Check if the default Template 01 fulfills your
requirement for the TWT Trunk port.
If the default Template 01 does not fulfill your requirement, you may prepare a different Trunk Feature
Template and apply on all TWT Ports. For this,
• Click the 'Trunk Feature Template' link.
• The Trunk Feature Template page will open.
• Prepare a new template, for example 02 to match your requirements.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
• Go back to the 'TWT Parameters' page.
• Go to the TWT Software Port Number you want to assign the Template you prepared.
• Enter the number of the Template you prepared (02) in the 'Trunk Feature Template' field.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
You may also prepare different Templates for different TWT Ports, for example Template 02 for certain
ports, Template 03 for others. In which case, follow the steps described above. For each TWT Port, enter
the number of the template you have prepared for that port.
To know more about customizing templates, refer the topic “Trunk Feature Template”.
• Cost Factor: This parameter is of relevance only if 'Least Cost Routing' feature is applied on the TWT
Trunk port.
Cost Factor is used to grade the cost of routing calls from a TWT trunk, from 1 to 99; where 1 denotes least
cost and 99 denotes highest cost.
Assign a Cost Factor to the TWT Trunk port, for instance 02, and program Least Cost Routing Table
accordingly.
For example, if you want to route all outgoing calls starting with number '6' through the TWT Trunk Port
001 only,
• You must first assign a Cost Factor (01-99) to TWT Port 002, for example, 02.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 585
• Click the link 'Least Cost Routing'.
• Click the 'Least Cost Routing - Number Based' link under to open the page.
• Enter '6' in the 'Number' column, Cost Factor '02' as Preference 1, 2, 3 and 4.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your settings.
All outgoing calls assigned Cost Factor trunk 02 will be made from TWT Trunk Port 002.
586 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Advanced Configuration
The above listed parameters fulfill the basic TWT trunk port configuration requirements of most users. However, for
users who need advanced features like Call Budget on the TWT trunk ports, you may click the 'Advance' button and
program the following parameters:
• Call Budget: If you want to enable 'Call Budget on Trunk' feature, configure the following parameters for
this TWT trunk port:
• Type: Select the type of Call Budget on Trunk—Amount, Minutes or Number of Calls—to be applied on
this TWT trunk port. By default, no Call Budget type is selected.
• Amount: If you selected 'Amount' as the Call Budget Type, enter the Budget Amount in this field. By
default the Amount is set to 999999.
• Minutes: If you selected 'Minutes' as the Call Budget Type, enter the number of Minutes in this field. By
default the number of minutes is set to 999999.
• Calls: If you selected ‘Calls’ as the Call Budget Type, enter the number of calls in this field. By default,
the number of calls is set to 9999.
• Scheduled Reset: Enable this flag if you want the Call Budget Amount/Minutes to be reset on a
particular date of every month.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 587
• Scheduled (Date): Enter the date of the month (Daily or 1-31) on which you want the Call Budget Amount/
Minutes/Number of Calls to be reset every month. You may select ‘Daily’ if your plan suggests so.
The consumed Call Budget Amount/Minutes/Number of Calls can be reset from SE and SA Mode, referred
to as Manual Reset. Refer the feature description “Call Budget on Trunk”.
• Call Back: This parameter is related to the ‘Call Back on Trunk Port’ feature. If you want to enable the 'Call
Back on Trunk Port' feature on this TWT trunk, configure the following parameters:
• Enable Call Back: Enable this flag to activate the Call Back on Trunk Port feature. By default, this flag
is disabled on all trunk port types. By default, the flag is disabled.
• Call Back Timer: This is the duration for which the system waits for the caller to disconnect before
applying the Call Back. The range of this timer is from 01 to 99 seconds. By default, it is set to 10
seconds.
• Call Back Mode: Select from the following options how a ‘Call Back’ call answered by the remote party
should be routed:
• DID
• PIN Authentication - Multiple Calls
• CLI Authentication - Multiple Calls
• CLI Authentication - Single Call - Answer Signaling
• Operator
By default, Operator is selected as the Call Back Mode.
• Call Back on: This parameter allows you to select if the call back should be made to the same number
that was received or to a different number. If you want the call back to be made to the same number
select the ‘CLI number”. If you want the call back to be made to a different number, select ‘Alternate
Number’.
By default, CLI number is selected for Call Back.
• Incoming Number List: Program the number strings that are eligible for Call Back in this List. By
default, Number List 15 is assigned to Call Back Incoming Number List.
Number List 15 is also assigned to all TWT trunks as well as all other Trunk port types. If you want the
same numbers strings to be programmed commonly for all TWT trunks and Trunk Port types, retain
this list.
If you want a different set of number strings to be programmed for this TWT Trunk, select a different
Number List, and assign it to the TWT trunk port.
You may program the Incoming Number List either from the ‘Number List’ page or by clicking the
‘Incoming Number List’ link to reach the Number List page.
Refer the topic “Number List” to know more, and for configuration instructions.
• Outgoing Number List: Program the number strings that are to be called back in this List.
For each number string you programmed in the ‘Incoming Number List’, you must program in the
corresponding index in the Outgoing Number List a number to which the call back is to be made. For
588 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
example, for the number string programmed at Index 1 in the Incoming Number List, a corresponding
number string at the same Index, Index 1, should be programmed in the ‘Outgoing Number List’.
By default, Number List 16 is assigned to Outgoing Number List.The same Number List 16 is also
assigned to all TWT trunks as well as all other Trunk port types.
You may program the default number list, or a different number list and assign it to this TWT Trunk port.
You may program the Outgoing Number List either from the ‘Number List’ page or by clicking the
‘Outgoing Number List’ link to reach the Number List page.
Refer the topic “Number List” to know more, and for configuration instructions.
• Call Back from: This parameter determines the trunk port to be used to make the call back. The call
back can be made using the same port or an Outgoing Trunk Bundle Group (OTGTBG).
Select ‘Same port’ if you want the call back to be made using the same port on which the missed call is
received. If you select OGTBG, the call back will be made using the OGTBG, which you have defined.
By default, Same port is selected.
• OGTB Group: If you selected OGTBG for making the call back in the previous parameter, you must
define the OGTBG that must be used in this parameter.
By default, OGTBG 01 is assigned.
If you want the system to select the lowest cost trunk for making the call back, enable Least Cost
Routing on the OGTBG that you define here for Call Back.
• If you have completed configuration of all the above listed TWT Parameters, click 'Submit' at the bottom of
the page to save your changes.
Configuring TWT Trunks using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To assign Hardware Slot and Port to the TWT Port, dial:
• 1104-TWT-Slot-Port offset on the card
Where,
TWT is the Software port number of the TWT port from 001 to 128.
Slot is Slot number in which the TWT is inserted from 01 to 16
Port Offset is the number of the Port on the card from 01 to 99.
To clear the Hardware ID assigned to a TWT Port, dial:
• 1104-TWT-00-00
To program a Name for a TWT Port, dial:
• 5404-1-TWT-Name-#* to program a name for a single TWT port.
• 5404-2-TWT-TWT-Name-#* to program the same name for a range of TWT ports.
• 5404-*-Name-#* to program the same name for all TWT ports.
Where,
TWT is the Software port number of the TWT port from 001 to 128.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 589
Name is a string of alphanumeric characters (maximum) 18 characters.
Terminate the command with #* if the name string has fewer than 18 characters.
To clear the Name of a TWT trunk, dial:
• 5404-1-TWT-#* to clear the name of a single TWT port.
• 5404-2-TWT-TWT-#* to clear the names for a range of TWT ports.
• 5404-*-#* to clear the names of all TWT ports.
To enable/disable the TWT Trunk, dial:
• 3307-1-TWT-Flag to enable/disable a single TWT port.
• 3307-2-TWT-TWT-Flag to enable/disable a range of TWT ports.
• 3307-* -Flag to enable/disable all TWT ports.
Where,
TWT is the Software port number of the TWT port from 001 to 128.
Flag is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Enable
To assign a Trunk Feature Template to a TWT Port, dial:
• 5803-1-TWT-Trunk Feature Template Number to assign a feature template to a single port.
• 5803-2-TWT-TWT- Trunk Feature Template Number to assign the same template to a range of ports.
• 5803-*- Trunk Feature Template Number to assign the same template to all ports.
Where,
TWT is the Software port number of the TWT port from 001 to 128.
Trunk Feature Template number is from 01 to 50.
Default: Template 01.
To assign a TWT Hardware Template to a TWT Port, dial:
• 5903-1-TWT-Hardware Template Number to clear the name of a single port.
• 5903-2-TWT-TWT-Hardware Template Number to clear the names for a range of ports.
• 5903-*-Hardware Template Number to clear the names of all ports.
Where,
TWT is the Software port number of the TWT port from 001 to 128.
Hardware Template Number is TWT Hardware Template from 01 to 50.
Default: Template 01.
To assign a Cost Factor to a TWT Port, dial:
• 3308-1-TWT-Cost Factor to assign cost factor for a single TWT port.
• 3308-2-TWT- TWT-Cost Factor to assign cost factor for a range of TWT ports.
• 3308-*-Cost Factor to assign cost factor for all TWT ports.
Where,
TWT is the Software port number of the TWT port from 001 to 128.
Cost Factor is from 01 to 99. Default: 01
• For commands to program Call Budget on TWT trunks, refer the topic “Call Budget on Trunk”.
To enable / disable Call Back on TWT port, dial:
• 3310-1-TWT-Code to enable/disable Call Back on a single TWT trunk.
• 3310-2-TWT-TWT-Code to enable/disable Call Back on a range of TWT trunks.
• 3310-*-Code to enable/disable Call Back on all TWT trunks.
Where,
590 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
TWT is the number of the software port of the TWT trunk from 001 to 128.
Code is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Disabled
To program Call Back Timer on TWT port, dial:
• 3311-1-TWT-Call Back Timer to set timer for a single TWT trunk.
• 3311-2 -TWT-TWT-Call Back Timer to set same timer duration for a range of TWT trunks.
• 3311-*-Call Back Timer to set the same timer duration for all TWT trunks.
Where,
TWT is the number of the software port of the TWT trunk from 001 to 128.
Timer is from 01 to 99 Sec.
Default: 10 Seconds
To select Call Back Mode for TWT port, dial:
• 3312 -1-TWT-Call Back Mode to set call back mode for a single TWT trunk.
• 3312 -2-TWT-TWT-Call Back Mode to set same call back mode for a range of TWT trunks.
• 3312-*-Call Back Mode to set the same call back mode for all TWT trunks.
Where,
TWT is the number of the software port of the TWT trunk from 001 to 128.
Call Back Mode is from 1 to 5
1 for DID
2 for PIN Auth. - Multiple Calls
3 for CLI Auth. - Multiple Calls
4 for CLI Auth. - Single Call - Ans. Sig.
5 for Operator
Default: Operator
To program Call Back On for TWT port, dial:
• 3313-1-TWT-Call Back on to program call back on for a single TWT trunk.
• 3313-2-TWT-TWT-Call Back on to program the same call back on option for a range of TWT trunks.
• 3313-*Call Back on to program the same call back on option for all TWT trunks.
Where,
TWT is the number of the software port of the TWT trunk from 001 to 128.
Call back on is
1 for CLI Number
2 for Alternate Number
Default: CLI Number
To assign Call Back - Incoming Number List to a TWT port, dial:
• 3314-1 -TWT-Incoming Number List to assign a list to a single TWT trunk.
• 3314-2-TWT-TWT-Incoming Number List to assign the same list to a range of TWT trunks.
• 3314-*-Incoming Number List to assign the same list to all TWT trunks.
Where,
TWT is the number of the software port of the TWT trunk from 001 to 128.
Incoming Number List is from 01 to 16.
Default: 15
To assign Call Back - Outgoing Number List to a TWT port, dial:
• 3315-1 -TWT-Outgoing Number List to assign a list to a single TWT trunk.
• 3315-2-TWT-TWT-Outgoing Number List to assign the same list to a range of TWT trunks.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 591
• 3315-*-Outgoing Number List to assign the same list to all TWT trunks.
Where,
TWT is the number of the software port of the TWT trunk from 001 to 128.
Incoming Number List is from 01 to 16.
Default: 16
To select Call Back From port for a TWT Trunk port, dial:
• 3316-1-TWT-Call Back From to select Call Back From for a single TWT trunk.
• 3316-2-TWT-TWT-Call Back From to select the same Call Back From for a range of TWT trunks.
• 3316-*-Call Back From to select the same Call Back From for all TWT trunks.
Where,
TWT is the number of the software port of the TWT trunk from 001 to 128.
Call Back From is
1 for Same Port
2 for OGTB Group
Default: Same Port
To assign Call Back - OGTB Group to a TWT port, dial:
• 3317-1-TWT-OGTB Group to assign an OGTBG to a single TWT trunk.
• 3317-2-TWT-TWT-OGTB Group to assign the same OGTBG to a range of TWT trunks.
• 3317-*-OGTB Group to assign the same OGTBG to all TWT trunks.
Where,
TWT is the number of the software port of the TWT trunk from 001 to 128.
OGTB Group is from 01 to 32.
Default: 01
• Exit SE mode.
592 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Configuring BRI Trunks
Refer the topic “ISDN-BRI”
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 593
Configuring T1E1PRI Trunks
Refer the topics “ISDN-PRI”, and “T1E1 Trunks”.
594 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Configuring Mobile Trunks
The ETERNITY supports a maximum of 64 Mobile ports83. Before you begin configuring the Mobile ports, ensure
that the GSM/3G card has been installed correctly.
Configuration of Mobile Trunks involves:
1. Customizing the Mobile Port Parameters
2. Network Selection
3. Viewing Mobile Port Status.
You can customize mobile port parameters and select the network using Jeeves and a Telephone. However,
mobile port status can be viewed using Jeeves only.
Mobile Port Parameters
Configuring Mobile Port Parameters using Jeeves
• Log into Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click 'Mobile Configuration' on the left navigation bar.
• Click the 'Mobile Port Parameters' link to open the page.
83. Depends on the model you have. Please refer the Appendix for an overview of the system resources and maximum expansion
capacity.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 595
Configure the following port parameters:
• Hardware Slot and Port: 'Slot' is the number of the Universal Slot in which the mobile card has been
inserted. 'Port' is the number of the Mobile port in which you have installed the SIM card.
The number of the Universal Slot will depend on the model of ETERNITY you are using. The number of
the Mobile Port depends on the configuration of the Mobile card. For instance, if you have installed
GSM8 card, the number of the ports will be from 1 to 8.
By default the ETERNITY can detect and assign the hardware slot and port numbers automatically to
the mobile (software) ports. However, if required, you may change the Hardware Slot and Port
assigned to the mobile software port. In which case, enter the desired Hardware Slot and Port number
in this field.
If you want to de-assign the Hardware Slot and Port, enter '00' in both fields.
• Enable Port: This flag is for enabling or disabling a Mobile Trunk port. When a Mobile Trunk port is
disabled, neither incoming nor outgoing calls can be made from that port.
By default, the port is enabled. You may disable ports that are not functioning by clicking the check box.
• Name: You may assign a 'Name' to each Mobile Trunk to facilitate identification. Whenever there is an
incoming call without CLI on this port, the Name you have programmed will be displayed on the landing
extension.
The Name of the port may be the name of the Service Provider of the SIM Card you have installed on
this port (recommended) or the phone number assigned to the SIM card on this port.
The Name may comprise a maximum of 18 characters.
• Band Selection (MHz): The Frequency Band supported by the mobile networks varies from country to
country. ETERNITY's mobile card supports frequency bands of most countries. Select the Frequency
Band used by your GSM/3G Provider for the mobile port.
By default, Mobile Frequency Band '900 + 1800 is selected.
Frequency Band selection not required if the Mobile Card has SIMCOM 3G module.
When you change the Frequency Band, the change will be effected after the next system restart or the
next Mobile Port restart.
• SIM PIN: If you have enabled PIN protection and changed the SIM PIN of the card to the default value
'1234' using a mobile handset84, you can assign a new PIN to the SIM card from the ETERNITY.
Make sure that the PIN stored on the SIM card and that of the system are the same.
The SIM PIN will not be set to default value, when you restore the default settings of the system.
If you have enabled PIN protection, and the SIM PIN on the Card and the SIM PIN programmed in the
ETERNITY are not the same, the SIM card may get blocked and would require the Personal Unblocking
Number (PUK) from the Service Provider to reactivate it again.
84. Refer the topic Installing the Mobile Card for instructions. If you have not enabled PIN protection before installing the GSM card,
you will not be able to change the SIM PIN.
596 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Incoming Calls: Select the Incoming Call Mode on the Mobile Port from the options:
• Accept': incoming calls will be allowed and incoming call logic is applied.
• ‘Ignore': incoming calls will not be processed further and call logic will not be applied.
• ‘Reject': incoming calls will be rejected immediately and mobile port will be freed (released).
By default, incoming calls are accepted. This feature is particularly useful in outbound call centers for
blocking incoming calls on a SIM number (mobile port) of the ETERNITY.
• Cost Factor: This parameter is of relevance only if 'Least Cost Routing' feature is applied on the
mobile port.
Cost Factor is used to grade the cost of routing calls from a mobile trunk, from 1 to 99; where 1 denotes
least cost and 99 denotes highest cost.
Assign a Cost Factor to the mobile Trunk port, for example, 03 and program Least Cost Routing Table
accordingly.
For example, if you want to route all outgoing calls starting with number '9' through the SIM installed in
Mobile Port Number 01 only,
• You must first assign a Cost Factor (01-99) to Mobile Port 01, for example, 03.
• Click 'Least Cost Routing - Number Based' to open the page.
• Enter '9' in the 'Number' column, Cost Factor '03' as Preference 1, 2, 3 and 4.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your setting.
All outgoing calls assigned Cost Factor trunk 03 will be made from Mobile Port 01.
• Trunk Feature Template: A Trunk Feature Template is a set of features like Time Table, Operator,
DID, DISA, Trunk Auto Answer, Trunk Landing Group, SMDR Storage, etc., that defines the behavior of
a Trunk. Apply a Trunk Feature Template to the Mobile Trunk. By default, Trunk Feature Template 01
is applied on all Mobile Trunks as well as all other trunk types. Refer the topic “Trunk Feature
Template” to know more.
Click the 'Trunk Feature Template’ link to open the page. Check if the default Template 01 fulfills your
requirement for the mobile port.
If the default Template 01 does not fulfill your requirement, prepare another Trunk Feature Template85,
and enter the newly prepared Template number for the Mobile port.
• CLIR: Enable this flag if you want to activate CLIR for all outgoing calls made through the Mobile Port.
When CLIR is enabled, the called party will not be able to see the subscriber number of the Mobile
Port.
85. The default template is applied on the ports of all trunk types supported by ETERNITY. Changes to the default template will be
applied on all trunk types also. So, you are advised to prepare a new template and apply it to the desired trunk types.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 597
By default CLIR is disabled for all Mobile ports.
This feature will work only if subscribed/supported by your mobile service provider.
• Return Call to Original Caller (RCOC): Enable this flag if you want to apply the RCOC feature.
If this feature is enabled on the Mobile trunk port, the system routes calls returned by remote parties
back to the extensions that originally made the call from this port (the original callers' extensions). To
know more, refer the feature description for Return Call to Original Caller (RCOC).
Advanced Configuration
The above listed parameters fulfill the basic mobile trunk port configuration requirements of most users. However, it
is anticipated that some users may need to configure other less commonly used features on the mobile ports, such
as Call Budget, Call Back on Mobile Port, or they may want to use the Mobile port as a Gateway application.
For such users, you may click the 'Advance' button and program the following parameters:
• N/w Registration Retry Count: The mobile port is programmed to automatically locate and register with
the Network that supports the SIM card installed on it. Also, at each power ON, the mobile port (SIM) will
automatically register with the Network that supports the SIM on it.
However, if the Mobile port fails to register, it will restart the process of network registration on the expiry of
the Network Registration Retry Timer86. On the expiry of this timer, the system will retry registration for the
programmed Count (number of times) and with each re-try attempt, the count will be decremented by one.
598 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
By default the Retry Count is set to 50. If required you may change the Count to the desired value.
• Tx Gain: You can increase or decrease the Transmit volume level from the mobile port by increasing or
decreasing the Transmit Gain (Tx) of the Mobile port. By default Tx is set at 3.
• Rx Gain: You can increase or decrease the Receive volume level on the mobile port by increasing or
decreasing the Receive Gain (Rx) of the Mobile port. By default Rx is set at 3.
If you change the Tx or Rx Gain during an active call, the change you made will not apply on the current
call. It will be applied on the next call.
• Rx Gain at SIP Trunk/SIP Extension (dB): This parameter allows you to increase the incoming speech
volume level of calls from SIP trunks/Extensions to Mobile Ports. By default, Rx Gain is set to 0dB.
• Tx Gain at SIP Trunk/SIP Extension (dB): This parameter allows you to increase the outgoing speech
volume level of calls from SIP trunks/Extensions to Mobile Ports. By default, Tx Gain is set to 6dB.
You can set Rx and Tx Gain at SIP Trunks/Extensions using SE Commands only. For instructions, see
“Configuring Mobile Port Parameters using a Telephone” later in this topic.
• Call Budget: If you want to enable 'Call Budget on Trunk' feature, configure the following parameters for
this mobile trunk port:
• Type: Select the type of Call Budget on Trunk—Amount, Minutes or Number of Calls—to be applied on
this mobile trunk port. By default, no Call Budget type is selected.
• Amount: If you selected 'Amount' as the Call Budget Type, enter the Budget Amount in this field. By
default the Amount is set to 999999.
• Minutes: If you selected 'Minutes' as the Call Budget Type, enter the number of Minutes in this field. By
default the number of minutes is set to 999999.
• Calls: If you selected ‘Calls’ as the Call Budget Type, enter the number of calls in this field. By default,
the number of calls is set to 9999.
• Scheduled Reset: Enable this flag if you want the Call Budget Amount/Minutes/Number of Calls to be
reset on a particular date of every month.
• Scheduled (Date): Enter the date of the month (Daily or 1-31) on which you want the Call Budget
Amount/Minutes/Number of Calls to be reset every month. You may select ‘Daily’ if your plan suggests
so.
The consumed Call Budget can be reset from SE and SA Mode, referred to as Manual Reset. Refer the
feature description “Call Budget on Trunk”.
• Call Back: This parameter is related to the ‘Call Back on Trunk Port’ feature. If you want to enable the 'Call
Back on Trunk Port' feature on this Mobile trunk, configure the following parameters:
86. The Network Registration Retry Timer defines the time for which the Mobile port, which has failed to register with the network,
should wait before attempting to re-register with the network. Network registration retry timer is 2 minutes and is non-programma-
ble.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 599
• Enable Call Back: Enable this flag to activate the Call Back on Trunk Port feature. By default, this flag
is disabled on all trunk port types. By default, the flag is disabled.
• Call Back Timer: This is the duration for which the system waits for the caller to disconnect before
applying the Call Back. The range of this timer is from 01 to 99 seconds. By default, it is set to 10
seconds.
• Call Back Mode: Select from the following options how a ‘Call Back’ call answered by the remote party
should be routed:
• DID
• PIN Authentication - Multiple Calls
• CLI Authentication - Multiple Calls
• CLI Authentication - Single Call - Answer Signaling
• Operator
By default, Operator is selected as the Call Back Mode.
• Call Back on: This parameter allows you to select if the call back should be made to the same number
that was received or to a different number. If you want the call back to be made to the same number
select the ‘CLI number”. If you want the call back to be made to a different number, select ‘Alternate
Number’.
By default, CLI number is selected for Call Back.
• Incoming Number List: Program the number strings that are eligible for Call Back in this List. By
default, Number List 15 is assigned to Call Back Incoming Number List.
Number List 15 is also assigned to all Mobile trunks as well as all other Trunk port types. If you want the
same numbers strings to be programmed commonly for all Mobile trunks and Trunk Port types, retain
this list.
If you want a different set of number strings to be programmed for this Mobile Trunk, select a different
Number List, and assign it to the Mobile trunk port.
You may program the Incoming Number List either from the ‘Number List’ page or by clicking the
‘Incoming Number List’ link to reach the Number List page.
Refer the topic “Number List” to know more, and for configuration instructions.
• Outgoing Number List: Program the number strings that are to be called back in this List.
For each number string you programmed in the ‘Incoming Number List’, you must program in the
corresponding index in the Outgoing Number List a number to which the call back is to be made. For
example, for the number string programmed at Index 1 in the Incoming Number List, a corresponding
number string at the same Index, Index 1, should be programmed in the ‘Outgoing Number List’.
By default, Number List 16 is assigned to Outgoing Number List.The same Number List 16 is also
assigned to all Mobile trunks as well as all other Trunk port types.
You may program the default number list, or a different number list and assign it to this Mobile Trunk
port.
You may program the Outgoing Number List either from the ‘Number List’ page or by clicking the
‘Outgoing Number List’ link to reach the Number List page.
600 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Refer the topic “Number List” to know more, and for configuration instructions.
• Call Back from: This parameter determines the trunk port to be used to make the call back. The call
back can be made using the same port or an Outgoing Trunk Bundle Group (OTGTBG).
Select ‘Same port’ if you want the call back to be made using the same port on which the missed call is
received. If you select OGTBG, the call back will be made using the OGTBG, which you have defined.
By default, Same port is selected.
• OGTB Group: If you selected OGTBG for making the call back in the previous parameter, you must
define the OGTBG that must be used in this parameter.
By default, OGTBG 01 is assigned.
• If you want the system to select the lowest cost trunk for making the call back, enable Least Cost Routing
on the OGTBG that you define here for Call Back.
• Accept Anonymous Calls: The flag is for accepting calls without CLI that land on the mobile port. By
default the flag is enabled. You may disable this flag to disallow calls without CLI on this Mobile port.
• Pause Timer: This Timer is used for providing delay in number dialing from the Mobile port. The Pause
Timer will be applicable when the digit 'P' is configured in the DTMF number string which is to be out dialed
as DTMF digits on the Mobile port.
For example, if PPP2 is to be out dialed and Pause timer is programmed as 3 seconds, the ETERNITY will
out dial the digit 2 after 9 seconds, that is, after a delay of individual P (3+3+3 =9). The range of this time is
from 1 to 9. By default the Timer is set to 3 seconds.
This parameter is used for the “Multi-Stage Dialing” feature.
• DTMF Outdial: You can select whether to send the DTMF digits from the Mobile Ports In-band or through
signaling, that is, AT Command. Default: AT Command.
When you select DTMF Outdial using AT Command, the length of the DTMF digits will be determined by
the DTMF ON Time you set.
• DTMF ON Time: This parameter determines the time for which the DTMF digit will remain ON, while being
out dialed by the ETERNITY. This parameter finds its application in the feature “Multi-Stage Dialing”' and in
DTMF Outdialing using AT Command.
• DTMF Detection Minimum Level (dB): Define the minimum dB level for detecting the DTMF digits dialed.
Default: -30
• Category (Logical Partition): This parameter assigns the Mobile Port to a trunk category for the purpose
of Logical Partitioning. By default all Mobile Ports are assigned to Category 1. Do not change the default
setting.
If you want to change the call permission between the mobile port and other trunks, click the 'Category' link
to open the Logical Partitioning page. You may program the call permission between Category 1 (assigned
to Mobile Trunk Ports) and other Categories. Refer the feature description “Logical Partition” to know
more.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 601
• Gateway Application-Answer Signaling: This parameter is to be programmed if the Mobile Trunk Port is
being used in a gateway application as a source port (from where calls originate). The calls originated on
the source port (mobile port) are routed using another Trunk port, the terminating port, which may be any
trunk port, for example: T1E1. When call made from the terminating port gets matured, this is signaled to
the source port in the form of DTMF digits.
• Use?: Enable this flag if you want the Mobile port to be used in a Gateway Application.
• DTMF String (max. 4 digits): Program the DTMF digits to be sent to signal call maturity to the source
port.
• Debug: Enable this flag by selecting the check box if you want to initiate debugging for the Mobile Port. By
default, debugging is disabled.
• Repeat the same steps to configure other mobile ports.
• If you have completed configuration of all the above listed Mobile Port Parameters, click 'Submit' at the
bottom of the page to save your changes.
Configuring Mobile Port Parameters using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To assign Hardware Slot and Port, dial:
• 1108-Mobile-Slot-Port Offset on the card
Where,
Mobile Port Number is the number of the software port from 01 to 64
Slot is the number of the universal slot from 01 to 16
Port Offset on the card is 00, 01 to 99.
To de-assign the Hardware Slot and Port, dial:
• 1108-Mobile-00-00
To enable/disable the Mobile Port, dial:
• 8000-1-Mobile-Flag to enable/disable a single mobile port.
• 8000-2-Mobile-Mobile-Flag to enable/disable a range of mobile ports.
• 8000-*-Flag to enable/disable all mobile port.
Where,
Mobile Port Number is the number of the software port from 01 to 64
Flag is
1 for Enable
0 for Disable
To assign a Name to the Mobile Port, dial:
• 5408-1-Mobile-Name-#* to assign a name to a single mobile port.
• 5408-2-Mobile-Mobile-Name-#* to assign the same name to a range of mobile ports.
• 5408-*-Name-#* to assign the same name to all mobile ports.
Where,
Mobile Port Number is the number of the software port from 01 to 64
Name is a string of a maximum of 18 alphanumeric characters. Terminate the command with #* if the
number string is fewer than 18 characters.
602 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To clear the Name of the Mobile Port, dial:
• 5408-1-Mobile-#* to clear the name of a single mobile port.
• 5408-2-Mobile-Mobile-#* to clear the names of a range of mobile ports.
• 5408-*-#* to clear the names of all mobile ports.
To select the frequency Band for the Mobile Port, dial:
• 8009-1-Mobile Port Number-Mobile Frequency Band Code to select the band for a single mobile
port.
• 8009-2-Mobile Port Number -Mobile Port Number -Mobile Frequency Band Code to select the
same band for a range of mobile ports.
• 8009-*-Mobile Frequency Band Code to select the same band for all mobile ports.
Where,
Mobile Port is the software port number of the mobile port, from 01 to 64.
Mobile Frequency Band Code is
1 for 900
2 for 1800
3 for1900
4 for 850+1900
5 for 900+1800
Default: 900 + 1800
To assign SIM PIN to the Mobile Port, dial:
• 8006-1-Mobile Port Number-SIM PIN-#* to assign SIM PIN to a single mobile port.
Where,
Mobile Port Number is the software port number of the mobile port, from 01 to 64.
SIM PIN is the new SIM PIN, any combination of 4 to 8 digits. Terminate the command with '#*' if SIM
PIN is fewer than 8 digits.
To select Incoming Call mode on the Mobile port, dial:
• 8005-1-Mobile-Mode to select the mode for a single mobile port.
• 8005-2-Mobile-Mobile-Mode to select the same mode for a range of mobile ports.
• 8005-*-Mode to select the same mode for all mobile ports.
Where,
Mode is
1 for Accept Incoming Calls.
2 for Ignore Incoming Calls
3 for Reject Incoming Calls
Default: Accept
To assign a Trunk Feature Template to the Mobile Port, dial:
• 5807-1-Mobile Port Number-Template Number to assign a template to a single mobile port.
• 5807-2-Mobile Port Number-Mobile Port Number-Template Number to assign the same template to
a range of mobile ports.
• 5807-*-Template Number to assign the same template to all mobile ports.
Where,
Mobile Port Number is the number of the software port from 01 to 64
Template Number is the number of the Trunk Feature Template from 01 to 50.
To enable/disable CLIR on the Mobile Port, dial:
• 8031-1-Mobile Port Number-CLIR to enable/disable CLIR on a single mobile port.
• 8031-2-Mobile Port Number-Mobile Port Number-CLIR to enable/disable CLIR on a range of mobile
ports.
• 8031-*- CLIR to enable/disable CLIR on all mobile ports.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 603
Where,
Mobile Port Number is the number of the software port from 01 to 64
CLIR is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Disable
To enable RCOC on Mobile Port, dial:
• 8030-1-Mobile -Code to enable the feature on a single mobile port.
• 8030-2-Mobile-Mobile-Code to enable the feature on a range of mobile ports.
• 8030-*-Code to enable the feature on all mobile ports.
Where,
Mobile Port Number is the number of the software port from 01 to 64
Code is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Disabled
To assign Cost Factor to a Mobile Port, dial:
• 8001-1-Mobile-Cost Factor to assign cost factor to a single mobile port.
• 8001-2-Mobile-Mobile-Cost Factor to assign the same cost factor to a range of mobile ports.
• 8001-*-Cost Factor to assign the same cost factor to all mobile ports.
Where,
Mobile Port Number is the number of the software port from 01 to 64
Cost Factor is from 01 to 99.
• For Advanced Configuration of the Mobile Ports, use the following commands:
To set Network Registration Retry Count, dial:
• 8004-1-Mobile-N/w Registration Retry Count to set the count for a single mobile port.
• 8004-2-Mobile-Mobile-N/w Registration Retry Count to set the same count for a range of mobile
ports.
• 8004-*-N/w Registration Retry Count to set the same count for all mobile ports.
Where,
Mobile Port Number is the number of the software port from 01 to 64
N/w Registration Retry Count is from 001 - 255: Default: 050
To change Rx Gain of Mobile Port, dial:
• 8002-1-Mobile-Receive Gain level to change the Rx gain of a single mobile port.
• 8002-2-Mobile Port Number-Mobile port number-Receive Gain level to set the same Rx Gain for a
range of mobile ports.
• 8002-*-Receive Gain level to set the same Rx Gain for all mobile ports.
Where,
Mobile Port Number is the number of the software port from 01 to 64
Receive Gain Level is
1 for Very Low
2 for Low
3 for Normal
4 for High
5 for Very High
604 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To change Tx Gain of Mobile Port, dial:
• 8003-1-Mobile Port Number-Transmit Gain level to change the Tx gain of a single mobile port.
• 8003-2-Mobile Port Number-Mobile Port Number-Transmit Gain level to set the same Tx Gain for a
range of mobile ports.
• 8003-*-Transmit Gain level to set the same Rx Gain for all mobile ports.
Where,
Mobile Port Number is the number of the software port from 01 to 64.
Transmit Gain Level is
1 for Very Low
2 for Low
3 for Normal
4 for High
5 for Very High
To change Rx Gain and Tx Gains at SIP Trunks/SIP Extensions, dial:
• 8041-1-Mobile-Rx Gain Code
• 8042-1-Mobile-Tx Gain Code
Where,
Mobile is the number of the software port of the mobile trunk, from 01 to 64.
Rx and Tx Gain is 01 to 63 dB: Default: 36
For Rx and Tx Gain at SIP codes, see the tables below.
• For commands to program Call Budget on Mobile Ports, refer the topic “Call Budget on Trunk”.
To enable/disable Call Back on Mobile Port, dial:
• 8010-1-Mobile-Code to enable/disable Call Back on a single mobile port.
• 8010-2-Mobile-Mobile-Code to enable/disable Call Back on a range of mobile ports.
• 8010-*-Code to enable/disable Call Back on all mobile ports.
Where,
Mobile Port Number is the number of the software port from 01 to 64
Code is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Disabled
To change Call Back Timer for the Mobile Port, dial:
• 8011-1-Mobile-Call Back Timer to change Call Back Timer for a single mobile port.
• 8011-2-Mobile-Mobile-Call Back Timer to set the same Call Back Timer duration for a range of mobile
ports.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 605
• 8011-*-Call Back Timer to set the same Call Back Timer duration for all mobile ports.
Where,
Mobile Port Number is the number of the software port from 01 to 64
Call Back Timer is from 01 to 99 seconds.
Default: 010 seconds.
To select the Call Back Mode, dial:
• 8012-1-Mobile-Call Back Mode to select Call Back Mode for a single mobile port.
• 8012-2-Mobile-Mobile Call Back Mode to select the same Call Back Mode for a range of mobile ports.
• 8012-*-Call Back Mode to select the same Call Back Mode for all mobile ports.
Where,
Mobile Port Number is the number of the software port from 01 to 64
Call Back Mode is
1 for DID
2 for PIN Authentication - Multiple Calls
3 for CLI Authentication - Multiple Calls
4 for CLI Authentication - Single Call - Answer Signaling
5 for Operator
Default: Operator
To program Call Back on for the Mobile Port, dial:
• 8013-1-Mobile-Call Back on to program call back on for a single mobile port.
• 8013-2-Mobile-Mobile-Call Back on to program the same call back on for a range of mobile ports.
• 8013-*-Number List to program the same call back on for all mobile ports.
Where,
Mobile Port Number is the number of the software port from 01 to 64.
Call Back on is
1 for CLI Number
2 for Alternate Number.
To assign a Call Back - Incoming Number List to a Mobile Port, dial:
• 8034-1-Mobile-Incoming Number List to assign a list to a single mobile port.
• 8034-2-Mobile-Mobile-Incoming Number List to assign the same list to a range of mobile port.
• 8034-*-Incoming Number List to assign the same list to all mobile ports.
Where,
Mobile Port Number is the number of the software port from 01 to 64.
Incoming Number List is from 01 to 16
Default: 15
To assign a Call Back - Outgoing Number List to a Mobile Port, dial:
• 8035-1-Mobile-Outgoing Number List to assign a list to a single mobile port.
• 8035-2-Mobile-Mobile-Outgoing Number List to assign the same list to a range of mobile port.
• 8035-*-Outgoing Number List to assign the same list to all mobile ports.
Where,
Mobile Port Number is the number of the software port from 01 to 64.
Outgoing Number List is from 01 to 16
Default: 16
To select Call Back From for a Mobile Port, dial:
• 8036-1-Mobile-Call Back From to select call back from for a single mobile port.
• 8036-2-Mobile-Mobile-Call Back From to select the same call back from option for a range of mobile
ports.
• 8036-* -Call Back From to select the same call back from option for all mobile ports.
606 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Where,
Mobile Port Number is the number of the software port from 01 to 64.
Call Back From is
1 for Same Port
2 for OGTB Group
Default: Same Port
To assign a Call Back - OGTB Group for a Mobile Port, dial:
• 8037-1-Mobile-OGTB Group to assign an OGTBG to a single mobile port.
• 8037-2-Mobile-Mobile-OGTB Group to assign the same OGTBG to a range of mobile ports.
• 8037-*-OGTB Group to assign the same OGTBG to all mobile ports.
Where,
Mobile Port Number is the number of the software port from 01 to 64.
OGTB Group is from 01 to 32
Default: 01
To enable/disable Accept Anonymous Calls on Mobile Port, dial:
• 8029-1-Mobile-Code to enable/disable Anonymous Calls on Mobile Port on a single mobile port.
• 8029-2-Mobile-Mobile-Code to enable/disable Anonymous Calls on Mobile Port on a range of mobile
ports.
• 8029-*-Code to enable/disable Anonymous Calls on Mobile Port on all mobile ports.
Where,
Mobile Port Number is the number of the software port from 01 to 64.
Scheduled Reset Date is from 01 to 31.
To program the Pause Timer on Mobile Port, dial:
• 8014-1-Mobile-Pause Timer to set the timer on a single mobile port.
• 8014-2-Mobile-Mobile-Pause Timer to set the same timer on a range of mobile ports.
• 8014-*-Pause Timer to set the same timer on all mobile ports.
Where,
Mobile Port Number is the number of the software port from 01 to 64.
Pause Timer is from 1 to 9 seconds. Default: 1 second.
To program DTMF ON Time on Mobile Port, dial:
• 8015-1-Mobile-DTMF ON Time to set the time on a single mobile port.
• 8015-2-Mobile-Mobile-DTMF ON Time to set the same time on a range of mobile ports.
• 8015-*-DTMF ON Time to set the same time on all mobile ports.
Where,
Mobile Port Number is the number of the software port from 01 to 64.
DTMF ON Time is
1 for 100 msec
2 for 200 msec
Default: 100 msec
To assign the Mobile Port to a 'Category' for Logical Partition, dial:
• 8018-1-Mobile-Category to assign a single mobile port to a category.
• 8018-2-Mobile-Mobile-Category to assign a range of mobile ports to the same category.
• 8018-*-Category to assign all mobile ports to the same category.
Where,
Mobile Port Number is the number of the software port from 01 to 64.
Category is from 1 to 3.
1 for Trunk ports interfaced with PSTN /PLMN (Public Land Mobile Network)
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 607
2 for Leased lines terminated in the trunk ports.
3 Trunk ports used to interconnect two PBXs.
Default: 1
To enable/disable Gateway Application on the Mobile Port, dial:
• 8016-1-Mobile-Gateway Application flag to enable/disable on a single mobile port.
• 8016-2-Mobile-Mobile-Gateway Application flag to enable/disable on a range of mobile ports.
• 8016-*-Gateway Application flag to enable/disable on all mobile ports.
Where,
Mobile Port Number is the number of the software port from 01 to 64.
Gateway Application flag is.
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Disable
To program the DTMF String for the Gateway Application on the Mobile Port, dial:
• 8017-1-Mobile-DTMF String to program the string on a single mobile port.
• 8017-2-Mobile-Mobile-DTMF String to program the same string on a range of mobile ports.
• 8017-*-DTMF String to program the same string on all mobile ports.
Where,
Mobile Port Number is the number of the software port from 01 to 64.
DTMF String is a maximum of 4 digits. Default: CCC
To enable/disable Debug on a Mobile Port, dial:
• 8028-1-Mobile port number-Debug Code to enable/disable debug on a single mobile port.
• 8028-2-Mobile port number-Mobile port number-Debug Code to enable/disable debug on a range
of mobile ports.
• 8028-*-Debug Code to enable/disable debug all mobile ports.
Where,
Mobile Port Number is the number of the software port from 01 to 64
Debug Code is
1 for Enable
0 for Disable
Default: Disable
• Exit SE mode.
Network Selection
After the Mobile card is successfully installed and powered on, the mobile port is programmed to automatically
locate and register with the Network that supports the SIM card installed in. Also, at each power ON, the mobile
port (SIM) will automatically register with the Network that supports the SIM on it.
However, if the Mobile port fails to register, it will restart the process of network selection on the expiry of the
Network Registration Retry Timer87.
If the ETERNITY is located in a border area where more than one Network Operator is available, it is possible that
the SIM card may register with another available network and result in 'Roaming' charges. To avoid this, you must
disable automatic network selection and program manual network selection.
87. The Network Registration Retry Timer defines the time for which the Mobile port, which has failed to register with the network,
should wait before attempting to re-register with the network. Network registration retry timer is 2 minutes and is non-programma-
ble.
608 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
When you enable manual network selection, you must program the Network Operator Priority Table. This table
requires you to program the Network Operator Codes (MCC-MNC)88 in order of priority for a Mobile Port. So,
whenever you register with the network manually, select the Network Operator that matches in order of priority. If
the Mobile port fails to register, it will restart the process of network selection on the expiry of the Network
Registration Retry Timer.
If no match is found, the Mobile port (SIM) will not get registered with any of the available network operators and no
calls can be made or received on this port.
Configuring Network Selection using Jeeves
While still logged in as System Engineer in the Full Programming Access mode,
• Click to open the link 'Network Selection' under Mobile Configuration.
• Click 'Network Selection Mode' of the desired Mobile port. Select 'Manual'.
• Enter the Network Operator Codes (MCC-MNC) in order of priority. The codes must not exceed 8 digits.
You can store up to 9 Network Operator Codes in the order of priority.
• Repeat the same steps to set network selection mode for other mobile ports.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your settings.
• When you change the Network Selection Mode to ‘Manual’ and the Network Operator Code manually,
the change you made will not come into effect until you have restarted the Mobile Port.
• To restart the Mobile Port,
• go back to “Mobile Port Parameters”.
• Click the check box to disable the “Enable Port’ flag.
• Click ‘Submit’ at the bottom of the page.
• Wait for the page to refresh.
• Click the check box to enable the ‘Enable Port’ flag.
• Click ‘Submit’ at the bottom of the page.
• The Mobile Port will be restarted.
Configuring Network Selection using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To select Network Selection mode, dial:
• 8007-1-Mobile Port Number-Code to select network selection mode for a single mobile port.
• 8007-2-Mobile Port Number-Mobile Port Number-Code to select the same network selection mode
for a range of mobile ports.
• 8007-*-Code to select the same network selection mode for all mobile ports.
Where,
Mobile Port Number is the number of the software port from 01 to 64
88. The Network Operator Code comprises of the Mobile Country Code (MCC) appended by the Mobile Network Code (MNC). The
MCC is usually a 3-digit code that identifies a country. A single country may be assigned more than one MCC. For example the
MCC assigned to India is 404, but same code applies to all network operators in the country.
The MNC is usually a 2/3-digit code. The MCC-MNC combination uniquely identifies the home network of the mobile terminal or
the mobile user. For example, AirTel, a GSM network operator in India, has different MNC assigned to its networks in various
states. The MNC for AirTel in the state of Maharashtra is 90, while the same for the state of Gujarat is 98.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 609
Code is
1 for Automatic Selection
2 for Manual Selection
Default: Automatic Selection
For example, to program Manual Network Selection on Mobile Port number 1, dial 8007-1-01-2
To program the network operator codes in order of priority for Mobile port, dial:
• 8008-1-Mobile-Priority-Network Operator Code-#* to program network operator codes for a single
mobile port.
• 8008-2-Mobile-Mobile-Priority-Network Operator Code-#* to program the same network operator
codes for a range of mobile ports.
• 8008-*-Priority-Network Operator Code-#* to program the same network operator codes of all mobile
ports.
Where,
Mobile Port Number is the number of the software port from 01 to 64
Priority is from 1 to 9.
Network Operator Code is MCC-NCC maximum 8 digits. Terminate the command with #* if the number
of digits is fewer than 8.
For example, following Network Operator Codes need to be programmed in the order of priority on
Mobile Port number 01:
Priority 1=40498
Priority 2 = 40425
Priority 3 = 40421
Dial:
8008-1-01-1-40498-#*
8008-1-01-2-40425-#*
8008-1-01-3-40421-#*
• Exit SE mode.
Viewing Mobile Port Status
You can view the status of Mobile ports on Jeeves only. To do this,
• Click the 'Status' link under 'Mobile Configuration'.
• Wait for 4-5 seconds after the Port Status page is opened.
• Click 'Refresh' at the bottom of the page for current view.
• The Port status page will display the following parameters for all Mobile ports that have been enabled:
• Port Name: This is the name by which the Mobile Port is programmed.
• Port Status: This is the status of the connection - showing Initialization with the Network, Registering
with the Network, Idle or Busy state of the network. It also shows errors and alerts when SIM is absent,
the wrong SIM PIN has been entered, SIM PUK is required.
• IMEI: This is the unique identification number of (the GSM engine) each Mobile port.
610 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Network Operator Code: This is the MCC-MNC code of the network with which the mobile port is
registered.
• Network Operator Name: This is the name of the service provider/network operator with which the
Mobile Port is registered.
• Signal Strength (dBm): This is the signal strength in '-dBm' as received from the network with which
the Mobile port is registered.
• Bit Error Rate (BER): BER is Bit Error Rate which defines the quality of the channel.
• Call Duration: This is the total call duration of matured outgoing calls89 on the Mobile port. This data is
used for calculating Answer Seizure Ratio (ASR) for the port. It is displayed in MMMMMM:SS format.
• Dialed Calls: This is the total number of outgoing calls90 made from the Mobile port. This data is used
for calculating Answer Seizure Ratio (ASR) for the port.
• Successful Calls: This is the total number of matured outgoing calls made from the Mobile port. This
data is used for calculating Answer Seizure Ratio (ASR) and Average Call Duration for the port.
• ASR: This is the Answer Seizure Ratio (ASR) calculated by the system for the Mobile port, in terms of
percentage. ASR is the sum of all outgoing matured calls from the Mobile port, divided by the total
number of outgoing calls made from the Mobile port, multiplied by 100. The system calculates ASR
after the completion of the outgoing call.
• ACD: This is the Average Call Duration (ACD) of outgoing calls made from the Mobile port. It is an
indicator for monitoring the network condition. Decreasing ACD is indicative of trouble in the network
condition.
The system calculates ACD after the completion of the outgoing calls, by dividing the total call duration
by the number of outgoing matured calls.
• Reset ASR and ACD: This field allows the System Engineer to reset manually the ASR and the ACD
of the Mobile port.
The parameters Total Call duration, Number of matured calls, Total Number of OG Calls, ASR and
ACD are saved in the configuration, and are not reset on Power OFF condition. The system maintains
the statistics for the last 999 calls. When the total number of outgoing calls exceeds 999, the system
will stop calculating ACD and ASR and will display ASR and ACD calculated on the basis of the last
999 calls only.
Therefore, the System Engineer must manually reset ASR and ACD when the total number of calls
reaches 999. When you reset ASR and ACD the number of call matured and the number of calls dialled
is reset to 0.
ASR and ACD can be reset anytime, even when the total number of calls is less than 999.
When ACD is reset, only the 'Total Call Duration' maintained for the ACD calculation will be reset. The
'Total Call Duration' of the Call Budget, the consumed minutes maintained for the Call Budget on the
mobile port will remain unaffected.
89. Matured calls are outgoing calls for which 'CONNECT' message was received from the network.
90. The total number of outgoing calls made includes the number of times the ATD has been sent from the Mobile port to the network.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 611
• SIM ID: This is the Integrated Circuit Card ID (ICC-ID) of the SIM Card inserted in the Mobile port. Each
SIM is internationally identified by its ICC-ID. ICC-IDs are stored in the SIM Card and are also printed
on the SIM card body.
• IMSI: International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) is a unique number stored in the SIM card.
• Cell ID: This is the 16-bit identifier that identifies the cell. The cell is the radio coverage area given by
one BTS (Base Transceiver Station).
• Location Area Code (LAC): The LA (Location Area) is a group of cells defined by the Operator. The
LAC (Location Area Code) uniquely identifies a LA within a PLMN (Public Land Mobile Network).
• Call Budget Type: This shows the Call Budget Type, whether Amount, Minutes or Number of Calls,
are set on the Mobile port.
• Allotted Amount (Rs.) / Minutes/Calls: This shows the sum/number of minutes/number of calls
allotted as Call Budget on the Mobile port.
• Consumed Amount (Rs.) / Minutes/Calls: This shows the sum/number of minutes/number of calls of
the allotted Call Budget that has been used up on the Mobile port.
• Call Budget Reset Mode: This shows the whether manual or scheduled reset of the consumed call
budget is set on the Mobile port.
• Call Budget Reset Schedule (Date): This shows whether the consumed Call Budget on the Mobile
port is to be reset Daily or on a particular date of a month.
• Reset Consumed Amount/Minutes/Calls: This editable field allows the System Engineer to reset the
consumed Call Budget Amount/Minutes/Calls at any time, manually.
• Registered with Network: This shows the type of network with which the Mobile port is registered,
whether GSM, GSM Compact, 3G or UMTS.
• Firmware Version of Engine: This shows the firmware version of the mobile Engine.
Resetting ASR and ACD using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To reset ASR and ACD calculation for Mobile Port, dial:
• 8032-1-Mobile-1 to reset ASR-ACD calculation for a single mobile port.
• 8032-2-Mobile-Mobile-1 to reset ASR-ACD calculation for a range of mobile ports.
• 8032-*-1 to reset ASR-ACD calculation for all mobile ports.
• Exit SE mode.
The System Administrator can also
• view the ID of the Mobile Network Operator with which the Mobile Port is currently registered.
• check Signal Strength of a mobile port, whenever there is trouble placing calls over a Mobile port to rule
out weak signal as the cause.
• Reset ASR and ACD calculation.
612 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To do this,
• Enter SA mode from a DKP.
• Dial 1072-017-Mobile Port Number to view ID of Network Operator.
You will get a confirmation tone.
If the port is successfully registered, the name of the network Operator will be displayed on the LCD of
the DKP.
If the port is not registered, the message 'Error' will be displayed on the LCD.
• Dial 1072-032-Mobile Port Number to check signal strength.
• Wait for the confirmation tone.
When the network responds, you the Mobile Network Signal Strength will be displayed on the LCD of
your DKP and programming beeps will be played.
The Signal Strength values are in -dBm. '-113' indicates weak signal, whereas '-51' indicates maximum
signal strength.
• Dial 1072-022-Mobile Port Number
You will get the confirmation tone and the confirmation message “ASR-ACD Reset” will appear on your
phone’s display.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 613
Configuring VoIP Network
After you have installed the VoIP Card and checked its functioning, first program the VoIP Port
Parameters, followed by the SIP Trunk Parameters, and SIP Extensions, as required.
A VoIP Card has a WAN Port and a LAN Port.
The VoIP Card may be installed typically, in a Public IP Network or in a Private network, behind a NAT Router.
When the VoIP Card is installed in a Public IP Network,
• the WAN Port of the card is connected to a Broadband Router/Modem.
• Public IP is assigned to the WAN Port.
• the LAN Port of the card is connected to a LAN Switch/Hub to which SIP devices are connected.
When the VoIP Card is installed in a Private Network, behind a NAT Router,
• the WAN Port of the card is connected to the LAN Switch/Hub.
• Private IP is assigned to the WAN Port.
• SIP devices within the LAN can get registered with the card.
When your VoIP Card is installed in a Private Network, you may have to change the IP Address and
Subnet Mask of the WAN Port of the card, before connecting it to the LAN Switch/Hub. However, this will
not be necessary, if there is a DHCP server on the LAN which will automatically assign an IP Address that
does not conflict with any other device on the LAN.
Depending on your installation scenario, configure the VoIP Port Parameters using Jeeves or dialing commands
from a Telephone.
VoIP Port Parameters
The term 'VoIP Port' referred to in the instructions given below is commonly used for the WAN Port and the LAN
Port of the VoIP Card. Whether it refers specifically to the WAN Port or the LAN Port depends on the installation
scenario. Where necessary, the term VoIP Port is specified as the WAN Port or the LAN Port.
Configuring VoIP Port Parameters using Jeeves
• Login as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the 'VoIP Configuration' link.
• Click 'VoIP Port Parameters' to open the page.
614 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Select the VoIP Port number you want to configure by clicking the respective tab, and program the
following port parameters:
• Hardware Slot: This is the number of the Universal Slot in which the VoIP card has been inserted. The
ETERNITY can automatically detect and assign the Hardware Slot numbers to the VoIP card (LAN and
WAN Port). If required, you may change the Hardware Slot number.
• Name: You may assign a 'Name' to each VoIP Port to facilitate easy identification. The Name may
comprise a maximum of 18 characters.
LAN Port
• MAC Address: This non-editable field shows the MAC Address of the LAN port.
• IP Address: Enter the IP Address to be assigned to the LAN Port of the VoIP Card. The default IP
Address is 192.168.002.031. You can assign only Static IP to the LAN Port.
• Subnet Mask: Enter the Subnet Mask to be assigned to the LAN Port. The default Subnet Mask is
255.255.255.0
WAN Port
• MAC Address: This non-editable field displays the MAC Address of the WAN port.
• Use MAC Cloning: MAC Cloning is required when you want the WAN Port to use a MAC Address other
than its own unique MAC Address as source MAC Address.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 615
When MAC Address Cloning is disabled, the WAN Port will use its unique MAC Address as the source
MAC Address on all Ethernet Frames. When MAC Cloning is enabled, the WAN Port will use the cloned
MAC Address on all Ethernet frames.
Select the check-box to enable cloning of the MAC Address of the WAN Port. By default, MAC Address
Cloning is disabled.
• Clone MAC Address: If you have enabled MAC Cloning, enter the MAC Address to be cloned in this field.
• Connection Type: Select the appropriate Connection Type for the WAN port, according to the IP
Addressing scheme of your installation scenario. Consult your LAN Administrator also in this regard.
• Static: Select this option if the connection type is Static. This is also the default connection type for all
WAN ports.
When you select this option, you must
• assign an IP Address to the WAN Port.
• change the Subnet mask of the WAN Port as appropriate.
• program the Router's LAN Interface IP Address as the Gateway IP Address.
• program the DNS Address/Domain Name provided by your ISP or ask your LAN Administrator for
the DNS Address and Domain Name.
• DHCP: Select this option if the connection type DHCP. As the DHCP Server will automatically assign IP
Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway Address to the WAN Port, you need not configure any of these.
• PPPoE: Select this option if the connection type is PPPoE. As the PPPoE server will automatically
assign the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway Address to the WAN Port, you need not change any
of these. You must program the User ID, Password and PPPoE Service Name as provided by your ISP.
Program the Service Name only if it has been provided. You must set DNS address.
• PPPoE: The parameter is relevant if you have selected PPPoE as the Connection Type. Configure the
following PPPoE parameters:
• User ID: Enter the User ID provided by the Internet Service Provider. The User ID may be a maximum
of 16 characters.
• Password: Enter the User Password provided by the Internet Service Provider. The password may be
a maximum of 16 characters.
• Service Name: Enter the PPPoE Service Name, if provided by your Internet Service Provider. The
Service Name may consist of a maximum of 16 characters. If Service Name is not required, leave this
field blank.
• IP Address: You must enter the IP Address, only if you selected 'Static' as the Connection Type.
If you selected DHCP or PPPoE as the Connection Type, the IP Address assigned by the DHCP/PPPoE
server will be displayed here.
• Subnet Mask: You must enter the Subnet Mask, only if you selected 'Static' as the Connection Type.
If you selected DHCP/PPPoE as the Connection Type, the Subnet Mask assigned by the DHCP/PPPoE
server will be displayed here.
616 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Default Gateway: You must enter the Gateway IP Address, only if you selected 'Static' as the Connection
Type.
If you selected DHCP/PPPoE as the Connection Type, the Gateway IP Address assigned by the DHCP/
PPPoE server will appear here in non-editable format.
• Domain Name Server (DNS): Configure the following DNS Connection settings for the WAN Port:
• DNS Address Assignment: If you selected 'Static' as your network Connection Type (IP Addressing),
you can select only 'Static' as the DNS Address Assignment.
If you selected DHCP as your network Connection Type, and the DHCP server provides DNS Address,
set the DNS Address Assignment to 'Automatic'. If the DHCP server does not provide DNS Address,
set DNS Address Assignment as 'Static' and program the DNS Server Address/DNS Name provided by
your ISP.
If you selected PPPoE as your network Connection Type, and the PPPoE server provides DNS
Address, set the DNS Address Assignment as 'Automatic'. If the PPPoE server does not provide DNS
Address, set the DNS Address Assignment as 'Static' and program the DNS Server Address/DNS
Name provided by your ISP.
• DNS Address: This field will be editable only if you selected DNS Address Assignment as 'Static'.
Enter the DNS IP Address here. The DNS Address can be a maximum of 15 characters.
If you selected DNS Address Assignment as 'Automatic', the DNS Address assigned by the DHCP/
PPPoE server will appear here.
• DNS Domain Name: Program DNS Domain Name if provided by your ITSP/LAN Administrator.
Otherwise, keep this field blank. The Domain Name may be a maximum of 40 characters.
• Dynamic DNS (DynDNS.org): This parameter is applicable only when you are going to configure SIP
Extensions on the VoIP Card.
When the VoIP Card is assigned dynamic IP Address using DHCP or PPPoE, SIP-enabled devices
registered with the Card as SIP Extensions need to change their configuration whenever a new IP Address
is assigned to the VoIP Card. Dynamic DNS resolves this.
ETERNITY VoIP Card supports Dynamic DNS Server client of the Service Provider Dynamic DNS.org. If
you want to use the DNS Service of DynDNS.org, program these parameters:
• Enable Dynamic DNS?: If you have taken the services of DynDNS.org, you must enable this flag. By
default this flag is disabled.
• Update IP Address at Power ON?: When your VoIP Card is registered with the DynDNS.org, the
DynamicDNS server stores the mapping between hostname and IP Address, which can be updated
periodically. However, if the VoIP card frequently sends IP Address update request to the DDNS server,
the server is likely to block the hostname in its database and terminate the DDNS services provided to
you.
So, if you restart the ETERNITY frequently, there is a great chance that DDNS server will block the
hostname programmed in the system. This will in turn affect the ability of the system to receive the calls
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 617
using DDNS host name since the entry (mapping between host name and IP Address) in the DNS
server will be deleted during those scenarios.
The VoIP Card offers you control over whether the system should update the IP Address in the DDNS
server at each Power ON or not. It also allows you to update the IP Address at any time, as required.
If you do not want to update the IP Address in the DDNS Server at each Power ON, set this flag to 'No'.
By default, the flag is set to 'No'.
• User ID: Enter the User ID created by you with DynDNS.org here. A maximum of 40 characters,
including all ASCII characters are allowed.
• Password: Enter the Password created by you for your User ID with DynDNS.org here. The password
may be not more than 24-characters long.
• Host Name: Enter the Host Name created by you with DynDNS.org here. A maximum of 40
characters, including all ASCII characters are allowed as Host Name.
• Retry Trials: This count defines the number of attempts that the VoIP Card should make to send the IP
Address Update Request to the Dynamic DNS Server. The Retry Count may be set from 1 to 9. By
default the count is set to 1.
• Update IP Address Now?: Enable this flag whenever you want to update the IP Address in the DDNS
server. By default, this flag is disabled.
You can use this flag to update the IP Address in the DDNS server, if you have disabled Update IP
Address during each Power ON.
• VoIP Server Domain: This parameter is of relevance only if you are configuring SIP Extensions on the
VoIP Card.
The VoIP Card is capable of maintaining a domain for registering SIP clients (any SIP-enabled device) as
SIP Extensions.
Program the Server Domain if you want SIP clients to register with the Registrar Server of the VoIP card
using the domain handled by the VoIP Card91.
If you program Server Domain for registration of SIP clients, you must also map the Domain name and the
IP Address of the WAN Port of the VoIP Card to the DNS Server in the network.
91. SIP clients can be registered with the VoIP Card either using the domain handled by the VoIP Card or using the WAN or LAN Port
IP Address.
If domain is programmed, VoIP card will listen for the SIP message which is redirected to the programmed domain only. It will also
listen for SIP messages on the WAN IP address and LAN IP address.
But if domain is not programmed, the VoIP card will listen for SIP messages only on the WAN IP Address and LAN IP address.
618 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Advanced Configuration
The above listed parameters fulfill the basic VoIP Port configuration requirements of most users. To configure other
parameters such as Quality of Service (QoS), NAT, STUN, SIP UDP/TCP Port, RTP Listening Port, VLAN, MAC
Cloning, click the 'Advance' button at the bottom.
Scroll to configure the advanced port parameters, described below.
• Quality of Service (QoS): This refers to priority of IP packets on network layer. QoS is programmed for
both signaling (SIP) and media (RTP). following types of QoS can be configured:
• SIP DiffServe/ToS: The VoIP Card sends all the SIP signaling messages with this QoS setting which
is selected here. This field defines the priority bits for SIP messages. There are two types of SIP QoS
from which you can select.
These are: Precedence and DiffServe. By default DiffServe is selected. Set the range of the selected
SIP QoS.
Precedence: Valid range is from 0-7, default: 5
DiffServe: Valid range is from 00-63, default: 26
• RTP DiffServe/ToS: The VoIP Card sends all the RTP packets with the QoS setting which is selected
here. This field defines the priority bits for RTP packet. There are two types of RTP QoS from which
you can select for RTP: Precedence and DiffServe. By default DiffServe is selected. Set the range of
the selected RTP QoS.
Precedence: Valid range is from 0-7, default: 5
DiffServe: Valid range is from 00-63, default: 46
QoS parameters are applicable for all packets (SIP/ RTP) leaving both LAN and WAN port as well as TCP
connection.
• Simple Traversal of UDPs through NATs (STUN):This parameter is to be configured only if the VoIP
Port (WAN) ETERNITY is located behind a NAT Router and SIP Messages need to be forwarded to the
public internet.
Simple Traversal of UDP through NAT (STUN) specifies the mechanism required for NAT traversal in SIP
messages. The STUN Server facilitates traversing through most NATs, except symmetric NATs. If your
router has symmetric NAT, do not program this parameter. If your router as asymmetric NAT, configure the
following STUN parameters:
• STUN Server Address: Enter the STUN Server Address, a maximum of 40 characters.
• STUN Port: Enter the Listening Port of the STUN Server. The valid range for this field is from 1024-
65535. The default STUN Port is 03478.
• Use SIP Port fetched using STUN: This flag is enabled by default to allow SIP Port Number to be
fetched using STUN in the SIP message. Disable this flag if you are using Port-Forwarding in the
Router for SIP messages.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 619
You also need to select 'Use IP Address fetched using STUN'' as the 'Source Port IP Address' in the 'SIP
Extension General Parameters', when you configure SIP Extensions'. Refer the topic "Configuring SIP
Extensions".
Since STUN does not work with symmetric NAT, as an alternative to STUN you can use the Router's Public
IP Address as NAT Traversal mechanism. Ask your Network Administrator about the NAT Traversal
mechanism that suits best for your voice network and program this parameter.
• Router's Public IP Address: This parameter is of relevance if the VoIP Port (WAN) of the ETERNITY is
located behind a NAT Router and SIP Messages are to be forwarded to the public internet.
Router's Public IP Address specifies the fixed IP Address of your NAT router required for NAT Traversal in
SIP messages.
You also need to select 'Router's Public IP Address' as the 'Source Port IP Address' in the 'SIP Extension
General Parameters', when you configure SIP Extensions'. Refer the topic "Configuring SIP Extensions".
You can also use STUN as an alternative to the Router's Public IP Address as NAT Traversal mechanism.
Ask your Network Administrator about the NAT Traversal mechanism that suits best for your voice network
and program this parameter.
• Disconnect on Silence Detection: With this parameter, any matured incoming or outgoing call can be
disconnected automatically, if silence (No RTP Packets) is detected for more than a specified duration of
time.
• Enable Disconnection on Silence Detection?: If you want to use this feature, click the check box to
enable it. By default, Disconnect on Silence Detection is enabled.
• Detection Time (sec): This Timer defines the duration for which, if silence is detected continuously,
the call will be disconnected. The valid range of this Timer is from 001 to 999 seconds. By default, it is
set to 999 seconds.
• Channels Reserved for SIP Trunks: The VoIP Card supports up to 32 voice channels (depending on the
model of ETERNITY), which can be used by SIP Extensions and SIP trunks.
It may happen that SIP Extension users use up most of the channels of the VoIP card, leaving too few or
none for making/receiving SIP Trunk calls.
This can be avoided by reserving some voice channels exclusively for SIP trunk calls.
Specify the minimum number of voice channels you want to reserve for SIP Trunk calls. By default, no
channel is reserved.
• SIP 100rel: This parameter is to be configured if you want to support reliable transmission of (SIP)
provisional responses. Enable 100rel by selecting the check box, if you want the VoIP Port to use 100rel
for reliable transmission of SIP provisional responses and to use PRACK (Provisional Acknowledgement).
By default, the flag is disabled.
620 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• SIP Over TCP: ETERNITY supports transporting of SIP messages over User Datagram Protocol (UDP) as
well as Transfer Control Protocol (TCP) connection. Despite the advantages that SIP over TCP offers, it is
more common to use UDP to transport SIP messages.
Enable this flag if you want to receive SIP messages over TCP. To be able to send SIP messages over
TCP, you must configure 'TCP' or 'TCP (Fallback to UDP)'. By default, SIP Over TCP is enabled.
• SIP UDP Port: This port defines the port on which the VoIP Port of ETERNITY listens for SIP messages
transported over UDP. This port is also used as the source port for sending SIP messages to the remote
peer. The valid range for this port is 1024-65535. Default: 05060.
• SIP TCP Port: This port defines the port on which the VoIP Port of ETERNITY listens for SIP messages
transported over TCP. This port is also used as the source port for sending SIP messages to the remote
peer. The valid range for this port is 1025-65535. The default SIP TCP Port is 05060.
• RTP Listening Port: This port defines the port on which the VoIP Port of ETERNITY listens for RTP
Packets. This port is also used as the source port for sending RTP packets to the remote peer. The valid
range for this port is 1024-65278. The default RTP Listening Port is 08000.
• Layer 2 VLAN/CoS: This parameter is to be configured if the VoIP Port (WAN) of ETERNITY is to be
connected in VLAN network.
This parameter enables the ETERNITY to add VLAN header to the packets generated by it. The VLAN
header consists of the VLAN ID (12-bit) and Class of Service (CoS, 3-bit) for prioritization of
traffic92.
VLAN Tag is applied on all packets generated by system (SIP, RTP, DNS, ARP, etc.), whereas CoS bits
are applied only for SIP and RTP packets generated by system.
The corresponding meaning of CoS bits with respect to traffic type is as follows:
COS Traffic Type
0 Best Effort
1 Background
2 Spare
3 Excellent Effort
4 Controlled Load
5 Video
6 Voice
7 Network Control
• Enable?: When this flag is enabled, all packets generated by the system (SIP, RTP, DNS, ARP, etc.)
will be tagged with VLAN ID as programmed. The CoS bits as programmed for SIP and RTP packets
will be included in the VLAN header. By default, this flag is disabled.
92. The IEEE 802.1P standard allows Layer2 switches to prioritize the traffic, thus providing Quality of Service (QoS), better handling
of data that pass over a network, thereby resulting in greater reliability and quality. Quality of Service (QoS) on Layer2 is referred to
as Class of Service (CoS) which is defined by IEEE 802.1P.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 621
• VLAN ID: Consult your network administrator and program the VLAN ID. The valid range for this is
from 0 - 4094. Default: 1.
• SIP CoS: Define the CoS (priority) bits in all SIP packets. The range of CoS bits is from 0 to 7. Default:
3.
• RTP CoS: Define the CoS (priority) bits in all RTP packets. The range of CoS bits is from 0 to 7.
Default: 6.
• UDP NAT Keep Alive: This parameter is to be configured when the VoIP Port is connected behind a NAT
router93 and SIP messages are transported over UDP. UDP NAT Keep Alive messages must be sent to
refresh the UDP binding in the NAT router.
• Enable: Enable this flag to send UDP NAT Keep Alive messages periodically to refresh the binding in
the NAT router. By default, this flag is disabled.
• Interval (sec): Select Time period after which the VoIP Port should send UDP NAT Keep Alive
messages. This time period should be less than the UDP Binding Timer of the router. The valid range is
001-999 seconds. By default it is set to 120 seconds.
• Type of Message: Select the type of message type to be sent when UDP NAT Keep Alive is enabled.
Select either REGISTER or NOTIFY. By default, NOTIFY is selected.
• TCP NAT Keep Alive: This parameter is to configured when the VoIP (WAN) Port is connected behind a
NAT router and SIP messages are transported over TCP. TCP NAT Keep Alive messages must be sent to
refresh the TCP binding in the NAT router.
• Enable: Enable this flag to send TCP NAT Keep Alive messages periodically to refresh the binding in
the NAT router. By default, this flag is disabled.
• Interval: Select Time period after which the VoIP Port should send TCP NAT Keep Alive messages.
This time period should be less than the Binding Timer of the router. The valid range is 001-999
seconds. By default it is set to 120 seconds.
• SIP Invite Timer (sec): This is the time in seconds that the VoIP Port waits for a response from the called
party after ending INVITE message. This timer starts after sending INVITE message to the called party
and stops on receipt of the provisional response or the final response or when the user disconnects the
call. On expiry of the timer, the call process is terminated by the ETERNITY and an error tone is played to
the user. The range of the SIP Invite Timer is 010-180 seconds. By default it is set to 30 seconds.
• SIP Provisional Timer (sec): This is the time in seconds that the VoIP Port waits for the final response
after receiving the provisional response from the called party. This timer starts on the receipt of the
provisional response from the called party and stops on receipt of the final response from the called party
or when the user disconnects the call. On expiry of the timer, the ETERNITY terminates the call process
and plays error tone to the user. The range of SIP provisional Timer is 010-180. By default, the timer is set
to 60 seconds.
• General Request Timer (sec): The time in seconds for which the VoIP Port waits for response for a
transaction request. This timer starts on the initiation of a transaction. This timer stops on receipt of a
93. Network Address Traversal (NAT) allows multiple hosts in the network to share the single public routable IP address. Means all the
hosts in the private network shall be identified by single public IP address in the global IP cloud.
622 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
response for the request. On expiry of the timer, the VoIP Port clears the transaction. This timer is used for
Registration request, etc. The range of the General Request Timer is 10-60 seconds. By default the timer
is set to 20 seconds.
• Assign LED for SIP Trunk: You can monitor the status and functioning of any one of the SIP trunks with
this parameter. This is LED2 on the VoIP card, which is assigned to any one of the SIP trunks that you
want to monitor. When assigned to a SIP trunk, the LED indicates the functioning of this trunk. By default
the LED is assigned to SIP trunk 01. Enter the number of the SIP trunk you want to be monitored here.
• If you have completed configuring the required parameters for the VoIP Ports, click 'Submit' at the bottom
of the page to save your VoIP Port settings.
• To program the parameters or another port, click the VoIP Port number on the top of the screen. Repeat
the same steps as above. Click ‘Submit’ at the bottom of the page to save your port parameter settings.
Configuring VoIP Port Parameters using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To assign Hardware Slot to a VoIP Port, dial:
• 1109-VoIP Port-Slot
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16
Slot is the number of the universal slot from 01 to 16.
To clear the Hardware Slot assigned to a VoIP Port, dial:
• 1109-VoIP Port-00
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16
To assign a Name to a VoIP Port, dial:
• 7763-1-VoIP Port-Name-#* to assign a name to a single VoIP port.
• 7763-2-VoIP Port-VoIP Port-Name-#* to assign the same name to a range of VoIP ports.
• 7763-*-Name-#* to assign the same name to all VoIP ports.
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16
Name is a string of a maximum of 18 alphanumeric characters. Terminate the command with #* if the
number string has fewer than 18 characters.
LAN Port Parameters
To configure IP Address for the LAN Port, dial:
• 7821-1-VoIP Port-IP Address
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16
IP Address is from 000-255.
Enter each octet in full. For example: To program IP address 192.168.10.11, enter 192168010011.
To configure Subnet Mask for the LAN Port, dial:
• 7822-1-VoIP Port-Subnet Mask to program the Subnet of a single VoIP port.
• 7822-2-VoIP Port-VoIP Port-Subnet Mask to program the same Subnet for a range of VoIP ports.
• 7822-*-Subnet Mask to program the same Subnet for all VoIP ports.
Where,
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 623
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16
Subnet Mask is from 000-255. Enter each octet in full. For example, to program Subnet Mask
255.255.255.000, enter 255255255000.
Default: 255.255.255.000
WAN Port Parameters
To enable/disable MAC Cloning on WAN Port, dial:
• 7773-1-VoIP Port-MAC Cloning Flag to enable/disable MAC Cloning on a single port.
• 7773-2-VoIP Port-VoIP Port-MAC Cloning Flag to enable/disable MAC Cloning on a range of ports.
• 7773-*-MAC Cloning Flag to enable/disable MAC Cloning on all ports.
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16.
MAC Cloning Flag is
1 for Enable
0 for Disable
Default: Disable
To configure Cloned MAC Address on WAN Port, dial:
• 7774-1-VoIP Port-Cloned MAC Address
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16.
Cloned MAC Address is a string of a maximum of 16 characters in hexadecimal format, for example:
00:50:C2:55:B0:10. Only Hexadecimal characters (0-9, A-F, '.')
Repeat this command to program the Cloned MAC Address on another VoIP Port.
When you enter the number string of the Cloned MAC Address, alphanumeric dialing will be automatically
enabled on the DKP. Do not enter '.' (dot/period) in the MAC Address. For example, to program MAC
Address 00.50.C2.55.B0.10, enter 0050C255B010 from the DKP.
To prevent the possible collision and loss of data, do not clone the MAC address, which is already used by
another device in the same network. Also, use MAC address as per IANA (Internet Assigned Numbers
Authority) standards.
To select the Connection Type for the VoIP Port, dial:
• 7751-1-VoIP Port-Connection Type to select connection type for a single VoIP port.
• 7751-2-VoIP Port-VoIP Port-Connection Type to select the same connection type for a range of VoIP
ports.
• 7751-*-Connection Type to select the same connection type for all ports.
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16
Connection Type is
1 for DHCP
2 for PPPoE
3 for Static IP
Default: Static IP.
To configure PPPoE User ID for PPPoE Connection Type, dial:
• 7752-1-VoIP Port-PPPoE User ID to program User ID for a single VoIP port.
• 7752-2-VoIP Port-VoIP Port-PPPoE User ID to program the same User ID for multiple ports.
• 7752-*-PPPoE User ID to program the same User ID for all VoIP ports.
624 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16
PPPoE User ID is a string of maximum 16 characters with extended ASCII character set.
To configure PPPoE Password for PPPoE Connection Type, dial:
• 7753-1-VoIP Port-PPPoE Password to program password for a single VoIP port.
• 7753-2-VoIP Port-VoIP Port-PPPoE Password to program the same password for a range of VoIP
ports.
• 7753-*-PPPoE Password to program the same password for all VoIP ports.
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16
PPPoE Password is a string of maximum16 characters, with extended ASCII character set.
To configure the Service Name for a PPPoE Connection Type, dial:
• 7787-1-VoIP Port-PPPoE Service Name to program service name for a single VoIP port.
• 7787-2-VoIP Port-VoIP Port-PPPoE Service Name to program the same service name for a range of
VoIP ports.
• 7787-*-PPPoE Service Name to program the same service name for all VoIP ports.
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16
PPPoE Service Name is a string of maximum16 characters, with extended ASCII character set.
To configure IP Address for VoIP Port having 'Static' as Connection Type, dial:
• 7754-1-VoIP Port-IP Address
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16
IP Address is from 000-255.
Enter each octet in full. For example: To program IP address 192.168.10.11, enter 192168010011.
To configure Subnet Mask for the VoIP Port having 'Static' as Connection Type, dial:
• 7755-1-VoIP Port-Subnet Mask to program the Subnet of a single VoIP port.
• 7755-2-VoIP Port-VoIP Port-Subnet Mask to program the same Subnet for a range of VoIP ports.
• 7755-*-Subnet Mask to program the same Subnet for all VoIP ports.
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16
Subnet Mask is from 000-255. Enter each octet in full. For example to program Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0, enter 255255255000.
To configure Default Gateway IP Address for the VoIP Port having 'Static' as Connection Type, dial:
• 7756-1-VoIP Port-Gateway Address to program Gateway IP Address for a single VoIP port.
• 7756-2-VoIP Port-VoIP Port-Gateway Address to program the same Gateway IP Address for a range
of VoIP ports.
• 7756-*-Gateway Address to program Gateway IP Address for all VoIP ports.
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16
Gateway IP Address is from 000-255. Enter each octet in full. For example: Enter the Gateway Address
192.168.10.10 as 192168010010.
Domain Name Server (DNS)
To configure DNS Address Assignment, dial:
• 7777-1-VoIP Port-DNS Address Assignment Type to select connection type for a single VoIP port.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 625
• 7777-2-VoIP Port-VoIP Port-DNS Address Assignment Type to select the same connection type for
a range of VoIP ports.
• 7777-*-DNS Address Assignment Type to select the same connection type for all VoIP ports.
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16.
DNS Address Assignment Type is
1 for Static
2 for Obtain Automatically
Default: Static
To configure DNS Server Address, dial:
• 7757-1-VoIP Port-DNS Server Address to configure server address of a single VoIP port.
• 7757-2-VoIP Port-VoIP Port-DNS Server Address to configure the same server address for a range
of VoIP ports.
• 7757-*-DNS Server Address to configure server address for all VoIP ports.
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16.
DNS Server Address is a maximum of 15 characters, with extended ASCII character set.
To configure DNS Domain Name, dial:
• 7758-1-VoIP Port-DNS Domain Name-#* to configure domain name for a single VoIP port.
• 7758-2-VoIP Port-VoIP Port-DNS Domain Name-#* to configure the same domain name for a range
of VoIP ports.
• 7758-*-DNS Domain Name-#* to configure the same domain name for a range of VoIP ports.
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16.
DNS Domain Name is a string of a maximum of 40 characters, including ASCII characters.
Dynamic DNS
To enable/disable Dynamic DNS flag, dial:
• 7823-1-VoIP Port-Flag to program the flag of a single VoIP port.
• 7823-2-VoIP Port-VoIP Port-Flag to program the same flag for a range of VoIP ports.
• 7823-*-Flag to program the same flag for all VoIP ports.
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16.
Flag is
0 for disable
1 for enable
Default: disabled.
To enable/disable Update IP Address at Power ON flag, dial:
• 7824-1-VoIP Port-Flag to program the flag of a single VoIP port.
• 7824-2-VoIP Port-VoIP Port-Flag to program the same flag for a range of VoIP ports.
• 7824-*-Flag to program the same flag for all VoIP ports.
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16.
Flag is
0 for disable
1 for enable
Default: disabled.
To program User ID for Dynamic DNS, dial:
626 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• 7825-1-VoIP Port-User ID for Dynamic DNS.
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16.
User ID for Dynamic DNS is maximum 40 characters.
To program Password for Dynamic DNS, dial:
• 7826-1-VoIP Port-Password for Dynamic DNS
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16.
Password for Dynamic DNS is maximum 24 characters.
To program Host Name for Dynamic DNS, dial:
• 7827-1-VoIP Port-Host Name for Dynamic DNS
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16.
Host Name for Dynamic DNS is maximum 40 characters.
To program Retry Trials for Dynamic DNS, dial:
• 7828-1-VoIP Port-Retry Trial for Dynamic DNS
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16.
Retry Trial for Dynamic DNS is from 1 to 9.
Default: 1.
To enable/disable Update IP Address Now? flag, dial:
• 7829-1-VoIP Port-Flag to program the flag of a single VoIP port.
• 7829-2-VoIP Port-VoIP Port-Flag to program the same flag for a range of VoIP ports.
• 7829-*-Flag to program the same flag for all VoIP ports.
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16.
Flag is
0 for disable
1 for enable
Default: disabled.
Quality of Service (QoS)
To select SIP DiffServe/ToS as Quality of Service for a VoIP Port, dial:
• 7765-1-VoIP Port-SIP QoS Level to select SIP QoS for a single VoIP port.
• 7765-2-VoIP Port-VoIP Port-SIP QoS Level to select the same SIP QoS Level for all VoIP ports.
• 7765-*-SIP QOS Level to select the same SIP QoS level for all VoIP ports.
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16.
SIP QoS Level Range is from 00 to 63.
Default: 26
To select RTP DiffServe/ToS as Quality of Service for a VoIP Port, dial:
• 7767-1-VoIP Port-RTP QoS Level to select RTP QoS for a single VoIP port.
• 7767-2-VoIP Port-VoIP Port-RTP QoS Level to select the same RTP QoS Level for all VoIP ports.
• 7767-*-RTP QoS Level to select the same RTP QoS level for all VoIP ports.
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16.
RTP QoS Level Range is from 00 to 63.
Default: 46
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 627
Simple Traversal of UDP through NATs (STUN)
To configure STUN Server Address (40 characters) for a VoIP Port, dial:
• 7759-1-VoIP Port-STUN Address to program STUN Server Address for a single VoIP port.
• 7759-2-VoIP Port-VoIP Port-STUN Address to program the same STUN Server Address for a range
of VoIP ports.
• 7759-*-STUN Address to program the same STUN Server Address for all ports.
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16.
STUN Server Address is a string of maximum 40 characters.
To configure STUN Server Port for a VoIP Port, dial:
• 7760-1-VoIP Port-STUN Port to program listening port of STUN for a single VoIP port.
• 7760-2-VoIP Port-VoIP Port-STUN Port to program the same STUN listening port for a range of VoIP
ports.
• 7760-*-STUN Port to program the same STUN listening port for all VoIP ports.
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16.
STUN Server Port is from 1024-65535.
Default: 03478
To enable/disable Use SIP Port fetched using STUN flag, dial:
• 7781-1-VoIP Port-Flag to enable/disable the flag on a single VoIP port.
• 7781-2-VoIP Port-VoIP Port-Flag to enable/disable the flag on a range of VoIP ports.
• 7781-*-Flag to enable/disable the flag on all VoIP ports.
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16.
Flag is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Enable
Router’s Public IP Address
To configure the (NAT) Router's Public IP Address, dial:
• 7780-1-VoIP-IP Address to program the Router's IP for a single VoIP port.
• 7780-2-VoIP Port-VoIP Port-IP Address to program the same Router's IP for a range of VoIP ports.
• 7780-*-IP Address to program the same Router's IP for all VoIP ports.
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16.
IP Address is the Router's Public IP Address from 000 to 255. Enter each octet of the IP Address in full
without the dots. For example: enter the IP Address 192.168.10.10 as 192168010010.
Disconnection on Silence Detection
To enable/disable Silence Detection Disconnection, dial:
• 7795-1-VoIP Port-Flag to enable/disable flag for a single VoIP port.
• 7795-2-VoIP Port- VoIP Port-Flag to enable/disable flag for a range of VoIP ports.
• 7795-*-Flag to enable/disable flag for all VoIP ports.
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16.
Flag is
0 for Disable
628 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
1 for Enable
Default: Enabled.
To set Silence Detection Disconnect Timer, dial:
• 7796-1-VoIP Port-Timer to set Timer for a single VoIP port.
• 7796-2-VoIP Port- VoIP Port-Timer to set the same Timer for a range of VoIP ports.
• 7796-*-Timer to set the same Timer for all VoIP ports.
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16.
Timer is from 001 to 999 seconds.
Default: 999 seconds.
Channel Reserved for SIP Trunks
To define Reserve Channels for SIP Trunks, dial:
• 7794-1-VoIP Port-Number of Channels to define channels for a single VoIP port.
• 7794-2-VoIP Port- VoIP Port-Number of Channels to define the same number of channels for a
range of VoIP ports.
• 7794-*-Number of Channels to define the same number of channels for all VoIP ports.
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16.
Number of channels is from 01 to 32.
Default: 00, no channel reserved.
SIP 100rel
To enable/disable Use 100rel Response for a VoIP Port, dial:
• 7783-1-VoIP Port-Code to enable/disable 100rel Response for a single VoIP port.
• 7783-2-VoIP Port-VoIP Port Code to enable/disable 100rel Response for a range of VoIP ports.
• 7783-*-Code to enable/disable 100rel Response for all VoIP ports.
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16.
Code is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Disable
SIP Over TCP
To enable/disable SIP over TCP flag, dial:
• 7790-1-VoIP Port-SIP Over TCP to enable/disable this feature on a single port.
• 7790-2-VoIP Port-VoIP Port-SIP Over TCP to enable/disable this feature on a range of ports.
• 7790-*-SIP Over TCP to enable/disable this feature on all ports.
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16.
SIP Over TCP is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Disable
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 629
SIP/RTP Ports
To define SIP UDP Port for a VoIP Port, dial:
• 7768-1-VoIP Port-SIP UDP Port to define SIP UDP Port for a single VoIP port.
• 7768-2-VoIP Port-VoIP Port-SIP UDP Port to define the same SIP UDP Port for a range of VoIP ports.
• 7768-*-SIP UDP Port to define the same SIP UDP Port on all VoIP ports.
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16.
SIP UDP Port is from 1025 to 65535.
Default: 5060
To define SIP TCP Port for a VoIP Port, dial:
• 7784-1-VoIP Port-SIP TCP Port to define SIP TCP Port for a single VoIP port.
• 7784-2-VoIP Port-VoIP Port-SIP TCP Port to define the same SIP TCP Port for a range of VoIP ports.
• 7784-*-SIP TCP Port to define the same SIP TCP Port on all VoIP ports.
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16.
SIP TCP Port is from 1024 to 65535.
Default: 5060
To define RTP Listening Port, dial:
• 7769-1-VoIP Port-RTP Listening Port to define RTP Listening on a single VoIP port.
• 7769-2-VoIP Port-VoIP Port-RTP Listening Port to define the same RTP Listening port on a range of
VoIP ports.
• 7769-*-RTP Listening Port to define the same RTP Listening port on all VoIP ports.
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16.
RTP Listening Port is from 1025 to 65535.
Default: 8000.
Layer 2 VLAN/CoS
To enable/disable Layer2 VLAN/CoS for a VoIP Port, dial:
• 7775-1-VoIP Port-Flag to enable/disable Layer2 VLAN/CoS for a single VoIP port.
• 7775-2-VoIP Port-VoIP Port-Flag to enable/disable Layer2 VLAN/CoS for a range of VoIP ports.
• 7775-*-Flag to enable/disable Layer2 VLAN/CoS for all VoIP ports.
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16.
Flag is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Disable
To assign a VLAN ID to the VoIP Port, dial:
• 7776-1-VoIP Port-VLAN ID to assign VLAN ID for a single VoIP port.
• 7776-2-VoIP Port-VoIP Port-VLAN ID to assign the same VLAN ID for a range of VoIP ports.
• 7776-*-VLAN ID to assign the same VLAN ID for all VoIP ports.
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16.
VLAN ID is from 0 to 4094
Default: 0001
630 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To program SIP CoS for a VoIP Port, dial:
• 7788-1-VoIP Port-SIP CoS to program SIP CoS for a single VoIP port.
• 7788-2-VoIP Port-VoIP Port-SIP CoS to program the same SIP CoS for a range of VoIP ports.
• 7788-*-SIP CoS to program the same SIP CoS for all VoIP ports.
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16.
SIP CoS is COS priority bits from 0 to 7. The corresponding meaning of the bits with respect to Traffic
type is as follows:
0 is for Best Effort
1 is for Background
2 is for Spare
3 is for Excellent Effort
4 is for Controlled Load
5 is for Video
6 is for Voice
7 is for Network Control
Default: 3, Excellent Effort
To program RTP CoS for a VoIP Port, dial:
• 7789-1-VoIP Port-RTP CoS to program RTP CoS for a single VoIP port.
• 7789-2-VoIP Port-VoIP Port-RTP CoS to program the same RTP CoS for a range of VoIP ports.
• 7789-*-RTP CoS to program the same RTP CoS for all VoIP ports.
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16.
RTP CoS is COS priority bits from 0 to 7. The corresponding meaning of the bits with respect to Traffic
type is as follows:
0 is for Best Effort
1 is for Background
2 is for Spare
3 is for Excellent Effort
4 is for Controlled Load
5 is for Video
6 is for Voice
7 is for Network Control
Default: 6, Voice
UDP NAT Keep Alive
To enable/disable UDP NAT Keep Alive for a VoIP Port, dial:
• 7761-1-VoIP Port-UDP NAT Keep Alive to enable/disable on a single VoIP port.
• 7761-2-VoIP Port-VoIP Port-UDP NAT Keep Alive to enable/disable on a range of VoIP ports.
• 7761-*-UDP NAT Keep Alive to enable/disable on all VoIP ports.
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16.
UDP NAT Keep Alive is
1 for Enable
0 for Disable
Default: Disable
To define Interval for UDP NAT Keep Alive for a VoIP Port, dial:
• 7762-1-VoIP Port-UDP NAT Keep Alive Interval to define the interval for a single VoIP port.
• 7762-2-VoIP Port-VoIP Port-UDP NAT Keep Alive Interval to define the same interval for a range of
VoIP ports.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 631
• 7762-*-UDP NAT Keep Alive Interval to define the same interval on all VoIP ports.
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16.
UDP NAT Keep Alive Interval is from 001 to 999 seconds.
Default:120 seconds.
To select the Type of Message for UDP NAT Keep Alive for a VoIP Port, dial:
• 7778-1-VoIP Port-NAT Keep Alive Message Type to select message type on a single VoIP port.
• 7778-2-VoIP Port-VoIP Port-NAT Keep Alive Message Type to select the same message type for a
range of VoIP ports.
• 7778-*-NAT Keep Alive Message Type to select the same message type on all ports.
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16.
NAT Keep Alive Message is
1 for NOTIFY
2 for REGISTER
Default: NOTIFY
TCP NAT Keep Alive
To enable/disable TCP NAT Keep Alive for a VoIP Port, dial:
• 7785-1-VoIP Port - NAT Keep Alive for TCP to enable/disable on a single VoIP port.
• 7785-2-VoIP Port - NAT Keep Alive for TCP to enable/disable on a range of VoIP ports.
• 7785-*- NAT Keep Alive for TCP to enable/disable on all VoIP ports.
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16.
NAT Keep Alive for TCP is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Disable
To define Interval for TCP NAT Keep Alive for a VoIP Port, dial:
• 7786-1-VoIP Port-NAT Keep Alive Interval for TCP to define interval for a single VoIP port.
• 7786-2-VoIP Port-VoIP Port-NAT Keep Alive Interval for TCP to define the same interval for a range
of VoIP ports.
• 7786-*-NAT Keep Alive Interval for TCP to define the same interval for all VoIP ports.
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16.
NAT Keep Alive Interval for TCP is from 001 to 999 seconds.
Default: 120 seconds
Timers
To configure the SIP Invite Timer, dial:
• 7770-1-VoIP Port-SIP Invite Timer to configure the invite timer for a single VoIP port.
• 770-2-VoIP Port -VoIP Port-SIP Invite Timer to configure the same timer duration for a range of VoIP
ports.
• 7770-*-SIP Invite Timer to configure the same timer duration for all VoIP ports.
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16.
SIP Invite Timer is from 010 to 180 seconds.
Default: 30 seconds.
632 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To configure the SIP Provisional Timer, dial:
• 7771-1-VoIP Port-SIP Provisional Timer to configure the provisional timer for a single VoIP port.
• 7771-2-VoIP Port-VoIP Port-SIP Provisional Timer to configure the same duration of the provisional
timer on a range of VoIP ports.
• 7771-*-SIP Provisional Timer to configure the same duration of the provisional timer on all VoIP ports.
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16.
SIP Provisional Timer is from 010 to 180 seconds.
Default: 60 seconds.
To configure the SIP General Request Timer for a VoIP Port, dial:
• 7779-1-VoIP Port-SIP General Request Timer to configure the request timer for a single VoIP port.
• 7779-2-VoIP Port-VoIP Port-SIP General Request Timer to configure the same timer duration for a
range of VoIP ports.
• 7779-*-SIP General Request Timer to configure the same timer duration for all VoIP ports.
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16.
SIP General Request Timer is from 10 to 60 seconds.
Default: 20 seconds.
LED Indication
To assign Registration LED to a SIP trunk:
• 7772-1-VoIP Port-SIP trunk
Where,
VoIP Port is the number of the software port from 01 to 16.
SIP trunk is the number of the SIP trunk you want to assign the LED, from 01 to 32.
Default: SIP trunk 01.
Viewing VoIP Port Parameters
You can view the status of VoIP Ports in Jeeves. To do this,
• Log into Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Under 'VoIP Configuration', click the 'VoIP Port Status' link .
The Port status page will display the following parameters for all VoIP Ports you have configured:
• VoIP Port Number
• WAN Port
• Ethernet Link
• Stack State
• Host IP Address
• Subnet Mask
• Gateway IP Address
• DNS IP Address
• Dynamic DNS Status
• MAC Address
• Server Domain
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 633
• NAT Status
• NAT Type
• Router's Public IP Address
• IP Address Fetched using STUN
• SIP Port Fetched using STUN
• LAN Port
• Ethernet Link
• Stack State
• MAC Address
• IP Address
• Subnet Mask
634 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Configuring SIP Trunks
SIP trunks may be Proxy or Non-Proxy. All SIP trunks are considered as Non-Proxy trunk by default.
Regardless of whether a SIP Trunk is Proxy or Non-Proxy, it must be assigned to a VoIP Ethernet Port, which is to
be used for that SIP trunk and the SIP trunk must be enabled. VoIP Calls can be initiated after suitable
configuration of the SIP trunk number in the Outgoing Trunk Bundle Group.
For Proxy SIP Trunks, you must program the following parameters required for registration with the Proxy Server.
• Assign the VoIP Port to be used for the SIP trunk.
• Enable the SIP trunk.
• Program the SIP ID, registrar Server Address, Registrar Server Port, Authentication ID, Authentication
Password as provided by your ITSP.
• If your ITSP uses Outbound Proxy, Enable the Outbound Proxy for the SIP trunk and also program the
Outbound Proxy Server Address and Port as provided by your ITSP.
The VoIP Ethernet Ports are assigned Software Port numbers from 01 to 16. Configuration of all VoIP
parameters are done for the Software Ports. Each of these software ports must first be assigned a Hardware
ID. A hardware ID of the Software Port shows the physical location of the port on the system.
Please read “Software Port and Hardware ID” to know about know more about this topic.
The number of SIP trunks supported by ETERNITY varies by model.
• ETERNITY ME supports 32 SIP Trunks.
• ETERNITY GE supports 16 SIP Trunks.
• ETERNITY PE supports 4 SIP Trunks.
If you have installed as single VoIP card, you can configure all SIP trunks on the same card.
If you have installed more than one VoIP card, you may program the SIP trunks on the VoIP Ethernet Ports in
a distributed manner. For example: if you have installed four VoIP cards in your ETERNITY ME, you can either
program 8 Trunks each on the 4 VoIP Ports OR you may program 12 Trunks on the VoIP Port of the first card,
8 on the VoIP Port of the second card, 6 Trunks each on the VoIP Ports of the third and the fourth card.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 635
Configuring SIP Trunks using Jeeves
While still logged in as System Engineer in the Full Programming Access mode,
• Click the link 'VoIP Configuration'.
• Scroll to 'SIP Trunk Parameters' and click this link to open the page.
Program the following SIP Trunk parameters:
• SIP Trunk No.: This non-editable field is the number of the SIP trunk. The SIP trunks are numbered
from 01 to 32.
• VoIP Ethernet Port No.: This is the software port number of the VoIP Ethernet Port, from 00 to 16, to
which you want to configure the SIP trunk.
It is possible to configure more than one SIP trunk on a single VoIP Ethernet Port. To do this, assign
the same VoIP Ethernet Port Number to all those SIP trunks you want to configure on that VoIP Port.
For example, if you want to configure SIP trunks 03, 04 and 05 on VoIP Ethernet Port No. 02, enter this
number (02) in this field for SIP trunk number 03, 04, and 05.
• Enable SIP Trunk: This flag is for enabling or disabling the SIP trunk. To be able to make incoming
and outgoing calls from the SIP trunk, click to enable the SIP trunk. By default, the SIP trunk is
disabled, disallowing incoming and outgoing calls. You may disable SIP trunks that are not functioning.
636 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Name: You may assign a 'Name' to each SIP trunk to facilitate identification. Whenever there is an
incoming call without CLI on this port, the Name you have programmed will be displayed on the landing
extension, provided it is a DKP.
The Name assigned to the SIP trunk may consist of a maximum of 18 characters. The Name of the port
may be the name of the ITSP the SIP trunk is subscribed with (recommended).
• SIP User ID: Enter the SIP User ID provided by the ITSP. SIP User ID is the ID that callers will use to
call this SIP trunk.
The SIP User ID may be a number or text for remote parties to call on the SIP trunk. For example, if
SIP URI provided by the ITSP is [email protected], enter 12345 in this field. SIP User ID may consist of
a maximum of 40 characters. All ASCII characters are allowed.
• Registrar Server Address: Enter the Proxy/Registrar Server Address. The Server Address may be an
IP Address or a Domain name, of maximum 40 characters.
• Registrar Server Port: Enter the Registrar Server Listening Port. The valid rang is from 1024 to
65535. By default, 5060 is set as the Listening Port of the Registrar Server.
• Re-registration Time (sec): The Registrar Server deletes an entry of its client from its database on
expiry of a fixed timer, which is set by the Registrar Server. ETERNITY VoIP Card sends a registration
request before this Timer expires to remain registered on the server.
Enter the value of the Timer after which the system should send registration request to maintain
registration binding with the server. The valid range of this timer is from 00001- 65535. By default the
Timer is set to 3600 seconds.
• Registration Retry Time (sec): This Timer stands for the period between retries for registration. If the
registration attempt fails, ETERNITY sends the registration request on the expiry of this Timer again.
The system continues to send the registration request till it gets registered. The valid range of this timer
is from 00001- 65535. By default the Timer is set to 00010 seconds.
• Authentication User ID: Enter the Authentication ID provided by the ITSP for this SIP trunk. The
Authentication User ID may be a string of 40 characters (maximum), including ASCII characters.
• Authentication Password: Enter the Authentication Password provided by the ITSP for this SIP trunk.
The Authentication Password may be a string of 16 characters (maximum), including ASCII characters.
• Outbound Proxy: This parameter is relevant only if the ITSP has a SIP outbound server to handle
voice calls. If yes, program the following parameters:
• Enable: Select this check box to enable Outbound Proxy. By default the flag is disabled.
• Server Address: Enter the Outbound Proxy Server's address. It may be an IP Address or Domain
name. A maximum of 48 Characters, including ASCII characters are allowed.
• Server Port: Enter the Outbound Proxy Server's Listening Port. The valid range for this is 1024-
65535. By default the Server Port is 5060.
• SIP Hardware Template: Assign a “SIP Hardware Template” to the SIP Trunk. The SIP Hardware
Template contains voice quality related features such as Voice Codec selection, Tx and Rx Gains,
Echo Cancellation, Jitter Buffer and, Fax-over-IP options and related parameters
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 637
There are 32 different templates to choose from. Each template can also be altered to suit your
requirement and preferences. By default, Template number 01 assigned to all SIP Trunks. Template
number 01 is also assigned to all SIP Extensions.
First, check if the values in Template 01 fulfill the feature requirements of the SIP Trunks. Retain this
template, if it fulfills the feature requirements of all SIP Trunks and if the same features are to be
allowed to all SIP Trunks.
If different sets of SIP hardware features are to be allowed to different SIP Trunks, then prepare
separate SIP Hardware Templates and apply them on the SIP Trunks. To do this,
• Under ‘VoIP Configuration’, click the 'SIP Hardware Template' link.
• Select a Template number, for example 03.
• Customize Template number 03 and click 'Submit'.
• Now go back to the 'SIP Trunks' page.
• Enter the number of the Template you customized, Template 03 in the 'SIP Hardware Template'
field of the SIP Trunk on which you want to apply this template.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
• Repeat the same steps to customize and assign a different SIP Hardware Template to another SIP
Trunk.
• Also, refer the topic “SIP Hardware Template” to know more about customizing the templates and
applying on the SIP Trunks.
• Trunk Feature Template: A Trunk Feature Template is a set of features like Time Table, Operator,
DID, DISA, Trunk Auto Answer, Trunk Landing Group, SMDR Storage, etc., that defines the behavior of
a Trunk. Apply a Trunk Feature Template to the SIP trunk. By default, Trunk Feature Template 01 is
applied on all SIP trunks as well as all other trunk types. Refer the topic “Trunk Feature Template” to
know more.
Click the 'Trunk Feature Template’ link to open the page. Check if the default Template 01 fulfills your
requirement for the SIP trunk.
If the default Template 01 does not fulfill your requirement, prepare another Trunk Feature Template94,
and enter the newly prepared Template number for the SIP trunk.
• Cost Factor: This parameter is of relevance only if 'Least Cost Routing' feature is applied on the SIP
trunk.
Cost Factor is used to grade the cost of routing calls from a SIP trunk, from 1 to 99; where 1 denotes
least cost and 99 denotes highest cost.
Assign a Cost Factor to the SIP trunk, for instance, 02 and program Least Cost Routing Table
accordingly.
For example, if you want to route all outgoing calls starting with number '9' through the SIP trunk 01
only,
• You must first assign a Cost Factor (01-99) to SIP trunk 01, for example, 02.
• Click the 'Least Cost Routing - Number Based' link to open the page.
94. The default template is applied on the ports of all trunk types supported by ETERNITY. Changes to the default template will be
applied on all trunk types also. So, you are advised to prepare a new template and apply it to the desired trunk types.
638 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Enter '9' in the 'Number' column, Cost Factor '02' as Preference 1, 2, 3 and 4.
• Click 'Submit' to save your settings.
All outgoing calls assigned Cost Factor trunk 02 will be made from SIP trunk 01.
• Simultaneous Calls: This parameter is for defining the number of Simultaneous Calls to be allowed on
the SIP trunk. ETERNITY ME and GE support up to 32 simultaneous calls, while ETERNITY PE
supports 16 simultaneous calls. You can configure as many simultaneous calls as supported on the
SIP trunk by the ITSP.
If the ITSP supports less than 8 simultaneous calls on SIP Trunks, you must program this parameter
accordingly. However, if you ITSP supports more than 8 simultaneous calls, you need not change this
parameter.
• If you have configured the above parameters for the desired VoIP Ethernet Ports, click 'Submit' to save
your configuration settings.
Advanced Configuration Parameters
The above listed parameters fulfill the basic SIP trunk configuration requirements of most users. However, it is
anticipated that some users may desire other less commonly used parameters such as RCOC, Accept Anonymous
Calls on SIP trunks, Call Budget on SIP trunks, etc.
For such users, you may click the 'Advanced' button and configure the following parameters:
• Return Call to Original Caller (RCOC): Enable this flag if you want to apply the 'Return Call to Original
Caller' on this SIP trunk.
If this feature is enabled on the SIP trunk, the system will route calls returned by remote parties back to the
extensions that originally made the call from this Trunk (the original callers' extensions). To know more,
refer the feature description for “RCOC (Return Call to Original Caller)”.
• Station Basic Feature Template: Assign a “Station Basic Feature Template” to the SIP trunk. There are
50 different templates to choose from. Each template can also be altered to suit your requirement and
preferences. Default: Template number 01 assigned to all SIP trunks.
• Station Advanced Feature Template: Assign a “Station Advanced Feature Template” to the SIP trunk.
There are 50 different templates to choose from. Each template can also be altered to suit your
requirement and preferences. Default: Template number 01 assigned to all SIP trunks.
• Add 'rinstance' in Register: 'rinstance' is any random value which can be used by the VoIP Ethernet Port
to fetch its own contact binding, that is, to know the Registration Expiry Timer assigned by the server. By
default, this flag is enabled.
• Send REGISTER Message: With this parameter you can select whether or not the system should send
REGISTER message from the SIP trunk. By default, this flag is enabled allowing REGISTER message to
be sent from the SIP trunk.
• Allow OG Calls without Registration: This parameter is to be enabled to allow outgoing calls to be made
from the SIP trunk, even when the SIP trunk is not registered. If this flag is disabled the system will not
allow outgoing calls to be made if the status of the SIP trunk is 'not registered'. By default, this flag is
disabled.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 639
• Send CLI?: This parameter allows you to configure the CLI of the SIP Trunk to be sent to the remote party
on outgoing calls made using the SIP trunk. You may select any of the following options as desired:
• CLIR: Select this option if you do not want the CLI to be sent.
• SIP ID: You may select this option if you want the SIP ID programmed on the SIP Trunk to be sent as
CLI.
• Calling Party-wise: Select this option if you want to send the Calling Extension Number (the number
of the extension making the outgoing call through the SIP trunk) as CLI.
When reverse DDI is programmed on the SIP Trunk, the DDI number of the calling extension will be
sent, instead of its extension number.
If the calling extension has disabled the parameter ‘Send DDI as CLI’ in its Station Advanced Feature
Template, then its Pilot number configured in the Outgoing Reference Table will be sent as CLI.
If calling extension has enabled CLIR, no CLI will be sent on the SIP Trunk.
• Fixed Number: Select this option if you want a specific number to be sent as CLI. When you select this
option, you must also define the number to be sent as CLI.
You may select this option you wish to send any of your trunk line numbers as CLI on the SIP Trunk so
as to enable the called party to call back the calling party using this CLI.
Since it is not possible to call back a SIP ID, Fixed Number offers you a solution, using which you can
send a trunk line number as CLI on the SIP Trunk. Using this CLI, the called party can call back the
calling party.
The Fixed Number may consist of a maximum of 40 characters, including all ASCII characters.
By default, ‘SIP ID is set as the Send CLI option for all SIP Trunks.
When extension number of the calling extension is blank, and the ‘Send CLI Option’ programmed for the
the SIP Trunk is other than "SIP ID", then also SIP ID will be sent as CLI.
• Accept Anonymous Calls?: The flag is for accepting calls without CLI that land on the SIP trunk. By
default the flag is enabled. You may disable this flag to disallow calls without CLI on this SIP trunk port.
• Source Port IP Address: Select the Source Port IP Address for the SIP trunk. You may select from any of
the following options, as applicable to your installation scenario.
• Use VoIP Ethernet Port IP Address: Select this option, if the VoIP Ethernet Port on which the SIP
trunk is configured is connected directly to the public Internet.
• Use IP Address fetched using STUN: Select this option, if the VoIP Ethernet Port is located behind a
NAT router other than Symmetric. If you select this option, make sure to disable 'Outbound Proxy'.
• Use Router's Public IP Address: Select this option if the VoIP Ethernet Port is located behind a NAT
router (any type). If you select this option, make sure to disable 'Outbound Proxy'.
640 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Use Symmetric RTP?: The use of Symmetric RTP makes it possible for a SIP device to send the RTP on
the same connection on which it is listening for RTP. This is done only on peer to peer SIP trunks.
Select 'Yes' if the VoIP Ethernet Port is located on a public IP and you want outgoing calls to the SIP Client
located behind the NAT Router. OR if you need to receive incoming calls from the SIP Client located
behind the NAT router. By default, Use of Symmetric RTP is enabled.
• Digest Authentication: This flag is to be enabled, if you want the feature 'Digest Authentication' to be
enabled on the SIP trunk.
When Digest Authentication is enabled, incoming calls from callers will be allowed only after the callers
have authenticated themselves (with their User ID and Password). If the caller enters invalid authentication
information, the system will re-challenge authentication once more, and reject the call, if the authentication
attempt fails again.
When you enable Digest Authentication, make sure that the Digest Authentication Table is also configured
first. To do this,
• Click the 'VoIP Configuration' link, if not done already.
• Scroll to go to 'Digest Authentication', and click this link to open the page.
• Enter the User ID to be authenticated along with its corresponding Password against each Index on the
Table.
• The User ID may be a maximum of 40 characters, including ASCII characters. The User Password may
be a maximum of 16 characters, including ASCII characters.
• If you have finished entering the User IDs and their corresponding User Passwords in this Table, click
'Submit' at the bottom of the page.
• Now, return to the 'SIP Trunk Parameters' page.
• Configure other SIP Parameters.
• Default Transport for Outgoing Message: The VoIP card of the ETERNITY supports three options for
transporting outgoing SIP messages:
• UDP: Outgoing messages are transported using UDP. By default this option is selected.
• TCP: Outgoing messages are transported using TCP.
• TCP (Fallback to UDP): TCP is used for outgoing messages. However, if the TCP connection fails, the
system will attempt to send the message again over UDP.
These options are checked only if you have enabled SIP over TCP flag. If the SIP over TCP flag is
disabled, all outgoing SIP messages will be transported over UDP only.
• Call Budget: If you want to enable 'Call Budget on Trunk' feature on this SIP trunk, configure the following
parameters:
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 641
• Type: Select the type of Call Budget on Trunk—Amount or Minutes or Calls—to be applied on this SIP
trunk. By default, no Call Budget type is selected.
• Amount: If you selected 'Amount' as the Call Budget Type, enter the Budget Amount in this field. By
default the Amount is set to 99999.
• Minutes: If you selected 'Minutes' as the Call Budget Type, enter the number of Minutes in this field. By
default the number of minutes is set to 99999.
• Calls: If you selected 'Calls' as the Call Budget Type, enter the number of Calls in this field. By default
the number of calls is set to 9999.
• Scheduled Reset: Enable this flag if you want the Call Budget Amount/Minutes/Number of Calls to be
reset on a particular date of every month.
• Scheduled (Date): Select the date of the month (Daily or 1-31) on which you want the Call Budget
Amount/Minutes/Number of Calls to be reset every month. You may select 'Daily' if your plan suggests
so.
The consumed Call Budget Amount/Minutes/Number of Calls can be reset also using SA and SE
commands, referred to as Manual Reset. Refer the feature description “Call Budget on Trunk”.
• Call Back: This parameter is related to the “Call Back on Trunk Port’ feature. If you want to enable the
'Call Back on Trunk Port' feature on this SIP trunk, configure the following parameters:
• Enable Call Back: Enable this flag to activate the Call Back on Trunk Port feature. By default, this flag
is disabled on all trunk port types. By default, the flag is disabled.
• Call Back Timer: This is the duration for which the system waits for the caller to disconnect before
applying the Call Back. The range of this timer is from 01 to 99 seconds. By default, it is set to 10
seconds for all SIP Trunks.
• Call Back Mode: Select from the following options how a ‘Call Back’ call answered by the remote party
should be routed:
• DID
• PIN Authentication - Multiple Calls
• CLI Authentication - Multiple Calls
• CLI Authentication - Single Call - Answer Signaling
• Operator
By default, Operator is selected as the Call Back Mode.
• Call Back on: This parameter allows you to select if the call back should be made to the same number
that was received or to a different number. If you want the call back to be made to the same number
select the ‘CLI number”. If you want the call back to be made to a different number, select ‘Alternate
Number’.
By default, CLI number is selected for Call Back.
• Incoming Number List: Program the number strings that are eligible for Call Back in this List. By
default, Number List 15 is assigned to Call Back Incoming Number List.
642 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Number List 15 is also assigned to all SIP trunks as well as all other Trunk port types. If you want the
same numbers strings to be programmed commonly for all SIP trunks and Trunk Port types, retain this
list.
If you want a different set of number strings to be programmed for this SIP Trunk, select a different
Number List, and assign it to the SIP trunk port.
You may program the Incoming Number List either from the ‘Number List’ page or by clicking the
‘Incoming Number List’ link to reach the Number List page.
Refer the topic “Number List” to know more, and for configuration instructions.
• Outgoing Number List: Program the number strings that are to be called back in this List.
For each number string you programmed in the ‘Incoming Number List’, you must program in the
corresponding index in the Outgoing Number List a number to which the call back is to be made. For
example, for the number string programmed at Index 1 in the Incoming Number List, a corresponding
number string at the same Index, Index 1, should be programmed in the ‘Outgoing Number List’.
By default, Number List 16 is assigned to Outgoing Number List.The same Number List 16 is also
assigned to all SIP trunks as well as all other Trunk port types.
You may program the default number list, or a different number list and assign it to this SIP Trunk port.
You may program the Outgoing Number List either from the ‘Number List’ page or by clicking the
‘Outgoing Number List’ link to reach the Number List page.
Refer the topic “Number List” to know more, and for configuration instructions.
• Call Back from: This parameter determines the trunk port to be used to make the call back. The call
back can be made using the same port or an Outgoing Trunk Bundle Group (OGTBG).
Select ‘Same port’ if you want the call back to be made using the same port on which the missed call is
received. If you select OGTBG, the call back will be made using the OGTBG, which you have defined.
By default, Same port is selected.
• OGTB Group: If you selected OGTBG for making the call back in the previous parameter, you must
define the OGTBG that must be used in this parameter.
By default, OGTBG 01 is assigned to all SIP trunks.
If you want the system to select the lowest cost trunk for making the call back, enable Least Cost
Routing on the OGTBG that you define here for Call Back.
• Incoming Reference ID: Assign an Incoming Reference ID for the SIP trunk for Working Hours, Break
Hours, Non-Working Hours. By default, 00 is assigned as Incoming Reference ID for all three time zones.
• Outgoing Reference ID: Assign an Outgoing Reference ID for the SIP Trunk, from 00 to 99. By default,
00 is assigned as Outgoing Reference ID.
• Pause Timer (sec): This Timer is required for inserting delay while digits of a number string are out dialed
from the SIP trunk. The Pause Timer will be applicable when the letter 'P' is configured in the DTMF
number string which is to be out dialed as DTMF digits on the SIP trunk. The range of this timer is from 1 to
9 seconds. By default the Timer is set to 3 seconds.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 643
For example, if 'PPP3' is to be out dialed and Pause timer is programmed as 3 seconds, the ETERNITY
will out dial the digit 3 after 9 seconds, after a delay of individual P (3+3+3 =9). The range of this Timer is
from 1 to 9.
This parameter is used for the “Multi-Stage Dialing” feature.
• DTMF Out Dial:
• DTMF ON Time: This is the time for which the DTMF digit will remain ON, while being out dialed by the
ETERNITY. This parameter finds its application in the feature “Multi-Stage Dialing”. The range of this
timer is from 051 to 255 milliseconds. By default, ON Time is defined as 102 msec.
• Inter Digit Pause (msec): This is the time for which the ETERNITY will wait before dialing the
successive digits.
• Gateway Application - Answer Signaling: This parameter is to be programmed if the SIP trunk is being
used in a gateway application as a source port (from where calls originate). The calls originated on the
source port (SIP trunk) are routed using another Trunk port, the terminating port, which may be any trunk
port, like T1E1. When call made from the terminating port gets matured, this is signaled to the source port
in the form of DTMF digits.
• Use?: Enable this flag if you want the SIP trunk to be used in a Gateway Application.
• DTMF String: Program the DTMF digits to be sent to signal call maturity to the source port.
• If you have configured the above parameters for the desired SIP trunks, click 'Submit' at the bottom of the
page to save your configuration settings.
Viewing SIP Trunk Status
You can also view the settings of the SIP Trunk Parameters on Jeeves. To do this,
• Under ‘VoIP Configuration’, click the 'SIP Trunk Status' link.
• For each SIP trunk (number), the following settings will be displayed:
• SIP Trunk Number
• Status
• Registration Time
• Registration Retry Count
• Reason for Failure
• Call Budget Type
• Call Budget Reset Mode
• Call Budget Reset Schedule (Date)
644 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Allotted Amount/Minutes/Calls
• Consumed Amount/Minutes/Calls
• Reset Consumed Budget (this is not a status indicator. It is for resetting the Consumed Call Budget
manually)
Configuring SIP Trunk Parameters using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To assign the SIP trunk to a VoIP Ethernet Port, dial:
• 7701-1-SIP-VoIP Ethernet Port to assign a single SIP trunk to a VoIP Ethernet port.
• 7701-2-SIP-SIP-VoIP Ethernet Port to assign a range of SIP trunks to the same VoIP Ethernet Port.
• 7701-*-VoIP Ethernet Port to assign all SIP trunks to the same VoIP Ethernet Port.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
VoIP Ethernet Port is the number of the port from 00 to 16.
Default: no SIP trunks are assigned VoIP Ethernet Port.
To de-assign the SIP trunk from a VoIP Ethernet Port:
• 7701-1-SIP trunk-00
To enable/disable the SIP trunk, dial:
• 7702-1-SIP-Code to enable/disable a single SIP trunk.
• 7702-2-SI-SIP-Code to enable/disable a range of SIP trunks.
• 7702-*-Code to enable/disable all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
Code is
1 for Enable
0 for Disable
To assign a name to the SIP trunk, dial:
• 5410-1-SIP-Name-#* to assign the name to single SIP trunks.
• 5410-2-SIP-SIP-Name-#* to assign the same name to a range of SIP trunks.
• 5410-*-Name-#* to assign the same name to all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
Name is a string of 18 alphanumeric characters. Terminate the command with #* if the Name has fewer
than 18 characters.
To clear the name of a SIP trunk, dial:
• 5410-1-SIP-#* to clear the name of a single SIP trunk.
• 5410-2-SIP-SIP-#* to clear the name of a range of SIP trunks.
• 5410-*-#* to clear the names of all SIP trunks.
To configure SIP User ID for a SIP trunk, dial:
• 7704-1-SIP-SIP User ID
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
SIP User ID is a string of 40 characters (maximum), with extended ASCII characters
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 645
To configure Registrar Server's Address, dial:
• 7705-1-SIP-Registrar Servers' Address to configure the server address for a single SIP trunk.
• 7705-2-SIP-SIP-Registrar Servers' Address to configure the same address of a range of SIP trunks.
• 7705-*-Registrar Servers' Address to configure the same address for all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
SIP Registrar Servers' Address is a string of 40 characters (maximum) with extended ASCII characters.
To define Registrar Server's Listening Port, dial:
• 7706-1-SIP-Registrar Server's Port to define the listening port for a single SIP trunk.
• 7706-2-SIP-SIP-Registrar Server's Port to define the listening port for a range of SIP trunks.
• 7706-*-SIP Registrar Server's Port to define the listening port for all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
SIP Registrar Server's Port is from 1025-65535. Default: 5060
To configure the Re-registration Timer, dial:
• 7707-1-SIP-Re-Registration Timer to configure the Timer for a single SIP trunk.
• 7707-2-SIP-SIP-Re-Registration Timer to configure the same Timer duration for a range of SIP
trunks.
• 7707-*-Re-Registration Timer to configure the same Timer duration for all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
Re-Registration Timer range is from 00001 to 65535 seconds. Default: 00010 seconds.
To configure the Registration Retry Timer, dial:
• 7708-1-SIP-Registration Retry Timer to configure the Timer of a single SIP trunk.
• 7708-2-SIP-SIP-Registration Retry Timer to configure the same Timer duration for a range of SIP
trunks.
• 7708-*-Registration Retry Timer to configure the same Timer duration for all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
Re-Registration Retry Timer range is from 00001 to 65535 seconds. Default: 00010 seconds.
To configure the Authentication ID for the SIP trunk, dial:
• 7709-1-SIP-Authentication User ID to configure the Authentication ID of a single SIP trunk.
• 7709-2-SIP-SIP-Authentication User ID to configure the same Authentication ID for a range of SIP
trunks.
• 7709-*-Authentication User ID to configure the same Authentication ID for all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
Authentication User ID is a string of maximum 16 characters, all ASCII characters allowed.
To configure the Authentication Password for the SIP trunk, dial:
• 7710-1-SIP-Authentication User Password to configure the Authentication Password of a single SIP
trunk.
• 7710-2-SIP-SIP-Authentication User Password to configure the same Authentication Password for a
range of SIP trunks.
• 7710-*-Authentication User Password to configure the same Authentication Password for all SIP
trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
Authentication password is a string of 16 characters; all ASCII characters allowed.
646 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To enable/disable Outbound Proxy for the SIP trunk, dial:
• 7715-1-SIP-Outbound Proxy Status to enable/disable proxy for a single SIP trunk.
• 7715-2-SIP-SIP-Outbound Proxy Status to enable/disable proxy for a range of SIP trunks.
• 7715-*-Outbound Proxy Status to enable/disable proxy for all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
Outbound Proxy Status is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Disabled
To configure Server Address of Outbound Proxy for the SIP trunk, dial:
• 7716-1-SIP-Outbound Proxy Server Address to configure Server Address for a single SIP trunk.
• 7716-2-SIP-SIP-Outbound Proxy Server Address to configure the same Server Address for a range
of SIP trunks.
• 7716-*-Outbound Proxy Server Address to configure the same Server Address for all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
Outbound Proxy Server Address is a string of a maximum 40 characters, with extended ASCII
character set.
To define Outbound Proxy Server's Listening Port, dial:
• 7717-1-SIP-Outbound Proxy Server Port to define the Listening port for a single SIP trunk.
• 7717-2-SIP-SIP-Outbound Proxy Server Port to define the same Listening port for a range of SIP
trunks.
• 7717-*-Outbound Proxy Server Port to define Listening port for all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
Outbound Proxy Server port range is from 01024-65535. Default: 05060.
To apply SIP Hardware Template to a SIP Trunk, dial:
• 7808-1-SIP-SIP Hardware Template Number to apply template to a single trunk.
• 7808-2-SIP-SIP- SIP Hardware Template Number to apply the same template to a range of trunks.
• 7808-*-SIP Hardware Template Number to apply the same template to all trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the SIP Trunk from 01 to 32.
SIP Hardware Template Number is from 01 to 32.
To assign a Trunk Feature Template to a SIP trunk, dial:
• 5808-1-SIP-Template Number to assign a template to a single SIP trunk.
• 5808-2-SIP-SIP-Template Number to assign the same template to a range of SIP trunks.
• 5808-*-Template Number to assign the same template to all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
Template Number is the number of the Trunk Feature Template from 01 to 50.
To assign a Cost Factor to the SIP trunk, dial:
• 7703-1-SIP-Cost Factor to assign cost factor to a single SIP trunk.
• 7703-2-SIP-SIP-Cost Factor to assign the same cost factor to a range of SIP trunks.
• 7703-*-Cost Factor to assign the same cost factor to all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 647
Cost Factor is from 01 to 99. Default: 01
To configure the number of Simultaneous Calls on a SIP trunk, dial:
• 7741-1-SIP-Number of Simultaneous Calls to configure the number of simultaneous calls for a single
SIP trunk.
• 7741-2-SIP-Number of Simultaneous Calls to configure the same number of simultaneous calls for a
range of SIP trunks.
• 7741-*-Number of Simultaneous Calls to configure the same number of simultaneous calls for all SIP
trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
Number of Simultaneous calls is from 01 to 32. Default: 32
• For Advanced Configuration of the SIP trunks, use the following commands:
To enable/disable RCOC on SIP trunk, dial:
• 7743-1-SIP-Code to enable/disable RCOC on a single SIP trunk.
• 7743-1-SIP-Code to enable/disable RCOC on a range of SIP trunks.
• 7743-*-Code to enable/disable RCOC on all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
Code is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Disable
To assign a Station Basic Feature Template to a SIP trunk, dial:
• 5508-1-SIP-Station Basic Feature Template Number to assign a template to a single SIP trunk.
• 5508-2-SIP-Station Basic Feature Template Number to assign the same template to a range of SIP
trunks.
• 5508-*-Station Basic Feature Template Number to assign the same template to all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
Template Number is the number of the Station Basic Feature Template from 01 to 50. Default: 01
To assign a Station Advanced Feature Template, dial:
• 5608-1-SIP-Station Advanced Feature Template Number to assign a template to a single SIP trunk.
• 5608-2-SIP-SIP- Station Advanced Feature Template Number to assign the same template to a
range of SIP trunks.
• 5608-*-Station Advanced Feature Template Number to assign the same template to all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
Template Number is the number of the Station Advanced Feature Template from 01 to 50. Default: 01
To enable/disable 'Add rinstance in Register'? dial:
• 7739-1-SIP-Flag to enable/disable 'rinstance' on a single SIP trunk.
• 7739-2-SIP-SIP-Flag to enable/disable 'rinstance' on a range of SIP trunks.
• 7739-*-Flag to enable/disable 'rinstance' on all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
Flag is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
648 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Default: Disabled
To enable/disable 'Send REGISTER' flag for the SIP trunk, dial:
• 7744-1-SIP-Flag to enable/disable send REGISTER flag on a single SIP trunk.
• 7744-2-SIP-SIP-Flag to enable/disable send REGISTER flag on a range of SIP trunks.
• 7744-*-Flag to enable/disable send REGISTER flag on all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
Flag is
0 for No
1 for Yes
Default: Yes
To enable/disable 'Allow Outgoing Calls without Registration' flag on the SIP trunk, dial:
• 7745-1-SIP-Flag to enable/disable this flag on a single SIP trunk.
• 7745-2-SIP-SIP-Flag to enable/disable this flag on a range of SIP trunks.
• 7745-*-Flag to enable/disable this flag on all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
Flag is
0 for restrict OG Calls without Registration
1 for allow OG Calls without Registration
Default: 1
To select a 'Send CLI' option for a SIP trunk, dial:
• 7718-1-SIP-Send CLI Option to select 'Send CLI' option for a single SIP trunk.
• 7718-2-SIP-SIP-Send CLI Option to select 'Send CLI' option for a range of SIP trunks.
• 7718-*-Send CLI Option to select ‘Send CLI’ option for all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
Send CLI Option is
0 for CLIR (do not send CLI)
1 for send SIP ID Programmed on Trunk as CLI
2 for send Calling Party-wise CLI
3 for send Fixed Number as CLI
Default: SIP ID.
To program the ‘Fixed Number’ to be sent as CLI, dial:
• 7305 -1-SIP- Fixed Number to program the fixed number for a single SIP trunk.
• 7305-2-SIP- SIP- Fixed Number to program the same fixed number for a range of trunks.
• 7305-*- Fixed Number to program the same fixed number for all trunks.
Where,
Fixed Number may be a string of a maximum of 40 characters, including all ASCII characters.
Default: Blank
To accept/reject Anonymous Calls on the SIP trunk, dial:
• 7742-1-SIP-Code to accept/reject Anonymous Calls on a single SIP trunk.
• 7742-2-SIP-SIP-Code to accept/reject Anonymous Calls on a range of SIP trunks.
• 7742-*-Code to accept/reject Anonymous Calls on all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
Code is
0 for Reject
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 649
1 for Accept
Default: Accept
To select Source Port IP Address for a SIP trunk, dial:
• 7711-1- SIP-Code to select Source Port IP Address for a single SIP trunk.
• 7711-2- SIP-SIP-Code to select Source Port IP Address for a range of SIP trunks.
• 7711-*-Code to select Source Port IP Address for all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
Code is
1 is for Use VoIP Ethernet Port IP Address
2 is for Use IP Address fetched using STUN
3 is for Use Router's Public IP Address
To enable/disable 'Use Symmetric RTP' flag, dial:
• 7719-1-SIP-Symmetric RTP Flag to enable/disable the flag for a single SIP trunk.
• 7719-2-SIP-SIP-Symmetric RTP Flag to enable/disable the flag for a range of SIP trunks.
• 7719-*-Symmetric RTP Flag to enable/disable the flag for all SIP trunks.
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
Code is
Symmetric RTP Flag is
0 for Disable (do not apply Symmetric RTP logic)
1 for Enable (apply Symmetric RTP logic)
Default: 0
To enable/disable Digest Authentication on SIP trunk, dial:
• 7729-1-SIP-Digest Authentication to enable/disable Digest Authentication on a single SIP trunk.
• 7729-2-SIP-SIP-Digest Authentication to enable/disable Digest Authentication on a range of SIP
trunks.
• 7729-*-Digest Authentication to enable/disable Digest Authentication on all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
Digest Authentication is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Disable
To configure Digest Authentication Table, dial:
• 4118-Index-User ID to configure User ID in the table
• 4119-Index-User Password to configure the corresponding password for the User ID.
Where,
Index is the location on the Authentication Table from 01 to 32.
User ID may be a maximum of 40 characters, including ASCII characters. Terminate the command with
#* if User ID has fewer than 40 characters.
User Password may be a string of a maximum of 16 characters, including ASCII characters. Terminate
the command with #* if User Password is less than 16 characters.
The Index number should remain the same for each User ID and its corresponding password. For
example, if you configured a User ID at Index number 03, the corresponding password for this ID should
also be configured at Index number 03.
To configure Default Transport for Outgoing Messages for a SIP trunk, dial:
• 7731-1-SIP-Default Transport for OG Message to select the transport mode for a single SIP trunk.
650 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• 7731-2-SIP-Default Transport for OG Message to select the transport mode for a range of SIP trunks.
• 7731-*-SIP-Default Transport for OG Message to select the transport mode for all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
Default Transport for OG Message is
1 for UDP
2 for TCP
3 for TCP (Fallback UDP)
Default: UDP
• For SE Commands for configuring Call Budget on SIP Trunks, refer the feature description “Call
Budget on Trunk”.
To enable / disable Call Back on SIP Trunk port, dial:
• 7712-1-SIP-Code to enable/disable Call Back on a single SIP trunk.
• 7712-2-SIP-SIP-Code to enable/disable Call Back on a range of SIP trunks.
• 7712-*-Code to enable/disable Call Back on all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
Code is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Disabled
To program Call Back Timer on SIP Trunk port, dial:
• 7713-1 -SIP-Call Back Timer to set timer for a single SIP trunk.
• 7713-2 -SIP-SIP-Call Back Timer to set same timer duration for a range of SIP trunks.
• 7713-*-Call Back Timer to set the same timer duration for all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
Timer is from 01 to 99 Sec.
Default: 10 Seconds (for SIP trunk 01)
To select Call Back Mode for SIP Trunk port, dial:
• 7714 -1-SIP-Call Back Mode to set call back mode for a single SIP trunk.
• 7714 -2-SIP-SIP-Call Back Mode to set same call back mode for a range of SIP trunks.
• 7714 -*-Call Back Mode to set the same call back mode for all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
Call Back Mode is from 1 to 5
1 for DID
2 for PIN Auth. - Multiple Calls
3 for CLI Auth. - Multiple Calls
4 for CLI Auth. - Single Call - Ans. Sig.
5 for Operator
Default: Operator
To program Call Back On for SIP Trunk port, dial:
• 7746-1-SIP-Call Back on to program call back on for a single SIP trunk.
• 7746-2-SIP-SIP-Call Back on to program the same call back on option for a range of SIP trunks.
• 7746-*Call Back on to program the same call back on option for all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 651
Call back on is
1 for CLI Number
2 for Alternate Number
Default: CLI Number
To assign Call Back - Incoming Number List to a SIP Trunk port, dial:
• 7747-1 -SIP-Incoming Number List to assign a list to a single SIP trunk.
• 7747-2-SIP-SIP-Incoming Number List to assign the same list to a range of SIP trunks.
• 7747-*-Incoming Number List to assign the same list to all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
Incoming Number List is from 01 to 16.
Default: 15
To assign Call Back - Outgoing Number List to a SIP Trunk port, dial:
• 7748-1-SIP-Outgoing Number List to assign a list to a single SIP trunk.
• 7748-2-SIP-SIP-Outgoing Number List to assign the same list to a range of SIP trunks.
• 7748-*-Outgoing Number List to assign the same list to all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
Outgoing Number List is from 01 to 16.
Default: 16
To select Call Back From port for a SIP Trunk port, dial:
• 7749-1-SIP-Call Back From to select Call Back From for a single SIP trunk.
• 7749-2-SIP-SIP-Call Back From to select the same Call Back From for a range of SIP trunks.
• 7749-*-Call Back From to select the same Call Back From for all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
Call Back From is
1 for Same Port
2 for OGTB Group
Default: Same Port
To assign Call Back - OGTB Group to a SIP Trunk port, dial:
• 7750-1-SIP-OGTB Group to assign an OGTBG to a single SIP trunk.
• 7750-2-SIP-SIP-OGTB Group to assign the same OGTBG to a range of SIP trunks.
• 7750-*-OGTB Group to assign the same OGTBG to all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
OGTB Group is from 01 to 32.
Default: 01
To assign Incoming Reference ID to the SIP trunk for Working Hours, dial:
• 7722-1-SIP-IC Reference ID to assign reference ID to a single SIP trunk.
• 7722-2-SIP-SIP-IC Reference ID to assign the same reference ID to a range of SIP trunks.
• 7722-*-IC Reference ID to assign the same reference ID to all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
IC Reference ID is from 00 to 99. Default: 00.
To assign Incoming Reference ID to the SIP trunk for Break Hours, dial:
• 7723-1-SIP-IC Reference ID to assign reference ID to a single SIP trunk.
652 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• 7723-2-SIP-SIP-IC Reference ID to assign the same reference ID to a range of SIP trunks.
• 7723-*-IC Reference ID to assign the same reference ID to all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
IC Reference ID is from 00 to 99. Default: 00.
To assign Incoming Reference ID to the SIP trunk for Non-Working Hours, dial:
• 7724-1-SIP-IC Reference ID to assign reference ID to a single SIP trunk.
• 7724-2-SIP-SIP-IC Reference ID to assign the same reference ID to a range of SIP trunks.
• 7724-*-IC Reference ID to assign the same reference ID to all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
IC Reference ID is from 00 to 99. Default: 00.
To assign Outgoing Route Reference ID to a SIP trunk, dial:
• 7721-1-SIP-OG Reference ID to assign reference ID to a single SIP trunk.
• 7721-2-SIP-SIP-OG Reference ID to assign the same reference ID to a range of SIP trunks.
• 7721-*-OG Reference ID to assign the same reference ID to all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
OG Route Reference ID is from 00 to 99. Default: 00.
To configure the Pause Timer for a SIP trunk, dial:
• 7720-1-SIP-Pause Timer to configure the timer for a single SIP trunk.
• 7720-2-SIP-SIP-Pause Timer to configure the timer for a range of SIP trunks.
• 7720-*-Pause Timer to configure the timer for all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
Pause Timer is from 1 to 9 seconds. Default: 3 seconds.
To configure the DTMF ON Time for the SIP trunk, dial:
• 7725-1-SIP-DTMF ON Time to configure the time for a single SIP trunk.
• 7725-2-SIP-SIP-DTMF ON Time to configure the time for a range of SIP trunks.
• 7725-*-DTMF ON Time to configure the time for all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
DTMF ON Time is from 051 to 255 milliseconds. Default: 102 msec.
To configure the DTMF Inter-Digit Pause Timer for the SIP trunk, dial:
• 7726-1-SIP-DTMF Inter-Digit Pause Timer to configure the timer for a single SIP trunk.
• 7726-2-SIP-SIP-DTMF Inter-Digit Pause Timer to configure the timer for a range of SIP trunks.
• 7726-*-DTMF Inter-Digit Pause Timer to configure the timer for all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
DTMF Inter-Digit Pause Timer from 051 to 255 milliseconds. Default: 102 msec.
To enable/disable Gateway Application-Answer Signaling on the SIP trunk, dial:
• 7727-1-SIP-Gateway Application to enable/disable gateway application for a single SIP trunk.
• 7727-2-SIP-SIP-Gateway Application to enable/disable gateway application for a range of SIP trunks.
• 7727-*-Gateway Application to enable/disable gateway application for all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
Gateway Application is
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 653
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Disable
To configure DTMF String for Gateway Application-Answer Signaling on the SIP trunk, dial:
• 7728-1-SIP-Gateway Application DTMF String to configure string for a single SIP trunk.
• 7728-2-SIP-SIP-Gateway Application DTMF String to configure string for a range of SIP trunks.
• 7728-*-Gateway Application DTMF String to configure string for all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
Gateway Application DTMF String is a string of maximum 4 digits. Default: CCC.
• Exit SE mode.
654 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Configuring SIP Extensions
ETERNITY supports SIP extensions. You can connect:
• The Extended IP Phone for ETERNITY supplied by Matrix. The Matrix Extended IP Phone functions just
like a DKP.
• Any standard SIP phone or SIP enabled device, such as an IP phone, a Soft phone, an Analog phone
adapter.
SIP Extensions function like any normal DKP/SLT extension of the ETERNITY. SIP Extension users can make and
receive calls to any extension user of the ETERNITY as well as any external numbers over PSTN, GSM, VoIP and
E&M lines, depending on the “Logical Partition” configured in the System.
The number of SIP Extensions supported by the different models of ETERNITY are:
• ETERNITY ME: 999 SIP Extensions
• ETERNITY GE: 500 SIP Extensions
• ETERNITY PE: 50 SIP Extensions
SIP Extensions are a licensed feature. Decide the number of SIP Extensions you will require and buy the
license. Refer the topic “License Management” to know more.
You can register a SIP Extension at three different locations as a single SIP Extension for Call Forking.
Configuring SIP Extensions using Jeeves
• Log into Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Click the Use Full Programming Access link.
• Click the VoIP Configuration link.
• Under VoIP Configuration, click SIP Extension General Parameters link.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 655
SIP Extension General Parameters
• On this page, the following information is displayed in non-editable fields:
• VoIP Port No.: This is the software port number of the VoIP Card.
• Hardware Slot: This is the number of the hardware slot in which the VoIP Card is located.
• Name: This is the name you have assigned to the VoIP Card, when you configured the VoIP Port
parameters.
• Now, set the following SIP Extension General Parameters, as required.
• As the Source Port IP Address, select the NAT Traversal mechanism for SIP messages from the
following options:
• Use VoIP Ethernet Port IP Address: Select this option if your VoIP Card is not located behind a
NAT Router.
• Use Router's Public IP Address: Select this option if your VoIP Card is located behind a NAT
Router, and you have set 'Router's Public IP Address' as the NAT Traversal mechanism in the “VoIP
Port Parameters”.
• Use IP Address fetched using STUN: Select this parameter if your VoIP Card is located behind a
NAT Router, and you have set 'Use IP Address fetched using STUN' as the NAT Traversal
mechanism in the “VoIP Port Parameters”.
656 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• You may set the Maximum Registration Timer (sec) as required. This is the Maximum Expiry Timer,
which the VoIP Card will accept in the REGISTER request received. If the value of Maximum Expiry
Timer received in the REGISTER request is greater than the value you have set here, the system will
send the value you have set in the SIP message. The same timer is used for handling SUBSCRIBE
requests. The valid range of this timer is from 10 to 99999 seconds. By default it is set to 3600
seconds.
• You may set the Minimum Registration Timer (sec), as required. This is the Minimum Expiry Timer,
which the User Agent should send in its REGISTER request. If the expiry value in the REGISTER
message is less than this value, the request will be rejected. The valid range of this timer is from 10 to
99999 seconds. By default, it is set to 45 seconds.
• In the Private Key field, enter the MD5 authentication key the VoIP Card of ETERNITY should use to
encrypt/decrypt the SIP messages. The Private Key may consist of a maximum of 24 characters. By
default, the field is blank.
• Click Submit to save your settings.
• You can restore the default values of any one or all the parameters on this page by clicking the Default
One and the Default button respectively.
SIP Extension Settings
• Under VoIP Configuration, click the SIP Extension Settings link.
The page of SIP Extension 001 opens.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 657
• You may select the SIP Extension number you want to configure and click OK.
The parameters of the SIP Extension number you selected will appear on this page.
• In the VoIP Port No. field, select the software port number of the VoIP Port to which you want to assign the
SIP Extension. For example, you want to assign SIP Extension 1 to VoIP Port number 2, select 02 as port
number from the list.
• Select the Use SIP Extension check box to enable the SIP extension. Default: enabled.
You may clear this check box, when you want to deactivate the SIP extension.
• In the Name field, enter a name for the SIP Extension, which may be the name of the person who will use
the SIP Extension or the name of a Department. The name you enter here will be displayed as the Caller
ID of the SIP Extension on the remote user's phone, when the SIP Extension user makes calls.
The name may consist of a maximum of 18 alphanumeric characters.
If no name is assigned to the SIP Extension, the system will display the name received in the INVITE from
the SIP Extension user for making outgoing calls.
• Enter the SIP ID for the extension. The SIP ID is necessary for registering the SIP Extension with the
Registrar of the VoIP Card. It is the number with which you can call the SIP Extension. Any extension user
of the ETERNITY can call a SIP Extension by dialing the SIP ID assigned to the SIP extension. SIP ID of
each SIP Extension must be a unique number string of a maximum of 6 digits. Any combination of digits
from 0 to 9 and the characters * and # are allowed.
658 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
You cannot assign the same SIP ID to more than one extension.
By default, SIP Extensions are assigned the following SIP ID (Access Codes):
SIP Extension SIP ID (Access Code)
001 3301
002 3302
: :
500 4300
• In the Authentication ID field, enter the number which you want the VoIP Card's Registrar Server to use
for user authentication of the SIP messages received from the SIP Extension. The number may be a string
of maximum 6 digits. Any combination of digits from 0 to 9 and the characters * and # are allowed in the
string.
Authentication ID is applicable only if any of the 'Authentication' of SIP Message Options, namely
REGISTER or INVITE or SUBSCRIBE or PUBLISH, is enabled. Else, Authentication ID will not be used.
• In the Authentication Password field, enter the password to be used by the VoIP Card to authenticate
the SIP messages received from the SIP Extension. You can enter a maximum of 24 digits as password.
The valid digits for the password are 0 to 9, * and #. The default Authentication Password is 1234.
• In the Call Appearances field, define the maximum number of simultaneous calls that the SIP Extension
user should be allowed to make/receive. You can set up to 10 call appearances for a SIP Extension. By
default, Call Appearance is set to 1.
When Call Appearance is set to 1, the SIP Extension can make/receive only 1 call at a time.
• Under Authentication, enable Authentication of any or all of the following SIP Message Options by
selecting the respective check boxes:
• REGISTER Request
• INVITE Request
• SUBSCRIBE Request
By default, the SIP Message Options REGISTER, INVITE, SUBSCRIBE are enabled.
Make sure that the Authentication ID for the SIP Extension has been programmed, when any of the above
SIP Message Options are enabled.
• To provide voice mail facility to the SIP Extension, select the Enable Voice Mail Subscription check box.
Default:
• To allow the SIP Extension to monitor the status of another extension, device or number, select the Enable
Busy Lamp Field95 Subscription check box. Default:
• To allow the SIP Extension to show his/her Presence Status to other SIP Extensions, select the Enable
PUBLISH check box. Default: disabled.
If you enable PUBLISH subscription for a SIP Extension, you must also enable Authentication. By
default, authentication is enabled.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 659
• To allow the SIP Extension user to view the status of other SIP-enabled Terminals, whether they are
available or not, select the Enable Presence Subscription check box. Default: disabled.
The SIP Extension for which you have enabled Presence Subscription will be able to view Presence of
only those SIP Extensions which have PUBLISH enabled.
• If you want to register this SIP Extension from more than one location, enable the Allow Multiple
Registration check box. Default:
You can register a SIP Extension at three different locations as a single SIP Extension for Call Forking.
• If the SIP Extension is a Matrix Extended IP Phone, select a Key Template for the extension. The Key
Template may be of the Operator, Executive, Guest or Hotel, according to the key map you want to
assign to this extension. Default: Operator’s Template.
Like the DKP, the Extended IP Phone will function as Operator, Executive, Hotel Attendant, and Hotel
Guest extension, according to the key map template you assign. For example, if the Extended IP Phone is
to be used by the Operator, select Operator's Template. The phone will be assigned the key template with
the special features required by Operators, such as more DSS keys for Trunk Access and Call
Appearances, a Call Release Key, etc.
Similarly, if the user of the Extended IP Phone is a Hotel Attendant, select 'Hotel Attendant's Template'.
The key map with the specific Front Desk User features such as Check-In, Check-Out, Guest In/Out,
Change Room Clean Status, Room Shift, will be automatically assigned to the Extended IP Phone.
To know more about key templates, and for instructions on customizing them, read the topic “DSS Keys
Programming”.
If you want to customize the key map of this Extended IP Phone instead of applying a key template, select
the option Personalized, and configure the Phone Key Settings. See “Matrix Extended IP Phone Settings”
for instructions.
The template you assign will be applied on the Extended IP Phones registered at all three locations.
• Assign a SIP Hardware Template to the SIP Extension. Default: 01. The “SIP Hardware Template”
contains voice quality related features such as Voice Codec selection, Tx and Rx Gains, Echo
Cancellation, Jitter Buffer and Fax-over-IP options and related parameters
There are 32 different templates to choose from. Each template can also be altered to suit your
requirement and preferences. By default, Template number 01 assigned to all SIP Extensions as well as to
SIP Trunks.
95. Busy Lamp Field (BLF), a typical feature supported by PCM/TDM PBX and Key Telephone Systems, is also supported on SIP
Extensions.
In PCM/TDM PBX and Key Telephone Systems, this feature is typically used by the Operator to monitor the status of another
extension, that is, whether it is available, ringing or busy. The status of the other extensions is indicated on the special function
keys programmed on the Operator's console. This helps the Operator decide whether to place the call, or transfer the call to that
extension, or pick up the call ringing on that extension.
With BLF Subscription enabled on the SIP Extension, the user can monitor the status of another extension, device or number
within the same Proxy Domain.
660 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Check if the values in this template fulfill requirements of the SIP Extension. If Template 01 fulfills the
feature requirements, retain Template 01.
If a different set of SIP hardware features are to be allowed to this SIP Extensions, prepare another
template and assign it to this extension. To do this,
• Click the SIP Hardware Template link.
• Select a Template number, for example 02.
• Customize Template number 02 and click Submit.
• Return to the SIP Extension Settings page.
• Select the number of the Template you customized, Template 02 in the SIP Hardware Template
field.
Also see the topic “SIP Hardware Template” to know more about customizing the templates and
applying on the SIP Extensions.
• Assign a Station Basic Feature Template to the SIP Extension. Default: The “Station Basic Feature
Template” has a set of features like Time Table, Class of Service, Toll Control, Operator, Storage of
Incoming and Outgoing Calls, Outgoing Trunk Bundle groups. There are 50 different templates to
choose from. Each template can also be altered to suit your requirement and preferences.
If the default Station Basic Feature Template 01 fulfills the feature requirements of the SIP Extension
(“Class of Service (COS)”, “Toll Control”, “OG Trunk Bundle Group”, etc.) retain this template, you may
also customize this template. If you want to assign a different set of features to this SIP Extension,
prepare a different Station Basic Feature Template and apply it to this extension. To do this,
• Click the Station Basic Feature Template link.
• Select a Template number, for example 05.
• Customize Template number 05 and click Submit.
• Return to the SIP Extension Settings page.
• Select the number of the Template you customized, Template 05, in the Station Basic Feature
Template field.
• Click Submit to save changes.
Also, see the topic “Station Basic Feature Template” to know more about customizing the templates
and applying on extensions.
• Assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to the SIP Extension. Default: Template 01. The
“Station Advanced Feature Template” has a set of advanced features for extensions such as Message
Wait Notification and Alarm Notification settings, Routing of Incoming DID Calls, Call Duration Control,
Floor Service, etc. There are 50 different templates to choose from. Each template can also be altered
to suit your requirement and preferences.
Check if the default template fulfills the feature requirements of the SIP Extension by clicking the
Station Advanced Feature Template link.
You may retain this template and customize it further, or customize another template if a different set of
features are to be allowed to this SIP Extension. To customize/prepare another template,
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 661
• Click the Station Advanced Feature Template link.
• Select the Template number, for example 02, and customize this template.
• Click Submit and return to the 'SIP Extension Settings' page.
• In the Station Advanced Feature Template field, select the number of the template you
customized.
• Click Submit to save changes.
Also see the topic “Station Advanced Feature Template” for instructions on customizing these
templates and applying them on the extensions.
• Assign the SIP Extension to a Call Pick-up Group, if required.
Call Pick Up allows the SIP Extension user to 'pick up' (answer) calls ringing on any other station, by
dialing a feature code, without physically going to the ringing station. It also allows incoming calls for the
SIP Extension to be answered by the other extensions assigned the same Call Pick-Up group.
For this to work, both the ringing station and the station picking up the call must be in the same 'Call Pick
Up Group'. Refer “Call Pick Up” for instructions on how to create groups. You can create as many as 99
groups numbered from 01 to 99.
Enter the number of the Call Pick-Up Group you created for this SIP Extension in this field.
Advanced Settings
• If you want to provide other features like Personal Directory, Priority, or assign a Station Type to the SIP
Extension, click the Advanced button at the bottom of the page.
• If using the system in the Hotel Mode, select the Station Type for the SIP Extension as Administration or
Guest.
• You may assign a Personal Directory number to the SIP Extension. Default: 00.
A Personal Directory is a list of 25 frequently dialed numbers, each of which are stored by Index number
(location code), Name and Trunk Access Codes ("Out Going Trunk Bundle Group Index"). The Personal
Directory is necessary for using the features “Abbreviated Dialing” and “Dial By Name”.
When a Personal Directory is assigned to a SIP Extension, make sure you also configure this directory.
The Personal Directory can be programmed by the SIP Extension users and by the System Engineer.
Refer the topic “Abbreviated Dialing” for instructions on programming the Personal Directory.
If Personal Directory is not to be assigned, enter 00 in this field.
• Select a Priority Level for the SIP Extension from 1 to 9. Default; 5.
Each station of the ETERNITY is assigned a Priority Level starting from 1, 2, 3... to 9, with '1' being lowest
Priority and '9' being highest Priority. Whenever an extension (phone) with higher priority calls an
extension with lower priority, a triple ring is placed on the called extension. To know more, read the feature
description “Priority”.
If this SIP extension is assigned to Operator, you may want to set a higher priority for this extension.
662 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Click Submit to save your SIP Extension Settings.
Matrix Extended IP Phone Settings
If you have connected a Matrix Extended IP Phone as SIP Extension, you must configure the Extended IP Phone
settings.
You can register three Matrix Extended IP Phones at three different locations as a single SIP Extension.
If you have connected more than one Matrix IP Phone as a SIP Extension, configure their settings as Location 1,
Location 2 and Location 3.
• Click Matrix IP Phone - Location 1.
• The settings of the phone at Location 1 appear.
• Select the check box Enable Matrix IP Phone Mode. Default: Disabled.
• Enter the MAC Address96 of the Matrix Extended IP Phone connected at this location in hexadecimal
format: 00:50:C2:55:B0:10. Default: blank.
ETERNITY validates the IP-Phone on the basis of the MAC Address, and provides configuration on
validation.
96. MAC address is the address of the electronic hardware devices such as a computer, which is hard-coded into the device during
manufacture and cannot be modified. No two devices can have similar MAC address and thus it uniquely identifies your phone.
MAC address is assigned as per the IANA standard. The MAC Address of the phone will be used as source MAC address on all
Ethernet frames.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 663
As ETERNITY allows registration of the SIP Extension from three different locations, it identifies the SIP
Extension in each location by the programmed MAC address.
• Select the appropriate Registrar Server IP Address to register the IP phone with the SIP Registrar of
ETERNITY, according to your installation scenario:
• If the Extended IP phone is in the same WAN network as ETERNITY, select Use WAN Port IP
Address as Registrar Server IP Address.
• If the Extended IP phone is in the same LAN network as ETERNITY, select Use LAN Port IP Address
as Registrar Server IP Address.
• If the Extended IP Phone is connected in the Global Network and ETERNITY is located behind a
Router, select Use Router/STUN's IP Address as Registrar Server IP Address.
Make sure the Router’s Public IP Address is configured in the Network Parameters.
• If the Extended IP Phone is connected in the Global Network and ETERNITY is located behind a NAT
Router, and STUN is programmed, select Use Router/STUN's IP Address as Registrar Server IP
Address.
• If Dynamic DNS is configured in the Network Parameters, select Use Dynamic DNS Host Name as
Registrar Server IP Address.
• To set the call progress tone generation standards of the country where the Matrix IP Phone is installed,
select the Call Progress Tone - Region. Default: Region 1.
See “Call Progress Tones” to know more.
• To display the Date and Time of the country where the Matrix IP Phone is installed, select the Date and
Time - Region. Default: India.
• If you want to enable Daylight Saving Time (DST) on the phone, set Apply DST? to Yes. Default: No.
The Daylight Saving Time convention followed in the country/region you selected will be automatically
applied. The IP phone will change its date and time settings according to the DST convention of the
selected country/region.
• Select the CO CLIP Pattern for the Extended IP phone. This is the type of Calling Line Presentation on the
phone for incoming calls from trunks. You can select any of these options:
• Name Only (only the name of the caller will be displayed).
• Number Only (only the number of the caller will be displayed).
• Number + Name (both the name and the number of the caller will be displayed).
Default: Number + Name.
• Select the Language for the IP phone. Default: English.
ETERNITY provides language support for English, French, German, Spanish, Portuguese, and Italian on
the Matrix IP Phone. When you select any of these languages, all the prompts and command strings will
appear in the selected language.
664 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Select a Ringer Mode for the phone from the four options:
• Ring immediate (it rings immediately as a fresh calls lands on the phone).
• Ring if idle (rings only if the phone is idle).
• Ring after a delay (if the call is still not answered).
• Ring OFF (silent mode).
Default: Ring Immediate’.
• If you selected Ring after a delay as Ringer Mode, set the Ring Delay Timer (sec), if required, to the
desired value.
The Ring Delay Timer is the time in seconds the system waits on receiving a call before ringing on the IP
phone. The range of this timer is 0 to 99 seconds. Default: 10 seconds.
• If you want to enable Ringer Auto Acknowledge mode, set the Acknowledge Timer (sec) to the desired
value.
The Ringer Auto Acknowledge mode determines when to stop the ring on the IP phone. There are two
options for Ringer Auto Acknowledge:
• Stop only when the call is answered.
• Stop after a delay.
To stop the ring on the IP phone after a delay, the Acknowledge Timer must be configured. The range of
this timer is 01 to 99 seconds. Default: 00 seconds.
To stop the ring only when the Call is answered or manually acknowledged, the Acknowledge Timer must
be set to '00'. By default, Ring Auto Acknowledge is turned OFF.
• To assign the Ring Destination for the IP phone, select the desired destination for Play Ring on. You may
choose
• Speakerphone: The ring will be played on the Speakerphone.
• Headset: The ring will be played on the Headset.
Default: Speakerphone.
When you select the Headset as the destination, make sure that you set the flag ‘Headset Connected?’ to
Yes, connect a Headset to the IP Phone.
• Select the desired Ring Tune according to your/IP phone user’s preference. Default: 1.
• Set the Ringer Volume to the desired level, from 0 to 7, according to your preference. Default: 5.
• To increase/decrease the volume of outgoing speech (Transmit Gain) on the handset of the IP phone, set
the Handset Transmit Volume to the desired level, from 0 to 7. Default: 4.
• To increase/decrease the volume of incoming speech (Receive Gain) on the handset of the IP phone, set
the Handset Receive Volume to the desired level, from 0 to 7. Default: 4.
• To increase/decrease the volume of outgoing speech (Transmit Gain) on the headset of the IP phone, set
the Headset Transmit Volume to the desired level, from 0 to 7. Default: 4.
• To increase/decrease the volume of outgoing speech (Receive Gain) on the headset of the IP phone, set
the Headset Receive Volume to the desired level, from 0 to 7. Default: 4.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 665
• To change the Transmit Gain of the Speakerphone MIC Volume, set Speaker Transmit Volume to the
desired level, from 0 to 7. Default: 4.
• To change the Receive Gain of the Speakerphone MIC Volume, set Speaker Receive Volume to the
desired level, from 0 to 7. Default: 4.
• To use a Headset with the IP phone, set Headset Connected? to Yes. Default: No.
Make sure that you connect a Headset to the Extended IP phone, if you select Yes.
• Select the Auto Answer check box to enable this feature on the Extended IP phone. Default: Disabled.
When you set the “Auto Answer” feature on the Extended IP phone, the phone goes OFF-Hook
automatically after a preset period of time, without the extension user having to pick up the handset or
press the speaker or headset key. When you enable Auto Answer, you must configure the Auto Answer
Timer.
• If you enabled Auto Answer on the phone, set the Auto Answer Timer (sec) to the desired value.
This timer defines the time in seconds that the IP phone should wait before going OFF-Hook to auto
answer a call. The range of this timer is 1 to 9 seconds. Default: 1 second.
• Adjust the Backlight brightness of the phone’s LCD display, by setting the LCD Backlight Level to the
desired value, from 1 to 4. Default: 3.
• Set the Back Light Off Timer (sec) to the desired value, if required, from 000 to 999 seconds. Default: 10
seconds.
• Set the LCD Contrast Level to a level from 1 to 4 that is comfortable to you. Default: 3.
Phone Key Settings
• To personalize the key map of the Extended IP Phone97, click the Phone Key Settings link.
97. To personalize the phone key settings, you select Personalized Key Template for the SIP Extension.
666 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• The key map of the Extended IP Phone opens in a new window on your screen.
• Click the key you want to configure. For example, TWT3.
The Functions to be Performed by the key opens in a new window.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 667
• In the Select Function Type list, select the function to be performed by the key. For example, you want to
use the key to call the Operator.
The Operator function is a Feature, so select the option FEATURE from the Select Function Type list
box.
From the Select Offset drop down list, all the features that can be assigned to keys are listed.
• Select Operator from the list of features in the Select Offset box.
• Click OK.
668 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The Operator feature appears on the key label.
• To take a second example, if you want to assign Remote DND to the key currently assigned TWT 2 key,
click the key.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 669
• In the Select Function Type list box, select the option SA Command, as Remote DND is a System
Administrator (SA) Command.
• In the Select Offset box, select the option Set DND for remote station.
• Click OK. The box closes. Remote DND feature will appear in abbreviated form as R-DND on the key
label.
• Follow the same instructions to assign features to other DSS keys. Selecting the appropriate Function
Type and the Offset for each feature/function.
If you want assign a feature, select FEATURE as function type, and select the desired feature as Offset.
If you want to use the key to call a DKP or a SIP extension, select DKP or SIP Extension as Function
Type and select the number of the extension as Offset.
To assign direct access to a mobile trunk, select MOBILE as Function Type and the desired port number 1
or 2 as Offset.
To assign direct access to a SIP Trunk, select SIP as Function Type and the desired trunk number from 1
to 4 as Offset.
670 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Click OK, each time you select a Function Type and Offset in the dialog box.
You can reinstate default key assignment any time, by clicking the Default button at the bottom of the
window.
• When you complete assigning functions to keys, close the window.
If you have upgraded your SETU VP248 to an Extended IP Phone with firmware V5Rx, the capsense key
labels listed in the table below will have the following functions:
Key Label Function assumed with Firmware V5Rx
Fwd Busy Voice Mail
Fwd NR Auto Call Back
DND Forward
Reject Release
SIP/RTP Ports
• Define SIP/RTP Ports:
• SIP Listening Port: This is the port on which the IP phone listens for SIP messages over TCP. This
port is also used as the source port for sending SIP messages to the remote peer. The valid range for
this port is 1024-65534. Default: 5060.
• RTP Listening Port: This is the port on which the IP phone listens for SIP messages over TCP. This
port is also used as the source port for sending RTP packets. This port is also used as the source port
for sending RTP packets to the remote peer. The valid range for this port is 1025-65278. Default: 8000.
Quality of Service
• Set the SIP Quality of Service (QoS) for SIP signaling as:
• SIP DiffServe/ToS. Valid range is 00 to 63. Default: 26.
OR
• RTP DiffServe/ToS. Valid range is 00 to 63. Default: 46.
NAT Keep Alive
• If the Extended IP phone is connected behind a NAT router, configure NAT Keep Alive.
• Select the check box Enable NAT Keep Alive to send Keep Alive messages periodically to refresh the
binding in the NAT router. Default: Disabled.
• Define as Interval (sec), the time period, from 001 to 999 seconds, after which the phone should send
Keep Alive message. Default: 120 seconds.
The time period you define should be less than the binding timer of the router.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 671
Timers
• Set the following Timers to the desired value, where required:
• SIP INVITE Timer (sec): This is the time in seconds that the phone waits for a response from the
called party after ending INVITE message. This timer starts after sending INVITE message to the
called party and stops on receipt of the provisional response or the final response or when the user
disconnects the call. On expiry of the timer, the phone terminates the call process and gives an error
tone to the user. The range of the SIP INVITE TIMER is 10-180 seconds. Default: 30 seconds.
• SIP Provisional Timer (sec): This is the time in seconds that the phone waits for final response after
receiving the provisional response from the called party. This timer starts on the receipt of the
provisional response from the called party and stops on receipt of the final response from the called
party or when the user disconnects the call. On expiry of the timer, the IP phone terminates the call
process and gives error tone to the user. The range of SIP Provisional Timer is 10-180 seconds.
Default: 60 seconds.
• General Request Timer (sec): This is the time in seconds for which the phone waits for response of a
transaction request. This timer starts on initiating a transaction. This timer stops on receipt of a
response for the request. On expiry of the timer, the phone clears the transaction. This timer is used for
Registration request, etc. The range of the General Request Timer is 10-60 seconds. Default: 20
seconds.
Debug
• To debug using Syslog Client supported by the Extended IP Phone, configure Debug parameters:
• Select the Enable Debug? check box. Default: disabled.
When the Debug flag is enabled, the phone will send the debug messages to the Syslog Server IP
address. Debug report can be viewed on the Syslog Server or any other application which can capture
the Syslog messages/debug sent by the phone.
• Enter the IP Address and port of the remote Syslog Server and as Syslog Server Address: Port.
The address of the Listening Port of the Syslog Server is from 1024-65535. Default: 514. Syslog uses
the UDP as transport protocol and listens on the port 514 (the default listening port).
• You may select the Debug Level from the following options, by selecting the respective check box:
• SIP
• System
• Hardware
• Call
• Menu
• User Interface
You may select any or all of these debug levels. The Syslog Client will send only the debug messages
for the selected level to the remote server on the IP network. For example, if the debug log of 'Call's is
required, you can select this option, and disable all others.
• Click Submit to save settings.
• If you have completed the configuration of the Matrix IP Phone Settings at Location 1, follow the same
steps as described above to configure the Matrix Extended IP Phone at Location 2 and Location 3.
672 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
When you change any of the parameters listed below in the SIP Extension at Location 1, 2, 3, the phone will restart
automatically, if registered:
• SIP ID
• Authentication ID
• Authentication Password
• Registrar Server IP Address
• MAC Address
• Enable Eternity Mode
• Key Map in the Key Template assigned to phone
• "Apply DST?"
• Inter Digit Wait Timer
• QoS
• SIP/RTP Ports
• NAT Keep Alive
• SIP Timers
The SIP Extension registered at Location 1, 2, 3, will also restart, if:
• The SE Password of ETERNITY is changed
• The VoIP Card Parameters are changed
• You restart the System
• You restart the VoIP Card
Configuring SIP Extensions using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from DKP/SLT.
General Parameters
To select Source Port IP Address, dial:
• 7830-1-VoIP Port-Source Port IP Address Option
Where,
VoIP Port is the software port number of the VoIP Port from 01 to 16.
Source Port IP Address Options are
1 for Use IP Address of VoIP Ethernet Port.
2 for Use IP Address Fetched using STUN.
3 for Use Router’s Public IP Address.
By default, Use IP Address of VoIP Ethernet Port is selected.
To set the Maximum Registration Timer, dial:
• 7831-1-VoIP Port - Maximum Registration Timer
Where,
VoIP Port is the software port number from 01 to 16.
Maximum Registration Timer is from 10 to 99999 seconds.
By default, it is set to 3600 seconds.
To set the Minimum Registration Timer, dial:
• 7832-1-VoIP Port-Minimum Registration Timer
Where,
VoIP Port is the software port number from 01 to 16.
Minimum Registration Timer is from 10 to 99999 seconds.
By default, it is set to 45 seconds.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 673
To configure Private Key, dial:
• 7833-1-VoIP Port-Private Key
Where,
VoIP Ethernet Port is the software port number from 01 to 16.
The Private Key is any string of a maximum of 24 characters. All ASCII characters are allowed.
SIP Extension Settings
To assign a VoIP Port Number for SIP Extension, dial:
• 7871-1-SIP Extension-VoIP Port
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
VoIP Port is the software port number of the VoIP Port.
To enable/disable the Use Extension flag, dial:
• 7872-1-SIP Extension-Code
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Flag is
0 for Don't use SIP Extension.
1 for Use SIP Extension
By default, Use SIP Extension is selected.
To assign a Name to a SIP Extension, dial:
• 5415-1-SIP Extension-Name-#* or Press <ENTER>
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Name is any alphanumeric string of a maximum of 18 characters.
To assign a SIP ID to a SIP Extension, dial:
• 7873-1-SIP Extension-SIP ID
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
SIP ID is any 6-digit (max.) number. Valid digits are 0-9,* and #.
To assign Authentication ID for a SIP Extension, dial:
• 7874-1-SIP Extension-Authentication ID
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Authentication ID is a 6-digit (max.) number. Valid digits are 0-9,* and #.
To assign Authentication Password for a SIP Extension, dial:
• 7875-1-SIP Extension-Authentication Password
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Authentication Password is a 24-digit (max.) number. The valid digits 0 to 9, * and #.
By default, Authentication Password is 1234.
To define the Call Appearances for a SIP Extension, dial:
• 7876-1-SIP Extension-Call Appearance
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Call Appearance is from 01 to 10.
By default, Call Appearance is 01.
674 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To enable/disable Authenticate REGISTER Request flag, dial:
• 7878-1-SIP Extension-Authenticate Register Request Flag
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Authenticate REGISTER Request flag is
0 for Disable.
1 for Enable.
By default, Authenticate REGISTER Request is enabled.
To enable/disable authenticate INVITE Request flag, dial:
• 7879-1-SIP Extension-Authenticate INVITE Request Flag
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Authenticate INVITE Request flag is
0 for Disable.
1 for Enable.
By default, Authenticate INVITE Request is enabled.
To enable/disable authenticate SUBSCRIBE Request flag, dial
• 7880-1-SIP Extension-Authenticate SUBSCRIBE Request Flag
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Authenticate SUBSCRIBE Request flag is
0 for Disable.
1 for Enable.
By default, Authenticate SUBSCRIBE Request is enabled.
To enable/disable authenticate Voice Mail Subscription flag, dial:
• 7882-1-SIP Extension-Voice Mail Subscription Flag
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Voice Mail Subscription flag is
0 for Disable.
1 for Enable.
By default, Authenticate Voice Mail Subscription is disabled.
To enable/disable authenticate Busy Lamp Field Subscription flag, dial:
• 7881-1-SIP Extension-Busy Lamp Field Subscription Flag
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Busy Lamp Field Subscription flag is
0 for Disable.
1 for Enable.
By default, Authenticate Busy Lamp Field Subscription is disabled.
To enable/disable PUBLISH flag, dial:
• 7883-1-SIP Extension-PUBLISH Flag
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
PUBLISH Flag is
0 for Disable.
1 for Enable.
By default, PUBLISH flag is disabled.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 675
To enable/disable authenticate PUBLISH, dial:
• 7884-1-SIP Extension-Authenticate PUBLISH flag
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
PUBLISH Flag is
0 for Disable.
1 for Enable.
By default, Authenticate PUBLISH flag is disabled.
To enable/disable Presence Subscription for a SIP Extension, dial:
• 7877-1-SIP Extension-Presence Subscription Flag
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Presence Subscription flag is
0 for Disable.
1 for Enable.
By default, Presence Subscription is disabled.
To enable/disable Allow Multiple Registration of a SIP Extension, dial:
• 7885-1-SIP Extension-Allow Multiple Registration flag
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Allow Multiple Registration flag is
0 for Disable.
1 for Enable.
By default, Allow Multiple Registration flag is disabled.
To assign a Key Template to a Matrix Extended IP Phone Extension, dial:
• 7886-1-SIP Extension-Key Template
Where,
SIP Extension is the number of the SIP Extension from 001 to 999.
Key Template is
1 for Operator’s Template
2 for Executive’s Template
3 for Hotel Attendant’s Template
4 for Guest’s Template
To assign a SIP Hardware Template to a SIP Extension, dial:
• 7807-1-SIP Extension-SIP Hardware Template Number
Where,
SIP Extension is the number of the SIP Extension from 001 to 999.
SIP Hardware Template Number is from 01 to 32.
Also see “Customizing SIP Hardware Template using a Telephone”.
To assign a Station Basic Feature Template to a SIP Extension, dial:
• 5510-1-SIP Extension-Station Basic Feature Template
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Station Basic Feature Template is from 01 to 50.
By default, Template 01 is assigned.
To assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to a SIP Extension, dial:
676 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• 5612-1-SIP Extension-Station Advanced Feature Template
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Station Advanced Feature Template is from 01 to 50.
By default, Template 01 is assigned.
To assign a SIP Extension to a Call Pick-Up Group, dial:
• 3904-1-SIP Extension-Call Pick Up Group
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Call Pick Up Group is from 00 to 99.
To select Station Type for a SIP Extension, dial:
• 3924-1-SIP Extension-Station Type
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Station Type is
1 for Administration.
2 for Guest.
To assign a Personal Directory to a SIP Extension, dial:
• 1908-1-SIP Extension-Personal Directory
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Personal Directory is from 01 to 50.
To remove a Personal Directory assigned to a SIP Extension, dial 00 as Personal Directory.
To assign Priority to a SIP Extension, dial:
• 3918-1-SIP Extension-Priority
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Priority is from 1 to 9.
Matrix Extended IP Phone Settings
To enable Matrix IP Phone Mode, dial:
• 7901-1-SIP Extension-Location-flag
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
Flag is 1 for Enable and 0 for Disable.
To enter the MAC address of the Extended IP Phone, dial:
• 7902-1-SIP Extension-Location-MAC Address
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
To assign the Registrar Server IP Address to the Extended IP Phone, dial:
• 7903-1-SIP Extension-Location-Registrar Server IP Address
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 677
Registrar Server IP Address is
1 for Use WAN Port IP Address.
2 for Use LAN Port IP Address.
3 for Use Router/STUN’s IP Address.
4 for Use Dynamic DNS Host Name
To select the Call Progress Tone - Region, dial:
• 7904-1-SIP Extension-Location-Region
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
Region is CPTG Region Code from 01 to 40. See “Call Progress Tones”.
To set the Date and Time of the Region, dial:
• 7906-1-SIP Extension-Location-Region
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
Region is Region Code from 001 to 123. See “Configuring ‘Region’”.
To apply Daylight Saving Time, dial:
• 7907-1-SIP Extension-Location-Apply DST Flag
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
Apply DST Flag is
1 for Enable
0 for Disable.
Default: Disable.
To select CO CLIP Pattern, dial:
• 7908-1-SIP Extension-Location-CO CLIP Pattern
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
CO CLIP Pattern is
1 for Name only
2 for Number only
3 for Number+Name
Default: Number + Name
To select Language, dial:
• 7909-1-SIP Extension-Location-Language
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
Language is
1 for English
2 for French
3 for German
4 for Spanish
5 for Portuguese
Default: English
678 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To select Ringer Mode, dial:
• 7910-1-SIP Extension-Location-Ringer Mode
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
Ringer Mode is
1 for Ring immediately
2 for Ring if idle
3 for Ring after delay
4 for Ring off
Default: Ring immediately
To select Ring Delay Timer, dial:
• 7911-1-SIP Extension-Location-Ring Delay Timer
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
Ringer Delay Timer is 01 to 99 seconds (00 seconds for Ring Immediately)
Default: 10 seconds
To select Ring Acknowledge Timer, dial:
• 7912-1-SIP Extension-Location-Ring Acknowledge Timer
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
Ringer Acknowledge Timer is 01 to 99 seconds
Default: 10 seconds
To select Ring Destination (Play Ring on), dial:
• 7913-1-SIP Extension-Location-Ring Destination
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
Ring Destination is
1 for Speaker Phone
2 for Headset
Default: Speaker phone
To select Ring Tune, dial:
• 7914-1-SIP Extension-Location-Ring Acknowledge Timer
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
Ring Tune is 1 to 9.
Default: 1
To select Ring Volume, dial:
• 7915-1-SIP Extension-Location-Ringer Volume
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
Ring Volume is 0 to 7.
Default: 4
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 679
To set Handset Transmit Volume level, dial:
• 7916-1-SIP Extension-Location-Handset Transmit volume
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
Handset Transmit Volume level is 0 to 7.
Default: 4
To set Handset Receive Volume level, dial:
• 7917-1-SIP Extension-Location-Handset Receive volume
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
Handset Receive Volume level is 0 to 7.
Default: 4
To set Headset Transmit Volume level, dial:
• 7918-1-SIP Extension-Location-Headset Transmit volume
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
Headset Transmit Volume level is 0 to 7.
Default: 4
To set Headset Receive Volume level, dial:
• 7919-1-SIP Extension-Location-Headset Receive volume
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
Headset Receive Volume level is 0 to 7.
Default: 4
To set Speaker Transmit Volume level, dial:
• 7920-1-SIP Extension-Location-Speaker Transmit volume
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
Speaker Transmit Volume level is 0 to 7.
Default: 4
To set Speaker Receive Volume level, dial:
• 7921-1-SIP Extension-Location-Speaker Receive volume
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
Speaker Receive Volume level is 0 to 7.
Default: 4
To enable/disable Headset Connectivity, dial:
• 7922-1-SIP Extension-Location-Headset Connectivity flag
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
680 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Headset connectivity flag is 0 for Disable, 1 for Enable.
Default: Disable
To enable/disable Auto Answer, dial:
• 7923-1-SIP Extension-Location-Auto Answer flag
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
Auto Answer flag is 0 for Disable, 1 for Enable.
Default: Disable
To set Auto Answer Timer, dial:
• 7924-1-SIP Extension-Location-Auto Answer Timer
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
Auto Answer Timer is 1 to 9 seconds.
Default: 1
To set LCD Backlight Level, dial:
• 7925-1-SIP Extension-Location-Backlight Level
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
Backlight level is 1 to 4.
Default: 3
To set LCD Backlight Off Timer, dial:
• 7926-1-SIP Extension-Location-Backlight Off Timer
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
Backlight Off Timer is 000 to 999 seconds.
Default: 010
To set LCD Contrast Level, dial:
• 7926-1-SIP Extension-Location-LCD Contrast Level
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
LCD Contrast Level is 1 to 4.
Default: 3
To Personalize the Phone Key Settings, dial:
• 7887-1-SIP Extension-Location-Key Number-Function Type-Function Number-Channel
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
Key Number is 01 to 29 (as located on the phone)
Function Type is 00 to 34 (00 is none).
Function Number (as per function type selected)
Channel Is the number of the channel in the BRI or PRI Line to be accessed.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 681
Channel number for BRI Line is
01 for Channel 1
02 for Channel 2
00 for both Channels
Channel number for PRI Line is
01 to 30 for Channels 1 to 30 respectively.
00 for all Channels
Channel number for all function types other than BRI and PRI is 00
For the complete list Function Type and Function Number see “DSS Keys Programming”. The Key
Numbers of the MATRIX Extended IP Phone is the same as EON48 described under “Customizing Key
Templates using a Telephone”.
To define the SIP Listening Port, dial:
• 7929-1-SIP Extension-Location-SIP Listening Port
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
SIP Listening Port is 1024 to 65535.
Default: 5060
To define the RTP Listening Port, dial:
• 7930-1-SIP Extension-Location-RTP Listening Port
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
RTP Listening Port is 1025 to 65278.
Default: 5060
To set the QoS - SIP Diffserve/ToS level, dial:
• 7931-1-SIP Extension-Location-SIP Diffserve/ToS level
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
SIP Diffserve/ToS is 00 to 63.
Default: 26
To set the QoS - RTP Diffserve/ToS level, dial:
• 7932-1-SIP Extension-Location-RTP Diffserve/ToS level
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
RTP Diffserve/ToS is 00 to 63.
Default: 46
To enable/disable NAT Keep Alive, dial:
• 7933-1-SIP Extension-Location-NAT Keep Alive flag
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
NAT KEEP Alive flag is 0 for Disable, 1 for Enable.
682 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Default: Disabled.
To set NAT Keep Alive Interval, dial:
• 7934-1-SIP Extension-Location-NAT Keep Alive Interval
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
NAT KEEP Alive Interval is 001 to 999 seconds.
Default: 120.
To set SIP INVITE Timer, dial:
• 7935-1-SIP Extension-Location-SIP INVITE Timer
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
SIP INVITE Timer is 10 to 180 seconds.
Default: 30.
To set SIP Provisional Timer, dial:
• 7936-1-SIP Extension-Location-SIP Provisional Timer
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
SIP Provisional Timer is 10 to 180 seconds.
Default: 60.
To set SIP General Request Timer, dial:
• 7937-1-SIP Extension-Location-SIP General Request Timer
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
SIP General Request Timer is 10 to 60 seconds.
Default: 20.
To enable Debug, dial:
• 7938-1-SIP Extension-Location-Debug flag
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
Debug flag is 0 for Disable, 1 for Enable.
Default: Disable
To define the Syslog Server Address for debug, dial:
• 7939-1-SIP Extension-Location-Syslog Server Address
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
To define the Syslog Server Port for debug, dial:
• 7940-1-SIP Extension-Location-Server Port
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 683
Server Port is 514, 1024-65535.
Default: 514
To enable/disable Debug Level - SIP, dial:
• 7941-1-SIP Extension-Location-flag
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
Flag is 0 for Disable, 1 for Enable
Default: Disable
To enable/disable Debug Level - System, dial:
• 7942-1-SIP Extension-Location-flag
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
Flag is 0 for Disable, 1 for Enable
Default: Disable
To enable/disable Debug Level - Hardware, dial:
• 7943-1-SIP Extension-Location-flag
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
Flag is 0 for Disable, 1 for Enable
Default: Disable
To enable/disable Debug Level - Call, dial:
• 7944-1-SIP Extension-Location-flag
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
Flag is 0 for Disable, 1 for Enable
Default: Disable
To enable/disable Debug Level - Menu, dial:
• 7945-1-SIP Extension-Location-flag
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
Flag is 0 for Disable, 1 for Enable
Default: Disable
To enable/disable Debug Level - User Interface, dial:
• 7946-1-SIP Extension-Location-flag
Where,
SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
Location is 1 to 3.
Flag is 0 for Disable, 1 for Enable
Default: Disable
• Exit SE mode.
684 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Viewing SIP Extension Status
You can view the Status of SIP Extension using Jeeves. To do this,
• Log into Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Click the Use Full Programming Access link.
• Click the VoIP Configuration link.
• Under VoIP Configuration, click the SIP Extension Status link.
• The SIP Extension Status page will open and display the following for each SIP Extension
• SIP Extension number
• VoIP Ethernet Port Number to which the SIP Extension is assigned.
• Name of the SIP extension
• SIP ID assigned to the SIP Extension
• REGISTRATION status; whether the SIP Extension is registered or not.
• Contact 1
• Contact 2
• Contact 3
• You may Log out of Jeeves.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 685
Configuring E&M Lines
The ETERNITY ME and GE support E&M interface. This interface is not supported on ETERNITY PE.
If you have correctly installed the E&M Cards and observed the Reset Cycle, you may now program the E&M Ports
“Using Jeeves” or a Telephone, depending on your installation scenario.
An E&M port of ETERNITY can be programmed to take on the function of:
• a Subscriber (Station) - works like a station interface, receiving incoming calls.
OR
• a Trunk - works like a trunk interface when any of the stations of the PBX makes an outgoing call through
it.
OR
• a Tie Line - takes on a dual personality: functioning as both a station and a trunk. The E&M port works like
a station interface for incoming calls. It works like a trunk interface when any station makes an outgoing
call through it.
This dual function is used in PBXs that are used as Transit Exchanges as in a PLCC Network. Read
“PLCC-An Introduction” to know more.
The E&M Card of ETERNITY supports the following features:
• E&M Interface - Types IV and V
• Speech Interface - Two-wire and four-wire.
• E&M Trunk Seizure Type98: Immediate, Immediate with Ack, Immediate + Wink, Immediate with
Ack+Wink (MFCR2)99, Seizure Pulse, Seizure Pulse + Wink, Express, and Radio.
• Address Signaling: Pulse dial (Pulse 10PPS, Pulse 20PPS) and Tone Dial (DTMF).
The E&M Interface (Type IV and Type V connection) and the Speech Interface (2-wire speech or 4-wire)
are selected at the time of installation by changing the Jumper settings.
Configuring the E&M using Jeeves
• Log into Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access.
• Click the 'E&M Configuration' link.
98. This is the line protocol that defines how the equipment seizes the E&M trunk. Also referred to as Start Dial Supervision Signaling
Protocol.
99. Currently supported only on ETERNITY GE E&M4 Card.
686 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Under ‘E&M Configuration’, click the 'E&M Parameters' link.
Configure the following parameters for each E&M port on this page:
• E&M No.: This non-editable field is the software port number of the E&M Port. Refer the topic
“Software Port and Hardware ID” to know more.
• Hardware Slot - Port: 'Slot' is the number of the number of the Universal Slot in which the E&M Card
is inserted. 'Port' is the number of the E&M hardware port on which the Tie Line equipment (PBX,
Router, Leased Line, etc.) is connected.
The ETERNITY can automatically detect and assign the hardware slot and port numbers automatically
to the E&M software ports.
For example: if you have inserted the card E&M8 in Slot 05 and E&M4 card in Slot 06 of ETERNITY
ME16S, the system will assign the Hardware Slot 05 and port numbers 01-08 to the E&M Software
Ports from 001 to 008 respectively. The system will assign hardware Slot 6 and port numbers 01-04 to
the E&M Software Ports 009 to 012. Refer the topic “Software Port and Hardware ID” to know more.
However, if required, you may change the Hardware Slot and Port assigned to the E&M software port.
In which case, enter the desired Hardware Slot and Port number in this field.
If you want to de-assign the Hardware Slot and Port, Enter '00' in both fields.
• Enable Port: This flag is for enabling or disabling an E&M port. When an E&M port is disabled, neither
incoming nor outgoing calls can be made from that port.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 687
By default, the port is enabled. You may disable ports that are not functioning.
• Name: You may assign a Name to the E&M Port. Whenever there is an incoming call on this Port, this
name will be displayed on the destination station, while receiving the call.
The Name may comprise a maximum of 18 characters.
• E&M Feature Template: This parameter is applicable to all E&M Ports. The E&M Feature Template is
a complete set of E&M features to be applied on E&M Ports according to their 'Orientation Type',
whether they are Stations, Trunks or Tie-Lines.
By default E&M Feature Template 01 is applied on all E&M Ports. This template has 'Station' as the
default Orientation Type.
If all the E&M Ports are to be programmed as 'Stations' retain this template.
If all the E&M Ports are to be programmed as 'Trunks' use the default E&M Feature Templates 09 and
10 which have 'Trunks' as Orientation Type.
If some of the E&M Ports are to be programmed as Stations, some as Trunks and yet others as Tie
Lines, prepare different E&M Feature Template for each Orientation Type and apply them to the related
ports.
• Click the 'E&M Feature Template' link to open the page.
• Select an E&M Feature Template Number.
• Customize the E&M Feature Template.
• Click 'Submit' to save changes.
• Go to the 'E&M Parameters' page.
• Apply the E&M Feature Template you customized to the E&M Port by entering the template number
in the 'E&M Feature Template' field of this port.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page.
• Repeat the same steps to customize another template and apply it to another E&M Port.
Refer the topic “E&M Feature Template” for more details on customizing the templates and applying
them on E&M Ports.
• Trunk Feature Template: This parameter is relevant only if the E&M Port is to be programmed to
function as a Trunk or a Tie-Line100. To know more, refer “E&M Feature Template”.
Assign a “Trunk Feature Template” to the E&M Port. A Trunk Feature Template is a set of features like
Time Table, Operator, DID, DISA, Trunk Auto Answer, Trunk Landing Group, SMDR Storage, etc., that
defines the behavior of a Trunk. Apply a Trunk Feature Template to the TWT Trunk port.
100. To program the E&M Port as a Trunk or a Tie-Line, you must set the 'Orientation Type' of the E&M Port to 'Trunk' or 'Tie-Line' in the
“E&M Feature Template” applied on the port.
688 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
By default, Trunk Feature Template 01 is applied on all E&M (trunk) Ports. This Template is also the
default template commonly applied on all other trunk types (TWT, ISDN BRI, ISDN T1E1PRI, GSM,
and VoIP).Refer the topic “Trunk Feature Template” to know more.
Click the link 'Trunk Feature Template to open the page. Check if the default Template 01 fulfills your
requirement for the E&M Trunk port.
If not, you may prepare a different Trunk Feature Template and apply on all E&M Ports. For this,
If the default Template 01 does not fulfill your requirement,
You may prepare a different Trunk Feature Template and apply on all TWT Ports. For this,
• Click the 'Trunk Feature Template' link.
• The Trunk Feature Template page will open.
• Prepare a new template, for example 04 to match your requirements.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
• Go to the 'E&M Parameters'.
• Go to the E&M Software Port Number you want to which you want to assign the Template you
prepared.
• Enter the number of the Template you prepared (04) in the 'Trunk Feature Template' field.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
You may also prepare different Templates for different E&M Ports, for example Template 04 for certain
ports, Template 05 for others. In which case, for each E&M Port, enter the number of the template you
have prepared for that port.
To know more about customizing templates, refer the topic “Trunk Feature Template”.
• Station Basic Feature Template: This parameter is applicable on when the E&M Port is to be
programmed to function as a Station (Orientation type = Station or Tie-Line).
Assign a “Station Basic Feature Template” to the E&M Port functioning as a Station. By default, Station
Basic Feature Template 01 is assigned to all stations, that includes SLT and DKP ports.
Check if the default template fulfills the feature requirements (like “Class of Service (COS)”, “Toll
Control”, “OG Trunk Bundle Group”, etc.) of the E&M Ports functioning as Stations.
If the default Template 01 fulfills the feature requirements and if the same features are to be allowed to
all E&M (station) ports, retain Template 01.
If different sets of features are to allowed to different E&M (station) Ports, then prepare separate
Station Basic Feature Templates and apply them on the ports. To do this,
• Click the link 'Station Basic Feature Template' to open the page.
• Select a Template number, for example 05.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 689
• Customize Template number 05 and click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page.
• Now go back to the 'E&M Parameters' page.
• Enter the number of the Template you customized, Template 05 in the 'Station Basic Feature
Template' field of the E&M Port (for example: E&M No. 003) on which you want to apply this
template. If you want to apply this template to other ports too, like E&M No. 004, 005, and 006,
assign the Template 05 to all these ports.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
• Repeat the same steps to customize and assign a different Template to another E&M port.
Also, refer the topic “Station Basic Feature Template” to know more about customizing the templates
and applying on the ports.
• Station Advanced Feature Template: This parameter is applicable only when the E&M Port is to be
programmed to function as a Station.
By default Station Advanced Feature Template 01 is assigned to all stations, that includes SLT and
DKP ports as well as E&M ports with the orientation type 'Station'.
Check if this default template fulfills the feature requirements of the E&M Ports (with 'station' as
orientation type) by selecting the 'Station Advanced Feature Template' link.
If the default Template 01 fulfills the feature requirements, and if the same features are to be allowed to
all E&M (station) ports, retain Template 01.
If different sets of features are to be allowed to different E&M (station) Ports, then prepare separate
Station Advanced Feature Templates and apply them on the ports.
To do this,
• Click the 'Station Advanced Feature Template' link to open the page.
• Select a Template number, for example 03.
• Customize Template number 03.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page.
• Go to the 'E&M Parameters' page.
• Enter the number of the Template you customized, Template 03 in the 'Station Basic Feature
Template' field of the E&M Port (for example, E&M No. 003) on which you want to apply this
template. If you want to apply this template to other ports too, like E&M No. 004, 005, and 006,
assign the Template 03 to all these ports.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
• Repeat the same steps to customize and assign a different Template to another E&M (Station) port.
690 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Also refer the topic “Station Advanced Feature Template” for instructions on customizing these
templates and applying them on the ports.
• Priority: This parameter is applicable only when the E&M Port is to be programmed to function as a
Station101. To know more, refer “E&M Feature Template”.
Each station of the ETERNITY is assigned a Priority Level starting from 1, 2, 3... to 9, with '1' being
lowest Priority and '9' being highest Priority. Whenever a station (phone) with higher priority calls a
station with lower priority, a triple ring is placed on the called station. To know more, read the feature
description “Priority”.
By default, the Priority of all E&M Ports functioning as Stations is set to '5'. So, decide what Priority
Level you will assign to each of the E&M Ports functioning as Stations and set the desired level for
each port.
• Cost Factor: This parameter is of relevance only if 'Least Cost Routing' feature is applied on the E&M
Trunk port.
Cost Factor is used to grade the cost of routing calls from an E&M trunk (orientation), from 1 to 99;
where 1 denotes least cost and 99 denotes highest cost.
Assign a Cost Factor to the E&M Trunk port, for example, 03 and program Least Cost Routing Table
accordingly.
For example, if you want to route all outgoing calls starting with number '6' through the E&M Trunk Port
001 only,
• You must first assign a Cost Factor (01-99) to E&M Trunk Port 001, for example 03.
• Click the 'Least Cost Routing - Number Based' link to open the page.
• Enter '6' in the 'Number' column, Cost Factor '03' as Preference 1, 2, 3 and 4.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your setting.
All outgoing calls assigned Cost Factor trunk 03 will be made from E&M Trunk Port 001.
• Repeat the same steps to configure other E&M Trunk/Station ports.
• If you have completed configuration of all the above listed E&M Parameters, click 'Submit' at the
bottom of the page to save your changes.
Configuring the E&M using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To assign Hardware ID to an E&M Software Port, dial:
• 1105-E&M-Slot-Port offset on the card
Where,
E&M is the Software Port number of the E&M port from 001 to 128.
101. Recall that E&M ports can function as trunks, as stations and have both functions. When an E&M Port is programmed as a Station
Interface, it can only receive incoming calls. To program the E&M Port as a Station, you must set the 'Orientation Type' of the E&M
Port to 'Station' in the E&M Feature Template applied on the port.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 691
Slot is Slot number in which the E&M Card is inserted from 01 to 16
Port Offset is the number of the E&M Port on the card from 01 to 99.
To clear the Hardware ID assigned to an E&M Software Port, dial:
• 1105-E&M-00-00
To enable/disable an E&M Port, dial:
• 3321-1-E&M-Code to enable/disable a single E&M port.
• 3321-2-E&M-E&M-Code-#* to enable/disable a range of E&M ports.
• 3321-*-Code to enable/disable all E&M ports.
Where,
E&M is the Software Port number of the port from 001 to 128.
Code is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Enable
To program a Name for an E&M Port, dial:
• 5406-1-E&M-Name-#* to program a name for a single E&M port.
• 5406-2-E&M-E&M-Name-#* to program the same name for a range of E&M ports.
• 5406-*-Name-#* to program the same name for all E&M ports.
Where,
E&M is the Software Port number of the port from 001 to 128.
Name is a string of alphanumeric characters 18 characters (maximum).
Terminate the command with #* if the name string has fewer than 18 characters.
To clear a name assigned to an E&M port, dial:
• 5406-1-E&M-#* to clear the name of a single E&M port.
• 5406-2-E&M-E&M-#* to clear the names for a range of E&M ports.
• 5406-*-#* to clear the names of all E&M ports.
To assign an E&M Feature Template to an E&M Port, dial:
• 6003-1-E&M-Template Number to assign a template to a single port.
• 6003-2-E&M-E&M-Template Number to assign the same template to a range of ports.
• 6003-*-Template Number to assign the same template to all ports.
Where,
E&M is the Software Port number of the port from 001 to 128.
Template Number is from 01 to 50.
Default: E&M Feature Template 01.
To assign a Trunk Feature Template to an E&M Port, dial:
• 5805-1-E&M-Template Number to assign a template to a single port.
• 5805-2-E&M-E&M-Template Number to assign the same template to a range of ports.
• 5805-*-Template Number to assign the same template to all ports.
Where,
E&M is the Software Port number of the port from 001 to 128.
Template Number is from 01 to 50.
Default: Trunk Feature Template 01.
To assign a Station Basic Feature Template to an E&M Port, dial:
• 5505-1-E&M-Template Number to assign a template to a single port.
• 5505-2-E&M-E&M-Template Number to assign the same template to a range of ports.
• 5505-*-Template Number to assign the same template to all ports.
692 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Where,
E&M is the Software Port number of the port from 001 to 128.
Template Number is from 01 to 50.
Default: Station Basic Feature Template 01.
To assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to an E&M Port, dial:
• 5605-1-E&M-Template Number to assign a template to a single port.
• 5605-2-E&M-E&M-Template Number to assign the same template to a range of ports.
• 5605-*-Template Number to assign the same template to all ports.
Where,
E&M is the Software Port number of the port from 001 to 128.
Template Number is from 01 to 50.
Default: Station Advanced Feature Template 01
To set a Priority Level for an E&M Port, dial:
This command is applicable only when the E&M Port is configured to function as a station!
• 3915-1-E&M-Priority to set Priority for a single E&M Port.
• 3915-2-E&M-E&M-Priority to set the same Priority for a range of E&M Ports.
• 3915-*-Priority to set the same Priority for all E&M Ports.
Where,
E&M is the Software Port number of the port from 001 to 128.
Priority is from 1 to 9.
Default: 5
To assign a Cost Factor to an E&M port, dial:
• 3322-1-E&M-Cost Factor to assign Cost Factor to a single E&M port.
• 3322-2-E&M-E&M-Cost Factor to assign Cost Factor to a range of E&M ports.
• 3322-*-Cost Factor to assign Cost Factor to all E&M ports.
Where,
E&M is the Software Port number of the port from 001 to 128.
Cost Factor is from 01 to 99. Default: 01
• Exit SE mode.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 693
Configuring Magneto Interface
A magneto telephone is a local battery telephone set, in which signaling current is provided by a hand generator,
usually a magneto. The hand generator, commonly referred to as 'crank', is located on the right hand side of the
telephone set and is turned to produce energy to ring other phones.
Tip and Ring wires of the magneto phone are dry, that is, they do not carry battery voltage when idle or in speech.
This means the wires carry only AC voice signals and not the DC voltage of the battery.
The Battery is used to power the microphone only and ringing generator is used to provide ring voltage to alert the
other phone.
Magneto Telephones are widely used by defense establishments as field phones in front lines, and by other
establishments such as railroad companies (signaling emergencies, crossings, etc.), electric utilities, pipeline
companies, who need to have their networks at places that are too remote to be serviced by public telephone
networks.
The Magneto Interface is supported on ETERNITY ME 10S and ME16S. A maximum of 128 Magneto Ports are
supported. The availability of ports depends on the variant of ETERNITY ME and the number of Magneto Cards
installed in the system.
Matrix does not supply Magneto Telephones.
How the Magneto Interface works
The Magneto port of ETERNITY works as a Station.
Making a Call to the Magneto Port
An extension user (SLT/DKP/ISDN Terminal) dials the Magneto Port Access Code to call a Magneto Field
Telephone.
• Ring is played on the Magneto Field Telephone connected to the Magneto Port.
• The extension user gets Ring Back Tone for the duration of the Ring Back Tone Timer.
• The extension user must press # or the Magneto Ring Enable (MRE) Key (on the DKP) before the expiry of
the Ring Back Tone Timer (programmable; default: 45 seconds) to check if the Magneto User has
answered the call102.
• The system considers pressing of the # or MRE Key as call maturity and connects the speech path
between the Magneto Field Telephone (connected to the Magneto Port) and the extension phone.
• If the Magneto User has answered the call, the extension user may start speech on hearing the Magneto
User's voice.
• If there is a period of silence, the extension user may press the # or MRE Key again to generate Ring on
the Magneto Telephone, and press the # and MRE Key once again during the Ring Back Tone Timer to
check speech with the Magneto User.
102. As there is no Answer Signaling or Call Disconnect feature on the Magneto line, there is no way for the Extension user to know
whether speech has been established with the Magneto User, but to wait to hear the Magneto User's voice.
694 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Either party can disconnect the call:
• The extension user either goes ON-Hook while in speech. Error Tone will be played to the Magneto
user for the duration of the Error Tone Timer and the system releases the Magneto Port.
• The Magneto User cranks the hand generator (Ring Down Signal) while in speech to disconnect the
call. The system detects the Ring Current and releases the Magneto Port.
• If the Magneto port is busy, the extension user will hear the Busy Tone.
• If the extension user goes ON-Hook while the Magneto Phone is ringing, the system will stop the ring
on the Magneto phone.
Making a Call from the Magneto Port
• The Magneto Field Telephone user cranks the hand generator to generate ringing current.
• The system detects the ringing current. If the ring current is present for more than 500msec, the system
treats it as a Call request from the Magneto Port.
• The system rings the Operator extension assigned to the Magneto Port for the duration of the Ring Back
Tone Timer and plays Ring Back Tone to the Magneto Telephone user.
• If the Operator goes OFF-Hook, before the expiry of the Ring Back Tone Timer, speech is established
between the Operator and the Magneto User.
• The Operator can now transfer the call to another extension or external number.
• Either party can disconnect the call:
• The Operator can go ON-Hook while in speech to disconnect. Error Tone will be played to the Magneto
user.
OR
• The Magneto User can cranks the hand generator again (Ring Down Signal) while in speech to
disconnect the call.
• The system releases the Magneto Port and the port with which the Magneto User is in speech.
• If neither the Operator nor any of the two Magneto station users in speech disconnects the call, the system
will automatically disconnect the call if silence (no speech) is detected for more than a specified duration of
time.
• For this, the flag 'Enable Silence Detection on Magneto' must be enabled in the System Parameters and
the 'Magneto Silence Disconnection Timer (default: 60 seconds) must be programmed. When Silence
Disconnection is enabled on Magneto port, the system will start the Magneto Silence Disconnection Timer
as soon as it detects silence. If the continuous silence is detected till the expiry of the timer the system
considers the conversation as over and releases the Magneto stations. The call is disconnected. However,
if speech is detected during this timer, the timer will be stopped.
• The call can be disconnected also using Forced Release by any extension user (Operator or any other
extension user) having the feature 'Forced Release' in its Class of Service.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 695
• If the Operator is busy, Busy Tone is played to the Magneto user.
• The Magneto user may crank the hand generator again to send Ring Current on the expiry of the Ring
Back Tone Timer. However, if the Magneto user sends the Ring Current again during the Ring Back
Tone Timer, the system will treat it as a call disconnect event. It will stop ringing the Operator's
extension and release the Magneto Port.
• The Magneto Ring Enable (MRE) Key should be programmed on the DKP extensions that are to be
allowed access to call Magneto ports.
• On SLT extensions and ISDN Terminals, the # key will serve the function of the MRE key.
Configuring Magneto Ports using Jeeves
• Log into Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access.
• Click the 'Magneto Configuration' link on the left navigation bar.
Configure the following Magneto port parameters:
• Magneto Port No.: This non-editable field is the number of the software port of the Magneto port.
696 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• HW Slot-Port: 'Slot' is the number of the Universal Slot in which the Magneto Card is inserted. 'Port' is
the number of the Magneto hardware port on which the Magneto Field telephone instrument is
connected.
The ETERNITY can automatically detect and assign the hardware slot and port numbers automatically
to the Magneto software ports.
However, if required, you may change the Hardware Slot and Port assigned to the Magneto software
port. In which case, enter the desired Hardware Slot and Port number in this field.
If you want to de-assign the Hardware Slot and Port, Enter '00' in both fields.
• Enable Port: This flag is for enabling or disabling a Magneto port. When a Magneto port is disabled,
neither incoming nor outgoing calls can be made from that port.
By default, the port is enabled. You may disable ports that are not functioning by selecting the check
box.
• Access Code: Assign Station Access Codes to the Magneto Port. Station Access Codes are
commonly referred to as Extension Numbers. These may be number strings of a maximum 6 digits,
which are to be dialed to call the Magneto port to which they are assigned.
All Magneto ports are assigned the following Station Access Codes as default.
Magneto Software Port Access Codes
001 2701
002 2702
003 2703
: :
: :
128 2828
You may either apply the default Station Access Codes to the Magneto ports or assign them according
to your requirement and preferences.
A maximum of six characters are allowed in an Access Code. These may be any combination of digits
between 0-9, and the characters *, #, A, B, C, D, F, P and 'Blank'.
If you decide to customize the Station Access Codes, make sure that the numbers do not clash
with any other Access Code in the 'Dial' phase. Refer the topics “Access Codes” and “Conflict
Dialing” to know more.
• Name: Assign a 'Name' to the Magneto port. The name may be of the person who will use the Magneto
telephone or the name of the department or location of the telephone. This name will be displayed on
the LCD of the Operator/extension user's phone, if it is equipped with Caller ID.
You can program a name of a maximum of 18 alphanumeric characters.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 697
• Priority: Assign a Priority Level from 1 to 9 to the Magneto Port, with '1' being lowest Priority and '9'
being highest Priority. Whenever a Magneto Port with higher priority calls a station with lower priority, a
triple ring is placed on the called station. To know more, read the feature description “Priority”.
By default, the Priority of all Magneto Ports is set to '5'.
• Station Basic Feature Template: As the Magneto Port functions as a station, assign a “Station Basic
Feature Template” to the Magneto port.
Only the following features of the Station Basic Feature Template are applied on the Magneto Port:
• Time Table
• Operator
• Class of Service
• Store Outgoing Calls
• Store Incoming Calls
By default, Station Basic Feature Template number 01 is assigned to all station types of the ETERNITY
(SLT, DKP, ISDN Terminals, E&M Lines with Station as Orientation Type). Template 01 is also applied
on Magneto ports by default.
Check if the default settings of the features applied on the Magneto ports (Time Table, Operator, Class
of Service, Storage of Outgoing and Incoming Calls) match your requirements for the Magneto ports. If
yes, retain the default Station Basic Feature Template 01.
If you want to change any of the feature settings in for the Magneto Ports, you may prepare a different
Template103, for example, Template 14 and apply it on the Magneto Ports.
Also, if different feature settings are to be applied on different Magneto Ports prepare separate Station
Basic Feature Templates and apply them on the ports. To do this,
• Click the 'Station Basic Feature Template' link to open the page.
• Select a Template number, for example 14.
• Customize the Magneto Port related features (listed above) in Template number 14 and click
'Submit' to save.
• Now go back to the 'Magneto Parameters' page.
• Enter the number of the Template you customized, Template 14 in the 'Station Basic Feature
Template' field of the Magneto Port, for example: MAG-001, on which you want to apply this
template. If you want to apply this template to other ports too, like MAG-002, 003, and 004, assign
the Template 14 to all these ports.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
103. This is recommended because changing the values of the default Template will be applied on all other station types to which the
Template is assigned.
698 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• If required, repeat the same steps to customize and assign a different Template to another Magneto
port.
Refer the topic “Station Basic Feature Template” to know more about customizing the templates and
applying on the ports.
• Station Advance Feature Template: Assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to the Magneto
Port.
Only the following features in Station Advance Feature Templates are applied on Magneto Ports.
• Internal Calls Storage
• Call Forward Ring Timer
By default Station Advanced Feature Template 01 is assigned to all stations of the ETERNITY, which
also includes DKP ports, SLT ports, ISDN Terminals and E&M Lines configured as Stations.
Check if this default template fulfills the feature requirements of the Magneto Ports by opening the link
'Station Advanced Feature Template'.
Check if the default settings of the features applied on the Magneto ports (Internal Call Storage flag
and Call Forward Ring Timer) fulfill the feature requirements of the Magneto ports, by opening the
'Station Advanced Feature Template' link.
If the default template fulfills your requirement, retain the default Station Basic Feature Template 01 for
the Magneto ports.
However, if you want to change any of the feature settings in for the Magneto Ports, you may prepare a
different Template104, for example, Template 05 and apply it on the Magneto Ports. To do this,
• Click the 'Station Advanced Feature Template' link to open the page.
• Select a Template number, for example 05.
• Customize Template number 05.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page.
• Now go back to the 'Magneto Parameters' page.
• Enter the number of the Template you customized, Template 05 in the 'Station Advanced Feature
Template' field of the Magneto Port, for example, MAG-001, on which you want to apply this
template. If you want to apply this template to other terminals too, like MAG-002, 003, and 004,
assign the Template 05 to all these ports.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
• Repeat the same steps to customize and assign a different Template to another Magneto Port.
Also refer the topic “Station Advanced Feature Template” for instructions on customizing these
templates and applying them on the station ports.
104. This is recommended because changing the values of the default Template will be applied on all other station types to which the
Template is assigned.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 699
• If you have completed configuration of the desired Magneto Ports, click 'Submit' at the bottom of the
page to save your settings.
• Now, configure the Magneto Ring Enable (MRE) Key for DKP extensions.
Configuring MRE Key for DKPs
The Magneto Ring Enable (MRE) Key is to be configured on DKP extensions that will be allowed to make calls to
the Magneto Ports.
Any DSS key may be configured as MRE Key. There are two ways to do this:
• Assign the MRE Key function in the DKP Key Template assigned to the DKPs, by customizing a template
and assigning it to the DKPs.
OR
• Assign the MRE Key function individually in each DKP, by selecting 'Personalized' Key map for each DKP.
For detailed information and instructions, see “DSS Keys Programming”.
Configuring Silence Detection on Magneto
If you want calls from Magneto ports to be disconnected automatically, if silence is detected, you must enable the
'Silence Detection on Magneto' flag and program the 'Magneto Silence Disconnection Timer', if required.
• Open the 'System Parameters' page.
• Go to 'Enable Silence Detection on Magneto'. By default the flag is enabled. If not, select check box to
enable this flag.
• Go to 'Magneto Silence Disconnection Timer', and set it to the desired value. The range of this timer is
from 001 to 255 seconds. By default it is set to 60 seconds.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your settings.
• Log out of Jeeves or continue with configuration tasks, as desired.
Configuring Magneto Parameters using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To assign Slot-Port Assignment to a Magneto Port, dial:
• 1110-Magneto Trunk-Slot-Port Offset on the Card
Where,
Magneto is the Software Port number of the Magneto port from 001 to 128.
Slot is Slot number in which the Magneto Card is inserted from 01 to 16
Port Offset is the number of the Magneto Port on the card from 00, 01 to 08.
Default: Hardware Slot and Port Offset is automatically assigned.
To enable/disable Magneto Port, dial:
• 6801-1-Magneto-Code to enable/disable a single Magneto port.
• 6801-2-Magneto-Magneto-Code to enable/disable a range of Magneto ports.
• 6801-*-Code to enable/disable all Magneto ports.
700 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Where,
Magneto is the Software Port number of the Magneto port from 001 to 128.
Code is
1 for Enable
2 for Disable
Default: Enable.
To program Access Code for Magneto Port, dial:
• 3107-1-Magneto-Access Code-#*
Where,
Magneto is the Software Port number of the Magneto port from 001 to 128.
Access Code is a number string of any combination of up to 6 characters, including the digits from to 9,
and the characters #, *, A, B, C, D, F, P, and Blank space.
Terminate the command with #* if the number string has fewer than 6 digits.
Default: 2101 to 2828.
To clear the Access Code assigned to the Magneto port, dial:
• 3107-1-Magneto-#* to clear Access Code assigned to a single Magneto port.
• 3107-2-Magneto-Magneto-#* to clear Access Code assigned to a range of Magneto ports.
• 3107-*-#* to clear the Access Codes assigned to all Magneto ports.
Where,
Magneto is from 001 to 128.
To assign a Name to the Magneto Port, dial:
• 5411-1-Magneto-Name-#* to assign Name to a single Magneto port.
• 5411-2-Magneto-Magneto-Name-#* to assign the same to a range of Magneto ports.
• 5411-*-Name-#* to assign the same name to all Magneto ports.
Where,
Magneto is the Software Port number of the Magneto port from 001 to 128.
Name is an alphanumeric string of Maximum 18 characters. Terminate the command with #* if fewer
than 18 characters are to be used as name.
To clear the Name of the Magneto Port, dial:
• 5411-1-Magneto-#* to clear the name of a single Magneto port.
• 5411-2-Magneto-Magneto-#* to clear the name of a range of Magneto ports.
• 5411-*-#* to clear the names of all Magneto ports
To assign Priority level of a Magneto Port, dial:
• 3919-1-Magneto-Priority to assign Priority Level to a single Magneto port.
• 3919-2-Magneto-Magneto-Priority to assign the same Priority Level to a range of Magneto ports.
• 3919-*-Priority to assign the same Priority Level to all Magneto ports.
Where,
Magneto is the Software Port number of the Magneto port from 001 to 128.
Priority is from 1 to 9.
Default: 5.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 701
To assign a Station Basic Feature Template to Magneto Port, dial:
• 5511-1-Magneto-Station Basic Feature Template Number to assign a template to a single Magneto
port.
• 5511-2-Magneto-Magneto- Station Basic Feature Template Number to assign the same template to
a range of Magneto ports.
• 5511-*- Station Basic Feature Template Number to assign the same template to all Magneto ports.
Where,
Magneto is the Software Port number of the Magneto port from 001 to 128.
Station Basic Feature Template is from 01 to 50.
Default: Station Basic Feature Template Number 01.
To assign a Station Advanced Feature Template for Magneto Port, dial:
• 5611-1-Magneto-Station Advanced Feature Template Number to assign a template to a single
Magneto port.
• 5611-2-Magneto-Magneto- Station Advanced Feature Template Number to assign the same
template to a range of Magneto ports.
• 5611-*- Station Advanced Feature Template Number to assign the same template to all Magneto
ports.
Where,
Magneto is the Software Port number of the Magneto port from 001 to 128.
Station Advanced Feature Template is from 01 to 50.
Default: Station Advanced Feature Template Number 01.
To assign MRE Key to a DKP, dial:
• 1261-1-DKP Key Template-EON Terminal Type-Key Number-Function Type-Function Number
Where,
DKP Key Template is the type of Key Template assigned to the DKPs:
1 for Operator Key Template
2 for Executive Key Template
3 for Hotel Attendant Key Template
4 for Guest Key Template
EON Terminal Type is the model of EON in use:
1 for EONSOFT
2 for EON42
3 for EON48
Key Number is the number of the DSS/Feature Key on the DKP which is to be assigned the MRE
function according to the Model of EON in use:
1 to 25 for EONSOFT
1 to 25 for EON42
1 to 29 for EON48
Function Type is '18' for 'Features'.
Function Number is '77' for 'Magneto Ring Enable' feature.
For example, to program MRE feature on Key Number 04, of the Operator's DKP which is EON48: dial
1261-1-1-3-04-18-77
To know more about assigning Features to DKP keys, refer the topic “DSS Keys Programming”.
702 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To enable or disable the "Enable Silence Detection on Magneto?" flag, dial:
• 5357-Flag
Where,
Flag is
1 for Enable
0 for Disable
By default, the flag is enabled.
To set Magneto-Silence Detection Timer, dial:
• 5356-Silence Detection Timer
Where,
Silence detection timer value range is from 001 to 255 seconds.
By default, the Timer is set to 60 seconds.
• Exit SE mode.
Port Swapping of Magneto, SLT and TWT Ports
Port Swapping is the interchanging of the position of two different port types within a connector.
This feature is supported on the SLT/TWT-Magneto card of ETERNITY ME only. You can 'swap' the position of two
ports, SLT/TWT and Magneto in the same RJ45 MDF connector on the card.
You can swap the position of ports of a selected connector or of all connectors on the card.
Illustrated below are the pin connections of the SLT, TWT and Magneto ports in the Normal and Swapped Modes.
SLT8-Magneto8 Card
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 703
TWT8-Magneto8 Card
Port Swapping can be done from the System Administrator (SA) mode using Jeeves or dialing SA commands from
a telephone.
Before you swap an SLT/TWT port and a Magneto port, disconnect the SLT/TWT and the Magneto
Telephone connected to these two ports, and connect them according to the pin position in the Swapped
Mode. Refer to the above illustrations of the pin details of the SLT/TWT-Magneto Cards in the 'Normal' and
'Swapped' mode.
Swapping Ports using Jeeves
• Log into Jeeves as System Administrator.
• To swap ports on the SLT-Magneto Card, click the 'SLT8-MAG8' link to open the page.
• To swap ports of the TWT-Magneto Card, click the 'TWT8-MAG8' link to open the page.
• The card connector details will appear according to the Slot Number in which the card is installed. Click the
link of the Slot Number of the card for which you want to use port swapping.
• The connector details of the selected card will appear on the page in the normal mode. The page displays
each connector on the card, with the wire-pair colors, the connection status, and the port name you have
programmed for that port.
• Go to the connector number for which you want to use port swapping.
• Select the 'Swap' check box to enable port swapping for the connector.
• When you finish enabling port swapping for the desired connectors on the card, click 'Submit' at the bottom
of the page.
• The page will be refreshed and the connector details of the 'Swapped' mode will appear on the page.
• If you want to restore 'Normal' mode, clear the 'Swap' check box.
• Repeat the same steps if you want to use port swapping for another SLT/TWT-Magneto Card, installed in
the ETERNITY.
704 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Swapping Ports using SA Commands
Before your swap a port using SA commands, you must know where the port is located, i.e. the number of
the Slot where the SLT/TWT-MAG card is installed and the Port Offset of the Port you want to swap on the
card.
• Enter SA mode from a DKP/SLT.
To swap the desired port, dial:
• 1072-046-Slot Number-Port Offset-Position
Where,
Slot Number is the number of the universal slot in which the card is installed, from 01 to 16.
Port Offset is the number of the Port in the Card which is to be swapped.
Position is
1 for Normal
2 for Swapped
By default, Normal is set.
For example, if you want to swap the 3rd port of the TWT8 - MAG8 card inserted in the 1st slot, to dial
1072-046-01-03-2.
If you want to set the 4th port of the SLT8-MAG8 card inserted in 16th slot back to "Normal" position
then user has to dial 1072-046-16-04-1.
• Exit SA mode.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 705
Configuring Loop Dial Trunk Ports
The ETERNITY ME supports a maximum of 32 Loop Dial (LD) trunk ports105. Before you begin configuration of the
LD trunk ports, ensure that the LD combination card (ETERNITY ME SLT8+MAG2+TWT2+LD2+ENM2) has been
installed correctly.
You may configure the LD ports from Jeeves and using a Telephone.
As the LD Port has a dual personality, behaving as a TWT Trunk port for outgoing calls and as an SLT port for
incoming calls. So, the Loop Dial parameters to be configured as a combination of SLT and TWT hardware and
feature parameters.
Configuring Loop Dial Parameters using Jeeves
• Log into Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the 'LD Parameters' link to open the page.
• Now, configure the following LD port parameters.
• LD Port No.: This non-editable field is the number of the software port assigned to the LD port.
• Hardware Slot-Port: 'Slot' is the number of the Universal Slot in which the LD port Card has been
inserted. 'Port' is the number of the LD port on that card.
By default, the ETERNITY will automatically detect and assign the hardware slot and port numbers to
the LD (software) ports. However, if required, you may change the Hardware Slot and Port assigned to
the LD software port.
If you want to de-assign the Hardware Slot and Port, Enter '00' in both fields.
• Enable Port: This flag is for enabling or disabling a LD trunk port. When an LD trunk port is disabled,
neither incoming nor outgoing calls can be made from that port.
By default, the port is enabled. You may disable ports that are not functioning by clearing the check
box.
• Name: You may assign a 'Name' to each LD trunk port to facilitate identification. Whenever there is an
incoming call on this port, the Name you have programmed will be displayed on the landing extension.
The Name may comprise a maximum of 18 characters.
• Priority: Select a Priority Level for the LD trunk port.
Each trunk of the ETERNITY can be assigned a Priority Level starting from 1, 2, 3... to 9, with '1' being
lowest Priority and '9' being highest Priority. Whenever there are incoming calls on multiple trunks, the
105. Depends on the model you have. Please refer the Appendix for an overview of the system resources and maximum expansion
capacity.
706 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
call on the trunk with higher priority will be answered by the Operator station first. To know more, read
the feature description “Priority”.
By default, the Priority of all LD trunks is set to '5'106. Decide what Priority Level you will assign to the
LD trunk port and set the desired level for the trunk port.
• Station Basic Feature Template: Assign a “Station Basic Feature Template” to the LD Trunk port, as
the port functions as a station for incoming calls.
By default, Station Basic Feature Template 01 is assigned to all stations of the system (SLT ports, DKP
ports, ISDN Terminals, and E&M Lines with Station as Orientation Type).
Check if the default template fulfills the feature requirements (like “Class of Service (COS)”, “Toll
Control”, “OG Trunk Bundle Group”, etc.) of the LD Port when functioning as an SLT.
If the default Template 01 fulfills the feature requirements and if the same features are to be allowed to
all LD trunk ports functioning as SLTs, retain Template 01.
If not, customize a Station Basic Feature Templates and assign it to the LD trunk port. To do this,
• Click the 'Station Basic Feature Template' link to open the page.
• Select a Template number, for example 11.
• Customize Template number 11 and click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page.
• Now go back to the 'LD Parameters' page.
• Enter the number of the Template you customized, Template 11 in the 'Station Basic Feature
Template' field of the LD Port, for example, LD-01, on which you want to apply this template.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
• Repeat the same steps to customize and assign a different Template to another LD trunk port.
Also, refer the topic “Station Basic Feature Template” to know more about customizing the templates
and applying on the ports.
• SLT Hardware Template: Assign an “SLT Hardware Template” to the LD Trunk port. By assigning an
SLT Hardware Template the LD port will be configured with hardware features of SLTs like AC
Impedance, Answer Signaling type, Speech Transmit and Receive Gains, Open Loop Disconnect,
Loop Current, and Fax connectivity.
There are 50 SLT Hardware Templates that can be customized and assigned to the LD ports. By
default SLT Hardware Template Number 01 is assigned to all the SLTs of the system.
Check if the values in this template fulfill your requirements. If the default SLT Hardware Template 01
fulfills the feature requirements and if the same features are to be allowed to all LD trunk ports, retain
Template 01.
106. By default, the Priority of all trunks is set to '9'.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 707
If different sets of hardware features are to be allowed to different LD ports, then customize separate
SLT Hardware Templates and apply them on the LD ports. To customize SLT hardware templates,
• Click the 'SLT Hardware Template' link to open the page.
• Select a Template number, for example 03.
• Customize Template number 03 and click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page.
• Now go back to the 'LD Parameters' page.
• Enter the number of the Template you customized, Template 03 in the 'SLT Hardware Template'
field of the LD Ports on which you want to apply this template.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
• Repeat the same steps to customize and assign a different SLT Hardware Template to another LD
port.
Also, refer the topic “SLT Hardware Template” to know more about customizing the templates and
applying on the LD trunk ports.
• TWT Hardware Template: Apply a “TWT Hardware Template” to the LD trunk port. By assigning a
hardware template, you can configure the hardware features for the LD trunk port, such as Trunk Type,
AC Termination Impedance, Pulse-Tone Dialing, Answer Supervision, Disconnect Supervision, DTMF
detection, etc.
The ETERNITY offers 50 TWT Hardware Templates. By default, TWT Hardware Template number 01
is assigned to all TWT Trunks of the system.
Check if this default template fulfills the feature requirements of the LD trunk ports by opening the 'TWT
Hardware Template' link.
If TWT Hardware Template 01 fulfills your requirements, and if the same features at to be applied on all
LD trunk ports, retain Template 01. Similarly, if you want only a few changes to be made to Template
01 and apply it on all LD as well as other TWT Ports, make the changes and retain the template.
However, if different sets of features are to be allowed to different LD trunk ports, then prepare
separate TWT Hardware Templates and apply them on the ports as required. To do this,
• Click the 'TWT Hardware Template' link to open the page.
• Select a TWT Hardware Template Number.
• Customize the TWT Hardware Template.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page.
• Go back to the 'LD Parameters' page.
• Apply the TWT Hardware Template you customized to the TWT Port by entering the template
number in the 'TWT Hardware Template' field of this port.
708 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page.
• Repeat the same steps to customize another template and apply it to the LD trunk port.
To know more about the hardware port features and customizing templates, refer the topic “TWT
Hardware Template”.
• Cost Factor: This parameter is of relevance only if 'Least Cost Routing' feature is applied on the LD
trunk port for outgoing calls.
Cost Factor is used to grade the cost of routing calls from an LD (TWT) trunk, from 1 to 99; where 1
denotes least cost and 99 denotes highest cost.
Assign a Cost Factor to the LD trunk port, for example, 02 and program Least Cost Routing Table
accordingly.
For example, if you want to route all outgoing calls starting with number '6' through the LD trunk port 01
only,
• You must first assign a Cost Factor (01-99) to LD trunk port 02, for example, 02.
• Click the 'Least Cost Routing' link.
• Click the 'Least Cost Routing - Number Based' link to open the page.
• Enter '6' in the 'Number' column, Cost Factor '02' as Preference 1, 2, 3 and 4.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your settings.
All outgoing calls assigned Cost Factor trunk 02 will be made from LD trunk port 02.
• SMDR-OG Storage: This flag is used to enable or disable the storage of details of outgoing calls from
the LD trunk port. Please refer the topic “Station Message Detail Recording-Storage” for more details.
By default, storage of outgoing calls is enabled.
• SMDR IC Storage: This flag is used to enable or disable storage of details of incoming calls on the LD
trunk port. Please refer the topic “Station Message Detail Recording-Storage” to know more. By
default, storage of incoming calls is enabled.
• Hold on DSS Key Press: This flag defines the 'Hold' state of the external called party, when an
extension user presses a DSS key to dial another port.
For example, the DKP extension user (on DKP-001 port) is in the middle of speech with an external
party on LD trunk port-02.
If extension user of DKP-001 presses a DSS key to call another extension port DKP-003, two situations
are possible, depending on whether the Hold on DSS Key Press flag is enabled or disabled:
• When the Hold Flag is enabled: LD-02 will be played music-on-hold. DKP-001 will hear Ring Back
Tone and the call will be placed on DKP-003.
• When Hold Flag is disabled: LD-02 will be disconnected. DKP-001 will hear Ring Back Tone, and
call will be placed on DKP-003.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 709
By default the Hold On DSS Key Press flag is enabled.
• Call Cost Calculation Pulse Rate Option: This parameter is to be configured only if you want to apply
the “Call Cost Calculation (CCC)” feature on the LD trunk ports.
You can program four options for Pulse Rate Types. Select from Pulse Rate Type for Pulse Rate
Option 1 to 4 which you want to apply on the LD trunk ports.
• Call Cost Calculation Time Schedule: This parameter is to be configured only if you want to apply the
“Call Cost Calculation (CCC)” feature on the LD trunk ports.
The Pulse Rates offered by service providers may vary according to the time of the day. In such cases,
you must first define the Time Zone (time of the day) for which a particular Pulse Rate should be
applied and the Time Schedule for each Time Zone.
You can configure up to four different Time Zones - T1, T2, T3 and T4 with different Pulse rates in the
“Holiday Pulse Rate Table”.
Now, configure the Call Cost Calculation Time Schedule, by specifying the Start Time and the End time
(in 24hours: minutes format) for each Time Zone.
The default Time Schedule (starts and end time) for each Time Zone Index are as follows:
Time Zone Index Start Time End Time
T1 00:00 23:59
T2 00:00 23:59
T3 00:00 23:59
T4 00:00 23:59
If your service provider offers the same Pulse Rate for the entire day,
• program only one Time Zone Index with the Pulse Rate, for example, T1, in the CC-Holiday Pulse
Rate Table.
• Now program the Time Schedule for Time Zone, T1, with the start and end time in Hours: Minutes
format;
• set the start and end time of the other Time Zone Index, T2 to T4, to 00:00 (hours: minutes).
Similarly, if your service provider supports two different Pulse Rates in a day, program the Start and the
End time for two Time Zones and set the other two to 00:00.
• If you have programmed all the Parameters, click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your
settings.
• When you have finished configuring the desired number of LD ports, you may log out of Jeeves or
continue with other configuration tasks.
710 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Configuring Loop Dial Parameters using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To program Hardware Slot-Port for the LD trunk port, dial:
• 1111-LD-Slot-Port offset
Where,
LD is the number of software port of the LD trunk port, from 01 to 32.
Slot is Slot number in which the LD trunk port card is inserted, from 01 to 16.
Port Offset is the number of the Port on the card, from 01 to 99.
To clear the Hardware ID assigned to an LD trunk port, dial:
• 1111-LD-00-00
To assign a name to the LD trunk port, dial:
• 5416-1-LD-Name-#*
Where,
LD is the number of software port of the LD trunk port, from 01 to 32.
Name is a string of alphanumeric characters (maximum) 18 characters.
Terminate the command with #* if the name string has fewer than 18 characters.
To enable/disable the LD trunk port, dial:
• 3941-1-LD-Flag to enable/disable a single port.
• 3941-2-LD-LD-Flag to enable/disable a range of ports.
• 3941-*-Flag to enable/disable all ports.
Where,
LD is the number of software port of the LD trunk port, from 01 to 32.
Flag is:
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
By default, flag is enabled.
To assign priority for LD trunk port, dial:
• 3920-1-LD-Priority to assign priority to a single port.
• 3920-2-LD-LD-Priority to assign the same priority to a range of ports.
• 3920-*-Priority to assign the same priority to all ports.
Where,
LD is the number of software port of the LD trunk port, from 01 to 32.
Priority is from 1 to 9.
By default, Priority is 5.
To assign Station Basic Features Template (SBFT) for LD trunk port, dial:
• 5512-1-LD-SBFT to assign a template to a single port.
• 5512-2-LD-LD Trunk-SBFT to assign the same template to a range of ports.
• 5512-*-SBFT to assign the same template to all ports.
Where,
LD is the number of software port of the LD trunk port, from 01 to 32.
SBFT is from 01 to 50.
By default, SBFT 01 is assigned.
To assign the SLT Hardware Template for LD trunk port, dial:
• 5704-1-LD-SLT Hardware Template to assign a template to a single port.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 711
• 5704-2-LD-LD-SLT Hardware Template to assign the same template to a range of ports.
• 5704-*-SLT Hardware Template to assign the same template to all ports.
Where,
LD is the number of software port of the LD trunk port, from 01 to 32.
SLT Hardware Template is from 01 to 50.
By default, the SLT Hardware Template 01 is assigned.
To program the TWT Hardware Template for LD trunk port, dial:
• 5904-1-LD-TWT Hardware Template to assign a template to a single port.
• 5904-2-LD-LD-TWT Hardware Template to assign the same template to a range of ports.
• 5904-*-TWT Hardware Template to assign the same template to all ports.
Where,
LD is the number of software port of the LD trunk port, from 01 to 32.
TWT Hardware Template is from 01 to 50.
By default, TWT Hardware Template 01 is assigned.
To program the Cost Factor for LD trunk port, dial:
• 3942-1-LD-Cost Factor to assign cost factor to a single port.
• 3942-2-LD-LD-Cost Factor to assign the same cost factor to a range of ports.
• 3942-*-Cost Factor to assign the same cost factor to all ports.
Where,
LD is the number of software port of the LD trunk port, from 01 to 32.
Cost Factor is from 01 to 99.
By default, Cost Factor 01 is assigned.
To enable/disable the SMDR OG Storage flag for LD trunk port, dial:
• 3943-1-LD-Flag to enable/disable flag for a single port.
• 3943-2-LD-LD-Flag to enable/disable flag for a range of ports.
• 3943-*-Flag to enable/disable flag for all ports.
Where,
LD is the number of software port of the LD trunk port, from 01 to 32.
Flag is
0 for Disable
1for Enable.
By default, flag is enabled.
To enable/disable the SMDR IC Storage flag for LD trunk port, dial:
• 3944-1-LD-Flag to enable/disable flag for a single port.
• 3944-2-LD-LD-Flag to enable/disable flag for a range of ports.
• 3944-*-Flag to enable/disable flag for all ports.
Where,
LD is the number of software port of the LD trunk port, from 01 to 32.
Flag is
0 for Disable
1for Enable.
By default, flag is enabled.
To enable/disable the Hold on DSS Key Press flag for LD trunk port, dial:
• 3945-1-LD-Flag to enable/disable flag for a single port.
• 3945-2-LD-LD-Flag to enable/disable flag for a range of ports.
• 3945-*-Flag to enable/disable flag for all ports.
Where,
LD is the number of software port of the LD trunk port, from 01 to 32.
712 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Flag is
0 for Disable
1for Enable.
By default, flag is enabled.
To program the Call Cost Calculation Pulse Rate Option for LD trunk port, dial:
• 3946-1-LD-Option to program pulse rate option for a single port.
• 3946-2-LD-LD-Option to program the same pulse rate option for a range of ports.
• 3946-*-Option to program the same pulse rate option for all ports.
Where,
LD is the number of software port of the LD trunk port, from 01 to 32.
Option is from 1 to 4.
By default, Pulse Rate Option is set to 1.
To program the Call Cost Calculation Time Schedule-T1-Start Time for LD trunk port, dial:
• 3947-1-LD-Start Time to program start time for a single port.
• 3947-2-LD-LD-Start Time to program the same start time for a range of ports.
• 3947-*-Start Time to program the same start time for all ports.
Where,
LD is the number of software port of the LD trunk port, from 01 to 32.
The Start Time is in 24 hours, HH:MM; range of HH is 00 to 23, range of MM is from 00 to 59.
By default, Start Time is set to 00:00.
To program the Call Cost Calculation Time Schedule-T1-End Time for LD trunk port, dial:
• 3948-1-LD-End Time to program end time for a single port.
• 3948-2-LD-LD-End Time to program the same end time for a range of ports.
• 3948-*-End Time to program the same end time for all ports.
Where,
LD is the number of software port of the LD trunk port, from 01 to 32.
The End Time is in 24 hours, HH:MM; range of HH is 00 to 23, range of MM is from 00 to 59.
By default, End Time is set to 23:59.
To program the Call Cost Calculation Time Schedule-T2-Start Time for LD trunk port, dial:
• 3949-1-LD-Start Time to program the start time for a single port.
• 3949-2-LD-LD-Start Time to program the same start time for a range of ports.
• 3949-*-Start Time to program the same start time for all ports.
Where,
LD is the number of software port of the LD trunk port, from 01 to 32.
The Start Time is in 24 hours, HH:MM; range of HH is 00 to 23, range of MM is from 00 to 59.
By default, Start Time is set to 00:00.
To program the Call Cost Calculation Time Schedule-T2-End Time for LD trunk port, dial:
• 3950-1-LD-End Time to program the end time for a single port.
• 3950-2-LD-LD-End Time to program the same end time for a range of ports.
• 3950-*-End Time to program the same end time for all ports.
Where,
LD is the number of software port of the LD trunk port, from 01 to 32.
The End Time is in 24 hours, HH:MM; range of HH is 00 to 23, range of MM is from 00 to 59.
By default, End Time is set to 23:59.
To program the Call Cost Calculation Time Schedule-T3-Start Time for LD trunk port, dial:
• 3951-1-LD Trunk-Start Time to program the start time for a single port.
• 3951-2-LD Trunk-LD Trunk-Start Time to program the same start time for a range of ports.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 713
• 3951-*-Start Time to program the same start time for all ports.
Where,
LD is the number of software port of the LD trunk port, from 01 to 32.
The Start Time is in 24 hours, HH:MM; range of HH is 00 to 23, range of MM is from 00 to 59.
By default, Start Time is set to 00:00.
To program the Call Cost Calculation Time Schedule-T3-End Time for LD trunk port, dial:
• 3952-1-LD-End Time to program end time for a single port.
• 3952-2-LD-LD-End Time to program the same end time for a range of ports.
• 3952-*-End Time to program the same end time for all ports.
Where,
LD is the number of software port of the LD trunk port, from 01 to 32.
The End Time is in 24 hours, HH:MM; range of HH is 00 to 23, range of MM is from 00 to 59.
By default, End Time is set to 23:59.
To program the Call Cost Calculation Time Schedule-T4-Start Time for LD trunk port, dial:
• 3953-1-LD-Start Time to program start time for a single port.
• 3953-2-LD-LD-Start Time to program the same start time for a range of ports.
• 3953-*-Start Time to program the same start time for all ports.
Where,
LD is the number of software port of the LD trunk port, from 01 to 32.
The Start Time is in 24 hours, HH:MM; range of HH is 00 to 23, range of MM is from 00 to 59.
By default, Start Time is set to 00:00.
To program the Call Cost Calculation Time Schedule-T4-End Time for LD trunk port, dial:
• 3954-1-LD-End Time to program end time for a single port.
• 3954-2-LD-LD-End Time to program the same end time for a range of ports.
• 3954-*-End Time to program the same end time for all ports.
Where,
LD is the number of software port of the LD trunk port, from 01 to 32.
The End Time is in 24 hours, HH:MM; range of HH is 00 to 23, range of MM is from 00 to 59.
By default, End Time is set to 23:59.
• Exit SE mode.
714 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Configuring the Voice Mail System (VMS)
Make sure you have completed the following tasks:
• Installed the VMS Card correctly and observed the Reset Cycle.
• Changed the IP Address of the VMS Ethernet Port so that it does not conflict with the IP Address of any
other device on the LAN.
• Changed the Subnet Mask of the VMS Ethernet Port so that the port is in the same Subnet as other
devices on the LAN.
For instructions, refer the separate the VMS Card System Manual.
Now,
1. Open the browser Mozilla Firefox or Internet Explorer on the standalone PC or grab any PC on the LAN
and open the browser.
2. Enter the IP Address of the VMS Card Ethernet Port on the address bar of your browser.
3. The Jeeves for programming the VMS Card will open.
4. Configure the VMS Card referring to the instructions given in the separate the VMS Card System
Manual.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 715
Configuring LCR
Least Cost Routing (also referred to as Automatic Route Selection) is an expense control feature of ETERNITY.
Least Cost Routing (LCR) is useful when there are different trunk lines for making outgoing calls, and the service
providers of these trunks offer different tariffs for calls made to certain locations or numbers or during a particular
time of the day.
When a call is made from an extension of the ETERNITY, LCR recognizes where the call is going to. It selects the
lowest cost trunk from among all the trunks allotted to that extension to make outgoing calls, depending upon how
the LCR is programmed.
The system can be programmed to select the most cost effective trunk for the time of the day when the call is made
from the extension or to select the most cost effective trunk for the destination number dialed from the extension or
to select the most cost effective trunk considering both time of the day and destination number.
Accordingly, ETERNITY supports four types of LCR which can be programmed, namely:
1. Time-based LCR: This type of LCR may be used when you have trunk lines of more than one service
provider, and each offers a different tariff according to the time of the day.
For example, Service Provider 1 offers a lower tariff for calls made between 9am to 8pm, while Service
Provider 2 offers a lower tariff for calls made between 8pm to 9am.
When Time-based LCR is programmed, the system uses the Online-dialing logic, whereby digits dialed by
the user are directly passed on to the trunk.
2. Number based LCR: This type of LCR may be used when you have trunk lines of more than one service
provider, and each offers different tariffs according to the area or distance, or phone numbers dialed. For
instance, Service Provider 1 provides cheaper calling rates for calls made from City A to City B, than
Service Provider 2 and Service Provider 3.
3. Time and Number based LCR: This type of LCR is a combination of number and time based LCR, i.e. the
service providers offer different tariffs according to the time of the day as well as area/distance.
For example, Service Provider 1 offers lower rates for calls made from City A to City B during peak hours
9am to 8pm, as compared to Service Provider 2, whereas Service Provider 2 offers cheaper rates for calls
made from City A to City B during off peak hours (8pm to 9 am).
When Time+Number-based LCR is programmed, the system uses Store and Forward dialing logic,
whereby digits dialed by the user are first stored at a memory location in the system, and then dialed out
on the lowest cost trunk.
4. Service Provider-based LCR: This type of LCR may be used when the same Service Providers offer
different rates for calls made to numbers within their own network and for calls made to numbers of
another Service Provider's network. For example, Service Provider 1 offers lower rates to call a Service
Provider1 number in City A and in City B, than for calling numbers of Service Provider 2 in the same cities.
This type of LCR may also be used when the same Service Providers apply different charges for different
subscriber services provided by them. For example, Service Provider 1 offers both Fixed Line as well as
GSM services and applies different charges for fixed line and GSM services.
716 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
When Service Provider-based LCR is programmed, whenever a number is dialed out, the system ignores
the area code, checks the number in the 'Service Provider-based LCR table', and routes the call according
to the lowest cost trunk programmed for that number.
ETERNITY also supports LCR based on Carrier Pre-Selection. This type of LCR is useful where there exist
different service providers for local and long distance calls. Refer the topic “Least Cost Routing-Carrier
Pre-Selection” to know more.
Cost Factor
For LCR to work, all trunks that are allotted to extensions for making outgoing calls, must first be assigned a Cost
Factor.
Cost factor is used for grading trunks in the order of increasing cost of routing calls, from 01 to 99, where 01
signifies least cost and 99 signifies the highest cost. Thus you can grade up to 99 trunks according to the increasing
cost of routing calls.
By default all trunks are assigned Cost Factor number 01.
After assigning Cost Factor to Trunks, you must configure the Type of LCR to be used on Trunks in the Outgoing
Trunk Bundle Group (OGTBG) allotted to the extensions for making calls.
Assigning Cost Factor to Trunks
• On a sheet of paper, make a list of all the trunks assigned to extensions for making outgoing calls.
• Make a table of the trunk types and assign a cost factor to each trunk type, as shown below.
Trunk Type and Number Service Provider Cost Factor
TWT-001 BSNL 01
TWT-002 BSNL 02
MOB-001 Reliance 03
MOB-002 BSNL 04
MOB-003 Airtel 05
MOB-004 Vodafone 06
BRI-01 BSNL 07
BRI-02 Reliance 08
• Program the Cost Factor number you assigned to the Trunk types in their respective trunk parameters. For
instance, assign Cost Factor 01 to TWT-001 and Cost Factor 002 to TWT-002 in the "TWT Trunk
Parameters". Similarly, assign Cost Factor 03 to Mobile Trunk 001, Cost factor 04 to Mobile Trunk 002,
Cost Factor 05 to Mobile Trunk port 003, and Cost Factor 06 to Mobile Trunk port 004 in the “Mobile Port
Parameters”.
• For programming instructions, refer the topics “Configuring TWT Trunks” and “Configuring Mobile Trunks”.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 717
Configuring Time-based LCR
• You can configure Time-based LCR for as many as 8 different Time Zones.
• On a sheet of paper, make a table for Time-based LCR.
• Define the Time Zone, i.e. the start and end time, when the LCR should be applied for the outgoing calls.
The Time Zone you define is stored at an Index number from 1 to 8.
• For each Time Zone that you define, select the Trunk with the lowest cost as your first preference, i.e.
Preference 1. Select the trunk of your second, third and fourth preference (in order of increasing cost.
When the trunk you selected as first preference is busy, the system will route the call through the next
trunk you have set that is free.
• Refer to the table you prepared for assigning Cost Factor to trunks.
• For example, you want calls made during 9am to 8pm to be routed through BSNL TWT trunks (TWT-001
and TWT-002). If these trunks are busy, you want the system to route calls through the BRI line of BSNL
trunk. When this line is busy, you want the system to attempt to route calls through the BRI line of
Reliance.
• You want calls made between 8pm to 9am to be routed through BSNL TWT trunk 001 only.
• At Time Zone Index 1, define the Time Zone start and end time in 24 Hours:Minutes format, enter the Cost
Factor you assigned to TWT-001 (01) and TWT-002 (02) as Preference 1 and Preference 2 respectively.
Enter the cost factor you assigned to BRI-01 (07) and BRI02 (08) as Preference 3 and Preference 4
respectively.
Time Zone Cost Factor
Time Zone
Index Start Time End Time Preference Preference Preference Preference
(HH:MM) (HH:MM) 1 2 3 4
1 09:00 20:00 01 02 07 08
2 20:01 08:59 01 01 01 01
• Similarly, at Time Zone Index 2, define the Time Zone in 24 Hours: Minutes format. Enter the Cost factor
you assigned to TWT-001, i.e. 01 as Preference 1, 2, 3, and 4. When calls are made during this time
period, they will be routed through TWT-001 only.
• If you have finished defining Time Zones and the preferred trunks for the time zones, configure the Time-
based LCR using Jeeves or a Telephone.
718 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Configuring Time-based LCR using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the Least Cost Routing (LCR) link. The links to the LCR options appear.
• Click the 'Time-based LCR' link to open the page.
• Enter the values of the Time-based LCR you prepared on the sheet of paper in the appropriate fields.
• Click Submit at the bottom of the page to save your settings.
• Log out of Jeeves or continue programming, as required.
Configuring Time-based LCR using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode.
To program Time Zone at a Time Zone index, dial:
• 3402-Time Zone Index-Start Time-End Time
Where,
Time Zone Index is from 01 to 08.
Start Time is the time in HH:MM format when the Time zone starts.
End Time is the time in HH:MM format when the Time zone ends.
For example to program 09:00 to 20:00 hours at Time Zone Index 1, dial 3402-01-0900-2000
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 719
By default, Time Zone is 00.00 to 23.59.
To program the Cost Factor (Service Provider preference) for the Time Zone, dial:
• 3403-Time Zone Index-CF1-CF2-CF3-CF4
Where,
Time Zone Index is from 01 to 08.
CF1is the first preferred (the cheapest) service provider.
CF2 is the second preferred (second cheapest) service provider.
CF3 is the third preferred service provider.
CF4 is the fourth preferred service provider.
For example, to program the preferred trunks for the Time Zone 09:00 to 20:00 hours, dial 3403-01-01-
02-07-08
It is mandatory to complete this command with CF1 to CF4. If you have only one service provider, program
the same as CF1, CF2, CF3, CF4.
To default the Time Zone based LCR table, dial:
• 3401
• Exit SE mode.
Configuring Number-based LCR
• You can configure Number-based LCR for as many as 99 different Numbers, which are stored against
Index numbers from 01 to 99.
• On a sheet of paper, make a table for Number-based LCR.
• Enter each of the number strings at an Index number from 01 to 99. A Number string may be a complete
telephone number, a truncated phone number or an area code.
• For each number string you enter, select the Trunk with the lowest cost as your first preference, i.e.
Preference 1. Select the trunk of your second, third and fourth preference (in order of increasing cost.
When the trunk you selected as first preference is busy, the system will route the call through the next
trunk you have set that is free.
• Refer to the table you prepared for assigning Cost Factor to trunks.
For example, you want all mobile numbers to be routed through the Mobile Trunk ports, all local numbers
to be routed through the TWT ports.
All mobile numbers start with the number '9', which is prefixed with a '0' when making long distance mobile
calls, so enter '9' and '09' as the number strings. For '9' as well as '09', select the Mobile trunks through
which the calls should be made in order of preference.
720 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Similarly, all local numbers start with 2, so enter this number in the number string column, and select the
TWT trunk in the order of preference. As in this example, you have only two TWT trunks, so you may keep
the same two trunks as your preference.
Cost Factor
Index Number
Preference 1 Preference 2 Preference 3 Preference 4
1 9 04 03 05 06
2 09 04 06 05 03
3 2 01 02 01 02
99
• If you have finished entering the number strings, and selecting the preferred trunks for the numbers,
configure the Number-based LCR using Jeeves or a Telephone.
Configuring Number-based LCR using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the Least Cost Routing (LCR) link. The links to the LCR options appear.
• Click the 'Number-based LCR' link to open the page.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 721
• Enter the values of the Number-based LCR you prepared on the sheet of paper in the appropriate fields.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your settings.
Configuring Number-based LCR using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode.
To program a number at number Index in the Time-based LCR table, dial:
• 3411-Number Index-Number String-#*
Where,
Number Index is from 01 to 99.
Number String can be a complete telephone number, a truncated telephone number or an area code.
Number string may be a maximum of 16 digits. Terminate the command with #* if the number string has
fewer than 16 digits. Terminate the command with #* if the number string has fewer than 16 digits.
By default, Number String is 'Blank'.
For example to program '9' at Index 01, dial 3411-01-9-#*
To clear a number string programmed at a number index, dial:
• 3411-Number Index-#*
Where,
Number Index is from 01 to 99.
To program Cost Factor (Service Provider preference) for the each Number, dial:
• 3412-Number Index-CF1-CF2-CF3-CF4
Where,
Number Index is from 01 to 99.
CF1is the first preferred (the cheapest) service provider.
CF2 is the second preferred (second cheapest) service provider.
CF3 is the third preferred service provider.
CF4 is the fourth preferred service provider.
For example, to program Cost Factor for number '9' at Index 01, dial 3412-01-04-03-05-06
It is mandatory to complete this command with CF1 to CF4. If you have only one service provider, program
the same as CF1, CF2, CF3, CF4.
To default the Number-based LCR table, dial:
• 3410
Configuring Time and Number-based LCR
• This is a combination of the Time Zone-based and Number-based LCR. You may use this feature if your
service providers offer lower call rates for calls made to certain numbers during a certain time of the day.
• On a sheet of paper, make a table for Time and Number-based LCR.
• Define the Time Zones when the service providers offer lower tariff. You can define up to 8 time zones.
• For each Time Zone you define, specify the Number strings on which lower tariff is applied during that
Time Zone.
722 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• For each Number string you enter for a particular time zone, assign Cost Factor. Select the trunk with the
lowest cost as your first preference. Select trunks of your second, third and fourth preference (in order of
increasing cost). Refer to the table you prepared for assigning Cost Factor.
• You can enter up to 99 different number strings, which are stored at Index numbers from 01 to 99. The
Number strings may be complete telephone numbers, truncated phone numbers or area codes.
When the trunk you selected as first preference is busy, the system will route the call through the next
trunk you set as preference if it is free.
For example, service provider of TWT-001 and TWT-002 (assigned Cost Factor 01 and 02) offers the
lowest rate for calls made to Area Code 022 between 8am to 12pm, followed by service providers of
Mobile Trunk-02 (assigned cost factor 04) and Mobile Trunk-01 (assigned cost factor 03).
• Define Time Zone 1 Start and End time as 08 to 12:00 hours
• Enter area code 022 as Number string at Number Index 1
• Assign Cost Factor preference for the number string in this sequence: 01, 02, 04, 03
Number Index
Time Start and 1 2 3 4 : 99
zone End Time
Number Number Number Number Number Number
Index (HH:MM)
String (CF String (CF String (CF String (CF String (CF String (CF
Preference) Preference) Preference) Preference) Preference) Preference)
08:00 to 022 (01, 011 (01, 02, 080 (01,
1 : :
12:00 02, 04, 03) 04, 05) 02, 05, 06)
12:00 to 022 (04,
2
18:00 03, 02, 01)
09:00 to 022 (03, 080 (03,
3
20:00 05, 06, 04) 05, 06, 04)
• If you have finished defining the time zones, entering the number strings, and selecting the preferred
trunks for the number strings, configure the Number and Time-based LCR using Jeeves or a Telephone.
Configuring Time+Number-based LCR using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the Least Cost Routing (LCR) link. The links to the different LCR options appear below this link.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 723
• Click the 'Time+Number-based LCR' link to open the page.
• Enter the values of the Time+Number-based LCR you prepared on the sheet of paper in the appropriate
fields.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your settings.
Configuring Time+Number-based LCR using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode.
To define Time Zone for Time+Number-based LCR, dial:
• 3421-Time Zone Index-Start Time-End Time
Where,
Time Zone Index is from 01 to 08.
Start Time is the time in HH:MM format when the Time zone starts.
End Time is the time in HH:MM format when the Time zone ends.
By default, Time Zone is 00.00 to 23.59.
For example, to define 08:00 to 12:00 as start and end time of Time Zone 1, dial 3421-1-0800-1200
To program the number string for Time+Number-based LCR, dial:
• 3422-Number Index-Number String-#*
Where,
Number Index is from 01 to 99.
724 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Number String can be a complete telephone number, a truncated telephone number or an area code.
Number string is of maximum 16 digits. Terminate the command with #* if the number string has fewer
than 16 digits.
By default, Number String is 'Blank'.
For example, to program Number string '022' at Number Index 01, dial 3422-01-022-#*
To clear a number index from the Time+Number-based LCR Table:
• 3422-Number Index-#*
To program Cost Factor (Service Provider preference) for the each Number and Time Zone, dial:
• 3423-Number Index-Time Zone Index-CF1-CF2-CF3-CF4
Where,
Number Index is from 01 to 99.
Time Zone Index is from 01 to 08.
CF1is the first preferred (the cheapest) service provider.
CF2 is the second preferred (second cheapest) service provider.
CF3 is the third preferred service provider.
CF4 is the fourth preferred service provider.
For example, to program Cost factor for Area code 022 during time zone 08 to 12:00 hours as entered
in the sample table, dial 3423-01-1-01-02-04-03
To default the Time and Number-based LCR table, dial:
• 3420
Configuring Service Provider-based LCR
• In Service Provider-based LCR, whenever a number is dialed out, the system ignores the area code, and
starts checking the numbers in the 'Service Provider-based LCR table' and routes the call according to the
lowest cost trunk programmed for that number. For this, you must program the two parameters Area Code
and Ignore Digit Count in the Area Code Table.
• On a sheet of paper make a table for Service Provider-based LCR.
Index Area Ignore Cost Factor
Number
No. Code Digit Count Preference 1 Preference 2 Preference 3 Preference 4
01 3 080 3 08 07 01 02
02 6 022 3 07 01 02 08
: : :
99 2 03852 5 01 02 01 02
• As you can see, the Service Provider-based LCR Table is similar to the Number-based LCR table.
• You can program as many as 99 different numbers which are stored against Index numbers from 01 to 99.
• The number strings may be the complete telephone number, a truncated phone number or the first digit of
the phone number.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 725
• For each number string that you enter against an Index number, you must also specify the Area Code and
the Ignore Digit Count.
• The Ignore Digit Count is the number of digits in the area code that the system should ignore before
checking the Service Provider-based LCR table. For each area code that you enter, the corresponding
Ignore Digit Count will be the number of digits in the area code. For example, the area code for the number
starting with '3' is 080, which consists of 3 digits. So, the Ignore Digit Count for the number/area code 080
will be 3.
• For each number string and area code that you enter, assign the Trunk of the service provider who offers
the lowest tariff to that number/area code. Refer the table you prepared for assigning Cost Factor to trunks.
• If you have finished entering the number strings, their corresponding area codes and the Ignore Digit
Count, and the preferred trunks, configure Service Provider-based LCR using Jeeves or a Telephone.
Configuring Service Provider-based LCR using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• To program Area Code and Ignore Digit Count, click the 'Call Cost Calculation' link.
• Click the 'Area Code Table' to open the page.
Each area code is stored at an index number.
726 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Enter the Area Codes and the corresponding Ignore Digit Counts from the sheet you prepared for Service
Provider based-LCR. You may also enter the respective name for each area code, if desired.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your changes.
• Now, click the Least Cost Routing (LCR) link. The links for the LCR options appear.
• Click the 'Service Provider Based link' to open the page.
• Enter the values of the Service Provider-based LCR you prepared on the sheet of paper in the appropriate
fields.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your settings.
Configuring Service Provider-based LCR using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode.
To program Area Code in the Area Code Table, dial:
• 2620-Area Code Index-Area Code-#*
Where,
Area Code Index is from 001 to 999.
Area Code is a string of maximum 7 digits. Terminate the command with #* if the number string has
fewer than 7 digits.
By default, Area Code is 'Blank'.
For example, to program Number string '080' at Number Index 001, dial 2620-001-080-#*
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 727
To clear an Area Code in the Area Code Table, dial:
• 2620-Area Code Index-#*
To program Ignore Digit Count for an Area Code, dial:
• 2623-Area Code Index-Ignore Digit Count
Where,
Area Code Index is from 001 to 999.
Ignore Digit Count is from 0 to 9.
By default, Ignore Digit Count is '0'.
Refer the topic "Area Code Table" under Call Cost Calculation to know more.
To program a number at number Index in the Service Provider-based LCR table, dial:
• 3441-Number Index-Number String-#*
Where,
Number Index is from 01 to 99.
Number String can be a complete telephone number, a truncated telephone number or an area code.
Number string may be a maximum of 16 digits. Terminate the command with #* if the number string
has fewer than 16 digits.
By default, Number String is 'Blank'.
For example to program '3' at Index 01, dial 3441-01-3-#*
To clear a number string programmed at a number index, dial:
• 3441-Number Index-#*
Where,
Number Index is from 01 to 99.
To program Cost Factor (Service Provider preference) for the each Number, dial:
• 3442-Number Index-CF1-CF2-CF3-CF4
Where,
Number Index is from 01 to 99.
CF1is the first preferred (the cheapest) service provider.
CF2 is the second preferred (second cheapest) service provider.
CF3 is the third preferred service provider.
CF4 is the fourth preferred service provider.
For example, to program Cost Factor for number '3' at Index 01, dial 3412-01-08-07-01-02
It is mandatory to complete this command with CF1 to CF4. If you have only one service provider, program
the same as CF1, CF2, CF3, CF4.
To default the Number-based LCR table, dial:
• 3440
• Exit SE mode.
Configuring LCR Type on Trunks
After assigning Cost Factor to Trunks and programming the LCR Type - Time-based, Number-based, Time and
Number-based, Service Provider-based - you must now apply the desired LCR Type on the Outgoing Trunk Bundle
Group (OGTBG) allotted to the extensions. This can be done using Jeeves or a Telephone.
728 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Configuring LCR Type in OGTB using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the 'Outgoing Trunk Bundle Group' link to open the page.
• For each OGTBG number assigned to extensions, select the desired LCR Type: Time-based, Number-
based, Time+Number based, Service Provider-based (Cost Factor).
• Click 'Submit' to save your settings.
You can find the OGTBG number assigned to each extension from the Station Basic Feature Template
assigned to the extension.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 729
Configuring LCR Type in OGTB using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode.
To select LCR type in OG Trunk Bundle Group, dial:
• 1404-1-OGTBG-LCR Type to select an LCR Type for a single group.
• 1404-2-OGTBG-OGTBG-LCR Type to select the same LCR Type for a range of OGTB groups.
• 1404-*-LCR Type to select the same LCR Type for all OGTB groups.
Where,
OGTBG is from 01 to 32.
LCR Type is
0 for No LCR
1 for Time zone-based LCR
2 for Number-based LCR
3 for Time+Number-based LCR
4 for Service Provider-based (Cost Factor) LCR
By default, 'No LCR' is selected as LCR Type.
• Exit SE mode.
730 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Configuring Emergency Number Dialing
ETERNITY supports dialing of Emergency Numbers immediately without any blocking.
The system will disregard features such as Toll Control, Call Budget, Automatic Number Translation, Call Duration
Control on the extensions when dialing out Emergency Numbers. To know more, refer the topic “Emergency
Dialing”.
For Emergency Number Dialing, you need to configure the Emergency Number Table. In this table, each
Emergency Number is to be assigned an Outgoing Trunk Bundle Groups (OGTB) through which the Emergency
Number is to be routed.
The system loads the default Emergency Numbers and Outgoing Trunk Bundle Group (OGTBG) in the Emergency
Number Table as per the “Region” you selected for the system. The Emergency Numbers loaded by default in the
Emergency Number Table are non-editable, but you can re-assign the default OGTB, as per your requirement.
For example, if you selected USA as Region, the default Emergency Number Table would look like this:
Default Emergency Number Table for USA
Index Emergency Number OG Trunk Bundle Group
01 911 32
02 112 01
03 01
04 01
05 01
06 01
07 01
08 01
09 01
10 01
If you selected Australia as Region, the default Emergency Number Table would look like this:
Default Emergency Number Table for Australia
Index Emergency Numbers OG Trunk Bundle Group
01 000 32
02 106 30
03 112 31
04 01
05 01
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 731
Index Emergency Numbers OG Trunk Bundle Group
06 01
07 01
08 01
09 01
10 01
Each Number is stored at an index from 01 to 10. The Emergency Number fields from index 01 to 5 are non-
editable, but you can select a different OGTBG for each of these default Emergency Numbers.
You can add Emergency Numbers at index 06 to 10 in the table, and select the OGTBG as required.
Configuring Emergency Number Table using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the 'Emergency Number Table' link to open the page.
The first five entries, at Index 01 to 05 on this table, are uneditable. These fields will be populated with the
default Emergency Numbers of your country (which you selected as Region).
732 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
If the Emergency Numbers loaded by default are applicable for your region/country, all you need to do is
re-assign, if required, the Outgoing Trunk Bundle Group assigned by default to each number.
If the Emergency Numbers loaded by default are not applicable for your region/country, you may add the
Emergency Numbers and their OGTBG at index 06 to 10 in this table.
Make sure that the trunks configured in the OGTBG for each Emergency Number belong to the correct
network and the ports through which the calls are to be routed are not disabled. For example, '112' is the
default Emergency Number for the mobile network. So, make sure that the Mobile Trunk to be used for
dialing this number is included in the OGTBG you assign to this number in the Table.
• Click 'Submit' to save changes.
Configuring Emergency Number Table using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from DKP/SLT.
To add Emergency Numbers in the table, dial:
• 3116-Index-Emergency Number-#*
Where,
Index is the location at which the Emergency Number is stored in the table, from 06 to 10 (01 to 05 are
reserved for default numbers).
Emergency Number is a string of 8 digits max. Use digits 0-9 only.
To assign an OG Trunk Bundle Group (OTBG) to an emergency number, dial:
• 3117-Index-OG Trunk Bundle Group
Where,
Index is the location at which the Emergency Number is stored in the table, from 01 to 10.
OGTBG is from 01 to 32.
• Exit SE mode.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 733
734 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
CHAPTER 9 Features and Facilities
Abbreviated Dialing
What's this?
Abbreviated Dialing is the use of short codes (abbreviated numbers), typically 2-3 digits, to dial out long-digit
numbers. It is also referred to as Memory Dialing.
Abbreviated Dialing allows you to dial quickly and easily, frequently called, long-digit numbers.
This feature requires you to store the frequently called, long-digit numbers107 and their corresponding short codes
in special lists, known as 'directories'. These directories may be 'personal' or 'global'.
ETERNITY supports two types of Abbreviated Dialing based on the type of directory used: Personal Abbreviated
Dialing and Global Abbreviated Dialing.
Abbreviated Dialing forms the basis of two other features of the ETERNITY: “Dialed Number Directory” and “Quick
Dial”.
Personal Abbreviated Dialing
This variation of Abbreviated Dialing makes use of the Personal Directory.
Personal Directories can be programmed and assigned to groups of extensions. The use of Personal Directories is
limited to the extensions to which they are assigned.
A personal directory accommodates 25 numbers. Each number may be up to 16 digits long. A personal directory
has Index numbers from 01 to 25 against which the frequently dialed telephone numbers are stored along with their
corresponding names and trunk access code ID.
As many as 50 different personal directories, numbered from 01 to 50 can be created and assigned to SLT, DKP
and SIP extensions.
With a personal directory assigned to an extension, the extension user simply dials out the Feature Access Code
for Abbreviated Dialing and the Index Number at which the desired number is stored in the personal directory.
107.These may be numbers of your branch offices, your clients, as also numbers of emergency services such as fire, police.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 735
For example: personal directory number 02 is assigned to extension 2001. The number 02652630555 is stored at
Index number 16 of this directory. The user of extension 2001 can call this number by simply dialing '8' (feature
access code) followed by '16' (the index number).
ETERNITY will automatically dial out the number using the trunk access code ID specified for this number in the
personal directory.
• When an extension user dials an abbreviated number from the Personal Directory, the system first
checks OG Trunk Bundle Group (OGTBG) and Toll Control Level (Call Privilege) of that extension and
then dials out the number.
• Each extension can access only the personal directory assigned to it.
• Personal Directory can be programmed by the System Engineer, as well as extension users. Extension
users can add contacts to the Personal Directory assigned to them from their extensions phones (DKP/
SLT/ISDN phone/IP Phone).
Global Abbreviated Dialing
This variation of Abbreviated Dialing makes use of a system-wide list of numbers stored in the memory of the
ETERNITY, known as the Global Directory.
Being a system-wide list, the Global Directory can be accessed by any extension connected to the ETERNITY.
The Global Directory has the capacity to store up to 900 numbers of a maximum of 16 digits each. The Global
Directory is divided into three parts:
• Part 1 - contains Memory Location codes 100 to 799.
• Part 2 - contains Memory Location codes 800 to 899.
• Part 3 - contains Memory Location codes 900 to 999.
The Global Directory has Memory Location codes starting from 100 to 999. The telephone numbers along with their
corresponding names are stored against Memory Location codes.
Whenever extension users of ETERNITY want to use Global Abbreviated Dialing, all they needs to do is dial the
feature access code ('8' or '6') and the Memory Location code at which the desired number is stored.
For example: the number 02652630566 is stored at Memory Location 102 of the Global Directory. Now, extension
users of ETERNITY can call this number by simply dialing the '8' or '6' (feature access code for Abbreviated
Dialing) followed by '102' (Memory Location code at which the desired number, 02652630566, is stored).
The ETERNITY will dial out the number using any of the trunks in the “OG Trunk Bundle Group” assigned to it in the
Memory Location.
• Extensions can use Global Abbreviated Dialing only if this feature is included in the “Class of Service
(COS)” allowed to them.
736 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Further, an extension can access only that part of the Global Directory which is allowed to it in the CoS.
For instance, if extension 2001 is allowed Global Directory Part 1 in its CoS, the user of extension 2001
can dial out only those numbers contained in Global Directory Part 1.
• So, to be able to access the entire Global Directory, extensions must be assigned all three parts of the
directory in their Class of Service. By default, only Global Directory Part 1 is included in the CoS of all
extensions.
• Global Directory can be programmed by the System Engineer, and by Digital Keyphone extension
users who have Global Directory Programming allowed to them in the Class of Service.
• While the System Engineer can program all three parts of the Global Directory, digital keyphone
extension users who are allowed Global Directory Programming in their Class of Service can configure
only Global Directory Part 1.
How to configure
For both Personal and Global Abbreviated Dialing to work, the System Engineer must:
• Program the Personal Directories and the Global Directory.
• Assign Personal Directory to the desired extensions (which may be different: SLT, DKP, ISDN Terminals,
IP Phones).
• Enable Global Directory Part 1/2/3 as desired in the Class of Service (CoS) group allowed to the
extensions.
• Enable ‘Global Directory Part 1’ and ‘Global Directory Programming’ in the CoS group of the digital key
phone extension users, who are to be allowed to program (add, delete, edit) contacts in the Global
Directory Part 1 from their digital keyphones.
All the above parameters can be programmed by the System Engineer using Jeeves as well as a telephone.
Preparing Numbers Lists for Personal and Global Directories
In consultation with the extension users, you may:
• Find out the number of personal directories that need to be programmed.
• Make a list of numbers frequently dialed by the extension.
• Ask the extension users the numbers they would like to be included in the personal directory of their
extension.
• Make separate lists of numbers along with their corresponding names and trunk access codes, for each
personal directory. You may draw four-column tables on paper and enter the Numbers and corresponding
names and trunk access codes against each Index number. For example:
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 737
Personal Directory 01
Index No. Number Name TAC ID
: : : :
: : : :
25
Personal Directory 02
Index No. Number Name TAC ID
: : : :
: : : :
25
• Compile the numbers to be included in the global directory. Numbers that are commonly dialed by all
extensions can be included in the global directory.
• Draw a four-column table on paper and enter the telephone numbers along with their names, and the
Outgoing Trunk Bundle Group (OGTBG) at each Memory location. For example:
Global Directory
Memory Location OGTBG Number Name
100
101
: : : :
: : : :
999
• Prepare the Global Directory keeping in mind that is divided into three parts: Part 1 (100 to 799), Part 2
(800 to 899), and Part 3 (900 to 999). As Part 1 is allowed to all extensions in their default CoS, you may
include the numbers allowed to all extensions in this part of the directory.
Configuring Personal Directory using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the ‘Abbreviated Dialing’ link.
738 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Click the 'Personal Directory' link under Abbreviated Dialing to open the page.
Each page of has four Personal Directories.
• For each Personal Directory, enter the Number you wish to store against an Index Number. Enter the
contact's Name against the number.
The length of the Number field is limited to 16 digits. The length of the Name field is limited to 12
alphanumeric characters. Ensure that the number and the name are programmed within this limit.
Each directory has a limit of 25 entries. You may enter up to 25 Numbers and Names in each Personal
Directory.
Change the TAC Index (TAC ID), if required.
• Click 'Submit' to save the entries.
• Repeat these steps to program each Personal Directory.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your entries.
Keep a print of each personal directory for your record and for the record of the extension user to whose
phone the personal directory is assigned. This will also help you take care of overlaps and include some of
the numbers that are dialed by all users in the Global Directory instead of the Personal Directory.
After you have programmed the Personal Directories, assign a personal directory to each extensions.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 739
To assign Personal Directory to SLT extensions, from the Full Programming Access Mode,
• Click the 'SLT Configuration' link.
• Click the 'SLT Parameters' link to open the page.
• Go to 'Personal Directory' column of the SLT to which the directory is to be assigned.
• Enter the number of the Personal Directory. For example, to assign Personal Directory No. 02 to SLT 2001
(software port 001, connected on hardware slot 03, hardware port 09), enter '02' in the 'Personal Directory'
column for SLT 2001.
• Similarly, enter the Personal Directory number to be assigned to each SLT.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
To assign Personal Directory to DKP extensions,
• Click the 'DKP Configuration' link.
• Click 'DKP Parameters' to open the page.
• Go to 'Personal Directory' column of the DKP to which the directory is to be assigned.
• Enter the number of the Personal Directory. For example, to assign Personal Directory No. 01 to DKP
3001 (software port 001, connected on hardware slot 17, hardware port 01), enter '01' in the 'Personal
Directory' column for DKP 3001.
• Similarly, enter the Personal Directory number to be assigned to each DKP.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
To assign Personal Directory to ISDN Terminal extensions,
• Click 'ISDN Terminal Parameters' to open the page.
• Go to 'Personal Directory' column of the ISDN Terminal to which the directory is to be assigned.
• For each ISDN Terminal that is to be assigned a Personal Directory, enter the number of the directory in
this column.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
To assign Personal Directory to SIP Extensions extensions,
• Under ‘VoIP Configuration’, click the 'SIP Extension Settings' link to open the page.
• Select the software port number of the SIP extension you want to assign the Personal Directory.
• Click the ‘Advance’ button.
740 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Scroll to Personal Directory, and select the 'Personal Directory' number you want to assign to this
extension.
• Click ‘Submit’ to save.
It is possible to assign the same personal directory to multiple extensions.
Configuring Personal Directory using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode.
To program a telephone number in a personal directory, dial:
• 1902-Personal Directory-Location Code-Number
Where,
Personal Directory is from 01 to 50.
Location Code is from 01 to 25.
Number is the telephone number, max. 16 digits. If the number has fewer than 16 digits, you must dial
#* to terminate the command.
To clear a telephone number from a location in a personal directory, dial:
• 1902-Personal Directory-Location Code-#*
To program a name in the personal directory, dial:
• 1903-Personal Directory-Location Code-Name
Where,
Personal Directory is from 01 to 50.
Location Code is from 01 to 25.
Name is a string of alphanumeric characters, max. 12 characters. If the name has fewer than 12
characters, you must dial #* to terminate the command.
To clear a name from a location in a personal directory, dial:
• 1903-Personal Directory-Location Code-#*
To program the TAC Index for personal directory, dial:
• 1904-Personal Directory-Location Code-TAC Index
Where,
PM Group is from 01 to 50.
Location Code is from 01 to 25.
TAC Index is from 1 to 6.
By default, the TAC Index 1 is assigned to Personal Directory.
• To assign a Personal Directory to an extension, dial the following commands:
If the extension is an SLT, dial:
• 1905-1-SLT-Personal Directory to apply personal directory on a single extension.
• 1905-2-SLT-SLT-Personal Directory to apply the same personal directory on a range of extensions.
• 1905-*-Personal Directory to apply the same personal directory on all extensions.
Where,
SLT is the Software Port Number of SLT from 001 to 512.
Personal Directory is from 01 to 50.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 741
By default, 00 is the Personal Directory assigned to all SLTs.
To clear the personal directory assigned to the SLT, dial:
• 1905-1-SLT-00 to clear personal directory from a single SLT.
• 1905-2-SLT-SLT-00 to clear personal directory from a range of SLTs.
• 1905-*-00 to clear personal directory from all SLTs.
If the extension is a DKP, dial:
• 1906-1-DKP-Personal Directory to assign personal directory to a single DKP.
• 1906-2-DKP-DKP-Personal Directory to assign the same personal directory to a range of DKPs.
• 1906-*- Personal Directory to assign the same personal directory to all DKPs.
Where,
DKP is the Software Port Number of the DKP from 001 to 128.
Personal Directory is from 01 to 50.
By default, 00 is the Personal Directory assigned to all DKPs.
To clear the personal directory assigned to the DKP, dial:
• 1906-1-DKP-00 to clear personal directory from a single DKP.
• 1906-2-DKP-DKP-00 to clear personal directory from a range of DKPs.
• 1906-*-00 to clear personal directory from all DKPs.
If the extension is an ISDN Terminal, dial:
• 1907-1-ISDN-Personal Directory to assign personal directory to a single ISDN Terminal.
• 1907-2-ISDN-ISDN-Personal Directory to assign the same personal directory to a range of ISDN
Terminals.
• 1907-*-Personal Directory to assign the same personal directory to all ISDN Terminals.
Where,
ISDN is the Software Port Number of the ISDN Terminal from 01 to 64.
Personal Directory is from 01 to 50.
By default, 00 is the Personal Directory assigned to all ISDN Terminals.
To clear the personal directory assigned to an ISDN Terminal, dial:
• 1907-1-ISDN-00 to clear personal directory of a single ISDN Terminal.
• 1907-2-ISDN-ISDN-00 to clear personal directory of a range of ISDN Terminals.
• 1907-*-00 to clear personal directory of all ISDN Terminals.
Where,
ISDN is the Software Port Number of the ISDN Terminal from 01 to 64.
Personal Directory is from 01 to 50.
By default, 00 is the Personal Directory assigned to all ISDN Terminals.
If the extension is To assign a Personal Directory to a SIP Extension, dial:
• 1908-1-SIP Extension-Personal Directory to assign a personal directory to a single SIP extension.
• 1908-1-SIP Extension-SIP Extension-Personal Directory to assign the same a personal directory to
a range of SIP extensions.
• 1908-*-Personal Directory to assign the same personal directory to all SIP extensions.
Where,
SIP Extension is the Software Port Number of the SIP Extension from 001 to 999.
Personal Directory is from 01 to 50.
742 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To clear Personal Directory assigned to SIP Extensions, dial:
• 1908-1-SIP Extension-00 to clear the personal directory of a single SIP extension.
• 1908-1-SIP Extension-SIP Extension-00 to clear the personal directory to a range of SIP extensions.
• 1908-*-00 to clear the personal directory of all SIP extensions.
Where,
SIP Extension is the Software Port Number of the SIP Extension from 001 to 999.
Personal Directory is from 01 to 50.
• Exit SE mode.
Configuring Global Directory using Jeeves
• Log into Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the 'Global Directory' link under Abbreviated Dialing to open the page.
Each page of has 99 entries. To go to the next 99 entries click the links above the table '200-299'
• Enter the Number you wish to store against a Memory Location Code. Enter the contact's Name
against the number.
The length of the Number field is limited to 16 digits. The length of the Name field is limited to 12
alphanumeric characters. Ensure that the number and the name are programmed within this limit.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your entries.
• Now, apply the Global Directory to extensions. Make sure that the feature Global Directory is enabled
in the CoS of the extensions to which you are assigning the Global Directory.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 743
By default, Global Directory Part 1 is allowed to all extensions in their CoS.
If the entire directory is to be assigned to all extensions, you may simply enable 'Global Directory Part 2
and Part 3 in the default CoS group 01 in the default Station Basic Feature Template 01 assigned to
the extensions.
However, if selected extensions are to be allowed Global Directory Part 2/Part 3, follow these steps:
• Define a CoS group with Global Directory Part 2/Part 3 enabled.
• Prepare a Station Basic Feature Template with this CoS group applicable in all the “Time Zones”.
• Assign this template to the extensions to which Global Directory Part /Part 3 are to be allowed.
Refer the topics “Class of Service (COS)” and “Station Basic Feature Template” for further instructions.
• Decide which of the DKP Extension users are to be allowed ‘Global Directory Programming’ (of Global
Directory Part 1) and allow this feature in their Class of Service.
By default, ‘Global Directory Programming’ is disabled in the default CoS group 01 in the default
Station Basic Feature Template 01 assigned to all extensions of ETERNITY. This means none of the
extensions can program Global Directory.
If you want to allow Global Directory Programming to all DKP extension users, simply enable this
feature in the CoS group of the Station Basic Feature Template assigned to them.
If you want to allow Global Directory Programming to only selected extensions, then follow these steps:
• Define a CoS group with Global Directory Programming enabled.
• Make sure this CoS also has Global Directory Part 1 enabled.
• Prepare a Station Basic Feature Template with this CoS group applicable in all the “Time Zones”.
• Assign this template to the DKP extensions to which Global Directory Programming is to be
allowed.
Refer the topics “Class of Service (COS)” and “Station Basic Feature Template” for programming
instructions.
• When Global Directory Part 1 is assigned to an extension user, ETERNITY will not check for Toll
Control.
• When you assign Global Directory Programming to a DKP extension user, the user can program any
number in Global Directory Part 1, this includes numbers denied to the extension user in the Call
Privilege defined in the Toll Control level of this extension user.
• Since the system does not check for Toll Control for numbers dialed out from Global Directory Part 1,
there is a possibility of extension users programming numbers not allowed to them in their Toll Control
level in the Global Directory Part 1, inadvertently or intentionally.
• Hence, the System Engineer is advised to exercise caution when allowing this feature to DKP
extension users.
• Click ‘Submit’ at the bottom of the pages on which you make changes to save your settings.
• If you have finished configuration, you may log out of Jeeves. Or you may continue, as required.
744 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Configuring Global Directory using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode.
To program a telephone number in the global directory, dial:
• 1801-Location Code-Number
Where,
Location Code is from 100 to 999.
Number is the telephone number, max. 16 digits. If the number has fewer than 16 digits, you must dial
#* to terminate the command.
To clear a telephone number from a location in the global directory, dial:
• 1801-Location Code-#*
To program a name in global directory, dial:
• 1802-Location Code-Name
Where,
Location Code is from 100 to 999.
Name is a string of alphanumeric characters, max. 12 characters. If the name has fewer 12 characters,
you must dial #* to terminate the command.
To clear a name from a location in the global directory, dial:
• 1802-Location Code-#*
To program the OGTBG for a contact in the global directory, dial:
• 1803-1-Location Code-OGTBG to assign OGTBG to a single Location code.
• 1803-2-Location Code-Location Code-OGTBG to assign OGTBG to a range of Location Codes.
• 1803-*-OGTBG to assign OGTBG to all Location Codes.
Where,
Location Code is from 100 to 999.
OGTBG is from 01 to 25.
By default, the OGTBG assigned is 01.
To clear a location code in the global directory:
• 1800-1-Location Code
• 1800-2-Location Code-Location Code
• 1800-*
• Exit SE mode.
Refer the topics “Class of Service (COS)” and “Station Basic Feature Template” for instructions on how to use
SE commands to
• enable a feature (Global Directory) in the CoS Group.
• assign the CoS group to a Station Basic Feature Template
• apply the template with the newly programmed CoS group to the extensions.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 745
Personal Directory Configuration by Extension Users
Extension users can program their own Personal Directories using their extension phones. The personal directory
may be programmed using DKP or SLT.
If you are using an SLT, you will not be able to program the Name of the contact in the directory.
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users
• Press DSS Key assigned to Personal Directory (if programmed).
OR
• Dial 1071.
• Enter Personal Memory Index (001 to 025)
• Enter Number of the contact (max. 16 digits).
• Press 'Enter' key.
• Enter Name of the contact.
• Press 'Enter' key.
• Enter Trunk Access Code.
• Press 'Enter' key.
• You get confirmation tone and the message on your phone's display.
For SLT Users
• Pick up handset.
• Dial 1071.
• Dial Personal Memory Index (001 to 025).
• Dial Number of the contact (max. 16 digits).
• Press #*.
• Dial Trunk Access Code.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace handset
Global Directory Configuration by Extension Users
Extension users can add, delete and edit contacts in Global Directory Part 1using their extension phones, provided
that:
• their phone is a digital key phone;
• Global Directory Part 1 is allowed to them in their Class of Service.
• Global Directory Programming is allowed to them in their Class of Service.
• Extension users can only add, delete and edit names and numbers of contacts in Global Directory Part
1. However, they cannot program the Outgoing Trunk Bundle Group (OGTBG) for the contacts in the
directory.
• When an extension user programs Global Directory Part 1, the system will automatically assign the
number and name to a free Memory Location. The system will use the OGTBG assigned to that
Memory Location by the System Engineer to dial out the number added by the extension user.
• By default, OGTBG 01 is assigned to all Memory Location Codes in the Global Directory.
746 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• To simplify configuration for both the System Engineer and the extension users, the System Engineer
is recommended to assign the same OGTBG number uniformly to all Memory Location Codes, and
enable Least Cost Routing on this OGTBG.
• If no OGTBG has been assigned to a Memory Location in the Global Directory (i.e. the field is blank),
and an extension user adds a contact to this Memory Location, the number will not be dialed out.
•
To program Global Directory Part 1 from the digital key phone, follow these steps:
• Press Enter key to enter Phone Menu.
• Scroll to ‘Contacts’ and press Enter Key.
• You will get the following options:
• Add
• Edit
• Delete
Adding a contact
To add a contact, select ‘Add’ and press Enter key.
• Enter your contact’s name on the prompt: ‘Name:’
A maximum of 12 characters are allowed.
• Press Enter key to save name.
• Enter your contact’s number on the prompt: ‘Number:’
A maximum of 16 digits are allowed.
• Press Enter key to save number.
• You will get the confirmation tone and the confirmatory message: “Stored at Index xxx”.
Editing a contact
To edit a contact,
• Scroll to ‘Contacts’ in the phone menu and press Enter key.
• Select ‘Edit’ and press Enter key.
• You get the prompt: 'Name:'
• Enter the initial letters of the contact's name.
• The number of matching entries that will appear at a time on your phone's display will vary according to
your phone's LCD display capacity.
• Scroll with the Up/Down navigation keys to reach the desired contact's name on the list.
• Press 'Enter' key to select the name.
• The system displays the name you selected.
• To delete a character, use the Back/Forward navigation key to place the cursor under the character you
want to delete.
• Press the ‘Transfer’ key to delete the character you selected with the cursor.
• To enter a character, use the Back/Forward navigation key to place the cursor in the position you want to
enter the character.
• Enter the desired character by pressing the relevant digit pad keys in quick succession.
• After you have finished editing the name/ number, press Enter key.
• The number of the contact whose name you edited will be displayed.
• Repeat the same steps as you did for editing the name.
• After you have finished editing the number, press Enter key.
• You will get the confirmation tone and the confirmatory message: “Stored at Index xxx”.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 747
Deleting a contact
To delete a contact,
• Scroll to ‘Contacts’ in the phone menu and press Enter key.
• Select ‘Delete’ and press Enter key.
• You get the prompt: 'Name'
• Enter the initial letters of the contact's name.
• The number of matching entries that will appear at a time on your phone's display will vary according to
your phone's LCD display capacity.
• Scroll with the Up/Down navigation keys to reach the desired contact's name on the list.
• Press 'Enter' key to delete the name.
• You will get the confirmation tone and the confirmatory message: ’Deleted’.
How to use
Personal Abbreviated Dialing
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users
• Press DSS Key assigned 'Abbreviated Dialing' function (if programmed).
OR
• Dial 8 (users world wide)
OR
• Dial 6 (users in USA)
• You get the message 'Give Index'
• Enter Personal Directory Index number: 001 to 025.
• The desired number will be dialed out.
For SLT Users
• Pick up the handset.
• Dial 8 (users world wide)
OR
• Dial 6 (users in USA)
• Dial Personal Directory Index number: 001 to 025.
• The desired number will be dialed out.
Global Abbreviated Dialing
For EON Users
• Press DSS Key assigned 'Abbreviated Dialing' function (if programmed).
OR
• Dial 8 (users world wide)
748 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
OR
• Dial 6 (users in USA)
• You get the message 'Give Index'
• Enter Global Directory Index number: 100 to 999.
• The desired number will be dialed out.
For SLT Users
• Pick up the handset.
• Dial 8 (users world wide)
OR
• Dial 6 (users in USA)
• Dial Global Directory Index number: 100 to 999.
• The desired number will be dialed out.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 749
Access Codes
What's this?
Access codes are short digit sequences dialed from an extension phone to instruct the PBX to perform a function
such as:
• Calling an extension.
• Calling a group of extensions (“Department Call”).
• Grabbing a trunk line or any trunk line from a group of trunks (“OG Trunk Bundle Group”).
• Turning on/off Digital and Analog Ports.
• Invoking a feature. Activating or deactivating a feature.
Accordingly Access Codes are classified into:
• Station Codes: Codes used for calling extensions, Analog Input Port, Digital Output Port. These codes
are also commonly referred to extension numbers, phone numbers. For the purpose of this document,
station codes are referred to as Flexible Numbers.
Default station codes: the factory-set default values for SLT extensions are from 2001 to 2512; for DKP
extensions from 3001 to 3128; for Analog Output Ports from 3921, 3922….
• Logical Group Codes: codes used for calling a group of stations as in a Department group, a group of
trunks as in Outgoing Trunk Bundle Group.
Default logical group codes: the factory-set codes for Department Numbers start from 3901, 3902….
Outgoing Trunk Bundle Groups from 61, 62, etc.
• Feature Codes: codes used for invoking a feature.
Default feature codes: there are different feature codes for every feature/function of the ETERNITY, e.g.: '2'
for Auto Call Back, '5' for Raid, '13' for Call Forward, etc.
Access codes may consist of single digits or a sequence of a maximum of 6 digits.
You can change the default access codes to codes of your choice. For example: the default Operator code
'9' can be changed to '0'; the default trunk access code for dialing Trunk Group1 can be changed from '61'
to '5'.
How it works
Whenever an access code is dialed from an extension, the system matches each digit in the code with the access
codes programmed within the system to determine the instruction, i.e. whether it is an extension it must call, or a
trunk line it must grab, a port it has to activate, etc. The system processes the instruction when a match is found.
750 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
For example:
• An extension user dials 131 to set Call Forward.
• When the first digit '1' is dialed, the system finds a match. As several default access codes begin with '1'
the system waits for the next digit to be dialed.
• When the second digit '3' is dialed, the system finds a match for '13'.
• As '13' is common for all Call Forward options108, the system waits for the next digit to be dialed
• When the user dials the third digit '1', the system finds a match for '131'.
• If there is more than one access codes matching with '131', e.g. '1311', '1314', '1315' the system will wait
for the next digit to be dialed.
• If no further digit is dialed on expiry of the Inter Digit Wait Timer, the system understands the instruction as
'Call Forward - Unconditional' and waits for the destination phone number to be dialed.
Access Codes are related to various phases of a call. When a call is processed by a PBX, it goes through a
number of pre-defined phases.
Typically a call passes through the different phases as shown below:
Idle Dial Routing Blocked Placed Matured Matured Denied
2-Way 3-Way
No Digits are The system The dialed The dialed Connected Connected No reply
activity. pressed on is processing extension extension is with the with two from dialed
the phone the call. The is busy. ringing. dialed extensions. extension.
keypad/dialed call is neither extension.
from the placed nor
rotary. blocked.
Dial tone is Beeps are Busy tone Ring Back Two-way Three-way Error Tone
played. played. is played. Tone is speech. speech. is played.
played.
Different access codes are dialed at different call phases. Station Codes and Logical Group Codes are dialed in the
'Dial' phase.
As different features are invoked in each call phase, Feature Access Codes are dialed at different call phases. For
example:
• Call Forward code is dialed at the 'Dial' phase'.
• DND Override code is dialed at the 'Routing' phase'
• Auto Call Back code is dialed at the 'Blocked' phase' as well as 'Placed' phase.
• Three-party Conference code is dialed at the 'Matured 2 way' phase.
108. Call forwarding options: Unconditional, When Busy, When No Reply, When Busy or No Reply.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 751
'Idle' phase is when no code is dialed. In the 'Denied Phase' no code is allowed to be dialed.
Each access code in a single call phase may be of different lengths, but must be unique. For example, the
same access code cannot be used for two different features like Call Forward and Redial, since both these
features are invoked in the 'Dial' phase.
However, the same access code can be used for features in different call phases. For example, '4' is the
default feature access code for DND Override (Routing Phase), Call Pick-Up-Group (Dial Phase) and Barge-
In (Blocked Phase).
Similarly, Station and Logical Group Codes too must be unique and should not match with any of the features
invoked in the 'Dial' phase. Refer the topics “Flexible Numbers” and “OG Trunk Bundle Group” to know more.
How to configure
ETERNITY provides default Access Codes for stations, logical groups - department and trunk groups - and
features.
It also provides country-specific default Access Codes which are applied automatically when you select the
'Region' to configure the system.
The default Access Codes for India are presented in the table below. The default Access Code tables also indicate
the call phase in which each feature is invoked.
Call Phases
Feature Access
Feature Matured Matured
Number Code Dial Routing Blocked Placed
2-Way 3-Way
Enter SE Mode 01 1#91 Y Y
Enter SA Mode 02 1#92 Y Y
Call Pick Up-General 03 4 Y Y
Call Pick Up-Selective 04 12 Y Y
Auto Call Back 05 2 Y Y
Cancel Auto Call Back 06 102 Y Y
Redial 07 7 Y Y
Auto Redial 08 17 Y Y
Cancel Auto Redial 09 1070 Y Y
Personal Directory Programming 10 1071 Y Y
Directory Dialing (Global + Personal) 11 8 Y Y
Operator Dialing 12 9 Y Y Y
Call Forward/Call Follow Me 13 13 Y Y
Dynamic Lock 14 14 Y Y
Hot Line 15 15 Y Y
Alarm 16 161 Y Y
Do Not Disturb 17 18 Y Y
752 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Call Phases
Feature Access
Feature Matured Matured
Number Code Dial Routing Blocked Placed
2-Way 3-Way
Interrupt Request 18 3 Y
Barge-In 19 4 Y
Raid 20 5 Y
Trunk Reservation 21 6 Y
Call Toggle 22 1 Y
Conference- 3 Party 23 0 Y
Trunk - to - Trunk Transfer 24 # Y
Conference-Multi Party 25 19 Y Y
Call Park 26 115 Y
Retrieve Parked Call 27 116 Y Y
Room Monitor 28 1073 Y Y
Last Caller Recall 29 1092 Y Y
Voice Help 30 1090 Y Y
Walk-In Class Of Service 31 111 Y Y
Change User Password 32 114 Y Y
Page Zone 33 1074 Y Y
DISA Log In Code 34 1079 Y
Trunk Release (Trunk-to-Trunk
35 ## Y
Speech)
Cancel All Features 36 1051 Y Y
Selective Port Access Code 37 69 Y Y
Flashing on Trunk 38 * Y Y
Change User Status 39 104 Y Y
Account Code by Number 40 1058 Y Y
Account Code by Name 41 1059 Y Y
Background Music 42 1099 Y Y
Meet Me Paging 43 1093 Y Y
Hot Desk 44 1091 Y
DND Override 45 4 Y
Presence Status 46 1097 Y
VMS Live Call Screening 47 1094 Y Y
VMS Conversation Recording 48 1095 Y
Forced Release 49 #* Y
Hold 50 Flash Y
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 753
Call Phases
Feature Access
Feature Matured Matured
Number Code Dial Routing Blocked Placed
2-Way 3-Way
Live Call Supervision 51 1098 Y Y
Forced Answer 52 5 Y
Mute 56 1052 Y Y
Emergency Conference 57 1177 Y
Self Ring Test 58 1057 Y
Set Chain Party 59 1050
SA Command 60 1072 Y Y
Second Trunk Access Code 61 # Y
Floor Service 62 38 Y Y
Keypad Lock DKP 63 - Y
CLIR 64 103 Y
Call Cost Display 65 1075 Y
Reminder 66 162 Y Y
Blind Transfer to Mail Box (VMS) 69 1078 Y
Message Wait Set 70 1076 Y Y
Message Wait Retrieval 71 1077 Y Y
Door Phone - Mode Selection
73 1171
(Scheduled / Manual)
Door Phone - Manual Mode (Local
74 1172 Y Y
(RG) / Remote (External Number)
Opening a Door 75 1173 Y
DOP (ON / OFF) 76 1174 Y Y
Magneto Ring Enable (MRE) 77 # Y
RCOC Invoke 78 **
Scheduled Call Forward 79 1075
Manual Priority Intrusion (MFC R2) 80 *37 Y
Forced Release Order (MFC R2) 81 *38 Y
Call Forward for Department Group 82 1175 Y Y
You can either use the default Access Codes or change them to suit your preferences.
• The following Access Codes are Non-Programmable:
• Enter SE Mode (1#91)
• Enter SA Mode (1#92)
• Only the Prefix of SA Commands '1072' is programmable. See above Table.
754 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Changing Feature Access Codes using Jeeves
• Login as System Engineer.
• Click the ‘Access Codes’ link to open the page.
• Change the Access Codes as per your preference. A maximum of 6 digits.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
If you enter a code that is already assigned to a station or a feature, the system will not accept the
duplicated code. The value will remain unchanged.
• To disable an access code, delete the existing code and leave the field blank.
• Click 'Default' all to default all Access Codes.
To change Station Access Codes (for SLT and DKP), Department Groups, Trunks and Trunk Groups, refer
the topics “Flexible Numbers”, “Department Call”, and “OG Trunk Bundle Group”.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 755
Changing Feature Access Codes using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from an SLT/DKP.
To program the access code for a feature, dial:
• 3111-1-Feature Number-Access Code-#*
Where,
Feature Number is from 01 to 81.
Access Code is a string of maximum 6 digits
• E.g.: To change the prefix of SA command '1072' to '107' dial: 3111-1-60-107-#*
Where,
60 is Feature Number for SA command.
107 is the new Access Code for SA command.
If you try to assign a number string that is already used to access a station or use a feature then the
system will not accept the command and will play error tone.
To default access codes, dial:
• 3161-1-Feature Number to default access codes for a single feature.
• 3161-2-Feature Number-Feature Number to default access codes of a range of features.
• 3161-* to default access codes of all features
Where,
Feature Number is from 01 to 81.
E.g.: To default the prefix of SA command '107' to '1072' dial: 3111-1-60
• Exit SE mode.
756 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Account Codes
What's this?
Account Codes are a very useful feature for organizations such as business consultants, law firms, advertising and
media agencies, and the like that cater to several clients, interacting with third parties on behalf of their clients.
Such organizations need to keep track of calls made to and on behalf of each client.
An 'Account Code' is a unique three-digit number that an organization can assign to each of its clients. Each
Account Code may be given a name and programmed in the Account Name List.
Doing so, whenever calls are made to the client or to a third party on behalf of the client,
• The extension user dials the Account Code or Name assigned to the client.
• The Account Code may be dialed,
• before dialing the external number.
Or
• when in speech with the client/third party (by putting the party on hold).
• Details of these calls are recorded by the Account Code dialed in the Station Message Detail Recording
Report (SMDR) for Outgoing Calls.
• The SMDR report can be printed using the Account Code as filter.
This way, the organization can know the details of calls made to and on behalf of each client.
To illustrate this with an example: An advertising media agency makes nearly 100 calls every day to and
on behalf of its clients that include 'Midas Business Solutions', 'Jet-Set Holidays', 'Bacchus Vineyard',
among several others.
Now, the agency can assign a three-digit account code to Midas Business Solutions, for instance '001' and
the name code 'Midas Biz' in the Account Name List. The same can be done for all other clients. Each time
someone in the agency makes a call to Midas, they may dial either the account code '001' or the account
name 'Midas Biz', either before dialing out the number or when in speech with the client.
The ETERNITY supports as many as 999 Account Codes.
Forced Account Code
The ETERNITY can be programmed to prompt extension users to dial the Account Code whenever they grab a
trunk to dial out a number. The system will allow extension users to dial out numbers only when after they have
dialed the Account Code or Name. Hence the name Forced Account Code for this feature.
The Forced Account Code works in the following manner:
• an extension user dials out the number or the Trunk Access Code to grab a trunk.
• the ETERNITY displays the Account Name List on the DKP of the extension user.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 757
• this List contains the names of clients along with their corresponding account codes, arranged
alphabetically.
• the extension user scrolls through the list to make a selection.
• the number is dialed out.
• Account Codes are applicable for external calls only.
• To use Account Codes, this feature must be included in the Class of Service (CoS) group allowed to
the extensions.
• If you want to use Account Names, you must program the Account Name List.
• When the Forced Account Code is enabled on an extension and trunk, the system will ask the user to
enter the account code irrespective of the method of dialing: Global Abbreviated dialing, Personal
abbreviated dialing, Least Cost Routing, or Selective Trunk Access.
• However, if Forced Account Code is enabled on the selected trunk, and the number is dialed using
Selective Trunk Access, the system will dial out the number using Store and Forward dialing.
In the case of Abbreviated Dialing or Direct Dialing, if the extension user fails to dial the Account Code,
an error message will be displayed on the extension user's DKP.
How to configure
For Account Code to work, the System Engineer must:
1. Enable 'Account Codes' feature in the Class of Service (CoS) of the extensions to which this feature is to
be allowed.
2. Prepare and program the Account Name List, if it is to be used.
3. If Forced Account Code is to be used, the System Engineer must enable 'Forced Account Code' flag in
• the “Station Advanced Feature Template” applied to the extensions from which calls using account
codes are to be made.
• the “Trunk Feature Template” applied on the trunks through which calls using account codes are to be
made.
All the above feature parameters can be programmed using Jeeves or by dialing commands from a
Telephone.
Preparing Account Name List
In consultation with the User, the SE may
• Draw a two-column table on a paper.
• Write Account Codes on one column. Account codes may be any three-digit number between 001 and
999.
758 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Write the Account Names, i.e., names of the clients on the second column, against their respective
Account Codes.
• The names must not exceed 12 characters. For example:
Account Code Client Account Name
001 Midas Biz
002 Jet Set
010 Bacchus
You need not follow a cardinal numbering sequence when assigning Account Codes.
You may assign any code to any client. For instance, you can assign code '111' to Midas Business
Solutions, '222' to Jet-Set Holidays, '333' to Bacchus Vineyard.
Configuring Account Codes using Jeeves
After preparing the Account Name list,
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the 'Account Name' link.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 759
• Enter the Names of the clients against the account codes you have assigned to them. Refer the paper with
the two-column table you created.
• Click ‘Submit’ to save your settings.
Now, include the feature 'Account Codes' in the Class of Service of the extensions.
In the default factory settings, Station Basic Feature Template Number 01 is assigned to all extensions of the
ETERNITY. Template 01 has the feature Account Codes in the default CoS Group (Number 01). So, all extensions
of ETERNITY can use this feature.
If Account Codes is to be allowed only to select stations, follow these steps:
1. Define a CoS group with 'Account Codes' enabled.
2. Prepare a Station Basic Feature Template with this CoS group applicable in all the “Time Zones”.
3. Assign this new Template to the stations to which Account Codes is to be allowed.
Refer the topics “Class of Service (COS)” and “Station Basic Feature Template” for detailed instructions.
If Forced Account Code is to be used, enable the 'Forced Account Code' flag in the “Station Advanced Feature
Template” of the stations and in the “Trunk Feature Template” assigned to the trunks.
When you enable 'Forced Account Code' in a template, this feature will be enabled on all DKP, SLT and
SIP extensions that are assigned this template. If necessary, create a separate template with this feature
and assign this template only to those stations that are to be assigned this feature.
To enable 'Forced Account Code' flag on Trunks,
• Go to the parameters page of the type of trunk you want to program. For example:
'TWT Parameters' page to program TWT Trunk
'Mobile Parameters' page to program GSM Trunk
'SIP Parameters' page to program SIP Trunks
• Click the ‘Trunk Feature Template’ link in the column. The feature template page will open.
By default Trunk Feature Template 01 is assigned to all Trunk Types.
If you want to enable this feature on all trunks, enable it in Trunk Feature Template 01.
If you want to enable this feature only on select trunks, program a different Template number with this
feature.
• Select the ‘Forced Account Code' check box in the template number assigned to the trunk.
• Click 'Submit' to save your changes.
• Return to the trunk parameters page.
• Now change the Trunk Feature Template number of the trunk you want to program. This number should
be the same as the template in which you have enabled the Forced Account Code check box.
760 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Click 'Submit' to save changes.
Repeat the above steps to configure all other trunk types.
Configuring Account Codes using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode.
To create the Account List:
• Dial command 4851-1-Account Code-Account Name
Where,
Account Code is 001 to 999.
Account Name is a string of 12 characters.
Terminate Account Name with #*, if it is less than 12 characters.
For example: to program account code '001' with the name 'Midas Biz', dial
4851-1-001-MIDAS BIZ-#*
Press the digit key '1' twice to give space between characters.
To enable Forced Account Code flag in Station Advanced Feature Template:
• Dial command 5602-1-Template Number-Feature Number-Flag Code
Where,
Template Number is Station Advanced Feature Template from 01 to 50. Default: 01
Feature Number for Forced Account Code is 09.
Flag Code is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
For example: To enable Forced Account Code Flag in Station Advanced Feature Template 02: Dial
5602-1-02-09-1
To apply the Station Advanced Feature Template now programmed with the Forced Account Code on
stations, refer the topic “Customizing Station Advanced Feature Template using a Telephone”.
To enable Forced Account Code flag on a Trunk:
• Dial command 5802-1-Template Number-Feature Number-Flag Code
Where,
Template Number is from 01 to 50.
Feature Number for Forced Account Code flag is 29.
Flag Code is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
For example: To enable Forced Account Code Flag in Trunk Feature Template 01: Dial 5802-1-01-29-1
To apply the Trunk Feature Template now programmed with the Forced Account Code on different
types of trunks, refer the topic “Customizing Trunk Feature Template using a Telephone”.
• Exit SE mode.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 761
How to use
Account Codes can be dialed in two ways: by Number and by Names.
Account codes, i.e. number and names, can be dialed:
• before making the call,
• during the call,
• when grabbing a trunk (if Forced Account Code flag is enabled).
Print and hand out copies of the Account Code List to everyone in the organization for reference while
making calls.
Dialing Account Code by Number
For EON Users and Extended IP Phone Users
To enter Account Code Number before making the call:
• Press DSS Key assigned to 'Account Code by Number'.
OR
• Dial 1058
• Enter Account Code
• Dial Trunk Access Code
• Dial the number of the client.
To enter Account Code Number during the call:
• Press Hold key to put called party on hold.
• Press DSS Key assigned to Account Code by Number.
OR
• Dial 1058
• Enter Account Code
• Speech will be resumed.
To enter Account Code Number when Forced Account Code Flag is enabled:
For EON Users and Extended IP Phone Users
• Dial Trunk Access Code to grab a trunk.
• You get error tone.
• Go ON-hook and then go OFF-hook.
• Press DSS Key assigned to Account Code by Number.
762 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
OR
• Dial 1058
• Enter the Account Code Number on the prompt.
• You get dial tone.
• Dial Trunk Access Code followed by the number of the client.
For SLT Users
• Dial Trunk Access Code to grab a trunk.
• You get error tone.
• Go ON hook.
• Go OFF hook.
• Dial Account Code first.
• Dial Trunk Access Code followed by the number of the client.
Dialing Account Code by Name
Dialing Account Code by Names is possible only if your phone is a DKP.
For EON Users and Extended IP Phone Users
To enter Account Code Name before making the call:
• Press DSS Key assigned to Account Code by Name.
OR
• Dial 1059.
• Enter the initial letter of the client's name.
The Account Name List will be displayed on your DKP, alphabetically with the corresponding account
codes.
• Scroll to select the desired client name and press Enter key.
• Dial Trunk Access Code.
• Dial the client's number.
To enter Account Code Name during the call:
• Press Hold key to put the called party on hold.
• Press DSS Key assigned to Account Code by Name.
OR
• Dial 1059.
• Dial the initial letter of the client's name.
The Account Name List will be displayed on your phone, alphabetically with the corresponding account
codes.
• Scroll to select the desired client name and press Enter key.
Speech will be resumed with the called party.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 763
Dialed the wrong account code or name?
If you have dialed the wrong account code or name while in the middle of a call, you can correct it by
pressing 'Hold' again and following the steps described above. The system will override the previously
dialed account code or name.
Printing Call Reports of Clients
You can print the call details of your clients using their account codes as filter.
Refer the section “Station Message Detail Recording-Report”, for more detailed instructions on printing reports
using filters.
764 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Alarms
What's this?
Alarms are an efficient and user-friendly feature available to all extensions of the ETERNITY.
Alarms can be set and canceled
• by the Operator for extension users.
• by the extension users for themselves.
Alarms can be set as:
• Once Only - A one-time call, where the extension phone rings at the set time.
• Daily - A repeat call, where the extension phone rings at the set time everyday.
Alarms can be served as:
• Personalized - The Operator greets the extension user to serve the alarm request.
• Automated - The system serves the alarm request by playing a voice message or music.
How it works
Personalized Alarm
When the Alarm serving mechanism is configured as 'Personalized',
• The Operator phone rings first109, displaying the number of the extension to which the alarm is to be
served.
• When the Operator answers this call, a call is placed on the extension on which the alarm is set.
• The extension rings for the duration of the Alarm Ring Timer.
• When the extension user answers the call, the Operator greets the extension user with the time and alarm
message.
• This event is recorded in the Hotel-Motel Activity Log as 'Wake-up Alarm of <HH:MM> Answered on
<phone number>'.
• If the extension user does not answer the call till the Alarm Ring Timer has elapsed, the Operator phone
will display a text message notifying 'No Reply' from the extension. The Alarm is now considered as
served.
109. The Operator phone rings for the duration of the Alarm Ring Timer. If the Operator does not answer the call, the ETERNITY will
make two more Alarm Attempts at an Alarm Attempt Interval of 5 minutes to call the Operator.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 765
• This event is recorded in the Hotel-Motel Activity log as 'Wake-up Alarm of <HH:MM> No Reply on <Phone
Number>'.
• If the extension is busy110, the Operator phone will display a text message notifying that the extension
number is 'Busy'.
• The Operator can now choose to
• inform the extension user about the alarm in person or send someone to do it.
• try the busy extension again.
• set “Auto Call Back (ACB)”.
Automated Alarm
When the Alarm serving mechanism is configured as 'Automated',
• The extension phone rings at the set time till the end of the Alarm Ring Timer. If the extension phone is
from the EON series, an Alarm message will appear on its display.
• When the extension user answers the call, s/he may be played music-on-hold, or a pre-recorded voice
message, or a music/message from an external source111, or be connected to a routing group, depending
upon the Alarm Notification Type programmed by the System Engineer.
The System Engineer may consult with the Enterprise to decide which of these options is to be
programmed as the Alarm Notification Type.
• If the extension user does not answer the alarm call, the ETERNITY makes two more attempts (in all, 3
attempts) at an interval of 5 minutes between each attempt, to call the extension. (Each attempt is
recorded in the Hotel-Motel Activity log as 'Wake-up Alarm of <HH:MM> No Reply on <Phone Number>'.
• If all Alarm attempts go unanswered, the ETERNITY places the call on the Operator phone. The Operator
phone rings till the end of the Alarm Ring Timer. The Operator phone displays the extension number with
the message 'No Reply'. The Alarm is now considered as served. (This event is recorded as "Alarm
Notification to Front Desk for <Phone Number>").
• If the extension phone is busy ETERNITY will continue to make Alarm Attempts at the Alarm Interval
programmed. When all Alarm Attempts go unanswered, the ETERNITY will place a call on the Operator
phone. The Operator phone will display the number of the extension phone with the message 'Busy'.
The Snooze function can be added to Automated-Alarms to ensure that the extension user answers the
call. Snooze is a system-wide feature; when set, this function will be added to all Automated Alarms.
When Snooze is activated,
• The extension phone rings for the Number of Alarm Attempts programmed, at set Alarm Attempt
Intervals.
110. An improperly placed receiver may also be the cause for the busy tone on the extension phone. In that case, the system will notify
the Operator Phone with the 'OFF-Hook Alert'. This event is recorded in the Hotel-Motel Activity Log as "Alarm not Served, <phone
number> is Busy".
111. This device can be connected to the Analog Input Port of ETERNITY.
766 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• The extension stops ringing, when the extension user answers the call and dials the Code '0' to
acknowledge the Alarm. Please note that this Alarm Acknowledgement Code is non-programmable.
Alarm Status Report
The Operator can know the status of Alarms (details of Alarms that have not been served) from the WakeUp
Alarms Reports from SA mode. The WakeUp Alarms Report is useful when Operators change shifts.
The status of Alarms set by Operator as well as extension users appears on this report, with details of time (hours
and minutes), type (once only, daily), and serving mechanism (personalized, automated).
The Operator can generate the Alarm report any time, or can set the system to automatically generate the Alarm
Report at a particular time. This is referred to as Scheduled Alarm Report.
The Alarm Report generated by the system can be printed or sent to a computer.
• ETERNITY can register as many as 960 Alarm requests set by the Operator and extension users.
• Multiple Alarms can be set for an extension by the Operator and/or by the extension user. For example,
Daily Alarm at 09:00am is set for an extension. The extension user wants to change the alarm time to
08:30am for a day. The extension user/Operator can set another alarm, i.e. a Once Only Alarm, at
08:30am without disturbing the daily alarm. Both the Alarms will ring at the set time.
• When multiple alarm requests have been set on an extension, if the Operator/extension user cancels
an alarm set for an extension, the system cancels all alarms set for the extension. It is not possible to
cancel any of these alarms selectively.
• It is not possible to modify an alarm request. Instead, the alarm request should be canceled and a new
one should be made.
• The duration of Alarm Ring Timer, the Number of Alarm Attempts and the Alarm Attempt Interval are
programmable.
• Alarms can be set for all extensions of the ETERNITY, including the Operator phone also.
• All the Alarm events are logged in the "Hotel-Motel Activity Log".
• Alarm settings will be retained in the system during power down and system upgrades.
How to configure
The following parameters play an important role in the functioning of the Alarm feature. These parameters carry
default values. The default values have been selected keeping the larger user base in mind. However, these values
can be changed by the System Engineer at the time of installation or afterwards as per users' requirements.
1. Alarm Ring Timer - The duration for which the system rings the extension to serve an Alarm call. By
default, the Alarm Ring Timer is set to 45 seconds. This timer can be set between 001 to 255 seconds.
This timer also signifies the duration for which the Operator phone rings to notify that an Alarm call has not
been answered or the extension phone is busy.
2. Number of Alarm Attempts - Number of times the system attempts to place an Alarm call on the
extension phone before notifying the Operator that the call is not answered or the phone is busy. By
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 767
default, the Number of Alarm Attempts is set to '3'. The Number of Alarm Attempts can be set between 1
and 9.
3. Alarm Attempt Interval - The time period between each Alarm Call attempt. By default, the Alarm Attempt
Interval is set to 5 minutes. The Alarm Attempt Interval can be set between 1 and 9.
4. Snooze Functionality - Snooze is a functionality which forces the extension user to acknowledge the
Alarm call. With snooze functionality enabled, the system expects the user to answer the Alarm call by
going OFF-Hook and dial Acknowledgement code '0'. With snooze functionality disabled, the system
considers the Alarm as answered when the extension user simply answers the alarm call by going OFF-
Hook (dialing acknowledgement code is not mandatory). Users may choose whether or not to enable
snooze functionality. By default, snooze functionality is disabled.
5. Configurable Alarm Type - When the Operator and extension user set an Alarm call request, the system
gives them the choice of setting 'Once Only' or 'Daily' Alarm calls.
User experience however, shows that 'Once Only' Alarm call requests are more common than 'Daily' Alarm
requests. So, ETERNITY allows you the flexibility of setting 'Once Only' as the default Alarm Type, by
disabling the 'Configuring Alarm Type' flag.
When this flag is disabled the system will prompt the Operator/Extension user to enter the Time of the
Alarm call and consider the Alarm Type as 'Once Only'.
By default, this flag is disabled.
6. Configurable Alarm Category - When the Operator sets an Alarm call for an extension, the system
prompts the Operator to select an Alarm Type (Once Only or Daily) and to select the alarm serving
mechanism - 'Automated or Personalized'.
If the Enterprise wishes to offer only 'Automated' Alarms to its extension users, ETERNITY allows the
flexibility to set 'Automated' as the default Alarm call serving mechanism. This can be done by disabling
the 'Configurable Alarm Category' flag.
When this flag is disabled, the system will consider the Alarm call serving mechanism as 'Automated' and
will prompt the Operator only for the Time of the Alarm call.
By default, this flag is disabled.
• When both flags 'Configurable Alarm Type' and 'Configurable Alarm Category' are disabled, the system
will set and serve 'Once Only - Automated' alarms only.
• If the 'Configurable Alarm Type' flag is disabled, but the 'Configurable Alarm Category' flag is enabled,
the system will set 'Once Only' alarm calls, but give the option of selecting 'Automated' or
'Personalized' as the serving mechanism.
• Similarly, if 'Configurable Alarm Type' is enabled, but the 'Configurable Alarm Category' flag is disabled,
the system will allow both 'Once Only' and 'Daily' alarms to be set, but the serving mechanism will be
'Automated'.
7. Alarm Notification Type - This is the means of notifying the extension user about the Alarm call. The
extension user can be played Music-On-Hold, Live Music, Pre-recorded Voice Message, Weather
information, Date and Time, etc. The ETERNITY supports four types of Alarm Notifications:
768 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
a. Voice Message: Selecting this option would play a message recorded in the Voice Module to the
extension user when s/he answers the Alarm call.
b. Music-On-Hold: Selecting this option would play music-on-hold to the extension user when s/he
answers the Alarm call.
c. External Music Source: Selecting this option would connect the extension user to live music when he
answers the Alarm call.
However, for this option to work the System Engineer should connect a live music source to the Analog
Input Port of ETERNITY. The live music source can be replaced by any other form of music. Please
refer the 'Technical Specifications' of Analog Input Port.
d. Routing Group: Selecting this option would connect the extension user to the stations programmed in
the Alarm Notification Group. The System Engineer may connect a device which can play customized
alarm greetings with date, time, weather conditions, traffic conditions, a marketing message, etc. on the
stations programmed in the Alarm Notification Group.
Alarm Notification Type must be configured at the time of installation.
8. Macros - This is a short code for simulating the Alarm call. The SLTs with special function keys send a
fixed string to the system, when each function key is pressed. The system interprets this string and
translates it into a string that can be understood by the system. For example, the SLT has a special
function key for Alarm calls which sends the string '51' to the system. The system can be programmed to
translate '51' into the feature access code for Alarm calls, '*161'.
All the above listed parameters can be programmed using Jeeves and a Telephone.
Configuring Alarm Parameters using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Under ‘Hotel Settings’, click the 'Hotel Parameters' link.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 769
• Configure the Alarm Call parameters:
• Use Alarm with snooze - enable this flag if you want to use the Snooze function for the Alarm Call.
• Alarm Ring Timer (Sec.) - you may change the time for which the Alarm Call will ring on the extension
phone and the time for which the Operator phone will ring to notify an unanswered Alarm Call.
• Number of Alarm Attempts - you may increase or decrease the number of attempts the system
should make to serve an Alarm call.
• Alarm Attempt Interval - you may increase or decrease the time gap between each attempt the
system makes to serve an Alarm call.
• Configurable Alarm Type flag - disable this flag, if you do not what the system to provide the
Operator and the extension users the option of setting 'Once Only' or 'Daily' Alarms. When this flag is
disabled, the system will allow only 'Once Only' alarms to be set.
• Configurable Alarm Category - disable this flag, if you do not want the system to provide the Operator
the option of setting 'Personalized' or 'Automated' Alarm calls. When this flag is disabled, the system
will follow the 'Automated' Alarm call serving mechanism. The Operator will not be prompted to choose
between 'Automated' and 'Personalized' Alarm calls when setting Alarm calls for an extension phone.
• The flags ‘Configurable Alarm Type’ and ‘Configurable Alarm Category’ are not applicable for Voice-
guided Alarms. In the case of Voice-guided Alarms, the Operator/Extension user will be prompted to
select the Alarm type and serving mechanism, each time, even when both aforementioned flags are
disabled.
770 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Click 'Submit' to save changes.
• Click 'Station Advanced Feature Template' to open the page.
• Select an Advanced Feature Template number (by default Template 01 is assigned to all extension
phones).
• Scroll with the horizontal bar to reach the column 'Alarm Notification Type'.
• Select the desired Alarm Notification Type to be set on all extension phones: Voice Message, Music-On-
Hold, External Music Source, Routing Group.
• If you select the Alarm Notification Type = Voice Message, ensure that you assign a voice module to
'Alarm' voice message application. Please refer topic “Voice Message Applications” for more details.
• If you select the Alarm Notification Type = Music-On-Hold, no further configuration is required.
• If you select the Alarm Notification Type = External Music Source, make sure you connect a music source
to the 'Analog Input Port' of the system. Please refer 'Technical Specifications' of the Analog Input Port for
more details.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 771
• If you select the Alarm Notification Type = Routing Group, you must program the Routing Group.
Click 'Alarm Notification Group' in the next column.
772 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The 'Routing Groups' page will open. By default Routing Group 31 is designated as Alarm Notification
Group. You may program this Routing Group, or select another.
If you selected a different Routing Group, program it and enter the number of this group in the 'Alarm
Notification Group' field of the Station Advanced Feature Template.
• If you selected 'Routing Group', and have connected a device capable of playing messages when serving
an alarm call, read Customized Alarm Messaging Devices for further instructions.
• Click Submit at the bottom of the page to save the change in the Template.
• Apply the Template now configured with the Alarm Notification Type to the extension phones.
Refer the topic “Station Advanced Feature Template” for instructions on applying this template to SLTs,
DKPs and ISDN Terminals.
If you want to set different Alarm Notification Types for different stations112, it is recommended that you
program separate Station Advanced Feature Templates for each Alarm Notification Type. On each station,
apply the Template with the relevant Alarm Notification Type that you want program for that station.
112. For example, play Music-on-hold on a few extensions, pre-recorded voice messages on some extensions, music/message from an
external source on some extensions, and customized alarm greetings from external devices on others.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 773
Now, to program SLTs with special Alarm function key,
• Click 'Macros' to open the page.
• In the field 'Number String', enter the strings to be replaced with on receiving the strings from the SLT.
• In the field 'Access Codes', enter the strings sent by the SLT on pressing the special function key for
'Alarms'. For example, if the SLT sends a string '51' to the ETERNITY, program the string '*161' (feature
access code for Alarms) in the field 'Number String', and enter the string '51' in the corresponding field viz.
'Access code'.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save the changes.
Configuring the Alarm Parameters using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To configure Alarm Ring Timer, dial:
• 2201-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255. Default: 45 seconds.
To configure Number of Alarm Attempts, dial:
• 2202-Number of Alarm Attempts
Where,
Number of Alarm Attempts is from 1 to 9. Default: 3.
774 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To configure Alarm Attempt Interval, dial:
• 2203-Alarm Attempt Interval
Where,
Alarm Attempt Interval is from 1 to 9 minutes. Default: 5 minutes.
To configure Snooze function, dial:
• 2204-Snooze
Where,
Snooze is 0 or 1.
Select '0' to disable Snooze and '1' to enable snooze.
To disable/enable Configurable Alarm Type, dial:
• 2208-Flag
Where,
Flag is 0 for Disable, 1 for Enable1. Default: Enabled.
To disable/enable Configurable Alarm Category, dial:
• 2209-Flag
Where,
Flag is 0 for Disable, 1 for Enable. Default: Enabled
To configure Alarm Notification Type, dial:
• 5602-1-Template Number-12-Alarm Notification Type
Where,
Template Number is Station Advanced Feature Template from 01 to 50.
Default: 01.
Alarm Notification Type is:
1 for Music on Hold
2 for Voice Message (Voice Modules)
3 for External Music Source
4 for Routing Group
For example: To program Routing Group as Notification Type in Station Advanced Feature Template
02: Dial 5602-1-02 -12-4
To apply the Station Advanced Feature Template now programmed with the Alarm Notification Type to
extension phones, refer the topic “Customizing Station Advanced Feature Template using a
Telephone”.
To program Macros, dial the following commands:
• Dial command 1810-Macro Index-Number String to create a macro.
Where,
Macro Index is from 01 to 25 (as 25 macros can be created)
Number String is the feature access code for Alarm, in this case '*163'
Terminate the command with #* as the number string is less than 24 digits.
For example: to create a macro for Alarm on Index 2: dial 1810-02-*163-#*
• Dial command 1810-Macro Index-#* to clear a macro.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 775
• Dial command 3115-1-Macro Index-Access Code to program Access code (i.e. number sent to the
system by the SLT)
Where,
Macro Index is from 01 to 25 Access Code is a string of 4-digits.
If the length of the Access code is less than 4-digits terminate the command with #*
For example: To program access code '53' for the macro for Alarm dial: 3115-1-02-53-#*
• Dial command 3115-1-Macro Index to clear the Access code for the macro.
• Exit SE mode.
Configuring Customized Alarm Messaging Devices
Alarm Messaging devices play real-time updated information like the date and time, greetings, weather information,
Road highway status, specific event announcements, etc. when called upon. These devices should be connected
to the ETERNITY on its SLT ports.
If the User wants to connect customized alarm messaging devices to the ETERNITY, the SE should configure the
system as instructed below:
• Connect the devices for customized alarm greetings to SLT ports only.
• Log into Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the 'Routing Groups' link to open the page.
776 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Select the default Routing Group 31 used for Alarm Notification Group, or any other Routing Group
number.
• Select 'SLT' as the 'Member Type' and enter the SLT 'Port Number' where the device is connected. It is
possible to configure 32 members in a single routing group.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 777
If only one device is connected, disable all other members from 02-32 by setting 'Member Type' to 'None'.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
• Open the 'Station Advanced Feature Template' page. By default Template Number 01 is applied to all
stations. The template has 'Voice Message' as default notification type. It is recommended that you
program another Template.
• Select 'Routing Group' as the Alarm Notification Type in the template you have selected for configuration.
• Enter the number of the 'Alarm Notification Routing Group' (default group: 31) in which you have
programmed the device (SLT port).
• Click Submit at the bottom of the page to save changes.
• Apply the Advanced Feature Template now configured with 'Routing Group' as Alarm Notification Type
and the number of the Alarm Notification Routing Group to the stations.
• Refer the section “Station Advanced Feature Template” for instructions on applying this template to
extension phones.
Configuring Generation of Alarm Reports using Jeeves
To generate Alarm Reports, you must program the following:
1. Destination Port (Communication Port/Printer Port113) for Hotel Reports.
113. Communication Port if you are using ETERNITY ME.
778 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
2. Parameters of Communication Port114/Printer Port.
3. Scheduled Alarm Report flag.
4. Time for printing the report.
The first two parameters can be programmed using Jeeves and a Telephone.
The last two parameters, i.e. the Scheduled Alarm Report flag and the Time for the report must be set from the
SA mode.
Configuring Scheduled Alarm Report Generation using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Go to 'Hotel Setting'.
• Under ‘Hotel Settings’, click the 'Hotel Parameters' link.
• Go to 'Destination Port of Hotel Reports' and select the Communication Port/Printer port to be assigned.
• Click 'Submit' to save your settings. If a 'Communication Port' is selected, program the parameters of the
port.
114. Speed/Baud Rate, Data Bits, Parity, Flow Control, DSR sensing.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 779
• Click the 'Communication Ports' link to open the page and program the parameters of the COM Port that
has been assigned as the destination port.
• Click 'Submit' to save changes.
Configuring Scheduled Alarm Report Generation using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To assign Destination Port for Hotel Reports, dial:
• 3701-Destination Port Code
Where,
Destination Port Code,
0 is None 1 is for COM Port 1
2 is for COM Port 2
3 is for Printer Port
For example: to assign Printer Port as destination port, dial 3701-3
• Exit SE mode.
To program parameters of the COM Port assigned as the Destination Port using SE commands, refer the
topic “Communication Ports” for instructions.
780 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
How to use
Alarms can be set by the extension users by themselves. The extension users can also ask the Operator to set the
alarm for them.
Alarms set/canceled by Operator
The Operator can set/cancel non-voice guided Alarms using EON or SLT.
Operator using EON
Using DSS Key:
To set Alarm for the extension user,
• Press the key assigned the 'Remote Alarm' function.
• Enter the Extension Number.
• Enter Time in HH:MM
• Select 'Once Only' or 'Daily'.
• Press 'Enter' key.
• Select 'Personalized' or 'Automated'.
• Press 'Enter' key to set Alarm.
• You get a confirmation tone and a text message with the phone number for which the alarm is set.
• Go Idle or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.
To cancel Alarms,
• Press key assigned the 'Remote Alarm' function.
• Enter Extension Number.
• Select 'Cancel All'.
• Press 'Enter' Key.
Using Commands:
To set Alarm for the extension user,
• Pick up the handset.
• Dial 1072-003.
• Enter Extension number.
• Enter Time in HH:MM
• Dial 1 for Once Only or Dial 2 for Daily
• Dial 1 for Personalized or Dial 2 for Automated.
• Press 'Enter' key to set Alarm.
• You get a confirmation tone and a text message with the phone number for which the alarm is set.
• Replace handset or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.
To cancel Alarms,
• Pick up the handset.
• Dial 1072-003.
• Enter Extension Number.
• Dial #.
• You get a confirmation tone and a text message with the phone number for which the alarm is canceled.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 781
• Replace handset or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.
Alarms set/cancel by Extension Users
Extension Users using EON
If the extension user has EON, alarms can be set using the DSS key as well as by dialing the command.
Using DSS Key:
To set Alarm,
• Press the key assigned the 'Alarm' function.
• Enter Time in HH:MM
• Select 'Once Only' or 'Daily'.
• Press 'Enter' key.
• You get a confirmatory text message and confirmation tone.
• Go Idle or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.
To cancel Alarms,
• Press the key assigned the 'Alarm' function.
• Select 'Cancel All'.
• Press 'Enter' Key.
Dialing Commands:
To set Alarm,
• Pick up the handset.
• Dial 161.
• Enter Time in HH:MM (24-hours format)
• Dial 1 for Once Only or Dial 2 for Daily.
• Press 'Enter' key.
• You get a confirmatory text message and confirmation tone.
• Replace handset or you get dial tone after 3 seconds
To cancel Alarms,
• Pick up the handset.
• Dial 161.
• Dial #.
• You get a confirmatory text message and confirmation tone.
• Replace handset or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.
Extension Users using SLT
To set Alarms,
• Pick up the handset.
• Dial 161.
• Dial HH:MM
• Dial 1 for Once Only or Dial 2 for Daily.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace the handset on the cradle.
782 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To cancel Alarms,
• Pick up the handset.
• Dial 161.
• Dial #.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace the handset.
• Extension users can set only automated alarms from their phones. For personalized alarms, they must
request the Operator.
• If there are multiple alarms set, alarms cannot be canceled selectively. Only the Operator can cancel
alarms selectively from SA mode.
• Alarms set on an extension will be served, even if DND is also set on the same extension.
Generating Scheduled Alarm Reports
To generate Scheduled Alarm Report, the Operator must
• enable the Scheduled Alarm Report.
• set the time to generate the Scheduled Alarm Report.
Both are possible from the SA mode only.
The Operator may dial the following SA commands using EON or an SLT. It is assumed that the Operator is in
SA mode.
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users
To enable Scheduled Alarm Report:
• Pick up the handset.
• Dial 1072-036-1.
• You get a confirmatory text message and a confirmation tone.
To set time for Scheduled Alarm Report:
• Dial 1072-037.
• Dial Time in Hours and Minutes (HH:MM)
• You get a confirmatory text message and a confirmation tone.
• Go Idle or you get dial tone after 3 seconds
To disable Scheduled Alarm Report:
• Pick up the handset.
• Dial 1072-036-0.
• You get a confirmatory text message and a confirmation tone.
• Go Idle or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.
For SLT Users
• Pick up the handset.
• Dial 1072-036-1 to enable Scheduled Alarm Report.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 783
• You get confirmation tone.
• Dial 1072-037.
• You get feature tone.
• Dial Time in HH:MM.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace the handset.
The system will print the Scheduled Alarm Report at the time set by the Operator at the designated
Destination port.
The SLT from which the Operator dials these commands must have the features 'Allow SA Commands' and
'System Administrator (SA) Mode' enabled in its Class of Service.
Printing Alarm Reports
When Scheduled Alarm Report is enabled and the time is set, the system will automatically print the report at the
set time. The Operator can also print Alarm Status Report any time s/he using SA commands.
The Operator can issue SA commands from EON or an SLT to print Alarm Status Reports.
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users
• Press the key assigned the 'Print Alarm Report' function (if programmed.
OR
• Dial 1072-913.
• You get a confirmatory text message and a confirmation tone.
• Go Idle or you get dial tone after 3 seconds
• The Alarm Report will be printed on the destination port (Communication/Printer Port) assigned.
For SLT Users
• Pick up the handset.
• Dial 1072-913.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace the Handset on the cradle.
• The Alarm Report will be printed on the assigned port (Communication/Printer Port)
Viewing Alarm Status
The Operator can view the status of Alarms that are yet to be served from the System Administrator pages of
Jeeves. To view Alarm Status,
• Open Jeeves.
• Log in as System Administrator.
• Click the 'Reports' link.
784 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Under ‘Reports’, click the 'Wakeup Alarms'.
• The unserved Alarm calls will appear on your screen.
• You can cancel any of the unserved Alarm calls by selecting the check-box and clicking the 'Cancel
Selected Alarms' button on this page.
• You can also print this page by clicking the 'Print' button on this page.
• Click 'Close' to exit the page.
• Click 'Logout' to exit SA mode.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 785
Wakeup/Alarm Report AS ON 18-03-2011(Fri) AT 23:49
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Room# Phone# Wakeup D P Room# Phone# Wakeup D P
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3001 12:18 2017 14:12
3001 12:21 2017 12:14
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
* indicates Daily Alarm and + indicates Personal Alarm Page : 1
---End of Report---
786 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Alternate Number Dialing
What's this?
Alternate Number Dialing allows you to dial different phone numbers in an attempt to reach a person whose line is
busy.
Alternate Number Dialing is useful when the person or organization you are trying to reach has more than one
number, where they may be reached. The system dials out different phone numbers of the same party, saving you
time and effort of dialing each of these numbers manually.
How it works
This feature works as an extension of the features “Last Number Redial” and “Auto Redial”. It requires you to
program Alternate Number Groups in the Global Directory first. With the alternate numbers programmed in the
Global Directory, all you need to do is to use Last Number Redial or Auto Redial, every time you want the system to
try Alternate Number Dialing.
For example: Midas Business Solutions has four telephone numbers: 2640459, 2631235, 2635589 and 2565590.
To be able to use Alternate Number Dialing, you must first program all four numbers as Alternate Number Group in
the Global Directory.
Now, when you dial one of these numbers, '2640459', and get a busy tone, you can either initiate Last Number
Redial or set an Auto Redial request.
When you initiate Last Number Redial,
• The system will dial an alternative number for the dialed number.
• If the redialed number is busy, you can set Last Number Redial again.
• The system will dial a second alternative number.
• If the second alternative number is also busy, you can set Last Number Redial again.
• The system will dial a third alternative number.
• This process will be repeated each time you set Last Number Redial, until the call gets through.
When you set an Auto Redial request on busy tone,
• The system will dial an alternative number.
• If the alternative number is busy, the system will redial another alternative number.
• The system will dial a different (alternative) number on each auto redial attempt115, until the call gets
through.
115. The number of auto redial attempts depends on the Auto Redial Count programmed in the system. By default, the system will
make 5 redial attempts if Auto Redial 'normal' is set. If Auto Redial 'Priority' is set, the system will make 20 redial attempts.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 787
• (for the number of redial attempts programmed), until the call gets through.
• when any of the alternate numbers gets through, the system will give a ring on your extension.
This process is illustrated in the graphic below:
(Busy) 2630555
( Bu
Calling Party sy)
2630556
2630557
ETERNITY
• Alternate Number Dialing will work only on extensions that are allowed the features “Last Number
Redial” in their “Class of Service (COS)”
• Also, Alternate Number Dialing will work only for those numbers that exist in the Global Directory
assigned to each extension. The Global Directory is divided into three parts, 100-399 (Part 1), 400-699
(Part 2), and 700-999 (Part 3). If an extension is assigned only Global Directory Part 2, Alternate
Number Dialing will work only for those numbers grouped as Alternate Number Groups in Global
Directory Part 2.
• Alternate Number Dialing will work also with “Abbreviated Dialing”. For example, an extension user
dials the abbreviated code 8100, and the dialed out number is busy. When the extension user sets
Redial or Auto Redial, the ETERNITY will try the alternate numbers related to 8100.
How to configure
For Alternate Number Dialing to work, the System Engineer must:
1. Make a List of Alternate Numbers.
2. Create Alternate Number Groups.
3. Program Alternate Number Groups in the Global Directory.
4. Enable the features 'Last Number Redial', 'Global Directory', in the Class of Service (CoS) group of the
extensions to which Alternate Number Dialing facility is to be provided. If desired, 'Auto Redial', 'Auto
Redial Priority' may also be enabled in the CoS of these extensions.
All of the above parameters can be programmed using Jeeves or dialing SE Commands from a telephone.
• To create Alternate Number Groups, the alternate numbers must exist in the Global Directory. If any of
the alternate numbers do not exist in the Global Directory, first program the numbers in the directory,
before you begin creating Alternate Number Groups. Refer the topic “Abbreviated Dialing” for
instructions on programming the Global Directory.
788 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• As Alternate Number Dialing works only for the Alternate Number Groups in the Global Directory
assigned to each extension, ensure that the relevant Global Directory with the Alternate Number
Groups is allowed in the CoS of the extensions.
Preparing Alternate Number List
In consultation with the User, you may:
• Draw a two-column table on a paper.
• Write the name of the contact on one column and the Alternate Numbers for the contact on the other
column.
• Make a list of the numbers which need to be grouped as alternate numbers. For example:
Name of the Contact Alternate Numbers
Midas Business Solutions 2640459, 2631235, 2635589, 2565590
Jet Set Holidays 022281110001, 022281110002
Bacchus Vineyard 2640075, 2640076
GoodLife Inn 2788856, 2788896
You may include as many alternate numbers as required by the User.
Creating Alternate Number Groups
• Assign the alternate numbers of each of contacts to an 'Alternate Number Group'.
• Each group must be assigned a number between 000 to 255.
• Taking the above example further, the Alternate Number Groups on the list may be numbered as follows:
Name of the Contact Alternate Numbers Alternate Number Group (No.)
Midas Business Solutions 2640459, 2631235, 2635589, 2565590 001
Jet Set Holidays 022281110001, 022281110002 002
Bacchus Vineyard 2640075, 2640076 003
GoodLife Inn 2788856, 2788896 004
Programming Alternate Number Groups in Global Directory using Jeeves
Make sure that the numbers on the list are also programmed in the Global Directory. If any of these numbers do not
exist in the Global directory already, program them in the Global Directory first. Refer the topic “Abbreviated Dialing”
for instructions on programming the Global Directory.
To create Alternate Number Groups and program them in the Global Directory,
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 789
• Click the 'Abbreviated Dialing' link.
• Click the 'Global Directory' to open the page.
• Click the 'Advance' button on the bottom of this page.
• Enter the number of the Alternate Number Group in the last column of the page.
For example, you have assigned Alternate Number Group '001' to all the numbers of the contact Midas
Business Solutions, enter this number against each number belonging to this contact.
Similarly, enter Alternate Group number '004' against the numbers belonging to the 'GoodLife Inn' to which
it is assigned.
Memory Outgoing Trunk Alternate
Number Name
Location Bundle Group Number Group
100 01 2640459 Midas Biz 001
101 01 2631235 Midas Biz 001
102 01 2635589 Midas Biz 001
103 01 2565590 Midas Biz 001
104 01 2788856 GoodLife Inn 004
105 01 022281110001 Jet Set 002
106 01 022281110002 Jet Set 002
790 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Memory Outgoing Trunk Alternate
Number Name
Location Bundle Group Number Group
107 01 033298765432 R. Mendez 000
108 01 2640075 Bacchus 003
109 01 2640076 Bacchus 003
: : : : :
129 01 2788896 GoodLife Inn 004
The numbers of the contacts may not necessarily appear alphabetically or in a sequence. It is possible that
the numbers of the same contact may be programmed at different memory locations in the Global
Directory.
In the above example, one number of the GoodLife Inn is programmed at memory location Index 104 and
the other on Index 129. Since these two numbers are grouped and assigned the number alternate group
number '004', this number must be entered against the GoodLife Inn numbers at the respective memory
location Index.
• After assigning Alternate Number Groups, click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
• Enable the features 'Last Number Redial' and 'Global Directory', in the Class of Service (CoS) group of the
extensions to which Alternate Number Dialing facility is to be provided. If desired, 'Auto Redial', 'Auto
Redial Priority' may also be enabled in the CoS of these extensions.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 791
By default Station Basic Feature Template Number 01 is assigned to all extensions of ETERNITY. The
default CoS Group 01 in this template has 'Redial' enabled in the set of 'Basic Features', so all extensions
of ETERNITY can use Last Number Redial.
However, the default CoS Group 01 has only Global Directory Part 1 enabled.
Recall that Alternate Number Dialing will work only for those numbers that exist in the Global Directory
assigned to each extension. So, the Global Directory Part containing the Alternate Number Groups must
be allowed to the extensions in their Class of Service. For example, if Alternate Number Groups are
programmed in Global Directory Part 2, extensions must have Global Directory Part 2 in their Class of
Service.
If all extensions are to be allowed the Alternate Number Dialing facility, simply enable the Global
Directories containing Alternate Number groups in the default CoS group 01.
However, if Alternate Number Dialing is to be allowed to select extensions only, define a new CoS group
and prepare a new Station Basic Feature Template with this CoS group and apply it to the desired
extensions.
Refer the topics “Class of Service (COS)” and “Station Basic Feature Template” for detailed instructions.
The Station Basic Feature Template 01 does not have the features Auto Redial and Auto Redial Priority in
the default CoS group 01. If these features are also to be allowed to the extensions, enable them in the
CoS you prepare.
Programming Alternate Number Groups in Global Directory using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To assign Alternate Group Numbers, dial:
• 1804-1-Memory Location Code-Alternate Group Number
Where,
Memory Location Code = 100 to 999. This is the Index number, where the number and name of the
contact is programmed.
Alternate Group Number = 000 to 255.
For example: To assign the numbers of the GoodLife Inn to an Alternate Number Group, dial:
1804-1-104-004
The number '2788856' stored at Index 104 will be assigned to Alternate Number
Group 004, which is the number assigned to GoodLife Inn.
Similarly, to program the second number dial: 1804-1-129-004
The number '2788896' stored at Index 129 will be assigned to Alternate Number Group 004.
If you have a continuous sequence of numbers that need to be programmed in the same group, you may
dial:
• 1804-2-Memory Location Code-Memory Location Code-Alternate Group Number
Here you enter a sequence of Memory Location Codes, from 100 to 999, and the number of the
Alternate Number Group.
For example: To assign the numbers of Midas Biz to an Alternate Number Group, dial: 1804-2-100-
103-001
792 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The numbers stored at Index 100 to 103 will be assigned to Alternate Number Group 001, which is the
number assigned to Midas Biz.
To clear the Alternate Number Groups, dial the following commands:
• 1804-1-Memory Location Code-000 to clear group of a single number.
• 1804-2-Memory Location Code-Memory Location Code-000 to clear group of a continuous
sequence of numbers.
• 1804-*-000 to clear all Alternate Number Groups
For example: To clear the Alternate Number Group assigned to a number of GoodLife Inn, dial: 1804-1-
104-000
The Alternate Number Group assigned to the GoodLife Inn number '2788856' stored at Index 104 will
be cleared.
For example: To clear the Alternate Number Group assigned to the sequence of numbers of Midas Biz,
dial: 1804-2-100-103-000
The Alternate Number Group assigned to the Midas Biz numbers stored in a continuous sequence
starting from Index 100 to 103 will be cleared.
• Exit SE mode.
How to use
Confirm with your System Engineer that
• Alternate Number Groups are programmed in the Global Directory allowed to your extension.
• 'Basic Features' (these include Redial) are enabled in the Class of Service allowed to your extension.
Now, follow the instructions for using the feature “Last Number Redial”.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 793
Auto Answer
What's this?
Auto Answer allows incoming calls to be answered without any manual interventions by the extension users.
This feature is particularly useful for Operators in high call traffic settings, as it saves them the effort of picking up
the handset or pressing the speaker key repeatedly.
This feature works only on digital key phones (DKP).
How it works
With Auto Answer set on an extension DKP, whenever a call lands on the DKP extension,
• the extension rings for the duration of the Auto Answer Timer116. This timer is programmable, and by
default it is set to 1 second.
• on the expiry of the Auto Answer Timer117, the system plays a beep to the user.
• the DKP goes OFF-Hook to answer the call, without any intervention by the extension user such as picking
up the handset or pressing the speaker or the headset key.
• If a headset is connected, and headset connectivity is enabled on the DKP, the incoming speech audio will
be diverted to the headset automatically.
• the extension user can talk to the caller.
Auto Answer works only if the DKP is in idle state; the phone must not be busy with an active call or using a feature.
How to configure
For Auto Answer to work, you are required to do the following:
1. Enable Auto Answer in the DKP Parameters.
2. Change Auto Answer Timer, if required. The range of this timer is 1 to 9 seconds. By default, the Auto
Answer Timer is set to 1 second.
3. Enable Headset Connectivity flag in the DKP Parameters, if headset is to be used for Auto Answer.
All of the above can be programmed by the System Engineer using Jeeves and a Telephone.
The DKP extension users can also program the above parameters using the Phone Menu of EON. See "How
to use" Auto Answer later in this topic.
116. This timer defines the time in seconds that the DKP should wait before going OFF-Hook to answer incoming calls.
117. This timer defines the time in seconds that the DKP should wait before going OFF-Hook to answer incoming calls.
794 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Programming Auto Answer using Jeeves
• Login as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the 'DKP Configuration' link.
• Under ‘DKP Configuration’, click 'DKP Parameters' to open the page.
• If the DKPs are already installed and configured, identify the DKP you wish to provide Auto Answer feature
by its Hardware Port/Slot Number, Access Code or Name.
• Click the 'Advance' button.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 795
• Go to the column 'Auto Answer' of the DKP parameters using the horizontal scroll bar. Enable the flag by
selecting the check box.
To cancel Auto Answer, disable the flag by selecting the check box.
• Now, go to the column 'Auto Answer Timer', and set the Timer as required. By default the Timer is set
to 1 second.
• If Headset is to be used by the DKP, go to the column 'Headset Connected?' and click the check box to
enable the flag.
• Repeat the above steps to program Auto Answer parameters for each DKP that is to be provided this
feature.
• Click 'Submit' to save changes.
Programming Auto Answer using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode.
To set auto answer on DKP, dial:
• 1214-1-DKP-Auto Call Answer Mode to set Auto Answer on a single DKP.
• 1214-2-DKP-DKP-Auto Call Answer Mode to set Auto Answer on a range of DKPs.
• 1214-*-Auto Call Answer Mode to set Auto Answer on all DKPs.
Where,
DKP is the Software port number of the DKP, from 001 to 128.
796 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Auto Call Answer Mode is
0 for Manual mode
1 for Auto Answer mode.
To set Auto Answer Timer, dial:
• 1215-1-DKP-Auto Call Answer Timer to set Timer for a single DKP.
• 1215-2-DKP-DKP-Auto Call Answer Timer to set the same Timer for a range of DKPs.
• 1215-*-Auto Call Answer Timer to set the same Timer for all DKPs.
Where,
DKP is the Software port number of the DKP, from 001 to 128.
Auto Call Answer Timer is from 1 to 9 seconds. Default: 1 second
To enable/disable Headset Connectivity flag, dial:
• 1213-1-DKP-Headset Connectivity Flag to enable/disable the flag on a single DKP.
• 1213-2-DKP-DKP-Headset Connectivity Flag to enable/disable the flag on a range of DKPs.
• 1213-*-Headset Connectivity Flag to enable/disable the flag on all DKPs.
Where,
DKP is the Software port number of the DKP, from 001 to 128.
Headset Connectivity Flag is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
• Exit SE mode.
How to use
Extension users can set/cancel Auto Answer and enable Headset connectivity from their DKP by navigating the
Menu of EON.
To set Auto Answer:
• Press the DSS Key assigned to Auto Answer function118.
OR
• Press 'Enter' Key.
• Scroll down to select 'Phone Settings'; press Enter Key.
• Enter Your User Password (default: 1111).
• Scroll down to select 'Call Answer Type'; press Enter Key.
• You get the options:
Manual Call Answer
Auto Call Answer
• Scroll to select Auto Answer and press Enter key.
• Now select the Timer for Auto Answer from any of the options:
Answer After 1 sec (default)
Answer After 2 sec
:
Answer After 9 sec
• Press Enter Key.
118. This function must have been programmed by the System Engineer on a DSS Key of EON. Refer "Digital Key Phone - Keys Pro-
gramming" for instructions.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 797
To cancel Auto Answer:
• Repeat the above steps.
• Select 'Manual Answer' as the Call Answer Type.
It is recommended that Auto Answer Timer be set to at least 2 seconds.
To enable Headset Connectivity:
• Press the DSS Key assigned to Headset function119.
OR
• Press 'Enter' Key.
• Scroll down to select 'Phone Settings'; press Enter Key.
• Enter Your User Password (default: 1111).
• Scroll down to select 'Headset Connectivity'; press Enter Key.
• You get the options:
Headset Not Connected
Headset Connected
• Scroll to select 'Headset Connected' and press Enter key.
119. This function must have been programmed by the System Engineer on a DSS Key of EON. Refer "Digital Key Phone - Keys Pro-
gramming" for instructions.
798 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Auto Call Back (ACB)
What's this?
If the extension number you have dialed is busy or is not responding, you may use the Auto Call Back feature,
instead of repeatedly dialing the number. Similarly, when you dial a code to access a trunk and the trunk is busy,
you may set Auto Call Back.
How it works
When you set Auto Call Back,
• the ETERNITY will queue your call attempt.
• As soon as both extensions, yours and the remote extension, are available, the system will ring first on
your extension for the duration of the Auto Call Back Ring Timer. This timer is set by default to 30 seconds
and is programmable.
• When you go OFF-Hook, the system will ring on the remote extension (provided it is also available at that
moment) for the duration of the Auto Call Back Ring Timer.
• When the remote extension user goes OFF-Hook, your call will get connected.
However, if the remote extension gets busy before the system can ring on it, the system will continue to try
again.
Auto Call Back set for a busy trunk works the same way. As soon as the busy trunk port you are trying to
access is available, the system will ring your extension. When you go OFF-Hook you will be connected to
the trunk port.
• Each extension of the ETERNITY can set only one Auto Call Back request at a time. If you set another
Auto Call Back request, before the first one has been served, the system will override the first request
and serve the second.
• The ETERNITY has the capacity to serve 300 Auto Call Back requests from its extensions at a time.
The service duration for each request is 60 minutes. Requests that are not served within 60 minutes
are automatically cancelled by the system. Also, the system will not serve any more requests if all the
300 requests are pending. In such a case, the system will play an error tone, when an extension
attempts to make a request.
Auto Call Back request set by you will be cleared by the system if:
• it was successfully served, i.e. your extension was connected to the remote extension or the trunk you
were trying to reach.
• you do not answer the Auto Call Back ring, before the expiry of the Ring Timer, i.e. within 30 seconds
(default setting).
• the remote extension does not answer the Auto Call Back ring before the expiry of the Ring Timer.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 799
• it has not been served within 60 minutes.
• Auto Call Back works for internal calls and for accessing trunk ports only.
• Internal calls include calls between PBXs that are networked using Q-SIG.
How to configure
Auto Call Back is a Class-of-Service dependant feature. An extension user can set/cancel Auto Call Back only if it
is enabled in the extension's Class of Service.
The only programming involved in this feature is enabling/disabling Auto Call Back in the Class of Service and
changing the duration of the Auto Call Back Ring Timer, if required.
Both these can be programmed using Jeeves and a Telephone.
Programming Auto Call Back using Jeeves
In the default factory settings, Station Basic Feature Template Number 01 is assigned to all extensions of
ETERNITY. Template 01 has the features 'Auto Call Back Busy' and 'Auto Call Back No Reply' enabled in the
default CoS group 01. So, all extensions of the ETERNITY can set/cancel Auto Call Back if the called number is
busy or does not reply.
However, if Auto Call Back Busy/No Reply is to be denied to any of the extensions, follow these steps:
1. Define a CoS group with Auto Call Back Busy/No Reply disable.
2. Prepare a Station Basic Feature Template with this CoS group applicable in all the “Time Zones”.
3. Assign this new Template to the selected extensions to which Auto Call Back is to be denied.
Refer the topics “Class of Service (COS)” and “Station Basic Feature Template” for instructions on how to
enable/disable a feature in a CoS group, how to prepare a Station Basic Feature Template with a new CoS
group and assign the new template to SLT, DKP and ISDN Terminal extensions using Jeeves.
If the User wants to increase or decrease the duration of the of the Auto Call Back ring on both extensions, i.e.
the extension requesting Auto Call Back and the destination extension, program the 'Auto Call Back Ring
Timer', according to User preference.
• Log into Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the 'System Timers' link to open the page.
800 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Scroll to reach 'Other Features'
• Change the value to the desired duration.
• Click 'Submit' to save your settings.
Programming Auto Call Back using a Telephone
Refer the topics “Class of Service (COS)” and “Station Basic Feature Template” for instructions on how to enable/
disable a feature in a CoS group, how to prepare a Station Basic Feature Template with a new CoS group and
assign the new template to SLT and DKP extensions using SE commands.
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To program Auto Call Back when Busy/No Reply in a CoS group, dial:
• 1302-1-COS Group-Feature Number-Code
Where,
CoS group is from 01 to 20
Feature Number for Auto Call Back when Busy is '04'
Feature Number for Auto Call Back when No Reply is '05'.
Code is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable.
For example: To enable Auto Call Back when Busy in CoS group 02, dial 1302-1-02-04-1
To enable Auto Call Back when No Reply in CoS group 02, dial 1302-1-02-05-1
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 801
To assign the CoS group with Auto Call Back Busy/No Reply to a Station Basic Feature Template, dial:
• 5502-1-Template Number-Feature Number-Code
Where,
Template Number is from 01 to 50.
Feature Number is
03 for CoS group for Working Hours
04 for CoS group for Break Hours
05 for CoS group for Non-Working Hours
Code is CoS group number from 01 to 20.
For example: To apply CoS group 02 with Auto Call Back Busy and No Reply for each Time zone in
Station Basic Feature Template 02, dial the following commands:
5502-1-02-03-02 for Working hours
5502-1-02-04-02 for Break hours
5502-1-02-05-02 for Non-working hours
• To apply the Station Basic Feature Template now programmed with Auto Call Back when Busy and No
Reply, to the extensions, dial the following commands:
If extension is an SLT, dial:
• 5503-1-SLT-Template Number to apply on a single SLT.
• 5503-2-SLT-SLT-Template Number to apply on a range of SLTs.
• 5503-*-Template Number to apply on all SLTs.
Where,
SLT is the Software port number of the SLT, from 001 to 512
Template Number is the number of the Station Basic Feature Template (01 to 50) you have
programmed with the Auto Call Back feature.
If extension is a DKP, dial:
• 5504-1-DKP-Template Number to apply to a single DKP.
• 5504-2-DKP-DKP-Template Number to apply to a range of DKPs.
• 5504-*-Template Number to apply to all DKPs
Where,
DKP is the Software port number of the DKP, from 001 to 128.
Template Number is from 01 to 50.
To program the Auto Call Back Ring Timer:
• Dial command 3801-Seconds
Where,
Seconds = 001 to 255 seconds.
• Exit SE mode.
How to use
Extension users can set two types of Auto Call Back:
• Auto Call Back on Busy - when the extension/trunk they are trying is Busy.
• Auto Call Back on No Reply - when there is no reply from the extension they are trying.
Auto Call Back can be set from EON as well as any SLT.
802 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Auto Call Back on Busy
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users
Using DSS Key:
To set Auto Call Back on Busy:
• Press the 'Call Back' Key (on EON48) or the 'Auto Call Back' Key (on EON42) on Busy Tone.
• You get confirmatory message "Auto Call Back Set" on the phone's display. The LED of the DSS Key will
be turned on.
• Go idle or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.
To cancel Auto Call Back on Busy:
• Press the 'Call Back' Key (on EON48) or the 'Auto Call Back' Key (on EON42) again.
• You get confirmatory message "Auto Call Back Canceled" on the phone's display. The LED of the DSS
Key will be turned off.
• Go idle or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.
Using Command:
To set Auto Call Back on Busy:
• Dial 2 on Busy Tone.
• You get confirmatory message "Auto Call Back Set" on the phone's display. The LED of the DSS Key
assigned to Auto Call Back will be turned on.
• Go idle or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.
To cancel Auto Call Back on Busy:
• Dial 102.
• You get confirmatory message 'Auto Call Back Canceled' on the phone's display. The LED of the DSS key
assigned to Auto Call Back will be turned off.
• Go idle or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.
For SLT Users
To set Auto Call Back on Busy:
• On Busy Tone.
• Dial 2.
• You get confirmatory tone
• Replace handset or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.
To cancel Auto Call Back:
• Pick up the handset.
• Dial 102.
• You get confirmatory tone.
• Replace handset or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 803
Auto Call Back on No Reply
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users
Using DSS Key:
To set Auto Call Back on No Reply:
• Press the 'Call Back' Key (on EON48) or the 'Auto Call Back' Key (on EON42) on Ring Back Tone.
• You get confirmatory message "Auto Call Back Set" on the phone's display. The LED of the DSS Key will
be turned on.
• Go idle or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.
To cancel Auto Call Back on No Reply:
• Press the 'Call Back' Key (on EON48) or the 'Auto Call Back' Key (on EON42) again.
• You get confirmatory message "Auto Call Back Canceled" on the phone's display. The LED of the DSS
Key will be turned off.
• Go idle or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.
Using Command:
To set Auto Call Back on No Reply:
• Dial 2 on Ring Back Tone.
• You get confirmatory message "Auto Call Back Set" on the phone's display. The LED of the DSS Key
assigned to Auto Call Back will be turned on.
• Go idle or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.
To cancel Auto Call Back:
• Dial 102.
• You get confirmatory message 'Auto Call Back Canceled' on the phone's display. The LED of the DSS key
assigned to Auto Call Back will be turned off.
• Go idle or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.
For SLT Users
To set Auto Call Back on No Reply:
• On Ring Back Tone
• Dial 2.
• You get confirmatory tone
• Replace handset or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.
To cancel Auto Call Back on No Reply:
• Pick up the handset.
• Dial 102.
• You get confirmatory tone.
• Replace handset or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.
If you hear an error tone while setting an Auto Call Back request, it is likely that the system already has 300
pending requests and is unable to accept yours.
804 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Auto Redial
What's this?
The Auto Redial feature retries a call automatically if the dialed number is busy. It repeatedly checks the busy line
till it is free. When the called number is no longer busy, the extension of the caller rings.
Auto Redial saves time and the effort of repeatedly dialing the entire phone number over and over until the called
party gets off the phone.
The Auto Redial feature is supported for external numbers only.
How it works
When an extension user dials a number and gets a busy tone, s/he may set Auto Redial. When Auto Redial is set,
• ETERNITY keeps trying the dialed number.
• It waits for the 'Dial Tone Wait Timer120' to expire to begin sensing the dial tone from the PSTN/CO
Network. This timer is programmable, and is set to 3 seconds as default.
• On sensing the dial tone the ETERNITY will dial out the requested number and will wait until the 'Ring
Back Tone Wait Timer121' expires to sense the Ring Back Tone from the requested number. This timer is
programmable and is set to 60 seconds as default.
• If the system does not detect Ring Back Tone for 60 seconds, it releases the trunk and tries again after
some time. If the system detects a busy tone, it releases the trunk and redials the number automatically
after some time. This process is repeated until the system detects the Ring Back Tone.
• When the ETERNITY detects the Ring Back Tone instead of the Busy Tone, it will ring on the extension
that set Auto Redial. The extension will ring for the duration of the 'Redial Ring Timer122'. This timer is
programmable and is set to 45 seconds as default.
• The extension must go OFF-Hook to get connected to the remote party.
• If the extension is in the middle of any activity such as dialing, ringing or speech, the ETERNITY will
suspend Auto Redial until the extension becomes idle again. After which it dials the requested number
again.
Two types of Auto Redial are supported by the ETERNITY - Auto Redial (normal) and Auto Redial 'Priority' - that
differ from each other in terms of the number of redial attempts and the interval between attempts.
• Auto Redial (normal): The system is programmed by default to make 5 attempts to redial at an interval of
45 seconds (default) between each attempt. Both, the number of attempts as well as the duration of the
120. Time for which ETERNITY waits to sense the dial tone from the PSTN/CO Network. Valid range of the timer: 000 to 255 seconds.
Default: 003 seconds.
121. Time for which ETERNITY waits to sense the RBT from the PSTN/CO Network after dialing the requested number. This timer is
particularly relevant to TWT ports. Valid range of the timer: 000 to 255 seconds. Default: 060 seconds.
122. Time for which the extension that has requested Auto Redial should ring. Valid range of the timer: 000 to 255 seconds. Default:
045 seconds.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 805
interval can be changed match User preference, like decreasing the number of attempts to 3 and
increasing the interval to 60 seconds.
• Auto Redial 'Priority': the system makes a greater number of attempts to redial and the duration of the
interval between each attempt is less. By default the system is programmed to make 20 redial attempts at
intervals of 20 seconds. The number of attempts as well as duration of the interval are programmable; for
instance, the number of attempts can be set to 30 and the interval to 15 seconds.
To change the number of redial attempts and the interval between them, the SE must Auto Redial Count and the
Auto Redial Timer respectively. In addition to these, the system has three other related timers, which can be
programmed to match User preference:
• Auto Redial Dial Tone Wait Timer
• Auto Redial Ring Back Tone (RBT) Wait Timer
• Auto Redial Ring Timer
• An extension user can request Auto Redial for multiple numbers at a time from the same extension and
more than one extension can attempt auto redial simultaneously.
• The system uses the same OG Trunk Bundle Group you used. If you dialed the number on group code
60, the system grabs one of the free trunks from group code 60 for Auto Redial.
• If the number was dialed the first time using selective trunk access, the system will use the same trunk
to execute Auto Redial.
• If the extension is programmed for 'Dynamic Lock', and you have set the 'Auto Redial', the system will
check the Toll control as per dynamic lock level.
Auto Redial may not work well on Two-wire Trunk lines, as its functioning greatly depends on line
condition. Unlike ISDN, GSM and VoIP trunks, the line condition of TWT trunks may not always measure
up to the standard requirement for Auto Redial to function.
How to configure
For Auto Redial to work, the System Engineer must:
1. Enable the features 'Auto Redial' and 'Auto Redial Priority' in the Class of Service (CoS) group of the
extensions to which this feature is to be allowed.
2. Change the 'Auto Redial Normal/Priority Count' and the 'Auto Redial Normal/Priority Timer' to match User
preference. This will change the number of redial attempts made by the system and the interval between
them.
3. If required, also change other related Timers such as Auto Redial Dial Tone Wait Timer, Auto Redial Ring
Back Tone (RBT) Wait Timer, Auto Redial Ring Timer.
All the above parameters can be programmed using Jeeves and by dialing SE commands from a
telephone.
806 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Programming Auto Redial using Jeeves
In the default factory settings, Station Basic Feature Template Number 01 is assigned to all extensions of
ETERNITY. The Station Basic Feature Template 01 does not have the feature Auto Redial and Auto Redial Priority
in the default CoS group 01. Thus none of the extensions of the ETERNITY have this feature.
If the User wants to allow all extensions the Auto Redial and or the Auto Redial Priority feature, the you can simply
enable this feature in the default CoS group 01.
However, if Auto Redial/Auto Redial Priority is to be allowed on only select extensions, follow these steps:
1. Define a CoS group with Auto Redial/Auto Redial Priority enabled.
2. Prepare a Station Basic Feature Template with this CoS group applicable in all the “Time Zones”.
3. Assign this new Template to the extensions to which Auto Redial/Auto Redial Priority is to be allowed.
Refer the topics “Class of Service (COS)” and “Station Basic Feature Template” for detailed instructions.
To change Auto Redial Counts and Timers:
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the 'System Timers and Counts' link.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 807
• Change the Count and Timer of the type of Auto Redial - Normal or Priority - you have set.
• You may change any of the related timers - Auto Redial Dial Tone Wait Timer, Auto Redial Ring Back Tone
(RBT) Wait Timer, Auto Redial Ring Timer - as per your preferences on this page.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
• If the ETERNITY is installed in Australia, please ensure that:
i. The Timer for Auto Redial Normal as well as Priority must be set to more than 5 seconds.
ii. The Auto Redial Priority Count should be set to less than 15.
• Click Submit at the bottom of the page to save your setting.
Programming Auto Redial using a Telephone
Refer the topics “Class of Service (COS)” and “Station Basic Feature Template” for instructions on how to use SE
commands to
• enable a feature (in this case Auto Redial and Auto Redial Priority) in the CoS group.
• assign the CoS group to a Station Basic Feature Template.
• apply the Template with the on DKP and SLT extensions, using SE commands.
To program the relevant Timers and count for Auto Redial:
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To set Auto Redial Normal - Timer:
• Dial command 1704-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 000 to 255.
To set Auto Redial Normal - Count:
• Dial command 1705-Count
Where,
Count is from 000 to 255.
To set Auto Redial - Priority:
• Dial command 1706-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 000 to 255.
To set Auto Redial - Count:
• Dial command 1707-Count
Where,
Count is from 000 to 255.
To change Auto Redial Dial Tone Wait Timer:
• Dial command 1701-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 000 to 255 seconds.
808 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Do not set this timer to less than 2 seconds.
To change Auto Redial RBT Wait Timer:
• Dial command 1702-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 000 to 255 seconds.
Do not set this timer to less than 2 seconds.
To change Redial Ring Timer:
• Dial command 1703-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 000 to 255 seconds.
Do not set this timer to less than 2 seconds.
• Exit SE mode.
How to use
Auto Redial can be set/canceled from EON as well as SLT.
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users
Using DSS Key
To set Auto Redial:
• When the external number you are trying is busy,
• Go ON-Hook on Busy Tone.
• Press the DSS Key assigned to 'Auto Redial' function.
To cancel Auto Redial:
• Press DSS Key assigned to Cancel Auto Redial function.
Using Command:
To set Auto Redial:
• When the external number you are trying is busy,
• Go ON-Hook on Busy Tone.
• Dial 17.
• Go Idle or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.
To cancel Auto Redial:
• Pick up the handset.
• Dial 1070.
• Go Idle or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 809
For SLT Users
To set Auto Redial
• When the external number you are trying is busy,
• Go ON-Hook on Busy Tone.
• Dial 17.
• Replace handset or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.
To cancel Auto Redial:
• Pick up the handset.
• Dial 1070.
• Replace handset or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.
810 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Automated Control Applications
What's this?
You can connect and operate a variety of gadgets such as a door lock, a siren/hooter, a school bell, a water pump,
sprinklers, automated illuminations (office lights, porch and terrace lights, glow signboards, street lights), and
others as automated control applications.
The “Digital Output Port (DOP)” of ETERNITY is used for running the automated control applications. Any external
device that meets the technical specifications of the DOP can be connected to it.
The gadget connected to the DOP can be operated, i.e. switched ON and OFF, manually by dialing Feature
Commands, or automatically at predefined time periods or on instigation from the “Digital Input Port (DIP)”.
The Automated Control Application gadget can be operated also from a remote location using “Direct Inward
System Access (DISA)”.
The ETERNITY PE supports 3 DOPs (located on the Door Phone Card), allowing you use 3 different automated
control application gadgets.
ETERNITY ME and GE support a single DOP each. So, you can connect and operate only a single application on
these models and their variants.
How it works
The gadget connected to the DOP can be operated in 9 different ways, referred to as Gadget Operation Modes.
Each of these is described in the table below:
Gadget Operation Modes
Gadget
Description Typical Application
Mode No.
1 Switch ON and Switch OFF the gadget using Command. Office Lights.
The gadget connected to the DOP can be operated any Lights can be switched on arrival of the
time as required, by dialing a command to switch ON. staff, and switched off when all staff
have left.
The gadget is switched OFF by dialing a command.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 811
Gadget
Description Typical Application
Mode No.
2 Switch ON the gadget using Feature Command and Door Lock.
Switch OFF after a Preset interval.
A door lock is opened manually and is
The gadget connected to the DOP is switched ON by expected to be locked automatically
dialing a command. after some time.
The gadget is switched OFF at the end of a Timer called
Preset Interval, which starts when the gadget is switched
ON.
This Timer is programmable. By default it is set to 10
seconds.
3 Switch ON and Switch OFF the gadget as per the Flip- Festive illuminations.
Flop Interval.
Strings of light bulbs can be turned on
The gadget remains ON for the duration of the Timer and turned off in the intervals of a few
called Flip-Flop Interval and remains switched OFF for seconds to get a blinking effect.
the duration of the same Timer.
The Flip-Flop Timer is programmable. By default it is set
to 3 seconds.
4 Switch ON the gadget using command and Switch OFF Glow signboard.
at the Preset OFF time.
Glow signboards can be turned ON
The gadget is turned ON by dialing a command. It is manually when required. Regardless of
turned OFF at a specific time called the Preset OFF- when they were turned on, they can be
Time. turned OFF automatically at a particular
time (for example, 7am).
The Preset OFF-Time is programmable. It is to be
programmed in the 24 Hours, Minutes and Seconds For example, you can turn on the Glow
format (HH:MM:SS) signboards in the evenings whenever
you remember to and have them
switched OFF early next morning.
5 Switch ON the gadget at Preset ON time and Switch Sprinklers.
OFF using command.
You can have Sprinklers started to
The gadget is turned ON at a specific time called the water the lawn at a particular time of the
Preset ON-Time. It is turned OFF by dialing a feature day and turn OFF the sprinklers
command. manually when you want by dialing a
command.
The Preset ON-Time is programmable. It is to be
programmed in the 24 Hours, Minutes and Seconds
format (HH:MM:SS)
812 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Gadget
Description Typical Application
Mode No.
6 Switch ON and Switch OFF the Gadget as per the A school bell or a factory siren/bell.
Schedule.
A school bell must ring multiple times
The gadget is switched ON and OFF according to the during a day at regular intervals to
start and end time programmed. indicate break time and end of class.
Similarly, a factory siren/bell must ring
The Scheduled ON and OFF Time are to be at regular intervals during a day to
programmed in the 24 Hours, Minutes and Seconds indicate shift change and break time.
format (HH:MM:SS).
The bell/siren connected to the DOP
ON and OFF Time schedules can be programmed for 24 can be programmed to start and stop
hours in a day. ringing at defined intervals during the
day.
7 Switch ON the gadget following instigation from DIP and A Water Pump.
Switch it OFF at next instigation from DIP.
When the water tank goes empty, the
water level sensor connected to the DIP
senses it and sends an instigation to
switch ON the Pump connected to the
DOP.
When the tank is filled, the water level
sensor senses it and sends instigation
to the DOP to switch OFF the pump.
8 Switch ON the gadget following instigation from DIP and A hooter/siren.
Switch OFF a using command.
A fire alarm or smoke sensor connected
to the DIP senses smoke sends
instigation to the DOP to turn on the
hooter/siren connected to it.
Once the emergency is identified, the
hooter/siren connected to the DOP can
be switched off by dialing a command.
9 Switch ON the gadget following instigation from DIP and Porch, Terrace, and other Lights on or
Switch OFF after a Preset Interval. around the premises.
The Preset Interval is programmable. By default it is set An object sensor connected to the DIP
to 10 seconds. senses the presence of persons/
objects. The DIP sends instigation to
the DOP, which turns on the Lights.
The lights are turned off automatically
after the Preset Interval (default: 10
seconds)
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 813
• Feature Commands override the gadget mode set for an application. You can turn ON or turn OFF a
gadget anytime by dialing Feature Commands, even when the Gadget mode selected is based on a
Timer or a Schedule or Instigation from DIP. For example, if you have selected Gadget mode 6 "Switch
ON and Switch OFF the Gadget as per the Schedule", you can at any time switch ON/OFF the gadget
with the Feature Command. The system will give precedence to the command issued and act
accordingly, without waiting for the ON/OFF-Time. Further control of the gadget will be as per schedule,
unless Feature Command is dialed again.
Similarly, when the Gadget mode is Switch ON and OFF on Instigation from DIP, you can still dial the
Feature Command to switch ON. The system will turn ON the gadget without waiting for instigation
from the DIP. The system will wait for instigation from DIP to turn OFF the gadget. But if you dial the
feature Command to switch OFF, the system will turn OFF the gadget without waiting for instigation
from DIP.
• ETERNITY supports only one Schedule for all gadgets. If you want to operate more than one gadget
(possible only on ETERNITY PE, as it supports 3 DOPs) as per the "Schedule" mode, the Schedule
you program will be applied commonly to all the gadgets.
• When the DOP is programmed to be switched ON/OFF on instigation from the DIP, the trigger time of
the DIP will be the same as the Event Sense Timer of the DIP. Refer “Digital Input Port (DIP)” to know
more about this Timer.
• Automated Control Applications operated in the 'Preset ON-Time', 'Preset OFF-Time' and 'Scheduled'
modes function on the basis of the “Real Time Clock (RTC)” of the ETERNITY. Though the RTC circuit
automatically updates the date, day and time values, it may drift over a long period. Check the RTC
values every month and reset the values to correct the drift.
How to install Gadgets
First, connect the appropriate gadget for the control application you want to use to the Digital Output Port.
If you want to use an application that requires an input sensor device, connect the sensor device to the Digital Input
Port.
For instructions refer the topics “Installing ETERNITY ME”/“Installing ETERNITY GE”/“Installing ETERNITY PE” as
relevant to your model of ETERNITY. Also refer the topic “Digital Output Port (DOP)” and “Digital Input Port (DIP)”.
How to configure
Programming of automated control applications involves the following:
• Configuring the Digital Output Port to which the gadget is connected. Refer the topic “Digital Output Port
(DOP)” for instructions.
• Configuring the Digital Input Port, if you want to operate the gadget in conjunction with a device connected
to the DIP. Refer the topic “Digital Input Port (DIP)”.
• Configuring the parameters of the gadgets attached to the DOP of ETERNITY.
The gadget parameters may be configured using Jeeves or a Telephone.
814 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Programming Automated Control Application using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the 'Automated Control Applications' link to open the page.
• Click the ‘Gadget-1’ tab.
• Program the following parameters of Gadget-1 that appear on your screen.
• Gadget mode: Select gadget mode in which you want to operate the device. Refer the description of
"Gadget Operation Modes" earlier in this topic.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 815
Depending on the Gadget mode you select, you may have to program the relevant Timer. For example,
if you select the option "Switch ON the gadget using Command and Switch OFF after a Preset interval"
as Gadget mode you may program the Preset Interval. All other Timer fields will be non-editable.
• DOP Number: Select the DOP number to which the gadget is connected.
816 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
ETERNITY ME and GE have only one DOP. So, you will get only DOP1 as the option. If you are using
ETERNITY PE, select the DOP number (DOP1, DOP2, DOP3) to which the gadget is connected.
• Preset Interval: You may program this Timer if you have selected the option "Switch ON the gadget
using Command and Switch OFF after a Preset interval" or the option "Switch ON the gadget following
instigation from DIP and Switch OFF after a Preset Interval" as Gadget mode.
The range of this timer is from 001 to 255 seconds. By default it is set to 10 seconds.
• Flip-Flop Interval: You may program this Timer if you have selected the option 'Switch ON and Switch
OFF the gadget as per the Flip-Flop Interval' as Gadget mode.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 817
The range of this timer is from 001 to 255 seconds. By default it is set to 3 seconds.
• Preset ON-Time (HH:MM:SS): You may program this Timer, if you have selected the option 'Switch
ON the gadget at Preset ON time and Switch OFF using command' as Gadget mode. The time format
is in 24 Hours: Minutes: Seconds format. Select the hours, minutes and seconds in the respective
boxes.
• Preset OFF-Time (HH:MM:SS): You may program this Timer, if you have selected the option 'Switch
ON the gadget using command and Switch OFF at the Preset OFF time' as Gadget mode. The time
format is in 24 Hours: Minutes: Seconds format. Select the hours, minutes and seconds from the
respective boxes.
818 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• If you have selected the option 'Switch ON and Switch OFF the Gadget as per the Schedule' as the
Gadget mode, you must also program the start and end time for the schedule. To do this,
• Click ‘Schedule' to open the page.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 819
• The Scheduled ON Time and OFF Time are to be programmed in the 24 Hours, Minutes and Seconds
format (HH:MM:SS).
You can program different ON and OFF Time schedules for 24 hours in a day. So you can run the
control application more than once in a day at different times.
Each Time Schedule - ON and corresponding OFF Time - is stored against an Index number from 1 to
24. The system stores each ON and OFF Time Schedule in ascending order of time. If you want to run
the control application more than once in a day, program the Time Schedule in the sequence from
earliest to last against each Index, i.e. morning hours should be programmed before evening hours
against each Index number.
• Click 'Submit' to save your Gadget settings.
• Go to 'System Parameters' page and click 'DOP.
820 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Set the DOP Contact Type as Normally Open/Normally Closed. By default it is set to 'Normally Open'.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your DOP settings
• Repeat the same steps to program the parameters of Gadget-2 and Gadget-3 (applicable for
ETERNITY PE only).
Programming Automated Control Application using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode.
To select the Gadget Mode for a gadget, dial:
• 1711-Gadget Number-Gadget Mode
Where,
Gadget is from 1 to 3
Gadget mode is from 1 to 9123.
By default, 1 is selected for all gadgets.
To assign DOP for the Gadget, dial:
• 1712-Gadget Number-DOP
Where,
DOP is
0 for None
1 for DOP1
2 for DOP2
3 for DOP3
123. Refer the table 'Gadget Operation Modes' at the beginning of this topic for description of the modes and their numbers.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 821
Gadget is from 1 to 3
By default, None is assigned to all gadgets.
To program the Preset Interval, dial:
• 1713-Gadget Number-Preset Interval
Where,
Gadget is from 1 to 3
Preset Interval is from 001 to 255 seconds.
By default Preset Interval is set to 010 seconds
To program 'Flip-Flop Timer', dial:
• 1714-Gadget Number-Flip-Flop Timer
Where,
Gadget is from 1 to 3.
Flip-Flop Timer is from 001 to 255 seconds.
By default Flip-Flop Timer is set to 003 seconds
To program 'Preset ON Time', dial:
• 1715-Gadget Number-Preset ON Time
Where,
Gadget is from 1 to 3
Preset ON Time is to be entered in HH MM SS (24 Hours) format.
To program 'Preset OFF Time', dial:
• 1716-Gadget Number-Preset OFF Time
Where,
Gadget is from 1 to 3
Preset OFF Time is to be entered in HHMMSS (24 Hours) format
To program Scheduled ON time at the Index of a Schedule, dial:
• 1717-Index-Scheduled ON Time
Where,
Index is from 01 to 24
Scheduled ON Time is to be entered in HHMMSS (24 Hrs) format.
To program Scheduled OFF Time at Index of a Schedule, dial:
• 1718-Index-Scheduled OFF Time
Where,
Index is from 01 to 24
Scheduled OFF Time is to be entered in HHMMSS (24 Hrs) format.
To program the DOP Contact Type, dial:
• 5001-1-DOP-Contact Type
Where,
DOP is 1 to 3.
Contact Type is
0 for Normally Open
1 for Normally Close
Default: Normally Open.
• Exit SE mode.
822 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
How to use
The gadget programmed to work on the basis of a Timer or a Schedule or on instigation from the DIP, will work on
the set time/instigation received.
Users need to dial Feature Commands if the selected Gadget mode requires it or whenever they want to override
the gadget mode selected to operate the gadget. For this, they must dial feature commands to turn ON and turn
OFF the DOP to which the gadget is connected.
For Extension Users worldwide
To turn ON the DOP to which the gadget is connected:
• Dial 1174-DOP Number-1
To turn OFF the DOP to which the gadget is connected:
• Dial 1174 - DOP Number- 0
DOP number is the number of the DOP from 1 to 3 to which the gadget is connected.
For Extension Users in Philippines
To turn ON the DOP to which the gadget is connected:
• Dial 1104-DOP Number-1
To turn OFF the DOP to which the gadget is connected:
• Dial 1104-DOP Number-0
DOP number is the number of the DOP from 1 to 3 to which the gadget is connected.
For System Administrators (SA)
To turn DOP ON:
• Dial 1072-020-DOP Number
To turn DOP OFF:
• Dial 1072-019-DOP Number
DOP number is the number of the DOP from 1 to 3 to which the gadget is connected.
From DISA mode
It is possible to operate Automated Control Application gadgets from a remote location, using “Direct Inward
System Access (DISA)”. For example, if you want switch off the Lights in your office from your residence, you do
this from DISA mode.
However, you can operate gadgets from the DISA mode using only the Feature Commands.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 823
The Feature Command to turn ON/OFF the DOP will work even when a Door Lock Opener is connected to
it.
When the control application gadget is set to operate on the basis of a Timer or a Schedule or Instigation,
you must inform all users about the duration of the Timers/Schedule, so that they can act accordingly
whenever required.
For example, if a door lock is set to close automatically after the Preset Interval of 30 seconds, the users of
this application must be aware of this, so that s/he may exit the room/building before the expiry of this
timer. Or the Door will be automatically closed/locked.
824 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Automatic Number Translation
What's this?
ETERNITY offers connectivity to different networks - PSTN, GSM, ISDN T1E1PRI, BRI, VoIP - each having a
different numbering plan. For example, the GSM network requires area codes to be dialed also for local numbers,
whereas PSTN requires dialing of area codes for long distance calls.
When ETERNITY is connected with multiple networks, outgoing calls may be routed through any of these
networks, depending on the routing pattern configured in the system. However, as extension users do not know
through which telecom network their calls will be routed, they cannot be expected to dial numbers according to the
numbering plan of the destination networks.
The feature, Automatic Number Translation of ETERNITY takes care of this. It modifies/manipulates dialed
numbers or part thereof to match with specific route numbering plan understood by the destination network (PSTN,
GSM, VoIP). This includes adding or stripping of country codes, area codes.
For example, when an extension user dials a local landline number, if Automatic Number Translation is so
programmed, the ETERNITY will prefix the number with the appropriate country-area code when it routes the call
through the GSM network.
How it works
Automatic Number Translation makes use of the Automatic Number Translation Table which comprises two pre-
defined Number lists:
• Dialed Number List - contains the numbers dialed by the extension users
• Substitute Number List - contains the corresponding numbers for those on the Dialed Number List that
the system will dial out as the destination numbers.
Both lists must be programmed, and the Table must be applied to the trunk ports, through which calls are
routed to the destination networks. The trunk ports may be TWT, Mobile, VoIP, depending on system
configuration.
You can program different 8 Automatic Number Translation Tables; each table accommodates 32 Dialed
Numbers and their corresponding Substitute numbers.
A trunk port can be assigned only 1 Table.
For example:
• Automatic Number Translation (ANT) Table-1 has '95' programmed as Dialed Number in Index-01 and '91'
as the corresponding Substitute Number at Index-01.
• The ANT Table-1 is assigned to the Mobile trunk port MOB-01.
• When extension user A dials '952652630555', the system
• detects the Trunk Access Group assigned to Extension A.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 825
• locates the Outgoing Trunk Bundle (OGTB) assigned to Extension A.
• checks if Automatic Number Translation feature is enabled on the trunk ports in the (OGTB) of
Extension A.
• matches the dialed number '952652630555' with those in the Dialed Number List applied to the OGTB
of Extension A. As a match is found, the system
• checks for the corresponding Substitute Number.
• substitutes '95' with '91'
• dials out the number as '912652630555' from the Mobile port-01.
Automatic Number Translation also forms the basis of “Multi-Stage Dialing”.
How to configure
The working of the Automatic Number Translation feature is controlled by two parameters: 'Automatic Number
Translation Table' and 'Automatic Number Translation flag' in the Outgoing Trunk Bundle
Automatic Number Translation Table
You must first program the Dialed Number list and the Substitute Number List in the Automatic Number Translation
Table, and assign the programmed Table to the Outgoing Trunk Bundle, on which you have enabled this feature.
Decide the number of ANT tables you need to program. You can program 8 different ANT Tables, with a maximum
of 32 number strings in each.
For convenience of programming, draw three column tables on paper. In each table, enter the Index numbers 1 to
32 in the first column, Dialed Number in the second column, and Substitute Number in the third column.
Enter the Dialed Numbers and their corresponding Substitute Numbers against each Index number. For example:
'95' is entered as the Dialed Number at Index 01 and its Substitute Number '91' also at Index 01.
Now, configure these tables in the system using Jeeves or dialing SE commands from a telephone.
Automatic Number Translation Flag
Decide which of the trunks are to be assigned the Automatic Number Translation feature and enable the Automatic
Number Translation flag in the Outgoing Trunk Bundle (OGTB) of those trunks, and assign the Automatic Number
Translation Table to the OGTB.
This can be done using Jeeves and a Telephone.
Configuring Automatic Number Translation using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
826 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Configuring Dialed and Substitute Number Tables
• Click to open the link 'Automatic Number Translation'.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 827
• Enter the Dialed Number and Substitute Number strings.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save settings.
Enabling Automatic Number Translation on Trunks
• Click the 'Outgoing Trunk Bundle' link to open the page.
828 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• For each Trunk bundle you want to assign Automatic Number Translation, (OGTB), enable the 'Apply ANT'
flag by selecting the check box.
• Now, select the ANT Table number you want to assign to this trunk.
• Repeat the steps to enable the feature in other OGTB.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
Configuring Automatic Number Translation using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To program Dialed Number string, dial:
• 4751-1-ANT Table No.-Index-Dialed Number String-#*
Where,
ANT Table No. is from 1 to 8.
Index is the location of the number string in the ANT table, from 01 to 32.
Dialed Number String is a maximum of 16 digits consisting of (0 - 9), # , *, A, B, C, D, F., P, + , W and
dot ('.').
For example: To configure ANT Table 1 with the number string '95' as dialed number at Index 01, dial
4751-1-1-01-95-#*
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 829
To program Substitute Number string, dial:
• 4752-1-ANT Table No.-Index-Substitute Number String-#*
Where,
ANT Table No. is from 1 to 8.
Index is the location of the number string in the ANT table, from 01 to 32.
Substitute Number String is a maximum of 40 digits consisting of (0-9), # , *, A, B, C, D, F., P, + , W and
dot ('.').
For example: To configure '91' as the substitute number for '95' at Index 01, in ANT Table 1 (see the
previous example), dial: 4751-1-1-01-91-#*
To program Special Digits, refer to the table below for the codes to be dialed:
Special Digits Code to be dialed
Flash (F) #2
Pause (P) #3
A #4
B #5
C #6
D #7
+ #8
.(dot) #9
# ##
* **
W *1
When programming special digits from an SLT or EON, press #9 for ‘.' (dot/period).
But for dialing numbers with '.' (dot/period) from an SLT or EON, press * (star).
To enable Automatic Number Translation Flag on OGTB, dial:
• 6702-1-OG Trunk Bundle Number-Feature Number-Code to enable the flag in a single trunk bundle.
• 6702-2-OG Trunk Bundle Number-OG Trunk Bundle Number-Feature Number-Code to enable the
flag in a range of trunk bundles.
• 6702-*-Feature Number-Code to enable the flag in all trunk bundles.
Where,
OG Trunk Bundle Number is from 001 to 128.
Feature Number for Automatic Number Translation flag is '5'.
Code is:
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Disabled.
For example:
To enable Automatic Number Translation flag in OGTB number 1, dial: 6702-1-001-5-1
To enable the same flag in OGTB numbers 1 to 8, dial: 6702-2-001-008-5-1
To enable the same flag in all OGTBs, dial: 6702-*-5-1
830 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To assign an Automatic Number Translation Table, dial:
• 6702-1-OG Trunk Bundle Number-Feature Number-Code to assign a Table to a single trunk bundle.
• 6702-2-OG Trunk Bundle Number-OG Trunk Bundle Number-Feature Number-Code to assign the
same Table to a range of trunk bundles.
• 6702-*-Feature Number-Code to assign the same Table to all trunk bundles.
Where,
OG Trunk Bundle Number is from 001 to 128.
Feature Number for Automatic Number Table is '6'.
Code is ANT Table number from 1 to 8.
For example:
To assign ANT Table 3 to OGTB number 1, dial: 6702-1-001-6-3
To assign ANT Table 3 to OGTB numbers 1 to 8, dial: 6702-2-001-008-6-3
To assign ANT Table to all OGTBs, dial: 6702-*-6-3
To default the ANT Table, dial:
• 4750-1-ANT Table No.
Where,
ANT Table No. is from 1 to 8.
By default all ANT tables are blank.
• Exit SE mode.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 831
Background Music (BGM)
What's this?
Extension users can be played pleasant music on their phones, with the 'Background Music' feature of the
ETERNITY.
The advantage of this feature is that extension users can listen to pleasant music on their extensions as they work,
without affecting communication (incoming and outgoing calls) on their extensions.
Background music can be played on DKPs as well as SLTs.
This feature is not supported on the Matrix Extended IP Phones.
How it works
Background Music on DKP
When the Background Music feature is enabled on a DKP extension,
• Music is played after the extension user dials the Background music feature code and goes ON-Hook.
• Music is played only when the extension is idle.
• Music is stopped automatically whenever there is an activity on the extension phone, such as:
• an incoming call landing on the extension. (Music is stopped and the phone rings).
• the extension user going OFF-Hook to make an outgoing call. (Music is stopped and the system dial
tone is played.)
• the extension user goes OFF-Hook to access any system feature using the phone.
• Music is resumed when the extension is ON-Hook or idle.
• Volume of the background music can be controlled using the Volume keys of the DKP.
Background Music on SLT
When Background music is enabled on an SLT extension,
• The extension user must first press the Speaker key. The system interprets this as 'OFF-Hook' and plays
dial tone.
• The extension user must dial the Background music feature code and press the Speaker key again. The
system interprets this as 'OFF-Hook'. It plays the dial tone and waits for the First Digit Timer to elapse.
Background Music is played only after the First Digit Timer has elapsed.
• Music is stopped when there is an incoming call. The extension user is played Ring Back Tone.
832 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• The extension user must go ON-Hook by pressing the Speaker key. Ring for incoming call is played.
• The extension user must go OFF-Hook to answer the call.
• Once the call has ended, the extension user can go ON-Hook. If the extension goes OFF-Hook, Music will
be played again at the end of the dial tone and the First Digit Timer.
• However, if the extension user dials a feature access code/extension number/external number before the
end of the First Digit Timer, music will not be played, until the extension goes OFF-Hook again.
• Volume of the music can be controlled using the volume keys of the SLT.
Source of Background Music
The source for Background Music to be played on extensions may be any external device such as a CD player,
cassette player, FM radio, PC, etc.
The external device must be connected to the Analog Input Port (AIP) of the ETERNITY. The external device must
comply with the technical specifications of the AIP.
The volume must be set to a level such that the music is not very low or very loud. The volume of the signal coming
from this device must never increase beyond the specified limits of the AIP. This may result in permanent damage
to the system. Matrix Warranty does not cover damages resulting from improper use.
For installation instructions refer “Installing ETERNITY ME”, “Installing ETERNITY GE”, “Installing ETERNITY PE”,
as applicable to your model.
• Background Music cannot be played on phones without Speakers.
• Background Music can be played only on extensions that have this feature enabled in the “Class of
Service (COS)” assigned to them.
How to configure
For the Background Music feature to work, the System Engineer must:
1. Enable Background Music in the Class of Service of the extensions to which this feature is to be allowed.
2. Connect a compatible external music device to the AIP.
In the default factory settings, Station Basic Feature Template Number 01 is assigned to all extensions of
ETERNITY. The Station Basic Feature Template 01 has the feature Background Music enabled in the default
Class of Service (COS) group 01. So, all extension users of the ETERNITY can play Background Music,
provided that their phones are a DKP or an SLT with Speaker.
In case Background Music is to be denied to an extension user, follow these steps:
1. Define a CoS group with Background Music disabled.
2. Prepare a Station Basic Feature Template with this CoS group applicable in all the “Time Zones”.
3. Assign this new Template to the Station to which Background Music is to be denied.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 833
Refer the topics “Class of Service (COS)” and “Station Basic Feature Template” for instructions.
How to use
Background Music can be played by extension users whose phone is a DKP or an SLT with Speaker function.
For EON Users
To start Background Music:
• Pick up the Handset
• Dial 1099.
• You get confirmatory message on the phone's display "Background music On Go On Hook"
• Go ON-Hook.
• Background Music starts.
To stop Background Music:
• Dial 1099 again.
For SLT Users
To start Background Music:
• Go OFF-Hook using Speaker key.
• You get dial tone.
• Dial 1099.
• Go ON-Hook.
• Go OFF-Hook.
• You get dial tone followed by Background Music (at the end of the First Digit Wait Timer)
To stop Background Music:
• Dial 1099 in dial tone.
834 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Backup-SMDR
What's this?
Station Message Detail Records (SMDR), i.e. records of internal, incoming and outgoing calls made to/from
extensions of the ETERNITY are stored124 by the system in the 'SMDR Buffer'. The SMDR Incoming Call buffer
has a capacity of storing a maximum of 5000 incoming call records. The SMDR Internal Call buffer can store up to
1000 internal call records, while a maximum of 6000 outgoing call records can be stored in the SMDR Outgoing
Call buffer.
SMDR buffer data can be cleared by the SE or SA manually or the system clears the data automatically when the
SMDR buffer is full, by replacing the oldest call record with the latest (First In First Out logic).
While the SMDR buffer data is maintained even during power failures, accidental data loss is not an uncommon
occurrence.
SMDR data may be lost when
• the Buffer is full.
• the files are accidentally deleted or corrupted.
• the Master Card is being replaced.
• the system is being upgraded.
• the default settings are restored.
Therefore it is advisable to Back-Up SMDR records to restore accidentally deleted, lost or corrupted files.
Back-up of SMDR records can be stored on a PC for retrieval later. The ETERNITY provides an embedded
FTP server125 to transfer SMDR call records on a PC.
You can backup-SMDR call records over the FTP using Jeeves.
The ETERNITY stores call records (SMDR) in the text format so that the files are readable when downloaded
using Jeeves.
Back-Up SMDR Files using Jeeves
• Open the web browser Internet Explorer.
• Enter the IP Address of the Ethernet Port of Eternity in the Address Bar.
• The web-based programming tool, Jeeves will open.
124. ETERNITY will store SMDR only if the SMDR-Storage flag has been enabled. The call records are stored according to the Storage
filters set.
125. File Transfer Protocol (FTP), is a standard network protocol, used to exchange and manipulate files over a TCP computer network
such as the Internet. FTP is commonly used to transfer Web server for everyone on the Internet. It is also commonly used to down-
load program and other files to your computer from other servers.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 835
• Click 'Log in as System Engineer'.
• You will be asked to enter the System Engineer password.
• Click 'Use Full Programming Access'.
• On the left navigation bar, scroll down to reach 'Station Message Detail Recording' and click this link.
• Now, click 'Back-Up SMDR Data'.
• The FTP server window 'Log On As' will open.
• Enter the SE password (default:1234)
• Click the 'Log On' button.
836 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• On successful login the FTP window will open. The records of incoming, internal and outgoing calls appear
in separate files with the extension '.cfg'.
• Select all files/files you would like to store. Click 'Copy selected items'.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 837
• Select the path where you want to store the back-up files on the PC. Click the 'Copy' button.
• SMDR Back-up in progress will appear on your screen.
838 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• After the Back-up is completed, close the window.
While uploading SMDR files on to ETERNITY, first, remove the current files in the system. Copy the new
files from computer (backup source) on to the system.
You can tag the back-up folders on the PC by date to store the records as archives.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 839
Backup-System Configuration
ETERNITY stores the current settings of hardware and software features in the System Configuration data files.
System Configuration data may be lost when:
• the default settings are restored.
• the Master Card is being replaced.
• the system is being upgraded.
• the files are accidentally deleted or corrupted.
Therefore it is advisable to Back-Up System Configuration files to restore original system configuration.
System Configuration files can be stored on a PC. The ETERNITY provides an embedded FTP server126 to
transfer Configuration files on to a PC.
System Configuration files can be transferred to a PC over the FTP using Jeeves.
Back-Up System Configuration Files using Jeeves
• Open the web browser Internet Explorer.
• Enter the IP Address of the Ethernet Port of ETERNITY in the Address Bar.
• The web-based programming tool, Jeeves will open.
• Click the 'Log in as System Engineer'.
• You will be asked to enter the System Engineer password.
• Click 'Use Full Programming Access'.
• On the left navigation bar, scroll down to reach 'Configuration Upload'. Now, click this link.
126. File Transfer Protocol (FTP), is a standard network protocol, used to exchange and manipulate files over a TCP computer network
such as the Internet. FTP is commonly used to transfer Web server for everyone on the Internet. It is also commonly used to down-
load program and other files to your computer from other servers.
840 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• The FTP server window 'Log on As' will open.
• Enter the SE password (default:1234)
• Click the 'Log On' button.
• On successful login the FTP window will open. The all the system configuration files will appear with the
extension '.cfg'.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 841
• Select all files/files you would like to store. Click the link 'Copy selected items'.
• Select the path where you want to store the back-up files on the PC. Click 'Copy' button.
• System Configuration Back-up in progress will appear on your screen.
• Log out after the Back-up is completed or log in again to use the web pages for further programming.
You can archive the Back-up of configuration files by tagging the back-up folders on the PC by date.
842 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Backup-System Software
The ETERNITY System Software may be accidentally deleted or corrupted during maintenance and upgrade
procedures. To prevent data loss, it is advised to back-up System Software.
This can be done by storing the System Software files on a PC, using the embedded FTP server provided by the
ETERNITY.
System Software files can be transferred to a PC over the FTP using Jeeves.
Back-Up System Software using Jeeves
• Open the web browser Internet Explorer.
• Enter the IP Address of the Ethernet Port of Eternity in the Address Bar.
• Jeeves will open.
• Click the 'Log in as System Engineer' link.
• You will be asked to enter the System Engineer password.
• Click 'Use Full Programming Access'.
• On the left navigation bar, scroll down to reach 'Firmware Upgrade'.
• The FTP server window 'Log on As' will open.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 843
• Enter the SE password (default:1234)
• Click the 'Log On' button.
• On successful login the FTP window will open. The all the system software files will appear on the window.
• Select all files/files you would like to store and click 'Copy selected items'.
• Select the path where you want to store the back-up files on the PC. Click the 'Copy' button.
844 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• System Software Back-up in progress will appear on your screen.
• Log out of Jeeves after the Back-up is completed or log in again to use the web pages for further
programming.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 845
Barge-In
What's this?
Barge-In allows you to break into an on-going conversation between two extension users, between an extension
user and an external caller as well.
Barge-In can be used by Operators to transfer Incoming calls to busy extensions. The Operator can put the caller
on hold, barge into the busy extension to inform about the call, and then transfer the call.
Barge-In can be used by a Boss to interrupt the secretary's busy extension.
ETERNITY offers flexibility to allow/deny Barge-In feature to an extension user, i.e. allow the extension user to
barge into on-going conversations. It also provides the flexibility to prevent conversations of extension users from
being barged in, referred to as Privacy against Barge-In.
How it works
• A, B and C are users of the system.
• A and B are talking to each other.
• C calls A.
• C gets busy tone.
• C dials Barge-In feature code.
• C gets Ring Back tone (RBT) and A gets beeps indicating a new call. If A is using EON, C's name and
number appear on C’s phone display.
• C gets RBT and A gets beeps for Barge-in timer. (By default, 10 seconds)
• During the beeps, A may press 'Flash' to answer the call.
• If A does not respond till the end of the Barge-In Timer (set to 10 seconds, by default), A gets connected to
C. B is put on hold and is given hold-on music.
• If B disconnects while A and C are talking, the held call between A and B is cleared.
• If B keeps holding the call and C disconnects, the call between A and C is cleared and A is connected back
to B.
• If B keeps holding the call and A disconnects, the call between A and C is cleared and A gets ring. A picks-
up the handset and gets connected back to B.
Feature Interactions
• Call States:
846 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Barge-In works only if the dialed extension is busy. The dialed extension may be busy with another
extension or trunk (external number).
• Barge-In cannot be used when accessed trunk is busy.
• Barge-In works only if the user about to be barged in is in a two-way normal speech with another user
or external party.
• It will not work if the busy signal is due to the user being OFF-Hook, or in the middle of dialing, or
accessing a feature of the PBX.
• “Call Toggle”: Once A and C comes in speech with each other, A can toggle between B and C using Call
Toggle feature.
• Privacy against Barge-In: If the feature 'Privacy against Barge-in is enabled for an extension, it cannot be
barged into.
• “Priority”: No Interaction with Barge-In. If 'A' has lower priority than 'B' but has Barge-In enabled; A can
barge in B.
• “Do Not Disturb (DND)”: Barge-In will not work if the called user has set DND. If 'A' has set DND. A is
busy with C. B calls A. B cannot barge in A.
• “DND-Override”: Barge-In will work if the calling user is allowed DND-Override and also has higher
'Priority' than the called user. If 'A' has set DND. A is busy with C. B calls A. On busy signal, B dials the
Barge-In code. Barge-In will be successful only if B has DND-Override enabled and has higher priority
than A.
How to configure
The functioning of this feature is controlled by three parameters, 'Barge-In', 'Privacy against Barge-In' and 'Barge-In
Timer'.
Barge-In and Privacy against Barge-In
First decide which of the extensions are to be allowed Barge-In and the extension that are to be protected against
Barge-In.
In the default factory settings, Station Basic Feature Template Number 01 is assigned to all the stations of
ETERNITY. The Station Basic Feature Template 01 is assigned CoS group 01. The default CoS group 01 has both
Barge-In and Privacy from Barge-In are disabled. So, none of the stations of the ETERNITY can use these
features.
If you want to allow Barge-In to the all extensions, simply enable Barge-In in the default CoS group 01.
However, if Barge-In is to be allowed on only select extensions then follow these steps:
a. Define a CoS group with Barge-In enabled.
b. Prepare a Station Basic Feature Template with this CoS group applicable in all the “Time Zones”.
c. Assign this new Template to the stations to which Barge-In is to be allowed.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 847
Repeat the above steps to allow 'Privacy from Barge-In' in the CoS of extensions that are to be exempted from
Barge-In.
Refer the topics “Class of Service (COS)” and “Station Basic Feature Template” for detailed instructions on
programming.
Barge-In Timer
Barge-In Timer is the time after which the caller gets connected to the called party. By default the Timer is set to 10
seconds.
Changing Barge-In Timer using Jeeves
• Login as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click 'System Timers' to open the page.
• Scroll to reach 'Other Features'.
• Go to the parameter 'Barge-In Timer (sec)' under Other Features.
• Set the desired value for the Timer.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
• Log out of Jeeves or continue, as required.
848 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Changing Barge-In Timer using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode.
• Dial command 3803-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255 seconds. Default is 10 seconds.
• Exit SE mode.
How to use
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users
• Dial an extension.
• If the extension is busy, you get Busy Tone.
• Press DSS Key assigned to 'Barge-In' function.
OR
• Dial 4127.
• You get Ring Back Tone.
• Wait for the system to connect you to the called extension.
• Talk.
• Replace the handset after the conversation has ended.
For SLT Users
• Dial an extension.
• If the extension is busy, you get Busy Tone.
• Dial 4.
• You get Ring Back Tone.
• Wait for the system to connect you to the called extension.
• Talk.
• Replace the handset after the conversation has ended.
127. This default feature access code can be changed to suit your preference. Refer the topic “Access Codes”.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 849
BCCH Selection
What's this?
BCCH Selection feature enables you to lock the Mobile Port of ETERNITY to a particular cell or channel or BTS
(Base Transceiver Station) for various reasons such as:
• better network availability,
• minimum call drop due to bad signal/ network failure, etc.
Cell Locking feature will work on SIMCOM 3G engine (Version V1.19/B11 or later and with 2G networks)
only.
This feature requires a license. To use this feature you must purchase the license for the Mobility Feature
Suite. Refer the topic “License Management” to know more.
How it works
In the GSM network, each BTS is assigned one particular channel called as ARFCN (Absolute Radio Frequency
Channel Number), which is transmitted by BTS in BCCH (Broadcast Control Channel).
Now, when ETERNITY is switched on, the Mobile Port gets registered with the network on a particular BTS which
has the highest signal strength. However, the signal strength is not consistent. It keeps fluctuating, resulting in call
drop or poor voice quality.
Therefore, to avoid this, ETERNITY enables you to lock the Mobile Port to a particular cell or channel manually
after checking Signal Strength and Signal Quality of each cell.
How to configure
You can lock Mobile Port to a cell or a channel only through Jeeves.
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Click the ‘Use Full Programming Access’ link.
• Click 'Mobile Configuration'.
• Click 'BCCH Locking' to open the page.
• The page displays the following parameters:
• Mobile Port Number: This is number of the Mobile port for which BCCH Selection status is displayed.
You can choose a different Mobile Port number from the drop down list. The page will display the
BCCH Selection related parameters for the selected mobile port.
• Mobile Port Name: This is the name you have assigned to the Mobile port in the Mobile port
parameters.
850 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Mobile Port Status: The current state of the Mobile Port is displayed in this field. Given below is the
description of the various status indication messages that will appear in this field.
STATUS DESCRIPTION
Disabled Displayed when Mobile Port is disabled.
GSM Displayed when GSM module is in initialization state i.e. before SIM
Initialization detection.
SIM Absent Displayed when SIM Card is not detected by the system.
SIM PIN wrong Displayed when wrong SIM PIN is issued.
SIM PUK Displayed when SIM PUK is required.
required
Registering Displayed when the Mobile Port is in registration process with the Network.
Idle Displayed when the Mobile Port is registered with the Network and it is
free.
Busy Displayed when any active call is present on the Mobile Port.
• BCCH Locking Status: The current BCCH Locking status of the mobile port is displayed in this field.
Given below is a description of the various BCCH Locking status indication messages that will appear
in this field.
STATUS DESCRIPTION
Trying to Lock Displayed when user selects Manual BCCH Locking as 'No' from 'Yes' and
module is in initialization process after system or module restart.
Trying to lock on Displayed when BCCH Locking is selected as Manual and the Mobile Port is in
BCCH xxxxx the registration process with the Network. xxxxx is the BCCH selected by the
user for locking the cell.
Manually Locked Displayed when BCCH Locking is selected as Manual and Mobile Port is
on BCCH xxxxx successfully registered with the Network. xxxxx is the BCCH selected by the user
for locking the cell.
Auto Locked on Displayed when BCCH Locking is selected as Auto and Mobile Port is
BCCH xxxxx successfully registered with the Network. xxxxx is the BCCH of the Main Cell.
xxxxx is updated as per the changes in the Main Cell's BCCH.
• Main Cell- Bit Error Rate (%): Bit Error Rate of the Main Cell is displayed in this field. Bit Error Rate
(BER) is the percentage of received bits on a digital link that are in error relative to the number of bits
received. Bit Error Rate is calculated from the received signal quality.
• Manual BCCH Locking: This parameter allows you to lock the Mobile Port to a particular cell of your
preference. By default, manual BCCH locking is set to 'No'. When manual BCCH locking is set to 'No',
Mobile Port gets locked to the cell as per the highest signal strength. Select 'Yes' if you want to lock the
Mobile Port to the particular cell selected by you.
• Auto Refresh: Click this button to refresh BCCH Selection page. All parameters on this page will be
downloaded automatically after every 15 seconds. By default, Auto Refresh button is enabled.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 851
• Stop Auto Refresh: By clicking this button, you can stop the system from automatically refreshing the
BCCH Selection page every 15 seconds. When you stop Auto Refresh, you must click 'Refresh' at the
bottom of this page to refresh the page whenever you want
• Cells: Indicates the cells with which the Mobile Port can be locked. You can decide to lock the Mobile Port
with a particular cell after considering the following cell related parameters, which appear on the page:
• MCC-MNC: In this field, MCC-MNC of a cell is displayed. Mobile Country Code (MCC) is a three digit
number uniquely identifying a country and Mobile Network Code (MNC) is either a two or three digit
number used to identify a given network from within a specific country.
• LAC (Location Area Code): In this field, LAC (Location Area Code) is displayed. LAC uniquely
identifies a location area within a GSM PLMN (Public Land Mobile Network). The maximum length of
LAC is 16 bits ranging from 0 to 65535. LAC is displayed in hexadecimal characters for SIMCOM-2G
and Wavecom-2G engines which ranges from 0000 to FFFF. For SIMCOM-3G engine, LAC is
displayed in decimal digits which ranges from 00000 to 65535.
• Cell ID: In this field, Cell ID is displayed. It is a 16-bit identifier that identifies the cell. Cell ID is
displayed in hexadecimal characters for SIMCOM-2G and Wavecom-2G engines which ranges from
0000 to FFFF. For SIMCOM-3G engine, Cell ID is displayed in decimal digits which ranges from 00000
to 65535.
• BSIC (Base Station Identification Code): In this field, BSIC (Base Station Identification Code) is
displayed. BSIC allows a mobile station to distinguish between different neighboring base stations.
BSIC is a three-digit value ranging from 0 to 255.
• BCCH (Broadcast Control Channel): In this field, the BCCH value of the cell is displayed. BCCH
defines the frequency channel number.
• Receive Level: In this field, the Receive Signal Strength level of the cell is displayed. It is the average
Receive Signal Strength of the cell. Its value ranges from -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
• Manual Cell Locking: This radio button is for locking a Mobile Port to a selected cell manually.
Now, to lock a Mobile Port to a particular cell,
• Select the desired Mobile Port Number from the drop down list.
• Set the parameter 'Manual BCCH Locking' to 'Yes'.
• Go to the Cell to which you want to lock the Mobile Port you selected.
• Select the radio button 'Manual Cell Locking' of that Cell.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page.
• The BCCH Locking for the selected Mobile Port will appear on this page, if Auto Refresh is enabled.
• If you have stopped Auto Refresh, click 'Refresh' at the bottom of the page to refresh the page and view
the current BCCH Locking settings of the selected Mobile port.
• You may now log out of Jeeves.
Example:
Consider the following example when using this feature:
Problem:
• ETERNITY is installed in roaming area, where more than one network is available, say A and B.
• Mobile Network Selection is set to 'Manual' mode and the first priority is programmed as network A and the
second priority is programmed as network B.
852 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• The Mobile Port gets registered with A network. After registration, the user locks the Mobile Port to one of
the cells of A network.
• After registration, if the module or the system restarts or gets deregistered from the network, module starts
registration process again.
• While re-registering, ETERNITY tries to lock the Mobile Port to the last selected cell of network A.
• If network A is unavailable then the Mobile Port will not get registered with the network.
Solution:
• In this situation, user should set Manual BCCH locking mode to 'No' to register Mobile Port with the
suitable network automatically.
• Later, the user can set the Manual BCCH locking mode to 'Yes' and lock the Mobile Port to the desired cell
after assessing the cell information.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 853
Behind the PBX Application
What's this?
It is common for small and medium PBXs to be connected to larger PBX systems, where the trunks of the larger
PBX are connected to the stations of the smaller system. This is usually done for the purpose of expanding the
capacity of the large PBX already in use.
Such configurations are referred to as 'Behind the PBX Application'.
How it works
Consider the following illustration.
21 S1 T1
T2
22 S2
T3
23 S3 T4
T5 S4 S1 31
T6 S5
S2 32
T7 S6 PSTN
S3 33
PBX A
Sn Tn S7
ETERNITY T1 S8
T2 S9
PBX-A is connected behind ETERNITY. In this 'Behind the PBX' configuration, the Trunk Lines T5, T6, T7 of
ETERNITY are connected to the Stations (SLT) S4, S5, S6 of PBX-A.
However, Trunk lines T1 and T2 of PBX-A are connected directly to the PSTN.
In such application scenarios, implementing toll control restrictions for the trunks is a difficult task for ETERNITY.
For example: Extension number 21 of ETERNITY in the above illustration is not allowed the facility of long distance
dialing. It has access to all the TWT trunks.
When the user of Extension 21 wants to access T1, T2 or T3 (which are direct trunks from the PSTN to ETERNITY)
the user dials '0' (Trunk Access Code programmed), gets PSTN dial tone. When the user dials the number,
ETERNITY applies Toll Control.
When the user of Extension 21 tries to grab a trunk T5, T6 or T7 (which are connected to stations of PBX-A) by
dialing Trunk Access Code, for example, '0', the user gets the dial tone of PBX A. This means, the user of
Extension 21 must dial '0' again to grab PSTN dial tone of the T1/T2 connected to PBX-A.
But when the user dials '0' again, ETERNITY plays an Error Tone, because ETERNITY has applied Toll Control
and since Extension 21 is not allowed long distance dialing, ETERNITY rejects dialing on trunk and plays error
tone.
854 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
This would not have been a problem if Extension 21 were allowed long distance dialing. Since Extension 21 cannot
be allowed long distance dialing, ETERNITY provides a solution for this in the form of a programmable Pre-PSTN
Digit Count (PPDC) for each TWT trunk.
The Pre-PSTN Digit Count defines the number of digits to be dialed to reach the PSTN. The system will apply Toll
Control check for the extension only after the programmed PPDC.
PPDC is to be programmed only for trunks that are connected to another PBX, and not for Trunks connected
directly to the PSTN. To take the above illustration further, PPDC must be programmed only for T5, T6, and T7.
PPDC count is to be programmed should have the same number of digits as the Trunk Access Codes programmed
for PBX-A. For example, if the Trunk Access Code is a single digit number, such as '0', the PPDC will be '1'. If Trunk
Access Code is a two-digit number, such as 61, the PPDC will be '2'.
Since PPDC is not applicable on trunks directly connected to the PSTN, it must be programmed as '0' for T1, T2,
T3, T4 of ETERNITY.
How to configure
The 'Pre-PSTN Digit Count' (PPDC) is to be programmed in the “TWT Hardware Template” applied to the TWT
trunks of the PBX that are connected to station ports of the other PBX as well as to TWT trunks that are directly
connected to the PSTN.
• For TWT Trunks that are directly connected to the PSTN, PPDC must be programmed as '0'.
• For TWT Trunks that are connected to the stations of another PBX, PPDC must be programmed as per the
number of digits in the Trunk Access Codes defined for the second PBX.
This can be done using Jeeves as well as from a Telephone.
The PPDC should be programmed only for 'Behind the PBX Applications'. For all normal applications, this
count must be set to '0' for all the trunks. Otherwise, external number dialing may be hampered. Features
like Least Cost Routing and Station Message Detail Recording will also be affected.
Configuring Pre-PSTN Digit Count (PPDC) using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click 'TWT Configuration'.
• Click 'TWT Hardware Template' under TWT Configuration to open the page.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 855
• Scroll with the horizontal scroll bar to reach the PPDC column of the template.
• By default TWT Hardware Template Number 01 is assigned to all trunks. The default 'PPDC' in this
template is '0'.
• For all trunks that are to be assigned PPDC '0' (i.e. trunks connected directly to the PSTN), you may retain
this template.
• For trunks that are to be assigned a PPDC count from 1 to 6 (i.e. trunks connected to the stations of
another PBX), prepare another TWT Hardware Template by selecting another template number, for
instance Template 02.
• From the drop down list, select the appropriate value. This would depend on the number digits in the Trunk
Access Code defined for the trunks in the other PBX. If the TAC is single digit, select '1'. If TAC is double
or triple digit, select '2' or '3' as applicable as the PPDC.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your setting.
• Apply the TWT Hardware Template to the TWT ports. To do this,
• Click 'TWT Parameters' to open the page.
• Enter the number of the template you prepared (Template 02) in the field "TWT Hardware Template"
for each port you want to assign this template.
• For Trunks to be assigned PPDC Count '0', retain TWT Hardware Template Number 01.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your settings.
856 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Log out or continue programming.
Configuring Pre-PSTN Digit Count (PPDC) using Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To program PPDC Count in TWT Hardware Template:
• Dial command 5902-1-Template Number-08-Code
Where,
Template Number is the TWT Hardware Template, from 01 to 50. Default: 01
38 is the Feature Number for PPDC
Code is the PPDC Count, from 0 to 6.
For instance: To program PPDC
'1' in Template Number 02, dial: 5902-1-02-38-1
'2' in Template Number 03, dial: 5902-1-03-38-2
To assign the TWT Hardware Template now programmed with the PPDC to trunks, dial:
• 5903-1-TWT-Template Number to apply the template on a single TWT trunk port.
• 5903-2-TWT-TWT-Template Number to apply the same template on a range of TWT trunk ports.
• 5903-*-Template Number to apply the same template on all TWT trunk ports.
Where,
TWT is the number of the Software port of TWT Trunks, from 001 to 128.
Template Number is TWT Hardware Template number programmed with the PPDC, from 01 to 50.
For instance: To apply Template Number 02 to TWT 003 to 005, dial 5903-2-003-005-02.
• Exit SE Mode.
Also, refer the topic “TWT Hardware Template” to know more.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 857
BITE (Built-In Test Equipment)
What's this?
BITE (Built-In Test Equipment) is an automatic testing facility offered by the ETERNITY to test the functioning of
trunk and station ports of the ETERNITY.
BITE is supported on the “The SLT+MAG+TWT+LD+ENM Card”. To be able to use BITE, you must have this card
installed in the system. You can test the functioning of SLT, Magneto, TWT, Loop Dial and E&M ports using BITE.
How it works
• The functioning of a port is tested by looping back the port with the opposite gender port, i.e. the BITE Port.
• The backbone of the system has a dedicated BITE bus. The port being tested is connected with the
opposite gender BITE Port via the BITE bus at the backbone.
• In the 'Normal' mode, the Port is connected with the RJ45 MDF connector of the card.
• When in 'Test' mode (when you conduct a BITE test), the Port is removed from the RJ45 MDF connector
and gets connected to with the BITE Bus at the backbone of the system.
• BITE is activated from the SA mode by dialing an SA command.
• When the SA command to start BITE is dialed, the system locates opposite gender port BITE port for the
port being tested and loops it back with the BITE port.
• The following tests are performed for the respective trunk/station port being tested when BITE is activated:
Opposite Gender Port
Port Under Test Tests
(BITE Port)
SLT TWT Seizure (Off-Hook)
Release (On-Hook)
Pulse digit detection
DTMF digit detection
Speech
TWT SLT Seizure (Off-Hook)
Release (On-Hook)
Pulse digit generation
DTMF digit generation
Speech
Ring Detection
858 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Opposite Gender Port
Port Under Test Tests
(BITE Port)
Magneto Magneto Incoming Ring
Outgoing Ring
Speech
E&M E&M Seizure
Release
Pulse digit dialing
DTMF digit dialing
Pulse digit detection
DTMF digit detection
Speech
• The port will be tested according to the current configuration of port. For example, if a TWT port being
tested has Pulse as Dial type in its configuration, BITE will check only for Pulse.
• The port under test and the BITE port will remain "Busy" until the test is completed. It will not be possible to
make or receive the calls on port under test as well as BITE port at this time.
• After the BITE test is completed, the tested port and the BITE port will switch back to "Normal" mode. Both
will become 'free' and calls can be made or received.
• A BITE Test will be terminated and considered as failed in the following conditions:
• If there is an ongoing call on the port being tested or the BITE port at the time of activating BITE.
• When any of the tests performed in the BITE test gets failed.
• When the port under test is in use.
• When all opposite gender BITE ports are in use in BITE card.
• When no opposite gender BITE port is found in the BITE Card.
• When no card is present in the BITE Card Slot.
• When the port under test does not support BITE functionality.
• When the card present in the BITE Card Slot does not support BITE functionality.
• When system gets restarted while BITE test is under process.
• When either BITE card or card under test gets restarted while BITE test is under process.
• When any BITE test is currently in process and the System Administrator tries to run BITE test for
another port. Here the latest BITE test and not the currently running BITE test will be considered as
failed.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 859
• The BITE test will be considered as successful only if all the tests of the BITE have been executed
successfully, without any error.
• The results of the BITE test are recorded in the System Activity Log. The result of the BITE test performed
for a port is appears on the log with the Slot Number and Port Offset of the port. A successful test is
indicated as 'Pass' and an unsuccessful test is indicated as 'Fail' in the log.
How to configure
To be able to use BITE, you must define the BITE Card Slot, i.e. the slot in which the “The
SLT+MAG+TWT+LD+ENM Card” is installed. This can be done using Jeeves or a telephone.
Programming BITE Card Slot using Jeeves
• Log into Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the 'System Parameters' link to open the page.
• Go to 'BITE Card Slot Number' and select the Slot Number, in which the BITE card is installed. By default,
no slot is selected (00).
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page.
• Log out of Jeeves.
Programming BITE Card Slot using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To define the BITE Card Slot, dial:
• 5366-1-Slot Number
Where,
Slot Number is the number of the slot in which the BITE Card is installed, from 00 to 16.
By default, the Slot No. is 00.
• Exit SE mode.
How to use
BITE is activated from SA mode. You can activate BITE from Jeeves as well as using a Telephone.
Activating BITE using Jeeves
• Log into Jeeves as System Administrator.
• Click the 'Built-In Test (BITE)’ link to open the page.
• Select the Port you want to test. You must select the Slot Number (of the card on which the desired port is
located) and the Port Offset (the number of the port on that card).
860 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Click 'Submit'.
• The system will inform you about the time that will be taken to complete the BITE test with the message
"Refresh the page after xx seconds to check the result", below 'Submit".
• To see the results, click 'Refresh' after the number of seconds have elapsed.
• Log out of Jeeves.
Activating BITE using a Telephone
• Enter SA mode from a DKP or SLT.
• Dial the SA command 1072-047-Slot No.-Port Offset
Where,
Slot No. is the Slot of the card on which the desired port is located, from 01 to 16.
Port Offset. is the port offset of the port under test (the number of the port on that card), from 01 to 32.
Port Offset will depend on the Card Type.
• Exit SA mode.
You may view the BITE results on the “System Activity Log”.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 861
Building Intercom
What's this?
ETERNITY offers the Building Intercom application as the telecom and security solution for commercial and
residential buildings, such as malls, shopping complexes, residential apartment blocks and gated-communities.
Presently, the Building Intercom application is supported in the ETERNITY ME and GE models and their variants.
Building Intercom Features
When used as Building Intercom, ETERNITY supports the following features and facilities:
• Alarms
• Analog Input Port
• Analog Output Port
• Auto Call Back
• Automated Control Applications
• Background Music
• Call Follow Me
• Call Forward
• Call Forward Remote
• Call Progress Tones
• Calling Line Identification and Presentation (CLIP)
• Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR)
• Communication Ports
• Conference 3-Party, Multiparty
• Communication Ports
• Conflict Dialing
• Customer Name
• Digital Input Port
• Digital Output Port
• Distinctive Rings
• Do Not Disturb
• Do Not Disturb (Remote)
• External Music Port
• Field Programmable (Onsite upgradation)
• Flash Timer
• Flexible Numbers
• Help Desk
• Hot Desking
• Hotline
• Internal Call
• Internal call Restriction
• Interrupt Request
• Last Caller Recall
• Meet Me Paging
• Music On Hold
• Name Programming for Extensions
• Programmable Call Progress Tones and rings
• Programming the System (Using SLT, DKP, Ethernet Port)
• Real Time Clock
862 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Remote Alarm
• Remote Call Forward
• Remote Programming
• Security Dialing and Reporting
• Self Ring Test
• Station In-Service/Out-service
• Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) (internal calls made/received)
• System Activity Log and Display
• System Debug
• System Fault Log and Display
• System Administrator Mode
• System Security (Passwords)
• Time Tables
• Upgrading the Software
• User Security (User Password)
• Voice Help
• Voice Prompts for Tones
• Walk-In Class of Service
• Web-based Programming
The Intercom Line Card
To use the Building Intercom application, the Intercom Line Card must be installed in the ETERNITY to connect
extension phones in the building.
The Intercom Line Card is available in the following configurations for the variants of ETERNITY ME and GE.
Card Name Configuration and Application
ETERNITY ME Card ILC32 32-port card to connect 32 Single Line Telephones
ETERNITY ME Card ILC16 16-port card to connect 16 Single Line Telephones
ETERNITY GE Card ILC20 20-port card to connect 20 Single Line Telephones
ETERNITY GE Card ILC8 8-port card to connect 8 Single Line Telephones
For installation instructions, under Installing ETERNITY ME, see “The Intercom Line Card” and under Installing
ETERNITY GE, see “The Intercom Line Card”.
Caution: When installing ETERNITY ME/GE for Building Intercom, you can install only the Intercom Line
Cards in the system. When an Intercom Line Card is present in the system, other Trunk cards or Extension
or Combination cards present in the system will not work.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 863
Call Back on Trunk Ports
What's this?
The feature Call Back on Trunk Ports is used to respond to missed calls from particular numbers on the different
trunk ports of ETERNITY: Two-wire Trunks, Mobile trunks, BRI trunks, T1E1PRI trunks, and SIP Trunks.
When Call Back feature is enabled on a trunk port, and there is a missed call on that trunk port, the ETERNITY
determines if the calling number is eligible for a call back or not. It calls back the same number or an alternative
number programmed for that number, either from the port on which it was received or from a different port,
depending on the programming. ETERNITY can be programmed to choose the most cost effective line to call back
the missed call numbers.
Employees at remote locations can use this feature to have the ETERNITY installed in their office call them back,
thereby saving on charges (for example, roaming charges on mobile calls), where applicable.
This feature requires a license. To use this feature you must purchase the license for the Mobility Feature
Suite. Refer the topic “License Management” to know more.
How it works
For this feature to work:
• Call Back must be enabled on the desired Trunk Ports.
• The CLI of those callers whom the system should call back must be programmed in the ‘Call Back
Incoming Number List’.
• The ‘Call Back Timer’ may be programmed. When the caller disconnects within the Call Back Timer, the
Call Back will be applied for that number.
• You must define ‘Call Back on’, i.e. you must select whether the number which must be called back should
be the same CLI number which the call was received or an alternative number.
• The number on which call back is to be made must be programmed in the ‘Call Back Outgoing Number
List’, if it is not the same CLI number or if it is an alternative number.
• You must select whether the call back should be made using the same trunk port on which the call was
received or an Outgoing Trunk Bundle Group (OGTBG). If you select OGTBG, you must also program the
OGTBG.
• You may enable Least Cost Routing (LCR) on the OGTB if you want the system to select the least cost
trunk for calling back the missed call number. Program LCR accordingly.
• Select a ‘Call Back Mode’, i.e. how the call should be routed when the call back is answered by the remote
party; whether it should be routed as DID, DISA or Operator.
864 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Following is an example of a Call Back on a mobile port, when the above parameters are programmed.
• Caller A calls mobile port 01.
• The system checks if the Call Back flag is enabled on mobile port 01.
• The flag is enabled.
• The system matches the CLI of A with the Call Back Incoming Number List assigned to mobile port 01 to
determine if the calling number is eligible for a call back.
• A match is found on Index 15 of the Call Back Incoming Number List.128
• The system waits for the period of the Call Back Timer (programmable, default: 10 seconds).
• A must disconnect before the expiry of the Call Back Timer so that the system can treat it as a Missed Call.
• If A disconnects within the Call Back Timer, the system applies Call Back for A’s number.
• The system checks the ‘Call Back on’ parameter, whether it has to call back the same number or an
alternative number.
• If an alternative number is programmed as ‘Call Back on’, the system checks the Outgoing Call Back
Number List for the alternative number. As the CLI of A matches with the number on Index 15 of the Call
Back Incoming Number List, the system checks Index 15 of the Call Back Outgoing Number List for the
corresponding alternative number to this number.
• The system checks if the number is to be called from the same port or an OGTBG.
• If the same port is programmed, the system will make a call to the number using mobile port 01.
• If OGTBG is programmed, the system will check if Least Cost Routing is enabled in the OGTBG and make
the call back accordingly.
• When A answers the call,
• The system checks the type of Call Back Mode enabled on mobile port 01 (the port on which the call back
request was made).
Four scenarios are possible:
1. “Direct Inward Dialing (DID)” is enabled as Call Back Mode on mobile port 01.
• A gets dial tone of ETERNITY.
• A can now use DID feature.
2. 'Pin Authentication - Multiple Calls' or 'CLI Authentication - Multiple Calls' is enabled as Call Back Mode
on mobile port 01.
128. If the system does not find a match for the CLI of the caller in the Call Back Incoming Number List, the 'Call
Back' feature will not be applicable and the call will be processed according to the normal incoming call logic.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 865
• A gets dial tone of ETERNITY.
• A can now reach any station or trunk of ETERNITY from DISA Mode.
3. 'CLI Authentication - Single Call Answer Signaling' is enabled as Call Back Mode on mobile port 01.
• A gets dial tone of another trunk of ETERNITY.
• A can make calls from the trunk.
4. ‘Operator’ is enabled as Call Back Mode on mobile port 01.
• A gets Ring Back Tone.
• The system lands the call on the Operator station assigned to mobile port 01.
Read the topics “Direct Inward Dialing (DID)”, “Direct Inward System Access (DISA)” and “Configuring
'Operator'” to know more about the call respective call logic.
• Since this feature is essentially for callers, they must be aware of its functioning to be able to use it, i.e.
disconnect the call within the Call Back Timer. If the caller does not disconnect within the Call Back
Timer, the call will be processed according to the normal incoming call logic.
• ETERNITY supports only one call back request at a time, for one trunk port. The second incoming call
on that trunk port will be processed by the system as per normal incoming call routing.
• For call back requests made from an OGTBG, if any of its trunks is busy, ETERNITY will support only
the last call back request in the OGTBG. Previous requests will be processed as per the normal
incoming call management logic.
How to configure
For this feature to function, you must program the following parameters on each Trunk port type (TWT, BRI, T1, E1,
Mobile, SIP) on which you want to use this feature:
• Enable Call Back: This flag must be enabled on the desired trunk port on which you want to activate the
Call Back on Trunk Port feature. By default, this flag is disabled on all trunk port types.
• Call Back Timer: This is the duration for which the system waits for the caller to disconnect the call after
the system has found a matching number for the caller’s CLI in the Call Back Incoming Number List.
When the caller disconnects within Call Back Timer, the system applies Call Back on the port. If the caller
does not disconnect within the Call Back Timer, the incoming call management logic is applied for the call
on the trunk port.
The range of this timer is from 01 to 99 seconds. By default, it is set to 10 seconds.
• Call Back Incoming Number List: This is the list of numbers that are eligible for Call Back. The system
checks the CLI of the caller with this list to determine if the caller is eligible for a call back.
The system compares the number string programmed in the Call Back Incoming List with the number
string received as CLI.
866 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Number string programmed in the 'Call Back Incoming Number List' shall be compared with the actual
received CLI.
The number string programmed in the Call Back Incoming Number List may be shorter than the number
string received as CLI, but only if the programmed number string completely matches with the received
CLI from the right towards left, the system will consider it as a complete match.
For example, if the programmed string is 263055 and the number string received in the CLI is
2652630555, the system will consider it a complete match. If the received CLI 912652630555, the system
will consider this caller too as eligible for a call back. Thus any CLI received with 263055 as the last 7 digits
will be considered as match found.
By default, ‘Number List’ 15 is assigned to all trunk port types as Call Back Incoming Number List. You
may program this list for all port types, or you may program another Number List and assign it to the
particular trunk port type.
Refer the topic “Number Lists” for instructions on how to configure the Number List.
• Call Back on: For each Trunk port type you have set the Call Back feature, you must define ‘Call Back on’,
i.e. you must select whether the number which must be called back should be the same number from
which the call was received or a different number.
When missed call is eligible for call back (matches with Incoming Number list), the 'Call Back on'
parameter determines the number on which the call back is to be made, i.e. whether on the same number
from which the missed call is received or on a different number.
In countries where CLI received on trunks can be dialed out without any modification, you may select ‘CLI
Number’ as ‘Call Back on’ option.
In countries where CLI received on trunks can be dialed only after appropriate modification, you may
select “Alternate Number’ as the ‘Call Back on’ option. You may also select ‘Alternate Number’ as Call
Back on when you want the call back to be made to a different number.
• Call Back Outgoing Number List: When the system finds a missed call eligible for a call back, it will
make the call back on the basis of the Call Back on option you selected and the Outgoing Number List you
programmed.
If you selected ‘CLI Number’ as “Call Back on’ option, you do not need to program the corresponding
outgoing number for the CLI received.
However, if the CLI received needs to be modified before being dialed out, then program the modified CLI
in the Outgoing List as the corresponding outgoing number for the CLI received.
The modified CLI or the Alternate number should be programmed at the same index number as the index
number at with the received CLI is programmed in the Call Back Incoming Number List. For example, for
the received CLI number string programmed at Index 15 in the Call Back Incoming Number List, the
corresponding modified CLI/Alternate number string should be programmed at the same Index, 15, in the
Call Back Outgoing Number List.
When the CLI received matches with the number string programmed at Index 15 of the 'Call Back
Incoming Number List', the call back will be made using the (modified/Alternate) number programmed at
Index 15 of the 'Call Back Outgoing Number List'.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 867
By default, ‘Number List’ 16 is assigned to all trunk port types as Call Back Outgoing Number List. You
may program this list for all port types, or you may program another Number List and assign it to the
particular trunk port type.
Refer the topic “Number Lists” for instructions on how to configure the Number List.
If you have selected ‘Alternate Number’ as ‘Call Back on’ option, but do not want to provide alternative
numbers to call back particular callers (i.e. CLI received), in such a case, program the CLI of these callers in
the Incoming Number List but keep the corresponding index numbers in the Outgoing Number Lists blank.
• Call Back from: This parameter determines the trunk port to be used to make call back.The call back can
be made using the same port or an Outgoing Trunk Bundle Group (OTGTBG). Select ‘Same port’ if you
want the call back to be made using the same port on which the missed call was received. If you select
OGTBG, the call back will be made using the OGTBG, which you have defined.
• OGTBG for Call Back: If you selected OGTBG for making the call back in the previous parameter, you
must assign the OGTBG that must be used in this parameter.
By default, OGTBG 01 is selected for Call Back.
If you want the system to select the lowest cost trunk for making the call back, enable Least Cost Routing
on the OGTBG that you define here for Call Back.
• Call Back Mode: Select from the following options how a ‘Call Back’ call answered by the remote party
should be routed:
• DID: The system will process the call as per the DID call logic - give a dial tone to the remote party,
who can now call any extension. Refer the feature description for “Direct Inward Dialing (DID)”.
• PIN Authentication-Multiple Calls: The system will process the call as per DISA call logic - allow
remote party to enter DISA mode with PIN-Authentication. On successful authentication (DISA
Login) the user is allowed to make calls or use features as allowed to him/her.
• CLI Authentication-Multiple Calls: The system will process the call as per DISA call logic,
allowing the remote party to enter DISA mode with CLI Authentication-Multiple calls as
authentication method and level of access.
• CLI Authentication-Single Call-Answer Signaling: The system will process the call as per DISA
call logic, allowing the remote party to enter DISA mode with CLI Authentication-Single call as
authentication method and level of access. Refer the feature description for “Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)”.
• Operator: When the remote party answers the Call Back call, the system will route the call to the
Operator129.
By default, Operator is selected as the Call Back Mode.
All these parameters may be programmed using Jeeves or by dialing SE commands from a telephone.
To program Call Back on different port types, refer the relevant topics mentioned below:
129. 'Operator' is the station which is assigned to the Mobile port in the Trunk Feature Template. Refer Trunk Feature Template to know
more.
868 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• For Call Back on TWT Ports, refer the topic “Configuring TWT Trunks”.
• For Call Back on Mobile Ports, refer the topic “Configuring Mobile Trunks”.
• For Call Back on BRI Ports, refer the topic ‘BRI Parameters’ under “ISDN-BRI”.
• For Call Back on T1E1 Ports, refer the topic ‘Call Back on T1E1 Trunk Ports’, under “T1E1 Trunks”.
• For Call Back on SIP Trunks, refer the topic “Configuring SIP Trunks”.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 869
Call Budget
What's this?
Call Budget is a cost control feature that allows you to keep a tab on the total cost of phone call made by extension
users.
With this feature, each extension can be allotted a 'budget' limit for outgoing calls, which is automatically reloaded
at the start of every month.
Long distance calls form a major part of the increased cost of telephone calls. Though excessive use or misuse of
long distance dialing can be restricted using Toll Control, there may be extension users whose nature of work
requires them to make long distance calls. Instead of denying them the facility, their telephone bill can be limited to
a certain amount using Call Budget.
With a Call Budget allotted to the extension, the user is free to make calls as long as s/he does not cross the budget
limit. Once the user exceeds the budget limit, the extension can be denied access to long distance dialing.
The extension user can be assigned a fresh budget, after which s/he can resume making long distance calls.
Call Budget can be enabled on all the extensions as well as on selected extensions. Each extension can be
assigned a different amount depending on user requirement.
This feature requires a license. To use this feature you must purchase the license for the Business Feature
Suite. Refer the topic “License Management” to know more.
How it works
When an extension allotted Call Budget makes a call,
• The system checks the current call budget amount of the extension.
• If the consumed amount is within the budget limit allotted to the extension,
• The system allows the extension to make the call as per the “Toll Control Levels” assigned to it.
• After the call ends, the system calculates and adds the call amount to the extension's account. Thus it
calculates and updates the total cost of calls made from the phone.
• If the consumed amount exceeds the budget limit allotted to the extension,
• The system considers this as Call Budget exhausted.
• The system allows the extension to make the call as per the Toll Control-Call Budget Consumed
assigned to the extension.
• After the call ends, the system calculates and adds the call amount to the extension's account.
• Until a new Call Budget is allocated to the extension user, the extension user can make calls only as per
Toll Control assigned for the Call Budget Consumed state.
870 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Once a new Call Budget is allocated, the extension user can make calls as per the “Toll Control” assigned
to the extension.
• If the budget exceeds anytime during the month, and if no fresh budget amount is allotted, the system
allows calls to be made as per the Allowed and Denied List of Toll Control-Call Budget Consumed till the
end of the month. From the 1st day of the following month, the system automatically reloads the budget
amount. The extension can now make calls.
• The Call Budget allotted to extension is valid for one month. The system automatically reloads the budget
at the start of every month.
• The budget amount can be changed or allotted afresh to extensions from the System Administrator (SA)
mode, at any time. The Call Budget allotted by the SA will be reloaded in the following month.
• Call Budget is not based on real time (online) call cost calculation. The ETERNITY calculates the call
cost only after the call has ended.
• So, if the Call Budget allotted to an extension user gets exhausted in the middle of a call, the call will
not disconnected, though the budget is exceeded. To prevent this from occurring, the System Engineer
may program the “Call Duration Control (CDC)” feature.
• Call Budget is dependent on precise Call Cost Calculation. So, SMDR parameters and long distance
codes must be programmed properly to prevent errors in calculation.
• This feature works independent of any Call Accounting Software (CAS) installed with the ETERNITY.
• The ETERNITY will calculate cost of phone calls made by extension phones even when no call budget
is allocated130.
How to configure
The working of this feature is controlled by three parameters: 'Call Budget' flag, 'Toll Control-Call Budget
Consumed' and 'Preset Call Budget Amount'.
These parameters can be programmed using Jeeves and Telephone.
Call Budget flag and Toll Control-Call Budget Consumed
To enable Call Budget feature on an extension, the System Engineer must enable the Call Budget flag and define
the Toll Control-Call Budget Consumed in the Station Basic Feature Template assigned to the stations.
In the default Station Basic Feature Template 01 assigned to all stations of the ETERNITY, the Call Budget flag is
disabled and the Toll Control-Call Budget Consumed is set to 'No Calls'.
If Call Budget is to be allowed to all stations, simply enable the flag in the default Station Basic Feature Template
01 and select the Toll Control for Call Budget Consumed state.
However, if Call Budget is to be allowed to selected extensions, then prepare a separate Station Basic Feature
Template with the Call Budget flag enabled and the Toll Control-Call Budget Consumed set. Now, apply this
template on stations that are to be allowed this feature.
130. Based on the feature 'Call Cost Calculation'.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 871
Refer the topic “Station Basic Feature Template” for detailed instructions for programming a feature in the template
and assigning templates to stations.
Preset Call Budget Amount
The amount of '9999' is set as default Call Budget in the system. This value may be changed by the System
Engineer according to the organization's practices. For example, if the organization wants to allocate a fixed
amount of $10 to all extension users, the Call Budget value can be set to '10'.
The new Call Budget set by the System Engineer will be considered as the Preset Call Budget amount. This
amount will be allocated at the start of every month to all extensions having Call Budget feature in their Station
Basic Feature Template.
Further, the System Administrator (SA) can override the Preset Call Budget amount set by the System Engineer,
and allot call budgets on an extension-by-extension basis. For example: allotting higher amount to extensions of
senior managers, Marketing, Sales, Exports departments, and lower amount to extensions that are less likely to
make long distance calls frequently.
The amount may be greater or lesser than the default amount set by the System Engineer. The Call Budget amount
allotted by the SA will be reloaded at the start of every month on the extension. For instructions refer 'How to Use'
later in this section.
Changing the Preset Call Budget Amount using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Open the 'Hotel Parameters' page under Hotel setting.
• Change the 'Preset Call Budget Amount' field as required.
• Click 'Submit' to save changes.
Changing Preset Call Budget Amount using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
• Dial command 3710-Preset Call Budget Amount
Where,
Preset Call Budget Amount is any amount of 6-digits.
If the amount is less than 6 digits, use leading zeros.
For example: To assign Call Budget = $10, dial 3710-000010
• Exit SE mode.
• Dial '00' to exit from an SLT
• Dial '00' and press 'Enter' key to exit from a DKP.
• The amount programmed as Preset Call Budget is to be considered as the local currency.
• At the time of installation, when the SE selects the Region Code (country code) and defaults the
system, the related Currency Code is applied.
• The currency symbol will not be displayed on the Operator's phone, on account of the limited number of
characters that can be displayed.
872 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• The local currency symbol will appear at the relevant places in the outgoing SMDR reports.
How to use
Call Budget amount can be allotted to extensions from SA mode only.
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users
To assign Call Budget to an Extension:
• Press DSS Key assigned to 'Assign Call Budget' function.
OR
• Dial 1072-004 (from SA mode).
• Enter Extension Number
• Enter Call Budget Amount.
Use leading zero if amount is fewer than 6 digits.
• You get confirmatory message.
• Go idle.
To view Call Budget assigned to an Extension:
• Press DSS Key assigned to the Call Budget function.
OR
• Dial 1072-011 (from SA mode).
• Enter Extension Number
• Call Budget assigned to the extension appears on your phone display.
For SLT Users
• Lift the handset.
• Dial 1072-004 (from SA mode).
• Dial Extension Number.
• Dial Call Budget Amount.
Use leading zero if amount is less than 6 digits.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace handset.
Call Budget cannot be viewed on SLT.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 873
Call Budget on Trunk
What's this?
Call Budget on Trunks is an expense control feature of ETERNITY that allows you to keep track and of the cost of
phone calls made from the different Trunk ports of ETERNITY.
With this feature, each trunk can be allotted a 'budget' limit for outgoing calls. This budget limit can be programmed
to be reloaded manually each time it is exceeded or at a scheduled date, either daily or at a particular date of the
month.
There are three types of Call Budget limit that can be set on the trunks:
• Amount: In this type of Call Budget, a fixed amount is assigned to the trunk. By default the amount of
999999 (to be considered in the local currency) is set as Call Budget Amount on trunks. With Amount-
based Call Budget you can control the actual expense incurred on making calls from a trunk.
• Minutes: In this type of Call Budget, a fixed number of Minutes are assigned to the trunk. By default,
999999 minutes are assigned as Call Budget Minutes on trunks. This type of Call Budget is useful when
the Service Provider offers 'Free' minutes. For example, the Service Provider allows the customer to make
calls for the first 1000 minutes every month. This offer can be availed of by programming Minutes-based
Call Budget on the trunk port.
• Number of Calls: In this type of Call Budget, you can define the maximum number of calls that can be
made from a trunk. By default, the maximum number of Call Budget - Calls is set to 9999 calls on the
trunks. This type of Call Budget is useful when the Service Provider offers a certain number of free calls or
a certain number of free calls for a fixed period. For instance, the Service Provider offers 150 free calls per
month.
With a Call Budget allotted to a trunk, the users can make calls from the trunk as long as the budget limit set for the
trunk (i.e. the Amount or Minutes or the maximum number of Calls) is not crossed. Once the budget limit is
exceeded, the trunk gets disabled automatically and no outgoing calls are allowed to be made from the trunk.
The consumed Budget can be reset, after which it becomes functional again and allows outgoing calls to be made.
The consumed Call Budget can be reset manually, i.e. anytime, as required/desired, or on a scheduled date either
daily or on a particular date of the month.
This feature requires a license. To use this feature you must purchase the license for the Business Feature
Suite. Refer the topic “License Management” to know more.
How it works
Call Budget can be enabled on trunk port types - TWT, Mobile, SIP, BRI, T1E1PRI- all at once or on selected trunk
port types from among them. Each trunk can be assigned a different Call Budget, depending on the requirement of
the users.
When Call Budget is enabled on a trunk port, for each outgoing call,
• The system checks the type of Call Budget set on the trunk - Amount, Minutes or number of Calls.
874 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• It checks the Call Budget consumed.
Call Budget- Amount
• When Amount-based Call Budget is selected, the Amount should be assigned to the trunk.
• At the end of each outgoing call made from the trunk, the system will calculate the cost of the call on the
basis of the Pulse Rate Type programmed. The system will thus calculate the total amount consumed after
the end of each call. Refer the topic "Call Cost Calculation" to know more.
Call Budget - Minutes
• When Minutes-based Call Budget is set, the total minutes for which calls will be allowed from the trunk port
must be defined.
• With the number of Minutes defined, at the end of each call, the system will calculate the duration of the
call on the basis of the units programmed in the Pulse Rate. The system will calculate the consumed
minute on the basis of the duration of the call. Refer the topic "Call Cost Calculation" to know more.
Call Budget - Number of Calls
• When the Call Budget is based on 'Number of Calls', the maximum number of calls to be allowed from the
trunk port is to be defined.
• With the number of calls programmed, the system will maintain a count for the number of matured
outgoing calls made from that trunk port.
• Thus for each matured call, the Number of Calls-Count is incremented, irrespective of the actual duration
of the matured call.
• When the assigned 'cost' or 'minutes' or 'number of calls' assigned to trunk is exhausted, ETERNITY will:
• print 'system activity log'.
• bar outgoing calls from such trunks.
• play an Error Tone to the extension users who attempt to access such trunks using Selective Trunk
Access.
• However, incoming calls will remain unaffected, and will be allowed on these trunks.
• The consumed Call Budget Amount/Minutes/Calls can be reset manually at any time from the System
Administrator mode or the System Engineer mode or can be programmed to be automatically reset either
daily or on a particular date of the month.
• The current Call Budget Amount/Minutes/Calls limit can be changed from the System Administrator (SA)
mode, at any time. If scheduled reset of consumed Call Budget is programmed, then the Call Budget
allotted by the SA will be reloaded on the scheduled date.
• Once a new Call Budget is allocated to the trunk, outgoing call facility is resumed on the trunk.
• Call Budget on Trunks is not based on real time (online) call cost calculation. The ETERNITY
calculates the call cost only after the call has ended.
• If the Call Budget allotted to a Trunk Port gets exhausted in the middle of a call, the call will not
disconnected, though the budget is exceeded.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 875
• Call Budget on Trunks is dependent on precise Call Cost Calculation. So, SMDR parameters and long
distance codes must be programmed properly to prevent errors in calculation.
• This feature works independent of any Call Accounting Software (CAS) installed with the ETERNITY.
• The ETERNITY will calculate cost of phone calls made by the trunks even when no call budget is
allocated131.
How to configure
Call Budget on Trunks is to be programmed in the Trunk Port Parameters of the trunk type on which you want to
enable this feature. This can be done using Jeeves as well as a telephone
Programming Call Budget on Trunks using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Call Budget parameters must be programmed in the 'Port Parameters' page of the trunk type you want to
configure. For instance, to configure Call Budget on a TWT Trunk,
• Click 'TWT Configuration' link.
• Click 'TWT Port Parameters' to open the page.
• Click the 'Advance' button and configure the following parameters:
• Call Budget: If you want to enable 'Call Budget on Trunk' feature, configure the following parameters for
this TWT trunk port:
• Type: Select the type of Call Budget on Trunk, i.e. Amount or Minutes or Calls to be applied on this
TWT trunk port. By default, no Call Budget type is selected.
• Amount: If you selected 'Amount' as the Call Budget Type, enter the Budget Amount in this field. By
default the Amount is set to 999999.
• Minutes: If you selected 'Minutes' as the Call Budget Type, enter the number of Minutes in this field. By
default the number of minutes is set to 999999.
• Calls: If you selected 'Calls' as the Call Budget Type, enter the number of Calls in this field. By default
the number of calls is set to 9999.
• Scheduled Reset: Enable this flag if you want the Call Budget Amount/Minutes/Number of Calls to be
reset on a particular date of every month.
• Scheduled (Date): Select the date of the month (Daily or 1-31) on which you want the Call Budget
Amount/Minutes/Number of Calls to be reset every month. You may select 'Daily' if your plan suggests
so.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your settings.
• You may program the same Call Budget parameters as listed above for other trunk types:
• Click 'Mobile Port Parameters' under 'Mobile Configuration' to program Call Budget on Mobile Ports.
Click the 'Advance' button on this page to reach Call Budget parameters.
131. Based on the feature 'Call Cost Calculation'.
876 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Click 'Port Parameters' under 'T1E1 Configuration' to program Call Budget on T1E1PRI trunks. Click
the 'Advance' button on this page to reach Call Budget parameters.
• Click 'BRI Parameters' under 'BRI Configuration' to program Call Budget on BRI trunks. Click the
'Advance' button on this page to reach Call Budget parameters.
• Click the 'Advance' button on 'SIP Parameters' under 'VoIP Configuration' to program Call Budget on
SIP trunks.
• You may log out of Jeeves.
• The consumed Call Budget on trunk can be reset from the System Engineer mode as well as the
System Administrator mode manually at any time, referred to as Manual Reset.
• Manual Reset of Call Budget on Trunks by the System Engineer can be done either from Jeeves or
using a Telephone.
Manual Reset of Call Budget on Trunk from Jeeves
• You may perform manual reset of the consumed Call Budget on the above listed trunk types from the
'Status' page of each of these trunk types.
• Open the 'Status' page under 'TWT Configuration'. Select the 'Reset Consumed Amount/Minutes/Calls'
check box of the TWT port for which you want to reset the consumed Call Budget.
• Similarly, open 'Status' page under 'Mobile Configuration' to enable the same parameter 'Reset
Consumed Amount/Minutes/Calls' of the Mobile port for which you want to reset the consumed Call
Budget.
• To manually reset the consumed Call Budget on T1E1PRI trunks, open 'Status' page under 'T1E1
Configuration'. Enable the parameter 'Reset Consumed Amount/Minutes/Calls' for the T1E1 port for
which you want to reset the consumed Call Budget.
• To manually reset the consumed Call Budget on BRI trunks, open 'Status' page under 'BRI
Configuration', and enable the parameter 'Reset Consumed Amount/Minutes/Calls' for the BRI port for
which you want to reset the consumed Call Budget.
• Open 'Status' page under 'VoIP Configuration' and enable the parameter 'Reset Consumed Amount/
Minutes/Calls' to manually reset consumed Call Budget on the desired SIP trunks.
Programming Call Budget on Trunks using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode.
Call Budget on TWT Trunks
To program Call Budget Type on TWT, dial:
• 3301-1-TWT-Budget Type to select Call Budget Type for a single trunk port.
• 3301-2-TWT-TWT-Budget Type to select the same Call Budget Type for a range of trunk ports.
• 3301-*-Budget Type to select the same Call Budget Type for all trunk ports.
Where,
TWT is the Software Port number of the TWT port from 001 to 128.
Budget Type
0 for None
1 for Amount
2 for Minutes
3 for Number of Calls
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 877
By default, Budget Type is None.
To program Call Budget Amount on TWT, dial:
• 3302-1-TWT-Budget Amount to program amount for a single trunk port.
• 3302-2-TWT-TWT-Budget Amount to program the same amount for a range of trunk ports.
• 3302-*-Budget Amount to program the same amount for all trunk ports.
Where,
TWT is the Software Port number of the TWT port from 001 to 128.
Budget Amount is of 6 digits max. Use leading zeros if amount to be programmed has fewer than 6
digits.
By default Budget Amount is 999999.
To program Call Budget Minutes on TWT, dial:
• 3303-1-TWT-Minutes to program minutes for a single trunk port.
• 3303-2-TWT-TWT-Minutes to program the same minutes for a range of trunk ports.
• 3303-*-Minutes to program the same minutes for all trunk ports.
Where,
TWT is the Software Port number of the TWT port from 001 to 128.
'Minutes' is of 6 digits max. Use leading zeros if Minutes to be programmed has less than 6 digits.
By default, Minutes is 999999.
To program Call Budget - Number of Calls on TWT, dial:
• 3309-1-TWT-Number of calls to program number of calls for a single trunk port.
• 3309-2-TWT-TWT-Number of calls to program the same number of calls for a range of trunk ports.
• 3309-*-Number of calls to program the same number of calls for all trunk ports.
Where,
TWT is the Software Port number of the TWT port from 001 to 128.
Number of Calls is of 4 digits from 0001 to 9999. Use leading zeros if number of calls to be
programmed has fewer than 4 digits.
By default, Number of calls is 9999.
To program Call Budget Reset Mode for TWT, dial:
• 3304-1-TWT-Call Budget Reset Mode to program reset mode for a single trunk port.
• 3304-2-TWT-TWT-Call Budget Reset Mode to program the same reset mode for a range of trunk
ports.
• 3304-*-Call Budget Reset Mode to program the same reset mode for all trunk ports.
Where,
TWT is the Software Port number of the TWT port from 001 to 128.
Reset Mode is
1 for Scheduled reset
2 for Manual reset
By default, Call Budget Reset Mode is Scheduled.
To program the Date for Scheduled Reset mode, dial:
• 3305-1-TWT-Date to program date for a single trunk port.
• 3305-2-TWT-TWT-Date to program the same date for a range of trunk ports.
• 3305-*-Date to program the same date for all trunk ports
Where,
TWT is the Software Port number of the TWT port from 001 to 128.
Date is
01 to 31 for Scheduled date to reset every month.
00 for Scheduled reset Daily.
By default, Reset date is 1st. of every month.
878 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Call Budget on SIP Trunks
To program Budget Type on SIP trunk, dial:
• 7733-1-SIP-Budget Type to program budget type for a single trunk.
• 7733-2-SIP-SIP-Budget Type to program the same budget type for a range of trunks.
• 7733-*-Budget Type to program the same budget type for all trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP Trunk from 01 to 32.
Budget Type
0 for None
1 for Amount
2 for Minutes
3 for Number of Calls
By default, Budget Type is None.
To program Call Budget Amount on SIP trunk, dial:
• 7734-1-SIP-Budget Amount to program amount for a single trunk.
• 7734-2-SIP-SIP-Budget Amount to program the same amount for a range of trunks.
• 7734-*-Budget Amount to program the same amount for all trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP Trunk from 01 to 32.
Budget Amount is of 6 digits maximum. Use leading zeros if the amount to be programmed has fewer
than 6 digits.
By default, Call Budget Amount is 999999.
To program Call Budget Minutes on SIP trunk, dial:
• 7735-1-SIP-Minutes to program minutes for a single trunk.
• 7735-2-SIP-SIP-Minutes to program the same minutes for a range of trunks.
• 7735-*-Minutes to program the same minutes for all trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP Trunk from 01 to 32.
Minutes is of 6 digits maximum. Use leading zeros if Minutes to be programmed has fewer than 6
digits.
By default, Minutes is 999999.
To program Call Budget Number of Calls on SIP trunk, dial:
• 7730-1-SIP-Number of calls to program number of calls for a single trunk port.
• 7730-2- SIP-SIP-Number of calls to program the same number of calls for a range of trunk ports.
• 7730-*- SIP-Number of calls to program the same number of calls for all trunk ports.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP Trunk from 01 to 32.
Number of Calls is of 4 digits from 0001 to 9999. Use leading zeros if number of calls to be
programmed has fewer than 4 digits.
By default, Number of calls is 9999.
To program Call Budget Reset Mode for SIP trunk, dial:
• 7736-1-SIP-Call Budget Reset Mode program reset mode for a single trunk.
• 7736-2-SIP-SIP-Call Budget Reset Mode to program the same reset mode for a range of trunks.
• 7736-*-Call Budget Reset Mode to program the same reset mode for all trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP Trunk from 01 to 32.
1 for Scheduled reset
2 for Manual reset
By default, Call Budget Reset Mode is Scheduled.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 879
To program the Date for Scheduled Reset mode for SIP trunk, dial:
• 7737-1-SIP-Date to program reset date for a single trunk.
• 7737-2-SIP-SIP-Date to program the same reset date for a range of trunks.
• 7737-*-Date to program the same reset date for all trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP Trunk from 01 to 32.
Date is
01 to 31 for Scheduled date to reset every month.
00 for Scheduled reset Daily.
By default, Reset date is 1st. of every month.
Call Budget on Mobile Trunks
To program Call Budget Type on Mobile trunk port, dial:
• 8019-1-Mobile-Budget Type to program budget type for a single trunk port.
• 8019-2-Mobile-Mobile-Budget Type to program the same budget type for a range of trunk ports.
• 8019-*-Budget Type to program the same budget type for all trunk ports.
Where,
Mobile is the number of the Mobile software port from 01 to 64.
Budget Type
0 for None
1 for Amount
2 for Minutes
3 for Number of Calls
By default, Budget Type is None.
To program Call Budget Amount on Mobile trunk port, dial:
• 8020-1-Mobile-Budget Amount to program amount for a single trunk port.
• 8020-2-Mobile-Mobile-Budget Amount to program the same amount for a range of trunk ports.
• 8020-*-Budget Amount to program the same amount for all trunk ports.
Where,
Mobile is the number of the Mobile software port from 01 to 64.
Budget Amount is of max. 6 digits. Use leading zeros when programming an amount with fewer than 6
digits.
By default, Budget Amount is 999999.
To program Call Budget Minutes on Mobile trunk port, dial:
• 8021-1-Mobile-Minutes to program minutes for a single trunk port.
• 8021-2-Mobile-Mobile-Minutes to program the same minutes for a range of trunk ports.
• 8021-*-Minutes to program the same minutes for all trunk ports.
Where,
Mobile is the number of the Mobile software port from 01 to 64.
Minutes is of max. 6 digits. Use leading zeros if Minutes to be programmed has fewer than 6 digits.
By default, Free Minutes is 999999.
To program Call Budget Number of Calls on Mobile trunk port, dial:
• 8033-1-Mobile-Number of calls to program number of calls for a single trunk port.
• 8033-2-Mobile-Mobile-Number of calls to program the same number of calls for a range of trunk
ports.
• 8033-*- Number of calls to program the same number of calls for all trunk ports.
Where,
Mobile is the number of the Mobile software port from 01 to 64.
880 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Number of Calls is of 4 digits from 0001 to 9999. Use leading zeros if number of calls to be
programmed has fewer than 4 digits.
By default, Number of calls is 9999.
To program Call Budget Reset Mode for Mobile trunk port, dial:
• 8022-1-Mobile-Call Budget Reset Mode to program reset mode for a single trunk port.
• 8022-2-Mobile-Mobile-Call Budget Reset Mode to program the same reset mode for a range of trunk
ports.
• 8022-*-Call Budget Reset Mode to program the same reset mode for all trunk ports.
Where,
Mobile is the number of the Mobile software port from 01 to 64.
1 for Scheduled reset
2 for Manual reset
By default, Call Budget Reset Mode is Scheduled.
To program the Date for Scheduled Reset mode for Mobile trunk port, dial:
• 8023-1-Mobile-Date to program reset date for a single trunk port.
• 8023-2-Mobile-Mobile-Date to program the same reset date for a range of trunk ports.
• 8023-*-Date to program the same reset date for all trunk ports.
Where,
Mobile is the number of the Mobile software port from 01 to 64.
Date is
01 to 31 for Scheduled date to reset every month.
00 for Scheduled reset Daily.
By default, Reset date is 1st. of every month.
Call Budget on BRI Trunks
To program Call Budget Type on BRI, dial:
• 6214-1-BRI-Budget Type to program budget type for a single trunk.
• 6214-2-BRI-BRI-Budget Type to program the same budget type for a range of trunks.
• 6214-*-Budget Type to program the same budget type for all trunks.
Where,
BRI is the number of the BRI software port from 01 to 32.
Budget Type
0 for None
1 for Amount
2 for Minutes
3 for Number of Calls
By default, Budget Type is None.
To program Call Budget Amount on BRI, dial
• 6215-1-BRI-Budget Amount to program amount for a single trunk.
• 6215-2-BRI-BRI-Budget Amount to program the same amount for a range of trunks.
• 6215-*-Budget Amount to program the same amount for all trunks.
Where,
BRI is the number of the BRI software port from 01 to 32.
Budget Amount is of max. 6 digits. Use leading zeros when programming an amount with fewer than 6
digits.
By default, Budget Amount is 999999.
To program Call Budget Minutes on BRI, dial:
• 6216-1-BRI-Minutes to program minutes for a single trunk.
• 6216-2-BRI-BRI-Minutes to program the same minutes for a range of trunks.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 881
• 6216-*-Minutes to program the same minutes for all trunks.
Where,
BRI is the number of the BRI software port from 01 to 32.
Minutes is of max. 6 digits. Use leading zeros when programming an amount with fewer than 6 digits.
By default, Minutes is 999999.
To program Call Budget Number of Calls on BRI, dial:
• 6205-1-BRI-Number of calls to program number of calls for a single trunk.
• 6205-2-BRI-BRI-Number of calls to program the same number of calls for a range of trunks.
• 6205-*-Number of calls to program the same number of calls for all trunks.
Where,
BRI is the number of the BRI software port from 01 to 32.
Number of Calls is of 4 digits from 0001 to 9999. Use leading zeros if number of calls to be
programmed has fewer than 4 digits.
By default, Number of calls is 9999.
To program Call Budget Reset Mode for BRI, dial:
• 6217-1-BRI-Reset Mode to program reset mode for a single trunk.
• 6217-2-BRI-BRI-Reset Mode to program reset mode for a range of trunks.
• 6217-*-Reset Mode to program reset mode for all trunks.
Where,
BRI is the number of the BRI software port from 01 to 32.
1 for Scheduled reset
2 for Manual reset
By default, Call Budget Reset Mode is Scheduled.
To program the Date for Scheduled Reset mode for BRI, dial:
• 6218-1-BRI-Date to program date for a single trunk.
• 6218-2-BRI-BRI-Date to program the same date for a range or trunks.
• 6218-*-Date to program the same date for all trunks.
Where,
BRI is the number of the BRI software port from 01 to 32.
Date is
01 to 31 for Scheduled date to reset every month.
00 for Scheduled reset Daily.
By default, Reset date is 1st. of every month.
Call Budget on T1E1 Trunks
To program Call Budget Type on T1E1 Port, dial:
• 6122-1-T1E1-Budget Type to program call budget type for a single trunk port.
• 6122-2-T1E1-T1E1-Budget Type to program the same call budget type for a range of trunk ports.
• 6122-*-Budget Type to program the same call budget type for all trunk ports.
Where,
T1E1is the number of the T1E1 software port from 1 to 8.
Budget Type is
0 for None
1 for Amount
2 for Minutes
3 for Number of Calls
By default, Budget Type is None.
To program Call Budget Amount on T1E1 Port, dial:
• 6123-1-T1E1-Budget Amount to program call budget amount for a single trunk port.
882 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• 6123-2-T1E1-T1E1-Budget Amount to program the same amount for a range of trunk ports.
• 6123-*-Budget Amount to program the same amount for all trunk ports.
Where,
T1E1is the number of the T1E1 software port from 1 to 8.
Budget Amount is of 6 digits max. Use leading zeros if amount to be programmed has fewer than 6
digits.
By default Budget Amount is 999999.
To program Call Budget Minutes on T1E1 Port:
• 6124-1-T1E1-Minutes to program minutes for a single trunk port.
• 6124-2-T1E1-T1E1-Minutes to program the same minutes for a range of trunk ports.
• 6124-*-Minutes to program the same minutes for all trunk ports.
Where,
T1E1is the number of the T1E1 software port from 1 to 8.
Minutes is of 6 digits max. Use leading zeros if Minutes to be programmed has less than 6 digits.
By default, Minutes is 999999.
To program Call Budget Number of Calls on T1E1 Port, dial:
• 6125-1-T1E1-Number of calls to program number of calls for a single trunk port.
• 6125-2-T1E1-T1E1-Number of calls to program the same number of calls for a range of trunk ports.
• 6125-*-Number of calls to program the same number of calls for all trunk ports.
Where,
T1E1is the number of the T1E1 software port from 1 to 8.
Number of Calls is of 4 digits from 0001 to 9999. Use leading zeros if number of calls to be
programmed has fewer than 4 digits.
By default, Number of calls is 9999.
To program Call Budget Reset Mode for T1E1, dial:
• 6138-1-T1E1-Call Budget Reset Mode to program reset mode for a single trunk port.
• 6138-2-T1E1-T1E1-Call Budget Reset Mode to program the same reset mode for a range of trunk
ports.
• 6138-*-Call Budget Reset Mode to program the same reset mode for all trunk ports.
Where,
T1E1is the number of the T1E1 software port from 1 to 8.
1 for Scheduled reset
2 for Manual reset
By default, Call Budget Reset Mode is Scheduled.
.
To program the Date for Scheduled Reset mode for T1E1, dial:
• 6139-1-T1E1-Date to program date for a single trunk port.
• 6139-2-T1E1-T1E1-Date to program the date for a range of trunk ports.
• 6139-*-Date to program the date for all trunk ports.
Where,
T1E1is the number of the T1E1 software port from 1 to 8.
Date is
01 to 31 for Scheduled date to reset every month.
00 for Scheduled reset Daily.
By default, Reset date is 1st. of every month.
• Exit SE mode.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 883
Resetting Consumed Call Budget on Trunks using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode.
To manually reset consumed Call Budget of TWT trunks, dial:
• 3306-1-TWT to manually reset a single trunk port.
• 3306-2-TWT-TWT to manually reset a range of trunk ports.
• 3306-* to manually reset all trunk ports.
Where,
TWT is the Software Port number of the TWT port from 001 to 128.
To manually reset consumed Call Budget of SIP trunks, dial:
• 7738-1-SIP to reset a single trunk.
• 7738-2-SIP-SIP to reset a range of trunks.
• 7738-* to reset all trunks.
Where,
SIP is the number of the software port of the SIP Trunk from 01 to 32.
To manually reset consumed Call Budget of Mobile trunks, dial:
• 8024-1-Mobile to reset a single trunk port.
• 8024-2-Mobile-Mobile to reset a range of trunk ports.
• 8024-* to reset all trunk ports.
Where,
Mobile is the number of the Mobile software port from 01 to 64.
To manually reset consumed Call Budget of BRI trunks, dial:
• 6219-1-BRI to reset a single trunk.
• 6219-2-BRI-BRI to reset a range of trunks.
• 6219-* to reset all trunks.
Where,
BRI is the number of the BRI software port from 01 to 32.
To manually reset consumed Call Budget of T1E1 trunks, dial:
• 6140-1-T1E1 to reset a single trunk port.
• 6140-2-T1E1-T1E1 to reset a range of trunk ports.
• 6140-* to reset all trunk ports.
Where,
T1E1is the number of the T1E1 software port from 1 to 8.
• Exit SE mode.
884 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Call Chaining
What's this?
Call Chaining is when an external/internal call transferred by the Operator to another extension or external number
is made to return to the Operator's extension after the conversation between the caller and the extension/external
number to which it is transferred has ended.
Call Chaining is useful situations where the Operator intervention is required after the transferred call has ended.
For instance:
• The caller needs to take an appointment or requires some information from the Operator after talking to the
desired extension.
• A marketing executive who calls his supervisor to consult on a technical problem needs to be informed
about his travel itinerary and ticket booking by the Operator. The Operator can transfer the call to the
supervisor, and use Call Chaining to retrieve the call once the conversation has ended to give the
information to the executive.
Call Chaining can be set for multiple calls.
Also refer “Call Transfer”, “Call Park”.
How it works
• A is an External Caller
• B is an extension.
• A calls a Trunk of ETERNITY.
• The Operator answers the call.
• The Operator transfers the call to B and sets Call Chaining.
• B disconnects the call with A, but A is still connected.
• The call comes back to the Operator, if the Operator is free.
• Now A is in speech with the Operator.
• If A disconnects the call with C, the call will be released. It will not return to the Operator.
• If the Operator is busy, A will be played music on hold for the duration of the Call Park Release Timer.
• If the Operator is busy and the Timer elapses, the call will be released.
Call Chaining can be performed when call is transferred from a DKP to another DKP, SLT or Trunk.
The process of Call Chaining would be the same if A were an internal caller and B were an external number,
or if both were external numbers or both were internal numbers.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 885
How to configure
The only programming involved in the functioning of this feature is assigning this feature to a DSS key which has
LED and programming, if necessary, the Call Park Release Timer.
Refer the topic “DSS Keys Programming” and “Call Park” for instructions.
How to use
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users
• Go OFF-Hook to answer the incoming call.
• The caller requests for an extension/trunk.
• Press DSS Key assigned to Call Chaining function.
OR
• Press Hold.
• Dial 1050.
• Caller gets on-hold music.
• You get confirmation tone and the message 'Called Party in Chaining' on your phone's display. If DSS Key
is used, the LED of the key will glow.
• Dial the requested extension/external number.
• You get Ring Back Tone.
• The called party answers.
• Perform Call Transfer132 to the requested extension/trunk.
• When extension/trunk disconnects, your extension rings.
• Go OFF Hook. You get connected with the caller.
• Go Idle after the conversation ends, or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.
For SLT Users
• Answer the incoming call.
• The caller requests for an extension/trunk.
• Dial Flash-1050.
• Caller gets on-hold music.
• Dial the requested extension/external number.
• You get Ring Back Tone.
• The called party answers.
• Go On-Hook to transfer call.
• When extension/trunk disconnects, your extension rings.
• Lift handset to answer. You get connected with the caller.
• Go Idle after the conversation ends.
132. Refer the EON48 and EON42 User Cards for instructions on various options for Call Transfer of internal and external calls.
886 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Call Cost Calculation (CCC)
What’s this?
• The ETERNITY can calculate the cost in amount for the calls made by the station. The cost calculation is
done at the time of printing of reports.
This feature requires a license. To use this feature you must purchase the license for the Business Feature
Suite. Refer the topic “License Management” to know more.
How it works
Few parameters are programmed to calculate the cost of the call. The cost of a call depends on:
• Trunk Port (Service Provider) used for making OG call.
• Number dialed i.e. local, long distance, international, etc.
• Time and day when the call was made i.e. daytime, nighttime, holiday, etc.
• Duration of the call.
The ETERNITY will calculate the 'call cost' by using following steps:
• When the call is made, the 'Call Cost Calculation Pulse Rate Option' is checked for the specific trunk,
based on the 'Call Cost Calculation Time Schedule' for the OG call. The pulse rate option (from 1 to 4), is
as assigned in Trunk Feature Template. Refer chapter “Trunk Feature Template”.
• The 'Number' dialed will be matched with 'Area Code Table' programmed in ETERNITY. For the matched
area code and, the 'Pulse rate type' programmed for the 'Pulse rate option' is obtained.
• This 'Pulse Rate type' obtained from 'Area Code Table' will be checked in 'Pulse Rate table' (The Table
may be for 'Normal' or 'Holiday', depending on the day of call) to obtain corresponding 'duration' and 'cost'
to be applied for the call duration.
• The 'pulse rate type' applied (duration and cost) is divided into two parts for each time zone:
• First unit.
• Additional units.
The duration of the call is interpreted in terms of number of units and the number of units depends on the pulse
rate.
• If the duration of the call is less or equal to one unit.
Cost of Call = Cost of First Unit + Service Charge
• If the duration of the call is more than one unit then,
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 887
Cost of Call = [Cost of First Unit + (Number of Additional units x Cost for Additional units)] + Service
Charge
• If the call answer supervision type is 12/16KHz then,
Cost of Call = (Unit Charge x Total Call units) + Service Charge. The cost of first unit and additional unit
depends on the pulse rates.
ETERNITY will use the 'cost of the call' for SMDR and also to deduct it from the call budget, if allotted to trunk.
Example:
The logic for call cost calculation is explained by following example:
• Suppose, OG call is made on trunk, TWT-001 which is assigned Trunk Feature Template number '01'.
• Trunk Feature Template-01, is configured for CCC as given below:
• CCC Time Schedule T1 = start time: 00:00, End time: 22:00
• CCC Time Schedule T2 = start time: 22:01, End time: 23:59
• CCC Pulse Rate Option = 1
• Area code table is programmed as shown below:
Pulse Rate Pulse Rate Pulse Rate Pulse Rate
Ignore
Area Type for Type for Type for Type for
Index Name Digit
Code Pulse Rate Pulse Rate Pulse Rate Pulse Rate
Count
Option - 1 Option - 2 Option - 3 Option - 4
001 26 Local 03 06 09 10
002 09 Mobile 05 03 07 08
• Pulse Rate Table is programmed as shown below:
Time Zone T1 Time Zone T2 Time Zone T3 Time Zone T4
Pulse Rate Type First Add. First Add. First Add. First Add.
Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit
Duration (sec) 180 180 60 30 90 30 120 60
01
Cost 02.00 02.00 02.00 02.00 02.00 02.00 02.00 02.00
Duration (sec) 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300
02
Cost 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00
Duration (sec) 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
03
Cost 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00
Duration (sec) 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45
04
Cost 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00
Duration (sec) 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180
05
Cost 03.00 03.00 03.00 03.00 03.00 03.00 03.00 03.00
888 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Time Zone T1 Time Zone T2 Time Zone T3 Time Zone T4
Pulse Rate Type First Add. First Add. First Add. First Add.
Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit
Duration (sec) : : : : : : : :
:
Cost : : : : : : : :
Duration (sec)
32
Cost
The call cost will be calculated as explained below:
• Suppose OG call is made by the station user, to number "2630555" through the trunk, TWT-001 at 20:10
hours. The ETERNITY will check trunk feature template assigned to TWT-001 and determine Time Zone
as per time of the call. The corresponding Pulse Rate Option configured in Trunk feature template will be
checked.
In this example, Time Zone for TWT-001 at 20:10 Hours would be T1.
Pulse Rate Option is = 1.
• The ETERNITY will match the dialed number "2630555" in Area Code table, in which, the entry
programmed at index 001 is found as best match.
Hence, as per Area Code Table, pulse rate type = 03, programmed in "Pulse Rate Option -1" for matching
entry (Index 001).
(However, if TWT would have been assigned Pulse Rate Option=2, in trunk feature template, the pulse
Rate type 06 would have been selected as shown in Area Code Table)
• Finally, for Pulse Rate Type = 03, ETERNITY will consider Cost for First Unit as 1.00 (Rs. or $ as per
applicable currency) for duration of 30 seconds and for additional unit also cost will be considered as 1.00
for duration of 30 seconds. (As shown in Pulse Rate Table). This data will be used for calculating total cost
of call based on the total duration.
How to configure
Step 1
Unit Charge
When call cost is to be calculated on the basis of 16 KHz metering pulses, user can select different unit charge for
first unit and different unit charge for the additional units.
Use following command to program the unit charge for first unit when 16 KHz metering is used:
2600-Unit Charge for First Unit
Where,
Unit charge is the amount in XX.XX format in any currency.
By default, unit charge for first unit is Rs.1.10.
Use following command to program the unit charge for additional units when 12/16 KHz metering is used:
2601-Unit Charge for Additional Unit
Where,
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 889
Unit charge is the amount in XX.XX format in any currency.
By default, Unit charge for additional unit is Rs.1.10.
Example1:
Let us program unit change for first unit to Rs. 1.50.
2600-0150
Example2:
Let us program unit charge for additional unit to US$0.75.
2601-0075
Step 2
Service Charge
There are three options for service charges:
• Fixed Service Charge: A fixed amount is added as service charge to every call regardless of the cost of
that call. This service charge amount is programmable.
• Unit Wise Service Charge: Service charge is added to each unit of the call. Suppose a call worth 10 units
was made then the service charge will also be charged for 10 units instead of once as it is done in case of
fixed service charge.
• Percentage Wise Service Charge: A percent of the cost of the call is added as a service charge for that
call. This percent is programmable.
Use following command to select service charge type:
2602-Service Charge Type
Where,
Service Charge Type Meaning
0 Fixed Service Charge
1 Unit wise Service Charge
2 Percentage wise Service Charge
By default, the service charge type is fixed.
Step 3
Use following command to program service charge:
2603-Service Charge
Where,
Service Charge is the amount in XX.XX format in any currency.
By default, Service Charge is Rs.00.00.
Example 1:
Let us program the service charge to Rs.2.00.
2603-0200
Example 2:
Let us program the service charge to US$1.75.
2603-0175
890 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Step 4
Use following command to set the percentage if the service charge is selected based on the percentage:
2604-Percentage
Where,
Percentage is from 000 to 100.
By default, percentage is 000.
Example:
Let us set the percentage to 10% of the cost of each call.
2604-010
Number of Units
• Number of Units is derived from the pulse rate at the time of the call and duration of the call. System
acquires the pulse rate type and call duration with the help of in-built RTC.
Total Units = First Unit + Additional Unit.
• If the call duration is less than the pulse rate of the first unit then additional unit is zero and total units. Call
units when call answer supervision type is 12/16KHz metering.
Call Units = (Call duration in seconds)/(Pulse rate in seconds).
Step 5
Assign parameters; 'CCC Pulse Rate Option' and program 'CCC Time Schedule' for the Trunk Feature Template
which is assigned to the specific trunk used for OG calls.
• Assign 'CCC Pulse Rate Option' from 1 to 4.
• Program four 'CCC Time Schedule', T1, T2,T3 and T4. Program Start Time and End Time for each.
• Refer chapter “Trunk Feature Template” for more details.
Step 6
Pulse Rate Types
Pulse rate can differ for normal and holidays. Maximum 32 entries can be made in the pulse rate type. Each pulse
rate type can have different rate and different cost for first and additional unit. The table below shows the format of
pulse rate for normal day.
Time Zone 1 Time Zone 2 Time Zone 3 Time Zone 4
Pulse Rate
Type First Add. First Add. First Add. First Add.
Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit
Duration 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00
01
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
Duration : : : : : : : :
02
Cost : : : : : : : :
: : : : : : : : : :
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 891
Time Zone 1 Time Zone 2 Time Zone 3 Time Zone 4
Pulse Rate
Type First Add. First Add. First Add. First Add.
Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit
Duration 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
32
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
Use following command to program duration of first unit for a pulse rate type on normal days:
2607-Pulse Rate Type-Time Zone-Duration of First Unit
Where,
Pulse Rate Type is from 01 to 32.
Time Zone is from 1 to 4.
Duration of First Unit is from 000.00 to 999.99.
Step 7
Use following command to load default normal pulse rate type:
2606
Step 8
Use following command to program duration of additional unit for a pulse rate type on normal days:
2608-Pulse Rate Type-Time Zone-Duration of Additional Unit
Where,
Pulse Rate Type is from 01 to 32.
Time Zone is from 1 to 4.
Duration of Additional Unit is from 000.00 to 999.99.
Time Zone 1 Time Zone 2 Time Zone 3 Time Zone 4
Pulse Rate
Type First Add. First Add. First Add. First Add.
Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit
Duration 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00
01
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
Duration 300.00 300.00 300.00 300.00 300.00 300.00 300.00 300.00
02
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
Duration 90.00 90.00 90.00 90.00 90.00 90.00 90.00 90.00
03
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
Duration 120.00 120.00 120.00 120.00 120.00 120.00 120.00 120.00
04
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
Duration 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00
05
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
Duration 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00
06
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
Duration 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00
07
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
892 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Time Zone 1 Time Zone 2 Time Zone 3 Time Zone 4
Pulse Rate
Type First Add. First Add. First Add. First Add.
Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit
Duration 3.30 3.30 3.30 3.30 3.30 3.30 3.30 3.30
08
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
Duration 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10
09
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
Duration 1.70 1.70 1.70 1.70 1.70 1.70 1.70 1.70
10
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
Duration 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10
11
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
Duration 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
12
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
Duration : : : : : : : :
:
Cost : : : : : : : :
Duration 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
32
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
Step 9
Use following command to program the cost of first unit of a pulse rate type for normal days:
2609-Pulse Rate Type-Time Zone-Cost of First Unit
Where,
Pulse Rate Type is from 01 to 32.
Time Zone is from 1 to 4.
Cost of first Unit is from XX.XX.
Step 10
Use following command to program the cost of additional unit of a pulse rate type for normal days:
2610-Pulse Rate Type-Time Zone-Cost of Additional Unit
Where,
Pulse Rate Type is from 01 to 32.
Time Zone is from 1 to 4.
Cost of Additional Unit is from XX.XX.
Holiday Pulse Rate Table
Separate pulse rate table is used for holidays. This allows total Flexibility of rates for holidays.
Step 11
Use following command to load default holiday pulse rate type:
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 893
2611
Time Zone 1 Time Zone 2 Time Zone 3 Time Zone 4
CCC Pulse
Rate Type First Add. First Add. First Add. First Add.
Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit
Duration 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00
01
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
Duration 300.00 300.00 300.00 300.00 300.00 300.00 300.00 300.00
02
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
Duration 90.00 90.00 90.00 90.00 90.00 90.00 90.00 90.00
03
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
Duration 120.00 120.00 120.00 120.00 120.00 120.00 120.00 120.00
04
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
Duration 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00
05
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
Duration 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00
06
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
Duration 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00
07
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
Duration 3.30 3.30 3.30 3.30 3.30 3.30 3.30 3.30
08
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
Duration 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10
09
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
Duration 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
10
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
Duration 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10
11
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
Duration 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
12
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
Duration : : : : : : : :
:
Cost : : : : : : : :
Duration 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
16
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
Step 12
Use following command to program duration for a first unit of a pulse rate type on holidays:
2612-Pulse Rate Type-Time Zone-Duration of First Unit
Where,
894 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Pulse rate type is from 01 to 32.
Time Zone from 1 to 4.
Duration of First Unit is from 000.00 to 999.99.
Step 13
Use following command to program duration for additional unit for a pulse rate type on holidays:
2613-Pulse Rate Type-Time Zone-Duration of Additional Unit
Where,
Pulse rate type is from 01 to 32.
Time Zone from 1 to 4.
Duration of Additional Unit is from 000.00 to 999.99.
Step 14
Use following command to program the cost of first unit of a pulse rate type for holidays:
2614-Pulse Rate Type-Time Zone-Cost of First Unit
Where,
Pulse Rate Type is from 01 to 32.
Time Zone is from 1 to 4.
Cost of First Unit is from XX.XX.
Step 15
Use following command to program the cost of additional unit of a pulse rate type for holidays:
2615-Pulse Rate Type-Time Zone-Cost of Additional Unit
Where,
Pulse Rate Type is from 01 to 32.
Time Zone is from 1 to 4.
Cost of Additional Unit is from XX.XX.
Area Code Table
• The pulse rate of a call depends on the destination number dialed. Generally, pulse rate varies depending
on the distance. Different destination locations can have different pulse rates depending on the distance
from the caller. Hence pulses rates can vary with different area codes. The Area Code Table in ETERNITY
will be programmed with parameters shown below:
Pulse Rate Pulse Rate Pulse Rate Pulse Rate
Ignore
Area Type for Type for Type for Type for
Index Name Digit
Code Pulse Rate Pulse Rate Pulse Rate Pulse Rate
Count
Option - 1 Option - 2 Option - 3 Option - 4
001
002
003
004
999
For example, pulse rate type for different area codes can be programmed as:
Destination Location Area Code Pulse Rate Type for Pulse Rate Option-1
USA 001 15
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 895
Destination Location Area Code Pulse Rate Type for Pulse Rate Option-1
Japan 0071 14
Singapore 0065 13
Sri Lanka 0094 12
Kolkata and Eastern Region 03 08
New Delhi 011 08
Southern Region 04 08
Mumbai 022 06
Rajkot 0281 05
Waghodia 952668 04
Halol 95 03
Surat 95261 04
Ahmedabad 9579 00
Maximum 999 entries are provided in the area code table.
In case the dialed number does not match with any of the area code table entries, pulse rate type 01 is
used as a default.
The 'pulse rate type' is retained even during power failure conditions. The Area Code table can be printed
or can be downloaded on a computer for reference. Refer “Default Area Code Table for the Region-USA”
at the end of chapter.
How to compress Area codes?
To program the area code table, we need all the area codes with applicable pulse rates. This information can be
obtained from the local PSTN service provider. Many telephone directions also publish this information. Once you
have all the area codes with pulse rates, follow given steps to compress this information so that it fits the area code
table provided in the system:
• Sort the area codes in increasing order. Write applicable rate codes against each area code.
• Select area codes having common digits (2, 3, 4 or more) with same pulse rate.
• Select this group of codes and find out maximum common digits.
• Use this truncated area code as a common area code for all the area codes in the group.
• Program this common area code with the common pulse rate for the whole group.
• Repeat this procedure to find out other such groups with common pulse rates.
• The codes, which do not belong to any group, should be entered individually as separate entries.
• Usually, area codes of places in the remote area from your city can be compressed in one common code.
896 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Example 1
Assume following entries in the stored, uncompressed area code table.
Index Area Code Pulse Rate Type
01 0111 03
02 0112 03
03 0113 03
04 0114 03
05 0115 03
06 0116 03
07 0117 03
08 0118 03
09 0119 03
10 0110 03
Note that all the above area codes have same pulse rates. Hence it is possible to compress them to one code: 011.
You can program this code with the common pulse rate 03. Thus, one entry in the system area code table will cover
10 entries.
The compressed area code table would look as shown below:
Area Code Pulse Rate
1 0111
Example 2
Index Area Code Pulse Rate
01 0131 03
02 0132 03
03 0133 03
04 0134 03
05 0135 03
06 0136 03
07 01372 03
08 01374 03
09 01376 03
10 0138 03
11 0139 03
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 897
In the above table, two pulse rates are different from others. You can program a common entry for area code 013.
And the exceptions can be entered separately as under:
Index Area Code Pulse Rate
01 013 03
02 0137 03
03 01372 03
Refer “Default Area Code Table for the Region-USA” at the end of chapter.
Step 16
Use following command to program an area code:
2620-Area Code Index-Area Code-#*
Where,
Area Code Index is from 001 to 999.
Area Code is a number string of maximum of 4 digits.
Use the following command to clear the area code for an index:
2620-Area Code Index-#*
Example:
Program area code 022 for Mumbai at area code index 001.
2620-001-022-#*
Step 17
Use following command to program Pulse Rate Type for Pulse Rate Option of area code index:
2621-Area Code Index-Pulse Rate Option-Pulse Rate Type
Where,
Area Code Index is from 001 to 999.
Pulse Rate Option is from 1 to 4.
Pulse Rate Type is from 01 to 32.
Step 18
Use following command to delete the complete Area Code Table:
2622-Reverse SE Password
Example:
To delete the area code table use command:
2622-4321 (The SE password is assumed to be 1234).
There is no command to delete a single entry from the area code table. However, these can be cleared or
overwritten.
Step 19
Use following command to program ignore digit count when SP_SP LCR is to be used:
2623-Area Code Index-Ignore Digit Count
Where,
Area Code Index is from 001 to 999. Refer “Default Area Code Table for the Region-USA”’ at end of the chapter.
Ignore Digit Count is from 0 to 9.
By default, Ignore digit is 0.
898 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Please refer topic “Configuring LCR” for more details on SP-SP LCR Type and Ignore Digit Count.
Holidays
Step 20
Use following command to program a weekly off:
2630-Day-Code
Where,
Holiday Index 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Day Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat
Code Meaning
0 Not a Holiday
1 Holiday
If any week day is programmed as holiday then holiday pulse rates will be applicable.
By default, Sunday is programmed as holiday.
Example:
To program Tuesday is a holiday:
2630-3-1
To program Sunday as working day (not a holiday)
2630-1-0
Step 21
Use following command to program a holiday date:
2631-Holiday Date Index-Date-Month
Where,
Holiday Date Index is from 1 to 5 (Five dates can be programmed).
Date is from 01 to 31.
Month is from 01 to 12.
By default, holiday is shown below:
Holiday Date Index Day
1 26-01
2 15-08
3 02-10
4 Blank
5 Blank
Use the following command to clear a holiday date index:
2632-Holiday Date Index
Example:
To program 1st May as a holiday as use following command:
2631-1-01-5
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 899
Step 22
Use the following command to program Area code name:
2633-Area Code Index-Name
Where,
Area Code Index is from 001 to 999.
Name is character string is of maximum 12 characters.
Use following command to clear area code name:
2633-Area Code Index-#*
Default Area Code Table for the Region-USA
Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count
1 1201 NJ 2 0
2 1202 DC 2 0
3 1203 CT 2 0
4 1204 Manitoba 2 0
5 1205 AL 2 0
6 1206 WA 2 0
7 1207 ME 2 0
8 1208 ID 2 0
9 1209 CA 2 0
10 1210 TX 2 0
11 1212 NY 2 0
12 1213 CA 2 0
13 1214 TX 2 0
14 1215 PA 2 0
15 1216 OH 2 0
16 1217 IL 2 0
17 1218 MN 2 0
18 1219 IN 2 0
19 1224 IL 2 0
20 1225 LA 2 0
21 1226 Ontario 2 0
22 1228 MS 2 0
23 1229 GA 2 0
24 1231 MI 2 0
25 1234 OH 2 0
26 1239 FL 2 0
27 1240 MD 2 0
900 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count
28 1242 Bahamas 2 0
29 1246 Barbados 2 0
30 1248 MI 2 0
31 1250 BC 2 0
32 1251 AL 2 0
33 1252 NC 2 0
34 1253 WA 2 0
35 1254 TX 2 0
36 1256 AL 2 0
37 1260 IN 2 0
38 1262 WI 2 0
39 1264 Anguilla 2 0
40 1267 PA 2 0
41 1268 Antigua 2 0
42 1269 MI 2 0
43 1270 KY 2 0
44 1276 VA 2 0
45 1281 TX 2 0
46 1284 BVI 2 0
47 1289 Ontario 2 0
48 1301 MD 2 0
49 1302 DE 2 0
50 1303 CO 2 0
51 1304 WV 2 0
52 1305 FL 2 0
53 1306 Saskatchewan 2 0
54 1307 WY 2 0
55 1308 NE 2 0
56 1309 IL 2 0
57 1310 CA 2 0
58 1312 IL 2 0
59 1313 MI 2 0
60 1314 MO 2 0
61 1315 NY 2 0
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 901
Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count
62 1316 KS 2 0
63 1317 IN 2 0
64 1318 LA 2 0
65 1319 IA 2 0
66 1320 MN 2 0
67 1321 FL 2 0
68 1323 CA 2 0
69 1325 TX 2 0
70 1330 OH 2 0
71 1331 IL 2 0
72 1334 AL 2 0
73 1336 NC 2 0
74 1337 LA 2 0
75 1339 MA 2 0
76 1340 USVI 2 0
77 1345 Cayman 2 0
78 1347 NY 2 0
79 1351 MA 2 0
80 1352 FL 2 0
81 1360 WA 2 0
82 1361 TX 2 0
83 1386 FL 2 0
84 1401 RI 2 0
85 1402 NE 2 0
86 1403 Alberta 2 0
87 1404 GA 2 0
88 1405 OK 2 0
89 1406 MT 2 0
90 1407 FL 2 0
91 1408 CA 2 0
92 1409 TX 2 0
93 1410 MD 2 0
94 1412 PA 2 0
95 1413 MA 2 0
902 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count
96 1414 WI 2 0
97 1415 CA 2 0
98 1416 Ontario 2 0
99 1417 MO 2 0
100 1418 Quebec 2 0
101 1419 OH 2 0
102 1423 TN 2 0
103 1424 CA 2 0
104 1425 WA 2 0
105 1430 TX 2 0
106 1432 TX 2 0
107 1434 VA 2 0
108 1435 UT 2 0
109 1438 Quebec 2 0
110 1440 OH 2 0
111 1441 Bermuda 2 0
112 1443 MD 2 0
113 1450 Quebec 2 0
114 1456 NANParea 2 0
115 1469 TX 2 0
116 1473 Grenada 2 0
117 1478 GA 2 0
118 1479 AR 2 0
119 1480 AZ 2 0
120 1484 PA 2 0
121 1500 NANParea 2 0
122 1501 AR 2 0
123 1502 KY 2 0
124 1503 OR 2 0
125 1504 LA 2 0
126 1505 NM 2 0
127 1506 NewBrunswick 2 0
128 1507 MN 2 0
129 1508 MA 2 0
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 903
Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count
130 1509 WA 2 0
131 1510 CA 2 0
132 1512 TX 2 0
133 1513 OH 2 0
134 1514 Quebec 2 0
135 1515 IA 2 0
136 1516 NY 2 0
137 1517 MI 2 0
138 1518 NY 2 0
139 1519 Ontario 2 0
140 1520 AZ 2 0
141 1530 CA 2 0
142 1540 VA 2 0
143 1541 OR 2 0
144 1551 NJ 2 0
145 1559 CA 2 0
146 1561 FL 2 0
147 1562 CA 2 0
148 1563 IA 2 0
149 1567 OH 2 0
150 1570 PA 2 0
151 1571 VA 2 0
152 1573 MO 2 0
153 1574 IN 2 0
154 1575 NM 2 0
155 1580 OK 2 0
156 1585 NY 2 0
157 1586 MI 2 0
158 1600 Canada 2 0
159 1601 MS 2 0
160 1602 AZ 2 0
161 1603 NH 2 0
162 1604 BC 2 0
163 1605 SD 2 0
904 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count
164 1606 KY 2 0
165 1607 NY 2 0
166 1608 WI 2 0
167 1609 NJ 2 0
168 1610 PA 2 0
169 1612 MN 2 0
170 1613 Ontario 2 0
171 1614 OH 2 0
172 1615 TN 2 0
173 1616 MI 2 0
174 1617 MA 2 0
175 1618 IL 2 0
176 1619 CA 2 0
177 1620 KS 2 0
178 1623 AZ 2 0
179 1626 CA 2 0
180 1630 IL 2 0
181 1631 NY 2 0
182 1636 MO 2 0
183 1641 IA 2 0
184 1646 NY 2 0
185 1647 Ontario 2 0
186 1649 T&CIsland 2 0
187 1650 CA 2 0
188 1651 MN 2 0
189 1660 MO 2 0
190 1661 CA 2 0
191 1662 MS 2 0
192 1664 Montsrat 2 0
193 1670 CNMI 2 0
194 1671 GU 2 0
195 1678 GA 2 0
196 1682 TX 2 0
197 1684 AS 2 0
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 905
Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count
198 1700 NANParea 2 0
199 1701 ND 2 0
200 1702 NV 2 0
201 1703 VA 2 0
202 1704 NC 2 0
203 1705 Ontario 2 0
204 1706 GA 2 0
205 1707 CA 2 0
206 1708 IL 2 0
207 1709 Newfoundland 2 0
208 1710 US 2 0
209 1712 IA 2 0
210 1713 TX 2 0
211 1714 CA 2 0
212 1715 WI 2 0
213 1716 NY 2 0
214 1717 PA 2 0
215 1718 NY 2 0
216 1719 CO 2 0
217 1720 CO 2 0
218 1724 PA 2 0
219 1727 FL 2 0
220 1731 TN 2 0
221 1732 NJ 2 0
222 1734 MI 2 0
223 1740 OH 2 0
224 1754 FL 2 0
225 1757 VA 2 0
226 1758 St.Lucia 2 0
227 1760 CA 2 0
228 1762 GA 2 0
229 1763 MN 2 0
230 1765 IN 2 0
231 1767 Dominica 2 0
906 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count
232 1769 MS 2 0
233 1770 GA 2 0
234 1772 FL 2 0
235 1773 IL 2 0
236 1774 MA 2 0
237 1775 NV 2 0
238 1778 BC 2 0
239 1779 IL 2 0
240 1780 Alberta 2 0
241 1781 MA 2 0
242 1784 St. V&G 2 0
243 1785 KS 2 0
244 1786 FL 2 0
245 1787 PrtoRico 2 0
246 1800 NANParea 2 0
247 1801 UT 2 0
248 1802 VT 2 0
249 1803 SC 2 0
250 1804 VA 2 0
251 1805 CA 2 0
252 1806 TX 2 0
253 1807 Ontario 2 0
254 1808 HI 2 0
255 1809 DomRepub 2 0
256 1810 MI 2 0
257 1812 IN 2 0
258 1813 FL 2 0
259 1814 PA 2 0
260 1815 IL 2 0
261 1816 MO 2 0
262 1817 TX 2 0
263 1818 CA 2 0
264 1819 Quebec 2 0
265 1828 NC 2 0
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 907
Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count
266 1829 DomRepub 2 0
267 1830 TX 2 0
268 1831 CA 2 0
269 1832 TX 2 0
270 1843 SC 2 0
271 1845 NY 2 0
272 1847 IL 2 0
273 1848 NJ 2 0
274 1850 FL 2 0
275 1856 NJ 2 0
276 1857 MA 2 0
277 1858 CA 2 0
278 1859 KY 2 0
279 1860 CT 2 0
280 1862 NJ 2 0
281 1863 FL 2 0
282 1864 SC 2 0
283 1865 TN 2 0
284 1866 NANParea 2 0
285 1867 Yukon 2 0
286 1868 Tri&Tob 2 0
287 1869 St. K&N 2 0
288 1870 AR 2 0
289 1876 Jamaica 2 0
290 1877 NANParea 2 0
291 1878 PA 2 0
292 1888 NANParea 2 0
293 1900 NANParea 2 0
294 1901 TN 2 0
295 1902 N Scotia 2 0
296 1903 TX 2 0
297 1904 FL 2 0
298 1905 Ontario 2 0
299 1906 MI 2 0
908 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count
300 1907 AK 2 0
301 1908 NJ 2 0
302 1909 CA 2 0
303 1910 NC 2 0
304 1912 GA 2 0
305 1913 KS 2 0
306 1914 NY 2 0
307 1915 TX 2 0
308 1916 CA 2 0
309 1917 NY 2 0
310 1918 OK 2 0
311 1919 NC 2 0
312 1920 WI 2 0
313 1925 CA 2 0
314 1928 AZ 2 0
315 1931 TN 2 0
316 1936 TX 2 0
317 1937 OH 2 0
318 1939 PrtoRico 2 0
319 1940 TX 2 0
320 1941 FL 2 0
321 1947 MI 2 0
322 1949 CA 2 0
323 1951 CA 2 0
324 1952 MN 2 0
325 1954 FL 2 0
326 1956 TX 2 0
327 1970 CO 2 0
328 1971 OR 2 0
329 1972 TX 2 0
330 1973 NJ 2 0
331 1978 MA 2 0
332 1979 TX 2 0
333 1980 NC 2 0
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 909
Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count
334 1985 LA 2 0
335 1989 MI 2 0
336 0117 Kazkhstan 2
337 01120 Egypt 2
338 01127 South Africa 2
339 01130 Greece 2
340 01131 Netherlands 2
341 01132 Belgium 2
342 01133 France 2
343 01134 Spain 2
344 01136 Hungary 2
345 01139 VaticanCity 2
346 01140 Romania 2
347 01141 Switzerland 2
348 01143 Austria 2
349 01144 UK 2
350 01145 Denmark 2
351 01146 Sweden 2
352 01147 Norway 2
353 01148 Poland 2
354 01149 Germany 2
355 01151 Peru 2
356 01152 Mexico 2
357 01153 Cuba 2
358 01154 Argentine 2
359 01155 Brazil 2
360 01156 Chile 2
361 01157 Colombia 2
362 01158 Venezuela 2
363 01160 Malaysia 2
364 01161 Australia 2
365 01162 Indonesia 2
366 01163 Philippines 2
367 01164 NZ 2
910 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count
368 01165 Singapore 2
369 01166 Thailand 2
370 01181 Japan 2
371 01182 Korea 2
372 01184 VietNam 2
373 01186 China 2
374 01190 Turkey 2
375 01191 India 2
376 01192 Pakistan 2
377 01193 Afghanistan 2
378 01194 Sri Lanka 2
379 01195 Myanmar 2
380 01198 Iran 2
381 011212 Morocco 2
382 011213 Algeria 2
383 011216 Tunisia 2
384 011218 Libya 2
385 011220 Gambia 2
386 011221 Senegal 2
387 011222 Mauritania 2
388 011223 Mali 2
389 011224 Guinea 2
390 011225 IvoryCoast 2
391 011226 BurkinaFaso 2
392 011227 Niger 2
393 011228 Togolese 2
394 011229 Benin 2
395 011230 Mauritius 2
396 011231 Liberia 2
397 011232 SierraLeone 2
398 011233 Ghana 2
399 011234 Nigeria 2
400 011235 Chad 2
401 011236 CenAfrica 2
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 911
Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count
402 011237 Cameroon 2
403 011238 CapeVerde 2
404 011239 SaoTome 2
405 011240 Equtl_Guinea 2
406 011241 Gabonese 2
407 011242 Congo 2
408 011243 CongoDem 2
409 011244 Angola 2
410 011245 GuineaBissa 2
411 011246 DiegoGarcia 2
412 011247 Ascension 2
413 011248 Seychelles 2
414 011249 Sudan 2
415 011250 Rwandese 2
416 011251 Ethiopia 2
417 011252 SomalianRep 2
418 011253 Djibouti 2
419 011254 Kenya 2
420 011255 Tanzania 2
421 011256 Uganda 2
422 011257 Burundi 2
423 011258 Mozambique 2
424 011260 Zambia 2
425 011261 Madagascar 2
426 011262 Reunion 2
427 011263 Zimbabwe 2
428 011264 Namibia 2
429 011265 Malawi 2
430 011266 Lesotho 2
431 011267 Botswana 2
432 011268 Swaziland 2
433 011269 Comoros 2
434 011290 StHelena 2
435 011291 Eritrea 2
912 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count
436 011297 Aruba 2
437 011298 FaroeIsland 2
438 011299 Greenland 2
439 011350 Gibraltar 2
440 011351 Portugal 2
441 011352 Luxembourg 2
442 011353 Ireland 2
443 011354 Iceland 2
444 011355 Albania 2
445 011356 Malta 2
446 011357 Cyprus 2
447 011358 Finland 2
448 011359 Bulgaria 2
449 011370 Lithuania 2
450 011371 Latvia 2
451 011372 Estonia 2
452 011373 Moldova 2
453 011374 Armenia 2
454 011375 Belarus 2
455 011376 Andorra 2
456 011377 Monaco 2
457 011378 SanMarino 2
458 011379 VaticanCity 2
459 011380 Ukraine 2
460 011381 Yugoslavia 2
461 011385 Croatia 2
462 011386 Slovenia 2
463 011387 Bosnia 2
464 011389 Macedonia 2
465 011420 Czech Repub 2
466 011421 Slovakia 2
467 011423 Liechtenstein 2
468 011500 Falklands 2
469 011501 Belize 2
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 913
Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count
470 011502 Guatemala 2
471 011503 El Salvador 2
472 011504 Honduras 2
473 011505 Nicaragua 2
474 011506 CostaRica 2
475 011507 Panama 2
476 011508 St.Pierre 2
477 011509 Haiti 2
478 011590 Guadeloupe 2
479 011591 Bolivia 2
480 011592 Guyana 2
481 011593 Ecuador 2
482 011594 FrenchGuyana 2
483 011595 Paraguay 2
484 011596 Martinique 2
485 011597 Suriname 2
486 011598 Uruguay 2
487 011599 NethAntilles 2
488 011670 East Timor 2
489 011672 Antarctic 2
490 011673 Brunei 2
491 011674 Nauru 2
492 011675 PapuaNewGuin 2
493 011676 Tonga 2
494 011677 SolomonIslnd 2
495 011678 Vanuatu 2
496 011679 Fiji 2
497 011680 Palau 2
498 011681 Wallis Island 2
499 011682 Cook Islands 2
500 011683 Niuel Island 2
501 011684 AmerSamoa 2
502 011685 WSamoa 2
503 011686 Kiribati 2
914 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count
504 011687 NewCaledonia 2
505 011688 Tuvalu 2
506 011689 FrenchPolyne 2
507 011690 Tokelau 2
508 011691 Micronesia 2
509 011692 MarshalIslnd 2
510 011850 Korea North 2
511 011852 Hong Kong 2
512 011853 Macau 2
513 011855 Cambodia 2
514 011856 Laos 2
515 011870 SatIndlOcn 2
516 011871 SatEastAtl 2
517 011872 SatPacific 2
518 011873 SatIndianOcn 2
519 011874 SatWestAtl 2
520 011880 Bangladesh 2
521 011960 Maldives 2
522 011961 Lebanon 2
523 011962 Jordan 2
524 011963 SyrianArab 2
525 011964 Iraq 2
526 011965 Kuwait 2
527 011966 SaudiArabia 2
528 011967 Yemen 2
529 011968 Oman 2
530 011971 UAE 2
531 011972 Israel 2
532 011973 Bahrain 2
533 011974 Qatar 2
534 011975 Bhutan 2
535 011976 Mongolia 2
536 011977 Nepal 2
537 011992 Tajikistan 2
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 915
Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count
538 011993 Turkmenistan 2
539 011994 Azerbaijani 2
540 011995 Georgia 2
541 011996 Kyrgyzstan 2
542 011998 Uzbekistan 2
543 2
544 2
545 2
546 2
547 2
: 2
998 2
999 2
Relevant Topics:
1. “Call Cost Display” 917
2. “Call Budget” 870
3. “QSIG” 1402
4. “Configuring LCR” 716
5. “Call Budget on Trunk” 874
6. “Trunk Feature Template” 546
916 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Call Cost Display
What is this?
With Call Cost Display, you can view the cost of the last 10 external calls made from your extension. These external
calls may have been made from Trunk Ports and on the Tie line network.
The system will display the dialed numbers and the call cost for each number that it has calculated on the LCD of
EON.
How to configure
For this feature to work, it must be enabled on the extension by the System Administrator (SA).
To enable 'Call Cost Display' for an extension:
• Enter SA mode.
• Dial command 1072-181-Station-Flag
Where,
Station is Number of the DKP Extension
Flag is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
By default Call Cost Display is enabled.
• Exit SA mode.
How to use
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users Only
• Press DSS Key assigned to Call Cost Display feature.
OR
• Dial 1075.
• Scroll with the up/down navigation keys to view the cost of the last 10 calls.
• The display shows the last 10 dialed numbers and their corresponding call cost.
For example: If the call charge is for the dialed number 0014034545247 is $2 and 80 cents' then the
display will show:
001403454 5247 2.8 0
F ri 22 JAN 12:19
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 917
• The display is retained till the extension remains OFF-Hook.
• Go Idle or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.
918 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Call Duration Control (CDC)
What's this?
Call Duration Control (CDC) allows a maximum time limit to be set on internal and external (both incoming and
outgoing) telephone calls. When the maximum call duration is reached, the calls are disconnected, after a warning
tone indicating to the user that the calls in progress will be disconnected.
By limiting the duration of the conversations, CDC helps increase availability of trunks for making outgoing calls
and for receiving incoming calls, which is important in high call traffic situations. Besides increasing trunk
availability, CDC curbs unrelated and unproductive conversations.
At a time, ETERNITY can control the duration of 64 calls.
How it works
• A is an extension user. B is an external number.
External-Outgoing Calls
• A dials B's number.
• The system checks the CDC Table applied to A.
• It checks whether the flag, Apply CDC to Outgoing Calls, is enabled. It matches B's number with the
entries on the Apply CDC to Number List and the Do Not Apply CDC to Number list in the CDC table.
Three results are possible:
a. The flag is enabled and a match is found for the number in the Apply CDC to Number List. So, CDC is
applied on the call.
b. The flag is enabled and a match is found in the Do Not Apply CDC to Number List. CDC is not applied
on the call.
c. The flag is enabled and a match is found in both Number Lists, i.e. Apply CDC and Do Not Apply CDC.
The system gives precedence to the Do Not Apply Number List. So, CDC is not applied to the call.
• When CDC is applied to the call (see point a above), the CDC Timer starts as soon as B has answered the
call. This timer is set to 160 seconds as default, but can be programmed to the desired time limit.
• At the end of the default/programmed time limit of the CDC Timer, the CDC Goodbye Timer starts. This
timer provides a grace period of 20 seconds for the user to finish the call. This Timer is non-programmable.
• At the end of the Goodbye Timer, the call is disconnected, if the 'Disconnect CDC after Timer' flag is
enabled.
• If this flag has not been programmed, the call will not be disconnected.
• Instead, the CDC Warn Timer will be loaded again for the default/programmed duration. The user can
know how long s/he has been talking.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 919
• A is played Warning Beeps. B cannot hear the beeps. This continues until either party disconnects.
External-Incoming Calls
CDC works similarly for incoming calls.
• B calls A.
• The system checks whether the flag, Apply CDC to Incoming Calls, is enabled and matches B's number
with the entries on the Apply CDC to Number List in the table. If the flag is enabled and a match is found
for the number, CDC is applied on the call.
• A will get beeps.
Internal Calls
A and B are extension users.
• A calls B.
• The system checks whether the flag, Apply CDC to Internal Calls, is enabled in the CDC Table.
• If the flag is enabled, CDC is applied on the call.
• Warning beeps are played to A, who made the call.
Warning Beep
Default: 160 secs. Default: 20 secs.
Total time after which call will be disconnected
Feature Interactions:
• Call Transfer: In case of transferred call, the CDC timer gets reset and starts again afresh on the
transferred extension.
• Conference: CDC is treated as turned OFF.
• Call Park: CDC is treated as turned OFF.
• Interrupt Request, Barge-In and Raid: CDC is treated as turned 'ON'.
• Emergency Number Dialing: Emergency calls are not affected by this feature, i.e. CDC will not be
applied on the dialing of Emergency Numbers.
• For Inter PINX or Intra PINX calls (QSIG Calls), the CDC will work only if it is enabled on the source port
(calling extension) irrespective of whether CDC is enabled or disabled on the called extension.
920 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
How to configure
This feature is controlled by the 'Call Duration Control Table'. This table is to be programmed as required by the
extensions. The CDC Table is assigned in the Station Advanced Feature Template of those extensions on which
Call Duration Control is to be applied.
To program the Call Duration Control Table,
• decide the types of calls - Outgoing, Incoming and Internal - on which CDC is to be enabled.
• make a list of numbers on which CDC is to be applied, i.e. the Apply CDC to Numbers List.
• Make a list of numbers on which CDC is not to be applied, the Do Not Apply CDC to Number List.
The Call Duration Control Table can be programmed using Jeeves and a Telephone.
Programming CDC Table using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Click the 'Call Duration Control' link to open the page.
• The CDC Table will open. There are 8 CDC Tables. By default CDC Table No. 1 is assigned to all
extensions of ETERNITY. If the same CDC is to be assigned to all extensions, program this table.
If different CDC is to be applied to different extensions, program separate CDC tables for these
extensions.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 921
• Now program the following parameters in the table you have selected:
• Apply CDC to Internal Calls: This flag is to be enabled if CDC is to be applied on internal calls. By
default the flag is disabled.
• Apply CDC to Incoming Calls: This flag is to be enabled if CDC is to be applied to incoming calls
external calls. By default this flag is disabled.
• Apply CDC to Outgoing Calls: This flag is to be enabled if CDC is to be applied to outgoing external
calls. By default this flag is disabled.
• Do Not Apply CDC to Number List: This is the list of numbers on which CDC is not to be applied. By
default, Number List 08 is assigned to this parameter. You must program this list with numbers which
you want to be exempt from CDC.
To program the list, click 'Do Not Apply CDC to Number List'.
922 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
This will lead you to the “Number Lists” page. Click '001-250' of Number list 07-08.
By default, Number List 08 is assigned to this parameter. You can also program any other Number List
you want. Enter the list of numbers on which CDC is not be applied (refer to the list you prepared).
Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your list.
Return to the "Call Duration Control' page. If you have prepared a Number List other than the default
08, then enter the list of that number in the Do Not Apply CDC to Number List column.
• Apply CDC to Number List: This is the list of numbers on which CDC is to be applied. By default,
Number List 07 is assigned to this parameter. You must program this list with numbers on which you
want CDC to be applied.
To program the list, click 'Apply CDC to Number List'. The 'Number Lists' page opens.
Click '001-250' of Number list 07-08. Follow the same steps as described above for programming the
Do Not Apply CDC Number List.
• CDC Timer: This is the time for which the warning beeps are to be played before the system
disconnects the call. The range of the timer is 0001 to 9999 seconds. By default this Timer is set to 160
seconds. Set the CDC Timer to the desired time limit.
• Disconnect Call after CDC Timer: This flag is to be enabled if you want the call to be automatically
disconnected on the expiry of the CDC Timer. By default the flag is disabled, which means that calls will
not be disconnected on expiry of the CDC Timer. Enable the flag if required.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 923
• Click to open the link 'Station Advanced Feature Template'. Ensure that the CDC Table Number (in this
case 01) you have programmed is assigned in the Template you want to apply to the extensions.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
• To assign the Station Advanced Feature Template with the CDC Table on SLT, DKP and ISDN Terminal
extensions, go to the respective pages 'SLT Parameters' under 'SLT Configuration', 'DKP Parameters'
under 'DKP Configuration' and 'ISDN Terminal Parameters'.
Refer “Station Advanced Feature Template” for instructions on customizing the templates and assigning
them to extensions.
• If selected extensions are to be allowed CDC or if different CDC parameters are to be allowed to selected
extensions (for example, 160 seconds duration timer for a few extensions, 360 duration timer for some
other extensions), then follow these steps:
a. Define a new CDC table.
b. Program the different CDC parameters in this table, as required for the extensions.
c. Apply this CDC table on a separate Station Advanced Feature Template.
d. Apply the new Station Advanced Feature Template now programmed with a different CDC table on the
selected extensions which are to be allowed this feature.
• Log out of Jeeves or continue programming if required.
924 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Programming CDC Table using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode.
To enable CDC for Outgoing Calls in a CDC Table, dial:
• 4202-1-CDC Table-Code to enable the flag in a single table.
• 4202-2-CDC Table-CDC Table-Code to enable the flag in a range of tables.
• 4202-*-Code to enable the flag in all tables.
Where,
CDC Table is from 1 to 8.
Code is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable.
To enable CDC flag for Incoming Calls in a CDC Table, dial:
• 4203-1-CDC Table-Code to enable the flag in a single table.
• 4203-2-CDC Table-CDC Table-Code to enable the flag in a range of tables.
• 4203-*-Code to enable the flag in all tables.
Where,
CDC Table is from 1 to 8.
Code is
0 for Disable.
1 for Enable.
To enable CDC flag for Internal Call, dial:
• 4204-1-CDC Table-Code to enable the flag in a single table.
• 4204-2-CDC Table-CDC Table-Code to enable the flag in a range of tables.
• 4204-*-Code to enable the flag in all tables.
Where,
CDC Table is from 1 to 8.
Code is
0 for Disable.
1 for Enable.
To assign a number list to Apply CDC to Number List, dial:
• 4205-1-CDC Table-Number List to enable the flag in a single table.
• 4205-2-CDC Table-CDC Table-Number List to enable the flag in a range of tables.
• 4205-*-Number List to enable the flag in all tables.
Where,
CDC Table is from 1 to 8.
Number List is from 01 to 16.
Default Number List is 07.
To assign a number list to Do Not Apply CDC to Number List, dial:
• 4206-1-CDC Table- Number List to assign Number List to a single table.
• 4206-2-CDC Table-CDC Table- Number List to assign Number List to a range of tables.
• 4206-*-Number List to assign Number List to all tables.
Where,
CDC Table is from 1 to 8.
Number List is from 01 to 16.
Default, Number List is 08.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 925
You must also program the Number Lists (default: 07 and 08) before assigning them to a CDC table. Refer
the topic 'Number Lists' for programming instructions.
To change CDC timer in a CDC table:
• 4207-1-CDC Table-CDC Timer to set Timer value in a single table.
• 4207-2-CDC Table-CDC Table-CDC Timer to set the same Timer value in a range of table
• 4207-*-CDC Timer to set the same Timer value in all tables.
Where,
CDC Table is from 1 to 8.
CDC Timer range is from 0001 to 9999 seconds.
Default CDC Timer value is 160 seconds.
To enable the Disconnection Flag in a CDC table:
• 4208-1-CDC Table-Disconnection Flag to enable the flag in a single table.
• 4208-2-CDC Table-CDC Table-Disconnection Flag to enable the flag in a range of tables.
• 4208-*-Disconnection Flag to enable the flag in all tables.
Where,
CDC Table is from 1 to 8.
Disconnection Flag is
0 for Disable.
1 for Enable.
To default a CDC table133 (see Table with Default Values):
• 4201-1-CDC Table to default a single table.
• 4201-2-CDC Table-CDC Table to default a range of tables.
• 4201-* to default all tables.
Where,
CDC Table is 1 to 8.
Example: Apply Call Duration Control on SLT 202 (connected at software port number 001) to disconnect all
calls starting with '0' after 240 seconds, except calls starting with '022'.
Solution: Since only one SLT is to be programmed, it is recommended that you use a CDC table other than
the default (CDC Table No. 1). So, select another CDC table to be assigned to SLT extension 202, for
example CDC Table No. 5. Follow these steps:
1. First, program the Apply CDC to Number List and Do Not Apply CDC to Number List. For example, take
Number List 04 as the Apply CDC to Number List and program the number '0' in this list. Take Number List
05 as the Do Not Apply CDC to Number List and program '022' in this list. Refer the topic "Number Lists"
for programming instructions.
2. Enable CDC for Outgoing call in the table. If using SE Commands, dial 4202-1-5-1.
3. Assign Number List 04 as allowed list and Number List 05 as denied list in table 5. If using SE commands
dial 4205-1-5-04 to assign List 04 and dial 4206-1-5-05 to assign List 05.
4. Change the CDC timer to 240 seconds. If using SE Commands, dial 4207-1-5-240.
5. Enable CDC disconnection Flag in CDC Table 5. If using SE Commands, dial 4208-1-5-1.
133. Refer Call Duration Control Table (Default Values).
926 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
6. Assign CDC Table 5 to SLT 202. To do this, change the CDC number in a Station Advanced Feature
Template of SLT 202.
7. Program a different Station Advanced Feature Template for SLT 202. Ensure that all other features and
parameters in the template are relevant for SLT 202.
8. Change the CDC Table number in the Template to 5.
9. Assign the Station Advanced Feature Template now programmed with CDC Table No. 5 to SLT 202. Refer
the topic “Station Advanced Feature Template” for programming instructions.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 927
Call Duration Display
What's this?
By invoking Call Duration Display, extension users can view the duration of the current call instantly.
Needless to say, only EON users can view Call Duration Display. The system displays the duration of the current
call on the LCD display of the phone.
The current call may be incoming or outgoing, internal or external call.
How it works
• The EON user goes OFF-Hook
• Dials an external number.
• The remote party answers the call.
• The dialed external number with duration (5-digits in the format of MM:SS) is displayed on the LCD of
EON, when the call is answered.
6 1 6 A M I T PAT E L 02:52
F ri 22 JAN 12:19
928 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Call Forward
What's this?
During a typical workday, it is common for people in an organization to move from one place to another. For
instance, a manager might go on the production floor or remain in the conference room for a few hours; a field
engineer may spend half of the day on site. So, they need to be able to attend their calls even when they are not
present at their desks. The 'Call Forward' feature of ETERNITY ensures this.
Using this feature, calls landing on an extension can be forwarded to another extension, an external number, Voice
Mail, or a Department Group. This way, extension users can ensure that callers can reach them and that they do
not miss calls when they are not present at their extension.
The Call Forward feature of ETERNITY offers the following forwarding options:
• Unconditionally - calls are forwarded to the destination phone number automatically without waiting for a
response from the called party's phone.
• If Busy - calls are forwarded to the destination phone number only when the called party's phone is busy.
• If No Reply - calls are forwarded to the destination phone number only when the called party does not
answer the phone. Each extension can set a different time after which the call should be forwarded, in
case of no reply. The default time is 30 seconds for all extensions and can be changed by programming
the Call Forward No-Reply Timer.
• If Busy or No Reply - calls are forwarded to the destination phone number when the called party's phone
is either busy or does not reply.
• Dual Ring134 - when calls are forwarded to another phone number. Both phones, i.e. the source phone
(whose calls are forwarded) as well as the destination phone (on which call is forwarded) will ring and the
user can answer from either extension.
Dual Ring is useful to users who may have to be present frequently at two different places. As it is
cumbersome to forward the calls from one extension to another and cancel it repeatedly, extensions users
can set Dual Ring, so they can attend to their calls at either place they are present.
How it works
A has set Call Forward to extension B unconditionally.
• The system forwards all calls for A to B, without checking for Busy Tone and without waiting for the Call
Forward No-Reply Timer to expire.
A has set Call Forward to external number on No-Reply.
• The system waits for the Call Forward No-Reply Timer to expire and forwards all external incoming calls to
the external number.
134.This feature is not supported in Q-Signaling.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 929
A has set Call Forward to extension B on Busy.
• The system forwards the call for A to B on detecting Busy signal from A.
B belongs to a Department Group and has set Call Forward-If Busy to C within the Department Group.
• If the system detects Busy signal on B, it forwards the call for B to C in the Department Group.
• However, if the caller has called the Department Group instead of calling B directly, the call will land in the
sequence on all Department group extensions. When it is B's turn, the call will not be forwarded to C, B will
ring instead.
C belongs to a Department Group and has set Call Forward-No Reply to D within the Department Group.
• The system waits for the Call Forward No-Reply Timer to expire, and forwards the call for C to D in the
Department Group.
D has set Call Forward to Voice Mail on Busy or No Reply.
• Whenever there is a call for D, if the system does not detect a busy signal from D, it waits for the Call
Forward No-Reply timer to expire.
• The system forwards the call to the Voice Mail Group.
E has set Call Forward Dual Ring on extension F.
• When there is a call for E, the system rings on both E and the destination F.
• E can answer the call at E or at F.
Feature Interaction:
• Do Not Disturb (DND): When DND and Call Forward are set on an extension, DND is given priority.
• You can select the types of calls, i.e. internal calls only, or trunk calls, or both, to be forwarded to
external numbers. You can program the system to forward internal calls only, or trunk calls only or both
trunk calls and internal calls, to the external number. For this, the parameter 'Allow External Call
Forward for' must be programmed in the “Station Advanced Feature Template” of the extensions that
are allowed Call Forward.
• The system supports only single-point Call Forward, which means, if the destination extension is also
forwarded, the call will not follow the forwarding path. For example: Calls for extension A are set to be
forwarded to extension B. Call Forward is also set on extension B with C as the destination number.
Calls for A will land on B only and calls for B will land on C only.
• Only one Call Forward Type can be set from an extension. Every new Call Forward Type set overrides
the previous one.
• When the calls are forwarded the extension user gets the feature tone on lifting the handset to indicate
that Call Forward is set on his/her extension.
930 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
How to configure
The functioning of this feature is controlled by three parameters: 'Class of Service' and 'Call Forward No-Reply
Timer' and ‘Allow External Call Forward for’.
Call Forward must be enabled in the Class of Service (COS) group of the extensions to which this feature is to be
allowed.
When Call Forward No-Reply is set, if required the Call Forward No-Reply Timer needs to be programmed.
You may select the types of calls, i.e. internal, external, both internal and external calls to be forwarded by
programming the ‘Allow External Call Forward for’ parameter.
Call Forward in Class of Service
In the default factory settings, Station Basic Feature Template Number 01 is assigned to all the extensions of
ETERNITY. Template 01 is assigned COS group 01 in which Call Forward is enabled. So, all extensions of
ETERNITY can use Call Forward.
If you want to deny Call Forward to certain extensions, follow these steps:
a. Define a CoS group with Call Forward disabled.
b. Prepare a Station Basic Feature Template with this CoS group applicable in all the “Time Zones”.
c. Assign this new Template to the extensions to which Call Forward is to be denied.
Refer the topics Class of Service and Station Basic Feature Template for programming instructions.
Call Forward No Reply Timer
When using Call Forward -No Reply, each extension can set a different Time after which the incoming call on the
extension should get forwarded when there is no reply from the extension. For this, the Call Forward No-Reply
Timer must be programmed. By default, this timer is set to 30 seconds.
The Call Forward No-Reply Timer is to be programmed in the “Station Advanced Feature Template” applied on the
extensions which are allowed Call Forward in their COS.
If you want to set this timer to the same duration for all extensions, simply set the Call Forward No-Reply Timer in
the default Station Advanced Feature Template 01 which is assigned to all extensions.
If you want to set different Timer duration for different extensions, then prepare separate Station Advanced Feature
Templates with the desired Timer durations and assign different Templates (with different Timer durations) to the
extensions as desired.
Allow External Call Forward for
The types of calls to be forwarded to the external number may be selected in the parameter "Allow External Call
Forward for" in the “Station Advanced Feature Template” applied on the extensions which are allowed Call
Forward.
You may select from 'Internal Calls', 'Trunk Calls' and 'Internal + Trunk Calls'. By default, only trunk calls are
forwarded to external numbers in the default Station Advanced Feature Template 01 which is assigned to all
extensions.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 931
If you want to set different call types for different extensions, then prepare separate Station Advanced Feature
Templates with the desired Call Types and assign these different Templates to the extensions as appropriate.
Refer the topic “Station Advanced Feature Template” for instructions on customizing the template and applying the
template to extensions using Jeeves and from a Telephone.
Changing Call Forward No-Reply Timer using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the 'Station Advanced Feature Template' link to open the page.
• Select an Advanced Feature Template number. (by default Template 01 is assigned to all extensions)
• Go to the column 'Call Forward No-Reply Timer (Sec.)'.
• Change to the desired value.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
• Apply the Template now configured with the Call Forward No-Reply Timer to the extensions.
932 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Changing Call Forward No-Reply Timer using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
• Dial command 5602-1-Station Advanced Feature Template Number-02-Call Forward No-Reply Timer
Where,
Station Advanced Feature Template is from 01 to 50. Default: 50.
Timer is from 001 to 255 seconds.
02 is the parameter number for "Call Forward No-Reply Timer" in the Template.
For example: To program Call Forward No-Reply Timer as '60' secs.' in Template number 02, dial 5602-1-
02-02-060
• Exit SE mode.
Refer the topic “Station Advanced Feature Template” for instructions on applying the template to extensions
using Jeeves and from a Telephone.
When Call Forward No-Reply is set on a phone that is programmed in a Trunk Landing Group, the calls will
be forwarded on expiry of 'Call Forward No-Reply' programmed in the routing group for this member
phone. Call Forward No-Reply Timer, programmed in Station Advanced Feature Template will not be
applied in this case.
How to use
Call Forward can be set/canceled by extension users who are allowed this feature. It can be set/canceled by an
extension user for another extension (refer “Call Forward-Remote” to know more).
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users
To set Call Forward,
• Press the 'Call Forward' key.
OR
• Dial 13.
• Scroll to select the desired Call Forward Type.
• Press 'Enter' key.
• Enter destination Phone Number/Voice Mail Group Number/ Department Group Number.
• You get a confirmatory text message and confirmation tone.
• Go Idle or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.
To set Call Forward-Dual Ring,
• First, set the desired Call Forward type.
• Press the 'Call Forward' key.
OR
• Dial 13.
• Scroll to select Dual Ring.
• Press 'Enter' key.
• Select Dual Ring ON
• Press ‘Enter’ key.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 933
• You get a confirmatory text message and confirmation tone.
• Go Idle or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.
• If the call is to be forwarded to an extension, dial the extension number.
• If the call is to be forwarded to an external number, dial Trunk Access Code, then the external phone
number and terminate the command with #*.
• For users world wide, Trunk Access Code (TAC) for dialing external numbers are: 0, 5, 61, 62, 63,
64.
• For users in USA, TAC for dialing external numbers are: 9, 5, 81, 82, 83, 84.
• If call is to be forwarded on voice mail, dial the Access Code for the Voice Mail group. The default
Access Code is 3931. Verify with the System Engineer if the default VMS Group Access Code has
been changed and use the new code to dial the VMS Group.
To cancel Call Forward,
• Press 'Call Forward' Key again.
OR
• Dial 13.
• Select 'Cancel'.
• You get a confirmatory text message and confirmation tone.
• Replace Handset on the cradle or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.
For SLT Users
To set Call Forward,
• Lift the handset.
• Dial 131 for Call Forward - All Calls
• Dial 132 for Call Forward - If Busy
• Dial 133 for Call Forward -If No Reply
• Dial 134 for Call Forward -If Busy or No Reply
• Dial destination Phone Number/Voice Mail Group Number/Department Number.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace handset.
To set Call Forward-Dual Ring,
• Set the desired Call Forward type.
• Dial 136-1 for Call Forward -Dual Ring
To cancel Call Forward,
• Lift the handset.
• Dial 130.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace the handset.
934 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To disable Dual Ring,
• Lift the handset.
• Dial 136.
• Dial 0.
• Replace Handset.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 935
Call Forward-Remote
What's this?
An extension user can set Call Forward for another ('remote') extension from his/her own extension. Thus, Call
Forward set for an extension from another extension is called 'Call Forward-Remote'.
This feature can be used by the Operator or the Receptionist to forward the calls for the Managers and other
extension users to the destinations where they will be available.
This feature is also useful in Hotels, where the Front Desk can set Call Forward for guests. Refer the ETERNITY
Hospitality System Manual to know how this feature can be used in hotels.
• Call Forward-Remote is possible only from the System Administration (SA) mode.
• Call Forward-Remote is not supported by Q-Signaling (QSIG).
How it works
This feature works in the same way as Call Forward. The only difference is that it is set by one extension user for
another extension.
For example:
• A and B are extension users.
• A needs to forward calls for B's extension to another extension 'C' or an external number or a Voice Mail
Group or a Department Number.
• A dials the Call Forward-Remote feature code followed by B's extension number, the destination number
where the calls for B should land.
• The system routes all incoming calls for B to the destination number.
How to configure
As Call Forward-Remote can be invoked only from the SA mode, either the feature 'System Admin Mode Access' or
'System Admin Station' must be enabled in the Class of Service of extensions that are to be allowed this feature.
The feature 'System Admin. Mode Access' requires a password to be dialed. Users must be provided a
password to use this feature from their extensions. The feature 'System Admin Station' allows entry into SA
mode, without a password.
In the default factory settings, Station Basic Feature Template Number 01 is assigned to all the extensions of
ETERNITY. This Template is assigned CoS group 01 by default. The default CoS group 01 has only 'System Admin
Mode Access' enabled. So, all extensions of the ETERNITY can access Call Forward Remote, provided they have
the SA password.
936 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Since 'System Admin Station' is disabled in the default CoS group 01, none of the extensions of the ETERNITY can
enter SA mode without password to set Call Forward-Remote.
You may decide which extensions should be allowed Call Forward-Remote feature. In general practice only very
few extensions are allowed this feature.
So, to allow this feature to a few extensions only:
a. Define a CoS group with either 'System Admin Mode Access' or 'System Admin Station' enabled. Recall
that the facility 'System Admin Mode Access' is password protected, so the extensions allowed access to
this feature must also be provided an SA Password.
b. Prepare a Station Basic Feature Template with this CoS group applicable in all the “Time Zones”.
c. Assign this new Template to the extensions to which Call Forward-Remote is to be allowed.
Refer the topics “Class of Service (COS)” and “Station Basic Feature Template” for detailed instructions and
programming.
How to use
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users
To set Call Forward-Remote:
• Press the DSS Key assigned to 'Call Forward-Remote'.
OR
• Dial 1072-006.
• Enter the Destination Phone Number.
• Scroll to select the desired Call Forward Type:
• All Calls.
• If Busy.
• If No Reply.
• If Busy or No Reply.
• Dual Ring.
• Press 'Enter' key.
• Enter Destination Phone Number135/Voice Mail Group Number136/Department Group.
• You get a confirmation tone and a text message for the Call Forward type set.
• Go Idle or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.
135. If call is to be forwarded to an extension of the ETERNITY, dial the extension number. If call is to be forwarded on an external num-
ber, dial Trunk Access Code, then dial the external phone number and terminate the command with #*.
For users world wide, Trunk Access Code (TAC) for dialing external numbers are: 0, 5, 61, 62, 63, 64. For users in USA, TAC for
dialing external numbers are: 9, 5, 81, 82, 83, 84.
136. If call is to be forwarded on voice mail, dial the Access Code for the Voice Mail group. The default Access Code is 3931.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 937
To cancel Call Forward set for an extension,
• Press the DSS Key assigned to 'Call Forward-Remote'.
OR
• Dial 1072-006.
• Enter Extension Number.
• Scroll to select 'Cancel'.
• Press 'Enter' key.
• You get a confirmation tone and text message for Call Forward canceled.
• Go Idle or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.
For SLT Users
To set Call Forward-Remote:
• Lift handset.
• Dial 1072-006.
• Enter Extension Number.
• Dial 1 for All Calls
• Dial 2 for If Busy
• Dial 3 for If No Reply
• Dial 4 for If Busy or No Reply
• Dial 5 for Dual Ring
• Dial destination Phone Number/Voice Mail Group Number.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace handset.
To cancel Call Forward Remote:
• Lift the handset.
• Dial 1072-006.
• Dial the Extension Number.
• Dial 0.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace handset.
938 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Call Forward-Scheduled
What's this?
Extension users may want their calls to be automatically forwarded to a desired destination number during working
hours or non-working hours. To cite an example, a Support Technician spends working hours on the field and
wants all incoming calls on his extension in the office to be forwarded to his cell phone during working hours. During
non-working hours, he wants call calls to be forwarded to his voice mail.
Remembering to set and cancel Call Forward and changing the destination number for each Time Zone, i.e.
working hours, non-working hours, break hours, every day proves to be cumbersome for such extension users.
In addition to “Call Forward”, ETERNITY supports 'Call Forward - Scheduled', which allows extension users to set
call forward for desired Time Zones at one time, and the system automatically forwards the calls to the destination
defined for each Time Zone.
How it works
Call Forward-Scheduled supports all the forwarding options as Call Forward: Unconditionally, If Busy, If No Reply, If
Busy or No Reply, Dual Ring.
Any of these options can be set for the three Time Zones: working hours, break hours and non-working hours.
The destination for Call Forward-Scheduled can be an internal (extension) number or an external number.
Both 'Call Forward' and Call Forward-Scheduled can be set on the same extension. In this case, priority is given to
'Call Forward' over Call Forward-Scheduled.
The logic for forwarding calls to the destination number remains the same as described in the topic “Call Forward”,
illustrated in the following example.
• Extension user A sets Call Forward-Unconditionally to extension B for Non-working hours.
• When there is a call on extension A, the system first checks if there is any 'Call Forward' type (i.e.,
Unconditional, Busy, No Reply, Busy/No Reply, Call Follow Me) set on extension A.
• If 'Call Forward' is set on extension A, the system will follow the logic described in 'How it works' under the
topic 'Call Forward".
• If no 'Call Forward' is set on extension A, the system will check if Call Forward-Scheduled is set on A.
• Since Call Forward-Scheduled is set on extension A, the system will compare the Time Zone for which the
Call Forward is scheduled with the current Time Zone of extension A.
• If the current Time Zone of extension A is the same as the Time Zone set for Call Forward Scheduled, i.e.
non-working hours, the call will be forwarded to extension B as per the call forward type set.
• As the Call Forward Type set by A is Unconditional, the system will forward the call to B, without checking
for the Busy Tone and without waiting for the Call Forward No-Reply Timer to expire.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 939
• If the current Time Zone of extension A is not the same as Time Zone set for Call Forward-Scheduled, the
call will not be forwarded. The system will consider that no call forward has been set.
• Call Forward - Scheduled can be set simultaneously for more than one Time Zone from the same
extension. For example, extension A can set Call Forward-Scheduled for working hours, then again set
Call Forward-Scheduled for non-working hours, and again for break hours.
• A different Call Forward Type can be set for a different Time Zone. For example, extension A can set
Call Forward -Unconditional for non-working hours, and Call Forward -Busy for working hours. Also, a
different destination number can be set for forwarding calls in each Time Zone. For example, extension
A can set Call Forward-Unconditional for non-working hours to a mobile number and set extension B as
destination number for working hours.
• When more than one Call Forward type is set on the same extension for the same Time Zone, the
latest Call Forward type set for the Time Zone will override the previous Call Forward type set for that
Time Zone. For example, extension A sets Call Forward -Busy for working hours, then sets Call
Forward Busy or No Reply for working hours, the latter will override the former. The system will
consider the latest, i.e. Busy or No Reply as the Call Forward type for forwarding calls during working
hours.
• Call Forward-Scheduled can be cancelled individually for a desired Time Zone or all at once for all
Time Zones.
• Call Forward-Scheduled can be set by extension users as well as for extension users from the System
Administrator mode.
• It is also possible to select the types of calls, i.e. internal calls only, or trunk calls, or both, to be
forwarded to external numbers. You can program the system to forward internal calls only, or trunk
calls only or both trunk calls and internal calls to the external number. For this, the parameter 'Allow
External Call Forward for' must be programmed in the “Station Advanced Feature Template” of the
extensions that want to use Call Forward-Scheduled.
How to configure
The programming of this feature involves the same parameters as in “Call Forward”.
'Call Forward' must be enabled in the Class of Service (CoS) group of the extensions to which this feature is to be
allowed. Refer the topic "Call Forward".
If Call Forward No-Reply is to be set, and if required, the Call Forward No-Reply Timer may be
Programmed in the “Station Advanced Feature Template” applied on the extensions which are to be allowed this
feature. Refer the topic “Call Forward”.
The types of calls to be forwarded to the external number may be selected in the parameter "Allow External Call
Forward for" in the “Station Advanced Feature Template” applied on the extensions which are allowed Call
Forward-Scheduled. You may select from 'Internal Calls', 'Trunk Calls' and 'Internal + Trunk Calls'. By default, only
trunk calls are forwarded to external numbers.
Extensions that are to be allowed to set Call Forward-Scheduled for other extensions must be allowed either the
feature 'System Admin Mode Access' or 'System Admin Station' in their COS. Refer the topic “Call Forward-
Remote”.
940 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
How to use
Call Forward-Scheduled can be set/canceled by users for their own extension, or for any other extension from the
SA mode.
• The destination number for forwarding calls can be a maximum of 24 digits. Terminate the command
with #* if destination number has fewer than 24 digits.
• If the destination number is an external number, enter the Trunk Access Code followed by the
destination number.
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users
Call Forward-Scheduled by Extension Users
To set Call Forward-Scheduled:
• Press DSS key assigned to Call Forward-Scheduled.
OR
• Dial 1175.
• Scroll to the desired Time Zone.
• Press Enter key to select Time Zone.
• Scroll to the desired Call Forward type for the selected Time Zone.
• Press Enter key to select Call Forward type.
• Enter Destination Number on prompt.
• You get confirmation tone and message showing extension to which Call Forward is set.
To cancel Call Forward-Scheduled for a Time Zone:
• Press DSS key assigned to Call Forward-Scheduled.
OR
• Dial 1175.
• Scroll to the desired Time Zone.
• Press Enter key to select Time Zone.
• Scroll to select Cancel.
• Press Enter key.
• You get confirmation tone and message.
To cancel Call Forward-Scheduled in all Time Zones:
• Press DSS key assigned to Call Forward-Scheduled.
OR
• Dial 1175.
• Scroll to 'Cancel Call Forward'.
• Press Enter key.
• You get confirmation tone and message.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 941
Call Forward-Scheduled from SA mode
To set Call Forward-Scheduled:
• Press DSS key assigned to Call Forward-Scheduled - Remote.
OR
• Dial 1072-223.
• Enter extension number (from which calls are to be forwarded)
• Scroll to the desired Time Zone.
• Press Enter key to select Time Zone.
• Scroll to the desired Call Forward type for the selected Time Zone.
• Press Enter key to select Call Forward type.
• Enter Destination Number on prompt.
• You get confirmation tone and message showing extension to which Call Forward is set.
To cancel Call Forward-Scheduled for a Time Zone:
• Press DSS key assigned to Call Forward-Scheduled - Remote.
OR
• Dial 1072-223
• Enter extension number (for which it is to be canceled)
• Scroll to the desired Time Zone.
• Press Enter key to select Time Zone.
• Scroll to select Cancel.
• Press Enter key.
• You get confirmation tone and message.
To cancel Call Forward-Scheduled in all Time Zones:
• Press DSS key assigned to Call Forward-Scheduled - Remote.
OR
• Dial 1072-223
• Enter extension number (for which it is to be canceled)
• Scroll to 'Cancel Call Forward'.
• Press Enter key.
• You get confirmation tone and message.
For SLT Users
Call Forward (CF)-Scheduled by Extension Users
To set/cancel CF-Scheduled for working hours:
• Lift handset.
• Dial 1175-1-1-Destination Number for CF-Scheduled-Unconditional.
• Dial 1175-1-2-Destination Number for CF-Scheduled -Busy.
• Dial 1175-1-3-Destination Number for CF-Scheduled -No Reply.
• Dial 1175-1-4-Destination Number for CF-Scheduled-Busy/No Reply.
942 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Dial 1175-1-5-1 for CF-Scheduled -Dual Ring.
• Dial 1175-1-5-0 to cancel CF-Scheduled -Dual Ring.
• Dial 1175-1-0 to cancel CF-Scheduled for Working Hours.
• Replace handset.
To set/cancel CF-Scheduled for break hours:
• Lift handset.
• Dial 1175-2-1-Destination Number for CF-Scheduled -Unconditional.
• Dial 1175-2-2-Destination Number for CF-Scheduled -Busy.
• Dial 1175-2-3-Destination Number for CF-Scheduled -No Reply.
• Dial 1175-2-4-Destination Number for CF-Scheduled -Busy/No Reply.
• Dial 1175-2-5-1 for CF-Scheduled -Dual Ring.
• Dial 1175-2-5-0 to cancel CF-Scheduled -Dual Ring.
• Dial 1175-2-0 to cancel CF-Scheduled for Break Hours.
• Replace handset.
To set/cancel CF-Scheduled for non-working hours:
• Lift handset.
• Dial 1175-3-1-Destination Number for CF-Scheduled -Unconditional.
• Dial 1175-3-2-Destination Number for CF-Scheduled -Busy.
• Dial 1175-3-3-Destination Number for CF-Scheduled -No Reply.
• Dial 1175-3-4-Destination Number for CF-Scheduled -Busy/No Reply.
• Dial 1175-3-5-1 for CF-Scheduled -Dual Ring.
• Dial 1175-3-5-0 to cancel CF-Scheduled -Dual Ring.
• Dial 1175-3-0 to cancel CF-Scheduled for Non-working Hours.
• Replace handset.
To cancel CF-Scheduled for all Time Zones:
• Lift handset.
• Dial 1175-0.
• Replace handset.
Call Forward (CF)-Scheduled from SA mode
To set CF-Scheduled for working hours:
• Lift handset.
• Dial 1072-223-Extension number-1-1-Destination Number for CF-Scheduled -Unconditional.
• Dial 1072-223-Extension number-1-2-Destination Number for CF-Scheduled -Busy.
• Dial 1072-223-Extension number-1-3-Destination Number for CF-Scheduled -No Reply.
• Dial 1072-223-Extension number-1-4-Destination Number for CF-Scheduled -Busy/No Reply.
• Dial 1072-223-Extension number-1-5-1 for CF-Scheduled -Dual Ring.
• Dial 1072-223-Extension number-1-5-0 to cancel CF-Scheduled -Dual Ring.
• Dial 1072-223-Extension number-1-0 to cancel CF-Scheduled -for working hours.
• Replace handset.
To set Call Forward-Scheduled for break hours:
• Lift handset.
• Dial 1072-223-Extension number-2-1-Destination Number for CF-Scheduled -Unconditional.
• Dial 1072-223-Extension number-2-2-Destination Number for CF-Scheduled -Busy.
• Dial 1072-223-Extension number-2-3-Destination Number for CF-Scheduled -No Reply.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 943
• Dial 1072-223-Extension number-2-4-Destination Number for CF-Scheduled -Busy/No Reply.
• Dial 1072-223-Extension number-2-5-1 for CF-Scheduled -Dual Ring.
• Dial 1072-223-Extension number-2-5-0 to cancel CF-Scheduled -Dual Ring.
• Dial 1072-223-Extension number-2-0 to cancel CF-Scheduled -for break hours.
• Replace handset.
To set Call Forward-Scheduled for non-working hours:
• Lift handset.
• Dial 1072-223-Extension number-3-1-Destination Number for CF-Scheduled -Unconditional.
• Dial 1072-223-Extension number-3-2-Destination Number for CF-Scheduled -Busy.
• Dial 1072-223-Extension number-3-3-Destination Number for CF-Scheduled -No Reply.
• Dial 1072-223-Extension number-3-4-Destination Number for CF-Scheduled -Busy/No Reply.
• Dial 1072-223-Extension number-3-5-1 for CF-Scheduled-Dual Ring.
• Dial 1072-223-Extension number-3-5-0 to cancel CF-Scheduled-Dual Ring.
• Dial 1072-223-Extension number-3-0 to cancel CF-Scheduled - for break hours.
• Replace handset.
To cancel Call Forward-Scheduled for all Time Zones:
• Lift handset.
• Dial 1072-223-Extension Number-0
• Replace handset.
944 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Call Park
What is this?
Call Park allows you to place a call on hold, so it can be retrieved from the same or another extension of the
system.
A call is 'parked' when the extension user temporarily places the call into a location in the system called 'Orbit'. The
user can attend to other calls. The parked call can be retrieved on completion of the current call by dialing the Orbit
number.
Call Parking is useful in offices housed in different parts of a building or multi-storied offices. It is useful in situations
like:
• the person who picked up the call is not the desired called party or the desired party is at an unknown
location. The person who picked up the call can then either go to find the desired called party or call other
numbers to find him/her. When found, the desired called party can pick up the call from the same or any
extension by dialing the Orbit number.
• the person who picked up the call may have to go to another part of the office to look up a file or consult a
colleague. The person can park the call and continue the conversation from the other part of the office.
The ETERNITY offers two types of Call Park facility:
• Call Park-General Orbit: The extension user can park calls in any of the 8 'general' Orbits, which are like
fictional extensions located in the system. The calls parked in the General Orbit can be picked up from any
extension by dialing the General Orbit Number. At a time, only one call can be parked in each General
Orbit.
• Call Park-Personal Orbit: Each telephone instrument (EON/SLT/SIP extension) connected as extension
has one Personal Orbit. Calls parked in personal orbit can be picked up only from where the call is parked.
So, no other person can pick up this call. Multiple calls can be parked in the Personal Orbit at a time.
Extension users can park the call either in the General Orbit or the Personal Orbit by dialing an Orbit Number from
1 to 9, where:
• 1 is the Personal Orbit Number.
• 2 to 9 are General Orbit Numbers.
After parking a call, the extension user can continue to make and answer other calls and use other system features.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 945
How it works
A and B are extension users. C, D and E are callers.
Parking Calls in General Orbit
• C calls B.
• A picks up the call.
• As B is not present at his extension, A parks the call in General Orbit Number 2 by dialing the Access
Code.
• C is played on-hold music.
• A tries to find B (by either calling several numbers or by going in person or sending someone).
• The parked call remains in orbit for the duration of the Call Park Timer, which is set to 45 seconds by
default.
• A finds B.
• B retrieves the call from another extension by dialing the feature access code for retrieving Call Park and
Orbit number 2.
• If A cannot locate B or if B cannot attend the call, A can also retrieve the call from his extension.
However,
• If neither A nor B retrieves the parked call within the Call Park Timer, the system will hunt for the extension
that parked the call (A) on the expiry of the Call Park Timer.
• Meanwhile, if A is busy, the system again keeps the call parked in orbit number 2 for the period of the Call
Park Timer. This process continues for the duration of the Call Park Release Timer, which is set to 3
minutes by default.
• If A is free, the system will ring on A's phone. A gets connected to C again.
• If A does not retrieve the parked call till the end of the Call Park Release Timer, C gets disconnected.
Parking Calls in Personal Orbit
Parking calls in the Personal Orbit works the same way as in General Orbit. The only difference is that A can park
multiple calls by dialing the Personal Orbit Number. But calls can be retrieved from A's phone only.
When there are multiple calls to be retrieved from the Personal Orbit, they are retrieved one by one, without
following any particular sequence like FIFO or LIFO.
To be able to use 'Call Park', this feature must be enabled in the COS of the requesting extension.
However, for retrieving parked calls, the system does not check COS. So any extension can retrieve
parked calls.
How to configure
To provide this feature to extensions,
• Enable the Call Park in the “Class of Service (COS)” of the “Station Basic Feature Template” of the
extensions. By default, this feature is enabled in the COS of all extension types for all the time zones.
• If required, you may change the duration of the Call Park Timer and the Call Park Release timer. See
“System Timers and Counts” for instructions.
946 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
How to use
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users
To park a call:
• You are in speech with extension/external caller.
• Press DSS Key assigned to 'Call Park'.
OR
• Press Hold and dial 115
• Enter Orbit Number (1-9)
(Personal Orbit:1; General: 2-9).
To retrieve a parked call from your phone, when your phone is in idle state:
• Press DSS Key assigned to 'Call Park - Retrieve'.
OR
• Dial 116
• Enter Orbit Number where you parked the call (1-9)
(Personal Orbit:1; General: 2-9).
• You are in speech with the extension/external caller.
To retrieve a parked call from your phone, when you are in speech with someone:
• Press Hold.
• Press DSS Key assigned to 'Call Park - Retrieve'.
• Dial 116
OR
• Enter Orbit Number where you parked the call (1-9)
(Personal Orbit:1; General: 2-9).
For SLT Users
To park a call:
• You are in speech with extension/external caller.
• Dial-Flash115-Orbit Number
(Personal Orbit:1; General: 2-9).
• Call is parked.
To retrieve a parked call from your phone, when your phone is in idle state:
• Lift the handset.
• Dial 116-Orbit Number
(Personal Orbit:1; General: 2-9).
• You are in speech with the extension/external caller.
To retrieve a parked call from your phone, when you are in speech with someone:
• Dial Flash - 116-Orbit Number
(Personal Orbit:1; General: 2-9).
• You are in speech with the extension/external caller.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 947
Call Hold
What's this?
Call Hold enables you to put an on-going conversation (with an internal or external number) on hold, and call
another person or receive a call from another person. You can retrieve the call you put on hold, after the
conversation with the other party has ended or in the middle of the conversation with the other party.
Call Hold is a feature of the DKP. ETERNITY enables two types of Call Hold on the DKP: Exclusive Hold and Global
Hold.
Exclusive Hold
The call placed on Exclusive hold can be retrieved only from the DKP which put it on hold. The call remains
connected to the DKP which placed it on hold.
When a call is put on Exclusive hold, the ETERNITY starts the Call Park Timer and Call Park Release Timer.
The call remains on hold for the duration of the Call Park Timer (programmable; default: 45 seconds). If this call is
not retrieved before the Call Park Timer expires, the call is parked in the Personal Orbit for the duration of the Call
Park Release Timer (programmable; default: 3 minutes). If the DKP becomes idle within this Timer, the call is
returned to the DKP and the DKP gets Ring Back Tone.
If the DKP is busy, the system waits for the duration of the Call Park Release Timer for the DKP to go idle or
retrieve the call. If the DKP goes idle within this Timer, the call is returned to the DKP and the DKP gets Ring Back
Tone.
The call is disconnected if the DKP is still not free or does not retrieve the call before the Call Park Release Timer
expires.
A call placed on Exclusive Hold can be retrieved in the following ways:
• Pressing the Hold key again (when the DKP is idle).
• Pressing the Key of the Call Appearance of the call put on hold (before it gets parked).
• Pressing DSS key assigned to the Trunk/extension you put on hold.
• Answering the call, when it returns at the end of the Call Park Timer.
Global Hold
The call placed on Global hold can be picked up from any DKP extension of ETERNITY. The call remains
connected in the system. The call remains on hold for the duration of the Call Hold Retrieval Timer (programmable;
default: 60 seconds). If this call is not retrieved before the expiry of the Timer, the call is returned to the DKP which
put it on hold.
To be able to place calls on Global Hold, you must enable 'Global Hold' in the System Parameters of ETERNITY.
The DKP (which picks up the call) must have a DSS Key to access the Trunk or the Extension which is put on hold.
948 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
When Global Hold is enabled in the System Parameters, all DKPs connected to the ETERNITY can pick up calls
put on hold by another DKP by:
• Pressing DSS key assigned to the Trunk put on Global Hold.
• Pressing the DSS key assigned to the extension put on Global Hold.
The call on Global Hold must be picked up before the Call Hold Retrieval Timer expires.
ETERNITY provides the flexibility to use Exclusive Hold and Global Hold at the same time. You can put
calls on Exclusive Hold even when Global Hold is enabled in the system.
ETERNITY does not support Global Hold on SIP Trunks.
How to configure
For this feature to work, you must program the following parameters:
• Class of Service: Call Hold must be enabled in the Class of Service (CoS) of the DKPs you want to allow
this feature.
In the default Station Basic Feature Template 01 assigned to all extensions of ETERNITY, Call Hold is
included in the 'Basic Features' assigned to all Class of Service groups, including the default CoS group
01. So, all extensions of ETERNITY can use this feature.
Refer the topics “Class of Service (COS)” and “Station Basic Feature Template” to know more.
• Global Hold: Enable this flag in the System Parameters if you want Calls on Hold to be picked up by any
DKP extension.
• DSS Keys: Program DSS Keys for Trunks and Stations on the DKPs which are allowed to retrieve calls on
Global Hold. Refer the topic “DSS Keys Programming” for instructions.
• Call Hold Retrieval Timer: Change the default setting this timer to the desired duration, if required.
• Call Park Timer: Change the default setting this timer to the desired duration, if required.
• Call Park Release Timer: Change the default setting this timer to the desired duration, if required.
You can program these parameters using Jeeves or a Telephone.
Programming Call Hold Parameters using Jeeves
• Login to Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 949
• Click 'System Parameters' to open the page.
• Enable the 'Global Hold' flag.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your changes.
• Click 'System Timers' to open the page.
950 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Scroll to reach 'Other Features'.
• Scroll further to 'Call Hold Retrieval Timer'. Set the Timer to the desired duration.
• Go to 'Call Park Timer'. Set the Timer to the desired duration.
• Go to 'Call Park Release Timer'. Set the Timer to the desired duration.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your changes.
• Log out of Jeeves or continue programming as required.
Programming Call Hold Parameters using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To enable/disable Global Hold flag, dial
• 5318-Code
Where,
Code is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Disable
To change Call Hold Retrieval Timer, dial:
• 3805-Seconds
Where,
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 951
Seconds is from 001-999 Seconds.
Default: 060 seconds.
To change Call Park Timer, dial:
• 3809-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 000-255 Seconds.
Default: 045 seconds.
To change Call Park Release Timer, dial:
• 3810-Minutes
Where,
Seconds is from 000-255 Seconds.
Default: 003 minutes.
• Exit SE mode.
How to use
Exclusive Hold
To put a call on Exclusive Hold, when Global Hold is disabled:
• You are in speech with on a Trunk/with an extension.
• Press Hold key, go idle.
• Call with Trunk/extension is put on 'Exclusive Hold'.
To retrieve the call:
• press Call Appearance key of your DKP
• press DSS Key of the Trunk/extension you put on hold from your DKP.
To put a call on Exclusive Hold, when Global Hold is enabled:
• You are in speech with on a Trunk/with an extension.
• Press Hold key twice in quick succession within 1 second.
• Go idle.
• Call with Trunk/extension is put on 'Exclusive Hold'.
To retrieve the call:
• press Call Appearance key of your DKP
• press DSS Key of the Trunk/extension you put on hold from your DKP.
Global Hold
To put a call on Global Hold:
• You are in speech with on a Trunk/with an extension.
• To put on Global Hold, press 'Hold' key.
• Go idle.
952 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To retrieve a call on Global Hold:
• From any DKP,
• Press the DSS Key of the Trunk/extension put on Global hold, which is blinking slowly 'Blue' (on EON48)
or 'Green' (on EON42) color.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 953
Call Logs
What's this?
ETERNITY stores the details of 20 each, of the following types of calls:
• Missed calls: incoming calls that were not answered by extension users.
• Answered calls: incoming calls answered by extension users.
• Dialed calls: calls made by extension users.
The call history of each of the above types of calls is stored by Name, Number, and Date-Time of the Call.
If there is no name in the CLI of the above types of calls, the system stores and displays the Number and the Date-
Time. In case there is no number in the CLI, the system will display the Port number on/from which the call was
received/made.
The Call Logs contain details of both internal as well as external calls made or received by the extension users.
The Call Logs feature is supported on DKP extensions only.
Using call logs you can:
• view call history: you can see the calls you missed, answered or dialed.
• make calls: you can call any number that you have missed, answered, or dialed.
• edit the numbers: you can change or modify the number in the call log. This is useful when the CLI
received and stored in the call log is not in the same format that is to be used to make calls.
• save the numbers: you can store the external numbers in your call logs in the "Personal Directory" and
use them for “Personal Abbreviated Dialing”.
The maximum number of calls that can be stored under each Call Log type is 20. The logs will be cleared
automatically using the First-In, First-Out method, i.e. the latest call detail will replace the record of the oldest call
detail.
Given the limited Call Log capacity, the system also allows you to choose if you want internal calls to be displayed
or not in the Missed, Answered and Dialed Call Logs. And accordingly it will store internal calls in the logs.
The system stores each Missed, Answered and Dialed call individually even if the same number is received
multiple times.
How to configure
This feature does not require any specific programming, except:
• Selecting whether internal calls should be logged in the Missed, Answered and Dialed Call Logs. This can
be done on the 'System Parameters' page of Jeeves or by using a Telephone.
• Programming of a DSS key for the Call Logs feature. For instructions please refer the topic “Configuring
DKP Extensions”.
954 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Programming Internal Call Logging using Jeeves
• Login as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the 'System Parameters' link to open the page.
• You may enable any or all of the following flags by selecting the respective check box:
• Log Internal Calls in Missed Calls
• Log Internal Calls in Answered Calls
• Log Internal Calls in Dialed Calls
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your settings.
• Log out of Jeeves or continue, as required.
Programming Internal Call Logging using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode.
To enable/disable Log Internal Calls in Missed Calls, dial:
• 5361-Code
Where,
Code is
0 for Disable (Do not store internal calls in "Missed Calls" log)
1 for Enable (Store internal calls in "Missed Calls" log)
By default, Internal Call Logs in Missed Calls is enabled.
To enable/disable Log Internal Calls in Answered Calls, dial:
• 5362-Code
Where,
Code is
0 for Disable (Do not store internal calls in "Answered" log)
1 for Enable (Store internal calls in "Answered Calls" log)
By default, Internal Call Logs in Answered Calls is enabled.
To enable/disable Log Internal Calls in Dialed Calls, dial:
• 5363-Code
Where,
Code is
0 for Disable (Do not store internal calls in "Dialed Calls" log)
1 for Enable (Store internal calls in "Dialed Calls" log)
By default, Internal Call Logs in Dialed Calls is enabled.
• Exit SE mode.
How to use
The Call Logs feature allows you to view calls and edit numbers, make calls to any number logged, and store
numbers.
Viewing Call Logs on DKP
There are two ways to view call logs on the DKP:
• From the Phone Menu
• Using the Feature Key assigned to Call Logs.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 955
If you are using a DSS Key for the Call Logs feature, whenever there is a missed call, the LED of the DSS
key will glow. If you press the Call Logs key, the system will display the last missed call details.
To view Call Logs on DKP from Phone Menu:
• Press Enter key when the phone is idle.
• Place your cursor on Call Logs option, press Enter key.
• Scroll with the Up/Down Navigation Key to reach the desired Call Log: Missed, Answered, Dialed.
• Press Enter key to select the desired Call Log.
• The phone will display the call log details by: <Name> <Date> <HH:MM>
• Press Enter key.
• The phone will display the Number: <XXXXXXXXXXX>
• To view another call log, scroll with the Back Navigation key to return to the previous option.
• You may exit the Phone Menu by going ON-Hook or pressing the Cancel key137.
• If there is no name in the CLI, the Call Log will only display the number.
• If you press the 'Enter' key, the system will dial out the number you just viewed.
To view Call Logs on DKP using DSS Key:
• Press DSS Key programmed for Call Logs, when the phone is idle.
• Scroll to select the desired Call Log Call Log: Missed, Answered, Dialed.
• Follow the same steps as described for viewing Call Log entries using the Phone Menu.
OR
• Press the DSS Key assigned the Call Logs feature, when it glows.
• The phone will display the call log details of the last missed call by: <Name> <Date> <HH:MM> (only if
name is received).
• Press Enter key.
• The phone will display the Number: <XXXXXXXXXXX>
• You may exit the Phone Menu by going OFF-Hook or pressing the Cancel key138.
• You may also edit or store the number.
• You may scroll with the < Back navigation key to view the other call logs.
• The LED of the Call Logs DSS key will be turned off once you have viewed the missed call.
Editing Numbers in Call Logs
• Go to Call Logs from the Phone Menu or by pressing Call Logs DSS Key. (see instructions given above).
• Scroll with the Up/Down Navigation Key to reach the desired Call Log: Missed, Answered, Dialed.
• Press Enter key to select the desired Call Log.
• The phone will display the call log details by: <Name> <Date> <HH:MM>
• Press Enter key.
• The phone will display the Number: <XXXXXXXXXXX>
• To edit the number, move the cursor with the Front and Back navigation key.
• Place the cursor under the digit you want to delete.
• Press 'Transfer' key to delete a digit.
• To insert a digit, place the cursor where you want to insert the digit, and enter the digit using the dial pad.
The digit will be inserted in the number string accordingly.
• Repeat the same to delete/insert another digit.
137. This key is available on EON48. This key must be programmed on EON42.
138. This key is available on EON48. This key must be programmed on EON42.
956 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• After editing the number, you may store it in the Personal Directory or dial the edited number by pressing
the Enter key.
The original number (you now changed) will remain unaffected in the Log. However, if you make a call to
the new number (you changed), it will be logged in the "Dialed" call log and the Last Number Redial list.
Making calls using Call Logs
• Go to Call Logs from the Phone Menu or by pressing Call Logs DSS Key.
• Scroll with the Up/Down Navigation Key to reach the desired Call Log: Missed, Answered, Dialed.
• Press Enter key to select the desired Call Log.
• The phone will display the call log details by: <Name> <Date> <HH:MM>
• Press Enter key.
• The phone will display the Number: <XXXXXXXXXXX>
• Press Enter key.
• The system will dial out the selected number using the Outgoing Trunk Bundle Group assigned in TAC-1.
• The dialed number will be logged in the "Dialed" call log and the Last Number Redial List.
Storing numbers of Call Logs in Personal Memory of the DKP
To store any external call record (trunk call) from Received, Missed and Dialed call logs to Personal Directory,
• Scroll to the desired call log.
• Press Enter key to view the complete number.
• Press 'v' (Down Navigation key).
• You will get the prompt: "Enter Name"139.
• Enter the name of the contact.
• Press Enter key.
• You will get the confirmation message: "Stored at Memory: <XXX>".
• When you store the number in the Personal Directory, the system will automatically assign Trunk
Access Code "TAC-1".
• If all 25 Location Index Numbers of the Personal Directory are already programmed, the message
"Memory Full" will appear on your phone's display and you will get an Error Tone. Refer the topic
“Abbreviated Dialing” to know more.
139. Only if there is a free Memory Index in the Personal Directory.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 957
Call Pick Up
What's this?
Call Pick-Up allows extension users to answer calls ringing on other extensions from their own extension; without
physically going to the ringing extensions.
Extension users can 'pick-up' both internal and trunk calls ringing on other extensions.
As extension users can answer calls of their colleagues or co-workers without physically going to their extensions,
this feature ensures that all incoming calls are answered.
ETERNITY offers two types of Call Pick-Up:
• Call Pick Up-Group - extensions are assigned to Pick-Up Groups. Any extension in a Pick-Up Group can
answer calls ringing on other extensions within the same group only.
• Call Pick-Up Selective - calls ringing on any extension of the system can be answered.
How it works
Call Pick-Up Group
• Extensions must be assigned to Call Pick-Up Groups. The extensions in a Call Pick-Up group may be SLT,
DKP and ISDN Terminal.
• As many as 99 such groups may be formed.
• Each group is assigned a number 01 to 99
• For example, extensions 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010. 2011, 2012, 2013 are assigned to Pick-Up Group
number 03.
• When an extension in this group rings, any extension in the group can pick up the call by dialing the
feature access code for "Call Pick-Up Group" (default: 4).
• The ringing extension should be in the same Pick-Up Group.
Call Pick-Up Selective
• Extensions need not be in Call Pick-Up Groups.
• Whenever an extension in the system rings, the call can be picked up by any extension of the system by
dialing the feature access code and the number of ringing extension.
When more than one extension in a Pick-Up Group is ringing, you can choose which one to answer first,
using Call Pick-Up Selective.
958 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Feature Interactions:
• Call States: Call Pick-Up will fail if the ringing extension goes into idle state just when you are dialing the
pick-up access code.
• Auto Call Back: Call Pick-Up will fail if the call ringing on the extension is an Auto Call Back request.
• Alarms: Call Pick-Up will fail if the call ringing on the extension is an Alarm Call.
How to configure
For this feature to function, 'Call Pick-Up' should be enabled in the Class of Service of extension that are to be
allowed this feature.
Call Pick-Up Groups
On a sheet of paper, list the extensions that are to be grouped into a Call Pick-Up Group. Make as many Call Pick-
Up Groups as required. Assign each group a number.
Call Pick-Up
SLT Extensions DKP Extensions ISDN Terminals
Group Number
01 2002, 2003, 2006, 2014 3003, 3004, 3005, 3201, 3201, 3203
3019, 3020, 3021, 3022, 3023,
02
3024
2007, 2008, 2009, 2010.
03 3205, 3206
2011, 2012, 2013
99
The numbering of Call Pick-Up Groups must start from 01 and end at 99.
Do not assign '00' as Call Pick-Up Group. '00' is the command to de-assign from a Call Pick-Up Group.
To program these groups, you may use Jeeves or issuing SE commands from a telephone.
Assigning Extensions to Call Pick-Up Groups using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the 'SLT Configuration' link.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 959
• Click the 'SLT Parameters' link to open the page.
• In the column Call Pick-up Group, assign the group number for SLT extensions. Refer to the sheet of paper
you prepared.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
• Click 'DKP Configuration'.
960 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Click the 'DKP Parameters' link to open the page.
• Assign Call Pick-Up Group number to DKP extensions. Refer to the sheet of paper you prepared.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
• Click 'ISDN Terminal Parameters' to open the page.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 961
• Click the 'Advance' button on the bottom of the page.
• Assign Call Pick-Up Group numbers to ISDN Terminals. Refer to the sheet of paper you prepared.
962 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
Assigning Extensions to Call Pick-Up Groups using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from DKP/SLT.
To assign SLT extension to a group, dial:
• 3901-1-SLT-Call Pick-Up Group to assign a single SLT to a group.
• 3901-2-SLT-SLT-Call Pick-Up Group to assign a range of SLTs to the same group.
• 3901-*-Call Pick-Up Group to assign all SLTs to the same group.
Where,
SLT is the Software Port of the SLT, from 001 to 512.
Call Pick-Up Group is from 00 to 99.
By default, Call Pickup Group for SLTs is 99.
To remove SLT extension from a group, dial:
• 3901-1-SLT-00 to remove a single SLT extension.
• 3901-2-SLT-SLT-00 to remove a range of SLT extensions.
• 3901-* to remove all SLT extensions from a group.
To assign DKP extension to a group, dial:
• 3902-1-DKP-Call Pick-Up Group to assign a single DKP to a group.
• 3902-2-DKP-DKP-Call Pick-Up Group to assign a range of DKPs to the same group.
• 3902-*-Call Pick-Up Group to assign all DKPs to the same group.
Where,
DKP is the Software Port of the DKP, from 001 to 128.
Call Pick-Up Group is from 00 to 99.
By default, Call Pickup Group for DKPs is 99.
To remove DKP extension from a group, dial:
• 3902-1-DKP-00 to remove a single DKP extension.
• 3902-2-DKP-DKP-00 to remove a range of DKP extensions.
• 3902-* to remove all DKP extensions from a group.
To assign an ISDN Terminal to a group, dial:
• 3903-1-ISDN Terminal-Call Pick-Up Group to assign a single ISDN Terminal to a group.
• 3903-2-ISDN Terminal-ISDN Terminal-Call Pick-Up Group to assign a range of ISDN Terminals to
the same group.
• 3903-*-Call Pick-Up Group to assign all ISDN Terminals to the same group.
Where,
ISDN is the Software Port of the ISDN Terminal, from 01 to 64.
Call Pickup Group is from 00 to 99.
By default, Call Pickup Group for ISDN Terminals is 99.
To remove an ISDN Terminal from a group, dial:
• 3903-1-ISDN Terminal-00 to remove a single terminal.
• 3903-2-ISDN Terminal-ISDN Terminal-00 to remove a range of terminals.
• 3903-* to remove all terminals.
• Exit SE mode.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 963
Call Pick-Up in Class of Service
Decide which extensions are to be assigned to Call Pick-Up groups. Ensure that the feature Call Pick-Up is enabled
in the Class of Service (COS) of these extensions.
In the default factory settings, Station Basic Feature Template Number 01 is assigned to all the extensions of
ETERNITY. The Station Basic Feature Template 01 is assigned COS group 01 which has Call Pick-Up feature
enabled. Thus, all the extensions of the ETERNITY can use Call Pick-Up by default.
If you want to deny Call Pick-up feature to all extensions, you can simply disable Call Pick-Up in the default CoS
group 01.
However, if Call Pick-Up is to be denied on only selected extensions then:
1. Define a CoS group with Call Pick-Up disabled.
2. Prepare a Station Basic Feature Template with this CoS group applicable in all the “Time Zones”.
3. Assign this new Template to the extensions to which Call Pick-Up is to be denied.
Refer the topics “Class of Service (COS)” and “Station Basic Feature Template” for detailed instructions and
programming.
How to use
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users
To pick up a ringing extension in your Group:
• Press DSS Key assigned to Call Pick-Up Group.
OR
• Dial 4.
• Talk.
• Go idle.
To pick up any one of several ringing extensions ringing or the extension that is not in your group:
• Press DSS Key assigned to Call Pick-Up Selective.
OR
• Dial 12.
• Dial number of the Extension you want to pick up.
• Talk.
• Go idle.
For SLT Users
To pick up a ringing extension in your Group:
• Lift the handset.
964 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Dial 4.
• Talk.
• Replace handset.
To pick up any one of several ringing extensions ringing or the extension that is not in your group:
• Lift the handset.
• Dial 12.
• Dial number of the Extension you want to pick up.
• Talk.
• Replace handset.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 965
Call Progress Tones
What's this?
Call Progress Tones (CPT) are audible tones sent from switching systems such as PSTN or PBX to calling parties
to show the status of phone calls, like dial tone, error tone, ringing error in number dialed, ringing called party, busy
line, etc.
Each CPT has a distinctive tone frequency and cadence assigned to it, for which some standards have been
established by the International Telecommunication Union (ITU).
On the basis of specific frequency, modulating frequency and cadence, the CPTs generated by ETERNITY are
categorized as:
CPT Event Sound Duration Timer
Dial Tone 1 Played on lifting the Toooooooooooo Played for 7 seconds. Dial Tone Timer
handset. After which Error Tone
starts
Dial Tone 2 Played on lifting the Toooooooooooo Played for 7 seconds. Dial Tone Timer
handset, when 'Store After which Error Tone
and Forward Dialinga' is starts
done.
Ring Back Tone Played when the Turroo... Turrroo Played for 45 seconds Ring Back Tone
internal number you Timer
have dialed is free.
Busy Tone High pitch beeps with Tooooooo......... Played for 7 seconds. Busy Tone Timer
(Engaged Tone) equal ON and OFF Toooooooo
periods, played when
the dialed extension is
busy. Busy tone
continues for 7
seconds. This Busy
Tone Timer is
programmable.
Error Tone Fast beeps, played on a Too…Too…Too Played for 30 seconds Error Tone Timer
(Congestion/ wrong operation being …Too
Refusal Tone as performed or a feature
per ITU invoked without access.
Internal Call Short beep followed by Beep.……….… Played for duration of Interrupt Request
Waiting Tone longer OFF duration Beep the Interrupt Request Timer, Barge-In
(Intrusion Tone repeated every second; Timer or the Barge-In Timer
as per ITU) played to the busy Timer.
extension when another
extension attempts
Interrupt Request/
Barge-In
966 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
CPT Event Sound Duration Timer
External Call Two ticks followed by a Beep...Beep… Played for the duration Transfer-On Busy
Waiting Tone longer OFF time of ……......Beep... of the Transfer-On Busy Timer.
(Call Waiting approx. 3 seconds; Beep Timer.
Tone as per ITU) played to a busy
extension when there is
a new incoming Trunk
call.
Confirmation Continuous, fast beeps, Beep... Beep... Played for 7 seconds. Confirmation Tone
Tone played to confirm Beep Timer
(Acceptance successful use of
Tone as per ITU) features.
Feature Tone Short beep followed by Beep................. Played until user goes
a longer off duration Beep ON-Hook or dials a
repeated every second; feature code.
played when dialing
feature access codes
Programming Short beep followed by Beep................. Played until user goes Programming Tone
Tone a longer off duration Beep ON-Hook or dials a Timer
repeated every second; command.
played to prompt
entering of fresh
commands during
programming.
Programming Continuous, fast beeps; Beep... Beep... Played for 3 seconds. Programming
Confirmation played to indicate that Beep Confirmation Timer
Tone system has received a
valid command and is
processing it.
Programming Fast beeps, played on a Too…Too…Too Played for 3 seconds. Programming Error
Error Tone wrong programming …Too Tone Timer
command being dialed.
a. In Store and Forward dialing, the digits are first stored in a memory location and then these are dialed on the trunk.
For example: When Least Cost Routing (LCR) is enabled, the system will store the dialed digits first, check the trunk
through which the call is to be routed and then dials the number on the appropriate trunk.
Tone standards vary with the country of application. For example, as per ITU standard, the Dial Tone for India
consists of 400Hz modulated by 25Hz, whereas it is 350+440Hz, without modulation, for USA/Canada. Further,
many countries use different frequencies and cadences for the same tone. For example, in the US, five different
frequency and cadence are used for Dial Tone.
ETERNITY offers the flexibility of setting the Call Progress Tone Generation (CPTG) type to match the country-
specific CPT standards established by ITU.
India being the default 'Region' for ETERNITY, the CTPG for India is set as default in the system.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 967
How it works
At the time of installation, when the System Engineer selects the 'Region' (according to the geographical location of
the site where the system is installed) and defaults the system, ETERNITY sets the country-specific CPTG type
defined for the selected 'Region'.
For countries that use different frequencies and cadences for the same tone, for instance, USA, only one
frequency/cadence among the group is considered. See Table "Default CPTG Type".
How to configure
Programming of Call Progress Tones involves configuration of three parameters: CPTG Type (Region), CPT
related Timers, and Dial Tone Type.
The country-specific CPTG type is set automatically by the system when the 'Region' is selected. However, if
required, the System Engineer can change the CTPG type set by the system.
Programming CPTG Parameters using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the 'Regional Settings' link.
• Click 'Call Progress Tones' under Regional Settings to open the page.
• Select desired 'Region' from the list.
968 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Select the desired Dial Tone Type from Type 1 or Type 2.
• Click 'Submit' to save changes.
To change CPT-related Timers
• Click the link 'System Timers' to open the page.
• Go to Call Progress Tones.
• Change the values of the CPT-related Timers as desired.
• Click 'Submit' to save changes.
Programming CPTG Parameters using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To select the Region, dial:
• 3501-Region Code
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 969
Refer Table below for Region Code (first column),
CPTG Dial tone 1 Dial Tone 2 Ring Back Tone Busy Tone
Region Region Cadence Cadence Cadence Cadence
Code Freq. Freq. Freq. Freq.
(sec) (sec) (sec) (sec)
1 Region1 440 Continuous 350+440 Continuous 350+440 0.4on 0.2off 440 0.75on 0.75off
0.4on 2.0off
2 Region2 400 Continuous 400 Continuous 400 0.6on 0.2off 400 0.5on 0.5off
0.2on 2.0off
3 Region3 350+440 Continuous 350+440 Continuous 440+480 2.0on 4.0off 480+620 0.5on 0.5off
4 Argentina 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.0on 4.0 off 425 0.3on 0.2off
5 Australia 425*25 Continuous 425*25 Continuous 400*25 .4on .2off 425 0.375on
.4on 2.0off 0.375off
6 Brazil 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.0on 4.0 off 425 0.25on 0.25off
7 Canada 350+440 Continuous 350+440 Continuous 440+480 2.0on 4.0off 480+620 0.5on 0.5off
8 China 450 Continuous 450 Continuous 450 1.0on 4.0off 450 0.35 on
0.36off
9 Egypt 425*50 Continuous 425*50 Continuous 425*50 2.0on 1.0off 425*50 1.0on 4.0off
10 France 440 Continuous 440 Continuous 440 1.5on 3.5off 440 0.5on 0.5off
11 Germany 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.0on 4.0off 425 0.48on 0.48off
12 Greece 425 0.2on 0.3off 425 0.2on 0.3off 425 1.0on 4.0off 425 0.3on 0.3off
0.7on 0.8off 0.7on 0.8off
13 India1 400*25 Continuous 400*25 Continuous 400*25 .4on .2off 400 0.75on 0.75off
.4on 2.0off
14 Indonesia 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.0on 4.0off 425 0.5on 0.5off
15 Iran 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.0on 4.0off 425 0.5on 0.5off
16 Iraq 400 0.4on 0.2off 400 0.4on 0.2off 400 Continuous 400 1.0on 1.0off
0.4on 1.5off 0.4on 1.5off
17 Israel 400 Continuous 400 Continuous 400 1.0on 3.0off 400 0.5on 0.5off
18 Italy1 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.0on 4.0off 425 0.5on 0.5off
19 Japan 400 Continuous 400 Continuous 400*25 1.0on 2.0off 400 .5on .5off
20 Kenya 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 0.67on 425 0.2on 0.6off
3.0off 1.5on 0.2on 0.6off
5.0off
21 Korea 350+440 Continuous 350+440 Continuous 440+480 1.0on 2.0off 480+620 0.5on 0.5off
22 Malaysia 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 0.4on 0.2off 425 0.5on 0.5off
0.4on 2.0off
23 Mexico 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.0on 4.0off 425 0.25on 0.25off
24 New 400 Continuous 400 Continuous 400+450 0.4on 0.2off 400 0.5on 0.5off
Zealand 0.4on 2.0off
25 Phillippines 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425+480 1.0on 4.0off 480+620 0.5on 0.5off
26 Poland 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.0on 4.0off 425 0.5on 0.5off
27 Portugal 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.0on 5.0off 425 0.5on 0.5off
28 Russia 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 0.8on 3.2off 425 0.4on 0.4off
29 Saudi 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.2on 4.6off 425 0.5on 0.5off
Arabia
30 Singapore 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425*24 0.4on 0.2off 425 .75on .75off
0.4on 2.0off
31 South 400*33 Continuous 400*33 Continuous 400*33 0.4on 0.2off 400 .5on .5off
Africa 0.4on 2.0off
32 Spain 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.5on 3.0off 425 0.2on 0.2off
33 Thailand 400*50 Continuous 400*50 Continuous 400 1.0on 4.0off 400 0.5on 0.5off
34 Turkey 450 Continuous 450 Continuous 450 2.0on 4.0off 450 0.5on 0.5off
35 UAE 350+440 Continuous 350+440 Continuous 400+450 0.4on 0.2off 400 0.375on
0.4on 2.0off 0.375off
970 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
CPTG Dial tone 1 Dial Tone 2 Ring Back Tone Busy Tone
Region Region Cadence Cadence Cadence Cadence
Code Freq. Freq. Freq. Freq.
(sec) (sec) (sec) (sec)
36 UK 350+440 Continuous 350+440 Continuous 400+450 0.4on 0.2off 400 0.375on
0.4on 2.0off 0.375off
37 USA 350+440 Continuous 350+440 Continuous 440+480 2.0on 4.0off 480+620 0.5on 0.5off
38 Italy2 400 Continuous 400 Continuous 400 1.0on 2.0off 400 0.5on 0.5off
39 Belgium 425 Continuous 425 1.0on 425 1.0on 3.0off 425 0.5on 0.5off
0.25off
40 India2 350+440 Continuous 350+440 Continuous 350+440 0.4on 0.2off 400 0.75on 0.75off
0.4on 2.0off
CPTG Error Tone Confirmation Tone Feature Tone CCWT ICWT
Region Region Cadence Cadence Cadence Cadence Cadence
Code Freq. Freq. Freq. Freq. Freq.
(sec) (sec) (sec) (sec) (sec)
1 Region1 440 0.25on 350+440 0.1on 350+ 0.1on 350+440 0.1on 440 0.1on
0.25 off 0.1off 440 0.9off 0.1off 2.9off
0.1on
2.7off
2 Region2 400 0.25on 400 0.1on 400 1.5on 400 0.2on 400 0.2on
0.25 off 0.1off 0.1off 4.8off 4.8off
3 Region3 440 0.25on 350+440 0.1on 350+ 0.1on 440+480 0.1on 440 0.1on
0.25 off 0.1off 440 0.9off 0.1off 2.9off
0.1on
2.7off
4 Argentina 425 0.3on 425 0.1on 425 0.1on 425 0.3on 425 0.1on
0.4off 0.1off 0.9off 10.0off 2.9off
5 Australia 425 0.375on 425*25 0.1on 425* 0.1on 425 0.2on 425 Continuous
0.375off 0.1off 25 0.9off 0.2off
0.2on
4.4off
6 Brazil 425 0.25on 425 0.1on 425 0.1on 425 0.05on 425 0.1on
0.25 off 0.1off 0.9off 1.0off 2.9off
7 Canada 480+ 0.25on 350+440 0.1on 350+ 0.1on 440 0.3on 480+ 0.5on
620 0.25off 0.1off 440 0.9off 10.0off 620 0.5off
8 China 450 0.7on 450 0.1on 450 0.1on 450 0.4 on 450 0.2on
0.7off 0.1off 0.9off 4.0off 0.2off
0.2on
0.6off
9 Egypt 450 0.5on 425*50 0.1on 425* 0.1on 425*50 0.1on 450 0.5on
0.5off 0.1off 50 0.9off 0.1off 0.5off
0.1on
2.7off
10 France 440 0.25on 440 0.1on 440 0.1on 440 0.3on 440 0.1on
0.25off 0.1off 0.9off 10.0off 2.9off
11 Germany 425 0.24on 425 0.1on 425 0.1on 425 0.2on .2off 425 0.1on
0.24off 0.1off 0.9off .2on 5.0off 2.9off
12 Greece 425 0.15on 425 0.1on 425 0.1on 425 0.3on 425 0.15on
0.15off 0.1off 0.9off 10.0off 0.25off
0.3on 0.15on
10.0off 1.45off
13 India1 400 0.25on 400 1.0on 400* 0.1on 400 0.2on 400 0.15on
0.25off 4.0off 25 0.9off 0.1off 4.85off
0.2on
7.5off
14 Indonesia 425 0.25on 425 0.1on 425 0.1on 425 0.15on 425 0.1on
0.25off 0.1off 0.9off 0.15off 2.9off
0.15on
10.0off
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 971
CPTG Error Tone Confirmation Tone Feature Tone CCWT ICWT
Region Region Cadence Cadence Cadence Cadence Cadence
Code Freq. Freq. Freq. Freq. Freq.
(sec) (sec) (sec) (sec) (sec)
15 Iran 425 0.25on 425 0.1on 425 0.1on 425 0.2on 425 0.1on
0.25off 0.1off 0.9off 0.2off 2.9off
0.2on
10.0off
16 Iraq 400 0.25on 400 0.1on 400 0.1on 400 0.1on 400 0.1on
0.25off 0.1off 0.9off 0.1off 2.9off
0.1on
2.7off
17 Israel 400 0.25on 400 0.17on 400 0.1on 400 0.5on 400 0.1on
0.25off 0.14off 0.9off 10.0off 2.9off
0.34on
5.0off
18 Italy1 425 0.2on 425 0.1on 425 0.1on 425 0.4on 425 0.1on
0.2off 0.1off 0.9off 0.1off 2.9off
0.25on
0.1off
0.15on
5.0off
19 Japan 400 0.25on 400 0.1on 400 0.1on 400*25 0.5on 400* 0.1on
0.25off 0.1off 0.9off 2.0off 25 2.9off
0.05on
0.45off
0.05on
3.45off
20 Kenya 425 0.2on 425 0.1on 425 0.1on 425 0.1on 425 0.1on
0.6off 0.1off 0.9off 0.1off 2.9off
0.1on
2.7off
21 Korea 480+ 0.3on 350+440 0.1on 350+ 0.1on 350+440 0.25on 350+ 0.1on
620 0.2off 0.1off 440 0.9off 0.25off 440 2.9off
0.25on
3.25off
22 Malaysia 425 2.5on 425 0.1on 425 0.1on 425 0.2on 425 0.1on
0.5off 0.1off 0.9off 0.2off 2.9off
0.2on
5.0off
23 Mexico 425 0.25on 425 0.1on 425 0.1on 425 0.1on 425 0.1on
0.25off 0.1off 0.9off 0.1off 2.9off
0.1on
2.7off
24 New 400 0.25on 400 0.1on 400 0.1on 400 0.2on 425 0.1on
Zealand 0.25off 0.1off 0.9off 3.0off 2.9off
0.2on
5.0off
25 Phillippines 480+ 0.25on 425 0.1on 425 0.1on 440 0.3on 440 0.1on
620 0.25off 0.1off 0.9off 10.0off 2.9off
26 Poland 425 0.5on 425 0.1on 425 0.1on 425 0.15on 425 0.1on
0.5off 0.1off 0.9off 0.15off 2.9off
0.15on
4.0off
27 Portugal 450 0.33on 425 1.0on 425 0.1on 425 0.2on 425 0.2on
1.0off 0.2off 0.9off 0.2off 1.4off
0.2on
5.0off
28 Russia 425 0.25on 425 0.1on 425 0.1on 950 0.333on 425 0.1on
0.25off 0.1off 0.9off 1.0off 2.9off
972 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
CPTG Error Tone Confirmation Tone Feature Tone CCWT ICWT
Region Region Cadence Cadence Cadence Cadence Cadence
Code Freq. Freq. Freq. Freq. Freq.
(sec) (sec) (sec) (sec) (sec)
29 Saudi 425 0.25on 425 0.1on 425 0.1on 425 0.15on 425 0.1on
Arabia 0.25off 0.1off 0.9off 0.2off 2.9off
0.15on
10.0off
30 Singapore 425 0.25on 425 0.125on 425 0.1on 425 0.3on 425 0.25on
0.25off 0.125off 0.9off 0.2off 2.0off
0.3on
3.2off
31 South 400 0.25on 400*33 0.1on 400* 0.1on 400*33 0.4on 400 0.15on
Africa 0.25off 0.1off 33 0.9off 4.0off 0.25off
0.15on
1.45off
32 Spain 425 0.25on 425 0.1on 425 0.1on 425 0.175on 425 0.1on
0.25off 0.1off 0.9off 0.175off 2.9off
0.175on
3.5off
33 Thailand 400 0.3on 400*50 0.1on 400* 0.1on 400 0.1on 400 0.1on
0.3off 0.1off 50 0.9off 0.1off 2.9off
0.1on
2.7off
34 Turkey 450 0.2on 450 0.04on 450 0.1on 450 .2on .6off 450 0.1on
0.2off 0.04off 0.9off .2on 8.0off 2.9off
.6on .2off
35 UAE 400 0.4on 350+440 0.1on 350+ 0.1on 350+440 0.1on 350+ 0.1on
0.35off 0.1off 440 0.9off 0.1off 440 2.9off
0.225on 0.1on
0.525off 2.7off
36 UK 400 0.4on 350+440 0.1on 350+ 0.1on 350+440 0.1on 400 0.2on
0.35off 0.1off 440 0.9off 0.1off 4.8off
0.225on 0.1on
0.525off 2.7off
37 USA 480+ 0.25on 350+440 0.1on 350+ 0.1on 440 0.3on 480+ 0.5on
620 0.25off 0.1off 440 0.9off 10.0off 620 0.5off
38 Italy2 400 0.25on 400 0.1on 400 1.75on 400 0.2on 400 0.2on
0.25 off 0.1off 0.1off 2.5off 0.2off
0.2on
2.5off
39 Belgium 425 0.167on 425 0.1on 425 0.1on 1400 0.175on 440 0.1on
0.167 off 0.1off 0.9off 0.175off 2.9off
0.175on
3.5off
40 India2 400 0.25on 350+440 0.1on 350+ 0.1on 350+440 0.1on 350+ 0.5on
0.25 off 0.1off 440 0.9off 0.1off 440 0.5off
0.1on 1.0on
2.7off 5.0off
The meaning of frequency notation is as follows:
• f1*f2: f1 is modulated by f2.
• f1+f2: The juxtaposition of two frequencies f1 and f2 without modulation.
Table: Default CPTG Type applied to each 'Region' supported by ETERNITY
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 973
By default, CPTG Type are as under:
To select the Dial Tone Type, dial:
• 5307-Flag
Where,
Flag is
1 for Dial Tone 1
2 for Dial Tone 2
To change CPT-related Timers, dial:
• 3502-Seconds to program the Dial Tone Timer.
Where,
Seconds is from 002 to 255.
Default: 007 seconds
• 3503-Seconds to program the Ring Back Tone Timer.
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255 seconds.
Default: 045 seconds.
• 3504-Seconds to program the Busy Tone Timer.
974 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255 seconds.
Default: 007 seconds.
• 3505-Seconds to program the Error Tone Timer.
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255 seconds.
Default: 030 seconds.
• 3506-Seconds to program the Confirmation Tone Timer.
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255 seconds.
Default: 007 seconds.
• 3509-Seconds to program the Programming Confirmation Tone Timer.
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255 seconds.
Default: 003 seconds.
• 3508-Seconds to program the Programming Error Tone Timer.
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255 seconds.
Default: 003 seconds.
• 3542-Seconds to change Tone Demo Timer140.
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255.
• Exit SE mode.
For SE commands to change Interrupt Request Timer and the Barge-In Timer, Transfer-On Busy Timer,
refer the relevant topics: “Interrupt Request (IR)”, “Barge-In” and “Call Transfer”.
How to use
It is important that users of ETERNITY also get acquainted with the different Call Progress Tones played by the
system, so that they understand the meaning of the terms used for various tones. Therefore, ETERNITY makes it
possible for users to listen to the various Call Progress Tones.
Demonstration of Tones
It is possible to demonstrate Call Progress Tones to users by dialing the SE commands from EON or an SLT.
By default, the system will play each tone as demonstration for 30 seconds. The duration of demonstration can be
changed by setting the 'Tone Demo Timer' to match user preference (see "Changing CPT-related Timers using a
Telephone" above).
To demonstrate call progress tones:
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
• Dial command 3541-Code.
Where,
140. Time for which the system demonstrates the tone/ring to the user.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 975
Code is
01 Dial Tone 1
02 Dial Tone 2
03 Ring Back Tone
04 Busy Tone
05 Error Tone
06 Confirmation Tone
07 Feature Tone
08 Routing Tone
09 Programming Tone
10 Intrusion Tone (ICWT)
11 External Call Waiting Tone (CCWT)
• Exit SE mode.
976 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Call Restriction based on IP Address
What's this?
When the VoIP Card of ETERNITY is connected to a public IP network, it is may be necessary to restrict traffic to
and from a particular IP address only.
With the feature 'Call Restriction based on IP Address', ETERNITY makes it possible to entertain requests on its
VoIP Ethernet ports for predefined IP Addresses only,
How it works
For this feature to work,
• the "IP Address based call traffic restriction" flag must be enabled for the VoIP Ethernet Port, and
• the "White List IP Address Table", i.e. a list of IP Addresses and their respective Subnet Masks from where
the traffic is to be allowed, must be configured for VoIP Ethernet Port.
• With flag enabled and the table programmed, traffic coming from all IP Addresses, other than those
programmed in the White List, will be blocked.
• If the flag "Call Restriction based on IP Address" is enabled, but the White List IP Address Table is
blank, all incoming traffic will be rejected and it will not be possible to make calls on such a VoIP Card.
• Call Restriction will be applied also on all the SIP Trunks which are assigned to the VoIP Ethernet Port.
How to configure
• Decide on which of the VoIP Ethernet Ports IP Address based call traffic restriction is to be applied.
• For each VoIP Ethernet Port you want to create a White List Table, make a three column table on a sheet
of paper.
VoIP Ethernet Port 1
Index IP Address Subnet Mask
• Make a list of IP Addresses. You are allowed to program a maximum of 5 IP Addresses. For each IP
Address enter the corresponding Subnet Mask address.
• With the White List Tables ready, you may program the tables using Jeeves or a telephone.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 977
Programming IP Address Based Call Traffic Restriction using Jeeves
• Login to Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the 'VoIP Configuration' link.
• Click "White List IP Address" to open the page.
• The White List IP Address page for VoIP Ethernet Port 1 will open.
• Select the "Enable IP Address based call traffic restriction" check box.
• Enter the IP Address and the respective Subnet Mask in the table. You may refer to the table you prepared
on paper.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your setting.
• To program the White List IP Address for another VoIP Ethernet Port, click the link of the desired VoIP
Ethernet Port.
• Repeat the same steps as described above to program the White List IP Addresses and the corresponding
Subnet Masks.
• You may logout of Jeeves after you have finished programming the White List IP Address for the desired
VoIP Ethernet Ports.
Programming IP Address Based Call Traffic Restriction using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To enable/disable the IP Address based Call Traffic Restriction flag, dial:
• 7797-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-Flag
Where,
VoIP Ethernet Port is the number of the VoIP Ethernet Port.
Flag is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
By default, Disable is selected
To program IP Address to be allowed, dial:
• 7815-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-Table Number Index-IP Address
Where,
VoIP Ethernet Port is the number of the VoIP Ethernet Port for which you want to program the White
List IP Address Table.
Table Number Index is from 1 to 5.
IP Address is the IP Address which you want to allow.
To program Subnet Mask of allowed IP addresses, dial:
• 7816-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-Table Number Index-Subnet Mask
Where,
VoIP Ethernet Port is the number of the VoIP Ethernet Port for which you want to program the White
List IP Address Table.
Table Number Index is from 1 to 5.
Subnet Mask should be the Subnet Mask corresponding to the IP Address you programmed at the
same Index number in the White List IP Address table.
To clear an entry of the White List table, dial:
• 7817-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-Table Number Index
Where,
VoIP Ethernet Port is the number of the VoIP Ethernet Port for which programmed the White List IP
Address Table.
Table Number Index is the entry you want to delete, from 1 to 5.
978 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To clear all entries of the White List table of a VoIP Ethernet Port, dial:
• 7817-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-*
• Exit SE mode.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 979
Call Taping
What's this?
Call Taping allows extension users to record the telephone conversations they have with other extensions or
external numbers, without the opposite party coming to know about it.
Feature is useful for keeping records of important conversations. For this feature to work, the system must have
either a VMS Card installed in it or be interfaced with Matrix CadencePro.
Call Taping can be done for:
• Incoming and outgoing external calls.
• Incoming and outgoing internal calls.
Calls are taped in a common mailbox assigned to this feature. Extension users with access to the mailbox can
retrieve and listen to the recorded conversations.
To be able to record external incoming and outgoing calls, a list of phone numbers (both incoming and outgoing)
must have been programmed in the system.
Incoming calls without Calling Line Identification (CLI) can also be taped. For this, the flag 'Tape Calls Without CLI?'
must be enabled in the Station Advanced Feature Template.
To be able to record internal calls, the 'Call Taping for Internal Calls flag' must be enabled on the extension which
desires to use this feature.
• Use this feature in accordance with the local privacy laws.
• Matrix Comsec is not responsible for any mis-/abuse of this feature by users.
How it works
• A and B are extensions. Both have Call Taping parameters configured.
• C and D are external parties.
• E is the mailbox141 extension.
A calls C
• The system matches the dialed number with the numbers in the Number List - Outgoing Calls.
• The system finds a match. When speech is established, the system starts recording the conversation
between A and C automatically in E's mailbox.
• Call Taping Beeps will be played to A and C, if this feature is enabled.
141. The mailbox may be of the VMS Card or CadencePro.
980 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
D calls B
• The system matches the incoming number with the numbers in the Number List-Incoming Calls.
• On finding a match, system records the speech between D and B in E's mailbox.
• Call Taping Beeps will be played to D and B only if this feature is enabled.
• If an incoming call does not have any CLI, the system checks the flag 'Tape Calls without CLI' in the
Call Taping parameters.
• If the flag is enabled, all calls without CLI are taped.
A calls B
• The system checks if the Call Taping Internal Flag is enabled on A.
• If the flag is enabled, the system records the speech between A and B in E's mailbox.
• Call Taping Beeps will be played to A and B only if this feature is enabled.
• If the flag is disabled, the speech between A and B will not be recorded.
• The same is done when B calls A. The speech will be recorded in E's mailbox.
To listen to the conversation, A and B must have access to the mailbox of E.
Feature Interaction:
• Conversation Recording: If Call Taping and “Conversation Recording” both are enabled for an
extension, then priority is given to Conversation Recording.
How to configure
The functioning of this feature requires the following parameters to be programmed:
• Mailbox Port: You must program the software port of the extension in whose mailbox the calls are to be
taped.
• Taping Calls without CLI Flag: This flag must be enabled if you want calls without CLI to be taped.
• Number Lists for Incoming and Outgoing Calls: The Call Taping Number List-Incoming Calls and Call
Taping Number List-Outgoing Calls are to be programmed so that the system can match the phone
numbers of the incoming and outgoing calls and initiate the recording of the speech.
On a sheet of paper, prepare the Call Taping List Incoming and Call Taping List Outgoing.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 981
You can add as many as 999 numbers to each list. Each entry on these Lists is stored in a serial order
against a 'Location Number'. So, draw three columns and enter the numbers against a location number
from 01 to 999.
Location Number List-Incoming Calls Number List-Outgoing Calls
001
002
999
Use this table to program the Number lists. By default Number List 09 is assigned for numbers of incoming
calls, and Number List 10 is assigned to numbers of outgoing calls.
• Call Taping Internal Flag: This flag is to be enabled in the Station Advanced Feature Template applied on
those extensions that are to be allowed Call Taping of internal calls, i.e. calls made or received by them to
or from other extensions.
• Call Taping Recording Beeps: This flag is to be enabled if Call Taping Beeps are to be played to the two
parties in speech. Enable Call Taping Beeps only when you want indication of speech recording to the two
parties in speech. By default, this flag is enabled.
Programming Call Taping Parameters using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
To program Mailbox Port:
• Click 'System Parameters' to open the page.
982 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Scroll down to 'Mailbox for Call Taping'.
• Select 'Port Type' for the mailbox, i.e. SLT or DKP.
• Enter the 'Port No.', i.e. Software Port Number of the SLT/DKP you selected as the Port Type.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
To enable/disable Call Taping Beeps:
• On the same 'System Parameters' page, go to 'Play Beep when Call Taping and Conversation Recording
Starts' and enable/disable beeps by selecting/clearing the check box.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
To program Call Taping Flags and Number Lists:
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 983
• Click 'Station Advanced Feature Template' to open the page.
By default, Station Advanced Feature Template 01 is assigned to all extensions of the ETERNITY. If you
want to assign Call Taping facility to all extensions, then program the Call Taping related flags and Number
Lists, in Template 01.
However, if only selected stations are to be assigned this feature, then:
1. Prepare a separate Station Advanced Feature Template.
2. Set the Call Taping Parameters in this template.
3. Apply this new template to all SLT and DKP stations that are to be allowed this feature.
• Scroll with the horizontal bar to reach the 'Call Taping' column of the Template Number assigned to the
extensions.
• If you want calls without CLI to be taped, click the check box to enable the flag - Tape Calls coming without
CLI?
• To program the list of numbers of incoming calls, click the link Number List- Incoming.
984 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The Number List page will open.
• Click '001-255' link of the default number list 9-10 assigned to Call Taping.
The Number Lists 9 and 10 will open.
• If the same incoming and outgoing numbers are to be programmed for all extensions, you may simply
program the default Number lists 09 and 10.
• If different incoming and outgoing numbers are to be programmed for different extensions, then
prepare different number lists.
• Enter the List of Incoming Numbers that the system should match in List No. 09.
• Enter the List of Outgoing Numbers that the system should match in List No. 10.
You can program as many as 999 numbers in each list. Each entry on these Lists is stored in a serial order
against a 'Location Index, starting from 001-999'. There are 250 Location Index on each page on your
screen. To go to the next set of Location Index, for instance, 251-500, click the link under 09-10.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your number lists.
• Follow the same steps to program a different Call Taping number list. But ensure that the different List
number you programmed is entered in the Station Advanced Feature Template applied to the extensions.
• If you want calls between extensions to be taped, click the check box to enable the flag - Call Taping for
Internal Calls.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 985
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes to the template.
• Now, apply the programmed template to DKP and SLT extensions to which you want to provide the Call
Taping facility. Refer the topic “Station Advanced Feature Template” for programming instructions.
Programming the Station Software Port using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To program Mailbox Port, dial:
• 4701-Station Type-Station Port
Where,
Station Type is
01 for SLT
02 for DKP
34 for SIP
Station Port is
Software Port Number of the SLT station from 001 to 512.
Software Port Number of the DKP station from 001 to 128.
Software Port Number of the SIP extension from 001 to 999.
To enable/disable Call Taping Beeps, dial:
• 5332-Code
Where,
Code is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
To program a number in a List:
• 4302-List Number-Location Index-Number-#*
Where,
List Number is from 01 to 16. In this case, 09 for Incoming Number List and 10 for Outgoing Number
List.
Location Index is from 001 to 999.
Number is a number string of maximum 16 digit long terminated with #*.
The digits used are as given in Table below for digits: 0-9, #, *, A, B, C, D, F, P, +.
Special Digit Code
Flash (F) #2
Pause (P) #3
A #4
B #5
C #6
D #7
+ #8
Dot (.) #9
# ##
* **
986 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To clear a number from a Location Index:
• 4302-List Number-Location Index-#*
Where,
List Number is from 01 to 16. In this case, 09 for Incoming Number List and 10 for Outgoing Number
List.
Location Index is from 001 to 999, where the number you want to clear is stored.
To program Number List - Incoming in Station Advanced Feature Template:
• 5602-1-Template Number-Feature Number-Code
Where,
Template Number is from 01 to 50.
Feature Number is
18 for Number List-Incoming.
19 for Number List-Outgoing.
Code is the Number List from 01 to 16.
In this case, 09 for Incoming Number List and 10 for Outgoing Number List.
To enable Call Taping Internal Flag in a Station Advanced Feature Template, dial:
• 5602-1-Template Number-Feature Number-Code
Where,
Template Number is from 01 to 50.
Feature Number for Call Taping Internal Flag is 20.
Code is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
To enable Tape calls coming without CLI Flag in a Station Advanced Feature Template, dial:
• 5602-1-Template Number-Feature Number-Code
Where,
Template Number is from 01 to 50.
Feature Number for Tape calls without CLI is 17.
Code is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
• Exit SE mode.
For SE commands for applying the programmed template to DKP and SLT extensions, refer the topic
“Customizing Station Advanced Feature Template using a Telephone”.
Also refer the topic “Number Lists” to know more.
How to use
This feature works automatically on extensions which have the related Call Taping parameters programmed in their
Station Advanced Feature Template.
Call Taping conversations are recorded in a single, common mailbox. These can be accessed directly by the
Mailbox Owner (user of the extension to which this common mailbox is assigned). Other extension users can also
access this common mailbox by calling the Voice Mail System.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 987
Instructions for accessing the mailbox are provided separately for these two groups of users.
For the Mailbox Owner
If you are an EON user
• Press Voice Mail Key.
OR
• Dial 3931142-Your Mailbox Password143
• Follow Voice Mail Prompts to listen to new messages.
If you are an SLT user
• Lift the handset.
• Dial 3931-Your Mailbox Password
• Follow Voice Mail Prompts to listen to new messages.
• Replace handset.
For Other Extension Users
• Press Voice Mail Key.
OR
• Dial 3931 (default Voice Mail Access Code).
• Dial 0 to go to Home Position (default Access Code).
• Dial 8 (default Access Code).
• Dial the number of the extension to which the common mailbox has been assigned.
• Enter the password for the common mailbox144.
• Follow Voice Mail Prompts to listen to new messages. Follow the prompts to listen to old messages.
• Replace handset, after you have finished listening to the messages.
If the common mailbox is password protected, make sure that you provide the password to all extension
users who are to be provided access to this mailbox.
The above instructions contain the default access codes. Check with your System Engineer, if these have
been changed and use the current access codes.
142. This is the default Voice mail Feature Access Code. Verify with you System Engineer if this has been changed and use the new
code.
143. Only if the mailbox is password protected, you will be prompted to enter the password.
144. Only if the mailbox is password protected, you will be prompted to enter the mailbox password.
988 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Call Toggle
What's this?
Call Toggle allows you to have two simultaneous telephone conversations, talking to two persons alternately.
Call Toggle is also referred to as Hold-Consult or Call Splitting,
You can toggle between:
• Two internal calls (i.e. two extensions).
• An internal Call and an External Call (extension and trunk).
• Two external calls (two trunks).
How it works
• A, B, and C are extensions.
• D and E are trunks.
Toggling between two internal calls
• A is in speech with B.
• A wants to talk to C.
• A presses Flash and dials the number of C.
• A gets Ring Back Tone and B is put on hold.
• C answers the call. A is in speech with C.
• A dials Flash-1 to toggle from C to B.
• C put on hold. A is in speech with B.
• A can toggle back to C by dialing Flash-1.
Toggling between internal call and external call
• A is in speech with B.
• A wants to talk to D.
• A presses Flash and dials the external number of D.
• A gets Ring Back Tone and B is put on hold.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 989
• D answers the call. A is in speech with D.
• A dials Flash-1 to toggle from D to B.
• D put on hold and played music. A is in speech with B.
• A can toggle back to D by dialing Flash-1.
Toggling between two external calls
• A is in speech with D.
• A wants to talk to E.
• A presses Flash and dials the external number of E.
• A gets Ring Back Tone and D is put on hold. D gets music on hold.
• E answers the call. D cannot hear the conversation between A and E.
• A dials Flash-1 to toggle from E to D.
• E is put on hold and played music on hold. A is in speech with D.
• A can toggle back to E by dialing Flash-1.
• The party put on hold during Call Toggle cannot hear the conversation between the other two parties.
• You can also toggle between an incoming internal/external call (indicated by call waiting tone) and an
internal/external call you are currently in speech with.
• You can also answer an incoming 'Interrupt Request' call and toggle between the interrupting extension
and the extension you were in speech.
• You can convert a Call Toggle into a three-party conference by dialing Flash-0.
• You can transfer the call you are currently in speech with to another extension.
• You can park the call you are currently in speech with.
How to configure
Call Toggle is a Class of Service (CoS)-dependant feature.
In the default Station Basic Feature Template 01 assigned to all extensions of ETERNITY, Call Toggle is included in
the 'Basic Features' assigned to all CoS groups, including the default CoS group 01. So, all extensions of
ETERNITY can use this feature.
As Call Toggle is a part of the set of 'Basic Features', you cannot disable this feature selectively in the COS of
extensions, without disabling the entire set of features.
No specific programming is required for this feature, except for programming a DSS key for Call Toggle, if required.
Refer the topic “DSS Keys Programming” for instructions.
990 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
How to use
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users
Call Toggle between two internal calls:
• Speech with extension 1
• Press Hold.
• Dial another extension number
• Speech with extension 2.
• Press DSS key assigned to Call Toggle.
OR
• Dial Hold-1.
• Speech with extension 1.
• Press DSS key assigned to Call Toggle again
OR
• Dial Hold-1.
• Speech with extension 2.
Call Toggle between an Internal Call and an External Call:
• Speech with extension
• Press Hold.
• Dial Trunk Access Code.
• Dial the external number.
• Speech with external party.
• Press DSS key assigned to Call Toggle.
OR
• Dial Hold-1.
• Speech with extension.
• Press DSS Key assigned to Call Toggle
OR
• Dial Hold-1.
• Speech with external party.
Call Toggle between two External Calls:
• Speech with external party 1 on trunk 1.
• Press Hold.
• Dial #
• Dial Trunk Access Code.
• Dial the external number.
• Speech with external party 2 on trunk 2.
• Press DSS key assigned to Call Toggle.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 991
OR
• Dial Hold-1.
• Speech with external party 1 on trunk 1.
• Press DSS Key assigned to Call Toggle again.
OR
• Dial Hold-1 again.
• Speech with external party 2 on trunk 2.
For SLT Users
Call Toggle between two internal calls:
• Speech with extension 1
• Press Flash.
• Dial another extension number
• Speech with extension 2.
• Dial Flash-1.
• Speech with extension 1.
• Dial Flash-1.
• Speech with extension 2.
Call Toggle between an Internal Call and an External Call:
• Speech with extension
• Press Flash.
• Dial Trunk Access Code.
• Dial the external number.
• Speech with external party.
• Dial Flash-1.
• Speech with extension.
• Dial Flash-1.
• Speech with external party.
Call Toggle between two External Calls:
• Speech with external party 1 on trunk 1.
• Press Flash.
• Dial #
• Dial Trunk Access Code.
• Dial the external number.
• Speech with external party 2 on trunk 2.
• Dial Flash-1.
• Speech with external party 1 on trunk 1.
• Dial Flash-1 again.
• Speech with external party 2 on trunk 2.
992 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Call Transfer
What is this?
Call Transfer enables you to relocate an existing call from an extension or trunk to another extension or to an
external number. Calls can be transferred after notifying the other extension/external number about the impending
transfer or can be transferred directly without notification.
The types of Call Transfer ETERNITY offers are:
• Call Transfer - Screened: The Operator puts the caller on hold, dials the desired party's extension, and
informs the desired party of the impending transfer. If the desired party chooses to accept the call, the call
is transferred over to them.
• Call Transfer - While Ringing: The Operator puts the caller on hold, dials the desired party's number and
transfers the call when the desired party's extension starts ringing.
This feature is used when there are several other calls to be attended and the Operator cannot wait for the
desired party to answer.
• Call Transfer - On Busy: The Operator puts the caller on hold, dials the desired party's number and
transfers the call even when the desired party is busy in speech with another person. The busy extension
gets intrusion tone and can choose to answer the intruding (transferred) call.
• Call Transfer - Trunk-to-Trunk: An external call is transferred on to another trunk line. The Operator puts
the external caller on hold, dials the desired party's external number, and transfers the call after or without
notifying the desired party of the impending transfer.
Trunk-to-Trunk call transfer may be used to transfer incoming calls for out-of-office extension users to their
cell phones, or to connect personnel at remote or distant locations. For instance: an out-of-office executive
who does not have long distance dialing permission can call the office and request the operator to connect
him to the desired party on a trunk line.
• Blind Transfer to VMS: The Operator puts the caller on hold, dials the feature access code for Blind
Transfer to VMS, dials the desired party's number, and transfers the call. The call is transferred to the
mailbox assigned to the desired party. The caller may leave a message in the mailbox.
Call Transfer is not exclusively an Operator feature, though it is used mostly by Operators. Calls can be
transferred by any extension to another extension or external number, if "Basic Features" are allowed in
Class of Service of the transferring extension.
How it works
A and B are extension users.
C is an external caller.
D is an external number.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 993
Call Transfer from Trunk/Extension to Extension
Three scenarios are possible:
1. Screened Transfer:
• C calls a Trunk of ETERNITY.
• The Operator answers the call.
• Operator puts C on hold.
• Operator dials B's extension.
• When B answers the call, the Operator informs B about the call.
• If B accepts the call, the Operator transfers the call to B.
• Now, B and C are in speech.
• If B does not accept the call, Operator may dial Flash to retrieve the call and speak to C.
• The Operator can also abort call transfer while B's phone is ringing by dialing Flash. The Operator gets
connected to C.
2. Transfer While Ringing:
• C calls a Trunk of ETERNITY.
• The Operator answers the call.
• The Operator puts C on hold and dials B's extension.
• The Operator transfers the call when B's phone starts ringing.
• If B answers the call, B gets connected to C.
• If B does not answer the call at the end of the Transfer-While Ringing Timer (programmable; default: 30
seconds), the call is returned to the Operator. C gets Ring Back Tone.
• The Operator answers the call and is in speech with C.
• However, if the Operator is busy at the time of call return, the system waits for the Operator to become
free. When the Operator is free, C gets Ring Back Tone.
• The Operator answers the call and is in speech with C.
3. Transfer On Busy:
• C calls a Trunk of ETERNITY.
• The Operator answers the call.
• The Operator puts C on hold and dials B's extension.
• The Operator gets busy tone from B's extension. B is busy with A
• The Operator transfers the call to B on Busy tone.
• B gets intrusion beeps. The beeps are played for the duration of the Transfer on Busy Timer
(programmable; default: 30 seconds)
• B may dial Flash to answer the call. A is put on hold.
• B is now connected to C.
• If B does not answer the intrusion beeps at the end of the Transfer on Busy Timer, the call is returned
to the Operator. C gets ring back tone.
• If the Operator too is busy at the time of call return, C gets busy tone.
Call Transfer - Trunk to Trunk
• C calls a Trunk of the ETERNITY.
• The Operator answers the call.
994 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• B is out of office, but is available at external number D.
• The Operator puts C on hold by dialing Flash.
• The Operator dials trunk access code and calls the external number D.
• The Operator may:
Wait for D to answer the call, transfer the call if D accepts the call. (screened transfer)
OR
Transfer the call as soon as D's phone starts ringing. (transfer while ringing)
• C and D are now in speech for the duration of the Trunk-to-Trunk Inactivity Timer145.
• A warning tone is given at the end of the Trunk-to-Trunk Inactivity timer (programmable; default: 90
seconds). On expiry of this timer, the call is disconnected.
• To extend the call, either C or D must dial any digit in tone (DTMF), except '##'.
Dialing ‘##’ to extend the call will result in Call Disconnection.
In the case of Trunk-to-Trunk transfer, both parties in speech on trunk lines must be informed that their call
would be disconnected at the end of the Trunk-to-Trunk Inactivity Timer and that they must dial any digit,
except ‘##” to extend the call.
Call Transfer - Blind Transfer to VMS
• C calls a Trunk of ETERNITY. C wants to talk to A.
• The Operator attends the call.
• The Operator puts C on hold.
• The Operator dials Feature Access Code for Blind Transfer to VMS and A's extension number.
• The system hunts for the mailbox assigned to A's extension.
• When the mailbox is found, the Operator gets confirmation tone. C gets connected to A's mailbox.
• C gets voice prompts. C may follow the prompts to leave a message.
• If A does not have a mailbox assigned, the Operator will get an error tone while transferring the call.
• The Operator may retrieve C's call by pressing Hold/Flash/Call Appearance key.
Feature Interactions:
• CLIP and Caller ID Presentation while Transfer: ETERNITY provides the flexibility to display either the
extension number that is transferring the call or the held party's number, i.e. the number of the party that is
about to be transferred. Refer “Calling Line Identification and Presentation (CLIP)”.
• Privacy: Call Transfer-On Busy will not work if the busy extension has Call Privacy from intrusion Tone in
its Class of Service.
• DND: Call Transfer will not work if the destination extension has set DND.
145. The process of Trunk-to-Trunk transfer takes place outside of the PBX. So, the PBX will not know which of the two trunks have
gone ON-Hook. Hence the Trunk-to-Trunk Inactivity Timer. The call is automatically disconnected when this timer expires.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 995
How to configure
To be able to use Call Transfer, this feature must be enabled in the Class of Service group of the extensions to be
allowed this feature. The default values of the related Timers may be changed, if required.
To be able to use Blind Transfer to VMS, the extensions must be assigned a mailbox in the VMS of the system.
Refer the System Manuals for the VMS Card and CadencePro to know more about this and for programming
instructions.
Call Transfer in Class of Service
In the default Station Basic Feature Template Number 01 is assigned to all the extensions of ETERNITY, the
default CoS group 01 in this template has Call Transfer included in the 'Basic Features'. So, all extensions of
ETERNITY can use this feature.
You cannot disable 'Call Transfer' selectively without disabling the entire set of 'Basic Features'.
Refer the topics “Class of Service (COS)” and “Station Basic Feature Template” to know more.
Call Transfer Related Timers
• Transfer While Ringing Timer: This timer is related to Call Transfer - While Ringing. It is the time for
which the system rings the extension. By default it is set to 30 seconds. At the end of the timer the call is
returned to the transferring extension.
• Transfer on Busy Timer: This timer is related to Call-Transfer on Busy. It is the time for which the system
waits for the busy extension to respond to the intrusion tone. By default the timer is set to 30 seconds. At
the end of the timer the call is returned to the transferring extension.
• Trunk to Trunk Inactivity Timer: This is the time duration after which the system disconnects the call
transferred from one trunk line to another. By default it is set to 90 seconds. At the end of the timer the call
is disconnected, if either party does not dial digits to extend the call. This Timer is relevant for TWT to TWT
and TWT to E&M calls only.
Changing Call Transfer Related Timers using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
996 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Click the 'System Timers' link to open the page.
• Scroll to reach the Call Transfer related timers and change the values as required.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
• Log out of Jeeves or continue with programming tasks, as required.
Changing Call Transfer Related Timers using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode.
To program Transfer While Ringing Timer:
• Dial command 3806-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255 seconds.
Default: 030
To program Transfer on Busy Timer:
• Dial command 3807-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255 seconds.
Default: 030
To program the Trunk-to-Trunk Inactivity Timer:
• Dial command 3808-Seconds
Where,
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 997
Seconds is from 001 to 255 seconds.
Default: 090
• Exit SE mode.
How to use
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users
Extension to Extension Transfer:
• Speech with extension.
• Press DSS Key assigned to desired party extension.
OR
• Press Hold and dial desired party's extension number.
• Press 'Transfer' Key.
OR
• Go ON-Hook.
Extension to Trunk:
• Speech with extension.
• Press DSS Key assigned to Trunk.
• Dial External Number (transfer target)
• Press 'Transfer' Key.
OR
• Press Hold.
• Dial-Trunk Access Code146-External Number and go On-Hook.
Trunk to Extension Transfer:
• Speech with Trunk.
• Press DSS Key assigned to desired party extension and Press 'Transfer Key'.
OR
• Press Hold and dial desired party's extension number and Go-ON Hook.
Trunk to Trunk Transfer:
• Speech with Trunk.
• Press Hold-#.
• Press DSS Key assigned to Trunk147.
• Dial External Number.
146.Trunk Access Code: users worldwide may dial a code from 0, 5, 61, 62, 63, and 64. Users in USA may dial a code from 0, 9, 81, 82,
83, and 84.
998 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Press DSS Key assigned to Trunk-Trunk Transfer.
OR
• Dial Hold-#-Trunk Access Code-External Number-Hold-#.
• Speech with the External Number.
• Dial Hold-#.
Blind Transfer to VMS:
• Speech with extension.
• Press Hold.
• Press DSS Key assigned to Blind Transfer to VMS.
OR
• Dial 1078.
• Dial desired party's extension number.
• Go Idle or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.
For SLT Users
Extension to Extension Transfer:
• Speech with extension.
• Press Flash.
• Dial desired party's extension number.
• Replace handset.
Extension to Trunk:
• Speech with extension.
• Press Flash.
• Dial Trunk Access Code.
• Dial External Number.
• Replace handset.
Trunk to Extension Transfer:
• Speech with Trunk.
• Press Flash.
• Dial desired party's extension number.
• Replace handset.
Trunk to Trunk Transfer:
• Speech with Trunk.
• Dial Flash-#.
• Dial Trunk Access Code
• Dial External Number.
147.Trunk Access Code: users worldwide may dial a code from 0, 5, 61, 62, 63, and 64. Users in USA may dial a code from 0, 9, 81, 82,
83, and 84.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 999
• Speech with the External Number.
• Dial Flash-#.
Blind Transfer to VMS
• Speech with Trunk/extension.
• Press Flash.
• Dial 1078.
• Dial desired party's extension number.
• Replace handset.
1000 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Calling Line Identification and Presentation (CLIP)
What's this?
The ETERNITY provides the facility of detecting the caller's number and presenting it on the display of the called
extension phone. This feature is called Calling Line Identification and Presentation (CLIP).
The calling number can be presented on ISDN Terminals, EON and also on SLTs that support CLI protocols.
The signaling protocols for CLI supported by ETERNITY are: DTMF, FSK V.23, and FSK-Bellcore.
These protocols are supported on trunks as well as extensions. Any type of trunk line and supporting DTMF or FSK
signaling can be interfaced with the ETERNITY.
Similarly, any type of telephone instrument supporting DTMF or FSK signaling protocol can be connected to the
SLT port.
How it works
When CLIP is enabled on a trunk,
• ETERNITY senses the digits/codes sent by PSTN.
• It sends this information to the landing extension/Operator along with the ringing signal.
• In case of, Internal calls the calling extension's name and number both are presented to the called
extension.
• In the case of External calls, only the number will be displayed on the landing/Operator extension.
• When the landing extension/Operator transfers the incoming call to an extension, putting the external
caller on hold, the system sends this information to the extension to which the call is transferred.
• During the transfer, the number of the landing extension/Operator will be displayed on the transfer
destination extension.
• On successful call transfer, the caller's number will be displayed on the transfer destination extension.
In the case of Call Transfer, the system also provides the option of displaying to the destination extension either the
number of the party that is put on hold to be transferred, i.e. the Held Party OR the number of the Transferring
Party, while the call transfer is taking place. This feature is called Caller ID Presentation while Transfer.
It is also possible to remove and replace the '+' character received as CLI on telephones that do not support CLIP
starting with this character.
For example, the GSM network sends the calling party number with '+' as the prefix. If the telephone connected as
extension does not support this, it will not present the CLI of the caller. To overcome this, ETERNITY provides you
the option of replacing '+' with an appropriate number string which these telephones can display.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1001
Feature Interactions:
• CLIR: CLIP and Caller ID Presentation while Transfer will work only if CLIR is not enabled on the
extension that has transferred the call. Refer the topic “Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR)”.
• Q-Sig: When two PBXs - PBX A and PBX B are networked using Q-Sig, and an extension of one PBX, for
instance, PBX A transfers a call to an extension of PBX B by putting the caller on hold, the CLI presented
on the extension of PBX B will be according to the type of Caller ID Presentation while Transfer set on the
transferring extension of PBX A.
How to configure
The functioning of this feature is controlled by two parameters: 'CLIP Type' and 'Caller ID Presentation while
Transfer'.
If you want to replace '+' characters received as CLI on telephones that do not support CLI prefixed with this
character, you must program the relevant flag and the desired number string in the 'System Parameters'.
All these parameters can be programmed using Jeeves and a Telephone.
CLIP Type
If SLTs supporting CLI are connected to the ETERNITY, the System Engineer must select a signaling protocol for
CLI in the SLT Hardware Template applied on the SLT extensions. By default SLT Hardware Template 01 is
assigned to all SLT extensions. The default CLIP Type in Template 01 is 'DTMF'.
There is no need to select a CLIP Type in the default Hardware Template 01, if all the SLTs support DTMF protocol.
If all SLTs support a different CLIP Type say FSK-Bellcore, you may simply select this CLIP Type in the default
Hardware Template applied on all SLT extensions.
However, if certain SLTs support a particular CLIP type and some support a different CLIP type, then create
separate SLT Hardware Templates with different CLIP types and apply them to the appropriate SLTs.
For example, you may select SLT Hardware Template 02 with FSK V.23 and SLT Hardware Template 03 with FSK
Bellcore, and Template 04 with DTMF as the CLIP Type and apply each template to the SLTs as per the CLIP Type
they support.
Selecting CLIP Type using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the 'SLT Configuration' link.
1002 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Click 'SLT Hardware Templates' under SLT Configuration to open the page.
• Select the CLIP Type supported by the SLT.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
Selecting CLIP Type using Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
• Dial command 5702-1-Template Number-Parameter Number-Code
Where,
Template Number is SLT Hardware Template Number from 01 to 50
Parameter Number is 01 for CLIP Type.
Code is:
0 for None
1 for DTMF
2 for FSK-V23
3 for FSK Bellcore
For instance: To select FSK-V23 in SLT Hardware Number 01, dial 5702-1-01-01-2
• Exit SE mode.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1003
Caller ID Presentation while Transfer
The Caller ID Presentation while Transfer gives you the choice of displaying to the destination extension, the CLI of
either the party put on hold to be transferred, i.e. the Held Party or the Transferring Party, that is, the party
transferring the call, during a call transfer.
This feature is to be programmed in the Station Advanced Feature Template applied on the extension.
In the Station Advanced Feature Template 01 assigned to all extensions by default, Caller ID of the Held Party is
selected.
But if you want to show the Caller ID of the Transferring party, select this option in the default Station Advanced
Feature Template 01.
If all certain extensions are to be provided Caller ID of the Held Party and others the Caller ID of the Transferring
Party,
1. Create separate Station Advanced Feature Templates.
2. Select 'Held Party' or 'Transferring Party' as desired in each Template.
3. Apply this Template on the extensions.
Configuring Caller ID Presentation while Transfer using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter the Full Programming Access mode.
• Click 'Station Advanced Feature Templates' to open the page.
1004 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
•
• Select the desired option: 'Held Party' or 'Transferring Party'.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your setting.
• Log out of Jeeves or continue programming.
Configuring Caller ID Presentation while Transfer using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
• Dial command 5602-1-Template Number-Feature Number-Code
Where,
Template Number is Station Advanced Feature Template Number from 01 to 50
Parameter Number is 01 for Caller ID Presentation while Transfer.
Code is:
1 for Transferring Party
2 for Held Party
For instance: To select Transferring Party in Template Number 02, dial 5602-1-02-01-1
• Exit SE mode
Refer the topic “Station Advanced Feature Template” for instructions assigning Templates to stations.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1005
Replacing '+' in CLI
To replace '+' characters received as CLI on telephones that do not support CLI prefixed with this character, you
must program the flag 'Replace '+' from CLI?' and the desired number string that should replace this character.
Configuring Replace '+' in received CLI using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter the Full Programming Access mode.
• Click 'System Parameters' to open the page.
• Enable the 'Replace '+' CLI?' flag by selecting the check box.
• Enter the desired number string in the field 'Replace '+' from CLI with the number string'.
• Click ‘Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your setting.
• Log out of Jeeves or continue programming.
Configuring Replace '+' using Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To replace '+', dial:
• 5334-Code
Where,
1006 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Code is
0 for Disable (no modification in CLI)
1 for Enable (replace '+' in CLI with the substitute number string programmed)
Default: 0
To program Replacement string, dial:
• 5335-Replacement String-#*
Where,
Replacement string is any string with digits from 0 to 9. A maximum of 6 digits are permitted. Terminate
the command with #* if the replacement string is fewer than 6 digits.
To remove the replacement string, dial:
• 5335-#*
• Exit SE mode.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1007
Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR)
What's this?
The ETERNITY allows extension users to suppress their identity, i.e. extension number and name, when they call
other extensions. This feature is called Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR).
Extensions that have 'CLIR Override' facility can view the CLI of those that have suppressed it with CLIR.
This is a feature of the PBX and not the PSTN. It is applicable for internal calls only.
This feature will work only on the proprietary digital key phone EON, the Matrix Extended IP Phone, and SLTs that
support Caller Line Identification (CLI).
How it works
• Extension A has CLIR enabled.
• Extension B does not have CLIR Override enabled.
• Extension C has CLIR Override enabled.
• When A calls B, B cannot view the extension name and number of A.
• When A calls C, C can view A's extension name and number.
Now,
• Extension D calls extension E.
• A picks up the call.
• D will be able to view A's name and extension only if it has CLIR Override enabled and is a digital key
phone, EON.
Feature Interactions:
• CLIP and Caller ID Presentation while Transfer: Both these features will not work if CLIR is enabled.
How to configure
'CLIR' and 'CLIR Override' are Class-of-Service-dependant features. Extensions that are to be allowed these
features, must have them enabled in their Class of Service (CoS) group.
Decide which extensions should be allowed CLIR and which should be allowed CLIR Override.
In the default factory settings, Station Basic Feature Template Number 01 is assigned to all the extensions of
ETERNITY. Template 01 is assigned CoS group 01 in which both CLIR and CLIR Override are disabled. Thus,
none of the extensions of the ETERNITY can suppress their CLI or force any other extension to display its CLI.
If you want to enable both features on all extensions, simply enable CLIR and CLIR Override in the default CoS
group 01.
If you want to allow CLIR to all extensions, but not allow CLIR Override to any extension, simply enable CLIR in the
default CoS group 01.
If you want to allow CLIR and/or CLIR Override to selected extensions, only, then follow these steps:
1008 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
1. Define a new CoS group with CLIR/CLIR Override enabled.
2. Prepare a Station Basic Feature Template with this CoS group applicable in all the “Time Zones”.
3. Assign this new Template to the extensions to which CLIR/CLIR Override is to be allowed.
Refer the topics “Class of Service (COS)” and “Station Basic Feature Template” for detailed instructions and
programming.
How to use
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users
To enable CLIR
• Press DSS Key assigned to CLIR148.
OR
• Dial 1031 to enable CLIR.
• You get confirmatory tone and message on the phone's display.
• Go idle or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.
To disable CLIR:
• Press DSS Key assigned to CLIR again149.
OR
• Dial 1030.
• You get confirmatory tone and message on the phone's display.
• Go idle or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.
For SLT Users
To enable CLIR:
• Lift handset.
• Dial 103-1.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace handset.
To disable CLIR:
• Lift handset.
• Dial 103-0.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace handset.
148. System Engineer is recommended to assign a DSS Key with LED to this feature. When the assigned DSS key is pressed, it will
glow red indicating that CLIR is enabled.
149. If a DSS key with LED has been assigned, when you press the key again, the LED will be turned off indicating CLIR is now
canceled.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1009
Cancel All Station Features
What's this?
For each feature of the ETERNITY that an extension user has set/enabled on his/her extension, the system
provides access code for cancellation of the feature.
However, there is also a single master command for extension users with which all features that are set on an
extension can be canceled.
When the extension user dials 'Cancel All Station Features' command, the following features, if set, are cancelled
from the extensions:
• Alarms
• Auto Answer
• Auto Call Back
• Auto Redial
• Background Music
• Call Follow-Me
• Call Forward
• Do Not Disturb
• Hot Line
• Hot Outward Dialing
• Trunk Reservation
• Walk-In Class of Service
Auto Redial, Background Music, Call Forward and Call Follow-Me, Do Not Disturb, Hotline and Trunk
Reservation are Class of Service dependent features. These features can be set/canceled from an
extension only if they are included in its “Class of Service (COS)”.
How to use
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users
• Press DSS Key assigned to 'Cancel All Features' (if programmed).
OR
• Dial 1051.
• You get confirmation tone and confirmatory message on your phone display.
• Go idle or wait for dial tone.
For SLT Users
• Lift handset.
• Dial 1051.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace the handset.
1010 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Class of Service (COS)
What's this?
Class of Service (CoS) defines the permission an extension will have on a PBX. It defines the set features of the
PBX that the extension is to be allowed access to.
Feature requirements vary among users and with time. Certain groups of extension users may have a need for
voice mail, while another group may need the ability to forward calls to a cell phone, and still others may have no
need to make calls outside the office.
Similarly, certain features that are required during working hours may not be required during break or non-working
hours.
ETERNITY offers the flexibility to allow or deny extension users access to features of the PBX, on the basis of their
requirement and according to time of the day. For users, access to various features from their extensions is their
CoS.
How it works
The list of all features allowed to an extension is referred to as 'CoS group'. There are 20 CoS groups numbered
from 01 to 20.
In each CoS group there are 53 features, which are identified by 2-digit numbers, from 01 to 53. These are referred
to as the 'CoS Feature Numbers'.
Each station port of the PBX has an associated CoS group that indicates which features of the PBX the port is
allowed to access.
The CoS group of a station port is defined in the “Station Basic Feature Template” applied to that station port. It is
defined for each "Time Zone", namely, working hours, break hours, and non-working hours, in the Template.
A feature can be allowed or denied to an extension by enabling or disabling it in the CoS group of the Station Basic
Feature Template applied to that extension.
The same CoS group uniformly to all stations ports for all Time Zones. Doing so, all extensions can access the
same set of features in all time zones. For example: CoS group 03 is assigned to all extensions for Working, Break
and Non-Working hours.
A different CoS group for each Time Zone can be assigned to all station ports. Doing so, all extensions can access
only those features allowed for the particular Time Zone.
For example: All extensions are assigned CoS group 03 for Working, CoS group 04 for Break hours and CoS group
05 for Non-Working Hours.
Different CoS groups can be assigned to different station ports, for all or for different Time Zones. Doing so, each
extension can access a different set of features in each Time Zone.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1011
For example: extensions 3001 to 3010 are allowed CoS group 03 for all Time Zones, while extensions 3011 to 3015
are assigned CoS group 03 during Working Hours, and for the Non-Working and Break Hours, they are assigned
CoS group 04 and 05 respectively.
Basic Features
A set of features including Internal Call, Call Hold, Call Toggle, Call Transfer, Department Call, Operator Access,
Redial, and Call Mute defined as Basic Features and allowed in all CoS groups.
It is not possible to enable or disable selectively any of the features included in "Basic Features".
How to configure
The table below presents the CoS groups from 01 to 20 with the list of 01 to 53 features supported on the stations.
Default CoS Groups
Feature Class of Service Group
Feature Name
Number 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
01 Account Code
02 System Admin. Mode Access
03 System Admin. Station
04 Auto Call Back-Busy
05 Auto Call Back-No Reply
06 Auto Redial
07 Auto Redial Priority
08 Background Music
09 Barge-In
10 Call Forward
11 Call Park
12 Call Pickup
13 Change Room Clean Status
14 Global Directory Programming
15 CLIR
16 CLIR Override
17 CO Call Waiting
18 Conference
19 Continued Dialing
20 Conversation Recording
21 Decrement Dynamic Lock Timer
for Internal Calls
22 DISA
23 Do Not Disturb
24 Do Not Disturb - Override
25 Door Phone Settings
26 DOP Turn ON/Turn OFF
27 Dynamic Lock
28 Forced Answer
29 Forced Release
30 Forced Release Order
31 Global Directory Part-1
32 Global Directory Part-2
33 Global Directory Part-3
1012 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Feature Class of Service Group
Feature Name
Number 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
34 Hot Desk
35 Hotline
36 Interrupt Request
37 Live Call Screening
38 Live Call Supervision
39 Manual Priority Intrusion
40 Message Wait (Set/Cancel)
41 Mini Bar Details
42 Paging
43 Privacy from DID
44 Privacy from Interrupt Request,
Barge-In and DND-Override
45 Privacy from Raid
46 Raid
47 Return Call to Original Caller
(RCOC)
48 Room Monitor
49 Selective Port Access
50 Trunk Reservation
51 Trunk-Trunk Transfer
52 Basic Featuresa
53 Emergency Conference
a. Basic Features includes: Internal Call, Call Hold, Call Toggle, Call Transfer, Department Call, Operator Access,
Redial, Mute.
• CoS group number 01 is assigned for all Time Zones in the default Station Basic Feature Template 01
assigned to all stations of the ETERNITY.
• CoS group number 19 and 20 are assigned when the Hospitality Application of ETERNITY is used. See
ETERNITY Hospitality System Manual.
Creating CoS Groups
• Take a pen and a paper pad.
• Prepare a list of extensions.
• Read the list of features supported on the extensions (see above Table 'Default CoS Groups for
Features').
• Against each extension name on the list, write the features needed for each Time Zone. You will notice
that the features needed by many extensions are identical.
• List the common features to be allowed to and features to be denied to all extensions. Assign a CoS Group
Number to this list.
• Are there any other features, in addition to those on the common list, which you want to allow to selected
extensions?
• If yes, extend the common list you prepared by adding the features to be allowed to selected extensions.
Assign a CoS Group Number to this extended list.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1013
• You can prepare different CoS Groups for different Time Zones and assign a number to each group.
• For example, you may end up creating five different CoS groups. The First group may contain none of the
features. The Second group may contain the most common features like Call Forward, Call Transfer,
Internal Dialing, etc. The Third group may contain more advanced features, and the Fourth group may
contain even more advanced features. The Fifth group may contain all the features.
• When you are finished preparing the CoS groups you need, program the CoS groups using Jeeves or by
issuing SE commands from a Telephone (DKP or SLT). See below for instructions.
• Now, the CoS groups to be assigned to extensions must be programmed in the Station Basic Feature
Template applied to the extensions. This can be done using Jeeves or by issuing SE commands from a
Telephone (DKP or SLT). See below for instructions.
Enabling a feature in a CoS Group using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the link 'Class of Service (CoS)'.
• The default CoS groups from 01 to 20 appear. The check boxes selected under each CoS group column
indicate that the feature is enabled in that CoS group. The default CoS groups meet the requirements of
most extension users. Check the default CoS groups whether the features you want to allow are enabled
and features you want to deny are disabled.
1014 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• To enable a feature in a CoS group, select corresponding check box in the CoS group. To disable a
feature simply clear the check box. For example: to enable DND-Override in CoS group 01, select the
check box against DND-Override in CoS group 01. To disable clear the check box again.
• Click 'Submit' to save changes.
Enabling a feature in a CoS Group using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To enable a feature in a CoS group, dial:
• 1302-1-CoS Group-Feature Number-Code to enable a feature in a single CoS group.
• 1302-2-CoS Group-CoS Group-Feature Number-Code to enable the same feature in a range of CoS
groups.
• 1302-*-Feature Number-Code to enable the same feature in all CoS groups.
Where,
CoS Group from 01 to 20.
Feature Number from 01 to 53. Refer the Table “Default CoS Groups” for Feature Numbers.
Code is
1 for Enable
0 for Disable
To default a CoS group, dial:
• 1301-1-CoS Group to default a single CoS group.
• 1301-2-CoS Group-CoS Group to default a range of CoS groups.
• 1301-* to default all CoS groups.
Where,
CoS Group is from 01 to 20.
• Exit SE mode.
Assigning a CoS group in a Station Basic Feature Template using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer, if not already logged in.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode, if not already done.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1015
• Click the link 'Station Basic Feature Template'.
• The default CoS group assigned to each time zone, i.e. working hour (WH), non-working hour (NH) and
break hour (BH), appears under Class of Service in each Template.
• To assign a CoS group to a Station Basic Feature Template, enter the CoS group number for each time
zone under Class of Service.
• Click 'Submit' to save changes.
By default, Station Basic Feature Template 01 is applied on all stations and CoS group 01 is the assigned
by default to this template in all time zones.
If all stations to be allowed the same set of features during working hours, break hours, non-working hours,
enter the same CoS group number in all time zones in the Template Number applied to all stations. For
1016 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
example: to assign CoS group 04 to all time zones in Template Number 01; enter 04 under WH, NH and
BH.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1017
If all stations are to be allowed a different set of features in each Time Zone, enter the CoS group for each
Time Zone. For example: to assign CoS group 03 in working hours, 04 in Break Hours and 05 in Non-
Working hours in Template 01, enter 03, 04, 05 under WH, BH and NH respectively.
• If a set of features is to be allowed to select stations only, assign the CoS group with these features
enabled to a separate Station Basic Feature Template. Apply this template to the select stations which are
to be allowed this CoS.
For example: To assign all features to extensions, create a CoS group with all features enabled, CoS
group 07. Select a different Station Basic Feature Template, for example 05. Enter CoS Group 07 in all
1018 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Time Zones in Template 05. Apply Template 05 to the software ports of the extensions that are to be
assigned all features.
• Remember to click 'Submit' to save the changes you make on every page.
Assigning CoS group to Station Basic Feature Template using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To assign CoS group to a template, dial:
• 5502-1-Template Number-Feature Number-Code
Where,
Template Number is Station Basic Feature Template Number, from 01 to 50.
Feature Number is
03 for CoS group for Working Hours
04 for CoS group for Break Hours
05 for CoS group for Non-Working Hours
Code is CoS group number from 01 to 20.
For Example: To program CoS group 04 in Station Basic Feature Template Number 06 for all Time
Zones, dial:
• 5502-1-06-03-04 to program CoS group 04 for Working Hours.
• 5502-1-06-04-04 to program CoS group 04 for Break Hours.
• 5502-1-06-05-04 to program CoS group 04 for Non-Working Hours.
Similarly, to program CoS Group 03 in working hours, 04 in Break Hours and 05 in Non-Working hours,
dial:
• 5502-1-06-03-03 to program CoS group 03 for Working Hours.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1019
• 5502-1-06-04-04 to program CoS group 04 for Break Hours.
• 5502-1-06-05-05 to program CoS group 05 for Non-Working Hours.
• Exit SE mode.
After you have programmed the CoS group in the Station Basic Feature Template, you must assign this
template to the stations. Refer the topic “Station Basic Feature Template” for instructions on applying
templates on SLT, DKP, ISDN Terminal and SIP extensions.
Finally, test the CoS programmed for each extension by invoking the features from each extension.
1020 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
CLI Based Routing
What is this?
ETERNITY offers the facility to detect the calling party's number and name. This is known as Calling Line
Identification.
On the basis of CLI, it is possible to land calls from a particular telephone number on a particular extension or group
of extensions. This is known as CLI Based Routing.
How it works
A, B, C are extensions. D and E are external callers.
Calls made by D are to be landed on A
Calls made by E are to be landed on B and C.
The CLI of D and E and their corresponding landing destinations should be entered in the CLI Based Routing
Table.
• D calls on a trunk of ETERNITY.
• The system checks the numbers stored in the CLI Based Routing table.
• D's number is found in the CLI Based Routing Table.
• The system checks the destination number stored against D's CLI.
• A's number is found as the destination extension.
• The system lands the call on A.
If D's number does not exist in the CLI Based Routing Table, the call will be routed according to the incoming
call management logic.
How to configure
For this feature to work, you must enter the numbers of the calling parties and the numbers of the corresponding
destination extensions in the CLI Based Routing Table. You can store up to 400 numbers in the CLI Routing Table.
Creating CLI Routing Table
On a sheet of paper, create a 5-column table, as illustrated below. Each calling party number in the CLI table is
stored a location index in the system. Enter the telephone numbers and names of the calling parties and the
corresponding landing destinations, i.e. the Port Type and Port Number. The Port Type may be SLT, DKP, ISDN
Terminal, SIP Extension or a Routing Group. Port Number is the number of the software port to which the landing
destination extension is connected.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1021
The 'Name' field is for identifying the entry. When placing a call on the destination extensions, both the number and
the 'Name' are presented in the CLI.
CLI Based Routing Table
Index Telephone Number Name Port Type Port Number
001 2640459 MidasBiz Routing Group 02
002 022281110001 Jet Set SLT 004
: :
010 2640075 Bacchus Routing Group 03
Configuring CLI Based Routing using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the link CLI Based Routing to open the page.
• Each number is to be stored at a Location Index numbered from 001 to 400.
1022 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
There are 100 entries on each page. To go to the next 100 Index numbers, click the tabs 101-200, 201-
300, 301-400.
• At each Location Index, enter the information for the following parameters:
• Number: enter the number of the calling party, not exceeding 16 digits. You can also enter '+' in the
number string.
• Name: enter the name of the calling party. You can enter a maximum of 8 characters in this field.
• Port Type: select the landing destination extension. It may be an SLT, a DKP, an ISDN Terminal, SIP
extension, or a Routing Group.
• Port Number: enter the software port to which the landing destination SLT/DKP/ISDN Terminal/SIP
Extension is connected. If you have selected a Routing Group as the landing destination, enter the
number of the Routing Group (01 to 96) in this field.
• Click Submit to save entries.
Configuring CLI Based Routing Table using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To add the calling party telephone number in the CLI Based Routing table, dial:
• 4101-Index-Telephone Number-#*
Where,
Index is from 001 to 400.
Telephone Number is the calling party's telephone number (Max. 16 digits).
Terminate the command with #*, if the number is less than 16 digits.
To enter '+' in the number string, dial #8
For Example: to enter 2640459 at Index Location 001, dial 4101-001-2640459-#*
To clear a telephone number from the CLI Based Routing table, dial:
• 4101-Index-#*
To enter the name of the calling party corresponding to the calling party's telephone number, dial:
• 4102-Index-Name-#*
Where, Index is from 001 to 400.
Name can be a maximum of 8 characters.
Terminate the name with #*, if less than 8 characters.
For Example: to enter the name Midas Biz for the number 2640459 at Index Location 001, dial 4102-
001-MidasBiz
To clear the name stored at a location index in the CLI table, dial:
• 4102-Index-#*
To assign the landing destination extension in the CLI table, dial:
• 4103-Index-Port Type-Port Number
Where,
Index is from 001 to 400.
Port Type is
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1023
00 for Null
01 for SLT
02 for DKP
20 for Routing Group
28 for ISDN Terminal
34 for SIP Extension
Port Number is Software Port number of SLT/DKP/ISDN Terminal/SIP Extension.
Port Number of SLT is from 001 - 512.
Port Number of DKP is from 001 to 128.
Port Number of ISDN Terminal is 01 to 64.
Port Number of Routing Group is from 01 to 96.
Port Number of SIP Extension is from 001 to 999.
For Example: to assign an SLT connected at Software Port number 004 as the landing destination for
calls from Midas Biz 2640459, dial 4103-001-01-004
To clear a location index in the CLI Based Routing table, dial:
• 4104-1-Index to clear a single location Index.
• 4104-2-Index-Index to clear a range of location Index.
• 4104-* to clear all location Indices.
Where,
Index is from 001 to 400.
By using these commands, the telephone number, name and the Port type-Port number will be cleared
from the location index.
• Exit SE mode.
1024 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Clock Synchronization
What's this?
When data is transmitted from the ETERNITY to external lines or when ETERNITY receives data from the external
lines, it is necessary that the transmitter and receiver be properly synchronized. If not clock slips can occur. A clock
slip can generate a loss or addition of data to the data stream.
How it works
• This can be done in three ways viz. using the data clock or using the external clock (clock is sent by the
network on a dedicated cable pair) or using the internal clock. ETERNITY does not support external clock.
When the ETERNITY is connected to the PSTN, then it is recommended to extract the clock from the
incoming data whereas if the ETERNITY is used to form a private network, you are recommended to use
the internal clock. For example, if a private network is formed by connecting three ETERNITY systems,
then one system should be programmed as master clock whereas other two should be programmed in the
slave mode.
• If two or more T1E1 Ports are connected to the PSTN (or a Private Network) then in such case, clock will
be extracted from the first T1E1 Software port whereas the transmit data on all other ports whether
connected to PSTN or private network will be clocked as per received.
How to configure
Clock Source for 'Master Clock Synchronization'
The ETERNITY supports 4 clock sources which can be programmed for the specific port.
Use the following command to configure the clock sources:
5341-Clock Source Index-Port Type-Port Offset
Where,
Port Offset is 01 to 32.
Clock Source Index is from 1 to 4.
Port Type Meaning Port Offset
05 T1E1 1-8
04 BRI 01-32
00 Null 000
0 is a valid port to follow internal clock.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1025
Default Table for the clock source, programmed in the system
Clock Source Index Port Type-Port Offset
1 T1E1-1
2 T1E1-2
3 T1E1-3
4 T1E1-4
The system checks this table for a master lock. If none of the ports is synchronized out of this table, the system
gives priority to the internal clock. If any one port is synchronized, the system selects that port as a system clock
master. Here index is given priority, that is, if the second port of this table is selected as clock master and suddenly
first port is synchronized, then the system changes its master from 2nd port to first port. Now if first port has lost its
synchronization then in this case again, the second port is selected as master clock of the system.
System Clock Synchronization
Use following command to select 'System Clock Synchronization':
5342-System Clock Synchronization
Where,
System Clock Synchronization is from 1 to 4.
System Clock Synchronization Meaning
1 8 KHz Derived
2 8 KHz
3 2.048 MHz
4 1.54 MHz
By Default, 'System Clock Synchronization' is 2.048 MHz for India and other countries except USA.
For USA, default 'System Clock Synchronization' is 1.54 MHz.
• This command is applicable only for 'ETERNITY GE', when Software version/revision 'V8R6' is used.
• Selecting option 1('8 KHz Derived'): If you are using, the Software version/revision 'V8R6' onwards,
with CPLD version/revision 'V1R2 or earlier', the System Clock Synchronization will be done only at '8
KHz Derived' option, irrespective of the selected 'System Clock Synchronization' option. If you are
using the BRI/T1E1 card with CPLD version/revision 'V1R3 and onwards', the clock synchronization
option will work as you have programmed the option, using this command. To know the CPLD version/
revision, open the cover of T1E1 card of your system and check the label on the CPLD device or
contact your dealer for more information.
• Selecting option 2('8 KHz'): By default, Master Clock Synchronization port number is given as T1E1-1,
T1E1-2, T1E1-3 and T1E1-4. The options for Master clock synchronization allow selecting T1E1 or BRI
port or a combination thereof as required. If any BRI port is selected in Master Clock Synchronization
option (for any option from 1 to 4), SE should select the System Clock Synchronization option 2 = 8
KHz.
• Selecting option 3('2.048 MHz'): Select 'System Clock Synchronization' option 3 = 2.048 MHz, only for
E1 T1E1 line.
1026 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Selecting option 4('1.54 MHz'): Select 'System Clock Synchronization' option 4 = 1.54 MHz, only for T1
T1E1 line.
PLL Locking Mode
This parameter is used to select the suitable speed of the PLL locking in the system.
Use following command to select the 'PLL Locking Mode':
5343-PLL Locking Mode
Where,
PLL Locking Mode is from 1 to 2.
PLL Locking Mode Meaning
1 Fast
2 Slow
By default, PLL Locking Mode is 'Slow'.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1027
Closed User Group (CUG)
What’s this?
To have private networks, few PBXs can be connected to each other using E&M, T1/E1, QSIG, etc. The
requirement demands that the PBXs connected to each other forming the network behave as a single group.
The users need not dial a separate code to access a station user of other PBX. The entire network should
behave as a single unit. Users will not know whether they are dialing an extension number of their own PBX or
of the other PBX. This is called Closed User Group.
PBX-A PBX-B
T1 E&M1 T1
T2 T2
PSTN PSTN
E&M2 E&M3
Tn Tn
S1 S2 Sn S1 S2 Sn
2001 2002 2003 3001 3002 3003
PBX-C
S1 S2 Sn
4001 4002 4003
In the above figure, 3 PBX systems are connected through E&M connectivity.
• T1 to Tn are trunk lines from the local central office (CO).
• S1 to Sn are stations.
• E&M1 to E&M3 are E&M lines between the three PBX systems.
This feature requires a license. To use this feature you must purchase the license for the Business Feature
Suite. Refer the topic “License Management” to know more.
How it works
For Closed User Group, it is mandatory to have unique station number in all the systems i.e. one cannot have
station number 2001 in PBX-A as well as in PBX-B or PBX-C.
Few new words have been used to explain this application, each of these words have been explained below:
1028 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Routing Table: This table has five parameters viz. Route Index, Route Code, OG Trunk Bundle Group,
Strip Digit Count and Self Route flag. The closed user group programming works according to this table.
Route Index Route Code OGTBG Strip Digit Count Self Router Flag Max. Dialed Digits
001
002
003
250
• Route Index: Maximum 250 different routes (001-250) can be programmed.
• Route Code: Route code could be of maximum sixteen digits. Digits 0 to 9 are allowed. However, ‘*’ and
‘#’ are not allowed. Generally route code will be a truncated number of the station numbers. For example in
the figure given above, route code for PBX-B can be defined as ‘3’ and that for PBX-C can be defined as
‘4’.
If PBX-B were having station numbers from 3100 to 3199 and PBX-C were having station numbers from
3200 to 3299 then route code for PBX-B can be defined as ‘31’ and that for PBX-C can be defined as ‘32’.
If PBX-B were having station numbers from 301 to 399 and 401 to 499 then two route codes can be
defined for PBX-B viz. ‘3’ and ‘4’. Likewise for PBX-C.
• OG Trunk Bundle Group: An OG Trunk Bundle Group (OGTBG) is assigned to each route code.
Whenever a call is to be made on that route, a free trunk from the OGTBG is selected and the station
number is dialed on it. The same logic of Rotation On/Off for trunk selection from the OGTBG is used. If
rotation is OFF then always the first trunk in the OGTBG is selected. If it is busy then the next trunk in the
group is selected. This helps to select an alternate route. Whereas if Rotation is ON then the trunks in the
OGTBG are selected in round robin fashion.
• Strip Digit Count: It has no significance for Closed User Group application. But it has to be programmed
as 0.
• Self-Route Flag: It has no significance for Closed User Group application. But it has to be programmed as
0.
• Maximum dialed digits: When digits are dialed on the trunk, the system waits for inter digit timer after the
last digit is dialed. In order to avoid this timer and number of digits dialed to be routed without further delay,
count for the number of digits to be programmed in this field. If the number of digits received are equal to
the parameters programmed then the number is dialed out immediately without waiting for the inter digit
timer. If the number of digits dialed by the user are not equal to the digits programmed, the number is
dialed after inter digit timer.
The ETERNITY has only one routing table. The same table is used for Closed User Group and Close User
Group-With Exchange ID applications. Hence the table has to be programmed keeping the application in
mind.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1029
How to configure
The commands explained below should be referred as:
To configure a single port: XXXX-1
To configure a range of ports: XXXX-2
To configure all the ports: XXXX-*
Step 1
Use following command to configure route code:
4502-1-Route Index-Route Code-#*
4502-2-Route Index-Route Index-Route Code-#*
4502-*-Route Code-#*
Where,
Route Index is from 001 to 250.
Route Code is a sixteen digits string of numbers.
Use following command to clear a particular route code:
4502-1-Route Index-#*
4502-2-Route Index-Route Index-#*
4502-*-#*
Where,
Route Index is from 001 to 250.
By default, Program Route Code is Blank.
Step 2
Use following command to assign OG Trunk Bundle Group to the route code:
4503-1-Route Index-OG Trunk Bundle Group
4503-2-Route Index-Route Index-OGTBG
4503-*-OG Trunk Bundle Group
Where,
Route Index is from 001 to 250.
OG Trunk Bundle Group is from 01 to 32.
By default, OG Trunk Bundle Group is 01.
Step 3
Use following command to configure strip digit count for a route:
4504-1-Route Index-Strip Digit Count
4504-2-Route Index-Route Index-Strip Digit Count
4504-*-Strip Digit Count
Where,
Router Index is from 001 to 250.
Strip Digit Count is from 0 to 9.
By default, Strip Digit Count is 0.
Step 4
Use following command to configure self-route flag for a route:
4505-1-Route Index-Code
4505-2-Route Index-Route Index-Code
4505-*-Code
Where,
1030 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Route Index is from 001 to 250.
Code Meaning
0 Disable Self-route Flag
1 Enable Self-route Flag
By default, Self-route flag is disabled.
Step 5
Use following command to configure maximum dialed digits to select router for a route code:
4506-1-Route Index-Maximum Dialed Digits
4506-2-Route Index-Route Index-Maximum Dialed Digits
4506-*-Maximum Dialed Digits
Where,
Route Index is from 001 to 250.
Maximum dialed digits is from 00 to 99.
Step 6
Use following command to clear an entry in a routing table:
4501-1-Route Index
4501-2-Route Index-Route Index
4501-*
Where,
Route Index is from 001 to 250.
ETERNITY offers few features associated with closed user group. Each of these are discussed below:
Alternate Route:
• This feature provides flexibility of accessing a station of other exchange through alternate routes if the
normally used route (the shortest route) is not free. To achieve this, the trunks that offer shortest routes
should be programmed first in the OGTBG followed by the trunks that provide alternate routes. Also the
rotation within the OGTBG should be OFF. In figure the requirement is that if E&M1 is busy then E&M2
should be used to call 3001 from PBX-A. In this case a OGTBG is to be so formed that it has E&M1 as
first trunk and E&M2 as second trunk and should be assigned to route code ‘3’. However, the rotation
within the OGTBG should be disabled. Similarly, if the call is to be made to 4001 then E&M2 should be
used. Hence another OGTBG should be programmed with E&M2 as first trunk and E&M1 as second
trunk and it should be assigned to route code ‘4’. Also the round robin option for the OGTBG should be
selected.
Transit Barring:
• This feature helps to bar the Transit calls through the exchange. Consider figure 1. It is required that a
station user in PBX-A can access station 3001 using alternate route through PBX-C but a station user
in PBX-B cannot access stations 2001 to 2010 using alternate route through PBX-C. This can be
accomplished using Transit Barring. To achieve this, a denied list containing 10 numbers viz. 2001 to
2010 should be assigned as Toll Control for the SLT port programmed for the E&M2. Doing so when a
station user from PBX-B dials 2001, if E&M1 is busy, the system would try dialing through E&M2 but
since E&M2 does not have requisite toll control, it will give error tone to station user. Transit Barring
adds value to the Alternate Route by allowing a selective access to the station with alternate route.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1031
• Each system in the network has a routing table. By default, the routing is blank and hence E&M works
as per normal E&M connectivity. After programming the routing table as per the requirement, when the
user dials a station number, the system first searches for the dialed number in the same system by
considering Self Route flag. If it is not available in its own system, it checks for it in the routing table,
finds the best fit, selects a free E&M path and reaches the dialed port.
• Please refer figure 1. When a station in PBX-A dials a station number 3001, the system searches for
this number in PBX-A. Since there is no station with flexible number 3001 in PBX-A, the system
checks the E&M routing table. The system follows the routing table, identifies that the dialed number is
in PBX-B, selects a free E&M path and reaches the dialed port.
• As shown in figure 1, the shortest path to reach station 3001 from PBX-A is through E&M1. But if E&M1
is busy then the network can be programmed to reach station 3001 through E&M2 and E&M3. For this
both PBX-A and PBX-B have to be programmed to accomplish this.
Forced Call Disconnection:
• Please refer “Forced Call Disconnection” for more details.
Relevant Topics:
1. “E&M Connectivity” 1203
2. “Forced Call Disconnection” 1234
3. “Closed User Group-With Exchange ID” 1033
4. “OG Trunk Bundle Group” 1352
1032 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Closed User Group-With Exchange ID
What’s this?
• To have private networks, few PBXs can be connected to each other using E&M, T1/E1, QSIG, etc. The
requirement demands that the PBXs connected to each other forming the network behave as a single
group. The users need not dial a separate code to access a station user of other PBX. The entire network
should behave as a single unit. The extension users will not know whether they are dialing an extension
number of their own PBX or other PBX. This is called Closed User Group. However, it is possible that the
PBXs connected to form a network may have same station numbers. Also, all the exchanges within the
network may have their own identity (called Exchange ID). In such cases, the routing scheme (the routing
table) has to be programmed keeping the Exchange ID (EID) in mind. This is known as Closed User
Group-With Exchange ID.
• This facility is generally used in PLCC Applications wherein new power stations (and hence PBXs) are
added in the network. It is not feasible to have unique station numbers throughout the network. In such
cases, an Exchange ID is assigned to the newly added PBX and a routing table is programmed in the
exchange. Also, the routing tables of other exchanges are modified to include the newly added exchange
in the network.
Figure 1: Open User Group Application
In the below figure, 3 PBX systems are connected through E&M connectivity.
• T1 to Tn are trunk lines from the local central office (CO).
• S1 to Sn are stations.
• E&M1 to E&M3 are E&M lines between the three PBX.
PBX-A PBX-B
T1 21 E&M1
22 T1
T2 T2
PSTN PSTN
E&M2 E&M3
Tn Tn
S1 S2 Sn S1 S2 Sn
2001 2002 2099 2001 2002 2099
PBX-C 23
S1 S2 Sn
2001 2002 2099
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1033
How it works
• In this application, it is possible to have same station number in two or more PBXs of the network. Few
new words have been used to explain Closed User Group-With Exchange ID application, each of these
words have been explained above.
• Routing Table: This table has five parameters viz. Route Index, Route Code, OG Trunk Bundle Group,
Strip Digit Count and Self Route flag. The Closed User Group-With Exchange ID programming works
according to this table.
Route Index Route Code OGTBG Strip Digit Count Self Router Flag Max. Dialed Digits
001
250
• Route Index: Maximum 250 different routes (001-250) can be programmed.
• Route Code: Route code could be of maximum six digits (XXXXXX). Digits 0 to 9 are allowed. Generally,
route code will be a unique number. The route code should not clash with any of the station numbers of
same PBX. For example in the figure given above, route code for PBX-A can be defined as ‘21’, route code
for PBX-B can be defined as ‘22’ and that for PBX-C can be defined as ‘23’. This means that no station in
PBX-A can start with ‘22’ or ‘23’. Similarly, no station in PBX-B can start with ‘21’ or ‘23’ and no station in
PBX-C start with ‘21’ and ‘22’.
• OG Trunk Bundle Group: An OG Trunk Bundle Group (OGTBG) is assigned to each route code.
Whenever a call is to be made on that route, a free trunk from the OGTBG is selected and the station
number is dialed on it. The same logic of rotation On/Off for trunk selection from the OGTBG is used. If
rotation is OFF then always the first trunk in the OGTBG is selected. If it is busy then the next trunk in the
group is selected. This helps to select an alternate route. Whereas if rotation is ON then the trunks in the
OGTBG are selected in round robin fashion.
• Strip Digit Count: This count signifies the number of digits to be stripped off while dialing/decoding a
number. To elaborate: Consider figure 1. The requirement is that if station 2001 of PBX-B dials 212002
and if E&M 1 is busy then the call should reach station 2002 of PBX-A through alternate route. In this case
the strip digit count of PBX-A should be programmed as 2 and that of PBX-B and PBX-C should be
programmed as 0. Doing so, when station 2001 of PBX-B dials 212002 and if E&M1 is busy then the call is
routed through PBX-C. In this case, PBX-B dials 212002 on E&M3, PBX-C receive this code and dials out
the same code i.e. 212002 on E&M2 without striping of any digit. On receiving 212002, PBX-A strips of two
digits as per the programming and routes the call to station 2002.
• Self-Route Flag: This flag signifies that the digits being dialed are for the same PBX and are not to be
dialed on the E&M trunk.
• Maximum dialed digits: When digits are dialed on the trunk, the system waits for inter digit timer after the
last digit is dialed. In order to avoid this timer and number of digits dialed to be routed without further delay,
count for the number of digits to be programmed in this field. If the number of digits received are equal to
the parameters programmed then the number is dialed out immediately without waiting for the inter digit
timer. If the number of digits dialed by the user are not equal to the digits programmed, the number is
dialed after inter digit timer.
1034 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Please note that the ETERNITY has only one routing table. The same table is used for Closed User Group
and Closed User Group-With Exchange ID. Hence the table has to be programmed keeping the
application in mind.
How to configure
Please refer topic “Closed User Group (CUG)” for more details.
ETERNITY offers few features associated with Closed User Group-With Exchange ID. Each of these are
discussed below:
Alternate Route
Please refer “Closed User Group (CUG)” for more details.
Transit Barring
Please refer “Closed User Group (CUG)” for more details.
Strip Digit Count is of significance in a network in which few exchanges possess Exchange ID whereas
others do not. Refer figure 2. PBX-A and PBX-B are made to work as Closed User Group since they have
unique stations. But since PBX-C possess stations whose flexible number clashes with stations in PBX-A,
it cannot be made a part of Closed User Group. In such case Closed User Group-with Exchange ID can be
used with the combination of PBX-A + PBX-B and PBX-C forming the network.
In this case, if 2001 of PBX-A wants to access 3001 through E&M1, he must dial 3001. But if E&M1 is busy
then system will allot him E&M2 and since there would not be any programming done, it will give error
tone to the caller. To avoid this condition, the station user of PBX-A should be asked to call 3001 by dialing
223001. For this, the strip digit count for the route index with route code ‘22’ in the routing table of PBX-B
should be programmed as ‘2’ and the strip digit count for the route index with route code ‘22’ in the routing
table of PBX-C should be programmed as ‘0’. Doing so, if the call to 3001 is made through E&M1, then
PBX-B would strip of the first two digits on receiving 223001 and make the caller reach 3001. If the call to
3001 is routed through E&M2, the PBX-C will not strip of any digit and would dial out 223001 on E&M3. On
receiving 223001, PBX-B as per the programming would strip of 22 and make the call land on 3001.
Strip Digit Count is also of importance in following case:
For example in figure 1, if station 2001 of PBX-A dials 212002 then also the call should go to 2002 of PBX-
A only. To accomplish this, the strip digit count should be programmed as ‘2’ and Self Route flag should be
enabled. Doing so when 2001 dials 212002, the system strips off first two digits and checks for the
remaining digits, which in this case would be 2002 and thereby the user reaches 2002 of the same PBX.
Forced Call Disconnection
Please refer “Forced Call Disconnection” for more details.
Prefix String Feature:
• This feature is programmed only for few Exchanges like ET1, Genesis, or BPL which does not send ‘0’
when user dials a number to call an extension number of the exchange. For other Exchanges like ‘ET2’ it
is not required to be programmed as it sends ‘0’ also if it is dialed.
• Maximum of 4-characters can be programmed as ‘Prefix String’.
•‘Prefix String’ is a string of characters which is prefixed to the string, dialed by the user and then CUG
Routing-Table is applied.
Example:
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1035
Detailed application for ‘Prefix String’ feature is explained by following steps:
• If this feature is not programmed for Exchange of type: ET1 or BPL, and ‘Prefix String’ is blank, then, only
‘2223’ is dialed by the Exchange when ‘02223’ is dialed by the user, to call station ‘23’.
• Now when ‘2223’ reaches Exchange B, since there is no entry in the CUG table, the feature-extension
flexible number table is checked. Now since a match starting with ’22..’ is found, the call is routed to station
‘22’ instead of ‘23’, because station number ‘22’ is present on the Extension.
• To avoid this, an entry is made in the routing table containing ‘22’ as the route code with strip digit count
‘2’. But then since the system checks CUG Routing-table first, the first two digits out of ‘2223’ always get
striped off and the call is not routed to station ‘22’. i.e. the other stations of Exchange B will never be able
to call station ‘22’.
• To solve this problem ‘Prefix String’ feature is programmed in the E&M Feature Template with ‘0’ as prefix
string, so that ‘string with prefix’ (022) is matched with the entries of CUG Routing Table (as shown in
figure). When user dials ‘02223’, first 3-digits are stripped off and the required Extension ‘23’ can be
called.
• Please refer topic “E&M Feature Template” to configure this feature.
Relevant Topics:
1. “E&M Connectivity” 1203
2. “Forced Call Disconnection” 1234
3. “Closed User Group (CUG)” 1028
4. “OG Trunk Bundle Group” 1352
5. “E&M Feature Template” 565
1036 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
CO Call Waiting
What's this?
The CO Call Waiting feature gives indication to the user of a busy extension about the waiting call on a Trunk.
This is a “Class of Service (COS)” dependent feature. Only those extensions which have this feature enabled in the
COS allowed to them, will be given indication of the incoming call waiting on the trunk.
How it works
• A and B are extensions.
• CO Call Waiting feature is enabled in the Class of Service of B but not on A.
• There is an incoming call on a trunk for B.
• B is busy on a call with A.
• ETERNITY plays Beeps to B to indicate the call waiting.
• To answer the waiting call, B may dial Flash or press the HOLD key.
• B will be connected to the caller.
• A will be put on hold.
• When there is an incoming call on a trunk for A, but A is busy on another call, A will not be provided any
indication of the waiting call.
How to configure
For CO Call Waiting to work on an extension, it must be enabled in the Class of Service allowed to that extension.
This can be done using Jeeves as well as a Telephone.
In the default factory settings, Station Basic Feature Template Number 01 is assigned to all the extensions of
ETERNITY. Template 01 is assigned CoS group 01. CO Call Waiting is disabled in the CoS. So, none of the
extensions of ETERNITY are provided call waiting indication for incoming trunk calls.
If you want to allow CO Call Waiting uniformly to all extensions of ETERNITY, simply enable this feature in the
default CoS group (01) in the default Template (01).
However, if you want to allow this feature to only selected extensions,
1. Define a CoS group with CO Call Waiting enabled.
2. Prepare a Station Basic Feature Template with this CoS group applicable in all the “Time Zones”.
3. Assign this new Template to the extensions to which CO Call Waiting is to be allowed.
Refer the topics “Class of Service (COS)” and “Station Basic Feature Template” for programming instructions.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1037
Communication Ports
What' this?
ETERNITY supports serial, asynchronous, RS232C Communication Ports.
The ETERNITY ME supports two communication ports, COM1 and COM2.
ETERNITY GE supports a single communication port.
ETERNITY PE6SP and PE3SP support a single communication port each. There is no communication port on
ETERNITY PE3SS.
A Communication Port is used for the following facilities:
• Programming ETERNITY using a PC
• PMS Interface (see ETERNITY Hospitality System Manual)
• SMDR Reports
• SMDR Online
• SMDR Posting
• System Activity Log
• System Fault Log
• Hotel-Motel Activity Log (see ETERNITY Hospitality System Manual)
A Communication Port is necessary for Programming ETERNITY using a PC, whereas for other above listed
facilities, Communication Port may or may not be used150.
How to configure
In order for each of the above listed facilities to work, a Communication Port must be assigned first as the
'Destination Port' and the attributes of the Communication Port of ETERNITY and the Communication Port of the
PC to which it is connected must programmed to match.
Communication Port as Destination Port
Communication port can be assigned as Destination Port using Jeeves as well as by dialing SE commands from a
Telephone. For instructions, refer the individual topics:
• PMS Interface
• “Configuring using Serial COM Port”
• “Station Message Detail Recording-Report”
• “Station Message Detail Recording-Online”
• “Station Message Detail Recording-Posting”
• “System Activity Log”
• “System Fault Log”
150. PMS can be interfaced on the Ethernet Port. For System Activity and Fault Logs, SMDR Reports and Online Printer Port can be
used. For SMDR-Posting Ethernet Port can be used.
1038 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Communication Port Attributes
The functioning of the Communication Port is controlled by the following attributes:
• Speed in bps.
• Number of data bits.
• Number of stop bits.
• Parity
• Flow Control
• DSR Sensing
These attributes must be programmed keeping in mind the application for which the communication port is used
(for instance, Programming through PC, generating SMDR Reports, etc.)
When DSR Sensing is enabled, the system continuously monitors the physical connection between the
ports. Whenever the physical connection is detected to be inactive, the system stops data transfer. If DSR
Sensing is disabled, the physical connection between the ports is not monitored. Hence, even when the
physical connection is inactive, data transfer continues, and this data is lost.
The Communication Port attributes can be changed using Jeeves and dialing SE commands from a telephone.
Changing the Communication Port attributes using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click 'Communication Ports' to open the page.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1039
• Set the desired values for COM Port 1 and COM Port 2:
• Speed (spd)
• Data Bits
• Parity
• Stop Bits
• Flow Control
• DSR Sensing
• Click 'Submit' to save changes.
Changing Communication Port attributes using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To set Data Transfer rate for a COM Port, dial:
• 3201-Port-Speed
Where,
Port is
1 for COM Port 1
2 for COM Port 2
If your system is ETERNITY GE/PE, dial '1' for COM Port.
Speed is
0 for 1200 bps
1 for 2400 bps
2 for 4800 bps
3 for 9600 bps
4 for 19200 bps
5 for 38400 bps
6 for 57600 bps
7 for 115200 bps
By default, Data Transfer Speed151 is 115200 bps.
To set Data Bits for a COM Port, dial:
• 3202-Port-Data Bits
Where,
Port is
1 for COM Port 1
2 for COM Port 2
For ETERNITY GE/PE, dial '1' for COM Port.
Data Bits are
0 for 7 data bits
1 for 8 data bits
By default, Data Bits are 8.
151. Please note that maximum speed of the Communication port allowed in two-way communication like programming through com-
puter, programming through the Jeeves is 2400 bps only.
1040 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To set Parity for a COM Port, dial:
• 3203-Port-Parity
Where,
Port is
1 for COM Port 1
2 for COM Port 2
For ETERNITY GE/PE, dial '1' for COM Port.
Parity is
0 for None
1 for Odd
2 for Even
3 for Mark
4 for Space
By default, Parity is set as 'None'.
To set Stop Bits for a COM Port, dial:
• 3204-Port-Stop Bits
Where,
Port is
1 for COM Port 1
2 for COM Port 2
For ETERNITY GE/PE, dial '1' for COM Port.
Stop Bits are
0 for 1 stop bit
1 for 2 stop bit
By default, Stop Bits are 1.
To set Flow Control for a COM Port, dial:
• 3205-Port-Flow Control
Where,
Port is
1 for COM Port 1
2 for COM Port 2
For ETERNITY GE/PE, dial '1' for COM Port.
Flow Control is from 0 to 2
0 for None
1 for Hardware (RTS/CTS)
2 for Software (XON/XOFF)
By default, Flow Control is 'None'.
To enable DSR Sensing on a COM Port, dial:
• 3206-Port-DSR Sensing
Where,
Port is
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1041
1 for COM Port 1
2 for COM Port 2
For ETERNITY GE/PE, dial '1' for COM Port.
DSR Sensing
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
By default, DSR Sensing is disabled.
To assign default parameters to a COM Port, dial:
• 3210-Port
Where,
Port is
1 for COM Port 1
2 for COM Port 2
For ETERNITY GE/PE, dial '1' for COM Port.
• Exit SE Mode.
Example 1: Configure COM1 parameters with these values:
• Speed = 9600 bps.
• Data Bits = 8 bits.
• Parity = None.
• Stop Bits = 1.
• Flow Control = None.
• DSR Sensing = Enable
To do this, dial the following SE commands:
3201-1-3
3202-1-1
3203-1-0
3204-1-0
3205-1-0
3206-1-1
Example 2: Configure COM2 parameters with these values:
• Speed = 2400 bps.
• Data Bits = 7 bits.
• Parity = Even.
• Stop Bits = 2.
• Flow Control = Hardware (RTS/CTS).
• DSR Sensing = Enable
To do this, dial the following SE commands:
3201-2-1
3202-2-0
1042 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
3203-2-2
3204-2-1
3205-2-1
3206-1-1
For connecting ETERNITY to a Computer/programming ETERNITY through a computer set the
Communication Port parameters to the following values (recommended):
Speed = 9600 bps.
Data Bits = 8.
Parity = None.
Stop Bits = 1.
Flow Control = None.
How to use
For ETERNITY to communicate with a PC through the Communication Ports (COM1 and COM2), it must be
connected with the Communication Port of the PC.
Connecting ETERNITY with a Computer over COM Port
To connect the ETERNITY with a PC over Communication Port, use the communication cable supplied by
Matrix152. This communication cable is provided with DB-9 female connectors on both ends.
You may connect any end to the ETERNITY and the other end to the PC.
If the PC supports only USB connectivity, use a USB-to-DB-9 converter of any standard make.
Refer the following Table for pin-out details of the COM Port.
Pin No. Signal Name
1 Data Carrier Detect (DTD)
2 Receive Data (RXD)
3 Transmit Data (TXD)
4 Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
5 Ground (GND)
6 Data Set Ready (DSR)
7 Request To Send (RTS)
8 Clear To Send (CTS)
9 Ring Indicator (IR)
152. This cable is supplied as an optional item. Contact your Matrix Dealer or the company to obtain this cable.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1043
Conference Dial-In
What’s this?
In a Dial-In, users can schedule a conference by dialing a conference number and a password and inform other
participants about the conference. The other participants can dial in to the on-going conference call to join the
conference.
Extension users can also schedule and join a Dial-In Conference from a remote location using “Direct Inward
Dialing (DID)”.
Conference Dial-In is useful for businesses to conduct client meetings or sales presentations, project meetings and
updates, regular team meetings, and communication to coworkers who operate in different locations. Besides
increased convenience, this feature allows workers to be more productive by saving time and cost of travel for out-
of-office meetings.
The number of simultaneous Dial-In Conferences supported by ETERNITY varies by model.
Number of
Maximum number of Parties in a
Model Simultaneous Dial-In
single Dial-In Conference
Conferences supported
ETERNITY ME 7 21
ETERNITY GE 5 15
ETERNITY PE 6S 5 15
ETERNITY PE 3SS, PE 3SP 2 6
How it works
A, B and C are extension users. C is at a remote location.
D, E and F are external callers.
Scheduling a Dial-In Conference
• A schedules a Dial-In Conference for 4.30 pm.
• A dials the code for scheduling the conference, the conference number and the password.
• The Conference Number is a single digit: 1 to 7.
The Conference Number must correspond with the number of simultaneous Dial-In Conferences
supported by the model of ETERNITY in use. For example, ETERNITY ME supports 7 Dial-In
Conference, so the, Conference number to the dialed by its users would be from 1 to 7. Similarly, the
ETERNITY PE 6S supports 5 simultaneous Dial-In Conferences, so the Conference number to the
dialed by its users would be from 1 to 5. The ETERNITY PE 3S/SP supports only 2 simultaneous Dial-
In conferences, so the Conference Number to be dialed by its users should be either 1 or 2. If a user
dials a conference number other than this, system will play an Error Tone.
1044 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• The Conference Password is a four digit number string. The conference password cannot be 1111.
• A informs B, C, D, E and F about the conference and provides them conference number, for example, '1'
and the password, '4040'.
• If C wants to schedule a conference, C must log into his extension from DISA mode.
Initiating and Joining a Dial-In Conference
Only extension users can initiate or join a conference.
External participants must be included in the conference by extension users.
• At the scheduled time, 4.30 pm, A initiates the conference by dialing the conference number and the
password, for instance: '1' and '4040'.
• B joins the conference by dialing the conference number and password.
• C joins the conference from DISA mode.
• The conference starts.
• When a new party joins the conference, the system plays beeps to the existing users, to inform them of
the new inclusion.
• Beeps are programmable. You can disable or enable beeps during conference.
Including a Party in an on-going Dial-In Conference
Any extension user in a Dial-In Conference can include any other extension user or external party in the conference
by dialing the Conference Include feature code.
• A, B or C can include external parties D, E and F in the conference
Removing a Participant from an on-going Dial-In Conference
Any participant, who has a DKP or Extended IP Phone can remove another participant from the Dial-In conference.
Withdrawing from a Dial-In Conference
• Participants in a conference can exclude themselves by dialing a feature code.
• If the conference has been initiated from the DISA mode, the caller (remote user) must dial the code for
withdrawing from the conference.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1045
• If a participant goes ON-Hook, without dialing the feature code for withdrawing from a Multi-party
Conference, the participant will be included in the conference again, when the participant dials the
Conference Inclusion feature code (191). To avoid this, participants must dial the feature code for
Withdrawing from conference.
• If all participants of a Dial-In Conference have withdrawn from the conference, one-by-one, but none of
them have dialed the feature command to terminate the conference (190), the system will start the
'Release Conference if idle for more than (Minutes) Timer'. This Timer is programmable, and by default
it is set to 002 Minutes. On the expiry of this Timer, the system will free the resource occupied by the
conference on the conferencing circuit. However, any participant can join the conference before the
Conference Release Timer expires.
Canceling a Conference
If any of the extension users A, B or C wants to cancel the conference, they can do so by dialing the appropriate
feature code 190, the Conference Number and the Conference Password.
When an extension user cancels a conference, the system disconnects all the participants from the
conference, but does not free the resource occupied by the conference. To free the resource occupied by
the conference, you must release the conference (see Releasing a Dial-In Conference).
Releasing a Dial-In Conference
A Dial-In Conference can be released by dialing the feature code196. On dialing this code, the system will free the
resource occupied by the conference in the conferencing circuit.
A Dial-In Conference can be canceled from SA mode also. This is useful when the participants forget the
password and cannot join the conference or cannot initiate the conference.
How to configure
To provide this feature to extensions,
• You must enable the feature 'Conference' in the“Class of Service (COS)” of the extensions in their “Station
Basic Feature Template”. By default, this feature is enabled on all extensions, so all extensions can use
this feature.
The feature 'Conference' in the Class of Service also includes 3-Party and Multi-party Conference.
Extensions that are denied 'Conference' in their Class of Service will not be allowed Dial-In as well as 3-
Party and Multi-party Conference.
• If desired, you may also change default value of the Release Conference if Idle for more than (min.) Timer.
See “System Timers and Counts”.
• If extension users are to be allowed to initiate or join the Conference from a remote location, “Direct Inward
System Access (DISA)” must be enabled on the trunk on which they call.
1046 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
How to use
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users
To Schedule a Dial-In Conference:
• Go OFF-Hook.
• Dial 194.
• Enter Conference Number on the prompt.
• Enter Conference Password on the prompt.
• You get confirmation tone and the message 'Conf <number> Scheduled' on your phone's display.
• Go ON-Hook.
• Call all participants and inform them of the time of the Dial-In conference, the Conference Number and
Password.
To initiate or join the Dial-In Conference:
• Go OFF-Hook.
• Dial 195.
• Enter the Conference Number on the prompt.
• Enter the Conference Password on the prompt. If you enter the wrong password, you get the message
'Check Conf P/w' on your phone's display.
• Conference is initiated.
• You will hear speech if any other participant has joined it. You will hear silence if no other participant has
joined it.
• If you hear silence, wait for others to join in.
OR
• Include the other participants in the conference, if you initiated the conference.
To include a party in the conference:
• After initiating the conference or while you are all in speech, go ON-Hook.
• Go OFF-Hook.
• You get dial tone.
• Dial the desired number to be included in the conference. You get Ring Back Tone.
• When you are in speech with the party, dial Hold-191. You get confirmation tone. The party is included in
the conference.
• Dial 191 again. You are included in the conference.
To remove a participant from the conference:
• While you are all in speech, go ON-Hook.
• Go OFF-Hook.
• You get dial tone.
• Dial 192.
• The numbers of the participants appear on your phone's display.
• Scroll to select the participant you want to remove.
• Press 'Enter' key.
• You get confirmation tone. The extension user is now excluded from the conference.
To withdraw from a Dial-In Conference:
• Go ON-Hook.
• Go OFF-Hook.
• Dial 193
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1047
To cancel a Conference:
• While you are all in speech, go ON-Hook.
• Go OFF-Hook.
• Dial 190.
To release a Dial-In Conference:
• While you are all in speech, go ON-Hook.
• Go OFF-Hook, dial 196.
• Enter the Conference Number.
• Enter the Conference Password.
• You get confirmation, the conference is released.
To release a Dial-In Conference from the System Administrator (SA) Mode:
• Enter SA mode from a DKP/SLT/Extended IP Phone.
• Dial 1072-026-Conference Number-Conference Password.
• You get confirmation, the conference is released.
You can also release a Dial-In Conference from System Administrator (SA) Mode using Jeeves. To do this,
• Open Jeeves.
• Log in as System Administrator.
• Click the Dial-In Conference - Cancel link.
• Enter the conference number (1 to 7) which you want to cancel in the Cancel Dial-In Conference Number
field.
1048 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Click Submit button.
• Log out of Jeeves.
For Extension Users at a Remote Location
To schedule a Dial-In Conference from the remote location:
• Dial a DISA enabled Trunk
• Dial DISA Login Code 1079-Extension Number-User Password, if PIN Authentication is required.
• After DISA Login beeps, dial 194-Conference Number-Conference Password.
To initiate or join a Dial-In Conference:
• After DISA Login beeps, dial 195-Conference Number-Conference Password.
To go ON-Hook during Conference:
• Dial #0
To go OFF-Hook during Conference:
• Dial #1
To include a party midway of the Conference:
• Dial #0 to go ON-Hook.
• Dial #1 to go OFF-Hook.
• You get dial tone.
• Dial the extension number to be included in the conference. You get Ring Back Tone.
• When you are in speech with the extension user, dial #2.
• You get feature tone, and the extension user is played music on hold.
• Dial 191-191. Both of you are now included in the conference.
To withdraw yourself from the Conference:
• Dial #0 to go ON-Hook.
• Dial 193 to withdraw from the conference.
• Dial #0#9 to end DISA session.
When you enter DISA mode, you get beeps, dial digits before the DISA Inactivity Timer elapses.
Never dial 'Flash' when in DISA mode, you will get disconnected.
Keep dialing any digit to continue the conference.
See “Direct Inward System Access (DISA)” to know more.
For SLT Users
The instructions are the same as for EON and Extended IP Phone users, except you will not get any confirmatory
or prompts as text messages on your phone.
• Lift the handset.
• You get dial tone.
To schedule a conference:
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1049
• Dial 194-Conference Number-Conference Password.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace Handset.
• Inform all intended participants about the time, conference number and password.
To initiate or join the conference:
• Dial 195-Conference Number-Conference Password.
• Talk, if you hear speech, or wait for others to join in.
OR
• Include any participant in the conference.
To include a participant in the conference:
• After initiating the conference, or when in speech,
• Go ON-Hook.
• Go OFF-Hook.
• Dial number of the participant.
• Talk.
• Dial Flash-191.
To withdraw from a Dial-In conference:
• Go ON-Hook.
• Go OFF-Hook.
• Dial 193
To cancel a conference:
• While you are all in speech, go ON-Hook.
• Go OFF-Hook.
• Dial 190.
To release a Dial-In conference:
• While you are all in speech, go ON-Hook.
• Go OFF-Hook, dial 196.
• Enter the Conference Number.
• Enter the Conference Password.
• You get confirmation, the conference is released.
1050 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Conference-3 Party
What's this?
ETERNITY offers three types of conference calls: Conference-3 Party, “Conference Dial-In”, and “Conference-
Multiparty”.
Conference-3 Party (also referred to as Three-Way Calling) is a telephone call, in which the calling party can have
two other persons participate in the call.
A 3-Party Conference is initiated by dialing the number of the first person one wishes to talk to. The first person is
informed about the conference and put on hold. The number of the second person one wishes to talk to is dialed.
When the second person answers, s/he is informed about the conference. Three-way speech is established by
pressing Flash-0.
An already connected two-way speech can be converted into a conference by adding a second person, without
disconnecting the call with the first person.
Thus, a 3-Party Conference may be planned or conducted on the spur of the moment.
A 3-Party Conference can be conducted with extensions of ETERNITY and between extensions and external
numbers.
It is also possible to conduct an Unsupervised 3-Party Conference, wherein the operator connects two trunks
through the system and withdraws from the three-way speech.
The maximum number of simultaneous 3-Party Conferences supported by each model/variant of ETERNITY are
mentioned in the table below.
Max. number of simultaneous 3-Party
Model
Conferences supported
ETERNITY ME 7
ETERNITY GE 5
ETERNITY PE6S 5
ETERNITY PE3SS and PE3SP 2
How it works
A, B, C are extensions.
D and E are external numbers.
3-Party Conference between extensions
• A is in speech with B.
• A and B want to include C in their conversation.
• A puts B on hold. A gets feature tone. B gets on-hold music.
• A dials C's extension number. A gets ring back tone.
• A is in speech with C. B cannot hear their conversation.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1051
• A dials Flash-0 to enable three-way speech.
• A, B, and C are now in speech.
• Any of them can disconnect to withdraw from the conference.
• If C disconnects, A and B will be in two-way speech.
• A and B can carry on the conversation or can have a conference with another trunk (external number) or
with another extension.
3-Party Conference between two extensions and a trunk
• A is in speech with B.
• A and B want to include D in their conversation.
• A puts B on hold. A gets feature tone. B gets on-hold music.
• A grabs a Trunk and dials D's extension number. A gets ring back tone.
• A is in speech with D. B cannot hear their conversation.
• A dials Flash-0 to enable three-way speech.
• A, B, and D are now in speech.
• Any of them can disconnect to withdraw from the conference.
• If B disconnects, A and D will be in two-way speech.
• A can now conduct a conference with another extension or trunk.
3-Party Conference between an extension and two trunks
• A is in speech with D.
• A and D want to include E in their conversation.
• A puts D on hold. A gets feature tone. D gets on-hold music.
• A grabs a Trunk and dials E's number.
• A is in speech with E. D cannot hear their conversation.
• A dials Flash-0 to enable three-way speech.
• A, D, and E are now in speech.
• Any of them can disconnect to withdraw from the conference.
• To conduct Unsupervised 3-Party Conference, A dials Flash-#.
• D and E are now in two-way speech.
How to configure
For this feature to work, the feature 'Conference' must be enabled in the Class of Service group of the extensions
that are to be allowed this feature.
If extension users at remote locations are to be allowed to initiate the 3-party conference, “Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)” or “Direct Inward Dialing (DID)” must be enabled on the trunk on which their call lands.
3-Party Conference in Class of Service
In the default factory settings, Station Basic Feature Template Number 01 is assigned to all the extensions of the
ETERNITY. The Station Basic Feature Template 01 is assigned CoS group 01 which has 'Conference' enabled. So,
all extensions of the ETERNITY can make Conference calls.
1052 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
If you want to deny 3-Party Conference to selected extensions, follow these steps:
1. Define a CoS group with 'Conference' disabled.
2. Prepare a Station Basic Feature Template with this CoS group applicable in all the “Time Zones”.
3. Assign this new Template to the extensions to which Conference is to be denied.
Refer the topics “Class of Service (COS)” and “Station Basic Feature Template” for detailed instructions and
programming.
The feature 'Conference' in the Class of Service also includes Dial-In and Multi-party Conference.
Extensions that are denied 'Conference' in their Class of Service will not be allowed all three types of
conferences - 3-Party, Dial-In and Multi-party Conference.
How to use
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users
• Speech with Party 1 on trunk/extension.
• Press Hold. Party 1 put on hold.
• Dial the number of Party 2.
If Party 2 is a trunk,
• Dial #
• Dial 0 to grab a trunk. You get Trunk dial tone.
• Dial telephone number of Party 2. You get ring back tone.
• Speech with Party 2.
Now,
• Press DSS key assigned to 'Conference'.
OR
Press Hold; dial 0
• Three-way speech is established.
To conduct Unsupervised 3-Party Conference:
• When in three-way speech with Party 1 on Trunk 1 and Party 2 on Trunk 2,
• Press Hold.
• Dial #.
• Trunk 1 and Trunk 2 in speech. You are out of the conversation.
For SLT Users
• Speech with Party 1 on trunk/extension.
• Dial Flash. You get Feature tone. Party 1 put on hold.
• Dial the number of Party 2.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1053
If Party 2 is a trunk,
• Dial #
• Dial 0 to grab a trunk. You get Trunk dial tone.
• Dial telephone number of Party 2. You get ring back tone.
• Speech with Party 2.
• Dial Flash-0
• Three-way speech is established.
To conduct Unsupervised 3-Party Conference:
• When in three-way speech with Party 1 on Trunk 1 and Party 2 on Trunk 2,
• Dial Flash.
• Dial #.
• Trunk 1 and Trunk 2 in speech. You are out of the conversation.
1054 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Conference-Multiparty
What’s this?
Like the Dial-In Conference, a Multi-party conference allows speech between more than three participants.
The key difference between Dial-In and Multi-party conference is that in a Dial-In conference participants can
include themselves in the conference by dialing into it without assistance, whereas in a Multi-party Conference the
party initiating the conference must include the participants by dialing their numbers and the Multi-party Conference
feature code.
A Multiparty conference may be
• between extensions
• between extensions and trunks, i.e. external numbers.
Extension users can initiate multiparty conference from a remote location using “Direct Inward System Access
(DISA)”.
There are 7 digital conferencing circuits in the system. The ETERNITY supports between 6 to 21 parties in a
conference depending on the model you are using.
ETERNITY ETERNITY ETERNITY ETERNITY ETERNITY
Multiparty Conference capacity
ME GE PE 6S PE 3SP PE 3SS
Maximum conference participants 21 15 15 6 6
Maximum simultaneous conferences (If all
7 5 5 2 2
the conferences involve 3 parties)
Maximum parties included in a conference (If
21 15 15 6 6
all parties are in a single conference)
This feature requires a license. To use this feature you must purchase the license for the Business Feature
Suite. Refer the topic “License Management” to know more.
How it works
A, B, C, and D are extension users.
E and F are external numbers.
A decides to hold a teleconference with B, C, D, E and F.
Initiating a Multiparty Conference
• A dials B's number and informs B about the conference call.
• A dials flash to put B on hold. B gets on-hold music.
• A dials conference inclusion code and gets confirmation tone.
• B is included in the conference.
• A goes ON-Hook and then OFF-Hook or waits for end of confirmation tone.
• A dials C's number and informs C about the conference.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1055
• A dials flash to put C on hold. C gets on-hold music.
• A dials conference inclusion code and gets confirmation tone.
• C is included in the conference.
• A repeats the above steps to include D, E and F in the conference.
• Having included the last participant, F, A dials conference inclusion code again.
• A is included in the conference.
• All participants can now converse.
Removing a participant from a Multiparty Conference
Any participant, who has a DKP or Extended IP Phone can remove another participant from the conference.
To remove E from the conference,
• A goes ON-Hook, then goes OFF-Hook.
• A dials the feature code to remove party from the conference.
• A selects E from the list of participants that appear A’s DKP/Extended IP Phone and presses Enter Key.
• E is disconnected.
Withdrawing from a Multiparty Conference
Participants in a conference can exclude themselves by dialing a feature code.
If the conference has been initiated from the DISA mode, the caller (remote user) must dial the code for
withdrawing from the conference.
If participant goes ON-Hook, without dialing the feature code for withdrawing from a Multi-party
Conference, the participant will be included in the conference again, when the participant dials the
Conference inclusion feature code (191). To avoid this, participants must dial the feature code for
Withdrawing from conference.
If all participants of a Multi-party Conference have withdrawn from the conference, one-by-one, but the
none of them have dialed the feature command to terminate the conference (190), the system will start the
'Release Conference if idle for more than (Minutes) Timer'. This Timer is programmable, and by default it is
set to 002 Minutes. On the expiry of this Timer, the system will free the resource occupied by the
conference on the conferencing circuit.
Canceling a Conference
Any participant in a conference can dial the Cancel conference code (190) to end the conference, all participants
will get Error Tone and the system resource occupied by the conference will be freed.
1056 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Examples of Multi-party Conferences:
A Multiparty conference between stations.
S1 A
S2 B
PSTN ETERNITY S3 C
S4 D
S5 E
A, B, C and D are in Conference
Simultaneous Multi Party conferences between stations.
S1 A
S2 B
S3 C
PSTN S4 D
S5 E
S6 W
ETERNITY
S7 X
S8 Y
S9 Z
S10 F
S11 G
A, B, C, D and E are in Conference1
W, X, Y and Z are in Conference2 S12 H
F, G and H are in Conference3
Multiple conferences between trunks and stations.
ETERNITY
T1 S1 A
T2 S2 B
T3 S3 C
PSTN T4 S4 D
T5 S5 E
T6
S6 F
S7 G
S8 H
S9 I
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1057
Multi party conferences between one trunk and a few stations.
T1 S1 A
T2 S2 B
PSTN T3
S3 C
T4
S4 D
T5
S5 E
ETERNITY
Multiparty Conference between a few trunks and one station.
T1 S1 A
T2 S2 B
PSTN T3
S3 C
T4
S4 D
T5
S5 E
ETERNITY
Simultaneous Multiparty conference between a few trunks and stations and between stations.
T1 S1 A
T2 S2 B
T3 S3 C
PSTN T4
T5 S4 E
T6 S5 D
S6 F
S7 G
ETERNITY
How to configure
To provide this feature to extensions,
• You must enable the feature 'Conference' in the“Class of Service (COS)” of the extensions in their “Station
Basic Feature Template”. By default, this feature is enabled on all extensions, so all extensions can use
this feature.
The feature 'Conference' in the Class of Service also includes 3-Party and Multi-party Conference.
Extensions that are denied 'Conference' in their Class of Service will not be allowed Dial-In as well as 3-
Party and Multi-party Conference.
• If desired, you may also change default value of the Release Conference if Idle for more than (min.) Timer.
See “System Timers and Counts”.
1058 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• If extension users are to be allowed to initiate or join the Conference from a remote location, “Direct Inward
System Access (DISA)” must be enabled on the trunk on which they call.
How to use
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users
To initiate multiparty conference:
• Dial the number of party 1.
• When you are in speech with party 1, dial Hold-191.
• Party 1 is included in the conference. You get confirmation tone.
• Dial number of party 2.
• When you are in speech with party 2, dial Hold-191.
• Party 2 is included in the conference. You get confirmation tone.
• Dial the number of party 3.
• When you are in speech with Party 3, dial Hold-191
• Repeat these steps to include as many parties as desired (max. 21).
• Press the DSS key assigned to 'Multiparty Conference'.
OR
• Dial 191
• You get included in the conference.
To cancel a Multiparty Conference:
• Go ON-Hook.
• Go OFF-Hook
• Dial 190.
To remove a party from Conference:
• Go ON-Hook, while in active conference.
• Go OFF-Hook
• Dial 192.
• Scroll to select the Party to be removed.
• Press Enter key.
To withdraw from Conference:
• Go ON-Hook
• Go OFF-Hook
• Dial 193.
For SLT Users
• Lift handset.
• Dial number of party 1.
• Speech with party 1.
• Dial Flash-191.
• Dial number of party 2.
• Dial Flash 191.
• Repeat the steps to include the desired number of parties (max. 21).
• Dial 191.
• You get included in the conference.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1059
To cancel Conference:
• Go ON-Hook.
• Go OFF-Hook
• Dial 190.
To withdraw from the Conference:
• Go ON-Hook, while in conference.
• Go OFF-Hook.
• Dial 193
To use Multiparty Conference from DISA mode, you may see the instructions “For Extension Users at a Remote
Location” under “Conference Dial-In”.
1060 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Conflict Dialing
What's this?
You may recall that “Access Codes” are dialed at different call phases. No two Access Codes must be the same in
the same call phase.
For example, the same access code cannot be used for two different features like Call Forward and Redial, since
both these features are invoked in the 'Dial' phase. Similarly, Station and Logical Group Codes too must be unique
and should not match with any of the features invoked in the 'Dial' phase.
However, ETERNITY allows overlaps within Feature Codes and “Flexible Numbers” (Station Codes). One Feature
Access Code can be a part of (subset) another code, for example, 4, 41, 412; Flexible Numbers of extensions can
be 201, 2011 etc.
So, when such overlapping access codes are dialed, the system matches the first digit. On finding more than one
Access code starting with the same digit, the system will not know how to interpret the instruction and act
accordingly.
Conflict Dialing feature resolves this confusion. When an access code that is a subset of any other access code is
dialed, the system waits for some time for the extension user to dial the next digit. If the user does not dial any digit
within that time, the system interprets it as the smaller Access Code, and invokes the associated feature.
The time for which the system waits for the next digit to be dialed before resolving the Access Codes is called
"Conflict Dialing Timer". This timer is set to 2 seconds and is programmable.
Refer the topics “Access Codes” to know more.
How it works
You may set,
• The Access code of Call Pick Up as '4'.
• The Access code for Alarms as '41'.
• The Access code for Department Group 01 as '412'.
• Extension user A dials '4'.
• The system finds three access codes starting with '4' (4, 41, 412).
• So, it waits for 2 seconds, which is the default duration of the Conflict Dialing Timer, for the next digit to be
dialed.
• If A does not dial any other digit before the Timer expires, the system interprets the code as '4' and invokes
Call Pick-Up.
• If A dials '1' before the Timer elapses,
• The system interprets it as '41'.
• The system detects another access code starting with '41'.
• So it waits for 2 seconds again for the next digit to be dialed.
• If A does not dial any other digit before the Timer elapses, the system interprets the code as '41' and
invokes the Alarm feature.
Matrix ETERNITY V9 System Manual 1061
• If A dials '2' before the Timer elapses,
• The system interprets the code as '412' and invokes Department Call to Group 01, provided there are
no other access codes like 4121, 4123, etc.
• If such access codes exist, the system again waits for the duration of the Conflict Dialing Timer for another
digit to be dialed.
• Thus, only when the conflict in the access codes is resolved will the system respond accordingly.
How to configure
The working of this feature is controlled by the Conflict Dialing Timer, which is set by default to 2 seconds and can
be changed as desired.
If the duration of the Conflict Dialing Timer is long, it may cause delay in the system's response to the
feature. If the duration is less, the system may misinterpret the access codes. Ensure that the value of the
Timer is programmed optimally (i.e. at least the default value).
Changing Conflict Dialing Wait Timer using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the 'System Timers' link.
• Go to 'Conflict Dialing Timer' and set the time in seconds as desired.
1062 Matrix ETERNITY V9 System Manual
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
• Log out of Jeeves or continue programming further.
Changing Conflict Dialing Wait Timer using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
• Dial command 5351-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255 seconds.
Default: 002 seconds.
• Exit SE mode.
Matrix ETERNITY V9 System Manual 1063
Conversation Recording
What's this?
Conversation Recording allows extension users to record their talk with other extension users or external parties,
after or without informing the opposite party.
This feature can be used to record verbal agreements, important discussions, instructions, interviews, client
requirements, take or place orders, etc.
Extensions must have a mailbox assigned to them for recording conversations. So, either a VMS card must be
installed or Matrix CadencePro must be interfaced with the system for this feature to work.
• Use this feature in accordance with the local laws.
• Matrix Comsec is not responsible for any mis-/abuse of this feature by users.
How it works
A and B are extensions. Both are assigned a mailbox each.
C and D are external parties.
• A calls C.
• C answers the call.
• A dials the command for Conversation Recording in mid-speech.
• C is put on hold.
• The system sends a string of digits to the Voice Mail System to initiate Conversation Recording.
• A and C are in speech again.
• The conversation recording starts in A's mailbox. The system plays beeps, if Conversation Recording
Beeps are enabled.
• A or C disconnects the call.
• Conversation recording ends.
• A can listen to the recorded conversation by invoking the Voice mail feature.
The same is repeated when B calls A. As both have mailboxes assigned, both can record the conversation.
How to configure
The functioning of this feature is controlled by three parameters: 'Class of Service', 'Mailbox', and 'Conversation
Recording Beeps'. These parameters can be programmed using Jeeves or by dialing SE Commands from a
telephone.
Conversation Recording in Class of Service
Conversation Recording must be enabled in the COS group of the extensions to which this feature is to be allowed.
In the default Station Basic Feature Template Number 01 is assigned to all the extensions of ETERNITY, CoS
group 01 is assigned as default. Conversation Recording is disabled in CoS group 01. So, none of the extensions
of the ETERNITY can record conversations.
1064 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Decide which extensions should be allowed Conversation Recording.
If you want to allow this feature to all extensions, simply enable Conversation Recording in the default CoS group
01.
If you want to allow Conversation Recording to selected extensions,
1. Define a CoS group with Conversation Recording enabled.
2. Prepare a Station Basic Feature Template with this CoS group applicable in all the “Time Zones”.
3. Assign this new Template to the extensions to which Conversation Recording is to be allowed.
Refer the topics “Class of Service (COS)” and “Station Basic Feature Template” for detailed instructions and
programming.
Mailbox
Extensions that are to be allowed Conversation Recording must also have a mailbox. Refer VMS Card System
Manual or CadencePro System Manual for more information and programming instructions.
Conversation Recording Beeps
Decide whether you want Beeps to be played during Conversation Recording. Follow the instructions given below.
Programming Conversation Recording Beeps using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access
• Click 'System Parameters' to open the page.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1065
• Go to 'Play Beep when Call Taping/Conversation Recording starts'. Click the check box to enable/disable
this feature.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
• Log out of Jeeves or continue with further programming.
Programming Conversation Recording Beeps using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
• Dial command 5332-Code.
Where,
Code is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
• Exit SE mode.
How to use
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users
To record a conversation:
• You are in speech with another extension/external number.
• Press DSS Key assigned to Conversation Recording (if programmed).
OR
Press Hold and Dial 1095.
• You get beeps (if enabled).
• Speech with party reestablished.
• Recording starts.
• Go ON-Hook, after conversation ends.
To listen to a recorded conversation:
• Press Voice Mail Key
OR
Dial 3931153-Voicemail Service Group Number-Password154
• Follow Voice Mail Prompts.
• Go Idle or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.
153. This is the default Voicemail Feature Access Code. Verify with you System Engineer if this has been changed and use the new
code.
154. Only if the mailbox is password protected.
1066 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Conversations are recorded as New Messages. So, follow the voice mail prompts for listening to new
messages.
For SLT Users
To record a conversation:
• You are in speech with another extension/external number.
• Dial Flash-1095
• You get beeps (if enabled).
• Speech with party reestablished.
• Recording starts.
• Replace handset when conversation ends.
To listen to a recorded conversation:
• Lift the handset
• Dial 3931-Voicemail Service Group Number-Password
• Follow Voice Mail Prompts.
• Replace handset.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1067
Customer Name
What's this?
Customer Name is the name of the organization/enterprise that has deployed ETERNITY. As the User, you can
enter the name of your company/organization in the system.
When Customer Name is assigned in the system, this name will appear as header on the various System Reports
generated and printed by the ETERNITY like SMDR Incoming, Outgoing and Internal Call Reports, T1E1PRI
Performance reports, Alarm Status reports, etc.
The Customer Name may consist of a maximum of 80 alphanumeric characters, including punctuation marks. So,
you can enter the organization's address along with the Customer Name.
How to configure
Customer Name can be programmed using Jeeves and dialing SE commands from a Telephone at the time of
installation, or any time thereafter. It can also be corrected or changed any time.
Programming Customer Name using Jeeves
• Login as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click 'System Parameters' to open the page.
1068 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Enter the name (and address, if desired) of the organization/enterprise in the field 'Customer Name'. For
example: Prudent Investment, 701 Sunshine Boulevard, Bannerghatta, Bangalore.
• Click 'Submit' to save changes.
Programming Customer Name using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode
To enter Customer Name, dial:
• 5401-Customer Name-#*
To clear the Customer Name, dial:
• 5401-#*
• Exit SE mode
• Use EON to assign Customer Name, as SLT does not support alphanumeric dialing.
• The method of entering Customer Name from EON is similar to typing text messages from the cell
phone.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1069
Day Night Mode
What's this?
Certain features of the ETERNITY like Operator, Class of Service, Toll Control, Outgoing Trunk Bundle Access
Groups, Trunk Landing Group, Direct Inward Dialing (DID), Direct Inward System Access (DISA), Security Alarms,
etc, require stations and trunks to behave differently according to the working hours, non-working hours and break
hours, which are referred to as Time Zones.
These Time Zone-dependant features and facilities are operated automatically according to the Time Tables
programmed in the system. In a Time Table, the Time Zones - Working Hours, Non-Working Hours, Break Hours -
are defined for the entire week. Time Table is assigned to trunks, stations and other time-zone dependant features.
The system executes the Time-Zone dependent features and facilities automatically according to the Time Table.
To know more refer the topic “Time Tables”.
Day/Night Mode allows you to manually change the Time Zone of the system at any point in time, by issuing a
command. For example, the office is to be closed on account of an unplanned holiday or emergency. So, the Time
Zones of all stations and trunks must be set to Non-working hours to route outgoing calls and land incoming calls
from/to the appropriate destination. You can set the ETERNITY to Night Mode until the office remains closed and
set it back to operate as per the Time Table, when work is resumed.
To cite another example, the office must work for extended hours. You can set the ETERNITY to Day Mode and set
it back to operate as per the Time Table.
When you set the system in Day/Night Mode, the system overrides the Time Tables assigned to Trunks, Stations
and Operator. According to the mode you selected, it applies Working Hours/Non-Working Hours to run all the
Time-Zone dependent features of the system.
When the system is set to Day Mode, it applies Working Hours as the Time Zone for all stations, trunks and time
zone dependant features and facilities. When the system is set to Night Mode, it applies Non-Working Hours as the
Time Zone on Time-Zone dependent features of the system.
Thus, Day/Night Mode forces the system to work in a particular Time Zone, until it is changed again, manually.
Day/Night mode can be set by the System Engineer (SE mode) as well as by the System Administrator (SA Mode).
It can be done using Jeeves or by dialing a command from a Telephone.
How to configure
Setting Day/Night Mode SE mode using Jeeves
• Log into Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
1070 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Click 'System Parameters' to open the page.
• Go to 'Day Night Mode'. Select the desired option:
• Set System in Day Mode (Working Hrs)
• Set System in Night Mode (Non-Working Hrs)
• Operate System as per Timetable assignment (default).
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page.
• Log out of Jeeves or continue, as desired.
Setting Day/Night Mode from SA mode using Jeeves
• Log into Jeeves as System Administrator.
• Click Day/Night Mode to open the page.
• Select the desired option:
• Set System in Day Mode (Working Hrs)
• Set System in Night Mode (Non-Working Hrs)
• Operate System as per Timetable assignment (default).
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1071
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page.
• Log out of Jeeves or continue, as desired.
Setting Day/Night Mode from SE mode using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To set the system in Day/Night mode, dial:
• 4801-Code
Where,
Code is from 1 to 3.
1 is for Day Mode
2 is for Night Mode
3 is for Operate system as per Time Table.
• Exit SE mode.
Setting Day/Night Mode from SA mode using a Telephone
• Enter SA mode from a DKP/SLT.
• Dial 1072-018-Code
Where,
Code is from 1 to 3
1 is for Day Mode
2 is for Night Mode
3 is for Operate system as per Time Table.
• Exit SA mode.
If you are setting Day/Night Mode from a DKP using a DSS key, refer the LED indication in table below.
LED Indication on DSS Key assigned to Day/Night Mode
Event Color Cadence
EON42 Day Mode Set Green Continuous ON
Night Mode Set Red Continuous ON
System set to work as per Time Table -- OFF
EON48 Day Mode Set Blue Continuous ON
Night Mode Set Red Continuous ON
System set to work as per Time Table -- OFF
1072 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Daylight Saving Time (DST)
What's this?
Daylight Saving Time (DST) is the practice of advancing clocks so that afternoons have more daylight and
mornings have less. Typically clocks are adjusted forward one hour near the start of spring and are adjusted
backward in autumn.
Many countries of the world use DST, though the start and end dates of DST vary with location and year. Even
within countries, uniform DST may not be observed. For example the states of Arizona and Hawaii do not observe
DST. Certain countries may observe DST in certain years, for instance Guatemala, while in most countries of Asia
and Africa, and in certain countries of South America, DST is not observed at all.
When ETERNITY is installed in a country/region where DST is used, it is necessary to synchronize the Real Time
Clock of ETERNITY with the local time.
So, if you are installing ETERNITY in a country where DST is used, find out the DST convention currently in use in
that country, and adjust DST accordingly.
How it works
The forward and backward adjustment of clocks can be Scheduled or Manual.
• Scheduled DST Adjustment: The Real Time Clock of the ETERNITY is advanced and set backward
automatically according to the DST convention of the country/region where the ETERNITY is installed.
Scheduled DST Adjustment is useful in countries/regions where DST Time is fixed, such as in Europe,
USA and Canada, without yearly variations.
The table below gives describes the DST conventions followed in the different countries for which
ETERNITY will automatically adjust DST.
ETERNITY supports 18 DST Types for Scheduled DST Adjustment.
DST DST Timings
Applicable in Countries
Type Start Time End Time
01 Last Sun MAR Last Sun OCT Austria, Poland, Russia, Spain
From 01:59 to 03:00 From 02:59 to 02:00
02 Last Sun OCT Last Sun MAR Australia, Australia-Tasmania, Belgium,
From 01:59 to 03:00 From 02:59 to 02:00 France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Italy,
Sweden, Switzerland
03 Second Sunday MAR First Sunday NOV Bahrain, Mexico, Turkey, United States
From 01:59 to 03:00 From 01:59 to 01:00
04 First Sun NOV Third Sun FEB Brazil
From 23:59 to 01:00 From 23:59 to 23:00
05 Second Sunday MAR First Sunday NOV Canada
From 01:59 to 03:00 From 01:59 to 01:00
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1073
DST DST Timings
Applicable in Countries
Type Start Time End Time
06 Second Sat OCT Second Sat MAR Chile
From 23:59 to 01:00 From 23:59 to 23:00
07 Last Sun MAR Last Sun OCT Denmark, Ireland, Portugal, United Kingdom
00:59 02:00 01:59 01:00
08 Last Sun MAR Last Sun OCT Finland
02:59 04:00 03:59 03:00
09 First APR First OCT Iraq
02:59 04:00 03:59 03:00
10 Last Sun MAR Last Sun OCT Kyrgyzstan
02:29 03:30 02:29 01:30
11 Last Fri APRIL Last Thu SEP Egypt
23:59 01:00 23:59 23:00
12 Last Sun MAR Last Sun OCT Lebanon
23:59 01:00 23:59 23:00
13 First Sun SEP First Sun APRIL Namibia
01:59 03:00 01:59 01:00
14 First Sun OCT Third Sun MAR New Zealand
01:59 03:00 02:59 02:00
15 Last Sun MAR Last Sun OCT Norway
01:59 03:00 02:59 02:00
16 First Sun OCT First Sun APRIL Paraguay
23:59 01:00 23:59 23:00
17 First APRIL First OCT Syria
23:59 01:00 23:59 23:00
18 First APRIL Last Sun OCT Cuba
23:59 01:00 23:59 23:00
The DST Type is to be selected according to the country/region where the system is installed.
When DST Mode is set to 'Scheduled' and the DST Type is selected, the system will automatically adjust
DST at the preset dates and time for the country/region where the system is installed.
For example, if ETERNITY is installed Spain, the DST Type 01 applicable to this country should be
programmed as Scheduled DST. The system will automatically advance the clock on the last Sunday of
March at 01.59.03:00 am every year (the start date of DST) and set the clock backward on the last Sunday
of October at 02.59.02:00 am of the same year.
• Manual DST Adjustment: The Real Time Clock of the ETERNITY is advanced and set backward
manually according to the DST convention of the country/region where the ETERNITY is installed.
Manual DST Adjustment is to be used in regions/countries that have no fixed DST Convention and where
yearly variations in DST practices are likely.
1074 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
When DST Mode is set as 'Manual', you must set the start and the end time, i.e. the time at which the clock
is to be advanced and the time at which the clock is to be delayed.
There are two ways to adjust DST manually:
1. The 'Day of Month' method, which specifies a day of the month DST will start or end. For example:
starting on the 2nd Sunday of March and ending on 1st Sunday of November.
2. The 'Date and Month' method, which specifies a date of the month that DST will start or end. For
example: starting on March 11 and ending on November 4.
DST is not applicable in certain regions/countries, like Asia and South America. In such cases, the DST
Mode is to be 'Disabled'.
How to configure
Adjusting DST using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the 'Regional Settings' link.
• Click the 'DST Parameters' link to open the page.
• Set the DST Mode to Manual or Scheduled as per your requirement.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1075
Scheduled DST Adjustment
• If you have selected 'Scheduled' DST mode, in the 'Region' list, select the name of the country/region
where your system is installed.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your DST setting.
• If you do not find your region on this list, you are recommended to set DST Mode to 'Manual' and adjust
DST manually.
Manual DST Adjustment
• If you have selected 'Manual' DST Mode, set the Forward and Backward Time Adjustments under 'Manual
Time Adjustments'.
• Go to the option 'Forward Time Adjustments' to advance the time when DST starts.
1076 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Select the desired 'Type' of forward time adjustment:
• 'Day-Month Wise' to specify the day of the month DST will start.
OR
• 'Date-Month Wise' to specify the date of the month DST will start.
If you select 'Day-Month Wise' option, the 'Date-Month Wise' option will be disabled, and vice versa.
Day-Month Wise
• If you select the 'Day-Month Wise' option, you should now select the desired options in each of the
following:
• Ordinal number: Select the Ordinal number of the day of the month, i.e. the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th day,
when DST begins.
• Day: Select the day of the month - Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday
- when DST begins.
• Month: Select the month when DST beings (January-December).
• Change Time From: Select the time when DST will begin to change. The time mode is 24 hours, with
options from 00 to 23 hours and 00 to 59 minutes.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1077
• To: Select the time to which the DST is advanced. The time mode is 24 hours, with options from 00 to
23 hours and 00 to 59 minutes.
Date-Month Wise
• If you select 'Date-Month Wise' option, you should now select the desired options in each of the following:
• Date: The date on which DST begins (1-31).
• Month: The name of the month when DST begins (January-December).
• Change Time From: The time when DST will begin to change. The time mode is 24 hours, with
options from 00 to 23 hours and 00 to 59 minutes.
• To: The time to which the DST is advanced. The time mode is 24 hours, with options from 00 to 23
hours and 00 to 59 minutes.
• Now, go to the option 'Backward Time Adjustments' to set the time back (i.e. end DST and begin standard
time).
• Follow the same steps described above (step no. 4 to 6) to set the day/date, month, hours and minutes
except, here you must set these parameters according to the time when DST ends.
• Click Submit at the bottom of the page to save your DST settings.
1078 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• ETERNITY gives you the flexibility to set the 'Forward DST Adjustment' according to Date-Month, while
the Backward DST Adjustment according to Day-Month. Similarly, the reverse is also possible, i.e.
Forward DST may be set according to Day-Month, while the Backward DST may be set as Date-
Month. This is flexibility is particularly useful for setting DST of countries where the start of DST is
defined by date and month, like the First of April, but the end of DST is defined by Day and Month, such
as the last Sunday of October (as observed in Cuba).
• When the DST of a particular country starts or ends on the Last Sunday or any other day, for example,
the last Tuesday, last Friday of the month, always set the Ordinal Number as '5th'.
• Wherever time adjustments are made at 00:00 hours, use the previous date and set DST start time (i.e.
"from" time) at 23:59 hrs.
Adjusting DST using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode.
To set the DST Mode, dial:
• 1010-DST Mode
Where,
DST Mode is
0 for Disabled
1 for Manual
2 for Scheduled
If DST Mode is selected as 'Manual'.
To set the start time of DST, dial:
• 1011-Date-Month-Current Time-Advance Time
Where,
Date is from 01 to 31. Use leading zero in case of single digit date (Default 01).
Month is from 01 to 12. Use leading zero in case of single digit month (Default 01).
Current Time155 is in HH:MM format,
HH from 00 to 23 (use leading zero)
MM from 00 to 59 (use leading zero) (Default 00:00).
Advance Time156 is in HH:MM format,
HH is from 00 to 23 (use leading zero)
MM from 00 to 59 (use leading zero) (Default 00:00).
Please note that the advance time will be greater than the current time.
To set the end time of DST, dial:
• 1012-Date-Month-Current Time-Delay Time
Where,
Date is from 01 to 31 (use leading zero for single digit date) (Default 01).
Month is from 01 to 12 (use leading zero for single digit month) (Default 01).
155. The current time is the time that is presently followed by the system.
156. This is the time to which the Real Time Clock should be advanced.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1079
Current Time is in HH:MM format (use leading zero),
HH is from 00 to 23
MM is from 00 to 59 (Default 00:00).
Delay Time157 is in HH:MM format (use leading zero must)
HH is from 00 to 23
MM is from 00 to 59 (Default 00:00).
Please note that the delay time will be less than the current time.
If DST Mode is selected as 'Scheduled'
To select the DST Type, dial:
• 1013-DST Type
Where,
DST
Applicable in Countries
Type
01 Austria, Poland, Russia, Spain
02 Australia, Australia-Tasmania, Belgium, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Italy,
Sweden, Switzerland
03 Bahrain, Mexico, Turkey, United States
04 Brazil
05 Canada
06 Chile
07 Denmark, Ireland, Portugal, United Kingdom
08 Finland
09 Iraq
10 Kyrgyzstan
11 Egypt
12 Lebanon
13 Namibia
14 New Zealand
15 Norway
16 Paraguay
17 Syria
18 Cuba
For example: to select DST Type for Brazil, dial: 1013-04.
• Exit SE mode.
157. This is the time to which the Real Time Clock should be set back to.
1080 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
DDI Routing Table
What's this?
• The DDI Routing Table is a set of general features that define the complete logic of identifying the flexible
numbers and DDI equivalent numbers when there is an incoming or outgoing call on a BRI/T1E1PRI and
SIP trunk. The ETERNITY offers 224 such tables each of which can be programmed as per the
requirement.
How it works
The DDI Routing Table is made up of the following Parameters:
• DDI Routing Reference ID-This is the reference number acts as an identifier to the mapping logic
programmed in the DDI Routing Table. Any number of table can have the same reference number. A
Reference ID is assigned to both IC reference tables and OG reference tables of the trunks. For more
details on call resolving, please refer the topics “Direct Dialing-In (DDI)”, “IC Reference Table” and “OG
Reference Table”.
• Start DDI Number-This is the First DDI Number for the ISDN Installation Number (MSN).
• Total DDI Numbers-The total number of DDI numbers supported for an ISDN Installation Number.
Suppose an ISDN Trunk supports 200 DDI numbers, then the total DDI Number will be 200.
• DDI Number of Digit-The number of digits in a DDI number. Suppose 200 DDI numbers are supported on
an ISDN Trunk, then the Number of Digits for that Trunk should be programmed as 3. Suppose 10 DDI
numbers are supported on another ISDN Trunk, then the Number of Digits for that Trunk should be
programmed as 2.
• Port Type-This parameter is to be programmed as listed in the parameter value in the DDI Routing Table.
• Port Number-Number of port, range of which depends upon selected port type. Refer parameter value
given in the DDI Routing Table. This field is of no significance if port type is selected as 'Flexible Number'.
• Start DDI Flexible Number-If port type is 'Flexible Number' you can enter the station number of the first
DDI Number for the Index. Once this is programmed based on the start DDI number the rest of the flexible
numbers of stations to which DDI Number is assigned is calculated. 'Start Flexible Number' field is of
significance only if the port type is 'Flexible Number'.
How to configure
The commands explained below should be referred as:
To configure a single port: XXXX-1
To configure a range of ports: XXXX-2
To configure all the ports: XXXX-*
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1081
Use the following command to configure the feature in a DDI Routing Table:
6322-1-DDI Routing Table ID-Parameter Number-Value
6322-2-DDI Routing Table ID-DDI Routing Table ID-Parameter Number-Value
6322-*-Parameter Number-Value
Where,
DDI Routing Table ID is from 001 to 224.
Parameter Value is from 01 to 06. Refer the DDI Routing Table for Parameter Values and their codes.
Code takes different values that vary from parameter to parameter. Please refer default table, which provides all the
values that can be assigned to various parameters.
Use following command to default a DDI Routing Table:
6321-1-DDI Routing Table ID
6321-2-DDI Routing Table ID-DDI Routing Table ID
6321-*
Where,
DDI Routing Table ID is from 001 to 224.
Following table shows default DDI Routing Table
01 02 03 04 05 06
Para. No./ DDI Start Total Start
Table ID DDI Number Port
Routing DDI DDI Port Type Flexible
of Digit Number
Ref. ID Numbers Numbers Number
001 00 000000 000000 0 None Blank Blank
002 00 000000 000000 0 None Blank Blank
003-223 Same as 224
224 00 000000 000000 0 None Blank Blank
Parameter Value:
Code 00 00-99 000001- 000000- 0-4 None -- Max. 6-
999999 999999 digits
04 BRI 01-32
05 T1E1PRI 1-8
06 E&M 001-128
08 AOP 1
11 Dept Grp 01-16
12 Quick Dial 100-999
20 ROUT GRP 01-32
25 Mobile 01-64
26 SIP 01-32
27 Flex. No. 4-digits
1082 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Refer to above table. Whenever Flexible number is selected as the port type, the range concept of Start
flexible number becomes relevant. In all other cases, range concept is not relevant.
• Flexible Number includes SIP Extension Numbers.
• When a call is placed on SLT/DKP port, the calling party number is displayed on the terminal.
• When the call is placed on BRI-NT or PRI-NT, the calling party number and the called party number both
are sent to the NT port. Doing so, the PBX connected to the NT port can resolve the DDI number and place
the call on the programmed station.
Relevant Topics:
1. “Direct Dialing-In (DDI)” 1148
2. “ISDN-BRI” 1263
3. “T1E1 Trunks” 1608
4. “IC Reference Table” 1252
5. “OG Reference Table” 1346
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1083
Debug System
What’s this?
• ETERNITY allows the System Engineer to monitor the state of software ports and IO operations. This is
known as Debug.
• This feature is very useful for the SE for troubleshooting.
• This effectively aids the SE in identifying the error.
How to configure
The commands explained below should be referred as:
To program a single port: XXXX-1
To program a range of ports: XXXX-2
To program all the ports: XXXX-*
Use the following command to program a port for debug:
2103-Port
Where,
Port Meaning
0 None
1 COM 1
2 COM 2
3 Printer
4 Ethernet
By default, the Port is 0.
Use following command to start/stop debug for required process:
2104-Value
Where value shall be entered in 4 digits as explained below
Process Type Value
Port State 0001
Card IO 0002
PMS 0004
Parameter Initialization on Power-ON 0008
Error 0016
1084 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Process Type Value
Communication Manager 0032
File Open/Read/Write 0064
VMS 0128
ACB 0256
Maturity/AOC 0512
Auto-up gradation 1024
• If it is required to enable combination of the above debugs, use value = Total Sum of the Values of all
requires debugs.
• This command will be saved in the configuration and hence, ETERNITY will retain this in case of power
failure.
Example:
• To enable debug for 'VMS' and 'PMS' use values = 0004 + 0128 = 0132 and give command 2104 - 0132.
• To disable debug for all process use command: 2104-0000.
Use following command to start/stop state debug:
2105-Port Type-Port Number Start-Port Number End-Flag
Where,
Port Type Meaning
01 SLT
02 DKP
03 TWT
04 BRI
05 T1E1
06 E&M
10 DOP
28 MOBILE
Software port number range shall be the software port number of the selected port type.
Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Settings made using this command is not saved in the configuration and hence if the system gets restart, SE needs
to give this command again.
When system gets restart, the debug will get disabled.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1085
Use following command to enable ETERNITY-GE HOST Debug:
2181-1-Code
Where,
Code is from 000 to 255.
Code Meaning
001 Enables HOST Debug on Ethernet
002 Enables ETERNITY GE Master Cmd/Event Debug
004 Enable ISDN Relate Host to DSP Cmd/Event Debug
007 Enable all three (above given) debugs
000 Enables DSP Serial Real Time Debug
Default is 000.
Use following command to enable ETERNITY-GE DSP Debug:
2184-1-Code
Where,
Code is from 000 to 255.
Code Meaning
000 Enables DSP Serial Real Time Debug
001 Enables DSP Serial Slow Debug
002 Enables DSP Ethernet Debug
Default is 000.
It is not possible to enable all three debugs at a time, only one of the three can be enabled at a time.
Use following command to Enable ETERNITY-GE DSP Debug:
2184-2-Code
Where,
Code is from 000 to 255.
Code Meaning
001 Enable SLT Debug
002 Enable TWT Debug
004 Enable DKP Debug
08 Enable ENM Debug
016 Enable ISDN Debug
032 Enable GSM Debug
064 Enable VOIP Debug
128 Enable VMS Debug
255 Enable debug for all the ports listed above
1086 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Code Meaning
000 Disable debug for all the ports listed above
Default is 000
Use the following command to initiate the debug of IO operations:
2199-Slot Number-1-Port Number-Code
2199-Slot Number-2-Port Number-Port Number-Code
2199-Slot Number-*-Code
If the Slot No. and the Port Number are programmed as 99 the debug of all slots and ports is generated.
Where,
Slot Number= 01 to 24,
Port Number = Port offset on the card in 2 digit
Code Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
If the Slot No. and the Port Number are programmed as 99 the debug of all slots and ports is generated.
By default, debug is 'disable'.
ETERNITY supports debug on syslog.
Use following command to program the IP Address of the Syslog Server:
2178-Syslog Server IP Address
Where,
Default IP address = 192.168.1.104.
Program the IP address of the computer on which syslog server is running. ETERNITY will send debug on this IP
Address.
Use following command to program Port number on which ETERNITY shall send debug to syslog server:
2179-Syslog Server's Listening Port
Where,
Listening port can be from 1024 - 65535.
Default = 514
Program the Port Number on which the syslog server will listen.
Parameters programmed for the syslog server are applicable only when 'Ethernet' is selected as the destination
port.
Use the following command to enable or disable PCM capture - Debug:
2124-Slot Number-Hardware Port Offset- Code
Where,
Code is from 0 to 3.
Code Meaning
0 Rx and Tx PCM Capture Disable
1 Rx PCM Capture Enable
2 Tx PCM Capture Enable
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1087
Code Meaning
3 Rx and Tx PCM Capture Enable
Relevant Topics:
1. “Debug VoIP Ethernet Port” 1089
2. “Communication Ports” 1038
1088 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Debug VoIP Ethernet Port
What's this?
• Matrix ETERNITY supports a feature by which SE can view the system debugs on the server over IP
network. This is done by 'Syslog Client' in the ETERNITY which supports multiple debug levels.
• Each debug message includes the MAC Address of syslog client who is sending debug messages in
'syslog' format.
How it works
• The debug can be enabled/disabled.
• If Debug flag is 'Disabled', syslog client will not send any debug to 'syslog server address'.
• If Debug flag is 'Enabled', syslog client will send debug to 'syslog server address' and the 'Debug Level'
which is enabled, can be viewed on the syslog server. The Server will use the MAC address data to filter
the debug of the specific gateway.
• The Server address and Server port number are used as programmed values.
• Following different DEBUG levels are supported:
• System
• Serial
• SIP
• CALL
• Registered User
• Registered Trunk
• BLF
• MWI
• Media
• VoPP
• Call Advance
• Registered User Advance
• Registered Trunk Advance
• BLF/MWI Advance
• Media Advance
• Presence
• IM
• As per the level selected, debug log will be generated. For example: if debug log of Call is required, enable
'CALL' level and disable all other debug levels.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1089
How to configure
The commands explained below should be referred as:
To configure a single port: XXXX-1
To configure a range of ports: XXXX-2
To configure all the ports: XXXX-*
Use following command to enable/disable Debug for the VoIP Ethernet Port:
7791-1-VoIP Ethernet Port -Debug
7791-2-VoIP Ethernet Port -VoIP Ethernet Port-Debug
7791-*-Debug
Where,
VoIP Ethernet Port is from 01 to 16.
Debug Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
By default: Disable.
Use following command to assign Syslog Server Address on which Debug parameter is to be sent for the VoIP
Ethernet Port:
7792-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-Syslog Server Address
7792-2-VoIP Ethernet Port-Syslog Server Address
7792-*-Syslog Server Address
Where,
VoIP Ethernet port is from 01 to 16.
Syslog Server Address is of 15 digits maximum.
By default, Blank.
Use following command to assign Server Port Address on which Debug parameter is to be sent for the VoIP
Ethernet Port:
7793-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-Server Port Address
7793-2-VoIP Ethernet Port-Server Port Address
7793-*-Server Port Address
Where,
VoIP Ethernet Port is from 01 to 16.
Server Port Address is from 1024 to 65535 and 514.
By default: 514.
If Debug flag is Enabled and Syslog Server IP address is Blank, debug log will be generated on Console
port i.e. COM port. The Baud rate on Hyper terminal should be set to 115200.
Use following command to enable debug level for the VoIP Ethernet port:
7794-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-Index-Code
7794-2-VoIP Ethernet Port-VoIP Ethernet Port-Index-Code
7794-*-Index-Code
Where,
VoIP Ethernet Port is from 01 to 16.
1090 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Index is from 01 to 17.
Index Meaning
01 System
02 Serial
03 SIP
04 Call
05 Registered User
06 Registered Trunk
07 BLF
08 MWI
09 Media
10 VoPP
11 Call Advance
12 Registered User Advance
13 Registered Trunk Advance
14 BLF/MWI Advance
15 Media Advance
16 Presence
17 IM
Code Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
By default, the following debug levels are enabled:
• Serial
• SIP
• Call
• Registered User
• Registered Trunk
• BLF
• MWI
• Media
• Presence
• IM
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1091
Default Settings
What's this?
ETERNITY is supplied with preset values for system and feature settings, as which may be altered and customized
by users to match their requirements and preferences. The factory-set values for system and feature settings that
are automatically assigned by the system are referred to as Default Settings or standard settings.
Every configurable parameter in the system has factory-set default values, which may be changed or customized to
match user requirements and preferences.
How it works
The default settings are to be loaded or restored in the following situations:
1. Installing the Eternity in a country other than India.
ETERNITY provides default settings to match country/region-specific requirements of users worldwide.
The default settings are set to match user requirements of India.
So, you must select the appropriate “Region” for the country/region in which the system is installed.
After selecting the 'Region', default the system.
The system will load the default settings for the country/geographical region where the system is installed.
The system is designed to work efficiently with the default settings. So, if the country/region-specific
default settings match their requirements, you may not even need to alter or customize the values of
various parameters,
They may work with default settings for the most part, customizing only some of the parameters to match
their specific requirements.
The country-specific default settings of various parameters that will be loaded on changing the 'Region' are
presented in the table below. For default values of Trunk Access Codes, Emergency Numbers, Distinctive
Rings, for various countries refer the respective topics.
Default
Default Default Default
Country Country DST Distinctive Abbr.
Time DST CPTG DKP Opr TAC
Code Name Schedule Ring Dialing
Zone Mode Language
Type
001 Afghanistan GMT+04:30 English
002 Algeria GMT+01:00 English
003 Antigua and GMT-04:00 English
Barbuda
004 Argentina GMT-03:00 04 Spanish
005 Australia GMT+08:00 Scheduled 2 05 English 9
(Perth)
006 Australia GMT+09:30 Scheduled 2 05 English 9
(Note2)
(Adelaide)
1092 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Default
Default Default Default
Country Country DST Distinctive Abbr.
Time DST CPTG DKP Opr TAC
Code Name Schedule Ring Dialing
Zone Mode Language
Type
007 Australia GMT+10:00 05 English 9
(Brisbane,
Canberra,
Melbourne,
Sydney)
008 Austria GMT+01:00 Scheduled 1 German 9
009 Bahamas GMT-05:00 English 9
010 Bahrain GMT+03:00 Scheduled 3 English 9
011 Bangladesh GMT+06:00 English
012 Belarus GMT+02:00 English
013 Belgium GMT+01:00 Scheduled 2 French 0
014 Bhutan GMT+06:00 English
015 Bolivia GMT-04:00 Spanish
016 Bosnia and GMT+01:00 English
Herzegovina
017 Botswana GMT+02:00 English
018 Brunei GMT+08:00 English
019 Brazil GMT-02:00 06 Portuguese 0
(Fernando De
Noronha)
020 Brazil GMT-03:00 Scheduled 4 06 Portuguese 0
(Brasilia, Rio
de Janeiro,
Sao Paulo)
021 Brazil GMT-04:00 06 Portuguese 0
(Manaus)
022 Brazil (Acre) GMT-05:00 06 Portuguese 0
023 Bulgaria GMT+02:00 English
024 Cambodia GMT+07:00 English
025 Cameroon GMT+01:00 English
026 Canada (St. GMT-03:30 Scheduled 5 03 English T3 0 89-T-XXX 6
John's)
027 Canada GMT-04:00 Scheduled 5 03 English T3 0 89-T-XXX 6
(Halifax)
028 Canada GMT-05:00 Scheduled 5 03 English T3 0 89-T-XXX 6
(Montreal,
Ottawa,
Toronto)
029 Canada GMT-06:00 Scheduled 5 03 English T3 0 89-T-XXX 6
(Winnipeg)
030 Canada GMT-07:00 Scheduled 5 03 English T3 0 89-T-XXX 6
(Calgary)
031 Canada GMT-08:00 Scheduled 5 03 English T3 0 89-T-XXX 6
(Vancouver)
032 Chile GMT-04:00 Scheduled 6 Spanish 0
033 China GMT+08:00 08 English 0
034 Colombia GMT-05:00 Spanish
035 Costa Rica GMT-06:00 Spanish
036 Croatia GMT+01:00 English
037 Cuba GMT-05:00 Scheduled 18 Spanish 0
038 Cyprus GMT+02:00 English
039 Czech GMT+01:00 English
Republic
040 Denmark GMT+01:00 Scheduled 7 English 0
041 Egypt GMT+02:00 Scheduled 11 09 English 9
042 Fiji GMT+12:00 English
043 Finland GMT+02:00 Scheduled 8 English 9
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1093
Default
Default Default Default
Country Country DST Distinctive Abbr.
Time DST CPTG DKP Opr TAC
Code Name Schedule Ring Dialing
Zone Mode Language
Type
044 France GMT+01:00 Scheduled 2 10 French 9
045 Germany GMT+01:00 Scheduled 2 11 German 9
046 Greece GMT+02:00 Scheduled 2 12 English 9
047 Guyana GMT-04:00 English
048 Hong Kong GMT+08:00 English 9
049 Hungary GMT+02:00 Scheduled 2 English 9
050 India GMT+05:30 01 English T1 9 69-T-XXX 8
051 Indonesia GMT+07:00 14 English
052 Iran GMT+03:30 15 English 9
053 Iraq GMT+03:00 Scheduled 9 16 English 9
054 Ireland GMT Scheduled 7 English 9
055 Israel GMT+02:00 17 English
056 Italy GMT+01:00 Scheduled 2 18 Italian 9
057 Japan GMT+09:00 19 English
058 Jordan GMT+02:00 English
059 Kazakhstan GMT+06:00 English
060 Kenya GMT+03:00 20 English
061 Korea - North GMT+09:00 21 English
062 Korea - South GMT+09:00 English
063 Kuwait GMT+03:00 English
064 Kyrgyzstan GMT+06:00 Scheduled 10 English 9
065 Lebanon GMT+02:00 Scheduled 12 English 9
066 Libya GMT+02:00 English
067 Malaysia GMT+08:00 22 English 0 6
(Note1)
068 Maldives GMT+05:00 English
069 Mauritius GMT+04:00 English
070 Mexico GMT-06:00 Scheduled 3 03 Spanish T3 0 89-T-XXX 6
(Mexico City)
071 Mexico GMT-07:00 Scheduled 3 03 Spanish T3 0 89-T-XXX 6
(Chihuahua)
072 Mexico GMT-08:00 Scheduled 3 03 Spanish T3 0 89-T-XXX 6
(Tijuana)
073 Mongolia GMT+08:00 English
074 Mozambique GMT+02:00 Portuguese
075 Myanmar GMT+06:30 English
076 Namibia GMT+01:00 Scheduled 13 03 English T3 9 89-T-XXX 6
077 Nepal GMT+05:45 English
078 Netherlands GMT+01:00 English
079 New Zealand GMT+12:00 Scheduled 14 24 English 9
080 Nigeria GMT+01:00 English
081 Norway GMT+01:00 Scheduled 15 English 9
082 Oman GMT+04:00 English
083 Pakistan GMT+05:00 English
084 Paraguay GMT-04:00 Scheduled 16 Spanish 9
085 Peru GMT-05:00 Spanish
086 Philippines GMT+08:00 25 English
087 Poland GMT+01:00 Scheduled 1 26 English 9
088 Portugal GMT Scheduled 7 27 Portuguese 9
089 Qatar GMT+03:00 English
090 Romania GMT+02:00 English
091 Russia GMT+03:00 Scheduled 1 28 English 9
(Moscow, St.
Petersburg)
1094 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Default
Default Default Default
Country Country DST Distinctive Abbr.
Time DST CPTG DKP Opr TAC
Code Name Schedule Ring Dialing
Zone Mode Language
Type
092 Russia GMT+06:00 Scheduled 1 28 English 9
(Novosibirsk)
093 Russia GMT+10:00 Scheduled 1 28 English 9
(Vladivostok)
094 Singapore GMT+08:00 30 English 9
095 Slovakia GMT+01:00 English
096 South Africa GMT+02:00 31 English
097 Spain GMT+01:00 Scheduled 1 32 Spanish 9
098 Sri Lanka GMT+05:30 English
099 Sudan GMT+03:00 English
100 Sweden GMT+01:00 Scheduled 2 English 9
101 Switzerland GMT+01:00 Scheduled 2 German 9
102 Syria GMT+02:00 Scheduled 17 English 9
103 Taiwan GMT+08:00 English 0
104 Tajikistan GMT+05:00 English
105 Thailand GMT+07:00 33 English
106 Turkey GMT+02:00 34 English 9
107 Uganda GMT+03:00 English
108 Ukraine GMT+02:00 English
109 United Arab GMT+04:00 35 English 9
Emirates
110 United GMT Scheduled 7 02 English T2 9 69-T-XXX 8
Kingdom
111 United States GMT-05:00 Scheduled 3 02 English T3 0 81-T-XXX 6
(Atlanta,
Augusta,
Boston,
Charlotte,
Columbus,
Detroit,
Indiapolis,
Miami, NY,
Philadelphia,
Washington)
112 United States GMT-06:00 Scheduled 3 02 English T3 0 81-T-XXX 6
(Chicago,
Dallas, Des
Moines,
Memphis,
Minneapolis,
New Orleans,
Oklahoma,
Omaha, St.
Louis)
113 United States GMT-07:00 Scheduled 3 02 English T3 0 81-T-XXX 6
(Albuquerque,
Boise,
Cheyenne,
Denver, Salt
Lake City)
114 United States GMT-08:00 Scheduled 3 02 English T3 0 81-T-XXX 6
(Las Vegas,
Los Angeles,
Phoenix, San
Francisco,
Seattle)
115 United States GMT-09:00 Scheduled 3 02 English T3 0 81-T-XXX 6
(Juneau)
116 United States GMT-10:00 02 English T3 0 81-T-XXX 6
(Hawaii)
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1095
Default
Default Default Default
Country Country DST Distinctive Abbr.
Time DST CPTG DKP Opr TAC
Code Name Schedule Ring Dialing
Zone Mode Language
Type
117 Uzbekistan GMT+05:00 English
118 Venezuela GMT-04:30 Spanish
119 Vietnam GMT+07:00 English
120 Yemen GMT+03:00 English
121 Yugoslavia GMT+02:00 English
122 Zambia GMT+02:00 English
123 Zimbabwe GMT+02:00 English
2. Installing the Eternity in a Hospitality Application.
The two main applications of the ETERNITY are:
• Enterprise application to meet the communication requirements of businesses.
• Hospitality application to meet the specific requirements of Hotels and Hospitals.
In addition to the common set of PBX features, there is a distinct set of in-built features for each of these
applications. When ETERNITY is to be installed in any of the two application scenarios, the 'Customer
Profile' - whether the user is an Enterprise or a Hotel - is to be defined at the time of installation.
When the Customer Profile is defined, all features specific to the application Enterprise/Hotel, along with
their default settings are loaded. By default the Customer Profile of ETERNITY is defined as 'Enterprise'.
Refer the ETERNITY Hospitality System Manual to know more.
3. Malfunctioning of the System.
When there is a system malfunction, possibly caused by a programming error that you are unable to
diagnose, you may restore default settings.
Restoring Default Settings
Default settings can be loaded or restored from the programming mode (software default).
To be able to do this, you must have the Programming Password, also referred to as the "SE password".
Whenever you restore the default settings in the system, all the programmable parameters except Network
Port Parameters158 and the “Region” will be set back to their default values.
Restoring Default Settings using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
158. The IP Address, Subnet Mask, Primary DNS, Secondary DNS, Host Name, Domain Name, DHCP Server Address.
1096 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Click the link 'Default the System'.
• You will be prompted whether you want to default the system.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1097
• Click 'OK'.
• Enter Reverse SE Password on the prompt.
• The SE password you enter must be the current password. For Example: if it is 1234, enter 4321 and click
OK.
1098 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• The system will restart and load the default settings. It takes 50 seconds to load default settings. The
system count down in the seconds will appear on your screen as “Loading Default Settings...Please Wait
for ____ seconds.
• You are returned to the Login page of Jeeves.
• You may now enter programming mode again.
Restoring Default Settings using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
• Dial command 5302-Reverse SE Password.
For Example: if your current SE password is 1234, you must dial 5302-4321 to restore default settings.
• The names programmed for the DKP and SLT will disappear and the default flexible numbers, i.e.
extension numbers assigned to the DKP and SLT stations will appear.
Without the SE Password, you cannot restore default values via the software. If you forget the SE
Password, you must resort to hardware default of the SE-Programming Password first. Refer the topic “”
later in this section for instructions on restoring the default SE Password.
Restoring Default Network Port Parameters using Jeeves
You can also set the Network Port parameters to their default values.
• Log into Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the link ‘Master Ethernet Port Parameters’.
• Click the 'Default' button.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1099
The system will default the Network Port Parameters.
You cannot default “Region”; you can only select a region to load the country-specific default settings and
default the system.
1100 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Department Call
What's this?
Department Call enables you to group together extensions of a particular department so that callers can reach
anyone in the department by dialing a common access code assigned to the department.
Calls made to such groups of extensions are called Department Calls and the access code used to make
department calls is called Department Number.
This feature is useful in situations where any member of a department may interact with callers, as for instance in a
information counter, a customer care cell, a technical support team, etc.
Callers can also reach individual extensions in a Department group by dialing the extension number.
ETERNITY supports the formation of 16 department groups. The member extensions of a department group may
be single line telephones (SLT), digital key phones (DKP), SIP Extensions, ISDN Terminals.
How it works
Extensions A, B, C, D are grouped as a Department with the access code 3901.
Internal Calls
• Extension E dials 3901 to call the Department.
• The system checks E's Class of Service for the Department Call feature.
• The feature is enabled. The system checks if Rotation is enabled in the routing group assigned to the
Department.
• The Rotation flag is enabled. The system lands the call on the extension which is set to ring first.
• Extension A, configured as the first landing destination rings for the duration of the Ring Timer
(configurable; default: 15 seconds).
• A answers the call. Speech established between A and E.
• If A does not answer, the system hunts for the next extension in the group to land the call, B.
• B starts ringing for the duration of the Ring Timer.
• If Continuous Ring is enabled on A, A will continue to ring even as B is ringing.
• If B does not answer the call at the end of the timer, the system hunts for the next extension, C.
• If B has Continuous Ring enabled, B will continue to ring even as C is ringing.
• If the call is not answered even after hunting the last extension, the system will loop back and start from
the first extension once again.
External Calls
Department Calls can be made using DID. For example, a company may use DID to have callers who want
information only to dial the Information Department instead of waiting for the Operator.
• An external caller places a call to Department 3901 using DID.
• The system checks if Rotation is enabled in the routing group assigned to the Department.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1101
• As the Rotation flag is enabled, and the first call was landed on A, the system lands the call on the next
extension B.
• Extension B rings for the duration of the Ring Timer (configurable; default: 15 seconds). If the Continuous
Ring flag is enabled for B, it will continue to ring, even as the system hunts for another extension in the
group to land the call.
• A third call internal/external made to Department 3901.
• The same process as described above will be repeated.
• But the system will land the call on extension C first, because Rotation flag is enabled on this routing
group.
• The subsequent incoming calls will land on the extension which is next to the one that received the last
call. So the next call to the Department will land on extension D, the one thereafter on A, and so forth.
Thus for each call, the system will hunt for a landing extension as per the Rotation set for the routing group. The
extensions will ring for the duration of the Ring Timer, either continuously or one-by-one (as per the Continuous
Flag configured), and according to the sequence in which the extensions in the group are arranged.
Rotation ensures equal distribution of call traffic. If Rotation is disabled, the fresh call will always land on first
extension of the Department group.
Department Group and ISDN Terminal: When more than two ISDN terminals connected to the same BRI
port are configured as members of a Department group, if a call is made to this group using the department
group access code, only two ISDN terminals connected to the BRI port will ring. This limitation is because
of the BRI protocol.
How to configure
The functioning of this feature requires you to do the following:
• Create Department Groups.
• Configure “Routing Group” (each routing group consisting of extensions related to a Department) and
assign the routing groups and appropriate access codes to the department groups.
• Enable 'Department Call' in the Class of Service (COS) of extensions that are to be allowed to make
Department calls.
Creating Department Groups
• On a sheet of paper, draw a five-column table.
• Decide the number of department groups you want to create, for example: 4 groups.
• Group all the extensions you want to put in each department group. You cannot group more than 32
extensions in a single department group.
• Decide in what sequence the extensions in each group should ring, i.e. which extensions should ring first,
second, third, and so forth.
• Decide the access code you want to assign to each department group.
1102 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Your table may look like this:
Extensions to be included as members
Department Access Code
Group Index to be assigned SIP ISDN
SLT DKP
Extension Terminal
3010, 3011,
1 3901 2001, 2002, 2003 3301, 3302
3012
2 3902 2015, 2020, 2021 3015, 3020 3305
16 3916 2023, 2024, 2025 3025 3315
The access codes for the department groups and extensions in this table are default access codes.
• Now, with this information ready, you may configure the department groups using Jeeves or dialing the
relevant SE commands from a Telephone.
Enabling Department Call in Class of Service
To be able to make Department Calls, internal users, i.e. extensions, must have this feature enabled in their Class
of Service group.
In the default Station Basic Feature Template Number 01 is assigned to all the extensions of ETERNITY, the
default COS group 01 in the template has 'Department Call' included in the ‘Basic Features’. So all extensions can
make Department calls. You cannot deny this feature to any extension, without denying the entire set of Basic
Features.
If you wish to allow this feature to member extensions only, retain this feature in the COS group of member
extensions only, and disable this feature in the COS group of all other extensions. For this, you may create
separate templates for member extensions and other extensions.
Refer the topic “Class of Service (COS)” and “Station Basic Feature Template” for instructions.
Configuring Department Groups using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1103
• Click the link Department Groups.
Creating Department Groups
• To create a Department group, assign an Access Code for the department group against the Index
Number.
By default, the Access Codes assigned to Department groups are from 3901 to 3916.
If you decide not to use the default access codes, ensure that the access code you assign to each
department group is unique and does not match with any SLT, DKP, ISDN, SIP Extension, DOP access
code or any feature access code of the Dial Phase. Refer the topic “Access Codes” to know more.
• Now, enter the Routing Group, i.e. the number of the group you created for this department.
Where multiple departments exist, you must create separate routing groups for each department group.
This can be done in two ways:
• create the routing groups first and simply enter the relevant routing group number against the
Department Group Index (to which you have assigned the access code).
OR
1104 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Click the link of the column Routing Groups to open the page.
• Choose the Routing Group number (from 01 to 96) you want to assign to the department group. In each
routing group you can include a maximum 32 extensions as 'members'.
• For each routing group you want to assign to a department group, configure the following parameters:
• Rotation Flag: With this flag, you can enable or disable the rotation of calls in the routing group
which has multiple 'member' extensions. When enabled, each fresh call will land on the extension
which is next to the one that received the last call. This ensures equal distribution of incoming calls
to all the destinations within the routing group. The flag has no relevance if the routing group has
only one member extension.
• Member Type: Select the 'Member Type' from this list. If the extension you want to add as member
of the group is an SLT, select SLT; if it is a DKP, select DKP as member type. Similarly, select ISDN
if the extension is an ISDN Terminal and SIP Extn. if the extension is a SIP extension. Include only
as many extensions as you want in the routing group and set the remaining Member Types to
'None'. For example: if you want to include only two extensions in the routing group, set the Member
Type in the remaining columns (Member 03-Member 32) to 'None.'
• Port Number: Enter the software port number on which the SLT/DKP/SIP Extension/ISDN terminal
to be grouped is attached.
• Ring Timer(s): This timer defines the time for which the extension, on which the call lands, should
ring. By default, the ring timer is set to 015 seconds and can be changed.
• Continuous Ring Flag: With this flag, you can set a extension to ring continuously until the call is
answered. The first extension will continue to ring even as the system hunts for other extensions in
the routing group to land the call. If the call still remains unanswered, the system will return the call
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1105
to the first extension once again. This flag is of no relevance, if there is only one member extension
in a routing group.
• Repeat the above steps to include other extensions in the routing group.
• Click Submit to save your settings.
For example:
The Customer Care Department of a company has four extensions: 201, 202, 203 and 204 (on software ports 001,
002, 003, and 004 respectively), which needs to be grouped for Department Calls.
Extensions 201 and 202 are SLTs. Extensions 203 and 204 are DKPs.
Requirement: The company wants the following:
1. Call traffic should be distributed equally on all four extensions.
2. Ring sequence should be 201, 202, 203, and 204 (first to last).
3. First 201 should ring for 20 seconds.
4. If no reply, 201 should continue to ring and 202 should ring for 10 seconds.
5. If still no reply, 201 should continue to ring and 203 should ring for 15 seconds.
6. If still no reply, 201 should continue to ring and 204 should ring for 20 seconds.
7. 51 should be the access code for this department group.
Solution: Select a routing group, for example 03, and configure as follows:
1. 201 as member 01, with member type SLT, and Port number 001.
2. 202 as member 02, with member type SLT, and Port number 002.
3. 203 as member 03, with member type DKP, and Port number 003
4. 204 as member 04, with member type DKP, and Port number 004.
1106 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Set ‘member type’ of members 5 to 32 in Routing Group 3 to 'None'.
1. Enable the 'Rotation Flag' on routing group number 03 to distribute call traffic.
2. Enable the 'Continuous Ring Flag' for member 01 (201) and set the 'Ring Timer' to '20 seconds.
3. Set the Ring Timer of member 02 (202) to 10 seconds. Disable 'Continuous Ring' flag.
4. Retain the Ring Timer of member 03 (203) as default 15 seconds. Disable 'Continuous Ring' flag.
5. Set the Ring Timer of member 04 (204) to 20 seconds. Disable 'Continuous Ring' flag.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1107
6. Assign 51 as access code and routing group 03 to the Customer Care Department.
• Click Submit to save your settings.
Configuring Department Groups using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To create a routing group with members, dial:
• 6502-1-Routing Group-Destination Index-Port Type-Port Number
Where,
Routing Group is the number of the Routing Group 01 to 96.
Destination Index is from 01 to 32.
Port Type is the 'Member type':
00 for None
01 for SLT
02 for DKP
28 for ISDN terminal
34 for SIP Extension
Port Number is the Software port number on which the member extension SLT, DKP, SIP Extension,
ISDN Terminal is attached.
Software port number of the SLT, from 001 to 512.
Software port number of the DKP, from 001 to 128.
Software port number of the ISDN Terminal, from 01 to 64.
Software port number of the SIP extension, from 001 to 999.
1108 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
For Example: To include the four extensions in the above example in Routing Group 03, dial:
• 6502-1-03-01-01-001 to include extension 201.
• 6502-1-03-02-01-002 to include extension 202.
• 6502-1-03-03-02-003 to include extension 203.
• 6502-1-03-04-02-004 to include extension 204.
To set the Ring Timer for each member extension in the routing group, dial:
• 6503-1-Routing Group-Destination Index-Ring Timer
Where,
Routing Group is the number of the Routing Group 01 to 96.
Destination Index is number of the member extension in the routing group from 01 to 32.
Ring Timer is from 000 to 255 seconds. (Default: 015 seconds)
For Example: To set the Ring Timer for the individual extensions of the Routing Group 03 in the above
example, dial:
• 6503-1-03-01-020 to make extension 201 ring for 20 seconds.
• 6503-1-03-02-010 to make extension 202 ring for 10 seconds.
• 6503-1-03-03-015 to make extension 203 ring for 15 seconds.
• 6503-1-03-04-020 to make extension 204 ring for 20 seconds.
To set the Continuous Ring Flag for extensions in the routing group, dial:
• 6504-1-Routing Group-Destination Index-Flag
Where,
Routing Group is the number of the Routing Group 01 to 96.
Destination Index is the number of the member extension in the routing group from 01 to 32.
Continuous Ring Flag is:
0 for disable continuous ring (each member extension in the group will ring for the duration of the 'Ring
Timer' for the group).
1 for enable continuous ring (the first extension in the group will ring till the call is answered).
For Example: To enable/disable the Continuous Ring Flag for the individual extensions of the Routing
Group 03 in the above example, dial:
• 6503-1-03-01-1 to enable the flag on extension 201.
• 6503-1-03-02-0 to disable the flag on extension 202.
• 6503-1-03-03-0 to disable the flag on extension 203.
• 6503-1-03-04-0 to disable the flag on extension 204.
To turn Rotation ON for the Routing Group, dial:
• 6505-1-Routing Group-Rotation Flag to enable rotation on a single routing group.
• 6505-2-Routing Group-Routing Group-Rotation Flag to enable rotation on a range of routing
groups.
• 6505-*-Rotation Flag to enable rotation on all routing groups.
Where,
Routing Group is the number of the Routing Group 01 to 96.
Rotation Flag is:
0 for Disable (fresh call lands on the first extension within the group).
1 for Enable (fresh call lands on the extension next to the one that received the previous calls).
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1109
For Example: To enable Rotation Flag for Routing Group 03 as in the above example, dial 6505-1-03-
1.
To assign routing group to the department group, dial:
• 2001-1-Department Group Index-Routing Group
Where,
Department Group Index is from 01 to 16.
Routing Group is from 01 to 96. Default: 01.
For Example: To assign Routing Group 03 to Department Group 01 (Customer Care) as in the above
example, dial 2001-1-01-03.
To clear the routing group assigned to department group, dial:
• 2001-1-Department Group Index-00 to clear the routing group of a single department group.
• 2001-2-Department Group Index-Department Group Index-00 to clear the routing groups of a range
of department groups.
• 2001-*-00 to clear the routing groups of all department groups.
To assign an access code (i.e. Department Number) to a department group, dial:
• 3113-1-Department Group Index-Access Code
• 3113-2-Department Group Index-Department Group Index-Access Code
• 3113-*-Access Code
Where,
Department Group Index is from 01 to 16.
Access Code is a string of a maximum of 6 digits.
Terminate the command string with #* if the Access Code has fewer than 6 digits.
For Example: To assign '51' as Access Code for the Department Group 01 as in the above example,
dial 3113-1-01-51-#*
To clear the access code assigned to a department group, dial:
• 3113-1-Department Group Index-#* to clear access code assigned to a single department group.
• 3113-2-Department Group Index-Department Group Index-#* to clear access codes assigned to a
range of department groups.
• 3113-*-#* to clear access codes of all department groups.
To default the access codes assigned to Department groups, dial:
• 3163-1-Department Group Index to default the access code of a single department group.
• 3163-2-Department Group Index-Department Group Index to default the access codes of a range of
department groups.
• 3163-* to default the access codes of all department groups.
• Exit SE mode.
1110 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
How to use
Making a Department Call
Making a department call is the same as calling another extension.
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users
• Press DSS Key assigned to the desired Department Group.
OR
• Dial the desired Department Group Number (default: 3901-3916).
• You get Ring Back Tone as the call lands on an extension within the department group.
• Talk when the call is answered.
• Go Idle or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.
For SLT Users
• Lift handset
• Dial the desired Department Group Number (default: 3901-3916).
• You get Ring Back Tone as the call lands on an extension within the department group.
• Talk when the call is answered.
• Replace handset.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1111
Dial By Name
What's this?
Dial By Name enables extension users to call another extension or an external party by dialing the name of the
person, instead of dialing their telephone number.
This feature is accessible only to users of the proprietary digital key phones and the Extended IP phones of Matrix.
With Dial By Name users need not remember the desired party's telephone number or short codes, i.e.
“Abbreviated Dialing” codes.
For each extension, the database for names used in Dial by Name is drawn from:
• the Personal Directory, which is assigned to each extension, wherein up to 25 external party numbers
along with their names may stored. The system uses the Personal Directory to dial external parties by their
names. See “Abbreviated Dialing” to know more.
• Global Directory, which is assigned to the extension in its “Class of Service (COS)”. The Global Directory
is a system-wide list of external party numbers and names. Up to 999 numbers can be stored in this
directory, and parts of the Global Directory (Part 1, 2, 3) can be assigned to each extension in its Class of
Service. See “Abbreviated Dialing” to know more.
• Names of Extensions, which are names of users/departments groups. Their names are assigned to SLT,
DKP and SIP extensions to identify the extension users. Names of Extensions are necessary for making
internal calls using the Dial By Name feature.
How it works
• Extension user presses the DSS Key assigned to 'Dial By Name' feature.
• On EON48 model and on SETU VP248, press the 'Names' key.
• On EON42 model, press the 'Dial by Name' key
• The prompt <Name: > appears on the phone display.
• User enters the name of the desired party159.
• For example, user wants to call Midas Biz, and enters the letter 'M' using the keypad.
• The system displays in alphabetical order, all names starting with 'M'. These numbers are drawn from the
Personal and Global Directories assigned to the extension and the Extension Names programmed in the
system.
• User scrolls the list using the Up/Down navigation keys to reach the desired contact's name.
OR
Instead of scrolling the entire list, the user enters more than one initial letter of the contact's name. The
search is narrowed down to more accurate matches. The phone displays the matching entries in the
directory.
• The user must select the desired name by pressing 'Enter' Key.
159. The process of entering the names is the same as when writing text messages (SMS) from a cell phone. The keys must be
pressed multiple times in quick succession to enter the desired alphabet.
1112 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• The system dials out the number stored under the selected name. The name and number are displayed on
the user's phone.
How to configure
For this feature to work, the following must programmed:
1. DSS Key: A direct station selection (DSS) key must be programmed for the Dial by Name feature. Without
the DSS Key this feature will not be accessible.
The factory-default key map of EON48 and SETU VP248, both phones have the DSS Key labeled as
'Names'.
In EON42, the DSS key is labeled as 'Dial by Name'.
2. Global Directory: The names of the external parties must be programmed against their respective
telephone numbers in the directory. Refer the topic “Abbreviated Dialing” for instructions on programming
the Global Directories.
3. Personal Directory: The names of the external parties must be programmed against their respective
telephone numbers in the Personal Directory. Refer the topic “Abbreviated Dialing” for instructions on
programming the Personal Directories.
4. Extension Names: Extensions may be SLTs, DKPs, ISDN Terminals or SIP extensions. Refer the topics
related to configuration of extensions160.
5. Class of Service: Dial By Name is allowed to all DKP users. However, the use of this feature is related to
the following features, which must be enabled in the Class of Service of the DKP and SIP extension users:
• 'Internal Calls'- This is to be enabled so that the station can call other stations.
• Global Directory Part 1
• Global Directory Part 2
• Global Directory Part 3.
Global Directory Part 1 is assigned to the default CoS group 01 assigned to all stations in the default
Station Basic Feature Template 01.
If you want the names to be drawn from Global Directory Part 2 and Part 3, provided these are
programmed, you must enable these two directories in the CoS of the DKP and SIP extensions.
Refer “Abbreviated Dialing”, for instructions on programming the Global Directory.
Refer “Class of Service (COS)” and “Station Basic Feature Template” for programming instructions on how
to enable a feature in the CoS and how to apply it on extensions.
The system will display the names exactly as they have been programmed in the Personal and Global
Directories and the SLT/DKP/ISDN Parameters. Refer the topic “Configuring DKP Extensions”.
160. You may also refer the instructions provided under the topic Configuring Extensions: “Configuring SLT Extensions”, “Configuring
DKP Extensions”, “Configuring ISDN Terminals”.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1113
How to use
For EON42 Users
• Press the 'Dial By Name' key.
• You get the prompt: 'Name:'
• Enter the initial letters for the contact's name.
• You will be able to see only one matching entry at a time on your phone's display.
• Scroll with the Up/Down navigation keys to reach the desired contact's name on the list.
• Press 'Enter' key to select the name.
• The system displays the name and number being dialed out.
• You get Ring Back Tone or Busy Tone.
For EON48 and Extended IP Phone Users
• Press 'Names' key.
• You get the prompt: 'Name'.
• Enter the initial letters for the contact's name.
• The number of matching entries that will appear at a time on your phone's display will vary according to
your phone's LCD display capacity.
• Scroll with the Up/Down navigation keys to reach the desired contact's name on the list.
• Press 'Enter' key to select the name.
• The system displays the name and number being dialed out.
• You get Ring Back Tone or Busy Tone.
Entered the wrong alphabet?
• Go ON-Hook.
• Go OFF-Hook.
• Press the DSS Key labeled 'Names'/'Dial By Name' again.
• Enter the name/initial letters of the contact's name.
1114 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Dialed Number Directory
What's this?
Dialed Number Directory is a Digital Key Phone feature, available only to the users of the proprietary DKP, Eon.
It is the list of numbers dialed out from the DKP, similar to the call history of recently dialed calls on a cell phone.
ETERNITY retains up to 16 numbers dialed out from a DKP in a directory.
These numbers may have been dialed out using features like Abbreviated Dialing, Quick Dial, Redial, Walk-In
Class of Service, or may be a simple outgoing call made by directly dialing the external number.
How it works
• When a DKP extension user makes an outgoing external call, the number is stored in the Redial Number
List.
• The list has a capacity of storing a maximum of 16 recently dialed numbers.
• The list is updated using the First-In First-Out logic, whereby the earliest dialed number is replaced with
the most recently dialed number.
• To use this feature, the DKP user must invoke the “Last Number Redial” feature.
• Doing so, the Redial Number List will appear on the phone display.
• The user may now navigate the list, select the number to be dialed out.
• The system will dial out the selected number using the same Outgoing Trunk Bundle Group used to place
this call earlier.
• If the number had been dialed earlier using Abbreviated Dialing, the system will check for Toll Control
when dialing out the number again from the dialed number directory161.
How to configure
No specific programming required.
How to use
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users Only!
• Press DSS Key assigned to Redial function.
OR
161. Recall that the system does not check for Toll Control when Abbreviated Dialing is used.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1115
Dial 7
• The list of last dialed calls appear on your phone's display.
• Scroll with up/down navigation key to reach the desired number.
• Press 'Enter' key.
• The desired number is dialed out and appears on your phone's display.
• You get ring back tone.
• Talk when speech is established.
• Go ON-Hook after the conversation has ended.
1116 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Digest Authentication
What's this?
Digest Authentication is a challenge-based authentication service of SIP to authenticate the identity of the
originator of SIP request in the INVITE message. The recipient of the request can ascertain whether or not the
originator of the request is authorised to make the request. When the digest credentials of the originator—User
Name and Password—in the INVITE message are authenticated and accepted by the recipient, the originator and
the recipient are connected.
ETERNITY supports Digest Authentication. You may use Digest Authentication to
• restrict access to ETERNITY to specific callers.
• prevent unwanted or malicious calls.
How it works
The Digest Authentication feature works on the basis of the Digest Authentication Table, in which the credentials,
namely the User Name and Passwords of trusted/authorised calling party SIP devices are stored. You must
configure this table. The Digest Authentication Table is common for all SIP trunks on which this feature is enabled.
When you enable this feature on a SIP trunk, for all incoming calls (SIP requests),
• ETERNITY will challenge the identity of the calling party (the SIP device initiating the request) to send its
digest credentials.
• When the calling party sends its credentials, ETERNITY authenticates the credentials by matching it with
its Digest Authentication Table.
• If a match is found, the calling party will be authenticated and the call will be allowed on the SIP trunk.
• If no match is found, ETERNITY will consider it as invalid authentication information and reject the call.
How to configure
To use this feature on SIP Trunks, you must do the following:
• Enable Digest Authentication on the SIP trunks you want to use this feature.
• Configure the Digest Authentication Table.
You can configure the Digest Authentication Table using Jeeves and from a telephone.
Configuring Digest Authentication using Jeeves
• Log into Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1117
• Click the VoIP Configuration link.
• Under VoIP Configuration, click the Digest Authentication Table link.
The Digest Authentication table opens.
1118 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• In the User ID field, enter the User ID to be authenticated. The User ID must be within 40 characters.
• In the Password field, enter the corresponding Password. The Password must be within 16 characters.
• Click Submit to save entries.
• Now, enable Digest Authentication on the desired SIP trunks. For instructions, see “Configuring SIP
Trunks”.
• You may log out of Jeeves
Configuring Digest Authentication using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To configure a SIP-ID in the Digest Authentication Table, dial:
• 4118-Index-User ID
Where,
Index is from 01 to 99.
User ID may have a maximum of 40 characters.
If the User ID has fewer than 40 characters, terminate the command with #* if using an SLT or press the
'Enter' key if using a DKP.
Default: Blank.
To configure the User Password for the User ID, dial:
• 4119-Index-User Password
Where,
Index is from 01 to 99. The User Password should be configured at the same index as the User ID.
User Password may have a maximum for 16 characters. If the User Password has fewer than 16
characters, terminate the command string with #* if using an SLT or press the 'Enter' key if using a DKP.
Default: Blank.
• Exit SE mode.
For SE Command for enabling Digest Authentication on SIP trunks, see “Configuring SIP Trunks”.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1119
Digital Input Port (DIP)
What's this?
The ETERNITY provides a single reliable, solid-state Digital Input Port (DIP) on all models of ETERNITY. Any
external sensor device or panic switch like an object sensor, smoke sensor, glass-break detector, water level
sensor, can be connected to the DIP.
The DIP is located on “The Master Card” of the ETERNITY ME, on “The CPU Card” of the ETERNITY GE, and on
“The Door Phone Card” in the ETERNITY PE.
The DIP can be used to trigger “Automated Control Applications” wherein, a gadget connected to the Digital Output
Port can be turned ON and OFF on instigation from the DIP.
A typical example of an automated control application would be of a fire alarm or a smoke sensor connected to the
DIP. Whenever it senses smoke, it sends an instigation to switch ON the hooter or siren connected to the Digital
Output Port.
Another example would be an object sensor for turning on lights on the premises. This sensor connected to the DIP
sends instigation to the Digital Output Port, whenever it senses the presence of persons or objects on the premises.
The Digital Output Port turns on the light on receiving this instigation from the DIP.
The DIP can be used for triggering Security Alarms, by connecting a fire/smoke sensor, a break-in or glass-break
sensor to it.
How it works
• A sensor is connected to the DIP.
• The sensor detects an event.
• The sensor sends a signal to instigate the DIP.
• The system waits for the duration of the Minimum Instigation Time (programmable; default: 01 second).
This is the time for which the instigation signal from the sensor should remain present on the DIP for it to
be identified as a genuine signal.
• The DIP responds according to the application for which it is used.
• If the DIP is being used for an “Automated Control Applications”, the system will instigate the “Digital
Output Port (DOP)” which will turn ON or OFF the Digital Output Port and hence the gadget connected
to it on receiving the instigation.
• If the DIP is being used for Security Alarm and Reporting, the system will trigger the alarm device -
hooter/siren - connected to the Digital Output Port or it will make a call to the external number or the
Routing Group programmed as destination for triggering Security Alarms.
• It will also ‘report’ the alarm call to the group of extensions programmed to receive Security Reporting
calls.
1120 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
How to connect an External Device to the DIP
The DIP has a two-wire, push-in (spring clamp action) connector to attach the sensor device.
Refer the chapter “Installing ETERNITY” for step-by-step instructions on connecting a sensor device to the DIP of
your model of ETERNITY.
Do not connect devices that do not conform to the specifications of the DIP!
How to configure
Configuring DIP parameters using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access Mode.
• Click the 'System Parameters' link.
• Click 'DIP' to open the page.
Whether you are using the DIP for an automated control application or for Security Alarm and Reporting,
you must configure the following parameters:
• Enable DIP: select this check box to enable the port.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1121
• Instigation Signal: Select the appropriate instigation signal for the DIP: from High or Low, depending
on the application for which it is being used.
• 'High' state signifies that the DIP is normally open. DIP should be programmed as 'High' when the
sensor connected to the DIP keeps the Loop open and closes it to signal an event.
• 'Low' state signifies that the DIP is normally closed. DIP should be programmed as 'Low' when the
sensor connected to the DIP normally keeps the Loop closed and opens/breaks it to signal an
event.
• Minimum Instigation Time: This is the time for which the instigation signal from the sensor device
should remain present on the DIP to be recognized by the DIP as a genuine signal. The range of this
timer is from 01 to 99 seconds. By default the Minimum Instigation Time is set to 01 second. You may
set the 'Minimum Instigation Time' to the desired value.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
Configuring DIP parameters using a Telephone
• Enter SE Mode from a DKP/SLT.
To enable/disable DIP, dial:
• 4901-1-Code
Where,
Code is
0 for Disable DIP
1 for Enable DIP
Default: DIP is Disabled.
To set DIP as High/Low, dial:
• 4902-1-Code
Where,
Code is
0 for DIP as Low
1 for DIP as High
Default: High.
To set the Minimum Instigation Time, dial:
• 4903-1-Minimum Instigation Time
Where,
Minimum Instigation Time is from 01 to 99 seconds.
Default: 01 seconds.
• Exit SE Mode.
1122 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Digital Key Phone-Operation
EON - the Proprietary Digital Key Phone
Matrix offers 'EON', the proprietary digital key phone (DKP). It is a powerful station, supporting a host of phone and
PBX features, as listed below.
DKP Features
• Status of other ports (Tri-color LED indication)
• Programmable Direct Station Selection (DSS) Keys and Feature keys
• LCD notification messages
• Ringer Tune selection
• Adjustable Speech level
• Adjustable Ringer Volume
• Adjustable Backlight and Contrast levels
• Hands-free operation - Speaker key and headset connectivity.
• Call Logs - last 20 Missed, Answered and Dialed Calls.
• Operator, Executive, Hotel Attendant and Guest Functionality
• Message Paging
• Menu based operation of PBX features
• Multiple Language support.
PBX Features
Listed below are the features of ETERNITY that require a Digital Key Phone:
• Abbreviated Dialing
• Auto Answer
• Background Music
• Call Chaining
• Call Cost Display
• Call Duration Display
• Call Mute
• Dialed Number Directory
• Directory Dialing by Name
• Dynamic Lock
• Forced Answer
• Keypad Lock
• Live Call Screening
• Message Paging
• Off-Hook Alert
• Room Monitor
• Text Message Reply
• Time Zone Display
• User Status (Presence)
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1123
Models of EON at a Glance
Model
Feature
EON42 EON48S EON48P EON48DS EON48DP
Total number of keys 42 48 48 48 48
Number of programmable keys 25 29 29 29 29
Capsense keys No Yes Yes Yes Yes
LCD display capacity 2 lines x 24 2 lines x 24 6 lines x 24 2 lines x 24 6 lines x 24
characters characters characters characters characters
Touch Keys No No No No No
Touch screen operation No No No No No
LCD with backlight Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Headset Interface Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Ringer Lamp (LED) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Speaker Phone Full duplex Full duplex Full duplex Full duplex Full duplex
EON 42
2 lines and 24 characters LCD display, full duplex speaker phone with headset connectivity.
LCD Display
The LCD display of EON42 is backlit and is similar to the one on a folder-type mobile phone. You can tilt the display
at a convenient angle for a clear view of the text/characters displayed.
The backlight cannot be switched ON or OFF by opening or closing the LCD display. The LCD backlight can be
turned on and off as well as adjusted for contrast and brightness from the "Phone Settings" of the DKP Phone
Menu.
1124 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Ringer LED
The Ringer LED indicates incoming internal and external calls. The LED Cadence will match with the Ring
Cadence of the incoming internal/external call.
The Ringer LED changes color according to the type of call, as described in the table below.
Type of Call Ringer LED Color
Internal Call Red
External Call Green
Alarm Red + Green (Orange)
Auto Redial Call Green
Auto Call Back Call Red
Priority Red
Programming mode Red
Navigation Keys
• Enter Key: To enter the Menu; when the phone is in the idle state (without any incoming or outgoing call
being made), if you press the 'Enter' key, you will enter into the 'Menu'.
Enter key is also used to make a selection from the Menu/sub-menu options or to complete an action.
• Up Key: To scroll upwards while navigating the Menu/sub-menu.
• Down Key: To scroll downwards while navigating the Menu/sub-menu.
• Forward Key: To move forward when dialing a number.
The Forward Key can be used to increase the volume of Speech when talking to someone and to increase
the volume of the Ringer when the phone rings.
• Back Key: To move backwards when dialing a number; to go back one level in the Menu.
The Back Key can be used to decrease the volume of Speech when talking to someone and to decrease
the volume of the Ringer when the phone rings.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Keys
These are a set of 24 programmable keys for single-touch access to Stations and Trunks and important or
frequently accessed features of ETERNITY.
Refer the topic “DSS Keys Programming” for instructions.
DSS Key LEDs
Each DSS key is equipped with an LED which glows to indicate the status of the Trunk/Station or Feature assigned
to it.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1125
• Status of Stations and Trunks: The LED of DSS keys assigned to Stations/Trunks glow in three colors to
indicate status of the call event on the Stations/Trunks and on the DKP.
Thus the status of the DKP user's own Station as well as that of the other Stations and the status of Trunk
lines are indicated by the LED of the DSS keys assigned to those Stations and Trunks on the DKP.
The following table shows the relationship between the color of the LED and various events:
Table 1: LED pattern of DSS Key assigned to Trunks and Stations
LED LED Mode
Color Continuously ON Slow Blink Fast Blink
Green The key assigned to the The key assigned to the The key assigned to the Station
Station you are in speech Station. you are calling or from which you
with. you have kept on hold. are being called.
Red The key assigned to the The key assigned to the The key assigned to the Station/
Station that is now busy Station which has put Trunk that is called or being
with another Station/ another Station/Trunk on called by another.
Trunk. hold.
Orange You are talking on a Trunk You have held a Trunk You have an incoming call on the
(external call) (external call) Trunk (external call)
• Green indicates the state of the station/trunk you access. For example, when you make a call to
another Station 203, the LED of the DSS key assigned to Station 203 blinks Green to indicate ringing at
the Station. If you have successfully established speech with Station 203 the LED glows Green
continuously.
• Red indicates the state of other Stations/Trunks. For example, if the LED of the DSS key assigned to
Station 201 is glowing Red continuously, it means Station 201 is busy with another Station or Trunk.
• Orange indicates the state of the trunk you are in speech with. For example, when you are in speech
on an outgoing call on Trunk 1 the LED of the DSS Key assigned to Trunk 1 will be continuously ON.
When you put the call on hold, the LED will blink slowly.
The LEDs of DSS Keys that are designated as Call Appearance (CA) Keys will function as follows:
Table 2: LED pattern of Call Appearance Keys
LED LED Mode
Color Continuously ON Slow Blink Fast Blink
Green When you are in speech When you have put a When any Station is calling
with a Station (internal call) Station on hold (internal call) (internal call)
Orange When you are in speech When you have put a Trunk When any Trunk is calling
with Trunk (external call) on hold (external call) (external call)
• Status of Features: The LED of a DSS key is activated when the feature assigned to this key is used.
The LED of DSS keys assigned to Stations/Trunks glow in a single color - Red - to indicate status of the
call event on the Stations/Trunks and on the DKP.
1126 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Not all features require LED indication. Hence the LED on a DSS Key is activated only if the feature
assigned to that key requires LED.
• For example, Call Pick-Up; this feature does not require an LED. So when a DSS key is assigned to
this feature, the LED of the key remains inactive, when Call Pick-Up is accessed.
• A feature like Auto Redial requires an LED to show that it has been set or canceled. So, the LED of the
DSS key to which the Auto Redial feature has been assigned will glow Red, when Auto-Redial is set,
and the LED is turned off when the feature is canceled.
• Thus the LEDs of the DSS keys function only if the LED is relevant for the feature/ function assigned to
the keys, and otherwise remain inactive.
• The LEDs of DSS keys to which features like Raid, Interrupt Request, Barge-In, Last Caller Recall are
assigned, will not glow.
Dial Pad
The dial pad consists of 12 fixed keys for the digits 0, 1-9, and the characters * and #. The dial pad is used for
dialing numbers of stations, external parties, and for dialing the programming and feature access codes.
Speaker Key
The speaker key is the last key on bottom-right of the keypad. It sets the phone in 'Speaker mode' for hands-free
operation. The Speaker key is programmable, you can assign any other feature/function to this key.
Speaker Key LED
The Speaker Key on EON42 is equipped with a single color LED which glows Red when pressed for the speaker
mode and is turned off, when you exit the speaker mode.
Since key is programmable, the LED indication pattern will be according to the feature/function you assign to this
key. For example, if you assign a Station to this key, the LED of the key will function as a tri-color LED to show
status of the Station. If you assign a feature that does not require any LED activity, like Call Pick-Up, the LED of this
key will remain inactive.
Headset Connectivity
The EON42 provides a Headset interface. You can use any stereo headset of standard make with a 2.5 mm single
connector into the headset jack on the left side panel of the phone.
You can also assign Headset key function to any of the DSS keys. Refer the topic “DSS Keys Programming” for
instructions.
Key Maps
EON may be the extension of the Operators and Executives in an enterprise, and the extension of the Front Desk
Attendant and Guest in hotels. Some of the feature required by each of these groups may not be required by
others.
For example, when EON is an Operator's extensions, more DSS keys would be required for Trunk Access, Call
Appearances, and Direct Station Calling, than for features. But when EON is a Hotel Attendant's extension, keys
are required for specific hotel functions such as Check-In/Check-Out, Changing Room Clean Status, Room Shift,
etc.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1127
To cater to the varying requirements of each user group, ETERNITY provides Key Maps for Operator, Executive,
Hotel Attendant, and Hotel Guest.
Default Key Maps
Operator/Executive Hotel Attendant Guest
Key Label Label Key Key Label Label Key Key Label Label Key
DKP4 SLT3 RV-Alarm Print RS Operator Alarm VG
DKP3 SLT2 Floor Ser Print AS Floor Ser Retrv Msg
DKP2 SLT1 MsgWait Clean MACRO-4 Missed Call
DKP1 ACB-Set R-Forward ACB-Set Voice Mail DND
TWT4 3PConf R-DND 3PConf Voice Help ACB-Set
TWT3 CallFwd R-Budget CallFwd SLT1 3PConf
TWT2 Name Call Block Name DKP2 CallFwd
TWT1 AR-Set Voice Mail Redial DKP1 Name
CA 1 Redial Retrv Msg Release TWT2 Redial
CA 2 Release TWT1 BT VMS TWT1 Release
CA 3 Transfer CA 2 Transfer CA 2 Transfer
CA 4 Hold CA 1 Hold CA 1 Hold
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
4 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 6
7 8 9 7 8 9 7 8 9
* 0 # * 0 # * 0 #
These key maps can be customized to match the exact requirement of individual users. Refer the topic “DSS Keys
Programming” for instructions on customizing the Key Maps.
Phone Menu
You can access the following PBX and phone features from the Menu of EON42:
Menu option Description
Call Logs To view call history of internal and external Missed, Answered and Dialed calls.
You can also edit numbers in the call logs and store them in the Personal Directory.
Contacts To add, edit, delete names and numbers of contacts in the Global Directory Part 1.
Call Forward To set and cancel Call Forward-Busy, Call-Forward No Reply, Call-Forward-
Unconditional, and Follow Me.
Dynamic Lock To change the Toll Control level of the phone.
User Status To set User Present or User Absent.
Keypad Lock To lock the keypad of the phone.
Do Not Disturb To set/cancel Do Not Disturb on the phone, i.e. block incoming internal and external
calls.
Call Cost Display To view the cost of calls made from the phone.
Hotline To set/cancel Hotline and Delayed Hotline.
1128 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Menu option Description
Alarm To set/cancel Personalized and Automated Alarms.
Background Music To start/stop Background music on the phone.
Change User To change User Password (required for using certain features like Call Follow Me,
Password Dynamic Lock, DISA, Walk-In Class of Service, User Absent/Present, Hot Desk, Voice
mail) and for customizing Phone Settings.
Phone Settings To customize settings of the phone such as Speech and Ringer Controls, LCD Display
settings (Brightness and Contrast, Backlight ON/OFF), Headset Connectivity, Call
Answering Mode (manual/auto answer).
Navigating the Phone Menu
To navigate the menu,
• Press Enter key when the phone is idle.
• Scroll with the Up/Down Navigation Key to reach the desired Menu option.
• Press Enter key to select the desired Menu option.
• Scroll with Up/Down Navigation Key to reach the desired sub-menu option.
• Press Enter key to select the desired sub-menu option.
To exit menu,
• Go ON-Hook
Or
• Press Cancel key, if programmed.
Second Call Indication
When you are in an on-going conversation and there is a second incoming call, EON42 will indicate the second
incoming call by playing the Call Waiting Tone on the handset (if you are using a handset) or on the speaker (if the
phone is in speaker mode), and displaying the Caller ID of station/trunk on the LCD.
If you go ON-Hook, the call waiting beeps will be turned into an audible Ring indicating an incoming call.
Operating EON42
Please refer the User Card for EON42 for instructions on operating the features of ETERNITY using EON.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1129
EON48
EON48S/EON48D-S
2 lines and 24 characters LCD display, full duplex, capsense feature keys
EON48P/EON48D-P
6 lines and 24 characters LCD display, full duplex, capsense feature keys.
LCD Display
The LCD display of EON48P/48D-P/48S/48D-S is backlit and can be tilted at a convenient angle for a clear view of
the text/characters displayed.
1130 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The LCD backlight can be turned on and off as well as adjusted for contrast and brightness from the "Phone
Settings" of the DKP Phone Menu.
Ringer LED
The Ringer LED indicates incoming internal and external calls. The LED Cadence will match with the Ring
Cadence of the incoming internal/external call.
The Ringer LED changes color according to the type of call, as described in the table below.
Type of Call Ringer LED Color
Internal Call Red
External Call Blue
Alarm Red + Blue (Violet)
Auto Redial Call Blue
Auto Call Back Call Red
Priority Red
Programming mode Red
Navigation Keys
These are 5 capsense keys. The functions of each are described briefly below.
• Enter Key: To enter the Menu; when the phone is in the idle state (without any incoming or outgoing call
being made), if you tap the 'Enter' key, you will enter into the 'Menu'.
Enter key is also used to make a selection from the Menu/sub-menu options or to complete an action.
• Up Key: To scroll upwards while navigating the Menu/sub-menu.
• Down Key: To scroll downwards while navigating the Menu/sub-menu.
• Forward Key: To move forward when dialing a number.
• Back Key: To move backwards when dialing a number; to go back one level in the Menu.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Keys
These are a set of 28 programmable keys assigned to Stations and Trunks and important or frequently accessed
features of ETERNITY.
Refer the topic “DSS Keys Programming” for instructions on programming these keys.
DSS Key LEDs
Each DSS key is equipped with an LED which glows to indicate the status of the Trunk/Station or Feature assigned
to it.
• Status of Stations and Trunks: The LED of DSS keys assigned to Stations/Trunks glow in three colors to
indicate status of the call event on the Stations/Trunks and on the DKP.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1131
Thus, the status of the DKP user's own Station as well as that of the other Stations and the status of Trunk
lines are indicated by the LED of the DSS keys assigned to those Stations and Trunks on the DKP.
The following table shows the relationship between the color of the LED and various events:
LED LED Mode
Color Continuously ON Slow Blink Fast Blink
Blue The key assigned to the The key assigned to the The key assigned to the
Station you are in speech Station you have kept on Station you are calling or from
with. hold. which you are being called.
Red The key assigned to the The key assigned to the The key assigned to the
Station that is now busy with Station which has put another Station/Trunk that is called or
another Station/Trunk. Station/Trunk on hold. being called by another.
Violet You are talking on a Trunk You have held a Trunk You have an incoming call on
(external call) (external call) the Trunk (external call)
• Blue indicates the state of the station/trunk you access. For example, when you make a call to another
Station 203, the LED of the DSS key assigned to Station 203 blinks Blue to indicate ringing at the
Station. If you have successfully established speech with Station 203 the LED glows Blue continuously.
• Red indicates the state of other Stations/Trunks. For example, if the LED of the DSS key assigned to
Station 201 is glowing Red continuously, it means Station 201 is busy with another Station or Trunk.
• Violet indicates the state of the trunk you are in speech with. For example, when you are in speech on
an outgoing call on Trunk 1 the LED of the DSS Key assigned to Trunk 1 will be continuously ON.
When you put the call on hold, the LED will blink slowly.
The LEDs of DSS Keys that are designated as Call Appearance (CA) Keys will function as follows:
LED LED Mode
Color Continuously ON Slow Blink Fast Blink
Blue When you are in speech with When you have put a Station When any Station is calling
a Station (internal call) on hold (internal call) (internal call)
Violet When you are in speech with When you have put a Trunk When any Trunk is calling
Trunk (external call) on hold (external call) (external call)
• Status of Features: The LED of a DSS key is activated when the feature assigned to this key is used.
The LED of DSS keys assigned to Stations/Trunks glow in a single color - Red - to indicate status of the
call event on the Stations/Trunks and on the DKP.
• Not all features require LED indication. Hence the LED on a DSS Key is activated only if the feature
assigned to that key requires LED.
• For example, Call Pick-Up; this feature does not require an LED. So when a DSS key is assigned to
this feature, the LED of the key remains inactive, when Call Pick-Up is accessed.
1132 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• A feature like Auto Redial requires an LED to show that it has been set or canceled. So, the LED of the
DSS key to which the Auto Redial feature has been assigned will glow Red, when Auto-Redial is set,
and the LED is turned off when the feature is canceled.
• Thus the LEDs of the DSS keys function only if the LED is relevant for the feature/ function assigned to
the keys, and otherwise remain inactive for example, Raid, Interrupt Request, Barge-In, Last Caller
Recall.
Dial Pad
The dial pad consists of 12 fixed keys for the digits 0, 1-9, and the characters * and #. The dial pad is used for
dialing numbers of stations, external parties, and for dialing the programming and feature access codes.
Speaker Key
The speaker key sets the phone in 'Speaker mode' for hands-free operation. The Speaker key is programmable,
you can assign any other feature/function on this key.
Speaker Key LED
The Speaker Key on EON48P/48D-P/48S/48D-S is equipped with a single color LED which glows Blue when
pressed for the speaker mode and is turned off, when you exit the speaker mode.
Since key is programmable, the LED indication pattern will be according to the feature/function you assign to this
key. For example, if you assign a Station to this key, the LED of the key will function as a tri-color LED to show
status of the Station. If you assign a feature that does not require any LED activity, like Call Pick-Up, the LED of this
key will remain inactive.
Volume Keys
• "+" (plus): This is the increase key, to raise the volume of speech while talking and to decrease the Ringer
volume, when the phone is ringing.
• "-" (minus): This is the decrease key, to lower the volume of speech while talking and to decrease the
Ringer volume when the phone is ringing.
Headset Connectivity
The EON48P/48D-P/48S/48D-S provides two Headset interfaces: A 2.5mm Audio Jack and an RJ11 connector at
the bottom of the phone body.
So you can use any stereo headset of standard make with a 2.5 mm single connector or a stereo headset with an
RJ11 connector.
You can also assign Headset key function to any of the DSS keys. Refer the topic “DSS Keys Programming” for
instructions.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1133
Key Maps
As EON48P/48D-P/48S/48D-S may be the extension of the Operator/s and Executives in an enterprise, and the
extension of the Front Desk Attendant and Guest in hotels, to meet the varied requirements of each user group,
ETERNITY provides Key Maps for Operator, Executive, Hotel Attendant, and Hotel Guest.
Operator/Executive Hotel Attendant Guest
Voice Mail ACB Set Cancel Mute 3PConf Transfer Voice Mail ACB Set Cancel Mute 3PConf Transfer Voice Mail ACB Set Cancel Mute 3PConf Transfer
CallFwd DND Names Redial Release Hold CallFwd DND Names Redial Release Hold CallFwd DND Names Redial Release Hold
1 2 abc 3 def 1 2 abc 3 def 1 2 abc 3 def
4 ghi 5 jkl 6 mno 4 ghi 5 jkl 6 mno 4 ghi 5 jkl 6 mno
7 pqrs 8 tuv 9 wxyz 7 pqrs 8 tuv 9 wxyz 7 pqrs 8 tuv 9 wxyz
Retrv
CA 4 DKP2
Msg.
CA 3 * 0 #
CA 3 * 0 #
DKP1 * 0 #
CA 2 CA 2 CA 2
CA 1 CA 1 CA 1
These key maps can be customized to match the exact requirement of individual users. Refer the topic “DSS Keys
Programming” for instructions on customizing the Key Maps.
Phone Menu
You can access the following PBX and phone features from the Menu of EON48P/48D-P/48S/48D-S:
Menu option Description
Call Logs To view call history of internal and external Missed, Answered and Dialed calls.
You can also edit numbers in the call logs and store them in the Personal Directory.
Contacts To add, edit, delete names and numbers of contacts in the Global Directory Part 1.
Call Forward To set and cancel Call Forward-Busy, Call-Forward No Reply, Call-Forward-
Unconditional, and Follow Me.
Dynamic Lock To change the Toll Control level of the phone.
User Status To set User Present or User Absent.
Keypad Lock To lock the keypad of the phone.
Do Not Disturb To set/cancel Do Not Disturb on the phone, i.e. block incoming internal and external
calls.
Call Cost Display To view the cost of calls made from the phone.
Hotline To set/cancel Hotline and Delayed Hotline.
Alarm To set/cancel Personalized and Automated Alarms.
Background Music To start/stop Background music on the phone.
Change User To change User Password (required for using certain features like Call Follow Me,
Password Dynamic Lock, DISA, Walk-In Class of Service, User Absent/Present, Hot Desk,
Voicemail) and for customizing Phone Settings.
1134 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Menu option Description
Phone Settings To customize settings of the phone such as Speech and Ringer Controls, LCD Display
settings (Brightness and Contrast, Backlight ON/OFF), Headset Connectivity, Call
Answering Mode (manual/auto answer).
Navigating the Phone Menu
To navigate the menu,
• Tap on Enter key when the phone is idle.
• Scroll by tapping the Up/Down Navigation Key to reach the desired Menu option.
• Tap on Enter key to select the desired Menu option.
• Scroll by tapping on the Up/Down Navigation Key to reach the desired sub-menu option.
• Tap on Enter key to select the desired sub-menu option.
To exit menu,
• Press Cancel key.
Or
• Go ON-Hook.
Second Call Indication
When you are in an on-going conversation and there is a second incoming call, EON48P/48D-P/48S/48D-S will
indicate the second incoming call by playing the Call Waiting Tone and displaying the Caller ID of station/trunk on
the LCD. If you are in the handset or headset mode, an audible Ring indicating an incoming call will be played on
the speaker of the phone.
Operating EON48
Please refer the User Card for EON48 for instructions on operating the features of ETERNITY using EON.
EONSOFT
The EONSOFT is a PC-based Digital Key Phone. Based on a graphic user Interface (GUI), the EONSOFT offers all
the features of EON42 and EON48, making it a substitute for the Digital Key Phone. Its integration with the
ETERNITY obviates the need for a separate telephone instrument.
The EONSOFT can be installed on any personal computer with Windows or NT operating system.
Two PC-based DSS64 Consoles are available to be used with the EONSOFT. You can use either one or both
DSS64 Consoles.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1135
The EONSOFT occupies only a single port, even when both PC-based DSS64 Consoles are used. Thus it supports
all the features of the Digital Key Phone and the DSS64 Console on a single window.
DKP Port
The DKP port connects EONSOFT to the DKP port of ETERNITY's DKP card.
Handset Port:
The Handset port connects the Receiver of the phone, to be used for speech.
The EONSOFT has the provision for attaching a Handset. A handset with spring cord is supplied by Matrix and is to
be connected to the handset jack (RJ12) on the Dongle.
Headset connectivity
EONSOFT supports headset connectivity, providing a MIC and a Speaker interface. Any stereo Headset of
standard make, with dual connectors can be connected to the MIC and the Speaker on the Dongle.
COM Port
The COM port connects EONSOFT to a PC (COM Port).
After EONSOFT has been successfully installed on a PC and the DKP parameters have been configured, each
time you open EONSOFT, the display and keypad of the phone will appear on your PC screen.
1136 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The illustration below shows EONSOFT with two DSS64 Consoles attached to it.
Phone Display
The EONSOFT has a 2-line and 24-character display. In the ON-Hook or idle condition, the first line displays the
Station Number and the Station name. The second line displays the Day, Date and Time.
When there is an incoming call, the calling party's number is displayed on Line 2 of the LCD162.
The LCD messages for various call events (dial, transfer, forward, hold, etc.), for prompts, alerts, confirmation,
errors, text messages, are displayed.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Keys
These are a set of 25 keys programmable keys, allowing you to assign Stations, Trunks or Features to them, so
that you can access any of these by pressing the respective key.
Refer the topic “DSS Keys Programming” for instructions on assigning stations, trunks, features to keys.
DSS Key LEDs
The DSS keys change color to indicate the status of the Trunk/Station or Feature assigned to them.
162. Only if the Station, to which EONSOFT is connected, has been allowed CLIP facility in its Class of Service.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1137
The color indications for the status of Stations and Trunks, Call Appearance and Features are the same as
described for “EON 42”.
Dial Pad
The dial pad consists of 12 keys (non-programmable), which include the digit keys for 0, 1-9, and character keys for
* and #.
Function Keys
These are non-programmable keys on the keypad of EONSOFT which have fixed functions.
• Redial: This key is used for redialing the last external number.
• Func Key: This key is used for accessing the Phone menu.
• Adr: This key is used for accessing the Address Book. The EONSOFT provides the facility of an Address
Book that is integrated with the Standard Windows Address Book, for storing the numbers and addresses
of contacts. So, when a call is to be made, you can select and dial the desired number from the directory.
• Spd Key: This key is used to dial by name.
• Flash: This key is used as 'Flash' key.
• Xfr: This key is used for transferring calls to another destination
• Hold: This key is used for putting the caller on hold. This key is also used to make a selection in the Phone
Menu.
• OFF-Hook: This key is used for going OFF-Hook. It simulates lifting of the handset, pressing of the
speaker key to make or receive calls.
• ON-Hook: This key is used for going ON-Hook. It simulates replacing of the handset, pressing of the
speaker key to disconnect.
Volume Control Keys
The and keys are used for increasing or decreasing the phone volume. Volume can be increased by clicking
and decreased by clicking .
Navigation Keys
The following keys are used for navigating the phone menu:
• 'Func' key: This key is used for entering the Phone menu and to go back one level in the menu.
• Up and Down keys: The and keys function as the Up and Down keys to scroll the Menu and sub-
menu options. You can scroll up down the menu by clicking and scroll up the menu by clicking .
• 'Hold' key: This key is used to make a selection in the Menu.
Speaker key
The 'Spk' key sets the phone in 'Speaker mode' for hands-free operation. The Speaker key is programmable; you
can assign any other feature/function to this key.
1138 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Shortcut keys
You can use the Keyboard of the PC to operate EONSOFT, with the help of "shortcut keys'. The following table
describes the functions performed when shortcut keys on the keyboard are pressed:
Short Cut Key Label Description
F1 Help
F2 Windows Address Book
F3 Spd
F4 Func
F5 Space Bar - Hook
F6 Alt+Enter - Hold
F7 Xfr
F8 Spk
Esc ON-Hook
. (dot/period) Flash
(Up Arrow Key) Volume key. To increase volume of ringer and speech
(Down Arrow Key) Volume key. To decrease volume of ringer and speech
Ctrl+C To open COM Port Settings Dialog Box
Ctrl+T To open Trunk Access Code Dialog Box
Tab (Tab Forward) Forward shifting of selection
Tab (Tab
Backward shifting of selection
Backward)
Shift + Enter To press the button with selection
Num Pad Dial out a number
Key Maps
EONSOFT can function as a Station for the Operator, Executive, and Hotel Attendant, also Guest (though unlikely
to be used by guests).
Phone Menu
The Phone menu is the same as EON42 and EON48.
Navigating the Phone Menu
To navigate the menu,
• Click 'Func' key when the phone is idle.
• Scroll by clicking the Up/Down Key to reach the desired Menu option.
• Click 'Hold' key to select the desired Menu option.
• Scroll by clicking the with Up/Down Key to reach the desired sub-menu option.
• Click 'Hold' key to select the desired sub-menu option.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1139
To exit menu,
• Press the 'Func' key repeatedly to go back one level in the menu, till you reach 'Menu'.
Or
• Press Cancel key, if programmed.
If you want to use the Keyboard, press the Shortcut key for the desired function.
Tool Tips
You can assign labels and tool tips for the DSS keys, which are displayed to the user on mouse over. You can
assign the function of each key as Tool Tip, to help user in intuitive operation of EONSOFT.
To assign a tool tip,
• right click the desired DSS key.
• The dialog box will show the Key Number.
• Enter the label for the key.
• Enter the Tool Tip for the key.
• Click 'OK'.
• Repeat the same steps to configure Tool Tip on another key.
• Each time you move the mouse on the key, the Tool Tip you programmed for this key will be displayed.
Call Indication
Incoming Calls are indicated by:
• Popping up of the EONSOFT window, when the window is minimized.
• Flashing of the Title Bar of the EONSOFT window, when the window is maximized.
In order for the EONSOFT window to pop up, you must have enabled the 'PopUp When Ring' option. When
this option is enabled and the EONSOFT window is minimized a new incoming call causes the window to pop
up to its full size notifying the user about the new call. When this option is enabled and the EONSOFT window
is maximized, a new incoming call is indicated by the flashing of the Title bar of the window.
When the 'PopUp When Ring' option is disabled and the EONSOFT window is minimized, a new incoming call
is indicated by the flashing of the EONSOFT Title at the bottom bar of the PC screen.
By default, the 'PopUp When Ring' option is enabled.
Second Call Indication
When you are in speech with someone, and there is a second incoming call, EONSOFT will indicate the second
incoming call, as a waiting call by playing an audible Ring.
To answer the second incoming call, you may put the current call on hold.
Operating EONSOFT
EONSOFT can be operated using the keyboard and the mouse.
1140 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Making calls
To make calls,
• Click the desired digits on the dial pad.
• The number will be dialed out.
• Talk.
• Click ON-Hook key to disconnect.
To make calls from Headset mode,
• Click OFF-Hook key.
• Click the desired digits on the dial pad.
• The number will be dialed out.
To make calls from Speaker mode,
• Click 'Spk' key.
• Click the desired digits on the dial pad.
• The number will be dialed out.
• A headset must be connected and 'Headset Connectivity' must be enabled in the 'DKP Parameters'.
Refer “DSS Keys Programming” for instructions.
• If you are using the keyboard instead of the mouse, press the appropriate Shortcut Keys listed above
and use the Number pad on the keyboard to dial digits.
Receiving calls
• When window pops up to indicate a call,
• Click 'Spk' key or 'OFF-Hook' Key.
• Talk.
• Click 'ON-Hook' key to disconnect.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1141
Digital Output Port (DOP)
What's this?
The ETERNITY provides a solid state Digital Output Port (DOP).
The DOP is located on “The Master Card” of the ETERNITY ME models and on “The CPU Card” of the ETERNITY
GE models. It is located on “The Door Phone Card” of the ETERNTIY PE.
The ETERNITY PE supports 3 DOPs while ETERNITY ME and GE support a single DOP each.
A DC contactor (60VDC max.) can be connected to the DOP. Any external relay based device, like a Door Lock
opener, a siren, or a hooter can be interfaced with the DOP via this DC contactor.
The DOP can be used for operating a variety of “Automated Control Applications”, such as a door lock release
device, a siren/hooter, a school bell, a water pump, sprinklers, and automated illuminations (office lights, porch and
terrace lights, glow signboards, street lights), and others.
How it works
• A gadget is connected to the DOP.
• If the DOP is being used for an Automated Control Application, it will turn on the gadget connected to it
according to the "Gadget Operation Mode" programmed.
There are 9 different Operation Modes. Refer the topic “Automated Control Applications” for an overview of
the operation modes in which the DOP may be used.
• The DOP can be turned ON/OFF by dialing the relevant Feature Command, which in turn switches ON/
OFF the gadget connected to it.
• The DOP can be operated also from a remote location from the Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
mode.
ETERNITY remembers the state of DOP during power failure. For instance, a water pump is being
controlled using DOP. If a power failure occurs while the pump is running, the Operator need not turn on
the water pump again on power restoration. The ETERNITY will remember the last state (in this case
pump on) and switch ON the water pump when power is restored.
How to connect a Gadget to the DOP
The DOP has a two-wire, push-in (spring clamp action) connector to attach the external devices.
Refer the chapter “Installing ETERNITY” for step-by-step instructions on connecting a gadget to the DOP of your
model of ETERNITY.
Do not connect devices that do not conform to the specifications of the DOP!
1142 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
How to configure
When you connect a gadget to the DOP, you must select the 'Contact Type' of the DOP, and enable the feature
'DOP Turn ON/Turn OFF' in the Class of Service (CoS) group assigned to the extensions which you want to allow
access to operation of the DOP.
In the default Station Basic Feature Template 01 assigned to all extensions of ETERNITY, the feature 'DOP Turn
ON/Turn OFF' is enabled in the default CoS group 01. Thus all extensions of ETERNITY can use switch ON/OFF
the DOP.
If you want to restrict access to DOP operation to selected extensions, simply disable this feature in the default CoS
group, and follow these steps:
• Define a new CoS group with DOP Turn ON/Turn OFF enabled.
• Prepare a Station Basic Feature Template with this CoS group applicable in all the Time Zones.
• Assign this new Template to the extensions to which DOP operation is to be allowed.
Refer the topics “Class of Service (COS)” and “Station Basic Feature Template” for detailed instructions on
programming.
If required you may also change the default Access Code '1174' assigned to the DOP, and assign a DSS key with
the function of DOP operation on the DKP extensions which are allowed access to the DOP. Refer the topic “DSS
Keys Programming” for instructions.
Configuring DOP using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the 'System Parameters' link to open the page
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1143
• Click 'DOP' to open the page.
• Set the contact type for the DOP as appropriate: Normally Open/Normally Close. By default, the contact
type for the DOP is 'Normally Open'.
If you are using ETERNITY PE, you may configure the settings of DOP-1, DOP-2 or DOP-3, as desired.
1144 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your setting.
• Log out of Jeeves or continue with programming tasks, as required.
Configuring DOP using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To select the contact type for the DOP, dial:
• 5001-1-DOP-Normal Contact Type
• 5001-2-DOP-DOP- Normal Contact Type
• 5001-*- Normal Contact Type
Where,
DOP is from 1 to 3.
Contact type is
0 for DOP Normally Open.
1 for DOP Normally Closed.
To assign a new access code for a DOP, dial:
• 3111-1-76-Access Code
Where,
Access Code is a string of maximum 6 digits. Terminate the command with #* if the new access code
has fewer than 6 digits.
To assign default access code to the DOP, dial:
• 3161-1-76.
• Exit SE mode.
How to use
The DOP will turn ON/OFF the gadget connected to it on the basis of a Timer or a Schedule or on instigation from
the sensor device connected to the Digital Input Port.
Irrespective of the "Gadget Operation Mode" programmed, the DOP (and hence the gadget connected to it) can be
turned ON/OFF by dialing a Feature Command at any time from an extension of the ETERNITY. This feature
command overrides the Operation mode defined for the gadget.
The extension from which you dial this feature command must have the feature 'DOP turn ON/turn OFF' in its Class
of Service.
For Extension Users
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users
• Press DSS key assigned to the DOP (if programmed).
OR
• Users world wide: Dial 1174
• Users in the Philippines: Dial 1104
• Enter DOP number on the prompt on the phone's display.
• Select the desired option:
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1145
• Turn on
• Turn off
• Press 'Enter' key.
• You get the confirmatory message 'DOP turned on/ DOP turned off' on your phone's display and a
confirmation tone
• Go idle.
For SLT Users
• Lift the handset.
• Users world wide: Dial 1174
• Users in the Philippines: Dial 1104
• Dial DOP Number.
• Dial 1 to turn ON DOP.
• Dial 0 to turn OFF DOP.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace the handset.
• DOP Number is the number of the DOP from 1 to 3 to which the gadget is connected.
• If using ETERNITY ME/GE, dial 1 for DOP Number. If using ETERNITY PE, dial the number of the
DOP which you want to turn ON/OFF.
For System Administrators (SA)
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users
To turn DOP ON
• Press DSS key assigned to the DOP (if programmed).
OR
• Dial 1072-020
• Enter DOP number on the prompt on the phone's display.
• You get the confirmatory message 'DOP turned on' on your phone's display and a confirmation tone.
• Go idle.
DOP number is the number of the DOP from 1 to 3 to which the gadget is connected.
To turn DOP OFF:
• Press DSS key assigned to the DOP (if programmed).
OR
• Dial 1072-019
• Enter DOP number on the prompt on the phone's display.
• You get the confirmatory message 'DOP turned off' on your phone's display and a confirmation tone.
• Go idle.
1146 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
For SLT Users
To turn DOP ON:
• Lift the handset.
• Dial 1072-020-DOP Number.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace the handset.
To turn DOP OFF:
• Lift the handset.
• Dial 1072-019-DOP Number.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace the handset.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1147
Direct Dialing-In (DDI)
What’s this?
• DDI is an ISDN Service which allows the caller to call the user on an ISDN compatible PBX or private
network directly without operator intervention.
• Using the DDI feature of ISDN, the calls can be made to land directly on the desired stations.
• The T1E1PRI and BRI trunks must be assigned a IC ReferenceNumber and OG Reference Number which
in turn defines the translation logic to handle an IC/OG. For more details refer “DDI Routing Table”, “IC
Reference Table” and “OG Reference Table” corresponding topics.
• Each ISDN Trunk is given an Installation Number by the SP. This is the combination of Main Number (MSN
No.) and the DDI Number. The Number is of max.16 digits. This is also known as ISDN Installation
Number.
• The MSN number is given by the SP whereas the Directory Numbers can be selected by the User.
However the number of digits to be used for the Directory Number should be informed to the SP.
• Each station is assigned a unique directory number.
• Please refer the topics “DDI Routing Table”, “T1E1 Trunks” and “ISDN-BRI” for details on programming.
DDI Routing is not supported on T1/E1 trunk line if you have selected E&M as the Signal Type.
How it works
Incoming Call
• When the call lands on the ISDN trunk of the PBX, the PBX checks if CLI based routing is enabled on the
trunk. If Yes, the call is routed accordingly. If CLI based routing is not enabled, then the PBX checks the IC
Reference Number assigned to the Trunk.
• If the IC Reference Number assigned to the trunk is 00, then the system further follows the logic of
Incoming Call management. For more details please refer the topic “Incoming Call Management”.
• If any other number is assigned as IC Reference Number to the trunk, the PBX searches the different IC
reference tables for a match. When a match is found, the system matches channel number of the trunk
with the channels of the table. If it does not match then the next table with the same IC reference number
is searched.
• When the channel number matches, the system uses the DDI Flexible Reference No. of the table to
identify the DDI Flexible Number table. This table helps the system to route the call to the target station.
The system first compares the received DDI number (called party number) with the DDI numbers
programmed in the DDI Flexible Number table. If a match (DDI Number) is found, the system goes ahead
with further interpreting the translation logic in the IC reference table else the system searches the next
matching DDI Flexible Number table and repeats the above procedure.
1148 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• If the number does not match with any number in the DDI Flexible Number tables assigned to the trunk, it
routes the call to the TLG assigned to the trunk.
• Once a perfect match is found, the system checks for the DDI routing flag on first station in the IC
reference table. If it is enabled, the system routes the call to the first station in the DDI Flexible Number
Table else identifies the station according to the DDI logic.
• Once the station is identified the system checks the DDI IC routing flag of the station (Please refer the topic
“Station Advanced Feature Template” for more details) on which the call is to be routed. If the flag is
enabled the call lands on the station else the call is routed to the TLG assigned to the Trunk.
• When the call lands on the DDI station, the caller gets the Ring Back Tone. The station rings for time=DDI
Timer, If the call is not answered the system checks for the Route when No reply flag in the IC reference
Table. If it is enabled the call is routed to the TLG programmed in the IC Reference Table (Trunk
Template) else the call is disconnected.
• When DDI station being called is busy, the caller gets the busy tone. The system checks for the Route
when busy flag in the IC Reference Table. If it is enabled the call is routed to the TLG programmed else
the call is disconnected.
• When the call is answered the system checks for DDI OG flag. If the flag is disabled the system does not
send the answering party number to the network. If the flag is enabled the system prepares the OG
number (Answering party number) and sends it to the ISDN Network.
Outgoing Call (Reverse DDI)
• The station user dials the trunk access Code.
• A Channel is assigned to the user (Based on availability and LCR).
• Depending on the Channel Number and the port grabbed, the OG reference number assigned to the port
is identified.
• After the OG reference number is identified, the ISDN installation no. is identified from the OG reference
table.
• The DDI Flexible reference number is also identified from the OG reference table and this helps in
identifying the flexible number of the calling station. The equivalent DDI number is found out from the
flexible number. The DDI number replaces the last digits (Number of DDI digits parameter in the DDI
Flexible Number table) of the ISDN installation number. This forms the answering/calling party number.
This is sent to the ISDN network.
• When an OG is made by a DDI station, the MSN Number + DDI number of the station is sent in the calling
party field.
• When an outgoing call is made by a Non-DDI station, the MSN Number + the first DDI number of the ISDN
=Trunk is sent in the calling party field.
Relevant Topics:
• “DDI Routing Table”
• “ISDN-BRI”
• “Trunk Feature Template”
• “T1E1 Trunks”
• “OG Reference Table”
• “IC Reference Table”
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1149
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
What’s this?
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) is an auto attendant feature that allows external callers to reach an extension directly
without the intervention of the Operator.
If DID is enabled on a trunk, whenever an external call lands on that trunk, the Built-In Auto Attendant or the Voice
Mail Auto Attendant of ETERNITY (if Voice Mail System card is installed) greets the caller and prompts the caller to
dial the desired extension number. The call is then placed to the extension number dialed by the caller.
ETERNITY offers Delayed DID, whereby incoming calls routed to the Operator or the Trunk Landing Group, can be
answered by the Built-In Auto Attendant or the Voice Mail Auto Attendant, if none of the landing extensions
answers the call within a certain time period.
Regular callers who know the extension numbers of ETERNITY, can use DID to reach the desired extensions
without Operator assistance. Thus, DID reduces call traffic on the Operator extension, saves callers the time for call
set-up and transfer. DID is particularly useful during non-working hours and holidays, and it helps project a
professional image of the organization.
DID will not work, when the dialed extension has Privacy from DID enabled in its Class of Service. So, if
you want to prevent external callers from accessing certain extensions, you must enable Privacy from
DID in their Class of Service. To know more, see “Privacy”.
How it works
DID can be configured on all trunk types, for the three time zones (working hours, break hours and non-working
hours).
When configuring DID on a trunk, you may choose to have calls answered by the Built-In Auto Attendant or the
Voice Mail Auto Attendant.
DID with Built-In Auto Attendant
When the Built-In Auto Attendant of ETERNITY is selected as the destination for incoming calls on a trunk, this is
how DID will work:
• A call lands on a Trunk.
• The system waits for the period of the DID Answer Wait Timer (default: 05 seconds) to answer the call
during this period. The caller gets Ring Back Tone from the CO.
• The system greets the caller with the pre-recorded voice message called the DID Welcome Greeting for
the current time zone. A Voice Module must be assigned for the DID Welcome Greeting.
• The DID Welcome Greeting message is played once.
If no voice module is assigned as Welcome Greeting, the system will play music-on-hold after answering
the call. It will play music-on-hold until the end of the DID Music Timer (default: 5 seconds).
1150 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• On the completion of the Welcome Greeting or music-on-hold at the end of the DID Music Timer, the
system plays the DID Dial Message to prompt the caller to dial the desired extension number.
The DID Dial Message is played once and the caller gets Beeps. The system waits for the DID Beeps
Timer (default: 10 seconds) to expire.
• If the caller does not dial any number before the DID Beeps Timer expires, the system plays the DID Call
Transfer to Operator message and transfers the call to the Operator.
The system waits for the duration of the DID Inactivity Timer (default: 60 seconds) for the Operator to
answer the call. If there is no answer at the end of this timer, the system releases the trunk.
If the caller fails to dial digits, you can have the call disconnected instead of having it routed to the
Operator. For this, you need to enable the Disconnect DID call, when caller does not dial any digit flag
in the System Parameters. When this flag is enabled, the system will play the DID No Dial Voice message
to the caller. If the caller fails to dial a digit within the DID Beeps Timer, the system will disconnect the call.
• If the caller dials the extension number, the system checks if the number is valid.
If the dialed digits are invalid, the system plays the Wrong Dial voice message to the caller. This message
is played once. The system waits for the duration for the DID Error Tone Timer (default: 5 seconds).
If the Wrong Dial Voice Message is not programmed, the system plays Error Tone to the caller for the
duration of the DID Error Tone Timer, followed by the DID Dial Prompt.
• If the number dialed by the caller is valid, the system checks if the dialed extension is free.
• If the dialed extension is busy, the system plays the DID Busy Message to the caller. The message is
played once.
• If no DID Busy Message is programmed, the caller will hear Busy Tone. The Busy Tone is played for
duration of the DID Busy Tone Timer (default: 15 seconds), followed by the DID Dial Prompt.
To have the call disconnected if the dialed extension is busy, you may enable the Disconnect DID Call,
when dialed number is busy flag in the System Parameters.
• The dialed extension is free. The system calls the extension and plays DID Ring Back Tone Message (if
programmed) or Ring Back Tone to the caller. This message is played until the dialed extension is ringing.
• The system waits for the period of the DID Ring Timer for the dialed extension to answer the call.
• When the dialed extension answers the call, the caller gets connected to the extension.
If the dialed extension does not answer before the expiry of the DID Ring Timer, the system prompts the
caller to dial again with the DID Dial Prompt message to the caller.
• The system diverts the call to the Operator. When the call is transferred to the Operator, the system plays
the DID Call Transfer to Operator voice message (if programmed) or plays Ring Back Tone to the caller.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1151
If there is no reply from the dialed extension, you can have the call disconnected instead of having it routed
it to the Operator by enabling the Disconnect DID call, when dialed number is not responding flag in
the System Parameters.
DID with Voice Mail Auto Attendant
When the Voice Mail Auto Attendant of ETERNITY is selected as the destination for incoming calls on a trunk, this
is how DID will work:
• A call lands on a Trunk.
• The Voice Mail System (VMS) installed in the ETERNITY answers the call.
• The VMS greets the caller with the Welcome message and the Greeting Message selected for the current
time zone (working hours, break hours and non-working hours).
• The VMS plays prompts to the caller to process the call further.
Delayed DID
You can use Delayed DID to have incoming calls that are not answered by the landing destinations—the Operator
and the Trunk Landing Group—within a certain time period, to be handled either by the Built-In or the Voice Mail
Auto Attendant.
When you use Delayed DID,
• as a call lands on a trunk, the system checks the incoming call routing configured for the current time zone
for the trunk.
• on finding Delayed DID enabled, the system rings on the destination extensions (Operator and Trunk
Landing Group) for the duration of time defined for ringing the extensions (default: 10 seconds).
• if no reply is received from the extensions, the system routes the call to the auto attendant you selected,
which may by the Built-In Auto Attendant or the Voice Mail Auto Attendant.
• the call is processed further by the auto attendant you selected.
How to configure
To use the Built-In Auto Attendant on trunks, do the following:
1. Make a list of the trunks by their port type (TWT, Mobile, SIP, T1E1PRI, BRI) and port number on which
you want to use the Built-In Auto Attendant.
2. In the “Trunk Feature Template” assigned to these trunks, enable DID for the desired time zones by
selecting DID ‘ON’.
1152 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
3. Assign Voice Modules for DID Messages. To play to callers pre-recorded voice messages as DID
greetings and to play voice prompts at each stage of the DID call, you need to assign Voice Modules for
the following DID Messages:
• DID Welcome Greeting: Played to callers when answering the DID call. Different welcome greetings
can be programmed for Working Hours, Break Hours and Non-working Hours. The DID Welcome
Greeting message is played once.
• DID Dial Prompt: Played after the Welcome greeting message to prompt the caller to dial the desired
extension number. This message is played once.
• DID Ring Back Tone: Played after the caller has dialed the number and the system is ringing the
dialed extension. This message is played continuously as the dialed extension rings.
• DID Wrong Dial message: Played when the caller dials a wrong number or the number dialed by the
caller does not match with any extension number of ETERNITY. This message is played once.
• DID Destination Busy: Played when the dialed extension is busy. This message is played once.
• DID Destination No Reply: Played when the dialed extension does not respond. This message is
played once.
• DID No Dial: Played when the caller has not dialed any number. This message is played once.
• DID Call Transfer to Operator: Played to the caller when the call is being transferred to the Operator.
This message is played once.
Pre-recorded DID voice messages are provided in .WAV file format on the CD-ROM provided to you
with the ETERNITY.
The default Voice Module numbers assigned to DID messages and the messages recorded on each
module are:
Voice
Module Voice Message Application Voice Message
Number
02 Morning Greeting Good Morning!
(DID/Trunk Auto Answer)
03 Afternoon Greeting Good Afternoon!
(DID/Trunk Auto Answer
04 Evening Greeting Good Evening!
(DID/Trunk Auto Answer)
05 DID Welcome Greeting for Day Time Welcome!
(Working Hours)
06 DID Welcome Greeting for Night time (Non- Welcome! I am sorry, we are closed.
working hours)
07 DID - Dial prompt Please dial the desired number.
08 DID - No Dial message Sorry! You have not dialed any number.
09 DID - Wrong Dial message Sorry! The number is not valid.
10 DID - Destination Busy message The person you dialed is busy.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1153
11 DID - Destination Ringing message The number you have dialed is ringing.
(Ring Back Tone)
12 DID - Destination No Reply message The person you dialed is not responding.
13 DID Call Transfer to Operator message Please hold, transferring your call to the
Operator.
You may customize these DID voice messages by recording messages of your choice and assigning
them to the voice modules. For instructions on recording messages on the voice modules and
assigning voice modules to different functions, see “Voice Message Applications”.
If you do not use any of the above voice modules, the system will play the Call Progress Tone for each call
state.
To use the Voice Mail Auto Attendant on trunks, do the following:
1. Make a list of the trunks by their port type (TWT, Mobile, SIP, BRI, T1E1PRI) and port number on which
you want to use the Voice Mail Auto Attendant for DID.
2. In the “Trunk Feature Template” assigned to these trunks,
• enable DID by selecting DID ‘ON’ for the desired time zones.
• assign the Voice Mail Group Number (default: 96) to the Trunk Landing Group.
3. Complete the VMS related configuration.
• Configure Welcome and Greeting messages. You may either use the default, pre-recorded welcome
messages of the VMS, or record the custom welcome messages that meet your requirements, in .WAV
file format.
• Configure Graphs and Nodes.
For more information and instructions, see the ETERNITY VMS Card System Manual.
To use Delayed DID on trunks, do the following:
1. Make a list of the trunks by their port type and port number on which you want to enable Delayed DID.
2. In the “Trunk Feature Template” assigned to these trunks,
• select Delayed DID as DID for the desired time zones.
• if you want to use the VMS Auto Attendant for Delayed DID, assign the Voice Mail Group number
(default: 96) to the Trunk Landing Group and complete the voice mail related configuration. For
more information and instructions, see the ETERNITY VMS Card System Manual.
• if you want to use the Built-In Auto Attendant for Delayed DID, you must assign the Voice Modules
for DID Messages, as described earlier.
1154 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
If required, you may also change the default values of the following DID related Timers and set them to the desired
values.
• DID Inactivity Timer (default: 60 seconds)
• DID Answer Wait Timer (default: 5 seconds)
• DID Music Timer (default:5 seconds)
• DID Beeps Timer (default: 10 seconds)
• DID Ring Timer (default: 30 seconds)
• DID Busy Tone Timer (default: 15 seconds)
• DID Error Tone Timer (default: 5 seconds)
To know more about these timers and for configuration instructions, see “System Timers and Counts”.
You may also configure the following DID related flags, as required:
• Disconnect DID Call, when dialed number is busy: When this flag is enabled, if the dialed extension
is found busy, the system will disconnect the DID call instead of routing it to the Operator. Default:
disabled.
• Disconnect DID call, when dialed number is not responding: When this flag is enabled, if there is
no reply from the landing destination extensions, the system will disconnect the DID call instead of
routing it to the Operator. Default: disabled.
• Disconnect DID call, when caller does not dial any digit: When this flag is enabled, if the caller fails
to dial a digit within the DID Beeps Timer, the system will disconnect the DID call instead of routing it to
the Operator. Default: disabled.
These flags may be used in Hotels that provide 'Limited Services' and do not want to receive unanswered/busy
calls on the guest phones.
For instructions on enabling or disabling these flags, see “System Parameters”.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1155
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
What’s this?
With Direct Inward System Access (DISA) remote users can access and use the system's features and facilities
using Trunks, on which this feature is enabled.
Using DISA, remote users can:
• call any extension.
• make external calls.
• use features and facilities of the system.
• configure features and facilities of the system and administer the system.
All these can be done as if being done from a local extension of the ETERNITY.
This feature allows access to system resources to remote users, and therefore has serious implications for
your system's security. Protect your system from unauthorized access and misuse.
DISA Variants
ETERNITY offers three types of DISA, each with a different method of authentication and level of access:
PIN Authentication - Multiple Calls
Callers can access an extension of ETERNITY by dialing the DISA Login Code that consists of:
• the DISA Feature Access Code.
• the extension number they want to access.
• the User Password of that extension.
Callers are authenticated and allowed to use the extension on which they are logged in.
The callers must dial special digits or codes to go On-hook, Off-hook. They are allowed to make as many trunk calls
and internal calls for as long as they remain logged in to the DISA mode.
To end the DISA login session, callers must dial the Termination code or disconnect from the remote end.
Callers can access an extension to use DISA PIN Authentication-Multiple Calls only if the extension has DISA
feature enabled in its Class of Service.
DISA with CLI Authentication - Multiple Calls
The system authenticates the caller by matching the caller’s CLI with the entries of the DISA-CLI Authentication
Table and logs the caller in to the extension configured as ‘Auto Login’ extension for the CLI.
Callers are not required to dial any DISA Login Code or any password.
When a caller is authenticated on the basis of CLI, the system plays the ('internal' system) Dial Tone to the caller.
1156 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The callers must dial special digits or codes to go On-hook, Off-hook. They are allowed to make as many trunk calls
and internal calls for as long as they remain logged in to the DISA mode.
To end the DISA login session, callers must dial the Termination code or disconnect from the remote end.
For this type of DISA, the DISA CLI Authentication Table must be configured first.
DISA with CLI Authentication - One Call Answer Signaling
This type of DISA is similar to the previous one. The system authenticates callers by matching the callers’ CLI with
the entries of the DISA-CLI Authentication Table and logs the callers in to the extension designated as ‘Auto Login’
extension for the CLI.
When the caller is authenticated on the basis of CLI, the system gives the caller direct access to the Outgoing
Trunks selected for TAC-1 for the current time zone (working hours, break hours, non-working hours)’ in the
“Station Basic Feature Template” assigned to the Auto Login extension. It plays the dial tone.
Callers are allowed to make a single external call. The system ends the DISA session on the completion of the call
by the caller or by the other remote party
For this type of DISA, the DISA CLI Authentication Table must be configured first.
To make another call, the caller must enter the DISA mode again, by calling the ETERNITY from the remote
location.
DISA with CLI Authentication - One Call Answer Signaling is generally used when ETERNITY is deployed in the
Gateway Mode, where ETERNITY is configured to send an answer signal to the caller/calling device, receive the
DTMF digits dialed by the caller/calling device and dial out the digits dialed by the caller/calling device. To know
more, see “Gateway Application-Answer Signaling”.
How it works
For this feature to work, you must enable the desired DISA variant on the desired trunks: TWT, Mobile, SIP,
T1E1PRI, BRI.
• A call lands on a DISA enabled Trunk.
• The system checks if a DISA variant is enabled on the trunk for the current time zone, i.e. working hours,
break-hours and non-working hours.
• If a DISA variant is enabled on the trunk, the system processes the call according to the DISA variant
enabled on the trunk.
• If DISA with PIN Authentication - Multiple Calls is enabled,
• The system plays Welcome Greeting message to the caller163.
• The caller must dial the DISA Login Code consisting of:
• the DISA Feature Access Code.
• the number of the extension the caller wants to access.
163. If no voice message is recorded, the system plays music-on-hold to the caller.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1157
• the user password of the extension.
• On successful login, the system starts the DISA Idle State Timer (configurable; default: 20 seconds).
The system waits for the caller to go Off-hook164.
• When the caller goes Off-hook by dialing the Off-hook code #1, the system plays the internal dial tone
and waits for the caller to dial digits.
• If the caller dials an external number using a TWT trunk, the system starts the DISA Inactivity Timer
(configurable; default: 2 minutes)165.
• The system waits for the caller to dial digits within the DISA Inactivity Timer.
• The system reloads this timer each time it receives digits from the caller. If the caller fails to dial any
digit within this timer, the system plays beeps for the duration of the DISA Warning Beeps Timer (fixed;
15 seconds). If no digit is received at the end of the Warning Beeps, the system terminates the DISA
session. If digits are received before the end of the Warning Beeps, the system reloads the DISA
Inactivity Timer.
• The caller can make as many trunk calls and internal calls.
• The caller can terminate the DISA login session either by disconnecting from the remote end or by
dialing the Termination Code #9.
• If DISA with CLI Authentication - Multiple Calls is enabled,
• The system compares the CLI of the caller with the Calling Party Numbers configured in the CLI
Authentication Table.
• If the CLI matches with any of the Calling Party Numbers in the Table, the system provides access to
the extension configured as Auto Login extension for this Calling Party Number in the Table166.
• The caller gets logged into the Auto Login extension and gets the dial tone of ETERNITY.
• At the end of the call, the caller dials the On-hook code #0 to go On-hook. To make another call, the
caller dials Off-hook code #1 and dials the desired number. Thus the caller dials the On-hook and Off-
hook codes to make as many trunk and internal calls as desired.
• If the caller dials an external number using a TWT trunk, the system starts the DISA Inactivity Timer
(configurable; default: 2 minutes)167. The system waits for the caller to dial digits within the DISA
Inactivity Timer.
• The system reloads this timer each time it receives digits from the caller. If the caller fails to dial any
digit within this timer, the system plays beeps for the duration of the DISA Warning Beeps Timer (fixed;
15 seconds). If no digit is received at the end of the Warning Beeps, the system terminates the DISA
session. If digits are received before the end of the Warning Beeps, the system reloads the DISA
Inactivity Timer.
164. If the caller does not go Off-hook within this timer, the system releases the call.
165. DISA Inactivity Timer is not applicable for T1E1PRI lines, BRI lines, SIP and Mobile trunks.
166. If no match is found for the CLI of the caller in the Table, the call will be routed as per the Incoming Call Routing configured in
ETERNITY.
167. DISA Inactivity Timer is not applicable for T1E1PRI line, BRI, SIP and Mobile trunks.
1158 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• If DISA with CLI Authentication - One Call Answer Signaling is enabled,
• The system compares the CLI of the caller with the Calling Party Numbers configured in the CLI
Authentication Table.
• If the CLI matches with any of the Calling Party Numbers in the Table, the system provides access to
the extension configured as Auto Login extension for this Calling Party Number in the Table168.
• The caller gets logged into the Auto Login extension and gets dial tone of the outgoing trunks selected
for TAC-1 for the current Time Zone (working hours, break hours, non-working hours).
• If the caller dials an external number using a TWT trunk, the system starts the DISA Inactivity Timer
(configured; default: 2 minutes).
• The system waits for the caller to dial digits within the DISA Inactivity Timer. If the caller fails to dial any
digit within this timer, the system plays beeps for the duration of the DISA Warning Beeps Timer (fixed;
15 seconds). If no digit is received at the end of the Warning Beeps, the system terminates the DISA
session. If digits are received before the end of the Warning Beeps, the system reloads the DISA
Inactivity Timer.
• After the external call is completed, i.e. the caller disconnects from the remote end or the other remote
called party has disconnected, the caller is logged out.
• To make another external call, the caller must call the DISA enabled trunk of ETERNITY again.
In all the variants of DISA, the caller can use all the features allowed in the “Class of Service (COS)” of the
extension the caller is logged in to (using PIN Authentication or CLI Authentication).
• DISA calls in the SMDR report are marked as "O" in the remarks column. See “Station Message Detail
Recording–Report”.
• If DISA is disabled, ETERNITY will route the call by DID logic, if DID is enabled. If DISA and DID both
are disabled, the incoming call will be routed as per the incoming call routing configured. To know
more, see “Direct Inward Dialing (DID)”.
How to configure
To provide DISA to remote users you need to do the following configuration:
• Select the DISA variant for the Trunks on which you want to apply this feature in their “Trunk Feature
Template”.
• Enable DISA in the “Class of Service (COS)” of the extensions which you want to allow callers to access
using DISA.
• Change the User Password of the DISA extensions, if you selected DISA PIN Authentication-Multiple
Calls. If you selected DISA PIN Authentication-Multiple Calls on a trunk, the default User Password (1111)
will not work. See “User Password” and “System Security” more information and instructions.
168. If no match is found for the CLI of the caller in the Table, the call will be routed as per the Incoming Call Routing configured in the
ETERNITY.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1159
• Configure the related timers, DISA Idle State Timer and DISA Inactivity Timer, if required. See “System
Timers and Counts” for instructions.
• If you have selected the DISA CLI Authentication-Multiple Calls or CLI Authentication-One Call Answer
Signaling on a trunk, you must configure the CLI Authentication Table.
Configuring DISA CLI Authentication Table using Jeeves
To configure the DISA CLI Authentication Table,
• Make a list of remote users and their numbers whom you want to allow DISA.
• For each remote user’s number on your list, write the Extension number of the ETERNITY you want to
allow this extension user to log in.
• Open Jeeves.
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access Mode.
1160 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Click the DISA - CLI Authentication link. The CLI Authentication Table page opens.
• You can configure as many as 999 numbers in this table, by clicking the tabs of the index on the top of the
table.
• Refer to the list of remote user numbers and the corresponding ETERNITY extension numbers you made.
• In the Calling Number column, enter the number of the remote users whom you want to allow access to
DISA using CLI Authentication. The system will match the CLI of the callers with the numbers you store
here.
• For each Calling Party Number, in the Auto Login as field, select the extension Port Type (SLT, DKP, SIP
Extension, ISDN Terminal) and Port Number you want to allow access to after the Calling Party Number
is authenticated.
• Click Submit button to save your entries.
• You may log out of Jeeves.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1161
Configuring DISA CLI Authentication Table using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To enter Calling Number in the CLI Authentication Table, dial:
• 4111-Index-Calling Number-#*
Where,
Index is from 001 to 999.
Calling Number may contain a maximum of 16 digits.The allowed digits are 0-9, #, *, A, B, C, D, +. Use
following codes to enter these digits:
Special Digit Code
A #4
B #5
C #6
D #7
+ #8
* **
# ##
To assign Port Type and Port Number, dial:
• 4112-Index-Port Type-Port Number
Where,
Index is from 001 to 999.
Port Type and Port Number are:
Port
Port Type Meaning
Number
00 000 None
01 001 to 512 SLT
02 001 to 128 DKP
28 01 to 64 ISDN Terminal
34 001 to 999 SIP Extension
For example, to configure extension '3001', which is a DKP with port number 001, as auto login station in
Index 001 of the Table, you must dial 4112-001-02-001.
• Exit SE mode.
1162 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
How to use
If you are a Remote user, to be able to use DISA, you must know:
• the number of the Trunk on which DISA is enabled and the variant of DISA enabled on this trunk.
• the number of the extension and the user password which you want to access, if using DISA with PIN
Authentication.
• the duration of the DISA related Timers: The DISA Idle State Timer and the DISA Inactivity Timer, so that
you may dial digits accordingly, without delay.
• the special digits to be dialed during a DISA login session.
Dialing Special Digits
After successful login, you will be required to go on-hook, go off-hook, use 'flash', use 'pause' or dial characters like
A, B, C, D, from your remote device to use the features and facilities of ETERNITY.
However, ETERNITY will not be able to understand the conventional way of dialing 'flash' key or going on-hook with
momentary make/break of loop current. Therefore, ETERNITY supports specific codes for specific activities. If
these codes are received during a DISA session, ETERNITY interprets it and performs the associated activity.
When you are in DISA mode, use the following codes to indicate an activity:
Special Digit/activity Code to be dialed
on-hook #0
off-hook #1
Flash #2
Pause #3
A #4
B #5
C #6
D #7
+ #8
To Terminate the DISA #9
# ##
End of String #*
To use DISA,
• Dial the number of the Trunk on which DISA is enabled for the current time zone, Working, Break, Non-
working hours.
• ETERNITY answers the call. You will get music or DID Voice Message, if configured.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1163
If DISA PIN Authentication-Multiple Calls is enabled,
• You will get beeps at the end of music/DID Voice Message.
• Dial DISA Login Code 1079 during the beeps.
• Dial the extension number. You will get beeps.
• Dial the User Password for the extension during the beeps.
• You get dial tone on successful login.
• Dial the special digits #1 to go Off-hook, #0 to go On-hook, and make your calls like any local extension.
For example, making an external call, dial Trunk Access Code '0' to grab a trunk and dial the number.
• To terminate DISA session dial #9 or disconnect the call from your (remote) end.
If DISA CLI Authentication-Multiple Calls is enabled,
• You will get system dial tone at the end of music/DID Voice Message.
• Dial the special digits #1 to go Off-hook, #0 to go On-hook, and make your calls like any local extension.
• To terminate DISA session dial #9 or disconnect the call from your (remote) end.
If DISA CLI Authentication - One Call Answer Signaling is enabled,
• You will get Trunk dial tone at the end of music/DID Voice Message.
• Dial the external number, without the Trunk Access Code.
• The DISA session will be terminated when you or the remote called party disconnects.
• To make another call, you must dial the number of the DISA enabled trunk again.
The features listed below are not supported in the DISA mode.
• Auto Call Back
• Auto Redial
• Call Park
• Call Chaining
• Self Ring Test
• Trunk Reservation
• Walk-In Class of Service
• Live Call Supervision
1164 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Direct Station Selection Console
The Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console is a two-wire digital terminal with 64 to 72 keys (depending on the
model) with single and dual-/tri-color LEDs. The DSS Console is an add-on module for the Digital Key Phone
(DKP), functioning as the extension of the DKP. It provides you quick access to Stations, Trunks, Features/
Functions of the ETERNITY or at the touch of a single key, making call operations easy.
While the DSS Console is more commonly used by the Operator/receptionist in an organization, it meant for use by
anyone who needs to access the many features of the ETERNITY at a single touch of a button.
The Matrix DSS Consoles are available as DSS64 (64 keys) and DSS72 (72 keys), and have different appearance
to match the style of each model of the digital key phone, EON.
DSS72: 24x3 (72 Keys) DSS64: 16x4 (64 Keys)
Two DSS Consoles can be attached to a single DKP. Each DSS Console occupies a Digital Key Phone Port. For
example, if you attach two DSS consoles to a single DKP, three DKP ports would be occupied.
The DSS Console can be attached with the ETERNITY in the same way as the DKP, EON, and is programmed as
an attachment of the DKP (Refer the sections “Installing DSS Consoles” and “Programming DSS Console Keys” for
instructions).
You can attach two DSS consoles to a single DKP. This may be necessary, if you want to access most or all of the
features/functions of the ETERNITY at a single touch of a key.
When a single DSS64 is attached with a DKP, the DSS keys of the DKP as well as all the 64 keys of the DSS64 can
be used. If the DSS72 is used, 72 keys can be used as DSS key, in addition to the DSS keys on the DKP. Similarly,
if two DSS64 are attached to a DKP, 128 additional keys are at your disposal to be used as DSS keys.
Each DSS Console that is attached to a DKP occupies a DKP port. Hence, the more DSS Consoles you attach to
DKPs, the lesser number of DKP ports will be available on the ETERNITY.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1165
DSS Keys
The keys on DSS64 and DSS72 are mapped as follows in the factory default settings:
DSS64: 16x4 (64 Keys) DSS72: 24x3 (72 Keys)
01 17 33 49
01 25 49
02 18 34 50 02 26 50
03 19 35 51 03 27 51
04 20 36 52 04 28 52
05 21 37 53 05 29 53
06 22 38 54 06 30 54
07 23 39 55 07 31 55
08 24 40 56 08 32 56
09 25 41 57
09 33 57
10 26 42 58
10 34 58
11 27 43 59
11 35 59
12 28 44 60
12 36 60
13 29 45 61
13 37 61
14 30 46 62
14 38 62
15 31 47 63
15 39 63
16 32 48 64
16 40 64
17 41 65
18 42 66
19 43 67
20 44 68
21 45 69
22 46 70
23 47 71
24 48 72
You can assign Station numbers or features/functions to the keys on the DSS Console in the same way as you
would assign functions to the DSS keys of various models of EON, so that they can be accessed easily simply by
pressing a single key.
LEDs
Each DSS Console key is equipped with an LED which glows in single (Red) or in tri-color (Green, Red, Orange)
depending on the function assigned to it.
When a Station or Trunk is assigned to a DSS Console key, the LED functions as a tri-color LED to show the status
of the Station (whether ringing, busy, in speech, on hold). When a Feature is assigned a DSS Console key, it
functions as a single color LED to indicate whether the Feature has been accessed or activated (for example:
whether the feature is set or canceled).
The LED color and cadence of the DSS Console keys is the same as that of the DSS keys of EON42, and 48.
Refer the topic “Digital Key Phone-Operation” to know more.
Remember, as not all Features/Functions require an LED, the LED of the DSS keys function only if the LED is
relevant for the feature/function which is assigned to the keys.
1166 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Distinctive Rings
What's this?
Distinctive Rings are ringing patterns used for distinguishing between different types of call events.
ETERNITY supports the following types of call events:
1. Internal Call
2. Priority Internal Call
3. External Call
4. Alarm Call
5. Auto Call Back Call
6. Auto Redial Call
7. Message Wait Call
8. SE Mode (Programming Ring)
9. Operator Alarm
10. Emergency
11. Self Ring
12. Call Supervision
13. Door Phone Call
14. Presence
With Distinctive Rings, it is possible to use ring cadence of user's choice for each of these call events. For instance,
Triple ring can be set for 'Priority Internal Calls' and long rings can be set for 'Alarm Calls'.
A set of ring types is called Distinctive Ring type. The default Distinctive Ring Types are:
Call Event Ring Type set 1 (T1) Ring Type set 2 (T2) Ring Type set 3 (T3)
Internal Call Short Very Slow Double Double
Trunk Call Double Long Slow Long Slow
Auto Call Back Short Long Short Long Short Long
Auto Redial Very Long Slow Very Long Slow Very Long Slow
Self Alarm Long Fast Long Fast Long Fast
Emergency Long Fast Long Fast Long Fast
Operator Alarm Long Fast Long Fast Long Fast
Message Wait
Short Fast Short Fast Short Fast
Call
Programming
Continuous Continuous Continuous
Ring
Self Ring Short Long Short Long Short Long
Priority Triple Triple Triple
Call Supervision Continuous Continuous Continuous
Door Phone Triple Triple Triple
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1167
Call Event Ring Type set 1 (T1) Ring Type set 2 (T2) Ring Type set 3 (T3)
Presence Continuous Continuous Continuous
These ring types have the following ring cadence:
Ring Pattern Cadence (in milliseconds)
Short Fast 750-750
Short Long 500-1500
Short Very Slow 750-2250
Long Fast 1500-500
Long Slow 1000-4000
Very Long Slow 2000-4000
Double 400-200-400-2000
400-200-400-200-400-
Triple
2000
Ring cadence is not programmable.
How it works
At the time of installation, when the System Engineer selects the “Region” (as per the geographical location of the
system), ETERNITY loads the country-specific Distinctive Ring Type defined for the selected Region.
Refer the topic “Default Settings” for the default Distinctive Ring Type applied to your country/region.
Demonstration of rings
It is possible to demonstrate Ring Types to users by dialing the SE commands from EON or an SLT.
By default, the system will play each Ring Type as demonstration for 30 seconds.
How to configure
The country-specific Distinctive Ring Pattern is set automatically by the system when you select the Region Code
and issue command to default the system. However, if required, the System Engineer can change the default Ring
Pattern loaded by the system.
Programming Distinctive Rings using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
1168 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Click the 'Ring Parameters' link to open the page.
• Select the desired Ring Pattern for each call event that you want to customize.
• Click 'Submit' to save changes.
• Log out of Jeeves or continue programming as required.
Programming Distinctive Rings using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To change Ring Pattern for the call event, dial:
• 4002-Event-Ring Pattern
Where,
Event is:
01 for Internal Call
02 for Trunk Call
03 for Auto Call Back Call
04 for Auto Redial Call
05 for Self Alarm Call
06 for Emergency
07 for Operator Alarm
08 for Message Wait Call
09 for Programming Ring
10 for Self Ring
11 for Priority Call
12 for Call Supervision
13 for Door Phone
14 for Presence
Ring Pattern is:
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1169
00 for OFF
01 for Continuous
02 for Short Fast
03 Short Long
04 Short Very Slow
05 Long Fast
06 Long Slow
07 Very Long Slow
08 Double
09 Triple
To default ring patterns of events:
• Dial command 4001
• Exit SE mode.
How to use
Users of ETERNITY may be acquainted with the different Distinctive Rings played by the system so that they can
associate the terms used to describe the rings with the sound emitted by the system for each ring.
Ring Patterns can be demonstrated to users by dialing the SE commands from EON or an SLT.
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users
• Enter SE mode.
• Dial command 4003-Ring Pattern
Where,
Ring Pattern is
01 for Continuous
02 for Short Fast
03 for Short Long
04 for Short Very Slow
05 for Long Fast
06 for Long Slow
07 for Very Long Slow
08 for Double
09 for Triple
• After dialing the desired Ring Pattern Code,
• Press 'Enter' key if using EON42/EON48.
• You get the prompt 'Go Idle for Ring' on your phone display.
• Go Idle.
• The Ring Pattern you selected will be played.
• You may repeat the SE commands to demonstrate another Ring Pattern.
1170 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Exit SE mode.
For SLT Users
• Enter SE mode.
• Dial command 4003-Ring Pattern
Where,
Ring Pattern is
01 for Continuous
02 for Short Fast
03 for Short Long
04 for Short Very Slow
05 for Long Fast
06 for Long Slow
07 for Very Long Slow
08 for Double
09 for Triple
• Go Idle, after dialing the desired Ring Pattern Code.
• The Ring Pattern you selected will be played.
• You may repeat the SE commands to demonstrate another Ring Pattern.
• Exit SE mode.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1171
Do Not Disturb (DND)
What's this?
Extension users may wish to restrict calls to their extensions in order to work uninterrupted by frequent phone calls.
The feature, Do Not Disturb, enables users accomplish this.
This feature is useful to extension users who are in the middle of a meeting or any important work that requires their
undivided attention. This feature can be used in hotels and hospitals, this feature can be used to restrict calls made
to guests and patients. See ETERNITY Hospitality System Manual.
DND can be set and canceled by
• Extension users
• Operator for extension users, referred to as DND-Remote.
Doing so, calls from other extensions will be barred. However, the extension user would continue to receive:
• all the external calls transferred by the Operator/any other phone, DID Calls and DDI Calls.
• Alarm calls.
• Reminder calls.
• Auto Call Back calls.
Also, the extension user can:
• use all the features of the PBX.
• make Outgoing calls and
• make Internal calls to other extensions.
DND has three supplementary features: “DND-Override”, “DND Text Message” and “Voice Message for DND
Notification”.
DND-Override
As the feature title suggests, 'DND-Override' allows the caller to land on the called extension, despite DND set on
the extension.
DND-Override will not work if the called extension has 'Privacy from DND-Override' enabled in its Class of Service.
DND Text Message
A DND Message can be a short Text Message such as 'In a Meeting', 'In a conference', 'On vacation', that a user
can set when enabling DND on his/her phone.
When setting DND (also DND-Remote), the extension user/Operator can select an appropriate text message to be
displayed to the calling extension.
This DND text message is displayed on the calling extension, but only if the calling extension is the proprietary
digital key phone, EON.
1172 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The ETERNITY supports 9 different DND Text Messages, which can be changed as per user requirement by the
System Engineer. User can select and set on their phones any of the DND messages programmed by the System
Engineer.
Voice Message for DND Notification
Using this feature, a pre-recorded Voice Message can be played to the caller informing him/her about the DND set
on the called extension. For example, "The dialed extension has activated Do Not Disturb".
Voice Message Notification for DND is particularly useful when the phone on which DND is set is an SLT.
When DND is set on an extension of ETERNITY, callers who try to reach that extension are played an error tone.
Callers who are using EON are displayed the DND Text Message set by the called extension, and thus come to
know the cause of the error tone. Such a facility is not available to callers who are using SLTs, who can hear only
the error tone and have no way of knowing the cause of the error tone.
Hence the feature Voice Message for DND Notification, whereby a pre-recorded Voice Message notifies them of
the DND set on the called extension.
To play to the callers pre-recorded voice messages as DND Notification, you must record and assign a Voice
Module.
How it works
A, B and C are extension users.
B has EON, while C has an SLT.
B has DND-Override in his Class of Service, C does not have this feature.
DND Text messages as well as Voice Message Notification for DND have been programmed by the System
Engineer.
• A has set DND on his extension with the DND Text message 'In Meeting'169.
• B calls A.
• As B has DND-Override, the Voice Message for DND Notification is played to B once, and the DND
message 'In Meeting' set by A appears on B's phone display. B gets routing Beeps.
• To exercise DND-Override, B must dial '4' the feature access code for 'DND-Override' during either during
the Voice Message or during the routing Beeps.
• B gets Ring Back Tone, if A's extension is free.
• B gets Busy Tone, if A's extension is busy.
• However, if A has Privacy from DND Override, B will get error tone and the DND message set by A
appears on B's phone.
If B fails to dial the DND-Override code before the end of the routing beeps, error tone will be played to
him.
Now, to take another example,
• C calls A.
• As C has an SLT, C will get only the Error tone.
• But as Voice Message for DND Notification is programmed in the system, C will be played the pre-
recorded message once.
169. While DND and DND Text Message can be set from any phone, DND Text Message can be viewed on EON only.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1173
• Since C is not allowed 'DND-Override' in his Class of Service, he cannot exercise this feature during the
Voice Message.
• At the end of the voice message, C will be played error tone.
How to configure
For this feature to work, 'DND', 'DND-Override' and 'Privacy from DND-Override' must be enabled in the Class of
Service group of the extensions which is to be allowed this feature.
Besides these, the System Engineer may program the DND Text Message and the Voice Message for DND
Notification, as per user requirements.
Programming DND in Class of Service
In the default Station Basic Feature Template 01 assigned to all stations of the ETERNITY, the default CoS group
01 has DND enabled. So, all stations of ETERNITY can set and cancel DND. DND-Override and Privacy from
DND-Override are disabled in the default CoS group 01. So, none of the stations can use DND-Override, or be
exempt from DND.
While it makes sense to offer all stations DND, providing DND-Override and Privacy from DND also to all stations
will not serve the purpose of DND.
Decide which stations are to be allowed 'DND', which are to be allowed 'DND-Override', and which are to be
allowed 'Privacy from DND-Override'. Generally, DND-Override is allowed to the Operator station. It may be
allowed to stations of persons in senior positions in the organization. Similarly, Privacy from DND-Override may be
allowed to persons in senior positions in the organization.
If you want to allow DND to all stations, retain the default CoS group 01 in Station Basic Feature Template 01.
However, if you want to allow DND only to selected stations, disable this feature in the default CoS group 1.
Now, to assign DND to selected stations, follow these steps:
1. Define a CoS group with DND enabled.
2. Prepare a Station Basic Template with this CoS group applicable in all the time zones.
3. Assign this newly prepared Station Basic Feature Template to the stations on which 'DND' is to be
enabled.
Similarly, if 'DND-Override' is to be to be allowed to the Operator and a few other stations, follow these steps:
1. Define a CoS group with DND-Override enabled. If DND is also to be allowed, enable both DND-Override
and DND in this CoS group.
2. Prepare a Station Basic Template with this CoS group applicable in all the time zones.
3. Assign this newly prepared Station Basic Feature Template to the Operator station on which 'DND-
Override' is to be enabled.
Repeat the same steps to allow 'Privacy from DND-Override' to selected stations. For stations that are to be
allowed 'DND' as well as 'Privacy from DND-Override', enable both features in the CoS group in the Station Basic
Feature Template applied on these stations.
Similarly, for stations that are to be allowed 'DND', 'DND-Override' and 'Privacy from DND-Override', enable all
three features in the CoS group that you prepare for these stations.
1174 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Refer the topics “Class of Service (COS)” and “Station Basic Feature Template” for detailed programming
instructions on how to prepare a CoS in the Station Basic Feature Template and how to apply this template on
stations.
Programming DND Text Messages
By default, 9 DND Text Messages are programmed in the ETERNITY as listed below:
Message # DND Message
1 Do Not Disturb
2 Unavailable
3 In Meeting
4 In Conference
5 Try on Mobile
6 On Vacation
On Business
7
Trip
8 Out of Office
9 With a Guest
You can use these default message options or program messages as per user preferences.
Programming DND Messages using Jeeves
• Login as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the 'System Parameters' link to open the page.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1175
• Scroll down with the vertical scroll bar on the right to reach 'DND Text Messages' on this page.
• All the default text messages appear in the DND message field. Change the DND text messages as
required. Click the field and enter your custom DND text message.
• Click 'Submit' to save the changes.
Programming DND Messages using Telephone
• Enter SE mode
• Dial command 1502-Text Message Number-Text Message
Where,
Text Message Number is from 1 to 9.
Text Message is a string of 16 alphabets or alphanumeric characters.
If the new message has less than characters 16 terminate the string with #*.
For example: to program 'Out for Lunch' as the second DND Text Message, dial 1502-2- Out for
Lunch -#*
• To clear a Text Message, dial 1502-Text Message Number-#*.
• To reload default DND text messages, dial command 1501. The default DND Text Messages are given
above in the table.
• Exit SE Mode.
1176 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• When you dial the command string for DND Text Messages, alphanumeric dialing will be automatically
enabled on the DKP - EON.
• You can enter alphabets by pressing the relevant key repeatedly, just as you would do when you type
text messages on your mobile phone (SMS mode). For example, to enter the alphabet 'b' you must
press the digit '2' twice in quick succession.
• Also, refer the topic “Digital Key Phone-Operation” for instructions on entering alphanumeric characters
using the keypad of EON.
Programming Voice Message for DND Notification
To be able to play a voice message to callers for DND notification, you must first record a Voice Module with the
desired message.
ETERNITY ME, GE and PE support 16 Voice Modules of 16 seconds duration each.
Record a Voice Module with the message "The dialed extension has activated Do Not Disturb" (recommended).
Assign the Voice Module to the Voice Message Application number 44 defined for 'DND Notification'.
Refer the topic “Voice Message Applications” for programming instructions.
How to use
DND set/canceled by Extension Users
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users
To set DND:
• Press the DSS Key assigned the 'DND' feature.
OR
• Dial 18
• Scroll to select from any of the DND messages that appears on the phone's display:
• Do Not Disturb
• Unavailable
• In Meeting
• In Conference
• Try on Mobile
• On Vacation
• On Business Trip
• Out of Office
• With a Guest
• Press 'Enter' key.
• You get a text message 'DND Set' on the phone's display and confirmation tone.
• Go Idle or you get dial tone after the confirmation tone.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1177
To cancel DND:
• Press DND Key again.
OR
• Dial 18-0
• You get a text message 'DND Cancelled' on the phone's display and confirmation tone.
For SLT Users
To set DND:
• Lift handset.
• Dial 18-1 for 'Do Not Disturb'
• Dial 18-2 for 'Unavailable'
• Dial 18-3 for 'In Meeting'
• Dial 18-4 for 'In Conference'
• Dial 18-5 for 'Try on Mobile'
• Dial 18-6 for 'On Vacation'
• Dial 18-7 for 'On Business Trip'
• Dial 18-8 for 'Out of Office'
• Dial 18-9 for 'With a Guest'
• Replace handset.
To cancel DND:
• Lift handset.
• Dial 18-0
• Replace handset.
DND-Remote
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users
To set DND for an extension user:
• Press the DSS Key assigned to DND-Remote.
OR
Dial 1072-001.
• Enter the extension number1.
• Scroll to select the desired DND message from the list that appears on your phone display.
• Do Not Disturb
• Unavailable
• In Meeting
• In Conference
• Try on Mobile
• On Vacation
• On Business Trip
• Out of Office
• With a Guest
• Press 'Enter' key.
• You get a text message 'DND Set on <Extension Number>' and confirmation tone.
1178 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Go Idle or you get dial tone after confirmation tone.
To cancel DND-Remote,
• Press the key assigned Remote-DND function.
OR
Dial 1072-001.
• Enter the Extension Number.
• Scroll to select the message 'Cancel DND'.
• Press 'Enter' key.
• You get a text message 'DND Canceled on <Extension number>' and confirmation tone.
• Go Idle or you get dial tone after confirmation tone.
For SLT Users
To set DND for an extension user:
• Lift the handset.
• Dial 1072-001. You get feature tone.
• Dial Extension number. You get feature tone.
• Dial 1 for 'Do Not Disturb'
• Dial 2 for 'Unavailable'
• Dial 3 for 'In Meeting'
• Dial 4 for 'In Conference'
• Dial 5 for 'Try on Mobile'
• Dial 6 for 'On Vacation'
• Dial 7 for 'On Business Trip'
• Dial 8 for 'Out of Office'
• Dial 9 for 'With a Guest'
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace handset.
To cancel DND set for an extension user:
• Pick up the handset.
• Dial 1072-001. You get feature tone.
• Dial Extension Number. You get feature tone.
• Dial '0' to cancel DND.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace handset.
DND-Override
For EON and SLT Users
• Dial an extension number.
• You get routing beeps and a DND Notification message, if programmed (and a DND Text message, if
using EON)
• Dial '4', the DND-Override Code, during the message or the routing beeps.
• The called extension will start ringing.
• You will get Ring Back tone.
• If the dialed phone is busy, you will get busy tone.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1179
Door Phone
What's this?
A Door Phone is typically used for monitoring an entrance door. It is installed in place of the Doorbell.
The door phone is similar to any ordinary phone; except it does not have a hook-switch or a dial pad. Usually, it is a
weather tight box, equipped with a button like a doorbell, which visitors press.
ETERNITY offers the Door Phone feature exclusively on its ETERNITY PE model and its variants.
When visitors press the Door Phone Call Button, the phone programmed to receive the call (landing destination)
rings. The user of the called phone can answer the door phone call by simply lifting the handset and talk to the
visitor at the door. The user of the called phone can have the door opened for the visitor by either physically
appearing at the door or operating a door lock release device.
The Door Phone feature of the ETERNITY PE allows users to operate the door phone from a remote location (off-
premises) by having their calls routed to an external number.
The Door Phone feature of the ETERNITY PE is very convenient to have at:
• Delivery entrances: It is not necessary to have company personnel monitor delivery entrances. They can
just answer the Door Phone instead.
• Clinics, Pharmacies, Apothecary, Druggist/Chemist Medicine Dispensaries: Where patients need to
be attended to and medicines must be dispensed round the clock to patients/prescription holders, doctors/
pharmacists can use the door phone feature to let in patients/prescription holders, even during non-
working hours and when they are absent.
It is also possible for the doctor/pharmacist to have calls of the door phone landed on their mobile number
or any other fixed line external number, and open their clinic/pharmacy from their current (remote) location
to let the patient in.
• Residences and Apartment entrances: The identity of the visitors can be screened before letting them
in. The occupants of the house can greet their guests/relatives and let them enter the house even in their
absence by answering the door phone from their current (remote) location and opening the door for them.
Matrix does not supply Door Phones, but only the Interface to connect Door Phones. Any standard 4-wire
Door Phone can be connected to the ETERNITY PE.
How it works
The Pre-requisites
• A four-wire Door Phone connected to the Door Phone Port on the Door Phone Card of the ETERNITY PE.
ETERNITY PE supports 3 Door Phone Ports, so you can connect as many four-wire Door Phones. This
may be required in buildings with more than one entrance.
1180 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• A Door Lock Release device connected to the Digital Output Port (DOP) on the Door Phone Card of the
ETERNITY PE, if a Door Lock Release is to be used in conjunction with the Door Phone.
ETERNITY PE supports 3 Digital Output Ports, allowing you to connect as many Door Lock devices.
The Process
• When a visitor arrives at the entrance and presses the door phone button, the system senses the doorbell
and places the call on the phone programmed as the landing destination. The destination phone may be
extensions of the ETERNITY or an external fixed line or mobile number.
When the landing destination is an extension of ETERNITY,
• The ETERNITY plays a distinct Ring Type on the extension, to indicate to the extension users that it is a
door phone call. The Ring Type is programmable; by default Triple Ring is set as ring type.
• The visitor is played Ring Back Tone while the destination extension rings for the duration of the 'Door
Phone Ring Timer (programmable)170.
If the destination extension does not answer the call within this Timer, the Door Phone call is dropped and
the Door Phone goes idle.
• When the destination extension answers the call, the Door Phone circuit is activated and two-way speech
is established between the visitor and the extension user.
• The extension user ascertains identity of the visitor.
• The extension user may now either physically appear at the door to open it, or dial the Open Door Lock
Code (default: 1173) from the current extension.
• When a Door Lock is used to open the door,
• the extension user puts the call on hold, music-on-hold is played to the visitor.
• the extension user dials the Feature Access Code to 'Open the Door' (default: 1173).
• the Door Lock is opened for the duration of the Timer 'Open Door for Time, (programmable; default: 5
seconds)171,172.
• as soon as this Access Code is dialed, speech is reestablished with the visitor.
• the extension user invites the visitor to enter the building.
• The Door Lock closes on the expiry of the "Open Door for" timer.
• The Door Phone goes idle only when the extension user goes ON-Hook.
• The extension user can open the Door Lock also by dialing the feature command to operate the DOP.
For this, however, the extension must have the facility "DOP Turn ON/Turn OFF' in its “Class of Service
(COS)”. Refer the topic “Digital Output Port (DOP)” for operation instructions.
• It is possible for the any extension of the ETERNITY PE to establish speech with the Door Phone even
when it is idle, by dialing the unique access code assigned to the Door Phone.
170. The "Door Phone Ring Timer" determines the time for which the landing destination shall ring for the door phone call. This Timer is
necessary because often visitors may press the door phone switch as they would do a door bell, for one or two seconds only,
whereas the call must remain present for a longer period of time for it to be answered.
171. This is the time for which the door will remain open.
172. An error tone will be played to the extension user for the duration of the error tone timer, if a DOP has not been assigned to the
Door phone port.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1181
When the landing destination is an external number,
• When the visitor presses the Door Phone button, the ETERNITY makes a call to the pre-programmed
external number, which may be a fixed line or a mobile number.
The ETERNITY connects the Door Phone to the Trunk Port on the basis of the Outgoing Trunk Bundle
Group assigned to the Door Phone Port. When connected to the Trunk Port, the Door Phone receives Call
Progress Tones of the CO Network.
• When the external number answers the call, speech is established between the visitor and the external
number.
• The called party on the external number ascertains the identity of the visitor.
• To open the door from the remote location,
• the called party on the external number puts the visitor on hold by dialing '#2'. The system plays music-
on-hold to the visitor.
• the called party on the external number dials the Feature Access Code for 'Open the Door' (default:
1173)173.
• the Door Lock is opened for the duration of the Timer 'Open Door for Time, (programmable; default: 5
seconds)174,175.
• as soon as this Access Code is dialed, speech is reestablished with the visitor.
• the visitor is invited to enter the building.
• the called party on the external number disconnects the call176; the Door Phone goes idle.
This way, it becomes possible to answer the door bell call from a remote location and open the door lock
from the remote location.
• The Door Lock can be opened by the called party on the external number also by dialing the command
for operating the DOP to which the Door Lock is connected, instead of dialing the 'Open the Door'
access code. Refer the topic “Digital Output Port (DOP)”for operation instructions.
• The called party on the external number can also call the Door Phone using Direct Inward System
Access (DISA).
• It is also possible for the called party on the external number to make multiple calls, while putting the
visitor at the Door Phone on hold. For this, the party must be logged in “Direct Inward System Access
(DISA)” mode.
• The Door Phone feature of the ETERNITY PE offers the flexibility of selecting the Routing Mode for Door
Phone calls. The system supports two Door Phone Call Routing Modes:
• Manual: Whenever you want to route the Door Phone Calls, you can alternately select the landing
destination, i.e., select a routing group at one time, the external number (the programmed fixed line or
mobile number) the next time, as required. The extension user can change the Call Routing Mode viz.
routing group or external number, as and when required.
173. This access code is to be dialed only when in speech with the visitor. If this access code is dialed when there is no speech, an error
tone will be played to the extension user for the duration of the Error Tone Timer.
174. This is the time for which the door will remain open.
175. An error tone will be played to the extension user for the duration of the error tone timer, if a DOP has not been assigned to the
Door phone port.
176. If the trunk used for placing this call is a Two-Wire Trunk, dial #0 to disconnect the call.
1182 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Scheduled: You can program the system to route Door Phone Calls automatically to the landing
destination phone according to the current “Time Zones”, i.e. working hours, break hours and non-
working hours. For example, you can have Door Phone calls during working hours landed on the
extensions of the ETERNITY, while Door Phone calls during non-working hours can be landed on an
external number. It is also possible to assign different routing groups (extensions) for different Time
Zones.
For this, a “Time Tables” must be assigned to the Door Phone Port, defining the Time Zones, i.e.
working hours, break hours and non-working hours. Routing Group must be defined for each Time
Zone. Similarly, if external number is selected as landing destination for any Time Zone, the number
must be programmed. The ETERNITY will follow the Time Table programmed and route the calls
according to the current Time Zone to the destination phone (routing group/external number)
programmed for the current Time Zone.
• The landing destination - Routing Group and the External Number - can be programmed only by the
System Engineer (SE).
• The Routing Mode for Door Phone Calls, 'Scheduled' or 'Manual' mode can be set by the SE as well as
the extension users (User Mode). However, extension users must have the feature "Door Phone
Settings" enabled in the '“Class of Service (COS)” group assigned to their extension. With this feature
included in their Class of Service, the extension users can switch between scheduled and manual
modes by dialing the Feature Command.
• The Time Table, the Routing Group, and the External Number for routing the Door Phone Calls can be
programmed by the System Engineer only.
• The Outgoing Trunk Bundle Group assigned to the Door Phone Port used for routing door phone calls
to an external number will be common for both Scheduled and Manual modes.
How to install Door Phones
For step-by-step installation of Door Phones, connecting them to the Door Phone Ports of the ETERNITY,
connecting Door Lock release devices, refer the topic “The Door Phone Card” in Installing ETERNITY PE.
ETERNITY PE supports 3 Door Phone Ports. You can connect any 4-wire Door Phones of standard make to these
ports.
How to configure
For the Door Phone feature to work, you must program the related set of Door Phone Parameters, allow 'Door
Phone Settings' in the Class of Service of extensions defined as the landing destination for Door Phone calls. If a
Door Lock is installed in conjunction with the Door Phone, you must also enable access to operate the Digital
Output Port in the Class of Service of extensions that are to be allowed to open the Door Lock.
Programming Door Phone Parameters using Jeeves
• Log into Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1183
• Click 'Door Phone Parameters' to open the page.
• The parameters for Manual Door Phone Routing will appear on your screen.
Door Phone Routing - Manual
If you want to manually route Door Phone calls, program the following parameters:
• Access Codes: Each Door Phone port can be given a unique access code. The Access Code allows the
extension user to call the related Door Phone. When an extension user dials the Door Phone Access
Code, the extension user will get connected to the related door phone and can speak to the visitor.
The default access codes for Port 1, Port 2, Port 3 are 2601, 2602 and 2603. You may change these
Access Codes. The Access Code assigned to the Door Phone port may be a maximum of 6 digits.
Refer the topics “Access Codes” and “Conflict Dialing” to know more.
• Name: It is also possible to assign a 'Name' to each door phone port for easy identification. This is useful
where there are multiple entrances each having a door phone installed. The Name you assign to a Door
Phone may be a maximum of 18 characters. By default Door Phone Port1, 2 and 3 are named 'Door
Phone 1', Door Phone 2' and Door Phone 3' respectively.
• Route Door Phone Calls to: Select the landing destination for Door Phone calls: Routing Group or
External Number.
• Routing Groups: program this parameter if you have selected Routing Group as the landing destination.
By default Routing Group 01 is assigned.
1184 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• If you want to assign a different Routing Group, click the 'Routing Group' link to open this page.
• Create another routing group, for instance, 03, and click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save
changes.
• Return the Door Phone Parameters page.
• Assign the number of the Routing Group you created (03) in this field.
• External Number: Program this parameter if you have selected External Number as the landing
destination. Enter the fixed line or mobile number to which door phone calls should be routed. The number
must not exceed 16 digits.
• OGTB Group: Define the Outgoing Trunk Bundle Group (OGTBG) through which the door phone calls to
the external number should be routed. By default OGTBG 01 is selected.
Door Phone Routing - Scheduled
If you want to route Door Phone calls as per Schedule,
• Click the 'Advance' button.
• The Door Phone parameters page will open again, with additional parameters.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1185
• Scroll to the right with the horizontal scroll bar, and program the following parameters for Scheduled
routing.
• Time Table: Each door phone port can be assigned a Time Table, with defined working hours, break
hours and non-working hours, so that calls landing on Door Phone can be routed to the destination phone
(routing group or external number) according to the current time zone. By default Time Table 1 is assigned
to all Door Phone ports. You may retain the default Time Table or assign a different Time Table.
• If you want to retain the default Time Table, check if the time zones defined in the default Time Table 1
fulfill your requirement by opening the 'Time Table' link in this column.
• The Time Table page will open, make the necessary changes, if required and click 'Submit' at the
bottom of the page to save your settings.
• Return to 'Door Phone Parameters' page.
• If you want to define a new Time Table for the door phone port, open the 'Time Table' page and define
the time zones in a new Time Table, for example, 2. Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page.
• Return to the 'Door Phone Parameters' page.
1186 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Enter the number of the new Time Table (2) you defined in the 'Time Table field of the Door Phone port
you want to assign it to.
• Door Phone Call Routing Mode: Select 'Scheduled' as the mode of call routing for the door phone port.
When you select one of these options, only those parameter fields related to the option will be editable on
the page.
The Routing Mode can be selected also by the extension user.
• Route Door Phone Calls to: define the landing destination for the door phone calls. You can select a
different landing destination - a Routing Group or an External Number - for each Time Zone, i.e. Working
Hours (WH), Break Hours (BH) and Non-Working Hours (NH).
You cannot program a different External Number for each Time Zone.
• Routing Group: program this parameter if you have selected Routing Group as the landing destination for
any of the Time Zones. By default Routing Group 01 is assigned.
• If you want to assign a different Routing Group, click the 'Routing Group' link to open the page.
• Create another routing group, for example, 04, and click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save
changes.
• Return the Door Phone Parameters page.
• Assign the number of the Routing Group you created (04) to the related Time Zone.
Also, refer the topic “Routing Group” for detailed instructions.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1187
• External Number: Program this parameter if you have selected External Number as the landing
destination for any of the Time Zones. Enter the fixed line or mobile number to which door phone calls
should be routed. The number must not exceed 16 digits.
• OGTB Group: Define the Outgoing Trunk Bundle Group (OGTB) through which the door phone calls to
the external number should be routed. By default OGTBG 01 is selected.
Door Lock Parameters
Program the following parameters if a Door Lock is used in conjunction with the Door Phone:
• Door Opener: Select the number of the Digital Output Port (DOP) to which the Door Lock for the Door
Phone is connected. For example, if the Door Lock for Door Phone 1 is connected at DOP1, select this
port as Door Opener. By default, no Door Opener has been assigned.
• Open Door For: This is the Time for which the Door Lock should remain open. Program this parameter if
using a Door Lock with the Door Phone. The range of this timer is from 01 to 99 seconds. By default the
Open Door Timer is set to 05 seconds.
• Door Phone Ring Timer: This is the time for which the Door Phone will ring on the landing extension in
the Routing Group. The range of this timer is from 001-255 seconds. The duration of this Ring Timer is set
to 30 seconds by default. You may program the desired duration.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your settings.
• Log out of Jeeves if you have no other programming tasks to complete.
1188 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Programming Door Phone Parameters using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To program access code (flexible number for Door Phone), dial:
• 3105-1-Door Phone-Access Code-#*
Where,
Door Phone is software port of Door Phone from 1 to 3
Access Code can be a number string not exceeding 6 digits.
Terminate command with #* if the number string is fewer than 6 digits.
To default access code of the Door Phone, dial:
• 3155-1-Door Phone
Where,
Door Phone is software port of Door Phone from 1 to 3
To program Name of Door Phone, dial:
• 5413-1-Door Phone-Name-#*
Where,
Door Phone is the software Port of the Door Phone from 1 to 3
Name can be of a maximum 18 characters.
Terminate command with #* if the Name is fewer than 18 characters.
To program Manual - Door Phone Call Routing Mode, dial:
• 3226-1-Door Phone-Call Routing Mode to program manual routing mode for a single door phone
port.
• 3226-2-Door Phone-Door Phone-Call Routing Mode to program manual routing mode for a range of
door phone ports.
• 3226-*-Call Routing Mode to program manual routing mode for all door phone ports.
Where,
Door Phone is the software port of the Door Phone from 1 to 3
Call Routing Mode is
1 for Routing Group,
2 for External Number
Default: Routing Group
To program Manual - Routing Group for Door Phone calls, dial:
• 3227-1-Door Phone-Routing Group to program manual routing group for a single door phone port.
• 3227-2-Door Phone-Door Phone-Routing Group to program the same routing group for a range of
door phone ports.
• 3227-*-Routing Group to program the same routing group for all door phone ports.
Where,
Door Phone is the software port of the Door Phone from 1 to 3
Routing Group is from 01 to 96.
Default: Routing group 01
To program Manual - Door Phone Call Routing on External Number, dial:
• 3228-1-Door Phone-External Number-#* to program external number for manual call routing for a
single door phone port.
• 3228-2-Door Phone-Door Phone-External Number-#* to program the same external number for
manual call routing for a range of door phone ports.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1189
• 3228-*-External Number-#* to program the same external number for manual call routing for all door
phone ports.
Where,
Door Phone is the software port of the Door Phone from 1 to 3
External number may be any number string not exceeding 16 digits. Terminate the command with #* if
the number is fewer than 16 digits.
To assign a Time Table to Door Phone, dial:
• 3221-1-Door Phone-Time Table-#* to assign a Time Table to a single door phone port.
• 3221-2-Door Phone-Door Phone-Time Table-#* to assign the same Time Table to a range of door
phone ports
• 3221-*-Time Table- #* to assign the same Time Table to all door phone ports.
Where,
Door Phone is the software port of the Door Phone from 1 to 3
Time Table is from 1 to 8
Default: 1 for all Door Phones
To assign Call Routing Mode for Door Phone, dial:
• 3222-1-Door Phone-Call Routing Mode to assign Call Routing Mode for a single door phone port.
• 3222-2-Door Phone-Door Phone-Call Routing Mode to assign the same Call Routing Mode to a
range of door phones ports.
• 3222-*-Call Routing Mode to assign the same Call Routing Mode to all door phone ports.
Where,
Door Phone is from 1 to 3
Call Routing Mode is
1 for Scheduled
2 for Manual
Default: Scheduled
To program Scheduled - Door Phone Call Routing for each Time Zone, dial:
• 3223-1-Door Phone-Time Zone-Call Routing Type to program time zone wise call routing for a single
door phone port.
• 3223-2-Door Phone-Door Phone-Time Zone-Call Routing Type to program the same routing type
and time zone for a range of door phone ports.
• 3223-*-Time Zone-Call Routing Type to program the same routing type and time zone for all door
phone ports.
Where,
Door Phone is the software port of the Door Phone from 1 to 3.
Time Zone is
1 for Working Hours (WH)
2 for Break Hours (BH)
3 for Non-Working Hours (NH)
Call Routing Type is
1 for Routing Group
2 for External Number
Default: Routing Group for WH, External Number for BH and NH
1190 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To program Scheduled - Door Phone Call Routing on Routing Group, dial:
• 3224-1-Door Phone-Time Zone-Routing Group to program a single door phone port.
• 3224-2-Door Phone-Door Phone-Time Zone-Routing Group to program the same Time Zone and
Routing Group for a range of door phone ports.
• 3224-*-Time Zone-Routing Group to program the same time zone and Routing Group for all door
phone ports.
Where,
Door Phone is the software port of the Door Phone from 1 to 3
Time Zone is
1 for Working Hours (WH)
2 for Break Hours (BH)
3 for Non-Working Hours (NH)
Routing Group is from 01 to 96.
Default: Routing Group 01 for all Time Zones.
To program Scheduled - Door Phone Call Routing on External Number, dial:
• 3225-1-Door Phone-External Number-#* to program a single door phone port.
• 3225-2-Door Phone-Door Phone-External Number-#* to program the same external number for a
range of door phone ports.
• 3225-*-External Number-#* to program the same external number for all door phone ports.
Where,
External number can be of a maximum of 16 digits. Terminate the command with #* if number is fewer
than 16 digits.
To program the OG Trunk Bundle Group (OGTBG) for Door Phone Port to route calls on External Number,
dial:
• 3229-1-Door Phone-OGTB Group to program OGTBG for a single door phone port.
• 3229-2-Door Phone-Door Phone-OGTB Group to program the same OGTBG for a range of door
phone ports.
• 3229-*-OGTB Group to program the same OGTBG for all door phone ports.
Where,
Door Phone is the software port of the Door Phone from 1 to 3
OGTBG is from 01 to 32.
Default: 01
To assign DOP (Door Opener) for the Door Phone, dial:
• 3231-1-Door Phone - DOP
Where,
Door Phone is the software port of the Door Phone from 1 to 3.
DOP is from 0 to 3
0 for None (no DOP is assigned)
1 for DOP1
2 for DOP2
3 for DOP3
Default: None
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1191
To program the Open Door Timer, dial:
• 3232-1-Door Phone-Open Door for Time
Where,
Door Phone is the software port of the Door Phone from 1 to 3.
Open Door Timer is from 01 to 99 seconds.
Default: 05 sec.
To program the Door Phone Ring Timer, dial:
• 3230-1-Door Phone-Door Phone Ring Timer to program the timer for a single door phone port.
• 3230-2-Door Phone-Door Phone-Door Phone Ring Timer to program the same timer for a range of
door phone ports.
• 3230-*-Door Phone Ring Timer to program the same timer for all door phone ports.
Where,
Door Phone is the software port of the Door Phone from 1 to 3
Door Phone Ring Timer is from 001 to 255 sec
Default: 30 sec.
• Exit SE mode.
Door Phone Settings in Class of Service
The feature 'Door Phone Settings' must be enabled in the “Class of Service (COS)” group assigned to the
extensions programmed as the landing destination for door phone calls, if you want to allow the extension user the
following:
• The option of selecting the Routing Mode for Door Phone calls, i.e. 'Scheduled' or 'Manual'.
• The facility to select the Call Routing Destination in the 'Manual Mode'.
In the default Station Basic Feature Template 01 assigned to all extensions of the ETERNITY PE, the default Class
of Service group 01 has the feature "Door Phone Settings" enabled. So, all extensions of ETERNITY PE are by
default allowed this feature.
There is no need to program this feature, if the default COS group 01 is assigned to the landing destination
extensions.
If a different COS group is assigned to the landing destination extensions, check if this feature is enabled in the
assigned COS group and enable this feature if not already included.
If you want to allow this COS feature exclusively to the landing destination extensions and deny this feature to all
other extensions, follow these steps:
1. Define a CoS group with Door Phone Settings enabled.
2. Prepare a Station Basic Template with this CoS group applicable in all the time zones.
3. Assign this newly prepared Station Basic Feature Template to the extensions on which 'Door Phone
Settings' is to be enabled.
Similarly, for extensions that are to be denied the 'Door Phone Settings' feature, follow the same steps, but
disable the 'Door Phone Settings' in the COS group and apply the Station Basic Feature Template on the
extensions which are to be denied this feature.
Refer the topic “Class of Service (COS)” and “Station Basic Feature Template” for instructions.
1192 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Digital Output Port Operation in Class of Service
As mentioned earlier, if you are using a Door Lock in conjunction with the Door Phone, you can open the Door Lock
by either dialing the 'Open the Door' access code, or by Turning ON/OFF the Digital Output Port to which the Door
Lock is connected.
To be able to open/close the Door Lock operating the Digital Output Port (DOP), the feature 'DOP Turn ON/OFF'
must be enabled in the Class of Service group allowed to the extension operating the DOP.
In the default Station Basic Feature Template 01 assigned to all extensions of the ETERNITY PE, the default Class
of Service group 01 has the feature "DOP Turn ON/OFF" enabled.
There is no need to program this feature, if the default COS group 01 is assigned to the landing destination
extensions.
If a different COS group is assigned to the landing destination extensions, check if this feature is enabled in the
assigned COS group. Enable this feature if not already included.
However, if you want to allow this COS feature exclusively to the landing destination extensions and deny this
feature to all other extensions, follow these steps:
1. Define a CoS group with DOP Turn ON/OFF enabled.
2. Prepare a Station Basic Template with this CoS group applicable in all the time zones.
3. Assign this newly prepared Station Basic Feature Template to the extensions to which 'DOP Turn ON/OFF
is to be allowed.
For extensions that are to be denied the 'DOP Turn ON/OFF' feature, follow the same steps, but disable the
'Door Phone Settings' in the COS group and apply the Station Basic Feature Template on the extensions
which are to be denied this feature.
Refer the topics “Class of Service (COS)” and “Station Basic Feature Template” for instructions.
How to use
To select a Call Routing Mode177:
Users world wide
• Dial 1171-Access Code of the Door Phone-1 for Scheduled Mode.
• Dial 1171-Access Code of the Door Phone-2 for Manual Mode.
Users in the Philippines
• Dial 1101-Access Code of the Door Phone-1 for Scheduled Mode.
• Dial 1101-Access Code of the Door Phone-2 for Manual Mode.
To select a Call Routing Destination for Manual Mode:
Users world wide
• Dial 1172-Access Code of the Door Phone-1 to route calls to an extension.
• Dial 1172-Access Code of the Door Phone-2 to route calls to an external number.
177. Manually by the user of the extension programmed as the landing destination for the Door Phone calls.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1193
Users in the Philippines
• Dial 1102-Access Code of the Door Phone-1 to route calls to an extension.
• Dial 1102-Access Code of the Door Phone-2 to route calls to an external number.
To open the Door Lock:
Users world wide
• Put the Door Phone call on Hold.
• Dial 1173
Users in the Philippines
• Put the Door Phone call on Hold
• Dial 1103
1194 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Dynamic Lock
What's this?
Dynamic Lock allows extension users to change the Toll Control Levels (Calling Permissions) of their extensions on
their own by dialing a code.
The System Administrator/Operator can also change the Toll Control Levels of extensions using Dynamic Lock.
With this feature, extension users can prevent misuse of outgoing call facility from their extensions, especially in
their absence.
Dynamic Lock also forms the basis of 'Call Privilege', which is feature of the Hotel Application of ETERNITY. Refer
the ETERNITY Hospitality System Manual to know more.
There are four types of Toll Control Levels, starting from Level 0 to Level 3 that can be set for extension phones.
For each Toll Control Level from 0 to 3, a 'Call Privilege’178 is to be assigned and corresponding numbers strings to
be allowed and number strings to be denied for each Call Privilege are to be programmed.
• Toll Control - Level 0 is Time Zone based, wherein the Call Privilege Type must be defined for each Time
Zone, i.e. Working Hours, Break Hours and Non-Working Hours. For instance, you may define
'International Calls' as Call Privilege for Working Hours, 'Local Calls' as Call Privilege for Break Hours and
'No Calls' as Call Privilege for 'Non-Working' Hours.
By default, Call Privilege 'International Calls' is selected for all three Time Zones.
• Toll Control - Level 1 is not based on Time Zones. By default, the Call Privilege Type for this level is
'Local Calls'.
• Toll Control - Level 2 is not based on Time Zones. By default, the Call Privilege type set for this level is
'National Calls'.
• Toll Control - Level 3 is not based on Time Zones. By default, Call Privilege 'No Calls' is selected for this
level.
The Call Privilege for each of the above Toll Control Levels can be redefined according to user
requirements. For example, Toll Control Level 3 can be programmed for allowing all types of calls by
selecting 'International Calls' as Call Privilege Type, and programming the numbers to be allowed and
denied in the 'International Numbers' List. Level 0 can be programmed to allow only Local Calls, by
programming the strings of 'Local Numbers'.
Refer the feature description for “Toll Control” to know more.
Extension users who are allowed the Dynamic Lock feature in their Class of Service, can set the Toll
Control Level in two ways:
• Manually: the extension user changes the Toll Control Level of the extension whenever s/he wants by
dialing the feature access code.
178. The Call Privilege types are: No Calls, Local Calls, Regional Calls, National Calls, International Calls and Limited Calls.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1195
For example, an extension user having Toll Control Level 2 (default: National calls) can restrict long
distance dialing on his/her extension by setting the Toll Control Level to 1 (default: Local calls) before
leaving the workplace. On return, the user can restore the previous Toll Control Level, by setting it back
to Level 2.
Thus the extension user sets Dynamic Lock s/he manually selects the desired Toll Control Level for
his/her extension and restores the original Toll Control Level assigned to the extension.
• Automatically: the extension user changes the Toll Control Level of the extension using the Dynamic
Lock Timer. The user sets the Timer to the desired number of minutes. On the expiry of this Timer, the
system restores the original Toll Control Level assigned to the extension.
For example, an organization has defined Toll Control Level 0 as Local Calls, and Level 3 as
International Calls. An extension user of this organization is assigned Level 0. When this extension
user wants to make international calls, he sets the Dynamic Lock Timer and selects Toll Control Level
3. At the end of the timer, Level 3 gets locked and Toll Control Level 0 is reapplied on the extension
phone.
• The changing of Toll Control level requires the user to dial the 4-digit User Password. The system will
not accept the default User Password (1111). The extension user must first change the default User
Password.
• The Dynamic Lock Timer can be set to a maximum of 99 minutes.
• The Dynamic Lock Timer must be set to '00' when using Manual Dynamic Lock.
How it works
The Pre-requisites
• The Toll Control Levels 0 to 3 are programmed in the Station Basic Feature Template applied on the
extension.
• Dynamic Lock is allowed to the extension in its Class of Service.
The Process
For Dynamic Lock - Manual
• The user of extension A sets the Dynamic Lock manually by entering the User Password and selecting the
desired Toll Control Level.
OR
• The Operator sets Dynamic Lock manually for an extension by entering the extension number and
selecting the Toll Control Level.
For Dynamic Lock - Automatic
• The user of extension A sets the Dynamic Lock by entering the User Password, selecting the desired Toll
Control Level, and setting the Dynamic Lock Timer.
1196 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
OR
• The Operator sets Dynamic Lock for an extension by entering the extension number, selecting the Toll
Control Level, and setting the Dynamic Lock Timer.
• Now, whenever a call is made from extension A, the system checks for Toll Control Level.
• The system then checks the associated Lists of allowed and denied numbers.
• If the Toll Control Level is 0, then Toll control is time zone based, i.e. working hours, break hours and
non-working hours. The outgoing call is allowed/denied as per the Call Privilege and the corresponding
Allowed and Denied Number List programmed for that time of the day by the System Engineer.
• If the Toll Control Level is 1, 2, 3 the outgoing call is allowed/denied as per the Call Privilege and the
corresponding number list programmed for each level.
• If Dynamic Lock - Automatic has been set by user/Operator, the system waits for the duration of the
Dynamic Lock Timer set for the extension. At the end of each outgoing call made during the period of this
Timer, the system will restart the Timer again. The system will change the Toll Control back to the pervious
Level when no call outgoing call is made till the expiry of this Timer.
• If Dynamic Lock - Automatic has been set by user/Operator, and an internal call is made during the period
of the Dynamic Lock Timer, the system will check for the 'Decrement Dynamic Lock Timer - Internal Calls'
feature in the Class of Service of allowed to the extension. If this feature is enabled, the system will start
the decrement of the Dynamic Lock Timer. The system will change the Toll Control back to the previous
level on the expiry of this Timer. However, if the 'Decrement Dynamic Lock Timer' feature is disabled in the
Class of Service, the system will reset the Toll Control as described in the previous step.
• If Dynamic Lock - Manual has been set, the extension user/Operator must set the Toll Control Level back
to the previous Level.
Feature Interactions
• Redial and Auto Redial: The system will check for Toll Control Level when an extension, on which
Dynamic Lock is set, attempts Redial or Auto Redial.
• Emergency Number Dialing: All extensions will be able to dial Emergency numbers always, regardless
of the Toll Control set on them.
ETERNITY provides for a separate programming of Emergency Numbers, which remain unaffected by
Dynamic Lock set on the phones. Refer the topic “Emergency Dialing” to know more about this feature.
How to configure
For this feature to work, it must be enabled in the Class of Service of the extensions; Toll Control Level must be
programmed in the Station Basic Feature Template of the extensions. The user must change the default User
Password.
Dynamic Lock in Class of Service
In the default Station Basic Feature Template 01 assigned to all extensions of the ETERNITY, the default COS
group 01 has Dynamic Lock enabled. So, all extensions can set Dynamic Lock.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1197
In the default COS group 01, 'Decrement Dynamic Lock Timer for Internal Calls' is disabled.
Retain the default template, if you want to allow this feature to all extensions and keep the Decrement Timer
disabled.
If you want to deny Dynamic Lock to all extension, simply disable this feature in the default COS group 01 of Station
Basic Feature Template 01.
If you want to allow Dynamic Lock and or the Decrement Dynamic Lock Timer for Internal Calls only to selected
stations, then follow these steps:
a. Define a new CoS group with Dynamic Lock and the Decrement Dynamic Lock Timer for Internal Calls
enabled.
b. Prepare a Station Basic Template with this CoS group applicable in all the time zones.
c. Assign this newly prepared Station Basic Feature Template to the extension on which 'Dynamic Lock' and
'Decrement Dynamic Lock Timer’ for Internal Call is to be allowed.
Similarly, if you want to deny Dynamic Lock/Decrement Dynamic Lock Timer to selected extension, prepare a new
Station Basic Feature Template with this feature disabled in the CoS group. Assign this feature to those stations
which are to be denied this feature.
Refer the topics “Class of Service (COS)” and “Station Basic Feature Template” for programming instructions.
Toll Control Levels in Station Basic Feature Template
Program the Toll Control Levels in the Station Basic Feature Template that are assigned to the extensions which
are to be allowed the Dynamic Lock feature. Refer the topic “Toll Control” for instructions.
How to use
Dynamic Lock, Manual and Automatic, can be set by extension users as well as from their own extensions or from
the SA mode by the Operator.
The extension user/Operator must first change the Dynamic Lock Level and set the Dynamic Lock Timer.
To set Dynamic Lock-Manual, the extension user/Operation must set the Dynamic Lock Timer to 00.
Recall that
• When the Dynamic Lock-Manual is set (Timer set to 00), the extension user/Operation must dial the
feature access code to restore the previous Toll Control Level.
• When Dynamic Lock-Automatic is set (Timer set to desired number of minutes), the system will restore
the previous Toll Control Level at the end of the Timer.
• The extension user must change the default User Password to be able to set the Dynamic Lock on his/
her extension. Refer the topic “User Password” for instructions on changing the password.
1198 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Changing Dynamic Lock by Extension Users
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users
To set Dynamic Lock Level:
• Press DSS Key assigned to Dynamic Lock.
OR
• Dial 141.
OR
• Enter Phone Menu by pressing 'Enter' key.
• You get the prompt: <Enter User Password>.
• Enter your User Password.
• Select the desired Toll Control Level:
• Toll Control Level 0
• Toll Control Level 1
• Toll Control Level 2
• Toll Control Level 3
• Press Enter key.
• You get the text message 'OK!' and a confirmatory tone.
If you are still working with the default User Password, the system will prompt you to 'Change User
Password' when you attempt to set Dynamic Lock. Change your User Password first, before you use this
feature.
To set Dynamic Lock-Manual:
• Press DSS Key assigned to Dynamic Lock.
OR
• Dial 142.
OR
• Enter Phone Menu by pressing 'Enter' key.
• You get the prompt <Enter User Password>
• Enter your User Password.
• You get the prompt: <Lock Timer = XX Minutes>.
• Enter 00
• You get the Text message <Lock Timer = 00 Minutes> and confirmation tone.
To set Dynamic Lock-Automatic:
• Press DSS Key assigned to Dynamic Lock.
OR
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1199
• Dial 142.
OR
• Enter Phone Menu by pressing 'Enter' key.
• You get the prompt <Enter User Password>
• Enter your User Password.
• You get the prompt: <Lock Timer = XX Minutes>.
• Enter the desired number of minutes (max. 99 minutes).
• You get the Text message <Lock Timer = xx Minutes> and confirmation tone.
For SLT Users
To set Dynamic Lock Level:
• Lift the handset.
• Dial 141-User Password-Toll Control Level.
• Dial 0 Level 0.
• Dial 1 for Level 1.
• Dial 2 for Level 2.
• Dial 3 Level 3.
• You get Confirmation tone.
• Replace handset.
To set Dynamic Lock-Manual:
• Lift the handset.
• Dial 142-User Password-00.
• You get Confirmation tone.
• Replace handset.
To set Dynamic Lock-Automatic:
• Lift the handset.
• Dial 142-User Password-Minutes (max. 99 minutes)
• You get Confirmation Tone.
• Replace handset.
Changing Toll Control Level for an Extension (SA mode)
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users
To set Dynamic Lock Level:
• Press DSS key assigned to Dynamic Lock.
OR
• Dial 1072-002179.
OR
179. Ensure that the feature 'Allow SA commands' is enabled in the “Class of Service (COS)” allowed to the extension from which this
code is being dialed.
1200 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Enter Phone Menu.
• You get a text message 'Enter Room/Phone Number'.
• Enter the extension number for which you want to set Dynamic Lock.
• Select the option 'Change Toll Ctrl. Level'
• Press Enter key.
• Scroll to select the desired Toll Control Level:
• Toll Control Level 0
• Toll Control Level 1
• Toll Control Level 2
• Toll Control Level 3
• Press 'Enter' key.
• You get the confirmatory text message 'OK!' and confirmation tone.
To set Dynamic Lock-Manual:
• Press DSS key assigned to Dynamic Lock.
OR
• Dial 1072-002180.
OR
• Enter Phone Menu.
• You get a text message 'Enter Room/Phone Number'.
• Enter the extension number for which you want to set Dynamic Lock.
• Select the option 'Change Lock Timer'.
• You get the following prompt: 'XX Minutes'.
• Enter 00
• You get the text message <Lock Timer = 00 Minutes> and confirmation tone.
To set Dynamic Lock-Automatic:
• Press DSS key assigned to Dynamic Lock.
OR
• Dial 1072-002181.
OR
• Enter Phone Menu.
• You get a text message 'Enter Room/Phone Number'.
• Enter the extension number for which you want to set Dynamic Lock.
• Select the option 'Change Lock Timer'.
• You get the following prompt: 'XX Minutes'.
180. Ensure that the feature 'Allow SA commands' is enabled in the “Class of Service (COS)” allowed to the extension from which this
code is being dialed.
181. Ensure that the feature 'Allow SA commands' is enabled in the “Class of Service (COS)” allowed to the extension from which this
code is being dialed.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1201
• Enter the desired number of minutes (max. 99)
• You get the text message <Lock Timer = xx Minutes> and confirmation tone.
For SLT Users
To change Dynamic Lock Level:
• Pick up the handset.
• Dial 1072-002, you get feature tone.
• Dial Extension Number, you get feature tone.
• Dial 1, the code for 'Change Toll Control Level'.
• Dial 0 for Level 0
• Dial 1 for Level 1
• Dial 2 for Level 2
• Dial 3 for Level 3
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace the Handset or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.
To set Dynamic Lock-Manual:
• Pick up the handset.
• Dial 1072-002, you get feature tone.
• Dial Extension Number, you get feature tone.
• Dial 2, the code for 'Change Lock Timer'.
• Dial 00.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace the Handset or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.
To set Dynamic Lock-Automatic:
• Pick up the handset.
• Dial 1072-002, you get feature tone.
• Dial Extension Number, you get feature tone.
• Dial 2, the code for 'Change Lock Timer'.
• Dial the number of Minutes you want to set the Timer.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace the Handset or you get dial tone after 3 seconds.
1202 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
E&M Connectivity
What’s this?
• E&M connectivity feature of ETERNITY offers seamless connectivity in PLCC network and also in between
various communication products like PBX, Router, Lease Line.
• E&M interface is widely used interface to connect such diverse equipment. For example, in a PLCC
network, number of PLCC EPAX needs to be connected. As shown in the figure 1 of PLCC network,
number of EPAXs are connected with each other through E&M tie lines.
• Say, an existing PBX capacity needs to be expanded beyond the configuration limit of a PBX. Installing
one more PBX and connecting both the PBXs through E&M interfaces can get us the desired expansion.
• Four different applications of E&M connectivity are shown below:
Figure 1: E&M Connectivity on PLCC-Network
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1203
How it works in PLCC network?
E&M interface is achieved using a ETERNITY ME Card E&M. An E&M port of ETERNITY-PLCC EPAX has dual
personality, both of a subscriber and a trunk. An E&M port works like a subscriber interface for any incoming call to
it and works like a trunk interface when any subscriber makes an outgoing call through it. However, please note that
a trunk line cannot be connected to an E&M port. Also a subscriber cannot be connected to an E&M port.
Incoming call on an E&M port in PLCC network:
When any subscriber of PLCC EPAX with SID-51 grabs an E&M2 port, he gets dial tone of SID-61. Now he
can call any subscriber of SID-61 and use features like priority, conference, just like a normal subscriber would
do. However, this E&M port needs to be programmed for the same.
Outgoing call using E&M port in PLCC network:
When any subscriber of PLCC EPAX-34 dials network access code (as per programming) and dials SID say
52, an E&M1 port is grabbed (as it is programmed for the same). Now he can call any subscriber of SID-52
and establish speech. However, this E&M port needs to be programmed as any other normal trunk like
enabling the port, programming the dial type.
All E&M ports can be put together in one single group depending on the requirement. A separate access code
can be assigned to it. This makes the operations easy. Now the subscribers have at least two different access
codes for making outgoing calls using trunk lines and other for making outgoing calls using E&M tie lines.
PBX EXPANSION (2-SYSTEMS)
Figure 2: Two PBXs are connected using E&M interface.
PBX-A PBX-B
T1 E&M1 E&M1 T1
T2 E&M2 E&M2 T2
PSTN E&M3 E&M3
PSTN
Tn Tn
S1 S2 Sn S1 S2 Sn
In the above figure,
• T1 to Tn are trunk lines from the local central office (CO).
• S1 to Sn are stations.
• E&M1 to E&Mn are E&M lines between two PBX systems.
1204 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Figure 3: PBX systems are connected through E&M connectivity.
E&M1 E&M1
PBX-A PBX-B
E&M2 E&M2
T1 (8x8x8)
(16x8)
E&M3 E&M3 T1
E&M4 E&M4
T2 E&M5 E&M5
T2
PSTN E&M6 E&M6 PSTN
E&M7 E&M7
E&M8 E&M8
Tn Tn
S1 S2 S8 S1 S2 S16
2001 2002 ....... 2008 3001 3002 ........ 3016
E&M1 ............. E&M8
PBX-C
(24x8)
S1 S2 S24
4001 4002 ........... 4024
Figure 4: Two PBX systems located far from each other connected to each other using E&M connectivity.
PBX-A
T1 Router
PSTN T2 E&M E&M
T3
S1 Sn
Lease
circuit,
VSAT
2001 2099
PBX-B
T1 Router
PSTN T2 E&M E&M
T3
S1 Sn
2001 2099
How it works
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1205
E&M interface is achieved using an ETERNITY ME Card E&M. An E&M port of ETERNITY-PLCC EPAX has dual
personality: both of a station and a trunk. An E&M port works like a station interface for any incoming call to it and
works like a trunk interface when any station makes an outgoing call through it. However, please note that a trunk
line cannot be connected to an E&M port. Also a SLT or DKP cannot be connected to an E&M port.
Incoming call on an E&M port
When any station of PBX B grabs an E&M port, he gets dial tone of PBX A. This port of PBX A behaves as a
SLT port. Now he can call another station, grab a trunk, or use a feature like raid, just like a normal station
would do. However, this E&M port needs to be programmed as any other normal station. Features like Class
of Service, Toll Control, will apply to this port, if programmed.
Outgoing call using E&M port
When any station from PBX A makes an outgoing call through an E&M port, he dials trunk access code. The
E&M port behaves as trunk interface and gives the station, the dial tone of PBX B. Now he can dial any station
of PBX B or grab a trunk line of PBX B to make a call or use any feature depending on the station
programming done by the SE of PBX B. Hence the E&M port of PBX A should be programmed as any other
normal trunk by enabling the port, programming the dial type, etc.
All E&M ports can be put together in one single group or few groups depending on the requirement. A
separate access code can be assigned to it. This makes the operations easy. In such case the stations can
have at least two different access codes for making outgoing calls, one for making outgoing calls using trunk
lines and other for making outgoing calls using E&M lines. Generally, E&M connectivity is used to expand the
PBX capacity or connect two or more remotely located PBXs. This forms a network of PBXs. The requirement
is that, so formed network should work as one Group. This is commonly known as Closed User Group. Please
refer “Closed User Group (CUG)” and “Closed User Group-With Exchange ID” for more details.
How to configure
Please refer “Station Basic Feature Template”, “Station Advanced Feature Template”, “Trunk Feature Template”
for more details.
Relevant Topics:
1. “Station Basic Feature Template” 436
2. “Station Advanced Feature Template” 446
3. “Trunk Feature Template” 546
1206 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
E1 Maintenance
What’s this?
• The E1 Maintenance consists of Error Counts (Performance Statistics), Alarms and Loop Back Tests.
• This is as per standards like G.704, G.706 and G.732.
• G.775 is also considered for detection of defect conditions like Loss of Signal (LOS), Loss of Frame (LOF),
Alarm Indication Signal (AIS), etc.
• To elaborate, the Digital line can have transmission errors. All the errors will not generate an Alarm. Few
severe errors generate Alarms. However, all the errors are logged in the System Fault Log.
• The SNIIC (Subscriber Network Interface Integrated Circuit), is used to interface E1 line to ETERNITY. It
supports error counters listed in the table given below.
• Each error detected by the ETERNITY ME Card T1E1PRI/port is sent to the master in the form of an
event.
• The master counts these errors and prepare a statistical record if the condition matches. For example,
Severely Errored Seconds Count is incremented when one OOF (Out of Frame) event reaches the master
or more than 320 framing errors reach the master.
• This statistical record is updated and maintained by the master.
Facility-Associated and Non-Facility Associated Signaling:
• Signaling on ISDN PRI trunks consists of messages transported over the D-Channel, which is channel 24
on T1 interface or channel 16 on E1 interface. This signaling can be provided by two methods:
• FAS: The D channel can provide signaling for the other B channels on the same interface. This is
called ‘Facility Associated Signaling’ (FAS).
• NFAS: The D channel can provide signaling for the other B channels on more than one interface. This
is called ‘No facility Associated Signaling’ (NFAS). The signaling arrangements, the capability is
supported to designate a D channel on one interface to be a backup to a D channel on another
interface in case of failure. This is called D channel backup.
Error Counts (Performance Statistics)
Table 1: Error Counters supported by SNIIC in E1 Mode.
Errored Frame Alignment Signal This counter is incremented on receipt of each errored FAS.
E-bit This counter is incremented when either E1 or E2 bit is set in the transmit
frame.
CRC-4 Error This counter is incremented when the received frame has CRC-4 errors.
Line Code violation Error This counter is incremented when a line code violation error occurs.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1207
Table 1: Error Counters supported by SNIIC in E1 Mode.
Excessive Zeros Error This counter is incremented when excessive zeros are received or Line
code violation error occurs.
Positive Slip Buffer This counter is incremented every time a positive slip occurs.
Negative Slip Buffer This counter is incremented every time a negative slip occurs.
Following parameters form the statistical record. This can be generated in the form of a report as shown below:
Performance Parameter Seconds/Count
Error Seconds 000 to 255
Bursty Errored Seconds 000 to 255
Severely Errored Seconds 000 to 255
Severely Errored Framing Seconds 000 to 255
Unavailable Seconds 000 to 255
Positive Slip Seconds 000 to 255
Negative Slip Seconds 000 to 255
Loss of Frame Count 000 to 255
Line Errored Seconds 00000 to 65535
Excessive Zeroes Error Count 000 to 255
CRC-4 Error Count 00000 to 65535
Out Of Frame (OOF)-Out of Frame is the occurrence of a particular density of framing error events. OOF is
declared when three consecutive frame alignment signals have been received with an error. OOF ends when;
• In frame N, the FAS is correct.
• In frame N+1, the FAS is absent.
• In frame N+2, the FAS is present and is correct.
Errored Seconds-It is defined as a second with one of the following:
• One FAS Errors.
• One or more OOF defects.
• One or more Slip events.
• A detected AIS defect.
Bursty Errored Seconds
Without CRC-It is a second with:
• More than one but less than 320 Errored FAS.
• No OOF.
• No SES.
• No AIS.
1208 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
With CRC-It is a second with:
• More than one but less than 320 CRC errors.
• No OOF.
• No SES.
• No AIS.
Severely Errored Seconds
With CRC-It is a second with one of the following:
• 832 or more CRC error events.
• one or more OOF defects.
Without CRC-It is a second with one of the following:
• 2048 or framing errors.
• Slips are not included. This is not incremented during Unavailable seconds.
Severely Errored Framing Seconds (SEFS)-It is a second with either one or more OOF defects or a detected AIS
defect.
Unavailable Seconds-It is defined as a second in which E1 service is unavailable. An unavailable state is declared
at the onset of 10 consecutive severely errored seconds and is cleared on onset of 10 consecutive seconds with no
severely errored seconds.
Positive Slip Seconds-It is defined as a second in which a frame is repeated to account for frequency drift
between ET2 and the network.
Negative Slip Seconds-It is defined as a second in which a frame is deleted to account for frequency drift between
ET2 and the network.
Loss of frame count-Loss of Frame is declared after 2.5 seconds of continuous loss of signal or OOF. LOF is
cleared after 10 seconds of continuous no loss of signal or OOF.
Line Errored Seconds-It is a second in which one or more than one line code violation error occurs.
Excessive Zeroes Error Count-This counter is incremented when excessive zeroes are received on the line or
when line code violation error occurs.
CRC-6 Error Count-This counter is incremented when a CRC-6 Error is detected.
Alarms
• Alarms are indicated on the LEDs of the ETERNITY ME Card T1E1PRI.
• ETERNITY ME Card T1E1PRI has four LEDs viz. L1 to L4.
• L1 and L2 indicate alarms for T1E1PRI-1 whereas L3 and L4 indicate alarms for T1E1PRI-2.
• During normal conditions, the LED blinks green (1 sec ON, 1 sec. OFF).
RED Alarm:
• This alarm is generated if Loss of Signal persists for 2.5 seconds.
• This is indicated by flashing the LED Red (500ms ON, 500ms OFF).
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1209
• The master logs this event in the System Fault Log as RED Alarm <Slot No.> <Port No.> at HH:MM:SS.
• This alarm is cleared when the signal is acquired back and persists for 10 seconds.
• The LED is turned OFF. The master logs this event in the System Fault Log as RED Alarm Cleared <Slot
No.> <Port No.> at HH:MM:SS.
RED Alarm is declared if
• Received signal is more than 20 dB or 40 dB below nominal for at least 1ms.
• 32 consecutive zeroes are received (As per CISCO, LOS is declared if more than 10 consecutive zeroes
are received).
• Loss of frame alignment occurs.
• When RED Alarm is declared, Yellow Alarm is sent to the far end within 12ms of detection of LOS.
YELLOW Alarm:
• This Alarm is also known as Remote Alarm Indication or Distant Alarm.
• This Alarm is generated when Yellow Alarm is sent by the far end (Yellow Alarm is sent by the far end to
indicate that it has lost the incoming signal).
• Yellow Alarm is declared when the signal corresponding to Yellow Alarm persists for 0.5 seconds.
• This is indicated by flashing the LED Orange (500ms ON, 500ms OFF).
• The master logs this event in the System Fault Log as YELLOW Alarm <Slot No.> <Port No.> at
HH:MM:SS.
• This alarm is cleared when No Yellow Alarm signal persists for 0.5 seconds.
• The LED is turned OFF. The master logs this event in the System Fault Log as YELLOW Alarm Cleared
<Slot No.> <Port No.> at HH:MM:SS. Yellow Alarm is declared if:
• Bit 3 of the receive NFAS is 1 on two consecutive occasions.
• Yellow Alarm is cleared if:
• Bit 3 of the receive NFAS is 0.
If equipment is connected in downstream (Drop and insert mode i.e. NT mode) then on receipt of Yellow
Alarm, a Blue Alarm will be sent on the port, which is configured in NT mode.
BLUE Alarm:
• It is also known as Alarm Indication Signal (AIS).
• This alarm indicates that the upstream equipment connected to the ETERNITY has lost receiving its
incoming signal.
• This alarm is generated when AIS persists for 2.5 seconds.
• This is indicated by flashing the LED Red (1 sec. ON, 1 sec. OFF).
• The master logs this event in the System Fault Log as BLUE Alarm <Slot No.> <Port No.> at HH:MM:SS.
• This alarm is cleared when clearance of AIS is detected for continuous 10 seconds.
• The LED is turned OFF. The master logs this event in the System Fault Log as BLUE Alarm Cleared
<Slot No.>
• <Port No.> at HH:MM:SS.
• Blue Alarm (AIS) is declared if unframed all ones signal is received as a string of 512 bits containing fewer
than three zero bits.
• When BLUE Alarm is declared, Yellow Alarm is sent to the downstream equipment connected to the
ETERNITY.
Table 2: Port1 Status
LED Card Status Port Status
L1 Green Flashing @1 Sec. Card Heart Bit Port 1 Layer is established
1210 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Table 2: Port1 Status
LED Card Status Port Status
L1 Red Flashing @1 Sec. Card Heart Bit Port 1 Layer is not established LOS-Red alarm detected.
L1 Red Flashing @500 Card Heart Bit Port 1 Layer is not established LBFA -Loss of Basic Frame
msec. Alignment.
L1 Red Flashing @100 Card Heart Bit Port 1 Layer is not established- LMFA loss of multiframe
msec. alignment.
L1 Yellow Flashing @1 Sec. Card Heart Bit Port 1 Layer is established -RAI (Yellow Alarm) is detected.
L2 Green Port 1 achieves CRC4 synchronization.
L2 Yellow Port1 does not achieve CRC4 synchronization.
L2 Green Flashing @1 Sec. Port 1 achieves CRC4 synchronization-AIS (Blue Alarm) is
detected.
L2 Yellow flashing @1 Sec. Port 1 doesn’t achieves CRC4 synchronization-AIS (Blue Alarm)
is detected.
Table 3: Port2 Status
LED Card Port Status
Status
L2 Green Steady Port2 Layer 1 is established.
L3 Red Flashing @1 Sec. Port 2 Layer is not established-LOS-Red alarm detected.
L3 Red Flashing @500 Port 2 Layer is not established-LBFA-Loss of Multi Frame
msec. Alignment.
L3 Red Flashing @100 Port 2 Layer is not established-LMFA Loss of Multi Frame
msec. Alignment.
L3 Yellow Flashing @1 Sec. Port 2 Layer is established-RAI (Yellow Alarm) is detected.
L4 Green Port 2 achieves CRC4 synchronization-AIS (Blue alarm) is
detected.
L4 Yellow Port2 doesn’t achieves CRC4 synchronization-AIS (Blue Alarm) is
detected.
Loop Back Tests:
Please refer the topic “T1E1 Trunks” for more details.
Relevant Topic:
1. “T1E1 Trunks” 1608
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1211
Emergency Conference
What’s this?
Emergency Conference enables you to establish a Conference between a pre-defined group of extensions using a
feature access code.
This feature can be used to call and consult with a group of people in emergency situations.
The number of parties that can be included in an Emergency Conference group depends on the Multiparty
Conference Capacity of your model of ETERNITY. The ETERNITY supports between 6 to 21 parties in a Multiparty
conference depending on the model you are using. For details, see “Conference-Multiparty”.
How it works
For this feature to work, you must do the following:
• First decide the key persons in the organization who should be parties to the Emergency Conference.
• Form a Department Group with the extensions of these key persons as members. A single Department
Group can have up to 32 extensions. For more information on forming Department Groups, see the topic
“Department Call”.
For example, you have formed a Department Group for Emergency Conference, with the extensions A to G as
members. The Access Code assigned to the Department Group is 3901.
Now, extension H wants to initiate an Emergency Conference. This is how the feature will work:
Initiating an Emergency Conference
• H dials the feature access code for Emergency Conference, followed by access code of the Department
Group (3901).
• All extensions in the Department Group (extensions A to G) which are free will start ringing. Extensions
that are busy will not be included in the call.
If there are DKP/Extended IP Phone extensions in the group, and these phones have a Call Appearance
free, the system will ring these extensions on the free Call Appearance, but will not wait for the extensions
to become free.
The number of extensions that the system will ring will depend on the resource occupied in the
conferencing circuit in the system at the time of initiation of the Emergency Conference. For example,
ETERNITY GE supports up to 15 participants in a single Multi-party conference, and 5 simultaneous
conferences, if all conferences involve 3 parties. Now, if there are already three such simultaneous
Multiparty conferences in the system when Emergency Conference is initiated, the system will ring on the
first 6 extensions of the Emergency Conference group, even if the group has more extension members.
This is because the system supports 15 participants and 9 parties are already involved in the three
simultaneous conferences.
1212 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Extension A goes Off-Hook to answer the call first. A gets connected to the initiator of the conference,
extension H.
• Two-way speech is established with extension A and H. All other extensions continue to ring.
• When another extension, B goes Off-Hook to answer the call, A and H get a beep, and three-way speech
is established between A, B, H.
• Thus, whenever a new member joins the conference, all other extensions already in conference will get a
beep, if the flag Play Beep when Conference/Dial-In Conference Starts is enabled in the “System
Parameters”.
• If the conference initiator, extension H, goes idle, all other extensions in the conference will still be in
conversation.
Cancelling an Emergency Conference
• Only the initiator of the conference, extension H, can cancel the conference. The initiator of the conference
can cancel the conference at two stages:
• When speech is established with one or more member extensions of the Emergency Conference
department group.
Or
• During Ring Back Tone, as the system rings on the extensions of the group, after the initiator of the
conference has dialed the feature access code.
• To cancel the Emergency Conference, extension H must dial the feature access code for Cancel
Conference, 190 (default).
How to configure
To provide this feature to extensions,
• You must enable the feature 'Emergency Conference' in the“Class of Service (COS)” of the extensions in
their “Station Basic Feature Template”. By default, this feature is enabled on all extensions, so all
extensions can use this feature.
• If the extension you are providing this feature is a DKP or an Extended IP phone, you may program a DSS
key on the phone with this feature.
• You must also create a Department Group as Emergency Conference group. For instructions, see
“Department Call”.
• By default, the system plays a beep when the Emergency Conference starts. If you do not want the beep
to be played, you must disable the flag Play Beep when Conference/Dial-In Conference Starts. For
instructions, see “System Parameters”.
This flag is common for other features like “Conference-Multiparty”, “Conference Dial-In”, “Emergency
Conference”, and “Raid”.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1213
How to use
You can initiate an Emergency Conference also using “Direct Inward System Access (DISA)”.
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users
To initiate an Emergency Conference:
• Press DSS Key assigned to Emergency Conference.
Or
• Dial 1177
• Dial Department Group Number.
• All free extensions in the group will ring.
• You get connected to the extensions that answer.
If no resources are free, you will get the ‘Conf. Resource full’ message on your LCD.
To cancel an Emergency Conference while in speech with one or more extensions:
• Go OFF-Hook
• Dial 190
• All participants who are connected, get disconnected and get error tone. Extensions participants who have
not yet answered the call, will stop ringing.
To cancel an Emergency Conference while the extensions are ringing:
• Go ON-Hook during Ring Back Tone.
• All extensions in the conference group will stop ringing.
You can cancel the conference only if you have initiated it.
For SLT Users
To initiate an Emergency Conference:
• Dial 1177
• Dial Department Group Number.
To cancel an Emergency Conference while in speech with one or more extensions:
• Go OFF-Hook
• Dial 190
To cancel an Emergency Conference while the extensions are ringing:
• Go ON-Hook during Ring Back Tone.
1214 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Emergency Detection and Reporting
What’s this?
When an emergency call is made from an extension, the system dials out the number using any of the free trunks
selected for routing Emergency Numbers. Since the number is dialed out by the PBX, the Emergency Service that
attends to the call will be able to locate the PBX, but not the extension that made the call.
Similarly, the Operator too has no way of knowing which of the extensions made the call, thus making it difficult to
quickly reach and provide help to the extension that made the emergency call.
With the Emergency Detection and Reporting feature, the Operator can know from which extension the emergency
call is being made. Whenever an Emergency call is made by an extension user, the system detects and reports it to
the Operator extension.
How it works
When an extension of ETERNITY makes an emergency call by dialing an Emergency Number,
• the system hunts for a free trunk in the OGTBG selected for routing the emergency number, and dials out
the number from a free trunk.
• simultaneously, the system informs the Operator by ringing on the Operator extensions for the duration of
the Alarm Ring Timer (configurable; default: 45 seconds).
• If Operator is a DKP or an Extended IP Phone, it will ring continuously, and an emergency message will be
displayed on the LCD.
Mon 21 MAR 10:38
3002 Recepti on 2
2003 Emer gency
The emergency message shows the number of the extension which has made the emergency call, in this
case, extension 2003.
Also see the topics “Configuring Emergency Number Dialing” and “Emergency Dialing”.
How to configure
To be able to use this feature, the Emergency Dialing Reporting flag must be enabled in the System Parameters.
See “System Parameters” for instructions. By default, this flag is enabled.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1215
Emergency Dialing
What's this?
The ETERNITY supports dialing of Emergency number immediately without any blocking.
When an extension user dials an Emergency number, the system will hunt for a free trunk from the outgoing trunk
bundle group selected for the emergency number. See “Configuring Emergency Number Dialing”.
The system will not apply any of the following on the extension dialing the Emergency number:
• Toll Control (Allowed Denied Numbers, Dynamic Lock)
• Call Budget (even when call budget is consumed)
• Call Duration Control
• Automatic Number Translation
The system will allow the extension to dial the Emergency number even in the following conditions:
• the extension is in Off-Hook state.
• the extension is in Standby Mode.
• the extension has grabbed the trunk line (using Trunk access code or selective access)
• the call state is in any state: Ringing, Busy, Error, Confirmation.
• SIM card is not present in the Mobile port.
• Mobile port is not registered with the network.
• SIM PIN is not valid.
• the keypad of the extension phone is locked.
Emergency Numbers will always be out dialed through the OGTBG you have selected for the numbers, except
when you have grabbed a trunk using Selective trunk access code/Selective Trunk Access DSS key. In which case,
the number will be dialed only from the trunk you have grabbed.
Emergency Number will not be out dialed in the following cases:
• If the trunk port from which number is to be routed (TWT, Mobile, T1E1PRI, BRI, SIP) is disabled.
• If the hardware related to dialing of Emergency number is not present.
• If the Emergency number is dialed from the SE Programming mode.
Emergency dialing will not work if Mains Power to the ETERNITY fails.
How to configure
The Emergency numbers are fixed as per the Region where ETERNITY is installed, you can add emergency
numbers, as required. For instructions, see “Configuring Emergency Number Dialing”.
How to use
To dial an Emergency number,
• Go Off-Hook
• Dial the Emergency Number
OR
• Dial Trunk Access Code-Emergency Number
1216 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
For example:
Dial 0-112
• Wherever the Trunk Access Code conflicts with the Emergency Number, the emergency number
should be dialed after dialing the Trunk Access Code.
• Let us take the example of Australia, where the emergency number is 000 and the trunk access code is
0. Now, when an extension user of ETERNITY located in Australia dials ‘0’ of the emergency number,
the system will consider it as trunk access code and will apply the trunk access code logic.
• Therefore, in such cases, the extension user must first dial the Trunk Access Code and then the
Emergency Number. In this case, the extension user must dial 0-000 for emergency number dialing, so
that the system will not wait for the Conflict Timer to apply the Trunk access code logic.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1217
External Music
What’s this?
ETERNITY provides a facility to give external music to the users by way of connecting an external music source. It
is possible to give external music to the stations or external callers or both. For more details, please refer “Music on
Hold (MOH)”.
Relevant Topic:
1. “Music on Hold (MOH)” 1335
1218 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Flash Timer
What is Flash?
Pulse dialing is a type of signaling in which codes (digits) are dialed in pulses. A hook switch or a Flash key is
generally used to dial this code. Technically, Flash is breaking the loop current for 200 milliseconds to 900 ms.
Please note that since this code is not simulated in standard DTMF convention, one cannot dial it in DTMF mode.
Flash timer signifies the time period for which the loop current breaks. Flash timer is programmable. Flash timer
ranges from 083 ms to 999 ms. By default, Flash Timer is 600 ms.
Where is it used?
Stations dial flash to use few PBX features and also to use few PSTN features. Flash is used in following cases:
• While transferring a call from one station to another.
• While making conference between few stations.
• While toggling call between two stations.
• While using call-waiting facility available from PSTN exchange.
Now a days, more number of basic service providers and different types of advanced electronic telephone
exchanges are prevailing. It is possible that one service provider interprets breaking of loop current for 300 ms
as flash, other service provider interprets breaking of loop current for 900 ms as flash and system interprets
breaking of loop current for 600 ms as flash. Hence if the system engineer sets the flash timer to 600 ms then
he might not be able to use features provided by the service provider interpreting 900 ms for flash.
To take care of this situation, ETERNITY offers Flexibility to program different flash timers for both stations and
trunks.
How to configure
Step 1
Please refer the topic “SLT Hardware Template” for more details on assigning flash timer to a SLT.
Step 2
Please refer the topic “TWT Hardware Template” for more details on assigning Flash Timer to E&M.
Step 3
Please refer “E&M Feature Template” for more details on assigning Flash Timer to an E&M.
• Many times it happens that while transferring the call, the call either gets disconnected or is not
transferred. This happens due to mismatch of time for which the hook switch is pressed, if used for
transferring the call hence it is advisable to use Flash Key of the telephone instrument, instead of hook
switch.
• This problem may occur with Flash Key also, if the timer for the Flash Key on the telephone instrument
and the flash timer of the system are not set properly.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1219
• Few telephone instruments have flash timers set to 800 ms. In such case the call does not get
transferred because the flash timer of all stations is set at 600 ms by default. In such cases the flash
timer of the station where the phone is connected should be increased to 800 ms.
Relevant Topics:
1. “SLT Hardware Template” 428
2. “TWT Hardware Template” 530
3. “Digital Key Phone-Operation” 1123
4. “E&M Feature Template” 565
1220 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Flashing on Trunks
What’s this?
Trunk exchanges support many advanced features like call waiting, call forward. To use these features it is
required to dial codes during speech. The dialing of codes during speech do not create problem when you are
dialing on the trunk directly. But with the PBX connected between the user and the central office, the central office
codes clash with PBX codes. This leads to difficulty in accessing CO features while in speech. However,
ETERNITY supports dialing codes on trunk when in speech to all codes from any extension. But it is required to
inform the PBX, prior to dialing some code on the trunk.
How to use
1 Speech with trunk.
2 Dial Flash. Feature tone
3 Dial *. Feature tone stopped.
4 Dial Desired Code.
Example:
To use Call Waiting facility of service provider exchange from any station, perform following steps:
1 Dial Flash-*. This informs the system to pass following code.
2 Dial Flash-1. Speech with second call.
3 Dial Flash-*. This informs the system to pass following code.
4 Dial Flash-1. Speech with first call.
5 Dial Flash-*. This informs the system to pass following code.
6 Dial Flash-1. Speech with second call.
How to configure
Please refer “Class of Service (COS)” for details on how to allow Flashing on Trunk to a user.
Relevant Topics:
1. “Class of Service (COS)” 1011
2. “Flash Timer” 1219
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1221
Flexible Numbers
What’s this?
• ETERNITY offers Flexibility to assign a code of your choice to access a station. This code is called Flexible
number. For example, to access first SLT having software port 001, one has to dial 2001. It is possible to
change this code to any other number of your choice.
• ETERNITY offers two types of stations viz. SLT and DKP. The system loads default access codes to all the
SLT and DKP stations on first power ON. Later on the stations can be assigned default Flexible numbers
using a command.
A typical table of default SLT station numbers looks like:
Software Port Access Codes
001 2001
002 2002
003 2003
: :
512 2512
A typical table of default DKP station numbers looks like:
Software Port Access Codes
001 3001
002 3002
003 3003
: :
128 3128
How to configure
Use following command to program the access code for a SLT station:
3101-1-SLT-Access Code-#*
Where,
SLT is a 3-digit number from 001 to 512.
Access Code is maximum of 6 digits.
Use following command to clear the access code for a SLT:
3101-1-SLT-#*
3101-2-SLT-SLT-#*
3101-*-#*
Use following command to assign the default flexible number of a SLT:
3151-1-SLT
1222 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
3151-2-SLT-SLT
3151-*
Where,
SLT is from 001 to 512.
Use following command to program the access code for a DKP:
3102-1-DKP-Access Code-#*
Where,
DKP is a 3-digit number from 001 to 128.
Access Code (flexible number) is maximum of 6 digits.
The flexible number can be programmed up to 6 digits, however the SE is recommended to program
flexible number of 4 or less than 4 digits only.
Use following command to clear the access code for a DKP:
3102-1-DKP-#*
3102-2-DKP-DKP-#*
3102-*-#*
Use following command to assign the default flexible number to a DKP:
3152-1-DKP
3152-2-DKP-DKP
3152-*
• It is possible to have maximum of 6 digit flexible numbers.
• It is possible to clear the flexible number of a station, range of station and all stations.
• Flexible numbers are the codes dialed from dial phase to call another station. These flexible numbers
should be unique and should not match with either other SLT stations or DKP stations or any of the
features available from the dial phase.
• Flexible number having common digits can be assigned to another station. Please refer “Conflict
Dialing” for more details.
• Same flexible number cannot be assigned to two different stations.
• Use flexible numbers for all the features used from User mode and SA mode. Software port numbers
are to be used only during for SE mode.
• When the access code of a station is cleared; its flexible number becomes null or void.
• If access code of a station is cleared, one cannot call that station. However the station with NULL
flexible number can make calls as usual.
Relevant Topics:
“Conflict Dialing”
“Access Codes”
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1223
Floor Service
What's this?
The Floor Service feature allows you to provide a common access code to extension users which they can dial to
call floor service.
Essentially a hospitality feature, Floor Service is also useful in offices. Floor service can be any administration or
service department in the building, such as a stationery room, back office, backroom, photocopy/ mail room,
secretarial assistance, concierge/janitor, Storeroom.
Just as all extension users can reach the Operator by dialing the common access code '9', they can reach the floor
service by dialing a common access code, '38'. This is the default Floor Service access code, for all geographical
regions where ETERNITY is installed.
This feature can be used in:
• Multi-storied buildings, which have floor service (pantry, mail sorting, house keeping, janitor, coffee room,
refreshment area) for each floor. The ETERNITY can be programmed to land calls made by extension
users dialing the common access code '38' on the floor service extensions of their respective floors.
• Offices that have a centralized floor service, instead of one on each floor. The ETERNITY can be
programmed to land calls made from all extension phones by dialing '38' on the common floor service
extensions.
How it works
For example, Midas Towers houses different departments on each floor. Each floor has Floor Service.
Extensions 2001 to 2010 are on the first floor, 2011 to 2020 on the second floor, and 3001 to 3010 on the third floor.
The floor service extensions are numbered as 2012 on the first floor, 2022 on the second floor and 3012 on the
third floor.
With the Floor Service programmed for each floor, when the extension user 2001 dials '38', the call will land on the
service extension 2012, assigned to room service on the first floor. Similarly, when the extension user 3008 on the
third floor dials '38', the call will land on the service extension 3012 on the third floor.
If Midas Towers had a single floor service extension 2012 for all floors, with Floor service programmed, calls made
from all extensions by dialing '38' would land on extension 2012 only.
How to configure
Programming the Floor Service feature involves the following steps:
1. Creating a routing group for each floor. Include Floor service extensions of a floor in a routing group
prepared for that floor.
2. Assigning a routing group (number) in the Floor Service feature in the Station Advanced Feature
Template. Prepare a different Station Advance Feature Template for each floor.
1224 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
3. Applying the Station Advanced Feature Template (with the Floor service group programmed) to the
extension. This will assign the extensions to the routing group programmed in the Template.
If the Enterprise/Building has centralized floor service, you only need to create a single Routing Group with
service extensions, as required. This routing group number can be programmed on a common Station
Advanced Feature Template which will be applied to all extensions.
Floor Service parameters can be programmed using Jeeves and a Telephone.
Programming Floor Service using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click 'Routing Groups' link.
• Choose the Routing Group number (01-96) you want to use as floor service group.
You can program different routing groups for different floors. In each routing group you can program
maximum 32 service extensions as 'members'.
• For routing group to be used as floor service, program the following parameters:
• Rotation Flag: With this flag, you can enable or disable the rotation of calls in the routing group which
has multiple 'member' extensions. When enabled, each fresh call will land on the extension which is
next to the one that received the last call. This ensures equal distribution of incoming calls to all the
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1225
destinations within the routing group. The flag has no relevance if the routing group has only one
member extension.
• Member Type: Select the 'Member Type'. If the floor service extension is an SLT, select SLT; if it is a
DKP, select DKP as member type. Similarly, if the extension is an ISDN Terminal, select ISDN
Terminal.
Program only as many extensions as you want in the routing group and set the remaining Member
Types to 'None'.
For example: if you want to program only one extension in the routing group, set the Member Type in
the remaining columns (Member 02-Member 32) to 'None.'
• Port Number: Enter the software port number on which the SLT/DKP/SIP Extension/ISDN Terminal
floor service extension is attached.
• Ring Timer(s): This timer defines the time for which the extension, on which the call lands, should ring.
By default, the ring timer is set to 015 seconds and can be changed.
• Continuous Ring Flag: With this flag, you can set an extension to ring continuously until the call is
answered. The first extension will continue to ring even as the system hunts for other extensions in the
routing group to land the call. If the call still remains unanswered, the system will return the call to the
first extension once again. This flag is of no relevance, if there is only one member extension in a
routing group.
• Repeat the above steps to include other floor service extensions in the routing group.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your settings.
• Click 'Station Advanced Feature Template' to open the page.
All extensions are assigned the Advanced Feature Template 01, by default. If the enterprise requires
separate floor-service group for each floor, program a separate Station Advanced Feature Template for the
extensions of each floor.
• Select a Station Advance Feature Template number to be assigned to the user extensions of a floor. For
example: Template number 02 for extensions 2001 to 2010 are on the first floor, Template number 03 for
1226 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
extensions, 2011 to 2020 on the second floor, and Template number 04 for extensions 3001 to 3010 on the
third floor.
• Scroll with the horizontal bar to reach the column 'Floor Service' of the selected Templates. Enter the
Routing Group number you want to use as floor service group for that particular Station Advance Feature
Template.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your settings.
• Now, apply the Station Advanced Feature Templates (with floor service routing groups programmed) to the
extensions of the respective floors. For example: Template number 02 on extensions 2001 to 2010 are on
the first floor, Template number 03 on extensions, 2011 to 2020 on the second floor, and Template number
04 on extensions 3001 to 3010 on the third floor.
If extensions are SLT, assign the Template on the 'SLT Parameters' page.
If extensions are DKP, assign the Template on the 'DKP Parameters' page.
If extensions are ISDN Terminals, assign the Template on the 'ISDN Parameters' page.
Refer the topic “Station Advanced Feature Template” for instructions.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1227
Programming Floor Service using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode.
To program a routing group with member extensions, dial:
• 6502-1-Routing Group-Destination Index-Port Type-Port Number
Where,
Routing Group is the number of the Routing Group 01 to 96.
Destination Index is from 01 to 32
Port Type is the 'Member type':
00 for None
01 for SLT
02 for DKP
28 for ISDN terminal
34 for SIP Extension
Port Number is the Software port number182 on which the floor service member extension SLT, DKP,
ISDN Terminal is attached.
Software port number of the SLT, from 001 to 512.
Software port number of the DKP, from 001 to 128.
Software port number of the ISDN Terminal, from 01 to 64.
Software port number of the SIP Extension, from 001 to 999.
To program the Ring Timer for the routing group, dial:
• 6503-1-Routing Group-Destination Index-Ring Timer
Where,
Routing Group is the number of the Routing Group 01 to 96
Destination Index is from 01 to 32
Ring Timer is from 000 to 255 seconds (default: 015 seconds).
To program the Continuous Ring Flag for the routing group, dial:
• 6504-1-Routing Group-Destination Index-Flag
Where,
Routing Group is the number of the Routing Group 01 to 96.
Destination Index is from 01 to 32
Continuous Ring Flag is
0 for disable continuous ring (each member extension in the group will ring for the programmed 'Ring
Timer' for the group)
1 for enable continuous ring (the first extension in the group will ring till the call is answered)
To program the routing group in a Station Advanced Feature Template, dial:
• 5602-1-Template Number-11-Routing Group
Where,
Template Number is from 01 to 50
11 is the feature code for Floor Service
Routing Group is from 01 to 96183
To apply the Station Advanced Feature Template now programmed with the Routing Group to SLTs,
DKPs, ISDN Terminals, SIP extensions, refer the topic “Customizing Station Advanced Feature
Template using a Telephone”.
182. Refer the topic 'Software Port and Hardware ID' in the ETERNITY System Manual.
183. Enter the number of the routing group you programmed as Floor Service group.
1228 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Exit SE mode.
How to use
To be able to use floor service, extension users may dial the default Access Code defined for Floor Service: 38.
Check with your System Engineer if this access code has been changed and dial the new access code
obtained from the System Engineer.
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users
• Go OFF-Hook.
• Press DSS Key assigned to Floor Service (if programmed)
OR
• Dial Access Code '38'
• Talk
• Go ON-Hook
For SLT Users
• Lift handset
• Dial, Access Code '38'
• Talk
• Replace Handset.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1229
Follow Me
What’s this?
Using this feature, extension users can make your calls follow you wherever you go. Extension users can receive
their calls on another extension, whenever they want.
How it works
• A’s extension number is 2001.
• B’s extension number is 2003.
• A is currently at B’s extension.
• A wants to receive calls from extension 2001 on extension 2003.
• A sets Call Follow Me on extension 2003.
• All calls landing on A’s extension 2001 will be forwarded to extension 2003.
• When A returns to extension 2001, A cancels Call Follow Me.
• The extensions dial tone changes to feature tone if its calls are forwarded.
• Multiple users can use ‘Follow Me’ from the same extension.
• Follow Me can be overwritten. Extension A sets Follow-Me on extension B. After a period of time; goes
to extension C. A can receive calls on extension C by setting Follow Me on extension C. Follow Me set
by A on extension B will be cancelled.
• Follow Me cannot be chained. If extension A sets Follow Me to extension B. And extension B sets
Follow Me on extension C, Follow Me of extension A is automatically cancelled.
• DND is given priority over Call Follow Me feature.
Also see “Call Forward”, “Class of Service (COS)” and “Do Not Disturb (DND)”
How to configure
To be able to use Follow Me, extension users must have Call Forward feature enabled in their Class of Service for
the time zone. For instructions, see “Class of Service (COS)” and “Station Basic Feature Template”.
How to use
For EON & Extended IP Phone Users
To set Follow Me from another extension,
• Press Forward key of the other extension.
OR
Dial 135.
• Enter your extension number.
1230 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Enter your user password.
To cancel Follow me, from your extension,
• Press Forward key of your extension phone.
• Select ‘Cancel’
OR
Dial 130.
For SLT Users
To set follow me from another extension,
• Lift the handset of the other extension.
• Dial 135
• Dial your extension number.
• Dial your user password.
• Replace handset.
To cancel Follow me,
• Lift the handset of your extension.
• Dial 130
• Replace handset.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1231
Forced Answer
What’s this?
Extension users can force other extension users to answer their calls when there is no response from the called
extensions.
How it works
Forced Answer can be requested from an SLT, a DKP and from the Extended IP Phone (calling extension).
However, the called extension (being forced to answer) must be either a DKP or an Extended IP Phone.
• Extension A (SLT) calls extension B (DKP).
• B’s extension phone is ringing, but B does not answer.
• A dials Forced Answer feature code.
• B’s extension phone’s speaker goes OFF-Hook.
• A may now talk to B.
Forced Answer can be used when the called extension is busy, but has free call loops (call appearances)
for calls to land. For example:
• Extension A (SLT) calls extension B (DKP).
• B is in speech with extension C, but there is a call appearance free on B’s DKP.
• Since B’s DKP has a free call appearance, A’s call lands on B.
• B’s extension starts ringing.
• A dials Forced Answer code during ring back tone.
• Extension C is put on hold.
• A is in speech with B.
• A may now talk to B.
• When A disconnects the call, B is now in speech with C.
How to configure
To be able to use Forced Answer, extension users must have this feature enabled in their Class of Service for the
time zone. For instructions, see “Class of Service (COS)” and “Station Basic Feature Template”.
How to use
For EON & Extended IP Phone Users
To use forced answer on an extension:
• Dial the desired extension number.
• Press the DSS Key assigned to Forced Answer on Ring Back tone.
OR
Dial 5 on Ring Back Tone.
• The Ring Back Tone stops.
• The called extension’s speaker goes OFF-Hook and the speaker key LED glows.
• You are in speech with the called party.
1232 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• You may talk.
For SLT Users
To use forced answer on an extension:
• Dial the desired extension number.
• Dial 5 on Busy tone.
• The Ring Back Tone stops.
• The called extension’s speaker goes OFF-Hook and the speaker key LED glows.
• You are in speech with the called party.
• You may talk.
You can also dial ‘5’, the feature code for Forced Answer, immediately after dialing the desired extension
number, instead of dialing it during Ring Back Tone. This way, you can talk to the desired extension user
without waiting for the called extension user to answer your call.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1233
Forced Call Disconnection
What’s this?
Forced Call Disconnection enables extension users to disconnect a busy extension or a trunk at will, and free the
system resources (access to extension and trunk) for themselves.
How it works
Forced Call Disconnection of an Extension:
• A, B and C are extensions.
• A and B are in speech.
• C calls B and finds it busy.
• C uses Forced Call Disconnection by dialing the feature command.
• C gets confirmation tone, while A and B get error tone.
Forced Call Disconnection of a Trunk:
• A and B are extensions. C is the external party.
• A is in speech with C on Trunk 1.
• B grabs Trunk 1 using Selective Port Access, but gets busy tone.
• B uses Forced Call Disconnection by dialing the feature command.
• B gets confirmation tone. A gets disconnected and gets error tone.
• B must grab Trunk 1 again to get the dial tone of the network.
To be able to use Forced Call Disconnection, the extension user must have a higher “Priority” than the
extension user whom he/she tries to forcibly disconnect.
To be able to use Forced Call Disconnection on a busy trunk, the extension user must have grabbed that
trunk using “Selective Port Access”. If the extension user has grabbed the trunk using a Trunk Access
Code, the feature code to dial Forced Call Disconnection will not work.
In PLCC applications, Forced Call Disconnection can be used in a chain to reach the last Exchange
through many tandem exchanges in between.
.
You are advised to restrict access to this feature only to important extension users. Extension Users who
are allowed this feature are advised to use it judiciously.
How to configure
To be able to use Forced Call Disconnection, the extension must have:
• Forced Release feature enabled in the Class of Service. For instructions see “Class of Service (COS)”
and “Station Basic Feature Template”.
• As Forced Call Disconnection on a busy trunk is possible only if the extension user has grabbed that trunk
using Selective Port Access, this feature must be enabled in the Class of Service of the extension. For
instructions see “Class of Service (COS)” and “Station Basic Feature Template”.
1234 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Higher Priority assigned than other extensions. See “Priority” for instructions.
How to use
For EON & Extended IP Phone Users
To forcibly disconnect a busy extension/trunk184:
• Press the DSS Key assigned to Forced Call Disconnection on Busy tone.
OR
Dial #* on Busy tone.
• You get confirmation tone.
• You may now dial the extension number/grab the trunk.
For SLT Users
To forcibly disconnect a busy extension/trunk:
• Dial #* on Busy tone.
• You get confirmation tone.
• You may now dial the extension number/grab the trunk.
184. Only if you have grabbed this trunk using Selective Port Access.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1235
Gateway Application-Answer Signaling
What's this?
• When ETERNITY acts as a Gateway, this feature is used to convey the call maturity information on source
port, when call made using destination port gets matured.
• This information can be useful for billing equipment connected at calling party side.
How it works
• This feature of answer signaling is applicable only for DISA option selected as 'CLI Authentication-one call-
Ans. Sig.' in the DISA-CLI Authentication Table. Refer chapter “Direct Inward System Access (DISA)”.
• The ETERNITY works as gateway for routing the call to the destination.
• If the calling party's number is programmed in Table - 'DISA-CLI Authentication', the ETERNITY will
consider the calling party as successfully logged in as station which is programmed as "Auto Login
station". The call will get answered by the ETERNITY. The caller will get dial tone.
• Caller can dial the desired number.
• ETERNITY will route the call from the destination port.
• When called party answers the call (i.e. call on destination port gets matured), the Answer Signaling will be
done on source port, if enabled.
• Answer Signaling will be done in form of DTMF digit string as programmed on the source port.
• If Answer Signaling is disabled on the source port, the DTMF digit string will not be dialed out, even if it is
programmed.
• On receiving these digits, Billing equipment/PBX with which the calling party is connected, can consider
the call is matured and start billing.
How to configure
To configure 'Gateway Application-Answer Signaling' flag and 'DTMF String' on desired trunk refer following
chapters:
• For TWT Trunk, Refer chapter “TWT Hardware Template”
• For E&M Trunk, Refer chapter “E&M Feature Template”
• For MOBILE Trunk, Refer chapter “Configuring Mobile Trunks”
• For T1E1 Trunk, Refer chapter “T1E1 Trunks”
• For BRI Trunk, Refer chapter “ISDN-BRI”
• For SIP Trunk, Refer chapter “Configuring SIP Trunks”
By default, 'Gateway Application-Answer Signaling' is disabled for all ports.
By default, DTMF Digit String' is programmed as 'CCC' on all ports.
1236 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Application:
Mumbai Delhi
Mobile FXS Mobile FXS
GFX11 GFX11
PSTN DS1-1 DS1-2 PSTN
ETERNITY
N/w N/w
Kolkata Chennai
Mobile FXS Mobile FXS
GFX11 GFX11
• Multiple GFX11s are installed at different places for PCO Application.
• One ETERNITY is installed at central place.
• On FXS port of each GFX11, 'Pay Phone' is connected.
• On GSM port of each GFX11, SIM card is installed.
• GFX11s are configured for multi stage dialing, in which when ever caller dials the number using pay
phone, GFX11 will store the number, it will first make a call to ETERNITY's T1E1 line on which DISA - 'CLI
Auth- One Call - Ans. Sig.' is enabled.
• GFX11's SIM Numbers are programmed in 'DISA - CLI Auth.' table in ETERNITY.
• ETERNITY compares the Calling Number received on T1E1 Port with DISA-CLI Auth. Table.
• As the number is programmed in the table, ETERNITY answers the call and offers the trunk assigned in
Station Basic Feature Template of the station used as 'Auto Login'.
• When ETERNITY answers the call, the GFX11 sends the stored called number (which is actually dialed by
the caller) in DTMF digits.
• ETERNITY routes the call on this number using the offered trunk.
• When called party answers the call, ETERNITY will send 'DTMF Digit Strings' programmed on the T1E1
Port (Source Port, on which call originated) as a Gateway Answer Signaling'.
• The Pay Phone connected with FXS Port of the GFX11 is also configured to understand the same DTMF
string as call maturity.
• Pay Phone will start billing only on receipt of the desired DTMF digits.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1237
Remarks:
• Source Port: Port of the ETERNITY on which call originates.
• Destination Port: Port of the ETERNITY on which call terminates.
Relevant Topics:
1. “Direct Inward System Access (DISA)” 1156
2. “TWT Hardware Template” 530
3. “E&M Feature Template” 565
4. “Configuring Mobile Trunks” 595
5. “T1E1 Trunks” 1608
6. “ISDN-BRI” 1263
7. “Configuring SIP Trunks” 635
1238 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
GPAX Application
What’s this?
GPAX application is one of the applications provided by ETERNITY and used in commercial establishment/Society/
Organization, etc. Group PBX are installed, operated and maintained by organizations/agencies. The owner will be
treated as the main hirer. The private exchange (PSTN)/service provider will provide junctions to the PBX and the
owner will pay the rental of the junctions, and the call charges. The number of junctions provided to the PBX should
be adequate to carry the traffic. The owner/agencies of the PBXs will be responsible for the payment of all charges
to the private exchange/service provider.
In this application say a PBX ‘A’ is connected to PSTN. PBX ‘A’ is given an exchange ID (say 2837). A number of
stations (say 001-100) can be connected to PBX ‘A’. When a station 015 dials 2837025, PBX ‘A’ interpret this
number to be dialed for the same system. However, for dialing a station number belonging to same system, it is not
necessary to prefix the station number with exchange ID. When a station 020 dials 2834537, PBX ‘A’ does not
interpret this to be dialed for the same system and hence will dial the digits on the trunk.
When a station user picks up the handset and dials any digit except the one programmed in the routing table will be
dialed on the trunk. If the user dials digit that is programmed in the routing table with Self-flag enabled, the system
will not dial the digits on the trunk since it would interpret these to be dialed for the same system.
For dialing the digits on the trunk it is required to program the routing table carefully. Route code should be
specified in route code column of routing table in association with Self Route Flag disable. This will make the call to
be routed on trunk which is specified in OG Trunk Bundle Group. Regarding this please refer “Closed User Group
(CUG)” and “Closed User Group-With Exchange ID”.
PBX A
T1
T2
PSTN 2837
Tn
S1 S2 Sn
001 002 100
In order to make internal calls, user is advised to program Routing Table such that one of the entries in routing table
should have route code as ‘#’, Strip digit count as ‘1’ and Self route flag as ‘1’ (enable). Doing so, when user picks
up handset and dials the required number with prefix ‘#’, the system interpret this number as an activity for the
internal users and waits for relevant access code.
Because of Strip digit count=1, the first digit dialed by the user (i.e. # in this case) will be ignored and next digit will
be processed which could be a feature code or a station number.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1239
In order to use system features, the feature codes should be prefixed by ‘#’. Whenever the user dials ‘#’ on picking
the handset, the PBX assumes it to be an activity for the internal users and waits for relevant access code.
In GPAX application, Answer Signaling on SLT and Answer Supervision on trunk shall e programmed properly. Also
the Disconnect Supervision parameter shall be programmed as appropriate for proper billing of calls.
Following figures shows how call is established between users using PSTN and ETERNITY-GPAX.
PSTN
Customer Site
C Makarpura Alkapuri
Subscriber
Card
ETERNITY-GPAX
FXO Subscriber B
(Trunk) Card
Inter Exchange
Trunk interface Inter Exchange
FXS card Trunk interface
(SLT) card
Inter
Exchange
Trunk card
1. Call from A to B is shown by
2. Call from B to A is shown by D
3. Call from C to A is shown by Sub Card
Customer Site PSTN
C
ETERNITY-GPAX
Trunk
Subscriber
Card
SLT
Card
Inter
A Exchange
Trunk
interface card
MFC Operator
1. Call from A to C is shown by
3. Call from C to A is shown by
1240 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Trunk Offer PSTN
C
ETERNITY-GPAX
Trunk
Subscriber
Card
SLT
Card
Inter
Exchange
A Trunk
interface
card
MFC Operator
1. Call from A to C is shown by
2. Call from C to A is shown by
3. Call from Opt. to A is shown by
Relevant Topic:
1. “Closed User Group (CUG)” 1028
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1241
GPAX Billing
What’s this?
In commercial establishments/large societies/organizations etc. staff make calls from their rooms. It is required that
the cost of these calls is calculated so that amount of calls made by a staff member can be paid. GPAX provides a
facility which if enabled can calculate cost of each call if programmed properly.
To calculate the total cost of a call please refer following topic for more details:
“Call Cost Calculation (CCC)”, “Call Duration Control (CDC)”, “Call Budget”, and GPAX charge Internal Calls in
“Station Advanced Feature Template”.
In order to make billing for internal calls between GPAX users, GPAX charge internal calls flag to be set to enable
(please refer “Station Advanced Feature Template” for more details).
If GPAX charge internal calls flag is enabled, this call will be recorded in the Station message detail recording-
outgoing buffer. If GPAX charge internal calls flag is set to disable, the call made to an internal station will not be
billed and will be recorded in the SMDR-Internal buffer as normal internal call.
• GPAX has a dedicated memory space (commonly called buffer) to store details of each call.
• These calls are retained in the buffer even during power failure.
• Various reports can be routed either on the printer or on the computer from this buffer.
• Once the buffer is 100% full, the new call overwrites the oldest one.
• It follows First In First Out (FIFO) scheme.
• It is recommended that printing of various reports should be regularised on fixed dates. This should be
done regardless of whether the buffer is full or not.
• This will prevent spilling and subsequent loss of data. You can enable or disable call logging for individual
trunk.
• This gives flexibility of monitoring only important (STD) trunks.
• This also prevents frequent spilling of the buffer, as new local calls will not be recorded.
1242 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
GPAX Flexible Numbers
What’s this?
• In office/organization, it is required that the flexible numbers are given in such a manner that it identifies
the departments/blocks i.e. say subscribers for marketing department may start with ‘5’, for technical
support with ‘6’ and so on.
• ETERNITY offers Flexibility to the user to assign a code of your choice to access a station. This code is
called Flexible number. For example, to access first SLT having software port 001, one has to dial 2001. It
is possible to change this code to any other number of your choice.
• ETERNITY offers two types of stations viz. SLT and DKP. The system loads default access codes to all the
SLT and DKP stations on first power ON. Later on the stations can be assigned default Flexible numbers
using a command.
Default table of SLT station numbers looks like:
Software Port Access Codes
001 2001
002 2002
003 2003
: :
: :
512 2512
Default table of DKP station numbers looks like:
Software Port Access Codes
001 3001
002 3002
003 3003
: :
: :
128 3128
How to configure
Please refer topic “Flexible Numbers” for more details.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1243
• While using the ETERNITY in the GPAX application, SE should program different toll control levels as
per the user's requirement for making the calls which can be different than office user.
• For example, SE can program the External number list for Allowed / Denied numbers for home user, as
per following Table:
Dynamic Toll Control Level Number List can be programmed and assigned to:
0 (time zone wise toll control) Allow Local calls only
1 Allow Local + STD calls
2 Allow Local + STD + ISD calls
3 Lock all calls
Relevant Topics:
1. “Conflict Dialing”
2. “Access Codes” 750
3. “Flexible Numbers” 1222
4. “Dynamic Lock” 1195
1244 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Help Desk
What’s this?
An organization may have a Centralised Information Office which provides information related to different
departments such as HR, IT, or General information. For each department in the organization, an extension number
can be defined as a Help Desk.
How it works
• Extension 2002 is defined as Help Desk for HR policies and general rules.
• Extension 2016 calls the Help Desk extension 2002.
• If the Help Desk extension is busy, an Auto Callback request is set automatically on the Help Desk
extension.
• As soon as the Help Desk extension is free, the system will serve the auto callback request.
• The Help Desk extension calls back extension 2016.
Also see “Auto Call Back (ACB)”
How to configure
You can define an station as ‘Help Desk’ by enabling the ‘Help Desk’ flag in its “Station Advanced Feature
Template”.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1245
Hot Desking
What’s this?
Hot Desking enables extension users to use all the properties of their own extension from another extension.
Hot Desking is useful for people who are often away from their own desks and must work from another. Hot
Desking allows them to use all the features and facilities of their own extension from another.
How it works
This feature is supported on DKP and SLT extensions only.
Hot Desking is possible only between extensions of the same type: SLT to SLT and DKP to DKP extensions.
The User Password of both extensions involved in Hot Desking must not be 1111.
Hot Desking can be performed only when both the extensions are idle.
To perform Hot Desking two extensions are required:
• The Host Extension - the extension whose user performs the Hot Desking.
• The Hot Desk Extension - the extension on which Hot Desking is performed.
• When Hot Desk is performed from the Hot Desking extension, all the properties of the Host Extension are
copied to the Hot Desk Extension.
• On the Host Extension, the user cannot perform any activity except Cancel Hot Desking.
• You must cancel Hot Desk from both the Hot Desk Extension and the Host Extension.
• After cancelling Hot Desk, the Host Extension and the Hot Desk Extension acquire their original properties.
How to configure
For this feature to work, the feature 'Hot Desk' must be enabled in the Class of Service of the Host Extension and
the Hot Desk Extension. See “Class of Service (COS)” and “Station Basic Feature Template” for instructions.
How to use
For EON users
To perform Hot Desk:
• Go to the EON extension (Hot Desk Extension) with which you want to swap your EON4 extension (Host
Extension) properties.
• Press DSS Key assigned to Hot Desk.
OR
• Dial 1091
• Enter Host Extension number
1246 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Enter Host Extension User Password
• Go ON-Hook.
The User password of both the extensions involved cannot be default password.
To cancel Hot Desk:
• On the Host Extension, press DSS Key assigned to Hot Desk.
OR
• Dial 1091
• Enter Hot Desk Extension number
• Enter Hot Desk Extension User Password
• Go ON-Hook.
• On the Hot Desk Extension, press DSS Key assigned to Hot Desk.
OR
• Dial 1091
• Enter own extension number (Hot Desk Extension Number)
• Enter own extension User Password
• You get confirmation, Hot Desk cleared
• Go ON-Hook.
For SLT Users
To perform Hot Desk:
• Go to the SLT extension (Hot Desk Extension) with which you want to swap your SLT extension (Host
Extension) properties.
• Lift the handset of the Hot Desk extension.
• Dial 1091
• Dial Host Extension number
• Dial Host Extension User Password
• Replace handset.
To cancel Hot Desk:
• On the Host Extension, dial 1091
• Dial Hot Desk Extension number
• Dial Hot Desk Extension User Password
• Go ON-Hook.
• On the Hot Desk Extension, dial 1091
• Dial own extension number (Hot Desk Extension Number)
• Dial own extension User Password
• You get confirmation, Hot Desk cleared
• Go ON-Hook.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1247
Hotline
What’s this?
The Hotline feature connects the extension user immediately to a particular number or trunk, whenever the
extension user goes OFF-Hook.
You can set Hotline to connect immediately to another extension, to a Department Group, to an external number or
to an outgoing trunk.
Hotline set for external numbers and outgoing trunks is referred to as Hot Outward Dailing.
ETERNITY offers two types of Hotline/Hot Outward Dialing:
• Immediate: As soon as the extension user goes Off-Hook, the user gets connected to the desired hotline
extension number, department group, external number, or outgoing trunk. For this the Hotline Timer must
be set to ‘00’ seconds (default: 3 seconds).
• Delayed: When the extension user goes OFF-Hook, the system plays Dial Tone to the extension user and
waits for the Hotline Timer (default: 3 seconds). On the expiry of this timer, it connects the extension user
to the desired hotline extension number, department group, external number or outgoing trunk.
How it works
• Hotline/Hot Outward Dialing can be set from an SLT, DKP or Extended IP Phone extension, if the
extension has Hotline in its Class of Service.
• To be able to use Hotline/Hot Outward Dialing, extension users must do the following:
• Select the type of Hotline they want to set on their extension; whether to an internal Extension Number,
a Department Group, or an External Number or Outgoing Trunk.
• Configure the Hotline Timer. For Immediate Hotline, extension users must set the Hotline Timer to ‘00’
seconds. For Delayed Hotline, extension users can set the Timer as per their requirement.
• Here is an example of how Hotline works:
A frequently dials the number of B. So, A sets Hotline for B’s number and also sets the Hotline Timer to 5
seconds (Delayed Hotline).
• A goes Off-Hook
• ETERNITY plays dial tone and waits for 5 seconds
• If A dials a number within the Hotline Timer, ETERNITY outdials the number dialed by A.
• If A does not dial any digit within this time, ETERNITY dials B’s number.
• A gets connected to B.
If ‘Dial Tone’ timer of the system is less than Hotline Timer, the Hotline Timer will override the ‘Dial Tone’
timer. To know more about these timers, see “System Timers and Counts”.
1248 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• If A had set the Hotline Timer to ‘00’ seconds (Immediate Hotline), A would be connected to B as soon
as A goes Off-Hook.
• If A sets delayed Hot Outward Dialing for a Trunk or an External Number, the system will play dial tone
to A and wait for the duration of the Hotline Timer for A to dial digits. If A does not dial any digits within
this timer, the system connects A to the Trunk/External Number.
• If A sets immediate Hot Outward Dialing (Hotline Timer set to ‘00’ seconds), A will be connected to the
Trunk/External number as soon as A goes Off-Hook.
• Delayed Hotline/Hot Outward Dialing allows extension users to dial out other numbers or grab another
trunk, without having to cancel the Hotline/Hot Outward Dialing they have set for a particular number or
trunk.
How to configure
To be able to use Hotline, extension users must have this feature enabled in their “Class of Service (COS)” for the
time zone, as required.
How to use
For EON & Extended IP Phone Users
To set Hotline on an Extension / Department Group,
• Press DSS key assigned to Hotline.
• Scroll to select ‘Set Hotline: Stn/ Dept’, press enter key
• Enter Extension / Department Group Number
OR
• Dial 151 and enter Extension Number / Department Group Number
To set Hot Outward Dialing for Trunk,
• Press DSS key assigned to Hotline.
• Scroll to select ‘Set Hotline: OG Trunk’, press enter key
• Enter TAC
OR
• Dial 152-TAC
To set Hot Outward Dialing to External Number,
• Press DSS key assigned to Hotline.
• Scroll to select ‘Set Hotline: Ext Num’, press enter key
• Enter TAC
• Enter External Number #*
OR
• Dial 153-TAC-External Number#*
You cannot set Hotline and Hot Outward Dialing on the same extension at the same time.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1249
To set Hotline Timer,
• Press DSS key assigned to Hotline
• Scroll to select ‘Set Hotline Timer’, press enter key
• Enter Hotline Timer:000-255 seconds
OR
• Dial 154-seconds (000-255)
The default value of Hot Line Timer is 3 seconds.
To Cancel Hotline / Hot Outward Dialing,
• Press DSS key assigned to Hotline
• Scroll to select ‘Cancel Hotline’, press enter key.
OR
• Dial 150
The cancellation code must be dialed from the dial tone. You have to be very quick in dialing the
cancellation code, if the delay in the Hotline Timer is set to 1 or 2 seconds.
For SLT Users
To set Hotline on an Extension / Department Group,
• Dial 151-Extension Number / Department Group Number
To set Hot Outward Dialing for Trunk,
• Dial 152-TAC
To set Hot Outward Dialing for External Number,
• Dial 153-TAC-External Number#*
To set Hotline Timer,
• Dial 154-seconds (000-255)
To cancel Hotline / Hot Outward Dialing,
• Dial 150
When you set the Hotline Timer to ‘00’ seconds (for immediate Hotline), you will not be able to dial any
digits, not even the feature code to Cancel Hotline.
If you have set Immediate Hot Outward Dialing for a Trunk or External Number, you will not be allowed to dial any
feature code, not even the feature code to cancel Hot Outward Dialing. However, if you need to cancel, you must
follow the steps described below.
• Go OFF-Hook.
You get the CO network Dial Tone.
• Dial by Digit.
You will hear Pause/Silence.
• Wait for the duration of the Trunk Inter Digit Timer
You will hear Pause/Silence.
1250 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Press Flash.
You will hear the Feature Tone.
• Dial the code to change the Hot Outward Dialing Timer (154) and change the duration of the timer
–or–
Dial the access code to cancel the Hot Outward Dialing (150).
You get Confirmation Tone.
• Go ON-hook.
You get the return ring of the trunk.
• Go OFF-Hook again.
You get connected to the held trunk.
• Go ON-Hook.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1251
IC Reference Table
What’s this?
The IC Reference Table is a set of general features that define the logic of resolving an incoming call and placing
on the target DDI station. An IC Reference Table is assigned to every port. This table in conjunction with DDI
Routing Table identifies the target station. The ETERNITY offers 64 such table each of which can be programmed
as per the requirement.
How it works
The IC Reference Table consists of the following parameters:
• IC Reference ID-This is the reference number acts as an identifier to the translation logic programmed in
the IC Reference Table. Any number of table can have the same reference number. An IC Reference ID is
assigned to ISDN and SIP trunks. When a call lands on the ISDN trunk, the system checks the IC
Reference Number assigned to it and identifies the corresponding DDI Routing Table for call resolving. For
more details on the complete Translation Logic please refer the topics “Direct Dialing-In (DDI)” and “DDI
Routing Table”.
• Start Channel Number-This is the First Channel Number for the trunk to which the logic is applicable.
• Total Channel Count-The Total number of channels of the trunk to which the IC Reference Table is
applicable.
• DDI Routing Reference ID-This is the DDI Routing Table's Reference number used by the IC Reference
table for mapping the received DDI number to a flexible number. It is a link parameter.
• Route on First Destination-This flag can be enabled or disabled. Once the station is identified, the
system checks the DDI IC routing flag of the station. If the flag is enabled, the call always lands on first
station of the MSN number. If the flag is disabled, the call is routed to the identified target station.
• Ring Timer-This timer signifies the time for which the station on which the incoming call is received rings.
On expiry of this timer if the Call is not answered the call is routed as per the programmed logic. Route to
TLG-When No Reply-When the DDI station does not answer the call, the system checks for this flag. If it is
enabled, then the system routes the call to the TLG assigned to the Trunk. It is in seconds.
• When No Reply-If the DDI station does not reply, the system checks parameter for processing the call
further. As per the option selected, the system does one of the following:
• Disconnect the call
• Route the call to Trunk Landing Group
• Answer the call automatically, greet the caller with a voice message, and on completion of message
disconnect the call.
• Answer the call, greet the caller with a voice message, and on completion of the message route the call
to Trunk Landing Group.
• Route the call to Voice Mail; to the DDI station’s Mail Box.
For this, a mail box must be assigned to the station. If the station is not assigned mail box, the caller will
hear the welcome message of the VMS, but will not be able to access the mail box.
1252 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• When Busy-If the DDI station cannot take the call because it is busy, the system checks this parameter for
processing the call further. As per the option selected, the system does one of the following:
• Disconnect the call.
• Route the call to Trunk Landing Group.
• Answer the call automatically, greet the caller with a voice message, and on completion of message
disconnect the call.
• Answer the call, greet the caller with a voice message, and on completion of the message route the call
to Trunk Landing Group.
• Route the call to Voice Mail; to the DDI station’s Mail Box.
• Trunk Feature Template - A Trunk feature template is assigned to each DDI Routing Table. This enables
the user to allow Auto Answer Time Zone wise, allow DID on a few numbers according to the time zone.
For more details refer the topic “Trunk Feature Template”.
How to configure
Configuring IC Reference Table using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access Mode.
• Click the ‘DDI Routing’ link.
• Under ‘DDI Routing’, click ‘Incoming Reference Table’.
• Configure the parameters in this table to match your requirement.
• Click Submit to save.
• You may log out of Jeeves.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1253
Configuring IC Reference Table using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
• To program IC Reference Table Index, dial:
• 6302-1-IC Reference Table Index-Feature Number-Value
• 6302-2-IC Ref. Table Index-IC Ref. Table Index-Feature Number-Value
• 6302-*-Feature Number-Value
Where,
IC Reference Table Index is from 01 to 64.
Feature Number is from 01 to 09.
See the table at the end of this topic for Feature numbers and the codes.
• To restore default IC Reference Table Index, dial:
• 6301-1-IC Reference Table Index to restore default of a single index.
• 6301-2-IC Ref. Table Index-IC Ref. Table Index to restore defaults of a range of index.
• 6301-* to restore defaults of the entire table.
Where,
IC Reference Table Index is from 01 to 64.
• Exit SE mode.
Default values of the IC Reference Table
Feature No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09
Feature IC Start Total DDI DDI Ring Trunk
Route on When When
Name/Table Ref. Channel Channel Routing Timer Feature
First Dest. No-Reply Busy
Index ID No. Count Ref. ID (Sec.) Template
01 00 01 00 00 Disable 045 Disconnect Disconnect 01
02 00 01 00 00 Disable 045 Disconnect Disconnect 01
: : : : : : : : : :
64 00 01 00 00 Disable 045 Disconnect Disconnect 01
Parameters Value:
Code 0 00- 01-30 00-30 00-99 Disable 001-255 Disconnect Disconnect 01-50
99
1 Enable Route to Route to
TLG TLG
2 Greet and Greet and
Disconnect Disconnect
3 Greet and Greet and
Route to Route to
TLG TLG
4 Route to Route to
Voice Mail Voice Mail
1254 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Incoming CLI Modification
What’s this?
For PBX users in countries, where the Calling Line Identification (CLI) received must be suitably modified before it
can be used to dial out the number, ETERNITY offers the feature ‘Incoming CLI Modification’.
The Incoming CLI received with the Country or Area Code, or both. However, the dialing pattern of the public
network may require the received CLI to be prefixed with additional digits, to dial out the same number. Or the
dialing pattern of the public network may require the CLI to be stripped off the prefixed digits to dial out the same
number.
With the feature ‘Incoming CLI Modification’ programmed, the ETERNITY detects whether the incoming CLI is a
local number, a national, or an international number. It modifies the incoming CLI accordingly, by adding or stripping
off the prefixed digits so that the number can be dialed out as per the dialing pattern supported by the public
network.
The modified CLI is presented to the extension phones and is stored in the “Call Logs”, and SMDR (see “Station
Message Detail Recording”). Extension users can call a number in the Call Logs without having to modify the CLI
manually.
How it works
• Incoming CLI Modification parameters must be programmed in the system considering the dialing pattern
supported by the local public network.
• Accordingly, ETERNITY matches the CLI received with the programmed parameters.
• It detects whether it is an international, national or local number.
• It modifies the CLI according as per the Modification parameters programmed.
• It presents the modified CLI to the extension; stores the modified CLI in the SMDR and in the Call Logs of
the extension, provided it is a digital key phone.
• When the received CLI is dialed out by the extension user from Call Log, ETERNITY dials out the same
number.
How to configure
For this feature to work, the parameter ‘Incoming CLI Modification’ must be programmed in the ‘System
Parameters’ of ETERNITY. This can be done from Jeeves or by dialing SE commands from a Telephone.
Programming Incoming CLI Modification using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click 'System Parameters’ to open the page.
• Click ‘Incoming CLI Modification’.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1255
Now, program these parameters:
• Enable Incoming CLI Modification: Enable this flag if you want to use the Incoming CLI Modification
feature. By default, this flag is disabled.
If you receive CLI in dialable format, there is no need to use this feature. In such case, keep the flag
disabled. You do not need to program any of the CLI modification parameters.
• Country Code: Enter the Country Code of the country where ETERNITY is installed. The Country Code
helps ETERNITY detect whether the Incoming CLI received is a national or an international number. Do
not enter any prefix for the Country Code. For example, if your ETERNITY is installed in USA, enter only ‘1’
as the Country Code. Do not enter ‘+’ or “00’ as prefix to the country code ‘1’. By default the Country Code
is ‘91’ (India).
• Area Code: Enter the Area Code of the place where the ETERNITY is installed. The Area Code helps
ETERNITY detect whether the Incoming CLI received is a local number. Do not enter any prefix for the
Area Code. For example, if you want to enter Area Code for Mumbai, enter only ‘22’. Do not enter the
prefix ‘0’ to the area code. By default, Area Code is ‘265’ (Vadodara city).
• Prefix required for International Calls: Enter the digits that are required as Prefix for dialing International
Numbers. The prefix may be up to 5 digits, with numbers from 00000 to 99999. By default, ‘00’ is set as the
prefix for dialing International numbers.
• Prefix required for National Calls: Enter the digits that are required as Prefix for dialing long distance,
National (within the country) numbers. The prefix may be up to 5 digits, with numbers from 00000 to
99999. By default, ‘0’ is set as prefix for dialing national numbers.
• Area Code required to make local calls?: Depending on the dialing pattern of your local public
telephone network, you may choose from the following options:
• No (Area Code not required): select this option if your public telephone network does not require the
dialing of Area Code for local numbers.
1256 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Yes (Area Code is required): select this option if your public telephone network requires you to dial
the Area Code for local numbers.
• Yes (Area Code with Prefix required): select this option if you public telephone network requires you
to dial Area Code with a particular Prefix for local numbers. If you select this option, you must also
program the Prefix digits for the Area Code.
By default, the option, ‘No (Area Code not required) is selected.
• Prefix digits to Area Code for local calls: If you have enabled the ‘Area Code required to make local
calls’ flag in the previous parameter, enter the prefix digits for the area code for local calls in this field.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
Programming CLI Based Routing Table using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To enable/disable Incoming CLI Modification, dial:
• 5367-Flag
Where,
Flag is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Disabled
To program the Country Code, dial:
• 5368-Country Code
Where,
Country Code is a number string up to 5 digits. The number string may consist of numbers from 00000
and 99999.
Default: 91 (India)
Program the Country Code without any prefix. For example, if you want to program USA as Country
Code, enter ‘1’ only (without the prefix ‘00’ or ‘+’)
To program the Area Code, dial:
• 5369-Area Code
Where,
Area Code is a number string up to 5 digits. The number string may consist of numbers from 00000 and
99999.
Default: 265 (Vadodara)
Program the Area Code without any prefix. For example, if you want to program Mumbai as Area Code,
enter ‘22’ only (without the prefix ‘0’)
To program International Call Prefix, dial:
• 5370-International Call Prefix
Where,
International Call Prefix is a number string up to 5 digits. The number string may consist of numbers
from 00000 and 99999.
Default: 00
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1257
To program National Call Prefix, dial:
• 5371-National Call Prefix
Where,
National Call Prefix is a number string up to 5 digits. The number string may consist of numbers from
00000 and 99999.
Default: 0
To enable/disable ‘Area Code required to make local calls?’, dial:
• 5372-Code
Where,
Code is
1 for No (Area Code is not required)
2 for Yes (Area Code is required)
3 for Yes (Area Code with Prefix required)
Default: 1
To program Prefix Digits to Area Code for Local Calls, dial:
• 5373-Prefix Digits
Where,
Prefix Digits to Area Code is a number string up to 5 digits. The number string may consist of numbers
from 00000 and 99999.
Default: Blank
• Exit SE mode.
1258 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Internal Call Restriction
What’s this?
• Using this feature, the operator will be able to allow/restrict internal calls. The operator has flexibility to
allow calls during day time and restrict calls during night time. In ETERNITY this feature is implemented by
following ways:
• Assigning 'Guest Group' to the station
• To enable/disable Internal Call Barring (Call Block)
Assigning 'Guest Group' to the station
• Privacy of the user is very important in Enterprises and hospitals. In general, most of the users need to
communicate only with reception, operator, pantry and such other service stations. He is not required to
dial other user numbers. For example, in hospitals the patients need to call the nurse and not the doctor or
other patients.
• Sometimes, a group of users occupy multiple rooms in the Enterprise. In such cases members of the
group would like to communicate only among themselves and service stations.
Essentially we need following logic:
• Certain service stations should be able to dial any other service station or any guest (for example Nurses,
Operator).
• Certain stations should be able to dial only service stations (for example: patients, single user in the office).
• A group of station users need to dial amongst each other and the service stations (for example: doctors).
Above requirements are implemented as follows:
• Solo Group (for example patients, single user of the station). This is classified in group 00.
• Universal Group (Nurses and other services staff for example). This is classified in group 99.
• Friend's Group (for example, Group of visitors). Such a group of station users can be assigned to any
group number from 01 to 98.
Following diagram depicts this logic:
Universal Group Friends Group Friend Group Friend Group
99 00 A B
Universal Group Friends Group Friend Group Friend Group
99 00 A B
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1259
How to use
From SA mode:
Dial, 1072-904-Flexible Number-Guest Group
OR
Press DSS key for 'Guest Group'
Where,
Flexible Number is the code given to access a station.
Guest Group is from 00 to 99.
By default, the guest group assigned is 99.
• The user can call any body in his 'guest group' number '99'.
• The station users in one 'guest group', '99' can call each other within the group as well as the station users
in other groups.
• The default Guest group of all the stations = 99.
Enable/Disable Internal Call Barring (Call Block)
ETERNITY supports a feature, to allow or bar the Internal Calls for the users of ETERNITY. This is called Call
Blocking.
How to use
From SA mode:
Dial, 1072-045-Code
OR
Press DSS key for 'Enable/Disable Internal Call Block'.
Where,
Code Meaning
0 Disable Call Block, (i.e. Internal Calls allowed)
1 Enable Call Block (i.e. Internal Calls barred)
• When this feature is enabled, the LED on the DSS key assigned to 'Call Block' will glow Red and when
disabled, the LED will be turned Off.
• When the operator issues "Call Block”- Enable command, all the station users will be assigned guest
group = 00.
• When the operator issues "Call Block”- Disable command, all the station users will be assigned guest
group = 99.
• Even after issuing SA command for 'Call Block', the operator can use the SA command 1072-904 to
change the guest group of any station user.
• Please refer separate manual for more details about Hotel Applications for this feature.
1260 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Interrupt Request (IR)
What’s this?
Interrupt Request allows you to break into an on-going conversation after intimating the extension user about the
interruption.
In case of an important or urgent trunk call the operator can put the call on hold, interrupt the busy extension user to
inform about the urgent call and then transfer the urgent call.
How it works
• A, B and C are extension users.
• A and B are talking to each other.
• C calls A.
• C gets busy tone.
• C dials Interrupt Request feature code.
• C gets Ring Back tone (RBT) and A gets beeps indicating a new call.
• To answer C’s call, A must dial Flash before the expiry of the Interrupt Request Timer. A will be in speech
with C. B will be put on hold and will get music on hold.
• If A does not dial Flash before expiry of the Interrupt Request Timer, C’s call will be disconnected.
• After the conversation between C and A is over, when C goes on-hook, speech between B and A will be
re-established.
Feature Interactions
• Call States:
• Interrupt Request works only if the dialed extension is busy. The dialed extension may be busy with
another extension or trunk (external number).
• Interrupt Request works only if the user about to be interrupted in is in a two-way normal speech with
another user or external party.
• It will not work if the busy signal is due to the user being Off-hook, or in the middle of dialing, or
accessing a feature of the ETERNITY.
• “Call Toggle”: Once A and C comes in speech with each other, A can toggle between B and C using Call
Toggle feature.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1261
• Privacy against Interrupt Request: If the feature 'Privacy against Interrupt Request is enabled for an
extension, it cannot be interrupted. See “Privacy”.
• “Priority”: No Interaction with Interrupt Request. If 'A' has lower priority than 'B' but has Interrupt Request
enabled; A can interrupt B.
How to configure
To be able to use Interrupt Request, extension users must have this feature enabled in their “Class of Service
(COS)” in their “Station Basic Feature Template”.
For instructions on configuring the different extension port types:
• “Configuring SLT Extensions”
• “Configuring DKP Extensions”
• “Configuring ISDN Terminals”
• “Configuring SIP Extensions”
If required you may also change the default value of the Interrupt Request Timer. For instructions see “System
Timers and Counts”.
How to use
For EON & Extended IP Phone Users
When dialed extension is busy,
• Press DSS Key assigned to Interrupt Request
OR
• Dial 3 on Busy Tone
For SLT Users
When dialed extension is busy,
• Dial 3 on Busy Tone.
1262 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
ISDN-BRI
What’s this?
• BRI port of the ETERNITY configured for NT mode can be connected to the BRI Port of another PBX
configured for TE mode. In such case, the ETERNITY will behave as Transit Exchange.
• Dialing method (en bloc/overlap) on the BRI port is programmable. This is because many PSTN
exchanges support only Overlap receiving. Hence, in such cases the BRI port (configured for TE mode)
will send the called party number in overlap mode.
• ETERNITY supports a software port entity called "ISDN Terminal" which can be connected to the BRI-NT
port and will be treated as stations of the PBX.
How it works
• The ISDN numbering plan with ETERNITY revolves around Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) and Direct
Dialing In (DDI).
• With MSN feature, practically all the station users or other specific terminals can be given a unique
telephone number. One station can be assigned a number 2765400, other station can be assigned
2765401, etc. Hence, for one subscriber the Service Provider can assign multiple numbers. Hence this
feature is called Multiple Subscriber Number.
• The ETERNITY can be programmed to land all the calls coming through various channels of the BRI line
on the Operator just like in case of normal trunk.
• Alternatively, using DDI feature of ISDN the calls can be made to land directly on the desired stations. To
accomplish this requirement, each station should be given a unique directory number. On assigning
directory number, a table is formed internally called DDI table as shown below:
Station (S/w Port No.) Directory Number
000 03
005 04
006 05
008 06
009 07
• When a caller calls a MSN number, the call lands on the PBX. The PBX compares the incoming number
with the DDI table. If the incoming number matches with any number in the DDI table, it routes the call to
the specific station. If the incoming number does not match with any number in the DDI table then it is
matched with CLI number. If it matches with any number in the CLI table, the call is routed according to the
CLI table. If the number does not match with either of these tables then the call is routed to the landing
destination.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1263
How to connect the BRI line?
ISDN
Network NT 1 ETERNITY
Power
U-Interface S/T
(2 wire) Interface
• Most of the Service Providers provide the NT1 along with the BRI line.
• At the Customer's Premises, the BRI line is terminated on the NT1. The S/T interface of the NT1 is
connected to BRI port of the ETERNITY.
The configuration details of U interface (RJ-45) at NT1 are given below:
Pin Number Pin Detail
4 Tx
5 Rx
The configuration details of S/T interface (RJ-45) on NT1 are given below:
Pin Number Pin Detail
3 Rx1
4 Tx1
5 Tx2
6 Rx2
Association of BRI port and ISDN Terminal:
• The 'ISDN terminal' is defined as a real port type in the system.
• Since 32 BRI ports are supported at present and as per protocol a maximum of 8 terminals can be
connected to the BRI port; at present 64 software ports are supported for ISDN terminals, namely 01 to 64
(Maximum 64 Terminals).
• ISDN terminals (software ports) do not have any hardware slot and port Id of their own.
• ISDN terminals (software ports) are associated to the BRI software port and the BRI software port has a
hardware slot and port ID of its own.
• Each ISDN terminal is assigned an access code (flexible number), station basic template, station
advanced template and a CPU group.
1264 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The ISDN terminals do not have a direct software port number as other port types have. Rather the ISDN
terminals have a derived software port number. Such derived software port numbers are used while
programming station name or assigning Station Basic Feature or Station Advanced Feature templates or
programming Routing Group.
For Call routing from the BRI NT:
• When call is made from the ISDN terminal the BRI port will check the calling party number sent by the
ISDN Terminal. If the calling party number = Programmed access code of the ISDN Terminal which are
assigned to the BRI port, the BRI Terminal will process the call further as per the Station Basic Feature
Template and Station Advanced Feature Template assigned to the ISDN Terminal.
• If the ISDN terminal doesn't send the calling party number while making the OG call, the Station Basic/
Advanced Feature template assigned to the BRI port will be used, for call processing.
• When the ISDN terminal doesn't send the calling party number = Access code programmed for the BRI
port on which it is connected, while making the OG call, the Station Basic/Advanced Feature Template
assigned to the BRI port will be applied.
• When ISDN terminal sends calling party number which is not programmed for any ISDN terminals
assigned to that particular BRI Port, neither its access code of that particular BRI port, the call will be
dropped, by the BRI port.
BRI port personality (Orientation Type)
• BRI port can be connected to a public ISDN exchange, private ISDN exchange or to an ISDN terminal (BRI
Access).
• When the BRI port is connected to a Public ISDN exchange, it behaves as a terminal. ETERNITY supports
this function of BRI Access by assigning it a parameter viz. Orientation = Terminal. The signaling used for
this Orientation is Q.931-protocol.
• When the BRI port is connected to an ISDN Phone or ISDN Video phone, it behaves as a 'network'.
ETERNITY supports this function of BRI Access by assigning it a parameter viz. Orientation = Network. In
this case, the BRI port behaves as network. The signaling used for this Orientation is Q.931- protocol.
• When the BRI port is connected to a private ISDN (the main application of this configuration is CUG,
feature transparency, etc.), the BRI port is used as a pipe of 128Kbps. It is of no significance which end
acts as network and which acts as terminal (User) since the role of the BRI port in such case will be to
route the call depending on the signaling protocol applied on the BRI port (128Kbps link). ETERNITY
supports this function of BRI Access by assigning it a parameter viz. Orientation = Tie-line. In this case, the
BRI port behaves as 128Kbps link. The signaling used for this Orientation can be any of the Inter-
exchange signaling protocol for BRI Access. The most commonly used is QSIG.
TEI negotiation on BRI port
• BRI port supports both automatic and fixed TEI negotiation, so that it can be integrated with a PBX of
another vendor. If 'Fixed' mode is selected, its value is required to be configured using SE commands or
Jeeves. TEI is 'Terminal Endpoint Identifier' protocol for negotiation used while connecting to the BRI port
with remote BRI port.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1265
Applications of BRI-NT Port:
Two applications are described below:
• Video Phone
• Making Data Call
Video Phone
• An important application of BRI-NT is establishing a Video Call using Video phone. It is used just like other
ISDN Phones.
• Video Phone can be used with ETERNITY supporting a BRI connection. ETERNITY does not support call
transfer from one Video Terminal to another Terminal. But the call routing is implemented by preparing
suitable OG Trunk Bundle Group (OGTBG).
• The OGTBG for the Video Phone should be so formed by the SE that a BRI channel will be allotted by the
Call Processing logic (preferably).
• If the OGTBG formed by the SE contains a non-ISDN trunk and if by the OGTBG logic this non-ISDN trunk
is to be allotted to the ISDN phone which has requested 2 B-channels then the call will be dropped. The
non-ISDN trunk is allowed only if the ISDN user makes an audio call. The PBX will allot first channel even
if other channels are available.
OG Call using Video Phone:
• The ETERNITY will support supplementary feature viz. Hold only. If the terminal equipment uses Hold
feature to hold a video call, it will be applicable.
• The ETERNITY does not support logic for converting audio call to video call.
• Instead, the Video Phone user will have to use one Trunk Access Code (and hence OGTBG) to make and
receive Video call and another TAC to make an audio call.
IC call to a Video Phone:
• User can program normal DDI routing logic to route the IC call to the Video Phone using the first or
additional channels.
• Depending upon terminal equipment call, the call will be answered by the Operator and transferred to the
Video Phone.
1266 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Video Conference
As shown in the figure ETERNITY supports Video conference from BRI-NT port.
• This feature works only if it is supported by the Service Provider. Video Conference is established mainly
by the Video Conferencing (VC) equipment.
• A Video Conference system (H.320) can be connected to any of the BRI-NT port.
• For Video conferencing, three BRI-NT ports of ETERNITY are connected to the three ports of the VC
equipment (The remaining one port of the Video Conference system remains free).
• Thus user will assign at least 6 B-channels to the OGTBG that is to be assigned to the VC equipment.
(User can assign BRI-NT software port nos. 01 to 03 to the Video Conferencing equipment).
• The user will program the routing of IC calls to the Video Conferencing equipment using DDI routing table
for placing IC video conferencing calls.
• More than one VC-equipment can be connected to a BRI-NT Port.
• Video Conferencing generally requires 6 B-channels. But Video Conferencing can also be done at
lower bit rates also using the "aggregation" of 6 B channels which must be supported by the VC
equipment.
• Please note that a Video Conference call cannot be transferred or kept on Hold.
Making Data Calls
• ETERNITY BRI-NT port supports data communication also.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1267
• For data-communication, connect the Router supporting ISDN-BRI or a Computer with ETERNITY ME
Card BRI to the BRI-NT port as shown below:
Using this feature following applications are supported:
• The computers connected in the LAN can browse the net through the BRI.
• Remote LAN Access the Computers in the LAN can access the computer/computers in LAN at the
remote end (Branch office/Home office).
• Files can be transferred from one LAN to another.
OG Data calls from the Router:
• The data call can be made by the router requesting desired number of channels. This establishes a live
connection between the Router and the ISP through the PBX. The users on the LAN can browse the net as
normal using Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator.
• For this, the ETERNITY will allocate data channels only on the BRI-TE port so as to leave other channels
for speech calls when the system detects the call to be a data call.
• Similarly, a Remote Computer can be accessed (Remote LAN Access) by dialing the Remote users'
number (The remote end PBX should be so programmed that the call made to a number lands directly on
the Router.) This establishes a permanent connection between the two Routers (and hence two LAN
networks).
• Now the user at PBX-A can access the computer in LAN at the remote end in the same way as accessing
another computer on the same network.
IC Data calls to the Router:
• Program the Trunk Landing Group such that all data calls will land on the PRI-NT port to which the Router
is connected using CLI based Routing logic or DDI based routing logic.
• However, while routing call on the BRI-NT port, the PBX will check that the data channels reserved for data
communication on the BRI-NT port are enough to establish the call. Otherwise the call will be rejected.
• The call will be rejected if the number of channels reserved for data calls, are already busy with one data-
call.
1268 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
How to configure
The commands explained below should be referred as:
To program a single port: XXXX-1
To program a range of ports: XXXX-2
To program all the ports: XXXX-*
BRI Parameters
Hardware Slot-Port
Use following command to assign hardware ID to a BRI software port:
1106-BRI-Slot-Port offset
Where,
BRI is from 01 to 32.
Slot is the number of the universal slot, where the BRI card is installed, from 01 to 16.
Port is the number of the BRI port on the card, from 00 to 99.
Use following command to de-assign the hardware slot and the hardware port assigned to the BRI software port.
1106-BRI-00-00
Name
Use following command to assign a name to the BRI port:
5405-1-BRI-Name
5405-2-BRI-BRI-Name
5405-*-Name
Where,
BRI is from 01 to 32.
Name is an alpha-numeric string of 12 characters. Terminate the command with #*.
By default, Name field is Blank.
Enable BRI Port
This parameter is used to enable/disable the port. When the Port configured in TE mode is disabled, it will not be
allotted to the user on grabbing the port. Instead the user will get error tone. Also no IC call will be allowed.
Likewise, when the port is configured in NT mode is disabled, the IC call will not be allowed to land on this port. The
port will be treated as absent and accordingly other activities will be performed like routing the call to other stations
in the group, etc.
Use following command to enable/disable BRI port:
6201-1-BRI-Flag
6201-2-BRI-BRI-Flag
6201-*-Flag
Where,
BRI is from 01 to 32.
Flag is 0 for disable, 1 for enable.
By default, the BRI Port is enabled.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1269
Orientation Type
Use following command to program Orientation Type for the BRI port:
6204-1-BRI-Orientation Type
6204-2-BRI-BRI-Orientation Type
6204-*-Orientation Type
Where,
Orientation Type Meaning
1 Terminal
2 Network
3 Tie Line
By default Type = 1.
When Orientation=Terminal, the port will be regarded as trunk. All the trunk related parameters will be applied.
When Orientation=Network, the port will be regarded as station. All the station related parameters will be applied.
When Orientation = Tie-line, the port will be regarded as station for all incoming calls on it and as a trunk for all
outgoing calls made through it.
BRI NT Interface Type
This parameter is relevant only when BRI port is used as Network Interface, i.e BRI NT mode.
Use the following command to select the Interface type as Point-to-Point or Point-to-Multipoint:
6226-1-BRI - Interface Type
6226-2-BRI-BRI-Interface Type
6226-*-Interface Type
Where,
Interface Type is
1 for Point-to-Point
2 for Point-to-Multipoint
Default =Point to Point
When ISDN Phones are to be connected with BRI NT of the ETERNITY, this parameter should be set as 'Point to
Multipoint'.
When an ISDN PBX is to be interfaced with BRI-NT of the ETERNITY, this parameter should be set as 'Point to
Point'.
BRI ISDN Switch Variant
Use following command to program the ISDN BRI Switch Variant of the BRI port:
6203-1-BRI-ISDN BRI Switch Variant
6203-2-BRI-BRI-ISDN BRI Switch Variant
6203-*-ISDN BRI Switch Variant
Where,
1270 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
BRI is from 01 to 32.
ISDN BRI Variant Meaning
01 ATT_4ESS
02 ATT_5ESS
03 AUSTRALIA
04 AUTO CONFIG
05 DMS_100
06 ETSI_NET3
07 NTT_INS64
08 SWV_HONG_KONG
09 US_NI1
10 US_NI2
11 VN_X
By default, ISDN BRI Switch Variant is 06.
OG Reference ID
Use following command to program an OG Reference ID to a BRI port:
6231-1-BRI-OG Reference ID
6231-2-BRI-BRI-OG Reference ID
6231-*-OG Reference ID
Where,
BRI is from 01 to 32.
OG Reference ID is from 00 or 01 to 99.
By default, OG Reference ID for BRI is 00.
This command is significant only if the BRI port is configured in TE mode.
IC Reference ID-WH
Use following command to program an IC Reference ID-WH on the BRI port:
6232-1-BRI-IC Reference ID
6232-2-BRI-BRI-IC Reference ID
6232-*-IC Reference ID
Where,
BRI is from 01 to 32.
IC Reference ID is from 01 to 99.
By default, IC Reference ID-WH for BRI is 00.
This command is significant only if the BRI port is configured in TE mode.
IC Reference ID-BH
Use following command to program an IC Reference ID-BH on the BRI port:
6233-1-BRI-IC Reference ID
6233-2-BRI-BRI-IC Reference ID
6233-*-IC Reference ID
Where,
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1271
BRI is from 01 to 32.
IC Reference ID is from 00 or 01 to 99.
By default, IC Reference ID-BH for BRI is 00.
This command is significant only if the BRI port is configured in TE mode.
IC Reference ID-NH
Use following command to program an IC Reference ID-NH on the BRI port:
6234-1-BRI-IC Reference ID
6234-2-BRI-BRI-IC Reference ID
6234-*-IC Reference ID
Where,
BRI is from 01 to 32.
IC Reference ID is from 00 or 01 to 99.
By default, IC Reference ID-NH for BRI is 00.
This command is significant only if the BRI port is configured in TE mode.
Trunk Feature Template
Use the following command to assign a Trunk feature Template to the BRI Port:
5804-1-BRI- Trunk Feature Template Number
5804-2-BRI-BRI- Trunk Feature Template Number.
5804-*- Trunk Feature Template Number.
Where,
BRI is from 01 to 32.
Template Number is the number of the customized Trunk Feature Template, from 01 to 50. Default: Template 01.
Cost Factor
Use following command to assign a Cost Factor to the BRI port:
6202-1-BRI-SP
6202-2-BRI-BRI-SP
6202-*-SP
Where,
BRI is from 01 to 32.
Cost Factory is from 01 to 99.
By default, all the BRI ports are assigned Cost Factor = 01.
This parameter is insignificant when BRI port is configured in NT mode.
Station Basic Feature Template
Use the following command to assign a Station Basic Feature Template to a BRI port:
5509-1-BRI-Template Number
5509-2-BRI-BRI-Template Number.
5509-*-Template Number
Where,
BRI is from 01 to 32.
Template is the number of the Station Basic Feature Template, from 01 to 50.
1272 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Default: Template 01 is assigned to all BRI ports.
Station Advanced Feature Template
Use the following command to assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to a BRI port:
5609-1-BRI-Template Number
5609-2-BRI-BRI-Template Number
5609-*-Template Number
Where,
BRI is from 01 to 32.
Template is the number of the Station Advanced Feature Template, from 01 to 50.
Default: Template 01 is assigned to all BRI ports.
Layer 1 Mode
• This parameter is applicable for BRI port, when orientation type is 'Terminal'.
• The Public ISDN provides different types of lines in different countries as mentioned below:
• On Demand
• Always ON
• In 'On Demand' type of line, layer 1 (physical layer) remains 'down' when the line is idle.
• When the network places incoming call, it activates the layer 1 and places the call.
• When the terminal makes out going call, the layer 1 gets activated automatically.
• In 'Always ON' type of line, layer 1 is always 'up', in normal condition.
• In this type of line, 'layer 1 down' indicates fault condition and calls get failed.
Use following command to program 'Layer 1 Mode' for BRI port:
6225-1-BRI-Layer 1 Mode
Where,
BRI is from 01 to 32.
Layer 1 Mode Meaning
1 Always ON
2 On Demand
Select the 'Layer 1 Mode' parameter, depending upon the type of line, terminated on BRI port of ETERNITY.
By default, Layer 1 Mode is 'Always ON'.
Notes for using the above command:
• When Layer 1 mode is set as 'Always ON', the ETERNITY uses this BRI to place call only if the layer 1
is 'up'. When layer 1 goes 'down', ETERNITY considers the line as un-healthy and will not use this BRI
as destination port. ETERNITY will place the call using the alternate port programmed in the same
routing group.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1273
• When Layer 1 mode is set as 'On Demand', ETERNITY will not check the Layer 1 condition while
placing call through this BRI.
• The default Layer 1 Mode is 'Always ON'. Hence, if the interfaced line is of the type 'On Demand', the
calls will not get routed through BRI port, unless the 'Layer 1 Mode' is changed to 'On Demand'.
• When the port is un-healthy, the ETERNITY routes the call using other healthy port. However, this
depends upon the member selection method and other ports programmed in the OG Trunk Bundle
Group (OGTBG). Refer chapter “OG Trunk Bundle Group” for more details.
TEI Negotiation
SE can select the Automatic or Fixed TEI negotiation for each BRI port as required. If Fixed TEI negotiation is
selected, the value of fixed TEI negotiation is required to be programmed.
Use following command to select TEI Negotiation on a BRI port:
6238-1-BRI-TEI Negotiation Mode
6238-2-BRI-BRI-TEI Negotiation Mode
6238-*-TEI Negotiation Mode
Where,
BRI is from 00 to 32.
TEI Negotiation mode Meaning
0 Automatic (Non-fixed)
1 Fixed
By default, TEI Negotiation Mode is Automatic.
TEI Value (for Fixed Mode)
Use following command to program TEI Negotiation value when programmed as Fixed:
6239-1-BRI-TEI Value
6239-2-BRI -BRI-TEI Value
6239-*-TEI Value
Where,
BRI is from 00 to 32.
TEI Value is from 00 to 63
By default, TEI Value is 00.
The System Engineer should take care of the following points when using the above commands for TEI negotiation:
• When you change the TEI mode on any port, the BRI card will get reset.
• If you have selected 'Fixed' mode, program the value as per the value of port connected at remote end as
explained below:
• TEI Value programmed in the BRI (NT) should match with the TEI value programmed in the Terminal
equipment connected with it.
• TEI value of BRI (TE) port of ETERNITY should match with the TEI value expected by the NT
equipment at other end.
1274 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Priority
This command is applicable when BRI port is configured to act as a station.
Use following command to assign priority to BRI:
3916-1-BRI-Priority
3916-2-BRI-BRI-Priority
3916-*-Priority
Where,
BRI is from 01 to 32
Priority is from 1 to 9
By default, Priority for BRI is 5.
Return Call to Original Caller (RCOC)
Use the following command to enable RCOC on BRI trunk:
6220-1-BRI-Code
6220-2-BRI-BRI-Code
6220-*-Code
Where,
BRI is from 01 to 32.
Code is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Disabled
Overlap Receiving Timer:
Use following command to set overlap receiving timer for BRI:
6208-1-BRI-Timer
6208-2-BRI-BRI-Timer
6208-*-Timer
Where,
BRI is from 01 to 32
Timer is from 001 to 255 seconds.
Default: 015 seconds.
This timer is relevant while receiving the called party number information in overlap receiving mode. It is not
relevant for overlap sending mode.
Idle Code
Use following command to program the Idle Code for the BRI port:
6207-1-BRI-Idle Code
6207-2-BRI-BRI-Idle Code
6207-*-Idle Code
Where,
BRI is from 01 to 32.
Idle Code is from 000 to 255.
The binary equivalent of the programmed value (000 to 255) is sent on the channel to signify that the channel is
idle. (or Unused) This setting depends on the network. Most commonly applicable values are 7F and FF (Binary
equivalent is 0111 1111 and 1111 1111, decimal equivalent is 127 and 255).
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1275
Default: Idle Code for the BRI port is 127 (7F).
Channel Reserved for Data Communication
Use the following command to program number of channels reserved for data transmission:
6235-1-BRI-Channel Count
6235-2-BRI-BRI-Channel Count
6235-*-Channel Count
Where,
BRI is from 01 to 32.
Channel Count is from 00 to 02.
By default, Number of Channels is 02.
Channels Reserved for OG Calls
Use following command to reserve the number of channels for OG calls on a BRI port.
6236-1-BRI-Channel Count
6236-2-BRI-BRI-Channel Count
6236-*-Channel Count
Where,
BRI is from 01 to 32.
Channel Count is from 0 to 2.
By default, Channel is reserved for OG Calls for BRI is 2. Both the channels are used for receiving OG calls.
Channels reserved for IC Calls
Use following command to reserve the number of channels for IC calls on a BRI port.
6237-1-BRI-Channel Count
6237-2-BRI-BRI-Channel Count
6237-*-Channel Count
Where,
BRI is from 00 to 32.
Channel Count is from 0 to 2.
By default, Channel is reserved for IC Calls for BRI is 2. Both the channels are used for receiving IC calls.
Caller - Type of Number (TON)
Use following command to program a Caller TON for the BRI port:
6221-1-BRI-Caller TON
6221-2-BRI-BRI-Caller TON
6221-*-Caller TON
Where,
BRI is from 01 to 32.
Caller TON Meaning
1 Unknown
2 International Number
3 National Number
4 Network Specific Number
5 Subscriber Number
1276 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Caller TON Meaning
6 Abbreviated Number
7 Reserved Number
By default, Caller TON for BRI is Unknown.
Caller Numbering Plan Identification (NPI)
Use following command to program a Caller NPI for the BRI port:
6222-1-BRI-Caller NPI
6222-2-BRI-BRI-Caller NPI
6222-*-Caller NPI
Where,
BRI is from 01 to 32.
Caller NPI Meaning
1 Unknown
2 ISDN Numbering
3 Date Numbering
4 Telex Numbering
5 National Numbering
6 Private
7 Reserved
By default, Caller NPI for BRI is ISDN Numbering.
Called - Type of Number (TON)
Use following command to program a Called Party destination TON for the BRI port:
6223-1-BRI-Called Party TON
6223-2-BRI-BRI-Called Party TON
6223-*-Called Party TON
Where,
BRI is from 01 to 32.
Called Party TON Meaning
1 Unknown
2 International Number
3 National Number
4 Network Specific Number
5 Subscriber Number
6 Abbreviated Number
7 Reserved Number
By default, Called Party TON for BRI is Unknown.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1277
Called Numbering Plan Identification (NPI)
Use following command to program a Called Party NPI for the BRI port:
6224-1-BRI-Called Party NPI
6224-2-BRI-BRI-Called Party NPI
6224-*-Called Party NPI
Where,
BRI is from 01 to 32.
Called Party NPI Meaning
1 Unknown
2 ISDN Numbering
3 Date Numbering
4 Telex Numbering
5 National Numbering
6 Private
7 Reserved
By default, Called Party NPI for BRI is ISDN Numbering.
Call Budget
Refer the topic “Call Budget on BRI Trunks” for command strings.
Call Back
Use the following commands to program Call Back on BRI Trunk ports. To know more about this feature, refer the
topic Call Back on Trunk Ports.
To enable/disable Call Back on BRI port:
6242-1-BRI- Call Back Flag
6242-2-BRI-BRI-Call Back Flag
6242- * - Call Back Flag
Where,
BRI is from 01 to 32
Call Back Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
By default, Call Back flag is disabled.
To program Call Back Timer for BRI port:
6243-1-BRI-Call Back Timer
6243-2-BRI-BRI-Call Back Timer
1278 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
6243-*-Call Back Timer
Where,
BRI is from 01 to 32
Pause Timer Range is from 01 to 99 Sec.
By default, Pause Timer is 10 Seconds
To program Call Back Mode on BRI port:
6244-1-BRI-Call Back Mode
6244-2-BRI-BRI-Call Back Mode
6244-*-Call Back Mode
Where,
BRI is from 01 to 32
Call Back Mode is 1 to 5
Call Back Mode Meaning
1 DID
PIN Auth. - Multiple
2
Calls
CLI Auth. - Multiple
3
Calls
CLI Auth. - Single
4
Call - Ans. Sig.
5 Operator
By default, Call Back mode is Operator
To program Call Back On method for BRI port:
6245-1-BRI-Call Back on selection
6245-2-BRI-BRI-Call Back on selection
6245-*-Call Back on selection
Where,
BRI is from 01 to 32
Call back on selection is
Call Back on Meaning
1 CLI Number
2 Alternate Number
By default, Call Back on selection is CLI Number
To assign Call Back - Incoming Number List to a BRI port:
6246-1-BRI-Incoming Number List
6246-2-BRI-BRI-Incoming Number List
6246-*-Incoming Number List
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1279
Where,
BRI is from 01 to 32
Incoming Number List is from 01 - 16.
By default, Incoming Number List is 15.
To assign a Call Back - Outgoing Number List to a BRI port:
6247-1-BRI-Outgoing Number List
6247-2-BRI-BRI-Outgoing Number List
6247-*-Outgoing Number List
Where,
BRI is from 01 to 32
Outgoing Number List is from 01 - 16.
By default, Outgoing Number List is 16.
To define Call Back From for a BRI port:
6248-1-BRI-Call Back From
6248-2-BRI-BRICall Back From
6248-*-Call Back From
Where,
BRI is from 01 to 32
Call Back From is
1 for Same Port
2 for OGTB Group
By default, Same Port is selected as Call Back From.
To assign a Call Back - OGTB Group for a BRI port:
6249-1-BRI-OGTB Group
6249-2-BRI-BRIOGTB Group
6249-*-OGTB Group
Where,
BRI is from 01 to 32
OGTB Group is from 01 to 32
By default, OGTBG is 01.
Pause Timer
Use following command to program Pause Timer:
6209-1-BRI- Pause Timer
6209-2-BRI-BRI-Pause Timer
6209- * - Pause Timer
Where,
BRI is from 01 to 32
Pause Timer is from 1 to 9 seconds
By default, Pause Timer is 3 seconds.
This Timer is used to provide delay for the number dialing by the BRI port. Pause timer will be applicable when any
'P' digit is configured in the DTMF number string which is to be outdialed as DTMF digits on BRI port. One of the
applications for using this parameter is Multi-stage dialing. Refer chapter “Multi-Stage Dialing”.
For example, if PPP2 is to be outdialed and Pause timer is programmed as 3 seconds, the ETERNITY will out dial
the digit 2 after 9 seconds i.e delay of individual P i.e 3+3+3 =9.
1280 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
DTMF ON Time (msec)
Use following command to program DTMF ON Time:
6210-1-BRI-DTMF ON Time
6210-2-BRI-BRI-DTMF ON Time
6210-*-DTMF ON Time
Where,
BRI is from 01 to 32
DTMF ON Time is from 051 to 255 msec.
By default, DTMF ON Time is 102 msec.
This parameter decides for how much time the DTMF digit will be ON, while out dialed by the ETERNITY. One of
the applications for using this parameter is Multi-stage dialing. Refer chapter “Multi-Stage Dialing”.
DTMF Inter digit Pause Timer
Use following command to program DTMF Inter digit Pause Timer:
6211-1-BRI- DTMF Inter digit Pause Time
6211-2-BRI-BRI- DTMF Inter digit Pause Time
6211-*-DTMF Inter digit Pause Time
Where,
BRI is from 01 to 32
DTMF Inter digit Pause Time is from 051 to 255 msec.
By default, DTMF Inter digit Pause Time is 102 msec.
This parameter decides how much time the pause (gap) should be present between two digits while dialed by the
ETERNITY. One of the applications for using this parameter is Multi-stage dialing. Refer chapter “Multi-Stage
Dialing”.
Category (Logical Partition)
Use the following command to program 'Category (Logical Partition)' for BRI port:
6213-1-BRI- Category
6213-2-BRI-BRI- Category
6213-*-Category
Where,
BRI is from 01 to 32
Category is from 1 to 3.
1 for CO
2 for Leased
3 for Private.
By default, Category is CO.
Gateway Application-Answer Signaling
This command is used to enable Gateway Application-Answer Signaling on BRI trunk. Refer chapter “Gateway
Application-Answer Signaling” for more details.
Use following command to set flag for Gateway Application-Answer Signaling on BRI trunk:
6206-1-BRI-Gateway Application-Answer Signaling Flag
6206-2-BRI-BRI-Gateway Application-Answer Signaling Flag
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1281
6206-*-Gateway Application-Answer Signaling Flag
Where,
BRI is from 01 to 32
Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
By default, Gateway Application-Answer Signaling Flag is 'disable'.
Use following command to program DTMF digits string to be dialed as Gateway Application-Answer Signaling:
6212-1-BRI-Gateway Application-Answer Signaling DTMF String
6212-2-BRI-BRI-Gateway Application-Answer Signaling DTMF String
6212-*-Gateway Application-Answer Signaling DTMF String
Where,
BRI is from 01 to 32.
DTMF Digits allowed for DTMF string are from (0 - 9), *, #, A, B, C, D.
Maximum 4 DTMF digits can be programmed. If you need less than 4 digits for DTMF string, terminate the
command using #*.
To program #, *, A, B, C, D use following codes:
Digit Code for programming through command
A #4
B #5
C #6
D #7
* **
# ##
By default, Gateway Application-Answer Signaling DTMF String is 'CCC'.
Debug Code
Debug information of various parts of the card can be obtained on the COM port of the card.
Use following command to get appropriate debug information for the BRI port:
6291-1-BRI-Level-Code
6291-2-BRI-BRI-Level-Code
6291-*-Level-Code
Where,
BRI is from 01 to 32.
Level is from 1 to 4 (As shown below).
Code is the value for the specified level to turn ON the debug for the parameters Code range = 000 to 255. Code
value '000' for each level will turn off that level's debug.
1282 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Level and Code for BRI port are as specified below:
Level 1
Unused Flow NLS LAP SVC Primitives Variables State Primitives
Code Meaning
001 Primitives
002 State
004 Variables
008 SVC Primitives
016 LAP
032 NLS
064 Flow Debug
000 Debug Off
Level 2
Unused Unused Unused DTMF Digit Unused Layer 4 Unused Unused
Code Meaning
004 Layer 4
016 DTMF Digit
000 Debug Off
Level 3
Unused Unused Unused HDLC D-Channel Unused Unused Unused Unused
Code Meaning
016 HDLC D-Channel
000 Debug Off
Level 4
Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused OS Task NI
Code Meaning
001 Network Interface (NI)
002 OS Task
000 Debug Off
By Default Debug = off for all BRI ports for all levels.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1283
Example:
• If '004' decimal value is entered as Debug Code for Level 1, then its binary equivalent '100' (0000100)
indicates that debug for "Variables" will get enabled.
• If "007" decimal value is entered as a Debug Code for the Level 1, then its binary equivalent "111"
(00000111) indicates that debug for "Primitives", "States" and "Variables" will get enabled.
Relevant Topics:
1. “ISDN-PRI” 1285
2. “Multi-Stage Dialing” 1331
3. “Gateway Application-Answer Signaling” 1236
4. “Logical Partition” 1313
5. “Call Budget on Trunk” 874
1284 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
ISDN-PRI
What’s this?
• This topic explains the connection of PRI line, and application of PRI.
• For MSN Numbering System, please refer “ISDN-BRI”.
• PRI port of the ETERNITY configured for NT mode can be connected to the PRI Port of another PBX
configured for TE mode. In such case, the ETERNITY will behave as Transit Exchange.
• Dialing method on the PRI port is not programmable. The PRI port (configured for TE mode) will send the
called party number in Enbloc mode.
• All the switch variants are applicable to the PRI port whether programmed in TE or NT mode.
Applications:
Applications for PRI-NT Port are as described below:
• Video conferencing system connected to the PRI-NT port with IC/OG calls.
• Data Calls support.
• Networking of PBXs.
Video conferencing system connected to the PRI-NT port:
PBX
ISDN PRI TE
Video
PRI NT Conferencing
System
• Connect the Video Conference system (H.320) to the PRI-NT port of the ETERNITY.
• This feature works only if it is supported by the Service Provider. Video Conference is established mainly
by the Video Conferencing (VC) equipment.
• Video Conferencing requires 6 B-channels. But Video Conferencing can also be done at lower bit rates
also using the “aggregation” of 6 B channels which must be supported by the VC equipment.
• The VC equipment uses two methods:H.221 and H.242 BONDING, for aggregation.
• More than one Videoconferencing system can be connected to the ETERNITY to each PRI-NT port.
• It also supports internal calling like, one Video Conferencing system to another.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1285
OG calls from VC
• After suitable connections to the VC equipment, user follows following sequence:
• Program the OGTBG (OG Trunk Bundle Group) such that the user gets at least 6 B-channels of the same
PRI port.
• Go OFF-Hook.
• Dial the trunk access code to grab the PRI trunk.
• Dial the destination number.
• If VC at the called party responds, the call is established which occupies 6-B Channels.
• If 6 B-channels on the same PRI port are not available, user at VC will get busy tone.
• The user at calling party’s VC gets dial tone of the ISDN exchange.
• The user at VC starts dialing the destination number. The destination number is sent in keypad IE by the
VC user to the PRI-NT port whereas it is dialed on the PRI-TE port in the method programmed for the port
i.e. Enbloc.
• Rest of the signaling is done between the VC equipment and the called party’s VC equipment.
• If VC equipment supports Phone Book feature, user can make call using the feature.
• At the end of VC, all the 6 B-channels are freed and available for other users.
• It is preferable that the SE will assign an OGTBG to the Video Conferencing equipment in such a manner
that the same group is not assigned to any other station. This is to allow Video Conferencing call at any
time.
IC Video Call:
• Following steps are followed for IC call:
• Program the system to place IC video calls to the PRI-NT port using DDI Routing Table.
• For this, program the DDI Routing Table. Refer related chapter.
• You can also prepare the Trunk Landing Group (Routing Group) to land the call to PRI-NT port. For this
purpose, Routing Group is to be modified.
Data Calls from PRI-NT:
• ETERNITY PRI-NT port supports data communication also.
• For data-communication, connect the Router supporting ISDN-PRI or a Computer with ETERNITY ME
Card T1E1PRI to the PRI-NT port as shown below:
1286 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
PBX
ISDN PRI TE
PRI NT Hub
Router
Using this feature following applications are supported:
• The computers connected in the LAN can browse the net through the PRI.
• Remote LAN Access the Computers in the LAN can access the computer/computers in LAN at the remote
end (Branch office/Home office).
• Files can be transferred from one LAN to another.
OG Data calls from the Router
• The data call can be made by the router requesting desired number of channels. This establishes a live
connection between the Router and the ISP through the PBX. The users on the LAN can browse the net
as normal using Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator.
• For this, the ETERNITY will allocate data channels only on the PRI-TE port so as to leave other channels
for speech calls when the system detects the call to be a data call.
• Similarly, a Remote Computer can be accessed (Remote LAN Access) by dialing the Remote users’
number (The remote end PBX should be so programmed that the call made to a number lands directly on
the Router.) This establishes a permanent connection between the two Routers (and hence two LAN
networks).
• Now the user at PBX-A can access the computer in LAN at the remote end in the same way as accessing
another computer on the same network.
IC Data calls to the Router:
• Program the Trunk Landing Group such that all data calls will land on the PRI-NT port to which the Router
is connected using CLI based Routing logic or DDI based routing logic.
• However, while routing call on the PRI-NT port, the PBX will check that the data channels reserved for data
communication on the PRI-NT port are enough to establish the call. Otherwise the call will be rejected.
• The call will be rejected if the number of channels, reserved for data calls are already busy with one data-
call.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1287
Networking of PBXs:
One of the applications is also for connecting multiple PBX using PRI-NT and PRI-TE ports. A simple connection of
only two PBXs is explained below. Refer following figure for connecting another PBX to the PRI-NT port.
2001
PBX-A PBX-B 3001
ISDN PRI TE
ISDN PRI TE
PRI NT PRI TE
Various cases of Calls from PBX-A to PBX-B can be:
Case-1: (2001 calls 3001)
• A station 2001 of PBX-A can call a station 3001 of PBX-B by dialing 3001.
• Such a call can be routed using CUG table of PBX-A. Refer chapter “Closed User Group (CUG)”.
Case-2: (2001 calls a subscriber of ISDN network connected to PBX-B)
Method 1
• Program (for PBX-A) an OGTBG containing the PRI-NT port and assign Trunk access code to it.
• Grab the PRI-NT by dialing access code. User of 2001 will get dummy dial tone of the PBX-A.
• Dial a station number 3001 of PBX-B.
Method 2
• User of 2001 can dial trunk access code of PBX-A, and dial a trunk access code of PBX-B. He will be
connected to ISDN network through PBX-B.
• Then he can make OG call on PRI-NT port as per method programmed for the PRI-NT port. (For example,
PRI-NT port can be programmed as a Trunk port and when station user of PBX-B grabs the PRI-NT port,
his call will be placed on the destination programmed for PRI-NT port in the Trunk Landing Group).
Case-3: (3001 to 2001)
Station 3001 of PBX-B will go Off-Hook.
• Using CUG feature of PBX-B, 3001 can call 2001 through PRI-NT port. Refer chapter “Closed User Group
(CUG)” for more details.
• 3001 can also dial Trunk Access Code to grab its PRI-TE port. He will get dial tone of PRI-NT Port of PBX-
A. Now 3001 can dial 2001 or trunk access code to make a call to the ISDN network connected to PBX-A.
1288 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
How to configure
For programming of the PRI, please refer topic “T1E1 Trunks” for more details.
• Trunk software ports are automatically assigned to the PRI port by the system depending on the slot in
which they are inserted.
• Please take care to terminate the PRI line on the HDSL interface only of the ISDN modem.
• The DDI Routing and Routing Tables shall be programmed as explained in chapters on DDI.
Relevant Topics:
1. “Software Port and Hardware ID” 1462
2. “T1E1 Trunks” 1608
3. “DDI Routing Table” 1081
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1289
Macros
What’s this?
Extension users often have to dial access codes for specific functions like dialing a feature code, making an internal
call, making an external call, etc.
ETERNITY supports Macros, using which, you can abbreviate long number strings for regularly used functions in to
macros and assign them to a DSS key on a DKP/Extended IP Phone extension.
You can also assign Macros on SLTs that have special keys.
How it works
• Extension 2001, frequently sets Call Forward-All Calls to an external number 26550333.
• To do this, each time, Extension 2001 must dial 131-Trunk Access Code-26550333-#*.
• Instead of having to dial this lengthy number string, a Macro can be created for Call Forward-All Calls to
External number.
• If Extension 2001 is an Extended SIP Phone or a DKP, the Macro can be assigned to a DSS key on the
phone.
• Instead of dialing this number string, the user of Extension 2001 can simply press the DSS key on which
this Macro is assigned.
• Thus when the DSS key on which a Macro is assigned is pressed, the corresponding access code is
executed.
• The system sets call forward to the external number automatically.
ETERNITY also supports Macros for SLT which have special keys. When each of these keys is pressed, a special
number string, which you can program is dialed.
For example, an SLT instrument has 5 special purpose keys. When these keys are pressed, the strings *50, *51,
*52, *53, *54 programmed on these keys are dialed out.
You can create Macros for the strings dialed out using the special keys, whereby the string dialed by each of these
special keys is associated with a particular function. For example, the special key for dialing *50 is associated with
Call Forward -All Calls to an external number. So, when the extension user presses *50, the system receives this
string and takes appropriate action, i.e. interprets it as call forward to the external number, and sets call forward.
Thus, each time the extension user presses the special key *50, the system considers that the extension user has
dialed 131-Trunk Access Code-26550333-#*.
1290 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
How to configure
You can create as many as 25 Macros using Jeeves and by dialing system commands from a telephone connected
to the ETERNITY.
Creating Macros using Jeeves
• Log into Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Click the Use Full Programming Access link.
• Click Macros.
The Macros page opens. Each macro is stored against an index number. By default the Macros Number
String and Access Code are blank when the system is operated in the Enterprise Mode.
• When creating a Macro for a DKP/Extended IP Phone,
• In the Number String field, enter the strings the system should consider as command when the DSS
Key on the DKP/Extended IP Phone.
• Click Submit to save.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1291
When ETERNITY is operated in the Hotel Mode (see Customer Profile under “System Parameters”),
Number Strings and Access Codes are assigned for features such as Front Desk, Room Service, Voice
Guided Alarm, Reservation Desk, Voice Mail Group, Retrieve Message. These Macros will appear on this
page. To know more, see the topic Customer Profile in the ETERNITY Hospitality System Manual.
• Now, assign this Macro to a DSS Key on the DKP/Extended IP Phone.
• When you assign a Macro to a DSS Key on a DKP or Extended IP Phone,
• you must select Macro as Function Type
• As Offset, you must select the Macro Index number (1-25) at which the number string is stored. In
this example, it would be Macro Index 1.
For detailed instructions on assigning a macro to a DSS key of a DKP, see “DSS Keys Programming”.
For instructions on assigning a macro to a DSS key of the Extended IP Phone, see “Matrix Extended IP
Phone Settings” under Configuring SIP Extensions.
• When creating a Macro for a special Key on an SLT,
• In the Number String field, enter the strings the system should consider as command when the special
key on the SLT is pressed.
• In the Access Codes field, enter the strings sent by the SLT on pressing the special function key.
For example, if the SLT sends the string ‘*53’ to the ETERNITY when the function key for Alarms is
pressed, enter the string 163 (the feature access code for Voice-guided Alarms) in the Number String
field, and enter the string *53 in the corresponding Access code field.
The Access Code that you assign here in Macros must not conflict with any other Access Codes in the
Dial Phase. See “Access Codes”.
• Click Submit to save.
• Log out of Jeeves.
Creating Macros using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from an SLT/DKP.
To create a Macro, dial:
• 1810-Macro Index-Number String
Where,
Macro Index is from 01 to 25.
Number String is a string of 24-digits.
If the length of the Number String is less than 24-digits terminate it with #*.
To clear a Macro, dial:
• 1810-Macro Index-#*
1292 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
You can program a special digit for 'Pause' in the Key Board Macro Number string using the code #3.
To assign an Access Code for the Macro, dial:
• 3115-1-Macro Index-Access Code
Where,
Macro Index is from 01 to 25.
Access Code is a string of 4-digits.
Access Code is maximum of 6 digits. If it is less than 6 digits, terminate it with #*.
To clear Access Code assigned to a Macro, dial:
• 3115-1-Macro Index
Where,
Macro Index is from 01 to 25.
To default the access code for the Macro, dial:
• 3165-1-Macro Index
Where,
Macro Index is from 01 to 25.
When ETERNITY is operated in Enterprise mode, the default Macros Number String and Access Codes
are blank. So, when you dial this command, the values in the Macros will become blank.
When ETERNITY is operated in the Hotel Mode, the Number Strings and Access Codes assigned by
default will be restored when you dial this command. See the topic Customer Profile in the ETERNITY
Hospitality System Manual to know more.
• Exit SE mode.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1293
Last Caller Recall
What’s this?
ETERNITY offers a facility—Last Caller Recall— to trace the extension that last made the call to your extension.
How it works
• B’s extension number is 2001.
• B wants to know who made the last call to extension 2001.
• B dials Last Caller Recall feature access code (Default:1092).
• The extension that last called 2001 rings.
• When the called extension answers, speech is established between B and the called extension user.
How to use
For EON & Extended IP Phone Users
• Lift Handset
• Press DSS Key assigned to Last Caller Recall.
OR
• Go OFF-Hook
• Dial 1092
The system dials out the extension number that last called your extension.
1294 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Last Number Redial
What’s this?
The system redials the last external number string dialed from an extension.
How it works
• Extension A dials the feature access code for ‘Redial’.
• If Extension A is an SLT, the system dials the last external number dialed from Extension A using the same
trunk access code used for dialing that number.
• If Extension A is a DKP or an Extended IP Phone, all external numbers dialed by Extension A are
displayed on the phone’s LCD.
• Extension A may select the number to be dialed out. The system will dial out this number using the same
trunk access code used for dialing this number.
• If Extension A has ‘Dynamic Lock’ set and uses Redial feature, the system will check for Toll Control as
per the Lock Level set for Extension A before dialing out the number.
How to configure
No particular configuration is required for this feature to work. Redial is included in the Basic Features allowed to all
extensions by default in their “Class of Service (COS)”. So, all extensions can use the Redial feature.
How to use
For EON & Extended IP Phone Users
• Press Redial Key.
Or
• Dial 7
A List of external numbers last dialed will appear on your phone’s display.
• Scroll to select the desired number.
• Press Enter key.
• The system dials out the external number.
For SLT Users
• Lift Handset
• Dial 7
• The system dials out the external number last dialed from your extension.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1295
Least Cost Routing-Carrier Pre-Selection
What’s this?
This type of Least Cost Routing is used in countries where the same service provider offers local call and long
distance calling services. These service providers allow subscribers to select the service provider or Carrier for long
distance calling.
For example,
Service
Provider B
Subscriber Service Service
PBX Provider A Provider C
Service
Provider D
A subscriber of Service Provider A must grab trunk lines of Service Provider A to call other subscribers in the local
area.
However, when the subscriber of Service Provider A wants to make a long distance call, the subscriber must dial a
prefix to select the a carrier (trunk) of the desired long distance, Service Provider B, C and D. Thus, the subscriber
accesses a secondary service provider by dialing a short code or prefix for long distance calling.
This feature works on the basis of “Automatic Number Translation”. Using Automatic Number Translation,
ETERNITY adds the code of the appropriate secondary Service Provider to the number string dialed by the
extension user to route the call to the desired secondary Service Provider.
How to configure
To use this feature, you must do the following:
• Select an Automatic Number Translation Table Number from 1 to 8.
• Configure the Automatic Number Translation Table. In the Automatic Number Translation Table, in the
Dialed Number String column, enter the long distance numbers that extension users will dial. In the
Substitute Number String column, enter the Prefixes of the Secondary Service Providers which should be
added to the dialed numbers. For example, the code ‘961’ for Service Provider B must be prefixed to the
number ‘2630555’ dialed by extension users, you must enter ‘2630555’ in the Dialed Number String
column and ‘9612630555’ in the Substitute Number String column.
• Enable“Automatic Number Translation” feature on the trunk (TWT/Mobile/SIP/T1E1/BRI) of your Primary
Service Provider in the “Outgoing Trunk Bundle” and apply the ANT Table number you configured to this
OG Trunk Bundle.
• Create “OG Trunk Bundle Group” that includes the OG Trunk Bundle you created with Automatic Number
Translation as member.
1296 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Assign the OG Trunk Bundle Group (containing the OG Trunk Bundle with ANT) to the extensions for the
Time Zones, i.e. Working Hours, Non-Working Hours, Break Hours, in the “Station Basic Feature
Template” of the extensions.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1297
License Management
What's this?
Certain features of ETERNITY require the purchase of a license. When you buy ETERNITY, you get a unique
license number for your product and a set of 'license-free' features are loaded in the system. Described below are
the features that require license.
PLCC
This functional module contains a set of special features supported by the ETERNITY when it is deployed in a
Power Line Carrier Communication Network of electric utilities. When you buy the license for this module, the
following features will be enabled:
• CCS Signaling when End Point and Transit.
• Express Signaling.
• Seizure Pulse and Release Pulse Signaling.
Hospitality
This functional module contains a set of special telephone and guest/patient management features for hospitality
and accommodation establishments like hotels and hospitals, which ETERNITY supports when it is deployed in a
hotel or hospital. When you buy the license for this module, the following features will be activated:
• Room Shift
• Check-In, Check-Out
• Change Room Occupancy Status
• Floor Service
• Change Room Clean Status
• Front Desk User GUI (web interface)
Property Management System (PMS)
ETERNITY supports interface for PMS, the application software commonly used by hotels to manage their
administrative functions. The PMS Interface supports proprietary PMS protocols of Matrix (Matrix PMS Type 1 and
Type 2) as well as Micros Opera. To be able to select any of these PMS Protocols, you must buy a license.
License for the Hospitality module is a pre-requisite for PMS.
1298 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Q-Sig
When ETERNITY is networked with another ETERNITY or with any other ISDN-PBX, Q-Sig or Q-Signaling is
supported to facilitate feature transparency between the PBXs in the network. Q-Signaling will be activated when
you buy a license.
Dealer Board
You need to buy a Dealer Board license for the DKP ports to which you want to connect and use the digital key
phone, EON, as a Turret.
Gateway
When ETERNITY is used as a Universal Gateway, a license is required to activate the Gateway functionality.
SIP Extensions
ETERNITY supports up to 999 SIP Extensions, depending on your model. With a license, you can register SIP-
enabled devices with the VoIP Card of the ETERNITY. Without a license you cannot register any SIP Extension.
Business Feature Suite
You would need a valid license key for enabling the following features of the Business Feature Suite.
• Multi-Party Conference
• SMDR Buffer (to increase capacity from 200 each of Incoming, Outgoing and Internal Calls to 5000
Incoming, 6000 Outgoing and 1000 Internal Calls)
• SMDR Online mode
• Call Cost Calculation
• SMDR Posting
• Call Budget on Station
• Call Budget on Trunk
• Closed User Group (CUG)
• Multi-stage Dialing
Mobility Feature Suite
With a valid license, you can enable the following features of the Mobility Feature Suite.
• Call Back on Trunks
• RCOC
• BCCH Selection
• SIM Balance Inquiry and Recharge
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1299
• Mobility Extension (DISA CLI Authentication, Call Forward to External Number, Scheduled Call Forward)
How to activate your License
For the functional modules and features described here, you would need to activate a valid License Key.
Instructions for Matrix Channel Partners
Your license voucher may be a paper or a PDF (protected) file.
You may activate your License Online. For this, keep the following items ready:
• The License Voucher containing the 16-digit PIN.
• A valid, unique User ID and Password from the Matrix License Support Centre.
• Access to Internet.
• Current License Key of the system.
To activate the License Key online,
• Open Jeeves.
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Click the Use Full Programming Access link.
• Click License Management link.
The License Management page opens.
• Note down the current License Key on this page.
You may view the features and functions that are currently available to you under Service Profile.
1300 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Keep your Current License Key and the License Voucher (paper or PDF) ready.
• Open a new window on your browser.
• Enter http://115.118.161.162:81/matrixlicense in the address bar of the new window and press the Enter
key on your keyboard or click Go on the address bar.
The Login to Access page will open.
• Enter your User Name and Password provided by Matrix and click the Login button.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1301
On successful login, the License Activation page will open.
• As Product Family, select the option ETERNITY.
• In the Current License Key field, type the current product license key you noted from the License
Management page of Jeeves.
• Click the View button.
1302 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• The page will show the current License Profile on ETERNITY. Click the Next button to continue.
The License Activation page opens.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1303
In the License PIN field on this page, enter the 16-digit License PIN from the Voucher.
• Click Details. The details appear in the fields Product Family, Product Name, Product Variant.
1304 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Click the Next button. Your Current License Profile and your New License Profile will appear on this
page.
• Click the Activate button and wait for a few seconds, as the activation is initiated.
On successful activation, the confirmation message will appear on your screen along with the activation
date and time.
You will also be sent a confirmation mail to your e-mail ID (registered with Matrix).
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1305
You may Save, Print, or Email this information for your records, by clicking the relevant button.
• Note down the New License Key generated on this page.
• Go back to the Jeeves window (or log in as System Engineer again, if your session has ended).
• Click the Use Full Programming Access link.
• Click the License Management page again.
• In Enter License Key, enter the new License Key generated.
1306 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Click the Submit button.
The Service Profile on this page will be updated according to the license.
• To log off, click the Logout button.
If you are unable to use Online Activation of the License Key or have no internet access, contact the Matrix
License Support Centre for assistance in generating the new License key.
Instructions for Customers
To activate your License, you would need the License Voucher containing the 16-digit License PIN. Contact your
Dealer/Distributor in this regard. Your License Voucher may be a paper or a protected PDF file.
• Open Jeeves.
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Click the Use Full Programming Access link.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1307
• Click the License Management link. The License Management page opens.
• Note down the current License Key on this page.
Under Service Profile, you may view the functional modules and features that are currently available to
you.
• Send your Current License Key and the License PIN (on the Voucher) to the Matrix License Support
Centre.
• You will receive a new License Key.
• Open Jeeves again.
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Click the Use Full Programming Access link.
• Click the License Management link.
• In Enter License Key, enter the New License Key you obtained from Matrix.
• Click the Submit button.
1308 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The Service Profile on this page will be updated accordingly.
• To log off, click Logout.
The current License Key and Service Profile will remain unchanged when the system is set to default or
the firmware is upgraded.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1309
Live Call Screening
What’s this?
Live Call Screening enables extension users to screen callers before attending their calls on their extensions.
How it works
To be able to use this feature,
• the Voice Mail System must be present in the ETERNITY.
• the extension users who are to be provided this feature must have a Personal Mailbox assigned, and have
this feature allowed to them in their Class of Service.
• the extension users who want to use this feature must set Call Forward to Voice Mail System on their
extension.
• the extension on which this feature is used must be a DKP or an Extended IP Phone.
With the above pre-requisites fulfilled, this is how Live Call Supervision will work:
• Extension A has activated Live Call Supervision.
• B calls A, and is transferred to A’s mailbox (as Call Forward to Voice Mail System is set).
• The VMS Auto Attendant offers B the option to leave a message in the mailbox of extension A.
• As B starts to record a message in A’s mailbox, the speaker of the DKP/Extended IP Phone of A gets
turned ON for the duration of the Live Call Screening Timer (configurable; default: 10 seconds).
• A hears the message being recorded in the mailbox.
• If A wants to answer the call, A can go Off-Hook. A gets connected to the caller and the system stops
recording the message in the mailbox.
• If A does not answer the call, the speaker is turned Off automatically on the expiry of the Live Call
Screening Timer.
• Also, after listening to some part of the message, if A finds that the call is not important, A can ignore the
caller by dialing any digit. When A dials any digit, the speaker of the DKP/Extended IP Phone is turned
OFF, but the message recording in the mailbox continues.
LCS works only if your extension is idle.
1310 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
How it configure
To be able to use Live Call Screening, extension users must have:
• A mailbox assigned to them.
• Live Call Screening enabled in the “Class of Service (COS)” for the time zone in their “Station Basic
Feature Template”, as required.
If required, you may also change the duration of the Live Call Screening Timer. See “System Timers and Counts”
for instructions.
How to use
For EON & Extended IP Phone Users only
To activate Live Call Screening,
• Press DSS key assigned to Live Call Screening.
OR
• Dial 1094-1
To answer a caller who is recording a message in your mailbox,
• Go Off-Hook by pressing the speaker key or lifting the handset.
• Speak to the caller.
To ignore the message of the caller,
• dial any digit.
To deactivate Live Call Screening,
• Press DSS key assigned to Live Call Screening, again.
OR
• Dial 1094-0
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1311
Live Call Supervision
What’s this?
Using Live Call Supervision, any extension can know the last external number dialed by another extension, even
when that extension is in speech with an external party.
This feature is useful for supervisors who want to know where their subordinates are calling.
This feature is supported on DKP and Extended IP Phone extensions, and on SLT extension which have CLI
phone.
How it works
• A is the supervisor of B.
• A wants to know where B is calling, B can use Live Call Supervision.
• When B dials an external number it is stored in the system’s memory.
• When A requests Live Call Supervision for B’s extension, the system retrieves the last external number
dialed by B and presents it on the display of A’s phone.
• If the last number dialed by B is an internal number, A will get error tone, as the system supports live call
supervision of external calls only.
Live Call Supervision can be used also when the extension being supervised is in speech with an external
party.
How to configure
To be able to use Live Call Supervision, extension users must have this feature enabled in their “Class of Service
(COS)” in their “Station Basic Feature Template” for the required time zones.
How to use
For EON & Extended IP Phone Users
• Press DSS key assigned to Live Call Supervision
OR
• Dial 1098
• Enter the Extension number to be supervised
For SLT Users
• Dial 1098-Extension number to be supervised.
1312 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Logical Partition
What's this?
Logical Partitioning is used to restrict the flow of call traffic between PSTN and Private Networks as well as
between PSTN and VoIP networks.
This feature may be used in countries where such restrictions are mandated by telecom regulations. For example,
in certain countries, calls from VoIP to Public Networks (PSTN, Public Land Mobile Network) are not allowed.
Thus, local telecom regulations may either disallow termination of lines from both networks on the same equipment
or may allow lines from both networks to be terminated on the same equipment, provided the equipment is
designed to restrict flow of call traffic from these networks. For example, the Telecom Regulatory Authority of India
allows termination of lines the PSTN and VoIP Networks in the same equipment, only if these lines are logically
partitioned. Termination of lines from both these networks in the same equipment without a logical partition
constitutes an offence.
ETERNITY supports Logical Partitioning for this purpose.
How it works
Logical Partition is applied on the Trunk ports. Trunk ports are assigned to any of the following categories according
to their installation scenario:
• Category 1: Trunk ports interfaced with PSTN /PLMN (Public Land Mobile Network) are assigned this
category.
• Category 2: Leased lines terminated in the trunk ports are assigned this category.
• Category 3: Trunk ports used to interconnect two PBXs are assigned this category. For example, QSIG
used on T1E1 port or the TWT of ETERNITY is interfaced with FXS of other PBX for expanding
configuration.
• These are default Categories. You have the flexibility to define each category according to suit your
preference. For example, you may, if you so prefer, define Leased lines to Category 3 and Trunk ports
connecting two PBXs to Category 1.
• As calls from VoIP to Public network trunks are always be restricted, VoIP trunks cannot be assigned to
any of the three categories of the trunks as explained above and therefore do not require any
classification.
For each of the above categories, including VoIP trunks, the System Engineer can program the calling
permission, i.e. whether to 'allow' or 'restrict' the calls across and within these categories and with the VoIP
trunks.
By default, calls are restricted for all categories, except within VoIP, which includes both SIP trunks and
SIP extensions.
Depending on the calling permission programmed between the trunk categories, the system will allow or
deny the calls on the trunks.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1313
How to configure
To able to use this feature you must first assign the trunk port - TWT, ISDN BRI, T1E1PRI, Mobile, VoIP to the
appropriate Category and then define the calling permission - allow or restrict calls - in Category 1 to 3 and VoIP
trunks (as described above).
Configuring Logical Partition using Jeeves
• Log into Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access.
• Now, assign the categories to the different Trunk Type, by programming the parameter 'Category (Logical
Partition)' in the Trunk Port Parameters of the respective trunk types: TWT, BRI, T1E1, E&M and Mobile
Port.
• For TWT trunks, assign Category in the “TWT Hardware Template”.
• For E&M ports, assign Category in the “E&M Feature Template”.
• For Mobile ports, assign Category in the “Mobile Port Parameters”.
• For T1E1PRI ports, assign Category in the "T1E1 Parameters".
• For BRI ports, assign Category in the "BRI Parameters".
• Open the desired Trunk Port Parameters page by clicking the link. For example, to assign a Category to
TWT ports, open the TWT Hardware Template page.
• Scroll with the horizontal bar to reach the column 'Category (Logical Partition).
• Select a Category number 1, 2, or 3 to assign Category to TWT ports.
1314 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your settings.
• Repeat the same steps to assign Categories to other Trunk ports.
If you have completed assignment of Category to the Trunk Type,
• Click the link 'Logical Partitioning' to open the page.
• Now, define the call permission for each category, i.e. 'allow' or 'restrict' calls. For example, allow/restrict
calls from Category 1 to Category 1, from Category 1 to Category 2, from Category 1 to Category 3 and so
forth.
• Click 'Submit' to save changes.
• Log out of Jeeves or continue with the configuration.
Configuring Logical Partition using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
• First, program the parameter 'Category (Logical Partition)' in the Trunk Port Parameters of the respective
trunk types. For SE Commands, refer the topics:
• “TWT Hardware Template”
• “E&M Feature Template”
• “Mobile Port Parameters”
• "T1E1 Parameters"
• "BRI Parameters"
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1315
To define call permission across and between categories:
• Dial 5317-Category-Category-Flag
Where,
Category is
1 for Category 1 trunks
2 for Category 2 trunks
3 for Category 3 trunks
4 for VoIP
Flag is
0 for restrict calls
1 for allow calls
Default: 0 (i.e. restrict calls) for Category 1 to 3 and 1 (allow calls) for VoIP.
• Exit SE mode.
• By default for countries other than UK and USA calls within and between all categories of trunks are
restricted. In other words, trunk to trunk calls are not allowed.
• In UK and USA the calls within all categories of trunks, including VoIP are allowed.
• When call permission is restricted between two categories of trunks and/or between any category of
trunk to VoIP, following feature interactions will apply:
• Call Transfer: Trunk to Trunk Transfer between restricted categories of trunk will not be allowed. If
the user attempts trunk-to-trunk transfer between restricted trunks, Error Tone will be played.
• Raid: If a user using DISA attempts to Raid a conversation of an extension with a trunk to which call
permission is restricted, the Raid attempt will fail and the user will get an Error Tone.
• Conference: An extension user will not be able to include restricted trunks in a 3 party or multi-
party conference. An Error Tone will be played when s/he attempts it.
• Dial-In Conference: Participation in a Dial-In Conference from trunks with restricted call permission
is not allowed.
• External Call Forward: In the case of DID, DISA or when transferring a trunk call to an extension,
if the extension has set call forward to an external number, the system will allow the call only if the
call permission between the source and destination trunk is allowed. Otherwise, an Error Tone will
be played to the user.
• Hotline: When a user has logged into DISA and the extension being used for the DISA login has
the Hotline - Trunk or Hot outward dialing (HOD) feature enabled, the system will allow the call
between the source trunk (from where the DISA login is made) and the destination trunk (which is
used as Hotline Trunk) only if calling is permitted between them. Otherwise an Error Tone will be
played to the DISA caller on the expiry of the Hotline Timer.
1316 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Meet Me Paging
What’s this?
Using Meet Me Paging, extension users can announce the name of the person they want to talk to on the Page
zone. The called person can respond to the announcement, by dialing, from any extension, the Meet Me Paging
code and the extension number of the caller.
When making a Meet Me Paging call, extension users can announce the extension number from where they are
calling, so that the called person knows which extension number to dial.
This feature is of great use to Operators. Using this feature, the Operator can put an important call on hold and
track the extension user who is not at the desk using Meet Me Paging. Once the person is located and calls the
Operator, the Operator can transfer the call to the person at the current location.
How it works
• The Operator receives a call for B.
• Operator calls B’s extension, but B is not at the desk.
• Operator uses Paging and makes the announcement for B, asking B to call the Operator.
• B is near extension 201. B dials Meet Me Paging Code and dials the extension number of the Operator.
• B is in speech with the Operator.
How to configure
To be able to use Meet Me Paging, extension users must have the feature“Paging” in their Class of Service.
How to use
For EON & Extended IP Phone Users
If you are the Caller (the paging party)
• Press the DSS key assigned to Paging.
OR
• Dial 1074
• Dial Page Zone Number
• Start announcement
If you are the Called Party (for whom the message has been announced):
• Lift the handset.
• Press the DSS key assigned to Meet Me Paging.
OR
• Dial 1093
• Dial the number of the paging extension.
• Speak with the paging extension user.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1317
For SLT Users
If you are the Caller (the paging party)
• Lift the handset.
• Dial 1074 - Page Zone Number
• Start announcement
If you are the Called Party (for whom the message has been announced):
• Lift the handset.
• Dial 1093 - Paging Extension Number.
• Speak with the paging extension user.
1318 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Message Wait
What’s this?
The Message Wait feature of ETERNITY enables extension users/Operator to set Message Wait on other
extensions to deliver important messages.
If the extension user has a mailbox assigned, the Message Wait feature indicates to the extension user, the arrival
of new messages in the user’s mailbox.
Thus, Message Wait can be set by extension users as well as by the Voice Mail System.
How it works
Message Wait set by Extensions/Operator
The Operator/any extension user can set Message Wait on another extension.
• The Operator calls Extension A.
• Extension A is not at the desk to attend the call.
• The Operator has an important message to communicate. So, the Operator sets Message Wait on
Extension A, using the Message Wait key (if configured) or by dialing the feature access code.
• Extension B tries to reach Extension A, and sets Message Wait on Extension A, using the Message Wait
key (if configured) or by dialing the feature access code.
• Message Wait will be indicated to Extension A according to the Type of Message Wait Notification set for
Extension A. This may be in the form of a Stuttered Dial Tone, a Voice Message, Ring, or LED Lamp.
• If Extension A is a DKP or an Extended IP Phone and has DSS key assigned for Retrieve New Message,
the LED of this key will glow to indicate new message wait.
• Now, Extension A can dial the feature access code to retrieve Message Wait, or press the Retrieve
Message Wait Key, if assigned.
• The system will call the extension that first set Message Wait on Extension A. In this case, the Operator. If
the Operator is busy, the system will place the call on Extension B. The system will try to call the
extensions that set Message Wait until the call is answered.
• The extension that set Message Wait on A gets the CLI of A as Message Wait. A can now deliver the
message.
• The LED of the Retrieve Message Wait key, if assigned, on Extension A will be turned off after all message
wait set by other extensions on Extension A have been served.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1319
Message Wait set by the Voice Mail System
The Voice Mail System (VMS) sets Message Wait on the extension, whenever a new message arrives in its
personal Mailbox.
• Extension A is assigned a Personal Mailbox.
• There is a new message in A’s Mailbox. The VMS indicates this to Extension A as per the Type of
Message Wait Notification set for Extension A. This may be in the form of a Stuttered Dial Tone, a Voice
Message, Ring or LED Lamp.
• If Extension A is a DKP or an Extended IP Phone, the Voice Mail key on the phone will also glow to
indicate the arrival of a new message.
• If the Retrieve Message Wait key is assigned on the DKP/Extended IP Phone of Extension A, the LED of
this key will also glow simultaneously to indicate arrival of the new voice mail.
• To listen to the new message, Extension A can
• press the Voice Mail key
or
• the Retrieve New Message key (if assigned)
or
• dial the feature access code for Retrieve New Message.
The VMS answers the call. After Extension A has listened to the new messages, the LED of the Voice Mail
key is turned off.
The LED of the Retrieve Message Wait key, if assigned, will also be turned off.
Voice Mail has priority over extension Message Wait set by extensions. If an extension has both
Message Wait and new Voice mail, and when the extension presses the Retrieve Message Wait key or
dials the feature access code to Retrieve Message Wait, the call will be placed first to the Voice Mail
System. When the extension user presses the Retrieve Message Wait key again, the call will be placed to
the extension that set Message Wait.
Types of Message Wait Notification
The system gives Message Wait indication to extensions according to the type of Message Wait Notification
selected for the extension. The types of Message Wait Notification offered by ETERNITY are:
Stuttered Dial Tone/Voice Message
• When the extension user goes OFF-Hook, the user will hear a voice message, if a pre-recorded Voice
Module has been assigned for Message Wait Notification. If no voice module is recorded and assigned,
the extension user will hear a stuttered dial tone instead.
• If you want voice message to be played as message wait notification, record and assign a Voice Module.
Refer “Voice Message Applications” for instructions.
ETERNITY can play only 4 Voice Modules simultaneously. The Voice Module for Message Wait
Notification will not be played if there are already 4 being played simultaneously. In which case, Stuttered
Dial Tone will be played for Message Wait Notification, when the extension user goes OFF-Hook.
1320 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
LED Lamp
• When the extension user has an SLT with 'Message Wait' lamp, you can set this type of Message Wait
Notification. The lamp will blink continuously when Message Wait is set. The lamp will be turned off when
the extension user has retrieved all the waiting messages.
Ring
• When a new Message Wait is set on the extension, the system will play Message Wait Ring (Short, Fast)
on the extension. See “Distinctive Rings”.
• The extension will ring for the duration of the Message Wait Ring Timer (configurable; default: 30
seconds). If the call is not answered within this timer, the system will ring on the extension again for as
many times as the Message Wait Ring Count (configurable; default: 10 times), and at the interval set as
the Message Wait Ring Timer Interval (configurable; default: 30 minutes).
• When the extension user answers the call, the user gets connected to the VMS or the extension that set
Message Wait.
Message Wait Signal generated by ETERNITY
Particulars Value
Peak Voltage 82-85 V
ON Time 100ms
OFF Time 150ms
Frequency 4Hz
DC Offset 48V
How to configure
To provide this feature to extensions, you must do the following configuration on the extensions:
• Enable the Message Wait feature in the “Class of Service (COS)” of the “Station Basic Feature Template”
of the extensions. This allows the extensions to set and cancel Message Wait on other extensions. Only
those extensions that have this feature in their COS can set or cancel Message Wait on other extensions.
By default, this feature is enabled in the COS of all extension types for all the time zones.
• Select the desired Message Wait Notification Type in the “Station Advanced Feature Template” of the
extensions.
• If you selected Voice Message as Message Wait Notification Type for an extension, you must also record
the desired Voice Message in a Voice Module and assign it to the Message Wait application. See “Voice
Message Applications” for instructions.
• If you selected Ring as Voice mail/Message Wait Notification Type for an extension, you may configure
the following Ring Parameters:
• Message Wait Ring Timer (default: 30 seconds)
• Message Wait Ring Count (default: 10 attempts)
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1321
• Message Wait Ring Timer Interval (default: 30 minutes).
See “System Timers and Counts” for instructions.
• You may also configure the features ‘Message Wait’ and ‘Retrieve Message Wait’ on DKP and Extended
IP Phone extensions.
For instructions on assigning these features to DSS keys of a DKP, see “DSS Keys Programming”.
For instructions on assigning these features to DSS keys of the Extended IP Phone, see “Matrix Extended
IP Phone Settings” under Configuring SIP Extensions.
How to use
For EON & Extended IP Phones
To set Message Wait:
• Press DSS Key assigned to 'Message Wait'.
OR
• Dial 1076
• Dial the extension number on which you want to set Message Wait.
• Select the option ‘Set Message Wait’
• Press Enter Key.
To cancel Message Wait:
• Press DSS Key assigned to 'Message Wait'.
OR
• Dial 1076
• Dial the extension number on which you want to cancel Message Wait.
• Select the option ‘Cancel Message Wait’
• Press Enter Key.
To retrieve Message Wait:
• Press DSS Key assigned to 'Retrieve Message Wait' or the Voice mail Key when the LED glows.
OR
• Dial 1077
For SLT
To set Message Wait:
• Pick up the handset.
• Dial 1076
• Dial extension number on which you want to set Message Wait.
• Dial 1
• Replace the handset.
To cancel Message Wait:
1322 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Pick up the handset.
• Dial 1076
• Dial extension number on which you want to cancel Message Wait.
• Dial 0
• Replace the handset.
To Retrieve Message Wait:
• Pick up the handset.
• Dial 1077
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1323
Mobility Extension
What's this?
ETERNITY offers mobility to its extension users whose nature of work keeps them from their desks frequently and
for longer durations.
Using mobility extensions, the extension users of ETERNITY can make and receive their calls from their current
(remote) location, placing calls through the system, and can access the system just as any other normal extension
of the ETERNITY.
How it works
ETERNITY supports two types of users:
• Station Users: they are extension users of ETERNITY to whom a dedicated physical station is assigned
on their desk.
• Virtual Users: they are extension users of ETERNITY who share a physical station, or may not have any
physical station allotted to them.
The facility of Mobility Extension is provided to both virtual and normal extension users using the features
“Direct Inward System Access (DISA)” and “Call Forward”.
This feature requires a license. To use this feature you must purchase the license for the Business Feature
Suite. Refer the topic “License Management” to know more.
How to configure
To provide Mobility Extension to users, the follow the steps described below.
• List out the Station Users and Virtual Users and configure them first. The software ports of SLT, DKP and
ISDN Terminals which are not assigned a physical slot - port, can be used as Virtual stations.
• Make sure that stations which are to be provided Mobility Extensions have the features Call Forward and
DISA enabled in their “Class of Service (COS)”185. Class of Service is to be programmed in the “Station
Basic Feature Template” assigned to the Mobility Extensions.
• Make a list of External numbers to which the Mobility Station users will forward their calls. Program these
numbers in the 'Allowed List' of Local, Regional, National and International Numbers, as appropriate.
• The Toll Control assigned to the station will be applied when a call is forwarded to an external number.
Make sure that the stations which are to be provided Mobility Extension have the required “Toll Control”
level for Call Forward to the External Numbers (the numbers you have programmed in the Allowed List).
Toll Control level is to be programmed in the “Station Basic Feature Template” assigned to the Mobility
Extensions.
185. It is possible to map the virtual user's flexible number (extension number) to a physical station. With this mapping, whenever a vir-
tual user's number is dialed, the call is placed to the assigned physical station. The physical station can be assigned by defining it
as the 'Landing Destination for Virtual Users' in the Station Advanced Feature Template assigned to the virtual user.
1324 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Program the parameter 'External Call Forward for' in the “Station Advanced Feature Template” assigned to
the Mobility Extensions. This parameter defines the types of call for which the External Call Forwarding is
to be applied. Select any one of the options, Internal Calls Only, Trunk Calls Only, Internal + Trunk Calls as
required.
• Program the parameter 'DISA' in the “Trunk Feature Template” of the trunk lines which Mobility Extensions
users are to be provided access to. Make sure you select the option 'CLI Auth. Multiple Calls' in the 'DISA'
parameter of the 'Trunk Feature Template'.
• Make a list of numbers which the Mobility Extension users will use to access the ETERNITY from DISA
mode. Program this list of numbers in the "DISA-CLI Authentication Table".
Program this list of numbers in the 'Calling Number' field of the Authentication Table. Program the 'Port
Type' and 'Port Number' of the Station assigned to Mobility Extension Users in the 'Auto Login As' field for
the respective 'Calling Number' field. Refer the topic “Direct Inward System Access (DISA)” to know more.
How to use
The Mobility Extension Users of ETERNITY can use the features of ETERNITY from a remote location as
described below.
Receiving calls
To receive calls, the Mobility Extension User must set Call Forward on his station with an external number (mobile
number, landline number, etc.) as the destination number.
To make calls ring on the station and the external number simultaneously, the Mobility Extension User must
activate the Call Forward-Dual Ring feature on his station.
The Mobility Extension User can also choose where he wants to receive the calls during a particular time of the day.
For example, he can receive calls during a particular time of the day, i.e. Time Zone on his external number and
have his calls received by his Voice mail or the Operator or any other number during another Time Zone. To do
this, he must set “Call Forward-Scheduled" on his station. Dual Ring can also be set for Call Forward-Scheduled.
Making calls
The Mobility Extension User should make a call on the DISA enabled trunk of ETERNITY from the external number
and the system will provide the dial tone to the user after authenticating the external number with the help of the
DISA-CLI Authentication table.
On getting the dial tone, the Mobility Extension User can make internal as well as external calls as per the “Toll
Control” and “Class of Service (COS)” assigned to his Station.
The Mobility Extension User can also dial codes of the Personal directory and Global directory numbers to use the
feature Abbreviated Dialing.
Accessing Features
The Mobility Extension User can access the system features by dialing specific codes after making calls on the
DISA enabled trunk of ETERNITY, or after answering the calls received on his external number.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1325
These codes are listed below.
Activity Code to be dialed
On-Hook #0
Off-Hook #1
Flash #2
Pause #3
Terminate the call #9
Described below are instructions for Mobility Extension users on using different call management features.
Call Hold
To put a call on hold,
• When in speech with Party A, Mobility Extension User dials #2.
• The call with Party A is put on Hold.
• Press Flash (#2) to retrieve the held call and talk to Party A again.
Call Transfer
To conduct a screened Call Transfer,
• When in speech with Party A, Mobility Extension User dials #2.
• The Call of Party A is put on Hold.
• Mobility Extension User gets Feature Tone.
• Dial Trunk Access Code (TAC) followed by the number of Party B. [To make external call]
OR
• Dial Internal station number [to make call on a station]
• When in speech, dial #0 to go on hook.
• Party A and Party B will get connected.
To perform Call Transfer-While Ringing,
• Mobility Extension User is in speech with Party A.
• During speech, Mobility Extension User dials #2.
• The Call of Party A is put on Hold.
• Mobility Extension User will get Feature Tone.
• Dial TAC - number of Party B. [To make external call]
OR
• Dial Internal station number [to make call on station]
• Dial #0 on receiving Ring Back Tone (RBT).
To perform Call Transfer-On Busy Station,
• Mobility Extension User is in speech with Party A.
• During speech, Mobility Extension User dials #2.
1326 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• The Call of Party A is put on Hold.
• Mobility Extension User will get Feature Tone.
• Dial number of Station user.
• Dial #0 on receiving Busy Tone.
To perform a Call Transfer-Trunk-to-Trunk,
• Mobility Extension User is in speech with Party A.
• During speech, Mobility Extension User dials #2-##.
• The Call of Party A is put on Hold.
• Mobility Extension User will get Feature Tone.
• Dial Trunk Access Code to grab the Trunk
• After receiving the Dial Tone of the trunk, dial number of Party B.
• After Party B answers the call, dial #2-##.
• Party A will get connected with Party B.
Making a Second Call
To make a second call by putting the current call on hold,
• Mobility Extension User is in speech with Party A.
• During speech, Mobility Extension User dials #2.
• The call of Party A is put on hold.
• Mobility Extension will get Feature Tone.
• To make an external call: dial TAC - number of Party B.
OR
• To make an internal call: dial extension number.
Call Toggle (Call Splitting)
To toggle between two calls,
• Mobility Extension User is in speech with Party A.
• During speech, Mobility Extension User dials #2.
• The call of Party A is put on hold.
• Mobility Extension will get Feature Tone.
• Dial number of Party B.
• Make speech with Party B.
• Dial #2-1 to put Party B in hold and speech with Party A.
• Again dial #2-1 to put Party A in hold and speech with Party B.
Call Pick Up
To pick up the call of same Call Pick Up-Group,
• Make a call on DISA enabled Trunk from Mobility Extension User.
• After receiving dial tone, dial 4.
• The call ringing on the station of the same Call Pick up-Group will get connected with Mobility Extension
User.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1327
To pick up the selective call,
• Make a call on DISA enabled Trunk from Mobility Extension User.
• After receiving dial tone, dial 12-Station Number.
• The call ringing on the dialed station of will get connected with Mobility Extension User.
3-Party Conference
To conduct a 3-Party Conference,
• Make the first call.
• Dial #2.
• Make the second call.
• Dial #2-0 to establish conference.
Multiparty Conference
To create a Multiparty Conference,
• Mobility Extension User is in speech with Party A.
• Dial #2 from Mobility Extension user.
• Dial 191.
• Dial number of Party B.
• After speech, dial #2.
• Dial 191.
• Dial number of Party C.
• After speech, dial #2.
• Dial 191.
• Dial number of Party D.
• After speech, dial #2.
• Dial 191.
• Dial 191.
• All Parties will get connected with each other.
To terminate the Multiparty Conference,
• When in the middle of a Multiparty Conference,
• Dial #0 to go On-Hook.
• Dial #1 to go Off-Hook.
• Dial 190 after getting Dial Tone.
When Dialed Station is busy
To make a call on an internal station which is busy,
• During busy tone
• Dial 3 for interrupt request.
• Dial 4 to Barge-In
• Dial 5 to Raid.
1328 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Call Forward-Unconditional
To set Call Forward-Unconditionally,
• Make a call on DISA enabled Trunk from Mobility Extension User.
• After getting Dial Tone, dial 131-Station/Department Group/VMS Group Number.
• The system will give confirmation tone.
To set Call Forward-Unconditionally on external number,
• Make a call on DISA enabled Trunk from Mobility Extension User.
• After getting Dial Tone, dial 131-TAC-external number.
• The system will give confirmation tone.
Call Forward-Busy
To set Call Forward-Busy,
• Make a call on DISA enabled Trunk from Mobility Extension User.
• After getting Dial Tone, dial 132-Station/Department Group/VMS Group Number.
• The system will give confirmation tone.
To set Call Forward-Busy on external number,
• Make a call on DISA enabled Trunk from Mobility Extension User.
• After getting Dial Tone, dial 132-TAC-external number.
• The system will give confirmation tone.
Call Forward-No Reply
To set Call Forward-No Reply,
• Make a call on DISA enabled Trunk from Mobility Extension User.
• After getting Dial Tone, dial 133-Station/Department Group/VMS Group Number.
• The system will give confirmation tone.
To set Call Forward-No Reply on external number,
• Make a call on DISA enabled Trunk from Mobility Extension User.
• After getting Dial Tone, dial 133-TAC-external number.
• The system will give confirmation tone.
Call Forward-Busy/No Reply
To set Call Forward-Busy/No Reply,
• Make a call on DISA enabled Trunk from Mobility Extension User.
• After the Dial Tone, dial 134-Station/Department Group/VMS Group Number.
• The system will give confirmation tone.
To set Call Forward-Busy/No Reply on external number,
• Make a call on DISA enabled Trunk from Mobility Extension User.
• After the Dial Tone, dial 134-TAC-external number.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1329
• The system will give confirmation tone.
To cancel Call Forward,
• Make a call on DISA enabled Trunk from Mobility Extension User.
• After the Dial Tone, dial 130.
• The system will give confirmation tone.
Call Forward-Dual Ring
To set Call Forward-Dual Ring,
• Make a call on DISA enabled Trunk from Mobility Extension User.
• After the Dial Tone, dial 136-1.
• The system will give confirmation tone.
To cancel Call Forward-Dual Ring,
• Make a call on DISA enabled Trunk from Mobility Extension User.
• After the Dial Tone, dial 136-1.
• The system will give confirmation tone.
Call Forward-Scheduled
To set/cancel Call Forward-Scheduled,
• Make a call on DISA enabled Trunk from Mobility Extension User.
• After the Dial Tone, dial 1175-Time Zone-Call Forward Type-Number.
• The system will give confirmation tone.
• Mobility Extension users can have Call Forward and Call Forward-Scheduled set on their extension by
the Operator or by another extension user.
• Using “Call Forward-Remote” and by setting “Call Forward-Scheduled” from the SA mode (using SA
commands or Jeeves), the extension user/Operator can set Call Forward and Call Forward-Scheduled
for any Mobility extension user. Refer the respective topics to know more.
1330 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Multi-Stage Dialing
What's this?
• There are some applications where we have to dial a fixed number string before dialing the actual number.
For example, using the ITC card (This card is provided by PSTN as prepaid card for calling the number
from BSNL line). In such application, the number is required to be out dialed after the call gets matured
and introducing some fixed number string (Calling card number) before dialing actual number. For
example, for making an ISD call using ITC card, you may be required to dial following sequence of digits:
• Dial first the number for using ITC calling card, for example, 1602233 (7 digits).
• Then, after the call is matured dial the 16 digit PIN number printed on the ITC card. For example: xxx..
(16 digits).
• After dialing the PIN number, dial the number to which you want to call i.e ISD number. For example,
yyy..(14 digits)
• Thus, you will have to dial 1602233 and 16 digit PIN number-i.e total 23 fixed digits every time, before
dialing the ISD number of 14 digits.
• To avoid pressing of such long digits for making call and to dial some digits with required delay, the feature
called 'Multi-Stage Dialing' is supported in the ETERNITY. Using this feature the ETERNITY will take care
for dialing the digits after the call is matured and dialing of digits with suitable pause time, before dialing out
the destination number.
• This feature works by suitable programming of following digits in the Number Lists for ANT feature: 0-9, #,
*, A, B, C, D, F, P, W, . (dot), +. Where A, B, C, D are the DTMF digits, F is for Flash, P is for Pause and W
is for Wait for Answer (period for the call is matured). Enter the special digits using specific Code for the
digit.
• While ETERNITY is dialing out the digits, user will get Call Proceeding Tone as configured in the system.
Refer System Parameters.
• Following parameters will be required, to configure this feature for the trunk port:
• Dialed Number String in ANT Table
• Substitute Number String in ANT Table
• Pause Timer
• DTMF ON Time
• Inter Digit Pause Time
• Call Proceeding Tone
This feature requires a license. To use this feature you must purchase the license for the Mobility Feature
Suite. Refer the topic “License Management” to know more.
This is explained with an Example after the topic How to configure.
How to configure
Step 1
Program Dialed Number String using command '4751'. Refer chapters “Automatic Number Translation”.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1331
Step 2
Program Substitute Number String using command '4752'. Refer chapters “Automatic Number Translation”.
Notes for programming Number String:
• It is recommended to SE, to not to program Pause character "P" before "W" character for the number
string to be out dialed from Mobile port. Else, the GSM Module may get restart while out dialing the DTMF
digits without call maturity signal.
• Use following Codes to program the special digits:
Special Digits Code for Programming through Command
Flash (F) #2
Pause (P) #3
A #4
B #5
C #6
D #7
+ #8
. (dot) #9
# ##
* **
W *1
Step 3
Enable 'ANT' for the trunk port using command 6702. Refer chapter “Outgoing Trunk Bundle” for more details.
Step 4
Assign the ANT Table to the trunk port using command 6702. Refer chapter “Outgoing Trunk Bundle” for more
details.
Step 5
Refer chapter “TWT Hardware Template” for command '5902' to program Pause Timer on TWT Trunk.
Refer chapter “T1E1 Trunks” for command '6109' to program Pause Timer on T1E1 Trunk.
Refer chapter “ISDN-BRI” for command '6209' to program Pause Timer on BRI port.
Refer chapter “Configuring Mobile Trunks” for command '8014' to program Pause Timer on Mobile port.
Refer chapter “Configuring SIP Trunks” for command '7720' to program Pause Timer on SIP trunk.
Refer chapter “E&M Feature Template” for command '6002' to program feature Pause Timer on E&M trunk.
Step 6
Refer chapter “TWT Hardware Template” for command '5902' to program DTMF ON Time on TWT Trunk
Refer chapter “T1E1 Trunks” for command '6117' to program DTMF ON Time on T1E1 Trunk.
Refer chapter “ISDN-BRI” for command '6210' to program DTMF ON Time on BRI port.
Refer chapter “Configuring Mobile Trunks” for command '8015' to program DTMF ON Time on Mobile port.
Refer chapter “Configuring SIP Trunks” for command '7725' to program DTMF ON Time on SIP trunk.
1332 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Step 7
Refer chapter “TWT Hardware Template” for command '5902' to program Inter Digit Pause Time on TWT Trunk
Refer chapter “T1E1 Trunks” for command '6118' to program Inter Digit Pause Timer on T1E1 Trunk.
Refer chapter “ISDN-BRI” for command '6211' to program Inter Digit Pause Timer on BRI port.
Refer chapter “Configuring SIP Trunks” for command '7726' to program Inter Digit Pause Timer on SIP trunk.
Step 8
Refer System Parameters for command '5311' for programming of Call Proceeding Tone.
Example:
Refer the figure given below:
Pay Phone ETERNITY
(with GSM Card)
00441159253724 ATD9898906335 GSM PSTN
FXS Mobile
Network Network
Dial 00441159253724 2630555
Gateway 1 Gateway in
UK (0044)
VoIP FXO PSTN
9898906335 Mobile 1 VoIP Internet
Network
00441159253724
Suppose you need to dial following numbers:
• Scenerio1 (through Gateway): Route the Number starting with 0044 through Gateway 1 i.e.9898906335
through the TWT trunk port 001 after the call is matured (after period for Wait for Answer).
• Scenerio2 (with Calling Card): Dial the Number starting with '2' using the calling card; by dialing first
1602233 and then dialing the PIN number 1132121234#1P of the card after the call is matured (after
period for Wait for Answer).
Step 1
Program dialed number string '0044' in ANT Table-1
4751-1-1-01-0044-#*
Program dialed number string '2' in ANT Table-1
4751-1-2-02-2-#*
Step 2
Program substitute number string '9898906335WP0044' in ANT Table-1
4751-1-1-01-9898906335 *1 #3 0044-#*
Program substitute number string '1602233WP1132121234#1P2' in ANT Table-1
4751-1-2-02-1602233 *1 #3 1132121234#1 #3 2-#*
Step 3
Assign ANT Table-1 to Mobile port-001
6702-1-64-6-1
Enable ANT feature for Mobile port-001
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1333
6702-1-64-5-1
Step 4
Keep other parameters Pause Timer, Inter Digit Pause Timer, DTMF ON Time same as default value.
ANT Table-1:
Index Dialed Number String Substitute Number String
1 0044 9898906335WP0044
2 2 1602233WP1132121234#1P2
32
Scenerio1:
• Program '0044' as Dialed String and program '9898906335WP0044' as Substitute string. Now when you
dial '00441159253724', the system will dial out the number as explained below:
• The system will dial out first, the Gateway1 number 9898906335.
• After the call is matured and delay for the pause timer, the system will dial the destination number:
'00441159253724'.
Scenerio2:
• Similarly, the system will process the call when you dial the number starting with prefix '2', for example,
2630555, using the calling card:
• The system will first dial out the number 1602233.
• After the call is matured and delay for the pause timer, the system will dial the PIN number with the
destination number as: 2-6-3-0-5-5-5. The service provider's network (PSTN) will route the call on
destination '2630555'.
Relevant Topics:
1. “Automatic Number Translation” 825
2. “Configuring Mobile Trunks” 595
3. “Outgoing Trunk Bundle” 1348
4. “T1E1 Trunks” 1608
5. “ISDN-BRI” 1263
6. “Configuring SIP Trunks” 635
7. “E&M Feature Template” 565
8. “TWT Hardware Template” 530
1334 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Music on Hold (MOH)
What’s this?
The music played to extension users and external callers who are put on hold is called Music on Hold (MoH).
How it works
ETERNITY supports Music on Hold from an Internal Music Source as well as an External Music Source.
MOH from Internal Music Source
A Voice Module assigned the Music on Hold application serves as the source of music for this feature. By default,
Voice Module 1 is assigned for Music on Hold.
When a caller is put on hold, ETERNITY plays the music recorded in Voice Module 1.
You can play a voice message of your choice instead of music to the callers. The message may contain any
promotional information about your company or services provided by your organization, etc. For this, you must
record a Voice Module with the custom message and assign the Voice Module to the Music on Hold application.
If the option Routing Group is selected as the Alarm Notification Type for an extension, when the
extension goes Off-hook to answer an alarm call, and the extensions in the Routing Group for Alarm
Notification are busy, Music-on-Hold will also be played to the extension answering the alarm call.
MOH from External Music Source
A hold-on music of your choice can be played by the system while you keep a person on hold. The ETERNITY
supports such external music interface on the its Analog Input Port (AIP). The AIP can handle un-amplified,
isolated, analog speech signal from an external music source.
Any external device meeting the specifications of the AIP can be connected with the system. The volume must be
set to an appropriate level such that the volume of the music on the trunks is neither too low nor too high. The
volume of the signal coming from this device must never increase beyond the specified limits.
For instructions on connecting an external music source to the AIP, see the topics “Installing ETERNITY ME”,
“Installing ETERNITY GE”, “Installing ETERNITY PE” as applicable to your model.
For instructions on recording voice modules, see“Voice Message Applications”.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1335
How to configure
Use following command to demonstrate Music on Hold:
3551-Code
Where,
Code Meaning
1 Voice Module 01
2 Analog Input Port
By default, code is 1.
Use following command to select the type of music to be played when stations are kept on hold:
3552-Code
Where,
Code Meaning
1 Voice Module 01
2 Analog Input Port
By default, code is 1.
Use following command to select the type of music to be played when trunks are kept on hold:
3553-Code
Where,
Code Meaning
1 Voice Module 01
2 Analog Input Port
By default, code is 1.
• If all the extensions of the Routing Group you selected for Alarm Notification type are busy, the
extension user will be played MoH (MoH can be Voice Module 01 or through AIP).
Example:
Program the system such that when stations are kept on hold, they get Voice Module 01 on Hold and when trunks
are kept on hold, the caller gets music from AIP.
3552-2
3553-2
Relevant Topics:
“Background Music (BGM)”
“Voice Message Applications”
1336 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Number Lists
What’s this?
A ‘Number List’ is a group of number strings. ETERNITY uses Number Lists to support different features as Toll
Control, Call Duration Control, Call Taping, Call Back on Trunk Ports, Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR).
ETERNITY supports 16 Number Lists. Each Number List can contain upto 999 number strings. Each number string
consist of a maximum of 16 characters.
The number strings are stored against Location Index numbers in the Number List. The Location Index numbers
start from 001 to 999.
The default values of the Number Lists in the system are shown below:
Default Number Lists
Location List Number
Index 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
001 00 0 00 * * * * * * * * * *
002 0 * * # # # # # # # # # #
003 1 # # F F F F F F F F F F
004 2 F F
005 3
006 4
007 5
008 6
009 7
010 8
011 9
012 *
013 #
014 F
015 +
016
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :
999
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1337
Use of Number Lists in various Features of ETERNITY
Call Back on Trunk Ports
When Call Back on set on any of the Trunk port types (TWT, Mobile, BRI, T1E1, SIP), you must program two lists:
• Call Back Incoming Number List: this list defines the numbers which are eligible for a call back.
• Call Back Outgoing Number List: this list define the number to which the call back is to be made.
By default, Number List 15 is assigned to Call Back Incoming Number List, and Number List 16 is assigned to Call
Back Outgoing Number List.
Call Duration Control
To set Call Duration Control (CDC) feature is set on an extension, you must program the Call Duration Control
Table, in which you must program the numbers on which CDC must be applied as well as the numbers on which
CDC must not be applied.
This requires you to program and assign two Number Lists: the Apply CDC to Number List and the Do Not Apply
CDC to Number List.
By default, Number List 07 is assigned to Apply CDC Number List, and Number List 08 is assigned to Do Not Apply
CDC Number List.
Refer “Call Duration Control (CDC)” to know more.
Call Taping
Call Taping allows you to record conversations of incoming and outgoing internal and external calls. When you set
Call Taping on an extension for external calls, the ETERNITY uses two Lists: Number List - Incoming Calls: this list
has the list of numbers of external callers whose conversation is to be recorded.
Number List - Outgoing Calls: this list has phone numbers of external called parties whose conversation is to be
recorded. The system matches the incoming and outgoing numbers with the respective lists to apply Call Taping.
By default, Number List 09 is assigned to Incoming Calls Number List, and Number List 10 is assigned to Outgoing
Calls Number List.
Refer the feature description “Call Taping” to know more.
Toll Control
The Toll Control Call Privilege Type “Limited Calls” allows and restricts dialing of telephone numbers starting with a
particular digit or a particular area code or certain telephone numbers only. To apply Call Privilege type ‘Limited
Calls’ you must program an Allowed Number List with numbers that are to be allowed, and a ‘Denied List’ with
numbers that are to be restricted.
By default, Number List 01 is assigned as Allowed List as well as Denied List.
Refer the feature description for “Toll Control” to know more.
1338 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
ETERNITY supports ‘Destination wise’ storage of outgoing calls as an SMDR Filter, using which it is possible to
store calls made from and received on selected destination numbers. To set Destination wise storage of calls in the
SMDR Buffer, you must program and assign a Number List containing the phone numbers whose call details need
to be tracked and stored. SMDR of an outgoing call will be tracked and stored only if it matches with an entry in the
Number List assigned.
Similarly, SMDR Reports of Incoming and Outgoing Calls can be generated and printed for selected numbers by
programming and assigning a Number List.
By default, Number List 02 is assigned to Destination Wise storage of SMDR and SMDR Report Printing.
Refer the topics “Station Message Detail Recording”, “Station Message Detail Recording-Storage”, “Station
Message Detail Recording-Report”.
How to configure
Take a pen and a paper. Decide which of the above-mentioned seven features are to be used. Number List
according to the feature for which it is to be used.
Number Lists can be programmed from Jeeves or by dialing SE commands from a telephone.
Programming Number List using Jeeves
• Log into Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the link 'Number List' to open the page.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1339
• Select the desired List Number. For example, Number List 03-04. Now click ‘001-250' of Number list 03-04.
The location Index 001 to 250 will appear for both lists on the page.
• Enter each number string against a Location Index (refer to the list you prepared).
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your list.
• Assign the Number List you prepared to the relevant feature.
• Log out of Jeeves if you have no other configuration tasks.
Programming Number List using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode.
To program a number in a Number List, dial:
• 4302-Number List-Location Index-Number-#*
Where,
Where
List is from 01 to 16.
Location Index is from 001 to 999.
Number is a number string of maximum 16 digits. The digits allowed are: 0-9, #, *, A, B, C, D, F, P, +.
Refer the table below for codes for dialing the special digits. Terminate the number string with #*
Special Digit Code
Flash (F) #2
Pause (P) #3
1340 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Special Digit Code
A #4
B #5
C #6
D #7
+ #8
Dot (.) #9
# ##
* **
To clear the number programmed at a Location index in a Number list, dial:
• 4302-Number List-Location Index-#*
Where,
Number List is from 01 to 16.
Location Index is from 001 to 999.
To default Number Lists, dial:
• 4301-1-Number List to default a single number list.
• 4301-2-Number List-Number List to default a range of number lists.
• 4301-* to default all number lists.
Where,
Number List is from 01 to 16.
• Exit SE mode.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1341
Mute
What’s this?
This feature helps the extension user to disconnect the speech transmission path in the middle of a conversation.
The extension user can still listen to the opposite party because the receiving path remains connected. Mute is
useful when you want to consult someone in the middle of a conversation, but do not want the opposite party to
listen to your discussion. You can Mute a call before making a call or during speech.
How it works
• A is in speech with B.
• A wants to consult to C in the room, but does not want B to hear their conversation.
• A presses the Mute Key.
• The transmit speech path from A to B is disconnected. The receive path remains connected.
• So, A will be able to hear B, but B will not be able to hear the conversation between A and C.
• When A has finished consulting C, to resume speech with B, A presses the Mute key again.
• The transmit speech path from A to B is restored. A and B are in speech again.
How to use
For EON & Extended IP Phone Users
To mute a call before making the call:
• Press the Mute key
The LED of the key glows.
• Dial a number on confirmation tone.
OR
• Dial 1052
• Dial desired number
To mute a call during speech:
• Press the Mute key to silence outgoing speech
OR
• Press Hold Key
• Dial 1052
To resume outgoing speech:
• Press Mute key.
The LED of the key is turned off.
OR
• Press Hold Key
• Dial 1052
For SLT Users
To mute a call before making the call:
• Dial 1052
• Dial desired number
1342 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To mute a call during speech:
• Press Flash Key
• Dial 1052
To resume outgoing speech:
• Press Flash Key
• Dial 1052
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1343
OFF-Hook Alert
What's this?
When the handset of an extension is not placed correctly, it will not be possible for the Operator or any other
extension to call the extension. Also, incoming calls will not reach the extension, Alarms and Reminders cannot be
placed on that extension.
To avoid this inconvenience, the ETERNITY supports the feature 'OFF-Hook Alert', whereby the system detects
and informs the Operator of the extension phone that remains OFF-Hook accidentally.
How it works
To give the Operator an OFF-Hook Alert,
• ETERNITY places a call on the Operator's phone.
• It displays a text message on the Operator's phone" "Hang up <extension number>
• When the Operator answers the call, s/he is played a confirmation tone, the text message remains on the
display.
• The Operator can inform the extension user to place the handset of the phone correctly.
• If the extension phone is an SLT, OFF-Hook Alert will be given to the Operator phone only. (The Operator
phone must be EON).
• If the extension phone is EON, OFF-Hook Alert will be give to both, the Operator phone and the extension
phone (EON).
• If the extension phone that is OFF-Hook is EON, the ETERNITY will activate 'OFF-Hook Alert' on the
extension phone, by playing the Error Tone continuously, on speaker to draw the attention of the extension
user.
• While the Error Tone for OFF-Hook Alert is being played on the extension phone, if the user presses the
Speaker Key, the Error Tone will continue to be played on the handset until it is replaced correctly.
How to configure
For this feature to work,
• the 'OFF-Hook Alert to Operator' flag must be enabled by the System Engineer in the 'System General
Parameters'.
• the Operator phone must be EON, the extension phones may be EON or SLT.
1344 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Programming 'OFF-Hook Alert to Operator' using Jeeves
• Log into Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the link 'System Parameters' to open the page.
• Go to the parameter 'OFF-Hook Alert to Operator', select the check box to enable the flag.
• Click 'Submit' to save the change.
• Log out of Jeeves or continue programming as required.
Programming 'OFF-Hook Alert to Operator' using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
• Dial 5333-1 to enable the flag.
• To disable the flag, dial 5333-0.
• Exit SE mode.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1345
OG Reference Table
What’s this?
The OG Reference Table is a set of general features that define the logic of building the DDI Number for a station
placing a call and sending it to the network. An OG Reference Table is assigned to SIP/T1E1PRI/BRI ports. This
table in conjunction with DDI Routing Reference Table builds the DDI Number. The ETERNITY offers 64 such
Tables each of which can be programmed as per the requirement.
How to use
• OG Reference Number-This is the reference number acts as an identifier to the translation logic
programmed in the OG Reference Table. Any number of table can have the same reference number. An
OG Reference ID can be assigned to ISDN, SIP, T1E1PRI and BRI trunks. For more details on the
complete translation logic please refer the topics “Direct Dialing-In (DDI)”, “DDI Routing Table”.
• Start Channel Number-This is the first channel number for the trunk to which the logic is applicable.
• Channel Count-The Total number of channels from the Start Channel Number of the port (Trunk) to which
the OG Reference Table is applicable.
• ISDN Number-Each ISDN Trunk is given an Installation Number by the Service Provider. This is the
combination of Main Number (MSN Number) and the first DDI Number. The Number is of maximum 16
digits. This is also known as ISDN Installation Number or just ISDN Number. The MSN number is given by
the service provider whereas the Directory Numbers can be selected by the user. However the number of
digits to be used for the Directory Number should be informed to the service provider.
• DDI Routing Reference ID-The ‘DDI Routing Reference ID’ programmed in the OG reference table,
provides mapping with the ‘DDI Routing Reference ID’ programmed in the DDI Routing Table. Using the
mapped entry of DDI Routing Table, the DDI number gets created from the flexible number. This DDI
number is sent as ‘Calling Party Number’ while making OG call.
How to configure
The commands explained below should be referred as:
To program a single port: XXXX-1
To program a range of ports: XXXX-2
To program all the ports: XXXX-*
Programming an OG Reference Table
Use the following command to program an OG Reference Table:
6312-1-OG Reference Table Index-Parameter Number-Value
6312-2-OG Reference Table Index-OG Reference Table Index-Parameter Number-Value
6312-*-Parameter Number-Value
Where,
OG Reference Table Index is from 01 to 64.
Parameter Number is from 1 to 5.
1346 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
How to assign default values to an OG Trunk Bundle?
Use the following command to default an OG Reference Table:
6311-1-OG Reference Table Index
6311-2-OG Reference Table Index-OG Reference Table Index
6311-*
Where,
OG Reference Table Index is from 01 to 64.
Default values of OG reference table as given below:
Parameter No. 1 2 3 4 5
Parameter Name/ OG Ref. ISDN DDI Routing Ref.
Start Channel No. Channel Count
Index ID Number ID
01 00 01 00 Blank 000
02 00 01 00 Blank 000
03-63 Same as 02
64 00 01 00 Blank 000
Parameter Value:
Code 01-99 01-02 01-30 16 digits 001-128
01-30
Relevant Topics:
1. “Direct Dialing-In (DDI)”
2. “ISDN-BRI”
3. “T1E1 Trunks”
4. “DDI Routing Table”
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1347
Outgoing Trunk Bundle
What’s this?
The Outgoing Trunk (OG) Trunk Bundle is set of parameters that completely define the grouping of similar
channels. The word channel refers to a speech path. By this definition, a channel can be a TWT trunk, an E&M
trunk, a Mobile port. Each speech path of the T1/E1 line is a channel. Bundles of similar trunks are formed. These
Bundles are used to form an OGTBG. The ETERNITY supports 128 OG Trunk Bundles.
How to use
The OG trunk bundle contains parameters like:
• Trunk Type: Specific trunk bundle consists of some of these ports. The different types of ports are TWT,
BRI, T1E1PRI, E&M, Mobile, and SIP.
• Trunk Number: Once the type of port is identified in the bundle, it is required to identify the number of that
port, because there can be more than one port for the given type.
• Start Channel Number: This is applicable to BRI and T1E1 Trunks.
• Trunk Count: This is the number of trunks to be kept in the same bundle. For TWT and E&M this could be
128. This value for the BRI and T1E1 Trunks is counted from the start channel. For example, if the port
type is TWT, port number is 002 and channel count is 025, then TWT channels 002 to 027 would be
grouped together. Consider a second example where channels 15 to 25 of T1E1PRI port are to be
programmed in one channel group, then the port type will be T1E1PRI, port number would be 5, start
channel number will be 15 and channel count will be 11.
• Rotation Type: This parameter shows which channel should be selected when the next call lands on that
port. For example, if ascending order is selected, the system checks 001-128, for first free channel and if
descending order is selected the system checks from 128-001.
• Ascending Order:
• 001 to 128 (for TWT/E&M)
• 01 to 30 (for T1E1PRI)
• 01 to 02 (for BRI)
• 01 to 32 (for SIP)
• Descending Order:
• 128-001 (for TWT/E&M)
• 30 to 01 (for T1E1PRI)
• 02 to 01 (for BRI)
• 32 to 01 (for SIP)
• Cyclic:
• Always the next channel is picked for a new OG call.
1348 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• ANT Apply: Select from enable/disable as required. To use ANT feature, it should be enabled for the trunk
port from which the number is to be dialed out.
• ANT Table No.: This is a Table number in which Dialed Number Strings and corresponding Substitute
number strings are programmed at specific Index. This table number is assigned to the specific trunk port
from which the number is to be dialed. Refer chapter “Automatic Number Translation” for more details.
How to configure
Use following command to program the feature in an OG Trunk Bundle Number:
6702-1-OG Trunk Bundle Number-Feature Number-Code
6702-2-OG Trunk Bundle Number-OG Trunk Bundle Number-Feature Number-Code
6702-*-Feature Number-Code
Where,
OG Trunk Bundle Number is from 001 to 128.
Feature Number is from 1 to 6.
Use following command to set default values for OG Trunk Bundle:
6701-1-OG Trunk Bundle Number
6701-2-OG Trunk Bundle Number-OG Trunk Bundle Number
6701-*
Where,
OG Trunk Bundle Number is from 001 to 128.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1349
Default values of OG Trunk Bundle
Feature Number
1 2 3 4 5 6
Bundle No. Alternate Number
Trunk Port Start Total
Rotation Translation (ANT)
Channel Trunk
Type
Type Number No. Count Apply ANT Table No.
001 TWT 001 01 008 Ascending No 1
002 MOB 001 01 032 Ascending No 1
003 BRI 001 01 002 Ascending No 1
004 T1E1 001 01 032 Ascending No 1
005 SIP 001 01 032 Ascending No 1
006 None 000 01 017 Cyclic No 1
007 None 000 01 017 Cyclic No 1
: None 000 01 017 Cyclic No 1
060 None 000 01 017 Cyclic No 1
061 TWT 001 01 008 Ascending No 1
062 BRI 001 01 002 Ascending No 1
063 T1E1 001 01 030 Ascending No 1
064 MOB 001 01 032 Ascending No 1
065 None 000 01 017 Cyclic No 1
: None 000 01 017 Cyclic No 1
128 None 000 01 017 Cyclic No 1
Parameter Values:
Code 0 None 000 No
1 03 001-128 01-30 001-128 Ascending Yes 1-8
2 04 001-032 Descending
3 05 001-008 Cyclic
4 06 001-128
5 25 001-064
6 26 001-032
Relevant Topics:
“Automated Control Applications”
“Outgoing Trunk Bundle”
1350 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
“OG Trunk Bundle Group”
“Automatic Number Translation”
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1351
OG Trunk Bundle Group
What’s this?
• OG Trunk Bundle Group provides efficient allocation of trunks to different stations.
• All the trunks connected to the system can be bunched in different groups called OG Trunk Bundle Group.
Maximum 8 Trunk Bundles can be put in one OG Trunk Bundle Group and 32 such OG Trunk Bundle
Groups can be formed.
• These OG Trunk Bundle Groups can be allotted to each individual station.
• A station can be allotted different OG Trunk Bundle Group during different timings of the day.
How it works
System uses two methods while selecting a trunk from the OG Trunk Bundle Group: ‘Remember last trunk’ and
‘Don’t Remember last trunk’.
In ‘Remember last trunk’ method, the system remembers the last trunk used and allots next trunk in the group to
the station.
In ‘Don’t remember last trunk’ method, the system searches for a first free trunk from the group.
1352 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Following flow chart depicts the chronology of events when a station grabs a trunk.
Start
Station user dials trunk
group access codes
Which
LCR type is
selected ?
Time based LCR Mixed LCR No LCR SP-SP LCR Number based LCR
System finds the cheapest
A C
trunk from the group System waits for dialing
depending upon the time on of entire number
which call is made &
following rotation logic System allots a free trunk from the
OG trunk bundle group depending System finds
upon the rotation flag cheapest trunk for
this number
End D
Is the
cheapest Yes
trunk free
? No
System allots the Is cheapest
No trunk to the station trunk free?
Are other No
End Yes trunks available
Are other in this group?
No System dials out
trunk available System gives busy
the number Yes
in this group tone to the station
System gives busy Select next cheap
Yes End
tone to the station trunk in this group
System waits for next
Select next action from user
cheapest trunk System waits for next
in this group action from the user
End
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1353
A
System waits for dialing of
entire number
System gets the OG trunk bundle group. System finds the
OG trunk bundle group from the grabbed. OG trunk
bundle group depending upon time and rotation logic
Yes Is the cheapest
trunk free ?
System dials out the number
No
End Are
Yes other trunks
available with OG
trunk bundle
group ?
Select next cheapest
No
trunk within the group
System gives busy
tone to the station
System waits for next
action from user
End
1354 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
C
System waits for dialing of entire
number
System ignores first few digits from the
dialed number as per ignore digit count
and finds cheapest trunk for the number
from the OG trunk bundle group as per
the number logic and rotation logic
How to configure
The commands explained below should be referred as:
To program a single port: XXXX-1
To program a range of ports: XXXX-2
To program all the ports: XXXX-*
Step 1
Use following command to make default OG Trunk Bundle Group:
1401-1-OGTBG Number
1401-2-OGTBG Number-OGTBG Number
1401-*
Where,
OGTBG Number is from 01 to 32.
Step 2
Use following command to set OG Trunk Bundle:
1402-1-OGTBG Number-Destination Index-OG Trunk Bundle
1402-2-OGTBG Number-OGTBG Number-Destination Index-OG Trunk Bundle
1402-*-Destination Index-OG Trunk Bundle
Where,
OGTBG Number is from 01 to 32.
Destination Index is from 1 to 8.
OG Trunk Bundle is from 001 to 128.
For Defaults refer Table1.
Step 3
Use following command to set Rotation Flag. For explanation on how to use, refer important point at the end of
chapter:
1403-1-OGTBG Number-Flag
1403-2-OGTBG Number-OGTBG Number-Flag
1403-*-Flag
Where,
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1355
OGTBG Number is from 01 to 32.
Flag Meaning
0 Rotation OFF
1 Rotation ON
For Defaults refer Table1.
Step 4
For LCR Type-refer chapter “Configuring LCR”.
Step 5
For CPS refer chapter “Least Cost Routing-Carrier Pre-Selection”.
Step 6
Refer the topic “Station Basic Feature Template” for details on assigning OGTBG to stations.
Step 7
How to assign an access code to OGTBG?
There are maximum 6 trunk access codes. These are Flexible access codes. Trunk access codes are common for
all the users. They cannot be different for different station.
A default trunk access codes table is given below:
OGTBG Index Default Trunk Access Code
1 0
2 5
3 61
4 62
5 63
6 64
Use following command to program the desirable access code for a trunk access index:
3112-1-OGTBG Index-Access Code-#*/Press <Hold>
3112-2-OGTBG Index-OGTBG Index-Access Code-#*/Press <Hold>
3112-*-Access Code-#*/Press <Hold>
Where,
OGTBG Index is from 1 to 6.
Access Code is maximum 6 digits (Generally access code for trunk is of two digits).
Use following command to clear the access code for a OGTBG index:
3112-1-OGTBG Index-#*
3112-2-OGTBG Index-OGTBG Index-#*
3112-*-#*
Use following command to assign default access code for a OGTBG index:
3162-1-OGTBG Index
3162-2-OGTBG Index-OGTBG Index
3162-*
1356 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
How to use
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 0/5/61 to 64. Dial tone of the trunk.
3 Dial desired external number.
• To grab OG Trunk Bundle Group 3, the user should dial ‘61’.
• To grab OG Trunk Bundle Group 1, the user should dial ‘0’.
How the Rotation flags work?
• Eight OG Trunk Bundles can be programmed as members of each OGTBG.
• OGTBG has “Rotation” flag, and each OG trunk bundle has Rotation type “Cyclic/Descending/Ascending”.
• These two flags don’t have any relation with each other, and so, will work in isolation.
If Rotation is ON in the OGTBG:
• The first call will get routed using the “OG Trunk bundle Member1”. The trunk port from the OG Trunk
Bundle member 1 will get selected using the rotation type programmed for the OG trunk bundle
programmed as member 1.
• When there is a second call, it will get routed using the “OG trunk bundle Member 2”, and the trunk port
from the OG trunk bundle member 2 will get selected according to the rotation type programmed in the OG
Trunk Bundle programmed as member2.
• Accordingly, the member of the OGTBG will be accessible to the station user accessing the OGTBG in
sequence.
If the Rotation is OFF in the OGTBG:
• The calls will always get routed from the “OG trunk Bundle member 1” if any trunk/channel in it is free. If all
the trunks/channels of the “OG trunk bundle member 1” are busy, then the call will get routed using the
“OG trunk bundle member 2”.
• Now the trunk/channel to route the call will get selected as per the rotation type programmed for the OG
trunk bundle used as member 2. When the trunk ports of OG trunk bundle programmed in member 1 and
member 2 all are busy, the OG trunk bundle member 3 will be used to route the call.
• Thus the Rotation flag of OGTBG will be used to select the OG trunk bundle member1 to member 8 as per
call basis while the rotation type flag associated with the OG trunk bundle will decide the rotation
mechanism to select the trunk port from the particular OG trunk bundle.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1357
Default OG Trunk Bundle Group Table (Table-1):
OGTB OGTB OGTB OGTB OGTB OGTB OGTB OGTB
Group
Rotation LCR Member Member Member Member Member Member Member Member
No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
01 None 01 02 03 04 05 00 00 00
02 None 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
03 None 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
04 None 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
05 None 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
:: None 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
21 None 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
22 None 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
23 None 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
24 None 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
25 None 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
26 None 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
27 None 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
28 None 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
29 None 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
30 None 61 62 63 00 00 00 00 00
31 None 64 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
32 None 61 62 63 64 00 00 00 00
Relevant Topics:
1. “Outgoing Trunk Bundle” 1348
2. “Configuring LCR” 716
3. “Time Tables” 1671
4. “Class of Service (COS)” 1011
5. “Station Basic Feature Template” 436
6. “Trunk Access Group (TAG)” 1692
1358 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
PCAP Trace
What's this?
PCAP or packet capture consists of intercepting and logging the traffic passing over a digital network or a part of a
network. PCAP intercepts each packet in the data streams that flow across the network, and can decode and
analyze its contents.
PCAP can be used, among others, to monitor the network, detect and analyze network problems, debug client/
server communications, debug network protocol implementations.
ETERNITY supports PCAP Trace for the Master Ethernet Port, the VoIP Port of ETERNITY, and the Matrix
Extended IP Phones.
Packets traveling over a network are captured and saved in the system. You can save these trace files (packets
captured by the system) on a PC and open these trace files using a graphical packet capture and protocol analysis
tool such as Wireshark or Ethereal.
ETERNITY also supports Filters and 'Promiscuous' mode for capturing packets, which you can use to specify the
types of data packets to be captured.
How to use
Using PCAP Trace for Master Ethernet Port of ETERNITY
PCAP Trace for the Master Ethernet Port allows a maximum of 1 MB of packets can be captured and stored in the
ETERNITY.
To use PCAP Trace for the Master Ethernet Port of ETERNITY,
• Log in to Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the PCAP Trace link to open the page.
• Decide the type of packets to be captured and set the Filter accordingly. The Filter Settings parameter
should be maximum 60 characters in length; all ASCII characters are allowed. By default, this field is
blank. So all packets will be captured.
Refer the following examples to know how to set the Filters.
Examples of Filter settings:
• To capture only SNMP traces:
• Filter Settings = port 161
Where, 161 is the SNMP Port number for which the traces are to be captured.
• To capture packets which are transmitted from the system, from IP address 192.168.1.191:
• Filter Settings = src 192.168.1.191
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1359
• To capture packets which are received for the system, to IP address 92.168.1.191:
• Filter Settings = dst 192.168.1.191
• To capture only packets which are transmitted from the system and received to the system, IP address
192.168.1.191:
• Filter Settings = src 192.168.1.191 or dst 192.168.1.191
• To capture packets which are transmitted from the system for particular port number only, from IP
address 192.168.1.191 and port number 161 :
• Filter Settings = src 192.168.1.191 and port 161
If you do not enter a valid filter, you will get the message: 'Invalid filter! Please enter valid filter'.
It is not mandatory to set Filters. When the Filter Settings field is left blank, the system will capture all
packets.
• You can set the Enable Promiscuous Mode? to Yes, if you want.
When you enable Promiscuous mode, the ETERNITY will capture all network traffic. However, this will
work only in a non-switched environment.
When Promiscuous Mode flag is disabled, the system will capture only traffic that is directly related to it.
Only traffic to, from or routed through the ETERNITY will be picked up by the PCAP Trace.
'Filter Settings' and 'Promiscuous Mode' (enabled) will not be cleared during power down.
• Click the Start button to begin the capturing of the packets.
• Click the Stop button to stop packet capture.
OR
• Wait for the system to stop packet capturing. The system stops packet capturing once the maximum
allotted memory of 1 MB (RAM) is utilized.
• Number of Packets and bytes captured as per the filter setting will be displayed as Packets Captured and
Total Bytes respectively.
Capturing of packets will not stop if you open any other page of Jeeves. So, you may continue using
Jeeves for any other purpose while PCAP Trace is being used.
• When the packet capturing is stopped (by you or the system), click the Save Trace File button to save the
files on the system’s FTP server.
The FTP Login page will open. Enter the SE password. Save your trace file on you local disk.
The current packets captured will not be deleted after you have saved the trace file. The current packets
will be deleted when you start the PCAP capture again.
1360 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• You may log out of Jeeves.
• Now, you can open the downloaded trace file using Wireshark or Ethereal or any other similar software
which supports opening of trace files.
Using PCAP Trace for VoIP Port of ETERNITY
PCAP Trace for the VoIP Port allows a maximum of 2 MB of packets to be captured and stored in the system.
To use PCAP Trace for VoIP Port of ETERNITY,
• Log into Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the VoIP Configuration link.
• Under VoIP Configuration, click the PCAP Trace link to open the page.
• Click the VoIP Port tab for which you want to carry out PCAP Trace. For example, VoIP Port-1.
• Set the Filter for the type of packets to be captured. The Filter Settings parameter should be maximum 60
characters in length; all ASCII characters are allowed. By default, this field is blank. So all packets will be
captured.
You may refer to the following examples for setting the Filters.
Examples of Filter Setting Syntax:
Filter Type Filter Setting Logic
src port port number src port 5060 Capture packets if the packet has
a source port value of 5060.
dst port port number dst port 80 Capture packets if the packet has
a destination port value of 80.
port port number port 5060 Capture packets if the packet has either source
or destination port value of 5060.
src host ip address src host 192.168.1.176 Capture packets if the source IP address
is 192.168.1.176
dst host ip address dst host 192.168.1.176 Capture packets if the destination IP address
is 192.168.1.176.
host ip address host 192.168.1.176 Capture packets if either source or destination IP address
is 192.168.1.176
If you enter an invalid filter, you will get an error message: 'Invalid filter! Please enter valid filter' if you do
not enter a valid filter.
It is not mandatory to set Filters. When the Filter Settings field is left blank, the system will capture all
packets.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1361
• You can set the flag Enable Promiscuous Mode? to Yes, if you want.
When you enable Promiscuous mode, the ETERNITY will capture all network traffic. When Promiscuous
Mode flag is disabled, the system will capture only traffic that is directly related to it. Only traffic to, from or
routed through the ETERNITY will be picked up by the PCAP Trace.
'Filter Settings' and 'Promiscuous Mode' (enabled) will not be cleared during power down.
• Press Start button to begin the capturing of the packets.
• Press Stop button to stopping the packet capturing.
OR
• Wait for the system to stop packet capturing. The system stops packet capturing once the maximum
allotted memory of 2 MB (RAM) is utilized.
Capturing of packets will not be interrupted if you open any other page of Jeeves. So, you may continue
using Jeeves for any other purpose while PCAP Trace is being used.
• When the packet capturing is stopped (by you or the system), you can download the captured file from the
FTP server of the VoIP Card.
The current packets captured will not be deleted after you have saved the trace file. The current packets
will be deleted when you start the PCAP capture again.
• If you want to run PCAP Trace for another port, click the desired VoIP Port Number, and repeat the steps
described above.
• You may open the downloaded trace file using Wireshark or Ethereal or any other similar software which
supports opening of trace files.
Using PCAP Trace for Matrix Extended IP Phone
PCAP Trace supported by the Matrix Extended IP Phone can capture up to 1 MB of packets and store them in the
embedded FTP server of the phone.
You are not required to set any filters; the phone captures all packets that it sends and receives.
To be able to use PCAP Trace for a Matrix Extended IP Phone, there must be a DSS Key for accessing the Local
Menu on the phone. If you have not already configured the DSS Key for Local Menu, you may do so now. For
instructions on configuring DSS keys of the Extended IP Phone, see “Matrix Extended IP Phone Settings” under
Configuring SIP Extensions.
To use PCAP Trace from an Extended IP Phone extension,
• Press the DSS Key assigned to ‘Local Menu’.
You can access the Local Menu only when your phone is in idle state.
1362 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
M on 10 M AY 1 5: 40
2 00 1 Re ce pt i on
Voice Mail Call Back Canc el Mute Conference Transfer
Forw ard DN D Names Redial Release Hold
Local Menu
1 2 abc 3 def
4 ghi 5 jkl 6 mno
7 pqrs 8 tuv 9 wxyz
CA04
CA03 * 0 #
CA02
CA01
• The Local Menu appears on your phone display.
LOCAL ME NU
N et wo r k P a r a m e t er s
N et wo r k S t a t u s
• The cursor appears under ‘Network Parameters’.
• Press Enter key to select ‘Network Parameters’.
• The Network Parameters submenu appears.
N E T W O R K PA R A M E T E R S
M A C :00 :1 b:09 :00 :9a :a 7
C o n n e c t i o n Ty p e
I P A d d r e ss
Sub net Ma sk
G at e w a y A d d r e s s
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1363
• Scroll with the DOWN navigation key to PCAP.
N E T W O R K PA R A M E T E R S
P P P o E S e rv i c e N a m e
S e r v er A d d re ss
S e r v er P o r t
VLAN S etti ng
PCAP
• Press Enter key.
• ‘Start PCAP’ appears on your phone display.
PCAP T RACE
Sta rt PCAP
• Press Enter key. You get a confirmation message ‘Started!’
PCAP TRACE
Sta rted !
To stop PCAP,
• Enter the Local Menu of the phone again by pressing the DSS key.
• Enter the Network Parameters submenu.
• Select PCAP and press Enter.
• The message Stop PCAP appears on your phone display.
PCAP T RACE
Stop PCAP
1364 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Press Enter key. You get the confirmation message: ‘Stopped!’
PCAP T RACE
Sto ppe d!
• Go idle.
You can download the Trace file from the embedded FTP server of the Extended IP Phone. To access the FTP
server using Windows FTP, do the following:
• Go to My Computer.
• Type the current IP Address of the Extended IP Phone in the Address bar. For example: ftp://
192.168.201.134
• Click Go or Press Enter key on your keyboard.
• The Log on as window of the FTP server opens.
• In User Name, type se (lower case).
• In Password, enter the current User Password set for the phone.
• Click Log on.
• On successful login, the FTP window will open. You will see the different Configuration folders in this
window.
• Click the folder ramdisk.
• In the ramdisk folder, right click the file trace.pcap and copy it on to your local disk.
• Open the trace.pcap file using Wireshark or Ethereal or any other similar software which supports
opening of trace files.
You may also use FireFTP, if you are using Mozilla Fire Fox. Make sure your browser has the FireFTP
Add-on installed.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1365
Paging
What's this?
Paging allows you to make announcements to groups of extension users and to make public announcements over
a public address system. You can deliver a message to a mass of people at once by just lifting the handset of your
phone and dialing a code.
This feature is useful when you want to call several people at once; for example, to inform them about a meeting
you have scheduled. If the persons you want to call have Digital Key Phones (DKP) as their extensions, you can
use paging instead of calling them up one by one.
This feature is of great use in factories, offices, where it is not feasible to provide individual extensions in every
place, or when announcements are to be made in a hall, a lobby or a shop floor. In such situations, if you need to
call or inform someone, you can simply make an announcement over a Public Address System (PAS).
ETERNITY supports two types of paging:
• Internal Paging: Announcements are made on DKP extensions of the ETERNITY.
• External Paging: Announcements are made on a Public Address System (PAS) connected to the Analog
Output Port of the ETERNITY.
For both types of Paging, the DKP extensions which are to be paged and the Analog Output Port to which the PAS
is connected must be included in 'Page Zones'.
• ETERNITY PE3SS does not support Paging.
• You can page from both SLT and DKP extensions, but the extensions you page to must be only DKP
extensions.
• The DKP extension being paged can only hear the person who is paging as the DKP speakerphone
mic is not activated.
How it works
The Pre-requisites
• Page Zones must be created. Each Page Zone accommodates up to 16 DKP extensions and the Analog
Output Port. You can create 12 different Page Zones of 16 DKP extensions each.
• Paging must be enabled in the Class of Service allowed to the DKP/SLT extension from which this feature
is to be used.
• For External Paging, a Public Address System must be connected to the Analog Output Port of the
ETERNITY. For instructions, refer the topic 'Connecting a Public Address System' under “Installing
ETERNITY ME”, “Installing ETERNITY GE” and “Installing ETERNITY PE”186.
186. ETERNITY PE3SS does not support Analog Output Port.
1366 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The Process
• A DKP/SLT extension which has Paging in its Class of Service, dials the Access code for Paging and the
Number of the Page Zone to which s/he wants to make the announcement.
• The system activates the speakerphones of the DKPs programmed in the Page Zone number. The system
activates the speakerphones only those DKP ports in the Page Zone that are free.
If the Analog Output Port is included in the Page Zone the PAS connected to this port will be activated.
• The calling DKP/SLT extension user makes his/her announcement.
• All DKPs in the Page Zone can hear the announcement. But they cannot speak to the calling DKP/SLT
extension user (as the mic of their speakerphones is not activated).
If the Analog Output Port is included in this Page Zone, the announcement will be heard by the public.
• The calling DKP/SLT extension goes ON-Hook after the announcement.
• The system deactivates the speakerphones of the DKPs and the PAS connected to the Analog Output
Port.
How to configure
For this feature to work, you must create Page Zones and enable this feature in the Class of Service of the
extensions which are to be allowed this feature.
Allowing Paging in Class of Service
In the default factory settings, Station Basic Feature Template Number 01 is assigned to all the stations of
ETERNITY. Template 01 is assigned CoS group 01 which has Paging enabled. So, all stations of ETERNITY can
page.
If you want to allow Paging to all stations, retain CoS group 01 in Template 01.
However, if Paging is to be disallowed to some stations then follow these steps:
a. Define a CoS group with Paging disallowed.
b. Prepare a Station Basic Feature Template with this CoS group applicable in all the “Time Zones”.
c. Assign this new Template to the stations to which Paging is to be disallowed.
Refer the topics “Class of Service (COS)” and “Station Basic Feature Template” for detailed instructions and
programming.
Creating Page Zones
Decide how many Page Zones you want to create. You can create as many as 12 different Page Zones. You can
include upto 16 DKP extensions and the Analog Output Port in each Page Zone.
For each Page Zone number, decide and assign the DKP extensions and the Analog Output Port.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1367
In a Page Zone, you can include only the Analog Output Port, or only DKP extensions or Analog Output Port as well
as DKP extensions.
On a sheet of paper create a two-column table for each page zone, as shown below. Enter the Software Port
number of the DKP extensions you want to include in the page zone. Also specify if you want to use the Analog
Output Port in a Page Zone.
Page Zone 1
Member Number DKP Port Number
1 002
2 003
3 008
4 009
16
Include Analog Output Port in Page Zone 1? No
Page Zone 2
Member Number DKP Port Number
1 007
2 010
3 012
4 013
16
Include Analog Output Port in Page Zone 2? Yes
If you want to include only the Analog Output Port in a Page Zone, you do not need to assign any DKP extensions
to that Page Zone.
Make a note of the Page Zone for which you want to use only the Analog Output Port.
Now, program Page Zones using Jeeves or by dialing SE commands from a Telephone.
Programming Page Zones using Jeeves
• Login as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the 'Page Zones' link to open the page.
1368 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• The first three page zones appear on this page.
• Refer to the Page Zones you created on paper and program the following parameters in each Page Zone:
• Page on AOP: Select this check box if you want to include AOP in the Page Zone.
If you want to include only the AOP in a Page Zone, do not program any of the DKPs in the Page Zone.
• DKP Port: Enter the Software Port number of the DKP you want to include in the Page Zone.
• Include in Page Zone: Select the check box to include the DKP Port number you entered as member
of the Page Zone.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your Page Zone settings.
• To go to other Page Zones, you may click the hyperlinked page zone numbers on the top of the Jeeves
screen.
• If you have completed programming Page Zones, you may log out of Jeeves.
Programming Page Zones using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To enable/disable Analog Output Port (AOP) in a Page Zone, dial:
• 2301-1-Page Zone-Flag to enable/disable AOP in a single Page Zone.
• 2301-2-Page Zone-Page Zone-Flag to enable/disable AOP in a range of Page Zones.
• 2301-*-Flag to enable/disable AOP in all Page Zones.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1369
Where,
Flag is
0 for Disable AOP for Page Zone
1 for Enable AOP for Page Zone
By default, AOP is disabled.
To program a DKP in a Page Zone, dial:
• 2302-1-Page Zone-Member-DKP to program a DKP in a single Page Zone.
• 2302-2-Page Zone-Page Zone-Member-DKP to program the same DKP in a range of Page Zones.
• 2302-*-Member-DKP to program the same DKP in all Page Zones.
Where,
Page Zone is from 01 to 12.
Member is from 01 to 16.
DKP is software port of the DKP to be included in the Page Zone from 001 to 128.
To include/exclude a member DKP in/from a Page Zone, dial:
• 2303-1-Page Zone-Member-Flag to include/exclude a DKP in/from a single Page Zone.
• 2303-2-Page Zone-Page Zone-Member-Flag to include/exclude the same DKP in/from a range of
Page Zones.
• 2303-*-Member-Flag to include/exclude the same DKP in/from all Page Zones.
Where,
Page Zone is from 01 to 12.
Member is from 01 to 16.
Flag is
0 for Exclude DKP member from Page Zone.
1 for Include DKP member in Page Zone.
• Exit SE mode.
How to use
It is possible to page from a DKP as well as SLT.
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users
• Press DSS Key assigned to Paging.
OR
• Dial 1074
• Enter Page Zone Number on the prompt on your phone's display.
• You get the prompt on your phone's display: Start Paging <Page Zone Number>.
• Make your announcement.
• Go ON-Hook at the end of your announcement.
For SLT Users
• Lift the handset.
• You get dial tone.
• Dial 1074-Page Zone Number.
• Start your announcement.
• Replace the handset after completing your announcement.
1370 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Peer-to-Peer Calling
What’s this?
• Making a call on the VoIP Ethernet Port without going through any proxy is called Peer-to-Peer Calling.
• For this the system supports, the table to be programmed which consists of Number, Destination Address
and Name field for each entry.
• The user has to know only the IP address of the called party.
For programming ‘.’ use ‘#9’ when SLT or DKP is used. But for dialing a number with ‘.’ use ‘*’.
For example:
There are 3 branch offices of the same company located at different places and they are connected to each other
by private IP Network as shown in the figure below:
Baroda Mumbai
PSTN 2637223 192.168.1.5 [email protected] 192.168.1.1 PSTN
265 22
32
PBX-A PBX-E
2630555 2654515 192.167.100.1 [email protected] 28111263 28121234
2001 2002 3001 3002
Frankfurt Chicago
PSTN 192.168.1.4 IP Network 192.168.1.2 PSTN
49-69 1-312
PBX-B PBX-D
[email protected] [email protected]
24251 24531 651011 890011
5001 5002 4001 4002
192.168.1.3
Delhi
PSTN
11
31
PBX-C
9898001122 6545351
2001 2002
Following types of calls can be made using peer to peer calling feature.
• 2001 will dial ‘3001’ to call Mumbai office.
• 2001 can dial 31-2001 to call Delhi office, i.e with PBX exchange ID.
• 2001 can use trunk Access Code ‘0’ to call Mumbai office. He can dial ‘0-3001’.
• 2001 can call 2001 in Delhi by dialing Trunk Access Code i.e. by dialing 0-312001.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1371
• 2001 can call the local PSTN number 28111263 of Mumbai by dialing Trunk Access Code i.e by dialing 0-
02228111263.
• Baroda local user 2630555 can call the Baroda user through Baroda-PBX i.e 2630555 user will dial any
PSTN number of PBX for which DISA is enabled and dials the Chicago number using TAC i.e. 0011-312-
651011.
• 2001 can transfer the call to 3001 in Mumbai (whether Internal or External Call).
• 2001 can call [email protected] directly through SLT or DKP using TAC.
• 2001 can call IP address 192.167.100.1 directly through SLT or DKP using TAC.
• 2001 can call [email protected] through SLT or DKP using TAC.
• [email protected] and IP address 192.167.100.1 can be stored in the Global Memory/Personal Memory.
Toll control will be checked for IP Address.
Above mentioned different applications of the non-proxy calling are possible with suitable programming of the
ETERNITY with ETERNITY ME Card VoIP. Programming for different applications of calling is explained in detailed
in Important points.
How it works
Peer to Peer Table is used, for deciding the destination IP Address for call routing on the non-proxy SIP trunks
(Registrar server address shall be programmed as blank for these trunks). This table is common for all the SIP
trunks.
Index Number String Destination Address Name
001 No Match Found
002 2001 192.168.001.116
003 2002 192.168.1.21 Matrix
: Blank Blank Blank
999 Blank Blank Blank
• Program three parameters viz. Number String Prefix, Destination Address and Name for each entry.
• Number String Prefix can be maximum 8 digits long. (0-9, #, * allowed). Default: Blank.
• Program the first entry for destination Address and Name which will be used to route the call in case the
dialed number is not found in the Peer-to-Peer call table. Thus entries at Index-001 are reserved for the
case of dialed number string not programmed in the Peer-to-Peer Table.
• Destination Address can be maximum 15 characters long. Default: Blank.
• Enter Name of maximum 12 characters long. Default: Blank.
• After this table, the system will check Automatic Number Translation (ANT) logic for dialing the number.
1372 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• If dialed number is found in the Peer-to-Peer table and Destination address is not programmed for that
Number, caller will get error tone.
• If destination address is programmed, then system will apply ANT logic.
• Programming of the Peer-to-Peer Table can be done through Web Jeeves and SE mode using DKP or
SLT.
How to configure
The commands explained below should be referred as:
To program a single port: XXXX-1
To program a range of ports: XXXX-2
To program all the ports: XXXX-*
Number String
Use following command to program the Number String in peer-to-peer table:
7801-1-Index-Number String-#*
7801-2-Index-Index-Number String-#*
7801-*-Number String-#*
Where,
Index is from 001-999.
Number String can be a complete telephone number, truncated telephone number or an area code.
Number string is of maximum 8 digits with (0-9, #. *).
By default, Blank for all indices.
Use following command to clear the Number String for an Index:
7801-1-Index-#*
7801-2-Index-Index-#*
7801-*-#*
Destination Address
Use following command to program the Destination Address in peer-to-peer table:
7802-1-Index-Destination Address-#*
7802-2-Index-Index-Destination Address-#*
7802-*-Destination Address-#*
Where,
Index is from 001-999.
Destination Address is of maximum 40 char. with ASCII.
By default, Blank for all indices.
Use following command to clear the destination address for an index:
7802-1-Index-#*
7802-2-Index-Index-#*
7802-*-#*
Name
Use following command to program the Name in peer-to-peer table:
7803-1-Index-Name-#*
7803-2-Index-Index-Name-#*
7803-*-Name-#*
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1373
Where,
Index is from 001-999.
Name is a string of alphanumeric characters of maximum 8 characters.
Use first 25 keys and the redial key to enter the name. Terminate with #*.
By default, Blank for all indices.
Display Name field is not sent in the SIP message. It is just a tag for the entry.
Use following command to clear the Name for an Index:
7803-1-Index-#*
7803-2-Index-Index-#*
7803-*-#*
• Differentiating the Proxy and Non-Proxy trunk:
• Refer the chapter “Configuring SIP Trunks”. The system will consider the SIP trunk to be party, if the
registrar server is programmed for it. If the registrar server address is not programmed, it will be
considered as non-proxy trunk.
• Using existing CUG table for making outgoing call using SIP Trunk:
• We can use the existing CUG Table of the system i.e. program the extension number or PBX
Exchange ID in the CUG table and Assign the OGTBG (consisting of SIP Non-proxy trunk).
• Thus when the user dials the extension number directly or with PBX exchange ID, CUG table will be
checked first and if the number is found in the CUG table, call will be routed using the OGTBG
programmed for that number.
How to configure the PBX and how the call will be routed when different
type of calls is made is explained below:
Case 1:
2001 of PBX-A dials 3001 after picking up the Handset:
• The call should land on station 3001 of PBX-E.
• Program 3001(or 3 or 30 or 300) with OGTBG containing SIP Trunk (Non-Proxy Trunk) in the CUG
table of PBX-A. Program Maximum dialed digits as 4 for this index. All other parameters in the CUG
table should be blank.
• Program 3001(or 3 or 30 or 300) and Destination Address 192.168.1.1 in the Peer-to-Peer table.
• When 2001 dials 3001, it will be compared in the CUG table. As number is matched in the CUG table,
OGTBG is decided.
• From OGTBG it is decided that it is a SIP trunk, thus Peer-to-Peer table is checked and Destination
address is found from the table.
• Use the ‘SIP’ as station for incoming call, by assigning ‘*’ as ‘SIP ID’ for the SIP trunk.
• Thus in the SIP message [email protected] is send from PBX-A.
1374 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• PBX-E receives [email protected] in the SIP message.
• PBX-E checks the CUG table first and as 3001 is not programmed in the CUG table, it checks the
flexible number of the stations.
• 3001 is found in the flexible number list of PBX-E.
• Thus the call is routed to the station 3001 of PBX-E.
• The call will be routed even if 3001 is programmed in the CUG table. For this, enable self route flag.
Case 2:
2001 of PBX-A dials 31-2001 (with PBX exchange ID) after picking up the handset. The call should land on
station 2001 of PBX-C:
• Program 31(or 312 or 3120 or 312001) with OGTBG containing SIP Trunk (Non-Proxy Trunk) in the CUG
table of PBX-A. Program Maximum dialed digits as 6 for this index. All other parameters in the CUG table
should be blank.
• Program 31(or 312 or 3120 or 312001) and Destination Address 192.168.1.3 in the Peer-to-Peer table.
• Program 31 (or 312 or 3120 or 312001) with Self Route Flag Enabled and strip digit count2 in the CUG
table of PBX-C.
• Use the ‘SIP’ as station for incoming call, by assigning ‘*’ as ‘SIP ID’ for the SIP trunk.
• When 2001 dials 312001, it will be compared in the CUG table. As number is matched in the CUG table,
OGTBG is decided.
• From OGTBG it is decided that it is a SIP trunk, thus Peer-to-Peer table is checked and Destination
address is found from the table.
• Thus in the SIP message [email protected] is send from PBX-A.
• PBX-C receives [email protected] in the SIP message.
• PBX-C checks the CUG table first and 312001 is found in the CUG table with self route flag enable and
strip digit count 2.
• Thus the call is routed to the station 2001 of PBX-C after striping of 31.
Case 3:
2001 of PBX-A dials 3001 using Trunk Access Code (TAC) after picking up the handset i.e. by dialing 0-3001:
• The call should land on station 3001 of PBX-E.
• Program LCR-Number Based (assign OGTBG containing SIP trunk (Non-proxy) to number 3) or assign
SIP Trunk (Non-Proxy trunk) for the TAC 0.
• Program 3001(or 3 or 30 or 300) and Destination Address 192.168.1.1 in the Peer-to-Peer table.
• Use the ‘SIP’ as station for incoming call, by assigning ‘*’ as ‘SIP ID’ for the SIP trunk.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1375
• When 2001 dials 0-3001, OGTBG is decided as per the programming i.e. LCR-Number based or OGTBG
assigned to TAC.
• From OGTBG it is decided that it is a SIP trunk, thus Peer-to-Peer table is checked and Destination
address is found from the table.
• Thus in the SIP message [email protected] is send from PBX-A.
• PBX-E receives [email protected] in the SIP message.
• PBX-E checks the CUG table first and as 3001 is not programmed in the CUG table, it checks the flexible
number of the stations.
• 3001 is found in the flexible number list of PBX-E.
• Thus the call is routed to the station 3001 of PBX-E.
Case 4:
2001 of PBX-A dials 2001using Trunk Access Code i.e. by dialing 0-312001. Call should land on station 2001
of PBX-C:
• Program LCR-Number Based (assign OGTBG containing SIP trunk (Non-proxy) to number 31) or assign
SIP Trunk (Non-Proxy trunk) for the TAC 0.
• Program 31(or 312 or 3120 or 312001) and Destination Address 192.168.1.3 in the Peer-to-Peer table.
• Use the ‘SIP’ as station for incoming call, by assigning ‘*’ as ‘SIP ID’ for the SIP trunk.
• Program 31 (or 312 or 3120 or 312001) with Self Route Flag Enabled and strip digit count2 in the CUG
table of PBX-C.
• When 2001 dials 0-312001, OGTBG is decided as per the programming i.e. LCR-Number based or
OGTBG assigned to TAC.
• From OGTBG it is decided that it is a SIP trunk, thus Peer-to-Peer table is checked and Destination
address is found from the table.
• Thus in the SIP message [email protected] is send from PBX-A.
• PBX-C receives [email protected] in the SIP message.
• PBX-C checks the CUG table first and 312001 is found in the CUG table with self route flag enable and
strip digit count 2.
• Thus the call is routed to the station 2001 of PBX-C after striping of 31.
Case 5:
2001 should be able to call the local PSTN number 28111263 of Mumbai by dialing Trunk Access Code i.e. by
dialing 0-02228111263. The call should be routed to the PSTN number 28122263 of PBX-E:
• Program LCR-Number Based (assign OGTBG containing SIP trunk (Non-proxy) to number 022) or assign
SIP Trunk (Non-Proxy trunk) for the TAC 0.
1376 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Program 022 and Destination Address 192.168.1.1 in the Peer-to-Peer table.
• Use the ‘SIP’ as station for incoming call, by assigning ‘*’ as ‘SIP ID’ for the SIP trunk.
• Program 022 with OGTBG containing any analog or digital trunk in the CUG table of PBX-E. Program Strip
digit count = 3. All other parameters in the CUG table should be blank.
• When 2001 dials 0-02228111263, OGTBG is decided as per the programming i.e. LCR-Number based or
OGTBG assigned to TAC.
• From OGTBG it is decided that it is a SIP trunk, thus Peer-to-Peer table is checked and Destination
address is found from the table.
• Thus in the SIP message [email protected] is send from PBX-A.
• PBX-E receives [email protected] in the SIP message.
• PBX-E checks the CUG table first and as 022 is programmed in the CUG table, it decides the OGTBG.
• Using the trunk programmed in the OGTBG, it dials out the number 28111263 after stripping off the digit
022.
• Thus the call is routed to the PSTN number 28111263 through PBX-E.
Relevant Topics:
1. “Closed User Group (CUG)”
2. “Configuring SIP Trunks”
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1377
PLCC-An Introduction
What’s this?
• ETERNITY-PLCC EPAX is a digital PBX. It uses a digital switch and hence is a 100% non-blocking
system. In PLCC network, number of PLCC EPAX needs to be connected.
• Refer to diagram showing cluster of exchanges in a PLCC network. Each exchange in PLCC network is
assigned with Exchange Identity (SID) in order to get identified by other exchanges in the network. Thus
each exchange is identified by Exchange Identity (SID). As shown, an exchange is connected to the other
exchange through an E&M tie line. Also, it is possible that an exchange may not be directly connected to
all other exchanges in a PLCC network through E&M tie lines.
• For example, SID-52 exchange is connected to SID-51, SID-34, SID-71 and SID-60 exchanges through
direct E&M tie lines. However, SID-52 exchange is not directly connected to SID-61, SID-62 and SID-72
exchanges through E&M tie lines.
• Following example shows how a call is established.
• Consider, an example where subscriber 20 of SID-52 needs to call subscriber 30 of SID-51. After
dialing trunk access code, dial 51 (SID number of the exchange) and then dial 30 (subscriber number
of SID-51). This is how a call is completed, as both exchanges; SID-51 and 52 are connected through a
direct E&M tie line.
• However, consider another example, where subscriber 20 of SID-52 needs to call subscriber 10 of SID-
61. Even though, here both exchanges are not connected through direct E&M tie line, it is possible by
dialing trunk access code with SID number of the exchange (here 61) followed by subscriber number
(here 10). However, the call will proceed through SID-60 and then reach SID-61. This is called Transit
Call. Here, the subscriber will not be able to know that call has proceeded to the required exchange
through transit facility.
PLCC Network
E&M Tie Line SID-62
Sub. 10
SID-61 Sub. 11
Sub. 12
SID-34 SID-60
Sub. 20
SID-52 Sub. 21
Sub. 22
SID-51 SID-71
SID-72
Sub. 30 Sub. 31
1378 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
E1 E2 En
PLCC-EPAX (SID-61)
E&M1 E&M2 E&M3 E&Mn
PLCC-EPAX
(SID-70)
E&M1 E&Mn
PLCC-EPAX E&M1
(SID-34)
E&M1 E&M2
E1 PLCC-EPAX E1
E&M2 (SID-52)
E2 E2
E&M3 E&M3
En En
E&Mn E&Mn
E&M1 E&M2 E&M3 E&Mn
PLCC-EPAX (SID-51)
E1 E2 En
PLCC-Priority
• All callers do not have same hierarchical position in an organization. It is not advisable to keep a call
waiting ofsome important person just because there is already one unimportant call pending at the
destination. The important caller should be allowed to jump the queue and be attended first ahead of other
earlier pending calls.
• The ETERNITY supports flexible priority assignment for different users. Each port can be assigned a
priority level between “0” to “9”. Higher the priority level, more important the caller is. Accordingly 0 has the
least priority and 9 has the highest priority.
• This feature enables a station user to free the system resources (station or a trunk) for him.
The PLCC functional module requires a license. You must purchase a license to activate CCS Signaling
when End Point and Transit, Express Signaling, and Seizure Pulse and Release Pulse Signaling. Refer the
topic “License Management”.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1379
How to use
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial Station/Trunk Access Code. Busy tone
The called station/trunk gets disconnected. You get dial tone after the
3 Dial #*.
confirmation tone.
4 Dial Station/External Number. Ring Back Tone
How it works
• Suppose, Station A and Station B are talking to each other. Station C calls Station B and finds it to be busy.
If he uses Priority, he gets connected to Station B. Station A gets disconnected and gets error tone.
However, for this to happen the priority of Station C should be higher than that of Station B and Station A
else he won’t be able to use this feature.
• Likewise suppose Station A is talking to an external party through trunk 1. Station B tries to grab Trunk 1.
On finding it busy, he uses Priority. Doing so, he gets connected to trunk 1 and gets P&T dial tone whereas
Station A gets disconnected and gets error tone. However, for this to happen priority of Station B should
be higher than Station A. In this case, priority of the trunk is not considered.
• Suppose station A is talking to an external party through trunk1. Station B calls station A and finds it busy.
He uses Priority. Doing so, station B gets dial tone whereas, the trunk 1 gets disconnected.
Priority-Within the Exchange
Under this facility any subscriber having priority access can enter in to conversation with two conversing
subscribers within the exchange.
E&M tie line E&M tie line
SID-61 SID-52 SID-34
In conversation Dials. Gets busy tone.
Uses priority by dialling
'#*'
Sub. 20 Sub. 21 Sub. 22
(Without priority access) (Without priority access) (With priority access)
How to use
Please refer above diagram. If any two subscribers, say 20 and 21 of an exchange with SID-52 (without priority
access) are in conversation and a third subscriber, say 22 (of same exchange) with priority access and wants to
talk with subscriber 21. But, when subscriber 22 dials for subscriber 21, it gets busy tone. Subscriber 22 can use its
priority by dialing code ‘#*’ in such case and can come in conference with subscribers 20 and 21.
1380 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Priority-In Other Exchange
Under this facility any subscriber having priority access can enter in to conversation with two conversing
subscribers in two different exchange.
E&M tie line E&M tie line
SID-61 SID-52 SID-34
Dials. Gets busy tone.
Uses priority by dialling In conversation
'# *'
Sub. 10 Sub. 20 Sub. 21
(With priority access) (Without priority access) (Without priority access)
How to use
Please refer above diagram. If any two subscribers, say 20 and 21 of an exchange with SID-52 are in conversation
and a subscriber, say 10 of an exchange with SID-61 (from the same network with priority access) want to talk with
subscriber 20 of SID-52. After dialing the required subscriber 20 of SID-52, he gets busy tone. Subscriber 10 of
SID-61 can now press ‘#*’ on his telephone and can get into conference with both subscriber 20 and 21 of SID-52.
Priority-Over Busy E&M Tie Line
Under this facility any subscriber having priority access can use priority to free a busy E&M tie line.
E&M tie line
SID-61 SID-52
Dials. Gets busy tone.
Uses priority by dialling
'#*'
In conversation
Sub. 10 Sub. 11 Sub. 20 Sub. 21
(With priority access) (Without priority access) (Without priority access)
How to use
Please refer diagram, if two subscribers, say 20 of SID-52 (without priority access) and 11 of SID-61 (without
priority access) are in conversation on an E&M tie line. Both this exchanges SID-52 and SID-61 are connected with
each other through a single E&M tie line. Now, if subscriber, say 10 (with priority access) of SID-61 wants to talk
with subscriber 21 of SID-52, then he will get busy tone. Subscriber 10 of SID-61 can now use its priority by
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1381
pressing ‘#*’ on his telephone and can get into conference with both subscriber 11 of SID-61 and subscriber 20 of
SID-52. After termination of the call by subscribers 11 and 20, subscriber 10 can get dial tone and make a call on an
E&M tie line to subscriber 21 of SID-52.
PLCC-Routing Table
• In PLCC network, number of PLCC-EPAX needs to be connected. The entire network should behave as a
single unit or one group. It is not feasible to have unique station numbers throughout the network. In such
cases, an Exchange ID is assigned to the PBX and a routing table is programmed in the exchange. In case
of newly added exchange in the network, the routing tables of other exchanges required to be modified.
In the above figure, 3 PBX systems are connected through E&M connectivity.
• T1 to Tn are trunk lines from the local central office (CO).
• S1 to Sn are stations.
• E&M1 to E&M3 are E&M lines between the three PBX systems.
How it works
In this application, it is possible to have same station number in two or more PBXs of the network. Few new words
have been used to explain PLCC routing table, each of these words have been explained below:
Routing Table: This table has five parameters viz. Route Index, Route Code, OG Trunk Bundle Group, Strip Digit
Count and Self Route flag. The PLCC routing table programming works according to this table.
Route Route Strip Digit Self Route Maximum Dialed
OGTBG
Index Code Count Flag Digits
001
250
1382 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Route Index: Maximum 250 different routes (001-250) can be programmed.
Route Code: Route code could be of maximum sixteen digits. Digits 0 to 9, # and * are allowed. Generally, route
code should be a unique number. For example in the figure given above, route code for PBX-A can be defined as
‘21’, route code for PBX-B can be defined as ‘22’ and that for PBX-C can be defined as ‘23’.
OG Trunk Bundle Group: An OG Trunk Bundle Group (OGTBG) is assigned to each route code. Whenever a call
is to be made on that route, a free trunk from the OGTBG is selected and the station number is dialed on it. The
same logic of rotation On/Off for trunk selection from the OGTBG is used. If rotation is OFF then always the first
trunk in the OGTBG is selected. If it is busy then the next trunk in the group is selected. This helps to select an
alternate route. Whereas if rotation is ON then the trunks in the OGTBG are selected in round robin fashion.
Strip Digit Count: This count signifies the number of digits to be striped of while dialing/decoding a number. To
elaborate: Consider figure 1. The requirement is that if station 2001 of PBX-B dials 212002 and if E&M 1 is busy
then the call should reach station 2002 of PBX-A through alternate route. In this case the strip digit count of PBX-A
should be programmed as 2 and that of PBX-B and PBX-C should be programmed as 0. Doing so, when station
2001 of PBX-B dials 212002 and if E&M1 is busy then the call is routed through PBX-C. In this case, PBX-B dials
212002 on E&M3, PBX-C receive this code and dials out the same code i.e. 212002 on E&M2 without striping of
any digit. On receiving 212002, PBX-A strips of two digits as per the programming and routes the call to station
2002.
Self-Route Flag: This flag signifies that the digits being dialed are for the same PBX and are not to be dialed on the
E&M trunk.
Maximum dialed digits: When digits are dialed on the trunk, the system waits for inter digit timer after the last digit
is dialed. In order to avoid this timer and number of digits dialed to be routed without further delay, count for the
number of digits to be programmed in this field. If the number of digits received are equal to the parameters
programmed then the number is dialed out immediately without waiting for the inter digit timer. If the number of
digits dialed by the user are not equal to the digits programmed, the number is dialed after inter digit timer.
Consider a case in which PLCC network has exchanges ‘A’, ‘B’, ‘C’ with station numbers 2001 to 2100 for PBX ‘A’,
3001 to 3100 for PBX ‘B’ and 4001 to 4100 for PBX ‘C’. Route code can be defined as ‘2’, ‘3’ and ‘4’ for PBX ‘A’,
PBX ‘B’ and PBX ‘C’ respectively. When station number 2001 wants to talk to 2050, he dials the required number.
PBX ‘A’ checks subsequent dialed digit and transfer the call to station number 2050. If first digit happens to be 3 or
4 the call is transferred to PBX ‘B’ or PBX ‘C’ respectively. PBX ‘B’ and PBX ‘C’ checks for second and subsequent
digits. If the dialed number is available in the exchange then the call is transferred to destination. If the dialed
number is not available then the error message will be given by that particular exchange.
The PLCC Routing table should be programmed carefully. Specified Route code in association with Self Route Flag
disable will make the call to be routed on trunk specified in OG Trunk Bundle Group.
OG Call with Trunk Access Code:
In PLCC applications, SLT numbers are duplicated. Internal and External dialing is differentiated. Internal dialing
happens by dialing SLT numbers directly. External dialing starts with dialing the trunk access code (usually ‘0’)
followed by SID and remote SLT number. Suppose the exchange ID of PBX-A is 21 and that of PBX-B is 22. Both
PBXs have same station numbers, say 2001,2002, etc. Suppose a station of PBX-A wants to call 2001 of PBX-B.
He has two options. He can dial 222001 or 0222001 i.e one with route code 22 and other with route code 022.
Hence we need to program two entries in the routing table, one with route code 22 and other with route code 022.
The ETERNITY has only one routing table. The same table is used for Closed User Group and Closed
User Group-With Exchange ID. Hence the table has to be programmed keeping the application in mind.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1383
How to configure
For more details on above steps, please refer topic “Closed User Group (CUG)” and “Closed User Group-With
Exchange ID”.
PLCC-Express Line Network
ETERNITY-PLCC Express Line Communication System is a digital PBX. It uses a digital switch and hence is a
100% non-blocking system. ETERNITY-PLCC Express Line Communication System is available in three models:
ETERNITY GE-6S, ETERNITY ME-10S and ETERNITY ME-16S.
Refer to diagram in ‘Introduction to PLCC Network’ topic showing cluster of substations in a PLCC network. A
substation in a PLCC network is connected to any other substation through a dedicated PLCC express line (i.e. 4/6
wire E&M tie line) as shown in the diagram.
How to configure
PLCC Express Line Communication System is one of the applications of the ETERNITY. We recommend the user
to read relevant topics before programming it for PLCC Express Line application.
Step 1
Refer chapter “E&M Feature Template” to program the feature in an E&M Feature Template.
Step 2
Refer chapter “E&M Feature Template” to assign default values to an E&M Feature Template.
Step 3
Refer chapter “E&M Feature Template” to assign an E&M Feature Template to an E&M.
Step 4
Refer chapter “Configuring DKP Extensions” to program a name for E&M trunk.
Step 5
Hardware ID is an attribute of a software port. Hardware ID of a software port decides where the port is physically
located. To derive hardware ID of a software port, we need slot number and port number of the card. Hence, all the
programming is done for the software port and not for the hardware ID. Accordingly, the software port number is
used for all the programming. Please refer “Software Port and Hardware ID” for more details, to assign hardware ID
to an E&M software port:
Step 6
Refer chapter “Station Advanced Feature Template” to assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to an E&M.
Step 7
Refer chapter “Station Advanced Feature Template” to assign a Station Basic Feature Template to an E&M.
Step 8
Please refer “Time Tables” chapter to program the time zone of a trunk.
Step 9
To program a feature in a Trunk Feature Template, please refer “Trunk Feature Template” for more details.
Step 10
To assign a Trunk Feature Template to an E&M, please refer “Trunk Feature Template” topic.
1384 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Step 11
Refer chapter “DSS Keys Programming” to assign a function to a key of DSS-64 assigned to a DKP. In this
commands function type and function number can be programmed as explained below.
Function:
A function should be assigned to these Keys, which they should perform. There are 2 different types of functions,
which can be assigned to a key for PLCC express line application. Each function that can be assigned to a key is
given unique number. Following table list the function types available:
Function Type Meaning Function Number/Port
00 Null --
06 Access a trunk 001 to 128
Step 12
Refer chapter “DSS Keys Programming” to assign a function to a DKP key. In this command refer above
explanation to program ‘Function Type’.
Step 13
Define dialing property of E&M port. The dialing properties are based on the applications. If the dialing type for a
E&M is programmed as pulse type then Pulse-Dialing ratio should be defined. The E&M support six different Pulse
Dialing Ratio’s.
Value Meaning/Ratio
1 10PPS, 1:2
2 10PPS, 2:3
3 10PPS, 1:1
4 20PPS, 1:2
5 20PPS, 2:3
6 20PPS, 1:1
For assigning Dial Type and Pulse Dial Ratio, please refer “E&M Feature Template” topic.
Relevant Topics:
1. “Trunk Feature Template” 546
2. “Time Tables” 1671
3. “E&M Feature Template” 565
4. “Closed User Group (CUG)” 1028
5. “Closed User Group-With Exchange ID” 1033
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1385
Presence
What's this?
Extension users may want to indicate their availability to callers from other extensions.
For example, an extension user may want to leave his desk for an indefinite period, but does not want to use Call
Forward or set Do Not Disturb. He wants to indicate to callers about his absence. Similarly, extension users who
are present at their desk may want to hide their presence from other users; or they may want to show their current
activity to the other extension users like they are Busy, or are away from their desks, or on the phone with someone
on another call, etc.
With the Presence feature of ETERNITY, extension users, including the Operator, can 'publish' their presence to
callers from other extensions. By doing so, they can indicate to the other extensions about their availability.
In the same way, the Presence feature allows extension users to view the 'Presence' status (availability) of the
extensions that they want to call, before making the call or when their call is not answered.
How it works
Publishing Presence
Any SLT, DKP, ISDN Terminal, and SIP Extension User can 'publish' their presence by setting any of the messages
listed in the following on their phone, by dialing the access code for this feature.
SIP Extension users who want to publish their presence have two options:
• Using the PUBLISH feature supported by the SIP Client.
• Using the feature access code for Publish Presence supported by ETERNITY.
The first option requires the parameter 'PUBLISH' to be enabled in the SIP Extension Settings. Refer
“Configuring SIP Extensions”. By default, this parameter is disabled.
Publishing Presence Messages
0. Absent: When an extension user sets 'Absent' as the message, all incoming internal as well as external
calls will be blocked from landing on his/her extension.
When any other DKP extension user calls this extension, the text message 'User Absent' will appear on
the caller's phone display.
If the extension phone that has set 'Absent' is a DKP, the letter 'A' appears on the phone's display to
indicate absence.
The letter 'A' disappears when the extension user sets a presence message other than 'Absent'.
As 'Absent blocks incoming external as well as internal calls, it can be used as an extension of the “Do Not
Disturb (DND)” feature, which blocks only internal incoming calls.
1386 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• When an SLT extension user calls the extension which has set 'Absent', an error tone will be played.
However, it is possible for the SLT extension user to find out the presence status of the called
extension. Refer “Viewing Presence” later in this topic.
• External callers who call the extension, on which 'Absent' is set, will get an error tone only.
• Outgoing calls can be made from the extension which has set 'Absent'. Only incoming calls are
restricted.
• If more than one extension is configured as "Operator" (routing group), incoming calls will be blocked
only on the Operator extension which has set User Absent.
1. Present:
When an extension user sets 'Present', all incoming calls will be received as normal on this extension.
If previously set as 'Absent', when a DKP extension user sets 'Present' the letter 'A' will disappear from the
phone's display.
When any other DKP extension user calls this extension, the name of the extension user will be displayed
on the caller's phone display, when the called extension is ringing.
2. Auto Detect: When an extension user sets 'Auto Detect', the system will detect the state of the phone;
depending on the call state, it will publish the presence message to the other extensions. Three types
Publish Presence messages are possible, with Auto Detect:
a. Idle: When the system detects the extension phone to be ON-Hook, it indicates the status of the phone
to other extensions 'idle'.
b. On the Phone: When the system detects the phone to be OFF-Hook, or in speech with another party
or if it detects an incoming call placed on the phone, it will indicate to the other extensions that this
extension user is 'On the Phone' with another party.
c. DND Text message: When the system detects that the extension phone has Do Not Disturb (DND) set
on it with a DND Text message, it will display to the calling extension, the DND message set by the
called party (this may be the default DND message or the DND Text message set by the called
extension).
3. Away: When an extension user sets 'Away', the system will display this message to the other extensions.
4. On the Phone: When an extension user sets 'On the Phone', the system will display this message to the
other extensions.
5. Do Not Disturb: The extension user can set this message to be published to other extensions, if s/he
wants to work uninterrupted.
Unlike the DND Feature, the extension user who has set this message will continue to receive calls both
internal as well as external calls, as the system considers this extension as 'present'.
6. I am Mobile: The extension user can set this message to be displayed to other extensions, when s/he is
not at the desk.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1387
7. In Meeting: The extension user can set this message to be displayed to the callers, if s/he is busy in a
discussion or meeting.
8. Out for Meal: The extension user can set this message to be displayed to other extensions when going on
a lunch break.
9. Out of Office: The extension user can set this message to be displayed to the callers when s/he leaves
the office temporarily.
When an extension user sets any Publish Presence message other than 'Absent', the system will consider
the user as 'Present'. All incoming and outgoing calls will be allowed on this extension.
It is possible to program another message in place of Publish Presence messages listed from 6 to 9: I am
Mobile, In a Meeting, Out for Meal, Out of Office.
Publish Presence messages can be set or changed for any extension from the System Administrator (SA)
mode.
Viewing Presence
• Extension users can know the status of another extension user before calling or when the extension user
does not answer the call.
• Generally, when DKP extension users call another extension, the name of the called extension is
displayed on the calling DKP extension. Now, if the flag 'Display User Status during Call' is enabled in the
System Parameters, when DKP extension users call another extension, the calling DKP extensions will be
displayed the 'presence' status message published by the called extension187.
• SLT extension users, whose phone is equipped with a CLI display, can see the status of another extension
by dialing a feature access code, then going ON-Hook. The system will ring back the SLT and send the
Presence status of the desired extension as CLI.
• SIP extension users can use the Presence feature of ETERNITY to view the presence status of other
extensions. For this, they must dial the feature access code and the number of the desired extension.
• SIP extension users who want to view the status of other extensions using the feature supported by their
SIP Client, must have 'Presence Subscription' enabled in their SIP Extension Settings. Refer “Configuring
SIP Extensions”.
How to configure
This feature involves the programming of the following parameters:
• 'Display User Status during Call' flag: DKP extension users will be able to view the presence status for
the called extension only if this flag is enabled in the System Parameters.
• PUBLISH: SIP extension users who want to publish their presence using the feature supported by their
SIP client will be able to publish their presence status only if this feature is enabled in their SIP Extension
Settings. This parameter is not necessary, if they want to publish presence using the feature of ETERNITY.
187. DKP users can also dial a feature access code and the number of the extension to see the status of that extension on their DKP.
But this would not be required, if the 'Display User Status during Call' flag is enabled in the System Parameters.
1388 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Presence Subscription: SIP extension users who want to view the presence of other extensions using
the feature supported by their SIP client must have this feature enabled in their SIP Extension Settings.
This parameter is not necessary, if they want to view presence using the feature of ETERNITY.
• Publish Messages: It is possible to customize the Publish Messages listed above from 6 to 9 viz.: 'I am
Mobile', 'In Meeting', 'Out for Meal', 'Out of Office'.
The above parameters, with the exception of 'Publish Messages', can be programmed using both Jeeves and
a Telephone. You can program 'Publish Messages' using Jeeves only.
Programming Presence using Jeeves
• Log into Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the 'System Parameters' link to open the page.
• Go to 'Display Presence Status during Call on DKP'. Click to enable the flag.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page.
• Click 'Publish Message'.
• You can change message number 6 to 9 as desired. The string may consist of a maximum of 16
characters.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your settings.
• Click the link 'VoIP Configuration'.
• Click 'SIP Extension Settings' under VoIP Configuration to open the page.
• Now, go to the desired SIP Extension number for which you want to enable the features PUBLISH and
Presence Subscription. By default both features are disabled. Click the respective check boxes to enable
the features.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your settings.
• Log out of Jeeves or continue, as desired.
Programming Presence using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To enable/disable 'Display Presence Status during Call on DKP', dial:
• 5320-Flag
Where,
Flag is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
By default, flag is disabled.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1389
For SE commands to enable PUBLISH and Presence Subscription on SIP Extensions, see
“Configuring SIP Extensions using a Telephone”.
• Exit SE mode.
How to use
This feature requires you to dial your User Password. The default User Password 1111 is not accepted. Please
change the User Password first.
Publish Presence can be set for an extension also from the System Administrator mode.
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users
Publishing Presence by Extension User
• Press DSS Key assigned to PUBLISH presence.
OR
• Dial 104
• Enter User Password on the prompt.
• Scroll to the desired Publish message from the menu:
• Absent
• Present
• Auto Detect
• Away
• On the Phone
• Do Not Disturb
• I am Mobile
• In Meeting
• Out for Meal
• Out of Office
• Press Enter key to select message.
• You get the confirmatory tone.
Publishing Presence from SA Mode
• Press DSS Key assigned to PUBLISH presence.
OR
• Dial 1072-014
• Enter Destination Number, i.e. the number of the extension Publish Presence is to be set.
• Scroll to the desired Publish message from the menu:
• Absent
• Present
• Auto Detect
• Away
• On the Phone
• Do Not Disturb
• I am Mobile
• In Meeting
1390 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Out for Meal
• Out of Office
• Press Enter key to select message.
• You get the confirmatory tone.
To view Presence Status
• Press DSS Key assigned to Display Presence Status.
OR
• Dial 1097.
• Enter Extension number
• The status of the extension number you dialed will be displayed on your phone's LCD.
• Go ON-Hook.
For SLT Users
Publishing Presence by Extension User
• Lift the handset.
• Dial 104-Password-Index Number
Index No. Meaning
0 Absent
1 Present
2 Auto Detect
3 Away
4 On the Phone
5 Do Not Disturb
6 I am Mobile
7 In Meeting
8 Out for Meal
9 Out of Office
• Replace handset.
Publishing Presence from SA Mode
• Lift the handset.
• Dial 1072-014-Extension Number-Index Number
Index No. Meaning
0 Absent
1 Present
2 Auto Detect
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1391
Index No. Meaning
3 Away
4 On the Phone
5 Do Not Disturb
6 I am Mobile
7 In Meeting
8 Out for Meal
9 Out of Office
• Replace handset.
To view Presence Status
You can view Presence Status of another extension only if your SLT has a CLI display.
• Lift handset.
• Dial 1097-Extension Number.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Go ON-Hook during confirmation tone.
• Your phone will ring and the status of the extension number you dialed will be displayed on your phone as
CLI.
1392 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Priority Calls in E&M MFCR2 Signaling
What's this?
In a network of PBXs connected over E&M trunks, callers may be unable to reach the desired station, as the called
station may be busy with another station.
The problem becomes more acute when important decision makers and persons involved in critical tasks in an
organization are unable to get through to the desired extension of the networked PBX, because it is busy.
ETERNITY supports Priority Call in E&M MFCR2 Signaling to overcome this. This feature makes it possible to land
a call on a busy extension and speak to the extension user. If you required, you can disconnect the remote party in
speech with the called extension.
E&M MFCR2 Signaling is currently supported on ETERNITY GE E&M Card only. This feature is currently
available on ETERNITY GE only.
How it works
• The extensions which are to be allowed Priority Call feature must be defined as 'Priority Subscriber' in their
Station Advanced Feature Templates.
• The extensions on which Priority Calls should be allowed to land must be 'Non-Priority Subscribers' (i.e.
defined as 'Ordinary Subscriber' in the Station Advanced Feature Template).
• In the following illustration, ETERNITY is networked with PBX-A over E&M Lines with MFCR2 Signaling.
Priority Call from ETERNITY to Networked PBX
2001 3001
M M
E E
Rx Rx
ETERNITY PBX-A
Tx Tx
SA SA
2002 3002
SB SB
• ETERNITY is the Originating PBX and PBX-A is the Terminating PBX.
• Extension 2001 of ETERNITY is a 'Priority Subscriber'. Extension 2002 is an 'Ordinary Subscriber' (Non-
Priority).
• Extension 3001 of PBX-A is a 'Non-Priority Subscriber'. Extension 3002 of PBX-A is also a 'Non-Priority
Subscriber'.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1393
• When Extension 2001 calls Extension 3001, depending upon its implementation, PBX-A understands it as
a priority call.
• If Extension 3001 is busy with another extension, 3002, and since both are non-priority subscribers, PBX-
A will automatically intrude the conversation between 3001 and 3002 and establish 3-way speech between
Extensions 2001, 3001 and 3002.
• Now, if Extension 2001 (the Priority caller) does not want Extension 3002 to be part of the conversation, s/
he can ask 3002 to go idle OR s/he can use the feature Forced Release Order to disconnect 3002 from the
conversation. 2001 can use Forced Release Order only if it is allowed to it in its “Class of Service (COS)”.
• When Extension 2001 dials the Feature Access Code for Forced Release Order, Extension 3002 will be
disconnected and two-way speech will be established between 2001 and 3001.
Priority Call from Networked PBX to ETERNITY
3001 2001
M M
E E
Rx Rx
PBX-A ETERNITY
Tx Tx
SA SA
3002 2002
SB SB
• PBX-A is the Originating PBX and ETERNITY is the Terminating PBX.
• Extension 3002 of PBX-A is a Priority Subscriber. Extension 3001 of PBX-A is Non-Priority Subscriber.
• Extension 2001 and 2002 of ETERNITY are Non-Priority Subscribers
• Extension 3002, a Priority Subscriber, calls Extension 2002 of ETERNITY.
• ETERNITY treats the call as priority call.
• Extension 2002 is busy with Extension 2001. ETERNITY checks the priority of both extensions. Since both
are non-priority subscribers, ETERNITY gives priority to Extension 3002 and plays beeps to 2002 and
2001 before establishing 3-way speech.
• ETERNITY will not treat a call as priority in the following cases:
• If the busy call is itself a priority call, i.e. at least one of the two parties in the busy call is a priority
subscriber.
• If any party involved in a matured call is Priority Extension or Trunk, the call will be considered as
priority call and hence no incoming priority call will be allowed to intrude this priority call.
• If the call is routed to data equipment, for example, fax machine.
• ETERNITY allows non-priority subscribers to intrude on a busy call using the feature Manual Priority
Intrusion. For this, the intruding extension must have the feature 'Manual Priority Intrusion' in its Class of
Service.
1394 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• When a non-priority extension requests Manual Priority Intrusion, ETERNITY receives an 80msec pulse
signal on the E wire of the E&M port, on detecting this signal ETERNITY will treat it as a Priority Call and
check whether the called extension that is busy can be intruded or not.
• If intrusion is possible ETERNITY creates a conference call, after playing beeps to notify both parties of the
3-way conference call. This beep will be played only if Conference beeps are enabled.
How to configure
For this feature to work, the extensions of the networked PBXs which are to be allowed Priority Call feature must be
defined as 'Priority Subscribers'.
Extensions on which Priority Calls must be allowed to land may be defined as 'Non-Priority Subscribers'.
If non-priority subscribers are to be allowed to Priority Calls when necessary, Manual Priority Intrusion feature must
be enabled in their Class of Service.
If the Priority Subscriber extension users are to be allowed to disconnect the second party (other than the desired
party) from the conversation during a Priority Call, the feature Forced Release Order must be enabled in their Class
of Service.
For Stations on which data terminals are connected (like Fax machine), it is recommended that the 'Station
Category' of these stations be programmed as 'Data Transmission' (in their Station Advanced Feature
Template).
Programming Extensions a Priority Subscribers
To define extensions of ETERNITY as 'Priority Subscribers' or 'Non-Priority Subscribers', you must set the
parameter "Station Category" in the Station Advanced Feature Template assigned to these extensions.
In the default Station Advanced Feature Template 01 assigned to all extensions of the ETERNITY, the Station
Category is set to 'Ordinary Subscriber', which means all extensions are by default, 'Non-Priority Subscribers'.
Since all extensions cannot be defined as 'Priority Subscribers', prepare a new Station Advanced Feature
Template, select the option 'Priority Subscriber' as Station Category in this template and apply it on the selected
extension that are to be defined as Priority Subscribers.
Refer the topic “Station Advanced Feature Template” for detailed instructions.
Programming Manual Priority Intrusion and Forced Release Order in Class of Service
In the default the default CoS group 01 in Station Basic Feature Template Number 01 assigned by default to all
extensions of ETERNITY, 'Manual Priority Intrusion' and 'Forced Release Order' are disabled.
If you want to allow all extensions these features, simply enable them in the default CoS group 01.
However, if either or both these features are to be allowed only to select extensions, follow these steps:
1. Define a CoS group with Manual Priority Intrusion/Forced Release Order enabled.
2. Prepare a Station Basic Feature Template with this CoS group applicable in all the “Time Zones”.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1395
3. Assign this new Template to the extensions to which Manual Priority Intrusion/Forced Release Order is to
be allowed.
Refer the topics “Class of Service (COS)” and “Station Basic Feature Template” for detailed instructions.
How to use
Manual Priority Intrusion
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users
• Dial the desired extension number.
• On Busy Tone, press HOLD key.
• Press DSS Key assigned to Manual Priority Intrusion (if programmed)
OR
• Dial *37.
• You are in 3-way speech.
For SLT Users
• Dial the desired extension number.
• On Busy Tone, press Flash to put call on hold.
• Dial *37.
• You are in 3-way speech.
Forced Release Order
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users
• Dial the desired extension number.
• When you are in 3-way speech,
• Press DSS Key assigned to Forced Release Order (if programmed)
OR
• Dial *38.
• You are connected the desired party. The second party is disconnected.
For SLT Users
• Dial the desired extension number.
• When you are in 3-way speech,
• Dial *38.
• You are connected the desired party. The second party is disconnected.
1396 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Priority
What’s this?
‘Priority’ is the precedence given to certain trunks and extensions over others in being answered by the destination
extension.
When ‘Priority’ is assigned to trunks, whenever there are incoming calls on multiple trunks at the same time, the call
on the trunk with higher priority will be answered by the landing destination extension/Operator first.
When Priority is assigned to Extensions, calls from extensions with higher priority will have precedence in landing
on the destination extension.
Higher Priority can be assigned to Extensions of important or higher ranking persons in an organization; for
example, calls from senior managers or top executives in an organization can be allowed to be answered first by
the destination extension.
Higher Priority can be assigned to particular Trunks, such as special or private trunk lines, trunk lines dedicated as
help lines or emergency trunks, or trunks designated as hotlines, so that when there are incoming calls on different
trunks at the same time, the call on these higher priority trunks gets answered first by the destination extension.
Priority can be assigned to all Trunk types (TWT, Mobile, SIP, T1E1PRI, BRI) and Extension types (SLT, DKP, ISDN
terminal, SIP, E&M as Station, Magneto port).
To understand how this feature works, consider this illustration:
M e nu S at 0 1 0 5:3 0
Priority: 9
Fwd Busy Fwd NR Cancel Mute Conf eren c
e Tr ansfer
DN D Voi e
c M
a li Nam es Redi al Rej ect Hol d
1 2 3 de
ETERNITY
ab c f
4 gh i 5 j kl 6 mno
C LI R 7 pq r s 8 t uv 9 w xyz
C A4
H ot il ne C A3
* 0 #
S IP 2 C A2
S IP 1 C A1
TWT Trunk 1 Priority: 5
TWT1 (Calls Operator at 10:00:00)
CO Priority: 9 2001
Incoming Call
at 10:00:10 Priority: 5
(Calls Operator at 10:00:05)
2002
Mobile Trunk 1
Priority: 7 Priority: 7
(Calls Operator at 10:00:15)
Me nu S at 0 1 0 5: 3 0
Incoming Call
at 10:00:12 Mobile 1
GSM
Fwd Busy Fwd NR Cancel M ute Conf ee
rn c
e Transfer
DN D Voi c
e Ma li Names
Redi al Rej ect Hol d
1 2 ab c 3 de f
4 gh i 5 j kl 6 m no
C LI R 7 pq r s 8 tuv 9 w xyz
C A4
H ot il ne C A3 * 0 #
S IP 2 C A2
S IP 1 C A1
Here,
• There are two incoming calls, one on the Analog Trunk, TWT 1 and the Mobile Trunk 1 at the same time.
• TWT Trunk 1 has priority, ‘9’, the Mobile Trunk 1 is assigned priority ‘7’.
• Three extensions, 2001, 2002 and 3001 are calling the Operator. Extension 3001 has priority ‘7’, while
extensions 2001 and 2002 have the same priority, ‘5’.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1397
• Now, on the Operator extension, which is the landing destination, the incoming calls from the trunks and
the extensions will land in the following chronological order:
Caller Time of the Call Priority
SLT 2001 10:00:00 5
SLT 2002 10:00:05 5
TWT
10:00:10 9
Trunk 1
Mobile
10:00:12 7
Trunk 1
DKP 3001 10:00:15 7
• These incoming calls, however, will appear on the Display of Operator’s phone (DKP or Extended IP
Phone) in the order of priority:
• TWT 1
• Mobile Trunk 1
• DKP 3001
• SLT 2001
• SLT 2002
• Now, when the Operator goes Off-hook (pressing speaker key or picking up the handset), the call on TWT
1 will be answered first, as TWT Trunk 1 has the highest priority.
• The Operator goes On-hook and then Off-hook, the call on Mobile Trunk 1 will be answered. Though
Mobile Trunk 1 and DKP 3001 have the same priority, ‘7’, Mobile Trunk 1 will be answered first, following
the chronological order.
• When the Operator goes On-hook after answering the call on Mobile Trunk 1, the call from DKP 3001 will
be placed on the Operator phone with a Priority Ring (configurable; default: Triple Ring).
• When the Operator goes Off-hook, the call from DKP 3001 is answered.
• When the Operator goes On-hook and then Off-hook after answering the call from DKP 3001, the call from
SLT 2001 will get answered first, though both 2001 and 2002 have the same priority, ‘5’. In this case,
Priority Ring will not be played.
• Thus, calls from trunks and extensions are answered by the landing destination in the order of priority.
Where priority is the same, calls are answered in chronological order. Calls from extensions with higher
priority are indicated by a Priority Ring on the landing destination.
Priority is relevant only when there is more than one call on the destination.
You can assign Priority to SLT extensions. However, Priority is not relevant when the SLT is a landing
destination, because there cannot be more than one call ringing on an SLT extension at a time.
1398 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
How to configure
To assign Priority to Trunks, you must set the priority in their “Trunk Feature Template”. See “Configuring Trunks”.
To assign Priority to Extensions, see instructions for configuring the respective Extension port type:
• “Configuring SLT Extensions”
• “Configuring DKP Extensions”
• “Configuring ISDN Terminals”
• “Configuring SIP Extensions”
• “Configuring E&M Lines”
• “Configuring Magneto Interface”
If required, you may change the Ring Pattern of the Priority Ring. See “Distinctive Rings” for instructions.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1399
Privacy
What’s this?
Extensions of ETERNITY can be protected from the intrusions by other extensions or from trunk calls by activating
Privacy.
How it works
Intrusions can occur on an extension when another extension invokes the following features:
• “DND-Override”
• “Interrupt Request (IR)”
• “Barge-In”
• “Raid”
Intrusions can also occur,
• When an external caller uses “Direct Inward Dialing (DID)” to reach an extension.
• When there is a call from another trunk line when you are in speech.
To prevent such intrusions, ETERNITY enables you to set the following types of Privacy:
• Privacy from Interrupt Request, Barge-In, DND Override: This type of Privacy protects an extension
from intrusions by other extensions using Interrupt Request, Barge-In or DND Override.
For example: Extension A has Privacy from Interrupt Request, Barge-In and DND Override.
Extension A and B are in speech, Extension C attempts to intrude the conversation Interrupt Request or
Barge-In. Extension C’s call will be blocked and C will get error tone.
Now, Extension A has set DND and Extension B attempts to override it using DND Override. Since A has
Privacy from DND Override, B’s call will be blocked and B will get error tone.
• Privacy from Raid: This type of Privacy protects an extension from intrusions by other extensions using
Raid.
For example: This type of Privacy is set on Extension A. Extension A and B are in speech, Extension C
uses Raid to intrude the conversation. Extension C’s call will be blocked and C will get error tone.
• Privacy from Trunk call intrusion: This type of Privacy prevents the extensions in the Trunk Landing
Groups that are busy from being intruded by another waiting call. For this type of Privacy to work, the
feature “CO Call Waiting”must be disabled on the extension.
For example: Extension A is the first trunk landing extension for calls on Trunk 1. Extension A and B are in
speech. A new call lands on Trunk 1. If A has CO Call Waiting beeps disabled, A will not hear the intrusion
beeps. The system will land the call on the next extension in the trunk landing group for calls on Trunk 1.
1400 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Privacy from DID call: This type of Privacy protects the extension from being accessed by external callers
using “Direct Inward Dialing (DID)”.
For example: This type of Privacy is set on Extension A. Extension A and B are in speech, external caller
C uses DID to call extension A. C’s call will be blocked and C will get error tone.
How to configure
To provide Interrupt Request to extension users, you must enable this feature in the “Class of Service (COS)”
assigned to them for the time zones in their “Station Basic Feature Template”.
By default, Privacy from Raid is enabled in the Class of Service of all Extension types: SLT, DKP, SIP, ISDN. So,
none of the extensions can raid the other. You may disable this feature in the Class of Service of extensions, which
you want to protect from Raid.
By default, Privacy from Interrupt Request, Barge-In and DND Override are disabled in the Class of Service of all
Extension types. You may enable this feature on extensions which you want to protect from intrusions using any of
these features.
By default, Privacy from DID is disabled on all Extension types. You may enable this feature on extensions which
you do not want external callers to reach.
By default, CO Call Waiting is disabled on all Extension types. You may keep this feature disabled on extensions
which you want to provide Privacy from Trunk Call intrusion beeps.
For instructions, see “Class of Service (COS)”, “Station Basic Feature Template”. Also see,
• “Configuring SLT Extensions”
• “Configuring DKP Extensions”
• “Configuring ISDN Terminals”
• “Configuring SIP Extensions”
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1401
QSIG
What's this?
• Q-Signaling (QSIG) is an ISDN based protocol for signaling between two PBXs. QSIG is a protocol based
on internationally agreed Standards for ISDN.
• You can network two or more ETERNITY using QSIG. This is known as 'Interoperability'.
• The ETERNITY supports QSIG on the T1E1PRI ports.
• The basic call procedure in the QSIG is implemented as per the ECMA-143.
• The generic functional protocol for the Supplementary Services is implemented as per ECMA-165. Refer
relevant chapter for more details for the features explained in this chapter.
This provides details about following:
a. QSIG Supplementary Services
b. Configuring for - Basic Call and Supplementary Services
c. Configuring for - IC Call using DDI Routing Over QSIG
QSIG support is a licensed feature of ETERNITY. To use this feature you must purchase a License Key.
Refer the topic “License Management” to know more.
a. QSIG Supplementary Services
The ETERNITY supports following supplementary services in QSIG:
• Advice of Charge (AOC)
• Identification:
• The Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP)
• Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR)
• The Connected Line Identification Presentation (COLP)
• Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR)
• Name Identification:
• The Calling Name Identification Presentation (CNIP)
• The Connected Name Identification Presentation (CONP)
• Call Diversion:
• Call Forward Unconditional (CFU)
• Call Forward On Busy (CFB)
• Call Forward on No Reply (CFNR)
• Call Completion:
• Call Completion on Busy Subscriber (CCBS)
• Call Completion on No Reply (CCNR)
1402 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Do Not Disturb (DND)
• Do Not Disturb - Override (DNDO)
• Call Intrusion (CI)
• Call Transfer (CT)
• Recall (RE)
• Message Wait Indication (MWI)
• Call Offer (CO)
The implementation of these features in QSIG is as per specific ECMA standards as described below.
Advice on Charge:
• Advice on Charge (AOC) is implemented as per ECMA-211 and ECMA-212.
• Using this feature, the caller can know the cost of the call made to public N/W using networked trunk. The
cost of the call will be determined by using Call Cost Calculation. Refer chapter “Call Cost Calculation
(CCC)”
.
• The ETERNITY supports called 'AOC-E' End of the Call Charge Information. ETERNITY supports
charging for calls made to public network. The Cost of the call is calculated by the end PBX from which the
call is terminated to public Network.
CLIP/CLIR/COLP/COLR/CNIP/CONP
• The Identification features are implemented as per ECMA-163 and ECMA-164.
• Refer chapters “Calling Line Identification and Presentation (CLIP)” and “Calling Line Identity Restriction
(CLIR)”.
Call Diversion
• Call Diversion is implemented as per ECMA-173 and ECMA-174. Refer chapters “Call Forward” and “Call
Forward-Remote”.
• Remote activation/deactivation of Call Forward is not supported.
Call Completion-on Busy Subscriber and on No Reply (CCBS and CCNR)
• Call Completion (CC) features CCBS and CCNR are implemented as per standards ECMA-185 and
ECMA-186.
• The CCBS is implemented as the feature Auto Call Back on Busy and the CCNR is implemented as the
feature Auto Call Back on No Reply. Refer chapter “Auto Call Back (ACB)”.
Do Not Disturb (DND)
• DND is implemented as per standards ECMA-193 and ECMA-194. Refer chapters “Do Not Disturb (DND)”.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1403
Do Not Disturb - Override (DNDO)
• DND is implemented as per standards ECMA-193 and ECMA-194. See the topic “Do Not Disturb (DND)”.
Call Intrusion (CI)
• Call Intrusion is implemented as per standards ECMA-202 and ECMA-203.
• The Call Intrusion (CI) is implemented as Raid feature. However the station on which intrusion is made, will
not get 'beeps'. On successful intrusion, the 'conference 3-party' type call will be established. See the topic
“Raid” and “Conference-3 Party”.
Call Transfer
• Call Transfer is implemented as per standards ECMA-177 and ECMA-178. Refer chapter “Call Transfer”.
• The ETERNITY supports Call Transfer by Joining method.
'CLIP-Hold' flag on the Transferring Station:
• If 'CLIP-Hold' flag is enabled on the Transferring Station, the ETERNITY will send the held party's number
as calling number while placing call on QSIG.
• If 'CLIP-Hold' flag is disabled on the Transferring Station, the ETERNITY will send the calling station's
number as calling number. Refer chapter “Calling Line Identification and Presentation (CLIP)” and “Station
Advanced Feature Template” for more details of CLIP-Hold.
• Note 1: It is recommended to enable CLIP Hold flag for the operator station, so that when operator
transfers the call to another PBX using QSIG, the terminating PBX (ETERNITY) can identify it as call
from Public network and treat as incoming call.
• Note 2: As a Terminating PBX, the ETERNITY will consider the call as internal or from public network
depending upon the length of the digits for the calling number received.
• Note 3: If Calling number is not received because of any reason, and CLIP- Hold flag is enabled, the
ETERNITY will send the 'Trunk Name' programmed for the trunk port as calling line identification.
Recall (RE)
• Recall (RE) is implemented as per standards ECMA-213 and ECMA-214 and ECMA-143.
• The ETERNITY supports Recall-Busy and Recall-No Answer features like ETERNITY features, Call
Transfer-On Busy and Call Transfer-While Ringing.
• Refer chapter “Call Transfer” for more details.
Message Wait Indication (MWI)
• Message Wait (MWI) is supported as per standards ECMA- 241 and ECMA-242.
• Refer chapter “Message Wait” for details about form of indications.
1404 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Call Offer
• Call Offer is implemented as per standards ECMA-191 and ECMA-192.
• The call offer feature is implemented as the 'Interrupt Request' feature.
• Refer chapter “Interrupt Request (IR)” for more details.
b. Configuring for - Basic Call and Supplementary Services
Configuration:
PSTN/ISDN
Q-Sig TAC-0 GSM/VoIP etc.
DS1-1 DS1-1
2103 3103
PBX-1 PBX-2
2102 3102
2101 3101
For simple application as shown in above figure, make settings as below for PBX 1 and PBX 2.
• Connect T1E1PRI line between PBX 1 and PBX 2.
• Now open Web Jeeves and make below settings in PBX 1 and PBX 2.
Settings at PBX 1:
Following basic settings are required in ETERNITY PBX 1.
• T1E1PRI Port Parameters:
• Set Signal Type as "E1 QSIG"
• Set Orientation Type as "Network"
• T1E1PRI PRI Parameters:
• Set ISDN PRI Variant as "QSIG E1"
• Closed User Groups (CUG)
Strip Digit Self Router Max. Dialed
Route Index Route Code OGTBG
Count Flag Digits
001 21 01 0 Enable 04
002 31 01 0 Disable 04
003 0 01 0 Disable 04
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1405
• OG Trunk Bundle Groups
OGTB OGTB OGTB OGTB
Group No. Rotation Flag LCR Type -------
Member 1 Member 2 Member 3 Member 8
01 Disable None 01 00 00 ------- 00
• OG Trunk Bundle
Automatic Number
Trunk Port Start Total
Template Rotation Translation (ANT)
Channel Trunk
Number Port Port Type Dialed Substitute
Number Count Apply
Type No. No. List No. List
01 T1E1PRI 001 01 030 Cyclic Disable 05 06
Following settings are required for CLI display.
• Program Outgoing (OG) Reference ID as "01" in T1E1PRI Port Parameters.
• DDI Routing-Outgoing Reference Table.
Table ID OG Ref. ID Start Channel No. Channel Count ISDN Number DDI Routing Ref. ID
01 01 01 30 2100 01
• DDI Routing-DDI Routing Table
Table Reference Start DDI Total DDI DDI No. Port Port Start DDI
ID ID No. Numbers Digit Count Type Number Flexible No.
001 01 2100 0100 4 FLEXNUM 000 2100
Settings at PBX 2:
Following basic settings are required in ETERNITY PBX 2.
• T1E1PRI Port Parameters
• Set Signal Type as "E1 QSIG"
• Set Orientation Type as "Terminal"
• T1E1PRI PRI Parameters
• Set ISDN PRI Variant as "QSIG E1"
• Closed User Groups (CUG)
Route Index Route Code OGTBG Strip Digit Count Self Router Flag Max. Dialed Digits
001 21 02 Note 0 Disable 04
002 31 02 Note 0 Enable 04
1406 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Assign OGTBG of T1E1PRI-1 used for QSIG connectivity with PBX 1.
• OG Trunk Bundle Groups
Group Rotation LCR OGTB OGTB OGTB OGTB
-------
Number Flag Type Member 1 Member 2 Member 3 Member 8
01 Disable None 01 00 00 ------- 00
02 Disable None 02 00 00 ------- 00
• OG Trunk Bundle
Automatic Number
Trunk Port Start Total
Template Rotation Translation (ANT)
Channel Trunk
Number Port Port Type Dialed Substitute
no. Count Apply
Type No. No. List No. List
01 Mobile 001 01 008 Cyclic Disable 05 06
02 T1E1PRI 001 01 030 Cyclic Disable 05 06
Following settings are required for CLI display.
• Program Outgoing (OG) Reference ID as "01" in T1E1PRI Port Parameters.
• DDI Routing-Outgoing Reference Table.
Table ID OG Ref. ID Start Channel No. Channel Count ISDN Number DDI Routing Ref. ID
01 01 01 30 3100 01
• DDI Routing- DDI Routing Table
Table Reference Start DDI Total DDI DDI No. Port Port Start DDI
ID ID No. Numbers Digit Count Type Number Flexible No.
001 01 3100 0100 4 FLEXNUM 000 3100
Basic Call:
Below examples show various calls between both PBX.
Example 1:
• To make call from station of PBX 1 to any station of PBX 2 or vice versa.
• From station 2101 of PBX 1, dial station number 3101 or from station 3101 of PBX 2, dial station number
2101.
Example 2:
• To make OG call from station of PBX 1 using Trunk of PBX 2.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1407
• From station 2101 of PBX 1, dial 0188 (TAC at PBX 2 for Trunk) and then dial 02652630555 (External Party
number).
Example 3:
• IC call on Trunk at PBX 2 using DID189.
• Enable DID on Mobile Trunk at PBX 2.
• Now External Party make IC call on Mobile port. IC call is answered by PBX 2. External Party gets DID
Music. Now External Party dials station number.
• Case 1: If External Party dials station number 3101 then call lands on 3101 of PBX 2.
• Case 2: If External Party dials station number 2101 then call lands on 2101 of PBX 1.
Supplementary Services:
Working of Supplementary Services of QSIG in ETERNITY is explained as below.
Identification:
From station 2101 of PBX 1, dial station number 3101.
• CLIP/CNIP:
Name and Number of station 2101 is displayed as CLI on station 3101.
• COLP/CONP:
When 3101 of PBX 2 answers the call then Name and Number of station 3101 is displayed on station 2101
using reverse DDI method.
• CLIR:
To restrict CLI at station 3101, below settings required for station 2101.
• Allow "CLI Restriction (CLIR)" in Class of Service for station 2101.
• Enable CLIR by dialing 103-1 from station 2101.
Here, Name and Number of station 2101 is not displayed on station 3101.
If "CLI Restriction (CLIR) Override" is enabled in Class of Service for station 3101, then Name and Number
of station 2101 is displayed on station 3101.
• COLR:
To restrict CLI when IC call answered by 3101, below settings required for station 3101.
188. Here 2101 of PBX 1 does not get dial tone after dialing 0 (TAC at PBX 2 for Trunk) because 0 is programmed in CUG table for PBX
1.
189. Refer "“c. Configuring for-IC Call using DDI Routing Over QSIG” topic for how to route Incoming Call on T1E1PRI/SIP over QSIG
using DDI Routing.
1408 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Allow "CLI Restriction (CLIR)" in Class of Service for station 3101.
• Enable CLIR by dialing 103-1 from station 3101.
Here, Name and Number of station 3101 is not displayed on station 2101 when station 3101 answers the
IC call.
If "CLI Restriction (CLIR) Override" is enabled in Class of Service for station 2101, then Name and Number
of station 3101 is displayed on station 2101.
• Call Diversion:
Station 2101 of PBX 1 wants to set Call Diversion (Call Forward) to station number 3101 of PBX 2.
• Call Forward-Unconditional:
From station 2101 of PBX 1, dial 131-3101-#*. Now all IC calls on 2101 gets forwarded to 3101 of PBX 2.
• Call Forward-on Busy:
From station 2101 of PBX 1, dial 132-3101-#*. Now all IC calls on 2101 gets forwarded to 3101 of PBX 2
when 2101 is busy.
• Call Forward- on No Reply:
From station 2101 of PBX 1, dial 133-3101-#*. Now all IC calls on 2101 gets forwarded to 3101 of PBX 2
when 2101 does not answer the IC call for RBT- Transfer on No Reply Timer.
• Call Follow Me does not work in QSIG.
• Call Forward-Remote does not work in QSIG.
• Call Forward-Dual Ring does not work in QSIG.
• Call Forward-External number on QSIG not supported i.e. if '0' is TAC code at PBX 2 and station 2101
of PBX 1 dials 131-0-02652630555 (External Number)-#* then station 2101 gets error tone.
• Call Completion:
Station 2101 of PBX 1 wants to set CCBS/CCNR (ACB) to station number 3101 of PBX 2.
• CCBS/CCNR:
From station 2101 of PBX 1, dial station number 3101 of PBX 2. Now dial Access code of ACB (Dial 2) to
set CCBS/CCNR on station 3101 of PBX 2.
• Call Intrusion:
Station 2101 of PBX 1 and station 3101 of PBX 2 are in speech. Now another station wants to make Call
Intrusion on station 2101 of PBX 1.
Case 1: Station 2102 of PBX 1 wants to make Call Intrusion on station 2101 of PBX 1.
• Allow "Raid" feature in Class of Service for station 2102 of PBX 1.
• Set "Priority" level of station 2102 higher than "Priority" level of station 2101.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1409
• Disable "Privacy from Raid" in Class of Service for station 2101 of PBX 1.
• Also disable "Privacy from Raid" in Class of Service for station 3101 of PBX 2.
• Now from station 2102, make call on 2101. After getting busy tone, dial Access code of Raid (Dial 5).
Speech will be established between all three parties 2101, 2102 and 3101.
If "Privacy from Raid" is enabled in Class of Service for station 2101 of PBX 1 or 3101 of PBX 2, then Raid
not possible in above case.
Case 2: Station 3102 of PBX 2 wants to make Call Intrusion on station 2101 of PBX 1.
• Allow "Raid" feature in Class of Service for station 3102 of PBX 2.
• Disable "Privacy from Raid" in Class of Service for station 2101 of PBX 1.
• Also disable "Privacy from Raid" in Class of Service for station 3101 of PBX 2.
• Now from station 3102 of PBX 2, make call on station number 2101 of PBX 1. After getting busy tone, dial
Access code of Raid (Dial 5). Speech will established between all three parties 2101, 3101 and 3102.
If "Privacy from Raid" is enabled in Class of Service for station 2101 of PBX 1 or 3101 of PBX 2, then Raid
not possible in above case.
• Call Transfer:
Station 2101 and station 2102 of PBX 1 are in speech. Now station 2101 of PBX 1 wants to transfer the
call to any station number or external number of PBX 2.
• From station 2101, dial Flash and then dial 3101 (Station number of PBX 2) or dial 0-02652630555
(External Number).
• Now from station 2101, goes ON hook or press 'Transfer' key to transfer the call.
• User can transfer the call after making speech with second party or when second party is 'Ringing' or
'Busy'.
• Call Recall:
Station 2101 of PBX 1 transfers the call to station 3101 of PBX 2 when station 3101 of PBX 2 is 'Ringing' or
'Busy'. Now station 3101 does not answer the call.
• Call gets return to station 2101 after expiry of 'Transfer on Busy Timer' for transfer- on busy case and
'Transfer while Ringing Timer' for Transfer- while ringing case.
• Call Offer:
Station 2101 of PBX 1 and station 3101 of PBX 2 are in speech. Now station 2102 of PBX 1 wants to give
Call Offer to station 3101 of PBX 2.
• Allow "Interrupt Request" feature in Class of Service for station 2102 of PBX 1.
• Now from 2102 of PBX 1, make call on station number 3101 of PBX 2. After getting busy tone, dial
Access code of Interrupt Request (Dial 3).
• Station 3101 of PBX 2 gets beeps.
1410 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
If "Privacy from Interrupt Request and Barge-In" is enabled in class of Service for station 3101 of PBX 2,
then Call Offer not possible from station 2102 of PBX 1.
• Do Not Disturb (DND):
Station 2101 of PBX 1 wants to set Do Not Disturb on his station.
• Allow "Do Not Disturb" in Class of Service for station 2101 of PBX 1.
• Now from station 2101, activate Do Not Disturb by dialing 181.
• Now station 3101 of PBX 2 will not be able to make call on station number 2101 of PBX 1.
• Do Not Disturb-Override (DNDO):
Station 2101 of PBX 1 has activated Do Not Disturb. Now station 3101 of PBX 2 wants to make call on
station 2101 of PBX 1.
• Allow "Do Not Disturb- Override" in Class of Service for station 3101 of PBX 2.
• Now station 3101 of PBX 2 can make call on station number 2101 of PBX 1.
If "Privacy from DND Override" is enabled in Class of Service for station 2101, then station 3101 of PBX 2
can not make call on station number 2101 of PBX 1.
Advice of Charge (AOC)
AOC is applicable for all external calls made by station of PBX 1 using trunk of PBX 2 (OG Gateway).
Example 1: AOC-OG Call
Station 2101 of PBX 1 makes external call by dialing 0-02652630555 (External Number).
• After completion of call, PBX 2 gives Cost of the call using AOC.
• Cost of call in AOC is calculated at PBX 2 as per parameters set in Web pages for 'Call Cost Calculation' at
PBX 2.
• If PBX 2 does not give any charge in AOC then no charge applies on station 2101 of PBX 1.
• No effect of Call Cost Calculation parameters set at PBX 1.
Example 2: AOC-Internal Call
Station 2101 of PBX 1 makes call station number 3101 of PBX 2.
• All calls between two stations of both PBX are free of charge.
Example 3: AOC-Call Transfer
Station 2101 and station 2102 of PBX 1 are in speech. Now station 2101 transfers the call to External Number
02652630555 using trunk of PBX 2.
• Cost of the call is given as per "Call Toggle Flag" and "Originating Flag" set in SMDR-Outgoing Calls at
PBX 2.
• If "Call Toggle Flag" is set to 'Split' at PBX 2, then charge before the call transfer is applied to station 2101
and charge after the call transfer is applied to station 2102.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1411
• If "Split Flag" is set to 'Don't Split' at PBX 2, then charge is applied as per "Originating Flag".
• If "Originating Flag" is set to 'Originating' then all charges before and after the call transfer is applied on
station 2101 who has transferred the call.
• If "Originating Flag" is set to 'Terminating' then all charges before and after the call transfer is applied on
station 2102.
Message Wait Indication (MWI):
Station 2101 of PINX1 is an Operator & he wants to set Message wait on station 3101 of PINX2.
• Open "Station Advanced Feature Template" page from Jeeves of PINX2 and program "MW Notification
Type" as Stuttered Dial Tone".
• From station 2101, dial Access Code "1076 - 3101-1", to set Message wait on station 3101 of PINX2.
• Now Message wait is set on station 3101. When user goes off hook from station 3101, he will get stuttered
dial tone.
Same way Message wait can also be canceled for 3101 by dialing access code "1076-3101-0".
c. Configuring for-IC Call using DDI Routing Over QSIG
If user wants DDI based routing over QSIG then following setup can be made (Not required for normal
scenario explained in Basic Call and Supplementary Services).
Configuration:
0265-304XXXX ISDN/VoIP
2199 Q-Sig
DS1-1 DS1-1
3199
PBX-1 PBX-2
2100 3100
Scenario of above figure is explained as below.
• T1E1PRI trunk at PBX 2 has ISDN Number with MSN number 0265304 and DDI numbers are 2100-2199
and 3100-3199.
• Station numbers from 2100 to 2199 are connected at PBX 1.
• Station numbers from 3100 to 3199 are connected at PBX 2.
• PBX 1 and PBX 2 are connected with each other using QSIG.
• If Calling Party number is received as 0265304-2100 to 0265304-2199 then it should route on stations of
PBX 1. If Calling Party number is received as 0265304-3100 to 0265304-3199 then it should route on
stations of PBX 2.
1412 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Settings at PBX 1:
• Settings for PBX 1 are given in Configuration of "Basic Call" and "Supplementary Services". No need to
change in these settings.
Settings at PBX 2:
Only make following settings in ETERNITY PBX 2.
• OG Trunk Bundle
Automatic Number
Trunk Port Start Total
Template Rotation Translation (ANT)
Channel Trunk
No. Port Port Type Dialed Substitute
no. Count Apply
Type No. No. List No. List
02 T1E1PRI 001 01 030 Cyclic Enable 05 06
• External Number List
Location External No. List 05 External No. List 06
001 026530421 21
Following settings are required for DDI based routing.
• Program Incoming (IC) Reference ID for all Time Zones as "01" in T1E1PRI Port Parameters.
• DDI Routing-Incoming Route Reference Table.
Route
Route
IC Start Total DDI Route Ring on TLG Trunk
Table on TLG
Ref. Channel Channel Routing on First Timer when Feature
ID when
ID No Count Ref. ID Destination (Sec) No Templates
Busy
Reply
01 01 01 30 01 No 045 No No 01
02 01 01 30 02 No 045 No No 01
• DDI Routing-DDI Routing Table
DDI No.
Table Reference Start Total DDI Port Port Start DDI
Digit
ID ID DDI No. Numbers Type Number Flexible No.
Count
001 01 3100 0100 4 FLEXNUM 000 3100
002 02 2100 0100 4 ROUTGRP 009
• Routing Group
Routing Group Rotation Flag Member 01 Member 02 Member 03 Member 04-32
09 Enable OTBG-02 None None None
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1413
Basic Call:
Below examples show various calls using DDI Routing.
Example 1: External Party makes call on 0265304-2101
Call lands directly on station 2101 of PBX 1 through QSIG.
Example 2: External Party makes call on 0265304-3101
Call lands on station 3101 of PBX 2.
1414 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Quick Dial
What’s this?
Quick Dial provides DKP and Extended IP phone users the facility of ‘One-touch’ dialing of numbers stored in their
Personal Directory and the Global Directory.
How it works
Quick Dial is based on “Abbreviated Dialing”.
To be able to Quick Dial a number,
• the number must exist in the Personal or Global Directory assigned to the extension.
• Personal and Global Directory dialing must be allowed in the Class of Service of the extension.
• On the DKP and Extended IP Phones, DSS keys must be configured with the Short Codes or Abbreviated
Numbers that are to be dialed out. These short codes are derived from the Index numbers of the Personal
Directory and the Memory Location Index of the Global Directory.
• You can Quick Dial a number simply by pressing the DSS key.
• The system locates the number to be dialed out in the Personal/Global Directory on the basis of the Index
Number/Memory Location Index configured on the DSS Key.
How to configure
See “Abbreviated Dialing” for instructions on configuring and assigning the Personal and Global Directories.
To assign the Short Codes or Abbreviated Numbers to be used for Quick Dial on DSS keys, for each DKP/
Extended IP Phone extension,
• List down the numbers from the Personal Directory and Global Directory to be used for Quick Dial.
• If the number is from the Personal Directory assigned to the extension, note the Index number at which it is
stored in the Personal Directory: 001 to 025.
• If the number is from the Global Directory assigned to the extension, note the Memory Location Index at
which it is stored in the Global Directory: 100 to 999.
• Now, configure the Quick Dial numbers on the DSS keys of the DKP and Extended IP Phone.
For detailed instructions on configuring DSS Keys on a Digital Key phone, see “DSS Keys Programming”.
For instructions on configuring DSS Keys on Matrix Extended IP Phone, see “Matrix Extended IP Phone
Settings” under Configuring SIP Extensions.
• On the desired key, select Quick Dial as Function Type.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1415
• As Offset, select the Index Number against which the number is stored in the Personal/Global Directory.
How to use
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users only
• Press the DSS key assigned to the Quick Dial numbers.
• The number will be dialed out.
• Talk when the called party answers.
1416 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Raid
What’s this?
Raid allows you to interrupt a telephone conversation between two extension users, turning the conversation into a
three-way call.
You can use Raid to land in a conversation between two extension users, and between an extension user and an
external caller, with a warning beep to the extension user. The extension user will hear a beep when you raid and
you will enter in to three-way speech with both parties.
You may also Raid a conversation without any warning by disabling the beep.
How it works
• A, B and C are extension users.
• A and B are in speech.
• C calls A.
• C gets busy tone.
• C dials the feature access code for Raid.
• Beep is played on A. Three-way speech is established between A, B and C.
• If any of these three parties disconnects, two-way speech is established between the remaining parties.
Feature Interactions
• Raid works only if the dialed extension is busy in two-way speech. The two-way speech may be with
another extension or with an external number on a trunk.
• You cannot Raid on Trunks, i.e. the external number which is in two-way speech with an extension. In this
case, C can raid the conversation between A and B, but not between A and another external number.
• Raid will not work if Privacy against Raid is enabled in the Class of Service of the extension being raided.
In this case, if Extension A has Privacy against Raid in its Class of Service, C will not be able to Raid the
conversation between A and B. To know more about this feature, see “Privacy”.
• The extension using Raid must have higher Priority assigned to it than the extension being raided. In this
case, C must have higher Priority than A to be able to invoke Raid.
Raid is a sensitive feature. You are advised to restrict access to this feature to select extension users.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1417
How to configure
To be able to use Raid, extension users must have this feature enabled in the “Class of Service (COS)” assigned to
them for the time zones in their “Station Basic Feature Template”.
By default, beep is played as a warning to the extension being raided. If required, you may disable the beep played
during Raid, by clearing the Play Beep when Raid/Conference/Dial-In Conference begins check box in the
System Parameters. For instructions, see “System Parameters”.
How to use
For EON & Extended IP Phone Users
When dialed extension is busy,
• Press DSS Key assigned to Raid.
OR
• Dial 5 on Busy Tone.
For SLT Users
When dialed extension is busy,
• Dial 5 on Busy Tone.
1418 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
RCOC (Return Call to Original Caller)
What is this?
Generally, extensions users of the PBX are given a trunk access to make outgoing calls from their phones. It is also
common for a group of extensions to share the same trunks to make outgoing calls.
When an extension user of the PBX makes an outgoing call and the called party does not answer the call or is busy
on another line, it is possible for the called party to return the call (made by the extension user) on the basis of the
CLI number received.
However, when the called party returns the call, this incoming call is mostly likely to land on the Operator extension,
as incoming calls are usually routed to the Operator.
Now, the Operator has no way of knowing which extension made the call so as to transfer the call to that extension.
Instead, the Operator must either ask the called party whom they wish to speak to and transfer the call or put the
called party on hold and find out the extension that made the call. This is an unwieldy process for all concerned -
the Operator, the called party and the extension user who originally made the call.
This can be overcome if the PBX is able to route the returned call to the original caller's extension.
ETERNITY makes this possible with the Return Call to Original Caller feature.
This feature is supported on Mobile ports, BRI, T1E1PRI (DS1) and SIP Trunks.
RCOC is not supported when calls are made from analog trunks - TWT and E&M- due to the signaling
limitations of these trunks.
This feature requires a license. This feature will work if you have the license for the Mobility Feature Suite
or the Business Feature Suite. For more information, see “License Management”.
How it works
The Prerequisites
• RCOC is enabled on the desired Trunk/s - BRI, T1E1PRI, Mobile and SIP.
• RCOC is enabled in the Class of Service group assigned to the extension.
The Process
• When an extension having RCOC feature in its Class of Service makes an out going call, the system
checks if RCOC is enabled on the trunk through which the outgoing call is routed.
• If RCOC is enabled on the trunk, the system stores the record of the outgoing call in an internal database
referred to as the RCOC Table.
• The system sets RCOC for the outgoing call in the following conditions, according to the Destination
Port190:
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1419
• If the Destination Port is a Mobile Port, RCOC is set when:
• called party is busy.
• called party is out of coverage/mobile is switched off.
• called party does not reply.
• called party rejects the call.
• caller (extension that made the call) goes ON-Hook before the called party answers the call.
• If the Destination Port is a BRI or T1E1PRI (DS1) Port or a SIP Trunk, RCOC is set when:
• called party is busy.
• called party does not answer the call.
• caller (extension that made the call) goes ON-Hook before the called party answers the call.
• When ETERNITY acts as Gateway,
• If the Originating Port is either BRI-NT or T1E1-NT, the system checks the Class of Service allowed
to the trunk port.
• If the Originating Port is a trunk (T1E1-TE, BRI-TE, TWT, MOBILE, SIP), RCOC will be set, if it is
enabled on Destination Port
• RCOC shall be set only if the Calling Party's Number is available. If calling party number is missing,
then RCOC shall not be set.
• Whenever there is an incoming call on any trunk, the system matches the CLI of the incoming all with the
RCOC Table.
• If a matching record entry is found, the system routes the call to the original caller and clears the record
entry from the RCOC Table.
• The return call rings on the original caller's extension for the period of the Ring Back Tone Timer
(programmable; default 45 seconds). If the original caller does not answer the call within this Timer, the call
is routed to the Trunk Landing Group programmed for that trunk.
• If no match is found in the RCOC Table or the extension or the original caller is busy, the call will be routed
according to the incoming call logic programmed (as programmed in the assigned Trunk Feature
Template) in the system.
Feature Interaction: RCOC and DISA CLI Authentication
• When DISA CLI Authentication (Multiple Calls or One Call) is enabled on a trunk, whenever there is an
incoming call on the trunk, the system will first check the DISA CLI Authentication Table.
• If a matching entry is found in the DISA CLI Authentication table, the system will give dial tone to the caller.
• The caller can now invoke RCOC feature by dialing ** (pressing Star key twice).
OR
• The caller can make calls to a station or an external number or use a feature as required.
• If the caller invokes RCOC feature by dialing ** (pressing Star key twice), the system will check the RCOC
Table.
190. The Trunk from which the outgoing call is made.
1420 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• If a matching record entry is found, the system routes the call to the original caller and clears the record
entry from the RCOC Table.
As RCOC is a “Class of Service (COS)” based feature, extensions that are not allowed this feature in their
COS cannot have their calls returned; even if this feature is enabled on the Trunk they used to make the
call.
• ETERNITY can keep a record of 255 entries in the RCOC Table.
• The record of the outgoing call is stored in the RCOC Table, only if the same record does not already exist
in the database.
• Each entry is kept for the duration of the RCOC Record Delete Timer (programmable; default: 999
minutes). Whenever a record is stored in the RCOC database, the Record Delete Timer for that entry is
activated. On the expiry of the Timer, the entry is deleted by the system.
• Each record is deleted from the database either after the call is returned or on expiry of the Record Delete
Timer.
• The RCOC database remains unaffected during power outages.
• In case of Call Transfer, RCOC will be set for the extension which made the call on the trunk.
• The Ring Back Tone Timer is common to all internal calls; calls made from one extension will ring on the
destination extension till the end of this timer. Change in the Ring Back Tone Timer for RCOC returned
calls on original caller's extension will also be applied on Ring Back Tone Timer for all internal calls. So,
program this Timer taking this into consideration.
• Persons using DISA must be informed about RCOC feature access code ** and how to use this feature
when in DISA mode.
How to configure
For this feature to work, it must be enabled on the Trunk and in the Class of Service of the stations. If desired, the
related Timers, i.e., the RCOC Record Delete Timer and the Ring Back Tone Timer may also be changed.
RCOC on Trunk
Enabling RCOC on Trunk using Jeeves
• Login as System Engineer.
• Click the trunk parameters of the trunk type on which you want to enable this feature, namely:
• SIP Parameters
• BRI Parameters
• T1E1 Port Parameters (T1E1PRI)
• MOBILE Port Parameters
• The page containing the trunk parameters will open.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1421
• Select the 'Return Call to Original Caller (RCOC)' check box on the page to enable this feature on the
desired trunk port.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
• Log out of Jeeves or continue with other programming tasks.
Enabling RCOC on Trunk using SE Command
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To enable RCOC on a SIP Trunk
• Dial 7743-1-SIP-Code to enable the feature on a single SIP trunk.
• Dial 7743-2-SIP-SIP-Code to enable the feature on a range of SIP trunks.
• Dial 7743-*-Code to enable the feature on all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the software port number of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
Code is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Disable
To enable RCOC on T1E1 Trunk
• Dial 6145-1-T1E1-Code to enable the feature on a single trunk.
• Dial 6145-2-T1E1-T1E1-Code to enable the feature on a range of trunks.
• Dial 6145-*-Code to enable the feature on all trunks.
Where,
T1E1 is the software port number of the trunk from 1 to 8.
Code is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Disable
To enable RCOC on BRI Trunk
• Dial 6220-1-BRI-Code to enable the feature on a single BRI trunk.
• Dial 6220-2-BRI-BRI-Code to enable the feature on a range of BRI trunks.
• Dial 6220-*-Code to enable the feature on all BRI trunks.
Where,
BRI is the software port number of the BRI trunk from 01 to 32.
Code is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Disabled
To enable RCOC on Mobile Port
• Dial 8030-1-Mobile -Code to enable the feature on a single Mobile port.
• Dial 8030-2-Mobile-Mobile-Code to enable the feature on a range of Mobile ports.
• Dial 8030-*-Code to enable the feature on all Mobile ports.
Where,
Mobile is the software port of the Mobile port from 01 to 32.
Code is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Disabled
1422 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To change the RCOC Record Delete Timer
• Dial 3521-Minutes
Where,
Minutes are from 001 to 999
Default: 999 minutes
To change the Ring Back Tone Timer
• Dial 3503-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255.
Default: 045 seconds.
• Exit SE mode.
RCOC in Class of Service
The feature 'RCOC' must be enabled in the “Class of Service (COS)” group assigned to the stations for returned
calls to land on them.
In the default Station Basic Feature Template 01 assigned to all stations of the ETERNITY, the default Class of
Service group 01 has the feature "RCOC" enabled. So, all stations of ETERNITY are by default allowed this
feature.
There is no need to program this feature if all stations are to be allowed this feature.
However, if you want to deny this COS feature to certain stations and allow this feature to all other stations, follow
these steps:
1. Define a CoS group with RCOC disabled.
2. Prepare a Station Basic Template with this CoS group applicable in all the time zones.
3. Assign this newly prepared Station Basic Feature Template to the stations on which 'RCOC' is to be
disabled.
Refer the topic “Class of Service (COS)” and “Station Basic Feature Template” for instructions.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1423
Real Time Clock (RTC)
What’s this?
Various features and facilities supported by ETERNITY, such as Alarms, Station Message Detail Records, System
Activity Log, Time Zones, Daylight Savings, certain Voice mail features need the correct time and date for their
proper functioning.
The ETERNITY has a built-in Real Time Clock (RTC) circuit that maintains date and time. When you select Region,
the RTC is automatically set to the current date and time of the country/region where ETERNITY is installed.
Since the RTC circuit may drift over a period, it is recommended that you check and reset RTC values at least once
every month to correct this drift. The RTC of ETERNITY takes care of leap years.
How to configure
Configuring RTC using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access.
• Click the link Real Time Clock.
• Select the desired Date Format:
• Enter the current Date
The current Day will appear as per the date you set.
• Set the current Time in HH:MM:SS (hours-minutes-seconds) format.
• Select Time Zone of the country/region where ETERNITY is installed.
• Click Submit to save RTC settings.
• You may log out of Jeeves
Configuring RTC using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To set the date format, dial:
• 1000-Date Format
Where,
Date format is
1 for DD-MM-YYYY
2 for MM-DD-YYYY
1424 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Default: 1.
To set date, dial:
• 1001-Date-Month-Year
Where,
DD is 01 to 31 (leading zero mandatory for single digit date).
MM is 01 to 12 (leading zero mandatory for single digit month).
YYYY is year in four digits from 0000 to 9999.
Default: Current date is set.
First set the date format and then set the date.
To set the current time, dial:
• 1003-Hours-Minutes-Seconds
Where
Hours is 00 to 23 (24-hour format in two digits)
Minutes is 00 to 59 (in two digits)
Seconds is 00 to 59 (in two digits)
Default: Current Time is set.
To select a Time Zone, dial:
• 1002-Time Zone Index Number
Where,
Time Zone Index Number is from 001 to 123, refer the table below.
Default: Index 050 - India.
• Exit SE mode.
Time Zones
Index Time Zone
001 Afghanistan (GMT+04:30)
002 Algeria (GMT+01:00)
003 Antigua and Barbuda (GMT-04:00)
004 Argentina (GMT-03:00)
005 Australia (Perth) (GMT+08:00)
006 Australia (Adelaide) (GMT+09:30)
007 Australia (Brisbane, Canberra, Melbourne, Sydney) (GMT+10:00)
008 Austria (GMT+01:00)
009 Bahamas (GMT-05:00)
010 Bahrain (GMT+03:00)
011 Bangladesh (GMT+06:00)
012 Belarus (GMT+02:00)
013 Belgium (GMT+01:00)
014 Bhutan (GMT+06:00)
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1425
Index Time Zone
015 Bolivia (GMT-04:00)
016 Bosnia and Herzegovina (GMT+01:00)
017 Botswana (GMT+02:00)
018 Brunei (GMT+08:00)
019 Brazil (Fernando De Noronha) (GMT-02:00)
020 Brazil (Brasilia, Rio de Janeiro, Sao Paulo) (GMT-03:00)
021 Brazil (Manaus) (GMT-04:00)
022 Brazil (Acre) (GMT-05:00)
023 Bulgaria (GMT+02:00)
024 Cambodia (GMT+07:00)
025 Cameroon (GMT+01:00)
026 Canada (St. John's) (GMT-03:30)
027 Canada (Halifax) (GMT-04:00)
028 Canada (Montreal, Ottawa, Toronto) (GMT-05:00)
029 Canada (Winnipeg) (GMT-06:00)
030 Canada (Calgary) (GMT-07:00)
031 Canada (Vancouver) (GMT-08:00)
032 Chile (GMT-04:00)
033 China (GMT+08:00)
034 Colombia (GMT-05:00)
035 Costa Rica (GMT-06:00)
036 Croatia (GMT+01:00)
037 Cuba (GMT-05:00)
038 Cyprus (GMT+02:00)
039 Czech Republic (GMT+01:00)
040 Denmark (GMT+01:00)
041 Egypt(GMT+02:00)
042 Fiji(GMT+12:00)
043 Finland(GMT+02:00)
044 France(GMT+01:00)
045 Germany(GMT+01:00)
046 Greece(GMT+02:00)
047 Guyana(GMT-04:00)
048 Hong Kong(GMT+08:00)
1426 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Index Time Zone
049 Hungary(GMT+02:00)
050 India(GMT+05:30)
051 Indonesia(GMT+07:00)
052 Iran(GMT+03:30)
053 Iraq(GMT+03:00)
054 Ireland(GMT)
055 Israel (GMT+02:00)
056 Italy(GMT+01:00)
057 Japan(GMT+09:00)
058 Jordan(GMT+02:00)
059 Kazakhstan(GMT+06:00)
060 Kenya(GMT+03:00)
061 Korea - North(GMT+09:00)
062 Korea - South(GMT+09:00)
063 Kuwait(GMT+03:00)
064 Kyrgyzstan(GMT+06:00)
065 Lebanon(GMT+02:00)
066 Libya(GMT+02:00)
067 Malaysia(GMT+08:00)
068 Maldives(GMT+05:00)
069 Mauritius(GMT+04:00)
070 Mexico (Mexico City) (GMT-06:00)
071 Mexico (Chihuahua) (GMT-07:00)
072 Mexico (Tijuana) (GMT-08:00)
073 Mongolia(GMT+08:00)
074 Mozambique(GMT+02:00)
075 Myanmar(GMT+06:30)
076 Namibia(GMT+01:00)
077 Nepal(GMT+05:45)
078 Netherlands(GMT+01:00)
079 New Zealand(GMT+12:00)
080 Nigeria(GMT+01:00)
081 Norway(GMT+01:00)
082 Oman(GMT+04:00)
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1427
Index Time Zone
083 Pakistan(GMT+05:00)
084 Paraguay(GMT-04:00)
085 Peru(GMT-05:00)
086 Philippines(GMT+08:00)
087 Poland(GMT+01:00)
088 Portugal(GMT)
089 Qatar(GMT+03:00)
090 Romania(GMT+02:00)
091 Russia (Moscow, St. Petersburg) (GMT+03:00)
092 Russia (Novosibirsk) (GMT+06:00)
093 Russia (Vladivostok) (GMT+10:00)
094 Singapore(GMT+08:00)
095 Slovakia(GMT+01:00)
096 South Africa(GMT+02:00)
097 Spain(GMT+01:00)
098 Sri Lanka GMT+05:30
099 Sudan(GMT+03:00)
100 Sweden(GMT+01:00)
101 Switzerland(GMT+01:00)
102 Syria(GMT+02:00)
103 Taiwan(GMT+08:00)
104 Tajikistan(GMT+05:00)
105 Thailand(GMT+07:00)
106 Turkey(GMT+02:00)
107 Uganda(GMT+03:00)
108 Ukraine(GMT+02:00)
109 United Arab Emirates(GMT+04:00)
110 United Kingdom(GMT)
111 United States (Atlanta, Augusta, Boston, Charlotte, Columbus, Detroit, Indiapolis,
Miami, NY, Philadelphia, Washington)(GMT-05:00)
112 United States (Chicago, Dallas, Des Moines, Memphis, Minneapolis, New Orleans,
Oklahoma, Omaha, St. Louis) (GMT-06:00)
113 United States (Albuquerque, Boise, Cheyenne, Denver, Salt Lake City) (GMT-07:00)
114 United States (Las Vegas, Los Angeles, Phoenix, San Francisco, Seattle) (GMT-
08:00)
1428 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Index Time Zone
115 United States (Juneau) (GMT-09:00)
116 United States (Hawaii) (GMT-10:00)
117 Uzbekistan(GMT+05:00)
118 Venezuela(GMT-04:30)
119 Vietnam(GMT+07:00)
120 Yemen(GMT+03:00)
121 Yugoslavia(GMT+02:00)
122 Zambia(GMT+02:00)
123 Zimbabwe(GMT+02:00)
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1429
Reminder
What's this?
Reminders are a variation of the “Alarms” feature, requiring the Date and Time to be set for each Reminder call.
Reminder calls are useful for extension users who wish to be reminded of important tasks or appointments.
For Reminder calls, date and time are set in the following format:
Date is set, according to Date Format you selected in the “Real Time Clock (RTC)” parameters, as:
• Day-Month-Year (DD:MM:YYYY)
Or
• Month-Date-Year (MM:DD:YYYY).
• Reminders can be set and canceled by:
• the Operator from the Operator phone and from Jeeves.
• extension users from their phones.
• Multiple Reminders can be set for an extension by the Operator and/or by the extension user.
• The mechanism for serving Reminders calls can be configured as 'Personalized' or 'Automated'.
• Reminders can be voice-guided, if the ETERNITY has a Voice Mail System (VMS) installed in it.
• ETERNITY can register as many as 48 Reminders set by the Operator and extension users.
How it works
Personalized Reminder
When the Reminder call serving mechanism is configured as 'Personalized',
• The Operator Phone rings first191, displaying the number of the extension to which the reminder call is to
be served.
• When the Operator answers this call, a call is placed on the extension on which the reminder call is set.
• The extension phone rings for the duration of the Alarm Ring Timer.
• When the extension user answers the call, the Operator greets the extension user with the reminder
message.
191. The Operator phone rings for the duration of the Alarm Ring Timer. If the Operator does not answer the call, the ETERNITY will
make two more Alarm Attempts at an Alarm Attempt Interval of 5 minutes to call the Operator.
1430 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• If the extension user does not answer the call till the Alarm Ring Timer has elapsed, the Operator phone
will display a text message notifying 'No Reply' from the extension. The Reminder is now considered as
served.
• If the extension is busy192, the Operator phone will display a text message notifying that the extension
number is 'Busy'.
• The Operator can now choose to
• inform the extension user about the Reminder in person or send someone to do it.
OR
• try the busy extension again.
OR
• set “Auto Call Back (ACB)”.
Personal Reminders will work even if the extension user has set DND or Call Forward.
Automated Reminder
When the Alarm serving mechanism is configured as 'Automated',
• The extension phone rings at the set time till the end of the Alarm Ring Timer. If the extension phone is a
DKP or the Matrix Extended IP Phone, Reminder message will appear on its display.
• When the extension user answers the call, the user may be played music-on-hold, or a pre-recorded voice
message, or be connected to the Voice Mail, or routed to the Operator, depending upon the Alarm
Notification Type you have configured for the extension.
• If the extension user does not answer the reminder call, the ETERNITY makes two more attempts (in all, 3
attempts) at an interval of 5 minutes between each attempt, to call the extension.
• If all Reminder call attempts go unanswered, the ETERNITY places the call on the Operator Phone. The
Operator Phone rings till the end of the Alarm Ring Timer. The Operator Phone displays the number of the
extension with the message 'No Reply'. The Reminder call is now considered as served.
• If the extension phone is busy, the ETERNITY will continue to make the Reminder call Attempts at the
Alarm Interval programmed. When all Alarm Attempts go unanswered, ETERNITY will place a call on the
Operator phone. The Operator Phone will display the number of the extension phone with the message
'Busy'.
192. An improperly placed receiver may also be the cause for the busy tone on the extension phone. In that case, the system will notify
the Operator Phone with the 'OFF-Hook Alert'.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1431
Snooze
The Snooze function can be added to Automated Reminders to ensure that the extension user answers the call.
Snooze is a system-wide feature; when set, this function will be added to all Automated Reminder calls.
When Snooze is activated,
• The extension phone rings for the Number of Alarm Attempt configured, at the set Alarm Attempt
Interval.
• The extension stops ringing when the user answers the call and dials 0 to acknowledge the Reminder
call. This reminder call Acknowledgement Code 0 is non-configurable.
• Reminder can be set for Operator phones also.
• Reminder settings will be retained in the system during power down and system upgrades.
• When multiple reminder requests have been set by an extension user, the extension user cannot
selectively cancel a particular reminder request. Only the Operator can selectively cancel Reminders
set for an extension user from the System Administrator pages of Jeeves.
• It is not possible to modify—change the date and time—of a reminder request. So, you may cancel the
Reminder request and set a new one.
Reminder Status Report
The Operator can know the details of Reminders that have not been served on the Reminder page of Jeeves, from
the System Administrator (SA) mode.
The status of Reminders set by Operator as well as extension users appears on this page, with details of time
(hours and minutes), and serving mechanism (personalized, automated).
The Operator can view the Reminder report whenever required and can also print this report.
How to configure
The configuration of Reminders is the same as Alarms.
To configure Reminders feature, do the following:
• Select the Alarm Notification Type for the extensions.
• Configure, as required, the Alarm Call related parameters: Alarm Ring Timer, Number of Attempts,
Alarm Attempt Interval, Configurable Alarm Type and Configurable Alarm Category, and Snooze.
• Configure Macros, if the SLT extension has special function keys, and you want to a function key for the
Reminder feature.
• Select Destination Port for Reminder Reports: COM Port or Ethernet Port.
For instructions, see the topic “How to configure” under “Alarms”.
1432 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
How to use
Reminders can be set by the extension users by themselves. The extension users can also ask the Operator to set
the Reminder for them.
If the Voice Mail System (VMS) is installed in the ETERNITY, it can offer voice-guided Reminders to extension
users and the Operator.
Voice-guided reminders lead users through a menu, helping them set the alarm in a step-by-step manner.
Voice-Guided Reminders set/canceled by Operator
The Operator can set voice-guided Reminders for extension users
For EON & Extended IP Phones
• Press DSS Key assigned to 'Remote Voice-Guided Reminder' function.
OR
• Dial 1072-035
• Follow Voice Mail System Prompts to set/cancel Reminder.
For SLT
• Pick up the handset.
• Dial 1072-035
• Follow Voice Mail System Prompts to set/cancel Reminder.
• Replace handset.
Voice-Guided Reminder set/canceled by Extension Users
For EON & Extended IP Phone Users
• Press the key assigned to Voice-guided 'Reminder' function.
OR
• Dial 164
• Follow Voice Mail System prompts.
For SLT Users
• Pick up the handset.
• Dial 164
• Follow Voice Mail System Prompts.
• Replace handset.
If the SLT of the extension user has a special Reminder function key, the extension user can set the alarm using
this key.
For SLT with 'Reminders' Key
• Press 'Reminders' key. (The label on the SLT key may differ from model to model)
• Follow the Voice Mail System prompts to set/cancel reminders.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1433
• SLTs with special function keys will work only if the corresponding Macros are programmed by the
System Engineer.
• Without the Voice Mail System installed, the extension user having SLT with the special Reminder
function key will not be able to set/cancel Reminders. This extension user can set/cancel Reminders
only by dialing the feature access code for voice-guided Reminders.
Non-Voice Guided Reminders set/canceled by Operator
For EON & Extended IP Phones
To set Reminder for the extension user,
• Press the key assigned the 'Remote Reminder' function.
OR
• Dial 1072-033
• Enter the Extension Number.
• Enter Date and Time in the format:
DD: MM: YYYY: HH: MM
OR
MM: DD: YYYY: HH: MM (users in USA)
• Select 'Personalized' or 'Automated'.
• Press 'Enter' key to set Reminder.
• You get a confirmation tone and message.
To cancel Reminder set for the extension user,
• Press key assigned for ‘Remote Reminder’ function.
OR
• Dial 1072-033
• Enter Extension Number.
• Select 'Cancel All'.
• Press 'Enter' Key.
For SLT
To set Reminder for an extension,
• Lift handset.
• Dial 1072-033
• Dial Extension Number.
• Dial Date and Time in the format:
DDMMYYYYHHMM
OR
• MMDDYYYYHHMM (users in USA)
• Dial 1 for Personalized, Dial 2 for Automated.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace handset.
1434 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To cancel Reminder set for an extension,
• Lift handset.
• Dial 1072-033
• Dial Extension Number.
• Dial #
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace handset.
To cancel reminder calls selectively, go to 'Reminder Status' page from the System Administrator of
Jeeves.
Non-Voice Guided Reminders set/cancel by Extension Users
For EON & Extended IP Phone Users
To set Reminder:
• Press the 'Reminder' key.
OR
• Dial 162
• Enter Date and Time in the format
DD:MM:YYYY:HH:MM
OR
MM:DD:YYYY:HH:MM (users in USA)
• Press 'Enter' key.
• You get a confirmatory text message and confirmation tone.
• Go Idle.
To cancel Reminder:
• Press 'Reminder' Key again.
OR
• Dial 162
• Select 'Cancel All'.
• Press Enter Key.
For SLT Users
To set Reminder,
• Lift handset.
• Dial 162
• Dial Date and Time in the format
DDMMYYYYHHMM
OR
MMDDYYYYHHMM (users in USA)
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace handset.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1435
To cancel Reminder,
• Pick up the handset.
• Dial 162
• Dial #
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace handset.
Viewing and Printing Reminder Status
The Operator can view the status of Reminders that are yet to be served from the System Administrator pages of
Jeeves or from an extension of the ETERNITY. First make sure you have assigned the Destination port for Hotel/
Motel reports, under Hotel Parameters.
To view Reminder Status from the System Administrator pages of Jeeves,
• Open Jeeves.
• Log in as System Administrator.
• Click the Reports link.
• Under Reports, click the Reminder link.
1436 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The unserved Reminders appear on the page.
• To cancel any of the unserved Reminders,
• Select the Cancel Reminder check box of the extension number for which you want to cancel the
reminder.
• Click the Cancel Selected Reminders button at the bottom of the page.
• To print this page, click the Print button.
• Click Close to exit the page.
• Click Logout to exit SA mode.
To print Reminder reports from an extension of ETERNITY,
• Pick up the handset.
• Dial 1072-917.
• Replace Handset.
• The report will be printed on the destination port assigned to Hotel/Motel reports.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1437
Reminder Report AS ON 10-05-2011(Tue) AT 23:50
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Room# Phone# Reminder P Room# Phone# Reminder P
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3001 11-05-2011 12:25 3001 13-05-2011 12:14
3001 14-05-2011 17:11
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ indicates Personal Reminder Page : 1
---End of Report---
• The ‘+’ sign on the report indicates Personal Reminder.
• If the date format of ETERNITY is set as MM-DD-YYYY or the Region 'USA' is selected, then the
reminder report will be printed according to this date format. To know more, see “Real Time Clock
(RTC)”.
Scheduled Reminder Report
The Operator can also schedule Reminder Reports to be printed regularly at a fixed time.
To enable/disable Scheduled Reminder Reports,
• Dial 1072-038.
• Dial 1 to enable Scheduled Reminder Report
• Dial 0 to disable Scheduled Reminder Report
• To set the time for the Scheduled Reminder Report,
To set the time for the Scheduled Reminder Report,
• Dial 1072-039
• Dial the scheduled time in HHMM format (from 00:00 to 23:59 hours; default: 00:00).
For example, dial 1730 to set the time to 17 hours and 30 minutes.
• Replace handset.
The report will be printed at the scheduled time on the destination port assigned for printing Hotel/Motel reports.
1438 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Remote Programming
What’s this?
• One can program ETERNITY from any remote location. Direct inward system Access (DISA) facility of the
system allows a remote user to login and use most of the functions of the system. Programming is one of
such functions allowed to the remote user. The remote user can program the system using the same
commands as used by the normal local station to program the system. The user can login into the SA
programming or SE programming mode.
How to use
• Make a DISA call.
• Login as DISA user. Get the DISA login beeps. Enter the SE/SA mode. Get programming/Dial Tone.
• Make programming changes.
• Exit SE/SA mode.
• Terminate DISA call.
• In case none of the trunk lines have DISA facility and it is required to do remote programming, then follow
following steps:
• From the remote location, make a call to the system.
• Ask the person answering the call at the system end to keep you on hold by dialing Flash. When the
person at the system end dials ‘Flash’, you get hold on music.
• Ask the person at the system end to dial 1#91-SE Password. On completion of the command, he gets
confirmation tone. He can disconnect and carry on with the routine job.
• The person at the remote end gets DISA beeps.
• He dials #1 and gets the dial tone.
• He can enter the SE/SA mode from the remote end.
SE Mode
Dial 1#91-SE Password program the system. Dial ‘00’ exit from the programming mode (SE Mode).
SA Mode
Dial 1#92-SA Password program the system. Dial 1#92 exit from SA mode.
Once the user is out of SE/SA Mode he gets DISA beeps.
How it works
Following flow chart depicts the process:
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1439
Start
Dial and log-in as a DISA user
remotely. For more details,
please refer section DISA
User is in DISA idle state. Gets DISA login beeps
User dials command for entering
program mode followed by SE password
Is the No
password
correct ?
Error Tone
Yes
System gives programming tone
User dials any of the programming command
Is the
Yes command dialed No
correct and accepted
by the system ?
Confirmation tone Error tone
Exit
Program
Mode Wait for error
Wait for confirmation
tone to get over
tone to get over System gives dial tone
End
Relevant Topic:
1. “Direct Inward System Access (DISA)” 1156
1440 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Room Monitor
What’s this?
This feature enables the DKP and Extended IP Phone Extension users to listen to the conversations taking place in
another location where a DKP/Extended IP Phone is present.
Room Monitor can be used to monitor activities on the Shop Floors / Manufacturing areas from another location.
• Use this feature in accordance with the local privacy laws.
• Matrix Comsec is not responsible for any mis-/abuse of this feature by users.
How it works
• A is a supervisor in a Manufacturing unit.
• A’s room in on the second floor. The manufacturing area is on the ground floor.
• To keep track of the activities in the plant on the ground floor, there must be a DKP or an Extended IP
Phone at the place where the activities are to be monitored, and A’s extension must have higher “Priority”
than the extension at the monitored location.
• If there is a DKP or an Extended IP Phone at the desired location, A can activate Room Monitor.
A can activate Room Monitor only if the DKP/Extended IP Phone at the desired location is idle.
• When A activates Room Monitor, the microphone of the DKP/Extended IP Phone on the ground floor goes
Off-hook. A can now hear all the sounds taking place on the ground floor, without anyone present there
coming to know that they are being monitored.
• To end Room Monitor, A must disconnect.
• Room monitoring will be terminated on the DKP/Extended IP Phone on the ground floor, if someone lifts
the handset of this phone or if there is a call on this phone from another extension.
• You can activate Room Monitor from any extension port type, but the extension being monitored must
be a DKP or an Extended IP Phone.
How to configure
To be able to use Room Monitor, extension users must have this feature enabled in the “Class of Service (COS)” in
the “Station Basic Feature Template” assigned to their extensions.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1441
How to use
For EON & Extended IP Phone Users
To enable Room Monitor on an extension,
• Press the DSS Key assigned to Room Monitor.
• Dial Extension Number to be monitored.
OR
• Dial 1073-Extension Number to be monitored.
For SLT Users
• Dial 1073-Extension Number to be monitored.
1442 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Routing Group
What’s this?
A Routing Group is a group of extensions which can function Many times it is required to call any one of the
persons among a group of related people. It is not important to talk to a particular person. The caller just wants any
member from the group. ETERNITY offers flexibility to put related stations in a group. These groups are called
Routing Groups. The call made to this group using the Access Code of the Routing Group. However the caller can
access individual stations of the group also by dialing the station number. The routing group is used to land IC call
on any trunk port.
Refer chapter “System Parameters” for command to put the station as 'in service' or 'out of service'.
How it works
• Maximum 96 Routing groups can be formed.
• Maximum 32 stations can be programmed in each routing group.
• The station can be a SLT, DKP, DOP, OG Trunk Bundle Group, SIP Extension or ISDN Terminal.
• The time for which each station rings can be programmed.
• The sequence in which various stations in the group should ring can be arranged.
• The number of stations that should ring at a time can be programmed.
• Once a station receives a ring, it can be set to ring continuously till the call matures. Such a station
continues ringing even when other stations of the group are hunted. This is called Continuous ringing and
can be programmed for each station.
• If the call is not answered even after hunting the last station, the system will loop back and start from the
first station once again.
• A fresh call can start hunting either from the first station or from the final station of the previous call. This
method is called Rotation Method and can be set for each group. If rotation method is enabled, the fresh
call will land on the destination next to the one, which received the last call. This would enable equal
distribution of incoming calls to all the destinations within the group. If the rotation method is disabled, the
fresh call will always land on first station of the department group. Refer chapter “Outgoing Trunk Bundle”.
• Any station can answer the call.
• User can program the 'OG Trunk Bundle Group' in the Routing Group. Hence, the ANT feature will be
automatically applicable as OG Trunk Bundle is part of OG Trunk Bundle Group.
• Now, the trunk to trunk calls will have advantage of LCR feature as LCR is property of OG Trunk Bundle
Group.
• Other Parameters Ring Timer, Continuous Ring and Rotation will remain fixed.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1443
'ISDN Terminal' as a member of Routing Group:
• When any incoming call on Trunk is to be routed on the ISDN Terminal, the Routing group assigned to the
Trunk will be programmed with the software port number of the ISDN terminal.
• Now the system will identify the access code (Flexible number) associated with the Software port of ISDN
terminal programmed in the Routing group and will include the flexible number in Called party number
field.
• The CLI received on the Trunk port will be forwarded to ISDN Terminal in "Calling Party Number" field.
How to configure
The commands explained below should be referred as:
• To program a single port: XXXX-1
• To program a range of ports: XXXX-2
• To program all the ports: XXXX-*
Step 1
Use following command to Program the destination in the Routing Group:
6502-1-Routing Group-Number Index-Port Type-Port Number
6502-2-Routing Group-Routing Group-Number Index-Port Type-Port Number
6502-*-Number Index-Port Type-Port Number
Where,
Routing Group is from 01 to 96.
Destination Index is from 01 to 32.
Port Type Meaning Port Number
00 Nonea 000
01 SLT 001-512
02 DKP 001-128
10 DOP 001
16 OG Trunk Bundle Groupb 001-025
28 ISDN Terminal 01-64
34 SIP Extension 001-500
a. Parameters, Ring Timer and Continuous Ring are not applicable if
the SE selects None, OG Trunk Bundle Group as Member Type.
b. Same as per above note.
Step 2
Use following command to program the time for which each station in the group should ring:
6503-1-Routing Group-Member Index-Ring Timer
6503-2-Routing Group-Routing Group-Member Index-Ring Timer
6503-*-Member Index-Ring Timer
Where,
Routing Group is from 01 to 96.
Member Index is from 01 to 32.
Ring Timer is from 001 to 255.
1444 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
By default, Ring Timer is 015 seconds.
Step 3
Use following command to program continuous or non-continuous ring for a station in the group:
6504-1-Routing Group-Member Index-Flag
6504-2-Routing Group-Routing Group-Member Index-Flag
6504-*-Member Index-Flag
Where,
Routing Group is from 01 to 96.
Member Index is from 01 to 32.
Flag Meaning
0 No station rings for the time set (Disable continuous)
1 The station rings till the call matures (Enable continuous)
Step 4
Use following command to program rotation method of a department group:
6505-1-Routing Group-Rotation Method
6505-2-Routing Group-Routing Group-Rotation Method
6505-*-Rotation Method
Where,
Routing Group is from 01 to 96.
Rotation Method Meaning
0 Fresh call lands on the first station within the group (disable continuous)
1 Fresh call lands on following the rotation method (enable continuous)
How to default a Routing Group?
Use following command to default a routing group:
6501-1-Routing Group
6501-2-Routing Group-Routing Group
6501-*
Where,
Routing Group is from 01 to 96.
On issuing the command all routing groups will get defaulted to the following values.
Member Index Port Type Port Number Ring Timer (Sec.) Continuous Ring Rotation
01 DKP 001 015 OFF ON
02 SLT 001 015 OFF ON
03 SLT 002 015 OFF ON
04-32 None 000 015 OFF ON
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1445
Step 5
Use following command to clear the member of a Routing Group:
6510-1-Routing Group
6510-2-Routing Group-Routing Group
6510-*
Where,
Routing Group is from 01 to 96.
Relevant Topics:
“Department Call”
“Voice Message Applications”
“Trunk Landing Group (TLG)”
“Security Alarm and Reporting”
1446 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Security Alarm and Reporting
What's this?
With the Security Alarm and Reporting feature of ETERNITY, external numbers as well as extensions can be
notified about emergency situations such as fire, break-in, burglary, etc.
This is a useful security feature. For example, in the event of burglary in a Bank, the teller or any employee can
press the Emergency Alarm193. The system will dial out the programmed external numbers such as Police,
Security Agency or to another branch office number to report the emergency, without anyone coming to know about
it.
Security Alarm
Security Alarm makes use of the “Digital Input Port (DIP)” to function.
A panic switch, a smoke detector or a break-in detector can activate the DIP. The system will sense the event and
will place a call to the numbers programmed to receive security alarm calls. These numbers may be
• external numbers (of Emergency Services, key decision makers, etc.), or
• a group of extensions (Routing Group), or
• a siren/hooter connected to the “Digital Output Port (DOP)”.
The system will play a pre-recorded voice message to inform the called parties (external numbers or group of
extensions) of the emergency or activate the siren connected on the DOP as programmed.
It is possible to select a different destination for Security Alarm calls according to Time Zones, i.e. working hours,
break hours, and non-working hours.
For example, factory manager can have the extension of Security Personnel programmed for Security Alarm during
working hours and break hours, and can have an external number, such as the factory manager’s residence phone
number, programmed for Security Alarm for non-working hours.
Security Reporting
It is possible to program the system to 'report' Security Alarm calls made to external numbers simultaneously also
to a group of extensions. Hence, the feature name Security Reporting.
The system will display the DIP Port number with the Text message 'Emergency' to the extensions on which it
lands the call. The extension user can know the location of the emergency if s/he knows the location of the sensor/
panic switch connected to the DIP Port Number displayed on his/her phone.
How it works
The Pre-requisites
• An emergency switch/sensor, output of a Smoke detector, Glass break detector, Fire Alarm, etc., is
connected as instigator to the “Digital Input Port (DIP)” of ETERNITY.
193.The device is connected to the Digital Input Port of the ETERNITY.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1447
• The Digital Input Port parameters194 are programmed. Refer the topic “Digital Input Port (DIP)” for
programming instructions.
• A voice message containing an Emergency Message is recorded in a Voice Module195.
• A “Time Tables” defining the working hours, break and non-working hours is assigned as the Time Table
for Security Alarm.
• For each Time Zone, the destination for Security Alarm calls is selected as DOP or External Numbers, or
Routing Group and the corresponding DOP/External Number/Routing Group of extensions is assigned.
• The Security Reporting flag is enabled in the Security Alarm Parameters, to report the emergency with the
prerecorded voice message to a group of extensions.
• A corresponding Routing Group of extensions is programmed for receiving Security-Reporting calls.
• If required, the default values of the following parameters may be changed:
• Security Alarm - Delay Response Timer: the time of initiating the dialing after the Security Alarm is
triggered by the DIP.
• Call Attempt Interval for External Number: the time gap between each attempt to call an external
number.
• Number of Attempts for each External Number: the number of attempts the system should make to
dial each external number you have programmed (in case no acknowledgement is received from the
number).
• Outgoing Trunk Bundle Group to dial External Numbers.
The Process
• The sensor instigates the DIP.
• The system waits for the duration of the 'Minimum Instigation Time' you programmed (default: 01 sec) to
respond to the instigation.
• On expiry of this timer, the system waits for the Security Alarm - Delay Response Timer (programmable;
default: 15 seconds), while checking the 'Trigger Security Alarm on' destination programmed for the
current Time Zone.
Security Alarm and Reporting to External Numbers
• On detecting 'External Number' as the destination for Trigger Security Alarm on, the system checks for the
first external number programmed in the for the current Time Zone.
• At the end of the Delay Response Timer, it places a call to the first external number.
When Security Reporting flag is enabled it also simultaneously places a call to the first extension number
in the Security Reporting-Routing Group.
194.Enable the port, set the Instigation Signal and the Minimum Instigation Time as required.
195.The pre-recorded message provided by Matrix (on the Product CD) is: "This is an emergency call. Please dial '0' to acknowledge".
Refer the topic “Voice Message Applications”.
1448 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
If the Reporting group extension is a digital key phone, the system will display the text message <<DIP-1
Emergency>> on the phone display.
• When the external called party answers the call, the ETERNITY delivers a pre-recorded Emergency
message (recorded in the Voice Module).
• The system repeats the voice message until the external and the internal called parties dial '0' to
acknowledge the call.
If the internal called party number is as a digital key phone, the system will display the text message for
Security Alarm Acknowledgement.
• When there is no response from the first external number, the ETERNITY dials the second external
number programmed for the current Time Zone.
If there is no response from the second external number or if the number is busy, the system tries the third
external number programmed for the current Time Zone and tries to deliver the message.
Thus, the system tries each number, one after the other, as many times as programmed in the Number of
Attempts (default: 5 attempts) with a time interval programmed in the Call Attempt Interval (default: 15
seconds).
The system stops dialing each external number only when the called party acknowledges the call by
dialing '0' or when the Number of Attempts is over.
Security Alarm and Reporting to Internal Numbers
• On detecting 'Routing Group' as the destination for Trigger Security Alarm on, the system places the call
on the first extension number in the Routing Group programmed for the current Time Zone.
When Security Reporting flag is enabled, the system also simultaneously places a call to the first
extension number in the Security Reporting-Routing Group.
If the Reporting group extension is a digital key phone, the system will display the text message <<DIP-1
Emergency>> on the phone display.
• When any of the Security Alarm-Routing Group extensions answers the call, the ETERNITY delivers the
pre-recorded Security Alarm message (recorded in the Voice Module).
It repeats the voice message until the called extension dials '0' to acknowledge the call.
• If there is no response from the first Security Reporting-Routing Group extension number, the system will
follow the Routing Group Logic to try other extensions in the group to land the Security Alarm call.
The system stops attempting the Security Alarm call, when any of the extensions in the Security Alarm-
Routing Group answers the call and acknowledges the call by dialing '0'.
If the Security Alarm-Routing Group extension is a digital key phone, the system will display the text
message for Security Alarm Acknowledgement.
• The Security Alarm 'Number of Attempts' count and the 'Call Attempt Interval' are not applicable for
routing Security Alarm calls to internal numbers (Routing Group).
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1449
• Time Zones are not applicable for Security Alarm Reporting. Regardless of the current Time Zone, the
Security Alarm call will be reported to the programmed Reporting-Routing Group.
How to configure
For this feature to work, you must program the Security Alarm parameters and the Digital Input Port.
Before you set the Security Alarm Parameters, ensure that you have the following programmed and ready:
• The sensor device connected to the Digital Input Port and the port parameters programmed. Refer the
topic “Digital Input Port (DIP)” for instructions.
• A voice message containing an Emergency Message is recorded in the Voice Module for Security and
Emergency. Refer the topic “Voice Message Applications” for instructions on recording voice module.
• Routing Groups of stations, i.e. Security Alarm-Routing Group, on which Security Alarm should be
triggered, if you have selected as 'Routing Group' for any of the Time Zones.
• A Routing Group of stations, i.e. the Security Reporting-Routing Group, on which security reporting should
initiated.
• The Time Table for Security Alarm, defining the working hours, non-working hours and break hours for the
Time Zones of the Response Type selected. Refer the topic “Time Tables” for programming instructions.
Now, program the Security Alarm Parameters using Jeeves or by dialing SE commands from a Telephone.
Programming Security Alarm using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the link 'Security Alarm' to open the page.
1450 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Now, program the following Security Alarm parameters:
• Use DIP to trigger Security Alarm: Enable this flag to use the Security Alarm feature. If this flag is
disabled, no alarm will be triggered. By default the flag is disabled.
You may program the Digital Input Port, if not done already. To do this,
• Click the link 'System Parameters' to open the page.
• Click 'DIP' again to reach the DIP Parameters.
• Select the check box to enable the DIP.
• Set the Instigation Signal type as 'High196' or 'Low197' according to sensor device connected to the
DIP. By default, 'High' is selected.
• Set the Minimum Instigation Time198 to the desired value. By default, it is set to 01 second.
Whether you are using the DIP for an automated control application or for Security Dialing and Reporting, you must
program the following parameters:
• Time Table for Security Alarm: Select the Time Table you want to apply for Security Alarm. By default,
Time Table 1 is selected.
• You may program the time table, if not done already. To do this,
Click the link 'Time Table' in this parameter.
• The Time Table page will open.
• Configure the default Time Table, or another Time Table.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
• Return to the Security Alarm page.
• Select the Time Table you programmed for this parameter.
Any changes you make in the Time Table will affect the features/applications which use the same Time
Table. Program Time Tables taking this into account. Program different Time Tables for features/
applications so that they remain unaffected.
• Trigger Security Alarm during Working Hours on: Select the desired destination - DOP, External
Number, Routing Group - on which Security Alarm should be initiated during the Time Zone - Working
Hours. Depending on the destination you selected, program the following parameters:
• DOP number: If you selected DOP, select the DOP number. ETERNITY PE supports 3 DOPs,
whereas ETERNITY ME and GE support only a single DOP.
• Routing Group number: If you selected Routing Group as destination, select the number of the
Routing Group you programmed for Security Alarm. For example, if you have programmed Routing
Group number 03 for Security Alarm for Working Hours, select 03. By default, Routing Group 01 is
selected.
• External Number 1: If you selected External Number as the destination, enter the first external number
you want the system to dial for Security Alarm.
• External Number 2: Enter the second external number you want the system to dial for Security Alarm.
196.'High' state signifies that the DIP is normally open. DIP should be programmed as 'High' when the sensor connected to the DIP
keeps the Loop open and closes it to signal an event.
197.'Low' state signifies that the DIP is normally closed. DIP should be programmed as 'Low' when the sensor connected to the DIP nor-
mally keeps the Loop closed and opens/breaks it to signal an event.
198.This is the time for which the instigation signal from the sensor device should remain present on the DIP to be recognized by the DIP
as a genuine signal.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1451
• External Number 3: Enter the third external number you want the system to dial for Security Alarm.
The External Numbers may be numbers of Emergency Services like the Police, Ambulance, or of any
key decision makers.
The External Number can be of a maximum of 16 digits.
• Trigger Security Alarm during Break Hours on: Like the previous parameter, select the desired
destination - DOP, External Number, Routing Group - on which Security Alarm should be initiated during
the Time Zone - Break Hours. Depending on the destination you selected, program the DOP Number/
Routing Group/External Numbers, as described above.
• Trigger Security Alarm during Non-Working Hours on: Repeat the instructions given above to select
the desired destination for Security Alarm during the Time Zone - Non-Working Hours and program the
DOP Number/Routing Group/External Numbers.
• Security Reporting: Select the check box to enable this flag, if you want Security Reporting to be
initiated for Security Alarm calls. Security Reporting enables notification of emergency situations to
Routing Group member extensions.
• Security Reporting-Routing Group: If you enabled Security Reporting, select the number of the
Routing Group you programmed for Security Reporting. For example, if you have programmed Routing
Group number 04 for Security Reporting, select 04. By default, Routing Group 01 is selected.
• Security Alarm - Delay Response Timer (sec): enter the time for which the system should wait
before dialing out the first external number after receiving signal about the emergency from the DIP. By
default the Delay Response Timer is set to 15 seconds.
1452 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Call Attempt Interval for External Number (sec): If you programmed External Numbers as Security
Alarm destination for any of the three Time Zones, you may program this parameter. This parameter
defines the time gap between each attempt to call the external number. When no acknowledgement is
received from one external number you programmed, the system will attempt to call the other external
number you programmed after the Call Attempt Interval. By default, the interval is set to 15 seconds.
• Number of Attempts for each External Number: If you programmed External Numbers as Security
Alarm destination for any of the three Time Zones, you may program this parameter. This parameter
defines the number of attempts the system should make to dial each external number you have
programmed. When no acknowledgement is received from an external number you programmed, the
system will repeatedly call the number for the number of Attempts you programmed. By default, the
number of attempts is set to 5.
• OG Trunk Bundle Group to Dial External Number: If you programmed External Numbers as
Security Alarm destination for any of the three Time Zones, select the Outgoing Trunk Bundle Group
from which the system should dial the external number. By default, OG trunk bundle group 01 is
selected.
• If you have finished programming the Security Alarm parameters, click 'Submit' to save your settings.
• Log out of Jeeves or continue with programming tasks, as desired.
Programming Security Alarm using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To enable/disable Security Alarm (use DIP to Trigger Security Alarm), dial:
• 5202-Flag
Where,
0 is for Disable
1 is for Enable
By default, Disable is set.
To assign a Time Table for Security Alarm, dial:
• 5203-Time Table
Where,
Time Table is from 1 to 8.
By default, Time Table 1 is selected.
To select the Security Alarm 'Trigger on' destination for a Time Zone, dial:
• 5204-TimeZone-Trigger on
Where,
Time Zone is
1 for Working Hours
2 for Break Hours
3 for Non-Working Hours
Trigger on destination is
1 for DOP
2 for Routing Group
3 for External Number.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1453
To program DOP for Security Alarm for a Time Zone, dial:
• 5205-TimeZone-DOP
Where,
Time Zone is
1 for Working Hours
2 for Break Hours
3 for Non-Working Hours
DOP is from 0 to 3.
By default, DOP number is 0 for all Time Zones.
To program Routing Group for Security Alarm for a Time Zone, dial:
• 5206-TimeZone-Routing Group
Where,
Time Zone is
1 for Working Hours
2 for Break Hours
3 for Non-Working Hours
Routing Group is from 01 to 96.
By default, Routing Group 01 is selected for all Time Zones.
To program External Numbers for Security Alarm for a Time Zone, dial:
• 5207-TimeZone-Index-External Number-#*
Where,
Time Zone is
1 for Working Hours
2 for Break Hours
3 for Non-Working Hours
Index is from 1 to 3.
External Number is a number string of a maximum 16 digits. Terminate the command with #* if the
number of digits in the External number is fewer than 16.
To program OG Trunk Bundle Group for External Numbers, dial:
• 5208-OG Trunk Bundle Group
Where,
OG Trunk Bundle Group is from 01 to 32.
By default, OG Trunk Bundle Group 01 is selected.
To program Delay Response Timer for Security Alarm, dial:
• 5209-Delay Response Timer
Where,
Delay Response Timer is from 000 to 255 seconds.
By default, 015 seconds is set.
To program Call Attempt Interval for External Number, dial:
• 5210-Call Attempt Interval
Where,
Call Attempt Interval is from 000 to 255 seconds.
By default, 015 seconds is set.
To program Number of Attempts for External Number, dial:
• 5211-Number of Attempts
Where,
Number of Attempts is from 000 to 255.
1454 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
By default, 005 is set.
To enable/disable Security Reporting, dial:
• 5212-Flag
Where,
Flag is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable.
By default, Enable is selected.
To program Routing Group for Security Reporting, dial:
• 5213-Routing Group
Where,
Routing Group is from 01 to 96.
By default, Routing Group 01 is selected.
To default Security Alarm parameters, dial:
• 5201
• Exit SE mode.
How to use
This is an automatic application. The system automatically dials the programmed numbers on receiving the signal
from the DIP. Human intervention is required only for acknowledging the emergency call placed by Security Alarm.
To acknowledge the Security Alarm call, press '0'.
It is unlikely that external called parties would know that '0' must be pressed to acknowledge the
emergency call. You are recommended to include this information in the Voice Module you record for
Security Alarm prompting the called party to dial '0'.
It may happen that Security Alarm is initiated mistakenly. In which case, it must be terminated from the SA mode.
To terminate an erroneously initiated Security Alarm,
• Lift the handset.
• You get Dial tone.
• Dial 1#92-SA Password.
• Dial 1072-021.
• You get Confirmation tone
• Dial 1#92.
• You get Dial tone again.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1455
Selective Port Access
What’s this?
ETERNITY supports different extension and trunk port types. In the Selective Port Access feature, each port type is
assigned a Port Access Code. Extension users can access a particular port by dialing the Port Access Code
assigned to the Port and its Port Number.
How it works
• Extension user A wants to access a particular Mobile port, Mobile Port 1 to make a call. Extension A must
dial the Selective Port Access Feature Code, followed by the Port Type Code for Mobile ports and then dial
the Port Number.
• By default, the following access codes are assigned to each Port Type:
Port Type Meaning Port Number
01 SLT 001 to 512
02 DKP 001 to 128
03 TWT 001 to 128
04 BRI 01 to 32
05 T1E1 1 to 8
06 E&M 001 to 128
25 Mobile 01 to 64
26 SIP Trunk 01 to 32
28 ISDN Terminal 01 to 64
34 SIP Extension 001 to 999
Here, Extension A must dial 69-25-01, where 69 is the feature code for Selective Trunk Access, 25 is the
port access code for the Mobile Port, and 01 is the number of the Mobile Port which A wants to access.
Similarly, if Extension A wants to access SIP Extension 10, A must dial 69-34-010.
How to configure
To be able to use Selective Port Access, extension users must have this feature enabled in their “Class of Service
(COS)”.
1456 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
How to use
For EON & Extended IP Phone Users
To enable Selective Port Access on an extension,
• Press DSS key assigned to Selective Port Access code
OR
• Dial 69-Port Type-Port Number
• Dial 89-Port Type-Port Number (for users in USA)
For SLT Users
• Dial 69-Port Type-Port Number
• Dial 89-Port Type-Port Number (for users in USA)
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1457
Self Ring Test
What’s this?
You can use Self Ring Test to check the functioning of your own extension phone. Self Ring Test allows you to call
your own extension. You can check the ringing volume of your extension phone.
How to use
For EON & Extended IP Phone Users
• Go OFF-Hook.
• Press DSS Key assigned to Self Ring Test.
OR
• Dial 1057.
• Go ON-Hook.
• Your phone rings.
• Go OFF-Hook to stop the ring.
• Go ON-Hook.
For SLT Users
• Lift the receiver.
• Dial 1057.
• Replace receiver.
• Your phone rings.
• Lift the receiver to stop the ring.
• Replace the receiver.
1458 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
SIM Card Balance and Recharging
What's this?
The ETERNITY supports Balance Inquiry and Recharging of the SIM Card installed in its Mobile Ports199.
This feature requires a license. To use this feature you must purchase the license for the Mobility Feature
Suite. Refer the topic “License Management” to know more.
How to use
To be able to use this feature, first collect the following information from your Network Operator:
• Balance Inquiry Number: This is the number provided by the Network Operator to the subscribers to
check Balance. Different Network Operators have different numbers. For example, the Balance Inquiry
number of Vodafone is *141#.
• Recharging Service Number: This is the number provided by the Network Operators to their subscribers
for Recharging Service. Different Network Operators have different numbers for Recharging Service. For
example, the Recharging Service Number of Vodafone is *140*.
This feature can be used from the SE Mode only on Jeeves.
SIM Card Balance Inquiry and Recharging using Jeeves
• Login to Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click 'Mobile Configuration' link.
199. ETERNITY supports Unstructured Supplementary Service Data (USSD), the standard for transmitting information over CSM sig-
naling channels and a commonly used method to query the available balance and other similar information in pre-paid GSM ser-
vices.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1459
• Click the link 'SIM Balance Recharge' under Mobile Configuration to open the page.
• All the mobile ports configured in the system will appear on this page, by their Names you programmed
when configuring the mobile trunk ports.
If you have not programmed any name for a port, the Name field for that port will appear blank.
• Go to the Mobile Port on which you want to request SIM Balance/Recharge.
• Click the check box 'Balance Inquiry/Recharge' to enable this feature.
Balance Inquiry
• To make Balance Inquiry,
• Click the "Request' button of Balance Inquiry, for all those Mobile Ports for which you want to request
Balance Inquiry.
• Enter the Balance Inquiry Number provided by the Network Operator whose SIM Card you have installed
in the Mobile Port.
A maximum of 8 digits are allowed. The valid digits for Balance Inquiry number are any digits from 0 to 9
and the characters * and #
• Click 'Submit'.
1460 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Recharging the SIM
• To recharge the SIM,
• Click the 'Request' button under 'Recharge'.
• Enter the following information in the appropriate fields under 'Recharge' for the Mobile Ports:
• Number: Enter the Recharging Service Number provided by the Network Operator in this field.
A maximum of 8 digits are allowed. The valid digits for Recharging Service number are any digits from
0 to 9 and the characters * and #
• PIN: Enter the PIN number which is printed on the Recharge Voucher/Coupon. Your Recharge PIN
number may consists of a maximum of 20 digits.
The valid digits for Balance Inquiry number are any digits from 0 to 9 and the characters * and #.
Make sure you enter the digits and characters of the Recharge PIN number exactly as given on the
Recharge Voucher/Coupon.
• For each port that you send a Balance Inquiry/Recharge Request, you will get this USSD-Reply: "Please
wait, processing the request. Refresh the page to see the current status."
• Click 'Refresh' at the bottom of the page.
• The response received from the GSM network (including possible error messages) will be displayed under
'USSD-Reply'. When the USSD Reply is received from the network, it will appear with the Date and Time
stamp of ETERNITY in this field.
• You may log out of Jeeves.
• For each Mobile Port (SIM Card) at a time you can either request Balance Inquiry or Recharge the SIM
Card. When you select the radio button of Balance Inquiry of Mobile Port 1, 'Recharge' will be disabled
for Mobile Port 1. And when you select the radio button of Recharge, 'Balance Inquiry' will be disabled
for Mobile Port 1.
However, you can send Balance Inquiry/Recharge request for all the Mobile Ports available in the
system.
• During Balance Inquiry/Recharge-Request, the status of the Mobile port will be 'busy'. It will become
idle only after the USSD response is received from the GSM network.
• The ETERNITY will clear the USSD Reply after system restart. So each time you open the 'SIM
Balance and Recharge' page after system restart, the USSD Reply box will be blank.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1461
Software Port and Hardware ID
What’s this?
The ETERNITY supports different types of ports as illustrated below:
Port
Station Trunk Auxilliary Virtual
Port Port Port Port
SLT 2 Wire analog Trunk Paging Port
E&M Port
DKP External Music Port
(EON45/EON42) BRI Port
DIP
DS1 Port
SIP Port DOP
Mobile Port
The ETERNITY treats a port as an entity and processes it on the basis of port type and its programmed attributes.
Type of Port
SLT
DKP
Trunk
DOP
DIP etc.
Attributes of Port
Software
Port Access Code
COS Group
Toll Control Group
DID, etc.
Hardware Port
Slot Number
Port Number
Software Port
The ETERNITY takes a software port as fundamental entity. It processes the software port. Hardware ID and the
access code are just two attributes of a software port and hence they are not used anywhere in processing and
programming.
1462 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Software ports are always numbered from 1 to the maximum number of ports supported for each port type. The
following table lists this range for each port type.
Port Type Max. Ports Supported Port No. Range
SLT 512 001-512
DKP 128 001-128
Trunk 128 001-128
E&M 128 001-128
BRI 32 01-32
T1E1PRI 8 1-8
Mobile (GSM) 64 01-64
SIP Trunks 32 01-32
Magneto 128 001-128
Each type of software port has different attributes. The System Engineer (SE) programs these attributes using the
corresponding template at the time of installing the ETERNITY.
Hardware ID is an attribute of a software port. Hence, all the programming is done for the software port and not for
the hardware ID. Accordingly, the software port number is used for all programming tasks.
An access code is just a Flexible number assigned to the software port. Programming is for the software port and
not for the access code (Flexible number). Accordingly, the software port number is used for all the programming.
The System Engineer allocates software port numbers to different users. This allocation is Flexible and any
software port number can be assumed for any user. Hardware ID is not relevant at this stage. Hardware ID can be
programmed for a software port any time. Further, it can be changed any time in case of hardware failure of a port.
Following example elaborates this point.
Name Position Port Type S/w Port Used
Anil Sharma Managing Director DKP 001
Nikhil Rao VP (Marketing) DKP 002
Revathi Thyagarajan VP (Finance) DKP 003
Anand Chakraborty Manager (MD) SLT 001
Pankaj Shah Accountant SLT 003
Ravi Tandon Sales Executive SLT 002
Conference Room -- DKP 005
Canteen -- SLT 004
Leased Line -- Trunk 003
STD Line -- Trunk 001
Please take a note of following points:
• Software port numbers start from 001 for all different port types.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1463
• Order is not important while allocating software port numbers.
Hardware ID
The hardware ID of a software port denotes where the port is physically located. To derive hardware ID of a
software port, we need:
• Slot number of the card.
• Port number on that card (Port offset).
Use following command to assign hardware ID to a SLT software port:
1101-SLT-Slot-Port offset on the card
Where,
SLT = Software port number of SLT from 001 to 512.
Slot=Slot number from, 01 to 16, in which the card is inserted.
Port offset = Port number on that card, from 01 to 99.
By default, it is auto assigned.
To clear the hardware ID assigned to a SLT software port use the following command:
1101-SLT-00-00
Use following command to assign hardware ID to a DKP software port:
1102-DKP-Slot-Port offset on the card
Where,
DKP = Software port number of DKP from 001 to 128.
Slot=Slot number from 01 to 16 in which the card is inserted.
Port offset = Port number on that card, from 01 to 99.
Use the following command to clear the hardware ID assigned to DKP software port:
1102-DKP-00-00
Use following command to assign hardware ID to DSS software port:
1103-DKP-DSS-Slot-Port offset on the card
Where,
DKP = Software port number of DKP from 001 to 128.
DSS is 0 or 1.
Slot=Slot number from 01 to 16 in which the card is inserted.
Port offset = Port number on that card, from 01 to 99.
Use the following command to clear the hardware ID assigned to the DSS software port:
1103-DKP-DSS-00-00
Use following command to assign hardware ID to a TWT software port:
1104-TWT-Slot-Port offset on the card
Where,
TWT = Software port number of TWT from 001 to 128.
Slot=Slot number from 01 to 16 in which the card is inserted.
Port offset = Port number on that card, from 01 to 99.
Use the following command to clear the hardware ID assigned to TWT software port:
1104-TWT-00-00
1464 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Use following command to assign hardware ID to an E&M software port:
1105-E&M-Slot-Port offset on the card
Where,
E&M = Software port number of E&M from 001 to 128.
Slot=Slot number from 01 to 16 in which the card is inserted.
Port offset = Port number on that card, from 01 to 99.
Use the following command to clear the hardware ID assigned to E&M software port:
1105-E&M-00-00
Use following command to assign hardware ID to a BRI software port:
1106-BRI-Slot-Port offset on the card
Where,
BRI is from 01 to 32.
Slot is from 01 to 16, in which the card is inserted.
Port Offset on the card is from 01 to 99. (port number 01 to 08 are practically used values).
By default, the Hardware Slot and Port Offset are auto assigned.
Use following command to de-assign the hardware slot and the hardware port assigned to the BRI software port.
1106-BRI-00-00
Use following command to assign hardware ID to a T1E1PRI software port:
1107-T1E1-Slot-Port offset on the card
Where,
T1E1PRI is from 1 to 8.
Slot = Slot number from 01 to 16, in which the card is inserted.
Port offset = Port number on that card, from 01 to 99 (port number 01 and 02 are practically used values).
By default, the Hardware Slot and Port Offset are auto assigned.
Use the following command to clear the hardware ID assigned to T1E1PRI software port:
1107-T1E1-00-00
Use following command to assign hardware ID to a Mobile port:
1108-Mobile Trunk Number-Slot-Port offset on the card
Where,
Mobile Trunk Number is from 01 to 64.
Slot is from 01 to 16.
Port Offset on the card is from 01 to 99. (port number 01 to 04 are practically used values).
By default, the Hardware Slot and Port Offset are auto assigned.
Use following command to de-assign the hardware slot and the hardware port assigned to the Mobile port.
1108-Mobile Trunk Number-00-00
Use following command to assign hardware ID to a VoIP software port:
1109-VoIP Ethernet Port-Slot
Where,
VoIP Ethernet Port is from 01 to 16.
Slot is from 01 to 16.
Use following command to de-assign hardware ID to a VoIP software port:
1109-VoIP Ethernet Port-00
Use following command to assign hardware ID to a Magneto port:
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1465
1110-Magneto-Slot-Port offset on the card
Where,
Magneto is from 001 to 128.
Slot is from 01 to 16
Port Offset on the card is from 1 to 8.
By default, the Hardware Slot and Port Offset is auto assigned.
Use following command to de-assign the hardware slot and the hardware port assigned to the Magneto port.
1110-Magneto port-00-00
Relevant Topics:
1. “Paging” 1366
2. “Music on Hold (MOH)” 1335
3. “DSS Keys Programming” 482
1466 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Static Routing Table
What's this?
Static Routing Table is required when you have more than one router (gateway) in your network and you want
ETERNITY to send packets to multiple routers/gateways for different types of calls.
Static Routing Table helps route calls between point to point sites (connected through Multi Protocol Label
Switching-MPLS, Frame Relay, etc.) and to public internet at the same time.
How it works
For example, two Local Area Networks, Network A and Network B, are connected through Frame Relay/ Multi
Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) network to give access to local resources and also to make Peer-to-Peer calls.
59.162.252.82
SIP Proxy
A B
192.168.1.0/24 192.168.2.0/24
Public
IP
Frame Relay/MPLS
192.168.1.1
ETERNITY ETERNITY
ETERNITY is connected at both sites behind a router.
These sites are also connected to public IP network to:
• give internet access to local hosts.
• access DID service provided by ITSPs to make PSTN/ GSM calls over IP network.
Network A and Network B are in different subnets.
The Static Routing Table makes it possible to route different types of outgoing calls—Peer to Peer or Proxy—made
to different subnets through different Gateways.
The Static Routing Table defines the appropriate Gateway Address (or Router’s LAN Address) where the IP
packets are to be sent.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1467
In the Static Routing Table, you must configure:
• The address of the final Destination where the packets are to be sent.
• The Subnet Mask to be applied on the final destination address.
• The Gateway Address where the IP packets are to be sent.
When ETERNITY sends packets, if the final destination IP Address and ETERNITY are not in the same Subnet, the
system will check the Static Routing Table.
If a perfect match is found, ETERNITY will start sending the IP packets to the corresponding Gateway Address
configured in the table.
If no match is found, ETERNITY will send the IP Packets to the Default Gateway Address (Network Connection
Type) you configured in the Master Ethernet Port Parameters. See “Configuring Master Ethernet Port Parameters”.
The Static Routing Table is common for all SIP Trunks.
How to configure
The Static Routing Table must be configured at each location where ETERNITY is installed. You may configure the
Static Routing Table using Jeeves or by dialing the system commands from a telephone connected to the
ETERNITY.
Configuring Static Routing Table using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access Mode.
• Scroll to reach VoIP Configuration and click this link to expand.
• Under VoIP Configuration, click the Static Routing Table link.
1468 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• The Static Routing Table page opens.
The Static Routing Table allows you to configure up to 8 entries. Each entry is stored against an Index
number.
For each entry, you must configure the following fields:
• Destination Address: This is the address of the final destination where the call is to be made. This
can be a device IP Address or Network Address.
• Subnet Mask: This is the mask to be applied on destination address.
• Gateway Address: This is the IP address of the node where the IP packets are to be sent. Generally,
it is the IP address of the LAN interface of the Router.
The Gateway Address must be in the same subnet as ETERNITY.
• Click Submit to save your entries.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1469
To take the above example further, the Static Routing Table of ETERNITY at Location A should be
configured as:
Index Destination Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address
1 192.168.2.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.1.1
• The Destination Address 192.168.2.0 specifies the network address of Location B.
• The Subnet Mask is the mask to be applied on the Destination address.
• The Gateway Address 192.168.1.1 specifies the LAN address of the Router A which connects location
A and location B.
The IP address of the LAN interface of the router which connects Location A to the public internet
should be configured as Default Gateway in the Network Parameters of ETERNITY in location A.
With the Static Routing Table configured thus, all calls made by ETERNITY to 192.168.2.0/ 24 will be
routed through the router which connects Location A to Location B. Whereas, all calls made by
ETERNITY to addresses other than 192.168.2.0/ 24 will be routed through the Default Gateway.
Similarly, configure the Static Routing Table in ETERNITY at location B to enable calling from Location
B to Location A.
• Click Submit to save entries.
Configuring Static Routing Table using a Telephone
• Enter SE Mode from a DKP/SLT.
To program Destination Address in Static Routing Table, dial:
• 7811-1-Index-Destination Address
Where,
Index is 1 to 8.
Destination Address is of 15 digits maximum. Enter each octet in full. For example, to program
192.168.10.10, dial 192168010010.
To program Subnet Mask in the Static Routing Table, dial:
• 7812-1-Index-Subnet Mask
Where,
Index is 1 to 8.
Subnet Mask is of 15 digits maximum. Enter each octet in full. For example, to program
255.255.255.255, dial 255255255255
To program Gateway Address in the Static Routing Table, dial:
• 7813-1-Index-Gateway Address
Where,
1470 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Index is 1 to 8
Gateway Address is of 15 digits maximum. Enter each octet in full. For example, to program
192.168.10.10, enter 192168010010.
Use default Gateway Address of ETERNITY (VoIP Ethernet Port)
To clear entries in the Static Routing Table, dial:
• 7814-1-Index to clear a single entry.
• 7814-2-Index-Index to clear a range of entries.
• 7814-* to clear all entries in the table.
Where,
Index is 1 to 8.
• Exit SE mode.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1471
Station Message Detail Recording
What’s this?
• The ETERNITY can record the details of Internal, Incoming (IC) and Outgoing (OG) calls made from/to all
the stations. This is called Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR).
• The SMDR can be obtained as a report, only if storage of each type of calls is enabled. To get the SMDR
user will be required to set the filter conditions and assign the destination port. The online SMDR is also
supported by the ETERNITY which gives the report immediately after the call is made or received.
• The ETERNITY supports third party call cost calculation protocols and the parameters for this can also be
set by configuring the SMDR. Thus the user will be required to program following types of parameters:
• SMDR Storage: These parameters are programmed to enable the storing of the IC, OG and Internal
calls. Refer chapter “Station Message Detail Recording-Storage”.
• SMDR Report: These parameters are programmed to assign destination port for getting report of IC,
OG and Internal calls and to get offline report. Refer chapter “Station Message Detail Recording-
Report”.
• SMDR Online: These parameters are programmed to assign destination port for getting online report
of IC, OG and Internal calls and to configure the call record format for IC calls. To interface third party
call accounting software (CAS) with ETERNITY, SMDR online mode must be enabled. Refer chapter
“Station Message Detail Recording-Online”.
• SMDR Posting: ETERNITY supports call cost calculation and call record formats as Holidex, Hobic,
Hobis, Xiox, etc. Using call cost calculation, ETERNITY calculates cost of the call and sends the call
record to the PMS (Property Management Software) using protocols, like Holidex, Hobic, Hobis, etc.
The parameters for this are programmed to select the protocol for call accounting software and to
configure parameters for OG Handshaking Protocol and OG call record format. To assign destination
port and destination IP Address for OG posting parameters. Refer chapter “Station Message Detail
Recording-Posting”.
Refer separate Manual for Hotel Applications for more details about PMS.
Relevant Topics:
“Station Message Detail Recording-Storage” 1545
“Station Message Detail Recording-Report” 1531
“Station Message Detail Recording-Online” 1473
“Station Message Detail Recording-Posting” 1489
1472 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Station Message Detail Recording-Online
What's this?
• The ETERNITY can generate report for the calls as and when the call is made provided the printer or a
computer is connected to the respective port. This is called SMDR Online report.
• To get the online report SE should assign the destination port for IC, Internal and OG calls. SE should
ensure that the storage flag is enabled to store the calls in the buffer of the system. Refer chapter “Station
Message Detail Recording-Storage” to enable the storage of calls.
• The ETERNITY supports to change the default format for the SMDR Report , such as column position and
field length for calling number, speech duration, remarks field, etc. SE can configure these parameters as
per user's requirement.
For example,
• Each Internal call is stored with following fields:
• Station who made the call.
• Station to which the call was made.
• Date and time when the call was made.
• Duration of the call in seconds.
• Each outgoing call is stored with following fields:
• Station who made the call.
• Trunk line port used for the call.
• Number dialed.
• Date and time when the call matured.
• Duration of the call in seconds.
• Call Units.
• Call Maturity Type.
• Call Type (Normal, DISA, ECF etc.).
This feature requires a license. To use this feature you must purchase the license for the Business Feature
Suite. Refer the topic “License Management” to know more.
How to configure
Internal Calls: (Assigning destination port and using start/stop command for Online report)
Use following command to assign a destination port for Online SMDR-Internal call record:
2830-Code
Where,
Code Meaning
0 None
1 COM1
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1473
Code Meaning
2 COM2
3 Printer Port
4 Ethernet Port
By default, the port assigned is None. This means the Online printing is disabled.
If you assigned Ethernet Port as destination port, use the following command to assign the IP Address to the
Ethernet Port:
2832-IP Address
By default, IP Address is 192.168.1.104
Use the following command to assign the IP Port:
2833-IP Port
Where,
IP Port is from 514 and 1024-65535
By default, IP Port is 514.
• On assigning the communication port or the printer port or Ethernet Port as the destination port, the report
generation is directed to that as soon as the incoming call is completed.
• SE should take care, not to overlap the assignment of same ports to the different processes.
Use following command to Start/Abort report generation:
1072-136-Flag
Where,
Flag Meaning
0 Abort
1 Start
By default, Flag is 0.
• The ETERNITY provides a facility to abort the report generation in midway (1072-136-0). Once the report
generation is aborted, then it has to be explicitly started with (1072-136-1). This command is issued from
the SA mode.
• OG Online Report (Assigning destination port and using start/stop command for Online report)
Use following command to assign destination port for Online SMDR-OG Call Record:
2730-Code
Where
Code Meaning
0 None
1 COM1
2 COM2
3 Printer
1474 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Code Meaning
4 Ethernet Port
By default, the port assigned is None. This means the On-line printing is disabled.
If you assigned Ethernet Port as destination port, use the following command to assign the IP Address to the
Ethernet Port:
2732-IP Address
By default, IP Address is 192.168.1.104
Use the following command to assign the IP Port:
2733-IP Port
Where,
IP Port is from 514 and 1024-65535
By default, IP Port is 514.
• On assigning the communication port or the printer port or Ethernet Port as the destination port, the report
generation is directed to the assigned port as and when an OG call is completed.
Use following command to Start/Abort report generation:
1072-101-Flag
Where,
Flag Meaning
0 Abort
1 Start
By default, Flag is 0.
The ETERNITY provides a facility to abort the report generation in midway (1072-101-0). Once the report
generation is aborted, then it has to be explicitly started with command (1072-101-1). This command is issued from
the SA mode.
IC Online Report (Assigning destination port and using start/stop command for Online report)
Use following command to assign destination port for Online SMDR-IC Call Record:
2930-Code
Where,
Code Meaning
0 None
1 COM1
2 COM2
3 Printer Port
4 Ethernet Port
By default, the port assigned is None. This means the Online printing is disabled.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1475
If you assigned Ethernet Port as destination port, use the following command to assign the IP Address to the
Ethernet Port:
2932-IP Address
By default, IP Address is 192.168.1.104.
Use the following command to assign the IP Port:
2933-IP Port
Where,
IP Port is from 514 and 1024-65535
By default, IP Port is 514.
• On assigning the communication port or the printer port or Ethernet Port as the destination port, the report
generation is directed to that as soon as the incoming call is completed.
• SE should take care, not to overlap the assignment of same ports to the different processes.
Use following command to start/abort report generation:
1072-151-Flag
Where,
Flag Meaning
0 Abort
1 Start
By default, Flag is 0.
The ETERNITY provides a facility to abort the report generation midway (1072-151-0). Once the report generation
is aborted, then it has to be explicitly started with (1072-151-1). This command is issued from the SA mode.
SMDR record format for IC Call Printing-Online
Each SMDR record can be taken with following Parameters, which can be changed as required. The default values
are also given.
Serial Number
Use following command to program column position for serial number:
8200-Column Position
Where,
Column Position is from 00 to 78.
By default, Column Position is 01.
Use following command to program field length for serial number:
8201-Field Length
Where,
Field Length is from 00 to 78.
By default, Field Length is 04.
Use following command to program alignment for serial number:
8202-Alignment
1476 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Where,
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
By default, Alignment is 2.
Use following command to program fill character for serial number:
8203-Fill Character
Where,
Fill Character is 3 digit ASCII value.
By default, Fill Character is ‘Space’.
Use following command to program reset for serial number:
8204-Reset
Where,
Reset Meaning
1 No Compulsory Reset
2 Reset to 001 every 24 hours (at 00:00 Hrs.)
3 Reset to 001 every 6 hours (at 00:00 Hrs.)
By default, Reset is ‘1’.
Serial Number starts from 1 and not 0.
When this field rolls over, it increments the increment counter.
Increment Counter
Use following command to program column position for increment counter:
8205-Column Position
Where,
Column Position is from 00 to 78.
By default, Column Position is 00 (This field is not available by default).
By default, Field Length is 1, which is fixed.
Use following command to program reset for increment counter:
8206-Reset
Where,
Reset Meaning
1 No Compulsory Reset
2 Reset to 001 every 24 hours (at 00:00 Hrs.)
3 Reset to 001 every 6 hours (at 00:00 Hrs.)
By default, Reset is ‘1’.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1477
Increment Counter starts from A to Z and then rolls over back to A.
Increment Counter increments when Serial Number Counter rolls over.
Property Code
Use following command to program column position for property code:
8207-Column Position
Where,
Column Position is from 00 to 78.
By default, Column Position is 00 (This field is not available by default).
Use following command to program field length for property code:
8208-Field Length
Where,
Field Length is from 00 to 78.
Use following command to program property code string for property code:
8209-Property Code String
• This is a fixed code that appears in each call.
• The Enterprise can have its own code.
• This code is required by the Property Management System (PMS) when it is catering to more than one
PMS interfaces.
• Refer separate Manual for Hotel/Motel Applications for more details about PMS and Hotel applications
for this feature.
Station Number
Use following command to program column position for station number:
8210-Column Position
Where,
Column Position is from 00 to 78.
By default, Column Position is 29.
Use following command to program field length for station number:
8211-Field Length
Where,
Field Length is from 00 to 78.
By default, Field Length is 04.
Use following command to program alignment for station number:
8212-Alignment
Where,
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
By default, Alignment is 2.
1478 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Use following command to program fill character for station number:
8213-Fill Character
Where,
Fill Character is 3 digit ASCII value.
By default, Fill Character is ‘Space’.
Trunk Number
Use following command to program column position for trunk number:
8214-Column Position
Where,
Column Position is from 00 to 78.
By default, Column Position is 23.
Use following command to program format type for trunk number:
8215-Format Type
Where,
Format Type Meaning
1 Matrix Format
2 Check-In Format
By default, Format Type is ‘1’.
• Matrix Format occupies 5 character space.
• Check In Format occupies 4 character space.
• First Character in Check In Format is X (Fixed). Remaining three characters show the software port
number. However, this will not specify whether the call is made through TWT 125 or E&M 125. Also the
channel number will not be specified in case of call made through T1E1PRI port or BRI port.
Date
Use following command to program column position for date field:
8216-Column Position
Where,
Column Position is from 00 to 78.
By default, Column Position is 34.
Use following command to program field length for date field:
8217-Field Length
Where,
Field Length is from 00 to 78.
By default, Field Length is 10.
Use following command to program alignment for date field:
8218-Alignment
Where,
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1479
Alignment Meaning
2 Right Alignment
By default, Alignment is 2.
Use following command to program fill character for date field:
8219-Fill Character
Where,
Fill Character is 3 digit ASCII value.
By default, Fill Character is ‘Zero’.
Use following command to program date format for date field:
8220-Date Format
Where,
Date Format Meaning
01 DD-MM-YY
02 DD/MM/YY
03 DD.MM.YY
04 DD MM YY
05 DDMMYY
06 DD-MM-YYYY
07 DD/MM/YYYY
08 DD.MM.YYYY
09 DD MM YYYY
10 DDMMYYYY
11 MM-DD-YY
12 MM/DD/YY
13 MM.DD.YY
14 MM DD YY
15 MMDDYY
16 YY-MM-DD
17 YY/MM/DD
18 YY.MM.DD
19 YY MM DD
20 YYMMDD
21 YYYY-MM-DD
22 YYYY/MM/DD
23 YYYY.MM.DD
24 YYYY MM DD
1480 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Date Format Meaning
25 YYYYMMDD
26 MM-DD
27 MM/DD
28 MM.DD
29 MM DD
30 MMDD
31 DD-MM
32 DD/MM
33 DD.MM
34 DD MM
35 DDMM
By default, Date Format is 1.
Use following command to program date fill flag for date field:
8257-Date Fill Flag
Where,
Date Fill Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
By default, Date Fill Flag is ‘1’ (i.e. single digit in Date, Month and year is printed with prefix ‘0’).
• Leading Zeros field is applicable for Date, Month and Year i.e. whether the single digit date is to be
printed as space-X or 0-X. For example: date = 1 is to be displayed as ‘1’ or ‘01’. In case when leading
zeroes are not required, the date, month and year sub-fields are right aligned and the spaces are filled
with character ‘space’.
• This Date field is not linked to the global flag of Date Format. The global Flag of Date format is used
while using features or in configuration reports but not in PMS. This is because the date format used by
the PMS is not the same as used by the users of the system.
Time
Use following command to program column position for time field:
8222-Column Position
Where,
Column Position is from 00 to 78.
By default, Column Position is 45.
Use following command to program field length for time field:
8223-Field Length
Where,
Field Length is from 00 to 78.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1481
By default, Field Length is 08.
Use following command to program alignment for time field:
8224-Alignment
Where,
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
By default, Alignment is 2.
Use following command to program fill character for time field:
8225-Fill Character
Where,
Fill Character is 3 digit ASCII value.
By default, Fill Character is ‘Zero’.
Use following command to program time format for time field:
8226-Time Format
Where,
Time Format Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
By default, Time Format is 1.
Use following command to program time fill flag for time field:
8258-Time Fill Flag
Where,
Time Fill Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
By default, Time Fill Flag is ‘1’.
Leading Zeros field is applicable for Hours, Minutes and Seconds i.e. whether the single digit hour is to be
printed as space-X or 0-X. For example: hour = 1 is to be displayed as ‘1’ or ‘01’. In case when leading
zeroes are not required, Date, Month and Year sub-fields are right aligned and the spaces are filled with
character ‘space’.
Answer Duration
Use following command to program column position for answer duration field:
8227-Column Position
Where,
Column Position is from 00 to 78.
By default, Column Position is 54.
1482 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Use following command to program field length for answer duration field:
8228-Field Length
Where,
Field Length is from 00 to 78.
By default, Field Length is 03.
Use following command to program alignment for answer duration field:
8229-Alignment
Where,
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
By default, Alignment is 2.
Use following command to program fill character for answer duration field:
8230-Fill Character
Where,
Fill Character is 3 digit ASCII value.
By default, Fill Character is ‘Space’.
Use following command to enable/disable the Filler character flag for Answer Duration:
8259-Filler Character Flag for Answer Duration
Where,
Filler Character Flag for Answer Duration Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Default = Enable, (i.e. the Filler Character will used as programmed)
Use following command to program duration unit for answer duration field:
8231-Duration Unit
Where,
Duration Unit Meaning
1 HH:MM:SS
2 HHMMSS
3 Minutes
4 Seconds
By default, Duration Unit is ‘4’.
When Duration Unit = Minutes, rounding to nearest whole number is done. For seconds <= 30, Minute is
not incremented and for seconds > 30, minute is incremented.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1483
Hold Duration
Use following command to program column position for hold duration field:
8232-Column Position
Where,
Column Position is from 00 to 78.
By default, Column Position is 58.
Use following command to program field length for hold duration field:
8233-Field Length
Where,
Field Length is from 00 to 78.
By default, Field Length is 03.
Use following command to program alignment for hold duration field:
8234-Alignment
Where,
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
By default, Alignment for hold duration field is 2.
Use following command to program fill character for hold duration field:
8235-Fill Character
Where,
Fill Character is 3 digit ASCII value.
By default, Fill Character is ‘Space’.
Use following command to enable/disable the Filler character flag for Hold Duration:
8260-Filler Character Flag for Hold Duration
Where,
Filler Character Flag for Hold Duration Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Default = Enable, (i.e. Filler Character will used as programmed)
Speech Duration
Use following command to program column position for speech duration field:
8237-Column Position
Where,
Column Position is from 00 to 78.
By default, Column Position is 62.
Use following command to program field length for speech duration field:
8238-Field Length
Where,
1484 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Field Length is from 00 to 78.
By default, Field Length is 03.
Use following command to program alignment for speech duration field:
8239-Alignment
Where,
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
By default, Alignment is 2.
Use following command to program fill character for speech duration field:
8240-Fill Character
Where,
Fill Character is 3 digit ASCII value.
By default, Fill Character is ‘Space’.
Use following command to enable/disable the Filler character flag for Speech Duration:
8261-Filler Character Flag for Speech Duration
Where,
Filler Character for Speech Duration Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Default = Enable, (i.e. Filler Character will used as programmed).
Called Number
Use following command to program column position for called number field:
8242-Column Position
Where,
Column Position is from 00 to 78.
By default, Column Position is 00. (This field is not available by default)
Use following command to program field length for called number field:
8243-Field Length
Where,
Field Length is from 00 to 78.
By default, Field Length is 16.
Use following command to program alignment for called number field:
8244-Alignment
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1485
Where,
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
By default, Alignment is 1.
Use following command to program number format for called number field:
8245-Number Format
Where,
Number Format Meaning
1 Continuous
2 Separated
By default, Number Format is ‘1’.
When separated is selected, put ‘-‘ in the called party number of 10 digits. First after three digits and
another after six digits.
Calling Number
Use following command to program column position for calling number field:
8246-Column Position
Where,
Column Position is from 00 to 78.
By default, Column Position is 06.
Use following command to program field length for calling number field:
8247-Field Length
Where,
Field Length is from 00 to 78.
By default, Field Length is 16.
Use following command to program alignment for calling number field:
8248-Alignment
Where,
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
By default, Alignment is 1.
Use following command to program number format for calling number field:
8249-Number Format
1486 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Where,
Number Format Meaning
1 Continuous
2 Separated
By default, Number Format is 1.
When separated is selected, put ‘-‘ in the called party number of 10 digits. First after three digits and
another after six digits.
DID Digits
Use following command to program column position for DID digits field:
8250-Column Position
Where,
Column Position is from 00 to 78.
By default, Column Position is 00. i.e. this field is not available by default.
Use following command to program field length for DID digits field:
8251-Field Length
Where,
Field Length is from 00 to 78.
By default, Field Length is 00.
Use following command to program alignment for DID digits field:
8252-Alignment
Where,
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
Remarks
Use following command to program column position for remarks field:
8253-Column Position
Where,
Column Position is from 00 to 78.
By default, Column Position is 68.
Use following command to program field length for remarks field:
8254-Field Length
Where,
Field Length is from 00 to 78.
By default, Field Length is 02.
Use following command to program alignment for remarks field:
8255-Alignment
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1487
Where,
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
By default, Alignment is 1.
Use following command to assign default IC SMDR format:
8256
Relevant Topics:
1. “Station Message Detail Recording” 1472
2. “Station Message Detail Recording-Storage” 1545
3. “Station Message Detail Recording-Report” 1531
4. “Station Message Detail Recording-Posting” 1489
IC calls-Online report will look like as shown below:
1 06001 3005 16-02-11 16:47:19 4 0 U
2 06001 3005 16-02-11 16:47:28 2 0 U
3 06001 3005 16-02-11 16:47:34 2 0 U
Internal calls-Online report will look like as shown below:
IN 3009 3005 16-02-2011 16:49:20 3
IN 3005 3009 16-02-2011 16:49:30 2
OG calls-Online report will look like as shown below:
6 3005 06001 123523 16-02-2011 16:33:04 12 1 1.10 D
1488 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Station Message Detail Recording-Posting
The Station Message Detail Record (SMDR)-Posting feature of ETERNITY is used for interfacing the system with
CAS.
SMDR-Posting sends call detail records to CAS for the purpose of call cost calculation.
When ETERNITY is interfaced with a third party Call Accounting Software (CAS) (See Note1) to determine the cost
of the calls made by the station users, the system uses SMDR-Posting to send to CAS call record details, like
number to which the call was made by the station user, number of the station from which the call was made, the
date and time when the call was made, the duration of the call, metering pulses incurred for the call, etc. On receipt
of this information, the CAS calculates the cost of the call for billing.
As different CAS interfaces support different protocols, the ETERNITY offers the flexibility to send call detail
records using the protocol supported by CAS. SMDR-Posting supports as many as 15 different widely-used CAS
protocols such as, Holidex, Hobic, Micros A, Micros B, Comm One, Call-Inn, Bell-HOBIC, XIOX, RSI and others.
Each posting protocol has its own handshaking protocol and call record format. The Installer/System Engineer can
configure any one of these depending upon the protocol supported by CAS. It is also possible to customize the
posting protocol to match the settings required by the CAS used by the organization.
SMDR-Posting is supported on Serial RS232 Communication Port as well as on TCP/IP Ethernet Port. Thus, the
CAS can be interfaced on either the COM port or the Ethernet port of the ETERNITY. For every outgoing call, call
detail record is posed on the designated port (COM port/Ethernet port)
SMDR-Posting sends outgoing call records only.
This feature requires a license. To use this feature you must purchase the license for the Business Feature
Suite. Refer the topic “License Management” to know more.
SMDR-Posting Protocols
The ETERNITY supports as many as 15 different posting protocols from the system to CAS. The flow of messages
between the ETERNITY and various protocols of CAS Interface is described in the following.
1. Holidex/HOBIS A
This protocol is used by Amstar, CLS, Compass, Compu-solve, Dehan, Encore, Fabco, HIS, Holidex, HRGAS,
InnSolutions, Inn-Star, Lodgemate, Logistix, Omron, Otto Clerk, Reserve 5, Resort Computer, RDP, Springer-
Miller Systems, Star and Stuart.
HOBIS B is used by EECO and New Systems Protocol for transfer of messages from the PBX to CAS.
Case 1: Normal delivery of message to CAS
PBX to CAS CAS to PBX
ENQ >
< ACK
STX-(tex)-ETX-BCC >
< ACK
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1489
Case 2: Busy Response from the CAS
PBX to CAS CAS to PBX
ENQ >
< NAK (CAS responds but cannot accept at this time)
The PBX will retransmit an ENQ after 5 seconds until the CAS accepts the message or until 4 NAK responses
are received.
Case 3: No Response from CAS
PBX to CAS CAS to PBX
ENQ > (Wait for 5 seconds)
No Response
The PBX will retransmit an ENQ after 5 seconds until CAS responds or until 4 Unsuccessful ENQ responses
have been sent.
Case 4: Negative Response to data transfer
PBX to CAS CAS to PBX
ENQ >
< ACK
STX-(tex)-ETX-BCC >
< NAK
ENQ > (Wait for 3 seconds)
STX-(tex)-ETX-BCC > (Maximum of 3 tries)
< ACK
The PBX will make a maximum of 3 attempts to send the message. If the message is still not transmitted
successfully, it will drop the message and proceed to the transmission of the next message.
Case 5: No Response to data transfer
PBX to CAS CAS to PBX
ENQ >
< ACK
STX-(tex)-ETX-BCC > (Wait for 11 seconds)
No Response
ENQ >
< ACK
STX-(tex)-ETX-BCC > (Maximum of 3 tries)
1490 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The PBX will try to send the message for a maximum of 3 tries. If the message is not transmitted successfully,
the system will drop the message and proceed for the transmission of the next message. Also, the system will
print a System Fault event and the message.
Link Control Characters
Control Character
Meaning
Char. ASCII Value
ENQ Used to request the status of the CAS HEX 05
ACK Positive Acknowledgement by the CAS (Indicates successful reception of data by HEX 06
the CAS)
NAK Negative Acknowledgement by the CAS (Unsuccessful reception of data by the HEX 15
CAS)
STX This marks the beginning of the data transfer. It also starts the accumulation of the HEX 02
BCC
ETX This is the last data character. Marks the end of the data. It is immediately followed HEX 03
by the BCC.
BCC This is a 'block check character' used to verify the successful transfer of data Depends on
between the systems. BCC is calculated by processing through an accumulatory the data
by an Exclusive OR operation. The BCC process should start with the character
after the STX character.
2. HOBIS B
Handshaking Parameters for HOBIS B are as below:
Positive Response form the CAS
PBX to CAS CAS to PBX
<LF> -message-<CR>
ACK
Negative Response form the CAS
PBX to CAS CAS to PBX
<LF>-message-<CR>
NAK
<LF>-message-<CR>
NAK
<LF>-message-<CR>
NAK
<LF>-message-<CR>
The ETERNITY will make 3 tries (default) to send the message for Data Transfer Retry Count - on Negative
Response. If the ACK is still not received from the CAS, the ETERNITY will proceed to the next message.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1491
No Response form the CAS
PBX to CAS CAS to PBX
<LF>-message-<CR> (wait for Response to Data Timeout
(sec), default 5 sec)
(no response)
After 3 seconds, (Data Transfer Retry Timer on No
Response), retransmit
<LF>-message-<CR> (wait for Response to Data Timeout
(sec), default 5 sec)
After 3 seconds (Data Transfer Retry Timer
on No Response), retransmit
<LF>-message-<CR> (wait for Response to Data Timeout
(sec), default 5 sec)
After 3 seconds (Data Transfer Retry Timer on No
Response), retransmit
<LF>-message-<CR> (wait for Response to Data Timeout
(sec), default 5 sec)
After sending the message the ETERNITY will wait for the response to data timeout time. If no response is
received from CAS for the sent message, the ETERNITY will log this message in the System Fault Log and
look for new message to be sent to CAS.
Link Control Characters
Control Char. Meaning Character ASCII Value
ACK Positive Acknowledgement from CAS HEX 06
NAK Negative Acknowledgement from CAS HEX 15
This marks the beginning of the message.
LF HEX 0A
Start of the Message (Line Feed)
CR End of the Message HEX 0D (Carriage Return)
3. Hobic
Protocol for transfer of messages from PBX to CAS.
Case 1: Positive Response from the CAS
PBX to CAS CAS to PBX
SOM-(tex)-EOM >
< ACK
1492 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Case 2: Negative Response from the CAS
SOM-(text)-EOM > (Wait for 3 seconds)
< NAK
SOM-(text)-EOM > (Wait for 3 seconds)
< NAK
SOM-(text)-EOM > (Wait for 3 seconds)
The PBX will make a maximum of 3 attempts to send the message. If the message is still not transmitted
successfully, it will drop the message and proceed to the transmission of the next message.
Case 3: No Response from the CAS
SOM-(text)-EOM > (Wait for 5 seconds)
No Response
The PBX will wait for 5 seconds to receive response from the CAS. If no response is received from the CAS
during this time period, it will drop the message and proceed to the transmission of the next message.
Link Control Characters
Control Char. Meaning Character ASCII
Value
ACK Positive Acknowledgement by the CAS HEX 06
(Indicates successful reception of data by the CAS)
NAK Negative Acknowledgement by the CAS HEX 15
(Unsuccessful reception of data by the CAS)
SOM This marks the beginning of the message. Start of Message. HEX 0A (Line Feed)
EOM End of Message. This marks the end of message. HEX 0D or 0A or 0C
(CR or LF or FF)
4. Micros A
Handshaking protocol for Micros A shall be as shown below:
Case 1: Positive Response from the CAS
PBX CAS
Text Plus Carriage Return >
<y
The first field of Text is always 'ac01' which marks the start of text. However, this field is a part of message and
not a link control character.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1493
Case 2: Negative Response from the CAS
PBX CAS
Text Plus Carriage Return > (Wait for 3 seconds)
<n
Text Plus Carriage Return > (Wait for 3 seconds)
The PBX will make a maximum of 2 attempts to send the message. If the message is still not transmitted
successfully, it will drop the message and proceed for the transmission of next message.
Case 3: No Response from the CAS
PBX CAS
Text plus Carriage Return > (Wait for 5 seconds)
No Response
The PBX will wait for 5 seconds and if no response is received from the CAS, it will drop the message and
proceed to the transmission of the next message.
Link Control Characters
Control Character Meaning Character ASCII value
Positive Acknowledgement by the CAS
ACK HEX 79 (ASCII 'y')
(Indicates successful reception of data by the CAS)
Negative Acknowledgement by the CAS (Unsuccessful
NAK HEX 6E (ASCII 'n')
reception of data by the CAS)
5. Micros B
Handshaking protocol for Micros B is as shown below:
Case 1: Positive Response from the CAS
PBX CAS
Text Plus Carriage Return >
< ACK
The first field of Text is always 'ac01' which marks the start of text. However, this field is a part of message and
not a link control character.
Case 2: Negative Response from the CAS
PBX CAS
Text Plus Carriage Return > (Wait for 3 seconds)
< NAK
Text Plus Carriage Return > (Wait for 3 seconds)
1494 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The PBX will try to send the message for a maximum of 2 tries and if still the message is not transmitted
successfully, it will drop the message and proceed for the transmission of the next message. It will also print a
System Fault event and the message.
Case 3: No Response from the CAS
PBX CAS
Text plus Carriage Return > (Wait for 5 seconds)
No Response
The PBX will wait for 5 seconds and if no response is received from the CAS, it will drop the message and
proceed to transmit the next message.
Link Control Characters
Control Character Meaning Character value
ACK Positive Acknowledgement by the CAS HEX 06
(Indicates successful reception of data by the CAS)
NAK Negative Acknowledgement by the CAS HEX 15
(Unsuccessful reception of data by the CAS)
6. Comm One, Call-Inn
No handshaking is required when any of the above protocols is selected.
7. RSI-CMS
ETERNITY sends call detail record in following format to RSI-CMS call accounting interface.
STX-Message-EXT
Call accounting interface will not send any response, ACK/NAK, for the messages received.
Call Detail Record Formats
The Call Detail Record formats are given below for various protocols.
HOLIDEX:
Start
Field Filler/
Parameter Column Alignment Remarks
Length Character
Number
Serial Number 01 03 RA Zero Every 6 hours it is cleared to 001.
(Starting from mid-night 00:00:00)
Increment 04 01 NA NA Every 6 hours it is cleared to A.
Counter (Starting from mid-night 00:00:00)
Property Code 06 03 NA NA As per the Programmed String
Date 10 05 NA Zero MM/DD
Station Number 16 05 RA Space --
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1495
Start
Field Filler/
Parameter Column Alignment Remarks
Length Character
Number
Time 22 05 NA Zero HH:MM
Duration 28 04 RA Zero Duration is in Minutes.
Currency 33 01 NA NA $
Symbol
Amount 34 06 RA Zero Format is DDD.CC
Called Number 41 12 LA Space Area code, Exchange code and
Subscriber Number separated by dash.
Space is sent in place of Area Code
and first dash if area code is not
present.
Call Type 54 1 NA NA As per the Call Type Indicator table
Indicator programmed by the SE. The SE should
program L = local, F=International and
Space shall be used for long distance.
Trunk Number 00 NA NA NA --
Units 00 NA NA NA --
Location 00 NA NA NA --
Account Code 00 NA NA NA --
Prefix String 00 NA NA NA --
(ac01)
Remarks 00 NA NA NA --
• The Called Number will be left aligned.
• If the actual dialed number is less than the specified field width, the number will be sent as per the
programmed alignment.
• If the dialed number length is greater than the width of the dialed number field, the trailing number digits
will be removed. For example: if the number dialed is 15134036508 (11 digits) and the width of the
called number field is 8, then the first 8 digits will be sent.
HOBIS A:
Start Column Field Filler
Parameter Alignment Remarks
Number Length Character
Serial Number 01 03 RA Zero --
Increment 04 01 NA NA --
Counter
Property Code 06 03 NA Space As per the Programmed String
Date 10 05 NA Zero Date Format is MM/DD
1496 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Start Column Field Filler
Parameter Alignment Remarks
Number Length Character
Station Number 17 04 RA Space --
Time 22 05 NA Zero Time Format is HH:MM
Duration 28 04 RA Zero In Minutes. Round up to the nearest
whole minute
Currency Symbol 33 01 NA NA $
Amount 34 06 RA Zero In DDD.CC
Called Number 41 12 LA Space Continuous number. Not separated
by dashes.
Call Type 54 01 NA NA By default, since the table is blank,
Indicator this field shall be blank. The SE is
expected to program the call
indicator fields as per his
requirement.
Trunk Number 00 NA NA NA --
Units 00 NA NA NA --
Location 00 NA NA NA --
Account Code 00 NA NA NA --
Prefix String 00 NA NA NA --
(ac01)
Remarks 00 NA NA NA --
NA = Not Applicable, RA = Right Aligned, LA = Left Aligned.
HOBIS B:
Same as HOBIS A, except the handshaking parameters.
HOBIC:
Start Column Field Filler
Parameter Alignment Remarks
Number Length Character
Serial Number 01 03 RA Zero Every 6 hours it is cleared to 001.
(Starting from mid-night 00:00:00)
Increment 04 01 NA NA Every 6 hours it is cleared to A.
Counter (Starting from mid-night 00:00:00)
Property Code 06 03 NA NA As per the Programmed String
Date 10 05 NA Zero MM/DD
Station Number 16 05 RA Space --
Time 22 05 NA Zero HH:MM
Duration 28 04 RA Zero Duration is in Minutes.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1497
Start Column Field Filler
Parameter Alignment Remarks
Number Length Character
Currency Symbol 33 01 NA NA $
Amount 34 06 RA Zero Format is DDD.CC
Called Number 41 15 LA Space Area code, Exchange code and
Subscriber Number separated by
dash. Space is sent in place of Area
Code and first dash if area code is
not present.
Call Type 57 1 NA NA As per the Call Type Indicator table
Indicator programmed by the SE. The SE
should program L = local,
F=International and Space shall be
used for long distance.
Trunk Number 00 NA NA NA --
Units 00 NA NA NA --
Location 00 NA NA NA --
Account Code 00 NA NA NA --
Prefix String 00 NA NA NA --
(ac01)
Remarks 00 NA NA NA --
By default the link control character EOM will be Carriage Return (CR - HEX 0D), Line Feed (LF - HEX 0A)
and Form Feed (FF - HEX 0C)
BELL HOBIC:
Start Column Field Filler
Parameter Alignment Remarks
Number Length Character
Serial Number 01 03 RA Zero The Serial number wraps to
001 every midnight.
Increment Counter 04 01 NA NA The Increment Counter
wraps to 001 every midnight.
Property Code 06 03 NA NA As per the Programmed
String
Date 10 05 NA Zero MM/DD, Date on which call
is started
Station Number 16 05 LA Space --
Time 22 05 NA Zero HH:MM, Time on which call
is started
Duration 28 04 RA Zero Duration is in Minutes,
(rounded to nearest minute)
Currency Symbol 33 01 NA NA $
1498 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Start Column Field Filler
Parameter Alignment Remarks
Number Length Character
Amount 34 06 NA Zero Format is DDD.CC
Called Number 41 08 RA Space Exchange code and
Subscriber Number
separated by dash.
No Area Code is
provided.
Call Type Indicator 50 1 NA NA As per the Call Type
Indicator table programmed
by the SE. The SE should
follow the recommendations
as given along with the
programming command.
Trunk Number 00 NA NA NA --
Units 00 NA NA NA --
Location 00 NA NA NA --
Account Code 00 NA NA NA --
Prefix String (ac01) 00 NA NA NA --
Remarks 00 NA NA NA --
MICROS A:
Start Column
Parameter Field Length Alignment Fill Char. Remarks
Number
Serial Number 00 NA NA NA --
Increment Counter 00 NA NA NA --
Property Code 00 NA NA NA --
Station Number 06 04 RA Zero --
Trunk Number 00 NA NA NA --
Date 00 NA NA NA --
Time 00 NA NA NA --
Duration 00 NA NA NA --
Units 00 NA NA NA --
Amount 11 06 RA Zero Format is DDDDCC
Currency Symbol 00 NA NA NA --
Call Type Indicator 00 00 NA NA --
Location 00 NA NA NA --
Called Number 18 12 RA Zero --
Account Code 00 NA NA NA --
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1499
Start Column
Parameter Field Length Alignment Fill Char. Remarks
Number
Prefix String (ac01) 1 4 NA NA --
Remarks 00 NA NA NA --
MICROS B:
Same as MICROS A, except the handshaking parameters.
HILTON:
Field Start Column Field Alignment Filler Remarks
Number Length Character
Serial Number 01 03 RA Zero The Serial number wraps to 001
every midnight.
Increment 04 01 NA NA This field is not documented but is
Counter always supposed to be an A.
Property Code 06 03 NA NA As per the Programmed String
Date 10 05 NA Zero MM/DD, date on which session
started
Station Number 16 04 LA Space Whether this field is of four digits or
five digits is not documented. Hence,
it is assumed to be of four digits.
Time 21 05 NA Zero HH:MM, Time on which session
started
Duration 27 01 NA NA Duration is in Minutes. What happens
to bigger duration call is now known.
We can assume roll over. Round it to
the nearest minute.
Currency Symbol 29 01 NA NA $
Amount 30 06 RA Zero Format is DDD.CC
Called Number 37 12 RA Space Area Code, Exchange code and
Subscriber Number separated by
dash. IF no Area Code is available,
then space is used in place of Area
Code and first dash.
Call Type 00 NA NA NA As per the Call Type Indicator table
Indicator programmed by the SE. The SE
should follow the recommendations
as given along with the programming
command.
Location 00 NA NA NA --
Trunk Number 00 NA NA NA --
Units 00 NA NA NA --
1500 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Field Start Column Field Alignment Filler Remarks
Number Length Character
Account Code 00 NA NA NA --
Prefix String 00 NA NA NA --
(ac01)
Remarks 00 NA NA NA --
In this protocol, the ETX is at the column position 61; hence the PBX will send blanks from column position 50 to
60.
XIOX:
Start Column Field Filler
Field Alignment Remarks
Number Length Character
Serial Number 01 03 RA Zero The Serial number wraps to 001
every midnight.
Increment 04 01 NA NA This field is initialized to B. This field
Counter can be programmed to any other
value. However, we shall not give this
programmable within the XIOX
protocol itself. If it is required by the
customer to start his field from say
'C', he shall have to use customized
option.
Property Code 06 03 NA NA As per the Programmed String
Date 10 05 NA Zero MM/DD
Station Number 16 04 LA Space Whether this field is of four digits or
five digits is not documented. Hence,
it is assumed to be of four digits.
Time 21 05 NA Zero HH:MM
Duration 27 04 NA NA Duration is in Minutes. What happens
to bigger duration call is now known.
We can assume roll over.
Currency Symbol 32 01 NA NA $
Amount 33 06 RA Zero Format is DDD.CC
Called Number 40 08 RA Space Exchange code and Subscriber
Number separated by dash. No Area
code is sent
Call Type 49 01 NA NA As per the Call Type Indicator table
Indicator programmed by the SE. The SE
should follow the recommendations
as given along with the programming
command.
Location 00 NA NA NA --
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1501
Start Column Field Filler
Field Alignment Remarks
Number Length Character
Units 00 NA NA NA --
Trunk Number 00 NA NA NA --
Account Code 00 NA NA NA --
Prefix String 00 NA NA NA --
(ac01)
Remarks 00 NA NA NA --
Comm One:
Start Column Field Filler Char. Filler Char.
Parameter Format Alignment
No. Length Required? (Decimal Value)
Serial Number 00 00 X X X X
Increment
00 01 X X X X
Counter
Property Code 00 00 X X X X
Station Number 06 04 Fixed LA Yes 032
Trunk Number 12 05 Matrix Format RA Yes 032
Date 37 08 MM/DD/YY RA Yes 032
Time 48 08 HH:MM:SS RA Yes 032
Duration 57 06 HHMMSS RA Yes 048
Units 00 00 X X X X
Amount 00 00 X X X X
Currency 00 00 X X X X
Call Type
00 00 X X X X
Indicator
Location 00 00 X X X X
Called Number 18 18 Continuous LA Yes 032
Account Code 01 03 Fixed RA Yes 048
Remarks 00 00 X X X X
Call-Inn:
Start Column Field Filler Char. Filler Char.
Parameter Format Alignment
No. Length Required? (Decimal Value)
Serial Number 00 00 X X X X
Increment
00 01 X X X X
Counter
Property Code 00 00 X X X X
1502 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Start Column Field Filler Char. Filler Char.
Parameter Format Alignment
No. Length Required? (Decimal Value)
Station Number 06 04 Fixed LA Yes 032
Trunk Number 00 NA X X X X
Date 37 08 MM/DD/YY RA Yes 032
Time 48 05 HH:MM RA Yes 032
Duration 57 08 HH:MM:SS RA Yes 048
Units 00 00 X X X X
Amount 00 00 X X X X
Currency 00 00 X X X X
Call Type
00 00 X X X X
Indicator
Location 00 00 X X X X
Called Number 18 18 Continuous LA Yes 032
Account Code 00 00 X X X X
Remarks 00 00 X X X X
RSI-CMS:
Start Column Field Filler Char. Filler Char.
Parameter Format Alignment
No. Length Required? (Decimal Value)
Serial Number 02 04 Fixed RA Yes 048
Increment Counter 00 00 X X X X
Property Code 00 00 X X X X
Station Number 07 05 Fixed RA Yes 032
Trunk Number 13 05 Matrix Format RA Yes 032
DD/MM/
Date 38 10 RA Yes 032
YYYY
Time 49 08 HH:MM:SS RA Yes 032
Duration 58 05 Minutes RA Yes 048
Units 00 00 X X X X
Amount 00 00 X X X X
Currency 00 00 X X X X
Call Type Indicator 00 00 X X X X
Location 00 00 X X X X
Called Number 19 18 Continuous LA Yes 032
Account Code 64 03 Fixed RA Yes 048
Remarks 00 00 X X X X
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1503
Customized SMDR-Posting Protocol
When SMDR-Posting Protocol is selected as 'Customized', then the various parameters of the Call Detail
Record format can also be customized.
When the Call Detail Record format is customized, if there is a gap between two fields, these fields will be
'space' (ASCII-32).
Setting up CAS Interface
ETERNITY supports CAS Interface on Communication Port (RS232) as well as Ethernet port (TCP/IP).
Depending upon the installation scenario of the ETERNITY in the organisation, the Installer/System Engineer
may decide whether to use the CAS interface on the COM Port or on Ethernet Port of the system.
Setting up CAS Interface on COM Port (RS232)
If the Installer/System Engineer has decided to set up the CAS Interface on the COM Port (Refer Note2) (RS232),
the following functional components are required to make the interface work:
• A PC with a spare serial/COM port (not supplied by Matrix).
• The CAS Software (not supplied by Matrix).
• The ETERNITY (supplied by Matrix).
Now, locate a spare serial/COM port on the PC. Connect the COM port the ETERNITY with the COM port of
the PC using the communication cable supplied by Matrix (Refer Note3).
Setting up CAS Interface on Ethernet Port (TCP/IP)
If the Installer/System Engineer has decided to set up the CAS Interface on the Ethernet Port (TCP/IP), the
following functional components are required to make the interface work:
• A PC with a spare Ethernet port (not supplied by Matrix) Or any free Ethernet Port of the LAN Switch on
which the CAS server application software is running.
• The CAS Software (not supplied by Matrix).
• The ETERNITY (supplied by Matrix).
Now, connect the Ethernet port of the Master/CPU card of the ETERNITY with the Ethernet Port of the PC (on
which CAS server application is running) or to one of the Ethernet ports of the LAN Switch, if the CAS server
is in the same LAN.
Programming SMDR-Posting for CAS
Programming the SMDR-Posting feature involves the following steps:
• Enabling storage of Outgoing (OG) SMDR. By default, OG SMDR storage is enabled. Refer “Station
Message Detail Recording-Storage”.
• Selecting the appropriate SMDR-Posting protocol to be used.
• Selecting the Destination Port for SMDR-Posting
1504 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• If SMDR-Posting is through RS232 (i.e. the CAS Interface is to be set up on the COM Port), program
the attributes of the COM port. Refer the chapter “Communication Ports” to set attributes of the COM
port.
• If SMDR-Posting is through TCP/IP (i.e. the CAS Interface is to be set up on the Ethernet port),
program the destination IP address and Port.
• Refine the Handshake parameters, if required.
• Refine Call Detail Record format, if required.
• Start SMDR-Posting process.
How to configure the SMDR-Posting parameters for CAS Interface?
To program SMDR Posting Parameters using SE Commands,
• Enter SE mode from any extension of ETERNITY.
• Dial command 2701-1 to enable storage of SMDR of outgoing calls.
• To disable dial 2701-0. If this flag is disabled, the system will not store records of outgoing calls.
By default, storage of outgoing calls is enabled.
Destination Port:
Use following command to assign Destination Port for SMDR-OG Posting:
8330-Code
Where,
Code Meaning
0 None
1 COM1
2 COM2
3 Not Used
4 Ethernet
By default, the port assigned is Ethernet.
For example, to select COM Port as destination port for SMDR Posting in ETERNITY GE model, dial: 8330-1.
Recollect that ETERNITY GE has only one COM Port.
Use following command to program CAS Server's IP Address (destination IP Address):
8331-Address-Address-Address-Address
Where,
Address is from 000 to 255 for the first 3 Octets and 001 to 254 for the fourth Octet.
By default, Destination Server IP Address is 192.168.1.103.
Use following command to program CAS Server IP Port (Destination Port):
8332-Destination IP Port
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1505
Where,
Destination IP Port number is from 1024 to 65535.
By default, destination IP Port is 5000.
Use following command to program Listening Port of ETERNITY.
8334-Listening Port
Where,
Listening Port is from 01024 to 65535.
By default, Listening Port is 06000.
Use following command to select appropriate SMDR-OG Posting Protocol:
8301-SMDR-OG Posting Protocol
Where,
SMDR-OG Posting protocols is from 01 to 15.
Posting Protocol Protocol Name
01 Blind Send
02 Matrix
03 Holidex
04 HOBIS A
05 HOBIS B
06 HOBIC
07 BELL HOBIC
08 MICROS A
09 MICROS B
10 Hilton
11 Xiox
12 Comm One
13 Call-Inn
14 RSI-CMS
15 Customized
By default, Posting Protocol is 02 i.e. Matrix.
When the above command is issued, the system will set the default values of the handshaking related parameters
and call record format parameters of the selected Posting Protocol.
The following table shows the default values for Handshaking parameters and Link Control parameters of various
OG-SMDR Posting protocols:
1506 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Default values for Handshaking and Link Control parameters of OG-SMDR Posting Protocols:
Parameter/
Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 a b c D e f g
Protocol
01 Blind Send 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 000 000 000 000 CR-LF 0
02 Matrix 3 5 3 5 3 3 5 3 5 3 0 000 ACK NAK STX ETX 1
03 Holidex 5 4 5 4 5 11 3 11 3 11 1 ENQ ACK NAK STX ETX 1
04 HOBIS A 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 ENQ ACK NAK STX ETX 1
05 HOBIS B 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 0 ENQ ACK NAK LF CR 0
06 HOBIC 5 3 3 3 3 5 3 3 3 3 0 000 ACK NAK LF CR-LF- 0
FF
07 BELL 5 5 5 5 5 5 3 3 3 3 1 ENQ ACK NAK STX ETX 1
HOBIC
08 MICROS A 5 3 3 3 3 5 3 3 3 3 0 000 y N 000 CR 0
09 MICROS B 5 3 3 3 3 5 3 3 3 3 0 000 ACK NAK 000 CR 0
10 HILTON 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 0 000 ACK NAK STX ETX 1
11 XIOX 2 3 2 3 2 2 3 2 3 2 0 000 ACK NAK STX ETX 1
12 Comm One 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 000 000 000 000 CR-LF 0
13 Call-Inn 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 000 000 000 000 000 0
14 RSI-CMS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 000 000 000 STX ETX 0
15 Customized 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 000 000 000 000 CR-LF 0
Use following command to start/stop SMDR Posting Process:
8333-Code
Where,
Code Meaning
0 abort
1 Start
By default, SMDR Posting is Stop.
Use following command to restore the default OG SMDR-Posting Parameters:
8300
Refining Handshake Parameters
The Installer/System Engineer may need to refine some of the Handshake parameters of the selected SMDR-
Posting protocol, i.e. change the factory default values of the protocol, to match the software requirements of the
CAS being used in the organisation. Refer the above table for default values of each protocol supported by
supported by ETERNITY.
OG-SMDR Handshaking Protocol Parameters
• Response to ENQ Timeout: The time for which the sender waits for a response to ENQ from the receiver.
• ENQ Retry Count - on No Response (to ENQ): The number of times the sender should send ENQ before
dropping the process, in case response is not received for the last message sent.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1507
• ENQ Retry Time - on No Response (to ENQ): The time after which the sender should sent the ENQ
again, in case the response is not received for the last message sent.
• ENQ Retry Count - on Negative Response (to ENQ): The number of times the sender should send ENQ
before dropping the process, in case of a negative response received for the last message sent.
• ENQ Retry Time - on Negative Response (to ENQ): The time after which the sender should sent the
ENQ again.
• Response to Data Timeout: The time for which the sender waits for a response to data from the receiver.
• Data Transfer Retry Count - on No Response (to Data Transfer): The number of times the sender
should send ENQ before dropping the process. This parameter is used when ACK is received against
ENQ and there is some problem while sending the data.
• Data Transfer Retry Time - on No Response (to Data Transfer): The time after which the sender should
send the ENQ again before dropping the process. This parameter is used when ACK is received against
ENQ and there is some problem in sending the data.
• Data Transfer Retry Count - on Negative Response (to Data Transfer): The number of times the
sender should send ENQ before dropping the process. This parameter is used when ACK is received
against ENQ and there is some problem in sending the data.
• Data Transfer Retry Time - on Negative Response (to Data Transfer): The time after which the sender
should sent the ENQ again before dropping the process. This parameter is used when ACK is received
against ENQ and there is some problem in sending the data.
• Use ENQ Character: This flag is to be enabled if the protocol uses ENQUIRE (ENQ) Signal.
• ENQ Character: The ASCII character (Single Character) used to send ENQUIRE (ENQ) signal to the
receiver.
• Acknowledgement (ACK) Character: The ASCII character (Single Character) used by the receiver to
acknowledge the receipt of the Link Control Character/Message Data.
• No Acknowledgement (NAK) Character: This parameter signifies the ASCII character (Single
Character) used by the receiver to dis-acknowledge the receipt of the Link Control Character/Message
Data.
• Start of Packet Character: A string of four ASCII characters used by the receiver to indicate Start of
Packet. Each ASCII character is from 000 to 252. Start of Packet may be of one character only, in which
case the string should be completed by programming remaining three characters with ASCII Null
Character (000).
• End of Packet Character: A string of four ASCII characters used by the receiver to indicate End of
Packet. Each ASCII character is from 000 to 252. End of Packet may be of one character only, in which
case, the string should be completed by programming the remaining three characters should be
programmed as ASCII Null (000).
• Use Byte Code Check (BCC): This flag is to be enabled when the protocol uses BCC Signal.
1508 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
How to configure Handshake Parameters?
To refine the above listed Handshaking parameters using SE Commands,
• Enter SE mode.
• Dial the following commands for each parameter.
Response to ENQ Timeout
Use following command to set ENQ no response timer:
8302-ENQ No Response Timer
Where,
ENQ No Response Timer is from 01-99 Seconds.
ENQ Retry Count - on No Response
Use following command to set ENQ no response retry count:
8303-ENQ Retry Count
Where,
ENQ Retry Count is from 01-99.
ENQ Retry Time - on No Response (to ENQ)
Use following command to set ENQ no response Retry Timer:
8304-ENQ No Response Retry Timer
Where,
ENQ No Response Retry Timer is from 01-99 Seconds.
ENQ Retry Count - on Negative Response (to ENQ)
Use following command to set ENQ Retry Count:
8305-ENQ Retry Count
Where,
ENQ Retry Count is from 01-99.
ENQ Retry Time - on Negative Response (to ENQ)
Use following command to set ENQ Retry Time:
8306-ENQ Retry Time
Where,
ENQ Retry Time is from 01-99 Seconds.
Response to Data Timeout
8307-Response to Data Timeout
Where,
Response to Data Timeout is from 01-99 Seconds.
Data Transfer Retry Count - on No Response (to Data Transfer)
Use following command to set Data Transfer Retry Count:
8308-Data Transfer Retry Count
Where,
Data Transfer Retry Count is from 01-99.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1509
Data Transfer Retry Time - on No Response (to Data Transfer)
Use following command to set Data Transfer Retry Time:
8309-Data Transfer Retry Time
Where,
Data Transfer Retry Time is from 01-99 Seconds.
Data Transfer Retry Count - on Negative Response (to Data Transfer)
Use following command to set Data Transfer Retry Count:
8310-Data Transfer Retry Count
Where,
Data Transfer Retry Count is from 01-99.
Data Transfer Retry Time - on Negative Response (to Data Transfer)
Use following command to set Data Transfer Retry Time:
8311-Data Transfer Retry Time
Where,
Data Transfer Retry Time is from 01-99 Seconds.
Use ENQ Character (if ENQUIRE Signal is used)
Use following command to enable/disable ENQUIRE Signal:
8312-ENQUIRE Signal
Where
ENQUIRE Signal Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
ENQ Character
Use following command to set the ENQUIRE character:
8313-ENQUIRE
Where,
ENQUIRE is an ASCII Character from 000 to 252.
Acknowledgement (ACK) Character
Use following command to set the ACK Character:
8314-Set ACK Character
Where,
Set ACK Character is an ASCII Character from 000 to 252.
No Acknowledgement (NAK) Character
Use following command to program the NAK Character:
8315-Set NAK Character
Where,
Set NAK Character is an ASCII Character from 000 to 252.
Start of Packet Character
Use following command to set the Start of Packet string:
8316-Character 1-Character 2-Character 3-Character 4
1510 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Where,
Start of Packet is a string of four ASCII Characters. Each ASCII character is from 000 to 252. If the Start of packet
contains only one ASCII character then the string should be completed by programming remaining three characters
with ASCII Null Character (000).
If STX is to be programmed as 'Start of Packet', dial: 8316-002-000-000-000
End of Packet Character
Use following command to program the End of Packet string:
8317-Character 1-Character 2-Character 3-Character 4
Where,
End of Packet is a string of four ASCII Characters. Each ASCII character is from 000 to 252. If the End of packet
contains only one ASCII character then the string should be completed by programming remaining three characters
with ASCII Null Character (000).
If ETX is to be programmed as 'End of Packet', dial: 8317-003-000-000-000
Byte Check Code (BCC)
Use following command to enable/disable BCC Flag:
8318-BCC Flag
Where,
BCC Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Refining Call Detail Record Format Parameters
The Call Detail Record (CDR) format for the selected SMDR-Posting protocol can also be refined to match the
software requirements of the CAS being used by the organisation.
This may be required if a 'customized' protocol has been selected by the Installer/System Engineer.
How to configure Call Detail Record Format Parameters?
SMDR-OG Online Call Record Format Parameters
The Call Detail Format for OG-SMDR Posting Protocols consists of the following parameters. For each parameter
explained briefly below, you can define the column position, field length (i.e. the number of digits), the alignment
(whether left aligned or right), and the filler characters, wherever required. Refine the following format parameters
according to the type of posting protocol you have selected and the requirement of the CAS being used by the
organization.
Serial Number: This is the serial number generated for each call record. Serial numbers are generated from
000 to 999. When serial number '999' is reached, the numbers roll over to 000.
Serial Number starts from 1 and not 0.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1511
When this field rolls over, it increments the increment counter.
Increment Counter: It increments when the serial number counter rolls over. The Increment counter starts
from A, ending at Z, and then roll over back to A.
Property Code: This is the property code required by the CAS used in the organisation. It is a string of
alphanumeric characters and is to be terminated with #*. This field has a maximum of 128 alphanumeric
characters.
• The System Engineer must program this string keeping in mind the field length used by the selected/
customized posting protocol.
• The default value of the default Property Code String has been set as 'AAA', as at least two known
protocols use this field. The System Engineer can set a different value here and the new value will
appear in the CDR record, irrespective of the protocol type selected.
• If Bell Hobic or Hilton has been selected, the System Engineer should program this field as 'AAA'. If
Xiox protocol has been selected, the System Engineer should program this field as HTL. These values
are not protocol dependent, but can be configured by the System Engineer.
Station Number: This is the extension number from which the call was made. The System Engineer can
define the column position and the field length of the Station number in the Call Detail Record.
Trunk Number: This is the number of the trunk from which the call was made.
• The Matrix Format occupies 5 character spaces.
• Check-Inn Format occupies 4 character spaces.
• The First Character in the Check-Inn Format is X (Fixed). The remaining three characters show the
software port number. However, this does not specify whether the call is made through TWT 125 or
E&M 125. Also, the channel number is not specified in case of call made through T1E1PRI port or BRI
port.
Date: The date on which the call was made. The date fill flag is to be enabled.
• Filler Character field is applicable for Date, Month and Year, i.e. whether the single digit date is to be
printed as space-X or 0-X. For example, date = 1 is to be displayed as '1' or '01'.
• Where leading zeroes are not required, the date, month and year sub-fields are right aligned and the
spaces are filled with character 'space'.
• The Date field is not linked to the global flag of Date Format. The global Flag of Date format is used,
while using features or in configuration reports but not in CAS. This is because the date format used by
the CAS is not the same as used by the users of the system.
Time: The time when the call was made. The format of the time field and the time fill flag are to be
programmed.
• Filler Character field is applicable for Hours, Minutes and Seconds i.e. whether the single digit hour is
to be printed as space-X or 0-X. For example, hour = 1 is to be displayed as '1' or '01'.
1512 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• In case when leading zeroes are not required, Date, Month and Year sub-fields are right aligned and
the spaces are filled with character 'space'.
Duration: The duration of each call. Program the duration unit and the duration fill flag.
When Duration Unit = Minutes, the rounding off to the nearest whole number is done. For seconds <= 30,
Minute is not incremented. For seconds > 30, minute is incremented.
Units: The duration of the call interpreted in terms of units. The number of units depends on the Pulse Rate.
The number of units is derived from the Call Unit = Call duration in seconds/Pulse rate in seconds.
Serial Number starts from 1 and not 0.
When Serial Number rolls over, it increments the increment counter.
Amount: This is the Amount of the call. Program the amount format and the fill flag.
• Filler Character field is applicable for both the sub fields of Amount viz. Rupees/Paisa i.e. whether the
single digit Rupee is to be printed as space-X or 0-X. For example, Rupee = 1 is to be displayed as '1'
or '01'. Where leading zeroes are not required, the Rupee and Paisa are right aligned and the spaces
are filled with character 'space'.
• When Amount Format = Higher Currency, rounding to nearest whole number is done. For Lower
Currency <= 50, Higher Currency is not incremented and for Lower currency > 50, Higher Currency is
incremented.
Currency: This is the symbol of the currency in which the Amount is charged. A maximum of 8 ASCII
Characters are allowed.
• Generally, Currency Symbol field prefixes to Amount field. Hence, to comply with various CDR formats,
it is recommended that the column position of Currency Symbol and Amount field should be
programmed properly.
• The System Engineer can change the Currency Symbol used in the OG-SMDR Format. However, this
change will not be reflected in the Front Desk User Wizard.
Call Type Indicator: This indicates the type of call made, i.e. whether local, international, information, etc.
The System Engineer must program the Number String, the Text String and its Meaning as explained in
following table:
Number Index Number String Text String Meaning
01 0 LD Long Distance
02 95 IC Inter Circle
03 197 INFO Information
04 0 INTL International
: : : :
36 2 L Local
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1513
The Text String is a string of Alphanumeric characters. Number String is of a maximum 4-digits.
The Number Index is kept as '36' as one of the SMDR-OG Posting protocols, INN-FORM XL supports 24
different types of calls.
By default, all the entries in this table are blank.
The System Engineer is advised to program the first 10 entries of this table as below if the selected posting
protocol is Bell Hobic or XIOX.
Number Index Number String Text String Meaning
01 1 A
02 2 A
03 3 A
04 4 A
05 5 A
06 6 A
07 7 A
08 8 A
09 9 A
10 0 A
: : :
36 Blank Blank Blank
The System Engineer is advised to program the first 11 entries of this table as below, if the selected
posting protocol is Holidex or Hobic.
Number Index Number String Text String Meaning
01 1 L
02 2 L
03 3 L
04 4 L
05 5 L
06 6 L
07 7 L
08 8 L
09 9 L
10 0 L
11 0 F International
: : :
36 Blank Blank Blank
1514 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• The System Engineer is advised to use default (i.e. Blank) table, if the selected protocol is Hilton, as
Hilton uses blank entries in this field which is 12 bytes long.
• The Text String should preferably be same as Field Length. If not, the remaining spaces will be filled
with character 'Space'. If the Field length is less than the Text string characters, then the number of text
characters equal to the Field length will be printed.
Location: This column indicates the location of the external number to which the call was made.
• The system detects the location from the called location programmed in the Area and Country Code
Tables.
• Called Location is programmed as one of the parameters of the Area Code Table and Country Code
Table. Depending upon the prefix dialed, the Location string is picked up from either Country Code
table or Area Code table.
• Called Location is not displayed for Local Calls.
• The Called Location parameter in the Country Code table and Area Code table is of 8 Characters.
• If the number of characters in the field Called Location is more than Field length then the remaining
characters will not be printed (overlapped by next field).
• If the number of characters in the field Called Location is less than Field length then the remaining
characters in the field Called Location will be filled by spaces.
Called Number: This is the external number to which the call was made.
• One way to separate the called party number is by Area Code, Exchange code and Subscriber
Number. This is difficult in an Open numbering system, in which the field size of area code, exchange
code are not standard but vary from two digits to four digits (for example, the Area code for 'Mumbai' is
of 2 digits, whereas that of 'Vadodara' is 3 digits).
• In the Closed numbering system, the Area Code, Exchange Code and the Subscriber number are of
fixed length. In such case, including '-' in the called party number is not difficult. Hence, '-' is put in the
called party number. The called party number is assumed to be of 10 digits. The first '-' is placed after
four digits, counting from the right. The second '-'is placed after seven digits, counting from the right. If
the dialed number is a local number of 7 digits then the second '-'is not placed. Also, the remaining
three digits are not placed, but filled with character 'space'.
• In this case, even if the call is made to a geographical area where open numbering system is followed,
'-' is placed in the same way.
Account Code: This is the Account Code (Refer Note4) using which the call was made.
Remarks: This column indicates the details of the call; whether it was a DISA call, DOSA call, Auto Redial
Call, type of call maturity.
Fixed Characters are used to indicate the type of call, call details, etc. The notations for the Remarks field are:
D DISA Call
A Auto Redial Call
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1515
C CPD
K 12KHz/16KHz
R Reversal
D Delay
I Connect
Reset Serial Number to 001: The Serial number counter can be reset to 001 after 24 hours (from 00:00
HH:MM) or every 6 hours. By default, 'No Compulsory Reset' is selected, which means the serial number
counter will not be automatically reset.
Starting Character - Increment Counter: Specify the starting character of the increment counter as the
serial number rolls over, in this field.
Reset Increment Counter: The Increment Counter can be reset to 001 after 24 hours (from 00:00 HH:MM) or
every 6 hours. By default, 'No Compulsory Reset' is selected, which means the serial number counter will not
be automatically reset.
Prefix String Required: This flag is to be programmed if the prefix string 0ac1 is to be sent when interfacing
with OG-SMDR Posting Protocol.
Property Code: Enter the property code required by the CAS.
Currency Symbol (Enter Decimal Value): Enter currency symbol to be used.
How to configure Call Detail Record format parameters?
To refine the above listed Call Detail Record format parameters using SE Commands,
• Enter SE mode.
• Dial the following commands for each parameter.
Serial Number
Use following command to program column position for serial number:
8100-Column Position
Where,
Column Position is from 000 to 128.
By default, Column Position is 001.
Use following command to program field length for serial number:
8101-Field Length
Where,
Field Length is from 000 to 128.
By default, Field Length is 004.
Use following command to program alignment for serial number:
8102-Alignment
1516 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Where,
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
By default, Alignment is 2.
Use following command to program fill character for serial number:
8103-Fill Character
Where,
Fill Character is 3 digit ASCII value ranging from 032 to 254.
By default, Fill Character is 'Zero'.
Use following command to program reset for serial number:
8104-Reset
Where,
Reset Meaning
1 No Compulsory Reset
2 Reset to 001 every 24 hours (at 00:00 Hrs.)
3 Reset to 001 every 6 hours (at 00:00 Hrs.)
By default, Reset is '1'.
Increment Counter
Use following command to program column position for increment counter:
8105-Column Position
Where,
Column Position is from 000 to 128.
By default, Column Position is 000.
By default, Field Length is 1, which is fixed.
Use following command to program reset for increment counter:
8106-Reset
Where,
Reset Meaning
1 No Compulsory Reset
2 Reset to 001 every 24 hours (at 00:00 Hrs.)
3 Reset to 001 every 6 hours (at 00:00 Hrs.)
By default, Reset is '1'.
Use the following command to program starting character for increment counter:
8174-Starting Character
Where,
Starting Character is from A to Z.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1517
By default, Starting Character is 'A'.
Property Code
Use following command to program column position for property code:
8107-Column Position
Where,
Column Position is from 000 to 128.
By default, Column Position is 000 (This field is not available by default)
Use following command to program field length for property code:
8108-Field Length
Where,
Field Length is from 000 to 128.
By default, Field Length is 004.
To program Property Code String:
Use following command to program property code string for property code:
8109-Property Code String
Where,
Property Code String is maximum of 16 characters.
By default, it is 'AAA'.
Station Number
Use following command to program column position for station number:
8110-Column Position
Where,
Column Position is from 000 to 128.
By default, Column Position is 006.
Use following command to program field length for station number:
8111-Field Length
Where,
Field Length is from 000 to 128.
By default, Field Length is 005.
Use following command to program alignment for station number:
8112-Alignment
Where,
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
By default, Alignment is 2.
Use following command to program fill character for station number:
8113-Fill Character
Where,
Fill Character is 3 digit ASCII value and ranging from 032 to 254.
By default, Fill Character is 'Space'.
1518 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Trunk Number
Use following command to program column position for trunk number:
8114-Column Position
Where,
Column Position is from 000 to 128.
By default, Column Position is 012.
Use following command to program format type for trunk number:
8115-Format Type
Where,
Format Type Meaning
1 Matrix Format
2 Check-Inn Format
By default, Format Type is '1'.
Date
Use following command to program column position for date field:
8116-Column Position
Where,
Column Position is from 000 to 128.
By default, Column Position is 037.
Use following command to program field length for date field:
8117-Field Length
Where,
Field Length is from 000 to 128.
By default, Field Length is 010.
Use following command to program alignment for date field:
8118-Alignment
Where,
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
By default, Alignment is 2.
Use following command to program fill character for date field:
8119-Fill Character
Where,
Fill Character is 3 digit ASCII value from 032 to 254.
By default, Fill Character is 'Space'.
Use following command to program date format for date field:
8120-Date Format
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1519
Where,
Date Format Meaning
01 DD-MM-YY
02 DD/MM/YY
03 DD.MM.YY
04 DD MM YY
05 DDMMYY
06 DD-MM-YYYY
07 DD/MM/YYYY
08 DD.MM.YYYY
09 DD MM YYYY
10 DDMMYYYY
11 MM-DD-YY
12 MM/DD/YY
13 MM.DD.YY
14 MM DD YY
15 MMDDYY
16 YY-MM-DD
17 YY/MM/DD
18 YY.MM.DD
19 YY MM DD
20 YYMMDD
21 YYYY-MM-DD
22 YYYY/MM/DD
23 YYYY.MM.DD
24 YYYY MM DD
25 YYYYMMDD
26 MM-DD
27 MM/DD
28 MM.DD
29 MM DD
30 MMDD
31 DD-MM
32 DD/MM
33 DD.MM
1520 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Date Format Meaning
34 DD MM
35 DDMM
By default, the date format depends upon the Posting Protocol selected.
Use following command to program date fill flag for date field:
8170-Date Fill Flag
Where,
Date Fill Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
By default, Date Fill Flag is '1'.
Time
Use following command to program column position for time field:
8122-Column Position
Where,
Column Position is from 000 to 128.
By default, Column Position is 048.
Use following command to program field length for time field:
8123-Field Length
Where,
Field Length is from 000 to 128.
By default, Field Length is 008.
Use following command to program alignment for time field:
8124-Alignment
Where,
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
By default, Alignment is 2.
Use following command to program fill character for time field:
8125-Fill Character
Where,
Fill Character is 3 digit ASCII value ranging from 032 to 254.
By default, Fill Character is 'Space'.
Use following command to program time format for time field:
8126-Time Format
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1521
Where,
Time Format Meaning
1 HH:MM:SS
2 HH:MM
By default, Time format is 1.
Use following command to program time fill flag for time field:
8171-Time Fill Flag
Where,
Time Fill Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
By default, Time Fill Flag is '1'.
Duration
Use following command to program column position for duration field:
8127-Column Position
Where,
Column Position is from 000 to 128.
By default, Column Position is 057.
Use following command to program field length for duration field:
8128-Field Length
Where,
Field Length is from 000 to 128.
By default, Field Length is 005.
Use following command to program alignment for duration field:
8129-Alignment
Where,
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
By default, Alignment is 2.
Use following command to program fill character for duration field:
8130-Fill Character
Where,
Fill Character is 3 digit ASCII value ranging from 032 to 254.
By default, Fill Character is 'Space'.
Use following command to program duration unit for duration field:
8131-Duration Unit
1522 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Where,
Duration Unit Meaning
1 HH:MM:SS
2 HHMMSS
3 Minutes
4 Seconds
By default, Duration Unit is '4'.
Use following command to program duration fill flag for duration field:
8172-Duration Fill Flag
Where,
Duration Fill Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
By default, Duration Fill Flag is '1'.
Units
Use following command to program column position for units field:
8132-Column Position
Where,
Column Position is from 000 to 128.
By default, Column Position is 063.
Use following command to program field length for units field:
8133-Field Length
Where,
Field Length is from 000 to 128.
By default, Field Length is 004.
Use following command to program alignment for units field:
8134-Alignment
Where,
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
By default, Alignment is 2.
Use following command to program fill character for units field:
8135-Fill Character
Where,
Fill Character is 3 digit ASCII value ranging from 032 to 254.
By default, Fill Character is 'Space'.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1523
Amount
Use following command to program column position for amount field:
8136-Column Position
Where,
Column Position is from 000 to 128.
By default, Column Position is 068.
Use following command to program field length for amount field:
8137-Field Length
Where,
Field Length is from 000 to 128.
By default, Field Length is 007.
Use following command to program alignment for amounts field:
8138-Alignment
Where,
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
By default, Alignment is 2.
Use following command to program fill character for amounts field:
8139-Fill Character
Where,
Fill Character is 3 digit ASCII value ranging from 032 to 254.
By default, Fill Character is 'Space'.
Use following command to program amount format for amount field:
8140-Amount Format
Where,
Amount Format Meaning
1 Higher Currency
2 Lower Currency
3 Spoken Currency with decimal point
4 Spoken Currency without decimal point
By default, Amount Format is '3'.
Use following command to program the amount fill flag for amount field:
8173-Amount Fill Flag
Where,
Amount Fill Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
1524 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
By default, Amount Fill Flag '1'.
Currency Symbol
Use following command to program column position for currency symbol field:
8141-Column Position
Where,
Column Position is from 000 to 128.
By default, Column Position is 000.
Use following command to program field length for currency symbol field:
8142-Field Length
Where,
Field Length is from 000 to 128.
By default, Field Length is 001.
Use following command to program alignment for currency symbol field:
8143-Alignment
Where,
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
By default, Alignment is '2'.
Use following command to program fill character for currency symbol field:
8144-Fill Character
Where,
Fill Character is 3 digit ASCII value ranging from 032 to 254.
By default, Fill Character is 'Space'.
Use following command to program symbol for currency symbol field:
8145-Character 1-Character 2-Character 3-Character 4-Character 5-Character 6-Character 7-Character 8
Where,
Character 1 to Character 8 shall be in 3 digit Decimal values.
Decimal values 000 and 032 to 255 are allowed.
If currency string/symbol to be used is fewer than 8 characters, terminate the command with #*.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1525
Refer following table to know Decimal value of corresponding currency character:
ASCII Character Table
Decimal ASCII Decimal ASCII Decimal ASCII Decimal ASCII Decimal ASCII
000 Null 076 L 121 y 166 ¦ 211 Ó
032 Space 077 M 122 z 167 § 212 Ô
033 ! 078 N 123 { 168 ¨ 213 Õ
034 " 079 O 124 | 169 © 214 Ö
035 # 080 P 125 } 170 ª 215 ×
036 $ 081 Q 126 ~ 171 « 216 Ø
037 % 082 R 127 <DEL> 172 ¬ 217 Ù
038 & 083 S 128 € 173 - 218 Ú
039 ' 084 T 129 174 ® 219 Û
040 ( 085 U 130 ‚ 175 ¯ 220 Ü
041 ) 086 V 131 ƒ 176 ° 221 Ý
042 * 087 W 132 „ 177 ± 222 Þ
043 + 088 X 133 … 178 ² 223 ß
044 , 089 Y 134 † 179 ³ 224 à
045 - 090 Z 135 ‡ 180 ´ 225 á
046 . 091 [ 136 ˆ 181 µ 226 â
047 / 092 \ 137 ‰ 182 ¶ 227 ã
048 0 093 ] 138 Š 183 · 228 ä
049 1 094 ^ 139 ‹ 184 ¸ 229 å
050 2 095 _ 140 Œ 185 ¹ 230 æ
051 3 096 ` 141 186 º 231 ç
052 4 097 a 142 Ž 187 » 232 è
053 5 098 b 143 188 ¼ 233 é
054 6 099 c 144 189 ½ 234 ê
055 7 100 d 145 ‘ 190 ¾ 235 ë
056 8 101 e 146 ’ 191 ¿ 236 ì
057 9 102 f 147 “ 192 À 237 í
058 : 103 g 148 ” 193 Á 238 î
059 ; 104 h 149 • 194 Â 239 ï
060 < 105 i 150 – 195 Ã 240 ð
061 = 106 j 151 — 196 Ä 241 ñ
062 > 107 k 152 ˜ 197 Å 242 ò
063 ? 108 l 153 ™ 198 Æ 243 ó
064 @ 109 m 154 š 199 Ç 244 ô
065 A 110 n 155 › 200 È 245 õ
066 B 111 o 156 œ 201 É 246 ö
067 C 112 p 157 202 Ê 247 ÷
068 D 113 q 158 ž 203 Ë 248 ø
069 E 114 r 159 Ÿ 204 Ì 249 ù
070 F 115 s 160 205 Í 250 ú
071 G 116 t 161 ¡ 206 Î 251 û
072 H 117 u 162 ¢ 207 Ï 252 ü
073 I 118 v 163 £ 208 Ð 253 ý
074 J 119 w 164 ¤ 209 Ñ 254 þ
075 K 120 x 165 ¥ 210 Ò 255 ÿ
Call Type Indicator
Use following command to program column position for call type indicator field:
8146-Column Position
Where,
Column Position is from 000 to 128.
By default, Column Position is 000.
Use following command to program field length for call type indicator field:
8147-Field Length
Where,
Field Length is from 000 to 128.
By default, Field Length is 001.
Use following command to program alignment for call type indicator field:
8148-Alignment
1526 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Where,
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
By default, Alignment is '2'.
Use following command to program number string for call type indicator field:
8149-Number Index-1-Number String
Where,
Number Index is from 01 to 36.
Number String is of four digits. Terminate with #* if the string is less than four digits.
Use following command to program text string for call type indicator field:
8149-Number Index-2-Text String
Where,
Number Index is from 01 to 36.
Text String is a string of Alphanumeric characters. Terminate with #* if the string is less than four digits.
Keep the Text String same as the Field Length.
By default, all the entries in this table are blank.
Called Location
Use following command to program column position for called location field:
8150-Column Position
Where,
Column Position is from 000 to 128.
By default, Column Position is 000.
Use following command to program field length for called location field:
8151-Field Length
Where,
Field Length is from 000 to 128.
By default, Field Length is 005.
Use following command to program alignment for called location field:
8152-Alignment
Where,
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
By default, Alignment is '2'.
Called Number
Use following command to program column position for called number field:
8154-Column Position
Where,
Column Position is from 000 to 128.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1527
By default, Column Position is 018.
Use following command to program field length for called number field:
8155-Field Length
Where,
Field Length is from 000 to 128.
By default, Field Length is 019.
Use following command to program alignment for called number field:
8156-Alignment
Where,
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
By default, Alignment is '1'.
Use following command to program number format for called number field:
8157-Number Format
Where,
Number Format Meaning
1 Continuous
2 Separated
By default, Number Format is '1'.
Account Code
Use following command to program column position for account code field:
8158-Column Position
Where,
Column Position is from 000 to 128.
By default, Column Position is 000.
Use following command to program field length for account code field:
8159-Field Length
Where,
Field Length is from 000 to 128.
By default, Field Length is 004.
Use following command to program alignment for account code field:
8160-Alignment
Where,
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
1528 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
By default, Alignment is '2'.
Use following command to program fill character for account code field:
8161-Fill Character
Where,
Fill Character is 3 digit ASCII value ranging from 032 to 254.
By default, Fill Character is 'Space'.
Prefix String (ac01)
Use following command to program prefix string (ac01):
8165-Code
Where,
Code Meaning
0 No
1 Yes
By default, Code is '0'.
Remarks
Use following command to program column position for remarks field:
8166-Column Position
Where,
Column Position is from 000 to 128.
By default, Column Position is 076.
Use following command to program field length for remarks field:
8167-Field Length
Where,
Field Length is from 000 to 128.
By default, Field Length is 002.
Use following command to program alignment for remarks field:
8168-Alignment
Where,
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
By default, Alignment is '1'.
Use following command to assign default CDR format:
8169
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1529
Programming Area Code and Country Code
Country code and Area Code must be programmed so that a call can be placed to a particular location in a
particular country. Country and Area Codes need to be programmed also for the purpose of calculating cost of
calls. Refer chapter “Call Cost Calculation (CCC)”.
Use following command to program a country code:
8321-Index-Country Code-#*
Where,
Index is from 001 to 200.
Country Code is a number string of maximum of 4 digits, terminate with #* if less than four digits.
Index Country Code
001 041
002 051
: :
200 096
Use following command to program a location in country code:
8322-Index-Country Name-#*
Where,
Index is from 001 to 200.
Country Name is of 8 characters; terminate the command string with #*, if the name is less than 8 characters.
Index Country Name
001 India
002 Kenya
: :
200 UAE
Relevant Topics:
1. “Communication Ports” 1038
2. “Call Cost Calculation (CCC)” 887
3. “Station Message Detail Recording” 1472
4. “Station Message Detail Recording-Storage” 1545
5. “Station Message Detail Recording-Online” 1473
6. “Station Message Detail Recording-Report” 1531
7. “Call Duration Control (CDC)” 919
1530 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Station Message Detail Recording-Report
What's this?
• The ETERNITY can generate report for the calls which were stored in the buffer when it is required by the
user. This is called SMDR Reports feature.
• To get the online report SE should assign the destination port for IC calls, Internal calls and OG calls. SE
should ensure that the storage flag is enabled to store the calls in the buffer of the system. Refer chapter
“Station Message Detail Recording-Storage” to enable the storage of calls.
• The ETERNITY supports to change the default filters for getting the SMDR Report, such as report for the
calls with specific call duration or for the calls only for specific originating stations or for the calls with
specific dates on which the calls were made or received etc. The SA can configure these filters as per
user's requirement.
• The ETERNITY provides flexibility to user, to get the report using following options:
• Manual: Getting the report when the command is issued by SA.
• Scheduled: Getting the report on pre-programmed day, date and time by SA.
• Refer the sample reports at the end of chapter for IC, OG and Internal calls with information about called
number, calling number, date of call, time of call, port or trunk number on which call was established and
speech duration, etc.
How to configure
Incoming calls report
Destination Port:
Use following command to assign a destination port for SMDR-IC Report:
2931-Code
Where,
Code Meaning
0 None
1 COM1
2 COM2
3 Printer Port
4 Ethernet Port
If you assigned Ethernet Port as destination port, use the following command to assign the IP Address to the
Ethernet Port:
2934-IP Address
By default, IP Address is 192.168.1.104
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1531
Use the following command to assign the IP Port:
2935-IP Port
Where,
IP Port is from 514 and 1024-65535
By default, IP Port is 514.
• On assigning the communication port or the printer port or Ethernet Port as the destination port, the
report generation is directed to the port assigned.
• Care should be taken by the SE not to overlap the assignment of same ports to the different processes.
• By default, the port assigned is None. This means the Report printing is disabled.
Filter Commands:
The SA can program the filters as per user's need to generate a customized report. These commands enable the
user to select the type of call reports generated viz. Normal calls, DID calls, Unanswered calls, Long Speech
Duration calls. It is also possible to generate call reports for a range of stations (SLT, DKP), different type of trunks
(TWT, BRI, T1E1PRI etc.).
Filter Commands
To set filter to print all normal calls 1072-152-Flag
To set filter to print all DID calls 1072-153-Flag
To set filter to print all Unanswered calls 1072-154-Flag
To set filter to print all DID Unanswered calls 1072-155-Flag
To set filter to print all DISA calls 1072-156-Flag
To set filter to print all calls with specific call duration 1072-157-Seconds
To set filter to print all DID calls 1072-153-Flag
To set filter to print all unanswered calls 1072-154-Flag
To set filter to print all DID unanswered calls 1072-155-Flag
To set filter to print all DISA calls 1072-156-Flag
To set filter to print all calls with specific call duration 1072-157-Seconds
To set filter to print all call with specific Unanswered duration 1072-158-Seconds
To set filter to print all calls with specific hold duration 1072-159-Seconds
To set filter to print all IC calls received by the station 1072-160-Flexible No.-Flexible No.
To set filter to print all IC calls received on the TWT 1072-161-TWT-TWT
To set filter to print all IC calls received on the BRI 1072-162-BRI-BRI
To set filter to print all IC calls received on the T1E1PRI 1072-163-T1E1PRI-T1E1PRI
To set filter to print all IC calls received on the E&M 1072-164-E&M-E&M
To set filter to print all IC calls received on Mobile 1072-165-Mobile-Mobile
To set filter to print all IC calls received on SIP 1072-166-SIP-SIP
To set filter to print all IC calls on or from date 1072-167-DD-MM-YYYY-DD-MM-YYYY
To set filter to print all IC calls received At/from-to Time 1072-168-HH-MM-HH-MM
1532 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Filter Commands
To set filter to print all IC calls from numbers matching in a Number 1072-169-Number List
list
Set OG print filter to print the calls terminated from the LD trunk. 1072-116-LD-LD
Set print filter to print all IC calls received from LD trunk. 1072-117-LD-LD
Set OG print filter to print the calls originated from the LD trunk. 1072-118-LD-LD
Where,
Flag Meaning
0 Don't store
1 Store
Seconds = 000-255.
TWT = 000-128.
BRI = 00-32.
T1E1PRI = 0-8.
E&M = 000-128.
Mobile = 00-64.
SIP = 00-32.
Date = 01-31
Month = 01-12.
Year = 0000-9999.
Number List = 00-16.
For example, for TWT filter, range can be 000 to 128, as explained below:
• 000-000: The report of calls will be printed which are made from any TWT trunk port.
• XXX-XXX: Calls will be printed from XXX-XXX. TWT number, where XXX = 001 to 128.
• 000-128: Error tone (Not valid).
Same explanation is true for other types of port like BRI, T1E1PRI, E&M and Mobile.
For Number List, range can be 00-16. Where, if 00 is set, no Number list is checked while processing the call.
Default the Filters:
Use following command to default the report generation filters:
1072-170
Calls made by all stations, all TWT, All BRI, All E&M and All T1E1PRI are printed.
The Date range is 01-05-2005 to 31-12-2100.
The Time range is 00:00 to 23:59.
The Number List is 02.
By default, All calls are printed as per the set filters.
Manual Report Generation:
SA should issue an explicit start command, to initiate the report generation.
Use following command to start/abort report generation:
1072-171-Flag
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1533
Where,
Flag Meaning
0 Abort
1 Start
By default, the Flag is 0.
Once the Start command is issued, the report generation stops only after the complete report based on the filters
set is generated. ETERNITY provides a facility to abort the report generation in midway (1072-171-0). Once the
report generation is aborted, then it has to be explicitly started (1072-171-1) if the report is required again.
The Scheduled Report Generation:
SA can issue the command to start report, automatically at a particular time (Daily) or at a particular time on a
particular day of the week (Weekly) or at a particular time on a particular date of a month (Monthly).
Once these parameters are programmed and the report generation is enabled, there is no need of any initiation of
the command.
Enable/disable Scheduled Report:
Use following command to enable/disable the generation of daily/weekly/monthly reports:
1072-172-Flag
Where,
Flag Meaning
0 Disable Schedule Report Generation
1 Enable Daily Scheduled Report
2 Enable Weekly Scheduled Report
3 Enable Monthly Scheduled Report
By default, the generation report is disabled.
Daily Reports:
Use following command to program the time for daily scheduled reports:
1072-173-HH-MM
Where,
HH and MM is in 24 hour format.
By default, HH:MM is 18:00.
Weekly Reports:
Use following command to program the day and time for weekly scheduled reports:
1072-174-Day-HH-MM
Where,
HH and MM is in 24 hour format.
Day is from 1 to 7 (1 is Sunday, 2 is Monday ……… and 7 is Saturday).
By default, HH:MM is 10:00 and Day is 2.
Monthly Reports:
1534 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Use following command to program the date and time for monthly scheduled reports:
1072-175-Date-HH-MM
Where,
HH and MM is in 24 hour format.
Date is from 01 to 31.
By default, HH:MM is 10:00 and Date is 01.
ETERNITY provides a facility to Abort the scheduled report generation midway (119-171-0). This aborts
the current report generation but does not affect any other scheduled report generation. The abortion of a
report does not affect its consecutive schedule. That is if a daily report is aborted on Monday, it does affect
the report generation schedule of Tuesday.
Internal Calls Report
Destination Port
Use following command to assign destination port for Online SMDR-Internal Report:
2831-Code
Where,
Code Meaning
0 None
1 COM1
2 COM2
3 Printer Port
4 Ethernet Port
If you assigned Ethernet Port as destination port, use the following command to assign the IP Address to the
Ethernet Port:
2834-IP Address
By default, IP Address is 192.168.1.104
Use the following command to assign the IP Port:
2835-IP Port
Where,
IP Port is from 514 and 1024-65535
By default, IP Port is 514.
On assigning the communication port or the printer port or Ethernet Port as the destination port, the report
generation is directed to the port assigned.
SE should take care, not to overlap the assignment of same ports to the different processes.
By default, the port assigned is None. This means the Report printing is disabled.
Filter Commands:
Filter Command
To set filter to print all internal calls from a station. 1072-137-Flexible No.-Flexible No.-
Type
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1535
Filter Command
To set filter to print all internal calls with duration greater than 1072-138-Seconds
specified.
Where,
Seconds = 000-999.
Type Meaning
0 Do not print the calls made to or from the station.
1 Print calls made to this station.
2 Print calls made from this station.
3 Print all calls made to/from this station.
By default, Type is 3 and seconds is 000.
Manual Report Generation
SA should issue an explicit start command to initiate the report generation.
Use following command to start/abort Report generation:
1072-141-Flag
Where,
Flag Meaning
0 Abort
1 Start
By default, flag is 0.
Once the start command is issued, the report generation stops only after the complete report based on the filters
set is generated. ETERNITY provides a facility to abort the report generation in midway (1072-141-0). Once the
report generation is aborted, then it has to be explicitly started (1072-141-1) if the report is required again.
Scheduled Report Generation:
SA should issue the command to start the report, automatically at a particular time (Daily) or at a particular time on
a particular day of the week (Weekly) or at a particular time on a particular date of a month (Monthly).
Once these parameters are programmed and the report generation is enabled, there is no need of any initiation
command.
Enable/disable Scheduled Report:
Use following command to enable/disable the generation of daily/weekly/monthly scheduled reports:
1072-142-Flag
Where,
Flag Meaning
0 Disable Schedule Report Generation
1 Enable Daily Scheduled Report
1536 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Flag Meaning
2 Enable Weekly Scheduled Report
3 Enable Monthly Scheduled Report
By default, the generation report is disabled.
Daily Reports:
Use following command to program the time for daily scheduled reports:
1072-143-HH-MM
Where,
HH and MM is in 24 hour format.
By default, HH:MM is 18:00
Weekly Reports:
Use following command to program the day and time for weekly scheduled reports:
1072-144-Day-HH-MM
Where,
HH and MM is in 24 hour format.
Day is from 1 to 7 (1 is Sunday, 2 is Monday ……… and 7 is Saturday).
By default, HH:MM is 10:00 and Day is 2.
Monthly Reports:
Use following command to program the date and time for monthly scheduled reports:
1072-145-Date-HH-MM
Where,
HH and MM is in 24 hour format.
Date is from 01 to 31.
By Default, HH:MM is 10:00 and Date is 01.
ETERNITY provides a facility to abort the scheduled report generation in midway (1072-141-0). This
aborts the current report generation but does not affect any other scheduled report generation. The
abortion of a report does not affect its consecutive schedule. That is if a daily report is aborted on Monday,
it does affect the report generation schedule of Tuesday.
OG Calls Report
Destination Port
Use following command to assign a destination port for SMDR-OG Report:
2731-Code
Where,
Code Meaning
0 None
1 COM1
2 COM2
3 Printer Port
4 Ethernet Port
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1537
If you assigned Ethernet Port as destination port, use the following command to assign the IP Address to the
Ethernet Port:
2834-IP Address
By default, IP Address is 192.168.1.104
Use the following command to assign the IP Port:
2835-IP Port
Where,
IP Port is from 514 and 1024-65535
By default, IP Port is 514.
• On assigning the communication port or the printer port or Ethernet Port as the destination port, the
report generation is directed to the port assigned.
• Care should be taken by the SE not to overlap the assignment of same ports to the different processes.
• By default, the port assigned is None. This means the Report printing is disabled.
Filter Commands:
SA can configure various filters to generate a report as per the user's requirement. It is possible to program the
following filters:
Filter Commands
To set filter to print all calls terminated on TWT 1072-103-TWT-TWT
To set filter to print all calls terminated on BRI 1072-104-BRI-BRI
To set filter to print all calls terminated on T1E1PRI 1072-105- T1E1PRI - T1E1PRI
To set filter to print all calls terminated on E&M 1072-106-E&M-E&M
To set filter to print all calls terminated on Mobile 1072-107-Mobile-Mobile
To set filter to print outgoing calls terminated on SIP 1072-108-SIP-SIP
To set filter to print outgoing calls for department billing group 1072-109-Group No.-Group No.
To set filter to print all calls made on or from date 1072-110-DD-MM-YYYY-DD-MM-YYYY
To set filter to print all calls made at or in between a time 1072-111-HH-MM-HH-MM
To set filter to print all calls of numbers matching in a Number 1072-112-External Number List
list
To set filter to print all calls duration more than specified 1072-113-Seconds
To set filter to print all calls with units more than specified 1072-114-Units
To set filter to print all calls made using Account Code 1072-115-Account Code-Account Code
To set filter to print all calls originated on stations 1072-102-Flexible No.-Flexible No.
To set filter to print calls originated on TWT 1072 - 183 - TWT - TWT
To set filter to print calls originated on BRI 1072 - 184- BRI- BRI
To set filter to print calls originated on T1E1PRI 1072 - 185 - T1E1PRI - T1E1PRI
To set filter to print calls originated on E&M 1072 - 186 - E&M- E&M
To set filter to print calls originated on Mobile 1072 - 187 - Mobile- Mobile
1538 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Filter Commands
To set filter to print calls originated on SIP 1072 - 188 - SIP- SIP
Where,
Seconds = 000-999.
Number List = 01-16.
TWT = 001-128.
BRI = 01-32.
T1E1PRI = 1-8.
E&M = 001-128.
Mobile = 00-64.
SIP = 00-32.
Date = 01-31.
Month = 01-12.
Year = 0000-9999.
Unit = 0000-9999.
Account Code = 0000-9999.
For Account Code filter, range can be set as various options as explained:
• 0000-0000: In report, all calls will be printed which doesn't consist of account code and calls with account
codes will not be printed.
• XXXX-XXXX: In report, calls with account code XXXX to XXXX will be printed, where XXXX = 0001 to
9999.
• 0000-XXXX: In report, all calls will be printed which are without account code and which have account
code upto XXXX
where,
XXXX=0001 to 9999.
Thus, if XXXX = 0020, then in report all calls without account code and with account code 0001 to 0020 will
be printed.
For TWT filter, range can be 000 to 128, as explained below:
• 000-000: Valid range. I report calls will be printed which are made from any TWT trunk port.
• XXX-XXX: Calls will be printed from XXX-XXX. TWT number, where XXX = 001 to 128.
• 000-128: Error tone (Not valid). Same explanation is true for other types of port like BRI, T1E1PRI, E&M
and Mobile.
For Number List, range can be 00-16. Where, if 00 is set, no Number List is checked.
How to set filter to print the calls department bill group wise from SA mode?
Use following command to set filter to print outgoing calls for department billing group
1072-109-Department Bill Group-Department Bill Group
Where,
Department Bill Group is from 00 to 99.
If command is used for more than one group, then the calls of first department billing group will be printed followed
by next department group.
By default, first Department Bill Group is '00' and second Department Bill Group is '99'.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1539
Default the Filters:
Use following command to default the report generation filters:
1072-120
By default, All calls are printed as per the set filters.
Calls made by all stations, all TWT, ALL BRI, ALL E&M and All T1E1PRI are printed.
The Date range = 01-05-2005 to 31-12-2100.
The Time range = 00:00-23:59.
The External Number list = 02.
Units = 0000.
Seconds = 000.
Please note that the date format depends on the date format of the system.
Deletion of calls made on or from a station:
The ETERNITY supports Deletion of SMDR Calls (From SA Mode) made from a particular station or a range of
stations.
Use the following Command to delete the calls made by a station or a range of stations:
1072-131-Flexible Number-Flexible Number
Deletion of calls made on or from a date:
Use the following Command to delete the calls made on a Date or from a Date:
1072-132-DD-MM-YYYY-DD-MM-YYYY (The format of the date depends on the date format of the system)
Manual Report Generation:
SA should issue an explicit start command to initiate the report generation.
Use following command to start/abort Report generation:
1072-121-Flag
Where,
Flag Meaning
0 Abort
1 Start
By default, Flag is 0.
Once the start command is issued, the report generation stops only after the complete report based on the filters
set is generated. ETERNITY provides a facility to abort the report generation in midway (1072-121-0). Once the
report generation is aborted, then it has to be explicitly started (1072-121-1) if the report is required again.
Scheduled Report Generation:
SA should issue the command to start the report, automatically at a particular time (Daily) or at a particular time on
a particular day of the week (Weekly) or at a particular time on a particular date of a month (Monthly).
Once these parameters are programmed and the report generation is enabled, there is no need of any initiation
command.
Enable/disable Scheduled Report:
Use following command to enable/disable the generation of daily/weekly/monthly scheduled reports:
1540 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
1072-122-Flag
Where,
Flag Meaning
0 Disable Schedule Report Generation
1 Enable Daily Scheduled Report
2 Enable Weekly Scheduled Report
3 Enable Monthly Scheduled Report
By default, the generation report is disabled.
Daily Reports:
Use following command to program the time for daily scheduled reports:
1072-123-HH-MM
Where,
HH and MM is in 24 hour format.
By default, HH:MM is 18:00.
Weekly Reports:
Use following command to program the day and time for weekly scheduled reports:
1072-124-Day-HH-MM
Where,
HH and MM is in 24 hour format.
Day is from 1 to 7 (1 is Sunday, 2 is Monday ……… and 7 is Saturday).
By default, HH:MM is 10:00 and Day is 2.
Monthly Reports:
Use following command to program the date and time for monthly scheduled reports:
1072-125-Date-HH-MM
Where,
HH and MM is in 24 hour format.
Date is from 01 to 31.
By Default, HH:MM is 10:00 and Date is 01.
ETERNITY provides a facility to abort the scheduled report generation in midway (1072-121-0). This
aborts the current report generation but does not affect any other scheduled report generation. The
abortion of a report does not affect its consecutive schedule. That is if a daily report is aborted on Monday,
it does affect the report generation schedule of Tuesday.
Relevant Topics:
1. “Station Message Detail Recording” 1472
2. “Station Message Detail Recording-Storage” 1545
3. “Station Message Detail Recording-Online” 1473
4. “Station Message Detail Recording-Posting” 1489
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1541
The Offline report for Incoming calls looks like shown below:
SMDR INCOMING CALLS REPORT AS ON 16-02-2011(Wed) AT 15:39
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STN : 000000 To 999999 TWT : 001 To 128 N : Y ANS DUR : 000
DATE : 01-05-2005 To 31-12-2099 BRI : 001 To 032 D : Y HLD DUR : 000
TIME : 00:00 To 23:59 T1E1 : 001 To 008 U : Y SPCH DUR : 000
NUM LIST : 02 E&M : 001 To 128 DU : Y
MOB : 001 To 064 I : Y
SIP : 001 To 032
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SrN CallingNo TRK STN DATE TIME Ans Hld Spch R
Dur Dur Dur
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 3012 05001 12-12-10 11:40:53 4 0 0 U
2 [email protected] 26001 3001 12-12-10 11:45:04 0 8 N
3 +919824944684 25002 2001 12-12-10 13:11:05 35 0 0 U
4 [email protected] 26001 3005 14-12-10 09:39:13 0 9 N
5 +912754262668 25002 2001 16-12-10 10:53:13 11 0 55 N
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOTAL CALLS : 5
TOTAL ANS DUR : 50 TOTAL HOLD DUR : 7430260 TOTAL SPCH DUR : 72
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
R(CALL TYPE):N=Normal, D=DID, U:UnAns, DU=DID-UnAns, I=DISA, T=Transit Q=Qsig
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Eternity V10R06 Page : 1
The Offline report for Internal calls looks like shown below:
SMDR INTERNAL CALLS REPORT AS ON 16-02-2011(Wed) AT 15:42
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SrN CALLING STATION CALLED STATION DATE TIME DUR
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 2009 3001 15-12-2010 17:34:11 11
2 3012 3001 15-12-2010 17:36:38 3
3 2010 3005 15-12-2010 18:09:58 5
4 2009 3001 15-12-2010 18:10:35 4
5 3012 3001 16-12-2010 14:24:03 8
6 3012 2026 16-12-2010 15:35:44 21
7 3012 2027 16-12-2010 15:36:09 71
8 3012 2028 16-12-2010 15:37:32 9
9 3012 2029 16-12-2010 15:37:45 20
10 3012 2030 16-12-2010 15:38:10 4
11 3012 2031 16-12-2010 15:38:16 3
12 3012 2032 16-12-2010 15:38:26 8
13 3001 3012 16-12-2010 16:46:04 2
14 3001 3012 16-12-2010 16:56:14 6
15 2001 3001 16-12-2010 17:36:28 5
16 3012 2033 16-12-2010 17:44:23 6
17 3012 2034 16-12-2010 17:58:35 5
18 3012 2035 16-12-2010 18:02:04 25
19 3012 2026 17-12-2010 09:30:37 70
1542 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
20 3012 2001 17-12-2010 09:31:46 3
21 3012 2027 17-12-2010 09:32:02 26
22 3012 2028 17-12-2010 09:32:32 24
23 3012 2029 17-12-2010 09:33:00 4
24 3012 2026 17-12-2010 10:39:15 12
25 3012 2027 17-12-2010 10:39:28 16
26 3012 2028 17-12-2010 10:40:02 9
27 3012 2029 17-12-2010 10:40:16 25
28 3012 2030 17-12-2010 10:40:43 4
29 3012 2031 17-12-2010 10:40:53 12
30 3012 2032 17-12-2010 10:41:10 6
31 3012 2033 17-12-2010 10:41:21 16
32 3012 2034 17-12-2010 10:41:54 25
33 3012 2035 17-12-2010 11:00:18 3
34 3012 2036 17-12-2010 11:00:25 69
35 3012 2037 17-12-2010 11:07:22 124
36 3012 2038 17-12-2010 11:26:26 25
37 3012 2039 17-12-2010 11:26:58 10
38 3012 2026 17-12-2010 11:29:17 96
39 3012 2028 17-12-2010 11:33:36 76
40 3012 2029 17-12-2010 12:03:22 7
41 3001 2026 11-01-2011 16:14:58 343
42 3001 2027 11-01-2011 16:24:00 53
43 3001 2026 12-01-2011 10:24:16 31
44 2005 3001 13-01-2011 13:08:19 5
45 3001 2005 13-01-2011 13:08:54 13
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Eternity V10R06 Page : 1
The Off line report for Outgoing calls looks like shown below:
SMDR OUTGOING CALLS REPORT AS ON 16-02-2011(Wed) AT 15:37
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Originated on Terminated on
STN : 000000 To 999999 TWT : 001 To 128 TWT : 001 To 128
DATE : 01-05-2005 To 31-12-2099 BRI : 001 To 032 BRI : 001 To 032
TIME : 00:00 To 23:59 T1E1 : 001 To 008 T1E1 : 001 To 008
NUM LIST : 02 E&M : 001 To 128 E&M : 001 To 128
DEPT GROUP : 00 To 00 MOB : 001 To 064 MOB : 001 To 064
DUR(sec) : 000 SIP : 001 To 032 SIP : 001 To 032
UNITS : 0000
ACCOUNT No : 000 To 000
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SrN STN TRK CalledNo DATE TIME DUR UNIT AMOUNT R
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 3012 26001 3001 12-12-2010 11:45:04 8 1 1.10 I
2 3012 26001 3005 14-12-2010 09:39:13 9 1 1.10 I
3 3012 03001 3005 15-12-2010 17:35:33 27 1 1.10 D
4 3012 03002 112 17-12-2010 12:22:11 18 1 1.10 D
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOTAL CALLS : 4
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1543
TOTAL DUR : 62 TOTAL UNITS : 4 TOTAL AMOUNT : 4.40
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TRK:03=TWT,04=BRI,05=T1E1,06=E&M,25=Mobile,26=SIP;STN:01=SLT,02=DKP,29=Magneto
R (CALL TYPE): O = DISA, A = Auto Redial, E = External Forwarded, T = Transit
MATURITY: C = CPD, K = 12KHz/16KHz, R = Reversal, D = Delay, I = Connect
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Eternity V10R06 Page : 1
1544 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Station Message Detail Recording-Storage
What's this?
• ETERNITY supports Station message detail recording (SMDR) facility for Incoming calls, Outgoing Calls
and Internal Calls. Refer chapter “Station Message Detail Recording”.
• The storing of each type of call is allowed only if it is enabled by the relevant command.
• ETERNITY will store the Incoming, Outgoing and Internal calls in SMDR, as per programming of SMDR
storage filters. These filters can be set by using specific commands mentioned in this chapter.
• The call records are stored in the SMDR buffer. Once the SMDR buffer is full, the next call is stored in
place of the oldest call in the SMDR buffer. This is known as First In First Out (FIFO) logic.
• The SMDR buffer data is maintained even during power failures. However it is advisable to take frequent
printouts of the calls to avoid accidental loss of the data.
• Thus following types of storage is maintained in the ETERNITY:
• SMDR-IC Storage
• SMDR-Internal Storage
• SMDR-OG Storage
SMDR-IC Storage
• The SMDR facility is used to keep track of the incoming calls received by the ETERNITY. The SMDR is
useful in monitoring and managing the incoming traffic in more effective manner. The ETERNITY can keep
log of each call received by it in the SMDR buffer. Each incoming call is stored in the form of a record in the
buffer.
• Maximum 5000 records can be stored in the SMDR IC buffer.
• SE can default the storage filters.
• The SA or SE can clear the SMDR IC buffer using appropriate command and password from the SA mode.
SMDR and ISDN Terminal for Incoming calls:
• The ISDN Terminals Flexible number or the BRI Port's access code whichever is used to place the call will
get stored in the column "STN" of the SMDR incoming calls report.
SMDR-Internal Storage
• SMDR-Internal storage is used to keep record of calls made from one station to other within the
organization. The ETERNITY can keep track of each call made by any station. Each call is stored in form
of a record in the SMDR buffer.
• Maximum 1000 records of Internal calls can be stored in the SMDR buffer.
• SE can default the storage filters.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1545
• The SE or SA can clear the SMDR-Internal buffer by using appropriate password from the SA mode.
• The SA can print these calls on a printer or can even transfer this data on a computer for storage or further
analysis.
SMDR and ISDN Terminal:
• If ISDN Terminals sends its access code (flexible number) in "Calling Number IE" it will be stored in
"CALLING STATION" in SMDR Internal Calls Report.
• If BRI's access code is sent as "Calling Number" it will be stored in the "CALLING STATION" in SMDR
Internal Calls Report.
• If BRI's access code is dialed or ISDN Terminal's flexible number is dialed by any station or another ISDN
Terminal it will be stored in the "CALLED STATION" field of the SMDR Internal Calls Reports.
SMDR-OG Storage
• SMDR-OG storage facility is used to keep records of calls made from the system. This SMDR is useful in
monitoring and controlling the cost of telephone calls. The ETERNITY can keep track of each call made by
any station.
• Maximum 6000 records can be stored in the SMDR buffer.
• SE can default the storage filters.
• The SE or SA can clear the SMDR-OG buffer by using appropriate password from the SA mode. The
System Administrator (SA) can print these calls on a printer. The SA can even transfer this data on a
computer for storage or further analysis.
• In case of a call transfer from one station to another station, the system stores two calls with same number
but different duration for both the stations. This is called 'Call Toggle'. Refer chapter “Call Toggle” for more
details.
SMDR and ISDN Terminal for Outgoing calls:
• If ISDN Terminal sends its access code (flexible number) in "Calling Number IE" it will be stored in column
"STN" in SMDR OG Calls Report.
• If ISDN Terminal doesn't send its flexible number while making OG call, the BRI port's access code will be
stored in the column "STN" in SMDR OG Calls Report.
How to configure
SMDR-IC Storage
Enable SMDR-IC Storage:
This command enables/disables the storage of incoming calls depending upon the storage filters set.
Use following command to set SMDR storage mode:
2901-Storage Flag
1546 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Where,
Storage Flag Meaning
0 Don't store the incoming calls
1 Store the incoming calls
By default, all the calls are stored as per the filters set.
Filter commands:
These commands enable the user to select the type of calls to be stored viz. All calls, Trunk wise calls, Un-
answered calls, DID calls, etc. Calls will be stored only if duration, exceeds than the set value.
Store Normal Calls 2902-Flag
Store DID Calls 2903-Flag
Store Unanswered Calls 2904-Flag
Store Unanswered DID Calls 2905-Flag
Store DISA Calls 2906-Flag
Store Calls-Speech Duration More than 2907-Seconds
Store Calls-Unanswered Duration for more than 2908-Seconds
Store Calls-Hold Duration for more than 2909-Seconds
Where,
Seconds = 000-999.
Flag Meaning
0 Don't store
1 Store
Default IC Storage Filters:
Use following command to default the incoming call storage filters:
2915
By default,
All Normal, DID, Unanswered, Unanswered DID, DISA calls will be stored.
The speech duration is set to 000.
The unanswered duration is set to 000.
The Hold Duration is set to 000.
Clear SMDR IC Buffer:
The SMDR-IC buffer can be cleared from the SA mode.
1072-180-Reverse SA Password
SMDR-Internal Storage
Enable SMDR-Internal Storage:
This command enables/disables the storage of internal calls depending upon the storage filters set.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1547
Use following command to set SMDR storage mode:
2801-Storage Flag
Where,
Storage Flag Meaning
0 Don't store the internal calls
1 Store the internal calls
By default, all the calls are stored as per the filters set.
Filter commands:
Filter Command
Store Calls-Speech duration 2802-Seconds
Where,
Seconds = 000-999.
By default, the speech duration is set to 000.
Default Internal Storage Filters:
Use following command to default the internal call storage filters:
2815
Clear SMDR Internal Buffer:
The SMDR-Internal buffer can be cleared from the SA mode.
Use the following command to clear the SMDR-Internal buffer:
1072-150-Reverse SA Password
SMDR-OG Storage
Enable SMDR-Internal Storage:
This command enables/disables the storage of outgoing calls depending upon the filters set.
Use following command to set SMDR storage flag:
2701-Storage Flag
Where,
Storage Flag Meaning
0 Don't store the outgoing calls
1 Store the outgoing calls
By default, the Storage Flag is 1.
Filter commands:
These commands enable the user to select the type of calls to be stored viz. destination number wise, duration
wise or cost wise.
1548 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Destination Wise:
It is possible to store outgoing calls selectively depending on the destination numbers. The ETERNITY supports
this feature in association with Number Lists. An outgoing call will be stored only if the number matches with an
entry in the Number List assigned.
Use following command to assign a Number list containing numbers for call storage:
2702-Number List
Where,
Number List is 01-16.
By default, Number List assigned is 02.
Duration wise:
Sometimes it is required to filter out the calls of small durations. System will not store the calls with duration less
than duration, programmed.
Use following command to set the filter of call duration:
2703-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 000 to 999.
By default, Seconds is 000.
Unit wise:
Sometimes it is required to filter out the calls based on Call units. System will not store the calls with units less than
the units programmed:
Use following command to set the filter for call Units:
2704-Units
Where,
Units are from 0000 to 9999.
By default, Units is 0000.
Default OG Storage Filters:
Use following command to default the outgoing calls storage filters:
2715
By default, Number List is 02, Seconds is 000 and Units is 000.
Call Toggle:
Use following command to set the Call Toggle flag:
2716-Toggle Flag
Where,
Toggle Flag Meaning
0 Toggle OFF
1 Toggle ON
By default, Toggle is ON.
Use following command to set the originating flag:
2717-Originating Flag
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1549
Where,
Originating Flag Meaning
0 OFF
1 ON
By default, the flag is originating station.
When Call Toggle Flag is set OFF, then only above command (2717) can be effective. Refer chapter “Call
Toggle” for more details.
Clear SMDR OG Buffer:
The SMDR-OG buffer can be cleared from the SA mode.
Use following command to clear SMDR-Outgoing buffer:
1072-133-Reverse SA Password
Relevant Topics:
1. “Station Message Detail Recording” 1472
2. “Station Message Detail Recording-Report” 1531
3. “Station Message Detail Recording-Online” 1473
4. “Station Message Detail Recording-Posting” 1489
1550 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
System Activity Log
What’s this?
The ETERNITY monitors all its activities and maintains records of these activities in the System Activity Log.
The System Activity Log has a buffer capacity of 250 records. The Activity Log stores records using the FIFO
method.
This log can be printed on a printer or downloaded on a computer in form of a report. The activity log can be printed
or downloaded in two modes:
• Online: The activity report is printed/downloaded as and when an activity occurs.
• Report (Offline): The activity report is printed/downloaded whenever desired. In the Offline mode, the last
250 activities recorded by the system are printed/downloaded.
The System Administrator can print/download System Activity Log, online or offline using any serial device
connected to the COM Port of ETERNITY.
ETERNITY also supports Syslog Client for System Activity Logs. The Syslog Client enables the system to send
activity logs in syslog format to the remote ‘Syslog Server’. You can view the logs on the remote server.
You may use Syslog for System Activity Log, if you have no spare COM Port on your ETERNITY or your system
does not have a COM Port, as in ETERNITY PE3SS.
How it works
• A destination port, serial or ethernet, must be assigned for activity logs. The system will send the activity
log to this port.
• If the System Administrator extension is a DKP or an Extended IP Phone, a DSS Key can be assigned for
System Activity Log.
• Each activity is stored in the Activity Log in this format:
<DD-MM-YYYY> < HH:MM:SS> <Activity Text>
• Whenever an activity is recorded by the system, the DSS key, if assigned for this feature on the System
Administrator’s DKP/Extended IP Phone extension, is turned ON.
• The System Administrator can view the activity log by pressing the DSS key (if assigned). The DKP/
Extended IP Phone of the System Administrator will display the activity in this format:
DD-MM HH:MM <Activity Index>
The format of the Date will be DD-MM or MM-DD as per Date Format selected in the Real Time Clock
settings of the system.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1551
Index of the Type of Activities recorded in the System Activity Log
Index Activity
1 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS MATRIX ETERNITY VvRr Started
2 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS Default Configuration Loaded :
3 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS Card Present: Slot=SS, Type: <ZZZZZ > Card V02R01
4 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS SLT Normal : XXXX , Slot=SS, Port=PP
5 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS DKP Normal : XXXX , Slot=SS, Port=PP
6 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS BRI Normal : Slot=SS, Port=PP
7 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS T1E1 Normal : Slot=SS, Port=PP
8 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS SMDR-IC buffer deletion : XXXX
9 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS SMDR-OG buffer deletion : XXXX
10 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS SMDR-Internal buffer deletion : XXXX
11 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS SE Access From : XXXX
12 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS SA Access From : XXXX
13 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS Emergency Number Dialed : XXXX
14 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS Log In : XXXX <Station name>
15 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS Log Out: XXXX <Station name>
16 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS Reg Fail, Authenticacation PW Invalid, SIPTrk=TT
17 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS Reg Fail, Config Parameters Invalid, SIPTrk=TT
18 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS Stack Construct Authenticate Fail Slot=SS, Port=PP
19 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS Stack Construct Fail - IP Address Invalid, Slot=SS
20 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS BITE Test of Slot No. xx Port Offset xxx : Pass
21 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS BITE Test of Slot No. xx Port Offset xxx : Fail
22 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS Personal Mailbox is full for Extension <Extn. Number>
23 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS VMS Disk is full (i.e. Pen Drive of VMS Card is full).
SS-Slot Number, PP -Port Number, TT -Trunk Number, XXXX -Station Number, v-Version for VvRr, r-
Revision for VvRr, ZZZZ = Card Type
When installed in the Hotel mode, the ETERNITY captures Hotel-Motel Activity Log. To know more, see the
ETERNITY Hospitality System Manual.
How to configure
The two functional parts of system activity log are: Storage and Report Generation in the Online or Report modes.
To be able to use this feature, you must enable storage of Activity Logs, and assign the Syslog Server address as
Destination Port for the logs.
1552 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
The destination port may be a COM Port, Ethernet Port or Printer Port200.
If you want to use Syslog Server, you must assign the IP Address of the remote Syslog server as the Destination
Port for the System Activity Log.
If the System Administrator phone is a DKP or an Extended IP Phone, you may assign a DSS key for System
Activity Log.
For instructions on configuring a DSS key on a DKP, see “DSS Keys Programming”.
For instructions on configuring a DSS key on an Extended IP Phone, see “Matrix Extended IP Phone Settings”
under Configuring SIP Extensions.
Configuring System Activity Log using Jeeves
• Open Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access Mode.
• Scroll to and click the System Activity Log link.
• Enable System Activity Log Storage.
• To generate System Activity Log - Online, i.e. as and when the activity occurs, select Destination Port.
for Online SAL from the following options:
• Comm. 1 or Comm. 2: Select a communication port if you want to use a serial device to capture the
logs. Make sure the device is connected to the COM port.
• Printeries printer port is available on ETERNITY ME only. Select this option if you want the logs to be
sent to the printer port of ETERNITY ME.
• Ethernet: Select Ethernet port if you want to use the remote syslog server for the logs.
• If you select Ethernet, in the Destination IP Address: Port - Online SAL field, enter the IP
Address and the port of the remote Syslog Server.
By default, no destination port is assigned for Online SAL.
• To generate System Activity Log - Report, i.e. offline, whenever desired, select Destination Port for SAL
Report from the options Comm. 1 or Comm. 2, Printer, Ethernet. Default: None.
• If you selected Ethernet as the Destination port, in the Destination IP Address: Port - SAL Report
field, enter the IP Address and the port of the remote Syslog Server.
• Click Submit to save settings.
200. The Printer port is available in ETERNITY ME only.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1553
Configuring System Activity Log using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To set enable/disable SAL storage, dial:
• 6401-Storage Flag
Where,
Storage Flag is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Enable
To select the Destination Port for SAL Online, dial:
• 6402-Port
Where,
Port is
0 for None
1 for COM Port 1
2 for COM Port 2
3 for Printer port
4 for Ethernet Port
Default: None
If you selected Ethernet Port as Destination port, to assign the IP Address for the Ethernet Port, dial:
• 6404-IP Address
To assign Port for the IP Address, dial:
• 6405-Port
Where,
Port is from 514 and 1024-65535
Default: 514.
To select the Destination Port for SAL Report, dial:
• 6403-Port
Where,
Port is
0 for None
1 for COM Port 1
2 for COM Port 2
3 for Printer port
4 for Ethernet Port
Default: None
If you selected Ethernet Port as Destination port, to assign the IP Address for the Ethernet Port, dial:
• 6406-IP Address
To assign Port for the IP Address, dial:
• 6407-Port
Where,
Port is from 514 and 1024-65535
Default: 514.
To restore default values of the system activity log parameters, dial:
• 6410
1554 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Exit SE Mode.
How to use
You can start and stop System Activity Log - Online and Report from the System Administrator mode using Jeeves
or dialing SA Commands from an extension phone.
To start/stop report generation using Jeeves,
• Open Jeeves.
• Log in as System Administrator.
• Click the System Activity Log link.
• To start System Activity Log - Online, click the Start button.
• To stop System Activity Log - Online, click the Abort button.
• To start System Activity Log - Report, click the Start button.
• To stop System Activity Log - Report, click the Abort button.
• To clear System Activity Logs from the buffer, click the Clear System Activity Log button.
• You may log out of the System Administrator mode.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1555
To generate Activity logs from an extension phone,
• Enter SA mode from a DKP/SLT/Extended IP Phone.
To start/stop Online log generation:
• Dial 1072-024-1 to start
• Dial 1072-024-0 to stop
To start/stop offline Report generation:
• Dial 1072-023-1 to start
• Dial 1072-023-0 to stop
To clear Activity Logs,
• Dial 1072-022-Reverse SA Password
• Exit SA mode.
You may print the logs captured on the Syslog Server after suitable modification of the format.
The Online System Activity Log report would look like this:
26-04-2011 16:51:48 DKP Normal : 3009 , Slot=07, Port=05
The Offline System Activity Log report would look like this:
SYSTEM ACTIVITY LOG AS ON 26-04-2011(Tue) AT 16:16
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
26-04-2011 16:14:50 DKP Normal : 3005 , Slot=07, Port=01
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Eternity V10R06 Page : 1
1556 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
System Activity Log Display
What’s this?
The ETERNITY provides a facility to display the last activity monitored by the system on the System Administrator’s
extension phone.
How to use
To be able to use this feature optimally, the System Administrator extension phone must be a DKP or an Extended
IP Phone, and a DSS Key must be assigned on the phone to System Activity Log Display.
For instructions on configuring DSS Keys on a Digital Key phone, see “DSS Keys Programming”.
For instructions on configuring DSS Keys on Matrix Extended IP Phone, see “Matrix Extended IP Phone Settings”
under Configuring SIP Extensions.
To view the System Activity Log from System Administrator Mode,
• Go Off-hook.
• Press the DSS key assigned to System Activity Log Display.
OR
• Dial 1072-009
• The last recorded Activity log appears on your phone’s display in this following format: Date-Time-Activity
Index
The Date and Time are in <DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:> format
The Activity Index is a two digit number from 01 to 23.
See System Activity Log Activity Index table in “System Activity Log”.
The date and month format will be DD-MM or MM-DD as per date format set in the system. See “Real Time
Clock (RTC)” for setting the date format.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1557
System Fault Log Display
What’s this?
The ETERNITY provides a facility to display the last fault monitored on the system on the System Administrator’s
extension phone.
How it works
To be able to use this feature optimally, the System Administrator extension phone must be a DKP or an Extended
IP Phone, and a DSS Key must be assigned on the phone to System Fault Log.
• When a fault occurs, the LED of the DSS Key assigned for the System Fault Log, glows.
The buzzer of the ETERNITY ME Master Card starts sounding.
• The System Administrator may press the DSS key or dial the System Fault Log feature access code to
acknowledge it.
• On pressing the DSS Key or dialing of the acknowledgment command, the LED of the Fault Log key is
turned OFF.
The buzzer of the ETERNITY ME Master Card stops sounding.
How to use
To view the System Fault Log from System Administrator Mode,
• Go Off-hook.
• Press the DSS key assigned to System Fault Log Display.
OR
• Dial 1072-010
• The Fault log appears on your phone’s display in this format:Date-Time-Fault Index
The Date and Time are in <DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:> format
The Activity Index is a two digit number from 01 to 12.
See System Fault Log Activity Index table in “System Fault Log”.
1558 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
System Fault Log
What’s this?
The ETERNITY maintains a log of all system faults. The system Fault Log has a buffer capacity of 100 records. The
Fault Log stores records using the FIFO method.
The System Fault log can be printed on a printer or downloaded on a computer in form of a report. The report can
be printed or downloaded by the System Administrator in two modes:
• Online: The fault report is printed/downloaded as and when a fault occurs.
• Report (Offline): The faulty report is printed/downloaded whenever desired. In the Report (Offline) mode,
the last 100 faults recorded by the system are printed/downloaded.
The System Administrator can print/download System Fault Log, Online or Report using any serial device
connected to the COM Port of ETERNITY.
Matrix ETERNITY also supports Syslog Client for System Fault Logs. The Syslog Client enables the system to
send fault logs in syslog format to the remote ‘Syslog Server’. You can view the logs on the remote server.
You may use Syslog for System Fault Log, if you have no spare COM Port on your ETERNITY or your system does
not have a COM Port, as in ETERNITY PE3SS.
How it works
• A destination port for sending the report must be selected to which the system can send the log.
• If the System Administrator extension is a DKP or an Extended IP Phone, a DSS Key can be assigned for
System Fault Log.
• Whenever a fault is detected, the LED of the Fault Log DSS key, if assigned, is turned ON. The buzzer of
the Master Card of ETERNITY ME starts sounding.
• If more than one DKP/Extended IP extension is assigned Fault Log DSS Key, the LED of all keys will be
turned ON.
• The System Administrator must acknowledge the Fault indication by pressing the Fault Log key or by
dialing the Fault Log access code. The LED of the Fault Log key is turned OFF. The buzzer of the Master
Card of ETERNITY ME stops sounding.
The different activities that are logged into system fault log are summarized in this table:
Event Index Event Description
1 Card Absent, Slot No.
2 DKP Absent, Flexible No. of the port, Slot No. <>, Port No<>
3 SLT Short, Flexible No. of the port, Slot No. <>, Port No <>
4 SLT Open, Flexible No. of the port, Slot No. <>, Port No. <>
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1559
Event Index Event Description
5 BRI Out of Synch., Slot No. <>, Port No.<>
6 T1E1PRI Out of Synch., Slot No. <>, Port No. <>
7 PMS link break-down
8 Internal Communication failure
9 RTC Failure
10 VoIP LAN Lost, Slot No. <>, Port No. <> on DD-MM-YYYY at HH:MM:SS
11 VoPP Fail, Slot No. <XX>
12 Registration Timer Fail, SIP Trunk <XX>
VOPP Fail: If VoPP fail message is logged, the ETERNITY VoIP card will not be functional.
Registration Timer Fail: The system may fail to load either the Re-registration Timer or the Registration
Retry Timer. In such a case the Proxy SIP trunk will remain un-registered and will not be functional.
The system will decode the registration status message received from ETERNITY VoIP module and, if it is
found to be a problem caused by Registration Timer Failure, this will be logged in the System Fault Log.
This can happen to one or more SIP trunks, while the other SIP Trunks are functioning normally. You need
to restart the system to resolve the problem.
How to configure
To be able to use this feature, you must enable storage of Fault Logs, and assign a Destination Port for the Fault
Logs. The destination port may be a COM Port, Ethernet Port, or Printer port (available on ETERNTIY ME only).
If the System Administrator phone is a DKP or an Extended IP Phone, you may assign a DSS key for System Fault
Log.
For instructions on configuring DSS Keys on a Digital Key phone, see “DSS Keys Programming”.
For instructions on configuring DSS Keys on Matrix Extended IP Phone, see “Matrix Extended IP Phone Settings”
under Configuring SIP Extensions.
You may configure the System Fault Log settings using Jeeves and by dialing system commands from a telephone
connected to the ETERNITY.
Configuring System Fault Log using Jeeves
• Open Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access Mode.
• Scroll to the System Fault Log link and click this link.
1560 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Enable System Fault Log Storage.
• To generate System Fault Log - online, i.e. as and when the fault occurs, select the Destination Port for
Online SFL from the following options:
• Comm. 1 or Comm. 2: Select a communication port if you want to use a serial device to capture the
logs. Make sure the device is connected to the COM port.
• Printer: The printer port is available only on ETERNITY ME. Select this option if you want the logs to
be sent to the printer port of ETERNITY ME.
• Ethernet: Select Ethernet port if you want to use the remote syslog server for the logs.
• If you select Ethernet, in the Destination IP Address: Port - Online SFL field, enter the IP Address
and the port of the remote Syslog Server.
By default, no destination port is assigned for Online SFL.
• To generate System fault Log - Report, i.e. offline, whenever desired, select Destination Port for SFL
Report from the options: Comm. 1 or Comm. 2, Printer, Ethernet. Default: None.
• If you selected Ethernet as Destination Port, in the Destination IP Address: Port - SFL Report field,
enter the IP Address and the port of the remote Syslog Server.
• Click Submit to save settings.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1561
Configuring System Fault Log using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To set enable/disable SFL storage, dial:
• 6451-Storage Flag
Where,
Storage Flag is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Enable
To select the Destination Port for SFL Online, dial:
• 6452-Port
Where,
Port is
0 for None
1 for COM Port 1
2 for COM Port 2
3 for Printer port
4 for Ethernet Port
Default: None
If you selected Ethernet Port as Destination port, to assign the IP Address for the Ethernet Port, dial:
• 6455-IP Address
To assign Port for the IP Address, dial:
• 6456-Port
Where,
Port is from 514 and 1024-65535
Default: 514.
To select the Destination Port for SFL Report, dial:
• 6453-Port
Where,
Port is
0 for None
1 for COM Port 1
2 for COM Port 2
3 for Printer port
4 for Ethernet Port
Default: None
If you selected Ethernet Port as Destination port, to assign the IP Address for the Ethernet Port, dial:
• 6457-IP Address
To assign Port for the IP Address, dial:
• 6458-Port
Where,
Port is from 514 and 1024-65535
Default: 514.
• Exit SE Mode.
1562 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
How to use
You can start and stop System Fault Log - Online and Report from the System Administrator mode using Jeeves or
dialing SA Commands from an extension phone.
To start/stop fault report generation using Jeeves,
• Open Jeeves.
• Log in as System Administrator.
• Click the System Fault Log link.
• To start System Fault Log - Online, click the Start button.
• To stop System Fault Log - Online, click the Abort button.
• To start System Fault Log - Report, click the Start button.
• To stop System Fault Log - Report, click the Abort button.
• To clear System Fault Logs from the buffer, click the Clear System Fault Log button.
• You may log out of the System Administrator mode.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1563
To generate Fault logs from an extension phone,
• Enter SA mode from a DKP/SLT/Extended IP Phone.
To start/stop Online fault log generation:
• Dial 1072-028-1 to start
• Dial 1072-028-0 to stop
To start/stop offline Report generation:
• Dial 1072-027-1 to start
• Dial 1072-027-0 to stop
• Exit SA mode.
You may print the logs captured on the Syslog Server after suitable modification of the format.
The format of the standard system fault report looks as below:
Field Column Position
Blank 00
Date (As per Date format selected) 01
Time (HH:MM:SS) 12
Even Index No. (two characters) 21
Event Description 24
The Online report would look like this:
12-04-2011 16:51:41 DKP Absent : 3009 , Slot=07, Port=05
The Offline report would look like this:
SYSTEM FAULT LOG AS ON 12-04-2011(Tue) AT 16:17
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12-04-2011 16:14:39 DKP Absent : 3005 , Slot=07, Port=01
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Eternity V10R06 Page : 1
1564 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
System Parameters
What’s this?
System Parameters are general parameters, related to features and facilities that are applied system-wide, such as
customer name, Day-Night mode, storage of call logs, end of dialing, alarms, DID call disconnect options,
Presence, and DND messages. Each of these is described briefly here.
Customer Name
You can assign the name of the enterprise/organization that is using ETERNITY as the Customer Name. The
Customer Name may contain up to 80 characters. You may enter the address of organization/enterprise along with
the name.
The Customer Name you assign will appear on the various System Reports generated and printed by the
ETERNITY.
System Parameters
• Customer Profile: ETERNITY two major applications: Enterprise application to meet requirements of
businesses, and Hospitality application to meet the specific requirements of Hotels and Hospitals.
You must select Customer Profile as Enterprise or Hotel according to the application you are using. When
you select the Customer Profile, all the features and facilities specific to the application Enterprise/Hotel
along with their default settings are loaded. By default, the Customer Profile of ETERNITY is defined as
'Enterprise'.
• Onsite configuration: This flag is enabled, the configuration GUI of ETERNITY, Jeeves, will show the
pages for only those trunks and extension port types that are on board the system, i.e., detected by the
system at Power-On.
• Voice Mail Group Destination: This is the group of extensions to be assigned as Voice Mail group.
If you have interfaced an external Voice mail System or Auto Attendant with the ETERNITY, you must first
create a routing group of the SLT extension ports connected to the VMS. Assign the same routing group
number in this field.
If you have installed the ETERNITY VMS Card, the system will automatically assign routing group number
‘96’ reserved for the VMS Group. Default: 96.
• External Voice Mail RTC Synchronization: When you interface an external Voice Mail System with the
ETERNITY, you need to synchronize the Real Time Clock (RTC) of the external VMS device and the RTC
of ETERNITY to ensure precision in the operation of time-based VMS features like Message Wait,
Greeting Messages, Call Transfer.
Enable the External Voice Mail RTC Synchronization, if you have connected an external Voice Mail
System to the ETERNITY.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1565
If you have installed the ETERNITY VMS Card, the system will synchronize RTC with the VMS Card
automatically in the following cases:
• At Power On.
• Whenever the RTC of ETERNITY is changed, either to correct clock drifts or due to Daylight Saving
Time adjustment.
• Daily at 00:01 hrs.
• Whenever the system detects the VMS Card, for instance during Hotswap or card Restart.
By default, the External Voice Mail RTC Synchronization is disabled.
• Station Name Pattern: The Station Name Pattern is the format in which the names of extensions will be
stored on the extension phones and displayed to other extensions. You can store names by First Names
only, First names and Last Names. You can also add Titles indicating gender, designation, rank, social
standing, like Mr. Mrs. Ms., Dr., Prof. Cmdr., Rev., to Names of extensions.
ETERNITY supports the following Station Name patterns.
Option Meaning
1 Title< space>First Name<space>Name
2 First Name only
3 Name only
4 First Name<space>Name
5 Title<space>Name
6 Title<space>Name
Station Name Pattern must be configured for the Guest Name and Title feature of the ETERNITY
Hospitality module. To know more, refer the feature description in the ETERNITY Hospitality System
Manual.
By default, Name Only is selected as the Station Name Pattern when ETERNITY is operated in the
Enterprise mode, and Title<space>Name is selected as the Station Name Pattern when ETERNITY is
operated in the Hotel Mode.
• Global Hold: This parameter is related to the “Call Hold” feature of ETERNITY. Global Hold enables you
pick up a call that has been put on hold by any extension from a DKP/Extended IP Phone extension of
ETERNITY.
• Store Internal Calls in Missed Call Log: ETERNITY stores call logs of external calls only. You may
instruct the system to store internal calls in the Missed Call log by enabling this parameter. See “Call
Logs”.
• Store Internal Calls in Dialed Call Log: You may instruct the system to store internal calls in the Dialed
Call log by enabling this parameter. See “Call Logs”.
• Store Internal Calls in Answered Call Log: You may instruct the system to store internal calls in the
Answered Call log by enabling this parameter. See “Call Logs”.
1566 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• MoH Source when Station kept on Hold: You can select the source of “Music on Hold (MOH)” that
ETERNITY should play on the extension that is put on hold. Select Internal (VM-01) if you want the
system to play MOH recorded in the Voice Module. Select External (AIP), if you want the system to play
MOH from an external device connected to the Analog Input Port (AIP) of the system.
• MoH Source when Trunk kept on Hold: You can select the source of music on hold (MoH) that
ETERNITY should play to external callers who are put on hold. Select Internal (VM-01) if you want the
system to play MOH recorded in the Voice Module. Select External (AIP), if you want the system to play
MOH from an external device connected to the Analog Input Port (AIP) of the system.
• End of Dialing Digit: End of Dialing Digit is a single digit, on receipt of which, the system considers the
number string dialed by the extension users as the complete string. It does not wait for further digits to be
dialed, and dials out the number. The digits * (star) or # (hash/pound) are used to indicate end of dialing to
the system, as these are unique and distinguishable from the digits generally dialed by extensions (0, 1,
2... to 9). Default: #
• Give Off-hook Alert to Operator: When this flag is enabled, the system will detect extensions that are off-
hook and ring on the Operator extension to alert the Operator about the state of the phone. This alert is
useful for detecting whether the handset of extension phones are placed correctly. Read the feature
description for “OFF-Hook Alert” to know more.
• Day/Night Mode: Certain features of the ETERNITY require extensions and trunks to behave differently
according to the working hours, break hours and non-working hours, which are referred to as Time Zones.
The Time Zones, i.e. working hours, break hours and non-working hours, are defined for the entire week in
a Time Table. Time Table is assigned to trunks, extensions and other time-zone dependant features.
You can set the Time Zone of the system as Working-Hours or Non-Working hours any time you want by
setting the system in the Day Mode or the Night Mode, or let the system operate as per the Time Table
assigned. For more details see “Day Night Mode” and “Time Tables”.
• Emergency Dialing Reporting: When this flag is enabled, the system detects the extension that has
made the emergency call and reports it to the Operator extension. Thus the Operator can know which
extension has made an emergency call. See “Emergency Detection and Reporting” to know more.
• Replace '+' from CLI: The Mobile network presents the calling party number with prefix '+' to the called
party. ETERNITY allows you to remove '+' and replace it with an appropriate number string as required. To
do this, you must enable Replace '+' from CLI.
You may also program the number string with which ‘+’ is to be replaced in the CLI in the Replace '+' from
CLI with the number string field. In this field, enter the number string with which you want to replace '+'
received as prefix of calling party number.
If you keep the number string field blank, ETERNITY will remove '+' sign from the CLI of calling party and
present the remaining digits on the CLI of the Called Party.
For example:
The number string +919327237228 is received as CLI.
If ‘00’ is configured as the replace string, the CLI number would become 00919327237228
If no replacement string is configured (i.e. left blank), the CLI number would be presented as
919327237228.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1567
• Disconnect DID Call, when Dialed Number is Busy: when this flag is enabled, the DID call will be
disconnected if the landing extensions is busy. The DID call will not be routed to the Operator. Default:
disabled.
• Disconnect DID call, when Dialed Number is not Responding: when this flag is enabled the system
disconnects the DID call if there is no reply from the landing destination extensions. The DID call will not be
routed to the Operator. Default: disabled.
• Disconnect DID call, when Caller Does not Dial any Digit: when this flag is enabled, the system will
disconnect the DID call if the caller fails to dial a digit within the First Digit Wait Timer. The DID call will not
be routed to the Operator. Default: disabled.
• Play Beep when Conference/Dial-in Conference Starts: This is a common flag for the features
“Conference-Multiparty”, “Conference Dial-In”, “Emergency Conference”, and “Raid”. When this flag is
enabled,
• the system plays a warning beep to the extension which is being raided by another extension, before
establishing three-way speech.
• the system plays beeps to the other participants in a Dial-In Conference when a new participant joins in
(i.e. dials in to an on-going Dial-In Conference)
• the system plays beeps to the other participants connected in a Multi-Party Conference and an
Emergency Conference, when a new participant is included.
If you disable this flag, no warning Beep will be played in Raid, the existing participants in a Dial-In or Multi-
party conference will not hear any beep tone indicating the addition of a new participant.
• Play Beep when Call Taping and Conversation Recording Starts: This is a common flag for the
features “Call Taping” and “Conversation Recording”. When this flag is enabled, the system plays Beeps to
the extensions/calling party and extension before it starts taping the call in the common mailbox or
recording the conversation in the extension’s mailbox.
When this flag is disabled, no indication will be given to the opposite party when the call is being taped/
conversation is being recorded. Default: Enabled.
• Play Feature Tone in place of Dial Tone when Call Forward is Set: You can select whether the you
want the system to play Feature Tone instead of Dial Tone to the extensions when Call Forward is set on
these extensions. When this flag is disabled, the system will play dial tone to the extension on which Call
Forward is set, whenever the extension goes Off-hook. Default: Enabled.
• Call Proceeding Tone - Multistage Dialing: This flag is used in “Multi-Stage Dialing” where you need to
configure Pause and Wait for Answer in the Substitute Number string for the number string dialed by the
extension users.
When an extension user makes a call using a Calling Card, and the system dials out the number in stages,
the extension user will get Ring Back Tone twice; first after the system has dialed the Calling Card
Number, and again after the system has dialed out the destination number (called party number). Thus the
extension user will get Ring Back Tone, twice. To avoid this, you may configure the 'Call Proceeding Tone'
to be played by the system when using Multi-Stage Dialing.
1568 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
You must configure the type of 'Call Proceeding Tone', according to your requirement; whether the
extension user should be connected to the speech path when the Calling Card number is out dialed or
when the called party number is out dialed. You can select any of the following Call Proceeding Tone
options, as per your requirement:
• Network Tone: If this option is selected, the extension user will get Ring Back Tone after dialing the
calling card number and again, after the system has dialed the called party number (when the system is
dialing out the number with Pause and Wait for Answer configured in the substitute number string).
• Pseudo Tone: If this option is selected, the extension user will get Feature Tone when the user has
completed dialing all the digits. At the end of the tone, the extension user gets connected to the called
party (destination number).
• Silent: If this option is selected, the extension user will get Silence (no tone), after the extension user
has completed dialing all digits. After dialing out the called party number in DTMF, the system will
connect the caller to the called party number (destination number).
• Companding Algorithm: The companding Algorithm —A law or law—is automatically selected when
you select Region for ETERNITY. However, if necessary, you may change the default companding
Algorithm that appears in this field. Select the companding Algorithm according to the Regulatory
Requirement of the country where ETERNITY is installed.
• Language of SE, SA and Front Desk User Web Interface: The GUI of ETERNITY supports the
languages English, Italian, Spanish, French, German, and Portuguese. When you select ‘Region’ for
ETERNITY, one of these languages will be applied as appropriate for the region you selected. For
instance, if you selected India, English will be applied. If you selected Spain, Spanish will be applied. If you
selected a country where none of these languages are the local language, English will be applied.
The language set by the system on Region selection will be applied on the pages of the GUI for every login
session. You can change the default language set on Region selection, by configuring this parameter.
• Form Feed in Report Printing: To print each system report on a separate page, enable Form Feed in
Report Printing. Default: Enabled.
• Minimum No. of digits received in CLI to consider the call is from Public N/w: This parameter is used
for distinguishing between incoming calls from Public Network and Private Network on the basis of the
number of digits received in the CLI.
This parameter is applicable to calls originating on the T1E1PRI ports (Tie-Line) configured for the Q-
Signaling. By default, CLI number with 8 or more digits will be considered as call from Public Network.
ETERNITY will check this parameter, whenever the incoming call is to be analyzed as call from PISN
(Private Integrated Subscriber Network) or non-PISN (Public Network Number).
• Mailbox for Call Taping: When “Call Taping” feature is applied on extensions, calls are taped in a
common mailbox assigned to this feature. Extension users with access to the mailbox can retrieve and
listen to the recorded conversations. This parameter requires you to define the Mailbox for Call Taping.
You may select the Extension Type—SLT, DKP, SIP—whose mailbox you want to use for Call Taping from
the drop down list, and enter the Port Number of this extension. For example, if you want to select the
mailbox of the phone connected to SLT Extension Port 4, enter 4 in this field.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1569
• Display Presence Status during Call on DKP: If you want to allow DKP extension and Extended IP
extension users to view the presence status of the extension they are calling, you must enable this flag.
Default: Disabled.
• Enable Programming through Comm. Port: You can configure ETERNITY via the Serial COM port of a
computer, using communication software like HyperTerminal, ProComm, and BitComm. To configure the
system using COM Port, you must enable this check box.
• Communication Port for Programming: If you have enabled Programming through Comm. Port,
select the COM Port to which you have connected the computer you will use for system configuration.
ETERNITY ME supports two COM Ports, you may select Comm. 1 or Comm. 2.
If your system is ETERNITY GE 6S, GE12S, PE6S or PE3SP which have a single COM Port, select
Comm. 1. For more information, see “Configuring using Serial COM Port”.
• BITE Card Slot Number: BITE (Built-In Test Equipment) is an automatic testing facility offered by the
ETERNITY to test the functioning of the SLT, Magneto, TWT, Loop Dial and E&M ports using BITE. For
more details, see “BITE (Built-In Test Equipment)”.
The “The SLT+MAG+TWT+LD+ENM Card” of ETERNITY supports BITE. If you have this card installed in
your system, you must define the BITE Card Slot, i.e. the slot in which the “The SLT+MAG+TWT+LD+ENM
Card” is installed.
• Enable Watch Dog: ETERNITY supports the Watchdog function to detect and restart the system,
whenever the system hangs. To use this function, select this check box. Default: Disabled.
When Watch Dog function is disabled, you must manually restart the system when it hangs.
• Master Buzzer: ETERNITY ME has a buzzer on the master card which sounds whenever the system
detects a fault. To know more, see “System Fault Log”.
You can set the duration of time for which the buzzer should sound by setting the Master Buzzer On Time
and OFF Time as Master Buzzer On Timer and Master Buzzer Off Timer respectively.
The range of the both timers is between 000 to 9999 milliseconds.
Incoming CLI Modification
This parameter is useful in countries where the Calling Line Identification (CLI) received by the PBX extension
users must be suitably modified before it can be used to dial out the number. To know more, see “Incoming CLI
Modification” to know more.
• Enable Incoming CLI Modification: To apply Incoming CLI modification, select this check box.
Configure the following options for CLI modification:
• Country Code: This is the Country Code of the country where ETERNITY is installed. The Country
Code helps ETERNITY detect whether the Incoming CLI received is a national or an international
number. Do not enter any prefix for the Country Code. For example, if your ETERNITY is installed in
USA, enter only ‘1’ as the Country Code. Do not enter ‘+’ or “00’ as prefix to the country code ‘1’.
Default: ‘91’ (India).
1570 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Area Code: This is the Area Code of the place where the ETERNITY is installed. The Area Code helps
ETERNITY detect whether the Incoming CLI received is a local number. Do not enter any prefix for the
Area Code. For example, if you want to enter Area Code for Mumbai, enter only ‘22’. Do not enter the
prefix ‘0’ to the area code. Default: ‘265’ (Vadodara city).
• International Prefix: These are digits required as Prefix for dialing International Numbers. The prefix
may be up to 5 digits, with numbers from 00000 to 99999. Default: ‘00’.
• National Prefix: These are digits required as Prefix for dialing long distance, National (within the
country) numbers. The prefix may be up to 5 digits, with numbers from 00000 to 99999. Default: ‘0’.
• Area Code required to make local calls?: Depending on the dialing pattern of your local public
telephone network, you may choose:
• No (Area Code not required), if your public telephone network does not require the dialing of Area
Code for local numbers.
• Yes (Area Code is required), if your public telephone network requires you to dial the Area Code for
local numbers.
• Yes, with Prefix Digit, if your public telephone network requires you to dial Area Code with a
particular Prefix for local numbers. If you select this option, you must also enter the prefix digits for
the area code for local calls in the Prefix Area Code field.
Clock Synchronization
The ETERNITY supports four clock sources for Clock Synchronization for the T1E1 and BRI ports. To know more,
see “Clock Synchronization”.
You must select the Clock Source in the order of Priority from 1 to 4. By default, the Clock Source priority is
selected as follows:
• Clock Source - Priority 1 - T1E1 - 001
• Clock Source - Priority 2 - T1E1 - 002
• Clock Source - Priority 3 - T1E1 - 003
• Clock Source - Priority 4 - T1E1 - 004
Also set the Clock Synchronization Frequency as: 8KHz Derived, 8KHz, 2.048MHz, 1.54 MHz
Set the PLL Locking Mode as Slow or Fast.
DND Text Message
ETERNITY allows you to program DND different Text Messages, which extension users can select when setting
DND on their extensions. The DND text message they select is displayed to the calling extensions. See “Do Not
Disturb (DND)” to know more.
By default the following messages are configured as DND Text messages, you may customize these messages,
according to your requirement.
Message No. Message Text
1 Do Not Disturb
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1571
Message No. Message Text
2 Unavailable
3 In Meeting
4 In Conference
5 Try on Mobile
6 On Vacation
7 On Business Trip
8 Out of Office
9 With a Guest
Publish Message
ETERNITY offers 10 different text Messages to Publish Presence, as listed in the table below. You can customize
message 6 to 9 to match your requirement.
Message No. Message Text
0 Absent
1 Present
2 Auto Detect
3 Away
4 On the Phone
5 Do Not Disturb
6 I am Mobile
7 In Meeting
8 Out for Meal
9 Out of Office
To know more about this feature, see “Presence”
Digital Output Port (DOP)
ETERNITY supports a Digital Output Port for connecting a door lock relay device to be used in conjunction with the
Door Phone connected to the ETERNITY.
When you connect a Door Lock release device, you must set the Normal Contact Type of the DOP to Normally
Open. Default: Normally Open. See “Digital Output Port (DOP)”.
Digital Input Port (DIP)
If you have connected a sensor device to the DIP for an automated control application or for Security Alarm and
Reporting, you must configure the following port parameters
1572 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Enable DIP: Select this check box to enable the port.
• Instigation Signal: Depending on the application for which you are using the DIP, select the appropriate
instigation signal for the DIP as High or Low state.
• 'High' state signifies that the DIP is normally open. DIP instigation signal should be set as 'High'
when the sensor connected to the DIP keeps the Loop open and closes it to signal an event.
• 'Low' state signifies that the DIP is normally closed. DIP instigation signal should be set as 'Low'
when the sensor connected to the DIP normally keeps the Loop closed and opens/breaks it to
signal an event.
• Minimum Instigation Time: This is the time for which the instigation signal from the sensor device
should remain present on the DIP to be recognized by the DIP as a genuine signal. The range of this
timer is from 01 to 99 seconds. By default the Minimum Instigation Time is set to 01 second. You may
set the 'Minimum Instigation Time' to the desired value.
To know more about the usage of the DIP, see “Digital Input Port (DIP)” and “Automated Control
Applications”.
Slave Card's Software Management
You can downgrade the software of the cards of ETERNITY to the lower version, by setting the Allow downgrade
of Slave card software to lower version? option for the desired card to Yes.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1573
How to configure
Configuring System Parameters using Jeeves
To configure System Parameters using Jeeves,
• Log into Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access Mode.
• Scroll to and click the System Parameters link.
• Configure the system parameters to match your requirement.
• Click Submit to save.
• You may log out of Jeeves.
1574 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Configuring System Parameters using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
Customer Name
• To enter Customer Name, dial:
• 5401-Customer Name-#*
• To clear the Customer Name, dial:
• 5401-#*
• To select Customer Profile, dial:
• 5315-Code
Where, Code is
1 for Enterprise Mode
2 for Hotel Mode
Default: Enterprise Mode.
• To enable/disable On-site Configuration flag, dial:
• 2108-Flag
Where, flag is
1 for Enable
0 for Disable
Default: Disable.
• To assign Voice Mail Group Destination, dial:
• 4601-Routing Group Number
Where, Routing Group Number is from 01 to 96.
Default: 96.
• To enable/disable External Voice Mail RTC Synchronization, dial:
• 3812-Flag
Where,
Flag is
1 for Enable
0 for Disable
Default: Disable
• To change Station Name Pattern, dial:
• 3615-Station Name Pattern Code
Where,
Station Name Pattern Code is
1 for Title <space> First Name <space> Name
2 for First Name only
3 for Name only
4 for First Name <space> Name
5 for Title<space>First Name
6 for Title<space>Name
Default: Name only
• To enable/disable Global Hold flag, dial
• 5318-Code
Where,
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1575
Code is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Disable
• To enable/disable Log Internal Calls in Missed Calls, dial:
• 5361-Code
Where,
Code is
0 for Disable (Do not store internal calls in "Missed Calls" log)
1 for Enable (Store internal calls in "Missed Calls" log)
Default: Enable.
To enable/disable Log Internal Calls in Answered Calls, dial:
• 5362-Code
Where,
Code is
0 for Disable (Do not store internal calls in "Answered" log)
1 for Enable (Store internal calls in "Answered Calls" log)
Default: Enabled.
To enable/disable Log Internal Calls in Dialed Calls, dial:
• 5363-Code
Where,
Code is
0 for Disable (Do not store internal calls in "Dialed Calls" log)
1 for Enable (Store internal calls in "Dialed Calls" log)
Default: Enabled.
• To select the type of music to be played when stations are kept on hold, dial:
• 3552-Code
Where,
Code is
1 for Voice Module 01
2 for Analog Input Port
Default: 1.
• To select the type of music to be played when trunks are kept on hold, dial:
• 3553-Code
Where,
Code is
1 for Voice Module 01
2 for Analog Input Port
Default: 1.
If all the extensions of the Routing Group you selected for Alarm Notification type are busy, the extension
user will be played MoH (MoH can be Voice Module 01 or through Analog Input Port).
• To program the end of dialing digit, dial:
• 5313-End of Dialing Digit
Where,
End of Dialing Digit may be either * (star/asterisk) or # (hash/pound).
Default: #
1576 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• To enable/disable OFF Hook Alert flag, dial:
• 5333-Code
Where, Code is
1 for Enable
2 for Disable
Default: Enable
• To set the system in Day/Night mode, dial:
• 4801-Code
Where,
Code is from 1 to 3.
1 is for Day Mode
2 is for Night Mode
3 is for Operate system as per Time Table.
• To enable/disable emergency reporting, dial:
• 5110-Code
Where,
Code is 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable.
Default: Enable
• To enable/disable Replace '+' from CLI, dial:
• 5334-Code
Where,
Code is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable.
Default: Disable
• To configure number string to be used as Replacement for ‘+’ in CLI, dial:
• 5335-Replacement string
Where,
Replacement string is any digit string of up to a maximum of 6 digits, from 0 to 9. Default: blank.
• To enable/disable the Disconnect when Caller Doesn't Dial a Digit' flag, dial:
• 5338-Code
Where, Code is
0 for Disable.
1 for Enable
Default: Disable.
• To enable/disable the Disconnect DID call when Dialed Number Busy, dial:
• 5336-Code
Where, Code is
0 for Disable.
1 for Enable
Default: Disable.
• To enable/disable Disconnect DID Call, when Dialed Number does Not Reply, dial:
• 5337-Code
Where, Code is
0 for Disable.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1577
1 for Enable
Default: Disable
To enable/disable Beep when Conference/Dial-In Conference, Raid starts, dial:
• 5331-Flag
Where,
Flag is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Enable
• To enable/disable Beep when Call Taping and Conversation Recording starts, dial:
• 5332-Flag
Where,
Flag is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Enable
• To disable/enable Feature Tone in place of Dial Tone when Call Forward is set, dial:
• 5312-Feature Tone Flag
Where,
Feature Tone Flag is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Enable
• To select Call Proceeding Tone Type - Multistage Dialing, dial:
• 5311-Call Proceeding Tone Type
Where,
Call Proceeding Tone Type is
1 for Network Tone
2 for Pseudo Tone
3 for Silent
Default: Network Tone
• To select the Companding Algorithm, dial:
• 5322-Companding type
Where
Companding type is
1 is for A-Law
2 is for µ-Law:
Default: A-Law.
• To select a Language for SE, SA and Front Desk User Web Interface, dial:
• 5319-Language
Where,
Language is
1 for English
2 for French
3 for German
4 for Spanish
5 for Portuguese
1578 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Default: English (country specific)
• To enable/disable Form Feed:
• 5321-Code
Where,
Code is
0 for Disable Form Feed.
1 for Enable Form Feed.
Default: Enable Form feed.
• To program minimum number of digits received in CLI to consider as call from the Public Network, dial:
• 5314-Minimum Caller ID Digits
Where,
Minimum Caller ID Digits is from 01 to 16.
Default:8
• To assign Mailbox for Call Taping, dial:
• 4701-Station Type-Station Port
Where,
Station Type is
01 for SLT
02 for DKP
34 for SIP
Station Port is
Software Port Number of SLT from 001 to 512.
Software Port Number of the DKP from 001 to 128.
Software Port Number of the SIP Extension from 001 to 999.
• To enable/disable 'Display Presence Status during Call on DKP', dial:
• 5320-Flag
Where,
Flag is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Disable.
• To enable/disable Programming through COM Port, dial:
• Dial 2102-Code
Where,
Code is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Disable.
• To select COM Port for programming, dial:
• Dial 2101-Code
Where,
Code is
0 for None
1 for COM Port 1
2 for COM Port 2
If your system is ETERNITY GE 6S, GE12S, PE6S or PE3SP which have a single COM Port, select
COM1.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1579
• To define the BITE Card Slot, dial:
• 5366-1-Slot Number
Where,
Slot Number is the number of the slot in which the BITE Card is installed, from 00 to 16.
Default: 00.
• To enable/disable Watch Dog function, dial:
• 5309-Flag
Where,
Flag is
1 for Enable
0 for Disable
• To set the ON/OFF time of the ETERNITY ME Master Card buzzer, dial:
• 5308-On Timer-Off Timer
Where,
ON Timer and OFF Timer are 0000 to 9999 milliseconds.
Incoming CLI Modification
• To enable/disable Incoming CLI Modification, dial:
• 5367-Flag
Where,
Flag is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Disabled
• To program the Country Code, dial:
• 5368-Country Code
Where,
Country Code is a number string up to 5 digits. The number string may consist of numbers from 00000
and 99999.
Default: 91 (India)
Program the Country Code without any prefix. For example, if you want to program USA as Country
Code, enter ‘1’ only (without the prefix ‘00’ or ‘+’)
• To program the Area Code, dial:
• 5369-Area Code
Where,
Area Code is a number string up to 5 digits. The number string may consist of numbers from 00000 and
99999.
Default: 265 (Evacuator)
Program the Area Code without any prefix. For example, if you want to program Mumbo as Area Code,
enter ‘22’ only (without the prefix ‘0’)
• To program International Call Prefix, dial:
• 5370-International Call Prefix
Where,
International Call Prefix is a number string up to 5 digits. The number string may consist of numbers
from 00000 and 99999.
1580 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Default: 00
• To program National Call Prefix, dial:
• 5371-National Call Prefix
Where,
National Call Prefix is a number string up to 5 digits. The number string may consist of numbers from
00000 and 99999.
Default: 0
• To enable/disable ‘Area Code required to make local calls?’, dial:
• 5372-Code
Where,
Code is
1 for No (Area Code is not required)
2 for Yes (Area Code is required)
3 for Yes (Area Code with Prefix required)
Default: 1
• To program Prefix Digits to Area Code for Local Calls, dial:
• 5373-Prefix Digits
Where,
Prefix Digits to Area Code is a number string up to 5 digits. The number string may consist of numbers
from 00000 and 99999.
Default: Blank
Clock Synchronization
• To select clock source, dial:
• 5341-Clock Source Index-Port Type-Port Offset
Where,
Clock Source Index is 1 to 4.’
Port Offset is 01 to 32.
Clock Source Index is from 1 to 4.
Port Type Meaning Port Offset
05 T1E1 1-8
04 BRI 01-32
00 Null 000
0 is a valid port to follow internal clock.
Default:
Clock Source Index Port Type-Port Offset
1 T1E1-1
2 T1E1-2
3 T1E1-3
4 T1E1-4
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1581
• To select System Clock Synchronization, dial:
• 5342-System Clock Synchronization
Where,
System Clock Synchronization from 1 to 4.
System Clock Synchronization Meaning
1 8 KHz Derived
2 8 KHz
3 2.048 MHz
4 1.54 MHz
Default: 2.048 MHz for India and other countries except USA. For USA: 1.54 MHz.
• To select PLL Locking Mode, dial:
• 5343-PLL Locking Mode
Where,
PLL Locking Mode is
1 for Fast
2 for Slow
Default: Slow.
DND Text Message
• To customize DND Text message, dial:
• 1502-Text Message Number-Text Message
Where,
Text Message Number is from 1 to 9. Default messages:
Message # DND Message
1 Do Not Disturb
2 Unavailable
3 In Meeting
4 In Conference
5 Try on Mobile
6 On Vacation
On Business
7
Trip
8 Out of Office
9 With a Guest
Text Message is a string of 16 alphabets or alphanumeric characters.
If the new message has less than characters 16 terminate the string with #*.
For example: to program 'Out for Lunch' as the second DND Text Message, dial 1502-2- Out for
Lunch -#*
1582 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• To clear a Text Message, dial:
• 1502-Text Message Number-#*.
• To restore default DND text messages, dial:
• 1501
Publish Message
You can customize Publish Messages using Jeeves only.
Digital Output Port (DOP)
• To select the contact type for the DOP, dial:
• 5001-1-DOP-Normal Contact Type
• 5001-2-DOP-DOP- Normal Contact Type
• 5001-*- Normal Contact Type
Where,
DOP is from 1 to 3.
Contact type is
0 for DOP Normally Open.
1 for DOP Normally Closed.
Digital Input Port (DIP)
• To enable/disable DIP, dial:
• 4901-1-Code
Where,
Code is
0 for Disable DIP
1 for Enable DIP
Default: DIP is Disabled.
• To set DIP as High/Low, dial:
• 4902-1-Code
Where,
Code is
0 for DIP as Low
1 for DIP as High
Default: High.
• To set the Minimum Instigation Time, dial:
• 4903-1-Minimum Instigation Time
Where,
Minimum Instigation Time is from 01 to 99 seconds.
Default: 01 seconds.
Slave Card's Software Management
You can downgrade the software of the cards of ETERNITY only using Jeeves.
• Exit SE mode.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1583
System Timers and Counts
What’s this?
Several features of the ETERNITY are based on Timers and Counts. For example, how long and how many times
an extension should ring when Message Wait is set, or how long the Busy Tone, the Ring Back Tone, or the Error
Tone should be played to an extension. ETERNITY allows you to configure most of these Timers and Counts to suit
your requirement. Listed below are the Timers and Counts related to the various features and facilities, along with a
brief description and default value of each.
Auto Redial
Name Description Range Default
Auto Redial - Dial Tone The time for which the system waits to sense the 0 to 255 3 seconds
Wait Timer (sec.) dial tone from the PSTN/CO Network.
Auto Redial - Ring Back The time for which system waits to sense the 0 to 255 60 seconds
Tone Wait Timer (sec.) Ring Back Tone from the PSTN/CO Network
after dialing the requested number.
Auto Redial - Ring The time for which the extension that has 0 to 255 45 seconds
Timer (sec.) requested Auto Redial should ring.
Auto Redial - Normal The time interval between auto redial attempts 0 to 255 45 seconds
Timer (sec.) when Auto Redial ‘Normal’ is set.
Auto Redial - Normal The number of auto redial attempts the system will 0 to 255 5 tries
Count make when Auto Redial ‘Normal’ is set.
Auto Redial - Priority The time interval between auto redial attempts 0 to 255 10 seconds
Timer (sec.) when Auto Redial ‘Priority’ is set.
Auto Redial - Priority The number of auto redial attempts the system will 0 to 255 20 attempts
Count make when an extension having the feature Auto
Redial Priority in its Class of Service uses Auto
Redial ‘Priority’.
Call Progress Tones
Name Description Range Default
Dial Tone Timer (sec.) The time for which the system plays the Dial tone. 2 to 255 7 seconds
Ring Back Tone Timer The time for which the system plays the Ring Back 1 to 255 45 seconds
(sec.) Tone.
Busy Tone Timer (sec.) The time for which the system plays the Busy Tone. 1 to 255 7 seconds
Error Tone Timer (sec.) The time for which the system plays the Error Tone. 1 to 255 30 seconds
Feature Confirmation The time for which the system plays the 1 to 255 7 seconds
Tone Timer (sec.) Confirmation Tone when a feature is set or
canceled.
1584 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Name Description Range Default
Programming Tone The time for which the system plays the 2 to 255 15 seconds
Timer (sec.) Programming Tone when you successfully enter the
SE mode from a phone.
Programming Error The time for which the system plays the Error Tone 1 to 255 3 seconds
Tone Timer (sec.) when you have entered an invalid command string
while configuring a feature from a phone.
Programming The time for which the system plays the 1 to 255 3 seconds
Confirmation Tone Confirmation Tone when a system command is
Timer (sec.) successfully executed when configuring the system
from a phone.
Tone Demo Timer (sec.) The time for which the system plays Call Progress 1 to 255 30 seconds
Tone when you are demonstrating the tone.
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Name Description Range Default
DID Inactivity Timer The time after which the system releases the 0 to 255 60 seconds
(sec.) trunk, if the caller has not dialed any digit, or
when a DID or Trunk Auto Answer call is not
answered by the landing destination.
DID Answer Wait Timer The time for which the system waits before 0 to 255 5 seconds
(sec.) answering a DID call.
DID Music Timer (sec.) The time for which the system plays music after 0 to 255 5seconds
answering the DID call.
DID Beeps Timer (sec.) The time for which the system plays beeps to the 0 to 255 10 seconds
caller to prompt the caller to dial the desired
extension number.
DID Ring Timer (sec.) The time for which the system rings on the 0 to 255 30 seconds
landing destination extension in a DID call.
DID Busy Tone Timer In a DID call, the time for which the system plays 0 to 255 15 seconds
(sec.) Busy Tone, if the dialed extension is busy.
DID Error Tone Timer In a DID call, the time for which the system plays 0 to 255 5 seconds
(sec.) Error Tone to the caller, if the caller has dialed an
invalid code.
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Name Description Range Default
DISA Idle State Timer In a DISA PIN Authentication call, the time for which 0 to 255 20 seconds
(sec.) the system waits for the caller to go Off-hook after
entering DISA. If the caller does not go Off-hook
within this timer, the system releases the call.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1585
Name Description Range Default
DISA Inactivity Timer In a DISA call, the time for which the system waits 0 to 255 2 minutes
(min.) for the caller to dial digits. If the caller does not dial
any digit within this timer, the system disconnects
the call. This timer is applicable only for Analog
Trunks.
Other Features
Name Description Range Default
Auto Call Back Ring The time for which the extension requesting the 1 to 255 30 seconds
Timer (sec.) Auto Call Back and the destination extension will
ring.
Interrupt Request Timer The time for which the extension on which the 1 to 255 45 seconds
(sec.) Interrupt Request is made will get the beeps.
Barge-In Timer (sec.) The time after which the extension that has 1 to 255 10 seconds
activated Barge-In gets connected to the
extension which is barged in.
Trunk Reservation The time for which a trunk remains reserved for 1 to 255 10 minutes
Timer (min.) the extension that has reserved the trunk.
Transfer while Ringing When an extension transfers a call to another 1 to 255 30 seconds
Timer (sec.) extension after it starts ringing, this is the time for
which the system will wait for the transfer target
extension to answer the call. If the transfer target
does not answer the call within this timer, the call
is returned to the transferror.
Transfer on Busy Timer When a call is transferred to a Busy extension, 1 to 255 30 seconds
(sec.) this is the time for which beeps are played on the
transfer target extension.
Trunk to Trunk Inactivity In a Trunk-to-Trunk call, this is the time for which 1 to 255 2 seconds
Timer (sec.) the system waits after call maturity for any digit to
be dialed. If no digit is dialed within this timer, the
system drops the call.
Call Park Timer (sec.) The time after which the call comes back to the 2 to 255 45 seconds
extension that has parked the call.
Call Park Release Timer The time after which the parked call gets 1 to 255 3 minutes
(min.) disconnected.
Live Call Screening The time for which the speaker of the DKP/ 1 to 255 10 seconds
(sec.) Extended IP Phone extension remains ON while
the message from the caller is being recorded.
Message Wait Ring It is the Number of times the extension should 0 to 255 10 attempts
Count ring after the Message Wait is set on an
extension. This count is applicable only when
‘Ring’ is selected as the Message Wait
Notification type for the extension.
1586 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Name Description Range Default
Message Wait Ring The time for which the extension rings to indicate 1 to 255 30 seconds
Timer (sec.) that Message Wait is set for the extension. This
timer is applicable only when ‘Ring’ is selected as
the Message Wait Notification type for the
extension.
Message Wait Ring The time after which the extension should ring 1 to 255 30 minutes
Interval Timer (min.) again to indicate Message Wait is set. This timer
is applicable only when ‘Ring’ is selected as the
Message Wait Notification type for the extension.
Conflict Dialing Timer The time for which the system waits for the 1 to 255 2 seconds
(sec.) extension user to dial the next digit to resolve
conflicting access codes dialed by the extension
user.
Station - Inter Digit Wait The time for which the system waits for the 2 to 255 7 seconds
Timer (sec.) extension user to dial the next digit. On the expiry of
this timer, the system considers it as the end of
number dialing.
Trunk - First Digit Wait the time for which the system waits for the 1 to 255 25 seconds
Timer (sec.) extension user to dial the first digit, after grabbing
the trunk.
Trunk - Inter Digit Wait When an extension user has grabbed the trunk and 1 to 255 3 seconds
Timer (sec.) is dialing a number, the system waits for the Trunk-
Inter-Digit wait timer for the extension user to dial
the next digit. On the expiry of this timer, the system
considers it as end of number dialing and proceeds
with the call.
Call Hold Retrieval This is the time for which a call put on Global 1 to 999 60 seconds
Timer (sec.) Hold remains connected in the system. If the call
put on Global Hold is not retrieved within this
timer, the call is returned to the DKP/Extended IP
Phone which put it on hold.
RCOC Record Delete This is the time for which the record of the 1 to 999 999 seconds
Timer (min.) outgoing call is stored in the RCOC Table. The
timer is activated whenever a record is stored in
the RCOC table. At the end of this timer, the
system deletes this record from the table.
Release Conference if This is the time for which the system will wait for 1 to 255 2 minutes
Idle for more than (min.) participants of a Dial-In Conference to withdraw or
release themselves from the conference, one-by-
one. On the expiry of this timer, the system releases
the Dial-In Conference and frees the resource
occupied by this conference in the conferencing
circuit.
Watchdog Refresh Wait This is the time within which the system should 1 to 255 60 seconds
Timer (sec.) signal to the Watchdog. If the system does not send
signal to the Watchdog within this Timer, the
watchdog device will restart ETERNITY.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1587
How to configure
Configuring Timers and Counts using Jeeves
• Log into Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Scroll to and click System Timers and Counts.
The Timers and Counts on this page are arranged by the name of the feature or function these are related
to.
• Change the value of the Timer or Count by entering the desired duration or count in the respective fields.
• Click Submit to save settings.
• You may log out.
1588 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Configuring Timers and Counts using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
Auto Redial
To set Auto Redial Normal - Timer, dial:
• 1704-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 000 to 255.
To set Auto Redial Normal - Count, dial:
• 1705-Count
Where,
Count is from 000 to 255.
To set Auto Redial - Priority, dial:
• 1706-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 000 to 255.
To set Auto Redial - Count, dial:
• 1707-Count
Where,
Count is from 000 to 255.
To change Auto Redial Dial Tone Wait Timer, dial:
• 1701-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 000 to 255 seconds.
Do not set this timer to less than 2 seconds.
To change Auto Redial RBT Wait Timer, dial:
• 1702-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 000 to 255 seconds.
Do not set this timer to less than 2 seconds.
To change Redial Ring Timer, dial:
• 1703-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 000 to 255 seconds.
Do not set this timer to less than 2 seconds.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1589
Call Progress Tones
To set Dial Tone Timer, dial:
• 3502-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 002 to 255.
Default: 007 seconds
To set Ring Back Tone Timer, dial:
• 3503-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255 seconds.
Default: 045 seconds.
To set Busy Tone Timer, dial:
• 3504-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255 seconds.
Default: 007 seconds.
To set Error Tone Timer, dial:
• 3505-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255 seconds.
Default: 030 seconds.
To set Confirmation Tone Timer, dial:
• 3506-Seconds to program the Confirmation Tone Timer.
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255 seconds.
Default: 007 seconds.
To set Programming Confirmation Tone Timer, dial:
• 3509-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255 seconds.
Default: 003 seconds.
To set Programming Error Tone Timer, dial:
• 3508-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255 seconds.
Default: 003 seconds.
To set Tone Demo Timer201, dial:
• 3542-Seconds.
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255.
Default: 030 seconds.
201. Time for which the system demonstrates the tone/ring to the user.
1590 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
DID
To set DID Inactivity Timer, dial:
• 2411-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255 seconds.
Default: 060 seconds.
To set DID Answer Wait Timer, dial:
• 2412-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255 seconds.
Default: 005 seconds.
To set DID Music Timer, dial:
• 2413-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255 seconds.
Default: 005 seconds.
To set DID Beeps Timer, dial:
• 2414-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255 seconds.
Default: 010 seconds.
To set DID Ring Timer, dial:
• 2415-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255 seconds.
Default: 030 seconds.
To set DID Busy Tone Timer, dial:
• 2416-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255 seconds.
Default: 015 seconds.
To set DID Error Tone Timer, dial:
• 2417-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255 seconds.
Default: 005 seconds.
DISA
To set DISA Idle State Timer, dial:
• 2420-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255 seconds.
Default: 020 seconds.
To set DISA Inactivity Timer, dial:
• 2421-Minutes
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1591
Where,
Minutes is from 001 to 255 minutes.
Default: 002 minutes.
Other Features
To set Auto Call Back Ring Timer, dial:
• 3801-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255 seconds.
Default: 030 seconds.
To set Interrupt Request Timer, dial:
• 3802-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is 001 to 255 seconds.
Default: 045 seconds.
To set Barge-In Timer, dial:
• 3803-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is 001 to 255 seconds.
Default: 010 seconds.
To set Trunk Reservation Timer, dial:
• 3804-Minutes
Where,
Minutes is 001 to 255 seconds.
Default: 010 minutes.
To set Transfer While Ringing Timer, dial:
• 3806-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255 seconds.
Default: 030
To set Transfer on Busy Timer, dial:
• 3807-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255 seconds.
Default: 030
To set the Trunk-to-Trunk Inactivity Timer, dial:
• 3808-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255 seconds.
Default: 090 seconds.
To set Call Park Timer, dial:
• 3809-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 002 to 255 seconds.
Default: 045 seconds.
1592 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To set Call Park Release Timer, dial:
• 3810-Minutes
Where,
Minutes is from 001 to 255 minutes.
Default: 003 minutes.
To set Live Call Screening Timer, dial:
• 3811-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255 seconds.
Default: 010 seconds.
To set Message Wait Ring Count, dial:
• 4403-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255 seconds.
Default: 010.
To set Message Wait Ring Timer, dial:
• 4404-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255 seconds.
Default: 030 seconds.
To set Message Wait Ring Interval, dial:
• 4405-Minutes
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255 minutes.
Default: 030 minutes.
To set Conflict Dialing Timer, dial:
• 5351-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255 seconds.
Default: 002 seconds.
To set Station - Inter Digit Wait Timer, dial:
• 5352-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255 seconds.
Default: 007 seconds.
To set Station - Inter Digit Wait Timer, dial:
• 5352-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255 seconds.
Default: 007 seconds.
To set Trunk - First Digit Wait Timer, dial:
• 5353-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255 seconds.
Default: 025 seconds.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1593
To set Trunk - Inter Digit Wait Timer, dial:
• 5354-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255 seconds.
Default: 003 seconds.
To set Call Hold Retrieval Timer, dial:
• 3805-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 001-999 Seconds.
Default: 060 seconds.
To set the RCOC Record Delete Timer, dial:
• Dial 3521-Minutes
Where,
Minutes are from 001 to 999
Default: 999 minutes.
To set Release Conference if idle for more than Timer, dial:
• 5355-Minutes
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255 minutes.
Default: 002 minutes.
To set Watch Dog Refresh Wait Timer, dial:
• 5316-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255 minutes.
Default: 060 seconds.
• Exit SE mode.
1594 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
System Security
What’s this?
Access to the Eternity is secured at three levels by way of a password:
• at the System Engineer Level with the System Engineer (SE) password.
• at System Administrator Level with the System Administrator (SA) password.
• at the User Level with the User Password.
The System Engineer and the System Administrator passwords secure the system settings from access and
alteration by unauthorized persons (anyone other than the System Engineer and the System Administrator), thus
preventing possible misuse of the features and facilities.
System Engineer (SE) Password
The SE password is 4-digit secret code, which may be a combination of any four digits, from 0 to 9. The default SE
Password is 1234, which can be changed from Jeeves as well as by dialing a command string.
• The SE password is stored in the Master Card/CPU Card. If you forget the SE password, the only way
to restore the default SE password is to change the Jumper settings of the Master Card/CPU card.
• You are advised to record and store the SE password at a safe place, where it can be accessed by you
(the System Engineer) to avoid the inconvenience of restoring the default SE password.
Changing SE Password using Jeeves
• Log in to Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the 'Change SE P/w' link.
• Enter the current SE password as Old SE Password. If you have not changed the default SE password
1234, enter this code.
• Enter the New SE password. It may be any combination of 4 digits. Valid digits: 0 to 9.
• Enter the new SE password again to Confirm New Password.
• Click Submit button to save your new password.
• You may log out of Jeeves
Changing SE Password using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
• Dial 5306-New SE Password
• Exit SE mode.
Forgot the SE Password?
If you have already changed the default SE-Password (1234) and are unable to recall or locate it, you must restore
the default SE password.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1595
Restoring Default SE Password
Restoring the Default SE Password requires you to change the Jumper Settings in the Master Card/CPU Card.
Follow the instructions given below for each model of ETERNITY.
ETERNITY ME
• Switch OFF the system.
• Remove the Master Card from the slot.
• Locate the Jumper J9 on the PCB of the Master Card.
• Change the position of the Jumper from BC to AB (i.e. from 'Normal' to 'Reset SE Password')
• Reinsert the Master Card into the slot.
• Switch ON the system and wait for 15 seconds.
• Switch OFF the system and remove the Master Card from the slot.
• Change the Jumper position from AB to the original position BC.
• Insert the Master Card back into the slot.
• Switch ON the system.
ETERNITY GE
• Remove the CPU Card from the slot.
• Locate Jumper J12 on the PCB of the CPU Card.
• Change the position of the Jumper from BC to AB (i.e. from 'Normal' to 'Reset SE Password')
• Reinsert the CPU Card into the slot.
• Switch ON the system and wait for 15 seconds.
• Switch OFF the system and remove the CPU Card from the slot.
• Change the Jumper position from AB to the original position BC.
• Insert the CPU Card back into the slot.
• Switch ON the system.
ETERNITY PE
• Remove the top cover of the enclosure.
• Locate and change the position of the Jumper from BC to AB. The Jumper numbers vary according to the
model you are using.
• On ETERNITY PE3SS change Jumper J10 from BC to AB position.
• On ETERNITY PE3SP change Jumper J10 from BC to AB position.
• On ETERNITY PE6SP change Jumper J13 from BC to AB position.
• Replace the cover of the enclosure.
• Switch ON the system and wait for 15 seconds.
• Switch OFF the system and remove the enclosure cover.
• Change the Jumper positions from AB to the original position BC.
• Replace the enclosure cover.
• Switch ON the system.
The default SE password will be restored to 1234. You can now enter the programming mode by dialing 1#91-
1234 (the default password). You can also change the SE password again using Jeeves or by dialing a
command as described above.
1596 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
If you change the default SE password (1234) again after you have reset SE Password (by changing the
Jumper on the Master Card/CPU card to AB position), the system will not store the new password, until
you change the Jumper back to the default BC position. So, make sure that you have recorded the new SE
password in a safe place, from where it can be retrieved. Change the Jumper back to the default BC
position.
System Administrator (SA) Password
The SA password too is a 4-digit code, which may be any combination of four digits between 0-9. The default SA
password is 1111, which can be changed from the SA mode of Jeeves and by dialing commands from a telephone.
Changing SA Password using Jeeves
• Log in to Jeeves as System Administrator.
• Click Miscellaneous Entries.
• Click SA Options.
• Enter the Current SA password. If you have not changed the default SA password 1111, enter this code.
• Enter the New SA password. It may be any combination of 4 digits. Valid digits 0 to 9.
• Click Submit button to save your new SA password.
• You may log out of Jeeves.
Changing SA Password using a Telephone
• Enter SA mode from a DKP/SLT.
• Dial 1072-015-New SA Password
• Exit SA mode.
Forgot the SA Password?
In case the System Administrator has forgotten the password, a new password can be issued by the System
Engineer only.
The System Engineer can assign a new SA password from Jeeves or by dialing a command from a telephone.
To issue a new SA Password from Jeeves,
• Log in to Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click Change SA P/w.
• Enter New SA Password.
• Click Submit to save new SA password.
• You may log out of Jeeves.
:
To issue a new SA Password using a Telephone,
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
• Dial 5310-New SA Password.
• Exit SE mode.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1597
User Password
Extension Users can secure their respective stations/extensions from unauthorized use with a password unique to
each extension. The User password too is a combination of any four digits, from 0 to 9. The default User Password
is 1111, which each user can change from their respective extensions. Refer the topic “User Password” to know
more.
Forgot the User Password?
If an extension user forgets the User Password, a new password can be issued to the extension user by the
System Administrator using Jeeves or by dialing a command.
To issue a new User password using Jeeves,
• Log in to Jeeves as System Administrator.
• Click Miscellaneous Entries.
• Click Station Properties.
• Now, Search Station, by entering either extension number as Station Number, or by entering the name
of the extension as Station Name.
• Click Submit.
• The page of the desired extension will appear.
• Enter the new User Password in the field Change User Password to. The User Password may be a
combination of 4 digits. Valid digits: 0 to 9.
• Click Submit button to save your new SA password.
• You may log out of Jeeves.
To issue a new User password using a telephone,
• Enter SA mode from a DKP/SLT.
• Dial 1072-012-Extension Number-New User Password
• Exit SA mode.
Additional Security to Extension Users
It is also possible to secure unattended extensions. This may be necessary when extension users forget to lock
their extensions and are away from their desks. In such situations, the System Administrator can protect the
extension from unauthorized access and use by:
a. locking the Keypad the extension phone; possible only on DKP extensions.
b. setting the User Status for the extension as "Absent"; possible on both DKP and SLT extensions. Read the
feature description “User Absent/Present” to know more.
The System Administration can do this lock the keypad of DKP extensions and set DKP and SLT extension users
as ‘Absent’ using Jeeves and by dialing commands from a telephone.
To secure an extension from Jeeves,
• Log in to Jeeves as System Administrator.
• Click Miscellaneous Entries.
• Click Station Properties.
• Now, Search Station, by entering either extension number as Station Number, or by entering the name
of the extension as Station Name.
1598 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Click Submit.
• The page of the desired extension will appear.
• Change user status by selecting the option Absent for the parameter Presence. When you want to
change user status again to present, select Present.
• Select the option Lock for the parameter Keypad. This parameter will be configurable only if the selected
extension is a DKP. When you want to remove keypad lock, select Unlock.
• Click Submit button.
• Log out of Jeeves.
To secure an extension using a telephone,
• Enter SA mode from a DKP/SLT.
• Dial 1072-013-Extension Number-1 to lock keypad of a DKP extension.
• Dial 1072-013-Extension Number-0 to unlock keypad of a DKP extension.
• Dial 1072-014-Extension Number-0 to change user status to Absent.
• Dial 1072-014-Extension Number-1 to change user status to Present.
• Exit SA mode.
• Extension users can also set their status as 'Absent' or 'Present' from their respective extension
phones. Refer “User Absent/Present”).
• DKP extension users can also lock the keypad of their phones from the DKP Phone Menu. Refer
“Digital Key Phone-Operation” for instructions on navigating the phone menu.
• It is also possible to lock/unlock the DKP keypad and set the user extension status as 'Absent'/'Present'
from a remote location using “Direct Inward System Access (DISA)”.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1599
T1 Maintenance
What’s this?
• The T1 system format logs which are useful for maintenance purpose of the PBX, consist of:
• Error Counts (Performance Statistics or T1-Statistics)
• Alarms
• The ETERNITY supports T1-Statistics and Alarm-logs. This chapter explains both Statistics and Alarms
and ‘Loop Back Tests’ for T1.
• The T1 Maintenance consists of Error Counts (Performance Statistics), Alarms and Loop Back Test. This
is as per standards like G.704, G.706 and G.732. G.775 is also considered for detection of defect
conditions like LOS, LOF, AIS, etc. (Loss of Signal, Loss of Frames, Alarm Indication Signal).
• Digital line can have transmission errors. All the errors will not generate an Alarm. Few severe errors will
generate Alarms. However, all the errors will be logged in the System Fault Log.
• The SNIIC (subscriber Network interface integrated circuit) is used to interface T1 line to ETERNITY. It
supports error counters listed in the table given below. Each error detected by the ETERNITY ME Card
T1E1PRI/port will be sent to the system in form of an event.
• The system will count these errors and prepare a statistical record if the condition matches.
For Example:
Severely Errored Seconds Count is incremented when one OOF event reaches the master or more than 320
framing errors reach the master. This statistical record is updated and maintained by the master.
Performance Statistics
Error Counters supported by SNIIC
• Framing Bit Error Counter: This counter is incremented on receipt of any error in the framing pattern. In
D4, FS errors are counted. (FS errors are counted if enabled). In ESF, any error in the 001011 framing
pattern increments this counter.
• Out of Frame Counter: Out of Frame is the occurrence of a particular density of framing error events. For
D4 framing, OOF is declared when the receiver detects two or more framing errors within 0.75ms or two or
more errors out of five or fewer consecutive framing bits. It ends when there are fewer than two frame bit
errors within 0.75ms period. For ECF framing, OOF is declared when the receiver detects two or more
errors out of five or fewer consecutive framing bits. It ends when there are fewer than two frame bit errors
within 3ms period.
• CRC-6 Error Counter: This counter is incremented when the received frame has CRC-6 errors. This is
applicable for ECF framing only.
• Line Code Violation Error Counter: This counter is incremented when a bipolar violation error occurs or
when excessive zeroes event occurs.
1600 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Excessive Zeroes Error Event: For AMI-coded signal, it is an occurrence of seven contiguous zeroes.
• Positive Slip Counter: This counter is incremented every time a positive slip occurs.
• Negative Slip Counter: This counter is incremented every time a negative slip occurs.
Statistical Record: (T1 Statistics)
Following parameters form the statistical record. This can be generated in the form of a report as shown below:
Performance Parameter No. of Seconds/Count
Errored Seconds
Bursty Errored Seconds
Severely Errored Seconds
Severely Framing Seconds
Unavailable Seconds
Positive Slip Seconds
Negative Slip Seconds
Loss of Frame Count
Line Errored Seconds
Excessive Zeroes Error Count
CRC-6 Error Count
Errored Seconds
For D4, it is defined as a second with one of the following:
• One or more OOF defect.
• One or more slip events (positive or negative).
• A detected AIS defect.
• Presence of Bipolar violation.
For ESF, it is a second with one of the following:
• One or more CRC error.
• One or more OOF defect.
• One or more slip events (positive or negative).
• A detected AIS defect.
Errored seconds are not incremented during Unavailable seconds.
Bursty Errored Seconds
• It is defined as a second in which more than one but less than 320 framing errors (Frame sync. error in D4
and CRC error in ESF) have occurred but with:
• No Severely Errored Frame defect.
• No AIS defect.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1601
• No Slip defects.
• No Out of frame (OOF) condition detected.
Errored seconds are not incremented during Unavailable seconds.
Severely Errored Seconds (SES)
For D4 signals-It is defined as a count of one seconds interval with one of the following:
• Framing error events.
• An OOF defect.
• 1544 or more Line Code violation errors.
For ESF signals-It is a count of one second interval with one of the following:
• 320 or more CRC events (i.e. Framing errors).
• One or more OOF defects.
• A detected AIS defect.
Slip defects are not counted in SES. Also this is not incremented during an Unavailable second. It is defined
as a second in which either an OOF has occurred or 320 or more framing errors have occurred.
Severely Errored Framing Seconds (SEFS)
• It is a second with either one or more OOF defects or a detected AIS defect.
Unavailable Seconds
• It is defined as a second for which T1 service is unavailable. An unavailable state is declared at the onset
of 10 consecutive severely errored seconds and is cleared on onset of 10 consecutive seconds with no
severely errored seconds.
Positive Slip Seconds
• It is defined as a second for which a frame is repeated to account for frequency drift between ETERNITY
and the network.
Negative Slip Seconds
• It is defined as a second for which a frame is deleted to account for frequency drift between ETERNITY
and the network.
Loss of Frame Count
• Loss of Frame is declared after 2.5 seconds of continuous loss of signal or OOF. LOF is cleared after 10
seconds of continuous no loss of signal or OOF.
Line Errored Seconds
• A second in which one or more Line Code Violation error events were detected.
1602 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Excessive Zeroes Error Count
This counter is incremented when excessive zeroes are received on the line or when line code violation error
occurs.
CRC-6 Error Count
• This counter is incremented when a CRC-6 Error is detected.
Parameters of Facility Data Link (FDL):
• FDL is used for communicating general maintenance information or for transmitting user defined
information within the T1 link. General maintenance information is in the form of Performance Message
Report which is generated by the ETERNITY ME Card T1E1PRI and depending upon the T1 FDL
Protocol, the Performance Message Report is sent every second or on request.
How to configure
The commands explained below should be referred as:
To program a single port: XXXX-1
To program a range of ports: XXXX-2
To program all the ports: XXXX-*
T1 FDL
T1 FDL can be enabled/disabled. This parameter is applicable only if Framing = ESF. If the Network (Public or
Private) to which the ETERNITY is connected does not support FDL then T1 FDL will be disabled.
Use following command to enable/disable T1 FDL on a T1E1PRI port:
6164-1-T1E1PRI-T1 FDL
6164-2-T1E1PRI-T1E1PRI-T1 FDL
6164-*-T1 FDL
Where,
T1E1PRI is from 1 to 8.
T1 FDL Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
By default, the T1 FDL is disabled.
T1 FDL Protocol
ETERNITY will support both the protocols of reporting the performance monitoring. This parameter is applicable
only if T1 FDL is enabled and Framing = ESF. This parameter will match the protocol expected by the other end of
the link.
Use following command to program the T1 FDL Protocol for a T1E1PRI port:
6165-1-T1E1PRI-T1 FDL Protocol
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1603
6165-2-T1E1PRI-T1E1PRI-T1 FDL Protocol
6165-*-T1 FDL Protocol
Where,
T1E1PRI is from 1 to 8.
T1 FDL Protocol Meaning
0 Disable
1 AT&T 54016
2 ANSI T1.403
By default, the T1 FDL Protocol is ANSI T1.403.
ANSI T1.403
• As per this standard, the receiving equipment transmits a performance report message (PRM) each
second over the FDL. This PRM is not sent to any specific remote location, but is broadcast so that any
PRM receiving device on the T1 line can intercept the message.
• The PRM contains error information pertaining to only the previous 4 seconds.
• It is the responsibility of the PRM receiver to accumulate the information and store it for 24 hours or the
time desired. This method allows performance monitoring points at different locations along the T1
network so that error localization is determined.
AT&T 54016
• As per this standard, the receiving equipment collects the data but does not transmit it on its own based on
time as done by ANSI. Instead, the transmitting end sends a request to the receiving end to transmit the
performance data.
• The Performance Message Report Format is as per ANSI T1.403.
Explanation of Alarms
• Alarms are indicated on the LEDs of the ETERNITY ME Card T1E1PRI. T1E1PRI card has four LEDs viz.
L1 to L4. L1 and L2 indicate alarms for T1E1PRI-1 whereas L3 and L4 indicate alarms for T1E1PRI-2.
• During normal conditions, the LED blinks green (1 sec. ON, 1 sec. OFF).
RED Alarm
• This alarm is generated if Loss of Signal persists for 2.5 seconds. This is indicated by flashing the LED
Red (500ms ON, 500ms OFF). The master logs this event in the System Fault Log. It is logged as System
Fault event 11 as RED Alarm <Slot No.> <Port No.> at HH:MM:SS.
It is cleared:
• When the signal is acquired back and persists for 10 seconds. The LED is turned OFF. The system logs
this event in the System Fault Log. For example, it is logged as a System Fault event viz. Fault index 12 as
RED Alarm Cleared <Slot No.> <Port No.> at HH:MM:SS.
1604 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
It is declared if:
• Received signal is more than 20 dB or 40 dB below nominal for at least 1ms.
• If 10 Consecutive zeroes are received.
• The interface SNIIC has settings for 32 consecutive zeroes or 192 consecutive zeroes. Hard program it to
32 consecutive zeroes.
• Loss of frame alignment occurs.
• When RED Alarm is declared, Yellow Alarm is sent to the far end within 12ms of detection of LOS.
YELLOW Alarm
• This Alarm is also known as Remote Alarm Indication. This Alarm is generated when Yellow Alarm is sent
by the far end (Yellow Alarm is sent by the far end to indicate that it has lost the incoming signal).
It is declared:
• When the signal corresponding to Yellow Alarm persists for 0.5 seconds. This is indicated by flashing the
LED Orange (500ms ON, 500ms OFF). The system logs this event in the System Fault Log. For example
it is logged as a System Fault event 13 as YELLOW Alarm <Slot No.> <Port No.> at HH:MM:SS.
It is cleared:
• When No Yellow Alarm signal persists for 0.5 seconds. The LED is turned OFF. The master logs this event
in the System Fault Log. For example it is logged as a System Fault event 14 as YELLOW Alarm Cleared
<Slot No.> <Port No.> at HH:MM: SS.
Remarks:
Yellow Alarm in D4 is declared if:
• More than 285 zeroes are received in bit position 2 of incoming DS0 channels during an integration period
of 1.5ms.
Yellow Alarm in D4 is cleared if:
• More than 3 ones are detected in bit position 2 of incoming DS0 channels during an integration period of
1.5ms.
Yellow Alarm in ESF is declared if:
• Reception of 0000000011111111 in seven or more code words out of ten.
Yellow Alarm in ESF is cleared if:
• Yellow Alarm signal pattern 0000000011111111 does not occur in 10 contiguous 16-bit signal pattern
intervals.
BLUE Alarm: (AIS)
• It is also known as Alarm Indication Signal (AIS).
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1605
• This alarm is generated when AIS persists for 2.5 seconds. This is indicated by flashing the LED Red (1
sec. ON, 1 sec. OFF). The system logs this event in the System Fault Log. Redefine System Fault event
06 as BLUE Alarm <Slot No.> <Port No.> at HH:MM:SS.
This alarm is cleared:
• When clearance of AIS is detected for continuous 10 seconds. The LED is turned OFF. The master logs
this event in the System Fault Log. For example it is logged as a System Fault event viz. Fault index 10 as
BLUE Alarm Cleared <Slot No.> <Port No.> at HH:MM:SS.
Blue Alarm-AIS is declared:
• If less than six zeroes are received on the incoming line data during a 3 ms interval. AIS is cleared if the
above condition does not exist for 3 ms. This interval of 3 ms could be upto maximum of 75ms.
When BLUE Alarm is declared, Yellow Alarm is sent to the far end.
LED Indication
• LED L1 and L2 are assigned to port 1 and LED L3 and L4 are assigned to port 2.
• LED L1 is used for Card Heart Bit as well as status of the PORT1.
Summary of above mentioned Alarm indications:
Table 1: Port1 Status
LED Port Status
L1 Green Steady Port1 Layer 1 is established
L1 Red Steady Port 1 Layer is not established
LOS-Red alarm detected
L1 Red flashing @500msec. Port 1 Layer is not established
LBFA-Loss of Basic Frame Alignment
L1 Red flashing @100msec. Port 1 Layer is not established
LMFA-Loss of Multi Frame Alignment
L1 Yellow Port 1 Layer is established
RAI-(Yellow Alarm) is detected
L2 Green Port 1 achieves CRC4 synchronization
L2 Yellow Port 1 does not achieve CRC4
synchronization
L2 Green Flashing Port 1 achieve CRC4 synchronization
@500msec.
AIS (Blue Alarm) is detected
L2 Yellow Flashing Port 1 does not achieves CRC4
@500msec. synchronization
AIS (Blue Alarm) is detected
1606 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Table 1: Port1 Status
LED Port Status
L1 & L2 Both OFF Port 1 is disabled
Table 2: Port2 Status:
LED Port Status
L3 Green Steady Port2 Layer 1 is established
L3 Red Steady Port 2 Layer is not established
LOS-Red alarm detected
L3 Red flashing @500msec. Port 2 Layer is not established
LBFA-Loss of Basic Frame Alignment
L3 Red flashing @100msec. Port 2 Layer is not established
LMFA-Loss of Multi Frame Alignment
L3 Yellow Steady Port 2 Layer is established
RAI-(Yellow Alarm) is detected
L4 Green Port 2 achieves CRC4 synchronization
L4 Yellow Port 2 does not achieve CRC4 synchronization
L4 Green Flashing @500msec. Port 2 achieve CRC4 synchronization
AIS (Blue Alarm) is detected
L4 Yellow Flashing @500msec. Port 2 does not achieves CRC4 synchronization
AIS (Blue Alarm) is detected
L3 & L4 Both OFF Port 2 is disabled
LED L1 is used for both Port 1 status and System Heart Bit. So in case LED is flashing, it will flash for 1
second and will OFF for 1 second.
Loop Back Tests:
• Refer chapter “T1E1 Trunks” for more details.
Relevant Topic:
1. “T1E1 Trunks” 1608
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1607
T1E1 Trunks
What’s this?
Digital Signal Level 1 (T1E1) trunks use Bit-Oriented Signaling (BOS) and multiplexes 24 channels (T1 service) or
32 channels (E1 service) into a single data stream. T1E1 can be used for voice or voice-grade data and for data-
transmission protocols. T1 trunk service multiplexes 24 channels into a single 1.544-Mbps data stream. E1 trunk
service multiplexes 32 channels into a single 2.048-Mbps stream. Both T1 and E1 provide a digital interface for
trunk groups.
Signaling Modes:
Common Channel Signaling (CCS) is an industry-standard technique where any one of a group of channels carries
the signals for the other channels. Matrix uses the 24th channel of a group for signaling. This signaling technique
differs from 24-channel signaling. When the system is configured for Facility-Associated Signaling, 24-channel
signaling uses the 24th channel in a T1E1 facility to carry signals. This technique also is called clear channel, out-
of-band or alternate voice data (AVD) signaling.
Channel Associated Signaling (CAS) is similar to common-channel signaling and is used only when the Bit Rate is
2.048 Mbps (the trunk is used with an E1 interface). Signaling is carried on the 16th channel.
Common-channel signaling and channel associated signaling provide a maximum transmission rate of 64 Kbps for
bearer channels.
ROBBED-BIT signaling is a per-channel signaling technique for transmitting signaling bits on each channel in a
T1E1 facility. The least-significant bit in every 6th transmitted information frame is removed and replaced by a
signaling bit. This technique is also called in-band signaling. The maximum transmission rate for each bearer
channel with ROBBED-BIT signaling is 56 Kbps.
ISDN-PRI signaling is carried on the 24th channel for a 1.544 Mbps connection and on the 16th channel for a 2.048
Mbps connection.
QSIG is an ISDN based protocol for signaling between nodes of a Private Integrated Services network.
Any of the common trunks, except for PCOL (Personal Central Office Line) trunks, can be analog or digital. (PCOL
trunks can only be analog.) Administering a digital trunk group is very similar to administering its analog
counterpart, but digital trunks must connect to a T1E1 port and this port must be administered separately.
User interface for E1_PRI and E1_CAS channels:
• In case of ISDN_E1_PRI and ISDN_E1_CAS the protocol supports 32 Channels ranging from 00 to 31,
out of which 2 channels (channel no. 00 and 16) are used for framing/signaling. So effectively user has 30
channels for OG/IC calls.
• For better understanding of the user the channel IDs are mapped as shown below. Thus for the E1_PRI
and E1_CAS the T1E1 portsupports total 30 channels ranging from 01 to 30, which you can use for
making and receiving calls.
Channel ID as
00 01 02 03 04 14 15 16 17 18 31
per Protocol
Channel ID for
01 02 03 04 14 15 16 17 30
User Interface
Mapping of Actual Channel ID with User Interface (E1_PRI and E1_CAS)
1608 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• The system Debug is for trouble shooting and so the channel ID in debug will be as the actual channel ID
as supported by the E1_PRI and E1_CAS protocols.
• Similarly, in case of T1 PRI, Protocol supports 24 channels (from 01 to 24), in which channel no. 24 is used
for the signaling, so effectively there are 23 Voice channels are available.
• But in case of T1 RBS, Protocol supports 24 channels (from 01 to 24) and the protocol doesn’t consume
any channel for signaling so that there are total 24 channels available for the users.
Loop Back Tests for E1 and T1
ETERNITY supports following types of Loop back tests:
• Near end Loop back: These are of two type viz.
• Line loop Back test
• Payload loop back test
• The ETERNITY will form the line loop back or payload loop back same as required by the other end.
• Far end Loop Back Test: These are of two type viz.
• Line loopback test
• Payload loopback test
• These tests are conducted when the T1E1 port is in NT mode and is connected to other PBX and wants to
test the line between itself and the far end. In this mode, ETERNITY acts as a network.
Near end Loopback:
• Near end loop back are of following types:
• Line loop back
• This can be implemented by shorting of signaling wires 'RTIP' and 'RRING' to 'TTIP' and 'TRING'
respectively at the line side.
• This is as good as shorting the Rx pair to Tx pair. In this case T1E1 port does not need to be in sync
with network.
Payload Loop back:
• This is effectively a physical connection of payload channels (Timeslot) with framing generated by T1E1
port itself for the transmit signal. In this case T1E1 port will be in sync with the Network.
• When the other end connected with the T1E1 port of the ETERNITY wants to perform the loopback tests,
the T1E1 port will form the loopback depending upon the type of test the other end wants to perform (i.e.
line loopback or payload loopback).
Method of forming loopback:
• Method of forming loopback at the T1E1 port side is different for the E1 and T1 carrier. These are
explained in the following.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1609
Case 1:
• When line type of the T1E1 port is configured as ISDN_E1_PRI or ISDN_E1_CAS:
• The protocol doesn't support the facility that the remote end can close/open the loop at the T1E1
port side automatically.
• Hence when the remote end wants to perform the loopback test he will inform the person (SE) at
the ETERNITY side to form the type of loop back as desired (i.e. Line loopback or Payload
loopback) on the T1E1 port.
• When the SE forms the loopback at T1E1 port side (by issuing appropriate SE Command), the
remote end can start the test.
• On completion of the testing, the remote end person will inform the SE to release/open the loopback
formed at the T1E1 port side.
• On request of the remote end, the SE will give SE command for the T1E1 port to open the Near end
loopback.
Case 2:
• When line type of the T1E1 port is configured as ISDN_T1_PRI or ISDN_T1_RBS,
• The protocol supports loopback Activation and deactivation message, whereby the remote end can
send the loop up activation code to the T1E1 port and the T1E1 port decodes the message and
forms the loop back automatically.
• On completion of the testing Remote end can send the loop deactivation code and the T1E1 port
can open the already formed loopback.
• So in this case the SE's intervention is not required to form and release the loop back.
• In case the remote end doesn't support facility to automatically form/release the loopback for the
T1E1 port though the carrier is T1, the SE can use the command (6141-1-T1E1-Type of Loop Back)
on request of the remote end and the loopback will get formed or released, depending on the
command issued.
Loopback Activation:
• When the system receives the SE command to form Line/Payload loop back (in case of E1):
• It will inform the ETERNITY ME Card T1E1 about the received command ETERNITY ME Card T1E1
will release all the calls supported by the T1E1 Port under test.
• The ETERNITY ME Card T1E1 will form the required type of loop back.
• System will put the T1E1 port in maintenance mode. It will release all active calls supported by T1E1
port and restrict the usage of T1E1 port for IC/OG calls.
1610 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
When the loopback activation code is received from far end on the T1E1 port, (When
carrier is T1)
• ETERNITY ME Card T1E1 will inform the system about the received information and the T1E1 port
number.
• ETERNITY ME Card T1E1 will release all the calls supported by the T1E1 Port under test.
• System will put the T1E1 port in maintenance mode. It will release all active calls supported by T1E1 port
and restrict the usage of T1E1 port for IC/OG calls.
Loopback Release:
• On receiving the loopback release code or receiving the command to release the loop back (either
Payload or Line), the system will take the T1E1 port out from the maintenance mode and now the T1E1
port will function normally.
Far end Loop back Test:
• Far end loop back test gives facility to ETERNITY to check the health of the line towards the other end
connected on its T1E1 port using loopback tests.
• The types of the far end loopback test are:
• Line loopback
• Payload loopback
The option 'Release All Loop Backs' is required when the far end requires the universal loop back release
code to release the Loop Back.
Method of forming loopback:
• Method of forming loopback at the T1E1 port side is different for the E1 and T1 carrier. These are
explained below.
Case 1:
• When line type of the T1E1 port is configured as ISDN_E1_PRI or ISDN_E1_CAS:
• The protocol doesn't support the facility that the ETERNITY can perform the loopback tests
automatically.
• The SE of the ETERNITY will inform the far end connected with the T1E1 port, to form the loopback
as required.
• Once the far end has formed the desired loop back the SE can issue command to start the Far end
loop back test.
Start Loopback Test:
• On receiving the command to start Far End loop back test (either the Line Loopback or Payload
loopback test).
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1611
• The system will put this T1E1 port in maintenance mode and inform the ETERNITY ME Card T1E1
about the test to perform with T1E1 port number
• ETERNITY ME Card T1E1 will release all the calls supported by the T1E1 Port under test.
• The ETERNITY ME Card T1E1 will start the PRBS generator and counter.
• ETERNITY ME Card T1E1 will send the PRBS count every 1 second to the system.
• ETERNITY ME Card T1E1 will increment PRBS Counter for every error encountered during the test
during one second.
• ETERNITY ME Card T1E1 will reset the PRBS counter to zero, after sending the PRBS Counter to
the system, every second.
• The system will store the received PRBS count (received every second) in Performance report,
which can be captured from Serial port or Printer port.
End Loopback Test/Release All Loop Backs
• When the SE wants to end the loopback test he will issue the command to end the Far End Loop
Back Test, for the T1E1 port under the test.
• SE will inform the other end's person that loopback test is finished and now the remote end can
open the loop formed.
• On receiving the command to end loop back test for the T1E1 port, the system will take the T1E1
port out of maintenance state and inform the T1E1 port about the received command.
• T1E1 port will function normal.
Case 2:
• When the line type of the T1E1 port is configured as "ISDN_T1_PRI" or "ISDN_T1_RBS"
• Loop back activation/deactivation is automatic.
• The activation methods are different for the D4 and ESF framing.
• In case of D4 framing only Line loop back is supported.
• In case of ESF framing both, Line loopback and Payload loop back are supported.
When Framing = D4
D4 Framing supports only:
• Line Loop Back test
Start Line Loop Back Test
• The test will start for the T1E1 port when SE issues the command to start the Far end line loop back test.
When SE command (6142-1-T1E1-1) is issued.
• The system will inform the ETERNITY ME Card T1E1 about the command and put this T1E1 port in
maintenance state.
1612 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• The ETERNITY ME Card T1E1 will release all calls supported by T1E1 port under test.
• The ETERNITY ME Card T1E1 will send the line loop back "Activation Code" and will start the PRBS
generator and counter.
• ETERNITY ME Card T1E1 will send the PRBS count every 1 second to Master.
• ETERNITY ME Card T1E1 will increment PRBS Counter for every error encountered during the test during
one second.
• ETERNITY ME Card T1E1 will reset the PRBS counter to zero, after sending the PRBS Counter to the
system, every second.
• The system will store the received PRBS count (received every second) in Performance report, which can
be captured from Serial port or Printer port.
Stop Loop Back Test
• When SE command (6142-T1E1-2) or (6142-T1E1-5) to end the Far end loop back test is issued.
• The system will inform the ETERNITY ME Card T1E1 about the received command and will take out the
T1E1 port from the maintenance mode.
• ETERNITY ME Card T1E1 will send the inband "Deactivation Code".
When Framing = ESF
ESF framing supports both:
• Line Loop back
• Payload loop back tests.
Start Loop Back Test:
• Depending upon the SE command issued to start the type of Loop Back (Line or Payload) test.
• The system will put the T1E1 port under test in Maintenance mode and will inform the T1E1 Port about the
received command.
• ETERNITY ME Card T1E1 will release all the calls supported by the T1E1 port.
• ETERNITY ME Card T1E1 will send the Loop back "Activation Message" for the line/payload loop back as
informed by the system.
• The ETERNITY ME Card T1E1 will start the PRBS generator and counter.
• ETERNITY ME Card T1E1 will send the PRBS count every 1 second to Master.
• ETERNITY ME Card T1E1 will increment PRBS Counter for every error encountered during the test during
one second.
• ETERNITY ME Card T1E1 will reset the PRBS counter to zero, after sending the PRBS Counter to Master,
every second.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1613
• The system will store the received PRBS count (received every second) in Performance report, which can
be captured from Serial port or Printer port.
Stop Loop Back Test/Release All Loop Backs:
• When SE issues command (6142-T1E1-2) or (6142-T1E1-4) or (6142-T1E1-5) to end the Far end loop
back test.
• The system will inform the ETERNITY ME Card T1E1 about the received command and will take out the
T1E1 port from the maintenance mode.
• ETERNITY ME Card T1E1 will send the "Deactivation Message" for the line/payload loopback test as
required.
Performance Report:
• 50 entries will be stored in Performance report.
• The report will store the entries in FIFO order.
From SA Mode
User the following command to start/abort online printing of T1E1 performance report:
1072-030-Flag
Where,
Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
By default, Flag is 0.
User the following command to start/abort offline printing of T1E1 performance report:
1072-031-Flag
Where,
Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
By default, Flag is 0.
• PRBS counter = 0 indicates the 'healthy' condition.
• During loop back test the PRBS counter may be greater than zero at initial stage of the loop back
stage, but it will be zero afterwards consistently for the healthy condition.
• PRBS counter = greater than zero, indicates the 'faulty' condition for the loop back test.
1614 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
How to configure
The commands explained below should be referred as:
• To program a single port: XXXX-1
• To program a range of ports: XXXX-2
• To program all the ports: XXXX-*
Port Status
Used to enable/disable the port. When the Port is disabled, it will not be allotted to the user on grabbing the port.
Instead the user will get error tone.
Use the following command to enable/disable the port:
6101-1-T1E1-Port Status
6101-2-T1E1-T1E1-Port Status
6101-*-Port Status
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Port Status Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
By default, the T1E1 Port is enabled.
Service Provider
Assign a Service Provider to the T1E1 port. This is useful in LCR.
Use following command to assign a name to the T1E1 port:
6102-1-T1E1-SP
6102-2-T1E1-T1E1-SP
6102-*-SP
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
SP is from 01 to 99.
By default, Service Provider is 01.
Line Coding Mechanism
Line coding is a pattern that data assumes as it is propagated over a communications channel as following:
• AMI: Alternate Mark Inversion. All transmissions generated by digital trunk ports are encoded in AMI Line
coding. Voltage on the line will be a net DC '0'.
• B8ZS: AMI with 0-code suppression, binary 8-zero substitution.
• HDB3: High density bipolar line coding.
• For both B8ZS and HDB3, line coding, the terminals at end-to-end will be HDB3-compatible.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1615
Use following command to program the Line Coding Mechanism for the T1E1 port:
6103-1-T1E1-Line Coding
6103-2-T1E1-T1E1-Line Coding
6103-*-Line Coding
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Line Coding Meaning
1 AMI-Basic
2 B8ZS
3 HDB3
4 CMI (Not Used)
By default, Line Coding is HDB3.
Set Line Coding = AMI or B8ZS for T1 line. However, B8ZS is recommended.
Set Line Coding = AMI or HDB3 for E1 line. However, HDB3 is recommended.
CMI is used in Japan and since ETERNITY does not support Japan, this option will never be used.
Framing Mode
• Framing: It is the set of 24 or 32 8-bit time slots that is treated as a single transmission unit.
• SF: D4 Superframe. The 12-frame unit that contains the synchronization pattern is known as the
'Superframe'.
• ESF: Extended Superframe Unlike the 12-bit synchronization pattern for D4 which utilizes all of the
available framing bits for sync., ESF employs only 6 of the available 24 framing bits to carry a
synchronization pattern. Each 24-frame entity spanning one ESF cycle, is referred to as an 'ESF
superframe'. With CEPT1 framing, the framing information is cycled through sixteen (0-15) frames (each
containing channels 0-31). The type of framing used at both ends must be identical, unless the signaling
and framing are converted somewhere in the transmission stream (as might happen in international
communication).
Use following command to program the Framing Mode for the T1E1 port:
6104-1-T1E1-Framing
6104-2-T1E1-T1E1-Framing
6104-*-Framing
Where,
Framing Meaning
1 SF (also called D4)
2 ESF
3 CEPT1 Multi Frame
By default, Framing is CEPT1 Multi Frame.
Set Framing = SF or ESF for T1 line. However, ESF is recommended since it supports advanced features
like CRC and FDL, which provide the performance reports.
1616 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Line type
Signal Type/Line Type signifies the type of signaling to be used on the T1/E1 line. The E&M Protocol can be used
on T1E1 Port. This can be done by assigning E&M Feature Template to T1E1 Port. Refer chapter “E&M Feature
Template”.
Use following command to program signaling type/ Line type of a T1E1:
6105-1-T1E1-Line Type
6105-2-T1E1-T1E1-Line Type
6105-*-Line Type
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Line Type Meaning
1 ISDN_E1_PRI
2 ISDN_T1_PRI
3 ISDN_E1_CAS
4 ISDN_T1_RBS
5 ISDN_E1_QSIG
6 ISDN_T1_QSIG
7 ISDN_E1_E&M
8 ISDN_T1_E&M
By default, signaling type/line type of a T1E1 is 1.
DDI Routing is not supported on T1/E1 trunk line if you have selected E&M as the Signal Type.
Interface Companding
The entry in this field must match the compounding method used by the far-end switch. This field does not appear
for all T1E1 ports. Companding is a method of improving the signal-to-noise (S/N) ratio resulting from the pulse
code modulation (PCM) process on voice calls. The analog signal's amplitude is compressed before it is quantized
and transmitted. Either of two algorithms are used to compand voice band signals: A-law and m-law. A-law is
generally used in countries that use E1 at 2.048 mbps; while m-law is used in countries that use T1 at 1.544 mbps.
Use the following command to program interface companding (PCM coding) of a T1E1:
6108-1-T1E1-Interface Companding
6108-2-T1E1-T1E1-Interface Companding
6108-*-Interface Companding
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Interface Compounding Meaning
1 A-Law (for E1 Service)
2 Mu-Law (for T1 Service)
By default, the interface companding of a T1E1 is 1.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1617
Auto Receive Equalization Mode
Use the following command to program auto receive equalization mode:
6110-1-T1E1-Mode
6110-2-T1E1-T1E1-Mode
6110-*-Mode
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Mode Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
By default, Auto Receive Equalization Mode is 1.
Receive Equalization Parameters
This field increases the strength of incoming signals by a fixed amount to compensate for line losses.
Use the following command to program the receive equalization parameters of a T1E1:
6111-1-T1E1-Receive Equalization Parameters
6111-2-T1E1-T1E1-Receive Equalization Parameters
6111-*-Receive Equalization Parameters
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Receive Equalization Parameters Meaning
1 None
2 8 dB
3 16 dB
4 24 dB
5 32 dB
6 40 dB
7 48 dB
8 Reserve
By default, the receive equalization parameters of T1E1 is 1.
Glare Option
ISDN glare occurs if the system initiates an out going call on a B-Channel at the same time the network initiates an
incoming call on that same B-channel. When processing a glare condition, programmed glare option on T1E1 port
will be considered.
Use following command to program Glare Option for the T1E1 port:
1618 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
6112-1-T1E1-Glare Option
6112-2-T1E1-T1E1-Glare Option
6112-*-Glare Option
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Glare Option Meaning
1 Proceed
2 Held Back
By default, Glare Option is 2.
Set Glare=Proceed, if ETERNITY is to be given priority in event of Glare.
Set Glare=Held Back, if the other end of the link is to be given priority in event of Glare.
The Glare settings should be complimentary on either side of the link.
Idle Code
It is the 8-bit sequence that occupies the time slot on a E1/T1 trunk channel when it is not being used.
Use the following command to program the Idle Code of a T1E1:
6113-1-T1E1-Idle Code
6113-2-T1E1-T1E1-Idle Code
6113-*-Idle Code
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Idle Code is from 000 to 255 (corresponding to 8 bits).
By default, the idle code is 127 (7F).
The binary equivalent of the programmed value (000 to 255) is sent on the channel to signify that the channel is
idle. (or Unused) This setting depends on the network. Most commonly applicable values are 7F and FF (Binary
equivalent is 0111 1111 and 1111 1111, decimal equivalent is 127 and 255).
Use message mode of the Digital Switch IC to send the idle channel code.
Overlap Receiving Timer
Use the following command to program overlap receiving timer:
6114-1-T1E1-Timer
6114-2-T1E1-T1E1-Timer
6114-*-Timer
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Timer is from 00 to 99.
By default, Overlap Receiving Timer is 15 seconds.
This timer is relevant while receiving the called party number information in overlap receiving mode.
If overlap receiving timer value is 0, it means indirectly to support only Enbloc receiving method. By the term
'Enbloc', we mean receiving digits in a single block.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1619
Pause Timer
Use following command to program Pause Timer:
6109-1-T1E1- Pause Timer
6109-2-T1E1-T1E1-Pause Timer
6109-*-Pause Timer
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8
Pause Timer is from 1 to 9 seconds
By default, Pause Timer is 3 seconds.
This Timer is used to provide delay for the number dialing by the T1E1 port. Pause timer will be applicable when
any 'P' digit is configured in the DTMF number string which is to be outdialed as DTMF digits on T1E1 port. One of
the applications for using this parameter is Multi-stage dialing. Refer chapter “Multi-Stage Dialing”.
For example, if PPP2 is to be outdialed and Pause timer is programmed as 3 seconds, the ETERNITY will out dial
the digit 2 after 9 seconds i.e delay of individual P i.e 3+3+3 =9.
DTMF ON Time
Use following command to program DTMF ON Time:
6117-1-T1E1-DTMF ON Time
6117-2-T1E1-T1E1-DTMF ON Time
6117-*-DTMF ON Time
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
DTMF ON Time is from 051 to 255 msec.
By default, DTMF ON Time is 102 msec.
This parameter decides for how much time the DTMF digit will be ON, while out dialed by the ETERNITY.
One of the applications for using this parameter is Multi-stage dialing. Refer chapter “Multi-Stage Dialing”.
DTMF Inter digit Pause Timer
Use following command to program DTMF Inter digit Pause Timer:
6118-1-T1E1-DTMF Inter digit Pause Time
6118-2-T1E1-T1E1-DTMF Inter digit Pause Time
6118-*-DTMF Inter digit Pause Time
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8
DTMF Inter digit Pause Time is from 051 to 255 msec.
By default, DTMF Inter digit Pause Time is 102 msec.
This parameter decides how much time the pause (gap) should be present between two digits while dialed by the
ETERNITY. One of the applications for using this parameter is Multi-stage dialing. Refer chapter “Multi-Stage
Dialing”.
Orientation Type
Use following command to program 'Orientation Type' for the T1E1 port:
6106-1-T1E1-Orientation Type
6106-2.T1E1-T1E1-Orientation Type
6106-*-Orientation Type
Where,
1620 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
T1E1=1 To 8.
Orientation Meaning
1 Terminal
2 Network
3 Tie Line
By default Type = 1.
When Orientation = Terminal, the port will be regarded as trunk. All the trunk related parameters will be applicable.
When Orientation = Network, the port will be regarded as station. All the station related parameters will be
applicable.
When Orientation = Tie-line, the port will be regarded as station for all IC calls to it and as trunk for all OG calls to
be made through it.
OG source calling party TON
Use following command to program OG source calling party TON for a T1E1:
6126-1-T1E1-Source TON
6126-2-T1E1-T1E1-Source TON
6126-*-Source TON
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Source TON Meaning
Unknown: This is used when the user or network has no a prior information about
1 the numbering plan. In this case, the Address Value field is organized according to
the network dialing plan. For example, prefix or escape digits might be present.
2 International Number.
3 National Number: Prefix or escape digits shall not be included.
Network Specific Number: This is used to indicate administration/Service number
4
specific to the serving network. For example, used to access an operator.
Subscriber Number: This is used when a specific short number representation is
5
stored in one or more SCs as part of a higher layer application.
6 Abbreviated Number
7 Reserved Number.
By default, OG source calling party TON of T1E1 is 1.
OG source calling party NPI
Use following command to program OG source calling party NPI for T1E1:
6127-1-T1E1-Source NPI
6127-2-T1E1-T1E1-Source NPI
6127-*-Source NPI
Where,
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1621
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Source NPI Meaning
1 Unknown
2 ISDN Numbering Plan
3 Data Numbering Plan
4 Telex Numbering
5 National Numbering Plan
6 Private Numbering Plan
7 Reserved for Extension
By default, OG source calling party NPI for T1E1 is 2.
OG Destination Called Party TON
Use following command to program OG Destination Called Party TON for a T1E1:
6128-1-T1E1-Destination TON
6128-2-T1E1-T1E1-Destination TON
6128-*-Destination TON
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Destination TON Meaning
1 Unknown: This is used when the user or network has no a prior information about
the numbering plan. In this case, the Address Value field is organized according to
the network dialing plan. For example, prefix or escape digits might be present.
2 International Number.
3 National Number: Prefix or escape digits shall not be included.
4 Network Specific Number: This is used to indicate administration/Service number
specific to the serving network. For example, used to access an operator.
5 Subscriber Number: This is used when a specific short number representation is
stored in one or more SCs as part of a higher layer application.
6 Abbreviated Number
7 Reserved Number.
By default, OG Destination Called Party TON of T1E1 is 1.
OG Destination Called Party NPI
Use following command to program OG Destination Called Party NPI for T1E1:
6129-1-T1E1-Destination NPI
6129-2-T1E1-T1E1-Destination NPI
6129-*-Destination NPI
Where,
1622 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Destination NPI Meaning
1 Unknown
2 ISDN Numbering Plan
3 Data Numbering Plan
4 Telex Numbering
5 National Numbering Plan
6 Private Numbering Plan
7 Reserved for Extension
By default, OG Destination Called Party NPI for T1E1 is 2.
Feed Inband-tones before DISCONNECT
Use following command to program to select whether the inband tones should be feed on T1E1-NT before sending
DISCONNECT message?
6130-1-T1E1-Flag
6130-2-T1E1-T1E1-Flag
6130-*-Flag
Where,
Flag Meaning
0 No
1 Yes
Default = NO.
This flag is applicable only when T1E1 port is configured as 'Network'.
When this flag is enabled (set as 'Yes'), inband tones shall be feed for 15 seconds (fixed, non programmable)
before sending DISCONNECT message.
When this flag is disabled (set as 'No'), inband tones (Busy/Error as applicable for the state of the call) shall not be
feed before sending the DISCONNECT message. However when DISCONNECT message is sent from T1E1-NT
port, inband tones will always be sent with 'progress indicator 8'.
Dial Tone Flag
• When the user dials the trunk access code or selective trunk access code for dialing the number directly
on the trunk port, he waits for the dial tone before dialing the number. But some exchange does not give
Dial Tone for the T1E1 Port. For Example, when T1E1 port as E1CAS type is used in Delhi, it is observed
that the exchange does not give dial tone when direct dialing on the trunk is used.
• To solve such problems, ETERNITY supports 'Dial Tone' when the T1E1 Port is accessed.
• It is applicable only when Online dialing is used as for Store and Forward dialing, the dial tone is given to
the user.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1623
• The dial tone is played for the Dial tone timer of the PBX.
Use following command to program the dial tone flag for T1E1 port:
6115-1-T1E1-Flag
6115-2-T1E1-T1E1-Flag
6115-*-Flag
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
By default, Dial Tone Flag is '0' for all the T1E1 ports.
• When dial tone flag is disabled, user will hear the dial tone of the exchange if provided, otherwise, user
will hear the silence.
• If the user is making the call from the FXS port and dial tone is not provided by the exchange, user will
not know when to start dialing the number. In this case, it is possible that some digits are not out dialed
on the port and wrong number is dialed out because system will out dial the number only if Outgoing
call Acknowledge is received from the ETERNITY ME Card T1E1 and user will not know about this
condition. Hence, it is required to enable this flag, if exchange is not providing the dial tone.
Routing Tone Flag
• When online dialing or store and forward dialing is used, some exchange do not provide any tone when
call is proceeding from the exchange.
• Thus, the user does not know whether the call is processing or not if for some time there is silence from the
exchange.
• In such case, this parameter is required to be programmed by the user.
• Routing tone will be stopped when alert message or connect message or disconnect message comes from
the ETERNITY ME Card T1E1.
Use following command to program the routing tone flag for T1E1 port:
6116-1-T1E1-Flag
6116-2-T1E1-T1E1-Flag
6116-*-Flag
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
By default, Routing Tone Flag is '0' for all the T1E1 ports.
Channel Count (Data)
1624 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Use the following command to reserve channels for data transmission on T1E1:
6135-1-T1E1-Channel Count (Data)
6135-2-T1E1-T1E1-Channel Count (Data)
6135-*-Channel Count (Data)
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Channel Count (Data) is from 00 to 30.
By default, Channel Count for data transmission is 00.
Channel Count (OG)
Use the following command to program number of channels reserved for OG channel count:
6136-1-T1E1-Channel Count (OG)
6136-2-T1E1-T1E1-Channel Count (OG)
6136-*-Channel Count (OG)
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Channel Count (OG) is from 00 to 30. "It specifies the number of channels to be reserved for making an OG calls.
For example, If OG channel count is programmed as 15, simultaneous 15 (maximum) OG calls can be made from
the T1E1 port".
By default, OG Channel Count is 30.
Channel Count (IC)
Use the following command to program number of channels reserved for IC channel count:
6137-1-T1E1-Channel Count (IC)
6137-2-T1E1-T1E1-Channel Count (IC)
6137-*-Channel Count (IC)
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Channel Count (IC) is from 00 to 30. "It specifies the number of channels to be reserved for making an IC calls. For
example, If IC channel count is programmed as 10, simultaneous 10 (max.) IC calls can be received on the T1E1
port".
By default, Channel Count (IC) is 30.
OG Reference ID
Use the following command to assign OG Reference ID to T1E1 port:
6131-1-T1E1-OG Reference ID
6131-2-T1E1-T1E1-OG Reference ID
6131-*-OG Reference ID
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
OG Reference ID is from 00 to 99.
By default, OG Reference ID is 00.
IC Reference ID for Working Hour
Use the following command to assign IC Reference ID for Working Hour:
6132-1-T1E1-IC Reference ID
6132-2-T1E1-T1E1-IC Reference ID
6132-*-IC Reference ID
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
IC Reference ID is from 00 to 99.
By default, IC Reference ID is 00.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1625
IC Reference ID for Break Hour
Use the following command to assign IC Reference ID for Break Hour:
6133-1-T1E1-IC Reference ID
6133-2-T1E1-T1E1-IC Reference ID
6133-*-IC Reference ID
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
IC Reference ID is from 00 to 99.
By default, IC Route Reference ID is 00.
IC Route Reference ID for Non-working Hour
Use the following command to assign IC Route Reference ID for Non-working Hour:
6134-1-T1E1-IC Reference ID
6134-2-T1E1-T1E1-IC Reference ID
6134-*-IC Reference ID
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
IC Reference ID is from 00 to 99.
By default, IC Route ID is 00.
Near End Loopback
Use the following command to activate/release Near End Loopback for T1E1:
6141-1-T1E1-Loopback
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Loopback Meaning
1 Activate Line Loopback
2 Release Line Loopback
3 Activate Payload Loopback
4 Release Payload Loopback
Far End Loopback
Use the following command to start/stop far end loopback test for T1E1:
6142-1-T1E1-Code
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Code Meaning
1 Start Line Loop Back Test
2 End Line Loop Back Test
3 Start Payload Loop Back Test
4 End Payload Loop Back Test
5 Release All Loop Backs
1626 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Online Performance Report Printing
Use following command to assign the port for online Performance Report Printing:
6143-Port
Where,
Port Meaning
0 None
1 COM 1
2 COM 2
3 Printer
Default, None.
Offline Performance Report Printing
Use following command to assign the port for offline Performance Report Printing:
6144-Port
Where,
Port Meaning
0 None
1 COM 1
2 COM 2
3 Printer
Default, None.
E1 Line Signaling Variant
The following command is applicable when the Bit Rate=E1.
Use following command to program E1 Line Signaling Variant for the T1E1 port:
6152-1-T1E1-E1 Line Signaling Variant
6152-2-T1E1-T1E1-E1 Line Signaling Variant
6152-*-E1 Line Signaling Variant
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
E1 Line Signaling Variant Meaning
01 ITU T Q.400-Q.490
02 E1 CAS Wink Start
03 E1 CAS Wink Start FGD
04 E1 CAS Delay Dial
05 E1 CAS Immediate Start/Dial
06 E1 CAS FXS Ground Start
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1627
E1 Line Signaling Variant Meaning
07 E1 CAS FXS Loop Start
08 E1 CAS FXO Ground Start
09 E1 CAS FXO Ground Start
10 Indian Line Signaling Variant 1
11 Indian Line Signaling Variant 2
By default, E1 Line Signaling Variant is 01.
• ITU-T Q.400-Q.490 is the only Line Signaling Variant supported currently. India supports three types of E1
line signaling protocols. One is same as ITU-T Q.400-Q.490. Other two differ from this standard and hence
are not supported currently. These will be supported on knowing their usage in the field. Most of the
Countries follow ITU-T Q.400-Q.490.
E1 Register Signaling Variant
Use following command to program E1 Register Signaling Variant for the T1E1 port:
6153-1-T1E1-E1 Register Signaling Variant
6153-2-T1E1-T1E1-E1 Register Signaling Variant
6153-*-E1 Register Signaling Variant
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
E1 Register Signaling Variant Meaning
1 E1 CAS Decadic
2 E1 CAS DTMF
3 E1 CAS MFC R2
4 E1 CAS MFC R1
By default, E1 Register Signaling Variants is 3.
• E1 CAS Decadic: A-bit is used to transmit the DNIS. The A-bit is toggled as per the Pulse Dial Ratio set.
• E1 CAS DTMF: DNIS/ANI is transmitted in the corresponding speech channel using the DTMF signals as
per ITU-T Q.23.
• E1 CAS MFC R2: DNIS/ANI is transmitted in the corresponding speech channel using the MFC R2 signals
as per ITU-T Q.400-Q490.
• E1 CAS MFC R1: DNIS/ANI is transmitted in the corresponding speech channel using the MFC R1 signals
as per ITU-T Q.300-Q390. Generally, E1 CAS MFC R2 is only used.
• DNIS: Dialed Number In Service.
• ANI: Auto Number Identification.
E1 Auto Alarm
E1 Auto Alarm-This command is used to disable/enable E1 Auto Alarm for T1E1 port.
1628 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Use following command to enable/disable E1 Auto Alarm for the T1E1 port for E1 signaling:
6154-1-T1E1-Flag
6154-2-T1E1-T1E1-Flag
6154-*-Flag
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Flag Meaning
0 Do not send alarm
1 Send alarm @ 1 second
2 Send alarm @ 2 second
3 Send alarm @ 3 second
4 Send alarm @ 4 second
5 Send alarm @ 5 second
6 Send alarm @ 6 second
7 Send alarm @ 7 second
8 Send alarm @ 8 second
9 Send alarm @ 9 second
By default, E1 Auto Alarm is '0'.
Line Build Out Parameters
This field reduces the outgoing signal strength by a fixed amount. The appropriate level of loss depends on the
distance between your switch (measured by cable length from the smart jack) and the nearest repeater. Where
another switch is at the end of the circuit, as in campus environments, use the cable length between the 2 switches
to select the appropriate setting from the table below. This field is relevant if the Near-end CSU type field is
integrated.
Use the following command to program the line build out parameters of a T1E1:
6162-1-T1E1-Code
6162-2-T1E1-T1E1-Code
6162-*-Code
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Code Meaning
1 0-133ft
2 133-266ft
3 266-399ft
4 399-533ft
5 533-665ft
6 -7.5dB or equidistance
7 -16dB or equidistance
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1629
Code Meaning
8 -22.5dB or equidistance
By default, the Line Build Out Parameters is 8.
Custom Pulse Width (CPW) for T1 signaling
Use following command to enable/disable Custom Pulse Width (CPW) Flag for the T1E1 port for T1 signaling:
6171-1-T1E1-Flag
6171-2-T1E1-T1E1-Flag
6171-*-Flag
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
By default, Custom Pulse Width Flag is '0'.
Custom Pulse Width Word 1 for T1 signaling
This command is used for Pulse shaping in first phase.
Use following command to program Custom Pulse Width Word 1 for the T1E1 port for T1 signaling:
6172-1-T1E1-Custom Pulse Width Word 1
6172-2-T1E1-T1E1-Custom Pulse Width Word 1
6172-*-Custom Pulse Width Word 1
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Custom Pulse Width Word 1 is from 000 to 127 volt.
By default, Custom Pulse Width Word 1 is 63 volt.
Custom Pulse Width Word 2 for T1 signaling
This command is used for Pulse shaping in second phase.
Use following command to program Custom Pulse Width Word 2 for the T1E1 port for T1 signaling:
6173-1-T1E1-Custom Pulse Width Word 2
6173-2-T1E1-T1E1-Custom Pulse Width Word 2
6173-*-Custom Pulse Width Word 2
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Custom Pulse Width Word 2 is from 000 to 127 volt.
By default, Custom Pulse Width Word 2 is 58 volt.
Custom Pulse Width Word 3 for T1 signaling
This command is used for Pulse shaping in third phase.
Use following command to program Custom Pulse Width Word 3 for the T1E1 port for T1 signaling:
6174-1-T1E1-Custom Pulse Width Word 3
1630 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
6174-2-T1E1-T1E1-Custom Pulse Width Word 3
6174-*-Custom Pulse Width Word 3
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Custom Pulse Width Word 3 is from 000 to 127 volt.
By default, Custom Pulse Width Word 3 is 76 volt.
Custom Pulse Width Word 4 for T1 signaling
This command is used for Pulse shaping in fourth phase.
Use following command to program Custom Pulse Width Word 4 for the T1E1 port for T1 signaling:
6175-1-T1E1-Custom Pulse Width Word 4
6175-2-T1E1-T1E1-Custom Pulse Width Word 4
6175-*-Custom Pulse Width Word 4
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Custom Pulse Width Word 4 is from 000 to 127 volt.
By default, Custom Pulse Width Word 4 is 00 volt.
Custom Pulse Width (CPW) Flag for E1 signaling
Use following command to enable/disable Custom Pulse Width (CPW) Flag for the T1E1 port for E1 signaling:
6155-1-T1E1-Flag
6155-2-T1E1-T1E1-Flag
6155-*-Flag
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
By default, Custom Pulse Width Flag is '0'.
Custom Pulse Width Word 1 for E1 signaling
This command is used for Pulse shaping in first phase.
Use following command to program Custom Pulse Width Word 1 for the T1E1 port for E1 signaling:
6156-1-T1E1-Custom Pulse Width Word 1
6156-2-T1E1-T1E1-Custom Pulse Width Word 1
6156-*-Custom Pulse Width Word 1
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Custom Pulse Width Word 1 is from 000 to 127 volt.
By default, Custom Pulse Width Word 1 is 109 volt.
Custom Pulse Width Word 2 for E1 signaling
This command is used for Pulse shaping in second phase.
Use following command to program Custom Pulse Width Word 2 for the T1E1 port for E1 signaling:
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1631
6157-1-T1E1-Custom Pulse Width Word 2
6157-2-T1E1-T1E1-Custom Pulse Width Word 2
6157-*-Custom Pulse Width Word 2
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Custom Pulse Width Word 2 is from 000 to 127 volt.
By default, Custom Pulse Width Word 2 is 107 volt.
Custom Pulse Width Word 3 for E1 signaling
This command is used for Pulse shaping in third phase.
Use following command to program Custom Pulse Width Word 3 for the T1E1 port for E1 signaling:
6158-1-T1E1-Custom Pulse Width Word 3
6158-2-T1E1-T1E1-Custom Pulse Width Word 3
6158-*-Custom Pulse Width Word 3
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Custom Pulse Width Word 3 is from 000 to 127 volt.
By default, Custom Pulse Width Word 3 is 064 volt.
Custom Pulse Width Word 4 for E1 signaling
This command is used for Pulse shaping in fourth phase.
Use following command to program Custom Pulse Width Word 4 for the T1E1 port for E1 signaling:
6159-1-T1E1-Custom Pulse Width Word 4
6159-2-T1E1-T1E1-Custom Pulse Width Word 4
6159-*-Custom Pulse Width Word 4
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Custom Pulse Width Word 4 is from 000 to 127 volt.
By default, Custom Pulse Width Word 4 is 064 volt.
ISDN PRI Switch Variant
This field selects the variant for ISDN PRI when ISDN PRI is selected as signaling mode. This must match with the
other end of the link.
Use following command to program the ISDN PRI Switch Variant:
6107-1-T1E1-ISDN PRI Switch Variant
6107-2-T1E1-T1E1-ISDN PRI Switch Variant
6107-*-ISDN PRI Switch Variant
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
ISDN PRI Variant Meaning
1 ATT_4ESS
2 ATT_SESS
3 AUSTRALIA
4 DMS
1632 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
ISDN PRI Variant Meaning
5 NET5
6 NTT_INS64
7 SWV_HONG_KONG
8 US_NI12
By default, ISDN PRI Switch Variant of a T1E1 is 5.
T1E1 (E1 CAS) Parameters
Forward tone Maximum ON timer (T1)
This timer signifies the maximum time for which the forward signal can be ON, from the outbound end.
Use the following command to program Forward Tone Maximum ON Timer:
7101-1-T1E1-Forward Tone Maximum ON Timer
7101-2-T1E1-T1E1-Forward Tone Maximum ON Timer
7101-*-Forward Tone Maximum ON Timer
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Forward Tone Maximum ON Timer is from 01 to 99 seconds.
By default, Forward Tone Maximum ON Timer is 15 secs.
• The DSP (Digital Signaling Processor) device will send the forward tone for this timer and will expect
backward signal within this timer. If no backward signal is received during this time, a timeout condition will
occur in which case, an alert signal will be sent to the ETERNITY ME Card Master, error tone be issued to
the calling party and a clear forward signal will be sent on the line.
Forward Tone Maximum OFF Timer (T2)
This timer signifies the maximum time between two out going forward signals. During this time the forward tone will
remain OFF. If the outbound end does not send a forward signal for this time, the inbound end will interpret it as per
its condition and shall take action accordingly.
Use the following command to program Forward Tone Maximum Off Timer:
7102-1-T1E1-Forward Tone Maximum OFF Timer
7102-2-T1E1-T1E1-Forward Tone Maximum OFF Timer
7102-*-Forward Tone Maximum OFF Timer
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Forward Tone Maximum OFF Timer is from 01 to 99 seconds.
By default, Forward Tone Maximum Off Timer is 24 seconds. This timer will be less than the Incoming R2 register
timeout timer programmed by the inbound end.
Maximum Compelled Cycle Time (T3)
This timer signifies the maximum time within which one Compelled signalling cycle should end.
Use the following command to program the Maximum compelled cycle time:
7103-1-T1E1-Maximum Compelled Cycle Time
7103-2-T1E1-T1E1-Maximum Compelled Cycle Time
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1633
7103-*-Maximum Compelled Cycle Time
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Total Call Set Up Timer is from 01 to 99 seconds.
By default, Maximum Compelled Cycle Time is 15 secs.
Pulse Duration for Pulsed Signals (T1A)
Backward signals A-3, A-4, A-6 and A-15 are pulsed to the outbound end. Pulse duration of these signals vary from
country to country.
Use the following command to program Pulse duration for pulsed signals:
7104-1-T1E1-Pulse Duration for Pulsed Signals
7104-2-T1E1-T1E1-Pulse Duration for Pulsed Signals
7104-*-Pulse Duration for Pulsed Signals
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Tolerance is fixed at +/-25ms.
By default, the Pulse Duration for Pulsed Signals is 150ms.
Pulsed Signal Maximum Wait Timer (T1B)
This timer signifies the time for which the outbound end waits for the pulsed signal. If the pulsed signal is not
received during this time, the compelling signalling is considered to be complete.
Use the following command to program the Pulsed Signal Maximum Wait Timer:
7105-1-T1E1-Pulsed Signal Maximum Wait Timer
7105-2-T1E1-T1E1-Pulsed Signal Maximum Wait Timer
7105-*-Pulsed Signal Maximum Wait Timer
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Pulsed Signal Maximum Wait Timer is from 01 to 99 seconds.
By default, Pulsed Signal Maximum Wait Timer is 15 secs.
First Forward Tone Wait Timer
This timer signifies the minimum time between receipt of line seizure signal and first forward signal.
Use the following command to program first forward tone wait timer:
7106-1-T1E1-First Forward Tone Wait Timer
7106-2-T1E1-T1E1-First Forward Tone Wait Timer
7106-*-First Forward Tone Wait Timer
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
First forward tone wait timer is from 08 to 24 seconds.
By default, the First Forward Tone Wait Timer is 15 seconds.
Minimum MF Signal Persist Timer
This timer signifies the minimum time for which the forward/backward signal should persist on the line to be
recognized as a forward/backward signal by the receiving end.
Use following command to program Minimum MF Signal Persist timer:
7107-1-T1E1-Minimum MF Signal Persist Timer
1634 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
7107-2-T1E1-T1E1-Minimum MF Signal Persist Timer
7107-*-Minimum MF Signal Persist Timer
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Minimum MF Signal Persist timer is from 001 to 255 ms.
By default, Minimum MF Signal Persist timer is 20 ms.
DNIS END Type (Outbound)
This parameter is applicable only when the DNIS length is set= 99 (i.e variable). The outbound end indicates end of
DNIS using a group I tone or using time out.
Use following command to program to set DNIS END Type (outbound) for T1E1 port:
7108-1-T1E1-End of DNIS
7108-2-T1E1-T1E1-End of DNIS
7108-*-End of DNIS
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
End of DNIS is from 00, 11 to 15.
00 indicates End of DNIS as time out.
01 to 15 indicates group 1 tone to declare End of DNIS.
By default, DNIS End Type (Outbound) is 15.
DNIS End Type (Inbound)
This parameter is applicable only when the DNIS length is set = 99 (i.e variable). The inbound end indicates end of
DNIS using a Group I tone or using time out.
Use following command to program DNIS End Type:
7109-1-T1E1-DNIS End Type
7109-2-T1E1-T1E1-DNIS End Type
7109-*-DNIS End Type
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
DNIS End Type is from 00, 11 to 15.
00 indicates End of DNIS as time out.
01 to 15 indicates group 1 tone to declare End of DNIS.
By Default, DNIS End Type (Inbound) is 15.
ANI Send Position (Outbound)
This parameter signifies the number of DNIS digits after which to send ANI. As such ANI is sent on receiving the
backward tone 'Send next digit' or send next ANI digit. If send next ANI tone is received then this parameter is not
applicable. But if same tone is used by the inbound end to request next ANI digit and next DNIS digit then ANI is
sent after the number of digits as set in this parameter.
Use following command to program the ANI Send Position:
7110-1-T1E1-ANI Send Position
7110-2-T1E1-T1E1-ANI Send Position
7110-*-ANI Send Position
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
ANI Send Position is from 00 to 99.
By default, ANI Send Position is 00.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1635
Is ANI Available (Outbound)
This parameter indicates the Group A tone (received from the inbound tone) that should be interpreted as a
question by the inbound end asking the outbound end whether the outbound end has ANI digits to be sent.
Use following command to program Is ANI Available (Outbound):
7111-1-T1E1-Is ANI Available (Outbound)
7111-2-T1E1-T1E1-Is ANI Available (Outbound)
7111-*-Is ANI Available (Outbound)
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Is ANI Available (Outbound) is Group A tone from 00 to 15. If no question by the inbound end, set this parameter to
00.
By default, Is ANI Available is '05'.
Positive Response to Is ANI Available (Outbound)
This parameter signifies the Group 1 tone that the outbound end will send to the inbound end as a response to Is
ANI Available tone from the inbound end. The tone defined in this parameters indicates the Group 1 tone with
which the Outbound end will respond to the inbound end to indicate that it has ANI digits to be sent.
Use the following command to program the Positive Response to Is ANI Available (Outbound):
7112-1-T1E1-Positive Response to Is ANI Available
7112-2-T1E1-T1E1-Positive Response to Is ANI Available
7112-*-Positive Response to Is ANI Available
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Positive Response to Is ANI Available is a Group 1 tone from 01 to 15.
By default, Positive Response to Is ANI Available is 01.
Negative Response to Is ANI Available (Outbound)
This parameter signifies the Group 1 tone that the outbound end will send to the inbound end as a response to Is
ANI Available tone from the inbound end. The tone defined in this parameter indicates the Group 1 tone with which
the Outbound end will respond to the inbound end to indicate that it does not have ANI digits to be sent.
Use following command to program the Negative Response to Is ANI Available (Outbound):
7113-1-T1E1-Negative Response to Is ANI Available
7113-2-T1E1-T1E1-Negative Response to Is ANI Available
7113-*-Negative Response to Is ANI Available
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Negative Response to Is ANI Available is a Group 1 tone from 01 to 15.
By default, Negative Response to Is ANI Available is 10.
ANI End Tone with Presentation Allowed (Outbound)
This parameter signifies the Group 1 tone used to signify end of ANI digits with Presentation Allowed.
Use the following command to program the End of ANI with Presentation Allowed (Outbound):
7114-1-T1E1-ANI End Tone with Presentation Allowed (Outbound)
7114-2-T1E1-T1E1-ANI End Tone with Presentation Allowed (Outbound)
7114-*-ANI End Tone with Presentation Allowed (Outbound)
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
1636 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
ANI End Tone with Presentation Allowed (Outbound) is a Group 1 tone from 00, 11 to 15. If no such tone is sent,
set this parameter to 00.
By default, ANI End Tone with Presentation Allowed (Outbound) is 15.
ANI End Tone with Presentation Restrict (Outbound)
This parameter signifies the Group 1 tone used to signify end of ANI digits with Presentation Restricted.
Use the following command to program the End of ANI with Presentation Restricted (Outbound):
7115-1-T1E1-ANI End Tone with Presentation Restrict (Outbound)
7115-2-T1E1-T1E1-ANI End Tone with Presentation Restrict (Outbound)
7115-*-ANI End Tone with Presentation Restrict (Outbound)
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
ANI End Tone with Presentation Restrict (Outbound) is a Group 1 tone from 00, 11 to 15. If no such tone is sent, set
this parameter to 00.
By default, ANI End Tone with Presentation Restrict (Outbound) is 00.
DNIS Digit Length (Inbound)
This parameter specifies the number of DNIS digits that are expected by the Inbound end to indicate the Called
party number during MFC R2 signaling.
Use following command to program the DNIS Digit Length:
7116-1-T1E1-DNIS Digit Length
7116-2-T1E1-T1E1-DNIS Digit Length
7116-*-DNIS Digit Length
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
DNIS Digit Length is from 01 to 99.
By default, DNIS Digit Length is 99.
• DNIS Digit length (01 to 98) will be expected by the inbound end. (Practical value would be 01 to 10)
• DNIS Digit length 99 indicates DNIS length is variable. Further action is taken after timeout or on receipt of
I-15. Refer parameter 'DNIS End Type (Inbound)'.
ANI Request Position (Inbound)
The inbound end may request/may not request ANI digits. It may request ANI digits after receiving first DNIS or
after receiving second DNIS or even after receiving all the DNIS digits.
Use following command to program the number of DNIS digits after which ANI digits should be requested by the
inbound end:
7117-1-T1E1-ANI Request Position
7117-2-T1E1-T1E1-ANI Request Position
7117-*-ANI Request Position
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
ANI Request Position is from 00, 01 to 99.
ANI Request Position=00 indicates Never request ANI digits.
ANI Request Position=01 to 98 indicates Request ANI digits on receipt of these many DNIS digits.
ANI Request Position = 99 indicates Request after receiving all the DNIS digits (complete DNIS).
By default, ANI Request Position is 99.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1637
ANI Length (Inbound)
This parameter signifies the number of ANI digits that would be expected by the inbound side as Calling Party
Number during MFC R2 signaling. This parameter at the inbound side guides the inbound register to switch from
requesting ANI digits back to requesting DID digits.
Use following command to program ANI Length (Inbound):
7118-1-T1E1-ANI Length
7118-2-T1E1-T1E1-ANI Length
7118-*-ANI Length
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
ANI Length = 00 to 99.
By default, ANI Length is 99.
• ANI Length=00 indicates ANI is not sent by the Outbound end.
• ANI Length = 99 indicates ANI Length is variable. If ANI length is variable, the logic waits for End of ANI
from the outbound side. The inbound end will sense for I-12 and I-15. I-12 is used to signify that no ANI
digits are available whereas I-15 is used to signify end of ANI digits. Some countries like China use I-15 to
signify both the events viz. End of ANI and no ANI digits available.
Ask ANI (Inbound)
This parameter specifies the backward group A tone used to ask the outbound end whether it has ANI digits to be
sent. This parameter is also known as Request ANI Category.
Use following command to program the ASK ANI available:
7119-1-T1E1-ASK ANI
7119-2-T1E1-T1E1-ASK ANI
7119-*-ASK ANI
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
ASK ANI Available is from 00 or 01 to 15.
If no such tone is sent by the inbound end, set this parameter to 00. For India, this should be set to 04
By default, Ask ANI (Inbound) is '05'.
Positive Response to Ask ANI (Inbound)
This parameter specifies the Group 1 forward tone to be received by the inbound end from the outbound which
would indicate that Outbound end has ANI digits to be sent. This parameter is also known as ANI category.
Use following command to program Positive Response to Ask ANI:
7120-1-T1E1-Positive Response to Ask ANI
7120-2-T1E1-T1E1-Positive Response to Ask ANI
7120-*-Positive Response to Ask ANI
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Positive Response to Ask ANI is from 01 to 15.
By default, Positive Response to Ask ANI is 01.
• This cannot be zero. This is because; Is ANI Available request would be made by the inbound end only if
the country supports this protocol. In such event, Is ANI Available request will be responded to.
For example, In India I-1 or I-10 is sent by the Outbound end. In Kuwait, I-6 is sent.
1638 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Negative Response to Ask ANI (Inbound)
This parameter specifies the Group 1 forward tone to be received by the inbound end from the outbound which
would indicate that Outbound end has ANI digits to be sent. This parameter is also known as ANI category.
Use following command to program Negative Response to Ask ANI:
7121-1-T1E1-Negative Response to Ask ANI
7121-2-T1E1-T1E1-Negative Response to Ask ANI
7121-*-Negative Response to Ask ANI
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Negative Response to Ask ANI is from 01 to 15.
By default, Negative Response to Ask ANI is 10.
• This cannot be zero. This is because; Is ANI Available request would be made by the inbound end only if
the country supports this protocol. In such event, Is ANI Available request will be responded to.
For example, In India I-1 or I-10 is sent by the Outbound end. In Kuwait, I-6 is sent.
ANI End Tone Presentation Allowed (Inbound)
This parameter specifies the Group I tone that the inbound end should expect from the outbound end to consider
End of ANI digits with an information that the Presentation of ANI by the outbound end is allowed.
Use following command to program the ANI End Tone Presentation Allowed:
7122-1-T1E1-ANI End Tone Presentation Allowed
7122-2-T1E1-T1E1-ANI End Tone Presentation Allowed
7122-*-ANI End Tone Presentation Allowed
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, ANI End Tone Presentation Allowed is 15.
• ANI End Tone Presentation Allowed is 00 or 11 to 15. If no such tone is sent, set this parameter to 00. For
For example, India uses A-4, China uses A-1, etc.
ANI End Tone Presentation Restricted (Inbound)
This parameter specifies the Group I tone that the inbound end should expect from the outbound end to consider
End of ANI digits with an information that the Presentation of ANI by the outbound end is Restricted.
Use following command to program the ANI End Tone Presentation Restricted:
7123-1-T1E1-ANI End Tone Presentation Restricted
7123-2-T1E1-T1E1-ANI End Tone Presentation Restricted
7123-*-ANI End Tone Presentation Restricted
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, ANI End Tone Presentation Restricted (Inbound) is 00.
• ANI End Tone Presentation Restricted is 00 or 11 to 15. If no such tone is sent, set this parameter to 00.
For example: India uses A-4, China uses A-1, etc.
Ordinary Subscriber
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1639
This parameter specifies the forward group II tone used to inform the inbound end that the calling party is an
Ordinary Subscriber. This signal is sent in response to Calling Party Category signal Request from the inbound
end.
Use following command to program the Ordinary Subscriber:
7124-1-T1E1-Ordinary Subscriber
7124-2-T1E1-T1E1-Ordinary Subscriber
7124-*-Ordinary Subscriber
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Ordinary Subscriber is from 00, 01 to 15. Use '00' when this parameter is not applicable.
By default, Ordinary Subscriber is 01.
Priority Subscriber
This parameter specifies the forward group II tone used to inform the inbound end that the calling party is a Priority
Subscriber. This signal is sent in response to Calling Party Category signal Request from the inbound end.
Use following command to program the Priority Subscriber:
7125-1-T1E1-Priority Subscriber
7125-2-T1E1-T1E1-Priority Subscriber
7125-*-Priority Subscriber
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Priority Subscriber is from 00, 01 to 15. Use '00' when this parameter is not applicable.
By default, Priority Subscriber is 02.
Maintenance Equipment
This parameter specifies the forward group II tone used to inform the inbound end that the calling party is
maintenance equipment.
Use following command to program the Maintenance Equipment:
7126-1-T1E1-Maintenance Equipment
7126-2-T1E1-T1E1-Maintenance Equipment
7126-*-Maintenance Equipment
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Maintenance Equipment is from 00, 01 to 15. Use '00' when this parameter is not applicable.
By default, Maintenance Equipment is 03.
Operator
This parameter specifies the forward group II tone used to inform the inbound end that the calling party is Operator.
Use following command to program the Operator:
7127-1-T1E1-Operator
7127-2-T1E1-T1E1-Operator
7127-*-Operator
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Operator is from 00, 01 to 15. Use '00' when this parameter is not applicable.
By default, Operator is 05.
Pay Phone
1640 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
This parameter specifies the forward group II tone used to inform the inbound end that the calling party is Pay
Phone (Coin box).
Use following command to program the Pay Phone:
7128-1-T1E1-Pay Phone
7128-2-T1E1-T1E1-Pay Phone
7128-*-Pay Phone
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Operator is from 00, 01 to 15. Use '00' when this parameter is not applicable.
By default, Pay Phone is 00.
Data Transmission
This parameter specifies the forward group II tone used to inform the inbound end that the call is a Data Call.
Use following command to program the Data Transmission:
7129-1-T1E1-Data Transmission
7129-2-T1E1-T1E1-Data Transmission
7129-*-Data Transmission
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Data Transmission is from 00, 01 to 15. Use '00' when this parameter is not applicable.
By default, Data Transmission is 06.
Interception Operator
This parameter specifies the forward group II tone used to inform the inbound end that the call is from Interception
Operator. This is used in Singapore.
Use following command to program the Interception Operator:
7130-1-T1E1-Interception Operator
7130-2-T1E1-T1E1-Interception Operator
7130-*-Interception Operator
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Interception Operator is from 00, 01 to 15. Use '00' when this parameter is not applicable.
By default, Interception Operator is 00.
Send next Digit (N+1)
This parameter specifies the backward group A tone used to request next digit, be it ANI digit or DNIS digit.
Use following command to program the Send next Digit:
7131-1-T1E1-Send Next Digit
7131-2-T1E1-T1E1-Send Next Digit
7131-*-Send Next Digit
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Send next Digit is 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Send Next Digit is 01.
• For example: India uses A-1 to signify event 'Send DNIS Digit'.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1641
Send last but one Digit (N-1)
This parameter specifies the backward group A tone used to request last but one digit i.e. N-1 digit, be it ANI digit or
DNIS digit.
Use following command to program the Send last but one Digit:
7132-1-T1E1-Send Last But One Digit
7132-2-T1E1-T1E1-Send Last But One Digit
7132-*-Send Last But One Digit
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Send Last But One Digit is 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Send Last But One Digit (N-1) is 02.
• For example: India uses A-9 to signify event 'Send last but one digit'.
Send last but two digit (N-2)
This parameter specifies the backward group A tone used to request last but two digit i.e. N-2 digit. Be it ANI digit or
DNIS digit.
Use following command to program the Send last but two digit:
7134-1-T1E1-Send Last But Two Digit
7134-2-T1E1-T1E1-Send Last But Two Digit
7134-*-Send Last But Two Digit
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Send Last But Two Digit is 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Send Last But Two Digit (N-2) is 07.
• For example: India uses A-7 to signify event 'Send last but two digit'.
Send last but three Digit (N-3)
This parameter specifies the backward group A tone used to request last but three digit i.e. N-3 digit. Be it ANI digit
or DNIS digit.
Use following command to program the Send Last But Three Digit:
7135-1-T1E1-Send Last But Three Digit
7135-2-T1E1-T1E1-Send Last But Three Digit
7135-*-Send Last But Three Digit
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Send last but three digit is 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Send Last But Three Digit is 08.
• For example: India uses A-8 to signify event 'Send last but three digit'.
Address-Complete, Change over to reception of Group B signals
This parameter specifies the backward group A tone used to inform the inbound end that the incoming register at
the inbound end needs no additional address digit and is about to go over to transmission of a group B signal
conveying the status of the equipment at the subscriber at the inbound end.
Use following command to program the Address-Complete, Change over to reception of Group B signals:
7136-1-T1E1-Address-Complete, Change Over to Reception of Group B Signals
1642 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
7136-2-T1E1-T1E1-Address-Complete, Change Over to Reception of Group B Signals
7136-*-Address-Complete, Change Over to Reception of Group B Signals
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Address-Complete, Change Over to Reception of Group B Signals is 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Address-Complete, Change Over to Reception of Group B Signals is 03.
Send Calling Party Category and Change to Group C
This parameter specifies the backward group A tone used by the inbound end to request Calling Party Category
from the outbound end. This tone also informs the outbound end to change to reception of Group C signal. This
signal is used in Mexico.
Use following command to program the Send Calling Party Category and Change to Group C:
7137-1-T1E1-Send Calling Party Category and Change to Group C
7137-2-T1E1-T1E1-Send Calling Party Category and Change to Group C
7137-*-Send Calling Party Category and Change to Group C
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Send Calling Party Category and change to Group C is from 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Send Calling Party Category and Change to Group C is 00.
Congestion in National Network
This parameter specifies the backward group A tone used to inform the congestion at the inbound end.
Use following command to program congestion in the National Network
7138-1-T1E1-Congestion in National Network
7138-2-T1E1-T1E1-Congestion in National Network
7138-*-Congestion in National Network
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Congestion in National Network is 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Congestion in National Network is 04.
Send Caller Party's Category
This parameter specifies the backward group A tone used to request calling party category.
Use following command to program the Send caller party's category:
7139-1-T1E1-Send Caller Party Category
7139-2-T1E1-T1E1-Send Caller Party Category
7139-*-Send Caller Party Category
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Send Caller Party Category is 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Send Calling Party's Category is 05.
• For example: India uses A-7 to signify event 'Send last but two digit'.
Address-Complete, Charge, Set-up Speech Conditions
This parameter specifies the backward group A tone used to inform the inbound end that the incoming register at
the inbound end needs no additional address digit, but will not send Group B signals. Also charge the call on
answer.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1643
Use following command to program the Address-Complete, Charge, Set-up Speech Conditions of Group B signals:
7140-1-T1E1-Address-Complete, Charge, Set-up Speech Conditions
7140-2-T1E1-T1E1-Address-Complete, Charge, Set-up Speech Conditions
7140-*-Address-Complete, Charge, Set-up Speech Conditions
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Address-Complete, Charge, Set-up Speech Conditions is 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Address-Complete, Charge Set-up Speech Conditions is 06.
Repeat DNIS digits from beginning
This parameter specifies the backward group A tone used to inform the outbound end to send all the DNIS digits
from the beginning.
Use following command to program the repeat DNIS digits from beginning of Group B signals:
7141-1-T1E1-Repeat DNIS Digits from Beginning
7141-2-T1E1-T1E1-Repeat DNIS Digits from Beginning
7141-*-Repeat DNIS Digits from Beginning
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Repeat DNIS Digits from Beginning is from 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Repeat DNIS Digits from Beginning is 00.
Send Next ANI Digit
This parameter specifies the backward group A tone used to request next (first) ANI digit.
Use following command to program the Send Next ANI Digit
7142-1-T1E1-Send Next ANI Digit
7142-2-T1E1-T1E1-Send Next ANI Digit
7142-*-Send Next ANI Digit
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Send Next ANI Digit is 00 or 01 to 15. If no such tone is sent, set this parameter to 00.
By default, Send Next ANI Digit is 05.
• Few countries use different tone to request next ANI digit and next DNIS digits.
• For example: India uses A-4, China uses A-1, etc.
Special Information Tone
This parameter specifies the backward group B tone used to inform the outbound end that the call cannot be made
through because of reasons beyond those which are considered by the Protocol and hence Special Information
tone will be sent to the calling party. The PBX should send only the Group B signal and then disconnect the call.
Use following command to program the Send Special Information Tone:
7143-1-T1E1-Send Special Information Tone
7143-2-T1E1-T1E1-Send Special Information Tone
7143-*-Send Special Information Tone
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Send Special Information Tone is from 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Send Special Information Tone is 02.
1644 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Special Information Tone, and setup Speech Conditions
This parameter specifies the backward group B tone used to inform the outbound end that the call cannot be made
through because of reasons beyond those which are considered by the Protocol and hence Special information
tone will be sent to the calling party and request the outbound end to setup speech conditions. In this case, the PBX
will connect the calling party to the voice message of the PBX informing the caller that the call cannot be
connected. This is required in countries like Argentina. This is same as a condition 'Call rejected, No indication of
cause'. This signal is also used in India to inform the caller that the called party's number is changed and the caller
should contact the Help desk of the Service Provider.
Use following command to program the Send Special Information Tone and Setup Speech Condition:
7144-1-T1E1-Send Special Information Tone and Setup Speech Conditions
7144-2-T1E1-T1E1-Send Special Information Tone and Setup Speech Conditions
7144-*-Send Special Information Tone and Setup Speech Conditions
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Send Special Information Tone, and Setup Speech Conditions is from 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Send Special Information Tone and Setup Speech Conditions is 02.
Subscriber line busy
This parameter specifies the backward group B tone used to inform the outbound end that the called subscriber is
busy.
Use following command to program the subscriber line busy:
7145-1-T1E1-Subscriber Line Busy
7145-2-T1E1-T1E1-Subscriber Line Busy
7145-*-Subscriber Line Busy
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Subscriber Line Busy is from 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Subscriber Line Busy is 03.
Subscriber line free, charge
This parameter specifies the backward group B tone used to inform the outbound end that the called subscriber is
free and the call is to be charged on answer.
Use following command to program the subscriber line free, charge:
7146-1-T1E1-Subscriber Line Free, Charge
7146-2-T1E1-T1E1-Subscriber Line Free, Charge
7146-*-Subscriber Line Free, Charge
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Subscriber Line Free, Charge is from 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Subscriber Line Free, Charge is 06.
Subscriber line free, No charge
This parameter specifies the backward group B tone used to inform the outbound end that the called subscriber is
free but the call is not to be charged on answer. This signal permits nonchargable calls without the need for
transferring "no charge' information by line signals.
Use following command to program the subscriber line free, no charge:
7147-1-T1E1-Subscriber Line Free, NO Charge
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1645
7147-2-T1E1-T1E1-Subscriber Line Free, NO Charge
7147-*-Subscriber Line Free, NO Charge
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Subscriber Line Free, NO Charge is from 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Subscriber Line Free, NO Charge is 07.
Congestion
This parameter specifies the backward group A tone used to inform that congestion is encountered after
changeover from Group-A to Group-B signals.
Use following command to program Congestion:
7148-1-T1E1-Congestion
7148-2-T1E1-T1E1-Congestion
7148-*-Congestion
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Congestion is from 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Congestion is 04.
Unallocated Number
This parameter specifies the backward group B tone used to inform the outbound end that the number received is
not in use.
Use following command to program the Unallocated Number:
7149-1-T1E1-Unallocated Number
7149-2-T1E1-T1E1-Unallocated Number
7149-*-Unallocated Number
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Unallocated Number is from 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Unallocated Number is 05.
Subscriber's line out of order
This parameter specifies the backward group B tone used to inform the outbound end that the called subscriber's
line is out of order
Use following command to program the subscriber's line out of order:
7150-1-T1E1-Subscriber's Line out of Order
7150-2-T1E1-T1E1-Subscriber's Line out of Order
7150-*-Subscriber's Line out of Order
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Subscriber's Line out of order is from 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Subscribers Line Out of Order is 08.
Reject Call due to R2MF Tone
This parameter specifies the Group B backward tone used to inform the outbound end that the call is rejected but
there is no indication of cause.
Use following command to program the Call rejected, No indication of cause:
7151-1-T1E1-Reject Call due to R2MF Tone
1646 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
7151-2-T1E1-T1E1-Reject Call due to R2MF Tone
7151-*-Reject Call due to R2MF Tone
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Reject Call due to R2MF Tone is from 00 to 15.
By default, Reject Call due to R2MF Tone is 00.
Alternative Answer Tone
This parameter specifies the Group B backward tone used to inform the outbound end that the call is accepted and
the speech path is made through. This is same as A-6. This is required in few countries like Czech Republic.
Use following command to program the Alternative Answer Tone:
7152-1-T1E1-Alternative Answer Tone
7152-2-T1E1-T1E1-Alternative Answer Tone
7152-*-Alternative Answer Tone
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Alternative Answer Tone is from 00, 01 to 15. Use '00' when this parameter is not applicable.
By default, Alternative Answer Tone is 00.
Changed Number (Announcement on line)
This parameter specifies the Group B backward tone used to inform the outbound end that the number dialed by
the calling party is changed. However, this parameter will be rarely used. Please note that VM should be assigned
for this feature.
Use following command to program the Changed Number (announcement on line):
7153-1-T1E1-Changed Number (announcement on line)
7153-2-T1E1-T1E1-Changed Number (announcement on line)
7153-*-Changed Number (announcement on line)
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Changed Number (announcement on line) is from 00, 01-15. Use '00' when this parameter is not applicable.
By default, Changed Number (announcement on line) is 00.
Send next ANI digit (group C)
This parameter specifies the backward group C tone to request next (even first) ANI digit from the outbound end.
Use following command to program the Send next ANI digit (Group C):
7154-1-T1E1-Send Next ANI Digit (Group C)
7154-2-T1E1-T1E1-Send Next ANI Digit (Group C)
7154-*-Send Next ANI Digit (Group C)
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Send next ANI digit (Group C) is from 00, 01 to 15. Use '00' when this parameter is not applicable.
This parameter is applicable in Mexico only.
By default, Send Next ANI Digit (Group C) is 00.
Request transition to Group A and restart from first DNIS (Group C)
This parameter specifies the backward group C tone to restart from first DNIS and request transition to Group A.
Use following command to program the Request transition to Group A and restart from first DNIS.
7155-1-T1E1-Request Transition to Group A and Restart from First DNIS
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1647
7155-2-T1E1-T1E1-Request Transition to Group A and Restart from First DNIS
7155-*-Request Transition to Group A and Restart from First DNIS
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Request Transition to Group A and Restart from First DNIS is from 00, 01 to 15. Use '00' when this parameter is not
applicable.
By default, Request Transition to Group A and Restart from First DNIS is 00.
• This parameter is applicable in Mexico only.
Address completed, change to reception of Group B (Group C)
This parameter specifies the backward group C tone used to signify Address completed, change to reception of
Group B signal.
Use following command to program the Address completed, change to reception of Group B signal:
7156-1-T1E1-Address Completed, Change to Reception of Group B Signal
7156-2-T1E1-T1E1-Address Completed, Change to Reception of Group B Signal
7156-*-Address Completed, Change to Reception of Group B Signal
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Address Completed, Change to Reception of Group B Signal is from 00, 01 to 15. Use '00' when this parameter is
not applicable.
By default, Address Completed, Change to Reception of Group B Signal is 00.
• This parameter is applicable in Mexico only.
Congestion (Group C)
This parameter specifies the backward group C tone used to signify Congestion
Use following command to program the tone for Congestion:
7157-1-T1E1-Congestion
7157-2-T1E1-T1E1-Congestion
7157-*-Congestion
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Congestion is from 00, 01 to 15. Use '00' when this parameter is not applicable.
By default, Congestion is 00.
• This parameter is applicable in Mexico only.
Request transition back to Group A, and sent next DNIS (Group C)
This parameter specifies the backward group C tone used to signify request transition back to group A, and send
next DNIS.
Use following command to program the tone for request transition back to group A, and send next DNIS signal:
7158-1-T1E1-Request Transition Back to Group A, and Send Next DNIS
7158-2-T1E1-T1E1-Request Transition Back to Group A, and Send Next DNIS
7158-*-Request Transition Back to Group A, and Send Next DNIS
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Request transition back to group A, and send next DNIS is from 00, 01 to 15. Use '00' when this parameter is not
applicable.
1648 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
By default, Request Transition Back to Group A, and Send Next DNIS is 00.
• This parameter is applicable in Mexico only.
Request transition back to Group A, and restart the last DNIS (Group C)
This parameter specifies the backward group C tone used to signify request transition back to group A, and repeat
the last DNIS
Use following command to program the tone for request transition back to group A, and repeat the last DNIS:
7159-1-T1E1-Request Transition Back to Group A, and Restart the Last DNIS
7159-2-T1E1-T1E1-Request Transition Back to Group A, and Restart the Last DNIS
7159-*-Request Transition Back to Group A, and Restart the Last DNIS
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Request Transition Back to Group A, and Restart the Last DNIS is from 00, 01 to 15. Use '00' when this parameter
is not applicable.
By default, Request Transition Back to Group A and Restart the Last DNIS is 00.
• This parameter is applicable in Mexico only.
CD Bits
This parameter indicates the default values of C and D bits when the ETERNITY transmits line signals.
Use following command to program the CD Bits for T1E1 port:
7161-1-T1E1-CD Bits
7161-2-T1E1-T1E1-CD Bits
7161-*-CD Bits
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
CD Bits Meaning (Binary Value)
0 00 (C=0, D=0)
1 01
2 10
3 11
By default, CD Bits is 1.
The C and D bits received during an IC call are ignored by the ETERNITY.
Invert Bit A
This parameter signifies that A-bit should be inverted before transmitting and on receiving.
Use following command to program to invert/don't invert Bit A for the T1E1 port:
7162-1-T1E1-Invert Bit A
7162-2-T1E1-T1E1-Invert Bit A
7162-*-Invert Bit A
Where,
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1649
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Invert Bit A Meaning
0 Don't Invert
1 Invert
By default, Invert Bit A is 0.
Invert Bit B
This parameter signifies that B-bit should be inverted before transmitting and on receiving.
Use following command to program to invert/don't invert Bit B for the T1E1 port:
7163-1-T1E1-Invert Bit B
7163-2-T1E1-T1E1-Invert Bit B
7163-*-Invert Bit B
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Invert Bit B Meaning
0 Don't Invert
1 Invert
By default, Invert Bit B is 0.
Invert Bit C
This parameter signifies that C-bit should be inverted before transmitting and on receiving.
Use following command to program to invert/don't invert Bit C for the T1E1 port:
7164-1-T1E1-Invert Bit C
7164-2-T1E1-T1E1-Invert Bit C
7164-*-Invert Bit C
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Invert Bit B Meaning
0 Don't Invert
1 Invert
By default, Invert Bit C is 0.
Invert Bit D
This parameter signifies that D-bit should be inverted before transmitting and on receiving.
Use following command to program to invert/don't invert Bit D for the T1E1 port:
7165-1-T1E1-Invert Bit D
7165-2-T1E1-T1E1-Invert Bit D
7165-*-Invert Bit D
Where,
1650 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Invert Bit D Meaning
0 Don't Invert
1 Invert
By default, Invert Bit D is 0.
E1 Metering Bit
This parameter signifies the bit used by the network to signal metering pulses.
Use following command to program the E1 Metering Bit for the T1E1 port:
7166-1-T1E1-E1 Metering Bit
7166-2-T1E1-T1E1-E1 Metering Bit
7166-*-E1 Metering Bit
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
E1 Metering Bit Meaning
0 None
1 Bit-A
2 Bit-B
3 Bit-C
4 Bit-D
By default, E1 Metering Bit is 1.
E1 Metering Pulse Minimum Timer
This timer signifies the minimum time for which the metering bit should change to be recognized as a genuine
metering pulse subject to E1 Metering Pulse Maximum timer. All changes occurred for time less than this timer will
be ignored. This parameter is applicable only for E1 lines with R2 MFC signaling.
Use following command to program the Metering Pulse Minimum timer for the T1E1 port:
7167-1-T1E1-E1 Metering Pulse Minimum Timer
7167-2-T1E1-T1E1-E1 Metering Pulse Minimum Timer
7167-*-E1 Metering Pulse Minimum Timer
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
E1 Metering Pulse Minimum timer is from 20ms to 1000ms.
By default, E1 Metering Pulse Minimum Timer is 150ms.
Clear Back Signal
This parameter signifies the signal used to signify that the called party has disconnected the line first. This is
indicated in two ways viz. Release guard signal or forced release signal. This is country dependent.
Use following command to program the Clear Back Signal for the T1E1 port:
7168-1-T1E1-Clear Back Signal
7168-2-T1E1-T1E1-Clear Back Signal
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1651
7168-*-Clear Back Signal
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Clear Back Signal Meaning
1 Release Guard (Ab=1)
2 Forced Release (Bb=0)
By default, Clear Back Signal is 1.
Release Timer
This timer signifies the time for which the clear back signal should persist on the line to be recognized as a genuine
clear back signal. This is also known as Clear Back timer.
Use following command to program the Release Timer for the T1E1 port:
7169-1-T1E1-Release Timer
7169-2-T1E1-T1E1-Release Timer
7169-*-Release Timer
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Release Timer is from 20ms to 1000ms.
By default, Release Timer is 400 ms.
Line Seizure Acknowledge Wait Timer
This timer signifies the time for which the outbound end waits for seizure acknowledgment from the inbound end
after sending the line seizure signal. On expiry of this timer, Clear forward signal is sent by the outbound end. Alarm
will be generated. This timer is applicable only when acting as Outbound end.
Use following command to program Line seizure acknowledge wait timer:
7170-1-T1E1-Line Seizure Acknowledge Wait Timer
7170-2-T1E1-T1E1-Line Seizure Acknowledge Wait Timer
7170-*-Line Seizure Acknowledge Wait Timer
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Line Seizure Acknowledge Wait Timer is from 0001 to 9999 milli seconds.
By default, Line Seizure Acknowledge Wait Timer is 200ms.
Release Guard Timer
This timer signifies the time for which inbound register waits before declaring the channel idle (sending idle signal)
when clear forward line signal is received from the outbound end. This timer is also applicable for Forced Release
signal. This timer is applicable only when acting as Inbound end.
Use following command to program Release Guard Timer:
7171-1-T1E1-Release Guard Timer
7171-2-T1E1-T1E1-Release Guard Timer
7171-*-Release Guard Timer
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
1652 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
T1E1 Release Guard Timer is from 0000 to 9999 milliseconds.
By default, Release Guard Timer is 200ms. This timer depends on the speed of switching and processing.
E&M on T1E1 port
ETERNITY supports E&M protocol on T1E1 port. Both E1 E&M and T1 E&M can be used as options of signaling
type of T1E1 port. Select the signal type/line type as ISDN_E1_ E&M or ISDN_T1_ E&M.
Use following command to program signaling type/Line type of a T1E1:
6105-1-T1E1-Line Type
6105-2-T1E1-T1E1-Line Type
6105-*-Line Type
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Line Type Meaning
1 ISDN_E1_PRI
2 ISDN_T1_PRI
3 ISDN_E1_CAS
4 ISDN_T1_RBS
5 ISDN_E1_QSIG
6 ISDN_T1_QSIG
7 ISDN_E1_E&M
8 ISDN_T1_E&M
By default, signaling type/line type of a T1E1 is 1.
Assign E&M Feature Template to T1E1 using following command:
Use Following command to assign E&M Feature Template to T1E1 Port
6004-1-T1E1-Template Number
6004-2-T1E1-T1E1- Template Number
6004-*- Template Number
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Template Number is 01 to 50.
By default, Template 01 is assigned to T1E1.
Now proceed to program other parameters for E&M on T1E1 using following commands:
Use following command to select B Bit Value
7191-1-T1E1-Code
7191-2-T1E1-T1E1-Code
7191-*-Code
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Code Meaning
1 Same as A bit
2 Fixed Value
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1653
By default, the Code is 1 (Same as A bit)
Use following command to program B Bit Value
7192-1-T1E1-B Bit Value
7192-2-T1E1-T1E1- B Bit Value
7192-*- B Bit Value
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
B bit value can be 0 or 1.
By default, B bit value is 0.
Use following command to program CD Bit Value
7193-1-T1E1-CD Bit Value
7193-2-T1E1-T1E1-CD Bit Value
7193-*- CD Bit Value
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
CD bit value can be 1 or 3.
By default, CD bit value is 1.
Use following command to program to invert/don't invert Bit A for the T1E1 port:
7162-1-T1E1-Invert Bit A
7162-2-T1E1-T1E1-Invert Bit A
7162-*-Invert Bit A
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Invert Bit A Meaning
0 Do not invert
1 Invert
By default, Invert Bit A is 0.
Use following command to program to invert/don't invert Bit B for the T1E1 port:
7163-1-T1E1-Invert Bit B
7163-2-T1E1-T1E1-Invert Bit B
7163-*-Invert Bit B
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Invert Bit B Meaning
0 Do not invert
1 Invert
By default, Invert Bit B is 0.
Use following command to program to invert/don't invert Bit C for the T1E1 port:
7164-1-T1E1-Invert Bit C
7164-2-T1E1-T1E1-Invert Bit C
7164-*-Invert Bit C
1654 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Invert Bit C Meaning
0 Do not invert
1 Invert
By default, Invert Bit C is 0.
Use following command to program to invert/don't invert Bit D for the T1E1 port:
7165-1-T1E1-Invert Bit D
7165-2-T1E1-T1E1-Invert Bit D
7165-*-Invert Bit D
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Invert Bit D Meaning
0 Do not invert
1 Invert
By default, Invert Bit D is 0.
Use the following command to program the line build out parameters of a T1E1:
6162-1-T1E1-Code
6162-2-T1E1-T1E1-Code
6162-*-Code
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Code Meaning
1 0 - 133 ft.
2 133 - 266 ft.
3 266 - 399 ft.
4 399 - 533 ft.
5 533 - 655 ft.
6 -7.5 dB or equidistance
7 -16 dB or equidistance
8 -22.5 dB or equidistance
By default, code is 8 = -22.5 dB or equidistance.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1655
Gateway Application-Answer Signaling
This command is used to enable Gateway Application-Answer Signaling on T1E1 trunk. Refer chapter “Gateway
Application-Answer Signaling” for more details.
Use following command to set flag for 'Gateway Application-Answer Signaling' on T1E1 trunk:
6119-1-T1E1-Gateway Application-Answer Signaling flag
6119-2-T1E1-T1E1-Gateway Application-Answer Signaling flag
6119-*- Gateway Application-Answer Signaling flag
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
By default, Gateway Application-Answer Signaling flag is 'disable'.
Use following command to program DTMF digits string to be dialed as Gateway Application-Answer Signaling:
6120-1-T1E1-Gateway Application-Answer Signaling DTMF String
6120-2-T1E1-T1E1-Gateway Application-Answer Signaling DTMF String
6120-1-T1E1-Gateway Application-Answer Signaling DTMF String
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
DTMF Digits allowed for DTMF string are from (0 - 9), *, #, A, B, C, D.
Maximum 4 DTMF digits can be programmed. If you need less than 4 digits for DTMF string, terminate the
command using #*.
To program #, *, A, B, C, D use following codes:
Digit Code for programming through command
A #4
B #5
C #6
D #7
* **
# ##
By default Gateway Application-Answer Signaling DTMF String is 'CCC'.
Call Back on T1E1 Trunk Ports
Use the following commands to program Call Back on T1E1 Trunk ports. To know more about this feature, refer the
topic Call Back on Trunk Ports.
To enable/disable Call Back on T1E1 port:
6176-1-T1E1- Call Back Flag
1656 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
6176-2-T1E1-T1E1-Call Back Flag
6176- *-Call Back Flag
Where,
T1EI is from 1 to 8
Call Back Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
By default, Call Back flag is disabled.
To program Call Back Timer for T1E1 port:
6177-1-T1E1-Call Back Timer
6177-2-T1E1-T1E1-Call Back Timer
6177-*-Call Back Timer
Where,
T1EI is from 1 to 8
Pause Timer Range is from 01 to 99 Sec.
By default, Pause Timer is 10 Seconds
To program Call Back Mode on T1E1 port:
6178-1-T1E1-Call Back Mode
6178-2-T1E1-T1E1-Call Back Mode
6178-*-Call Back Mode
Where,
T1EI is from 1 to 8
Call Back Mode is 1 to 5
Call Back Mode Meaning
1 DID
PIN Auth. - Multiple
2
Calls
CLI Auth. - Multiple
3
Calls
CLI Auth. - Single
4
Call - Ans. Sig.
5 Operator
By default, Call Back mode is Operator
To program Call Back On method for T1E1 port:
6179-1-T1E1-Call Back on selection
6179-2-T1E1-T1E1-Call Back on selection
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1657
6179-*-Call Back on selection
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8
Call back on selection is
Call Back on Meaning
1 CLI Number
2 Alternate Number
By default, Call Back on selection is CLI Number
To assign Call Back - Incoming Number List to a T1E1 port:
6180-1-T1E1-Incoming Number List
6180-2-T1E1-T1E1-Incoming Number List
6180-*-Incoming Number List
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8
Incoming Number List is from 01 to 16.
By default, Incoming Number List is 15.
To assign a Call Back - Outgoing Number List to a T1E1 port:
6147-1-T1E1-Outgoing Number List
6147-2-T1E1-T1E1-Outgoing Number List
6147-*-Outgoing Number List
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8
Outgoing Number List is from 01 to 16.
By default, Outgoing Number List is 16.
To define Call Back From for a T1E1 port:
6148-1-T1E1-Call Back From
6148-2-T1E1-T1E1-Call Back From
6148-*-Call Back From
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8
Call Back From is
1 for Same Port
2 for OGTB Group
By default, Same Port is selected as Call Back From.
To assign a Call Back - OGTB Group for a T1E1 port:
6149-1-T1E1-OGTB Group
6149-2-T1E1-T1E1-OGTB Group
6149-*-OGTB Group
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8
OGTB Group is from 01 to 32
1658 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
By default, OGTBG is 01.
Relevant Topics:
1. “Direct Dialing-In (DDI)” 1148
2. “DDI Routing Table” 1081
3. “T1 RBS Parameters” 1660
4. “T1 Maintenance” 1600
5. “E&M Feature Template” 565
6. “Multi-Stage Dialing” 1331
7. “Gateway Application-Answer Signaling” 1236
8. “Call Budget on Trunk” 874
9. “Logical Partition” 1313
T1E1 PERFORMANCE REPORT AS ON 17-02-2011(Thu) AT 09:57
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PRBS Count 01 On T1E1 Port 0 At 17-02-2011 On 09:57:03
PRBS Count 01 On T1E1 Port 0 At 17-02-2011 On 09:57:04
PRBS Count 01 On T1E1 Port 0 At 17-02-2011 On 09:57:05
PRBS Count 01 On T1E1 Port 0 At 17-02-2011 On 09:57:06
PRBS Count 01 On T1E1 Port 0 At 17-02-2011 On 09:57:07
PRBS Count 01 On T1E1 Port 0 At 17-02-2011 On 09:57:08
PRBS Count 01 On T1E1 Port 0 At 17-02-2011 On 09:57:09
PRBS Count 01 On T1E1 Port 0 At 17-02-2011 On 09:57:10
PRBS Count 01 On T1E1 Port 0 At 17-02-2011 On 09:57:11
PRBS Count 01 On T1E1 Port 0 At 17-02-2011 On 09:57:12
PRBS Count 01 On T1E1 Port 0 At 17-02-2011 On 09:57:13
PRBS Count 01 On T1E1 Port 0 At 17-02-2011 On 09:57:14
PRBS Count 01 On T1E1 Port 0 At 17-02-2011 On 09:57:15
PRBS Count 01 On T1E1 Port 0 At 17-02-2011 On 09:57:16
PRBS Count 01 On T1E1 Port 0 At 17-02-2011 On 09:57:17
PRBS Count 01 On T1E1 Port 0 At 17-02-2011 On 09:57:18
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ETERNITY V10R06 Page : 1
Online report:
PRBS Count 25 On T1E1 Port 0 At 17-02-2011 On 17:16:12
PRBS Count 25 On T1E1 Port 0 At 17-02-2011 On 17:16:13
PRBS Count 25 On T1E1 Port 0 At 17-02-2011 On 17:16:14
PRBS Count 25 On T1E1 Port 0 At 17-02-2011 On 17:16:15
PRBS Count 25 On T1E1 Port 0 At 17-02-2011 On 17:16:16
PRBS Count 25 On T1E1 Port 0 At 17-02-2011 On 17:16:17
PRBS Count 25 On T1E1 Port 0 At 17-02-2011 On 17:16:18
PRBS Count 25 On T1E1 Port 0 At 17-02-2011 On 17:16:21
PRBS Count 25 On T1E1 Port 0 At 17-02-2011 On 17:16:22
PRBS Count 25 On T1E1 Port 0 At 17-02-2011 On 17:16:25
PRBS Count 25 On T1E1 Port 0 At 17-02-2011 On 17:16:26
PRBS Count 25 On T1E1 Port 0 At 17-02-2011 On 17:16:27
PRBS Count 25 On T1E1 Port 0 At 17-02-2011 On 17:16:28
PRBS Count 25 On T1E1 Port 0 At 17-02-2011 On 17:16:29
PRBS Count 25 On T1E1 Port 0 At 17-02-2011 On 17:16:30
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1659
T1 RBS Parameters
What’s this?
• Some countries like North America support the standard of 1.544Mbps of PCM trunk. This is known as T1
Trunks. The T1 type of PCM Trunks use Robbed Bit Signaling. ROBBED-BIT signaling is a per-channel
signaling technique for transmitting signaling bits on each channel in a T1E1 facility. The least-significant
bit in every 6th transmitted information frame is removed and replaced by a signaling bit. This technique is
also called in-band signaling. The maximum transmission rate for each bearer channel with ROBBED-BIT
signaling is 56 Kbps.
• ISDN-PRI signaling is carried on the 24th channel for a 1.544 Mbps connection and on the 16th channel
for a 2.048 Mbps connection. There are two types of parameters:
• Line Signaling (ABCD Bits)
• Register Signaling
• Line signaling is described by following types:
• E&M Wink, E&M FGD, E&M Delay, E&M Immediate, FXS Ground start.
• FXS Loop Start, FXO Loop Start and FXO Ground Start.
• T1 Line signaling type is applicable when the Line Type is programmed as T1 RBS for the T1E1 Port.
• Register signaling is described by following types:
• DTMF and Decadic (In this version ‘Decadic’ is not supported).
T1 Line signaling is applicable when the Line Type is programmed as ISDN_T1_RBS for the T1E1 Port.
Refer chapter “T1E1 Trunks” to program Line Type as T1 RBS.
E&M Wink Start
Bits A and B are set to 1 to indicate Off-hook. Bits A and B are set to 0 to indicate On-Hook. Bits C and D follow bits
A and B. The application for making calls and receiving calls is explained below:
Making an OG Call
• To transmit Off-Hook, bits A, B, C and D on the transmit channel are set to 1.
• The far end (network) sends a wink (a momentary OFF-Hook for 200ms). i.e. bits A, B, C and D on the
receive channel receive a pulse (Active High) of 200ms.
• On receipt of the wink signal, DNIS (Dialed Number Identification Service or DID) is sent on the speech
channels using the Register Signaling type (DTMF or Decadic (A-Bit) or R1 MFC or R2 MFC).
DNIS is Dialed Number In Service. It is the ISDN number that is being dialed. This is provided by the telco in
the call setup messages. DNIS can be used to provide differentiated service to dialing users.
The call goes through when the called party answers the call.
1660 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Receiving an IC Call
• Bit A, B, C and D =1 are received on the receive channel.
• The PBX sends a wink.
• The far end sends the DNIS in the speech channels using Register Signaling.
Disconnect
• By the Network-Bits A and B on the receive channel are 0. Bits C and D are also 0 in ESF. Following this,
the bits on the transmit channel are set to 0 by the PBX.
• By the PBX-Bit A and B on the transmit channel are set to 0. Bit C and D are also set to 0 in case of ESF.
Following this, the bits A and B(C and D in ESF) are received as 0 on the receive channel.
E&M Wink Start FGD
• Bits A and B are set to 1 to indicate OFF-Hook. Bits A and B are set to 0 to indicate ON-Hook. Bits C and
D follow bits A and B (Incase of ESF).
Making an OG Call
• To transmit OFF-Hook, bits A, B, C and D on the transmit channel are set to 1.
• The far end (network) sends a wink (a momentary OFF-Hook for 200ms.). i.e. bits A, B, C and D on the
receive channel receive a pulse (Active High) of 200ms.
• On receipt of the wink signal, DNIS (Dialed Number Identification Service or DID. It is the ISDN number
that is being dialed. This is provided by the telco in the call setup messages. DNIS can be used to provide
differentiated service to dialing users.) is sent on the speech channels using the Register Signaling type.
• The call goes through when the called party answers the call.
Receiving an IC Call
• Bit A, B, C and D =1 are received on the receive channel.
• The PBX sends a wink.
• The far end sends the DNIS in the speech channels using DTMF.
• On expiry of DTMF Inter-digit timer, the PBX sends a wink again.
• The PBX goes off hook when the call is answered by the called party.
Disconnect
• By the Network-Bits A and B on the receive channel are 0. Bits C and D are also 0 in ESF. Following this,
the bits on the transmit channel are set to 0 by the PBX.
• By the PBX-Bit A and B on the transmit channel are set to 0. Bit C and D are also set to 0 in case of ESF.
Following this, the bits A and (C and D in ESF) are received as 0 on the receive channel.
Please note that while using T1 RBS, only DID is being sent/received and not the CLI/ANI.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1661
E&M Delay Dial
Same as E&M Wink Start. But in this case, the receiving side does not send Wink. Instead the O/G side waits for
E&M Delay Dial timer before sending the DNIS.
E&M Immediate Start/Dial
Same as E&M Delay Dial. But here the O/G side sends the DNIS immediately after sending Off-hook on its transmit
channel.
FXS Loop Start
The T1E1 port acts as a FXS port whereas the network acts as FXO port. When configured for this type of
signaling, the FXS side (the PBX) uses the A-bit whereas the FXO side (the Network) uses the B-bit. Bits C and D
follow A and B bits.
Direction State A B C D
Transmit ON-Hook 0 1 0 1
Transmit OFF-Hook/Loop Closed 1 1 1 1
Receive ON-Hook 0 1 0 1
Receive OFF-Hook 0 1 0 1
Receive Ringing 1 1 1 1
Making an OG Call
• To transmit OFF-Hook, bits A (and Bit C if ESF) on the transmit channel is set to 1.
• The far end provides dial tone. There is no signaling change.
• The ETERNITY sends the DNIS (Dialed Number Identification Service or DID) on the speech channels
using the DTMF signals.
• The call goes through when the called party answers the call.
Receiving an IC Call
• Bit B (and bit D if ESF) toggles as per the ringing pattern.
• The Network sends the DNIS on the speech channel using DTMF signals.
• The PBX detects toggling of bit B. When the called station of the PBX answers, the PBX transmits Off-
hook state by changing bit-A from 0 to 1.
Disconnect
By the Network:
• No indication from the Network. The PBX will detect error tone to detect a disconnect from the network. On
detecting on-hook from the network, the PBX transmits on-hook by setting Bit A from 1 to 0.
By the PBX:
1662 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• The PBX transmits on-hook by setting Bit A from 1 to 0.
FXS Ground Start
The T1E1 port acts as a FXS port whereas the network acts as FXO port. When configured for this type of
signaling, the FXS side (the PBX) uses the A-bit (however, the PBX can use B-bit but generally it is ignored by the
Network) whereas the FXO side (the Network) uses the A and B-bits both. Bits C and D follow A and B bits.
Direction State A B C D
Transmit ON-Hook/Loop Open 0 1 0 1
Transmit Ground on Ring 0 0 0 0
Transmit OFF-Hook/Loop Closed 1 1 1 1
Receive ON-Hook/No TIP Ground 1 1 1 1
Receive OFF-Hook/TIP Ground 0 1 0 1
Receive Ringing 0 0 0 0
Making an OG Call
• To transmit Off-hook, bits A (and Bit C if ESF) and B (and Bit C if ESF) on the transmit channel is set to 0.
• The network detects this change and goes off-hook. The A-bit on the receive channel goes from 1 to 0.
The B-bit is set to 1.
• Bit A and Bit B are set to 1.
• Network sends dial tone.
• PBX detects dial tone and sends DNIS (DTMF digits) on the corresponding speech channel.
• The call goes through when the called party answers the call.
Receiving an IC Call
• Bit A (and bit C if ESF) goes from 1 to 0.
• Bit B (and bit D if ESF) toggles as per the ringing.
• The Network sends the DNIS on the speech channel using DTMF signals.
• The PBX detects toggling of bit B and the seizure on Bit A.
• When the called station of the PBX answers, the PBS transmits Off-hook state by changing bit-A from 0 to
1.
• The Network stops toggling of bit B. Bit B is set to 1.
Disconnect
• By the Network-A bit on the receive channel of the PBX goes from 0 to 1. On detecting on-hook from the
network, the PBX transmits on-hook by setting Bit A from 1 to 0.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1663
• By the PBX-The PBX transmits on-hook by setting Bit A from 1 to 0. On detecting on-hook from the PBX,
the network transmits on-hook by setting Bit A from 0 to 1.
• FXO Loop Start or FXO Ground Start is used when the ETERNITY is connected to the Network i.e. when
the T1E1 port is configured for Terminal mode (Connection mode).
• Whereas FXS Loop Start or FXS Ground Start is used when the ETERNITY is connected to another
ETERNITY i.e. when the T1E1 port is configured for Network mode.
FXO Loop Start-This is complementary to FXS Loop Start explained above.
FXO Ground Start-This is complementary to FXS Ground Start explained above.
How to configure
The commands explained below should be referred as:
• To program a single port: XXXX-1
• To program a range of ports: XXXX-2
• To program all the ports: XXXX-*
Step 1
T1 Line Signaling Variants
Program the line Signaling Variant for the T1E1 Port. This command is applicable when the Bit Rate = T1. The T1
Line Signaling Variants are as per standard EIA-464B/AT&T TR41458. (This standard specifies the “Requirements
of the PBX Switching Systems”).
Use following command to program the T1 Line Signaling Variants for the T1E1 port:
6181-1-T1E1-T1 Line Signaling Variants
6181-2-T1E1-T1E1-T1 Line Signaling Variants
6181-*-T1 Line Signaling Variants
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
T1 Line Signaling Variants Meaning
1 E&M Wink Start
2 E&M Delay Dial
3 E&M Immediate Start/Dial
4 FXS Ground Start
5 FXS Loop Start
6 FXO Ground Start
7 FXO Loop Start
By default, T1 Line Signaling variants for the T1E1 port is 1.
Step 2
Wink Timer-This timer signifies the wink time. Wink is defined as a momentary off-hook for the time defined. It acts
as an acknowledgment signal to the end making an O/G call.
1664 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Use the following command to program T1 wink timer for T1E1:
6182-1-T1E1-Wink Timer
6182-2-T1E1-T1E1-Wink Timer
6182-*-Wink Timer
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Wink Timer is from 0001 to 9999 ms.
By default, T1 Wink Timer is 0200 ms.
Step 3
Wink Wait Timer-This timer signifies the maximum time to wait before sending a wink start signal after an I/C
seizure is detected.
Use the following command to program the T1 wink wait timer for T1E1:
6183-1-T1E1-Wink Wait Timer
6183-2-T1E1-T1E1-Wink Wait Timer
6183-*-Wink Wait Timer
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Wink Wait Timer is from 0001 to 9999 ms.
By default, T1 Wink Wait Timer is 0200 ms.
Step 4
Wait Wink Timer-This timer signifies the time for which the system should wait for receiving the wink after sending
the OG Seizure.
Use the following command to program the T1 wait wink timer for T1E1:
6184-1-T1E1-Timer
6184-2-T1E1-T1E1-Timer
6184-*-Timer
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Timer is from 0001 to 9999 ms.
By default, T1 Wait Wink Timer is 0200 ms.
Step 5
Delay Duration-This duration signifies the time after which the DNIS information is to be sent (while making an OG
call)
Use the following command to program the T1 delay duration for T1E1:
6185-1-T1E1-Delay Duration
6185-2-T1E1-T1E1-Delay Duration
6185-*-Delay Duration
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Delay Duration is from 0001 to 9999 ms.
By default, T1 Delay Duration is 0140 ms.
Step 6
Start Delay Duration-This timer signifies the time for which the PBX waits for receiving DNIS from the network.
This timer is loaded on receiving the Off-hook (I/C Seizure) on the receive channel (while receiving an IC call)
Use the following command to program the T1 start delay duration for T1E1:
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1665
6186-1-T1E1-Start Delay Duration
6186-2-T1E1-T1E1-Start Delay Duration
6186-*-Start Delay Duration
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Start Delay Duration is from 001 to 255 seconds.
By default, T1 Start Delay Duration is 020 seconds.
Step 7
DTMF Digit Timer-This timer signifies the DTMF digit time
Use the following command to program the T1 DTMF digit timer for T1E1:
6187-1-T1E1-DTMF Digit Timer
6187-2-T1E1-T1E1-DTMF Digit Timer
6187-*-DTMF Digit Timer
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
DTMF Digit Timer is from 001 to 255 ms.
By default, T1 DTMF Digit Timer is 100 ms.
Step 8
DTMF Inter Digit Timer-This timer signifies the Inter-digit timer between the DTMF digits being dialed for the DNIS
(or the DID) information.
Use the following command to program the T1 DTMF inter digit timer for T1E1:
6188-1-T1E1-DTMF Inter Digit Timer
6188-2-T1E1-T1E1-DTMF Inter Digit Timer
6188-*-DTMF Inter Digit Timer
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
DTMF Inter Digit Timer is from 001 to 255 ms.
By default, T1 DTMF Inter Digit Timer is 100 ms.
Step 9
Debug for T1E1 Port
ETERNITY supports debug of parameters (debug codes) depending on the Level of debug. On issuing this
command the ETERNITY ME Card T1E1 will send the debug details to the COM port of the T1E1 port.
Please note following command change as per Version of Software used. First set of Command '6191' is
used up to Version V6R0.12 and Commands at the end of 'Level 4' are used for Version V6R0.13
onwards. Here 'XXX' is the Code as mentioned in Tables for Level1 to level 4.
Till S/W V6R12 V6R13 and onward
Debug Level-1 6191-1-T1E1-1-XXX 6191-1-T1E1-1-XXX
Debug Level-2 6191-1-T1E1-2-XXX 6191-1-T1E1-2-XXX
Debug Level-3 6191-1-T1E1-3-XXX 6192-1-T1E1-1-XXX
Debug Level-4 6191-1-T1E1-4-XXX 6192-1-T1E1-2-XXX
Option 1
Use following command to start/stop debug the parameters for the T1E1 port:
6191-1-T1E1-Level-Debug Code
1666 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
6191-2-T1E1-T1E1-Level-Debug Code
6191-*-Level-Debug Code
Where,
T1E1 Port is from 1 to 8.
Level is from 1 to 4 (As shown below).
Code is the value for the specified level to turn ON the debug for the parameters. Code range is from 000 to 255.
Code value ‘000’ for each level will turn off that level’s debug.
Level 1:
Unused Unused Unused Unused Layer 4 CAS DSP MFC R2 CAS
001 CAS
002 MFC R2
004 CAS DSP
008 Layer 4
000 Debug Off
Level 2:
Unused Unused Unused HDLC (D-Channel) FDL ABCD Bits Counters Alarms
001 Alarms
002 Counters
004 ABCD Bits
008 FDL
HDLC (D
016
Channel)
000 Debug Off
Level 3:
Unused Flow Debug NLS Debug LAP Debug SVC Primitives Variables State Primitives
001 Primitives
002 State
004 Variables
008 SVC Primitives
016 LAP Debug
032 NLS Debug
064 Flow Debug
000 Debug Off
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1667
Level 4:
Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused NI Debug OS Task
001 OS Task
002 NI Debug
000 Debug Off
Default: Debug Code = ‘Debug OFF’ for all T1E1 ports for all levels.
Option 2
Use following command to enabled Global Level-1 debug for T1E1 Port (ETERNITY-ME and ETERNITY-GE)
619-1-1-T1E1-1-Code
619-1-2-T1E1- T1E1-1-Code
619-1-*-1-Code
Where,
Code is from 000 to 255
Code Debug Description
001 Log Primitive
002 Lap State
004 Lap Variables
008 Log SVC Primitive
016 Log Debug
032 Log NLS
064 Log Flow
Default is 000.
While using 6191 command:
• In ETERNITY GE, issue * Command only.
• In ETERNITY ME with ETERNITY ME Card T1E1 Dual, issue command for both the T1E1 software
port number assigned to ETERNITY ME Card T1E1 Dual.
• In ETERNITY ME with ETERNITY ME Card T1E1 Single, issue command for the T1E1 software port
number as required.
• In ETERNITY ME use * command only if debug for all the T1E1 port is to be enabled/disabled.
Option 3
Use following command to enabled Global Level-2 debug for T1E1 Port (ETERNITY-ME and ETERNITY-GE)
6191-1-T1E1-2-Code
6191-2-T1E1-T1E1-2-Code
6191-*-2-Code
Where,
Code is from 000 to 255.
Code Debug Description
001 Telesoft NI Debug
1668 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Code Debug Description
002 Telesoft OS Debug
000 Debug Off
Default is 000.
While using 6191 command:
• In ETERNITY GE, issue * Command only.
• In ETERNITY ME with ETERNITY ME Card T1E1 Dual, issue command for both the T1E1 software
port number assigned to T1E1 Dual card.
• In ETERNITY ME with ETERNITY ME Card T1E1 Single, issue command for the T1E1 software port
number as required.
• In ETERNITY ME use * command only if debug for all the T1E1 port is to be enabled/disabled.
Use following command to enabled T1E1 Port Level Debug (ETERNITY-ME and ETERNITY-GE)
6192-1-T1E1-1-Code
6192-2-T1E1-T1E1-1-Code
6192-*-1-Code
Where,
Code is from 000 to 255.
Code Debug Description
001 CAS Debug
002 R2 MFC State Debug
004 L4 Message Debug
008 R2 MFC R2 Digit Debug
016 DTMF Digit Debug
000 Debug Off
Default is 000.
Use following command to enable T1E1 Port-Port Level Physical Layer Debug:
6192 -1-T1E1- 2- Code
6192 -2-T1E1-T1E1- 2- Code
6192 -*- 2- Code
Where,
Code is from 000 to 255.
Code Debug Description
001 Alarm Debug
002 Error Counter
004 ABCD Bits
008 FDL Debug
016 HDLC Flag
000 Debug Off
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1669
Default is 000.
Step 10
Use the following command to program T1 Register Signaling Variant for the T1E1 port:
6161-1-T1E1-T1 Register Signaling Variant
6161-2-T1E1-T1E1-T1 Register Signaling Variant
6161-*-T1 Register Signaling Variant
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
T1 Register Signaling Variant Meaning
1 T1 RBS Decadic
2 T1 RBS DTMF
3 T1 RBS MFC R2
4 T1 RBS MFC R1
By default, T1 Register Signaling Variant is 2.
T1 RBS Decadic: A-bit is used to transmit the DNIS. The A-bit is toggle as per the Pulse dial Ratio Set.
T1 RBS DTMF: DNIS is transmitted in the corresponding speech channel using the DTMF signals as per the ITU-T
Q.23.
T1 RBS MFC R2: Same as above but using MFCR2 as per ITU-T Q.400-Q.490.
T1 RBS MFC R1: Same as above but MFCR1 as per ITU-T Q.300-Q.390.
Step 11
This parameter signifies the pulse dial ratio at which the signaling is done on the T1 RBS Line with T1 Register
Signaling = T1 RBS Decadic.
Use the following command to program digital pulse dial ratio for the T1E1 port:
6163-1-T1E1-Code
6163-2-T1E1-T1E1-Code
6163-*-Code
Where,
T1E1 is from 1 to 8.
Code Meaning
1 10 PPS, 1:2
2 10 PPS, 2:3
3 10 PPS, 1:1
By default, Digital Pulse Dial Ratio is 1.
Relevant Topics:
1. “T1 Maintenance” 1600
2. “T1E1 Trunks” 1608
1670 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Time Tables
What's this?
Certain features of the ETERNITY like Operator, Class of Service, Toll Control, Outgoing Trunk Access, among
others, require stations and trunks to behave differently according to the time of the day, which is referred to as
Time Zone.
For example, incoming calls are to be routed to the security personnel extension, instead of the Operator when the
office is closed, or certain features in the Class of Service are to be allowed only during working hours, or access to
outgoing long distance calls are to be denied during non-working hours, or the station must play a different greeting
message to the callers during break hours and holidays.
Time Tables can be assigned to stations and trunks to define their behavior according to the time of the day, i.e.
Time Zone.
Time Zones
A day can be divided into three time zones: Working hours, Break hours and Non-working hours. The default Time
Zones defined for each day are:
• Working hours: 09:00 to 18:00
• Break hours: 13:00 to 14:00
• Non-working hours: 18:00 to 09:00
Working, Break and Non-Working hours are set to 00:00 for Sunday.
You can define a different Time Zone for your organization. Further, you can program each day of a week with
different time zones. For example, you may define the Working hours from Monday to Friday as 09:30 to 18:30, and
for Saturday, from 09:30 to 15:00. If you have a 24x7 business, you may set Working Hours also for Sunday.
Time Tables
A Time Table is a schedule of the three Time Zones, namely: Working Hours, Break Hours, Non-Working hours, for
the entire week.
A Time Table is assigned to stations defining the Time Zones for the entire week, so that the system can execute
the Time Zone-dependent features and facilities according to the Time Table.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1671
There are 8 different Time Table templates to select from.
Time Table 8
Time Table 7
Time Table 6
Time Table 5
Time Table 4
Time Table 3
Time Table 2
Time Table 1
By default, the Time Table 1 is assigned to all stations and trunks in their Station Basic Feature Template and
Trunk Feature Template respectively. In Time Table 1, six days of the week - Monday to Saturday -have working
hours from 9:00-18:00, break hours from 13:00-14:00 hours and non-working hours from 18:00 to 09:00. Sunday is
a holiday, with all three Time Zones set to 00:00 hours.
You may also customize the default Time Table 1 OR customize and assign a different Time Table to the stations
and trunks.
ETERNITY offers the facility to switch the system manually into "Day/Night mode", at any point in time, by
issuing a command. When you set the system in Day/Night Mode, the system overrides the Time Tables
assigned to Trunks, Stations and Operator. According to the mode you selected, it applies Working Hours/
Non-Working Hours to run all the Time-Zone dependent features of the system.
Refer the topic “Day Night Mode” to know more.
How to configure
A Trunk port can be assigned Time Table in the “Trunk Feature Template” assigned to it. A Station port can be
assigned a time table in the “Station Basic Feature Template” assigned to it.
The default Time Table 1 is assigned to both stations and trunks of ETERNITY. Check if this time table matches the
working hours of the organization, and the Time Zone requirements of the individual stations and trunks.
The following station parameters can be programmed differently for different Time Zones:
• Class of Service.
• Toll Control.
• OG Trunk Bundle Group.
The following trunk parameters can be programmed differently for different Time Zones:
• DID
• DISA
1672 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Trunk Landing Group
The following features can be programmed differently for different Time Zones:
• Security Alarms
• Door Phone call Routing
You may retain the default Time Table 1 or customize it to suit your requirements. Or you may customize different
Time Tables and assign them to different stations and trunks.
You can customize a Time Table using Jeeves or by dialing commands from a Telephone.
Programming Time Table using Jeeves
• Log in as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click the link 'Time Table' to open the page.
• Select the desired Time Table number and define the Time Zones, i.e. working hours, break hours and
non-working hours.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your changes.
• Now, assign the Time Table you program to the desired Station/Trunk.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1673
• To assign Time Table to Stations, go to Station Basic Feature Template. Refer the topic “Customizing
Station Basic Feature Template using a Telephone” for instructions.
• To assign Time Table to Trunks, go to Trunk Feature Template. Refer the topic “Customizing Trunk
Feature Template using a Telephone” for details a how to assign timetable to trunks.
• Log out of Jeeves or continue programming, as required.
Programming Time Table using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
To program a timetable, dial:
• 1052-1-Time Table-Day-Time Zone-Start Time-End Time to program a single time Table.
• 1052-2-Time Table-Time Table-Day-Time Zone-Start Time-End Time to program the same time
zones for a range of time tables.
• 1052-*-Day-Time Zone-Start Time-End Time to program the same time zones for all time tables.
Where,
Time Table is from 1 to 8.
Day is the Day of the week
1 for Sunday
2 for Monday
3 for Tuesday
4 for Wednesday
5 for Thursday
6 for Friday
7 for Saturday
Start Time is Time Zone start time in 24-hours, HH:MM format. Where Hours is 00 to 23 and Minutes is
00 to 59.
End time is Time Zone end time in 24 hours, HH:MM format. Where Minutes is 00 to 59.
By default, Time Zone 1 is 0900 to 1800 and Time Zone 2 is 1300 to 1400. The left over time
automatically is treated as Non-Working Hours.
To default a time table, dial:
• 1051-1-Time Table to default a single time table.
• 1051-2-Time Table-Time Table to default a range of time tables.
• 1051-* to default all time tables.
Where,
Time Table is 1 to 8.
To assign Time Table to Stations and Trunk ports using SE commands, refer the topics “Customizing
Station Basic Feature Template using a Telephone” and “Customizing Trunk Feature Template using
a Telephone”.
• Exit SE mode.
1674 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Time Zone Display
What’s this?
The current time zone—Working Hours, Break Hours and Non-working Hours—is displayed on the LCD of the DKP
and the Extended IP Phone.
During Non-working hours the letter ‘N’ is displayed on the LCD of the DKP and the Extended IP Phone in the idle
state, and during Break hours, the letter ‘B’ is displayed.
During working hours, in the idle state, the phone display will look like this:
M on 20 D EC 16:58
3003 R eception 2
During Non-working hours, in the idle state, the phone display will look like this:
M on 20 D EC 16:58 N
3003 R eception 2
During Non-working hours, in the idle state, if the extension user has set User Absent and activated Keypad Lock
on the phone, the phone display will look like this:
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1675
Toll Control
What's this?
Toll Control (or Toll Restriction) is an expense control feature of ETERNITY. It enables you to program the system
so that each extension has a designated calling permission referred to as 'Call Privilege'.
Each type Call Privilege allows the extension to call certain areas and restricts it from calling others. The extension
can also be restricted from the dialing of specific telephone numbers.
The ETERNITY supports five types of Call Privileges, these are:
• No Calls: Dialing of all external numbers is restricted. Only internal (extension-to-extension) calls are
allowed.
Only the numbers programmed in Global Directory Part I will be allowed to be dialed out, if the directory is
allowed in the Class of Service of the extension.
• Local Calls: Dialing of outgoing calls to Local area numbers, in addition to internal calls, is allowed. It is
possible to restrict calls to certain local numbers. To apply this Call Privilege, you must configure the 'Local
Numbers' list.
• Regional Calls: Dialing of outgoing calls to regional numbers is allowed, in addition to internal and local
calls. It is possible to restrict calls to certain regions. To apply this Call Privilege type, you must configure
the 'Regional Numbers' list.
• National Calls: Dialing of domestic, long-distance numbers within the country is allowed, in addition to
internal and regional calls. You can also restrict calls to certain parts of the country. To apply this Call
Privilege type, you must configure the 'National Numbers' list.
• International Calls: Dialing of international numbers is allowed, in addition to local area, long distance
and internal numbers. You can also restrict calls to certain countries. To apply this Call Privilege type, you
must configure the 'International Numbers' list.
• Limited Calls: Dialing of only specific Telephone numbers (regional, national or international) is allowed.
By applying this Call Privilege type, you can allow and restrict dialing of telephone numbers starting with a
particular digit, or a particular area code, or certain telephone numbers only. To apply this Call Privilege
type, you must program an 'Allowed List' with the numbers that are to be allowed and a 'Denied List' with
numbers that are to be restricted.
Toll Control forms the basis of the features “Dynamic Lock” and “Call Budget”.
Using “Dynamic Lock”, extension users can change the Toll Control (Call Privilege) of their extensions on their own.
The Operator or System Administrator can also change the Toll Control of the extension using Dynamic Lock. To
support this feature, ETERNITY offers fours levels of Toll Control, from 0 to 3.
When the “Call Budget” feature is used on extensions, it becomes necessary to define the calling permission for
extensions that have consumed their allotted budget. To support this feature, ETERNITY offers Toll Control-Call
Budget Consumed.
1676 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Toll Control Levels
For each Toll Control Level from 0 to 3, a 'Call Privilege' is defined. The system applies the Toll Control Level (i.e.
the Call Privilege) set by the extension users themselves or set by the System Administrator/Operator for the
extensions using Dynamic Lock.
• Toll Control - Level 0 is Time Zone based, wherein you must define the Call Privilege Type for each Time
Zone, i.e. Working Hours, Break Hours and Non-Working Hours. For instance, you may define
'International Calls' as Call Privilege for Working Hours, 'Local Calls' as Call Privilege for Break Hours and
'No Calls' as Call Privilege for 'Non-Working' Hours.
By default, Call Privilege 'International Calls' is selected for all three Time Zones.
• Toll Control - Level 1 is not based on Time Zones. By default, the Call Privilege Type for this level is
'Local Calls'.
• Toll Control - Level 2 is not based on Time Zones. By default, the Call Privilege type set for this level is
'National Calls'.
• Toll Control - Level 3 is not based on Time Zones. By default, Call Privilege 'No Calls' is selected for this
level.
• Toll Control - Call Budget Consumed is applied only if the “Call Budget” feature is enabled on the
extension.
ETERNITY offers you the flexibility to redefine the Call Privilege for each of the above Toll Control Levels according
to user requirements.
How it works
• When a call is made, the ETERNITY checks the Toll Control Level assigned to the extension making the
call.
• The system checks the 'Call Privilege' programmed in the Toll Control Level of the extension.
• For each call privilege type detected, the system will check the following to determine if call is to be
allowed or denied, as summarized in the table below:
Type Call Privilege detected Logic will check
Local calls Local Number List programmed.
Regional calls Regional Number List programmed
National calls National Number List programmed
International calls International Number List programmed
Limited Calls Allowed and Denied Number Lists assigned to the extension in its Station
Basic Feature Template
• The Local, Regional, National and International Number Lists consist of Allowed Numbers and Denied
Numbers.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1677
• The system compares the each digit of the dialed number string with the number strings programmed in
the Allowed and Denied Number Lists of the Local/Regional/National/International Number Lists, using the
following logic:
Allowed Number List Denied Number List Result
match found match found Call allowed
match found no match found Call allowed
no match found no match found Call allowed
no match found match found Call denied
• The call is allowed to be made, if the dialed number:
• matches with Allowed Number list and the Denied Number list.
• matches with Allowed Number list, but not with the Denied Number list.
• matches with neither the Allowed List nor the Denied List.
• The call is restricted, if the dialed number matches with the Denied Number list, but not with the Allowed
Number list.
How to configure
For Toll Control to work, you must first program the lists of Local Numbers, Regional Numbers, National Numbers
and International Numbers. With these number lists ready, you may program the Toll Control Levels.
Before you program, make a two-column tables each for Local, Regional, National and International numbers on
paper or using a computer. On one column of each list, write down the numbers you want to permit. On the other
column write down the numbers you want to restrict.
Call Privilege of Local Numbers (List of Local Numbers)
Sr. No. Allowed List Denied List
999
Call Privilege of Regional Numbers (List of Regional Numbers)
Sr. No. Allowed List Denied List
1678 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Sr. No. Allowed List Denied List
999
Call Privilege of International Numbers (List of International Numbers)
Sr. No. Allowed List Denied List
999
Programming Toll Control using Jeeves
• Login as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access mode.
• Click 'Regional Settings' link.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1679
Local Numbers
• Click the link 'Local Numbers' to open the page.
• Enter the local area numbers that are permitted to be dialed in the 'Allowed List' and the numbers that are
to be restricted in the 'Denied List'. You may enter as many as 999 numbers in each list.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save the entries.
1680 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Regional Numbers
• Click the link 'Regional Numbers' to open the page.
• Enter the regional area numbers that are permitted to be dialed in the 'Allowed List' and the numbers that
are to be restricted in the 'Denied List'.
• Repeat the entries you made in the 'Local Number' list also in the 'Regional Numbers' list.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save the entries.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1681
National Numbers
• Click the link 'National Numbers' to open the page.
• Enter the long distance numbers within the country that are to be permitted in the 'Allowed List' and the
numbers that are to be restricted in the 'Denied List'.
• Repeat the entries you made in the 'Local Numbers' and the "Regional Numbers' lists in this list.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save the entries.
1682 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
International Numbers
• Click the link 'International Numbers' to open the page.
• Enter the overseas numbers that are to be permitted in the 'Allowed List' and the numbers that are to be
restricted in the 'Denied List'.
• Repeat the entries you made in the lists of 'Local Numbers', 'Regional Numbers' and 'National Numbers' in
this list.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save the entries.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1683
Number Lists for 'Limited Calls'
• Click the link 'Number List' to open the page.
• By default Number List 01 is assigned to both Allowed and Denied List for Limited Calls.
• Select a different Number List for Allowed List, for example 02. Enter the specific numbers or digits that are
to be allowed to be dialed in the list.
• Click 'Submit' to save your entries.
• Select another Number List for Denied List, for example 03. Enter the specific numbers or digits that are to
be restricted from being dialed in this list.
• Click 'Submit' to save your entries.
It is not mandatory to assign the same Limited-Calls Allowed-List and Denied-List for all Time Zones of Toll
Control Level 0 or to other Toll Control Levels. You can prepare different Allowed and Denied Lists for
each Toll Control Level.
Toll Control Levels
• Click 'Station Basic Feature Template' to open the page.
• By default all stations of ETERNITY are assigned Template 01. You may customize this template or select
another template.
1684 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Go to Toll Control Level 0.
• Select the desired Call Privilege Type for each Time Zone - Working Hours, Break Hours, Non-Working
hours.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1685
• If you have set 'Limited Calls' as the Call Privilege type for a Time Zone, enter the number of the List you
prepared for permitted numbers in the 'Allowed List'. Enter the number of the list you prepared for
restricted numbers in the 'Denied List'.
• Repeat the same steps to select the Call Privilege type for other Toll Control Levels 1, 2 and 3.
• Click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save the entries.
• Log out of Jeeves or continue programming.
Programming Toll Control using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode from a DKP/SLT.
Local Numbers
To program Local Numbers Allowed List, dial:
• 4303-Index-Number String-#*
Where,
Index is the location at which the number should be stored in the list, from 001 to 999.
Number String can be maximum 16 digits and should be terminated with #* if it has fewer than 16
digits.
1686 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Refer the following table for codes for dialing special digits: 0-9, #, *, A, B, C, D, Flash (F), Pause (P), +,
Dot (.).
Special Digit Code
Flash (F) #2
Pause (P) #3
A #4
B #5
C #6
D #7
+ #8
Dot (.) #9
# ##
* **
To program Local Numbers Denied List, dial:
• 4304-Index-Number String-#*
To default the Local Numbers List, dial:
• 4311-Reverse SE Password
Regional Numbers
To program Regional Numbers Allowed List, dial:
• 4305-Index-Number String-#*
Where,
Index is the location at which the number should be stored in the list, from 001 to 999.
Number String can be maximum 16 digits and should be terminated with #* if it has fewer than 16
digits.
For keying in special digits, refer the above table.
To program Regional Numbers Denied List, dial
• 4306-Index-Number String-#*
To default the Regional Numbers List, dial:
• 4312-Reverse SE Password
National Numbers
To program National Numbers Allowed List, dial:
• 4307-Index-Number String-#*
Where,
Index is the location at which the number should be stored in the list, from 001 to 999.
Number String can be maximum 16 digits and should be terminated with #* if it has fewer than 16
digits.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1687
For keying in special digits, refer the above table.
To program National Numbers Denied List, dial:
• 4308-Index-Number String-#*
To default the National Numbers List, dial:
• 4313-Reverse SE Password
International Numbers
To program International Numbers Allowed List, dial:
• 4309-Index-Number String-#*
Where,
Index is the location at which the number should be stored in the list, from 001 to 999.
Number String can be maximum 16 digits and should be terminated with #* if it has fewer than 16
digits.
For keying in special digits, refer the above table.
To program International Numbers Denied List, dial:
• 4310-Index-Number String-#*
To default the International Numbers List, dial:
• 4314-Reverse SE Password
Limited Calls - Allowed and Denied Lists
To program Limited Calls - Allowed/Denied List, dial:
• 4302-List Number-Location Index-Number-#*
Where,
List is the number of the List you customized as Allowed/Denied List, from 01 to 16.
Location Index is the index number at which the number should be stored in the list, from 001 to 999.
Number is the number string you want to store at this location index on the list. The number can be
maximum 16 digits and should be terminated with #* if it has fewer than 16 digits. Refer the following
table for codes for dialing special digits: 0-9, #, *, A, B, C, D, Flash (F), Pause (P), +, Dot (.).
Special Digit Code
Flash (F) #2
Pause (P) #3
A #4
B #5
C #6
D #7
+ #8
Dot (.) #9
# ##
* **
1688 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To clear a number programmed in a List, dial:
• 4302-List Number-Location Index-#*
Where,
List Number is the number of the list from which the number is to be cleared, from 01 to 16.
Location Index is the number on this list at which the number to be cleared is stored, from 001 to 999.
Toll Control Levels
To program Toll Control - Level 0 (WH), dial:
• 5502-1-Template-07-Call Privilege Type
Where,
Template is number of the Station Basic Feature Template, from 01 to 50
07 is the feature number for Toll Control Level 0 (WH) on the template.
Call Privilege Type is
1 for No Calls
2 for Local Calls
3 for Regional Calls
4 for National Calls
5 for International Calls
6 for Limited Calls
To program Toll Control - Level 0 (WH) Allowed List, dial:
• 5502-1-Template-08-Number List
Where,
Template is number of the Station Basic Feature Template, from 01 to 50
08 is the feature number on the template for Toll Control Level 0 (WH) Allowed List for Limited Calls.
Number List is the number of the list prepared as Allowed List for Limited Calls, from 01 to 16.
To program Toll Control - Level 0 (WH) Denied List, dial:
• 5502-1-Template-09-Number List
Where,
Template is number of the Station Basic Feature Template, from 01 to 50
09 is the feature number on the template for Toll Control Level 0 (WH) Denied List for Limited Calls.
Number List is the number of the list prepared as Denied List for Limited Calls, from 01 to 16.
To program Toll Control - Level 0 (BH), dial:
• 5502-1-Template-10-Call Privilege Type
Where,
Template is number of the Station Basic Feature Template, from 01 to 50
10 is the feature number for Toll Control Level 0 (BH) on the template.
Call Privilege Type is
1 for No Calls
2 for Local Calls
3 for Regional Calls
4 for National Calls
5 for International Calls
6 for Limited Calls
To program Toll Control - Level 0 (BH) Allowed List, dial:
• 5502-1-Template-11-Number List
Where,
Template is number of the Station Basic Feature Template, from 01 to 50
11 is the feature number on the template for Toll Control Level 0 (BH) Allowed List for Limited Calls.
Number List is the number of the list prepared as Allowed List for Limited Calls, from 01 to 16.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1689
To program Toll Control - Level 0 (BH) Denied List, dial:
• 5502-1-Template-12-Number List
Where,
Template is number of the Station Basic Feature Template, from 01 to 50
09 is the feature number on the template for Toll Control Level 0 (BH) Denied List for Limited Calls.
Number List is the number of the list prepared as Denied List for Limited Calls, from 01 to 16.
To program Toll Control - Level 0 (NH), dial:
• 5502-1-Template-13-Call Privilege Type
Where,
Template is number of the Station Basic Feature Template, from 01 to 50
10 is the feature number for Toll Control Level 0 (NH) on the template.
Call Privilege Type is:
1 for No Calls
2 for Local Calls
3 for Regional Calls
4 for National Calls
5 for International Calls
6 for Limited Calls
To program Toll Control - Level 0 (NH) Allowed List, dial:
• 5502-1-Template-14-Number List
Where,
Template is number of the Station Basic Feature Template, from 01 to 50
11 is the feature number on the template for Toll Control Level 0 (NH) Allowed List for Limited Calls.
Number List is the number of the list prepared as Allowed List for Limited Calls, from 01 to 16.
To program Toll Control - Level 0 (NH) Denied List, dial:
• 5502-1-Template-15-Number List
Where,
Template is number of the Station Basic Feature Template, from 01 to 50
09 is the feature number on the template for Toll Control Level 0 (NH) Denied List for Limited Calls.
Number List is the number of the list prepared as Denied List for Limited Calls, from 01 to 16.
To program Toll Control - Level 1, dial:
• 5502-1-Template-16-Call Privilege Type
Where,
Template is number of the Station Basic Feature Template, from 01 to 50
16 is the feature number for Toll Control Level 1 on the template.
Call Privilege Type is:
0 for No Calls
1 for Local Calls
2 for Regional Calls
3 for National Calls
4 for International Calls
To program Toll Control - Level 2, dial:
• 5502-1-Template-17-Call Privilege Type
Where,
Template is number of the Station Basic Feature Template, from 01 to 50
1690 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
17 is the feature number for Toll Control Level 2 on the template.
Call Privilege Type is
0 for No Calls
1 for Local Calls
2 for Regional Calls
3 for National Calls
4 for International Calls
To program Toll Control - Level 3, dial:
• 5502-1-Template-18-Call Privilege Type
Where,
Template is number of the Station Basic Feature Template, from 01 to 50
18 is the feature number for Toll Control Level 3 on the template.
Call Privilege Type is
0 for No Calls
1 for Local Calls
2 for Regional Calls
3 for National Calls
4 for International Calls
To program Toll Control - Call Budget Consumed, dial:
• 5502-1-Template-19-Call Privilege Type
Where,
Template is number of the Station Basic Feature Template, from 01 to 50
19 is the number for this feature on the template.
Call Privilege Type is
0 for No Calls
1 for Local Calls
2 for Regional Calls
3 for National Calls
4 for International Calls
• Exit SE mode.
Also refer the topics “Configuring Extensions”, “Station Basic Feature Template”, “Number Lists”.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1691
Trunk Access Group (TAG)
The topic ‘Trunk Access Group’ is renamed as ‘OG Trunk Bundle Group (OGTBG)’ in Firmware Version V6 and
later of ETERNITY.
Refer chapter “OG Trunk Bundle Group” for more details.
1692 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Trunk Auto Answer
What’s this?
• The calls landing on a trunk are answered automatically.
• This is a very useful feature in call centres.
• By enabling Auto Answer on trunks, you can ensure the caller will not get a busy tone, which may force
him to disconnect his call.
• By enabling Auto Answer, the caller will be greeted with pleasant greetings and voice messages before the
call is actually handled. The caller will get music when station becomes free.
• By enabling Auto Answer, the caller will be offered ‘Busy Message’ called ‘Trunk Auto Answer Busy Bye
Message’, if the incoming call is answered using Trunk Auto Answer feature and the call is not answered
by routing group member within specific time of DID inactivity Timer. Refer flow chart.
How it works
• ETERNITY supports 3 types of Trunk Auto Answer.
• Disabled.
• All (All calls landing on the trunk are answered automatically).
• Busy.
• The Trunk Auto Answer type can be different for different Time zones viz. WH, BH, NH.
• Greetings can be assigned to the trunks to greet the caller based on the Time Zone.
• These greetings are played only once.
• After the greetings the trunk can be programmed to play one of the following to the Caller.
• Ring Back Tone.
• Internal Hold Music.
• External Hold Music.
• Voice Messages:
• ETERNITY offers 4 Voice Messages that can be played back after the greetings.
• ETERNITY offers 4 voice messages for Trunk Auto Answer Busy Bye Message.
How to configure
Please refer the topic “Trunk Feature Template” for details on programming Trunk Auto Answer.
This feature is same as the one offered by many IVR systems, like Railway Enquiry, Banking Industry, etc.
This notifies the caller that someone would attend him shortly. This feature finds large application in call
centers.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1693
Start
Call originates on the Trunk
Auto
No
Answer
Enable?
Yes
Process the call as
Answer the call per the programming
Load DID Inactivity Timer
End
Check routing group assigned to trunk port
and Play Trunk Auto Answer Greeting
message once (if enabled), followed by
continuous Trunk Auto Answer RBT
message (if enabled, otherwise play RBT)
Process the call as per the logic and
programming of the routing group
assigned to the trunk
Call No
Answered?
Yes DID Inactivity No
Timer Expired?
Stop DID Inactivity
Timer and Trunk Auto Yes
Answer RBT message.
Connect caller with call If VM is assigned : Play Trunk
answering station Auto Answer Busy Bye
Message (once) else play Busy
Tone for the Busy Tone Timer
End
Release the Trunk Port
End
Relevant Topics:
“Trunk Feature Template”
“Voice Message Applications”
“Auto Answer”
1694 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
What’s this?
Trunk Auto Answer enables calls landing on a trunk to be answered automatically by greeting the caller with a voice
message before the call is actually handled.
Trunk Auto Answer is useful when you want callers to remain connected until one of the landing destinations
selected for incoming trunk calls becomes free to attend to the caller.
Trunk Auto Answer is useful in call centres, railway enquiry, banks, where callers need to be notified that they
would be attended shortly, so that they do not disconnect the call.
ETERNITY offers two types of Trunk Auto Answer:
• For all Calls: the system answers all incoming calls landing on the trunk line.
• When Busy: the system answers incoming calls on the trunk, only if the landing destinations are busy.
How it works
Trunk Auto Answer on a trunk works only when Operator or Extension/s is selected as the landing destination for
incoming calls for the Day and Night.
So, you can enable Trunk Auto Answer on a CO, Mobile or SIP trunk, only if you have selected Operator or
Extensions as the destination for incoming calls on that trunk.
ETERNITY NE handles incoming calls on the trunk according to the type of Trunk Auto Answer selected for the
trunk: For all Calls or When Busy
When Trunk Auto Answer–For all Calls is enabled on a CO, Mobile or SIP Trunk, for each incoming call on the
trunk,
• The System answers the with a Greeting message, known as the Trunk Auto Answer Greeting, and rings
the landing destination—Operator or Extensions—selected for the time of the day.
The system starts the DID Inactivity Timer (default: 60 seconds). The Trunk Auto Greeting message is
played once. You may assign a Trunk Auto Answer Greeting of your preference.
• If the landing destination does not answer before the Trunk Auto Answer Greeting message ends, the
system plays Trunk Auto Answer Ring Back Tone message to the caller.
The Ring Back Tone message is played repeatedly for the duration of the DID Inactivity Timer.
However, if no Trunk Auto Answer Ring Back Tone message is assigned, the system will plays Ring Back
Tone to the caller for the duration of this timer.
• If any of the landing destinations answers the call before the expiry of the DID Inactivity Timer, the system
stops the DID Inactivity Timer and the Ring Back Tone message, and connects the caller to the extension
that answered the call.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1695
• If none of the landing extensions answers the call before the expiry of the DID Inactivity Timer, the system
plays the Trunk Auto Answer Busy Bye message and releases the trunk port.
If no Trunk Auto Answer Busy Bye message is assigned, the system plays the Busy Tone for the duration
of the Busy Tone Timer and releases the trunk port.
When Trunk Auto Answer–When Busy is enabled on a CO, Mobile or SIP Trunk, for each incoming call on the
trunk,
• The System answers the with the Trunk Auto Answer Greeting message and loads the DID Inactivity
Timer.
The Greeting message is played once.
• The System waits for any of the landing destinations (Operator or Extensions) selected for the time of the
day to be free.
• If no landing destination is free at the end of the Trunk Auto Answer Greeting message, the system plays
Ring Back Tone or Trunk Auto Answer Ring Back Tone message, if assigned, to the caller for the duration
of the DID Inactivity Timer.
• If any of the landing destinations is free before the expiry of the DID Inactivity Timer, the system places the
call on that destination.
• If none of the landing destinations is free at the end of the DID Inactivity Timer, the system plays the Trunk
Auto Answer Busy Bye message, if assigned, and releases the trunk port.
If the Busy Bye message is not assigned, the system will play the Busy Tone to the caller for the duration
of the Busy Tone Timer.
How to configure
For this feature to work, you must do the following:
1. Enable Trunk Auto Answer on the CO Trunk, Mobile, SIP trunk, as required.
• Under Basic Settings, open the links to the desired trunk port type.
1696 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Select the desired Trunk port number.
• Open the Route Incoming Calls link on the page of the selected trunk number.
• If Operator or Extensions is selected as the destination to Route calls during the Day and to Route
calls During the Night, configure Trunk Auto Answer.
It is not mandatory to configure Trunk Auto Answer for both time zones. You may configure for any time
zone, according to your requirement.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1697
• Select the Type of Trunk Auto Answer for the Day and for the Night as: For all Calls or When Busy.
You may select the same or different options for the Day and Night, according to your requirement.
• Select the Trunk Auto Answer Greeting message, the Trunk Auto Answer Ring Back Tone
Message, and the Trunk Auto Answer Busy Bye Message for the Day and Night.
You may select different Greeting, Ring Back Tone and Busy Bye Message for each time zone.
For detailed instructions, see
• “CO Trunks”
• “Mobile Trunks”
• “SIP Trunks”
2. Configure the Trunk Auto Answer related Timers, if required. The following Timers are of relevance to the
Trunk Auto Answer Feature:
• The DID Inactivity Timer (default: 60 seconds)
• The Ring Back Tone Timer (default: 45 seconds)
• The Busy Tone Timer (default: 7 seconds)
• You may change the duration of these timers from the“System Timers and Counts” page under
Advanced Settings.
The Ring Back Timer and the Busy Tone Timer are also applicable for the Ring Back Tone and the Busy
Tone played for internal calls.
3. Record and assign Voice Modules for the following Voice Messages related to this feature:
• Trunk Auto Answer Greeting Message.
• Trunk Auto Answer Ring Back Tone Message
• Trunk Auto Answer Busy Bye Message
For each of these messages, you can record four different messages.
1698 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
See the topic “Voice Message Applications” under Advanced Settings link for instructions on recording and
assigning voice modules to greeting messages.
If you do not want to use messages, you may select the options: Music-on-Hold or Do not Play any
message.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1699
Trunk Landing Group (TLG)
What’s this?
A Trunk Landing Group is a group of extensions on which incoming calls on a particular trunk are landed.
Trunk Landing Groups are formed for efficient call management. Generally, incoming calls on a trunk are landed on
the Operator extensions. However, when several trunks are interfaced with the system, it becomes difficult for the
operator to answer all calls efficiently. Trunk Landing Groups relieve the Operator to a great extent, as the incoming
calls get distributed among several extensions.
How it works
• A Trunk Landing Group (TLG) is a “Routing Group”.
• You can configure as many as 95 TLGs. Each group is numbered from 01 to 95.
• A maximum of 32 stations—SLT, DKP, SIP, ISDN, or DOP—can included in each Trunk Landing Group.
• For each group that you create, you can do the following:
• set the Sequence in which the stations in the group should ring, by selecting the member stations in a
sequence from 1 to 32.
• set the Time for which each station in the group should ring, by setting the Ring Timer (default: 15
seconds).
• set each station to ring continuously till the call matures by enabling Continuous Ring (default:
disabled).
When Continuous Ring is enabled, once a station receives a ring, it rings continuously till the call
matures. The station continues to ring even as other stations in the group are hunted.
If the call is not answered even after the last station in the group has been hunted, the system will loop
back and start hunting from the first station, all over again.
• have a number of stations in the group ring simultaneously by enabling Continuous Ring on these
stations and setting the Ring Timer for these stations to ‘00’ seconds.
• set equal distribution of incoming calls on all stations in the group, by enabling Rotation for the entire
group (default: disabled).
When Rotation is enabled on a TLG, for each new call on a trunk, the system will land the call on the
extension next to the one that received the last call.
When Rotation is disabled in a TLG, for each new call on a trunk, the system will land the call on the
first free station of the TLG.
• To each Trunk, you must assign a TLG for the Time Zones, working hours, break hours and non-working
hours. You may assign the same TLG for all three Time Zones, or a different TLG for each Time Zone.
1700 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
How to configure
• According to the number of trunks interfaced with your ETERNITY and the number of extensions you
have, identify the trunks to which you want to assign TLG for each Time Zone. This will help you decide the
number of TLGs to be formed, the type and number of extensions in each group, and their sequence.
• Decide the Trunk number to which each TLG is to be assigned.
• Configure each TLG as a Routing Group. See “Routing Group” for instructions.
• Assign the TLGs you formed for each trunk for the three Time Zones in its Trunk Feature Template. for
instructions, see “Trunk Feature Template”.
Example:
Two TWT Lines (configured on software ports 001 and 002) are interfaced with ETERNITY.
• Incoming calls on TWT 1 during working hours should land on SLT stations 2001, 2003, 2005 (configured
on software ports 008, 010, 012 respectively).
Incoming calls on TWT 1during break hours and non-working hours should land on SLT stations 2002,
2004 (configured on software ports 009, 011 respectively).
• Incoming calls on TWT 2 should land always on DKP stations 3001, 3002, 3003, 3009, 3010 (configured
on software ports 013, 014, 015, 016, 017).
• Incoming call on TWT 1 should ring for 10 seconds on each station in the TLG.
• Incoming call on TWT 2 should ring for 20 seconds on each station in the TLG.
• The stations of the TLGs of TWT 1 and TWT2 should ring for the set time only.
• “Rotation Method” to be followed in the TLG of TWT1 and TWT2.
In this example, for TWT 1, you would need to form 2 TLGs; one TLG for working hours and one for break hours
and non-working hours. So, form two Routing Groups. For example, Routing Group 10 for working hours and
Routing Group 11 for break hours and non-working hours.
In Routing Group 10, select the member SLTs in this sequence: 2001, 2003 and 2005. Set the Ring Timer for each
member SLT to 10 seconds. Disable Continuous Ring for the SLT, as each station in the group must ring for the set
time.
In Routing Group 11, select the member SLT in this sequence: 2002 and 2004, and set the Ring Timer for each SLT
to 10 seconds. Disable Continuous Ring for the SLT, as each station in the group is required to ring for the set time
only.
Enable Rotation for Routing Group 10 and Routing Group 11.
For TWT 2 you would need to form a common TLG for working hours, break hours and non-working hours. So,
configure as single routing group, for example, Routing Group 13 for TWT 2. In Routing Group 13, select the
member stations in this sequence: 3001, 3002, 3003, 3009, 3010. Set the Ring Timer for each DKP member station
to 20 seconds. Disable Continuous ring for each DKP in the group. Enable Rotation for Routing Group 13.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1701
Select a Trunk Feature Template number for TWT 1 and TWT 2. For example, feature template 04 for TWT 1 and
template 05 for TWT 2.
In the Feature Template of TWT 1, assign TLG. For working hours, assign Routing Group 10, for break and non-
working hours, assign Routing Group 11.
In the feature Template of TWT 2, assign Routing group 13 as TLG for all three time zones.
1702 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Trunk Reservation
What’s this?
This feature enables any extension user to reserve a trunk for exclusive use, for a specific time period.
Trunk Reservation can be requested from an SLT extension, a DKP extension and from an Extended IP Phone
extension.
How it works
Let us understand this feature with the help of an example:
In an organization there are four TWT trunk lines, TWT 1, 2, 3 and 4, but all of these have full traffic throughout the
day.
Extension user A is a sales executive. To complete the sales target, A needs to make long-distance calls to
customers. Since there this full traffic on all the four trunks throughout the day, and these trunks are constantly
busy, A would need a dedicated trunk line to save time and complete the target.
So, A can reserve one of the four trunk lines for the desired duration. To do this,
• Extension A grabs a trunk by dialing the Trunk Access Code.
• The Trunk is busy.
• Extension A dials the feature access code for Trunk Reservation for the busy trunk.
• As soon as the trunk is free, A’s extension rings.
• A answers the call and gets connected to the trunk, and gets dial tone.
• A can now make as many calls as required.
• The trunk remains reserved for the duration of the Trunk Reservation Timer. This timer is configurable, and
by default is set to 10 minutes. A can have this Timer configured to the desired duration.
• All other extension users who try to access this trunk get error tone, even if this trunk is free.
• If A is finished with the calls before the expiry of the Trunk Reservation Timer, A has two options:
a) release the trunk manually, by cancelling Trunk Reservation.
or
b) wait for the expiry of Trunk Reservation Timer.
• Only when the trunk is released (by A or at the end of the Timer) will other users be able to access it.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1703
How to configure
To be able to use Trunk Reservation, extension users must have this feature enabled in their Class of Service for
the time zone. For configuration instructions, see “Class of Service (COS)”, and “Station Basic Feature Template”.
You may increase or decrease the duration of the Trunk Reservation Timer. See “System Timers and Counts” for
instructions.
How to use
For EON & Extended IP Phone Users
To set Trunk Reservation, when Trunk you access is busy,
• Press DSS Key assigned to Trunk Reservation
OR
• Dial 6 on Busy Tone
To release a reserved Trunk, wait for the Timer to expire, or cancel Trunk Reservation, manually.
To cancel Trunk Reservation Manually,
• Press DSS Key assigned to Trunk Reservation.
OR
• Dial 102
For SLT Users
To set Trunk Reservation, when Trunk you access is busy,
• Lift handset.
• Dial 6 on Busy Tone.
• Replace handset.
To cancel Trunk Reservation Manually,
• Lift handset.
• Dial 102
• Replace handset.
1704 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
User Absent/Present
What's this?
Extension users may sometimes want to leave their desks, and expecting to return soon, they may not have
forwarded their calls or set Do Not Disturb on their extensions. In such cases, incoming calls will continue to land on
the extension and go unanswered. The callers have no way of knowing that the extension user is not present at the
extension and may try the extension number repeatedly.
With the User Absent/Present feature of ETERNITY, extension users, including the Operator, can set 'User Absent'
when they leave their desks. By doing so, they can block all incoming external as well as internal calls from landing
on their extension. When they return to their desks, they can set 'User Present' and receive incoming calls again.
While Do Not Disturb blocks only internal calls, User Absent can be set when you want to block all
incoming calls (external as well as internal). Thus User Absent can be used as an extension of DND to also
block external calls.
There are more options for indicating availability to other extensions. Refer the topic “Presence” to know
more.
How it works
When an extension user of EON sets 'User Absent', the letter 'A' appears on the phone's display:
EON42 EON48P
617 Himanshu Fri 29 JAN 16:58 A
Fri 29 JAN 16:58 A 617 Himanshu
The letter 'A' disappears when the extension user sets 'User Present'.
When an extension user of EON calls the extension which has set 'User Absent', the text message 'User Absent'
will appear on the caller's phone display.
When an SLT extension user calls the extension which has set 'User Absent', callers who dial this extension will get
an error tone.
External callers who call the extension, on which 'User Absent' is set, will get an error tone only.
• Outgoing calls can be made from the extension which has set 'User Absent'. Only incoming calls are
restricted.
• User Absent/Present can be set on an extension from the SA mode.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1705
• If more than one extension is configured as "Operator' (routing group), incoming calls will be blocked
only on the Operator extension which has set User Absent.
• User Password is required for this feature. The default User Password, 1111, will not work. Change the
User Password first.
How to use
For Extension Users
To set User Absent on your extension:
• Dial 104-User Password-0
To set User Present on your extension:
• Dial 104-User Password-1
For System Administrator
To set User Absent on an extension:
• Dial 1072-014-0
To set User Present on an extension:
• Dial 1072-014-1
The System Administrator can also set an extension as Absent/Present using Jeeves. For instructions, read
“Additional Security to Extension Users” under the topic System Security.
1706 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
User Password
What’s this?
The User Password is a 4-digit code for extension users to protect their extension phones from unauthorized use.
The default User Password is 1111. It can be changed by the extension users from their phones to any desired
value, not exceeding 4 digits.
In case the extension user forgets the password, it can be cleared and restored to the default value 1111 by the
System Engineer (SE) or the System Administrator (SA). Refer the topic “System Security” for instructions.
The User Password is also required to access and use certain features of ETERNITY, which are listed below.
• Call Follow Me
• Dynamic Lock
• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
• Walk-In Class of Service
• User Absent/Present
• Hot Desk
• Phone Settings of the DKP
• Mailbox of Voice mail
The extension user must change the default password for all the above listed features except: Phone Settings,
Mailbox of Voice mail. Both these features allow the extension user to use the default User Password, whereas in
the case of others, the system will not allow feature access without changing the User Password.
In the case of Hot Desking, the default password will work only for one extension involved.
The User Password for an extension can be changed only from that extension phone only.
Since the Mailbox can be accessed using the default User Password, extension users who are assigned a
mailbox are recommended to change their User Password to prevent unauthorized access to their mailbox.
How to use
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users
• Press ‘Enter’ key to enter DKP menu.
• Scroll to Change User Password.
• Press ‘Enter’ key.
• You get the prompt: Enter Old User Password.
• Dial you current user password.
If the default password 1111 has not be changed, enter default password.
• You get the prompt: Enter New User Password.
• Dial your new user password, not exceeding 4-digits.
You get confirmation tone and the confirmatory message ‘User Password Changed’ on your phone
display.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1707
For SLT Users
• Lift the handset.
• Dial 114
• Dial Current User Password (default password 1111 if not changed already).
• Dial New User Password.
• You get confirmation tone.
• Replace handset.
1708 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Video Call
What’s this?
• Video call can be set up if the service provider supports it.
• The Video Conferencing equipment (VC) is connected at the NT Port of the PBX.
• ETERNITY supports using of Video Phone for:
• OG Call
• IC Call
• Conferencing
• It supports this feature from both BRI-NT and PRI-NT ports.
• Refer chapters “ISDN-BRI” and “ISDN-PRI” for more details.
Relevant Topics:
1. “ISDN-BRI” 1263
2. “ISDN-PRI” 1285
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1709
Virtual Station
What’s this?
The Virtual Station feature of ETERNITY enables multiple users to share one telephone instrument as their
extension, yet be considered as individual extensions by the system, with distinct extension properties and class of
service.
Such shared extensions are called Virtual Stations, as their users do not have individual phones for their use.
Virtual stations are useful in laboratories, common rooms, dormitories, shop floors, and wherever it is not feasible
to provide dedicated telephone instruments to individual extension users. Virtual extensions allow you make
optimum use of the existing phones without investing in new ones.
How it works
The shared telephone instrument is called the Master Station. A Master Station can be an SLT, a DKP or the Matrix
Extended IP Phone.
• Virtual Stations are assigned to the Master Extension. A Master Extension can have multiple Virtual
Stations, but a Virtual Station can have only one Master Station.
• The Virtual Station functions as any SLT, DKP or SIP extension of ETERNITY. It can be assigned all
features and facilities, like Class of Service, Toll Control, Call Forward, just like any other physical
extension of ETERNITY.
• Incoming calls to a Virtual Station will ring on the Master Station.
• All incoming, outgoing, internal and external calls of the Virtual Stations are recorded in the Station
Message Detail Records.
• To make outgoing calls, the Virtual Station user must use the feature “Walk-In Class of Service”.
• The Virtual Station user is logged out of the Master Station according to the Walk Out mode assigned to it:
Walk out single call or Walk out multiple calls.
How to configure
To use this feature, you must assign the Master Station and the Master Port for the extensions you want to
configure as Virtual Extension. For instructions, see “Station Advanced Feature Template”.
How to use
For making outgoing calls users of Virtual Extensions must use “Walk-In Class of Service”.
1710 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Voice Help
What’s this?
The Voice Help feature of ETERNITY allows you to record and play short (16 second duration) voice messages to
provide quick help to extension users. Voice Help messages may contain important instructions, or frequently
accessed feature codes, or important phone numbers, etc.
For example, the Access Codes of the frequently used features can be recorded in the Voice Help message.
Extension users may simply dial the Voice Help feature code and listen to the voice message.
How to configure
To be able to use Voice Help, you must first record a voice module with the contents you wish to provide as help.
Record the voice module considering the maximum duration of the voice module, so that the message is not
truncated.
The voice module must be assigned to the Voice Help application. Refer topic “Voice Message Applications” for
instructions on recording the voice module and assigning it to Voice Help.
How to use
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users
• Press DSS Key assigned to Voice Help.
OR
• Dial 1090
You will hear the Voice Help message.
• Go idle after the message ends.
For SLT Users
• Lift the handset.
• Dial 1090.
• You will hear the Voice Help message.
• Replace handset after the message ends.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1711
Voice Mail Integration
What’s this?
Any Voice Mail System or Auto-Attendant can be integrated with the ETERNITY. However this integration works
well if the exchange of information between the two is perfect. Generally, this integration works on two protocols:
Tone Sensing and Gateway.
Tone Sensing relies on sensing of various Call Progress tones. Gateway uses DTMF digits to signify various Call
Progress events. The ETERNITY supports both Tone Sensing as well as the Gateway mode.
User can transfer the call on the mail box of the station by dialing the access code for 'Blind transfer to VMS'. Refer
chapter “Call Transfer” for more details.
ETERNITY supports:
• External VMS - Matrix CadencePro or any third-party external VMS system.
• ETERNITY ME/GE/PE Card VMS16
See the System Manual for 'ETERNITY VMS Card' for more information.
See the ETERNITY Hospitality System Manual for more information about Hotel/Motel applications of this
feature.
External VMS
How to connect a VMS/Auto-Attendant to ETERNITY
The ports of VMS/Auto-Attendant should be connected to the SLT ports of the ETERNITY using a single pair
telephone cable.
The figure given below shows connection of a VMS with the ETERNITY where only two VMS ports are interfaced.
How it works
As shown in the figure, VMS is connected on two SLT stations. If all the calls are to be routed through VMS,
ETERNITY should be programmed such that all the incoming calls land on the VMS. Alternatively, the PBX should
be programmed such that incoming calls land on other extensions.
1712 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
When an incoming call lands on the VMS, the VMS processes the call and guides the caller to reach the desired
station.
As stated earlier, integration of the ETERNITY with VMS or an Auto-Attendant works on two protocols: Tone
Sensing and Gateway.
Tone Sensing relies on sensing of various Call Progress tones. For example, when an incoming call lands on VMS
through the ETERNITY, it answers the call and prompts the caller to dial a station.
Subsequently, it senses the dialed station number, keeps the caller on hold and dials the station number where the
call is to be diverted. Then the VMS waits for the ring back tone. It first senses the ring back tone and then waits for
it to stop.
As soon as the ring back tone stops the VMS transfers the call to the dialed station. All this process involves
sensing of various tones like ring back tone, hold tone, etc. and hence is commonly called tone sensing. However,
this method is not accurate.
To overcome this problem, ETERNITY offers Gateway mode.
Gateway uses DTMF digits to signify various Call Progress events. With Gateway mode, in the above example
when the VMS receives an incoming call, it answers the call. Then it prompts the caller to dial a station. It senses
the dialed station, keeps the caller on hold and dials the station where the call is to be diverted. On successful
receipt of the dialed station, the ETERNITY sends a defined code (signifying ring back tone) to the VMS.
Depending upon the transfer type set for the VMS, it either transfers the call or waits for the called party to respond.
In the latter case, when the called party answers the call, the ETERNITY again sends a defined code (signifying
successful speech connection). The VMS detects this code and transfers the call to the dialed station. Since codes
(defined string of characters) are used for the transfer of information, this method has much higher reliability.
ETERNITY ME/GE/PE Card VMS
How to connect ETERNITY ME/GE/PE Card VMS16?
• ETERNITY ME/GE/PE Card VMS can be inserted in any free slot of ETERNITY.
• ETERNITY will automatically configure required number of SLT port as VMS ports.
• The port name of all these VMS SLT Ports is assigned as 'Voice Mail'.
• The ETERNITY ME/GE/PE Card VMS supports maximum 512 mailboxes and each mailbox can store total
of 254 messages.
• The System shall automatically assign VMS group when ETERNITY ME/GE/PE Card VMS is installed.
The default VMS Group assigned is Routing Group number '96'. Refer chapter “Routing Group” for more
details.
• SA can place the Voice guided remote alarm call to the voice mail. Refer chapter “Alarms” and “DSS Keys
Programming” for details of SA command.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1713
How to use
Assigning Mailbox to the station:
ETERNITY supports to assign or de-assign a Mailbox to the station.
From SA mode:
Dial 1072-005-Station Number-Code
Where,
Station number is flexible number of the station.
Code Meaning
0 De-assign mail box
1 Assign mail box
How to program
The commands explained below should be referred as:
To program a single port: XXXX-1
To program a range of ports: XXXX-2
To program all the ports: XXXX-*
Default IP Address of the Ethernet port of the ETERNITY ME/GE/PE Card VMS 16, is 192.168.001.131.
Step 1
Use following command to assign Destination Type for VMS group:
4601-Destination Type
Where,
Destination Type Meaning
1 Routing Group
2 Number
By Default, Destination Type is Routing Group.
Step 2
Use following command to assign Destination for VMS group:
4602-Destination-#*
Where,
Destination is 10 digit maximum with digits 0-9, * and #.
By default, Destination is '96'.
Please refer the topic “Routing Group” for details on programming. Take care to see all the stations programmed in
the Routing Group assigned as VMS Group are SLTs. Assigning 00 as routing group means no routing group is
programmed as VMS Group.
1714 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Step 3
How to assign an access code of your choice to VMS Group?
Access code is the code dialed from the dial phase to call the VMS group. The VMS group access code must be
unique and should not match with either SLT station number or DKP station number or any of the features available
from the dial phase.
Use the following command to program the access code for a VMS Group:
3114-1-VMS Group Index-Access Code-#*
3114-2-VMS Group Index-VMS Group Index-Access Code-#*
3114-*-Access Code-#*
Where,
VMS Group Index is 1.
Access Code is maximum of 6 digits. If it is less than 6 digits, terminate it with #*
By default, the Access Code of the VMS Group is 3931
How to default the Access Codes?
Use following command to default the access code for a VMS Group:
3164-1-VMS Group Index
3164-2-VMS Group Index-VMS Group Index
3164-*
Where,
VMS Group Index is 1.
How to clear the Access Codes?
Use following command to clear the access code for a VMS Group:
3114-1-VMS Group Index-#*
3114-2-VMS Group Index-#*
3114-*-#*
Where,
VMS Group Index is 1.
Step 4
Use following command to know 'IP Address: Web Server Port' of VMS Card:
2131-Slot Number
Where,
Slot Number is from 01 to 16 (In which VMS Card is inserted).
This command can be issued from DKP only.
Relevant Topics:
“Routing Group”
“SLT Hardware Template”
“Message Wait”
“QSIG”
“Call Transfer”
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1715
Voice Message Applications
What’s this?
ETERNITY allows you to record different voice messages which can be played to callers/extension users according
to the situation. For example, if you have activated “Direct Inward Dialing (DID)” on some of the trunk lines, you can
use an appropriately recorded Voice Message to guide callers to reach the desired party/destination extension.
Similarly, an extension user who wants to set an alarm can record a personal voice message on his/her own, which
will be played to him/her when the alarm request is served.
How it works
The voice messages are recorded in 'Voice Modules' and the voice modules are assigned to the features/
applications with which they are to be used.
The ETERNITY supports 16 Voice Modules of a maximum duration of 16 seconds each. You can record up to 16
short messages of a maximum 16 seconds each or less.
A voice message can be of two types:
• Once-Only: the message is played only once from its start to its end.
• Continuous: the message is played repeatedly from the start to the end.
When the recorded voice modules are assigned to the features/applications, they are played to the callers/
extension users whenever the feature/application is activated.
As many as five different voice messages can be played simultaneously to a caller/extension user.
Voice messages can be used for different applications or situations as described in the following.
DID Greeting Messages
On Trunk lines that have DID enabled, you can use a recorded Voice Message to guide callers to reach the desired
party/destination extension. It is possible to play DID Greeting Messages according to the time of the day, i.e.
working hours, break hours, and non-working hours.
For example:
• DID Greeting message for working hours: "Welcome to Cotton Software".
• During Greeting message lunch hours: "Welcome to Cotton Software. This is lunchtime. Please call
after 2.00 pm".
• DID Greeting Message for non-working hours: "Welcome to Cotton Software. We are closed for the
day. Please call later".
• DID Dial Message: "Please dial the desired station number".
1716 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
DID Guidance Messages
You can use voice messages to guide DID callers at various stages of the call. For instance, prompting them to dial
a number, or giving an alert when they dial a wrong or invalid number, or informing them when the desired
destination extension is busy or when there is no response from the dialed extension, etc.
For example,
• DID Dial Message: "Please dial the desired Station Number".
• DID Wrong Dial Message: "Sorry you have dialed an invalid Station Number. Please dial a valid Station
Number".
• DID Ring Back Tone (RBT) Message: "You have successfully dialed the desired Station".
• DID Busy Message: "The station you have dialed is busy. Please hold the line or try any other Station
Number".
• DID No-Reply Message: "The Station you have dialed is not responding. Please try another Station".
• DID No-Dial Message: "Sorry you have not dialed any Station Number. Please wait while your call is
transferred to the Operator".
• DID Conference Number202 Message: "Please dial the Conference Number".
• DID Conference Password Message: "Please dial the Conference Password".
• DID Call Transfer Message: "Transferring the call to the Operator". This message is played to the caller,
when he does not dial any number and the call is transferred to the Operator.
Voice Message for Features
• Alarms: A pre-recorded voice message is played to the extension on which Alarm is set when the wake-
up call is served. This feature is very useful in hotels where wake-up alarms are to be set for guests at the
oddest hours. With the Voice Message for alarms, guests can be greeted when they pick up the handset to
answer their phone.
For example, "Good Morning. This is a wake up call. You may please call room service for any assistance.
Thank you. Have a nice day".
You are recommended to record the message "Please press 0 to acknowledge the Alarm and Reminder"
as a voice module for the Alarm/Reminder message, so that extension users can acknowledge Snooze
calls. Refer the topics “Alarms” and “Reminder” to know more.
• Security Alarm: A pre-recorded voice message is played to the external number and to the extension
which answers the Security Alarm call. The default message played to the called parties is: "This is an
emergency call. Please dial '0' to acknowledge.
• Voice Help: You can record and play voice message to provide quick help to extension users. The Voice
Help message may contain important instructions, or frequently accessed feature codes, or important
phone numbers, etc.
202. Refer the description of the feature “Conference Dial-In”
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1717
For example, the Access Codes of the frequently used features can be recorded in the Voice Help
message. Extension users may simply dial the Voice Help feature code and listen to the voice message.
Help message must be recorded considering the maximum duration of the Voice Module (16 seconds), so
that voice messages are not truncated.
• Music-on-Hold: Callers who are put on hold are usually played music from an internal/external source as
they wait. You can play a voice message instead of music to the callers. The message may contain any
promotional information about your company or services provided by your organization, etc.
For example, "Welcome to Progressive Bearings. We are glad to announce that we are now an ISO 9001
company."
• Message Waiting: Whenever there is a new message in the mailbox of the extension user and if the VMS
informs the ETERNITY about the new message, the ETERNITY changes the dial tone of the extension to
a stuttered dial tone. The ETERNITY also offers the facility to playback a message instead of the stuttered
dial tone to indicate the waiting message. An appropriate voice message can be played back to the
extension user when he lifts the handset.
For example, "You have a new message in your Mailbox. Please access your mailbox".
Voice Message for Dial Tone
Normally, when a caller goes OFF-Hook to dial an extension, he gets the dial tone for a fixed time interval (Dial
Tone Timer). If the caller does not respond within this time, he gets an error tone. The caller however, may not
know about the Timer. So, a message may be played to the caller.
For example, "Please dial the number immediately after the beep".
When you record a message for the Dial Tone, make sure that the length of the message is shorter than
the duration of the Dial Tone Timer.
Voice Message for Ring Back Tone
When a caller dials an extension, if the station is free, the caller gets a Ring Back Tone. Instead of the ring Back
Tone, the caller can be played a message like: "The station you have dialed is free. Please wait till the station
responds".
When you record the Ring Back Tone message, take care that the length of the message is shorter than
the duration of the Ring Back Tone Timer.
Voice message for Busy Tone
When a caller dials an extension, if the extension is busy, the caller gets a busy tone. The ETERNITY can be made
to play back message instead of the busy tone, like: "The station you have dialed is currently busy. Please dial after
some time".
When you record the Busy Tone message, take care that the length of the message is shorter than the
duration of the Busy Tone Timer.
1718 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Voice message for Error Tone
When a caller performs a wrong operation or uses a feature without access, it is possible to play a voice message
to the caller instead of the Error Tone, such as: "Please check the number you have dialed".
Voice message for Confirmation Tone
The ETERNITY confirms the successful usage of features with a confirmation tone which could be replaced with a
voice message like: "The requested operation is performed successfully".
Voice Message for DND Notification
When an extension user has set 'Do Not Disturb' on his/her extension, a voice message can be played to the caller
informing him/her about the DND set on the called extension. For example, "The dialed extension has activated Do
Not Disturb".
Voice Message Notification for DND is particularly useful when the phone on which DND is set is an SLT and
callers are also using SLT.
Voice Message for Toll Control/CoS Violation
When an extension dials out a number, the system checks the Toll Control assigned to that extension. If the dialed
number does not match with the number strings programmed for the Call Privilege type set for the Toll Control
assigned to the extension, the following message can be played: "Please check the number you have dialed. This
facility is not available on your Telephone".
Similarly, a voice message can be played to the extension user who attempts to invoke a feature that is not allowed
to his/her extension phone in its Class of Service (COS).
Voice Message for Trunk Auto Answer
Trunk Auto Answer enables calls landing on a trunk to be answered automatically by greeting the caller with a voice
message before the call is actually handled. For example, the caller can be played the message: "Please Wait!
Your call will be attended shortly".
ETERNITY supports 4 Trunk Auto Answer messages.
Voice Messages for Station User Greetings
ETERNITY supports two greeting messages. These messages are played to the extension users when they lift the
handset. These Messages may be festive greetings like 'Happy New Year", or an announcement like "Meeting in
the Conference Room at 4 O'clock", or any other voice message to be played to the extension users when they lift
the handset. Once the greeting message is in effect, on lifting the handset Station User Greeting1 and Greeting2
are played followed by dial tone.
Voice Guidance-Time Based Greetings
ETERNITY supports 3 time-based greetings: Morning, Afternoon, Evening greetings. Messages like "Good
Morning", "Good Afternoon", "Good Evening" can be recorded.
These time based greetings are played to callers before the DID Greetings Message on a DID enabled trunk. On
an Auto-Answer enabled trunk these messages are played before the trunk AutoAnswer greetings.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1719
The Time Based Greetings will be played during following time periods:
Voice Message Greeting Time during which Greeting will be played
Morning Greeting 00:00 to 11:59
Afternoon Greeting 12:00 to 14:59
Evening Greeting 15:00 to 23:59
How to configure
To be able to play Voice Messages, you must first record them in voice modules. Once you have recorded the
voice messages, you must assign the voice module to the appropriate Voice Message Application.
Pre-recorded voice messages are provided in WAV format on the documentation CD shipped with the ETERNITY.
You may either use them when recording the voice modules or you may record messages of your choice.
Recording Voice Messages
Voice Messages can be recorded from any of the two sources:
• A DKP/SLT connected to the ETERNITY.
• An External Music Source (PC, Music System) connected to the “Analog Input Port (AIP)” of the
ETERNITY. For instructions, refer the topic Connecting External Music Source under “Installing ETERNITY
ME”, “Installing ETERNITY GE”, “Installing ETERNITY PE” as relevant to your model of ETERNITY.
If you want to use the pre-recorded voice messages provided with the system, first copy the WAV files on
to the PC to which ETERNITY is connected. The contents of the audio files are indicated by their file
names. Select the audio files (containing the messages) you wish to use, and copy them on to the PC.
Play the files when you record the messages. Recording instructions are provided below.
To record Voice Message,
• Lift the handset.
• Enter SE mode from the DKP/SLT.
• Select the source for recording the Voice Message, dial:
• 2501-Code
Where,
Code is
1 for Telephone Instrument (DKP/SLT).
2 for External Music Source (PC or Music System).
By default, Recording Source is 1.
• Record the Voice Message, dial:
• 2502-Voice Module Number
Where,
Voice Module is from 01 to 16.
• You will get a dial tone.
• At the end of the dial tone, start recording the message, by speaking into your telephone instrument or if
using an external music source (PC or Music System), play the voice message.
• Limit your message to 16 seconds.
1720 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Go ON-Hook on completion of the message.
To check/verify the Voice Message you recorded, dial:
• 2503-Voice Module
Where,
Voice Module is from 01 to 16.
In this case, dial the number of the Voice Module you just recorded.
If the audibility of the recorded message is not satisfactory, you may repeat this procedure again.
Assigning Voice Modules to Voice Message Applications using Jeeves
• Log in to Jeeves as System Engineer.
• Enter Full Programming Access Mode.
• Click the link 'Voice Message Applications’ to open the page.
Now program the following parameters:
• Recording Source: Select the source of recording - Telephone Instrument or Music System. By
default, Telephone instrument is selected.
• Recording Format: Select the format of the voice message recorded, A-Law, Mu-Law or Linear, as
appropriate. By default Mu-Law is selected.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1721
• Voice Message Application-Voice Module-Duration (sec): Go to the desired Voice Message
Application to assign the voice module number you recorded for this application. For example, you
have recorded Voice Module 08 as DND Notification Message. Enter this number against "DND
Notification".
• By default, the following Voice Messages Applications have been assigned to Voice Modules 01 to 13
(see table below). If the default Message recorded in the module suits your purpose, simply assign the
Voice Module number to the relevant Voice Application. The system will automatically set the duration
of the Voice Message Application.
• For example, if you want to use Morning, Afternoon and Evening Greetings. You may simply assign the
default Voice Modules 02, 03, and 04.
• Refer the following table for Voice Message Applications assigned by default to the Voice Modules:
Default Voice Message Applications assigned to Voice Modules
Voice Module
Voice Message Application Voice Message
Number
01 Music-On-Hold
02 Morning Greeting Good Morning!
(DID/Trunk Auto Answer)
03 Afternoon Greeting Good Afternoon!
(DID/Trunk Auto Answer
04 Evening Greeting Good Evening!
(DID/Trunk Auto Answer)
05 DID Welcome Greeting for Day Time Welcome!
(Working Hours)
06 DID Welcome Greeting for Night time Welcome! I am sorry, we are closed.
(Non-working and Break hours)
07 DID - Dial prompt Please dial the desired number.
08 DID - No Dial message Sorry! You have not dialed any number.
09 DID - Wrong Dial message Sorry! The number is not valid.
10 DID - Destination Busy message The person you dialed is busy.
11 DID - Destination Ringing message The number you have dialed is ringing.
(Ring Back Tone)
12 DID - Destination No Reply message The person you dialed is not responding.
13 DID Call Transfer to Operator message Please hold, transferring your call to the Operator.
1722 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• It is possible to assign the same Voice Module to more than one Voice Message Application.
• If you have already recorded Voice Module 08, ETERNITY will automatically detect and display the
duration of the Voice Module you recorded. So you need not define the duration of the Voice Module.
• You may define the duration of the Voice Module, only if you want the recorded voice message to be
played for a specific duration. For example, the message you recorded in the voice module is 15
seconds long, but you want to play only the message contents of the first 8 seconds, you can define the
duration of the message as 8 seconds.
• Voice Module 01 is reserved for Music-on-Hold by default. You are advised not to assign this module to
any other Voice Message Application.
• Click 'Submit' to save your settings.
• You may log out of Jeeves.
Assigning Voice Modules to Voice Message Applications using a Telephone
• Enter SE mode.
To define voice message duration for voice modules203:
• Dial 2504-Voice Module-Duration
Where,
Voice Module is 01 to 16.
Duration is from 00 to 16 seconds.
By default, Duration of Voice Modules is 16 seconds.
To assign a voice message application to a voice module:
• Dial 2505-Voice Message Application Number-Voice Module
Where,
Voice Message Application Number is from 01 to 44. See table below.
Voice Module is the voice module number from 1 to 16.
By default, Voice Module assigned is 00.
Voice Message Once/Continuous
Meaning
Application Number (Not Programmable)
01 Morning Greeting (DID/Trunk Auto Answer) Once
02 Afternoon Greeting (DID/Trunk Auto Answer) Once
03 Evening Greeting (DID/Trunk Auto Answer) Once
04 DID Welcome Greeting for Working Hours Once
05 DID Welcome Greeting for Break Hours Once
06 DID Welcome Greeting for Non-working Hours Once
07 DID - Dial Prompt Once
08 DID - Destination Ringing Message Continuous
203. Necessary only if the duration is less than 16 seconds.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1723
Voice Message Once/Continuous
Meaning
Application Number (Not Programmable)
09 DID - Wrong Dial Message Once
10 DID - Destination Busy Message Once
11 DID - Destination No Reply Message Once
12 DID - No Dial Message Once
13 DID - Conference Number Once
14 DID - Conference Password Once
15 DID - Call Transfer to Operator Once
16 Toll - Control & COS Violation Once
17 Trunk Auto Answer Greeting 1 Once
18 Trunk Auto Answer Greeting 2 Once
19 Trunk Auto Answer Greeting 3 Once
20 Trunk Auto Answer Greeting 4 Once
21 Trunk Auto Answer RBT Message 1 Continuous
22 Trunk Auto Answer RBT Message 2 Continuous
23 Trunk Auto Answer RBT Message 3 Continuous
24 Trunk Auto Answer RBT Message 4 Continuous
25 Trunk Auto Answer Bye Message 1 Once
26 Trunk Auto Answer Bye Message 2 Once
27 Trunk Auto Answer Bye Message 3 Once
28 Trunk Auto Answer Bye Message 4 Once
29 DDI - Destination No Reply Message Once
30 DDI - Destination Busy Message Once
31 DDI - Call Transfer to TLG Message Once
32 Alarm Continuous
33 Station User Greeting 1 Once
34 Station User Greeting 2 Once
35 Message Wait Notification Continuous
36 Message Wait - No message Once
37 DND Notification Once
38 Security/Emergency Message Continuous
39 Dial Tone Once
40 Ring Back Tone Continuous
41 Busy Tone Once
42 Error Tone Once
43 Confirmation Tone Once
1724 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Voice Message Once/Continuous
Meaning
Application Number (Not Programmable)
44 Voice Help Continuous
To use the default Voice Modules, refer the table “Default Voice Message Applications assigned to Voice
Modules”, and assign the desired Voice Module to a Voice Message Application.
To clear the voice module assigned to a voice message application:
• Dial 2505-Voice Message Application Number-00
Where,
VM Application Number is from 01 to 44.
• Exit SE mode.
Assigning Station User Greeting Message to Extensions
This is done from SA mode only, using a DSS Key (if the phone is EON and a key is programmed for this function)
or by dialing SA command strings.
To set/cancel a User Greeting message on an extension phone, from SA mode:
• Dial 1072-008-Extension Number-Greeting Number-Code
Where,
Greeting Number is
0 for Greeting Message 1
1 for Greeting Message 2
Code is
0 for Cancel
1 for Set
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1725
Walk-In Class of Service
What’s this?
Every extension of ETERNITY is allowed a distinct Class of Service and Toll Control defining its access to features
and its calling permission.
Extension users may be required to make calls from another extension, which does not have the same Class of
Service and Toll Control as their own extension.
With Walk-In Class of Service, all extension users of ETERNITY can make calls from any other extension of the
system as per the Class of Service and Toll Control of their own extension.
This feature is particularly useful to extension users who frequently move away from their desk. It allows them the
same level of feature access and Toll Control on the other extensions from which they make calls.
Extension users can 'Walk-In' from any extension port: DKP, SLT, ISDN Terminal, Magneto, E&M (with Station as
Orientation Type), and SIP.
ETERNITY offers two types of Walk-In:
• One call: The extension user is automatically logged out after s/he has made a call from the extension into
which s/he has walked in.
• Multiple Calls: The extension user can make as calls as desired, and remains 'walked-in' until s/he
manually 'Walks-Out' or until a second person walks into the same extension port.
Extension users can be allowed either of the above types of Walk-In by programming the 'Walk-Out Mode" in their
“Station Advanced Feature Template”.
Walk-In Class of Service is a password-protected facility. The User Password is required to operate this feature.
The default User Password 1111 must be changed for using this feature.
How it works
• Extension user A has a DKP with the number 3001. He has long distance calling facility on his extension.
• Extension user B has an SLT with the number 2001. She can make only local calls from her extension.
• Extension user A is at B's desk and needs to make a long distance call.
• Extension user A can 'Walk-In' into B's extension number 2001 by dialing
• the feature code for 'Walk-In Class of Service'.
• the User Password (default password 1111 will not be accepted).
• On successful Walk-In, the system applies the Class of Service and Toll Control of extension 3001 on
extension 2001.
• Extension user A can now dial the trunk access code and the external, long distance number.
1726 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• If Extension 2001 has 'One Call' selected as the 'Walk-Out Mode' for the extension, A will be 'Walked-Out'
when the current call ends or if A goes ON-Hook at any time after walking into extension 2001.
• If Extension 2001 has 'Multiple Calls' selected as the 'Walk-Out Mode' for the extension, extension user A
must manually walk out by dialing the feature code for 'Walk-Out'.
• If Extension user A does not 'Walk-Out', the system will perform a walk out for A only when another
extension user walks into extension 2001.
• Calls made by Extension user A from extension 2001 using Walk-In will be calculated and charged to
extension 3001 only.
• Call record details of calls made by Extension user A from extension 2001, using Walk-In will be recorded
in the Station Message Detail Record of extension 3001 only.
At a time, only one extension user can walk-in into another extension.
How to configure
This feature is available to all extensions of ETERNITY. It does not require any other programming except selection
of the 'Walk-Out Mode' for the extension in its “Station Advanced Feature Template”.
By default, Station Advanced Feature Template 01 is assigned to all extensions of ETERNITY and the default
'Walk-Out Mode' selected in the template is 'One Call'. Retain this template if you want to keep this as the Walk-Out
mode for all extensions.
If you want to allow different walk-out modes to different extensions, then decide which of the extensions are to be
allowed 'One Call' and which are to be allowed 'Walk-In until Logout'.
For each extension, select the 'Walk-Out Mode' in its Station Advanced Feature Template. You can do this using
Jeeves or by dialing SE commands from an extension phone.
For detailed instructions refer the topics “Customizing Station Advanced Feature Template using Jeeves” and
“Customizing Station Advanced Feature Template using a Telephone”.
How to use
For EON and Extended IP Phone Users
To Walk-In into another extension:
• Press DSS Key assigned to Walk-In Class of Service (if programmed).
OR
• Dial 111
• Dial 1 on the prompt 'Walk-In' on your phone's display.
• You get the prompt 'Walk in from which Station?'
• Dial your extension number.
• You get the prompt 'Enter your User Password'.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1727
• Dial your User Password (default password will not be accepted).
• You get the confirmation message 'Walked In Successfully' on your phone's display and confirmation tone.
• You can now make your calls by dialing the desired number during the confirmation tone or after you get
the dial tone.
To Walk-Out of the extension:
• Press DSS Key assigned to Walk-In Class of Service.
OR
• Dial 111.
• Dial 0 on the prompt 'Walk-In' on your phone's display.
• You get the confirmation message 'Walked Out' on your phone's display and confirmation tone.
For SLT Users
To Walk-In into another extension:
• Lift handset.
• Dial 111-1
• Dial your extension number.
• Dial your User Password.
• You get a confirmation tone.
• You can make your calls now, during the confirmation tone or after you get the dial tone.
To Walk-Out of the extension:
• Dial 111-0
• You get a confirmation tone.
• Replace the handset.
If the extension you are walking in has 'One Call" as the Walk-Out mode, and you go ON-Hook before you
make the call, you will be 'Walked Out'. You must Walk-In again.
1728 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Appendix
Technical Specifications
System Resources
System Resources Description Maximum Capacity
ETERNITY ME ETERNITY GE ETERNITY PE
10S 16S 3S 6S 12S 3SS 3SP 6SP
Total Card Slots 16 19 5 8 14 3 3 6
Universal Card Slots The Maximum Physical 10 16 3 6 12 3 3 6
Card Slots
Total User Ports The Maximum Physical 324 516 60 120 240 24 24 48
Ports available
Optional Interfaces
Maximum Ports
System
Description ETERNITY ME ETERNITY GE ETERNITY PE
Resources
10S 16S 3S 6S 12S 3SS 3SP 6SP
SLT Ports To connect Single Line 320 512 60 120 240 24 24 48
Analog Telephones, Modem,
Fax
DKP/DSS To connect Proprietary 128 128 48 96 128 24 24 48
Ports Digital Key Phones or DSS
Consoles
TWT Ports To connect Two-Wire Trunk 128 128 48 96 128 8 8 16
Lines
BRI Ports To connect to ISDN BRI 32 32 12 24 32 - 6 12
Network or Compatible
Devices
T1/E1/PRI To connect to T1 or E1 PRI 8 8 3 6 8 - 3 6
Ports Network or ISDN PRI
Compatible Devices
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1729
Maximum Ports
System
Description ETERNITY ME ETERNITY GE ETERNITY PE
Resources
10S 16S 3S 6S 12S 3SS 3SP 6SP
GSM/3G To connect to GSM/3G 64 64 12 24 48 12 12 24
Ports Network
VoIP Simultaneous VoIP Calls per 32 32 32 32 32 16 16 16
Channels per Card
Card
VoIP Trunks To connect SIP Trunks of 32 32 16 16 16 4 4 4
ITSP or Peer-to-Peer
SIP Registration of VoIP Phones, 500 500 500 500 500 50 50 50
Extensions Softphones and Mobile SIP
Clients
E&M Ports To connect E&M Network 80 128 12 24 48 - - -
Voice Mail To configure as Voice Mail 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
System System
Magneto To connect Magneto Phones 128 128 12 24 48 - - -
Ports
Redundancy To provide Redundancy in Available for - - - - - - -
case of Primary Hardware Master Card,
Failure Switch Card
and PS48VDC
Digital Input To connect Sensor or Panic - - - - 1 1 1
Port Switch
Digital Output To connect to External - - - - 3 3 3
Port Devices like Door Lock or
Relay Port
Door Phone To connect Four-Wire Door - - - - 3 3 3
Port Phones
The maximum number of ports supported by the GSM, SLT and DKP Cards may vary according to the type
of Power Supply used. Refer the following table for maximum ports supported with Universal Power
(PSUNI) and DC Power Supply in ETERNITY ME.
ETERNITY ME - Universal Power Supply (PSUNI)
Type of Port Maximum Number of Ports Supported
GSM 32 ports in Talk mode
128 ports in Talk mode for short loop
SLT 10 extensions talk mode for long loop
320 extensions permanently connected
DKP 96 ports maximum
1730 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Analog SLT ports supported for Short Loop with Loop Current
programmed
Loop Current Programmed 20mA 25mA 30mA 35mA 40mA
Number of ports supported in talk mode (OFF-Hook short loop) 250 200 175 150 128
according to loop current programmed
ETERNITY ME DC to DC 400W Power Supply
Type of Port Maximum Number of Ports Supported
GSM 112 ports in Talk mode
SLT 256 ports in Talk mode for short loop
20 extensions talk mode for long loop
512 extensions permanently connected
DKP 128 ports
Built-In Interfaces
ETERNITY ME ETERNITY GE ETERNITY PE
System Resources Description
10S 16S 3S 6S 12S 3SS 3SP 6SP
DKP/DSS Port To connect Proprietary Digital 4 4 - - - - - -
Key Phone or DSS Consoles
RS232 Port To connect Computer for SMDR 2 2 1 1 1 - 1 1
Output
Parallel Printer Port To connect a parallel Printer 1 1 - - - - - -
Analog Input Port To connect External Music 1 1 1 1 1 - 1 1
Device
Analog Output Port To connect a Public Address 1 1 1 1 1 - 1 1
System
Digital Input Port To connect Sensor or Panic 1 1 1 1 1 - - -
Switch
Digital Output Port To connect to External Devices 1 1 1 1 1 - - -
like Door Lock or Relay Port
Ethernet Port To access Web-Based 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Programming Tool "Jeeves”
USB Port Reserved for Future Application 1 1 1 1 1 - 1 1
Conference Maximum No. of Simultaneous 7 7 5 5 5 2 2 5
3-Party Conference
Voice Modules (16 Auto Attendant and Other Voice 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
Seconds each) Based Applications
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1731
Cards
ETERNITY ME Cards Description
SLT32 32 SLT Ports card to connect 32 Single Line Telephones
SLT16 16 SLT Ports card to connect 16 Single Line Telephones
SLT8 8 SLT Ports card to connect 8 Single Line Telephones
DKP32 32 DKP Ports card to connect 32 Digital Key Phones /DSS Consoles
DKP16 16 DKP Ports card to connect 16 Digital Key Phones /DSS Consoles
DKP8 8 DKP Ports card to connect 8 Digital Key Phones /DSS Consoles
TWT16 16 Two-Wire Trunk Ports card to connect 16 Two-Wire Trunk Lines
TWT8 8 Two-Wire Trunk ports card to connect 8 Two-Wire Trunk Lines
TWT8+SLT24 8 Two-Wire Trunk Ports and 24 SLT ports card to connect 8 Two-Wire Trunk Lines and
24 Single Line Telephones
SLT8-Magneto8 8 SLT ports and 8 Magneto ports to connect 8 Single Line Telephones and 8 Magneto
stations
TWT8-Magneto8 8 TWT ports and 8 Magneto ports to connect 8 Two-Wire Trunk Lines and 8 Magneto
stations
SLT8+MAG2+TWT2+L 8 SLT ports, 2 Magneto Ports, 2 Two-Wire Trunk ports, 2 Loop Dial ports, and 2 E&M
D2+ENM2 ports to connect 8 Single Line Telephones, 2 Magneto phones, 2 Two-Wire Trunk lines, 2
E&M ports
BRI8 8 BRI Ports card to connect 8 ISDN BRI Lines or ISDN Compatible Devices
BRI4 4 BRI Ports card to connect 4 ISDN BRI Lines or ISDN Compatible Devices
T1E1PRI Dual Dual Port T1/E1PRI Card with QSIG Support to connect 2 T1/E1 PRI Lines or
Compatible Devices
T1E1PRI Single Single Port T1/E1PRI Card with QSIG Support to connect 2 T1/E1 PRI Lines or
Compatible Devices
GSM/3G8 8 GSM/Ports card to insert 8 GSM SIM Cards for mobile Network Connectivity
GSM/3G4 4 GSM/Ports card to insert 4 GSM SIM Cards for mobile Network Connectivity
VoIP32 VoIP Card to connect to IP Network for making VoIP calls. Supports 32 VoIP Channels
E&M8 8 E&M Ports card to connect to 8 E&M Lines
E&M4 4 E&M Ports card to connect to 4 E&M Lines
Magneto8 8 Magneto Ports to connect 8 Magneto Phones
VMS16 16 Port Voice Mail System with 512 Mailboxes to give mailbox facility to PBX users
ETERNITY GE Cards Description
SLT20 20 SLT Ports card to connect 20 Single Line Telephones
SLT8 8 SLT Ports card to connect 8 Single Line Telephones
DKP16 16 DKP Ports card to connect 16 Digital Key Phones /DSS Consoles
DKP8 8 DKP Ports card to connect 8 Digital Key Phones /DSS Consoles
1732 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
ETERNITY GE Cards Description
DKP4+SLT16 4DKP Ports and 16 SLT Ports card to connect 4 Digital Key Phones and 16 Single Line
Telephones
TWT2+DKP2+SLT16 2 Two-Wire Trunk ports, 2 Digital Key Phone ports and 16 SLT ports to connect 2 Two-
Wire Trunk Lines, 2 Digital Key Phones/DSS Consoles and 16 Single Line Telephones
TWT8+SLT8 8 Two-Wire Trunk Ports and 8 SLT Ports card to connect 8 Two-Wire Trunk Lines and 8
Single Line Telephones
TWT4+SLT16 4 Two-Wire Trunk Ports and 16 SLT Ports card to connect 4 Two-Wire Trunk Lines and
16 Single Line Telephones
TWT16 16 Two-Wire Trunk Ports card to connect 16 Two-Wire Trunk Lines
TWT8 8 Two-Wire Trunk ports card to connect 8 Two-Wire Trunk Lines
BRI4 4 BRI Ports card to connect 4 ISDN BRI Lines or ISDN Compatible Devices
T1E1PRI Single Single Port T1/E1PRI Card with QSIG Support to connect 1 T1/E1 PRI Line or
Compatible Device
GSM/3G 4 4 GSM/ Ports card to insert 4 GSM SIM Cards for mobile Network Connectivity
VoIP32 VoIP Card to connect to IP Network for making VoIP calls. Supports 32 VoIP Channels.
E&M4 4 E&M Ports card to connect to 4 E&M Lines
VMS16 16 Port Voice Mail System with 512 Mailboxes to give mailbox facility to PBX users
ETERNITY PE Cards Description
SLT8 8 SLT Ports card to connect 8 Single Line Telephones
DKP8 8 DKP Ports card to connect 8 Digital Key Phones /DSS Consoles
DKP4 + SLT4 4 DKP Ports and 4 SLT Ports card to connect 4 Digital Key Phones and 16 Single Line
Telephones
TWT8 8 Two-Wire Trunk ports card to connect 8 Two-Wire Trunk Lines
TWT4 + SLT4 4 Two-wire Trunk ports and 4 SLT (Analog phone) card
TWT4+ DKP4 4 Two-Wire Trunk Ports and 4 DKP Ports card to connect 4 Two-Wire Trunk Lines and 4
Digital Key Phones/DSS Consoles
TWT2+ DKP2+SLT4 2 Two-Wire Trunk Ports, 2 DKP Ports and 4 SLT Ports card to connect 2 Two-Wire
Trunks, 2 Digital Key Phones/DSS Consoles, 4 Single Line Telephones
BRI2* 2 BRI Ports card to connect 2 ISDN BRI Lines or ISDN Compatible Devices
T1E1PRI Single* Single Port T1/E1PRI Card with QSIG Support to connect 1 T1/E1 PRI Line or
Compatible Device
GSM/3G 4 4 GSM Ports card to insert 4 GSM SIM Cards for mobile Network Connectivity
VoIP16 VoIP Card to connect to IP Network for making VoIP calls. Supports 16 VoIP Channels
per Card
VMS 16 Port Voice Mail System with 512 Mailboxes to give mailbox facility to PBX users
Door Phone Multifunction card with:
3 Door phone ports to connect 4-wire Door Phones.
3 Digital Output Ports to connect External Devices like Door Lock.
1 Digital Input Port to connect a Sensor Device or Panic Switch.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1733
* Only in ETERNITY PE3SP and PE6SP
Optional Items
EON42, EON48 Digital Key Phone
EONSOFT PC based Digital Key Phone
DSS64, DSS72 Direct Station Selection unit for 64/72 ports
Technology
Type of Switching PCM/TDM, Digital Switching, 100% Non-Blocking
Processor 32-bit RISC
Architecture Distributed Processing
Slots Universal
SLT (Analog Station)
Signaling Loop Start
Dialing DTMF and Pulse (10/20PPS)
Off Hook AC Impedance 600/900/Complex
Off Hook Current 39mA max
Loop Limit 1800 max (excluding Telephone)
On-Hook Voltage (Tip/Ring) -48V nominal
DTMF Detection ITU-T Q.24
Return Loss >18dB
Longitudinal Balance >50dB
Transmission Level Adjust Tx Gain: -3dB to +6dB, Rx Gain: -3dB to 6dB
Ringing Trapezoidal 60VRMS/25Hz and Sinusoidal 52VRMS/25Hz
REN 3
CLI Reception DTMF, FSK ITU-T V.23 and FSK Bellcore 202
Protection Over Voltage Secondary Protection
Physical Connector RJ45
DKP (Digital Station)
Signaling Proprietary Digital (2B+D)
Interface Single Pair for Speech, Signaling and Power
1734 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Loop Limit 100
Speech Level Adjustable Tx and Rx Gain for Handset and Hands-free
Protection Over Voltage Secondary Protection
Physical Connector RJ45
TWT (Two-Wire Trunk)
Signaling Loop Start
Loop Limit 1200
Off Hook AC Impedance 600/900/Complex
Pulse Dialing 10/20 PPS
DTMF Dialing and Reception ITU-T Q.23 and Q.24
Return Loss >18dB
Longitudinal Balance >50dB
Transmission Level Adjust Tx Gain: -15dB to +10dB, Rx Gain: -15dB to 10dB
CLI Reception DTMF, FSK ITU-T V.23 and FSK Bellcore 202
Call Maturity Delay and Polarity Reversal
Protection Over Voltage and Over Current Secondary Protection
Physical Connector RJ45
ISDN BRI
Channels 2B+D
Personality Network (NT) and Terminal (TE)
AT&T 4ESS, DMS-100, ETSI NET3, ITU-T Q.921, ITU-T Q.931, NTT INS64, US Ni1
Switch Variant
(National ISDN1), France Vnx
Protection Solid state (Over Voltage and Over Current)
Built-in Secondary Protection
Physical Connector RJ45 (120)
ISDN PRI
Channels 2B+D and 30B+D
Personality Network (NT) and Terminal (TE)
Line Coding AMI/B8ZS for T1 and HDB3 for E1
Framing ESF for T1 and CEPT1 (with/without CRC) for E1
AT&T 2ESS, AT&T 5ESS, DMS-100, ETSI NET5, ITU-T Q.921, ITU-T Q.931, NTT
Switch Variant
INS64, US NI2 (National ISDN 2), QSIC ECMA, France VN
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1735
Protection Solid state (Over Voltage and Over Current)
Built-in Secondary Protection
Physical Connector RJ45 (120)
Supplementary Services QSIG ECMA
E1 CAS
Bit Rate 2048 kbps +/-50 ppm
Line Coding HDB3
Framing CEPT1 (with/without CRC) with CAS MF
Line Signaling ITU-T Q.400 - Q. 490
Register Signaling MFC-R2
Alarms I.431. G.732, ETSI 300-233
Protection Solid state (Over Voltage and Over Current)
Built-in Secondary Protection
Physical Connector RJ45 (120)
T1 RBS
Bit Rate 1544 kbps +/- 50 ppm
Line Coding AMI and B8ZS
FXS Loop Start, FXO Loop Start, FXS Ground Start, FXO Ground Start, E&M
Line Signaling
(Immediate, Wink Start, Wink Start FGD)
Framing D4, ESF
Digit Dialing DTMF
Alarms ANSI T1.231
Performance ANSI T1.403, ANSI T1.231, AT&T TR54016
Protection Solid state (Over Voltage and Over Current)
Built-in Secondary Protection
Physical Connector RJ45 (120)
GSM Trunks
GSM Band (MHz) Quadband GSM850, EGSM900, DSC1800, PCS1900
Compliant ETSI GSM Phase2/2+
SIM Card One SIM per GSM Port
SIM Interface 1.8V, 3V
Transmission Power Class 4 (2W) at GSM850MHz and EGSM900MHz band
Class 1 (1W) at DCS1800MHz and PCS1900MHz band
1736 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
RF Sensitivity Better than -106dBm
External Antenna One Antenna per 4 GSM Ports,1.8/3.0dBi, 50, SMA (male) Connector, Omni-
directional with cable of 3 meters length
VoIP
VoIP Protocols SIP V2, SDP, RTP, RFC 2833
Network Protocol IPv4, TCP, UDP, DHCP, STUN
SIP 4 to 32 SIP Trunks (depending on model), Outbound Proxy Support, Display Name, User
Name, Password, URL, Proxy URL, Register URL, Register Interval
NAT/Firewall Support PPPoE
Voice Codecs G.711 (A-Law, µ-Law), G.723, G.729AB, GSM-FR, iLBC
Line Echo Cancellation G.168 with 64-129ms Tail Length
Voice Dynamic Jitter Buffer (Adaptive), Comfort Noise Generation and Voice Activity Detection
Fax T.38 and Pass Through
Data Network Ethernet (RJ45) Port, Auto MDIX (10/100 BaseT)
Quality of Service Layer 3 DIFFServ and ToS
LED Indications 1-LED for System Status and 1-LED for Registrar Status
E&M Trunks
Type Type IV and Type V
Signaling Pulse 10PPS, Pulse 20PPS, DTMF
Signaling Protocol Normal, Delay, Wink, CCS Signals
Speech Interface 2-wire and 4-wire
Auxiliary Ports
Analog Input Port 0.7Vmrs, Isolated, Push-type connector
Analog Output Port 0.7Vmrs, Isolated, Push-type connector
Digital Input Port Loop Sensing-Open/Close, 5mA, Push-type connector
Digital Output Port VDC Max.= 60VDC, IDC Max.= 0.15A, Push-type connector
Power Supply
Option 1: Mains 90-265VAC, 47-63Hz
Supply Input
Option 2: 48VDC +/-20%
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1737
Power Consumption ETERNITY ME10S 70W
ETERNITY ME16S 100W
ETERNITY GE3S 25W
ETERNITY GE6S 30W
ETERNITY GE12S 50W
ETERNITY PE3SS 75W
ETERNITY PE3SP 75W
ETERNITY PE6SP 75W
Mechanical
Dimensions (W x H x D) ETERNITY ME10S 48.20 x 33.00 x 29.90 cm (19.00 x 12.90 x 11.70 Inches)
ETERNITY ME16S 52.30 x 33.00 x 29.90 cm (20.50 x 12.90 x 11.70 Inches)
ETERNITY GE3S 18.00 x 16.30 x 25.40 cm (07.04 x 06.42 x 10.00 Inches)
ETERNITY GE6S 26.00 x 16.30 x 25.40 cm (10.24 x 06.42 x 10.00 Inches)
ETERNITY GE12S 41.20 x 16.30 x 25.40 cm (16.22 x 06.42 x 10.00 Inches)
ETERNITY PE3SS 29.8 x 5.2 x 30.0 cm (11.73 x 2.04 x 11.8 Inches)
ETERNITY PE3SP 29.8 x 5.2 x 30.0 cm (11.73 x 2.04 x 11.8 Inches)
ETERNITY PE6SP 43.9 x 5.2 x 30.0 cm (17.28 x 2.04 x 11.8 Inches)
Unit Weight ETERNITY ME10S 8.30 Kg (18.26 lbs)
ETERNITY ME16S 10.50 Kg (23.10 lbs)
ETERNITY GE3S 1.50 Kg (3.30 lbs)
ETERNITY GE6S 3.50 Kg (7.70 lbs)
ETERNITY GE12S 6.50 Kg (14.30 lbs)
ETERNITY PE3SS 1.55 Kg (3.41 lbs)
ETERNITY PE3SP 1.57 Kg (3.45 lbs)
ETERNITY PE6SP 2.51 Kg (5.52 lbs)
Installation ETERNITY ME10S Wall Mount, Table Top, 19" Rack (Optional)
ETERNITY ME16S Wall Mount, Table Top
ETERNITY GE3S Wall Mount, Table Top
ETERNITY GE6S Wall Mount, Table Top
ETERNITY GE12S Wall Mount, Table Top, 19" Rack (Optional)
ETERNITY PE3SS Wall Mount
ETERNITY PE3SP Wall Mount
ETERNITY PE6SP Wall Mount, Table Top, 19" Rack (Optional)
1738 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Environment
Operating Temperature -10oC to +50oC (-14oF to +122oF)
Operating Humidity 5-95% RH, Non-Condensing
Storage Temperature -40oC to +85oC (-40oF to +185oF)
Storage Humidity 0-95%, RH, Non-Condensing
Compliance
EMI/EMC
Conducted Emission CISPR 22
Radiated Emission CISPR 22
Harmonic Current Emission IEC 61000-3-2
Voltage Flicker IEC 61000-3-3
Electro-static Discharge IEC 61000-4-2
Radiated Susceptibility IEC 61000-4-3
Electrical Fast Transient IEC 61000-4-4
Surge IEC 61000-4-5
Conducted Immunity IEC 61000-4-6
Power Frequency Magnetic Field IEC 61000-4-8
Voltage Interruption & Dips IEC 61000-4-11
FCC
Conducted Emission: FCC Part 15 Sub Part B
Radiated Emission: FCC Part 15 Sub Part B
FCC68 US: MTXMFO1BETERNITY
TEC IR/IPX-01/03 APR2005
EC Directives R&TTE 1999/5/EC
LVD 73/23/EEC
EMC 89/336/EEC
Safety IEC 60950:2001 (First Edition)
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1739
Packing List
Verify contents of the package shipped to you with the contents listed below. If any of the items is missing or
damaged, contact your Dealer/Reseller.
ETERNITY ME 10S/16S
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1 ETERNITY MEa 1
2 3-pin Power Cord, MC-4 Black 1
3. MDF Cable for ETERNITY ME Switch Card 1
4. Wall Mounting Nails 4
5. Mounting Template 1
6. User Card 4
7. Quick Start 1
CD (System Manual, Hospitality System Manual,
8. 1
User Card, Quick Start and Voice Messages)
9. Warranty Card Set 1
a. Factory fitted with the Power Card, Master Card and Switch Card.
If your model is ETERNITY 10SR with the Redundancy Option, there will be 2 Power Cards, 2 Master
Cards and 2 Switch Cards factory fitted.
ETERNITY ME Cards
ETERNITY ME PS48VDC (Power Supply)
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY ME Card PSV8VDC 1
2. 3-Way Battery Cable 1
3. Fuse Slow Blow 5x20 10 Amp 1
ETERNITY ME PSUNI
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY ME Card PSUNI 1
2. Cable Mains MC-4, 4 pin 1
1740 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
ETERNITY ME Switch
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY ME Card Switch 1
2. MDF Cable (24 way - 10 pair) 1
ETERNITY ME Master
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY ME Card Master 1
2. Cable (RJ45) 1
ETERNITY ME Card SLT32
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY ME Card SLT32 1
2. MDF (RJ45) Cables 8
ETERNITY ME Card SLT16
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY ME Card SLT16 1
2. MDF (RJ45) Cables 4
ETERNITY ME Card SLT8
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY ME Card SLT8 1
2. MDF (RJ45) Cables 2
ETERNITY ME Card DKP32
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY ME Card DKP32 1
2. MDF (RJ45) Cables 8
ETERNITY ME Card DKP16
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY ME Card DKP16 1
2. MDF (RJ45) Cables 4
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1741
ETERNITY ME Card DKP8
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY ME Card DKP8 1
2. MDF (RJ45) Cables 2
ETERNITY ME Card TWT16
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY ME Card TWT16 1
2. MDF (RJ45) Cables 4
ETERNITY ME Card TWT8
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY ME Card TWT8 1
2. MDF (RJ45) Cables 2
ETERNITY ME Card TWT8+SLT24
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY ME Card TWT8+SLT24 1
2. MDF (RJ45) Cables 8
ETERNITY ME Card BRI8
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY ME Card BRI8 1
2. MDF (36 way, 20 pair) Cable 2
ETERNITY ME Card BRI4
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY ME Card BRI8 1
2. MDF (36 way, 20 pair) Cable 1
ETERNITY ME Card T1E1PRI Dual
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY ME Card T1E1PRI Dual 1
2. MDF (36 way, 20 pair) Cable 2
1742 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
ETERNITY ME Card T1E1PRI Single
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY ME Card T1E1PRI Single 1
2. MDF (36 way, 20 pair) Cable 1
ETERNITY ME Card GSM8
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY ME Card GSM8 1
2. GSM Antenna External SMA 2
ETERNITY ME Card GSM4
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY ME Card GSM4 1
2. GSM Antenna External SMA 1
ETERNITY ME Card VoIP8
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY ME Card VoIP8 1
2. RJ45 Cable 1
ETERNITY ME Card E&M8
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY ME Card E&M8 1
2. MDF Cable (36 way, 20 pair) 2
ETERNITY ME Card E&M4
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY ME Card E&M4 1
2. MDF Cable (36 way, 20 pair) 1
ETERNITY ME Card Magneto8
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY ME Card Magneto8 1
2. MDF Cable (36-way, 20 pair) 1
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1743
ETERNITY ME SLT8-Magneto8 Card
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY ME Card SLT8-Magneto8 1
2. MDF Cable RJ45 8
ETERNITY ME TWT8-Magneto8 Card
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY ME Card TWT8-Magneto8 1
2. MDF Cable RJ45 8
ETERNITY ME SLT8+MAG2+TWT2+LD2+ENM2 Card
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY ME Card SLT8+MAG2+TWT2+LD2+ENM2 1
2. MDF Cable RJ45 7
ETERNITY ME Card VMS16
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1 ETERNITY ME Card VMS16 1
2. 1 GB USB Flash Drivea 1
3. RJ45 Cable 1
a. Factory fitted.
ETERNITY GE
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1 ETERNITY GEa 1
2 3-pin Power Cord, MC-4 Black 1
3. Wall Mounting Nails 2
4. Mounting Template 1
5. User Card 4
6. Quick Start 1
CD (System Manual, Hospitality System Manual,
7 1
User Card, Quick Start and Voice Messages)
8. Warranty Card Set 1
a. Factory fitted with the Power Card and CPU Card.
1744 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
ETERNITY GE Cards
ETERNITY GE Card SLT20
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY GE Card SLT20 1
2. MDF (RJ45) Cables 5
ETERNITY GE Card SLT8
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY GE Card SLT8 1
2. MDF (RJ45) Cables 2
ETERNITY GE Card DKP16
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY GE Card DKP16 1
2. MDF (RJ45) Cables 4
ETERNITY GE Card DKP8
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY GE Card DKP8 1
2. MDF (RJ45) Cables 2
ETERNITY GE Card DKP4+SLT16
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY GE Card DKP4+SLT16 1
2. MDF (RJ45) Cables 6
ETERNITY GE Card TWT2+DKP2+SLT16
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY GE Card TWT2+DKP2+SLT16 1
2. MDF (RJ45) Cables 6
ETERNITY GE Card TWT2+DKP2+SLT8
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY GE Card TWT2+DKP2+SLT8 1
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1745
Sr. No. Item Quantity
2. MDF (RJ45) Cables 4
ETERNITY GE Card TWT8+SLT8
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY GE Card TWT8+SLT8 1
2. MDF (RJ45) Cables 4
ETERNITY GE Card TWT4+SLT16
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY GE Card TWT4+SLT16 1
2. MDF (RJ45) Cables 6
ETERNITY GE Card TWT16
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY GE Card TWT16 1
2. MDF (RJ45) Cables 4
ETERNITY GE Card TWT8
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY GE Card TWT8 1
2. MDF (RJ45) Cables 2
ETERNITY GE Card BRI4
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY GE Card BRI4 1
2. MDF (RJ45) Cable 1
ETERNITY GE Card T1E1PRI Single
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY GE Card T1E1PRI Single 1
2. MDF (RJ45) Cable 1
1746 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
ETERNITY GE Card GSM4
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY GE Card GSM4 1
2. GSM Antenna External SMA 1
ETERNITY GE Card VoIP8
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY GE Card VoIP8 1
2. RJ45 Cable 1
ETERNITY GE Card E&M4
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY GE Card E&M4 1
2. MDF Cable RJ45 2
ETERNITY GE Card VMS16
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1 ETERNITY GE Card VMS16 1
2. 1 GB USB Flash Drivea 1
3. RJ45 Cable 1
a. Factory fitted.
ETERNITY PE
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1 ETERNITY PEa 1
2 3-pin Power Cord, MC-4 Black 1
4. Wall Mounting Nails 2
5. Mounting Template 1
6. User Card 4
7. Quick Start 1
CD (System Manual, Hospitality System Manual,
8 1
User Card, Quick Start and Voice Messages)
9. Warranty Card Set 1
a. Factory fitted with the Power Supply Unit and CPU.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1747
ETERNITY PE Cards
ETERNITY PE Card SLT8
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY PE Card SLT8 1
2. MDF (RJ45) Cable 3
ETERNITY PE Card DKP8
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY PE Card DKP8 1
2. MDF (RJ45) Cable 3
ETERNITY PE Card DKP4 + SLT4
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY PE Card DKP4+SLT4 1
2. MDF (RJ45) Cable 3
ETERNITY PE Card TWT8
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY PE Card TWT8 1
2. MDF (RJ45) Cables 2
ETERNITY PE Card TWT4 + SLT4
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY PE Card TWT4+SLT4 1
2. MDF (RJ45) Cables 3
ETERNITY PE Card TWT4+ DKP4
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY PE Card TWT4+DKP4 1
2. MDF (RJ45) Cables 3
ETERNITY PE Card TWT2+ DKP2+SLT4
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY PE Card TWT2+DKP2+SLT4 1
1748 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Sr. No. Item Quantity
2 MDF (RJ45) Cables 3
ETERNITY PE Card BRI2
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY PE Card BRI2 1
2. RJ45 Cable 1
ETERNITY PE Card T1E1PRI Single
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY PE Card T1E1PRI Single 1
2. RJ45 Cable 1
ETERNITY PE Card GSM4
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY PE Card GSM4 1
2. GSM Antenna External SMA 1
ETERNITY PE Card VoIP8
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. ETERNITY PE Card VoIP8 1
2. RJ45 Cable 1
ETERNITY PE Card VMS16
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1 ETERNITY PE Card VMS16 1
2. 1 GB USB Flash Drivea 1
3. RJ45 Cable 1
a. Factory fitted.
EON42
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. EON42 Phone Body 1
2. Handset 1
3. 6P6C Line Cord 1
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1749
Sr. No. Item Quantity
4. 4P4C Spring Cord 1
5. EON42 User Card 1
6. Warranty Card Set 1
EON48
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. EON48 Phone Body 1
2. Handset 1
3. 6P6C Line Cord 1
4. 4P4C Spring Cord 1
5. Foot Stand 1
6. EON48 User Card 1
7. Warranty Card Set 1
DSS64
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. DSS64 Console 1
2. Cable RJ45 1
DSS72
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. DSS72 Console 1
2. Cable RJ45 1
3. Foot stand 1
EONSOFT
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. EONSOFT Dongle 1
2. Handset with Spring Cord 1
3. Communication Cable 1
4. Screw m7/30 2
5. Screw Grip 2
1750 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Sr. No. Item Quantity
6. Mounting Template 1
7. EONSOFT CD 1
PPM4
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1. Matrix PPM4 1
2. Wall Mounting Screws 2
3. Wall Mounting Screw Grips 2
4. Mounting Template 1
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1751
How to Make the Telecom Earth
The Earth (Ground) is the most important safety procedure to prevent electrical shocks and fires. It protects from
lightning strikes, electrical transients, static discharges, electromagnetic interference and electrical hazards.
A proper earth must be in place to protect people and the system. The following explanation shows how a perfect
electrical earth can save lives.
P
Vs Vc
A.C. Input Electrical Parts of the Gadget
N Z1
Z2
Enclosure of the Gadget
Earth
In the above diagram, Vc = VS *Z2 / Z1 + Z2
Where,
• Z1 is the stray impedance between the electrical parts of the Gadget and the Chassis.
• Z2 is the stray impedance between the Chassis and the Earth.
• If Z2 = 0 then VC = 0
This formula implies that if the impedance between the Chassis and the Earth is reduced to 0 then the Voltage on
the Chassis, i.e. VC, would be Zero and hence any person touching the enclosure will not get an electric shock.
Hence Z2 should be made Zero.
This can be done by providing a perfect earth to the electrical equipment.
It is recommended that you provide a dedicated earth for the PBX/any other telecom equipment. This dedicated
earth is called the Telecom Earth (Ground).
Providing a separate Telecom Earth to the telecom equipment eliminates the possibility of any back-voltage on the
earth.
CO Line CO Line
System
Lightning
Protective Earth
Protectors
Terminal
Telecom Earth
1752 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
How to make a perfect Earth
Exchange Room
G.1 PIPE 4 Inch
Pit of area 2x2x6
BUS BAR
Copper strip 1 inch wide
x 3 mm thick x 6 mm long
Soil
1 layer of salt and charcoal 1:3 ratio
Copper plate 1.5x1.5 x 1/4 thick
• Dig a pit of area 2 feet x 2 feet x 6 feet (L x B x D).
• Get a copper plate of size 1.5 feet x 1.5 feet x 0.25 feet.
• Connect a copper strip of size 1-inch wide, 3 mm thick and 6 feet length at the center of the copper plate
by welding or nuts and bolts.
• Insert a G.I. pipe onto the copper strip till it reaches the copper plate.
• Place this set up into the pit. Make sure that at least 4 inches of the G.I. pipe is above the ground level.
• Fill the bottom of the pit with a 1-inch layer of charcoal and salt in the proportion of 3:1 (3 parts charcoal, 1
part salt) and then cover with the soil.
• Connect a bare 14 SWG copper wire (double) on the top of the copper strip and run it to the exchange
room and connect it on the bus bar.
• The Bus bar is a copper strip, 4 inches long with 6 screws and nuts mounted on it. It has to be fixed on the
wall in the exchange room.
• The earth wire of the Primary Protection Modules (PPM) should be connected to this Bus bar.
• Water the earth at regular intervals.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1753
Features at a Glance
Abbreviated Dialing
Personal/Global Abbreviated Dialing 8-Location Code
Program Personal memory 1071-Location Code-Number-#*-TAC
Account Code
Account Code by Number 1058-Account Code
Account Code by Name 1059-Account Name
Alarms
Once Only Alarm 161-Hours-Minutes-1
Daily Alarms 161-Hours-Minutes-2
Cancel Once Only/Daily Alarm 161-#
Set/Cancel Voice Guided Alarm 163-Follow VMS Prompts
Auto Call Back
Auto Call Back-On Busy 2
Auto Call Back-On No Reply 2
Cancel Auto Call Back 102
Auto Redial
Auto Redial 17
Cancel Auto Redial 1070
Automatic Control Applications
DOP ON/OFF 1174
Back Ground Music
Enable/Disable Back Ground Music 1099
Barge-In
Barge-In 4
1754 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Call Cost Display
Last Ten dialed numbers Cost display 1075
Call Chaining
Call Chaining 1050
Call Forward
Call Forward-All Calls to Another Station 131-Station/Department Group/VMS Group
Call Forward-All Calls to External Station 131-Trunk Access Code-Dest. Number-#*
Call Forward-If Busy 132-Station/Department Group/VMS Group
Call Forward-If Busy-All Calls to External Number 132-Trunk Access Code-Dest. Number-#*
Call Forward-If No Reply 133-Station/Department Group/VMS Group
Call Forward-If No Reply-All Calls to External Number 133-Trunk Access Code-Dest. Number-#*
Call Forward-If Busy or No Reply 134-Station/Department Group/VMS Group
Call Forward-If Busy or No Reply-All to External
134-Trunk Access Code-Dest. Number-#*
Number
Call Forward-Dual Ring 1361
Disable Call Forward-Dual Ring 1360
Cancel Call Forward 130
Call Forward - Scheduled
For Working Hours
Call Forward-Scheduled - Unconditional 1175-1-1-Destination Number
Call Forward - Scheduled - Busy 1175-1-2-Destination Number
Call Forward - Scheduled - No Reply 1175-1-3-Destination Number
Call Forward - Scheduled - Busy/No Reply 1175-1-4-Destination Number
Call Forward - Scheduled - Set Dual Ring 1175-1-5-1
Call Forward - Scheduled - Cancel Dual Ring 1175-1-5-0
Call Forward - Scheduled - Cancel for Working Hours 1175-1-0
For Break Hours
Call Forward-Scheduled - Unconditional 1175-2-1-Destination Number
Call Forward - Scheduled - Busy 1175-2-2-Destination Number
Call Forward - Scheduled - No Reply 1175-2-3-Destination Number
Call Forward - Scheduled - Busy/No Reply 1175-2-4-Destination Number
Call Forward - Scheduled - Set Dual Ring 1175-2-5-1
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1755
Call Forward - Scheduled - Cancel Dual Ring 1175-2-5-0
Call Forward - Scheduled - Cancel for Break Hours 1175-2-0
For Non-Working Hours
Call Forward-Scheduled - Unconditional 1175-3-1-Destination Number
Call Forward - Scheduled - Busy 1175-3-2-Destination Number
Call Forward - Scheduled - No Reply 1175-3-3-Destination Number
Call Forward - Scheduled - Busy/No Reply 1175-3-4-Destination Number
Call Forward - Scheduled - Set Dual Ring 1175-3-5-1
Call Forward - Scheduled - Cancel Dual Ring 1175-3-5-0
Call Forward - Scheduled - Cancel for Non-Working
1175-3-0
Hours
Cancel Call Forward - Scheduled for all Time Zones 1175-0
Call Forward - Department Group
Call Forward-Department Group - Unconditional 1175-Department Group Number (Access Code)-1-
Destination Number
Call Forward-Department Group - Busy 1175-Department Group Number (Access Code)-2-
Destination Number
Call Forward-Department Group - No Reply 1175-Department Group Number (Access Code)-3-
Destination Number
Call Forward-Department Group - Busy/No Reply 1175-Department Group Number (Access Code)-4-
Destination Number
Call Forward-Department Group - Cancel 1175-Department Group Number (Access Code)-0
Call Hold
Put the caller on Hold Flash
Retrieve the caller Flash
Call Park
To Park a Call 115-Orbit Number
To Retrieve the Parked Call 116-Orbit Number
Call Pick Up
Call Pick Up-General 4
Call Pick Up-Selective 12-Station
1756 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Call Toggle
Call Toggle (Toggle) Flash-1
Call Transfer
Call Transfer to Station Speech with Station-Flash-Station (Transfer
Target)-OnHook
Call Transfer to Station (External Number) Speech with External Number-Flash-Station
(Transfer Target)-OnHook
Call Transfer to Trunk (External) Speech with External Number -Flash-#-TAC-
External Number (Transfer Target)-Flash-#
Call Transfer to Trunk Speech with Station -Flash-TAC-External Number-
Go OnHook
Blind Transfer to Mail Box (VMS) Flash-1078-Station
Calling Line Identification Restriction
Enable/disable CLIR 103
Cancel All Station Features
Cancel all station features 1051
Conference 3-Party
Conference 3-Party Flash-0
Conference-Unsupervised Flash-#
Conference Dial-In
Schedule a Conference 194-Conference Number-Conference Password
Initiate a Conference 195-Conference Number-Conference Password
To include a station in a midway of conference 191
Cancel a Conference 196-Conference Number-Conference Password/
190
Conference Multiparty
Conference Multiparty Flash-191
To exclude a station from mid of conference 192
Terminate Conference 190
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1757
Conversation Recording
Conversation Recording Flash-1095
Department Call
Department Call Department Number (3901-3916)
Direct Inward System Access
Enter DISA Mode 1079-Station Number-User Password
Do Not Disturb
Set Do Not Disturb with Text Message 18-DND Message Number
Cancel Do Not Disturb 18-0
DND Override 4
Door Phone
Set Door Phone as Scheduled Mode 1171-Access Code of Door Phone-1
Set Door Phone as Manual Mode 1171-Access Code of Door Phone-2
Set Door Phone to route calls to an extension 1172-Access Code of Door Phone-1
Set Door Phone to route calls to an external number 1172-Access Code of Door Phone-2
To open the Door Lock 1173
Dynamic Lock
Set Dynamic Timer 142-User Password-Minutes
Change Toll Control Level 141-User Password-Level
Emergency Conference
Make Emergency Conference 1177-Department Group Number
While in speech with any one party, Go Off-Hook
Cancel Emergency Conference
and dial 190
Emergency Dialing
Go Off-Hook and dial Emergency Number
Dial Emergency Number or
Dial TAC-Emergency Number
1758 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Flashing on Trunks
Flashing on Trunks Flash-*
Floor Service
To access Floor Service 38
Follow Me
Set Call Follow Me 135-Station-User Password
Cancel Call Follow Me 130
Forced Answer
Forced Answer 5
Forced Call Disconnection
Forced Call Disconnection #*
Hot Desking
Set Hot Desk 1091-Your Station Number-User Password
Hotline
Set Hotline 151-Station
Set Hotline Timer 154-Seconds
Hot Outward Dialing 152-Trunk Access Code
HOD with Number 153-Trunk Access Code-Number-#*
Cancel Hotline/HOD 150
Interrupt Request
Interrupt Request 3
Last Caller Recall
Last Caller Recall 1092
Last Number Redial
Last Number Redial 7
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1759
Live Call Screening
To Activate LCS 1094-1
To Deactivate LCS 1094-0
Live Call Supervision
Set Live Call Supervision 1098-Destination Station
Maid-In
Maid Status from a Room 1054-Code
Meet Me Paging
Meet Me Paging-Caller 1093-Page Zone Number
Meet Me Paging-Called Party 1093-Station Number of the Caller/AOP
Message Wait
Message Wait Set/Cancel 1076-Station-Code
Message Wait Retrieval 1077
Mini Bar
To check the utilities of the room 1056-Item Number-Quantity
Mute
Mute 1052
OG Trunk Bundle Group
To grab OG Trunk Bundle Group 0/5/6-OGTBG Index
Operator
Call to Operator 9
Paging
Paging 1074-Page Zone Number
Presence
Publishing Presence by extension user 104-Password-Index No.
1760 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To view Presence Status 1097-Extension Number
Priority Calls in E&M MFCR2 Signaling
Manual Priority Instrusion *37
Forced Released Order *38
Raid
Raid 5
RCOC
RCOC in DISA Mode ** on dial tone
Reminder
Set Reminder 162-DD-MM-YYYY-HH-MM
Cancel Reminder 162-#
Set/Cancel Voice Guided Reminder 164-Follow VMS Prompts
Room Monitor
Room Monitor 1073-Station
Selective Port Access
Selective Port Access 69-Port Type-Port Offset
Self Ring Test
Self Ring Test 1057
System Administrator Mode
Enter System Administrator Mode 1#92-SA Password
Exit SA Mode 1#92
SA Command 1072
System Engineer Mode
Enter System Engineer Mode 1#91-SE Password
Exit SE Mode 00
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1761
Trunk Reservation
Reserve a Trunk 6
Cancel a Reserved Trunk 102
User Absent/Present
User Absent 104-User Password-0
User Present 104-User Password-1
User Password
Change User Password 114-Old User Password-New User Password
Voice Help
Voice Help 1090
Walk-In Class Of Service
To Walk-In 111-1-Station Password
To Walk-Out 111-0
1762 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
SA Commands
Call Phases
Feature Access
Feature Name Matured Matured
Number Code Dial Routing Blocked Placed
2-Way 3-way
Check-In 001 1072-901 Y Y
Check-Out 002 1072-902 Y Y
Guest Name 003 1072-903 Y Y
Guest Group 004 1072-904 Y Y
Guest-In/Out 005 1072-905 Y Y
Guest Title 006 1072-906 Y Y
Change Check-In Profile of Room 007 1072-907 Y Y
Change Occupancy Status of 008 1072-908 Y Y
Room / Extension
Change Clean status of Room/ 009 1072-909 Y Y
Extension
Room Shift 010 1072-910 Y Y
Reprint Check Out Report 011 1072-911 Y Y
Print Room Status Report 012 1072-912 Y Y
Print Alarm Status Report 013 1072-913 Y Y
Delete Checked Out calls 014 1072-914 Y Y
Set DND-Remote 015 1072-001 Y Y
Set Dynamic Lock settings – 016 1072-002 Y Y
Remote
Set Alarm –Remote 017 1072-003 Y Y
Assign Call Budget to a station 018 1072-004 Y Y
Assign/Deassign Mailbox to a 019 1072-005 Y Y
Station - Remote
Set Call Forward – Remote 020 1072-006 Y Y
Set Call forward for all stations- 021 1072-007 Y Y
Remote
Assign Station User Greeting 022 1072-008 Y Y
Message
Display & Acknowledge System 023 1072-009 Y Y
Activity
Display & Acknowledge System 024 1072-010 Y Y
Fault
Station Budget Display 025 1072-011 Y Y
Change User password of a 026 1072-012 Y Y
Station
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1763
Call Phases
Feature Access
Feature Name Matured Matured
Number Code Dial Routing Blocked Placed
2-Way 3-way
Lock/unlock DKP's Keypad 027 1072-013 Y Y
User Absent / Present 028 1072-014 Y Y
Change SA password 029 1072-015 Y Y
Change SA mode timer 030 1072-016 Y Y
Display Registered GSM Network 031 1072-017 Y
ID
Set Day/Night mode 032 1072-018 Y
Switch OFF DOP manually 033 1072-019 Y Y
Switch ON DOP manually 034 1072-020 Y Y
Terminate Security dialing 035 1072-021 Y Y
Clear System Activity Log 036 1072-022 Y Y
Start/Abort SAL in Offline mode 037 1072-023 Y Y
Start/Abort SAL in Online mode 038 1072-024 Y Y
- 039 1072-025 Y Y
Cancel Dial in Conference 040 1072-026 Y Y
Start/Abort SFL in Offline mode 041 1072-027 Y Y
Start/Abort SFL in Online mode 042 1072-028 Y Y
Display Port Parameters 043 1072-029 Y Y
Start/Abort Online OG Report 044 1072-101 Y Y
OG Print Filter: Print calls 045 1072-102 Y Y
originated from station/s
OG Print Filter: To Print calls 046 1072-103 Y Y
terminated from TWT
OG Print Filter: To Print calls 047 1072-104 Y Y
terminated from BRI
OG Print Filter: To Print calls 048 1072-105 Y Y
terminated from T1E1
OG Print Filter: To Print calls 049 1072-106 Y Y
terminated from E&M
OG Print Filter: To Print calls 050 1072-107 Y Y
terminated from Mobile
OG Print Filter: To Print calls 051 1072-108 Y Y
terminated from SIP
OG Print Filter: To Print calls 052 1072-109 Y Y
Department Bill Group wise
OG Print Filter: To print calls made 053 1072-110 Y Y
on dates
1764 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Call Phases
Feature Access
Feature Name Matured Matured
Number Code Dial Routing Blocked Placed
2-Way 3-way
OG Print Filter: Print calls made 054 1072-111 Y Y
between time
OG Print Filter: To Print calls made 055 1072-112 Y Y
to numbers matching with the
numbers programmed in the
Number List
OG Print Filter: To Print calls of 056 1072-113 Y Y
Duration more than this time
OG Print Filter: To Print calls of 057 1072-114 Y Y
Units more than the units
programmed
OG Print Filter: To Print calls made 058 1072-115 Y Y
to account code
Assign default OG Print filters 059 1072-120 Y Y
Start/Abort offline report 060 1072-121 Y Y
Enable/ Disable OG Schedule 061 1072-122 Y Y
Reports
Program Time for Daily OG 062 1072-123 Y Y
Scheduled Reports
Program Day and Time for OG 063 1072-124 Y Y
Weekly Scheduled Reports
Program Date and Time for OG 064 1072-125 Y Y
Monthly Scheduled Reports
Delete calls made by stations 065 1072-131 Y Y
Delete calls made on/from date 066 1072-132 Y Y
To clear SMDR OG buffer 067 1072-133 Y Y
Start/Abort Internal calls Report 068 1072-136 Y Y
Set filter to print Internal calls 069 1072-137 Y Y
Report Station wise
Set filter to print internal calls with 070 1072-138 Y Y
duration greater than that given
here
Start/Abort Offline Internal Call 071 1072-141 Y Y
Report
Enable/ Disable Internal 072 1072-142 Y Y
Scheduled Reports
Program Time for Internal Daily 073 1072-143 Y Y
Scheduled Reports
Program Day and Time for Internal 074 1072-144 Y Y
Weekly Scheduled Reports
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1765
Call Phases
Feature Access
Feature Name Matured Matured
Number Code Dial Routing Blocked Placed
2-Way 3-way
Program Date and Time for 075 1072-145 Y Y
Internal Monthly Scheduled
Reports
To Clear SMDR Internal Buffer 076 1072-150 Y Y
Start/Abort Online – IC Report 077 1072-151 Y Y
Set filter to print all Normal calls 078 1072-152 Y Y
Set filter to print all DID calls 079 1072-153 Y Y
Set filter to print all Unanswered 080 1072-154 Y Y
calls
Set filter to print all DID 081 1072-155 Y Y
Unanswered calls
Set filter to print all DISA calls 082 1072-156 Y Y
Set filter to print all calls with 083 1072-157 Y Y
speech duration More than timer
Set filter to print all calls 084 1072-158 Y Y
unanswered for duration More
than timer
Set filter to print all calls kept on 085 1072-159 Y Y
hold for duration more than timer
Set filter to print all IC calls 086 1072-160 Y Y
received by the station
Set filter to print all IC calls recd. 087 1072-161 Y Y
On the TWT
Set filter to print all IC calls recd. 088 1072-162 Y Y
On the BRI
Set filter to print all IC calls recd. 089 1072-163 Y Y
On the T1E1
Set filter to print all IC calls recd. 090 1072-164 Y Y
On the E&M
Set filter to print all IC calls from 091 1072-165 Y Y
Mobile
Set filter to print calls received 092 1072-166 Y Y
from SIP
Set filter to print all IC calls recd. 093 1072-167 Y Y
On/from date
Set filter to print all IC calls recd. 094 1072-168 Y Y
At/from-to Time
Set filter to print all IC calls recd. 095 1072-169 Y Y
From nos. matching the External
Number List
Default IC Print filters 096 1072-170 Y Y
1766 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Call Phases
Feature Access
Feature Name Matured Matured
Number Code Dial Routing Blocked Placed
2-Way 3-way
Abort/Start IC Offline Report 097 1072-171 Y Y
Enable/ Disable IC Scheduled 098 1072-172 Y Y
Report
Program Time for IC Daily 099 1072-173 Y Y
Scheduled Reports
Program Day and Time for IC 100 1072-174 Y Y
Weekly Scheduled Reports
Program Date and Time for IC 101 1072-175 Y Y
Monthly Scheduled Reports
Clear SMDR-IC buffer 102 1072-180 Y Y
Start/Abort Printing of Online T1E1 103 1072-030 Y Y
Performance Report
Start/Abort Offline T1E1 104 1072-031 Y Y
Performance Report
Signal Strength of Mobile Port 105 1072-032 Y Y
Enable/Disable Call Cost Display 106 1072-181 Y Y
for a Station
Start/Abort Hotel/Motel Activity log 107 1072-176 Y Y
in Offline mode
Start/Abort Hotel/Motel Activity log 108 1072-177 Y Y
in Online mode
Display and Acknowledge Hotel/ 109 1072-178 Y Y
Motel Activity
Change Guest VIP Status of 110 1072-915 Y Y
Station
Change Phone Ringing Pattern of 111 1072-916 Y Y
Room
Print Reminder Status Report 112 1072-917 Y Y
Remote Reminder 113 1072-033 Y Y
Remote Voice Guided Alarm 114 1072-034 Y Y
Remote Voice Guided Reminder 115 1072-035 Y Y
- 116 --
- 117 --
Enable/Disable Scheduled Alarm 118 1072-036 Y Y
Report
Program Time for Scheduled 119 1072-037 Y Y
Alarm Report
Enable/Disable Scheduled 120 1072-038 Y Y
Reminder Report
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1767
Call Phases
Feature Access
Feature Name Matured Matured
Number Code Dial Routing Blocked Placed
2-Way 3-way
Program Time for Scheduled 121 1072-039 Y Y
Reminder Report
Request Database 122 1072-040 Y Y
Synchronisation to PMS
Enable/Disable Scheduled Room 123 1072-041 Y Y
Status Report
Program Time for Schedule Room 124 1072-042 Y Y
Status Report
Enable/Disable Scheduled 125 1072-043 Y Y
Change of Room Clean Status
Program Time for Schedule 126 1072-044 Y Y
Change of Room Clean Status
- 127 1072-182 Y Y
Enable/Disable Internal Call Block 128 1072-045 Y Y
For Guest Phones
Software Version Revision Display 129 1072-191 Y Y
of Master Card
User Definable Fields 130 1072-920 Y Y
OG Print Filter: To print calls 131 1072-183 Y Y
originated from TWT
OG Print Filter: To print calls 132 1072-184 Y Y
originated from BRI
OG Print Filter: To print calls 133 1072-185 Y Y
originated from T1E1
OG Print Filter: To print calls 134 1072-186 Y Y
originated from E&M
OG Print Filter: To print calls 135 1072-187 Y Y
originated from Mobile
OG Print Filter: To print calls 136 1072-188 Y Y
originated from SIP
OG Print Filter: To print calls 137 1072-189 Y Y
originated from Magneto
Set Budget Type for TWT Port 138 1072-192 Y Y
Program Budget Amount for TWT 139 1072-193 Y Y
Program Free Minutes on TWT 140 1072-194 Y Y
Set Budget Type for T1E1 Port 141 1072-195 Y Y
Program Budget Amount for T1E1 142 1072-196 Y Y
Program Free Minutes on T1E1 143 1072-197 Y Y
Set Budget Type for BRI Port 144 1072-198 Y Y
1768 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Call Phases
Feature Access
Feature Name Matured Matured
Number Code Dial Routing Blocked Placed
2-Way 3-way
Program Budget Amount for BRI 145 1072-199 Y Y
Program Free Minutes on BRI 146 1072-200 Y Y
Set Budget Type for SIP 147 1072-201 Y Y
Program Budget Amount for SIP 148 1072-202 Y Y
Program Free Minutes on SIP 149 1072-203 Y Y
Set Budget Type for MOBILE 150 1072-204 Y Y
Program Budget Amount for 151 1072-205 Y Y
MOBILE
Program Free Minutes on MOBILE 152 1072-206 Y Y
Call Budget Reset Mode for TWT 153 1072-207 Y Y
Scheduled Date to Rest Call 154 1072-208 Y Y
Budget Statistics on TWT
Reset consumed Budget Amount / 155 1072-209 Y Y
minutes on TWT manually
Call Budget Reset Mode for T1E1 156 1072-210 Y Y
Scheduled Date to Rest Call 157 1072-211 Y Y
Budget Statistics on T1E1
Reset consumed Budget Amount / 158 1072-212 Y Y
minutes on T1E1 manually
Call Budget Reset Mode for BRI 159 1072-213 Y Y
Scheduled Date to Rest Call 160 1072-214 Y Y
Budget Statistics on BRI
Reset consumed Budget Amount / 161 1072-215 Y Y
minutes on BRI manually
Call Budget Reset Mode for SIP 162 1072-216 Y Y
Scheduled Date to Rest Call 163 1072-217 Y Y
Budget Statistics on SIP
Reset consumed Budget Amount / 164 1072-218 Y Y
minutes on SIP manually
Call Budget Reset Mode for 165 1072-219 Y Y
MOBILE
Scheduled Date to Rest Call 166 1072-220 Y Y
Budget Statistics on MOBILE
Reset consumed Budget Amount / 167 1072-221 Y Y
minutes on MOBILE manually
Swap Ports for TWT8/SLT8 - 168 1072-046 Y Y
MAG8 Card
Reset ASR and ACD for Mobile 169 1072-222 Y Y
port
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1769
Call Phases
Feature Access
Feature Name Matured Matured
Number Code Dial Routing Blocked Placed
2-Way 3-way
Set/Cancel Scheduled Call 170 1072-223 Y Y
Forward
Start BITE Test for desired port 171 1072-047 Y
OG Print Filter: To print calls 172 1072-116 Y Y
terminated from LD trunk
IC Print Filter: To print calls 173 1072-117 Y Y
received on LD trunk
OG Print Filter: To print calls 174 1072-118 Y Y
originated from LD trunk
To Broadcast Message 175 1072-301 Y Y
To record a prompt for a node 176 1072-302 Y Y
To playback a prompt for a node 177 1072-303 Y Y
To record a system greetings 178 1072-304 Y Y
To playback a system greetings 179 1072-305 Y Y
To record Welcome message 180 1072-306 Y Y
To playback Welcome message 181 1072-307 Y Y
To record Time Zone greeting for a 182 1072-308 Y Y
mailbox
To playback Time Zone greeting 183 1072-309 Y Y
for a mailbox
To record Name of a station 184 1072-310 Y Y
To playback Name of a station 185 1072-311 Y Y
To record Voice Guidance 186 1072-312 Y Y
message
To playback Voice Guidance 187 1072-313 Y Y
message
1770 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
System Commands
Abbreviated Dialing
Program telephone number in a personal directory 1902-Personal Directory-Location Code-Number
Clear telephone number from a location in a PM 1902-Personal Directory-Location Code-#*
Group
Program a name in PM Group 1903-Personal Directory-Location Code-Name
Clear a name from location in a PM Group 1903-Personal Directory-Location Code-#*
To program a TAC Index to PM Group 1904-Personal Directory-Location Code-TAC Index
To assign PM Group to a SLT 1905-1-SLT-Personal Directory
To clear PM Group assigned to a SLT 1905-1-SLT-00
To assign PM Group to a DKP 1906-1-DKP-Personal Directory
To clear PM Group assigned to a DKP 1906-1-DKP-00
To assign PM Group to an ISDN Terminal 1907-1-ISDN-Personal Directory
To clear PM Group assigned to an ISDN Terminal 1907-1-ISDN-00
To clear a PM Group 1901-1-PM Group
To program a telephone number in global directory 1801-Location Code-Number
Clear telephone number from a location in global 1801-Location Code-#*
directory
Program a name in global directory 1802-Location Code-Name
Clear a name from a location in the global directory 1802-Location Code-#*
Program the OGTBG for global directory 1803-1-Location Code-OGTBG
Clear a location code in the global directory 1800-1-Location Code
Access Codes
Program the access code for features 3111-1-Feature Number-Access Code-#*
Assign default access code 3161-1-Feature Number
Account Codes
Program account name for the account code 4851-1-Account Code-Account Name
To enable Forced Account Code flag in Station 5602-1-Template Number-Feature Number-Flag
Advanced Feature Template Code
To enable Forced Account Code flag on a Trunk 5802-1-Template Number-Feature Number-Flag
Code
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1771
Alarms
Program alarm/reminder ring timer 2201-Seconds
Program number of alarm attempts 2202-Number of Alarm Attempts
Program alarm attempt interval 2203-Alarm Attempt Interval
Enable/disable snooze alarm/reminder 2204-Code
To disable/enable Configurable Alarm Type 2208-Flag
To disable/enable Configurable Alarm Category 2209-Flag
5602-1-Template Number-12-Alarm Notification
To configure Alarm Notification Type
Type
To program Macros 1810-Macro Index-Number String
To clear a Macro 1810-Macro Index-#*
To program Access Code for Macro 3115-1-MAcro Index-Access Code
To clear the Access Code for the Macro 3115-1-Macro Index
To assign Destination Port for Hotel Reports 3701-Destination Port Code
Alternate Number Dialing
To assign an alternate group number to a location 1804-1-Memory Location Code-Alternate Number
code Group
To clear an alternated group number to a location code 1804-1-Memory Location Code-000
Auto Answer
To set auto answer on DKP 1214-1-DKP-Auto Call Answer Mode
To set Auto Answer Timer 1215-1-DKP-Auto Call Answer Timer
To enable/disable Headset Connectivity flag 1213-1-DKP-Headset Connectivity Flag
Auto Call Back
To program Auto Call Back when Busy/No Reply in a 1302-1-COS Group-Feature Number-Code
CoS group
To assign the CoS group with Auto Call Back Busy/No 5502-1-Template Number-Feature Number-Code
Reply to a Station Basic Feature Template
To apply the Station Basic Feature Template with Auto 5503-1-SLT-Template Number
Call Back when Busy and No Reply, to an SLT
To apply the Station Basic Feature Template with Auto 5504-1-DKP-Template Number
Call Back when Busy and No Reply, to a DKP
To program the Auto Call Back Ring Timer 3801-Seconds
1772 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Auto Redial
Program time duration between two trials for low 1704-Seconds
priority
Program the number of trials for low priority 1705-Count
Program time duration between two trials for high 1706-Seconds
priority
Program the number of trials for high priority 1707-Count
Program auto redial dial tone wait timer 1701-Seconds
Program auto redial RBT wait timer 1702-Seconds
Program auto redial ring timer 1703-Seconds
Automated Control Applications
To select the Gadget Mode for a gadget 1711-Gadget Number-Gadget Mode
To assign DOP for the Gadget 1712-Gadget Number-DOP
To program the Preset Interval 1713-Gadget Number-Preset Interval
To program 'Flip-Flop Timer' 1714-Gadget Number-Flip_Flop Timer
To program 'Preset ON Time' 1715-Gadget Number-Preset ON Time
To program 'Preset OFF Time' 1716-Gadget Number-Preset OFF Time
To program Scheduled ON time at the Index of a 1717-Index-Scheduled ON Time
Schedule
To program Scheduled OFF Time at Index of a 1718-Index-Scheduled OFF Time
Schedule
To program the DOP Contact Type 5001-1-DOP-Contact Type
Automatic Number Translation
To program Dialed Number String for the Index of the 4751-1-ANT Table No.-Index-Dialed Number String-
ANT Table #*
To program Substitute Number String for the Index of 4752-1-ANT Table No.-Index-Substitute Number
the ANT Table String -#*
To enable Automatic Number Translation Flag on 6702-1-OG Trunk Bundle Number-Feature Number-
OGTB Code
To assign an Automatic Number Translation Table 6702-1-OG Trunk Bundle Number-Feature Number-
Code
To default the ANT Table 4750-1-ANT Table No.
Barge-In
To program Barge-In Timer 3803-Seconds
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1773
Behind the PBX Application
To program PPDC Count in TWT Hardware Template 5902-1-Template Number-08-Code
To assign the TWT Hardware Template now 5903-1-TWT-Template Number
programmed with the PPDC to trunks
BITE
To define the BITE Card Slot 5366-1-Slot Number
Call Back on Trunk Ports
To 5366-1-Slot Number
Call Budget
To program default Call Budget Amount 3710-Preset Call Budget Amount
Call Budget on Trunk
To program Call Budget Type on TWT 3301-1-TWT-Budget Type
To program Call Budget Amount on TWT 3302-1-TWT-Budget Amount
To program Free minutes on TWT 3303-1-TWT-Minutes
To program Call Budget Reset Mode for TWT 3304-1-TWT-Call Budget Reset Mode
To program the Date for Scheduled Reset mode 3305-1-TWT-Date
To program Call Budget - Number of Calls on TWT 3309-1-TWT-Number of Calls
To program Budget Type on SIP 7733-1-SIP-Budget Type
To program Budget Amount on SIP 7734-1-SIP-Budget Amount
To program Free Minutes on SIP 7735-1-SIP-Minutes
To program Call Budget Reset Mode for SIP 7736-1-SIP-Call Budget Reset Mode
To program the Date for Scheduled Reset mode for 7737-1-SIP-Date
SIP trunk
To program Call Budget Number of Calls on SIP trunk 7730-1-SIP-Number of Calls
To program Call Budget Type on Mobile trunk port 8019-1-Mobile-Budget Type
To program Call Budget Amount on Mobile trunk port 8020-1-Mobile-Budget Amount
To program Call Budget Minutes on Mobile trunk port 8021-1-Mobile-Minutes
To program Call Budget Number of Calls on Mobile 8033-1-Mobile-Number of Calls
trunk port
To program Call Budget Reset Mode for Mobile trunk 8022-1-Mobile-Call Budget Reset Mode
port
To program the Date for Scheduled Reset mode for 8023-1-Mobile-Date
Mobile trunk port
1774 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To program Call Budget Type on BRI 6214-1-BRI-Budget Type
To program Call Budget Amount on BRI 6215-1-BRI-Budget Amount
To program Call Budget Minutes on BRI 6216-1-BRI-Minutes
To program Call Budget Number of Calls on BRI 6205-1-BRI-Number of Calls
To program Call Budget Reset Mode for BRI 6217-1-BRI-Reset Mode
To program the Date for Scheduled Reset mode for 6218-1-BRI-Date
BRI
To program Call Budget Type on T1E1 Port 6122-1-T1E1-Budget Type
To program Call Budget Amount on T1E1 Port 6123-1-T1E1-Budget Amount
To program Call Budget Minutes on T1E1 Port 6124-1-T1E1-Minutes
To program Call Budget Number of Calls on T1E1 Port 6125-1-T1E1-Number of Calls
To program Call Budget Reset Mode for T1E1 6138-1-T1E1-Call Budget Reset Mode
To program the Date for Scheduled Reset mode for 6139-1-T1E1-Date
T1E1
To manually reset consumed Call Budget of TWT 3306-1-TWT
trunks
To reset Call Budget consumed Amount/Minutes for 7738-1-SIP
SIP Trunk manually
To manually reset consumed Call Budget of Mobile 8024-1-Mobile
trunks
To manually reset consumed Call Budget of BRI trunks 6219-1-BRI
To manually reset consumed Call Budget of T1E1 6140-1-T1E1
trunks
Call Cost Calculation (CCC)
Program the unit charge for first unit when 16 KHz 2600-Unit Charge for First Unit
metering is used
Program the unit charge for additional unit when 16 2601-Unit Charge for Additional Unit
KHz metering is used
To select service charge type 2602-Service Charge Type
To program service charge 2603-Service Charge
To set the service charge percentage when is selected 2604-Percentage
based on the percentage
Program duration of first unit for a pulse rate type on 2607-Pulse Rate Type-Time Zone-Duration of First
normal days Unit
Program duration of additional unit for a pulse rate 2608-Pulse Rate Type-Time Zone-Duration of
type on normal days Additional Unit
Load default normal pulse rate type 2606
Program cost of first unit for a pulse rate type on 2609-Pulse Rate Type-Time Zone-Cost of First Unit
normal days
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1775
Program cost of additional unit for a pulse rate type on 2610-Pulse Rate Type-Time Zone-Cost of
normal days Additional Unit
Program duration of first unit for a pulse rate type on 2612-Pulse Rate Type-Time Zone-Duration of First
holidays Unit
Program duration of additional unit for a pulse rate 2613-Pulse Rate Type-Time Zone-Duration of
type on holidays Additional Unit
Program cost of first unit for a pulse rate type on 2614-Pulse Rate Type-Time Zone-Cost of First Unit
holidays
Program cost of additional unit for a pulse rate type on 2615-Pulse Rate Type-Time Zone-Cost of
holidays Additional Unit
Load default holiday pulse rate type 2611
To program an area code 2620-Area Code Index-Area Code-#*
To clear an area code for an Index 2620-Area Code Index-#*
To program Pulse Rate Type for Pulse Rate Option of 2621-Area Code Index-Pulse Rate Option-Pulse
area code index Rate Type
To program pulse rate for an area code 2621-Area Code Index-Pulse Rate Type
To delete the complete area code table 2622-Reverse SE Password
To program ignore digit count when SP_SP LCR is 2623-Area Code Index-Ignore Digit Count
used
Program weekly off day 2630-Day-Code
Program holiday date 2631-Holiday Date Index-Date-Month
To clear a holiday date index 2632-Holiday Date Index
To program area code name 2633-Area Code Index-Name
To clear an area code name 2633-Area Code Index-#*
Call Duration Control (CDC)
To enable CDC for outgoing call 4202-1-CDC Table-Code
To enable CDC for incoming call 4203-1-CDC Table-Code
To enable CDC for internal call 4204-1-CDC Table-Code
To assign an external number to a table (allowed) 4205-1-CDC Table-Number List
To assign an external number to a table (denied) 4206-1-CDC Table-Number List
To assign CDC time to CDC table 4207-1-CDC Table-CDC Timer
To assign disconnection flag to a CDC table 4208-1-CDC Table-Disconnection Flag
To default a CDC Table 4201-1-CDC Table
Call Hold
To enable/disable Global Hold flag 5318-Code
To change Call Hold Retrieval Timer 3805-Seconds
1776 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To change Call Park Timer 3809-Seconds
To change Call Park Release Timer 3810-Minutes
Call Logs
To enable/disable Log Internal Calls in Missed Calls 5361-Code
To enable/disable Log Internal Calls in Answered Calls 5362-Code
To enable/disable Log Internal Calls in Dialed Calls 5363-Code
Call Park
Set call park timer 3809-Seconds
Set call park release timer 3810-Minutes
Call Pick Up
To assign call pickup group for SLT 3901-1-SLT-Call Pickup Group
To de-assign call pickup group for SLT 3901-1-SLT-00
To assign call pickup group for DKP 3902-1-DKP-Call Pickup Group
To de-assign call pickup group for DKP 3902-1-DKP-00
To assign call pickup group for ISDN Terminal 3903-1-ISDN Terminal-Call Pickup Group
To de-assign call pickup group for ISDN Terminal 3903-1-ISDN Terminal-00
Call Progress Tones
To select the region 3501-Region Code
To change CPT-related Timers 3502-Seconds
To program the ring back tone timer 3503-Seconds
To program busy tone timer 3504-Seconds
To program error tone timer 3505-Seconds
To program confirmation tone timer 3506-Seconds
To program the programming confirmation tone timer 3509-Seconds
To program the programming error tone timer 3508-Seconds
To select a dial tone 5307-Flag
To demonstrate call progress tones 3541-Code
To set demonstration timer 3542-Seconds
Call Restriction based on IP Address
To enable/disable the IP Address based Call Traffic
7797-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-Flag
Restriction flag
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1777
7815-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-Table Number Index-IP
To program IP Address to be allowed
Address
7816-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-Table Number Index-
To program Subnet Mask of allowed IP addresses
Subnet Mask
To clear an entry of the White List table 7817-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-Table Number Index
To clear all entries of the White List table of a VoIP 7817-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-#*
Ethernet Port
Call Taping
Program the port in whose mailbox the call is to be 4701-Station Type-Station
taped
To enable/disable beeps during conversation
5332-Code
recording
To program a number in a List 4302-List Number-Location Index-Number-#*
To clear a number from a Location Index 4302-List Number-Location Index-#*
To program Number List - Incoming in Station 5602-1-Template Number-Feature Number-Code
Advanced Feature Template
To enable Call Taping Internal Flag in a Station 5602-1-Template Number-Feature Number-Code
Advanced Feature Template
To enable Tape calls coming without CLI Flag in a 5602-1-Template Number-Feature Number-Code
Station Advanced Feature Template
Call Transfer
To program transfer while ringing timer 3806-Seconds
To program transfer-on busy timer 3807-Seconds
To program trunk-to-trunk inactivity timer 3808-Seconds
Call Line Identification and Presentation
To program parameter in a SLT hardware Template 5702-1-Template Number-Parameter Number-Code
To program the feature in a Station Advanced Feature 5602-1-Template Number-Feature Number-Code
Template
To program replacement ‘+’ string in CLI 5334-Code
To program replacement ‘+’ string in CLI 5335-Replacement String-#*
To removed replacement ‘+’ string in CLI 5335-#*
Class of Service (COS)
To enable a feature in a CoS group 1302-1-CoS Group-Feature Number-Code
To default a CoS group 1301-1-CoS Group
To assign CoS group to a template 5502-1-Template Number-Feature Number-Code
1778 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
CLI Based Routing
To program the incoming number in a CLI table 4101-Index-Telephone Number-#*
To clear a number from the CLI table 4101-Index-#*
To program name of calling party 4102-Index-Name-#*
To clear a name of calling party 4102-Index-#*
To assign landing destination for the incoming number 4103-Index-Port Type-Port Number
To clear a location index in the CLI table 4104-1-Index
Clock Synchronization
To program the clock sources 5341-Clock Source Index-Port Type-Port Offset
To select 'System Clock Synchronization' 5342-System Clock Synchronization
To select the 'PLL Locking Mode' 5343-PLL Locking Mode
Closed User Group (CUG)
To program route code 4502-1-Route Index-Route Code-#*
To clear a particular route code 4502-1-Route Index-#*
To assign OGTBG to a router code 4503-1-Route Index-OGTBG
To program strip digit count for a route 4504-1-Route Index-Strip Digit Count
To program self route flag for a route 4505-1-Route Index-Code
To program maximum dialed digits to select router for 4506-1-Route Index-Maximum Dialed Digits
a route code
To clear an entry in a routing table 4501-1-Route Index
Communication Ports
To set data transfer rate of a COM port 3201-Port-Speed
To set data bit of a COM port 3202-Port-Data Bits
To set parity of a COM port 3203-Port-Parity
To set stop bit of a COM port 3204-Port-Stop Bits
To set flow control of a COM port 3205-Port-Flow Control
To program the DSR sensing 3206-Port-DSR Sensing
To set default parameters of a COM port 3210-Port
Configuring using a Telephone
Changing Login Session Time Out of Jeeves 2118-Time
Logging Out users from Jeeves 2119
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1779
Logging Out Users from Jeeves selectively 2120-User Number
Configuring using Serial COM Port
To enable programming through COM Port 2102-Code
To select COM Port for Programming 2101-Code
Configuring Master Ethernet Port
To select Connection Type 2116-Connection Type
To program PPPoE User ID 2117 - PPPoE User ID
To program PPPoE Password 2123- PPPoE Password
To program PPPoE Service Name 2124-PPPoE Service Name
To assign IP Address to Master Ethernet Port 2110-IP Address
To assign Subnet Mask to the Master Ethernet Port 2111-Subnet Mask
To program the Gateway IP Address 2112-Gateway IP Address
To select DNS Assignment Type 2115-DNS Address Assignment Type
To program Primary DNS Server Address 2113-Primary DNS Server Address
To program Secondary DNS Server Address 2114-Secondary DNS Server Address
To program Web Server Port (Listening port of Jeeves) 2121-Port
To enable/disable Dynamic DNS 2125-Code
To program Dynamic DNS User ID 2126-DDNS User ID
To program Dynamic DNS User Password 2127-DDNS User Password
To program Dynamic DNS Host Name 2128 - DDNS Host Name
To program Dynamic DNS - Retry Trial Count 2129 - DDNS Retry Count
To Update Dynamic DNS IP Address binding (‘Update
2130
IP Address Now?’ flag)
To program Router's Public IP Address 2132-IP Address
To program STUN Server Address 2133-STUN Server Address
To program STUN Server Port 2134- Port
To set STUN Query Interval 2135 - Interval
To view IP Address of the Master Ethernet Port 2150
To view Subnet Mask of the Master Ethernet Port 2151
To view Gateway Address of the Master Ethernet Port 2152
To view current STUN query status 2159
To view Router’s Public IP Address fetched by STUN 2160
To view Dynamic DNS Status 2161
To view Ethernet link Status 2162
1780 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Configuring Extensions
To change the default value of a SLT Hardware 5702-1-Template Number-Parameter Number-Code
Template
To default SLT Hardware Template 5701-1-Template Number
To apply the Customized SLT Hardware Template to 5703-1-SLT-Template Number
SLT port
To program a feature in a Station Basic Feature 5502-1-Template Number-Feature Number-Code
Template
To default a Station Basic Feature Template 5501-1-Template Number
To assign a Station Basic Feature Template to SLT 5503-1-SLT-Template Number
To assign a Station Basic Feature Template to a DKP 5504-1-DKP-Template Number
To assign a Station Basic Feature Template to an 5507-1-ISDN-Template Number
ISDN Terminal port
To assign a Template to an E&M (Station) port 5505-1-E&M-Template Number
To assign a Station Basic Feature Template to a 5506-1-T1E1PRI-Template Number
T1E1PRI port
To assign a Station Basic Feature Template to a BRI 5509-1-BRI-Template Number
port
To assign a Station Basic Feature Template to a SIP 5508-1-SIP Trunk-Template Number
trunk
To program a feature in a Station Advanced Feature 5602-1-Template Number-Feature Number-Code
Template
To default a Station Advanced Feature Template 5601-1-Template Number
To assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to 5603-1-SLT-Template Number
SLT
To assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to a 5604-1-DKP-Template Number
DKP
To assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to an 5607-1-ISDN-Template Number
ISDN Terminal port
To assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to an 5605-1-E&M-Template Number
E&M (Station) port
To assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to a 5606-1-T1E1PRI-Template Number
T1E1PRI port
To assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to a 5609-1-BRI-Template Number
BRI port
To assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to a 5608-1-SIP Trunk-Template Number
SIP trunk
Configuring SLT Extensions
To assign Hardware Slot-Port to an SLT 1101-SLT-Port Offset on the Card
To de-assign the hardware slot and the hardware port 1101-SLT-00-00
of an SLT port
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1781
To assign Access Code to an SLT Port 3101-1-SLT-Access Code-#*
To clear the Access Code to assigned to the SLT Port 3101-1-SLT-#*
To assign default Access Codes assigned to SLT 3151-1-SLT
To assign a Name to an SLT 5402-1-SLT-Name
To clear the name of the SLT 5402-1-SLT-#*
To assign an SLT Hardware Template to an SLT port 5703-1-SLT-Template Number
To assign a Station Basic Feature Template to an SLT 5503-1-SLT-Template Number
Port
To assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to an 5603-1-SLT-Template Number
SLT Port
To assign a Call Pick-Up Group to an SLT Port 3901-1-SLT-Call Pickup Group
To remove an SLT from a Call Pick Up group 3901-1-SLT-00
To assign a Personal Directory to an SLT Port 1905-1-SLT-Personal Directory
To clear the Personal Directory assigned to the SLT 1905-1-SLT-00
To define the Priority for an SLT Port 3911-1-SLT-Priority
Configuring DKP Extensions
To assign Hardware Slot-Port to a DKP 1102-DKP-Port Offset on the Card
To de-assign the hardware slot and the hardware port 1102-DKP-00-00
of a DKP port
To assign Access Code to a DKP Port 3102-1-DKP-Access Code-#*
To clear the Access Code to assigned to the DKP Port 3102-1-DKP-#*
To assign default Access Codes assigned to DKP 3152-1-DKP
To assign a Name to a DKP 5403-1-DKP-Name
To clear the name of the DKP 5403-1-DKP-#*
To assign a Station Basic Feature Template to a DKP 5504-1-DKP-Template Number
Port
To assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to a 5604-1-DKP-Template Number
DKP Port
To define the Call Capacity of a DKP Port 1201-1-DKP-Call Capacity
To assign a Key Map for a DKP Port 1221-1-DKP-DKP Key Template Number
To assign the DKP Port to a Call Pick-Up Group 3902-1-DKP-Call Pickup Group
To remove a DKP from a Call Pick Up group 3902-1-DKP-00
To assign a Personal Directory to a DKP Port 1906-1-DKP-Personal Directory
To clear the Personal Directory assigned to the DKP 1906-1-DKP-00
To define the Priority for a DKP Port 3912-1-DKP-Priority
To select CO CLIP Pattern for a DKP Port 1243-1-DKP-CO CLIP Pattern
1782 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To select Language for a DKP port 1224-1-DKP-Language
To select Ringer Mode for a DKP Port 1204-1-DKP-Ringer Mode
To select Ring Delay Timer for a DKP Port 1205-1-DKP-Ring Delay Timer
To set the Acknowledgement Mode 1206-1-DKP-Ringer Auto Acknowledge Mode
To set the Ringer Auto Acknowledge Timer 1207-1-DKP-Ringer Auto Acknowledge Timer
To select Destination for 'Play Ring ON' for a DKP Port 1220-1-DKP-Ring Destination
To select Ring Tune for a DKP Port 1202-1-DKP-Ring Tune
To set Ringer Volume for a DKP Port 1203-1-DKP-Ringer Volume
To set Handset Transmit (Tx) Volume Level for a DKP 1208-1-DKP-Handset MIC Volume Level
To set Handset Receive (Rx) Volume Level for a DKP 1209-1-DKP-Handset Speaker Volume Level
To set Headset Transmit (Tx) Transmit Volume Level 1222-1-DKP-Headset MIC Volume Level
for a DKP
To set Headset Receive (Rx) Volume Level for a DKP 1223-1-DKP-Headset Speaker Volume Level
To set Hands-free Transmit (Tx) Volume Level for a 1210-1-DKP-Speaker Phone MIC Volume Level
DKP
To set Hands-free Receive (Rx) Volume Level for a 1211-1-DKP-Speaker Phone Speaker Volume Level
DKP
To set Key Click Volume Level for a DKP 1212-1-DKP-Key Click Volume
To enable/disable DTMF Generation Flag for a DKP 1241-1-DKP-DTMF Generation
To set DTMF Transmit Level for a DKP 1218-1-DKP-DTMF Transmit Level
To enable/disable Headset Connectivity for a DKP 1213-1-DKP-Headset Connectivity Flag
To enable/disable Auto Answer for a DKP 1214-1-DKP-Auto Call Answer Mode
To set Auto Answer Timer (sec) for a DKP 1215-1-DKP-Auto Call Answer Timer
To set LCD Back Light Level of a DKP 1216-1-DKP-LCD Backlight Level
To change LCD Backlight OFF Timer of a DKP 1219-1-DKP-LCD Backlight OFF Timer
To change LCD Contrast Level of a DKP 1217-1-DKP-LCD Contrast Level
To assign Hardware Slot-Port to DSS connected to a 1103-DKP-DSS-Slot-Port Offset on the Card
DKP
To clear the hardware Slot-Port assigned to the DSS 1103-DKP-DSS-00-00
software port
Configuring ISDN Terminal
To assign BRI Software Port to an ISDN Terminal 7301-1-ISDN Terminal-BRI
To de-assign ISDN Terminal from a BRI Software Port 7301-1-ISDN Terminal-00
To assign Access Code to an ISDN Terminal 3103-1-ISDN Terminal-Access Code-#*
To clear the Access codes assigned to the ISDN 3103-1-ISDN Terminal-#*
Terminal
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1783
To assign default Station Access Codes to ISDN 3153-1-ISDN Terminal
Terminal
To assign a Name to an ISDN Terminal 5409-1-ISDN Terminal-Name-#*
To clear the Name of the ISDN Terminal 5409-1-ISDN Terminal-#*
To assign a Station Basic Feature Template to an 5507-1-ISDN Terminal-Template Number
ISDN Terminal
To assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to an 5607-1-ISDN Terminal-Template Number
ISDN Terminal
To assign a Personal Directory to an ISDN Terminal 1907-1-ISDN Terminal-Personal Directory
To clear the Personal Directory assigned to an ISDN 1907-1-ISDN Terminal-00
Terminal
To define the Priority for an ISDN Terminal 3913-1-ISDN Terminal-Priority
To assign an ISDN Terminal to a Call Pick-Up Group 3903-1-ISDN Terminal-Call Pick-Up Group
To remove an ISDN Terminal from a Call Pick-Up 3903-1-ISDN Terminal-00
Group
Configuring Region
To select Region 5301-Region Code
Configuring Operator
To assign a Time Table to an Operator 1602-1-Operator-Time Table
To define an Operator for Working Hours 1611-1-Operator-Routing Group
To define an Operator for Break Hours 1612-1-Operator-Routing Group
To define an Operator for Non-working Hours 1613-1-Operator-Routing Group
To default an Operator 1601-1-Operator
Configuring Trunks
To change the default value of a TWT Hardware 5902-1-TWT Hardware Template Number-Feature
Parameter in a Template Number-Code
To default TWT Hardware Template 5901-1-TWT Hardware Template
To assign a TWT Hardware Template to a TWT port 5903-1-TWT-TWT Hardware Template
To change the default value of a Trunk Feature 5802-1-Trunk Feature Template Number-Feature
Parameter in a Template Number-Code
To default Trunk Feature Templates 5801-1-Trunk Feature Template Number
To assign a Trunk Feature Template to a TWT Trunk 5803-1-TWT-Trunk Feature Template Number
To assign a Trunk Feature Template to a BRI Trunk 5804-1-BRI-Trunk Feature Template Number
To assign a Trunk Feature Template to an E&M Trunk 5805-1-E&M-Trunk Feature Template Number
To assign a Trunk Feature Template to a T1E1 Trunk 5806-1-T1E1-Trunk Feature Template Number
1784 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To assign a Trunk Feature Template to a Mobile Trunk 5807-1-Mobile-Trunk Feature Template Number
To assign a Trunk Feature Template to a SIP Trunk 5808-1-SIP-Trunk Feature Template Number
To change the default values of a Parameter in an 6002-1-Template Number-Parameter Number-Code
E&M Feature Template
To restore default values to the Parameters of an E&M 6001-1-Template Number
Feature Template
To assign an E&M Feature Template to an E&M port 6003-1-E&M-Template Number
To assign E&M Feature Template to a T1E1 Port 6004-1-T1E1-Template Number
To change the default values of a SIP Hardware 7806-1-SIP Hardware Template Number-Parameter
Parameter in a Template Number-Code
To default the values of a SIP Hardware Template 7805-1-SIP Hardware Template Number
To apply SIP Hardware Template to a SIP Trunk 7808-1-SIP-SIP Hardware Template Number
To apply SIP Hardware Template to a SIP Extension 7807-1-SIP Extension-SIP Hardware Template
Number
Configuring TWT Trunks
To assign Hardware Slot and Port to the TWT Port 1104-TWT-Slot-Port offset on the card
To clear the Hardware ID assigned to a TWT Port 1104-TWT-00-00
To program a Name for a TWT Port 5404-1-TWT-Name
To clear the Name of a TWT trunk 5404-1-TWT-#*
To enable/disable the TWT Trunk 3307-1-TWT-Flag
To assign a Trunk Feature Template to a TWT Port 5803-1-TWT-Trunk Feature Template Number
To assign a TWT Hardware Template to a TWT Port 5903-1-TWT-Hardware Template Number
To assign a Cost Factor to a TWT Port 3308-1-TWT-Cost Factor
Configuring Mobile Trunks
To assign Hardware Slot and Port 1108-Mobile-Slot-Port Offset on the card
To de-assign Hardware Slot and Port 1108-Mobile-00-00
To enable/disable the Mobile Port 8000-1-Mobile-Flag
To assign a Name to the Mobile Port 5408-1-Mobile-Name-#*
To clear the Name of the Mobile Port 5408-1-Mobile-#*
To select the frequency Band for the Mobile Port 8009-1-Mobile Port Number-Mobile Frequency
Band Code
To assign SIM PIN to the Mobile Port 8006-1-Mobile Port Number-SIM PIN-#*
To select Incoming Call mode on the Mobile port 8005-1-Mobile-Mode
To assign a Trunk Feature Template to the Mobile Port 5807-1-Mobile Port Number-Template Number
To enable/disable CLIR on the Mobile Port 8031-1-Mobile Port Number-CLIR
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1785
To enable RCOC on Mobile Port 8030-1-Mobile-Code
To assign Cost Factor to a Mobile Port 8001-1-Mobile-Cost Factor
To set Network Registration Retry Count 8004-1-Mobile-N/w Registration Retry Count
To change Rx Gain of Mobile Port 8002-1-Mobile-Receive Gain Level
To change Tx Gain of Mobile Port 8003-1-Mobile Port Number-Transmit Gain Level
To enable/disable Call Back on Mobile Port 8010-1-Mobile-Code
To change Call Back Timer 8011-1-Mobile-Call Back Timer
To select the Call Back Mode 8012-1-Mobile-Call Back Mode
To assign a Trusted Caller List Number to the Mobile 8013-1-Mobile-Number List
Port
To enable/disable Accept Anonymous Calls on Mobile 8029-1-Mobile-Code
Port
To program the Pause Timer on Mobile Port 8014-1-Mobile-Pause Timer
To program DTMF ON Time on Mobile Port 8015-1-Mobile-DTMF ON Time
To assign the Mobile Port to a 'Category' for Logical 8018-1-Mobile-Category
Partition
To enable/disable Gateway Application on the Mobile 8016-1-Mobile-Gateway Application Flag
Port
To program the DTMF String for the Gateway 8017-1-Mobile-DTMF String
Application on the Mobile Port
To enable/disable Debug on a Mobile Port 8028-1-Mobile Port Number-Debug Code
To select Network Selection mode 8007-1-Mobile Port Number-Code
To program the network operator codes in order of 8008-1-Mobile-Priority-Network Operator Code-#*
priority for Mobile port
To reset ASR and ACD calculation for Mobile Port 8032-1-Mobile-1
Configuring VoIP Network
To assign Hardware Slot to a VoIP Ethernet Port 1109-VoIP Port-Slot
To clear the Hardware Slot assigned to a VoIP 1109-VoIP Port-00
Software Port
To assign a Name to a VoIP Ethernet Port 7763-1-VoIP Port-Name-#*
To configure IP Address for the LAN Port 7821-1-VoIP Port-IP Address
To configure Subnet Mask for the LAN Port 7822-1-VoIP Port-Subnet Mask
To enable/disable MAC Cloning on WAN Port 7773-1-VoIP Port-MAC Cloning Flag
To configure Cloned MAC Address on WAN Port 7774-1-VoIP Port-Cloned MAC Address
To select the Connection Type for the VoIP Ethernet 7751-1-VoIP Port-Connection Type
Port
To configure PPPoE User ID for PPPoE Connection 7752-1-VoIP Port-PPPoE User ID
Type
1786 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To configure PPPoE Password for PPPoE Connection 7753-1-VoIP Port-PPPoE Password
Type
To configure the Service Name for a PPPoE 7787-1-VoIP Port-PPPoE Service Name
Connection Type
To configure IP Address for VoIP Port having 'Static' as 7754-1-VoIP Port-IP Address
Connection Type
To configure Subnet Mask for the VoIP Port having 7755-1-VoIP Port-Subnet Mask
'Static' as Connection Type
To configure Gateway IP Address for the VoIP Port 7756-1-VoIP Port-Gateway Address
having 'Static' as Connection Type
To configure DNS Address Assignment 7777-1-VoIP Port-DNS Address Assignment Type
To configure DNS Server Address 7757-1-VoIP Port-DNS Server Address
To configure DNS Domain Name 7758-1-VoIP Port-DNS Domain Name-#*
To enable/disable Dynamic DNS Flag 7823-1-VoIP Port-Flag
To enable/disable Update IP Address at Power ON 7824-1-VoIP Port-Flag
flag
To program User ID for Dynamic DNS 7825-1-VoIP Port-User ID for Dynamic DNS
To program password for Dynamic DNS 7826-1-VoIP Port-Password for Dynamic DNS
To program Host Name for Dynamic DNS 7827-1-VoIP Port-Host Name for Dynamic DNS
To program Retry Trials for Dynamic DNS 7828-1-VoIP Port-Retry Trial for Dynamic DNS
To enable/disable Update IP Address Now? flag 7829-1-VoIP Port-Flag
To select SIP DiffServe/ToS as Quality of Service for a 7765-1-VoIP Port-SIP QoS Level
VoIP Port
To select RTP DiffServe/ToS as Quality of Service for 7767-1-VoIP Port-RTP QoS Level
a VoIP Port
To configure STUN Server Address 7759-1-VoIP Port-STUN Address
To configure STUN Server Port 7760-1-VoIP Port-STUN Port
To enable/disable Use SIP Port fetched using STUN 7781-1-VoIP Port-Flag
Flag
To configure NAT Router’s Public IP Address 7780-1-VoIP-IP Address
To enable/disable Silence Detection Disconnection 7795-1-VoIP Port-Flag
To set Silence Detection Disconnect Timer 7796-1-VoIP Port-Timer
To enable/disable Use 100rel Response for a VoIP 7783-1-VoIP Port-Code
Port
To enable/disable SIP over TCP flag 7790-1-VoIP Port-SIP Over TCP
To define SIP UDP Port for a VoIP Port 7768-1-VoIP Port-SIP UDP Port
To define SIP TCP Port for a VoIP Port 7784-1-VoIP Port-SIP TCP Port
To define RTP Listening Port 7769-1-VoIP Port-RTP Listen Port
To configure the SIP Invite Timer 7770-1-VoIP Port-SIP Invite Timer
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1787
To enable/disable Layer2 VLAN/CoS for a VoIP Port 7775-1-VoIP Port-Flag
To assign a VLAN ID to the VoIP Port 7776-1-VoIP Port-VLAN ID
To configure the SIP Provisional Timer 7771-1-VoIP Port
To program SIP CoS for a VoIP Port 7788-1-VoIP Port-SIP CoS
To program RTP CoS for a VoIP Port 7789-1-VoIP Port-RTP CoS
To enable/disable UDP NAT Keep Alive for a VoIP Port 7761-1-VoIP Port-UDP NAT Keep Alive
To define Interval for UDP NAT Keep Alive for a VoIP
7762-1-VoIP Port-UDP NAT Keep Alive Interval
Port
To select the Type of Message for UDP NAT Keep 7778-1-VoIP Port-UDP NAT Keep Alive Message
Alive for a VoIP Port Type
To enable/disable TCP NAT Keep Alive for a VoIP Port 7785-1-VoIP Port -TCP NAT Keep Alive
To define Interval for TCP NAT Keep Alive for a VoIP
786-1-VoIP Port-TCP NAT Keep Alive Interval
Port
To configure SIP Invite Timer 7770-1-VoIP Port-SIP Invite Timer
To configure SIP Provisional Timer 7771-1-VoIP Port-SIP Provisional Timer
To configure the SIP General Request Timer for a 7779-1-VoIP Port-SIP General Request Timer
VoIP Ethernet Port
To assign Registration LED to a SIP trunk 7772-1-VoIP-SIP Trunk
Configuring SIP Trunks
To assign the SIP trunk to a VoIP Port 7701-1-SIP-VoIP Port
To de-assign the SIP trunk to a VoIP Port 7701-1-SIP-00
To enable/disable the SIP trunk 7702-1-SIP-Code
To assign a name to the SIP trunk 5410-1-SIP-Name-#*
To clear the name of a SIP trunk 5410-1-SIP-#*
To configure SIP User ID for a SIP trunk 7704-1-SIP-SIP User ID
To configure Registrar Server's Address 7705-1-SIP-Registrar Server’s Address
To define Registrar Server's Listening Port 7706-1-SIP-Registrar Server’s Port
To configure the Re-registration Timer 7707-1-SIP-Re-Registration Timer
To configure the Registration Retry Timer 7708-1-SIP-Registration Retry Timer
To configure the Authentication ID for the SIP trunk 7709-1-SIP-Authentication User ID
To configure the Authentication Password for the SIP 7710-1-SIP-Authentication User Password
trunk
To enable/disable Outbound Proxy for the SIP trunk 7715-1-SIP-Outbound Proxy Status
To configure Server Address of Outbound Proxy for 7716-1-SIP-Outbound Proxy Server Address
the SIP trunk
To define Outbound Proxy Server's Listening Port 7717-1-SIP-Outbound Proxy Server Port
To select the OG Vocoder Preference for a SIP trunk 7712-1-SIP-Preference Index-Preference Vocoder
1788 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To enable/disable Silence Suppression for Vocoder 7740-1-SIP-Flag
(except GSM) on a SIP trunk
To assign a Trunk Feature Template to a SIP trunk 5808-1-SIP-Template Number
To assign a Cost Factor to the SIP trunk 7703-1-SIP-Cost Factor
To configure the number of Simultaneous Calls on a 7741-1-SIP-Number of Simultaneous Calls
SIP trunk
To enable/disable RCOC on SIP trunk 7743-1-SIP-Code
To assign a Station Basic Feature Template to a SIP 5508-1-SIP-Station Basic Feature Template
trunk Number
To assign a Station Advanced Feature Template 5608-1-SIP-Station Advanced Feature Template
Number
To program Rx Gain for SIP to Digital Trunk/DKP 7891-1-SIP-Rx Gain
Voice Calls
To program Tx Gain for SIP to Digital Trunk/DKP Voice 7892-1-SIP-Tx Gain
Calls
To select DTMF Type for a SIP trunk 7713-1-SIP-DTMF Type
To select Fax Type for the SIP trunk 7714-1-SIP-Fax Type
To program T.38 Fax - Max Rate (Kbps) 7883-1-SIP-Max. Rate
To program T.38 Fax - Packet Period 7884-1-SIP-Packet Period
To program T.38 Fax - Image Redundancy Level 7885-1-SIP-Image Redundancy Level
To program T.38 Fax - Data Redundancy Level 7886-1-SIP-Data Redundancy Level
To program Fax Data Gain for SIP Trunk in case of 7887-1-SIP-Fax Data Gain
SIP to Digital Trunk Call
To program Fax Bypass Gain for SIP Trunk in case of 7889-1-SIP-Fax Bypass Gain
SIP to Digital Trunk Call
To program Fax Data Gain for SIP Trunk in case of 7888-1-SIP-Fax Data Gain
SIP to SLT Call
To program Fax Bypass Gain for SIP Trunk in case of 7890-1-SIP-Fax Bypass Gain
SIP to SLT Calls
To enable/disable Echo Cancellation 7746-1-SIP-Flag
To program Echo Cancellation Tail Length for TWT 7747-1-SIP-Tail Length
calls
To program Echo Cancellation Tail Length for FXS and 7748-1-SIP-Tail Length
Digital Trunks
To select Type of Jitter Buffer 7880-1-SIP-Jitter Buffer Type
To set Optimization Factor for Dynamic Jitter Buffer 7881-1-SIP-Optimization Factor
To set Minimum Delay for Static/Dynamic Jitter Buffer 7882-1-SIP-Minimum Delay
To enable/disable 'Add rinstance in Register'? 7739-1-SIP-Flag
To enable/disable 'Send REGISTER' flag for the SIP 7744-1-SIP-Flag
trunk
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1789
To enable/disable 'Allow Outgoing Calls without 7745-1-SIP-Flag
Registration' flag on the SIP trunk
To enable/disable 'Send CLI' flag for a SIP trunk 7718-1-SIP-Flag
To accept/reject Anonymous Calls on the SIP trunk 7742-1-SIP-Code
To select Source Port IP Address for a SIP trunk 7711-1-SIP-Code
To enable/disable 'Use Symmetric RTP' flag 7719-1-SIP-Symmetric RTP Flag
To enable/disable Digest Authentication on SIP trunk 7729-1-SIP-Digest Authentication
To configure Digest Authentication Table 4118-Index-User ID
To configure Default Transport for Outgoing Messages 7731-1-SIP-Default Transport
for a SIP trunk
To assign Incoming Reference ID to the SIP trunk for 7722-1-SIP-IC Reference ID
Working Hours
To assign Incoming Reference ID to the SIP trunk for 7723-1-SIP-IC Reference ID
Break Hours
To assign Incoming Reference ID to the SIP trunk for 7724-1-SIP-IC Reference ID
Non-Working Hours
To assign Outgoing Route Reference ID to a SIP trunk 7721-1-SIP-OG Reference ID
To configure the Pause Timer for a SIP trunk 7720-1-SIP-Pause Timer
To configure the DTMF ON Time for the SIP trunk 7725-1-SIP-DTMF ON Time
To configure the DTMF Inter-Digit Pause Timer for the 7726-1-SIP-DTMF Inter Digit Pause Timer
SIP trunk
To enable/disable Gateway Application-Answer 7727-1-SIP-Gateway Application
Signaling on the SIP trunk
To configure DTMF String for Gateway Application- 7728-1-SIP-Gateway Application DTMF String
Answer Signaling on the SIP trunk
To enable/disable PUBLISH flag 7883-1-SIP Extension-PUBLISH Flag
To assign a Station Basic Feature Template to a SIP 5510-1-SIP Extension-Station Basic Feature
Extension Template
To assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to a 5612-1-SIP Extension-Station Advanced Feature
SIP Extension Template
To select Station Type for a SIP Extension 3924-1-SIP Extension-Station Type
To assign a Personal Directory to a SIP Extension 1908-1-SIP Extension-Personal Memory Group
To assign Priority to a SIP Extension 3918-1-SIP Extension-Priority
To assign a SIP Extension to a Call Pick-Up Group 3904-1-SIP Extension-Call Pick Up Group
Configuring SIP Extension
To select Source Port IP Address 7830-1-VoIP Port-Source Port IP Address Option
To set the Maximum Registration Timer 7831-1-VoIP Port-Maximum Registration Timer
To set the Minimum Registration Timer 7832-1-VoIP Port-Minimum Registration Timer
1790 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To program Private Key 7833-1-VoIP Port-Private Key
To assign a VoIP Port Number for SIP Extension 7871-1-SIP Extension-VoIP Port
To use/disable a SIP Extension 7872-1-SIP Extension-Code
To program a Name for a SIP Extension 5415-1-SIP Extension-Name-#* or Press <ENTER>
To program SIP ID for a SIP Extension 7873-1-SIP Extension-SIP ID
To program Authentication ID for a SIP Extension 7874-1-SIP Extension-Authentication ID
To program Authentication Password for a SIP 7875-1-SIP Extension-Authentication Password
Extension
To define the Call Appearance for a SIP Extension 7876-1-SIP Extension-Call Appearance
To enable/disable Authenticate REGISTER Request 7878-1-SIP Extension-Authenticate Register
flag Request Flag
To enable/disable authenticate INVITE Request flag 7879-1-SIP Extension-Authenticate INVITE
Request Flag
To enable/disable authenticate SUBSCRIBE Request 7880-1-SIP Extension-Authenticate SUBSCRIBE
flag Request Flag
To enable/disable authenticate Busy Lamp Field 7881-1-SIP Extension-Busy Lamp Field
Subscription flag Subscription Flag
To enable/disable authenticate Voice Mail Subscription 7882-1-SIP Extension-Voice Mail Subscription Flag
flag
To enable/disable authenticate PUBLISH 7884-1-SIP Extension-Authenticate PUBLISH flag
To enable/disable Presence Subscription for a SIP 7877-1-SIP Extension-Presence Subscription Flag
Extension
To enable/disable PUBLISH flag 7883-1-SIP Extension-PUBLISH Flag
To assign a Station Basic Feature Template to a SIP 5510-1-SIP Extension-Station Basic Feature
Extension Template
To assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to a 5612-1-SIP Extension-Station Advanced Feature
SIP Extension Template
To select Station Type for a SIP Extension 3924-1-SIP Extension-Station Type
To assign a Personal Directory to a SIP Extension 1908-1-SIP Extension-Personal Memory Group
To assign Priority to a SIP Extension 3918-1-SIP Extension-Priority
To assign a SIP Extension to a Call Pick-Up Group 3904-1-SIP Extension-Call Pick Up Group
Configuring E&M Lines
To assign Hardware ID to an E&M Software Port 1105-E&M-Port offset on the Card
To clear the Hardware ID assigned to an E&M 1105-E&M-00-00
Software Port
To enable/disable an E&M Port 3321-1-E&M-Code
To program a Name for an E&M Port 5406-1-E&M-Name
To clear a name assigned to an E&M port 5406-1-E&M-#*
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1791
To assign an E&M Feature Template to an E&M Port 6003-1-E&M-Template Number
To assign a Trunk Feature Template to an E&M Port 5805-1-E&M Template Number
To assign a Station Basic Feature Template to an E&M 5505-1-E&M-Template Number
Port
To assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to an 5605-1-E&M-Template Number
E&M Port
To set a Priority Level for an E&M Port 3915-1-E&M-Priority
To assign a Cost Factor to an E&M port 3322-1-E&M-Cost Factor
Configuring Magneto Interface
To assign Slot-Port Assignment to a Magneto Port 1110-Magneto Trunk-Slot-Port offset on the Card
To enable/disable Magneto Port 6801-1-Magneto-Code
To program Access Code for Magneto Port 3107-1-Magneto-Access Code-#*
To clear the Access Code assigned to the Magneto 3107-1-Magneto-#*
port
To assign a Name to the Magneto Port 5411-1-Magneto-Name-#*
To clear the Name of the Magneto Port 5411-1-Magneto-#*
To assign Priority level of a Magneto Port 3919-1-Magneto-Priority
To assign a Station Basic Feature Template to 5511-1-Magneto-Station Basic Feature Template
Magneto Port Number
To assign a Station Advanced Feature Template for 5611-1-Magneto-Station Advanced Feature
Magneto Port Template Number
To assign MRE Key to a DKP 1261-1-DKP Key Template-EON Terminal Type-Key
Number-Function Type-Function Number-Channel
To enable or disable the "Enable Silence Detection on 5357-Flag
Magneto?" flag
To set Magneto-Silence Detection Timer 5356-Silence Detection Timer
Configuring Loop dial Trunk Port
To program Hardware Slot-Port for the LD trunk port 1111-LD-Slot-Port offset
To clear the Hardware ID assigned to an LD trunk port 1111-LD-00-00
To assign a name to the LD trunk port 5416-1-LD-Name-#*
To enable/disable the LD trunk port 3941-1-LD-Flag
To assign priority for LD trunk port 3920-1-LD-Priority
To assign Station Basic Features Template (SBFT) for 5512-1-LD-SBFT
LD trunk port
To assign the SLT Hardware Template for LD trunk 5704-1-LD-SLT Hardware Template
port
1792 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To program the TWT Hardware Template for LD trunk 5904-1-LD-TWT Hardware Template
port
To program the Cost Factor for LD trunk port 3942-1-LD-Cost Factor
To enable/disable the SMDR OG Storage flag for LD 3943-1-LD-Flag
trunk port
To enable/disable the SMDR IC Storage flag for LD 3944-1-LD-Flag
trunk port
To enable/disable the Hold on DSS Key Press flag for 3945-1-LD-Flag
LD trunk port
To program the Call Cost Calculation Pulse Rate 3946-1-LD-Option
Option for LD trunk port
To program the Call Cost Calculation Time Schedule- 3947-1-LD-Start Time
T1-Start Time for LD trunk port
To program the Call Cost Calculation Time Schedule- 3948-1-LD-End Time
T1-End Time for LD trunk port
To program the Call Cost Calculation Time Schedule- 3949-1-LD-Start Time
T2-Start Time for LD trunk port
To program the Call Cost Calculation Time Schedule- 3950-1-LD-End Time
T2-End Time for LD trunk port
To program the Call Cost Calculation Time Schedule- 3951-1-LD Trunk-Start Time
T3-Start Time for LD trunk port
To program the Call Cost Calculation Time Schedule- 3952-1-LD-End Time
T3-End Time for LD trunk port
To program the Call Cost Calculation Time Schedule- 3953-1-LD-Start Time
T4-Start Time for LD trunk port
To program the Call Cost Calculation Time Schedule- 3954-1-LD-End Time
T4-End Time for LD trunk port
Configuring LCR
To program Time Zone at a Time Zone index 3402-Time Zone Index-Start Time-End Time
To program the Cost Factor (Service Provider 3403-Time Zone Index-CF1-CF2-CF3-CF4
preference) for the Time Zone
To default the Time Zone based LCR table 3401
To program a number at number Index in the Time- 3411-Number Index-Number String-#*
based LCR table
To clear a number string programmed at a number 3411-Number Index-#*
index
To program Cost Factor (Service Provider preference) 3412-Number Index-CF1-CF2-CF3-CF4
for the each Number
To default the Number-based LCR table 3410
To define Time Zone for Time+Number-based LCR 3421-Time Zone Index-Start Time-End Time
To program the number string for Time+Number- 3422-Number Index-Number String-#*
based LCR
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1793
To clear a number index from the Time+Number- 3422-Number Index-#*
based LCR Table
To program Cost Factor (Service Provider preference) 3423-Number Index-Time Zone Index-CF1-CF2-
for the each Number and Time Zone CF3-CF4
To default the Time and Number-based LCR table 3420
To program Area Code in the Area Code Table 2620-Area Code Index-Area Code-#*
To clear an Area Code in the Area Code Table 2620-Area Code Index-#*
To program Ignore Digit Count for an Area Code 2623-Area Code Index-Ignore Digit Count
To program a number at number Index in the Service 3441-Number Index-Number String-#*
Provider-based LCR table
To clear a number string programmed at a number 3441-Number Index-#*
index
To program Cost Factor (Service Provider preference) 3442-Number Index-CF1-CF2-CF3-CF4
for the each Number
To default the Number-based LCR table 3440
To select LCR type in OG Trunk Bundle Group 1404-1-OGTBG-LCR Type
Configuring Emergency Number Dialing
To program Emergency Numbers in the table 3116-Index-Emergency Number-#*
To program OG Trunk Bundle Group (OTBG) for an 3117-Index-OG Trunk Bundle Group
emergency number
Conflict Dialing
To program conflict dialing timer 5351-Seconds
Conversation Recording
To enable/disable conversation recording beeps 5332-Code
Customer Name
To program the customer name 5401-Customer Name-#*
To clear the customer name 5401-#*
Day Night Mode
To set the system in Day/Night mode 4801-Code
Daylight Saving Time (DST)
To program the DST Mode 1010-DST Mode
1794 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To program the start time of DST when manual 1011-Date-Month-Current Time-Advance Time
selected
To program the end time of DST when manual 1012-Date-Month-Current Time-Delay Time
selected
To program the DST Type 1013-DST Type
DDI Routing Table
To program the feature in a DDI Routing Table 6322-1-DDI Routing Table ID-Parameter Number-
Value
To default a DDI table 6321-1-DDI Routing Table ID
Debug for the VoIP Ethernet Port
To enable/disable debug for the VoIP Ethernet Port 7791-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-Debug
To program Syslog Server Address on which Debug 7792-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-Syslog Server Address
parameter is to be sent for the VoIP Ethernet Port
To program Server Port Address on which Debug 7793-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-Server Port Address
parameter is to be sent for the VoIP Ethernet Port
To enable debug level for the VoIP Ethernet Port 7794-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-Index-Code
Default Settings
To load the default parameters 5302-Reverse SE Password
Department Call
To program the destination in the routing group 6502-1-Routing Group-Destination Index-Port
Type-Port Number
To program the time for which each station in the 6503-1-Routing Group-Destination Index-Ring
group should ring Timer
To program continuous or non-continuous ring for a 6504-1-Routing Group-Destination Index-Flag
station in the group
To program rotation method of a department group 6505-1-Routing Group-Routing Flag
To assign routing group to the department group 2001-1-Department Group Index-Routing Group
To clear the routing group assigned to the department 2001-1-Department Group Index-00
group
To program the access code for a department number 3113-1-Department Group Index-Access Code
To default the access code for a department group 3163-1-Department Group Index
To clear the access code for a department number 3113-1-Department Group Index-#*
Digest Authentication
To program SIP-Id in the Digest Authentication Table 4118-Index-User ID
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1795
To program User Password in the Digest 4119-Index-User Password
Authentication Table
Digital Input Port (DIP)
To enable/disable DIP 4901-1-DIP-Code
To program the DIP as active high/active low 4902-1-DIP-Code
To program the minimum instigation time for a DIP 4903-1-DIP-Minimum Instigation Time
To assign default values to a DIP 4901-1-DIP
Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming
To assign a feature to a key in a Template 1261-1-DKP Key Template-EON Terminal Type-Key
Number-Function Type-Function Number
To assign a DKP Key template to a DKP 1221-1-DKP-DKP Key Template
To assign a Personalized Key map to a DKP 1221-1-DKP-0
To assign a function to a DKP key 1252-1-DKP-Key Number-Function Type-Function
Number
To assign a function to a DSS key 1254-1-DKP-DSS-Key Number-Function Type-
Function Number
To clear a function of a key on a DSS of a DKP 1254-1-DKP-DSS-Key Number-00-000
Digital Output Port (DOP)
To program the contact type for the DOP 5001-1-DOP-Normal Contact Type
To assign a new access code for a DOP 3111-1-76-Access Code
To assign default access code to the DOP 3161-1-76
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
To set DID inactivity timer 2411-Seconds
To set DID answer wait timer 2412-Seconds
To set music timer 2413-Seconds
To set beeps timer 2414-Seconds
To set ring timer 2415-Seconds
To set busy tone timer 2416-Seconds
To set error tone timer 2417-Seconds
To enable/disable the Disconnect when Caller Doesn't 5338-Code
Dial a Digit' flag
To enable/disable the Disconnect DID call when 5336-Code
Dialed Number Busy:
1796 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To enable/disable Disconnect DID Call, when Dialed 5337-Code
Number does Not Reply
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
To program DISA idle state timer 2420-Seconds
To program DISA inactivity timer 2421-Minutes
To program Calling Number on DISA Application 4111- Index-Calling Number-#*
To program Port Type and Port Number for DISA 4112- Index-Port Type-Port Number
Application
Distinctive Rings
To demonstrate the ring 4003-Ring Pattern
To change demonstration timer 3542-Seconds
To make default all ring type situation 4001
To assign ring type to a situation 4002-Event-Ring Pattern
Do Not Disturb (DND)
To default all DND Text Messages 1501
To Edit the Text Message 1502-Text Message Number-Text Message
Door Phone
To program access code of Door Phone 3105-1-Door Phone-Access Code-#*
To default the access code of Door Phone 3155-1-Door Phone
To program the name of Door Phone 5413-1-Door Phone-Name-#*
To assign a time table to Door Phone 3221-1-Door Phone-Time Table-#*
To assign call routing mode for Door Phone 3222-1-Door Phone-Call Routing Mode
To program Scheduled - Door Phone Call Routing for 3223-1-Door Phone-Time Zone-Call Routing Type
each Time Zone
To program Scheduled - Door Phone Call Routing on 3224-1-Door Phone-Time Zone-Routing Group
Routing Group
To program Scheduled - Door Phone Call Routing on 3225-1-Door Phone-External Number-#*
External Number
To program Manual-Door Phone Call Routing Mode 3226-1-Door Phone-Call Routing Mode
To program Manual - Routing Group for Door Phone 3227-1-Door Phone-Routing Group
calls
To program Manual - Door Phone Call Routing on 3228-1-Door Phone-External Number-#*
External Number
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1797
To program the OG Trunk Bundle Group for Door 3229-1-Door Phone-OGTB Group
Phone Port to route calls on External Number
To program the Door Phone Ring Timer 3230-1-Door Phone-Door Phone Ring Timer
To assign DOP (Door Opener) for the Door Phone 3231-1-Door Phone-DOP
To program the Open Door Timer 3232-1-Door Phone-Open Door for Time
Emergency Detection and Reporting
To enable/disable emergency reporting 5110-Code
Emergency Dialing
To program emergency numbers 3116-Index-Emergency Number-#*
To program an OGTBG for emergency number 3117-Index-OG Trunk Bundle Group
Flexible Numbers
To program the access code for a SLT 3101-1-SLT-Access Code-#*
To clear the access code for a SLT 3101-1-SLT-#*
To assign the default flexible number of a SLT 3151-1-SLT
To program the access code for a DKP 3102-1-DKP-Access Code-#*
To clear the access code for a DKP 3102-1-DKP-#*
To assign the default flexible number of a DKP 3152-1-DKP
Floor Service
To program a routing group with member extensions 6502-1-Routing Group-Destination Index-Port
Type-Port Number
To program the Ring Timer for the routing group 6503-1-Routing Group-Destination Index-Ring
Timer
To program the Continuous Ring Flag for the routing 6504-1-Routing Group-Destination Index-Flag
group
To program the routing group in a Station Advanced 5602-1-Template Number-11-Routing Group
Feature Template
IC Reference Table
To default the IC Reference Table 6301-1-IC Reference Table Index
6302-1-IC Reference Table Index-feature Number-
To program IC Reference Table Index
Value
Interrupt Request
To set interrupt request timer 3802-Seconds
1798 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
ISDN BRI
To assign a name to the BRI port 5405-1-BRI-Name
To enable/disable BRI port 6201-1-BRI-Port Status
To assigning a service provider to a BRI port 6202-1-BRI-SP
To program the BRI ISDN switch variant of the BRI 6203-1-BRI-BRI ISDN Switch Variant
port
To program orientation type for a BRI port 6204-1-BRI-Orientation Type
To program the type of interface companding for the 6205-1-BRI-Companding
BRI
To program the idle code for the BRI 6207-1-BRI-Idle Code
To set overlap receiving timer for BRI 6208-1-BRI-Timer
To program Pause Timer 6209-1-BRI- Pause Timer
To program DTMF ON Time 6210-1-BRI-DTMF ON Time
To program DTMF Inter digit Pause Timer 6211-1-BRI- DTMF Inter digit Pause Time
To get appropriate debug information 6291-1-BRI-Level-Code
To program a caller TON for the BRI 6221-1-BRI-Caller TON
To program a caller NPI for the BRI 6222-1-BRI-Caller NPI
To program a called party TON for the BRI 6223-1-BRI-Called Party TON
To program a called party NPI for the BRI 6224-1-BRI-Called Party NPI
To program an OG reference ID to a BRI 6231-1-BRI-OG Reference ID
To program an IC reference ID-WH on the BRI 6232-1-BRI-IC Reference ID
To program an IC reference ID-BH on the BRI 6233-1-BRI-IC Reference ID
To program an IC reference ID-NH on the BRI 6234-1-BRI-IC Reference ID
To program number of channels reserved for data 6235-1-BRI-Channel Count
transmission
To reserve the number of channels for OG calls on BRI 6236-1-BRI-Channel Count
To reserve the number of channels for IC calls on a 6237-1-BRI-Channel Count
BRI
To select TEI Negotiation on a BRI port 6238-1-BRI-TEI Negotiation Mode
To program TEI Negotiation value when programmed 6239-1-BRI-TEI Value
as Fixed
To program access code for ISDN terminal 3103-1-ISDN Terminal-Access Code-#*
To default access code for ISDN terminal 3153-1-ISDN Terminal
To assign a BRI software port to ISDN terminal 7301-1-ISDN Terminal-BRI
To de-assign a BRI software port to ISDN terminal 7301-1-ISDN Terminal-00
To assign personal directory to an ISDN terminal 1907-1-ISDN Terminal-Personal Directory
To program Gateway Application-Answer Signaling 6206-1-BRI-Gateway Application-Answer Signaling
Flag Flag
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1799
To program "Gateway Application-Answer Signaling 6212-1-BRI-Gateway Application-Answer Signaling
DTMF String". DTMF String
To program Layer 1 Mode for the BRI Port 6225-1-BRI-Layer 1 Mode
Key Board Macro
To create a macro 1810-Macro Index-Number String
To clear a macro 1810-Macro Index-#*
To program access codes for the macro 3115-1-Macro Index-Access Code
To clear access code 3115-1-Macro Index
To program to default access code for the macro 3165-1-Macro Index
Logical Partition
To define call permission across and between 5317-Category-Category-Flag
Categories
Live Call Screening
To program LCS timer 3811-Seconds
Message Wait
To program Message Wait Ring Count 4403-Message Wait Ring Count
To program the message wait ring timer 4404-Message Wait Ring Timer
To program the message wait ring interval timer 4405-Message Wait Ring Interval Timer
Music on Hold
To demonstrate music on hold 3551-Code
To select the type of music to be played when station 3552-Code
are kept on hold
To select the type of music to be played when trunks 3553-Code
are kept on hold
Number List
To program a number in a Number List 4302-List Number-Location Index-Number-#*
To clear the number programmed in a Number List 4302-List Number-Location Index-#*
To default a Number List 4301-1-List Number
OFF-Hook Alert
To enable/disable OFF-Hook Alert to Operator 5333-Code
1800 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
OG Reference Table
To program an OG reference table 6312-1-OG Reference Table Index-Parameter
Number-Value
To default an OG reference table 6311-1-OG Reference Table Index
OG Trunk Bundle
To program the feature in OG trunk bundle 6702-1-OG Trunk Bundle Number-Port Type-Port
Number-Code
To set default values for OG trunk bundle 6701-1-OG Trunk Bundle Number
OG Trunk Bundle Group
To make default OGTBG 1401-1-OGTBG Number
To set OG trunk bundle 1402-1-OGTBG No-Destination Index-OG Trunk
Bundle
To set rotation flag 1403-1-OGTBG Number-Flag
To program the desirable access code for a trunk 3112-1-OGTBG Index-Access Code-#*
access index
To clear the access codes for an OGTBG index 3112-1-OGTBG Index-#*
To assign default access code for a OGTBG index 3162-1-OGTBG Index
Paging
To enable/disable Analog Output Port (AOP) in a Page 2301-1-Page Zone-Flag
Zone
To program a DKP in a Page Zone 2302-1-Page Zone-Member-DKP
To include/exclude a member DKP in/from a Page 2303-1-Page Zone-Member-Flag
Zone
Presence
To enable/disable 'Display Presence Status during Call 5320-Flag
on DKP'
Peer-to-Peer Calling
To program the number string in peer-to-peer table 7801-1-Index-Number String-#*
To clear the number string for an index 7801-1-Index-#*
To program the destination address in peer-to-peer 7802-1-Index-Destination Address-#*
table
To clear the destination address for an Index 7802-1-Index-#*
To program the name in peer-to-peer table 7803-1-Index-Name-#*
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1801
To clear the name for an index 7803-1-Index-#*
Priority
To assign priority to SLT 3911-1-SLT-Priority
To assign priority to DKP 3912-1-DKP-Priority
To assign priority to ISDN Terminal 3913-1-ISDN Terminal -Priority
To assign priority to SIP Extension 3918-1-SIP Extension-Priority
To assign priority to T1E1 3914-1-T1E1-Priority
To assign priority to E&M 3915-1-E&M-Priority
To assign priority to BRI 3916-1-BRI-Priority
To assign priority to Magneto 3919-1-Magneto-Priority
RCOC
To enable RCOC on a SIP Trunk 7743-1-SIP-Code
To enable RCOC on T1E1 Trunk 6145-1-T1E1-Code
To enable RCOC on BRI Trunk 6220-1-BRI-Code
To enable RCOC on Mobile Port 8030-1-Mobile-Code
To change the RCOC Record Delete Timer 3521- Minutes
To change the Ring Back Tone Timer 3503-Seconds
Real Time Clock
To program the date format 1000-Date Format
To set the date 1001-Date-Month-Year
To select the Country for the time zone 1002-Time Zone
To set time 1003-Hours-Minutes-Seconds
Reminder
Program alarm/reminder ring timer 2201-Seconds
Program number of alarm attempts 2202-Number of Alarm Attempts
Program alarm attempt interval 2203-Alarm Attempt Interval
Assign destination port to the Hotel/Motel report 3701-Flag
Enable/disable snooze alarm/reminder 2204-Code
Routing Group
To program the destination in the routing group 6502-1-Routing Group-Destination Index-Port
Type-Port Number
1802 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To program the time for which each station in the 6503-1-Routing Group-Member Index-Ring Timer
group should ring
To program continuous or non-continuous ring for a 6504-1-Routing Group-Member Index-Flag
station in the group
To program rotation method of a department group 6505-1-Routing Group-Rotation Method
To default a routing group 6501-1-Routing Group
To clear the destination in a routing group 6510-1-Routing Group
Security Alarm and Reporting
To enable/disable Security Alarm (use DIP to Trigger 5202-Flag
Security Alarm)
To assign a Time Table for Security Alarm 5203-Time Table
To select the Security Alarm 'Trigger on' destination for 5204-TimeZone-Trigger on
a Time Zone
To program DOP for Security Alarm for a Time Zone 5205-TimeZone-DOP
To program Routing Group for Security Alarm for a 5206-TimeZone-Routing Group
Time Zone
To program External Numbers for Security Alarm for a 5207-TimeZone-Index-External Number-#*
Time Zone
To program OG Trunk Bundle Group for External 5208-OG Trunk Bundle Group
Numbers
To program Delay Response Timer for Security Alarm 5209-Delay Response Timer
To program Call Attempt Interval for External Number 5210-Call Attempt Interval
To program Number of Attempts for External Number 5211-Number of Attempts
To enable/disable Security Reporting 5212-Flag
To program Routing Group for Security Reporting 5213-Routing Group
To default Security Alarm parameters 5201
Software Port and Hardware ID
To assign hardware ID to a SLT software port 1101-SLT-Slot-Port offset on the Card
To clear the hardware ID assigned to a SLT software
1101-SLT-00-00
port
To assign hardware ID to a DKP software port 1102-DKP-Slot-Port offset on the Card
To clear the hardware ID assigned to a DKP software
1102-DKP-00-00
port
To assign hardware ID to DSS software port 1103-DKP-DSS-Slot-Port offset on the Card
To clear the hardware ID assigned to DSS software
1103-DKP-DSS-00-00
port
To assign hardware ID to a TWT software port 1104-TWT-Slot-Port offset on the Card
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1803
To clear the hardware ID assigned to a TWT software
1104-TWT-00-00
port
To assign hardware ID to an E&M software port 1105-E&M-Slot-Port offset on the Card
To clear the hardware ID assigned to an E&M software
1105-E&M-00-00
port
To assign hardware ID to a BRI software port 1106-BRI-Slot-Port offset on the Card
To clear the hardware ID assigned to a BRI software
1106-BRI-00-00
port
To assign hardware ID to a T1E1 software port 1107-T1E1-Slot-Port offset on the Card
To clear the hardware ID assigned to a T1E1 software
1107-T1E1-00-00
port
To assign hardware ID to a mobile software port 1108-Mobile-Slot-Port offset on the Card
To clear the hardware ID assigned to mobile software
1108-Mobile-00-00
port
To assign hardware ID to a VoIP software port 1109-VoIP Ethernet Port-Slot
To de-assign hardware ID to a VoIP software port 1109-VoIP Ethernet Port-00
To assign hardware ID to a Magneto software port 1110-Magneto-Slot-Port offset of the card
To de-assign hardware ID to a Magneto software port 1110-Magneto-00-00
Static Routing Table
To program Destination Address in Static Routing
7811-1-Index-Destination Address
Table
To program Subnet Mask in the Static Routing Table 7812-1-Index-Subnet Mask
To program Gateway Address in the Static Routing
7813-1-Index-Gateway Address
Table
To clear specific entries of the index of Static Routing
7814-1-Index
Table
Station Message Detail Recording-Online
To assign destination port for Online SMDR-IC Call 2930-Code
Record
To assign the IP Address to the Ethernet Port 2932-IP Address
To assign the IP Port 2933-IP Port
To assign a destination port for Online SMDR-Internal 2830-Code
call record
To assign the IP Address to the Ethernet Port 2832-IP Address
To assign the IP Port 2833-IP Port
To assign destination port for Online SMDR-OG Call 2730-Code
Record
To assign the IP Address to the Ethernet Port 2732-IP Address
1804 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To assign the IP Port 2733-IP Port
To program column position for serial number 8200-Column Position
To program field length for serial number 8201-Field Length
To program alignment for serial number 8202-Alignment
To program fill character for serial number 8203-Fill Character
To program reset for serial number 8204-Reset
To program column position for increment counter 8205-Column Position
To program reset for increment counter 8206-Reset
To program column position for property code 8207-Column Position
To program field length for property code 8208-Field Length
To program property code string for property code 8209-Property Code String
To program column position for station number 8210-Column Position
To program field length for station number 8211-Field Length
To program alignment for station number 8212-Alignment
To program fill character for station number 8213-Fill Character
To program column position for trunk number 8214-Column Position
To program format type for trunk number 8215-Format Type
To program column position for date field 8216-Column Position
To program field length for date field 8217-Field Length
To program alignment for date field 8218-Alignment
To program fill character for date field 8219-Fill Character
To program date format for date field 8220-Date Format
To program date fill flag for date field 8257-Date Fill Flag
To program column position for time field 8222-Column Position
To program field length for time field 8223-Field Length
To program alignment for time field 8224-Alignment
To program fill character for time field 8225-Fill Character
To program time format for time field 8226-Time Format
To program time fill flag for time field 8258-Time Fill Flag
To program column position for answer duration field 8227-Column Position
To program field length for answer duration field 8228-Field Length
To program alignment for answer duration field 8229-Alignment
To program fill character for answer duration field 8230-Fill Character
To enable/disable the Filler char. flag for Answer 8259-Filler Character Flag for Answer Duration
Duration
To program duration unit for answer duration field 8231-Duration Unit
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1805
To program column position for hold duration field 8232-Column Position
To program field length for hold duration field 8233-Field Length
To program alignment for hold duration field 8234-Alignment
To program fill character for hold duration field 8235-Fill Character
To enable/disable the Filler character flag for Hold 8260-Filler Character Flag for Hold Duration
Duration
To program column position for speech duration field 8237-Column Position
To program field length for speech duration field 8238-Field Length
To program alignment for speech duration field 8239-Alignment
To program fill character for speech duration field 8240-Fill Character
To enable/disable the Filler char. flag for Speech 8261-Filler Character Flag for Speech Duration
Duration
To program column position for called number field 8242-Column Position
To program field length for called number field 8243-Field Length
To program alignment for called number field 8244-Alignment
To program number format for called number field 8245-Number Format
To program column position for calling number field 8246-Column Position
To program field length for calling number field 8247-Field Length
To program alignment for calling number field 8248-Alignment
To program number format for calling number field 8249-Number Format
To program column position for DID digits field 8250-Column Position
To program field length for DID digits field 8251-Field Length
To program alignment for DID digits field 8252-Alignment
To program column position for remarks field 8253-Column Position
To program field length for remarks field 8254-Field Length
To program alignment for remarks field 8255-Alignment
To assign default IC SMDR format 8256
Station Message Detail Recording-Posting
To enable/disable storage of SMDR OG Calls 2701-Code
To assign Destination Port for SMDR-OG Posting 8330-Code
To program SMDR OG Posting Protocol 8301-SMDR OG Posting Protocol
To set ENQ no response timer 8302-ENQ No Response Timer
To set ENQ no response retry count 8303-ENQ Retry Count
To set ENQ no response Retry Timer 8304-ENQ No Response Retry Timer
To set ENQ Retry Count 8305-ENQ Retry Count
1806 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To set ENQ Retry Time 8306-ENQ Retry Time
To set SMDR-OG posting Data response to Data 8307-Response to Data Timeout
Timeout
To set Data Transfer Retry Count (No Response) 8308-Data Transfer Retry Count
To set Data Transfer Retry Time (No Response) 8309-Data Transfer Retry Time
To set Data Transfer Retry Count (Negative 8310-Data Transfer Retry Count
Response)
To set Data Transfer Retry Time (Negative Response) 8311-Data Transfer Retry Time
To enable/disable ENQUIRE Signal 8312-ENQUIRE Signal
To set the ENQUIRE character 8313-ENQUIRE
To set the ACK Character 8314-Set ACK Character
To program the NAK Character 8315-Set NAK Character
To set the Start of Packet string 8316-Start of Packet
To program the End of Packet string 8317-End of Packet
To enable/disable BCC Flag 8318-BCC Flag
To set SMDR-OG Posting Parameters to Default Value 8300
To program column position for serial number 8100-Column Position
To program field length for serial number 8101-Field Length
To program alignment for serial number 8102-Alignment
To program fill character for serial number 8103-Fill Character
To program reset for serial number 8104-Reset
To program column position for increment counter 8105-Column Position
To program reset for increment counter 8106-Reset
To program starting character for increment counter 8174-Starting Character
To program column position for property code 8107-Column Position
To program field length for property code 8108-Field Length
To program property code string for property code 8109-Property Code String
To program column position for station number 8110-Column Position
To program field length for station number 8111-Field Length
To program alignment for station number 8112-Alignment
To program fill character for station number 8113-Fill Character
To program column position for trunk number 8114-Column Position
To program format type for trunk number 8115-Format Type
To program column position for date field 8116-Column Position
To program field length for date field 8117-Field Length
To program alignment for date field 8118-Alignment
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1807
To program fill character for date field 8119-Fill Character
To program date format for date field 8120-Date Format
To program date fill flag for date field 8170-Date Fill Flag
To program column position for time field 8122-Column Position
To program field length for time field 8123-Field Length
To program alignment for time field 8124-Alignment
To program fill character for time field 8125-Fill Character
To program time format for time field 8126-Time Format
To program time fill flag for time field 8171-Time Fill Flag
To program column position for duration field 8127-Column Position
To program field length for duration field 8128-Field Length
To program alignment for duration field 8129-Alignment
To program fill character for duration field 8130-Fill Character
To program duration unit for duration field 8131-Duration Unit
To program duration fill flag for duration field 8172-Duration Fill Flag
To program column position for units field 8132-Column Position
To program field length for units field 8133-Field Length
To program alignment for units field 8134-Alignment
To program fill character for units field 8135-Fill Character
To program column position for amount field 8136-Column Position
To program field length for amount field 8137-Field Length
To program alignment for amounts field 8138-Alignment
To program fill character for amounts field 8139-Fill Character
To program amount format for amount field 8140-Amount Format
To program amount fill flag for amount field 8173-Amount Fill Flag
To program column position for currency symbol field 8141-Column Position
To program field length for currency symbol field 8142-Field Length
To program alignment for currency symbol field 8143-Alignment
To program fill character for currency symbol field 8144-Fill Character
To program symbol for currency symbol field 8145-Character1.......Character8
To program column position for call type indicator field 8146-Column Position
To program field length for call type indicator field 8147-Field Length
To program alignment for call type indicator field 8148-Alignment
To program number string for call type indicator field 8149-Number Index-1-Number String
To program text string for call type indicator field 8149-Number Index-2-Text String
1808 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To program column position for called location field 8150-Column Position
To program field length for called location field 8151-Field Length
To program alignment for called location field 8152-Alignment
To program column position for called number field 8154-Column Position
To program field length for called number field 8155-Field Length
To program alignment for called number field 8156-Alignment
To program number format for called number field 8157-Number Format
To program column position for account code field 8158-Column Position
To program field length for account code field 8159-Field Length
To program alignment for account code field 8160-Alignment
To program fill character for account code field 8161-Fill Character
To program prefix string (ac01) 8165-Code
To program column position for remarks field 8166-Column Position
To program field length for remarks field 8167-Field Length
To program alignment for remarks field 8168-Alignment
To assign default CDR format 8169
To program a country code 8321-Index-Country Code-#*
To program a location in country code 8322-Index-Country Code-#*
To start/stop SMDR Posting Process 8333-Code
To program the destination IP Address for Posting 8331-Address-Address-Address-Address
SMDR-OG Call Record
To program the destination IP Port for Posting SMDR- 8332-Destination IP Port
OG call Record
To program Listening Port of ETERNITY 8334-Listening Port
Station Message Detail Recording-Report
To assign a destination port for SMDR-IC Report 2931-Code
To assign the IP Address to the Ethernet Port 2934-IP Address
To assign the IP Port 2935-IP Port
To assign destination port for Online SMDR-Internal 2831-Code
Report
To assign the IP Address to the Ethernet Port 2834-IP Address
To assign the IP Port 2835-IP Port
To assign a destination port for SMDR-OG Report 2731-Code
To assign the IP Address to the Ethernet Port 2734-IP Address
To assign the IP Port 2735-IP Port
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1809
Station Message Detail Recording-Storage
To set SMDR storage mode (IC) 2901-Storage Flag
Store Normal Calls 2902-Flag
Store DID Calls 2903-Flag
Store Unanswered Calls 2904-Flag
Store Unanswered DID Calls 2905-Flag
Store DISA Calls 2906-Flag
Store Calls-Speech Duration More than 2907-Seconds
Store Calls-Unanswered Duration for more than 2908-Seconds
Store Calls-Hold Duration for more than 2909-Seconds
To default the incoming call storage filters 2915
To set SMDR storage mode (Internal) 2801-Storage Flag
Store Calls-Speech duration 2802-Seconds
To default the internal call storage filters 2815
To set SMDR storage flag (OG) 2701-Storage Flag
To assign a Number List containing numbers for call 2702-Number List
storage
To set the filter of call duration 2703-Seconds
To set the filter for call Units 2704-Unit
To default the outgoing call storage filters 2715
To set the Call Toggle flag 2716-Toggle Flag
To set the originating flag 2717-Originating Flag
System Activity Log
To program the storage flag to enable/disable SAL 6401-Storage Flag
To assign a port for online printing of SAL 6402-Port
To assign the IP Address to the Ethernet Port 6404-IP Address
To assign the IP Port 6405-IP Port
To assign a port for offline printing of SAL 6403-Port
To assign the IP Address to the Ethernet Port 6406-IP Address
To assign the IP Port 6407-IP Port
To default system activity log parameters for SAL 6410
System Debug
To program a port for debug 2103-Port
1810 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To start/stop debug for required process 2104-Value
2105-Port Type-Port Number Start-Port Number
To start/stop state debug
End-Flag
To enable ETERNITY-GE Host debug 2181-1-Code
To enable ETERNITY-GE DSP Debug 2184-1-Code
To enable ETERNITY-GE DSP Debug 2184-2-Code
To initiate the debug of IO operations 2199-Slot Number-1-Port Number-Code
To program the IP Address of the Syslog Server 2178-Syslog Server IP Address
To program Port number on which ETERNITY shall
2179-Syslog Server's Listening Port
send debug to Syslog Server
To enable or disable PCM capture - Debug 2124-Slot Number-Hardware Port Offset- Code
System Fault Log
To enable/disable storage of faults 6451-Flag
To assign the port to system fault log-online printing 6452-Port
To assign the IP Address to the Ethernet Port 6455-IP Address
To assign the IP Port 6456-IP Port
To assign a port to system fault log-offline printing 6453-Port
To assign the IP Address to the Ethernet Port 6457-IP Address
To assign the IP Port 6458-IP Port
System Parameters
To assign Station Type to SLT 3921-1-SLT-Station Type
To assign Station Type to DKP 3922-1-DKP-Station Type
To assign Station Type to ISDN Terminal 3923-1-ISDN Terminal-Station Type
To restart the card installed in Universal Slot of the 2187-Slot No
ETERNITY
To restart the system 5305-Reverse SE Password
To load default values of all system timers 5303
To know the software version/revision of the system 5304
To enable/disable form feed 5321-Code
To set the A-law/M-law 5322-Type
To monitor a port 7902-Slot-LED Number-Port
To program the on/off time of the ETERNITY ME Card 5308-ON Timer-OFF Timer
Master buzzer
To enable/disable the watch dog 5309-Flag
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1811
To enable/disable "Alarm/Reminder notification to 5311-Flag
Operator when Station is stand-by
To enable/disable feature tone 5312-Feature Tone Flag
To program the end of dialing digit 5313-End of Dialing Digit
To program Caller ID digits to be considered as call 5314-Minimum Caller ID Digits
from Public Network
SLT Stand-by Notification to Operator 5333-Flag
To program Listening Port of Web Server 2121-Port
To select Hotel/Enterprise Mode 5315-Code
To program default Call Budget Amount 3710-Preset Call Budget Amount
To display 'MAC Address' on DKP 2122
To program Call Proceeding Tone Type for multi-stage 5311-Call Proceeding Tone Type
dialing
System Security
To change SE password 5306-New SE Password
To assign a new password to the SA 5310-New SA Password
T1 Maintenance
To enable/disable T1 FDL on a T1E1 port 6164-1-T1E1-T1 FDL
To program the T1 FDL protocol for a T1E1 port 6165-1-T1E1-T1 FDL Protocol
T1 RBS Parameters
To program the T1 line signaling variants for the T1E1 6181-1-T1E1-T1 Line Signaling Variants
port
To program T1 wink timer for T1E1 6182-1-T1E1-Wink Timer
To program the T1 wink wait timer for T1E1 6183-1-T1E1-Wink Wait Timer
To program the T1 wait wink timer for T1E1 6184-1-T1E1-Wait Wink Timer
To program the T1 delay duration for T1E1 6185-1-T1E1-Delay Duration
To program the T1 start delay duration for T1E1 6186-1-T1E1-Start Delay Duration
To program the T1 DTMF digit timer for T1E1 6187-1-T1E1-DTMF Digit Timer
To program the T1 DTMF inter digit timer for T1E1 6188-1-T1E1-DTMF Inter Digit Timer
To start/stop debug the parameters for the T1E1 port 6191-1-T1E1-Level-Code
To enabled Global Level-1 debug for T1E1 Port 6191-1-T1E1-1-Code
To enabled Global Level-2 debug for T1E1 Port 6191-1-T1E1-2-Code
To enabled T1E1 Port Level Debug 6192-1-T1E1-1-Code
to enable T1E1 Port-Port Level Physical Layer Debug 6192-1-T1E1-2-Code
1812 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To program T1 register signaling variant for the T1E1 6161-1-T1E1-T1 Register Signaling Variant
port
To program digital pulse dial ratio for the T1E1 port 6163-1-T1E1-Code
T1E1 Trunks
To enable/disable the port 6101-1-T1E1-Port Status
To assign a name to the T1E1 port 6102-1-T1E1-SP
To program the line coding mechanism for the T1E1 6103-1-T1E1-Line Coding
port
To program the framing mode for the T1E1 port 6104-1-T1E1-Framing
To program signalling type/line type of a T1E1 6105-1-T1E1-Line Type
To program interface companding of a T1E1 6108-1-T1E1-Interface Companding
To program auto receive equalization mode 6110-1-T1E1-Mode
To program the receive equalization parameters of a 6111-1-T1E1-Receive Equalization Parameters
T1E1
To program glare option for the T1E1 port 6112-1-T1E1-Glare Option
To program the idle code of a T1E1 6113-1-T1E1-Idle Code
To program overlap receiving timer 6114-1-T1E1-Timer
To program Pause Timer 6109-1-T1E1-Pause Timer
To program DTMF ON Time 6117-1-T1E1-DTMF ON Time
To program DTMF Inter digit Pause Timer 6118-1-T1E1-DTMF Inter Digit Pause Timer
To program orientation type for the T1E1 port 6106-1-T1E1-Orientation Type
To program source TON for a T1E1 6126-1-T1E1-Source TON
To program source NPI for T1E1 6127-1-T1E1-Source NPI
To program OG destination party TON or a T1E1 6128-1-T1E1-Destination TON
To program OG destination party NPI for T1E1 6129-1-T1E1-Destination NPI
To program to select whether the inband tones should 6130-1-T1E1-Flag
be feed on T1E1-NT before sending DISCONNECT
message?
To program the dial tone flag for T1E1 6115-1-T1E1-Flag
To program the routing tone flag for T1E1 6116-1-T1E1-Flag
To reserved channels for data transmission on T1E1 6135-1-T1E1-Channel Count (Data)
To program number of channels reserved for OG 6136-1-T1E1-Channel Count (OG)
To program number of channels reserved for IC 6137-1-T1E1-Channel Count (IC)
To assign OG reference ID to T1E1 6131-1-T1E1-OG Reference ID
To assign IC reference ID for working hour 6132-1-T1E1-IC Reference ID
To assign IC reference ID for break hour 6133-1-T1E1-IC Reference ID
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1813
To assign IC reference ID for non-working hour 6134-1-T1E1-IC Reference ID
To active/deactivate near end loopback for T1E1 6141-1-T1E1-Loopback
To start/stop far end loopback test for T1E1 6142-1-T1E1-Code
To assign the port to performance report for online 6143-Port
printing
To assign the port to performance report for offline 6144-Port
printing
To program E1 line signaling variant for the T1E1 6152-1-T1E1-E1 Line Signaling Variant
To program E1 register signaling variant for the T1E1 6153-1-T1E1-E1 Register Signaling Variant
To enable/disable E1 auto alarm for the T1E1 E1 6154-1-T1E1-Flag
signaling
To program the line build out parameters of a T1E1 6162-1-T1E1-Code
To enable/disable customer pulse width flag for T1E1 6171-1-T1E1-Flag
T1 signaling
To program customer pulse width word1 for T1E1 T1 6172-1-T1E1-Customer Pulse Width Word 1
signaling
To program customer pulse width word2 for T1E1 T1 6173-1-T1E1-Customer Pulse Width Word 2
signaling
To program customer pulse width word3 for T1E1 T1 6174-1-T1E1-Customer Pulse Width Word 3
signaling
To program customer pulse width word4 for T1E1 T1 6175-1-T1E1-Customer Pulse Width Word 4
signaling
To enable/disable customer pulse width flag for T1E1 6155-1-T1E1-Flag
E1 signaling
To program customer pulse width word1 for T1E1 E1 6156-1-T1E1-Customer Pulse Width Word 1
signaling
To program customer pulse width word2 for T1E1 E1 6157-1-T1E1-Customer Pulse Width Word 2
signaling
To program customer pulse width word3 for T1E1 E1 6158-1-T1E1-Customer Pulse Width Word 3
signaling
To program customer pulse width word4 for T1E1 E1 6159-1-T1E1-Customer Pulse Width Word 4
signaling
To program the ISDN PRI switch variant 6107-1-T1E1-ISDN PRI Switch Variant
To program forward tone maximum ON timer 7101-1-T1E1-Forward Tone Maximum ON Timer
To program forward tone maximum OFF timer 7102-1-T1E1-Forward Tone Maximum OFF Timer
To program the maximum compelled cycle time 7103-1-T1E1-Maximum Compelled Cycle Time
To program pulse duration for pulsed signals 7104-1-T1E1-Pulse Duration for Pulsed Signals
To program the pulsed signal maximum wait timer 7105-1-T1E1-Pulsed Signal Maximum Wait Timer
To program first forward tone wait timer 7106-1-T1E1-First Forward Tone Wait Timer
To program minimum MF signal persist timer 7107-1-T1E1-Minimum MF Signal Persist Timer
To program to set DNIS END type (outbound) for T1E1 7108-1-T1E1-End of DNIS
1814 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To program DNIS end type (inbound) for T1E1 7109-1-T1E1-DNIS End Type
To program the ANI send position 7110-1-T1E1-ANI Send Position
To program the Is ANI available (outbound) 7111-1-T1E1-Is ANI Available
To program the positive response to Is ANI available 7112-1-T1E1-Positive Response to Is ANI Available
(outbound)
To program the negative response to Is ANI available 7113-1-T1E1-Negative Response to Is ANI
(outbound) Available
To program the end of ANI with presentation allowed 7114-1-T1E1-ANI End Tone with Presentation
(outbound) Allowed
To program the end of ANI with presentation restrict 7115-1-T1E1-ANI End Tone with Presentation
(outbound) Restrict
To program the DNIS digit length 7116-1-DNIS Digit Length
To program the DNIS request position 7117-1-T1E1-ANI Request Position
To program ANI length 7118-1-T1E1-ANI Length
To program the Ask ANI available 7119-1-T1E1-Ask ANI
To program positive response to ask ANI 7120-1-T1E1-Positive Response to Ask ANI
To program negative response to ask ANI 7121-1-T1E1-Negative Response to Ask ANI
To program end tone presentation allowed (inbound) 7122-1-T1E1-ANI End Tone Presentation Allowed
To program end tone presentation restrict (inbound) 7123-1-T1E1-ANI End Tone Presentation Restrict
To program the ordinary subscriber 7124-1-T1E1-Ordinary Subscriber
To program the priority subscriber 7125-1-T1E1-Priority Subscriber
To program the maintenance equipment 7126-1-T1E1-Maintenance Equipment
To program the operator 7127-1-T1E1-Operator
To program the pay phone 7128-1-T1E1-Pay Phone
To program the data transmission 7129-1-T1E1-Data Transmission
To program the interception operator 7130-1-T1E1-Interception Operator
To program the send next digit 7131-1-T1E1-Send Next Digit
To program the send last but one digit 7132-1-T1E1-Send Last but One Digit
To program the send last but two digit 7134-1-T1E1-Send Last but Two Digit
To program the send last but three digit 7135-1-T1E1-Send Last but three Digit
To program the address complete, change over to 7136-1-T1E1-Address Complete, Change Over to
reception of group B signals Reception of Group B
To program the send calling party category and 7137-1-T1E1-Send Calling Party Category and
change to group C Change to Group C
To program congestion in the national network 7138-1-T1E1-Congestion in National Network
To program the send caller party's category 7139-1-Send Caller Party Category
To program the address-complete, charge, setup 7140-1-T1E1-Address Complete, Charge, Setup
speech of condition group B signals Speech Condition
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1815
To program repeat DNIS digits from beginning of 7141-1-T1E1-Repeat DNIS Digits from Beginning
group B signals
To program the send next ANI digit 7142-1-T1E1-Send Next ANI Digit
To program the send special information tone 7143-1-T1E1-Send Special Information Tone
To program the send special information tone and 7144-1-T1E1-Send Special Information Tone and
setup speech condition Setup Speech Condition
To program the subscriber line busy 7145-1-T1E1-Subscriber Line Busy
To program the subscriber line free, charge 7146-1-T1E1-Subscriber Line Free, Charge
To program the subscriber line free, no charge 7147-1-T1E1-Subscriber Line Free, No Charge
To program congestion 7148-1-T1E1-congestion
To program the unallocated number 7149-1-T1E1-Unallocated Number
To program the subscriber's line out of order 7150-1-T1E1-Subscriber's Line Out of Order
To program the call rejected, no indication of cause 7151-1-T1E1-Reject Call due to R2MF Tone
To program the alternative answer tone 7152-1-T1E1-Alternative Answer Tone
To program the changed number (announcement on 7153-1-T1E1-Changed Number (Announcement on
line) Line)
To program the send next ANI digit (group C) 7154-1-T1E1-Send Next Digit
To program the request transition to group A and 7155-1-T1E1-Request Transition to Group A and
restart from first DNIS Restart from First DNIS
To program the address completed, change to 7156-1-T1E1-Address Completed, Change to
reception of Group B signal Reception of Group B Signal
To program the tone for congestion 7157-1-T1E1-Congestion
To program the tone for request transition back to 7158-1-T1E1-Request Transition Back to Group A,
group A and send next DNIS signal and Send Next DNIS
To program the tone for request transition back to 7159-1-T1E1-Request Transition Back to Group A,
group A and restart the last DNIS signal and Restart the Last DNIS
To program the Cd bits of the T1E1 port 7161-1-T1E1-CD Bits
To program the invert/don't invert bit A for the T1E1 7162-1-T1E1-Invert Bit A
To program the invert/don't invert bit B for the T1E1 7163-1-T1E1-Invert Bit B
To program the invert/don't invert bit C for the T1E1 7164-1-T1E1-Invert Bit C
To program the invert/don't invert bit D for the T1E1 7165-1-T1E1-Invert Bit D
To program the E1 metering bit for the T1E1 port 7166-1-T1E1-E1 Metering Bit
To program the metering pulse minimum timer for the 7167-1-T1E1-E1 Metering Pulse Minimum Timer
T1E1
To program the clear back signal for the T1E1 7168-1-T1E1-Clear Back Signal
To program the release timer for the T1E1 7169-1-T1E1-Release Timer
To program line seizure acknowledge wait timer 7170-1-T1E1-Line Seizure Acknowledge Wait Timer
To program release guard timer 7171-1-T1E1-Release Guard Timer
To program signaling type/line type of a T1E1 6105-1-T1E1-Line Type
1816 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
To assign E&M Feature Template to T1E1 6004-1-T1E1-Template Number
To select B Bit value 7191-1-T1E1-Code
To program B Bit value 7192-1-T1E1-B Bit Value
To program CD Bit value 7193-1-T1E1-CD Bit Value
To program to invert/don't invert Bit A for the T1E1 port 7162-1-T1E1-Invert Bit A
To program to invert/don't invert Bit B for the T1E1 port 7163-1-T1E1-Invert Bit B
To program to invert/don't invert Bit C for the T1E1 port 7164-1-T1E1-Invert Bit C
To program to invert/don't invert Bit D for the T1E1 port 7165-1-T1E1-Invert Bit D
To program the line build out parameters of a T1E1 6162-1-T1E1-Code
To program Gateway Application-Answer Signaling 6119-1-T1E1-Gateway Application-Answer
Flag Signaling Flag
To program "Gateway Application-Answer Signaling 6120-1-T1E1-Gateway Application-Answer
DTMF String". Signaling DTMF String
Time Tables
1052-1-Time Table-Day-Time Zone-Start Time-End
To program a timetable
Time
To default a time table 1051-1-Time Table
Toll Control
To program Local Numbers Allowed List 4303-Index-Number String-#*
To program Local Numbers Denied List 4304-Index-Number String-#*
To default the Local Numbers List 4311-Reverse SE Password
To program Regional Numbers Allowed List 4305-Index-Number String-#*
To program Regional Numbers Denied List 4306-Index-Number String-#*
To default the Regional Numbers List 4312-Reverse SE Password
To program National Numbers Allowed List 4307-Index-Number String-#*
To program National Numbers Denied List 4308-Index-Number String-#*
To default the National Numbers List 4313-Reverse SE Password
To program International Numbers Allowed List 4309-Index-Number String-#*
To program International Numbers Denied List 4310-Index-Number String-#*
To default the International Numbers List 4314-Reverse SE Password
To program Limited Calls - Allowed/Denied List 4302-List Number-Location Index-Number-#*
To clear a number programmed in a List 4302-List Number-Location Index-#*
To program Toll Control - Level 0 (WH) 5502-1-Template-07-Call Privilege Type
To program Toll Control - Level 0 (WH) Allowed List 5502-1-Template-08-Number List
To program Toll Control - Level 0 (WH) Denied List 5502-1-Template-09-Number List
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1817
To program Toll Control - Level 0 (BH) 5502-1-Template-10-Number List
To program Toll Control - Level 0 (BH) Allowed List 5502-1-Template-11-Number List
To program Toll Control - Level 0 (BH) Denied List 5502-1-Template-12-Number List
To program Toll Control - Level 0 (NH) 5502-1-Template-13-Number List
To program Toll Control - Level 0 (NH) Allowed List 5502-1-Template-14-Number List
To program Toll Control - Level 0 (NH) Denied List 5502-1-Template-15-Number List
To program Toll Control - Level 1 5502-1-Template-16-Number List
To program Toll Control - Level 2 5502-1-Template-17-Number List
To program Toll Control - Level 3 5502-1-Template-18-Call Privilege Type
To program Toll Control - Call Budget Consumed 5502-1-Template-19-Call Privilege Type
Trunk Reservation
To program trunk reservation timer 3804-Minutes
Using Full Programming Access
Changing Region using a Telephone 5301-Region Code
To default the System 5302-Reverse SE Password
Voice Mail Integration
To assign destination type for VMS Group 4601-Destination Type
To assign destination for VMS Group 4602-Destination-#*
To program the access code for a VMS group 3114-1-VMS Group Index-Access Code-#*
To default the access code for a VMS group 3164-1-VMS Group Index
To clear the access code for a VMS group 3114-1-VMS Group Index-#*
To know 'IP Address: Web Server Port' of VMS Card 2131-Slot Number
Voice Message Applications
To select a source to record a VM 2501-Code
To record a voice message 2502-Voice Module Number
To verify a message 2503-Voice Module
To define voice message duration for voice modules 2504-Voice Module-Duration
To assign a voice message application to a voice 2505-Voice Message Application Number-Voice
module Module
To de-assign the voice module from a voice message 2505-Voice Message Application Number-00
application
1818 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Troubleshooting
• All servicing to be undertaken ONLY by qualified service personnel. There are no user serviceable parts
inside the unit.
• Always switch off "MAINS" and "BATTERY" marked switches of the system before opening the system and
remove power cable from Mains plug, to avoid risk of electric shock.
ETERNITY is not turning ON
AC Mains:
• Check the Mains Voltage.
• Check the Mains Switch.
• Check the Mains Fuse (6Amp Slow Blow, glass fuse provided in AC Mains socket of ETERNITY ME Card
10SAC/16SAC).
• Check the MOV (275/20).
• Check for loose connection of PT3 connector (connecting AC Mains socket to ETERNITY ME Card
10SAC/16SAC).
• Please contact authorized Matrix dealer.
ETERNITY ME Card PS48VDC:
• Check the DC voltage of DC power source, it has to be 43-56V.
• If FCBC is used, check battery voltage interfaced with FCBC, it has to be 43-56V.
• Please check the fuse.
One Station is not working
• Change the telephone instrument and check.
• Check wiring of that Station.
• Please contact authorized Matrix dealer.
When I call 2001 Station the call goes to 2002
• Dial 130 from 2001 (your call might have been forwarded).
Station not ringing
• Check ringer volume of the telephone instrument.
• Try replacing the telephone instrument.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1819
• Dial 130 to disable call forward/call follow me feature.
Station found busy
• Check whether hand-set is properly kept on the cradle.
• Try replacing telephone instrument.
• Check wiring.
Station cannot dial
• Try replacing telephone instrument.
• Ensure dialing is not disabled through programming.
Incoming Call does not land correctly
• Ensure proper programming of trunk landing group for the trunk.
• Check for Call Privacy from incoming calls.
• Check the Time programmed in the PBX. This is a time sensitive feature.
CLI Number does not come on the Station
• Please check up with your Telephone Company (Service Provider) for CLI facility.
• Please check whether the Station where you are checking CLI function is programmed as CLI Phone.
• Please contact authorized Matrix dealer.
There is lot of hum on AOP
• Please check AOP port.
• Please check the amplifier.
• Please check for any open circuit in the wiring.
• Please check for any mismatch of speaker and amplifier.
Digital Output Port does not operate
• Please check the connections made.
• Please check for the polarity. Refer to the figure shown in topic “Digital Output Port (DOP)”.
• Please check for any open circuit in the wiring.
Security Dialer does not work
• Please check the connections of the Panic Switch/Sensor to the “Digital Input Port (DIP)”.
1820 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
• Please check for any open circuit in the wiring.
• Please check the programming for Security Dialer.
• Please contact authorized Matrix Dealer.
GSM Call not OK
• Please check antenna connection with antenna port of ETERNITY ME Card GSM or ETERNITY ME Card
GSM.
• Please check GSM network registration, with SIMcard interface.
• Please check Mobile Trunks programming in the Routing Group.
• Select proper Routing Type selection as per Time Zone.
VoIP Call is not OK
• Please check registration of SIP with Server of Service Provider.
• Please check number dialing method is followed correctly.
• Please check SIP trunks are programmed correctly in the Routing Group.
• Please check proper Routing Type selection as per Time Zone.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1821
Acronyms
ACB Auto Call Back
AIP Analog Input Port
AIS Alarm Indication Signal
ANSI American National Standard Institute
ANT Automatic Number Translation
AO/DI Always On/Dynamic ISDN
AOP Analog Output Port
APM Analog Personality Module
ATA Analogue Telephone Adaptor
AVD Alternate Voice data signaling (Also called clear channel, out-of-band signaling)
BCC Byte Check Code
BGM Background Music
BH Break Hour
BI Barge-In
BOS Bit Oriented Signaling
BPS Bits per second
BRI Basic Rate Interface (2 B-Channels@64Kbps + D-Channel@64Kbps)
BSCs Base Station Controllers
BSS Base Station Subsystem
BTSs Base Transceivers Stations
CAS Channel Associate Signaling, Call Accounting Software
CCC Call Cost Calculation
CCS Common Channel Signaling
CCS Compander Control Signal
CCWT External Call Waiting Tone
CD Carrier Detect
CDC Call Duration Control
CDC Call Duration Control
CDR Call Detail Record
CESID Customer Emergency Services Identification Dialing
CI Call Incoming
CLIP Calling Line Identification and Presentation
CLIR Calling Line Identity Restriction
1822 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
CO Call Outgoing
CO Central Office
COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation
COLR Connected Line Identification Restriction
COS Class of Service
CPC Calling Party Control
CPD Call Progress Detection
CPTG Call Progress Tone (Generation)
CPU Call Pick-Up
CPW Custom Pulse Width
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
CTS Clear to Send
CPE Customer Premise Equipment
CUG Closed User Group
CVT Constant Voltage Transformer
DCD Data Carrier Detected
DCE Data Communication Equipment (Data circuit terminating equipment)
DDI Direct Dialing-In
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DID Direct Inward Dialing
DIP Digital Input Port
DISA Direct Inward System Access
DKP Digital Key Phone
DLC Digital Station Card
DND Do Not Disturb
DNS Domain Name System
DOP Digital Output Port
T1E1 Digital Signal Level 1
DSR Data Signal Ready
DSS64 Direct Station Selection Console
DST Daylight Saving Time
DTE Data Terminal Equipment
DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency
DTR Data Terminal Ready
E1 E-Carrier1 (30B+D)
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1823
EID Exchange ID
ENQ Enquiry
ETX End of Text
E&M Ear and Mouth Interface
FAS Frame alignment signal
FCBC Float cum Boost Charger
FIFO First In First Out
FM Frequency Modulation
FSK Frequency Shift Keying
FTP File Transfer Protocol
GDT Gas Discharge Tube
GND Ground
GSM Global System for Mobile
GPRS General Purpose Radio Service
HDSL High Speed Digital Subscriber Line
HLR Home Location Register
HOG Hot Outward Dialing
IC Incoming call
ICWT Internal Call Waiting Tone
IMEI International Mobile Equipment Identity
IP Internet Protocol
IR Interrupt
ISDN Integrated Service Digital Network
ISP Internet Service Provider
ITU International Telecommunication Union
IVDT Integral Voice/Data Terminal
LA Left Align
LAN Local Area Network
LAN NIC Network Interface Card
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LCM Line Coding Mechanism
LCR Least Cost Routing
LCS Live Call Screening
LE Local Exchange
LED Light Emitting Diode
1824 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
LIFO Last in First Out
LNR Last Number Redial
LOF Loss of Frame
LOS Loss of signal
LSR Least Cost Routing
MAC Media Access Control Address
MCC Mobile Country Code
MCI Malicious Call Identification
MDF Main Distribution Frame
MFA Multi-Frame Alignment
MNC Mobile Network Code
MOH Music on Hold
MOV Metal Oxide Varistor
MS Mobile Station
MSC Mobile Switching Center
MSN Multiple Subscribers Numbers
MTBF Mean Time between Failures
NH Non Working Hour
NPI Numbering Plan Identification, Number Planning Index
NSS Network and Switching Subsystem
NT1/2 Network Termination (Type 1/2)
OG Outgoing
OMC Operation Maintenance Centers
OOF Out of Frame
OSI Open Systems Interconnect
OSS Operation Support Subsystem
PAS Public Address System
PBX Private Branch Exchange
PC Personal Computer
PCM Primary Interface Compounding
PCOL Personal Central Office Line
PFT Power Fail Transfer Module
PIN Personal Identification Number
PISN Private Integrated Service Network
PLCC Power Line Carrier Communication
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1825
PMS Property Management Software
POTS Plain Old Telephone Systems
PPDC Pre PSTN Digit Count
PPM Primary Protection Module
PPS Pulse per second
PRI Primary Rate Interface (23B+D/30B+2D)
PS Power Supply
PSK Phase Shift Keying
PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network
PUK Personal Unlock Key
QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
QSIG Q-Signaling
RA Right Align
RBT Ring Back Tone
RF Radio Frequency
RI Ring Indicator
RLSD Receive Line Signal Detector (also called Carrier Detect)
RTC Real Time Clock
RTS Request to Send
RXD Receive data
SA System Administrator
SAL System Activity Log
SE System Engineer
SEFS Severely Eroded Framed Seconds
SES Severely eroded seconds
SFL System Fault Log
SID Exchange Identity
SIP Session Initiated Protocol
SIM Subscriber Identity Module
SLIC Subscriber Loop Integrated System
SLT 2 wire Analog Station, Single Line Telephone
SMDR Station Message Detail Recording
SMPS Switch Mode Power Supply
SP Service Provider
STX Start of Text
1826 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
SPID Service Provider Identifier
T1 T-Carrier (23B+D)
TA Terminal Adaptor
TAC Trunk Access Code
TAG Trunk Access Group
TCM Trellis Coding Modulation
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TE1/2 Terminal Equipment (Type 1/2)
TEI Terminal Endpoint Identifier
TLG Trunk Landing Group
TON Type of Numbering Plan (Caller/Called)
TON Type of Number
TWT Two Wire Trunks, 2 wire Analog Trunk Card
UART Universal Asynchronous receiver/transmitter
UPS Un-interrupted Power Supply
VIC Voice Interface Card
VLR Visitor Location Register
VMS Voice Mail Service
VMA Voice Message Application
WAN Wide Area Network
WH Working Hour
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1827
Warranty Statement
Matrix Comsec Pvt. Ltd. (Matrix) warrants to its consumer purchaser any of its products to be free of defects in
material, workmanship and performance for a period of 15 months from date of manufacturing or 12 months from
the date of installation which ever is earlier.
During this warranty period, Matrix will at its option, repair or replace the product at no additional charge if the
product is found to have manufacturing defect. Any replacement product or part(s) may be furnished on an
exchange basis, which shall be new or like-new, provided that it has functionality at least equal to that of the
product, being replaced. All replacement parts and products will be the property of Matrix. Parts repaired or
replaced will be under warranty throughout the remainder of the original warranty period only.
This limited warranty does not apply to:
1. Products that have been subjected to abuse, accident, natural disaster, misuse, modification, tampering,
faulty installation, lack of reasonable care, repair or service in any way that is not contemplated in the
documentation for the product or if the model or serial number has been altered, tampered with, defaced or
removed.
2. Products which have been damaged by lightning storms, water or power surges or which have been
neglected, altered, used for a purpose other than the one for which they were manufactured, repaired by
customer or any party without Matrix’s written authorization or used in any manner inconsistent with
Matrix’s instructions.
3. Products received improperly packed or physically damaged.
4. Products damaged due to operation of product outside the products’ specifications or use without
designated protections.
Warranty valid only if:
• Primary protection on all the ports provided.
• Mains supply is within limit and protected.
• Environment conditions are maintained as per the product specifications.
Warranty Card:
• When the product is installed, please return the warranty card with:
• Date, signature and stamp of the customer
• Date, signature and stamp of the channel partner
• Matrix assumes that the customer agrees with the warranty terms even when the warranty card is not
signed and returned as suggested.
The Purchaser shall have to bear shipping charges for sending product to Matrix for testing/rectification. The
product shall be shipped to the Purchaser at no-charge if the material is found to be under warranty. The Purchaser
shall have to either insure the product or assume liability for loss or damage during transit.
Matrix reserves the right to waive off or make any changes in its warranty policy without giving any notice.
1828 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
If Matrix is unable to repair or replace, as applicable, a defective product which is covered by Matrix warranty,
Matrix shall, within a reasonable time after being notified of the defect, refund the purchase price of the product
provided the consumer/purchaser returns the product to Matrix.
In no event will Matrix be liable for any damages including lost profits, lost business, lost savings, downtime or
delay, labor, repair or material cost, injury to person, property or other incidental or consequential damages arising
out of use of or inability to use such product, even if Matrix has been advised of the possibility of such damages or
losses or for any claim by any other party.
Except for the obligations specifically set forth in this Warranty Policy Statement, in no event shall Matrix be liable
for any direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages whether based on contract or any other legal
theory and where advised of the possibility of such damages.
Neither Matrix nor any of its distributors, dealers or sub-dealers makes any other warranty of any kind, whether
expressed or implied, with respect to Matrix products. Matrix and its distributors, dealers or sub-dealers specifically
disclaim the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.
This warranty is not transferable and applies only to the original consumer purchaser of the Product. Warranty shall
be void if the warranty card is not completed and registered with Matrix within 30 days of installation.
All legal course of action subjected to Vadodara (Gujarat, India) Jurisdiction only.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1829
Regulatory Information
Customer Information-ACTA
Federal Communications Commission Statement
Part 15:
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his/her own expense.
Part 68:
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA (Administrative
Council for Terminal Attachments). On the bottom side of this equipment is a label that contains, among other
information, a product identifier in the format US: MTXMF01BETERNITY. If requested, this number must be
provided to the telephone company.
REN Number
The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices that may be connected to the telephone line. Excessive
RENs on the telephone line may result in devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all
areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed 5.0. To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a
line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. On the bottom of this equipment is a
label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US: MTXMF01BETERNITY. The
digits represented by 01 are the ringer equivalence number (REN) without a decimal point (for example, 03 is a
REN of 0.3). If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company.
If this equipment 'ETERNITY' causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in
advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice is not practical, the
telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a
complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect
the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you
to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.
If trouble is experienced with this equipment 'ETERNITY', for repair or warranty information, please contact your
dealer. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you
disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
It is recommended that repairs be performed by the representatives of your Sales Representative.
The equipment cannot be used on public coin phone service provided by the telephone company. Connection to
party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission or
corporation commission for information.
1830 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Using Automatic Dialers:
This equipment supports automatic dialing of Emergency number for using the feature 'Security Dialing and
Reporting'. Hence the user should take care about following point:
WHEN PROGRAMMING EMERGENCY NUMBERS AND (OR) MAKING TEST CALLS TO EMERGENCY
NUMBERS:
• Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call.
• Perform such activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning or late evenings.
Using Direct Inward Dialing ("DID"):
The equipment supports a feature 'direct inward dialing' (DID). Hence while operating it, following points must be
considered:
ALLOWING THIS EQUIPMENT TO BE OPERATED IN SUCH A MANNER AS TO NOT PROVIDE FOR PROPER
ANSWER SUPERVISION IS A VIOLATION OF PART 68 OF THE FCC'S RULES. PROPER ANSWER
SUPERVISION IS WHEN:
a. This equipment returns answer supervision to the public switched telephone network (PSTN) when DID
calls are:
• Answered by the called station
• Answered by the attendant
• Routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the customer premises equipment
(CPE) user.
• Routed to a dial prompt
b. This equipment returns answer supervision on all DID calls forwarded to the PSTN. Permissible
exceptions are:
• A call is unanswered
• A busy tone is received
• A reorder tone is received
Equal Access:
This equipment is capable of providing the end user equal access to the carrier of the user's choice. This
equipment is capable of providing users access to interstate providers of operator services through the use of
access codes. Modification of this equipment by call aggregators to block access dialing codes is a violation of the
Telephone Operator Consumers Act of 1990.
Electrical Safety:
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer
terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem.
However Matrix provides all protection against lightning transients in the equipment; the user must provide a
suitable surge arrestor while integrating the equipment with other networking equipments.
Using FAX Capability:
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other
electronic device, including FAX machines, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin
at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent
and an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message and the telephone
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1831
number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may
not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)
In order to program this information into your FAX machine, Refer user's Guide for the software of the Fax
operation, such as 'Win Fax'.
Alarm Dialing Equipment:
The equipment supports a Digital Output Port (DOP), for various control applications. For example, on receiving a
signal from the Digital Input Port connected to a sensor like fire alarm, smoke sensor, etc. the DOP will be switched
'ON'. Please refer ETERNITY System manual and refer chapter “Automated Control Applications” for verifying
proper operation after installation.
To ensure proper operation, this equipment must be installed according to the enclosed installation
instructions. To verify that the equipment is operating properly and can successfully report an alarm, this
equipment must be tested immediately after installation, and periodically thereafter, according to the
enclosed test instructions.
Installation and Repairs
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the
local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of
connection. Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the dealer/
supplier. Contact the support at [email protected]
Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the
telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.
1832 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
TEC Certificate:
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1833
1834 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1835
CE Certificate:
1836 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
CE Certificate:
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1837
1838 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
RoHS Certificate:
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1839
Open Source Licensing Terms and Conditions
• The firmware of this product also includes some of the Open-Source software released under GNU
General Public License (GPL) Version 2. Terms of this license is printed in full below.
• The source of the open source software used in this product is available on CD, upon written request from:
R&D Team
Matrix Comsec Pvt Ltd
394, Makarpura GIDC,
Vadodara - 390 010
Gujarat
India.
Customer shall bear the shipping and handling charges.
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.,
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public
License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This
General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it to
your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their
rights.
1840 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and
(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
modification follow.
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains
a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below,
refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program"
means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:
that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,
either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another
language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).
Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1841
of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any
part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
parties under the terms of this License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this
License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on
the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
collective works based on the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program
with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of
a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
the scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
1842 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
customarily used for software interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer
to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is
allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
received the program in object code or executable form with such
an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source
code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to
control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a
special exception, the source code distributed need not include
anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component
itself accompanies the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering
access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt
otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are
prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
the Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
this License.
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1843
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent
license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
be a consequence of the rest of this License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among
countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates
the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will
be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program
specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any
later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of
this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
Foundation.
1844 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author
to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free
Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals
of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and
of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS
TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest
to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
<one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
(at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
Matrix ETERNITY System Manual 1845
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along
with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc.,
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this
when it starts in an interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author
Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts
of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called
something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or
menu items--whatever suits your program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if
necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program
`Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice
This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may
consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the
library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General
Public License instead of this License.
1846 Matrix ETERNITY System Manual
Index
A Call Taping 980–988
Abbreviated Dialing 735–749 Call Toggle 989–992
Access Codes 750–756 Call Transfer 993–1000
Account Codes 757–764 Calling Line Identification and Presentation
Alarms 765–785 (CLIP) 1001–1007
Alternate Number Dialing 787–793 Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR) 1008–1009
Appendix 1729–1846 Cancel All Station Features 1010
Attended Call Transfer 1248 Class of Service 159, 247, 317
Auto Answer 794–798 Class of Service (COS) 1011–1020
Auto Call Back 799–804 CLI Based Routing 1021–1024, 1255–1258
Auto Redial 805–810 Clock Synchronization 1025–1027
Automated Control Applications 811–824 Closed User Group (CUG) 1028–1032
Automatic Number Translation 825–831 Closed User Group-With Exchange ID 1033–1036
CO Call Waiting 1037
B Communication Ports 1038–1043
Background Music (BGM) 832–834 Conference Dial-In 1044–1050
Backup-SMDR 835–839 Conference-3 Party 1051–1054
Backup-System Configuration 840–842 Conference-Multiparty 1055–1060
Backup-System Software 843–845 Conflict Dialing 1061–1063
Barge-In 846–849 Conversation Recording 1064–1067
BCCH Selection 850–853 Customer Name 1068–1069
Behind the PBX Applications 854–857
BITE 858–861, 862–863 D
boot process 152, 241, 310 Day Night Mode 1070–1072
Daylight Saving Time (DST) 1073–1080
C DDI Routing Table 1081–1083
Call Back on Mobile Port 864–869 Debug for the VoIP Ethernet Port 1089–1091
Call Budget 870 Default Settings 1092–1597
Call Budget on Trunk 874–884 Department Call 1101–1111
Call Chaining 885–886 Dial By Name 1112–1114
Call Cost Calculation (CCC) 887–916 Dialed Number Directory 1115–1116
Call Cost Display 917–918 Digest Authentication 1117–1119
Call Duration Control (CDC) 919–927 Digital Input Port (DIP) 1120–1122
Call Duration Display 928 Digital Key Phone - Keys Programming 482–516
Call Forward 929–935 Digital Key Phone-Operation 1123–1141
Call Forward-Remote 936–938 Digital Output Port (DOP) 1142–1147
Call Hold 948–953 Direct Dialing-In (DDI) 1148–1149
Call Logs 954–957 Direct Inward Dialing (DID) 1150
Call Park 945–947 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 1156–1159
Call Pick Up 958–965 Direct Station Selection Console 1165–1166
Call Progress Tones 966–976 Distinctive Rings 1167–1171
Call Restriction based on IP Address 977–979 Do Not Disturb (DND) 1172–1179
Door Phone 1180–1194 N
Dynamic Lock 1195–1202 Navigation keys
Down key 155, 243, 313
E Enter key 155, 243, 313
E&M Connectivity 1203–1206 Number Lists 1337–1341
E1 Maintenance 1207–1211
Emergency Detection and Reporting 1212–1214, 1215 O
Emergency Dialing 1216–1217 OFF-Hook Alert 1344–1345
External Music 1218 OG Reference Table 1346–1347
OG Trunk Bundle 1348–1351
F OG Trunk Bundle Group 1352–1358
Flash Timer 1219–1220
Flashing on Trunks 1221 P
Flexible Numbers 1222–1223 Paging 1366–1370
Floor Service 1224–1229 PC Port 152, 240, 310
Follow Me 1230 PCAP Trace 1359–1362
Foot Stand 150, 238, 308 Peer-to-Peer Calling 1371–1377
Forced Answer 1232 PLCC-An Introduction 1378–1385
Forced Call Disconnection 1234 Power Adaptor 152, 240, 310
power jack 152, 240, 310
G Power over Ethernet (PoE) 152, 240, 310
Gateway Application-Answer Signaling 1236–1238 Presence 1386–1392
GPAX Application 1239–1241 prioritization of traffic 159, 247, 317
GPAX Billing 1242 Priority 1397–1399
GPAX Flexible Numbers 1243–1244 Priority Calls in E&M MFCR2 Signaling 1393–1396
Privacy 1400–1401
H
Help Desk 1245 Q
Hot Desking 1246–1247 QSIG 1402–1414
Hotline 1248–1251 Quick Dial 1415–1416
I R
IC Reference Table 1252–1254 Raid 1417–1418
Installing ETERNITY 33–39 RCOC (Return Call to Original Caller) 1419–1423
Installing ETERNITY GE 165–251 Real Time Clock (RTC) 1424–1429
Installing ETERNITY ME 45–49 Reminder 1430–1438
Installing ETERNITY PE 253–325 Reminder - Personalized 1430
Internal Call Restriction 1259–1260 Reminder - Snooze 1432
Interrupt Request 1261–1262 Reminder - Voice-guided 1430
ISDN-BRI 1263–1284 Reminder Status 1436
ISDN-PRI 1285–1289 Remote Programming 1439–1440
Room Monitor 1441–1442
L Routing Group 1443–1446
Last Caller Recall 1294
Last Number Redial 1295 S
Least Cost Routing-Carrier Pre-Selection 1296–1297 Security Alarm and Reporting 1447–1455
License Management 1298–1309 Selective Port Access 1456–1457
Live Call Screening 1310–1312 Self Ring Test 1458
Live Call Supervision 1312 SIM Card Balance and Recharging 1459–1461
Logical Partition 1313–1316 Software Port and Hardware ID 1462–1466
Static Routing Table 1467–1471
M Station Message Detail Recording 1472
Meet Me Paging 1317–1318 Station Message Detail Recording-Online 1473–1488
Message Wait 1319 Station Message Detail Recording-Posting 1489–1530
Mobility Extension 1324–1330 Station Message Detail Recording-Report 1531–1544
Multi-Stage Dialing 1331–1334 Station Message Detail Recording-Storage 1545–1550
Music on Hold (MoH) 1335–1336 Station Name Pattern 1566
Mute 1342–1343 System Activity Log 1551–1556
System Activity Log Display 1557
System Debug 1084–1088
System Fault Log 1559–1564
System Fault Log Display 1558
System Parameters 1565–1583
System Security 1584
T
T1 Maintenance 1600–1607
T1 RBS Parameters 1660–1670
T1E1 Trunks 1608–1659
Time Tables 1671–1674
Time Zone Display 1675
Toll Control 1676–1691
traffic type 159, 247, 317
Trunk Access Group (TAG) 1692
Trunk Auto Answer 1693–1694
Trunk Landing Group (TLG) 1700–1702
Trunk Reservation 1703–1704
U
User Absent/Present 1705–1706
User Password 1707–1708
V
Video Call 1709
Virtual Station 1710
VLAN header 159, 247, 317
VLAN ID 159, 247, 317
VLAN/CoS Layer
CoS 159, 247, 317
RTP CoS 159, 247, 317
SIP CoS 159, 247, 317
VLAN ID 159, 247, 317
Voice Help 1711
Voice Mail Integration 1712–1715
Voice Message Applications 1716–1725
W
Walk-In Class of Service 1726–1728
MATRIX COMSEC PVT. LTD.
Corporate Office:
394-GIDC, Makarpura, Vadodara - 390010, India.
Tel.:+91 265 2630555, Fax: +91 265 2636598
E-mail: [email protected]
Factory:
39-GIDC, Waghodia - 391760, Dist. Vadodara, India.
Version 10, June 2011
Tel.: +91 2668 262056/57
Technical Support:
Tel.: +91 2668 263172/73, Fax: +91 2668 262631
E-mail: [email protected]
www.MatrixComSec.com
You might also like
- Matrix Eternity Me, Ge, Pe Vms Card System Manual enNo ratings yetMatrix Eternity Me, Ge, Pe Vms Card System Manual en193 pages
- Securing ChatGPT: Best Practices for Protecting Sensitive Data in AI Language ModelsFrom EverandSecuring ChatGPT: Best Practices for Protecting Sensitive Data in AI Language ModelsNo ratings yet
- Eternity: The IP-PBX With Seamless Mobility and Universal ConnectivityNo ratings yetEternity: The IP-PBX With Seamless Mobility and Universal Connectivity12 pages
- Cybersecurity for Executives: A Guide to Protecting Your BusinessFrom EverandCybersecurity for Executives: A Guide to Protecting Your BusinessNo ratings yet
- Callmaster: VI Voice Terminal Installation and User's ManualNo ratings yetCallmaster: VI Voice Terminal Installation and User's Manual20 pages
- The Linux Terminal for Advanced Users - The Command Line Made Easy: First EditionFrom EverandThe Linux Terminal for Advanced Users - The Command Line Made Easy: First EditionNo ratings yet
- CAN Bus for Beginners: A Practical Guide to Automotive NetworkingFrom EverandCAN Bus for Beginners: A Practical Guide to Automotive NetworkingNo ratings yet
- FM0854 1 Advent XT2 Ascom IP DECT Installation ManualNo ratings yetFM0854 1 Advent XT2 Ascom IP DECT Installation Manual25 pages
- Manual-Iii - User Guide For QX Ip Pbxs-Rev1.7No ratings yetManual-Iii - User Guide For QX Ip Pbxs-Rev1.755 pages
- AI-Driven Digital Transformation: A Proven Blueprint for Responsible AI ScalingFrom EverandAI-Driven Digital Transformation: A Proven Blueprint for Responsible AI ScalingNo ratings yet
- Manual Meridian Console M2250 Opcion 11No ratings yetManual Meridian Console M2250 Opcion 11168 pages
- Customer Service Procedure Call Home Dialing Information: CSP-2032/J 10/10/07No ratings yetCustomer Service Procedure Call Home Dialing Information: CSP-2032/J 10/10/0732 pages
- Four-Line Small Business System Speakerphone 945: User'S ManualNo ratings yetFour-Line Small Business System Speakerphone 945: User'S Manual50 pages
- Panasonic KX NCP500 1000 Installation Manual PDFNo ratings yetPanasonic KX NCP500 1000 Installation Manual PDF142 pages
- 900 MHZ Cordless Handset With Caller Id User'S GuideNo ratings yet900 MHZ Cordless Handset With Caller Id User'S Guide64 pages
- Matrix Eternity Technical Specifications Brochure En-1No ratings yetMatrix Eternity Technical Specifications Brochure En-16 pages
- Irish Red Setter Guide Irish Red Setter Guide Includes: Irish Red Setter Training, Diet, Socializing, Care, Grooming, and MoreFrom EverandIrish Red Setter Guide Irish Red Setter Guide Includes: Irish Red Setter Training, Diet, Socializing, Care, Grooming, and MoreNo ratings yet
- MN008337A01-AA Multilingual DEP 250 User GuideNo ratings yetMN008337A01-AA Multilingual DEP 250 User Guide146 pages
- Four-Line Intercom Speakerphone 964: User'S ManualNo ratings yetFour-Line Intercom Speakerphone 964: User'S Manual44 pages
- Human Machine Interface: Part 3: Dip - DigitalNo ratings yetHuman Machine Interface: Part 3: Dip - Digital62 pages
- ECRM Electronic Customer Relationship ManagementNo ratings yetECRM Electronic Customer Relationship Management8 pages
- Woodsmith Magazine Guild Edition - June - July 2015100% (11)Woodsmith Magazine Guild Edition - June - July 201568 pages
- History As The Site of Controversial and Conflicting Views0% (1)History As The Site of Controversial and Conflicting Views20 pages
- Download Full (Ebook) Cultures of Prediction: How Engineering and Science Evolve with Mathematical Tools by Johnson, Ann & Johannes, Lenhard PDF All Chapters100% (4)Download Full (Ebook) Cultures of Prediction: How Engineering and Science Evolve with Mathematical Tools by Johnson, Ann & Johannes, Lenhard PDF All Chapters81 pages
- EdExcel A Level Chemistry Unit 1 Mark Scheme Results Paper 1 Jun 2005No ratings yetEdExcel A Level Chemistry Unit 1 Mark Scheme Results Paper 1 Jun 200510 pages
- End Mill Construction: View B-B View A-ANo ratings yetEnd Mill Construction: View B-B View A-A1 page
